Standard Specifications: For Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction

Standard
Specifications
for Road, Bridge, and
Municipal Construction
2018
M 41-10
Ordering Information
The 2018 Standard Specifications can be purchased from the Washington State
Department of Printing website at www.prt.wa.gov.
Note: This publication is not for resale.
The 2018 Standard Specifications can be also downloaded, free of charge, from
the following web page at www.wsdot.wa.gov/publications/manuals/m41-10.htm.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Information

Materials can be made available in an alternate format by emailing the WSDOT
Diversity/ADA Affairs Team at wsdotada@wsdot.wa.gov or by calling toll free,
855-362-4ADA (4232). Persons who are deaf or hard of hearing may make a request
by calling the Washington State Relay at 711.
Title VI Notice to Public

It is Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) policy to ensure
no person shall, on the grounds of race, color, national origin, or sex, as provided by
Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, be excluded from participation in, be denied
the benefits of, or be otherwise discriminated against under any of its federally funded
programs and activities. Any person who believes his/her Title VI protection has been
violated may file a complaint with WSDOT’s Office of Equal Opportunity (OEO). For
Title VI complaint forms and advice, please contact OEO’s Title VI Coordinator at
360‑705‑7082.
Standard Specifications: 2018, Copyright © 2005, Washington State Department of

Transportation. All rights reserved.
Foreword
These Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction have been
developed to serve as a baseline for the work delivered to the public by the Washington State
Department of Transportation (WSDOT). The Standard Specifications are incorporated into
the written agreement (Contract) between WSDOT as Contracting Agency and the Contractor,
except where the Contract indicates that a particular specification has been amended or
replaced with a special provision to resolve project-specific issues. The decision to amend or
replace any standard specification with a special provision is made during the design process
and is based upon the sound engineering judgment of the project designer.
These Standard Specifications reflect years of refinement through the literally hundreds
of projects the Department delivers each year. In addition, the standards are the result of
countless hours of development and review by both our internal WSDOT staff as well
as our industry partners through the joint WSDOT/Associated General Contractors’
Standing Committees.
Finally, these standards reflect the contracting philosophy and balance of risk-allocation
that the Department has adopted through the years. We believe that this balance of risks
provides us the lowest final cost solution to our transportation needs. For example, shifting
risk to the Contractor can provide more certainty on final cost, but may result in higher initial
cost. On the other hand, accepting more risk by the owner can result in lower initial costs, but
less certainty on the final cost. We at the Department of Transportation believe that we have
reached the optimum point of balance for risk, and we will continue to consider this balance
on all future specification revisions.
The language above indicates that these specifications are to be used only as a guideline
during the design process, and that is true. Once they have been incorporated into a Contract,
however, they become the legal and enforceable language of that Contract. The Standard
Specifications, the Amendments to the Standards, and the Project Special Provisions, along
with any attachments in the Contract documents, define a Contract and are no longer seen as
guidelines. Rather, they are the written agreement, subject to revision only through the change
order process.
This preface is for informational purposes only and is not to be used to interpret or affect
the terms.
Robert E. Christopher, P.E.

State Construction Engineer
2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 1

Foreword
Page 2 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

2018 Standard Specifications
Division 1 General Requirements
Division 2 Earthwork
Division 3 Aggregate Production and Acceptance
Division 4 Bases
Division 5 Surface Treatments and Pavements
Division 6 Structures
Division 7 Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers,

Water Mains, and Conduits
Division 8 Miscellaneous Construction
Division 9 Materials
Index

Contents

Division 1 General Requirements........................................................................1-1
1-01 Definitions and Terms................................................................................................. 1-1
1-01.1 General.......................................................................................................... 1-1
1-01.2 Abbreviations................................................................................................ 1-1
1-01.2(1) Associations and Miscellaneous............................................... 1-1
1-01.2(2) Items of Work and Units of Measurement................................ 1-2
1-01.3 Definitions..................................................................................................... 1-3
1-02 Bid Procedures and Conditions................................................................................. 1-7
1-02.1 Prequalification of Bidders........................................................................... 1-7
1-02.2 Plans and Specifications................................................................................ 1-8
1-02.3 Estimated Quantities..................................................................................... 1-8
1-02.4 Examination of Plans, Specifications, and Site of Work............................... 1-8
1-02.4(1) General...................................................................................... 1-8
1-02.4(2) Subsurface Information........................................................... 1-10
1-02.5 Proposal Forms........................................................................................... 1-10
1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal............................................................................... 1-10
1-02.7 Bid Deposit................................................................................................. 1-11
1-02.8 Noncollusion Declaration and Lobbying Certification............................... 1-11
1-02.8(1) Noncollusion Declaration....................................................... 1-11
1-02.8(2) Lobbying Certification............................................................ 1-12
1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal................................................................................... 1-12
1-02.10 Withdrawing, Revising, or Supplementing Proposal.................................. 1-13
1-02.11 Combination and Multiple Proposals.......................................................... 1-13
1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals....................................................................... 1-14
1-02.13 Irregular Proposals...................................................................................... 1-14
1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders......................................................................... 1-15
1-02.15 Pre-Award Information............................................................................... 1-15
1-03 Award and Execution of Contract........................................................................... 1-16
1-03.1 Consideration of Bids................................................................................. 1-16
1-03.1(1) Identical Bid Totals................................................................. 1-16
1-03.2 Award of Contract....................................................................................... 1-16
1-03.3 Execution of Contract................................................................................. 1-17
1-03.4 Contract Bond............................................................................................. 1-17
1-03.5 Failure to Execute Contract........................................................................ 1-17
1-03.6 Return of Bid Deposit................................................................................. 1-18
1-03.7 Judicial Review........................................................................................... 1-18
1-04 Scope of the Work..................................................................................................... 1-19
1-04.1 Intent of the Contract.................................................................................. 1-19
1-04.1(1) Bid Items Included in the Proposal......................................... 1-19
1-04.1(2) Bid Items Not Included in the Proposal.................................. 1-19
1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents, Plans, Special Provisions,
Specifications, and Addenda....................................................................... 1-19
1-04.3 Reference Information................................................................................ 1-20
1-04.4 Changes....................................................................................................... 1-20
1-04.4(1) Minor Changes........................................................................ 1-21
1-04.4(2) Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP)......................... 1-21

Contents
1-04.5 Procedure and Protest by the Contractor.................................................... 1-24

1-04.6 Variation in Estimated Quantities............................................................... 1-25
1-04.7 Differing Site Conditions (Changed Conditions)....................................... 1-26
1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments............................................................... 1-26
1-04.9 Use of Buildings or Structures.................................................................... 1-26
1-04.10 Use of Materials Found on the Project....................................................... 1-26
1-04.11 Final Cleanup.............................................................................................. 1-27
1-05 Control of Work........................................................................................................ 1-28
1-05.1 Authority of the Engineer........................................................................... 1-28
1-05.2 Authority of Assistants and Inspectors....................................................... 1-28
1-05.3 Working Drawings...................................................................................... 1-29
1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviations From Plans and Stakes.......................... 1-29
1-05.5 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 1-30
1-05.6 Inspection of Work and Materials............................................................... 1-30
1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work.......................................... 1-31
1-05.8 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 1-31
1-05.9 Equipment................................................................................................... 1-31
1-05.10 Guarantees................................................................................................... 1-31
1-05.11 Final Inspection........................................................................................... 1-31
1-05.12 Final Acceptance......................................................................................... 1-32
1-05.13 Superintendents, Labor, and Equipment of Contractor............................... 1-32
1-05.13(1) Emergency Contact List.......................................................... 1-33
1-05.14 Cooperation With Other Contractors.......................................................... 1-33
1-05.15 Method of Serving Notices......................................................................... 1-33
1-06 Control of Material................................................................................................... 1-34
1-06.1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use............................................................. 1-34
1-06.1(1) Qualified Products List (QPL)................................................ 1-34
1-06.1(2) Request for Approval of Material (RAM).............................. 1-34
1-06.1(3) Aggregate Source Approval (ASA) Database......................... 1-35
1-06.1(4) Fabrication Inspection Expense.............................................. 1-35
1-06.2 Acceptance of Materials............................................................................. 1-36
1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests for Acceptance.......................................... 1-36
1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance................. 1-37
1-06.3 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.................................................. 1-41
1-06.4 Handling and Storing Materials.................................................................. 1-42
1-06.5 Owners Manuals and Operating Instructions.............................................. 1-42
1-06.6 Recycled Materials...................................................................................... 1-42
1-07 Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public................................................ 1-44
1-07.1 Laws to be Observed................................................................................... 1-44
1-07.2 State Taxes.................................................................................................. 1-45
1-07.2(1) State Sales Tax: WAC 458-20-171 – Use Tax......................... 1-45
1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax: WAC 458-20-170 – Retail Sales Tax............ 1-45
1-07.2(3) Services................................................................................... 1-45
1-07.3 Forest Protection and Merchantable Timber Requirements........................ 1-45
1-07.3(1) Forest Fire Prevention............................................................. 1-45
1-07.3(2) Merchantable Timber Requirements....................................... 1-46

Contents
1-07.4 Sanitation.................................................................................................... 1-46

1-07.4(1) General.................................................................................... 1-46
1-07.4(2) Health Hazards........................................................................ 1-46
1-07.5 Environmental Regulations......................................................................... 1-47
1-07.5(1) General.................................................................................... 1-47
1-07.5(2) State Department of Fish and Wildlife.................................... 1-47
1-07.5(3) State Department of Ecology.................................................. 1-47
1-07.5(4) Air Quality.............................................................................. 1-48
1-07.6 Permits and Licenses................................................................................... 1-48
1-07.7 Load Limits................................................................................................. 1-48
1-07.7(1) General.................................................................................... 1-48
1-07.7(2) Load-Limit Restrictions.......................................................... 1-49
1-07.8 High-Visibility Apparel............................................................................... 1-50
1-07.8(1) Traffic Control Personnel........................................................ 1-50
1-07.8(2) Non-Traffic Control Personnel................................................ 1-50
1-07.9 Wages.......................................................................................................... 1-50
1-07.9(1) General.................................................................................... 1-50
1-07.9(2) Posting Notices....................................................................... 1-52
1-07.9(3) Apprentices............................................................................. 1-52
1-07.9(4) Disputes.................................................................................. 1-53
1-07.9(5) Required Documents............................................................... 1-53
1-07.9(6) Audits...................................................................................... 1-53
1-07.10 Worker’s Benefits........................................................................................ 1-53
1-07.11 Requirements for Nondiscrimination.......................................................... 1-54
1-07.11(1) General Application................................................................ 1-54
1-07.11(2) Contractual Requirements....................................................... 1-54
1-07.11(3) Equal Employment Opportunity Officer................................. 1-56
1-07.11(4) Dissemination of Policy.......................................................... 1-56
1-07.11(5) Sanctions................................................................................. 1-57
1-07.11(6) Incorporation of Provisions..................................................... 1-57
1-07.11(7) Vacant...................................................................................... 1-57
1-07.11(8) Vacant...................................................................................... 1-57
1-07.11(9) Subcontracting, Procurement of Materials, and Leasing
of Equipment........................................................................... 1-57
1-07.11(10) Records and Reports............................................................... 1-58
1-07.12 Federal Agency Inspection.......................................................................... 1-58
1-07.13 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work......................................................... 1-58
1-07.13(1) General.................................................................................... 1-58
1-07.13(2) Relief of Responsibility for Completed Work........................ 1-59
1-07.13(3) Relief of Responsibility for Damage by Public Traffic.......... 1-59
1-07.13(4) Repair of Damage................................................................... 1-59
1-07.14 Responsibility for Damage......................................................................... 1-60
1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution Prevention....................................................... 1-61
1-07.15(1) Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasures Plan............ 1-61
1-07.16 Protection and Restoration of Property....................................................... 1-64
1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property........................................................... 1-64
1-07.16(2) Vegetation Protection and Restoration.................................... 1-65
1-07.16(3) Fences, Mailboxes, Incidentals............................................... 1-65
1-07.16(4) Archaeological and Historical Objects................................... 1-66
1-07.16(5) Payment................................................................................... 1-66

Contents
1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities.................................................................... 1-66

1-07.17(1) Utility Construction, Removal, or Relocation by
the Contractor.......................................................................... 1-66
1-07.17(2) Utility Construction, Removal, or Relocation by Others........ 1-67
1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance....................................... 1-67
1-07.19 Gratuities..................................................................................................... 1-69
1-07.20 Patented Devices, Materials, and Processes............................................... 1-70
1-07.21 Rock Drilling Safety Requirements............................................................ 1-70
1-07.22 Use of Explosives....................................................................................... 1-70
1-07.23 Public Convenience and Safety.................................................................. 1-70
1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic..................................................... 1-70
1-07.23(2) Construction and Maintenance of Detours............................. 1-72
1-07.24 Rights of Way.............................................................................................. 1-73
1-07.25 Opening of Sections to Traffic.................................................................... 1-73
1-07.26 Personal Liability of Public Officers........................................................... 1-73
1-07.27 No Waiver of State’s Legal Rights.............................................................. 1-73
1-08 Prosecution and Progress......................................................................................... 1-74
1-08.1 Subcontracting............................................................................................ 1-74
1-08.1(1) Prompt Payment, Subcontract Completion and Return
of Retainage Withheld............................................................. 1-75
1-08.2 Assignment................................................................................................. 1-77
1-08.3 Progress Schedule....................................................................................... 1-77
1-08.3(1) General Requirements............................................................. 1-77
1-08.3(2) Progress Schedule Types......................................................... 1-77
1-08.3(3) Schedule Updates.................................................................... 1-78
1-08.3(4) Measurement........................................................................... 1-79
1-08.3(5) Payment................................................................................... 1-79
1-08.4 Prosecution of Work.................................................................................... 1-79
1-08.5 Time for Completion................................................................................... 1-79
1-08.6 Suspension of Work.................................................................................... 1-80
1-08.7 Maintenance During Suspension................................................................ 1-81
1-08.8 Extensions of Time..................................................................................... 1-82
1-08.9 Liquidated Damages................................................................................... 1-83
1-08.10 Termination of Contract.............................................................................. 1-84
1-08.10(1) Termination for Default.......................................................... 1-84
1-08.10(2) Termination for Public Convenience...................................... 1-86
1-08.10(3) Termination for Public Convenience Payment Request......... 1-86
1-08.10(4) Payment for Termination for Public Convenience.................. 1-86
1-08.10(5) Responsibility of the Contractor and Surety........................... 1-86
1-09 Measurement and Payment..................................................................................... 1-87
1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities......................................................................... 1-87
1-09.2 Weighing Equipment.................................................................................. 1-88
1-09.2(1) General Requirements for Weighing Equipment.................... 1-88
1-09.2(2) Specific Requirements for Batching Scales............................ 1-89
1-09.2(3) Specific Requirements for Platform Scales............................. 1-89
1-09.2(4) Specific Requirements for Belt Conveyor Scales................... 1-90
1-09.2(5) Measurement........................................................................... 1-90
1-09.2(6) Payment................................................................................... 1-91

Contents
1-09.3 Scope of Payment....................................................................................... 1-91

1-09.4 Equitable Adjustment.................................................................................. 1-92
1-09.5 Deleted or Terminated Work....................................................................... 1-92
1-09.6 Force Account............................................................................................. 1-93
1-09.7 Mobilization................................................................................................ 1-96
1-09.8 Payment for Material on Hand.................................................................... 1-97
1-09.9 Payments..................................................................................................... 1-97
1-09.9(1) Retainage................................................................................. 1-98
1-09.10 Payment for Surplus Processed Materials................................................... 1-99
1-09.11 Disputes and Claims................................................................................... 1-99
1-09.11(1) Disputes Review Board........................................................... 1-99
1-09.11(2) Claims................................................................................... 1-102
1-09.11(3) Time Limitation and Jurisdiction.......................................... 1-104
1-09.12 Audits........................................................................................................ 1-104
1-09.12(1) General.................................................................................. 1-104
1-09.12(2) Claims................................................................................... 1-104
1-09.12(3) Required Documents for Audits............................................ 1-105
1-09.13 Claims Resolution..................................................................................... 1-105
1-09.13(1) General.................................................................................. 1-105
1-09.13(2) Nonbinding Alternative Disputes Resolution (ADR)........... 1-106
1-09.13(3) Claims $250,000 or Less....................................................... 1-106
1-09.13(4) Claims in Excess of $250,000............................................... 1-107
1-10 Temporary Traffic Control..................................................................................... 1-108
1-10.1 General...................................................................................................... 1-108
1-10.1(1) Materials............................................................................... 1-108
1-10.1(2) Description............................................................................ 1-108
1-10.2 Traffic Control Management..................................................................... 1-109
1-10.2(1) General.................................................................................. 1-109
1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans..............................................................1-111
1-10.2(3) Conformance to Established Standards.................................1-111
1-10.3 Traffic Control Labor, Procedures, and Devices....................................... 1-112
1-10.3(1) Traffic Control Labor............................................................ 1-112
1-10.3(2) Traffic Control Procedures.................................................... 1-113
1-10.3(3) Traffic Control Devices......................................................... 1-115
1-10.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 1-118
1-10.4(1) Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items)......................... 1-118
1-10.4(2) Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals........................... 1-119
1-10.4(3) Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control...... 1-120
1-10.4(4) Owner-Provided Resources.................................................. 1-120
1-10.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 1-120
1-10.5(1) Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items)......................... 1-120
1-10.5(2) Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals........................... 1-120
1-10.5(3) Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control...... 1-121

Contents
Division 2 Earthwork............................................................................................2-1
2-01 Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup............................................................ 2-1
2-01.1 Description.................................................................................................... 2-1
2-01.2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris....................................................... 2-1
2-01.2(2) Disposal Method No. 2 – Waste Site........................................ 2-1
2-01.2(3) Disposal Method No. 3 – Chipping.......................................... 2-1
2-01.3 Construction Requirements........................................................................... 2-1
2-01.3(1) Clearing..................................................................................... 2-1
2-01.3(2) Grubbing................................................................................... 2-2
2-01.3(3) Vacant........................................................................................ 2-2
2-01.3(4) Roadside Cleanup..................................................................... 2-2
2-01.4 Measurement................................................................................................. 2-3
2-01.5 Payment......................................................................................................... 2-3
2-02 Removal of Structures and Obstructions................................................................. 2-4
2-02.1 Description.................................................................................................... 2-4
2-02.2 Vacant............................................................................................................ 2-4
2-02.3(1) Removal of Foundations........................................................... 2-4
2-02.3(2) Removal of Bridges, Box Culverts, and Other
Drainage Structures................................................................... 2-4
2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters............ 2-5
2-02.4 Vacant............................................................................................................ 2-5
2-02.5 Payment......................................................................................................... 2-6
2-03 Roadway Excavation and Embankment................................................................... 2-7
2-03.1 Description.................................................................................................... 2-7
2-03.2 Vacant............................................................................................................ 2-7
2-03.3(1) Widening of Cuts...................................................................... 2-7
2-03.3(2) Rock Cuts.................................................................................. 2-7
2-03.3(3) Excavation Below Subgrade..................................................... 2-9
2-03.3(4) Sluicing................................................................................... 2-10
2-03.3(5) Slope Treatment...................................................................... 2-10
2-03.3(6) Deposit of Rock for the Contracting Agency’s Use................ 2-10
2-03.3(7) Disposal of Surplus Material.................................................. 2-10
2-03.3(8) Wasting Material..................................................................... 2-11
2-03.3(9) Roadway Ditches.................................................................... 2-11
2-03.3(10) Selected Material.................................................................... 2-11
2-03.3(11) Slides....................................................................................... 2-12
2-03.3(12) Overbreak................................................................................ 2-12
2-03.3(13) Borrow.................................................................................... 2-12
2-03.3(14) Embankment Construction...................................................... 2-13
2-03.3(15) Aeration................................................................................... 2-18
2-03.3(16) End Slopes.............................................................................. 2-19
2-03.3(17) Snow Removal........................................................................ 2-19
2-03.3(18) Stepped Slope Construction.................................................... 2-19
2-03.3(19) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters.......... 2-19
2-03.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 2-19
2-03.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 2-20

Contents
2-04 Haul............................................................................................................................ 2-23

2-04.1 Description.................................................................................................. 2-23
2-04.2 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 2-23
2-04.3 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 2-23
2-04.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 2-23
2-04.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 2-23
2-05 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 2-24
2-06 Subgrade Preparation.............................................................................................. 2-25
2-06.1 Description.................................................................................................. 2-25
2-06.2 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 2-25
2-06.3 Construction Requirements......................................................................... 2-25
2-06.3(1) Subgrade for Surfacing........................................................... 2-25
2-06.3(2) Subgrade for Pavement........................................................... 2-25
2-06.4 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 2-25
2-06.5 Measurement and Payment......................................................................... 2-26
2-06.5(1) Subgrade Constructed Under Same Contract......................... 2-26
2-06.5(2) Subgrade Not Constructed Under Same Contract.................. 2-26
2-07 Watering..................................................................................................................... 2-27
2-07.1 Description.................................................................................................. 2-27
2-07.2 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 2-27
2-07.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 2-27
2-07.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 2-27
2-08 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 2-28
2-09 Structure Excavation................................................................................................ 2-29
2-09.1 Description.................................................................................................. 2-29
2-09.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 2-29
2-09.3(2) Classification of Structure Excavation.................................... 2-31
2-09.3(3) Construction Requirements, Structure Excavation, Class A... 2-31
2-09.3(4) Construction Requirements, Structure Excavation, Class B... 2-36
2-09.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 2-36
2-09.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 2-37
2-10 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 2-39
2-11 Trimming and Cleanup............................................................................................ 2-40
2-11.1 Description.................................................................................................. 2-40
2-11.2 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 2-40
2-11.4 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 2-40
2-11.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 2-40

Contents
2-12 Construction Geosynthetic....................................................................................... 2-41

2-12.1 Description.................................................................................................. 2-41
2-12.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 2-41
2-12.3(1) Underground Drainage............................................................ 2-42
2-12.3(2) Separation............................................................................... 2-42
2-12.3(3) Soil Stabilization..................................................................... 2-42
2-12.3(4) Permanent Erosion Control and Ditch Lining........................ 2-42
2-12.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 2-43
2-12.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 2-43

Contents
Division 3 Aggregate Production and Acceptance .............................................3-1

3-01 Production From Quarry and Pit Sites..................................................................... 3-1
3-01.1 Description.................................................................................................... 3-1
3-01.2 Material Sources, General Requirements..................................................... 3-1
3-01.2(1) Approval of Source................................................................... 3-1
3-01.2(2) Preparation of Site..................................................................... 3-1
3-01.2(3) Stripping Quarries and Pits....................................................... 3-1
3-01.2(4) Production Requirements.......................................................... 3-2
3-01.2(5) Final Cleanup............................................................................ 3-2
3-01.3 State Furnished Material Sources................................................................. 3-2
3-01.3(1) Quality and Extent of Material................................................. 3-2
3-01.3(2) When More Than One Site is Provided.................................... 3-3
3-01.3(3) Reject Materials........................................................................ 3-3
3-01.3(4) Surplus Screenings.................................................................... 3-3
3-01.3(5) Moving Plant............................................................................. 3-3
3-01.4 Contractor Furnished Material Sources........................................................ 3-4
3-01.4(1) Acquisition and Development................................................... 3-4
3-01.4(2) Surplus Screenings.................................................................... 3-5
3-01.4(3) Substitution of Gravel Deposit in Lieu of Ledge Rock
or Talus Source Provided by the Contracting Agency.............. 3-5
3-01.4(4) Gravel Base............................................................................... 3-5
3-01.5 Measurement................................................................................................. 3-5
3-01.6 Payment......................................................................................................... 3-5
3-02 Stockpiling Aggregates............................................................................................... 3-6
3-02.1 Description.................................................................................................... 3-6
3-02.2 General Requirements................................................................................... 3-6
3-02.2(1) Stockpile Sites Provided by the Contracting Agency............... 3-6
3-02.2(2) Stockpile Site Provided by the Contractor................................ 3-6
3-02.2(3) Stockpiling Aggregates for Future Use..................................... 3-6
3-02.2(4) Stockpiling Aggregates for Immediate Use.............................. 3-6
3-02.2(5) Preparation of Site..................................................................... 3-7
3-02.2(6) Construction of Stockpiles........................................................ 3-7
3-02.2(7) Removing Aggregates From Stockpiles.................................... 3-7
3-02.3 Additional Requirements for Specific Aggregates........................................ 3-8
3-02.3(1) Washed Aggregates................................................................... 3-8
3-02.4 Measurement................................................................................................. 3-8
3-02.5 Payment......................................................................................................... 3-8
3-03 Site Reclamation.......................................................................................................... 3-9
3-03.1 Description.................................................................................................... 3-9
3-03.2 General Requirements................................................................................... 3-9
3-03.2(1) Contracting Agency-Provided Sites.......................................... 3-9
3-03.2(2) Contractor-Provided Sites......................................................... 3-9
3-03.2(3) Out-of-State Sites...................................................................... 3-9
3-03.3 Reclamation Plans......................................................................................... 3-9
3-03.3(1) Contracting Agency-Provided Sites.......................................... 3-9
3-03.3(2) Contractor-Provided Sites....................................................... 3-10
3-03.4(1) Erosion Control....................................................................... 3-10
3-03.4(2) Deviations From Approved Reclamation Plans...................... 3-10

Contents
3-03.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 3-10

3-03.5(1) Contracting Agency-Provided Sites........................................ 3-10
3-03.5(2) Contractor-Provided Sites....................................................... 3-10
3-04 Acceptance of Aggregate.......................................................................................... 3-11
3-04.1 Description.................................................................................................. 3-11
3-04.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 3-11
3-04.3(1) General.................................................................................... 3-11
3-04.3(2) Point of Acceptance................................................................ 3-11
3-04.3(3) Sampling................................................................................. 3-11
3-04.3(4) Testing Results........................................................................ 3-11
3-04.3(5) Nonstatistical Evaluation........................................................ 3-11
3-04.3(6) Statistical Evaluation.............................................................. 3-12
3-04.3(7) Rejected Work......................................................................... 3-12
3-04.3(8) Price Adjustments for Quality of Aggregate........................... 3-13
3-04.4 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 3-13
3-04.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 3-13

Contents
Division 4 Bases.....................................................................................................4-1
4-01 Vacant........................................................................................................................... 4-1
4-02 Gravel Base.................................................................................................................. 4-2
4-02.1 Description.................................................................................................... 4-2
4-02.2 Materials....................................................................................................... 4-2
4-02.4 Measurement................................................................................................. 4-2
4-02.5 Payment......................................................................................................... 4-2
4-03 Vacant........................................................................................................................... 4-3
4-04 Ballast and Crushed Surfacing.................................................................................. 4-4
4-04.1 Description.................................................................................................... 4-4
4-04.2 Materials....................................................................................................... 4-4
4-04.3(1) Equipment................................................................................. 4-4
4-04.3(2) Subgrade................................................................................... 4-4
4-04.3(3) Mixing....................................................................................... 4-4
4-04.3(4) Placing and Spreading............................................................... 4-5
4-04.3(5) Shaping and Compaction.......................................................... 4-5
4-04.3(6) Keystone................................................................................... 4-5
4-04.3(7) Miscellaneous Requirements.................................................... 4-6
4-04.3(8) Weather Limitations.................................................................. 4-6
4-04.3(9) Hauling...................................................................................... 4-6
4-04.3(10) Hours of Work........................................................................... 4-6
4-04.3(11) Permeable Ballast...................................................................... 4-6
4-04.4 Measurement................................................................................................. 4-6
4-04.5 Payment......................................................................................................... 4-7

Contents
Division 5 Surface Treatments and Pavements...................................................5-1

5-01 Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation............................................................. 5-1
5-01.1 Description.................................................................................................... 5-1
5-01.2 Materials....................................................................................................... 5-1
5-01.3(1) Vacant........................................................................................ 5-1
5-01.3(2) Material Acceptance.................................................................. 5-2
5-01.3(3) Vacant........................................................................................ 5-3
5-01.3(4) Replace Cement Concrete Panel............................................... 5-3
5-01.3(5) Partial Depth Spall Repair........................................................ 5-4
5-01.3(6) Dowel Bar Retrofit.................................................................... 5-5
5-01.3(7) Sealing Existing Concrete Random Cracks.............................. 5-6
5-01.3(8) Sealing Existing Longitudinal and Transverse Joint................. 5-6
5-01.3(9) Cement Concrete Pavement Grinding...................................... 5-6
5-01.3(10) Pavement Smoothness.............................................................. 5-7
5-01.3(11) Concrete Slurry and Grinding Residue..................................... 5-7
5-01.4 Measurement................................................................................................. 5-7
5-01.5 Payment......................................................................................................... 5-7
5-02 Bituminous Surface Treatment.................................................................................. 5-9
5-02.1 Description.................................................................................................... 5-9
5-02.1(1) New Construction..................................................................... 5-9
5-02.1(2) Seal Coats.................................................................................. 5-9
5-02.1(3) Pavement Sealers – Fog Seal.................................................... 5-9
5-02.2 Materials....................................................................................................... 5-9
5-02.3(1) Equipment................................................................................. 5-9
5-02.3(2) Preparation of Roadway Surface............................................ 5-10
5-02.3(3) Application of Emulsified Asphalt and Aggregate.................. 5-11
5-02.3(4) Vacant...................................................................................... 5-12
5-02.3(5) Application of Aggregates...................................................... 5-12
5-02.3(6) Additional Emulsified Asphalt and Aggregate........................ 5-13
5-02.3(7) Patching and Correction of Defects........................................ 5-13
5-02.3(8) Progress of Work..................................................................... 5-13
5-02.3(9) Protection of Structures........................................................... 5-13
5-02.3(10) Unfavorable Weather.............................................................. 5-14
5-02.3(11) Temporary Pavement Markings.............................................. 5-14
5-02.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 5-14
5-02.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 5-14
5-03 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 5-16
5-04 Hot Mix Asphalt........................................................................................................ 5-17
5-04.1 Description.................................................................................................. 5-17
5-04.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 5-17
5-04.2(1) How to Get an HMA Mix Design on the QPL........................ 5-17
5-04.2(2) Mix Design – Obtaining Project Approval............................. 5-20
5-04.3(1) Weather Limitations................................................................ 5-21
5-04.3(2) Paving Under Traffic............................................................... 5-21
5-04.3(3) Equipment............................................................................... 5-21
5-04.3(4) Preparation of Existing Paved Surfaces.................................. 5-24

Contents
5-04.3(5) Producing/Stockpiling Aggregates, RAP, & RAS.................. 5-25

5-04.3(6) Mixing..................................................................................... 5-26
5-04.3(7) Spreading and Finishing......................................................... 5-27
5-04.3(8) Aggregate Acceptance Prior to Incorporation in HMA.......... 5-27
5-04.3(9) HMA Mixture Acceptance...................................................... 5-28
5-04.3(10) HMA Compaction Acceptance............................................... 5-33
5-04.3(11) Reject Work............................................................................. 5-37
5-04.3(12) Joints....................................................................................... 5-38
5-04.3(13) Surface Smoothness................................................................ 5-39
5-04.3(14) Planing Bituminous Pavement................................................ 5-40
5-04.3(15) Sealing Pavement Surfaces..................................................... 5-40
5-04.3(16) HMA Road Approaches.......................................................... 5-40
5-04.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 5-40
5-04.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 5-40
5-05 Cement Concrete Pavement..................................................................................... 5-43
5-05.1 Description.................................................................................................. 5-43
5-05.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 5-43
5-05.3(1) Concrete Mix Design for Paving............................................ 5-43
5-05.3(2) Consistency............................................................................. 5-44
5-05.3(3) Equipment............................................................................... 5-44
5-05.3(4) Measuring and Batching Materials......................................... 5-46
5-05.3(5) Mixing Concrete..................................................................... 5-48
5-05.3(6) Surface Preparation................................................................. 5-49
5-05.3(7) Placing, Spreading, and Compacting Concrete....................... 5-49
5-05.3(8) Joints....................................................................................... 5-51
5-05.3(9) Vacant...................................................................................... 5-52
5-05.3(10) Tie Bars and Corrosion Resistant Dowel Bars........................ 5-52
5-05.3(11) Finishing................................................................................. 5-53
5-05.3(12) Surface Smoothness................................................................ 5-54
5-05.3(13) Curing..................................................................................... 5-55
5-05.3(14) Cold Weather Work................................................................. 5-56
5-05.3(15) Concrete Pavement Construction in Adjacent Lanes.............. 5-56
5-05.3(16) Protection of Pavement........................................................... 5-56
5-05.3(17) Opening to Traffic................................................................... 5-57
5-05.3(18) Vacant...................................................................................... 5-57
5-05.3(19) Vacant...................................................................................... 5-57
5-05.3(20) Vacant...................................................................................... 5-57
5-05.3(21) Vacant...................................................................................... 5-57
5-05.3(22) Repair of Defective Pavement Slabs....................................... 5-57
5-05.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 5-58
5-05.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 5-59
5-05.5(1) Pavement Thickness................................................................ 5-59

Contents
Division 6 Structures.............................................................................................6-1
6-01 General Requirements for Structures....................................................................... 6-1
6-01.1 Description.................................................................................................... 6-1
6-01.2 Foundation Data............................................................................................ 6-1
6-01.3 Clearing the Site............................................................................................ 6-1
6-01.4 Appearance of Structures.............................................................................. 6-1
6-01.5 Vacant............................................................................................................ 6-1
6-01.6 Load Restrictions on Bridges Under Construction....................................... 6-1
6-01.7 Navigable Streams........................................................................................ 6-2
6-01.8 Approaches to Movable Spans...................................................................... 6-2
6-01.9 Working Drawings........................................................................................ 6-2
6-01.10 Utilities Supported by or Attached to Bridges.............................................. 6-2
6-01.11 Name Plates.................................................................................................. 6-3
6-01.12 Final Cleanup................................................................................................ 6-3
6-01.13 Vacant............................................................................................................ 6-3
6-01.14 Premolded Joint Filler................................................................................... 6-3
6-01.15 Normal Temperature..................................................................................... 6-3
6-02 Concrete Structures.................................................................................................... 6-4
6-02.1 Description.................................................................................................... 6-4
6-02.2 Materials....................................................................................................... 6-4
6-02.3(1) Classification of Structural Concrete........................................ 6-4
6-02.3(2) Proportioning Materials............................................................ 6-4
6-02.3(3) Admixtures................................................................................ 6-8
6-02.3(4) Ready-Mix Concrete................................................................. 6-8
6-02.3(5) Acceptance of Concrete.......................................................... 6-10
6-02.3(6) Placing Concrete..................................................................... 6-15
6-02.3(7) Vacant...................................................................................... 6-20
6-02.3(8) Vacant...................................................................................... 6-20
6-02.3(9) Vibration of Concrete.............................................................. 6-20
6-02.3(10) Bridge Decks and Bridge Approach Slabs.............................. 6-20
6-02.3(11) Curing Concrete...................................................................... 6-25
6-02.3(12) Construction Joints................................................................. 6-28
6-02.3(13) Expansion Joints..................................................................... 6-29
6-02.3(14) Finishing Concrete Surfaces................................................... 6-30
6-02.3(15) Date Numerals........................................................................ 6-31
6-02.3(16) Plans for Falsework and Formwork........................................ 6-32
6-02.3(17) Falsework and Formwork....................................................... 6-32
6-02.3(18) Placing Anchor Bolts.............................................................. 6-56
6-02.3(19) Bridge Bearings...................................................................... 6-56
6-02.3(20) Grout for Anchor Bolts and Bridge Bearings......................... 6-56
6-02.3(21) Drainage of Box Girder Cells................................................. 6-57
6-02.3(22) Drainage of Substructure........................................................ 6-57
6-02.3(23) Opening to Traffic................................................................... 6-57
6-02.3(24) Reinforcement......................................................................... 6-58
6-02.3(25) Prestressed Concrete Girders.................................................. 6-64
6-02.3(26) Cast-In-Place Prestressed Concrete........................................ 6-77
6-02.3(27) Concrete for Precast Units...................................................... 6-88
6-02.3(28) Precast Concrete Panels.......................................................... 6-89

Contents
6-02.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 6-92

6-02.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 6-93
6-03 Steel Structures......................................................................................................... 6-95
6-03.1 Description.................................................................................................. 6-95
6-03.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 6-95
6-03.3(1) Vacant...................................................................................... 6-95
6-03.3(2) Facilities for Inspection........................................................... 6-95
6-03.3(3) Inspector’s Authority.............................................................. 6-95
6-03.3(4) Rejections................................................................................ 6-96
6-03.3(5) Mill Orders and Shipping Statements..................................... 6-96
6-03.3(6) Weighing................................................................................. 6-96
6-03.3(7) Shop Plans............................................................................... 6-96
6-03.3(8) Substitutions............................................................................ 6-97
6-03.3(9) Handling, Storing, and Shipping of Materials........................ 6-97
6-03.3(10) Straightening Bent Material.................................................... 6-97
6-03.3(11) Workmanship and Finish........................................................ 6-98
6-03.3(12) Falsework................................................................................ 6-98
6-03.3(13) Fabricating Tension Members................................................. 6-98
6-03.3(14) Edge Finishing........................................................................ 6-98
6-03.3(15) Planing of Bearing Surfaces.................................................... 6-98
6-03.3(16) Abutting Joints........................................................................ 6-99
6-03.3(17) End Connection Angles........................................................... 6-99
6-03.3(18) Built Members........................................................................ 6-99
6-03.3(19) Hand Holes.............................................................................. 6-99
6-03.3(20) Lacing Bars............................................................................. 6-99
6-03.3(21) Plate Girders............................................................................ 6-99
6-03.3(22) Eyebars.................................................................................... 6-99
6-03.3(23) Annealing.............................................................................. 6-100
6-03.3(24) Pins and Rollers.................................................................... 6-100
6-03.3(25) Welding and Repair Welding................................................ 6-100
6-03.3(26) Screw Threads....................................................................... 6-103
6-03.3(27) High-Strength Bolt Holes..................................................... 6-103
6-03.3(28) Shop Assembly..................................................................... 6-104
6-03.3(29) Welded Shear Connectors..................................................... 6-105
6-03.3(30) Painting................................................................................. 6-105
6-03.3(31) Alignment and Camber......................................................... 6-106
6-03.3(32) Assembling and Bolting........................................................ 6-106
6-03.3(33) Bolted Connections............................................................... 6-107
6-03.3(34) Adjusting Pin Nuts................................................................ 6-113
6-03.3(35) Setting Anchor Bolts............................................................. 6-113
6-03.3(36) Setting and Grouting Masonry Plates................................... 6-113
6-03.3(37) Setting Steel Bridge Bearings............................................... 6-113
6-03.3(38) Placing Superstructure.......................................................... 6-113
6-03.3(39) Swinging the Span................................................................ 6-113
6-03.3(40) Draining Pockets................................................................... 6-114
6-03.3(41) Vacant.................................................................................... 6-114
6-03.3(42) Surface Condition................................................................. 6-114
6-03.3(43) Castings, Steel Forgings, and Miscellaneous Metals............ 6-114
6-03.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-115
6-03.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-115

Contents
6-04 Timber Structures................................................................................................... 6-116

6-04.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-116
6-04.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-116
6-04.3 Construction Requirements....................................................................... 6-116
6-04.3(1) Storing and Handling Material.............................................. 6-116
6-04.3(2) Workmanship........................................................................ 6-116
6-04.3(3) Shop Details.......................................................................... 6-116
6-04.3(4) Field Treatment of Cut Surfaces, Bolt Holes, and
Contact Surfaces................................................................... 6-116
6-04.3(5) Holes for Bolts, Dowels, Rods, and Lag Screws.................. 6-117
6-04.3(6) Bolts, Washers, and Other Hardware.................................... 6-117
6-04.3(7) Countersinking...................................................................... 6-117
6-04.3(8) Framing................................................................................. 6-117
6-04.3(9) Framed Bents........................................................................ 6-117
6-04.3(10) Caps...................................................................................... 6-117
6-04.3(11) Bracing.................................................................................. 6-118
6-04.3(12) Stringers................................................................................ 6-118
6-04.3(13) Wheel Guards and Railings.................................................. 6-118
6-04.3(14) Single-Plank Floors............................................................... 6-118
6-04.3(15) Laminated Floors.................................................................. 6-118
6-04.3(16) Plank Subfloors for Concrete Decks..................................... 6-119
6-04.3(17) Trusses.................................................................................. 6-119
6-04.3(18) Painting................................................................................. 6-119
6-04.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-119
6-04.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-119
6-05 Piling........................................................................................................................ 6-120
6-05.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-120
6-05.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-120
6-05.3(1) Piling Terms.......................................................................... 6-120
6-05.3(2) Ordering Piling...................................................................... 6-121
6-05.3(3) Manufacture of Precast Concrete Piling............................... 6-122
6-05.3(4) Manufacture of Steel Casings for Cast-In-Place
Concrete Piles....................................................................... 6-123
6-05.3(5) Manufacture of Steel Piles.................................................... 6-123
6-05.3(6) Splicing Steel Casings and Steel Piles.................................. 6-124
6-05.3(7) Storage and Handling............................................................ 6-124
6-05.3(8) Pile Tips and Shoes............................................................... 6-125
6-05.3(9) Pile Driving Equipment........................................................ 6-125
6-05.3(10) Test Piles............................................................................... 6-128
6-05.3(11) Driving Piles......................................................................... 6-128
6-05.3(12) Determination of Bearing Values.......................................... 6-131
6-05.3(13) Treatment of Timber Pile Heads........................................... 6-132
6-05.3(14) Extensions and Buildups of Precast Concrete Piles.............. 6-132
6-05.3(15) Completion of Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles........................ 6-133
6-05.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-133
6-05.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-133

Contents
6-06 Bridge Railings........................................................................................................ 6-135

6-06.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-135
6-06.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-135
6-06.3(1) Timber Railings..................................................................... 6-135
6-06.3(2) Metal Railings....................................................................... 6-135
6-06.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-135
6-06.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-136
6-07 Painting.................................................................................................................... 6-137
6-07.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-137
6-07.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-137
6-07.3(1) Work Force Qualifications.................................................... 6-137
6-07.3(2) Submittals............................................................................. 6-137
6-07.3(3) Quality Control and Quality Assurance................................ 6-139
6-07.3(4) Paint System Manufacturer’s Technical Representative....... 6-140
6-07.3(5) Pre-Painting Conference....................................................... 6-140
6-07.3(6) Paint Containers, Storage, and Handling.............................. 6-141
6-07.3(7) Paint Sampling and Testing................................................... 6-141
6-07.3(8) Equipment............................................................................. 6-142
6-07.3(9) Painting New Steel Structures.............................................. 6-142
6-07.3(10) Painting Existing Steel Structures......................................... 6-144
6-07.3(11) Painting or Powder Coating of Galvanized Surfaces............ 6-151
6-07.3(12) Painting Ferry Terminal Structures....................................... 6-153
6-07.3(13) Painting Timber Structures................................................... 6-153
6-07.3(14) Metallic Coatings.................................................................. 6-153
6-07.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-156
6-07.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-156
6-08 Bituminous Surfacing on Structure Decks........................................................... 6-158
6-08.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-158
6-08.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-158
6-08.3(1) Definitions............................................................................. 6-158
6-08.3(2) Contractor Survey for Grade Controlled Structure Decks.... 6-158
6-08.3(3) General Bituminous Pavement Removal Requirements....... 6-159
6-08.3(4) Partial Depth Removal of Bituminous Pavement from
Structure Decks..................................................................... 6-159
6-08.3(5) Full Depth Removal of Bituminous Pavement from
Structure Decks..................................................................... 6-160
6-08.3(6) Repair of Damage due to Bituminous Pavement Removal
Operations............................................................................. 6-160
6-08.3(7) Concrete Deck Repair........................................................... 6-161
6-08.3(8) Waterproof Membrane for Structure Decks.......................... 6-161
6-08.3(9) Placing Bituminous Pavement on Structure Decks.............. 6-163
6-08.3(10) HMA Compaction on Structure Decks................................. 6-163
6-08.3(11) Paved Panel Joint Seals and HMA Sawcut and Seals........... 6-163
6-08.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-163
6-08.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-164

Contents
6-09 Modified Concrete Overlays.................................................................................. 6-165

6-09.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-165
6-09.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-165
6-09.3(1) Equipment............................................................................. 6-166
6-09.3(2) Submittals............................................................................. 6-169
6-09.3(3) Concrete Overlay Mixes....................................................... 6-170
6-09.3(4) Storing and Handling............................................................ 6-171
6-09.3(5) Scarifying Concrete Surface................................................. 6-172
6-09.3(6) Further Deck Preparation...................................................... 6-173
6-09.3(7) Surface Preparation for Concrete Overlay............................ 6-175
6-09.3(8) Quality Assurance................................................................. 6-176
6-09.3(9) Mixing Concrete For Concrete Overlay............................... 6-176
6-09.3(10) Overlay Profile and Screed Rails.......................................... 6-177
6-09.3(11) Placing Concrete Overlay..................................................... 6-178
6-09.3(12) Finishing Concrete Overlay.................................................. 6-179
6-09.3(13) Curing Concrete Overlay...................................................... 6-180
6-09.3(14) Checking for Bond................................................................ 6-180
6-09.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-180
6-09.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-181
6-10 Concrete Barrier..................................................................................................... 6-182
6-10.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-182
6-10.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-182
6-10.3(1) Precast Concrete Barrier....................................................... 6-182
6-10.3(2) Cast-In-Place Concrete Barrier............................................. 6-183
6-10.3(3) Removing and Resetting Permanent Concrete Barrier......... 6-184
6-10.3(4) Joining Precast Concrete Barrier to Cast-In-Place Barrier... 6-184
6-10.3(5) Temporary Barrier................................................................. 6-184
6-10.3(6) Placing Concrete Barrier....................................................... 6-184
6-10.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-185
6-10.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-185
6-11 Reinforced Concrete Walls..................................................................................... 6-187
6-11.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-187
6-11.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-187
6-11.3(1) Submittals............................................................................. 6-187
6-11.3(2) Excavation and Foundation Preparation............................... 6-187
6-11.3(3) Precast Concrete Wall Stem Panels...................................... 6-187
6-11.3(4) Cast-In-Place Concrete Construction.................................... 6-189
6-11.3(5) Backfill, Weepholes, and Gutters.......................................... 6-189
6-11.3(6) Traffic Barrier and Pedestrian Barrier................................... 6-189
6-11.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-189
6-11.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-189

Contents
6-12 Noise Barrier Walls................................................................................................. 6-190

6-12.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-190
6-12.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-190
6-12.3(1) Submittals............................................................................. 6-190
6-12.3(2) Work Access and Site Preparation........................................ 6-191
6-12.3(3) Shaft Construction................................................................ 6-191
6-12.3(4) Trench, Grade Beam, or Spread Footing Construction......... 6-192
6-12.3(5) Cast-In-Place Concrete Panel Construction.......................... 6-192
6-12.3(6) Precast Concrete Panel Fabrication and Erection................. 6-192
6-12.3(7) Masonry Wall Construction.................................................. 6-193
6-12.3(8) Fabricating and Erecting Timber Noise Barrier Wall Panels.6-193
6-12.3(9) Access Doors and Concrete Landing Pads........................... 6-193
6-12.3(10) Finish Ground Line Dressing................................................ 6-193
6-12.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-194
6-12.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-194
6-13 Structural Earth Walls........................................................................................... 6-195
6-13.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-195
6-13.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-195
6-13.3(2) Submittals............................................................................. 6-196
6-13.3(4) Precast Concrete Facing Panel and Concrete Block
Fabrication............................................................................ 6-198
6-13.3(5) Precast Concrete Facing Panel and Concrete Block
Erection................................................................................. 6-199
6-13.3(6) Welded Wire Faced Structural Earth Wall Erection.............. 6-200
6-13.3(7) Backfill.................................................................................. 6-200
6-13.3(8) Guardrail Placement.............................................................. 6-201
6-13.3(9) SEW Traffic Barrier and SEW Pedestrian Barrier................ 6-201
6-13.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-202
6-13.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-202
6-14 Geosynthetic Retaining Walls................................................................................ 6-203
6-14.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-203
6-14.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-203
6-14.3(2) Submittals............................................................................. 6-203
6-14.3(4) Erection and Backfill............................................................. 6-204
6-14.3(5) Guardrail Placement.............................................................. 6-205
6-14.3(6) Permanent Facing.................................................................. 6-205
6-14.3(7) Geosynthetic Retaining Wall Traffic Barrier and
Geosynthetic Retaining Wall Pedestrian Barrier.................. 6-205
6-14.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-205
6-14.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-206

Contents
6-15 Soil Nail Walls......................................................................................................... 6-207

6-15.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-207
6-15.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-207
6-15.3(1) General Description.............................................................. 6-207
6-15.3(2) Contractor’s Experience Requirements................................ 6-207
6-15.3(3) Submittals............................................................................. 6-207
6-15.3(4) Preconstruction Conference.................................................. 6-208
6-15.3(5) Earthwork.............................................................................. 6-208
6-15.3(6) Soil Nailing........................................................................... 6-209
6-15.3(7) Shotcrete Facing.................................................................... 6-210
6-15.3(8) Soil Nail Testing and Acceptance......................................... 6-210
6-15.3(9) Concrete Fascia Panels......................................................... 6-214
6-15.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-214
6-15.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-214
6-16 Soldier Pile and Soldier Pile Tieback Walls.......................................................... 6-215
6-16.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-215
6-16.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-215
6-16.3(2) Submittals............................................................................. 6-215
6-16.3(3) Shaft Excavation................................................................... 6-216
6-16.3(4) Installing Soldier Piles.......................................................... 6-217
6-16.3(5) Backfilling Shaft................................................................... 6-217
6-16.3(6) Designing and Installing Lagging and Installing
Permanent Ground Anchors.................................................. 6-218
6-16.3(7) Prefabricated Drainage Mat.................................................. 6-221
6-16.3(8) Concrete Fascia Panel........................................................... 6-221
6-16.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-221
6-16.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-221
6-17 Permanent Ground Anchors.................................................................................. 6-223
6-17.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-223
6-17.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-223
6-17.3(1) Definitions............................................................................. 6-223
6-17.3(2) Contractor Experience Requirements................................... 6-223
6-17.3(3) Submittals............................................................................. 6-224
6-17.3(4) Preconstruction Conference.................................................. 6-224
6-17.3(5) Tendon Fabrication............................................................... 6-225
6-17.3(6) Tendon Storage and Handling............................................... 6-226
6-17.3(7) Installing Permanent Ground Anchors.................................. 6-226
6-17.3(8) Testing and Stressing............................................................ 6-228
6-17.3(9) Permanent Ground Anchor Acceptance Criteria................... 6-230
6-17.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-231
6-17.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-231

Contents
6-18 Shotcrete Facing...................................................................................................... 6-232

6-18.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-232
6-18.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-232
6-18.3(1) Submittals............................................................................. 6-232
6-18.3(2) Mix Design........................................................................... 6-232
6-18.3(3) Testing................................................................................... 6-232
6-18.3(4) Qualifications of Contractor’s Personnel.............................. 6-233
6-18.3(5) Placing Wire Reinforcement................................................. 6-233
6-18.3(6) Alignment Control................................................................ 6-233
6-18.3(7) Shotcrete Application............................................................ 6-234
6-18.3(8) Shotcrete Finishing............................................................... 6-234
6-18.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-235
6-18.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-235
6-19 Shafts........................................................................................................................ 6-236
6-19.1 Description................................................................................................ 6-236
6-19.2 Materials................................................................................................... 6-236
6-19.3(2) Shaft Construction Submittal................................................ 6-237
6-19.3(3) Shaft Excavation................................................................... 6-240
6-19.3(4) Slurry Installation Requirements.......................................... 6-243
6-19.3(5) Assembly and Placement of Reinforcing Steel..................... 6-245
6-19.3(6) Contractor Furnished Accessories for Nondestructive
QA Testing............................................................................ 6-246
6-19.3(7) Placing Concrete................................................................... 6-248
6-19.3(8) Casing Removal.................................................................... 6-249
6-19.3(9) Nondestructive QA Testing of Shafts.................................... 6-249
6-19.3(10) Engineer’s Final Acceptance of Shafts................................ 6-252
6-19.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 6-252
6-19.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 6-252

Contents
Division 7 Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers,

Water Mains, and Conduits................................................................7-1
7-01 Drains........................................................................................................................... 7-1
7-01.1 Description.................................................................................................... 7-1
7-01.2 Materials....................................................................................................... 7-1
7-01.3(1) Drain Pipe................................................................................. 7-1
7-01.3(2) Underdrain Pipe........................................................................ 7-2
7-01.4 Measurement................................................................................................. 7-2
7-01.5 Payment......................................................................................................... 7-2
7-02 Culverts........................................................................................................................ 7-3
7-02.1 Description.................................................................................................... 7-3
7-02.2 Materials....................................................................................................... 7-3
7-02.3(1) Placing Culvert Pipe – General................................................. 7-4
7-02.3(2) Installation of Metal End Sections............................................ 7-4
7-02.3(3) Headwalls.................................................................................. 7-5
7-02.3(4) Removing and Relaying Culverts............................................. 7-5
7-02.3(5) Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe..................................................... 7-5
7-02.3(6) Precast Reinf. Conc. Three Sided Structures, Box Culverts
and Split Box Culverts.............................................................. 7-5
7-02.4 Measurement................................................................................................. 7-9
7-02.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-10
7-03 Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, Arch, and Underpass........................................ 7-11
7-03.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-11
7-03.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-11
7-03.3(1) Foundations, General.............................................................. 7-11
7-03.3(2) Assembling............................................................................. 7-12
7-03.3(3) Backfilling............................................................................... 7-12
7-03.3(4) Invert Treatment...................................................................... 7-12
7-03.3(5) Headwalls................................................................................ 7-12
7-03.3(6) Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe................................................... 7-12
7-03.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-12
7-03.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-13
7-04 Storm Sewers............................................................................................................. 7-14
7-04.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-14
7-04.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-14
7-04.3(1) Cleaning and Testing............................................................... 7-14
7-04.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-17
7-04.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-17

Contents
7-05 Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins, and Drywells....................................................... 7-18

7-05.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-18
7-05.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-18
7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade.................... 7-19
7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes................................................... 7-19
7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes......................................... 7-20
7-05.3(4) Drop Manhole Connection...................................................... 7-20
7-05.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-20
7-05.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-20
7-06 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 7-22
7-07 Cleaning Existing Drainage Structures.................................................................. 7-23
7-07.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-23
7-07.2 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 7-23
7-07.4 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 7-23
7-07.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-23
7-08 General Pipe Installation Requirements................................................................. 7-24
7-08.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-24
7-08.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-24
7-08.3(1) Excavation and Preparation of Trench.................................... 7-24
7-08.3(2) Laying Pipe............................................................................. 7-25
7-08.3(3) Backfilling............................................................................... 7-27
7-08.3(4) Plugging Existing Pipe............................................................ 7-28
7-08.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-28
7-08.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-28
7-09 Water Mains.............................................................................................................. 7-29
7-09.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-29
7-09.1(1) Definitions............................................................................... 7-29
7-09.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-29
7-09.3(1) General.................................................................................... 7-30
7-09.3(2) Ungraded Streets..................................................................... 7-30
7-09.3(3) Clearing and Grubbing in Ungraded Streets........................... 7-30
7-09.3(4) Removal of Existing Street Improvements............................. 7-31
7-09.3(5) Grade and Alignment.............................................................. 7-31
7-09.3(6) Existing Utilities..................................................................... 7-31
7-09.3(7) Trench Excavation.................................................................. 7-31
7-09.3(8) Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Materials............... 7-32
7-09.3(9) Bedding the Pipe..................................................................... 7-33
7-09.3(10) Backfilling Trenches............................................................... 7-33
7-09.3(11) Compaction of Backfill........................................................... 7-33
7-09.3(12) General Pipe Installation......................................................... 7-33
7-09.3(13) Handling of Pipe..................................................................... 7-33
7-09.3(14) Cutting Pipe............................................................................ 7-34
7-09.3(15) Laying of Pipe on Curves....................................................... 7-34
7-09.3(16) Cleaning and Assembling Joint............................................... 7-34

Contents
7-09.3(17) Laying Ductile Iron Pipe With Polyethylene Encasement...... 7-34

7-09.3(18) Coupled Pipe 4 inches in Diameter and Larger...................... 7-35
7-09.3(19) Connections............................................................................. 7-35
7-09.3(20) Detectable Marking Tape........................................................ 7-36
7-09.3(21) Concrete Thrust Blocking....................................................... 7-36
7-09.3(22) Blowoff Assemblies................................................................ 7-36
7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test........................................................ 7-36
7-09.3(24) Disinfection of Water Mains................................................... 7-38
7-09.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-40
7-09.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-41
7-10 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 7-42
7-11 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 7-43
7-12 Valves for Water Mains............................................................................................ 7-44
7-12.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-44
7-12.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-44
7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post........................................... 7-45
7-12.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-45
7-12.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-45
7-13 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 7-46
7-14 Hydrants.................................................................................................................... 7-47
7-14.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-47
7-14.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-47
7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants...................................................................... 7-47
7-14.3(2) Hydrant Connections.............................................................. 7-47
7-14.3(3) Resetting Existing Hydrants................................................... 7-48
7-14.3(4) Moving Existing Hydrants...................................................... 7-48
7-14.3(5) Reconnecting Existing Hydrants............................................. 7-48
7-14.3(6) Hydrant Extensions................................................................. 7-48
7-14.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-48
7-14.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-48
7-15 Service Connections.................................................................................................. 7-50
7-15.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-50
7-15.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-50
7-15.3(1) Flushing and Disinfection....................................................... 7-50
7-15.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-50
7-15.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-51
7-16 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 7-52

Contents
7-17 Sanitary Sewers......................................................................................................... 7-53

7-17.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-53
7-17.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-53
7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities............................. 7-53
7-17.3(2) Cleaning and Testing............................................................... 7-53
7-17.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-57
7-17.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-57
7-18 Side Sewers................................................................................................................ 7-58
7-18.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-58
7-18.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-58
7-18.3(1) General.................................................................................... 7-58
7-18.3(2) Fittings.................................................................................... 7-58
7-18.3(3) Testing..................................................................................... 7-58
7-18.3(4) Extending Side Sewers Into Private Property......................... 7-58
7-18.3(5) End Pipe Marker..................................................................... 7-58
7-18.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-58
7-18.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-59
7-19 Sewer Cleanouts........................................................................................................ 7-60
7-19.1 Description.................................................................................................. 7-60
7-19.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 7-60
7-19.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 7-60
7-19.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 7-60

Contents
Division 8 Miscellaneous Construction...............................................................8-1

8-01 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control......................................................... 8-1
8-01.1 Description.................................................................................................... 8-1
8-01.2 Materials....................................................................................................... 8-1
8-01.3(1) General...................................................................................... 8-1
8-01.3(2) Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching........................................... 8-5
8-01.3(3) Placing Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket...................... 8-8
8-01.3(4) Placing Compost Blanket.......................................................... 8-8
8-01.3(5) Plastic Covering........................................................................ 8-8
8-01.3(6) Check Dams.............................................................................. 8-9
8-01.3(7) Stabilized Construction Entrance.............................................. 8-9
8-01.3(8) Street Cleaning.......................................................................... 8-9
8-01.3(9) Sediment Control Barriers........................................................ 8-9
8-01.3(10) Wattles..................................................................................... 8-11
8-01.3(11) Outlet Protection..................................................................... 8-12
8-01.3(12) Compost Sock......................................................................... 8-12
8-01.3(13) Temporary Curb...................................................................... 8-12
8-01.3(14) Temporary Pipe Slope Drain................................................... 8-12
8-01.3(15) Maintenance............................................................................ 8-12
8-01.3(16) Removal.................................................................................. 8-13
8-01.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-13
8-01.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-14
8-02 Roadside Restoration................................................................................................ 8-16
8-02.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-16
8-02.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-16
8-02.3(1) Responsibility During Construction....................................... 8-16
8-02.3(2) Work Plans.............................................................................. 8-16
8-02.3(3) Weed and Pest Control............................................................ 8-17
8-02.3(4) Topsoil..................................................................................... 8-18
8-02.3(5) Planting Area Preparation....................................................... 8-19
8-02.3(6) Soil Amendments.................................................................... 8-19
8-02.3(7) Layout of Planting................................................................... 8-19
8-02.3(8) Planting................................................................................... 8-19
8-02.3(9) Pruning, Staking, Guying, and Wrapping............................... 8-20
8-02.3(10) Fertilizers................................................................................ 8-20
8-02.3(11) Bark or Wood Chip Mulch...................................................... 8-20
8-02.3(12) Completion of Initial Planting................................................ 8-20
8-02.3(13) Plant Establishment................................................................. 8-21
8-02.3(14) Plant Replacement.................................................................. 8-21
8-02.3(15) Live Fascines.......................................................................... 8-22
8-02.3(16) Lawn Installation.................................................................... 8-22
8-02.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-23
8-02.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-24

Contents
8-03 Irrigation Systems..................................................................................................... 8-26

8-03.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-26
8-03.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-26
8-03.3(1) Layout of Irrigation System.................................................... 8-26
8-03.3(2) Excavation............................................................................... 8-26
8-03.3(3) Piping...................................................................................... 8-27
8-03.3(4) Jointing.................................................................................... 8-27
8-03.3(5) Installation............................................................................... 8-27
8-03.3(6) Electrical Wire Installation..................................................... 8-28
8-03.3(7) Flushing and Testing............................................................... 8-28
8-03.3(8) Adjusting System.................................................................... 8-29
8-03.3(9) Backfill.................................................................................... 8-29
8-03.3(10) As Built Plans......................................................................... 8-29
8-03.3(11) System Operation.................................................................... 8-30
8-03.3(12) Cross Connection Control Device Installation....................... 8-30
8-03.3(13) Irrigation Water Service.......................................................... 8-30
8-03.3(14) Irrigation Electrical Service.................................................... 8-31
8-03.4 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 8-31
8-03.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-31
8-04 Curbs, Gutters, and Spillways................................................................................. 8-32
8-04.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-32
8-04.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-32
8-04.3(1) Cement Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Spillways.................... 8-32
8-04.3(2) Extruded Asphalt Concrete Curbs and Gutters....................... 8-33
8-04.3(3) Vacant...................................................................................... 8-33
8-04.3(4) Metal Spillways...................................................................... 8-33
8-04.3(5) Spillways at Bridge Ends........................................................ 8-34
8-04.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-34
8-04.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-34
8-05 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 8-35
8-06 Cement Concrete Driveway Entrances................................................................... 8-36
8-06.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-36
8-06.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-36
8-06.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-36
8-06.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-36
8-07 Precast Traffic Curb................................................................................................. 8-37
8-07.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-37
8-07.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-37
8-07.3(1) Installing Curbs....................................................................... 8-37
8-07.3(2) Painting of Curbs.................................................................... 8-37
8-07.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-37
8-07.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-38

Contents
8-08 Rumble Strips............................................................................................................ 8-39

8-08.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-39
8-08.2 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 8-39
8-08.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-39
8-08.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-39
8-09 Raised Pavement Markers....................................................................................... 8-40
8-09.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-40
8-09.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-40
8-09.3(1) Preliminary Spotting............................................................... 8-40
8-09.3(2) Surface Preparation................................................................. 8-40
8-09.3(3) Marker Preparation................................................................. 8-40
8-09.3(4) Adhesive Preparation.............................................................. 8-40
8-09.3(5) Application Procedure............................................................ 8-41
8-09.3(6) Recessed Pavement Marker.................................................... 8-41
8-09.3(7) Tolerances for Pavement Markers.......................................... 8-41
8-09.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-41
8-09.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-42
8-10 Guide Posts................................................................................................................ 8-43
8-10.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-43
8-10.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-43
8-10.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-43
8-10.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-43
8-11 Guardrail................................................................................................................... 8-44
8-11.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-44
8-11.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-44
8-11.3(1) Beam Guardrail....................................................................... 8-44
8-11.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-46
8-11.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-46
8-12 Chain Link Fence and Wire Fence.......................................................................... 8-49
8-12.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-49
8-12.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-49
8-12.3(1) Chain Link Fence and Gates................................................... 8-49
8-12.3(2) Wire Fence and Gates............................................................. 8-51
8-12.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-52
8-12.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-53
8-13 Monument Cases....................................................................................................... 8-54
8-13.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-54
8-13.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-54
8-13.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-54
8-13.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-54

Contents
8-14 Cement Concrete Sidewalks..................................................................................... 8-55

8-14.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-55
8-14.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-55
8-14.3(1) Excavation............................................................................... 8-55
8-14.3(2) Forms...................................................................................... 8-55
8-14.3(3) Placing and Finishing Concrete.............................................. 8-55
8-14.3(4) Curing..................................................................................... 8-56
8-14.3(5) Detectable Warning Surface.................................................... 8-56
8-14.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-56
8-14.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-56
8-15 Riprap........................................................................................................................ 8-57
8-15.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-57
8-15.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-57
8-15.3(1) Excavation for Riprap............................................................. 8-57
8-15.3(2) Loose Riprap........................................................................... 8-57
8-15.3(3) Hand Placed Riprap................................................................ 8-57
8-15.3(4) Vacant...................................................................................... 8-57
8-15.3(5) Vacant...................................................................................... 8-57
8-15.3(6) Quarry Spalls.......................................................................... 8-57
8-15.3(7) Filter Blanket.......................................................................... 8-58
8-15.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-58
8-15.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-58
8-16 Concrete Slope Protection........................................................................................ 8-59
8-16.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-59
8-16.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-59
8-16.3(1) Footing and Preparation of Slope........................................... 8-59
8-16.3(2) Placing Semi-Open Concrete Masonry Units......................... 8-59
8-16.3(3) Poured in Place Cement Concrete........................................... 8-59
8-16.3(4) Pneumatically Placed Concrete............................................... 8-59
8-16.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-60
8-16.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-60
8-17 Impact Attenuator Systems...................................................................................... 8-61
8-17.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-61
8-17.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-61
8-17.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-61
8-17.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-61
8-18 Mailbox Support....................................................................................................... 8-62
8-18.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-62
8-18.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-62
8-18.3(1) Type 3 Mailbox Support......................................................... 8-62
8-18.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-62
8-18.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-62

Contents
8-19 Vacant......................................................................................................................... 8-63

8-20 Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation
Systems, and Electrical............................................................................................. 8-64
8-20.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-64
8-20.1(1) Regulations and Code............................................................. 8-64
8-20.1(2) Industry Codes and Standards................................................. 8-64
8-20.1(3) Permitting and Inspections...................................................... 8-65
8-20.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-65
8-20.2(2) Equipment List and Drawings................................................ 8-65
8-20.3(1) General.................................................................................... 8-66
8-20.3(2) Excavating and Backfilling..................................................... 8-67
8-20.3(3) Removing and Replacing Improvements................................ 8-68
8-20.3(4) Foundations............................................................................. 8-68
8-20.3(5) Conduit.................................................................................... 8-69
8-20.3(6) Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull boxes........................ 8-75
8-20.3(7) Messenger Cable, Fittings....................................................... 8-76
8-20.3(8) Wiring..................................................................................... 8-76
8-20.3(9) Bonding, Grounding............................................................... 8-79
8-20.3(10) Service, Transformer, and Intelligent Transportation
System (ITS) Cabinets ........................................................... 8-80
8-20.3(11) Testing..................................................................................... 8-80
8-20.3(12) Painting................................................................................... 8-81
8-20.3(13) Illumination Systems.............................................................. 8-82
8-20.3(14) Signal Systems........................................................................ 8-84
8-20.3(15) Grout....................................................................................... 8-86
8-20.3(16) Reinstalling Salvaged Material .............................................. 8-86
8-20.3(17) “As Built” Plans...................................................................... 8-86
8-20.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-86
8-20.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-86
8-21 Permanent Signing.................................................................................................... 8-88
8-21.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-88
8-21.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-88
8-21.3(1) Location of Signs.................................................................... 8-88
8-21.3(2) Placement of Signs.................................................................. 8-88
8-21.3(3) Sign Covering......................................................................... 8-88
8-21.3(4) Sign Removal.......................................................................... 8-88
8-21.3(5) Sign Relocation....................................................................... 8-89
8-21.3(6) Sign Refacing.......................................................................... 8-89
8-21.3(7) Sign Message Revision........................................................... 8-90
8-21.3(8) Sign Cleaning.......................................................................... 8-90
8-21.3(9) Sign Structures........................................................................ 8-90
8-21.3(10) Sign Attachment...................................................................... 8-93
8-21.3(11) Multiple Panel Signs............................................................... 8-93
8-21.3(12) Steel Sign Posts....................................................................... 8-93
8-21.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 8-93
8-21.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 8-94

Contents
8-22 Pavement Marking.................................................................................................... 8-95

8-22.1 Description.................................................................................................. 8-95
8-22.2 Materials..................................................................................................... 8-95
8-22.3(1) Preliminary Spotting............................................................... 8-95
8-22.3(2) Preparation of Roadway Surfaces........................................... 8-95
8-22.3(3) Marking Application............................................................... 8-96
8-22.3(4) Tolerances for Lines................................................................ 8-99
8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions........................................................... 8-99
8-22.3(6) Removal of Pavement Markings............................................. 8-99
8-22.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 8-100
8-22.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 8-101
8-23 Temporary Pavement Markings............................................................................ 8-103
8-23.1 Description................................................................................................ 8-103
8-23.2 Materials................................................................................................... 8-103
8-23.3(1) General.................................................................................. 8-103
8-23.3(2) Preliminary Spotting............................................................. 8-103
8-23.3(3) Preparation of Roadway Surface.......................................... 8-103
8-23.3(4) Pavement Marking Application............................................ 8-103
8-23.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 8-104
8-23.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 8-105
8-24 Rock and Gravity Block Wall and Gabion Cribbing.......................................... 8-106
8-24.1 Description................................................................................................ 8-106
8-24.2 Materials................................................................................................... 8-106
8-24.3(1) Rock Wall.............................................................................. 8-106
8-24.3(2) Gravity Block Wall............................................................... 8-107
8-24.3(3) Gabion Cribbing.................................................................... 8-107
8-24.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 8-109
8-24.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 8-109
8-25 Glare Screen............................................................................................................ 8-110
8-25.1 Description................................................................................................ 8-110
8-25.2 Materials................................................................................................... 8-110
8-25.3(1) Glare Screen Fabric............................................................... 8-110
8-25.3(2) Slats....................................................................................... 8-110
8-25.3(3) Posts...................................................................................... 8-110
8-25.3(4) Tension Wire......................................................................... 8-110
8-25.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 8-110
8-25.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 8-110
8-26 Vacant........................................................................................................................8-111
8-27 Vacant....................................................................................................................... 8-112
8-28 Vacant....................................................................................................................... 8-113

Contents
8-29 Wire Mesh Slope Protection................................................................................... 8-114

8-29.1 Description................................................................................................ 8-114
8-29.2 Materials................................................................................................... 8-114
8-29.3(1) Submittals............................................................................. 8-114
8-29.3(2) Anchors................................................................................. 8-114
8-29.3(3) Wire Rope............................................................................. 8-114
8-29.3(4) Wire Mesh............................................................................. 8-114
8-29.4 Measurement............................................................................................. 8-115
8-29.5 Payment..................................................................................................... 8-115

Contents
Division 9 Materials..............................................................................................9-1
9-00 Definitions and Tests................................................................................................... 9-1
9-00.1 Fracture......................................................................................................... 9-1
9-00.2 Wood Waste.................................................................................................. 9-1
9-00.3 Test for Mass of Galvanizing........................................................................ 9-1
9-00.4 Sieves for Testing Purposes.......................................................................... 9-1
9-00.5 Dust Ratio..................................................................................................... 9-1
9-00.6 Sand/Silt Ratio.............................................................................................. 9-1
9-00.7 Galvanized Hardware, AASHTO M232....................................................... 9-1
9-00.8 Sand Equivalent............................................................................................ 9-1
9-00.9 Field Test Procedures.................................................................................... 9-1
9-01 Cement......................................................................................................................... 9-2
9-01.1 Types of Cement........................................................................................... 9-2
9-01.2 Specifications................................................................................................ 9-2
9-01.2(1) Portland Cement........................................................................ 9-2
9-01.2(2) Rapid Hardening Hydraulic Cement......................................... 9-3
9-01.3 Tests and Acceptance.................................................................................... 9-3
9-01.4 Storage on the Work Site.............................................................................. 9-3
9-02 Bituminous Materials................................................................................................. 9-4
9-02.1 Asphalt Material, General............................................................................. 9-4
9-02.1(1) Vacant........................................................................................ 9-4
9-02.1(2) Vacant........................................................................................ 9-4
9-02.1(3) Vacant........................................................................................ 9-4
9-02.1(4) Performance Graded Asphalt Binder (PGAB).......................... 9-4
9-02.1(5) Vacant........................................................................................ 9-5
9-02.1(6) Cationic Emulsified Asphalt..................................................... 9-5
9-02.1(7) Vacant........................................................................................ 9-6
9-02.1(8) Flexible Bituminous Pavement Marker Adhesive.................... 9-6
9-02.1(9) Vacant........................................................................................ 9-6
9-02.2 Sampling and Acceptance............................................................................. 9-7
9-02.2(1) Certification of Shipment.......................................................... 9-7
9-02.2(2) Samples..................................................................................... 9-7
9-02.3 Temperature of Asphalt................................................................................. 9-7
9-02.4 Anti-Stripping Additive................................................................................ 9-7
9-02.5 Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) Additive........................................................... 9-7
9-03 Aggregates................................................................................................................... 9-8
9-03.1 Aggregates for Portland Cement Concrete................................................... 9-8
9-03.1(1) General Requirements............................................................... 9-8
9-03.1(2) Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete......................... 9-8
9-03.1(3) Vacant........................................................................................ 9-9
9-03.1(4) Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete................... 9-10
9-03.1(5) Combined Aggregate Gradation for Portland Cement
Concrete.................................................................................. 9-10
9-03.2 Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement Mortar.................................... 9-11
9-03.2(1) Grading for Surface Finishing Applications........................... 9-12
9-03.2(2) Grading for Masonry Mortar Applications............................. 9-12
9-03.3 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-12

Contents
9-03.4 Aggregate for Bituminous Surface Treatment............................................ 9-12

9-03.4(2) Grading and Quality................................................................ 9-12
9-03.5 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-13
9-03.6 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-13
9-03.7 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-13
9-03.8 Aggregates for Hot Mix Asphalt................................................................. 9-13
9-03.8(2) HMA Test Requirements......................................................... 9-14
9-03.8(3) Grading................................................................................... 9-15
9-03.8(4) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-15
9-03.8(5) Mineral Filler.......................................................................... 9-15
9-03.8(6) HMA Proportions of Materials............................................... 9-16
9-03.8(7) HMA Tolerances and Adjustments......................................... 9-16
9-03.9 Aggregates for Ballast and Crushed Surfacing........................................... 9-17
9-03.9(1) Ballast..................................................................................... 9-17
9-03.9(2) Permeable Ballast.................................................................... 9-17
9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing................................................................... 9-18
9-03.9(4) Maintenance Rock.................................................................. 9-18
9-03.10 Aggregate for Gravel Base.......................................................................... 9-19
9-03.11 Streambed Aggregates................................................................................ 9-19
9-03.11(1) Streambed Sediment............................................................... 9-19
9-03.11(2) Streambed Cobbles................................................................. 9-20
9-03.11(3) Streambed Boulders................................................................ 9-20
9-03.11(4) Habitat Boulders..................................................................... 9-21
9-03.12 Gravel Backfill............................................................................................ 9-21
9-03.12(1) Gravel Backfill for Foundations.............................................. 9-21
9-03.12(2) Gravel Backfill for Walls........................................................ 9-21
9-03.12(3) Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding.................................. 9-22
9-03.12(4) Gravel Backfill for Drains....................................................... 9-22
9-03.12(5) Gravel Backfill for Drywells................................................... 9-22
9-03.13 Backfill for Sand Drains.............................................................................. 9-23
9-03.13(1) Sand Drainage Blanket........................................................... 9-23
9-03.14 Borrow........................................................................................................ 9-23
9-03.14(1) Gravel Borrow........................................................................ 9-23
9-03.14(2) Select Borrow.......................................................................... 9-24
9-03.14(3) Common Borrow.................................................................... 9-24
9-03.14(4) Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Wall................................ 9-24
9-03.15 Native Material for Trench Backfill............................................................ 9-25
9-03.16 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-25
9-03.17 Foundation Material Class A and Class B................................................... 9-25
9-03.18 Foundation Material Class C...................................................................... 9-25
9-03.19 Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill......................................................... 9-25
9-03.20 Test Methods for Aggregates...................................................................... 9-26
9-03.21 Recycled Material....................................................................................... 9-26

Contents
9-04 Joint and Crack Sealing Materials.......................................................................... 9-29

9-04.1 Premolded Joint Fillers............................................................................... 9-29
9-04.1(1) Asphalt Filler for Contraction and Longitudinal Joints
in Concrete Pavements............................................................ 9-29
9-04.1(2) Premolded Joint Filler for Expansion Joints........................... 9-29
9-04.1(3) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-29
9-04.1(4) Elastomeric Expansion Joint Seals......................................... 9-29
9-04.2 Joint Sealants.............................................................................................. 9-29
9-04.2(1) Hot Poured Joint Sealants....................................................... 9-29
9-04.2(2) Poured Rubber Joint Sealer..................................................... 9-30
9-04.2(3) Polyurethane Sealant............................................................... 9-30
9-04.3 Joint Mortar................................................................................................. 9-30
9-04.4 Pipe Joint Gaskets....................................................................................... 9-31
9-04.4(1) Rubber Gaskets for Concrete Pipes and Precast Manholes.... 9-31
9-04.4(2) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-31
9-04.4(3) Gaskets for Aluminum or Steel Culvert or Storm Sewer Pipe. 9-31
9-04.4(4) Rubber Gaskets for Aluminum or Steel Drain Pipe................ 9-31
9-04.4(5) Protection and Storage............................................................ 9-31
9-04.5 Flexible Plastic Gaskets.............................................................................. 9-31
9-04.6 Expanded Polystyrene................................................................................. 9-31
9-04.7 Expanded Rubber........................................................................................ 9-32
9-04.8 Flexible Elastomeric Seals.......................................................................... 9-32
9-04.9 Solvent Cements......................................................................................... 9-32
9-04.10 Butyl Rubber and Nitrile Rubber................................................................ 9-32
9-04.11 Butyl Rubber Sealant................................................................................. 9-32
9-04.12 External Sealing Band................................................................................ 9-32
9-05 Drainage Structures and Culverts........................................................................... 9-33
9-05.0 Acceptance and Approval of Drainage Structures, and Culverts................ 9-33
9-05.1 Drain Pipe................................................................................................... 9-33
9-05.1(1) Concrete Drain Pipe................................................................ 9-33
9-05.1(2) Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum Coated
(Aluminized) Corrugated Iron or Steel Drain Pipe................. 9-33
9-05.1(3) Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Drain Pipe................................ 9-33
9-05.1(4) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-33
9-05.1(5) PVC Drain Pipe, Couplings, and Fittings............................... 9-33
9-05.1(6) Corrugated Polyethylene Drain Pipe, Couplings, and
Fittings (Up to 10 inch) .......................................................... 9-33
9-05.1(7) Corrugated Polyethylene Drain Pipe, Couplings, and
Fittings (12 Inch Through 60 inch)......................................... 9-34
9-05.2 Underdrain Pipe.......................................................................................... 9-34
9-05.2(1) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-34
9-05.2(2) Perforated Concrete Underdrain Pipe..................................... 9-34
9-05.2(3) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-34
9-05.2(4) Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum Coated
(Aluminized) Corrugated Iron or Steel Underdrain Pipe........ 9-34
9-05.2(5) Perforated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Underdrain Pipe...... 9-34
9-05.2(6) Perforated PVC Underdrain Pipe............................................ 9-35
9-05.2(7) Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene Underdrain Pipe
(Up to 10 Inch)........................................................................ 9-35
9-05.2(8) Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene Underdrain Pipe
(12-Inch Through 60‑Inch Diameter Maximum),
Couplings, and Fittings........................................................... 9-35
Contents
9-05.3 Concrete Culvert Pipe................................................................................. 9-35

9-05.3(1) Plain Concrete Culvert Pipe.................................................... 9-35
9-05.3(2) Reinforced Concrete Culvert Pipe.......................................... 9-36
9-05.3(3) Beveled Concrete End Sections.............................................. 9-37
9-05.4 Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch................................................................ 9-37
9-05.4(1) Elliptical Fabrication............................................................... 9-37
9-05.4(2) Mitered Ends........................................................................... 9-37
9-05.4(3) Protective Treatment............................................................... 9-37
9-05.4(4) Asphalt Coatings and Paved Inverts....................................... 9-37
9-05.4(5) Polymer Protective Coating.................................................... 9-38
9-05.4(6) Spun Asphalt Lining............................................................... 9-38
9-05.4(7) Coupling Bands....................................................................... 9-38
9-05.4(8) Steel Nestable Pipe................................................................. 9-39
9-05.4(9) Steel End Sections................................................................... 9-39
9-05.5 Aluminum Culvert Pipe.............................................................................. 9-40
9-05.5(2) Mitered Ends........................................................................... 9-40
9-05.5(3) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-40
9-05.5(4) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-40
9-05.5(5) Coupling Bands....................................................................... 9-40
9-05.5(6) Aluminum End Sections......................................................... 9-40
9-05.6 Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, Arch, and Underpass.............................. 9-40
9-05.6(1) General.................................................................................... 9-40
9-05.6(2) Fabrication.............................................................................. 9-40
9-05.6(4) Structural Plate Pipe Arch....................................................... 9-41
9-05.6(5) Structural Plate Arch............................................................... 9-41
9-05.6(6) Structural Plate Underpass...................................................... 9-41
9-05.6(7) Concrete.................................................................................. 9-41
9-05.6(8) Plates....................................................................................... 9-41
9-05.7 Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe........................................................................ 9-41
9-05.7(1) Plain Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe........................................... 9-41
9-05.7(2) Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe................................. 9-41
9-05.7(3) Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints.......................................... 9-42
9-05.7(4) Testing Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints............................. 9-42
9-05.8 Vitrified Clay Sewer Pipe............................................................................ 9-42
9-05.9 Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe............................................................. 9-42
9-05.9(1) Continuous Lock Seam Pipe................................................... 9-43
9-05.9(2) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-43
9-05.9(3) Coupling Bands....................................................................... 9-43
9-05.10 Steel Storm Sewer Pipe............................................................................... 9-43
9-05.10(1) Coupling Bands....................................................................... 9-43
9-05.10(2) Basis for Acceptance............................................................... 9-44
9-05.11 Aluminum Storm Sewer Pipe..................................................................... 9-44
9-05.11(1) Coupling Bands....................................................................... 9-44
9-05.11(2) Basis for Acceptance............................................................... 9-44
9-05.12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe.................................................................. 9-44
9-05.12(1) Solid Wall PVC Culvert Pipe, Solid Wall PVC Storm
Sewer Pipe, and Solid Wall PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe........... 9-44
9-05.12(2) Profile Wall PVC Culvert Pipe, Profile Wall PVC Storm
Sewer Pipe, and Profile Wall PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe........ 9-44

Contents
9-05.13 Ductile Iron Sewer Pipe.............................................................................. 9-45

9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe....................................................................... 9-45
9-05.15 Metal Castings............................................................................................ 9-45
9-05.15(1) Manhole Ring and Cover........................................................ 9-46
9-05.15(2) Metal Frame, Grate, and Solid Metal Cover for Catch
Basins or Inlets........................................................................ 9-46
9-05.15(3) Cast Metal Inlets..................................................................... 9-46
9-05.16 Grate Inlets and Drop Inlets........................................................................ 9-46
9-05.17 Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe.................................................... 9-47
9-05.17(1) Continuous Lock Seam Pipe................................................... 9-47
9-05.17(2) Coupling Bands....................................................................... 9-47
9-05.18 Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe....................................................................... 9-47
9-05.19 Corrugated Polyethylene Culvert Pipe, Couplings, and Fittings................ 9-47
9-05.20 Corrugated Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe, Couplings, and Fittings....... 9-48
9-05.21 Steel Rib Reinforced Polyethylene Culvert Pipe........................................ 9-48
9-05.22 Steel Rib Reinforced Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe............................... 9-48
9-05.23 High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe................................................... 9-49
9-05.24 Polypropylene Culvert Pipe, Polypropylene Storm Sewer Pipe,
and Polypropylene Sanitary Sewer Pipe..................................................... 9-49
9-05.24(1) Polypropylene Culvert Pipe and Storm Sewer Pipe............... 9-50
9-05.24(2) Polypropylene Sanitary Sewer Pipe........................................ 9-50
9-05.30 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-50
9-05.40 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-50
9-05.50 Precast Concrete Drainage Structures......................................................... 9-50
9-05.50(1) Fabrication Tolerances and Requirements.............................. 9-50
9-05.50(2) Manholes................................................................................. 9-51
9-05.50(3) Precast Concrete Catch Basins................................................ 9-51
9-05.50(4) Precast Concrete Inlets............................................................ 9-51
9-05.50(5) Precast Concrete Drywells...................................................... 9-51
9-05.50(6) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-51
9-05.50(7) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-51
9-05.50(8) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-51
9-05.50(9) Synthetic Fibers for Precast Units........................................... 9-51
9-05.50(10) Synthetic Structural Fibers for Precast Units.......................... 9-52
9-06 Structural Steel and Related Materials................................................................... 9-53
9-06.1 Structural Carbon Steel............................................................................... 9-53
9-06.2 Structural Low Alloy Steel.......................................................................... 9-53
9-06.3 Structural High-Strength Steel.................................................................... 9-53
9-06.4 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-53
9-06.5 Bolts............................................................................................................ 9-53
9-06.5(1) Unfinished Bolts..................................................................... 9-53
9-06.5(2) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-53
9-06.5(3) High-Strength Bolts................................................................ 9-53
9-06.5(4) Anchor Bolts........................................................................... 9-55
9-06.6 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-55
9-06.7 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-55
9-06.8 Steel Castings.............................................................................................. 9-55
9-06.9 Gray Iron Castings...................................................................................... 9-55
9-06.10 Malleable Iron Castings.............................................................................. 9-55

Contents
9-06.11 Steel Forgings and Steel Shafting............................................................... 9-55

9-06.12 Bronze Castings.......................................................................................... 9-55
9-06.13 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-55
9-06.14 Ductile Iron Castings.................................................................................. 9-55
9-06.15 Welded Shear Connectors........................................................................... 9-55
9-06.16 Roadside Sign Structures............................................................................ 9-56
9-06.17 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-57
9-06.18 Metal Bridge Railing................................................................................... 9-57
9-06.19 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-57
9-06.20 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-57
9-06.21 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-57
9-06.22 Bolts, Washers, and Other Hardware.......................................................... 9-57
9-07 Reinforcing Steel....................................................................................................... 9-58
9-07.1 General........................................................................................................ 9-58
9-07.1(1) Acceptance by Manufacturer’s Certification.......................... 9-58
9-07.1(2) Bending................................................................................... 9-58
9-07.1(3) Lengths.................................................................................... 9-59
9-07.1(4) Vacant...................................................................................... 9-59
9-07.2 Deformed Steel Bars................................................................................... 9-59
9-07.2(1) Headed Steel Reinforcing Bar................................................ 9-59
9-07.3 Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars........................................................ 9-59
9-07.4 Plain Steel Bars........................................................................................... 9-60
9-07.5 Dowel Bars (for Cement Concrete Pavement)............................................ 9-60
9-07.5(1) Epoxy-Coated Dowel Bars (for Cement Concrete
Pavement Rehabilitation)........................................................ 9-60
9-07.5(2) Corrosion Resistant Dowel Bars (for Cement Concrete
Pavement and Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation)... 9-60
9-07.6 Tie Bars (for Cement Concrete Pavement)................................................. 9-61
9-07.7 Wire Mesh................................................................................................... 9-61
9-07.8 Deformed Wire............................................................................................ 9-61
9-07.9 Cold Drawn Wire........................................................................................ 9-61
9-07.10 Prestressing Reinforcement Strand............................................................. 9-61
9-07.11 Prestressing Reinforcement Bar.................................................................. 9-62
9-08 Paints and Related Materials................................................................................... 9-63
9-08.1 Paint............................................................................................................ 9-63
9-08.1(1) Description.............................................................................. 9-63
9-08.1(2) Paint Types.............................................................................. 9-63
9-08.1(3) Working Properties................................................................. 9-64
9-08.1(4) Storage Properties................................................................... 9-64
9-08.1(5) Fineness of Grinding............................................................... 9-64
9-08.1(6) Test Methods........................................................................... 9-65
9-08.1(7) Acceptance.............................................................................. 9-65
9-08.1(8) Standard Colors....................................................................... 9-65
9-08.2 Powder Coating Materials for Coating Galvanized Surfaces..................... 9-65
9-08.3 Pigmented Sealer Materials for Coating of Concrete Surfaces.................. 9-66
9-08.4 Abrasive Blast Materials............................................................................. 9-66
9-08.4(1) Abrasive Blast Media.............................................................. 9-66
9-08.4(2) Lead Abatement Additive....................................................... 9-66

Contents
9-08.5 Surface Cleaning Materials......................................................................... 9-67

9-08.5(1) Bird Guano Treatment............................................................. 9-67
9-08.5(2) Fungicide Treatment............................................................... 9-67
9-08.5(3) Water....................................................................................... 9-67
9-08.6 Filter Fabric................................................................................................. 9-67
9-08.7 Single-Component Urethane Sealant.......................................................... 9-67
9-08.8 Foam Backer Rod....................................................................................... 9-67
9-09 Timber and Lumber................................................................................................. 9-68
9-09.1 General Requirements................................................................................. 9-68
9-09.2 Grade Requirements.................................................................................... 9-68
9-09.2(1) Structures................................................................................ 9-68
9-09.2(2) Guardrail Posts and Blocks..................................................... 9-69
9-09.2(3) Signposts, Mileposts, Sawed Fence Posts, and Mailbox Posts.. 9-69
9-09.3 Preservative Treatment................................................................................ 9-69
9-10 Piling.......................................................................................................................... 9-71
9-10.1 Timber Piling.............................................................................................. 9-71
9-10.1(1) Untreated Piling...................................................................... 9-71
9-10.1(2) Creosote Treated Piling........................................................... 9-71
9-10.1(3) Timber Composite Piling........................................................ 9-71
9-10.1(4) Peeling..................................................................................... 9-72
9-10.2 Concrete Piling............................................................................................ 9-72
9-10.2(1) Concrete.................................................................................. 9-72
9-10.2(2) Reinforcement......................................................................... 9-72
9-10.3 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piling..................................................................... 9-72
9-10.4 Steel Pile Tips and Shoes............................................................................ 9-72
9-10.5 Steel Piling.................................................................................................. 9-72
9-11 Waterproof Membrane............................................................................................. 9-74
9-11.1 Asphalt for Waterproofing.......................................................................... 9-74
9-11.2 Primer for Waterproof Membrane............................................................... 9-74
9-12 Masonry Units........................................................................................................... 9-75
9-12.1 Concrete Blocks.......................................................................................... 9-75
9-12.2 Concrete Brick............................................................................................ 9-75
9-13 Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock for Erosion and
Scour Protection and Rock Walls............................................................................ 9-76
9-13.1 Riprap and Quarry Spalls............................................................................ 9-76
9-13.1(1) General.................................................................................... 9-76
9-13.1(2) Heavy Loose Riprap............................................................... 9-76
9-13.1(3) Light Loose Riprap................................................................. 9-76
9-13.1(4) Hand Placed Riprap................................................................ 9-76
9-13.1(5) Quarry Spalls.......................................................................... 9-76
9-13.2 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-77
9-13.3 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-77
9-13.4 Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection...................................................... 9-77
9-13.4(1) Suitable Shape of Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection..... 9-77
9-13.4(2) Grading Requirements of Rock for Erosion and
Scour Protection...................................................................... 9-77

Contents
9-13.5 Concrete Slope Protection........................................................................... 9-78

9-13.5(1) Semi-Open Concrete Masonry Units Slope Protection.......... 9-78
9-13.5(2) Poured Portland Cement Concrete Slope Protection.............. 9-78
9-13.5(3) Pneumatically Placed Portland Cement Concrete
Slope Protection...................................................................... 9-78
9-13.6 Vacant.......................................................................................................... 9-78
9-13.7 Rock for Rock Wall..................................................................................... 9-78
9-13.7(1) Rock for Rock Walls and Chinking Material.......................... 9-78
9-13.7(2) Backfill for Rock Wall............................................................ 9-78
9-14 Erosion Control and Roadside Planting................................................................. 9-79
9-14.1 Topsoil......................................................................................................... 9-79
9-14.1(1) Topsoil Type A........................................................................ 9-79
9-14.1(2) Topsoil Type B........................................................................ 9-79
9-14.1(3) Topsoil Type C........................................................................ 9-79
9-14.2 Seed............................................................................................................. 9-79
9-14.3 Fertilizer...................................................................................................... 9-79
9-14.4 Mulch and Amendments............................................................................. 9-80
9-14.4(1) Straw....................................................................................... 9-80
9-14.4(2) Hydraulically Applied Erosion Control Products (HECPs).... 9-80
9-14.4(3) Bark or Wood Chip Mulch...................................................... 9-83
9-14.4(4) Wood Strand Mulch................................................................ 9-83
9-14.4(5) Agricultural Grade Dolomite Lime......................................... 9-83
9-14.4(6) Agricultural Grade Gypsum.................................................... 9-83
9-14.4(7) Tackifier.................................................................................. 9-83
9-14.4(8) Compost.................................................................................. 9-84
9-14.4(9) Horticultural Grade Perlite...................................................... 9-86
9-14.5 Erosion Control Devices............................................................................. 9-86
9-14.5(1) Polyacrylamide (PAM)........................................................... 9-86
9-14.5(2) Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket................................. 9-86
9-14.5(3) Plastic Covering...................................................................... 9-87
9-14.5(4) Check Dams............................................................................ 9-87
9-14.5(5) Wattles..................................................................................... 9-88
9-14.5(6) Compost Socks ...................................................................... 9-88
9-14.5(7) Coir Log.................................................................................. 9-88
9-14.5(8) High Visibility Fencing........................................................... 9-89
9-14.5(9) High Visibility Silt Fence........................................................ 9-89
9-14.6 Plant Materials............................................................................................ 9-89
9-14.6(1) Description.............................................................................. 9-89
9-14.6(2) Quality..................................................................................... 9-89
9-14.6(3) Handling and Shipping........................................................... 9-91
9-14.6(4) Tagging................................................................................... 9-91
9-14.6(5) Inspection................................................................................ 9-91
9-14.6(6) Substitution of Plants.............................................................. 9-91
9-14.6(7) Temporary Storage.................................................................. 9-92
9-14.6(8) Sod.......................................................................................... 9-92
9-14.7 Stakes, Guys, and Wrapping....................................................................... 9-92

Contents
9-15 Irrigation System...................................................................................................... 9-93

9-15.1 Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings........................................................................... 9-93
9-15.1(1) Galvanized Pipe and Fittings.................................................. 9-93
9-15.1(2) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings...................................... 9-93
9-15.1(3) Polyethylene Pipe.................................................................... 9-93
9-15.2 Drip Tubing................................................................................................. 9-93
9-15.3 Automatic Controllers................................................................................. 9-94
9-15.4 Irrigation Heads.......................................................................................... 9-94
9-15.5 Valve Boxes................................................................................................ 9-94
9-15.6 Gate Valves................................................................................................. 9-94
9-15.7 Control Valves............................................................................................. 9-95
9-15.7(1) Manual Control Valves........................................................... 9-95
9-15.7(2) Automatic Control Valves....................................................... 9-95
9-15.7(3) Automatic Control Valves With Pressure Regulator............... 9-95
9-15.8 Quick Coupling Equipment........................................................................ 9-95
9-15.9 Drain Valves................................................................................................ 9-95
9-15.10 Hose Bibs.................................................................................................... 9-96
9-15.11 Cross Connection Control Devices............................................................. 9-96
9-15.12 Check Valves............................................................................................... 9-96
9-15.13 Pressure Regulating Valves......................................................................... 9-96
9-15.14 Three-Way Valves....................................................................................... 9-96
9-15.15 Flow Control Valves................................................................................... 9-96
9-15.16 Air Relief Valve.......................................................................................... 9-96
9-15.17 Electrical Wire and Splices......................................................................... 9-96
9-15.18 Detectable Marking Tape............................................................................ 9-97
9-15.19 Wye Strainers.............................................................................................. 9-97
9-16 Fence and Guardrail................................................................................................. 9-98
9-16.1 Chain Link Fence and Gates....................................................................... 9-98
9-16.1(1) General.................................................................................... 9-98
9-16.2 Wire Fence and Gates................................................................................. 9-99
9-16.2(1) General.................................................................................... 9-99
9-16.3 Beam Guardrail......................................................................................... 9-101
9-16.3(1) Rail Element.......................................................................... 9-101
9-16.3(2) Posts and Blocks................................................................... 9-101
9-16.3(3) Galvanizing........................................................................... 9-102
9-16.3(4) Hardware............................................................................... 9-102
9-16.3(5) Anchors................................................................................. 9-102
9-16.3(6) Inspection and Acceptance.................................................... 9-103
9-16.4 Wire Mesh Slope Protection..................................................................... 9-103
9-16.4(1) General.................................................................................. 9-103
9-16.4(2) Wire Mesh............................................................................. 9-103
9-16.4(3) Wire Rope............................................................................. 9-103
9-16.4(4) Hardware............................................................................... 9-103
9-16.4(5) Fasteners and Lacing Wire.................................................... 9-103
9-16.4(6) Ground Anchors.................................................................... 9-103
9-16.5 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-104

Contents
9-16.6 Glare Screen.............................................................................................. 9-104

9-16.6(1) General.................................................................................. 9-104
9-16.6(2) Glare Screen Fabric............................................................... 9-104
9-16.6(3) Posts...................................................................................... 9-104
9-16.6(4) Tension Wire......................................................................... 9-105
9-16.6(5) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-105
9-16.6(6) Tension Wire Attachments.................................................... 9-105
9-16.6(7) Slats....................................................................................... 9-105
9-16.6(8) Fittings.................................................................................. 9-105
9-16.6(9) Fabric Bands and Stretcher Bars........................................... 9-105
9-16.6(10) Tie Wire and Hog Rings........................................................ 9-105
9-17 Flexible Guide Posts................................................................................................ 9-106
9-17.1 General...................................................................................................... 9-106
9-17.1(1) Dimensions........................................................................... 9-106
9-17.1(2) Reflective Sheeting............................................................... 9-107
9-17.2 Ultraviolet Resistance Test Procedure (Laboratory Test)......................... 9-107
9-17.2(1) Acceptance............................................................................ 9-107
9-17.3 Field Impact Test Procedure..................................................................... 9-107
9-17.3(1) Test Observations.................................................................. 9-108
9-17.3(2) Acceptance............................................................................ 9-108
9-17.4 Pre-approval.............................................................................................. 9-108
9-18 Precast Traffic Curb............................................................................................... 9-109
9-18.1 Precast Traffic Curb.................................................................................. 9-109
9-18.1(1) Aggregates and Proportioning.............................................. 9-109
9-18.1(2) Mixing................................................................................... 9-109
9-18.1(3) Forms.................................................................................... 9-109
9-18.1(4) Placing Concrete................................................................... 9-109
9-18.1(5) Removal of Forms................................................................. 9-110
9-18.1(6) Curing Concrete.................................................................... 9-110
9-18.1(7) Finish.................................................................................... 9-110
9-18.1(8) Surface Treatment................................................................. 9-110
9-18.1(9) Dimensions and Shape.......................................................... 9-110
9-18.1(10) Curb Lengths......................................................................... 9-110
9-18.1(11) Defective Curb...................................................................... 9-110
9-18.1(12) Repairing Curb.......................................................................9-111
9-18.1(13) Identification Marking...........................................................9-111
9-18.1(14) Shipping.................................................................................9-111
9-18.1(15) Sampling and Inspection........................................................9-111
9-18.2 Vacant.........................................................................................................9-111
9-18.3 Vacant.........................................................................................................9-111
9-18.4 Water Repellent Compound...................................................................... 9-112
9-18.5 Sodium Metasilicate.................................................................................. 9-112
9-19 Vacant....................................................................................................................... 9-113
9-20 Concrete Patching Material, Grout, and Mortar................................................. 9-114
9-20.1 Patching Material...................................................................................... 9-114
9-20.2 Specifications............................................................................................ 9-114
9-20.2(1) Patching Mortar.................................................................... 9-114
9-20.2(2) Patching Mortar Extended With Aggregate.......................... 9-114
9-20.2(3) Aggregate.............................................................................. 9-114
9-20.2(4) Water..................................................................................... 9-114

Contents
9-20.3 Grout......................................................................................................... 9-115

9-20.3(1) Grout Type 1 for Post-Tensioning Applications................... 9-115
9-20.3(2) Grout Type 2 for Nonshrink Applications............................. 9-115
9-20.3(3) Grout Type 3 for Unconfined Bearing Pad Applications...... 9-115
9-20.3(4) Grout Type 4 for Multipurpose Applications........................ 9-115
9-20.4 Mortar....................................................................................................... 9-115
9-20.4(1) Fine Aggregate for Mortar.................................................... 9-115
9-20.4(2) Mortar Type 1 for Concrete Surface Finish.......................... 9-115
9-20.4(3) Mortar Type 2 for Masonry Applications............................. 9-115
9-20.4(4) Mortar Type 3 for Concrete Repair....................................... 9-116
9-20.5 Bridge Deck Repair Material.................................................................... 9-116
9-21 Raised Pavement Markers (RPM)........................................................................ 9-117
9-21.1 Raised Pavement Markers Type 1............................................................. 9-117
9-21.1(1) Physical and Chemical Properties......................................... 9-117
9-21.2(1) Physical Properties................................................................ 9-117
9-21.2(2) Optical Requirements............................................................ 9-117
9-21.2(3) Strength Requirements.......................................................... 9-118
9-22 Monument Cases..................................................................................................... 9-119
9-22.1 Monument Cases, Covers, and Risers....................................................... 9-119
9-23 Concrete Curing Materials and Admixtures........................................................ 9-120
9-23.1 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete........................................................ 9-120
9-23.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Concrete Curing Compounds....................... 9-120
9-23.3 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-120
9-23.4 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-120
9-23.5 Burlap Cloth.............................................................................................. 9-120
9-23.6 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.......................................................... 9-120
9-23.6(1) Air-Entraining Admixtures................................................... 9-120
9-23.6(2) Type A Water-Reducing Admixtures.................................... 9-120
9-23.6(3) Type B Retarding Admixtures.............................................. 9-120
9-23.6(4) Type C Accelerating Admixtures.......................................... 9-120
9-23.6(5) Type D Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures............ 9-120
9-23.6(6) Type E Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures......... 9-120
9-23.6(7) Type F Water-Reducing, High Range Admixtures............... 9-120
9-23.6(8) Type G Water-Reducing, High Range, and Retarding
Admixtures............................................................................ 9-121
9-23.6(9) Type S Specific Performance Admixtures............................ 9-121
9-23.7 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-121
9-23.8 Waterproofing........................................................................................... 9-121
9-23.9 Fly Ash...................................................................................................... 9-121
9-23.9(1) Tests and Acceptance............................................................ 9-121
9-23.10 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag.................................................... 9-121
9-23.10(1) Tests and Acceptance............................................................ 9-122
9-23.11 Microsilica Fume...................................................................................... 9-122
9-23.12 Natural Pozzolan....................................................................................... 9-122
9-23.13 Blended Supplementary Cementitious Material....................................... 9-122

Contents
9-24 Plastic Waterstop.................................................................................................... 9-123

9-24.1 Material..................................................................................................... 9-123
9-24.1(1) Tests of Material................................................................... 9-123
9-25 Water........................................................................................................................ 9-124
9-25.1 Water for Concrete.................................................................................... 9-124
9-25.2 Water for Plants......................................................................................... 9-124
9-26 Epoxy Resins........................................................................................................... 9-125
9-26.1 Epoxy Bonding Agents............................................................................. 9-125
9-26.1(1) General.................................................................................. 9-125
9-26.1(2) Packaging and Marking........................................................ 9-125
9-26.1(3) Certification........................................................................... 9-125
9-26.1(4) Rejection............................................................................... 9-125
9-26.1(5) Acceptance............................................................................ 9-125
9-26.2 Epoxy Adhesive for Lane Markers........................................................... 9-126
9-26.2(1) General.................................................................................. 9-126
9-26.2(3) Certification........................................................................... 9-126
9-26.2(4) Rejection............................................................................... 9-126
9-26.2(5) Acceptance............................................................................ 9-126
9-26.3 Epoxy Grout/Mortar/Concrete.................................................................. 9-126
9-26.3(1) General.................................................................................. 9-126
9-26.3(3) Certification........................................................................... 9-126
9-26.3(4) Rejection............................................................................... 9-127
9-26.3(5) Acceptance............................................................................ 9-127
9-27 Cribbing................................................................................................................... 9-128
9-27.1 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-128
9-27.2 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-128
9-27.3 Gabion Cribbing........................................................................................ 9-128
9-27.3(1) Gabion Fabric........................................................................ 9-128
9-27.3(2) Gabion Baskets..................................................................... 9-128
9-27.3(3) Gabion Mattresses................................................................. 9-129
9-27.3(4) Fasteners for Basket Assembly............................................. 9-129
9-27.3(5) Nonraveling Construction..................................................... 9-129
9-27.3(6) Stone..................................................................................... 9-130
9-28 Signing Materials and Fabrication........................................................................ 9-131
9-28.1 General...................................................................................................... 9-131
9-28.2 Manufacturer’s Identification and Date.................................................... 9-131
9-28.3 Corner Radius........................................................................................... 9-131
9-28.4 Extruded Windbeams and “Z” Bar........................................................... 9-131
9-28.5 Letter and Spacing Formula...................................................................... 9-131
9-28.6 Destination Sign Messages....................................................................... 9-131
9-28.7 Process Colors........................................................................................... 9-132
9-28.8 Sheet Aluminum Signs.............................................................................. 9-132
9-28.9 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Signs.......................................................... 9-132
9-28.9(1) Mechanical Properties........................................................... 9-133
9-28.9(2) Physical Properties................................................................ 9-133

Contents
9-28.10 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-133

9-28.11 Hardware................................................................................................... 9-134
9-28.12 Reflective Sheeting................................................................................... 9-134
9-28.12(1) Application............................................................................ 9-137
9-28.12(2) Edge Treatment..................................................................... 9-137
9-28.12(3) Splices and Color Matching.................................................. 9-138
9-28.13 Demountable Prismatic Reflectorized Message and Borders................... 9-138
9-28.14 Sign Support Structures............................................................................ 9-138
9-28.14(1) Timber Sign Posts................................................................. 9-138
9-28.14(2) Steel Structures and Posts..................................................... 9-138
9-28.14(3) Aluminum Structures............................................................ 9-139
9-28.15 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-139
9-29 Illumination, Signal, Electrical.............................................................................. 9-140
9-29.1 Conduit, Innerduct, and Outerduct............................................................ 9-140
9-29.1(1) Rigid Metal Conduit, Galvanized Steel Outerduct,
and Fittings........................................................................... 9-140
9-29.1(2) Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings and Appurtenances................. 9-140
9-29.1(3) Flexible Metal Conduit......................................................... 9-141
9-29.1(4) Non-Metallic Conduit........................................................... 9-141
9-29.1(5) Innerduct and Outerduct....................................................... 9-141
9-29.1(6) Detectable Underground Warning Tape................................ 9-143
9-29.1(7) Steel Casings......................................................................... 9-143
9-29.1(8) Drilling Fluid........................................................................ 9-143
9-29.1(9) Repair.................................................................................... 9-143
9-29.2 Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull Boxes......................................... 9-144
9-29.2(1) Junction Boxes...................................................................... 9-144
9-29.2(2) Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes................................................. 9-146
9-29.2(3) Structure Mounted Junction Box.......................................... 9-148
9-29.2(4) Cover Markings.................................................................... 9-148
9-29.2(5) Testing Requirements............................................................ 9-148
9-29.3 Fiber Optic Cable, Electrical Conductors, and Cable............................... 9-150
9-29.3(1) Fiber Optic Cable.................................................................. 9-150
9-29.3(2) Electrical Conductors and Cable........................................... 9-151
9-29.3(3) Wire Marking Sleeves........................................................... 9-153
9-29.4 Messenger Cable, Fittings......................................................................... 9-153
9-29.5 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-153
9-29.6 Light and Signal Standards....................................................................... 9-153
9-29.6(1) Steel Light and Signal Standards.......................................... 9-154
9-29.6(2) Slip Base Hardware............................................................... 9-154
9-29.6(3) Timber Light Standards, Timber Strain Poles, Timber
Service Supports................................................................... 9-154
9-29.6(4) Welding................................................................................. 9-154
9-29.6(5) Foundation Hardware............................................................ 9-155
9-29.7 Luminaire Fusing and Electrical Connections at Light Standard
Bases, Cantilever Bases, and Sign Bridge Bases...................................... 9-155
9-29.7(1) Unfused Quick-Disconnect Connector Kits ......................... 9-155
9-29.7(2) Fused Quick-Disconnect Kits............................................... 9-155
9-29.8 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-156
9-29.9 Ballast, Transformers................................................................................ 9-156
9-29.9(1) Ballast................................................................................... 9-156
9-29.9(2) Transformers......................................................................... 9-157

Contents
9-29.10 Luminaires................................................................................................ 9-157

9-29.10(1) Conventional Roadway Luminaires...................................... 9-158
9-29.10(2) Decorative Luminaires.......................................................... 9-158
9-29.10(3) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-159
9-29.10(4) Underdeck and Wall Mount Luminaires............................... 9-159
9-29.10(5) Sign Lighting Luminaires..................................................... 9-159
9-29.11 Control Equipment.................................................................................... 9-161
9-29.11(1) Time Clock Controls............................................................. 9-161
9-29.11(2) Photoelectric Controls........................................................... 9-161
9-29.12 Electrical Splice Materials........................................................................ 9-161
9-29.12(1) Illumination Circuit Splices.................................................. 9-161
9-29.12(2) Traffic Signal Splice Material............................................... 9-162
9-29.13 Control Cabinet Assemblies...................................................................... 9-162
9-29.13(1) Environmental, Performance, and Test Standards for
Solid-State Traffic Controller Assemblies............................ 9-162
9-29.13(3) Traffic Signal Controller....................................................... 9-163
9-29.13(4) Traffic-Signal Controller Software....................................... 9-163
9-29.13(5) Flashing Operations.............................................................. 9-166
9-29.13(6) Emergency Preemption......................................................... 9-166
9-29.13(7) Wiring Diagrams................................................................... 9-167
9-29.13(8) Generator Transfer Switch.................................................... 9-167
9-29.13(9) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-167
9-29.13(10) NEMA, Type 170E, 2070 Controllers and Cabinets............. 9-167
9-29.13(11) Traffic Data Accumulator and Ramp Meters........................ 9-174
9-29.13(12) ITS Cabinet........................................................................... 9-176
9-29.14 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-177
9-29.15 Flashing Beacon Control........................................................................... 9-177
9-29.16 Vehicular Signal Heads, Displays, and Housing....................................... 9-177
9-29.16(1) Optically Programmed, Adjustable Face, and
Programmable Array 12-Inch Traffic Signal......................... 9-178
9-29.16(2) Conventional Traffic Signal Heads....................................... 9-179
9-29.16(3) Polycarbonate Traffic Signal Heads...................................... 9-181
9-29.16(4) Traffic Signal Cover.............................................................. 9-181
9-29.17 Signal Head Mounting Brackets and Fittings........................................... 9-181
9-29.18 Vehicle Detector........................................................................................ 9-182
9-29.18(1) Induction Loop Detectors..................................................... 9-182
9-29.18(2) Magnetometer Detectors....................................................... 9-183
9-29.19 Pedestrian Push Buttons............................................................................ 9-183
9-29.20 Pedestrian Signals..................................................................................... 9-183
9-29.21 Flashing Beacon........................................................................................ 9-184
9-29.22 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-184
9-29.23 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-184
9-29.24 Service Cabinets........................................................................................ 9-184
9-29.24(1) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-185
9-29.24(2) Electrical Circuit Breakers and Contactors........................... 9-185
9-29.25 Amplifier, Transformer, and Terminal Cabinets....................................... 9-186

Contents
9-30 Water Distribution Materials................................................................................. 9-187

9-30.1 Pipe........................................................................................................... 9-187
9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe................................................................... 9-187
9-30.1(2) Polyethylene Encasement..................................................... 9-187
9-30.1(3) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-187
9-30.1(4) Steel Pipe.............................................................................. 9-187
9-30.1(5) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC).................................................... 9-187
9-30.1(6) Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe (4 inches and Over).......... 9-188
9-30.2 Fittings...................................................................................................... 9-188
9-30.2(1) Ductile Iron Pipe................................................................... 9-188
9-30.2(2) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-188
9-30.2(3) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-188
9-30.2(4) Steel Pipe.............................................................................. 9-188
9-30.2(5) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe............................................ 9-188
9-30.2(6) Restrained Joints................................................................... 9-189
9-30.2(7) Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe.............. 9-189
9-30.2(8) Restrained Flexible Couplings.............................................. 9-189
9-30.2(9) Grooved and Shouldered Joints............................................ 9-189
9-30.2(10) Polyethylene (PE) Pipe (4 inches and Over)......................... 9-189
9-30.2(11) Fabricated Steel Mechanical Slip-Type Expansion Joints.... 9-189
9-30.3 Valves........................................................................................................ 9-189
9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 to 16 inches)................................................. 9-189
9-30.3(2) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-189
9-30.3(3) Butterfly Valves..................................................................... 9-189
9-30.3(4) Valve Boxes.......................................................................... 9-190
9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts............................................................... 9-190
9-30.3(6) Valve Stem Extensions.......................................................... 9-190
9-30.3(7) Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum Valves...................... 9-190
9-30.3(8) Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly.................................... 9-190
9-30.4 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-190
9-30.5 Hydrants.................................................................................................... 9-190
9-30.5(1) End Connections................................................................... 9-190
9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions............................................................. 9-191
9-30.5(3) Hydrant Extensions............................................................... 9-191
9-30.5(4) Hydrant Restraints................................................................ 9-191
9-30.5(5) Traffic Flange........................................................................ 9-191
9-30.5(6) Guard Posts........................................................................... 9-191
9-30.6 Water Service Connections (2 inches and Smaller).................................. 9-191
9-30.6(1) Saddles.................................................................................. 9-191
9-30.6(2) Corporation Stops................................................................. 9-191
9-30.6(3) Service Pipes......................................................................... 9-192
9-30.6(4) Service Fittings..................................................................... 9-192
9-30.6(5) Meter Setters......................................................................... 9-192
9-30.6(6) Bronze Nipples and Fittings.................................................. 9-192
9-30.6(7) Meter Boxes.......................................................................... 9-192
9-31 Fabricated Bridge Bearing Assemblies................................................................. 9-193
9-31.1 Steel Plates and Bars................................................................................. 9-193
9-31.2 Stainless Steel........................................................................................... 9-193
9-31.3 Bearing Blocks and Keeper Rings............................................................ 9-193
9-31.4 Pin Assembly............................................................................................ 9-193
9-31.5 Welded Shear Connectors......................................................................... 9-193
9-31.6 Bolts, Nuts and Washers........................................................................... 9-193

Contents
9-31.7 Anchor Array Rods, Nuts and Washers.................................................... 9-193

9-31.8 Bearing Pads............................................................................................. 9-194
9-31.8(1) Elastomeric Pads................................................................... 9-194
9-31.8(2) Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)............................................ 9-194
9-31.8(3) Pre-formed Fabric Pad.......................................................... 9-194
9-31.9 Polyether Urethane.................................................................................... 9-195
9-31.10 Silicone Grease......................................................................................... 9-195
9-31.11 Epoxy Gel................................................................................................. 9-195
9-31.12 Resin Filler................................................................................................ 9-195
9-32 Mailbox Support..................................................................................................... 9-196
9-32.1 Steel Posts................................................................................................. 9-196
9-32.2 Bracket, Platform, and Anti-Twist Plate................................................... 9-196
9-32.3 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-196
9-32.4 Wood Posts................................................................................................ 9-196
9-32.5 Fasteners................................................................................................... 9-196
9-32.6 Snow Guard.............................................................................................. 9-196
9-32.7 Type 2 Mailbox Support........................................................................... 9-196
9-32.8 Concrete Base........................................................................................... 9-196
9-32.9 Steel Pipe.................................................................................................. 9-196
9-32.10 U-Channel Post......................................................................................... 9-196
9-33 Construction Geosynthetic..................................................................................... 9-197
9-33.1 Geosynthetic Material Requirements........................................................ 9-197
9-33.2 Geosynthetic Properties............................................................................ 9-198
9-33.2(1) Geotextile Properties............................................................. 9-198
9-33.2(2) Geotextile Properties for Retaining Walls and
Reinforced Slopes ................................................................ 9-200
9-33.2(3) Prefabricated Drainage Mat.................................................. 9-200
9-33.3 Aggregate Cushion of Permanent Erosion Control Geotextile................. 9-201
9-33.4 Geosynthetic Material Approval and Acceptance..................................... 9-201
9-33.4(1) Geosynthetic Material Approval........................................... 9-201
9-33.4(2) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-201
9-33.4(3) Acceptance Samples ............................................................ 9-201
9-33.4(4) Acceptance by Certificate of Compliance............................. 9-202
9-33.4(5) Approval of Seams................................................................ 9-203
9-34 Pavement Marking Material.................................................................................. 9-204
9-34.1 General...................................................................................................... 9-204
9-34.2 Paint.......................................................................................................... 9-204
9-34.2(1) Vacant.................................................................................... 9-204
9-34.2(2) Color..................................................................................... 9-204
9-34.2(3) Prohibited Materials.............................................................. 9-204
9-34.2(4) Low VOC Solvent Based Paint............................................. 9-205
9-34.2(5) Low VOC Waterborne Paint................................................. 9-206
9-34.2(6) Temporary Pavement Marking Paint.................................... 9-207
9-34.3 Plastic........................................................................................................ 9-207
9-34.3(1) Type A – Liquid Hot Applied Thermoplastic........................ 9-207
9-34.3(2) Type B – Pre-Formed Fused Thermoplastic......................... 9-207
9-34.3(3) Type C – Cold Applied Pre-Formed Tape............................. 9-208
9-34.3(4) Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate........... 9-208

Contents
9-34.4 Glass Beads for Pavement Marking Materials.......................................... 9-209

9-34.5 Temporary Pavement Marking Tape......................................................... 9-210
9-34.5(1) Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Short Duration......... 9-210
9-34.5(2) Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Long Duration......... 9-211
9-34.6 Temporary Flexible Raised Pavement Markers........................................ 9-211
9-34.7 Field Testing.............................................................................................. 9-211
9-34.7(1) Requirements........................................................................ 9-211
9-35 Temporary Traffic Control Materials................................................................... 9-213
9-35.0 General Requirements............................................................................... 9-213
9-35.1 Stop/Slow Paddles.................................................................................... 9-213
9-35.2 Construction Signs.................................................................................... 9-213
9-35.3 Wood Sign Posts....................................................................................... 9-214
9-35.4 Sequential Arrow Signs............................................................................. 9-214
9-35.5 Portable Changeable Message Signs........................................................ 9-214
9-35.6 Barricades................................................................................................. 9-215
9-35.7 Traffic Safety Drums................................................................................. 9-215
9-35.8 Vacant........................................................................................................ 9-216
9-35.9 Traffic Cones............................................................................................. 9-216
9-35.10 Tubular Markers........................................................................................ 9-216
9-35.11 Warning Lights and Flashers.................................................................... 9-216
9-35.12 Transportable Attenuator........................................................................... 9-216
9-35.12(1) Truck-Mounted Attenuator................................................... 9-216
9-35.12(2) Trailer-Mounted Attenuator.................................................. 9-216
9-35.12(3) Submittal Requirements........................................................ 9-217
9-35.13 Tall Channelizing Devices........................................................................ 9-217
9-35.14 Portable Temporary Traffic Control Signal............................................... 9-217
9-36 Shaft-Related Materials.......................................................................................... 9-219
9-36.1 Shaft Casing.............................................................................................. 9-219
9-36.1(1) Permanent Casing................................................................. 9-219
9-36.1(2) Temporary Casing................................................................. 9-219
9-36.2 Shaft Slurry............................................................................................... 9-219
9-36.2(1) Mineral Slurry....................................................................... 9-219
9-36.2(2) Synthetic Slurry.................................................................... 9-219
9-36.2(3) Water Slurry.......................................................................... 9-220
9-36.3 Steel Reinforcing Bar Centralizers........................................................... 9-220
9-36.4 CSL Access Tubes and Caps..................................................................... 9-220
9-36.5 Grout for CSL Access Tubes..................................................................... 9-220

Contents

Division 1 General Requirements
1-01 Definitions and Terms
1-01.1 General
The following abbreviations and terms are defined here as they are used in any Contract
documents and Specifications. When used in the Proposal Form to denote items of Work
and units of measurements, abbreviations are defined to mean the full expression.
1-01.2 Abbreviations
1-01.2(1) Associations and Miscellaneous
These abbreviations are used in Plans and Specifications as defined here:
AAA American Arbitration Association
AAR Association of American Railroads
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGA American Gas Association
AGC Associated General Contractors of America
AI Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
AMS Aerospace Material Specification
ANLA American Nursery and Landscape Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute
APA American Plywood Association
API American Petroleum Institute
APWA American Public Works Association
ARA American Railway Association
AREMA American Railway Engineering and Maintenance Association
ARTBA American Road & Transportation Builders Association
ASA American Standards Association
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASLA American Society of Landscape Architects
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASNT American Society for Nondestructive Testing
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials International
AWPA American Wood Protection Association
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CFR Code of Federal Regulations
CLI Chain Link Institute
CRAB County Road Administration Board
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
DIPRA Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association
ECY Washington State Department of Ecology
EEI Edison Electric Institute
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
ESAL Equivalent Single Axle Loads
FHWA Federal Highway Administration
FOP Field Operating Procedure
2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 1-1

FSS Federal Specifications and Standards, General Services Administration

HUD United States Department of Housing and Urban Development
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ITE Institute of Transportation Engineers
IES Illumination Engineering Society
IMSA International Municipal Signal Association
LID Local Improvement District
LPI Lighting Protection Institute
MSHA Mine Safety and Health Act
MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association
NEPA National Environmental Policy Act
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology
NRMCA National Ready Mix Concrete Association
OMWBE Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA Portland Cement Association
PPI Plastic Pipe Institute
P/PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute
QPL Qualified Products List
RAM Request for Approval of Material
RCW Revised Code of Washington (Laws of the State)
RID Road Improvement District
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SEPA State Environmental Policy Act
SOP Standard Operating Procedure
SSPC Society of Protective Coatings
TIB Transportation Improvement Board
UL Underwriters Laboratories
ULID Utility Local Improvement District
UMTA Urban Mass Transit Administration
WAC Washington Administrative Code
WAQTC Western Alliance for Quality Transportation Construction
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau
WISHA Washington Industrial Safety and Health Administration
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute
WSDOT Washington State Department of Transportation
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
1-01.2(2) Items of Work and Units of Measurement
Plans and Specifications may include common engineering and construction abbreviations.
Many such abbreviations need no definition. But when the following abbreviations are used,
they will only mean:
Agg. Aggregate
Al. Aluminum
BST Bituminous Surface Treatment
Cl. Class
Cfm Cubic Feet per Minute
Cfs Cubic Feet per Second
Comb. Combination
Conc. Concrete
CPF Composite Pay Factor
Page 1-2 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

Definitions and Terms 1-01
Crib. Cribbing
Culv. Culvert
cy or cu yd. Cubic Yard
Diam. Diameter
ESAL Equivalent Single Axle Loads
Est. Estimate or Estimated
Excl. Excluding
F Fahrenheit
gph Gallon per Hour
gpm Gallon per Minute
Hund. Hundred
HMA Hot Mix Asphalt
In. Inch
Incl. Including
JMCIF Job Mix Compliance Incentive Factor
JMF Job Mix Formula
lb Pound(s)
LF or Lin. Ft. Linear Foot (Feet)
LS Lump Sum
M Thousand
MBM Thousand Feet Board Measure
MUTS Minimum Ultimate Tensile Strength
PCPS Precast Prestressed
Pres. Pressure
psf Pounds per Square Foot
psi Pounds per Square inch
PVC Polyvinyl Chloride
RAP Recycled Asphalt Pavement
Reg. Regulator
Reinf. Reinforced, Reinforcing
Sec. Section
St. Steel
Str. Structural
sy or sq. yd. Square Yard(s)
Th. Thick or Thickness
Tr. Treatment
Va Air Voids
VC Vitrified Clay
VFA Voids Filled with Asphalt
VMA Voids in Mineral Aggregate
1-01.3 Definitions
Addendum – A written or graphic document, issued to all Bidders and identified as an
Addendum prior to Bid opening, which modifies or supplements the Bid Documents and
becomes a part of the Contract.
Auxiliary Lane – The part of the Roadway next to Traveled Ways for parking, speed
changes, turning, weaving, truck climbing, or for anything that adds to through traffic
movement.
Award – The formal decision of the Contracting Agency to accept the lowest responsible
and responsive Bidder for the Work.
Bid, Proposal – The offer of a Bidder on a properly completed Proposal Form to perform
the Contract.
Bidder – An individual, partnership, firm, corporation, or joint venture, submitting
a Proposal or Bid. When required by law or otherwise the individual, partnership, firm,
corporation, or joint venture shall be prequalified.
Bid Documents – The component parts of the proposed Contract which may include,
but are not limited to, the Proposal Form, the proposed Contract Provisions, the proposed
Contract Plans, Addenda, and for projects with Contracting Agency subsurface investigations;
the Summary of Geotechnical Conditions and subsurface boring logs (if any).
Bridge Approach Embankments – An embankment beneath a Structure and extending
100 feet beyond a Structure’s end (at Subgrade elevation for the full embankment width) plus
an access ramp on a 10:1 slope to the original ground elevation. Also, any embankment that
replaces unsuitable foundation soil beneath the Bridge Approach Embankment.
Call for Bids (Advertisement for Bids) – The published public notice soliciting Proposals
or Bids for Work stating, among other things, the time, place, and date for receiving and
opening the Bids.
Cold Weather Protection Period – A period of time 7 days from the day of concrete
placement or the duration of the cure period, whichever is longer.
Commission, Washington State Transportation Commission – The appointive body
having authority over state transportation matters as provided by law.
Completion Dates – Substantial Completion Date is the day the Engineer determines
the Contracting Agency has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities, both from
the operational and safety standpoint, all the initial plantings are completed and only minor
incidental work, replacement of temporary substitute facilities, plant establishment periods,
or correction or repair remains for the Physical Completion of the total Contract.
Physical Completion Date is the day all of the Work is physically completed on the project.
All documentation required by the Contract and required by law does not necessarily need to
be furnished by the Contractor by this date.
Completion Date is the day all the Work specified in the Contract is completed and
all the obligations of the Contractor under the Contract are fulfilled by the Contractor.
All documentation required by the Contract and required by law must be furnished by the
Contractor before establishment of this date.
Contract – The written agreement between the Contracting Agency and the Contractor.
It describes, among other things:
1. What work will be done, and by when;
2. Who provides labor and materials; and
3. How Contractors will be paid.
The Contract includes the Contract (agreement) Form, Bidder’s completed Proposal Form,
Contract Provisions, Contract Plans, Standard Specifications, Standard Plans, Addenda,
various certifications and affidavits, supplemental agreements, change orders, and subsurface
boring logs (if any).
Contract Bond – The approved form of security furnished by the Contractor and the
Contractor’s Surety as required by the Contract, that guarantees performance of all the Work
required by the Contract and payment to anyone who provides supplies or labor for the
performance of the Work.
Contract Form (Agreement Form) – The form provided by the Contracting Agency that
requires the authorized signatures of the Contractor and the Contracting Agency to result in
formal execution of the Contract.
Contracting Agency – Agency of Government that is responsible for the execution and
administration of the Contract.
Contractor – The individual, partnership, firm, corporation, or joint venture, Contracting
with the Contracting Agency to do prescribed Work.
Contract Plans – A publication addressing the Work required for an individual project.
At the time of the call for Bids, the Contract Plans may include, but are not limited to, the
following: a vicinity map, a summary of quantities, structure notes, signing information,
traffic control plans, and detailed drawings; all for a specific individual project. At the time
of the Contract execution date, the Contract Plans include any Addenda.

Definitions and Terms 1-01
Contract Provisions – A publication addressing the Work required for an individual

project. At the time of the call for Bids, the Contract Provisions may include, for a specific
individual project, the amendments to the Standard Specifications, the Special Provisions,
a listing of the applicable Standard Plans, the prevailing minimum hourly wage rates, and an
informational Proposal Form with the listing of Bid items. The proposed Contract Provisions
may also include, for a specific individual project, the Required Contract Provisions Federal-
aid Construction Contracts, and various required certifications or declarations. At the time of
the Contract execution date, the Contract Provisions include the proposed Contract Provisions
and include any Addenda, a copy of the Contract Form, and a copy of the Proposal Form with
the Contract prices and extensions.
Department, Department of Transportation – The State Agency authorized by law to
administer transportation-related work.
Engineer – The Contracting Agency’s representative who directly supervises the
engineering and administration of a construction Contract.
Federal Highway Administration – The Federal Agency authorized to approve plans
and contracts for Federal-Aid Highway projects. They also inspect such projects to ensure
Contract compliance.
Frontage Road – A local street or road usually next to an arterial Highway that serves
abutting property and adjacent areas and controls access.
Highway – A public way for vehicles, including the entire Right of Way.
Inspector – The Engineer’s representative who inspects Contract performance in detail.
Laboratory – The laboratories of the Contracting Agency, or other laboratories the
Contracting Agency authorizes to test Work, soils, and materials.
Plans – The Contract Plans or Standard Plans which show location, character, and
dimensions of prescribed Work including layouts, profiles, cross-sections, and other details.
Project Engineer – Same as Engineer.
Proposal Form – The form provided to Bidders by the Contracting Agency for submittal
of a Proposal or Bid to the Contracting Agency for a specific project. The form includes the
item number, estimated plan quantity, and item description of the Bid items along with blank
spaces to be completed by the Bidder for the unit prices, extensions, the total Bid amount,
signatures, date, acknowledgment of Addenda, and the Bidder’s address. The required
certifications and declarations are part of the form.
Reference Information – Information provided to the Contractor by the Contracting
Agency that is not part of the Contract.
Right of Way – Land, property, or property interest, usually in a strip, acquired for or
devoted to transportation purposes.
Roadbed – The graded part of the Roadway within top and side slopes, prepared as a
foundation for the pavement structure and Shoulders.
Roadside – The area outside the traveled way.
Roadway – The portion of the Right of Way within the outside limits of the side slopes.
Secretary, Secretary of Transportation – The chief executive officer of the Department
and other authorized representatives.
Shoulder – The part of the Roadway next to the Traveled Way or Auxiliary Lanes.
It provides lateral support of base and surface courses and is an emergency stopping area
for vehicles.
Special Provisions – Supplemental Specifications and modifications to the Standard
Specifications and the amendments to the Standard Specifications that apply to an
individual project.
Specifications – Provisions and requirements for the prescribed Work.

Standard Plans – A manual of specific plans or drawings adopted by the Contracting

Agency which show frequently recurring components of Work that have been standardized
for use.
State – The state of Washington acting through its representatives.
Structures – Bridges, culverts, catch basins, drop inlets, retaining walls, cribbing,
manholes, endwalls, buildings, service pipes, sewers, underdrains, foundation drains, and
other features found during Work that the Contract may or may not classify as a Structure.
Subcontractor – An individual, partnership, firm, corporation, or joint venture who is
sublet part of the Contract by the Contractor.
Subgrade – The top surface of the Roadbed on which subbase, base, surfacing, pavement,
or layers of similar materials are placed.
Substructure – The part of the Structure below:
1. The bottom of the grout pad for the simple and continuous span bearing, or
2. The bottom of the girder or bottom slab soffit, or
3. Arch skewbacks and construction joints at the top of vertical abutment members or
rigid frame piers.
Substructures include endwalls, wingwalls, barrier and railing attached to the wingwalls,
and cantilever barriers and railings.
Superstructure – The part of the Structure above:
1. The bottom of the grout pad for the simple and continuous span bearing, or
2. The bottom of the block supporting the girder, or
3. Arch skewbacks and construction joints at the top of vertical abutment members
or rigid frame piers.
Longitudinal limits of the Superstructure extend from end to end of the Structure in
accordance with the following criteria:
1. From the face of end diaphragm abutting the bridge approach embankment for end piers
without expansion joints, or
2. From the end pier expansion joint for bridges with end pier expansion joints
Superstructures include, but are not limited to, the bottom slab and webs of box girders,
the bridge deck and diaphragms of all bridges, and the sidewalks when shown on the bridge
deck. The Superstructure also includes the girders, expansion joints, bearings, barrier, and
railing attached to the Superstructure when such Superstructure components are not otherwise
covered by separate unit measured or lump sum bid items.
Superstructures do not include endwalls, wingwalls, barrier and railing attached to the
wingwalls, and cantilever barriers and railings unless supported by the Superstructure.
Surety – A company that is bound with the Contractor to ensure performance of the
Contract, payment of all obligations pertaining to the Work, and fulfillment of such other
conditions as are specified in the Contract, Contract Bond, or otherwise required by law.
Titles (or Headings) – The titles or headings of the Sections and Subsections herein are
intended for convenience of reference and shall not be considered as having any bearing on
their interpretation.
Traveled Way – That part of the Roadway made for vehicle travel excluding Shoulders
and Auxiliary Lanes.
Work – The provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and everything needed
to successfully complete a project according to the Contract.
Working Drawings – Drawings, plans, diagrams, or any other supplementary data or
calculations, including a schedule of submittal dates for Working Drawings where specified,
which the Contractor must submit to the Engineer.

Bid Procedures and Conditions 1-02
1-02 Bid Procedures and Conditions

1-02.1 Prequalification of Bidders
The Contracting Agency will provide a Bid Proposal Form only after a prospective Bidder
submits a “Standard Questionnaire and Financial Statement”. This questionnaire enables the
Contracting Agency to decide whether or not the Bidder is qualified to perform Highway,
road, or other public work. The questionnaire shall be sworn to before a person authorized
to take oaths.
On the basis of this questionnaire, the Contracting Agency will either specify the type
and amount of Work it considers the prospective Bidder prequalified to perform or advise
the prospective Bidder of the reasons they failed to be prequalified. To remain prequalified,
the Bidder must submit an updated questionnaire once a year and supplements whenever
required by the Contracting Agency.
A submittal deadline applies to any prospective Bidder not prequalified or from whom
a supplemental questionnaire is due. To receive consideration for issuance of a Bid Proposal
Form on a specific project, the questionnaire (or supplement) must be received by the
Prequalification Engineer no less than 15 days prior to the scheduled Bid opening.
The Contracting Agency may withdraw a Bidder’s prequalification or reduce its amount if:
1. The extent of other work the Bidder has under Contract (Contracting Agency or
otherwise) justifies such action, or
2. Past or present work on a Contracting Agency Contract has been less than satisfactory.
If a Bidder’s questionnaire does not contain sufficient information, the Contracting Agency
may refuse to provide a Bid Proposal Form and disregard any Bid submitted. After opening
Bids, the Contracting Agency may decide that a prequalified Bidder is not responsible and
may refuse to accept the Bid on that basis. Such a refusal will be conclusive unless the
Bidder appeals within five days to the Superior Court of Thurston County. Any appeal shall
be heard within ten days after it is filed and shall provide at least five days’ notice to the
Contracting Agency.
The Bidder shall ensure that the combination of the Bid amount and other Contract work
with the Contracting Agency does not exceed the prequalification amount. If this combination
does exceed the prequalification amount, the Contracting Agency may determine the Bidder
to be not responsible and refuse to Award a Contract.
Two or more prospective Bidders may, in a joint venture, prequalify and Bid jointly on
a single Contract. Each shall have filed a “Standard Questionnaire and Financial Statement”.
Together they shall also file a standard form of “Individual Project Statement of Joint Venture”
and a joint venture agreement in a form acceptable to the Contracting Agency.
To Bid jointly on a continuous joint venture on more than one Contract, two or more
prospective Bidders shall submit:
1. A “Standard Questionnaire and Financial Statement” compiled for the joint venture;
2. A “Standard Questionnaire and Financial Statement” for each member (if the
Contracting Agency has no copy on file); and
3. A copy of the “Joint Venture Agreement” signed by each member of the joint venture
and naming each person authorized to sign documents on its behalf. (If any member
is a corporation, a corporate resolution shall accompany the agreement. This resolution
shall authorize the joint venture agreement and name the officer(s) authorized to sign
the joint venture agreement or Contract on behalf of the corporation.)
The Contracting Agency will treat the continuing joint venture as a new firm and decide
its prequalification on that basis.
Any joint venture and each of its members is subject to Section 1-02.14.

1-02.2 Plans and Specifications

The Contracting Agency will place review copies of the Plans and Specifications on file
in the offices of:
1. All Regional Administrators of the Department;
2. The County Engineer of the county in which the Work is located; and
3. These plans service offices of the Associated General Contractors of America: Seattle,
Spokane, and Tacoma, Washington.
Prospective Bidders may purchase Plans and Specifications from the Department of
Transportation in Olympia, Washington, for the fee given in the call for Bids. The fee shall
accompany each request for Plans. Checks shall be payable to the State of Washington,
Department of Transportation.
After Award of the Contract, the Plans and Specifications will be issued without charge
on the following basis:
No. of
To Prime Contractor Sets Basis of Distribution
Reduced Plans (11″ by 17″) and Special 10 Furnished automatically upon Award.
Provision
Additional reduced Plans (11″ by 17″) 10 Furnished only upon request for projects with more
and Special Provision than 100 plan sheets.
Large Plans (22″ by 34″) and Special Provisions 1 Furnished automatically upon award.
Additional large Plans (22″ by 34″) and 1 Furnished only upon request for projects with more
Special Provisions than 100 plan sheets.
No. of
To Subcontractors and Suppliers Sets Basis of Distribution
Reduced Plans (11″ by 17″) and accompanying 1 Furnished only upon request by the Prime Contractor
Special Provisions for an approved Subcontractor or material supplier.
Additional Plans may be purchased by payment of the current rates.

1-02.3 Estimated Quantities
The quantities shown in the Proposal Form and the Contract Forms are estimates and are
stated only for Bid comparison purposes. The Contracting Agency does not warrant expressly
or by implication, that the actual quantities of Work will correspond with those estimates.
Payment will be made on the basis of the actual quantities of each item of Work completed
in accordance with the Contract requirements.
1-02.4 Examination of Plans, Specifications, and Site of Work
1-02.4(1) General
The Bidder shall carefully examine the Bid Documents as defined in Section 1-01.3.
Submittal of a Bid shall be conclusive evidence that the Bidder has made these examinations
and understands all requirements for the performance of the completed Work. The Bidder
further warrants, agrees, and acknowledges by submitting a Bid that it:
1. Has taken steps reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the Work;
2. Has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can
affect the Work or its cost, including but not limited to:
a. Conditions bearing upon acquisition, transportation, disposal, handling, and storage
of materials;
b. The availability of labor, materials, water, electric power, and roads;
c. Uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site;

d. The conformation and condition of the ground;

e. The character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during Work
performance; and
f. The site biological hazards and associated physical hazards.
3. Has satisfied itself as to the character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface
materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably
ascertainable from an inspection of the Work site (including material sites) as well
as from the Bid Documents and other information made a part of this Contract; and
4. Has satisfied itself as to the adequacy of time allowed for the completion of the
physical Work on the Contract.
Any failure of the Bidder to take the actions described and acknowledged in this clause
shall not relieve the Bidder from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost
of successfully performing the Work, or from proceeding to successfully perform the Work
without additional expense to the Contracting Agency.
The Bidder agrees that the Contracting Agency shall not be liable to it on any claim
for additional payment or additional time or any claim whatsoever if the claim directly or
indirectly results from the Bidder’s failure to investigate and familiarize itself sufficiently
with the conditions under which the Contract is to be performed.
The Bidder shall be familiar and comply with all Federal, State, tribal, and local laws,
ordinances, and regulations which might affect those engaged in the Work. The Contracting
Agency will not consider any plea of misunderstanding or ignorance of such requirements.
Bid prices shall reflect what the Bidder anticipates to be the cost of completing the Work,
including methods, materials, labor, and equipment. Except as the Contract may provide,
the Bidder shall receive no payment for any costs that exceed those in the Bid prices.
Prospective Bidders are advised that projects with Work on or adjacent to water may
require insurance coverage in compliance with:
1. The Longshoremen’s and Harbor Worker’s Compensation Act (administered
by U.S. Department of Labor), or
2. The State Industrial Insurance (administrated by the Washington State Department
of Labor and Industries), or
3. Both.
The Contractor shall bear all cost for such insurance as provided in Section 1-07.10.
No Claim shall be allowed because of any ambiguity in the Contract if:
1. The Bidder discovers an ambiguity but fails to notify the Contracting Agency, or
2. The Bidder failed to discover a patent ambiguity that would be discovered
by a reasonably prudent contractor in preparing its Bid.
Any prospective Bidder desiring an explanation or interpretation of the Bid Documents,
shall request the explanation or interpretation in writing by close of business on the Thursday
preceding the bid opening to allow a written reply to reach all prospective Bidders before
the submission of their Bids. Oral explanations, interpretations, or instructions given by
anyone before the Award of a Contract will not be binding on the Contracting Agency.
Any information given a prospective Bidder concerning any of the Bid Documents will be
furnished to all prospective Bidders as an Addendum if that information is deemed by the
Contracting Agency to be necessary in submitting Bids or if the Contracting Agency concludes
that the lack of the information would be prejudicial to other prospective Bidders.

1-02.4(2) Subsurface Information

If the Contracting Agency has made subsurface investigation of the site of the proposed
Work, the boring log data, soil sample test data, and geotechnical recommendations reports
obtained by the Contracting Agency will be made available for inspection by the Bidders
at the location specified in the Special Provisions. The Summary of Geotechnical Conditions,
as an appendix to the Special Provisions, and the boring logs shall be considered as part of the
Contract. However, the Contracting Agency makes no representation or warranty expressed or
implied that:
1. The Bidders’ interpretations from the boring logs are correct,
2. Moisture conditions and indicated water tables will not vary from those found at the
time the borings were made, and
3. The ground at the location of the borings has not been physically disturbed or altered
after the boring was made.
The Contracting Agency specifically makes no representations, guarantees, or warranties
as to the condition, materials, or proportions of the materials between the specific borings
regardless of any subsurface information the Contracting Agency may make available to the
prospective Bidders.
The availability of subsurface information from the Contracting Agency shall not relieve
the Bidder or the Contractor from any risks or of any duty to make examinations and
investigations as required by Section 1-02.4(1) or any other responsibility under the Contract
or as may be required by law.
1-02.5 Proposal Forms
At the request of a prequalified Bidder, the Contracting Agency will provide a physical
Proposal Form for any project on which the Bidder is eligible to Bid. For certain projects
selected at the sole discretion of the Contracting Agency, the Bidder may also be authorized
to access an electronic Proposal Form for submittal via Trns∙Port Expedite® software
and BidExpress®.
The Proposal Form will identify the project and its location and describe the Work. It will
also list estimated quantities, units of measurement, the items of Work, and the materials to
be furnished at the unit Bid prices. The Bidder shall complete spaces on the Proposal Form
that call for unit prices, extensions, the total Bid amount, signatures, date, acknowledgment
of Addenda, and the Bidder’s address. The required certifications are included as part of the
Proposal Form.
1-02.6 Preparation of Proposal
The Contracting Agency will accept only those Proposals properly executed on the
physical forms it provides, or electronic forms that the Bidder has been authorized to access.
Unless it approves in writing, the Contracting Agency will not accept Proposals on forms
attached to the Plans and stamped “Informational”.
All prices shall be in legible figures (not words) written in ink or typed, and expressed
in U.S. dollars and cents. The Proposal shall include:
1. A unit price for each item (omitting digits more than four places to the right of the
decimal point),
2. An extension for each unit price (omitting digits more than two places to the right
of the decimal point), and
3. The total Contract price (the sum of all extensions).
In the space provided on the signature sheet, the Bidder shall confirm that all Addenda
have been received.
The Bidder shall submit with the Bid a completed Underutilized Disadvantaged Business
Enterprise (UDBE) Utilization Certification, when required by the Special Provisions. For
each and every UDBE firm listed on the Bidder’s completed Underutilized Disadvantaged

Business Enterprise Utilization Certification, the Bidder shall submit written confirmation
from that UDBE firm that the UDBE is in agreement with the UDBE participation
commitment that the Bidder has made in the Bidder’s completed Underutilized Disadvantaged
Business Enterprise Utilization Certification. WSDOT Form 422‑031 (Underutilized
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation Document) is available for
this purpose. Bidder must submit good faith effort documentation with the Underutilized
Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Utilization Certification ONLY In The Event the bidder’s
efforts to solicit sufficient UDBE participation have been unsuccessful. Directions for delivery
of the Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Written Confirmation Documents
and Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Good Faith Effort documentation are
included in Sections 1-02.9 and 1-02.10.
The Bidder shall submit with the Bid a list of:
1. Subcontractors who will perform the work of heating, ventilation and air conditioning,
plumbing as described in RCW 18.106 and electrical as described in RCW 19.28, and
2. The work those Subcontractors will perform on the Contract.
3. Shall not list more than one Subcontractor for each category of work identified, except,
when Subcontractors vary with Bid alternates, in which case the Bidder shall identify
which Subcontractor will be used for which alternate.
If no Subcontractor is listed, the Bidder acknowledges that it does not intend to use any
Subcontractor to perform those items of work.
Proposals of corporations shall be signed by the officer or officers having authority to sign
them. If a Bidder is a copartnership, the Proposal shall be signed by an authorized member of
the copartnership. When the Bidder is a joint venture, the Proposal shall be signed by one or
more individuals as authorized by the Joint Venture.
1-02.7 Bid Deposit
A deposit of at least 5 percent of the total Bid shall accompany each Bid. This deposit may
be cash, certified check, cashier’s check, or a proposal bond (Surety bond). For projects that
are selected by the Contracting Agency to be Bid electronically, the proposal bond may be
in either a physical format, or an electronic format via Surety2000.com or Insurevision.com
and BidExpress®. When a physical Bid deposit or proposal bond is furnished to accompany
an electronic Proposal Form, the Bid deposit shall be received by the Contracting Agency at
the location specified for receipt of Bids prior to the time set for receipt of Bids. Any proposal
bond shall be on a form acceptable to the Contracting Agency and shall be signed by the
Bidder and the Surety. A proposal bond shall not be conditioned in any way to modify the
minimum 5 percent required. The Surety shall: (1) be registered with the Washington State
Insurance Commissioner, and (2) appear on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State
of Washington published by the Office of the Insurance Commissioner.
The failure to furnish a Bid deposit of a minimum of 5 percent with the Bid or as a physical
supplement to the electronic Proposal Form shall make the Bid nonresponsive and shall cause
the Bid to be rejected by the Contracting Agency.
1-02.8 Noncollusion Declaration and Lobbying Certification
1-02.8(1) Noncollusion Declaration
When required by Section 112(c) Title 23, United States Code, a declaration shall be
provided certifying that the Bidder has not taken part in collusion or other action that would
restrain competitive Bidding.
The Code of Federal Regulations 23 CFR 635.112(f)(1) requires that: “Each Bidder shall
file a sworn or unsworn statement executed by, or on behalf of the person, firm, association, or
corporation submitting the Bid, certifying that such persons, firm, association, or corporation
has not either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion,
or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive Bidding in connection with
the submitted Bid. Failure to submit the sworn or unsworn statement as part of the Bid

Proposal package will make the Bid nonresponsive and not eligible for Award consideration”.
In addition, 23 CFR 635.112(f)(1) requires that the Contracting Agency provide the form
for the declaration to prospective Bidders and that the declaration shall be executed by such
persons, firm, association, or corporation under penalty of perjury under the laws of the
United States.
Therefore, by including the Non-collusion Declaration as part of the signed bid Proposal,
the Bidder is deemed to have certified and agreed to the requirements of the Declaration.
1-02.8(2) Lobbying Certification
Section 319 of Public Law 101-121 prohibits payment of Federal Funds for contract
lobbying by the Contractor and any Subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor whose contract
exceeds $100,000. A Certification for Federal-Aid Contracts (WSDOT Form 272-040) is
provided in the Proposal Form for Contracts exceeding $100,000 to address this requirement.
By signing the proposal, the Bidder will be deemed to have signed and agreed to the
conditions and requirements of the Certification for Federal-Aid Contracts.
The Contractor shall ensure that a Certification for Federal-Aid Contracts (WSDOT Form
272-040) is included in every contract with any Subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor
whose contract exceeds $100,000. By signing the contract any Subcontractor or lower tier
subcontractor will be deemed to have signed and agreed to the conditions and requirements
of the Certification for Federal-Aid Contracts. The Contractor shall keep evidence in their
files that such Subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor has committed to this requirement.
Section 319 of Public Law 101-121 also provides that, if any funds other than Federal
appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting
to influence an officer or employee of any Federal agency, a Member of Congress, an officer
or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this
Federal Contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the Contractor shall complete and
submit to the Contracting Agency the Standard Form LLL, DISCLOSURE OF LOBBYING
ACTIVITIES, in accordance with the instructions on the form. Any Subcontractor or lower
tier subcontractor whose contract exceeds $100,000 shall disclose in the same manner as
the Contractor, except that, Standard Form LLL shall be submitted to the Contractor for
processing to the Contracting Agency.
Audits will be conducted to ensure compliance with this section.
The Certification for Federal-Aid Contracts (WSDOT Form 272-040) may be reproduced
from the Proposal form. The disclosure form is available from the Washington State
Department of Transportation’s Contract Ad and Award Office, Transportation Building,
Olympia, WA 98504.
1-02.9 Delivery of Proposal
For projects scheduled for Bid opening in Olympia, the Proposal shall be sealed and
submitted in the envelope provided with it to the address provided below or shall be submitted
electronically via Trns∙Port Expedite® software and BidExpress®. The Bidder shall fill in all
blanks on this envelope to ensure proper handling and delivery. Bids are to be received no later
than until 11:00:59 A.M. Pacific time on the date of Bid opening:
Washington State Department of Transportation
Room 2D20
310 Maple Park Avenue SE
Olympia WA 98501-2361
For projects scheduled for Bid opening in other locations, the Proposal shall be sealed and
submitted in the envelope provided with it at the location and time identified in the Special
Provisions. The Bidder shall fill in all blanks on this envelope to ensure proper handling
and delivery.

Proposals that are received as required will be publicly opened and read as specified
in Section 1-02.12. The Contracting Agency will not open or consider any Proposal when
the Proposal or Bid deposit is received after the time specified for receipt of Proposals or
received in a location other than that specified for receipt of Proposals unless an emergency
or unanticipated event interrupts normal work processes of the Contracting Agency so that
Proposals cannot be received.
If an emergency or unanticipated event interrupts normal work processes of the Contracting
Agency so that Proposals cannot be received at the office designated for receipt of bids as
specified in Section 1-02.12 the time specified for receipt of the Proposal will be deemed to
be extended to the same time of day specified in the solicitation on the first work day on which
the normal work processes of the Contracting Agency resume.
When a Bid deposit is furnished in a physical format as specified in Section 1-02.7 the Bid
deposit shall be submitted in a sealed envelope marked as “BID SUPPLEMENT” and with the
Bidder’s company name, project title, and Bid date.
1-02.10 Withdrawing, Revising, or Supplementing Proposal
After submitting a physical Bid Proposal to the Contracting Agency, the Bidder may
withdraw, revise, or supplement it if:
1. The Bidder submits a written request signed by an authorized person, and
2. The Contracting Agency receives the request before the time set for receipt
of Proposals.
The original physical Bid Proposal may be supplemented, or revised and resubmitted
as the official Bid Proposal if the Contracting Agency receives it before the time set for receipt
of Proposals. Faxed Bid revisions and supplements will be accepted only if they are submitted
in accordance with the “Example Format for Facsimile Bid Changes” instructions posted
on the WSDOT website at www.wsdot.wa.gov/biz/contaa/bulletin.
Unless specifically allowed in the Contract, emailed requests to withdraw, revise,
or supplement a Proposal are not acceptable. The Contracting Agency is not responsible
fordelayed, partial, failed, illegible, or partially legible FAX document transmissions, and
such documents may be rejected as incomplete at the Bidder’s risk.
The Contracting Agency will not accept requests to revise or withdraw electronic Bid
Proposals. Such requests shall be furnished directly to BidExpress® and in accordance
with their terms and conditions.
1-02.11 Combination and Multiple Proposals
A project may be organized for Bidding and construction by various methods to enable
proposals to be submitted for combined projects or for the construction method specified.
The Contracting Agency reserves the right to Award combined or separate Bids or by such
other method deemed most advantageous to the Contracting Agency. Only those combined
Bids specifically prescribed in the project Special Provisions will be accepted. If contracts
are Awarded for combinations of projects, separate contracts will be written for each project
included in the combination.
A Bidder submitting more than one Proposal at a letting may attach one of the following
statements to each Proposal:
“We prefer to be Awarded not more than (Number) Contracts for projects for which we
have submitted Bids at this letting;” or
“We prefer to be Awarded Contracts of a total value of not more than $____ for projects
for which we have submitted Bids at this letting”.
Such attachments will not make the Proposals irregular. The Contracting Agency will
Award each Contract to the lowest responsible Bidder but will consider such attachment in
determining the responsibility of the Bidder to perform each Contract for which a statement
has been attached.

1-02.12 Public Opening of Proposals

Proposals will be opened and publicly read at the time indicated in the call for Bids unless
the Bid opening has been delayed or canceled. Bidders, their authorized agents, and other
interested parties are invited to be present.
If an emergency or unanticipated event interrupts normal work processes of the Contracting
Agency so that Proposals cannot be opened at the time indicated in the call for Bids the time
specified for opening of Proposals will be deemed to be extended to the same time of day on
the first work day on which the normal work processes of the Contracting Agency resume.
1-02.13 Irregular Proposals
1. A Proposal will be considered irregular and may be rejected if:
a. The Bidder is not prequalified;
b. The Bidder adds provisions reserving the right to reject or accept the Award, or enter
into the Contract;
c. A price per unit cannot be determined from the Bid Proposal;
d. The Proposal form is not properly executed;
e. The Bidder fails to submit or properly complete a Subcontractor list, if applicable,
as required in Section 1-02.6;
f. The Bidder fails to submit or properly complete an Underutilized Disadvantaged
Business Enterprise Utilization Certification, if applicable, as required in
Section 1-02.6;
g. The Bidder fails to submit written confirmation from each UDBE firm listed
on the Bidder’s completed Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise
Utilization Certification that they are in agreement with the Bidder’s UDBE
participation commitment, if applicable, as required in Section 1-02.6, or if
the written confirmation that is submitted fails to meet the requirements of the
Special Provisions;
h. The Bidder fails to submit Underutilized Disadvantaged Business Enterprise Good
Faith Effort documentation, if applicable, as required in Section 1-02.6, or if the
documentation that is submitted fails to demonstrate that a Good Faith Effort to meet
the Condition of Award was made; or
i. The Bid Proposal does not constitute a definite and unqualified offer to meet the
material terms of the Bid invitation.
2. A Proposal may be considered irregular and may be rejected if:
a. The Proposal does not include a unit price for every Bid item;
b. Any of the unit prices are excessively unbalanced (either above or below the amount
of a reasonable Bid) to the potential detriment of the Contracting Agency;
c. The authorized Proposal Form furnished by the Contracting Agency is not used
or is altered;
d. The completed Proposal form contains any unauthorized additions, deletions,
alternate Bids, or conditions;
e. Receipt of Addenda is not acknowledged;
f. A member of a joint venture or partnership and the joint venture or partnership
submit Proposals for the same project (in such an instance, both Bids may be
rejected); or
g. If Proposal form entries are not made in ink.

1-02.14 Disqualification of Bidders

A Bidder may be deemed not responsible and the Proposal rejected if:
1. More than one Proposal is submitted for the same project from a Bidder under the same
or different names;
2. Evidence of collusion exists with any other Bidder. Participants in collusion will
be restricted from submitting further Bids;
3. A Bidder is not prequalified for the Work or to the full extent of the Bid;
4. An unsatisfactory performance record exists based on past or current Contracting
Agency Work;
5. There is uncompleted work (Contracting Agency or otherwise) which might hinder
or prevent the prompt completion of the Work Bid upon;
6. The Bidder failed to settle bills for labor or materials on past or current Contracts;
7. The Bidder has failed to complete a written public contract or has been convicted
of a crime arising from a previous public contract;
8. The Bidder is unable, financially or otherwise, to perform the Work;
9. A Bidder is not authorized to do business in the state of Washington; or
10. There are any other reasons deemed proper by the Contracting Agency.
1-02.15 Pre-Award Information
Before Awarding any Contract, the Contracting Agency may require one or more
of these items or actions of the apparent lowest responsible Bidder:
1. A complete statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any or all
materials to be used;
2. Samples of these materials for quality and fitness tests;
3. A progress schedule (in a form the Contracting Agency requires) showing the order
of and time required for the various phases of the Work;
4. A breakdown of costs assigned to any Bid item;
5. Attendance at a conference with the Engineer or representatives of the Engineer; or
6. Any other information or action taken that is deemed necessary to ensure that the
Bidder is the lowest responsible Bidder.

1-03 Award and Execution of Contract

1-03.1 Consideration of Bids
After opening and reading Proposals, the Contracting Agency will check them for
correctness of extensions of the prices per unit and the total price. If a discrepancy exists
between the price per unit and the extended amount of any Bid item, the price per unit will
control. The total of extensions, corrected where necessary, will be used by the Contracting
Agency for Award purposes and to fix the amount of the Contract Bond.
The right is reserved by the Contracting Agency to waive informalities in the bidding,
accept a Proposal of the lowest responsible Bidder, reject any or all Bids, republish the call
for Bids, revise or cancel the Work, or require the Work to be done in another way if the best
interest of the Contracting Agency is served.
A Bidder who wishes to claim error after the Bids have been publicly opened and read
as required by RCW 47.28.090 shall promptly notify the Contracting Agency that an error
occurred. The Bidder shall submit a notarized affidavit or declaration under penalty of perjury
signed by the Bidder and accompanied by the work sheets used in the preparation of the Bid,
requesting relief from the responsibilities of Award. The affidavit or declaration shall describe
the specific error(s) and certify that the work sheets are the ones used in preparing the Bid.
The affidavit or declaration shall be submitted no later than 5:00 p.m. on the first business
day after Bid opening or the claim will not be considered. The Contracting Agency will
review the affidavit or declaration and the certified work sheets to determine the validity of
the claimed error and if the error is of the kind for which the law allows relief from forfeiture
of the Bid deposit. If the Contracting Agency concurs in the claim of error and determines
that the error is of the kind which allows relief from forfeiture, the Bidder will be relieved
of responsibility and the Bid deposit of the Bidder will be returned. If the Contracting
Agency does not concur in the error or determines that the error is not the kind for which
the law allows relief, the Contracting Agency may Award the Contract and if the Bidder
refuses to execute the Contract, the Bidder’s Bid deposit shall be forfeited as required by
RCW 47.28.100.
1-03.1(1) Identical Bid Totals
After opening Bids, if two or more lowest responsive Bid totals are exactly equal, then
the tie-breaker will be determined by drawing as described in this section. Two or more
slips of paper will be marked as follows: one marked “Winner” and the other(s) marked
“unsuccessful”. The slips will be folded to make the marking unseen. The slips will be
placed inside a box. One authorized representative of each Bidder shall draw a slip from
the box. Bidders shall draw in alphabetic order by the name of the firm as registered with
the Washington State Department of Licensing. The slips shall be unfolded and the firm
with the slip marked “Winner” will be determined to be the successful Bidder and eligible
for Award of the Contract. Only those Bidders who submitted a Bid total that is exactly
equal to the lowest responsive Bid are eligible to draw.
1-03.2 Award of Contract
Normally, Contract Award or Bid rejection will occur within 45 calendar days after Bid
opening. If the lowest responsible Bidder and the Contracting Agency agree, this deadline
may be extended. If they cannot agree on an extension by the 45 calendar day deadline, the
Contracting Agency reserves the right to Award the Contract to the next lowest responsible
Bidder or reject all Bids. The Contracting Agency will notify the successful Bidder of the
Contract Award in writing.

Award and Execution of Contract 1-03
1-03.3 Execution of Contract

Within 20 calendar days after the Award date, the successful Bidder shall return the
signed Contracting Agency-prepared Contract, an insurance certification as required by
Section 1-07.18, and a satisfactory bond as required by law and Section 1-03.4, and shall
be registered as a contractor in the state of Washington.
Until the Contracting Agency executes a Contract, no Proposal shall bind the Contracting
Agency nor shall any Work begin within the project limits or within Contracting Agency-
furnished sites. The Contractor shall bear all risks for any Work begun outside such areas
and for any materials ordered before the Contract is executed by the Contracting Agency.
If the Bidder experiences circumstances beyond their control that prevents return of the
Contract documents within 20 calendar days after the Award date, the Contracting Agency
may grant up to a maximum of 20 additional calendar days for return of the documents,
provided the Contracting Agency deems the circumstances warrant it.
1-03.4 Contract Bond
The successful Bidder shall provide an executed Contract Bond for the full
Contract amount. This Contract Bond shall:
1. Be on a Contracting Agency-furnished form;
2. Be signed by an approved Surety (or Sureties) that:
a. Is registered with the Washington State Insurance Commissioner; and
b. Appears on the current Authorized Insurance List in the State of Washington
published by the Office of the Insurance Commissioner,
3. Be conditioned upon the faithful performance of the Contract by the Contractor within
the prescribed time;
4. Be conditioned upon the payment of taxes, increases, and penalties incurred on the
project under titles 50, 51, and 82 RCW; and
5. Guarantee that the Surety shall indemnify, defend, and protect the Contracting Agency
against any claim of direct or indirect loss resulting from the failure:
a. Of the Contractor (or any of the employees, Subcontractors, or lower tier
subcontractors of the Contractor) to faithfully perform the Contract; or
b. Of the Contractor (or the Subcontractors or lower tier subcontractors of the
Contractor) to pay all laborers, mechanics, Subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors,
material person, or any other person who provides supplies or provisions for
carrying out the Work.
The Contracting Agency may require Sureties or Surety companies on the Contract Bond
to appear and qualify themselves. Whenever the Contracting Agency deems the Surety or
Sureties to be inadequate, it may, upon written demand, require the Contractor to furnish
additional Surety to cover any remaining Work. Until the added Surety is furnished, payments
on the Contract will stop.
1-03.5 Failure to Execute Contract
Failure to return the insurance certification and bond with the signed Contract as required
in Section 1-03.3, or failure to provide Disadvantaged, Minority or Women’s Business
Enterprise information if required in the Contract, or failure or refusal to sign the Contract,
or failure to register as a contractor in the state of Washington shall result in forfeiture of the
proposal bond or deposit of this Bidder. If this should occur, the Contracting Agency may then
Award the Contract to the second lowest responsible Bidder or reject all remaining Bids. If
the second lowest responsible Bidder fails to return the required documents as stated above
within the time provided after Award, the Contract may then be Awarded successively in a like
manner to the remaining lowest responsible Bidders until the above requirements are met or
the remaining Proposals are rejected.

1-03.6 Return of Bid Deposit

When Proposals have been examined and corrected as necessary, proposal bonds and
deposits accompanying Proposals ineligible for further consideration will be returned.
All other proposal bonds and deposits will be held until the Contract has been properly
executed. When the Contract has been properly executed, all remaining deposits or bonds,
except those subject to forfeiture, will be returned.
1-03.7 Judicial Review
Any decision made by the Contracting Agency regarding the Award and execution of the
Contract or Bid rejection shall be conclusive subject to the scope of judicial review permitted
under Washington Law. Such review, if any, shall be timely filed in the Superior Court of
Thurston County, Washington.

Scope of the Work 1-04
1-04 Scope of the Work

1-04.1 Intent of the Contract
The intent of the Contract is to prescribe a complete Work. Omissions from the Contract
of details of Work that are necessary to carry out the intent of the Contract shall not relieve
the Contractor from performing the omitted Work.
1-04.1(1) Bid Items Included in the Proposal
The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, transportation, supplies,
and incidentals required to complete all Work for the items included in the Proposal.
1-04.1(2) Bid Items Not Included in the Proposal
When the Contract specifies Work that has no Bid item, and the Work is not specified as
being included with or incidental to other Bid items, an equitable adjustment will be made in
accordance with Section 1-04.4 unless that Work is customarily considered as incidental to
other items.
1-04.2 Coordination of Contract Documents, Plans, Special Provisions, Specifications,
and Addenda
The complete Contract includes these parts: the Contract Form, Bidder’s completed
Proposal Form, Contract Plans, Contract Provisions, Standard Specifications, Standard Plans,
Addenda, various certifications and affidavits, supplemental agreements, change orders, and
subsurface boring logs (if any). These parts complement each other in describing a complete
Work. Any requirement in one part binds as if stated in all parts. The Contractor shall provide
any Work or materials clearly implied in the Contract even if the Contract does not mention
it specifically.
Any inconsistency in the parts of the Contract shall be resolved by following this order of
precedence (e.g., 1 presiding over 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7; 2 presiding over 3, 4, 5, 6, and 7; and
so forth):
1. Addenda,
2. Proposal Form,
3. Special Provisions,
4. Contract Plans,
5. Amendments to the Standard Specifications,
6. Standard Specifications, and
7. Standard Plans.
On the Contract Plans, Working Drawings, and Standard Plans, figured dimensions shall
take precedence over scaled dimensions.
This order of precedence shall not apply when Work is required by one part of the Contract
but omitted from another part or parts of the Contract. The Work required in one part must be
furnished even if not mentioned in other parts of the Contract.
Whenever reference is made in these Specifications or the Special Provisions to codes,
rules, specifications, and standards, the reference shall be construed to mean the code, rule,
specification, or standard that is in effect on the Bid advertisement date, unless otherwise
stated or as required by law.
If any part of the Contract requires Work that does not include a description for how
the Work is to be performed, the Work shall be performed in accordance with standard
trade practice(s). For purposes of the Contract, a standard trade practice is one having such
regularity of observance in the trade as to justify an expectation that it will be observed by the
Contractor in doing the Work.
In case of any ambiguity or dispute over interpreting the Contract, the Engineer’s decision
will be final as provided in Section 1-05.1.

1-04.3 Reference Information

Reference Information provided to the Contractor is not part of the Contract. The
Contracting Agency does not guarantee the accuracy of the Reference Information and is
not responsible for the content of the Reference Information in any manner. Any use of
Reference Information by the Contractor is done solely at the Contractor’s risk. If a document
that is provided as reference information contains material also included as a part of the
Contract, that portion of the document shall be considered a part of the Contract and not
as Reference Information.
1-04.4 Changes
The Engineer reserves the right to make, at any time during the Work, such changes in
quantities and such alterations in the Work as are necessary to satisfactorily complete the
project. Such changes in quantities and alterations shall not invalidate the Contract nor
release the Surety, and the Contractor agrees to perform the Work as altered. Among others,
these changes and alterations may include:
1. Deleting any part of the Work.
2. Increasing or decreasing quantities.
3. Altering Specifications, designs, or both.
4. Altering the way the Work is to be done.
5. Adding new Work.
6. Altering facilities, equipment, materials, services, or sites, provided by the Contracting
Agency.
7. Ordering the Contractor to speed up or delay the Work.
The Engineer will issue a written change order for any change unless the remainder of this
section provides otherwise.
If the alterations or changes in quantities significantly change the character of the Work
under the Contract, whether or not changed by any such different quantities or alterations, an
adjustment, excluding loss of anticipated profits, will be made to the Contract. The basis for
the adjustment shall be agreed upon prior to the performance of the Work. If a basis cannot
be agreed upon, then an adjustment will be made either for or against the Contractor in such
amount as the Engineer may determine to be fair and equitable. If the alterations or changes
in quantities do not significantly change the character of the Work to be performed under the
Contract, the altered Work will be paid for as provided elsewhere in the Contract. The term
significant change shall be construed to apply only to the following circumstances:
A. When the character of the Work as altered differs materially in kind or nature from that
involved or included in the original proposed construction; or
B. When an item of Work, as defined elsewhere in the Contract, is increased in excess of
125 percent or decreased below 75 percent of the original Contract quantity. For the
purpose of this Section, an item of Work will be defined as any item that qualifies for
adjustment under the provisions of Section 1-04.6.
For item 1, an equitable adjustment for deleted Work will be made as provided in
Section 1-09.5.
For item 2, if the actual quantity of any item, exclusive of added or deleted amounts
included in agreed change orders, increases or decreases by more than 25 percent from the
original Plan quantity, the unit Contract prices for that item may be adjusted in accordance
with Section 1-04.6.
For any changes except item 1 (deleted Work) or item 2 (increasing or decreasing
quantities), the Engineer will determine if the change should be paid for at unit Contract
price(s). If the Engineer determines that the change increased or decreased the Contractor’s
costs or time to do any of the Work including unchanged Work, the Engineer will make an
equitable adjustment to the Contract. The equitable adjustment will be by agreement with

the Contractor. However, if the parties are unable to agree, the Engineer will determine the
amount of the equitable adjustment in accordance with Section 1-09.4 and adjust the time
as the Engineer deems appropriate. Extensions of time will be evaluated in accordance with
Section 1-08.8. The Engineer’s decision concerning equitable adjustment and extension of
time shall be final as provided in Section 1-05.1.
The Contractor shall proceed with the Work upon receiving:
1. A written change order approved by the Engineer, or
2. An oral order from the Engineer before actually receiving the written change order.
Within 14 calendar days of delivery of the change order the contractor shall endorse
and return the change order, request an extension of time for endorsement or respond in
accordance with Section 1-04.5. The Contracting Agency may unilaterally process the change
order if the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements. Changes normally noted on
field stakes or variations from estimated quantities, except as provided in subparagraph A or B
above, will not require a written change order. These changes shall be made at the unit prices
that apply. The Contractor shall respond immediately to changes shown on field stakes without
waiting for further notice.
The Contractor shall obtain written consent of the Surety or Sureties if the Engineer
requests such consent.
1-04.4(1) Minor Changes
Payments or credits for changes amounting to $25,000 or less may be made under the
Bid item “Minor Change”. At the discretion of the Contracting Agency, this procedure
for Minor Changes may be used in lieu of the more formal procedure as outlined in
Section 1-04.4, Changes.
The Contractor will be provided a copy of the completed order for Minor Change.
The agreement for the Minor Change will be documented by signature of the Contractor,
or notation of verbal agreement. If the Contractor is in disagreement with anything required
by the order for Minor Change, the Contractor may protest the order as provided in
Section 1-04.5.
Payments or credits will be determined in accordance with Section 1-09.4. For the purpose
of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an
amount for “Minor Change” in the Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor.
1-04.4(2) Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP)
1-04.4(2)A General
A VECP is a Contractor proposed change to the Contract Provisions which will accomplish
the projects functional requirements in a manner that is equal to or better than the requirements
in the Contract. The VECP may be: (1) at a less cost or time, or (2) either no cost savings or a
minor increase in cost with a reduction in Contract time. The net savings or added costs to the
Contract Work are shared by the Contractor and Contracting Agency.
The Contractor may submit a VECP for changing the Plans, Specifications, or other
requirements of the Contract. The Engineer’s decision to accept or reject all or part of the
proposal is final and not subject to arbitration under the arbitration clause or otherwise subject
to litigation.
The VECP shall meet all of the following:
1. Not adversely affect the long term life cycle costs.
2. Not adversely impact the ability to perform maintenance.
3. Provide the required safety and appearance.
4. Provide substitution for deleted or reduced Condition of Award Work, Apprentice
Utilization and Training.

VECPs that provide a time reduction shall meet the following requirements:
1. Time saving is a direct result of the VECP.
2. Liquidated damages penalties are not used to calculate savings.
3. Administrative/overhead cost savings experienced by either the Contractor or
Contracting Agency as a result of time reduction accrue to each party and are not used
to calculate savings.
1-04.4(2)B VECP Savings
1-04.4(2)B1 Proposal Savings
The incentive payment to the Contractor shall be one-half of the net savings of the proposal
calculated as follows:
1. (gross cost of deleted work) – (gross cost of added work) = (gross savings)
2. (gross savings) – (Contractor’s engineering costs) – (Contracting Agency’s costs) =
(net savings)
3. (net savings) / 2 = (incentive pay)
The Contracting Agency’s costs shall be the actual consultant costs billed to the
Contracting Agency and in-house costs. Costs for personnel assigned to the Engineer’s office
shall not be included.
1-04.4(2)B2 Added Costs to Achieve Time Savings
The cost to achieve the time savings shall be calculated as follows:
1. (cost of added work) + (Contractor’s engineering costs - Contracting Agency’s
engineering costs) = (cost to achieve time savings)
2. (cost to achieve time savings) / 2 = (Contracting Agency’s share of added cost)
If the timesaving proposal also involves deleting work and, as a result, creates a savings for
the Contracting Agency, then the Contractor shall also receive one-half of the savings realized
through the deletion.
1-04.4(2)C VECP Approval
1-04.4(2)C1 Concept Approval
The Contractor shall submit a written proposal to the Engineer for consideration.
The proposal shall contain the following information:
1. An explanation outlining the benefit provided by the change(s).
2. A narrative description of the proposed change(s). If applicable, the discussion shall
include a demonstration of functional equivalency or a description of how the proposal
meets the original contract scope of work.
3. A cost discussion estimating any net savings. Savings estimates will generally follow
the outline below under the section, “Proposal Savings”.
4. A statement providing the Contracting Agency with the right to use all or any part of the
proposal on future projects without future obligation or compensation.
5. A statement acknowledging and agreeing that the Engineer’s decision to accept or reject
all or part of the proposal is final and not subject to arbitration under the arbitration
clause or otherwise be subject to claims or disputes.
6. A statement giving the dates the Engineer must make a decision to accept or reject the
conceptual proposal, the date that approval to proceed must be received, and the date
the work must begin in order to not delay the contract. If the Contracting Agency does
not approve the VECP by the date specified by the Contractor in their proposal the
VECP will be deemed rejected.
7. The submittal will include an analysis on other Work that may have costs that changed
as a result of the VECP. Traffic control and erosion control shall both be included in
addition to any other impacted Work.

After review of the proposal, the Engineer will respond in writing with acceptance or
rejection of the concept. This acceptance shall not be construed as authority to proceed with
any change contract work. Concept approval allows the Contractor to proceed with the Work
needed to develop final plans and other information to receive formal approval and to support
preparation of a change order.
1-04.4(2)C2 Formal Approval
The Contractor’s submittal to the Engineer for formal approval shall include the following:
1. Deleted Work – Include the calculated quantities of unit price Work to be deleted.
Include the proposed partial prices for portions of lump sum Work deleted. For deletion
of force account items include the time and material estimates.
2. Added Work – Include the calculated quantities of unit price Work to be added, either
by original unit Contract prices or by new, negotiated unit prices. For new items of
Work include the quantities and proposed prices.
3. Contractor’s Engineering Costs – Submit the labor costs for the engineering to develop
the proposal; costs for Contractor employees utilized in contract operations on a regular
basis shall not be included.
4. Schedule Analysis – If the VECP is related to time savings, the Contractor shall submit
a partial progress schedule showing the changed Work. The submittal shall also include
a discussion comparing the partial progress schedule with the approved progress
schedule for the project.
5. Working Drawings – Type 3 Working Drawings shall be submitted; those drawings
which require engineering shall be a Type 3E.
Formal approval of the proposal will be documented by issuance of a change order.
The VECP change order will contain the following statements which the Contractor agrees
to by signing the change order:
1. The Contractor accepts design risk of all features, both temporary and permanent,
of the changed Work.
2. The Contractor accepts risk of constructability of the changed Work.
3. The Contractor provides the Contracting Agency with the right to use all or any part
of the proposal on future projects without further obligation or compensation.
VECP change orders will contain separate pay items for the items that are applicable to
the Proposal. These are as follows:
1. Deleted Work.
2. Added Work.
3. The Contractor’s engineering costs, reimbursed at 100 percent of the Contractor’s cost.
4. Incentive payment to the Contractor.
When added Work costs exceed Deleted Work costs, but time savings make a viable
proposal, then items 3 and 4 above are replaced with the following:
3. The Contracting Agency’s share of added cost to achieve time savings.
4. The Contractor’s share of savings from deleted Work.
1-04.4(2)C3 Authority to Proceed with Changed Work
The authority for the Contractor to proceed with the VECP Work will be provided by
one of the following options:
1. Execution of the VECP change order, or
2. At the Contractor’s request the Contracting Agency may provide approval by letter
from the Engineer for the Work to proceed prior to execution of a change order. All
of the risk for proceeding with the VECP shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Additionally, the following criteria are required to have been met:
a. Concept approval has been granted by the Contracting Agency.

b. All design reviews and approvals have been completed, including plans
and specifications.
c. The Contractor has guaranteed, in writing, the minimum savings to the
Contracting Agency.
1-04.5 Procedure and Protest by the Contractor
The Contractor accepts all requirements of a change order by: (1) endorsing it, (2) writing a
separate acceptance, (3) not responding within the allotted time as outlined in Section 1-04.4,
or (4) not protesting in the way this section provides. A change order that is not protested as
provided in this section shall be full payment and final settlement of all claims for Contract
time and for all costs of any kind, including costs of delays, related to any Work either covered
or affected by the change. By not protesting as this section provides, the Contractor also
waives any additional entitlement and accepts from the Engineer any written or oral order
(including directions, instructions, interpretations, and determinations).
If in disagreement with anything required in a change order, another written order, or
an oral order from the Engineer, including any direction, instruction, interpretation, or
determination by the Engineer, the Contractor shall:
1. Immediately give a signed written notice of protest to the Engineer or the Engineer’s
field Inspectors before doing the Work;
2. Supplement the written protest within 14 calendar days with a written statement and
supporting documents providing the following:
a. The date and nature of the protested order, direction, instruction, interpretation
or determination;
b. A full discussion of the circumstances which caused the protest, including names
of persons involved, time, duration and nature of the Work involved, and a review
of the Plans and Contract Provisions referenced to support the protest;
c. The estimated dollar cost, if any, of the protested Work and a detailed breakdown
showing how that estimate was determined;
d. An analysis of the progress schedule showing the schedule change or disruption
if the Contractor is asserting a schedule change or disruption; and
e. If the protest is continuing, the information required above shall be supplemented
upon request by the Engineer until the protest is resolved.
Throughout any protested Work, the Contractor shall keep complete records of extra costs
and time incurred. The Contractor shall permit the Engineer access to these and any other
records related to the protested Work as determined by the Engineer.
The Engineer will evaluate all protests provided the procedures in this section are followed.
If the Engineer determines that a protest is valid, the Engineer will adjust payment for Work
or time by an equitable adjustment in accordance with Section 1-09.4. Extensions of time
will be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-08.8. No adjustment will be made for an
invalid protest.
If the Engineer determines that the protest is invalid, that determination and the reasons
for it will be provided in writing to the Contractor. The determination will be provided within
14 calendar days after receipt of the Contractor’s supplemental written statement (including
any additional information requested by the Engineer to support a continuing protest)
described in item 2 above.
If the Contractor does not accept the Engineer’s determination then the Contractor shall
pursue the dispute and claims procedures set forth in Section 1-09.11. In spite of any protest
or dispute, the Contractor shall proceed promptly with the Work as the Engineer orders.
By failing to follow the procedures of Sections 1-04.5 and 1-09.11, the Contractor
completely waives any claims for protested Work.

1-04.6 Variation in Estimated Quantities

Payment to the Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of Work performed
and accepted in conformance with the Contract. When the accepted quantity of Work
performed under a unit item varies from the original Proposal quantity, payment will be at
the unit Contract price for all Work unless the total accepted quantity of any Contract item,
adjusted to exclude added or deleted amounts included in change orders accepted by both
parties, increases or decreases by more than 25 percent from the original Proposal quantity.
In that case, payment for Contract Work may be adjusted as described herein.
The adjusted final quantity shall be determined by starting with the final accepted quantity
measured after all Work under an item has been completed. From this amount, subtract any
quantities included in additive change orders accepted by both parties. Then, to the resulting
amount, add any quantities included in deductive change orders accepted by both parties.
The final result of this calculation shall become the adjusted final quantity and the basis for
comparison to the original Proposal quantity.
1. Increased Quantities – Either party to the Contract will be entitled to renegotiate the
price for that portion of the adjusted final quantity in excess of 1.25 times the original
Proposal quantity. The price for excessive increased quantities will be determined by
agreement of the parties, or, where the parties cannot agree, the price will be determined
by the Engineer based upon the actual costs to perform the Work, including reasonable
markup for overhead and profit.
2. Decreased Quantities – Either party to the Contract will be entitled to an equitable
adjustment if the adjusted final quantity of Work performed is less than 75 percent of
the original Bid quantity. The equitable adjustment shall be based upon and limited to
three factors:
a. Any increase or decrease in unit costs of labor, materials or equipment, utilized for
Work actually performed, resulting solely from the reduction in quantity;
b. Changes in production rates or methods of performing Work actually done to the
extent that the nature of the Work actually performed differs from the nature of the
Work included in the original plan; and
c. An adjustment for the anticipated contribution to unavoidable fixed cost and
overhead from the units representing the difference between the adjusted final
quantity and 75 percent of the original Plan quantity.
The following limitations shall apply to renegotiated prices for increases and/or equitable
adjustments for decreases:
1. The equipment rates shall be actual cost but shall not exceed the rates set forth in the
AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement (referred to in Section 1-09.6) that is in
effect at the time the Work is performed.
2. No payment will be made for extended or unabsorbed home office overhead and field
overhead expenses to the extent that there is an unbalanced allocation of such expenses
among the Contract Bid items.
3. No payment for consequential damages or loss of anticipated profits will be allowed
because of any variance in quantities from those originally shown in the Proposal form,
Contract Provisions, and Contract Plans.
4. The total payment (including the adjustment amount and unit prices for Work
performed) for any item that experiences an equitable adjustment for decreased quantity
shall not exceed 75 percent of the amount originally Bid for the item.
If the adjusted final quantity of any item does not vary from the quantity shown in the
Proposal by more than 25 percent, then the Contractor and the Contracting Agency agree that
all Work under that item will be performed at the original Contract unit price.
When ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall proceed with the Work pending
determination of the cost or time adjustment for the variation in quantities.

The Contractor and the Contracting Agency agree that there will be no cost adjustment for
decreases if the Contracting Agency has entered the amount for the item in the Proposal form
only to provide a common Proposal for Bidders.
1-04.7 Differing Site Conditions (Changed Conditions)
During the progress of the Work, if preexisting subsurface or latent physical conditions
are encountered at the site, differing materially from those indicated in the Contract, or if
preexisting unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, differing materially from those
ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in the Work provided for in the
Contract, are encountered at the site, the party discovering such conditions shall promptly
notify the other party in writing of the specific differing site conditions before they are
disturbed and before the affected Work is performed.
Upon written notification, the Engineer will investigate the conditions and if he/she
determines that the conditions materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the
cost or time required for the performance of any Work under the Contract, an adjustment,
excluding loss of anticipated profits, will be made and the Contract modified in writing
accordingly. The Engineer will notify the Contractor of his/her determination whether or
not an adjustment of the Contract is warranted.
No Contract adjustment which results in a benefit to the Contractor will be allowed unless
the Contractor has provided the required written notice.
The equitable adjustment will be by agreement with the Contractor. However, if the parties
are unable to agree, the Engineer will determine the amount of the equitable adjustment in
accordance with Section 1-09.4. Extensions of time will be evaluated in accordance with
Section 1-08.8.
If the Engineer determines that different site conditions do not exist and no adjustment
in costs or time is warranted, such determination shall be final as provided in Section 1-05.1.
If there is a decrease in the costs or time required to perform the Work, failure of
the Contractor to notify the Engineer of the differing site conditions shall not affect the
Contracting Agency’s right to make an adjustment in the costs or time.
No claim by the Contractor shall be allowed unless the Contractor has followed the
procedures provided in Sections 1-04.5 and 1-09.11.
1-04.8 Progress Estimates and Payments
Engineer-issued progress estimates or payments for any part of the Work shall not be used
as evidence of performance or quantities. Progress estimates serve only as basis for partial
payments. The Engineer may revise progress estimates any time before final acceptance.
If the Engineer deems it proper to do so, changes may be made in progress estimates and in
the final estimate.
1-04.9 Use of Buildings or Structures
The Engineer will decide whether any building or Structure on the Right of Way may
remain during the Work and whether the Contractor may use such a building or Structure.
1-04.10 Use of Materials Found on the Project
With the Engineer’s written approval, the Contractor may use on the project: stone, gravel,
sand, other materials from on-site excavation, or timbers removed in the course of the Work.
Approval will not be granted if:
1. The excavated materials or timber fail to meet Contract requirements;
2. The excavated materials or timber are required for other use under the Contract;
3. The excavated materials are required for use as Selected Materials under Section
2-03.3(10); or
4. Such use is not in the best interests of the Contracting Agency as determined by the
Engineer, whose decision shall be final as provided in Section 1-05.1.

Any material disturbed by, but not used in, the Work shall be disposed of as provided
elsewhere in the Contract or as ordered by the Engineer in accordance with Section 1-04.4.
1-04.11 Final Cleanup
The Contractor shall perform final cleanup as provided in this section to the Engineer’s
satisfaction. The Engineer will not establish the Physical Completion Date until this is done.
The Highway Right of Way, material sites, and all ground the Contractor occupied to do the
Work shall be left neat and presentable. The Contractor shall:
1. Remove all rubbish, surplus materials, discarded materials, falsework, camp buildings,
temporary structures, equipment, and debris; and
2. Deposit in embankments, or remove from the project, all unneeded, oversized rock
left from grading, surfacing, or paving.
The Contractor shall not remove warning, regulatory, or guide signs unless the
Engineer approves.

1-05 Control of Work

1-05.1 Authority of the Engineer
The Engineer shall be satisfied that all the Work is being done in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract. The Contract and Specifications give the Engineer authority
over the Work. Whenever it is so provided in this Contract, the decision of the Engineer
shall be final: provided, however, that if an action is brought within the time allowed in
this Contract challenging the Engineer’s decision, that decision shall be subject to the
scope of judicial review provided in such cases under Washington case law.
The Engineer’s decisions will be final on all questions including the following:
1. Quality and acceptability of materials and Work,
2. Measurement of unit price Work,
3. Acceptability of rates of progress on the Work,
4. Interpretation of Plans and Specifications,
5. Determination as to the existence of changed or differing site conditions,
6. Fulfillment of the Contract by the Contractor,
7. Payments under the Contract including equitable adjustment,
8. Suspension(s) of Work,
9. Termination of the Contract for default or public convenience,
10. Determination as to unworkable days, and
11. Approval of Working Drawings.
The Engineer represents the Contracting Agency with full authority to enforce Contract
requirements. If the Contractor fails to respond promptly to the requirements of the Contract
or orders from the Engineer:
1. The Engineer may use Contracting Agency resources, other contractors, or other means
to accomplish the Work; and
2. The Contracting Agency will not be obligated to pay the Contractor, and will deduct
from the Contractor’s payments any costs that result when any other means are used
to carry out the Contract requirements or Engineer’s orders.
At the Contractor’s risk, the Engineer may suspend all or part of the Work according to
Section 1-08.6.
Nothing in these Specifications or in the Contract requires the Engineer to provide the
Contractor with direction or advice on how to do the Work. If the Engineer approves or
recommends any method or manner for doing the Work or producing materials, the approval
or recommendation shall not:
1. Guarantee that following the method or manner will result in compliance with
the Contract,
2. Relieve the Contractor of any risks or obligations under the Contract, or
3. Create any Contracting Agency liability.
1-05.2 Authority of Assistants and Inspectors
The Engineer may appoint assistants and Inspectors to assist in determining that the Work
and materials meet the Contract requirements. Assistants and Inspectors have the authority to
reject defective material and suspend Work that is being done improperly, subject to the final
decisions of the Engineer.
Assistants and Inspectors are not authorized to accept Work, to accept materials, to issue
instructions, or to give advice that is contrary to the Contract. Work done or material furnished
which does not meet the Contract requirements shall be at the Contractor’s risk and shall not
be a basis for a claim even if the Inspectors or assistants purport to change the Contract.

Control of Work 1-05
Assistants and Inspectors may advise the Contractor of any faulty Work or materials
or infringements of the terms of the Contract; however, failure of the Engineer or the assistants
or Inspectors to advise the Contractor does not constitute acceptance or approval.
1-05.3 Working Drawings
The Contract may require the Contractor to submit Working Drawings for the performance
of the work. Working Drawings shall be submitted by the Contractor electronically to the
Engineer in PDF format; drawing details shall be prepared in accordance with conventional
detailing practices. If the PDF format is found to be unacceptable, at the request of the
Engineer, the Contractor shall provide paper copies of the Working Drawings with drawings
on 11 by 17 inch sheets and calculations/text on 8½ by 11 inch sheets.
Working Drawings will be classified under the following categories:
1. Type 1 – Submitted for Contracting Agency information. Submittal must be received
by the Contracting Agency a minimum of 7 calendar days before Work represented
by the submittal begins.
2. Type 2 – Submitted for Contracting Agency review and comment. Unless otherwise
stated in the Contract, the Engineer will require up to 20 calendar days from the date
the Working Drawing is received until it is returned to the Contractor. The Contractor
shall not proceed with the Work represented by the Working Drawing until comments
from the Engineer have been addressed.
3. Type 2E – Same as a Type 2 Working Drawing with Engineering as described below.
4. Type 3 – Submitted for Contracting Agency review and approval. Unless otherwise
stated in the Contract, the Engineer will require up to 30 calendar days from the date
the Working Drawing is received until it is returned to the Contractor. The Contractor
shall obtain the Engineer’s written approval before proceeding with the Work
represented by the Working Drawing.
5. Type 3E – Same as a Type 3 Working Drawing with Engineering as described below.
All Working Drawings shall be considered Type 3 Working Drawings except as specifically
noted otherwise in the Contract. Unless designated otherwise by the Contractor, submittals
of Working Drawings will be reviewed in the order they are received by the Engineer. In the
event that several Working Drawings are received simultaneously, the Contractor shall specify
the sequence in which they are to be reviewed. If the Contractor does not submit a review
sequence for simultaneous Working Drawing submittals, the review sequence will be at the
Engineer’s discretion.
Working Drawings requiring Engineering, Type 2E and 3E, shall be prepared by (or under
the direction of) a Professional Engineer, licensed under Title 18 RCW, State of Washington,
and in accordance with WAC 196-23-020. Design calculations shall carry the Professional
Engineer’s signature and seal, date of signature, and registration number on the cover page.
The cover page shall also include the Contract number, Contract title and sequential index
to calculation page numbers.
If more than the specified number of calendar days is required for the Engineer’s review
of any individual Working Drawing or resubmittal, an extension of time will be considered
in accordance with Section 1-08.8.
Review or approval of Working Drawings shall neither confer upon the Contracting
Agency nor relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for the accuracy of the drawings
or their conformity with the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all risk and all costs of any
Work delays caused by rejection or nonapproval of Working Drawings.
Unit Bid prices shall cover all costs of Working Drawings.
1-05.4 Conformity With and Deviations From Plans and Stakes
The Special Provisions may require that the Contractor be contractually responsible for
part or all of the project surveying. For survey requirements not the responsibility of the
Contractor, the Engineer will lay out and set construction stakes and marks needed to establish

the lines, grades, slopes, cross-sections, and curve superelevations. These stakes and marks
will govern the Contractor’s Work. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for detailed
dimensions, elevations, and slopes measured from them.
All Work performed shall be in conformity with the lines, grades, slopes, cross-sections,
superelevation data, and dimensions as shown in the Plans, or as staked. If the Plans, Special
Provisions, or these Specifications, state specific tolerances, then the Work shall be performed
within those limits. The Engineer’s decision on whether the Work is in conformity shall be
final, as provided in Section 1-05.1.
The Contractor shall not deviate from the approved Plans and Working Drawings unless
the Engineer approves in writing.
When the Contracting Agency is responsible for roadway surveying, and the Contractor
trims the Subgrade with an automatic machine guided by reference lines, the Engineer will
set control stakes for line and grade only once after grading is complete. To gain better control
with unusual pavement widths or for other reasons, the Engineer may set more control stakes
without added cost to the Contractor. The Contractor shall set reference lines from these
control stakes for trimming Subgrade, for surfacing, and for controlling the paving machines.
The Contractor shall work to preserve stakes, marks, and monuments set by the Engineer.
The Contracting Agency will deduct from payments due the Contractor all costs to replace
such stakes, marks, and monuments carelessly or willfully damaged or destroyed by the
Contractor’s operation.
The Contractor shall provide enough safe areas to permit the Engineer to set those points
and elevations that are the responsibility of the Contracting Agency and to perform random
checks of the surveying performed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall keep the Engineer informed of staking requirements to provide the
Engineer with adequate time to set the stakes for which the Contracting Agency is responsible.
Contractor requests for stakes shall be made at least 3 working days before the Engineer needs
to begin the staking operation.
1-05.5 Vacant
1-05.6 Inspection of Work and Materials
The Engineer may inspect all Work and materials for conformity with Contract terms.
To ensure the Engineer’s safety and access during these inspections, the Contractor shall
provide any equipment needed, such as walkways, railings, ladders, and platforms.
When the Engineer requests, the Contractor shall (without charge) provide samples of
materials used or to be used in the Work. If the Contractor uses materials tested and approved
for one project in an unrelated project, the Contracting Agency may deduct its testing and
inspection costs from payments due the Contractor. The Engineer may order the Contractor
to remove and replace, and bear the cost of doing so, any materials used without inspection.
Any inspections, tests, measurements, or other actions by Contracting Agency employees
serve only one purpose: to assure the Engineer that Work, materials, progress rate, and
quantities comply with Contract terms. Such work by Contracting Agency employees shall not
relieve the Contractor from doing any Contract-assigned Work or from determining whether
Contract requirements are being met. The Contractor shall correct any substandard Work or
materials. The Engineer will reject unsuitable Work or materials even though inspected or
paid for in a progress estimate.
If the Engineer requests, then the Contractor shall remove or uncover any area of the
completed Work. After the Engineer inspects it, the Contractor shall restore the area to the
standard the Contract requires. The Contractor shall bear the cost of uncovering, removing,
and restoring the exposed Work: (a) if it proves unacceptable, or (b) if it was placed without
authority or without due notice to the Engineer. The Contracting Agency will pay these costs
by agreed price or by force account if the Work proves to be acceptable and the Contractor
had performed the original Work with the authority of and due notice to the Engineer.

The Contractor, if advised to do so by the Engineer, shall permit representatives from

other agencies to inspect the Work when it is to be done:
1. On any railroad, utility, or facility of a public agency; or
2. To the satisfaction of any federal, state, or municipal agency.
In any crushing or screening operation, the Contractor shall provide and install a
mechanical sampler that:
1. Is automatic or semi-automatic;
2. Can safely and easily obtain representative samples of the materials being produced;
3. Can convey the samples to ground level in Contracting Agency-provided sacks;
4. Moves at an even rate through the full width of the materials stream falling from the
discharge end of the belt, gate, or chute;
5. Is power driven during the material intercept cycle; and
6. Can be adjusted to take samples of about 100 pounds as often as the Engineer requires.
No material from the crushing or screen operation will be accepted until after the Engineer
has approved the design and operation of the sampling equipment. The Contractor shall bear
all costs of providing the sampling equipment, the power to operate it, and the space for
its use.
1-05.7 Removal of Defective and Unauthorized Work
The Contracting Agency will not pay for unauthorized or defective Work. Unauthorized or
defective Work includes: Work and materials that do not conform to Contract requirements;
Work done beyond the lines and grades set by the Plans or the Engineer; and extra Work
and materials furnished without the Engineer’s written approval. At the Engineer’s order,
the Contractor shall immediately remedy, remove, replace, or dispose of unauthorized or
defective Work or materials and bear all costs of doing so.
1-05.8 Vacant
1-05.9 Equipment
At the Engineer’s request, the Contractor shall provide an operating and maintenance
manual for each model or type of mixing, placing, or processing equipment before using
it in the Work. The Contractor shall also provide test instruments to confirm whether the
equipment meets operating requirements, such as vibration rate, revolutions-per-minute,
or any other requirements.
The Contract may require automatically controlled equipment for some operations. If the
automatic controls on such equipment fail, then the Contractor may operate the equipment
manually for the remainder of that normal working day, provided the method of operation
produces results otherwise meeting the Specifications. Continued operation of the equipment
manually beyond this working day will be permitted only by specific authorization of
the Engineer.
The Engineer will reject equipment that repeatedly breaks down or fails to produce results
within the required tolerances. The Contractor shall have no claim for additional payment or
for extension of time due to rejection and replacement of any equipment.
1-05.10 Guarantees
The Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Agency any guarantee or warranty
furnished as a customary trade practice in connection with the purchase of any equipment,
materials, or items incorporated into the project.
1-05.11 Final Inspection
The Engineer will not make the final inspection until the physical Work required by
the Contract, including final cleanup and all extra Work ordered by the Engineer, has been
completed. The Physical Completion Date for the Contract will be determined as provided
in Section 1-08.5.

1-05.12 Final Acceptance

The Contractor must perform all the obligations under the Contract before a Completion
Date and final acceptance can occur. Failure of the Contractor to perform all the obligations
under the Contract shall not bar the Contracting Agency from unilaterally accepting the
Contract as provided in Section 1-09.9. The Secretary accepts the completed Contract and
the items of Work shown in the final estimate by signature of the Final Contract Voucher
Certification. The date of that signature constitutes the acceptance date. Progress estimates
or payments shall not be construed as acceptance of any Work under the Contract.
The Contractor agrees that neither completion nor final acceptance shall relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility to indemnify, defend, and protect the Contracting Agency
against any claim or loss resulting from the failure of the Contractor (or the Subcontractors
or lower tier subcontractors) to pay all laborers, mechanics, Subcontractors, materialpersons,
or any other person who provides labor, supplies, or provisions for carrying out the Work
or for any payments required for unemployment compensation under Title 50 RCW or for
industrial insurance and medical aid required under Title 51 RCW.
Final acceptance shall not constitute acceptance of any unauthorized or defective work
or material. The Contracting Agency shall not be barred from requiring the Contractor to
remove, replace, repair, or dispose of any unauthorized or defective work or material or
from recovering damages for any such work or material.
1-05.13 Superintendents, Labor, and Equipment of Contractor
At all times, the Contractor shall keep at the Work site a set of the Plans, Specifications,
Special Provisions, and Addenda. The Contractor shall devote the attention required to make
reasonable progress on the Work and shall cooperate fully with the Engineer and Inspectors.
Either the Contractor in person or an authorized representative shall remain on site
whenever the Work is underway. Before the Work begins, the Contractor shall name in writing
an experienced superintendent who understands the Contract and is able to supervise the
Work. This superintendent shall have full authority to represent and act for the Contractor. Any
superintendent who repeatedly fails to follow the Engineer’s written or oral orders, directions,
instructions, or determinations, shall be subject to removal from the project. Upon the written
request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall immediately remove such superintendent and
name a replacement in writing.
Competent supervisors experienced in the task being performed shall continuously oversee
the Contract Work. At the Engineer’s written request, the Contractor shall immediately remove
and replace any incompetent, careless, or negligent employee.
Noncompliance with the Engineer’s request to remove and replace personnel at any level
shall be grounds for terminating the Contract under the terms of Section 1-08.10.
The Contractor shall keep all machinery and equipment in good, workable condition.
It shall be adequate for its purpose and used by competent operators.
The Engineer will rate the Contractor’s performance and Contract compliance in
these categories:
1. Progress of Work,
2. Quality of Work,
3. Equipment,
4. Administration/Management/Supervision, and
5. Coordination and Control of Subcontractors.
Whenever the Contracting Agency evaluates the Contractor’s prequalification under
RCW 47.28.070, it will take these reports into account.

1-05.13(1) Emergency Contact List

The Contractor shall submit an Emergency Contact List to the Engineer no later than
5 calendar days after the date the Contract is executed. The list shall include, at a minimum,
the Prime Contractor’s Project Manager, or equivalent, the Prime Contractor’s Project
Superintendent, the Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Lead, and the Traffic Control
Supervisor. The list shall identify a representative with delegated authority to act as the
emergency contact on behalf of the Prime Contractor and include one or more alternates.
The emergency contact shall be available upon the Engineer’s request at other than normal
working hours. The Emergency Contact List shall include 24-hour telephone numbers for
all individuals identified as emergency contacts or alternates.
1-05.14 Cooperation With Other Contractors
The Contracting Agency may perform other work at or near the site, including any
material site, with other forces than those of the Contractor. This work may be done with
or without a contract. If such work takes place within or next to this project, the Contractor
shall cooperate with all other contractors or forces. The Contractor shall carry out Work
under this project in a way that will minimize interference and delay for all forces involved.
The Engineer will resolve any disagreements that may arise among the contractors or the
Contractor and the Contracting Agency over the method or order of doing the Work. The
Engineer’s decision in these matters shall be final, as provided in Section 1-05.1.
The coordination of the Work shall be taken into account by the Contractor as part of the
site investigation in accordance with Section 1-02.4 and any resulting costs shall be incidental
and included within the unit Bid prices in the Contract.
1-05.15 Method of Serving Notices
Any written notice to the Contractor required under these Specifications may be served
on the Contractor either personally or by mailing or by delivery to the last post office address
known to the Engineer.
All correspondence from the Contractor shall be directed to the Engineer.

1-06 Control of Material

1-06.1 Approval of Materials Prior to Use
Prior to use, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of all proposed materials.
The Contractor shall use the Qualified Product List (QPL), the Aggregate Source Approval
(ASA) Database, or the Request for Approval of Material (RAM) form.
All equipment, materials, and articles incorporated into the permanent Work:
1. Shall be new, unless the Special Provisions or Standard Specifications permit otherwise;
2. Shall meet the requirements of the Contract and be approved by the Engineer;
3. May be inspected or tested at any time during their preparation and use; and
4. Shall not be used in the Work if they become unfit after being previously approved.
1-06.1(1) Qualified Products List (QPL)
The QPL is a listing of manufactured products that have been evaluated and determined
suitable for use in Highway construction.
If the Contractor elects to use the QPL, the most current list available at the time the
product is proposed for use, shall be used. The QPL submittal shall be prepared by the
Contractor in accordance with the instructions in the QPL and submitted to the Engineer
prior to use.
The QPL identifies the approved products, the applicable Specification Section, and the
basis for acceptance at the project level. The listing is divided into two categories, “Approved”
and “Conditionally Approved”. “Approved” products are denoted with an “A”. Those products
may be accepted without additional sampling. “Conditionally Approved” products are denoted
with a “CA”. The acceptance and use of these products is based upon additional job sampling
and/or documentation. All additional acceptance actions need to be completed prior to the
material being incorporated into the Work.
The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the intended items for use from the QPL by
reference to the Contract Bid item.
The use of listed products shall be restricted to the Standard Specification for which they
are listed and fulfillment of the acceptance requirement defined in the QPL. Qualified products
not conforming to the Specifications, not fulfilling the acceptance requirements, or improperly
handled or installed, shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
To qualify for continued listing on the QPL, products may be sampled and tested for
conformance to the Standard Specifications. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to
make revisions to the QPL at any time.
If there is a conflict between the QPL and the Contract, the provisions of the Contract
shall take precedence over the QPL.
The current QPL can be accessed online at www.wsdot.wa.gov/business/materialslab/QPL.htm.
1-06.1(2) Request for Approval of Material (RAM)
The RAM shall be used when the Contractor elects not to use the QPL or the material
is not listed in the QPL. The RAM shall be prepared by the Contractor in accordance with the
instructions on Form 350-071 and submitted to the Engineer for approval before the material
is incorporated into the Work.
Approval of the material does not constitute acceptance of the material for incorporation
into the Work.
Additional acceptance actions as noted on the RAM need to be completed prior to the
materials being incorporated into the Work.
When requesting approval of an item that requires fabrication, both the fabricator and
the manufacturer of the base material shall be identified on the RAM.

Control of Material 1-06
1-06.1(3) Aggregate Source Approval (ASA) Database

The ASA is a database containing the results of WSDOT preliminary testing of aggregate
sources. This database is used by the Contracting Agency to indicate the approval status
of these aggregate sources for applications that require preliminary testing as defined in
the Contract. The ASA ‘Aggregate Source Approval Report’ identifies the currently approved
applications for each aggregate source listed. The acceptance and use of these aggregates
is contingent upon additional job sampling and/or documentation. The ASA database can
be accessed online at the agency website.
Aggregates approved for applications on the ASA ‘Aggregate Source Approval Report’ not
conforming to the Specifications, not fulfilling the acceptance requirements, or improperly
handled or installed, shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
Aggregate materials that are not approved for use in the ASA data base may be sampled
and tested by the Agency, for a specified use on a project, from the source or from a processed
stockpile of the material and all cost for the sampling and testing will be deducted from
the Contract.
The Contractor agrees to authorize the Engineer to deduct the sampling and testing costs
from any money due or coming due to the Contractor.
1-06.1(4) Fabrication Inspection Expense
In the event the Contractor elects to have items fabricated beyond 300 miles from Seattle,
Washington, the Contracting Agency will deduct from monies due or that may become due to
the Contractor all costs to perform plant approval and fabrication acceptance inspection for
the items listed in Table 1 and costs for initial plant approval for items listed in Table 2. Plants
currently listed on the QPL for the items shown in Table 1 and Table 2 in this section do not
require plant approval.
Table 1
Items Requiring Plant Approval and Fabrication Acceptance Inspection
• Anchor Bolts (ASTM A449 & F1554 Grade 105) • Precast Concrete Traffic Barrier
• Bridge Bearings (Cylindrical, Disc, Fabric Pad, Low • Precast Concrete Vaults (Electrical, Utility,
Rise, Pin, Pendulum, and Spherical) Drainage, etc.)
• Cattle Guards • Precast Concrete Girders and Precast
• Coated Piling and Casing Bridge Components
• Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel • Prestressed Concrete Girders
• Fabricated/Welded Miscellaneous Metal Drainage • Prestressed Concrete Panels
Items: Grate Inlets, and Drop Inlets • Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts
• Longitudinal Seismic Restrainers • Precast Reinforced Concrete Split Box Culverts
• Metal Bridge Railing and Handrail • Precast Reinforced Concrete Three Sided Structures
• Metal Castings for Concrete Drainage, electrical, and • Prestressed Concrete Piles
Utility Items • Retrofit Guardrail Posts with Welded Base Plates
• Modular Expansion Joints • Signal Standards
• Paint & Powder Coating Facilities for Table 1 items • Signing Material
• Precast Concrete Bridge Deck Panels • Sign Structures – Cantilever, Sign Bridge, and Bridge
• Precast Concrete Catch Basins, Manholes, Inlets, Mounted, Roadside Type PLT/PLU
Drywells, and Risers • Soldier Piles
• Precast Concrete Drain, Perforated Underdrain, • Steel Bridges and Steel Bridge Components
Culvert, Storm Sewer, and Sanitary Sewer Pipe • Steel Column Jackets
• Precast Concrete Floor Panels • Steel Light Standards, and High Mast Light Poles
• Precast Concrete Junction Boxes, Pull Boxes, • Strip Seal Expansion Joints
Cable Vaults • Structural Steel for Ferry Terminal Berthing, Pedestrian
• Precast Concrete Marine Pier Deck Panels and Vehicle Loading Structures
• Precast Concrete Pier Caps • Timber Bridges
• Precast Concrete Retaining Walls, including • Treated Timber and Lumber 6 inch by 6 inch or larger
Lagging Panels • Welded Structural Steel (Miscellaneous)
• Precast Concrete Roof Panels
• Precast Concrete Structural Earth Walls, Noise Barrier
Walls, Wall Panels, and Wall Stem Panels

Table 2
Items Requiring Initial Plant Approval Only
• Epoxy Coating of Dowels and Tiebars for • Precast Concrete Blocks for Structural Earth Walls
Concrete Pavement • Steel Pipe Piling
• Guardrail Posts and Blocks
The deductions for fabrication inspection costs will be as shown in the Payment
Table below.
Zone Place of Fabrication or Inspection Site Reduction in Payment
1 Within 300 airline miles from Seattle None*
2 Between 300 and 3,000 airline miles from Seattle $700.00 per inspection day**
3 Over 3,000 airline miles from Seattle $1,000 per inspection day,**
but not less than $2,500 per trip
*Fabrication inspection expense does not apply for initial acceptance inspection in Zone 1. Re-inspection of items due to
unacceptable workmanship or scheduling errors made by the Contractor, fabricator, or facility applying protective coatings will be
assessed at $60.00 per hour but not less than $120.00 per inspection.
**An inspection day includes any calendar day or portion of a calendar day spent by one inspector inspecting, on standby, or
traveling to and from, a place of fabrication. An additional cost per inspection day will be assessed for each additional inspector.
Reimbursement will be assessed at $280.00 per day for weekends and holidays for each on site inspector in travel status, but not
engaged in inspection or travel activities when fabrication activities are not taking place.
Where fabrication of an item takes place in more than one zone, the reduction in payment
will be computed on the basis of the entire item being fabricated in the farthest of zones where
any fabrication takes place on that item.
The rates for Zones 2 and 3 shall be applied for the full duration of time for all fabrication
inspection activities, to include, but not be limited to: plant approvals, prefabrication meetings,
fabrication, coatings, and final inspection. When an inspection is for more than one Contract
the fabrication inspection costs shall be prorated as determined by the Engineer.
1-06.2 Acceptance of Materials
1-06.2(1) Samples and Tests for Acceptance
The Contractor shall deliver representative samples (from the Contractor, Producer,
or Fabricator) to the Engineer without charge before incorporating material into the Work.
In providing samples, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with sufficient time and
quantities for testing before use. The Engineer may require samples at any time. Samples
not taken by or in the presence of the Engineer will not be accepted for test, unless the
Engineer permits otherwise.
The Contractor shall designate specific Contractor employees as points of contact for
concrete testing and acceptance. Alternates shall be designated to ensure that direct contact
is maintained during concrete placement. If designated by the Contractor to the Engineer,
the concrete supplier will receive all 28-day concrete strength test results.
The Engineer will designate specific Contracting Agency employees as points of contact
for concrete testing and acceptance.
The Contractor may observe any of the sampling and testing performed by the
Engineer. If the Contractor observes a deviation from the specified sampling and testing
procedures, the Contractor shall verbally describe the deviations observed to the Engineer
or designated representative immediately, and shall confirm these observed deviations in
writing to the Engineer within 24 hours, referencing the specific procedures and steps. The
Engineer will respond in writing within 3 working days of the receipt of the Contractor’s
written communications.

All field and Laboratory materials testing by the Engineer will follow methods described
in Contract documents, or in the WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01, using qualified testing
personnel and calibrated or verified equipment. The standard or tentative standard in effect
on the Bid advertising date will apply in each case.
Revisions to the WSDOT Materials Manual M 46‑01 or revisions to other Specifications
or test methods such as AASHTO, ASTM, or Federal Specifications will be considered as in
effect 60 calendar days after publication.
1-06.2(2) Statistical Evaluation of Materials for Acceptance
1-06.2(2)A General
Where specified, acceptance sampling and testing will be performed by the Contracting
Agency and statistically evaluated for acceptance by the provisions of this Subsection.
All test results for a lot will be analyzed collectively and statistically by the quality level
analysis procedures shown at the end of this Subsection to determine the total percent of
the lot that is within Specification limits and to determine an appropriate pay factor. Lots
and sublots are defined in the appropriate Subsection of these Specifications for the material
being statistically evaluated.
Quality level analysis is a statistical procedure for determining the percent compliance
of the material with these Specifications. Quality level is the computed percent of material
meeting these Specifications and is determined from the arithmetic mean, (Xm), and the
sample standard deviation (S), for each constituent of the lot.
Any necessary rounding off of test results or calculations will be accomplished according
to the individual testing procedure, or, if not defined in the procedure then accomplished
according to the following rule:
1. The final significant digit will not be changed when the succeeding digit is less than 5.
2. The final significant digit will be increased by one when the succeeding digit is 5
or greater.

Table 1
Estimated percent of Work Within Specification Limits
Estimated Upper Quality Index QU or Lower Quality Index QL
percent Within
Specification n=10 n=12 n=15 n=18 n=23 n=30 n=43 n=67
Limits to to to to to to to to
(PU or PL) n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 n=11 n=14 n=17 n=22 n=29 n=42 n=66 ∞
100 1.16 1.49 1.72 1.88 1.99 2.07 2.13 2.20 2.28 2.34 2.39 2.44 2.48 2.51 2.56
99 1.46 1.64 1.75 1.82 1.88 1.91 1.96 2.01 2.04 2.07 2.09 2.12 2.14 2.16
98 1.43 1.58 1.66 1.72 1.75 1.78 1.81 1.84 1.87 1.89 1.91 1.93 1.94 1.95
97 1.15 1.40 1.52 1.59 1.63 1.66 1.68 1.71 1.73 1.75 1.76 1.78 1.79 1.80 1.81
96 1.37 1.47 1.52 1.56 1.58 1.60 1.62 1.64 1.65 1.66 1.67 1.68 1.69 1.70
95 1.14 1.34 1.42 1.47 1.49 1.51 1.52 1.54 1.55 1.56 1.57 1.58 1.59 1.59 1.60
94 1.31 1.38 1.41 1.43 1.45 1.46 1.47 1.48 1.49 1.50 1.50 1.51 1.51 1.52
93 1.13 1.28 1.33 1.36 1.38 1.39 1.40 1.41 1.41 1.42 1.43 1.43 1.44 1.44 1.44
92 1.12 1.25 1.29 1.31 1.33 1.33 1.34 1.35 1.35 1.36 1.36 1.37 1.37 1.37 1.38
91 1.11 1.22 1.25 1.27 1.28 1.28 1.29 1.29 1.30 1.30 1.30 1.31 1.31 1.31 1.31
90 1.10 1.19 1.21 1.23 1.23 1.24 1.24 1.24 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.26 1.26
89 1.09 1.16 1.18 1.18 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.19 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20 1.20
88 1.07 1.13 1.14 1.14 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15 1.15
87 1.06 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.10 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11 1.11
86 1.04 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06
85 1.03 1.04 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.03 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02 1.02
84 1.01 1.01 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
83 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
82 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
81 0.95 0.92 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.87
80 0.93 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83
79 0.91 0.86 0.84 0.82 0.82 0.81 0.81 0.81 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.80 0.79
78 0.88 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.79 0.78 0.78 0.77 0.77 0.77 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76 0.76
77 0.86 0.80 0.77 0.76 0.75 0.75 0.74 0.74 0.74 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73 0.73
76 0.83 0.77 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.71 0.71 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70 0.70
75 0.81 0.74 0.71 0.70 0.69 0.69 0.68 0.68 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.67 0.66
74 0.78 0.71 0.68 0.67 0.67 0.65 0.65 0.65 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.63
73 0.75 0.68 0.65 0.64 0.63 0.62 0.62 0.62 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.61 0.60
72 0.73 0.65 0.62 0.61 0.60 0.59 0.59 0.59 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.58 0.57
71 0.70 0.62 0.59 0.58 0.57 0.57 0.56 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.54
70 0.67 0.59 0.56 0.55 0.54 0.54 0.53 0.53 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52 0.52
69 0.64 0.56 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49 0.49
68 0.61 0.53 0.50 0.49 0.48 0.48 0.48 0.47 0.47 0.47 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.46 0.46
67 0.58 0.50 0.47 0.46 0.45 0.45 0.45 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.44 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43
66 0.55 0.47 0.45 0.43 0.43 0.42 0.42 0.42 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.41 0.40
65 0.51 0.44 0.42 0.40 0.40 0.39 0.39 0.39 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38
64 0.48 0.41 0.39 0.38 0.37 0.37 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.36 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35 0.35
63 0.45 0.38 0.36 0.35 0.34 0.34 0.34 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.32
62 0.41 0.35 0.33 0.32 0.32 0.31 0.31 0.31 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30
61 0.38 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.29 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.28
60 0.34 0.28 0.28 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.25
59 0.31 0.27 0.25 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23
58 0.30 0.25 0.23 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.20
57 0.25 0.20 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18
56 0.20 0.18 0.16 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.15
55 0.18 0.15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13
54 0.15 0.13 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
53 0.10 0.10 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08
52 0.08 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
51 0.05 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
50 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Table 2
Pay Factors
Required Quality Level for a Given Sample Size (n) and a Given Pay Factor
n=10 n=12 n=15 n=18 n=23 n=30 n=43 n=67
to to to to to to to to
Pay Factor n=3 n=4 n=5 n=6 n=7 n=8 n=9 n=11 n=14 n=17 n=22 n=29 n=42 n=66 ∞
1.05 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
1.04 100 99 97 95 96 96 96 97 97 97 97
1.03 100 98 96 94 92 93 93 94 95 95 96 96
1.02 99 97 94 91 89 90 91 92 93 93 94 94
1.01 100 100 100 98 95 92 89 87 88 89 90 91 92 92 93
1.00 69 75 78 80 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
0.99 66 72 76 78 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 89 90 91
0.98 64 70 74 76 78 79 80 81 82 84 85 86 87 88 90
0.97 63 68 72 74 76 77 78 79 81 82 83 84 86 87 88
0.96 61 67 70 72 74 75 76 78 79 81 82 83 84 86 87
0.95 59 65 68 71 72 74 75 76 78 79 80 82 83 84 86
0.94 58 63 67 69 71 72 73 75 76 78 79 80 82 83 85
0.93 57 62 65 67 69 71 72 73 75 76 78 79 80 82 84
0.92 55 60 63 66 68 69 70 72 73 75 76 78 79 81 82
0.91 54 59 62 64 66 68 69 70 72 74 75 76 78 79 81
0.90 53 57 61 63 65 66 67 69 71 72 74 75 77 78 80
0.89 51 56 59 62 63 65 66 68 69 71 72 74 75 77 79
0.88 50 55 58 60 62 64 65 66 68 70 71 73 74 76 78
0.87 49 53 57 59 61 62 63 65 67 68 70 71 73 75 77
0.86 48 52 55 58 59 61 62 64 66 67 69 70 72 74 76
0.85 46 51 54 56 58 60 61 62 64 66 67 69 71 72 75
0.84 45 49 53 55 57 58 60 61 63 65 66 68 70 71 73
0.83 44 48 51 54 56 57 58 60 62 64 65 67 69 70 72
0.82 43 47 50 53 54 56 57 59 61 62 64 66 67 69 71
0.81 41 46 49 51 53 55 56 58 59 61 63 64 66 68 70
0.80 40 44 48 50 52 54 55 56 58 60 62 63 65 67 69
0.79 39 43 46 49 51 52 54 55 57 59 61 62 64 66 68
0.78 38 42 45 48 50 51 52 54 56 58 59 61 63 65 67
0.77 36 41 44 46 48 50 51 53 55 57 58 60 62 64 66
0.76 35 39 43 45 47 49 50 52 54 56 57 59 61 63 65
0.75 33 38 42 44 46 48 49 51 53 54 56 58 60 62 64
REJECT Values Less Than Those Shown Above
Reject Quality Levels Less Than Those Specified for a 0.75 Pay Factor
Note: If the value of (PU + PL) - 100 does not correspond to a (PU + PL) - 100 value in this table, use the next smaller (PU + PL) - 100
value.
1-06.2(2)B Financial Incentive

As an incentive to produce superior quality material, a pay factor greater than 1.00 may
be obtained with the maximum pay factor being 1.05. A lot containing non-Specification
material will be accepted provided the Composite Pay Factor reaches the minimum value
specified elsewhere. A lot containing non-Specification material which fails to obtain at least
the specified minimum Composite Pay Factor will be rejected by the Engineer. The Engineer
will take one or more of the following actions when rejected material has been incorporated
into the Work:
1. Require complete removal and replacement with Specification material at no additional
cost to the Contracting Agency.
2. At the Contractor’s written request, allow corrective work at no additional cost to the
Contracting Agency and then an appropriate price reduction that may range from no
reduction to no payment.

3. At the Contractor’s written request, allow material to remain in place with an

appropriate price reduction that may range from a designated percentage reduction
to no payment.
Any lot for which at least three samples have been obtained, and all of the test results meet
one of the appropriate criteria listed below, will receive at least a 1.00 Composite Pay Factor:
1. All test results are within the allowable limits specified for the item, or
2. All test results that only have a lower Specification limit are greater than or equal
to that limit, or
3. All test results that only have an upper Specification limit are less than or equal
to that limit.
Computation of the quality level in these instances will be for determining the amount
of any bonus that might be warranted.
Lots represented by less than three samples or unsampled lots will be exempt from
statistical based acceptance.
1-06.2(2)C Removed and Rejected Materials
The Contractor may, prior to sampling, elect to remove any defective material and replace
it with new material at no expense to the Contracting Agency. Any such new material will be
sampled, tested, and evaluated for acceptance as a part of the sublot in accordance with this
statistical sampling and testing procedure.
The Engineer may reject a sublot that tests show to be defective. Such rejected material
shall not be used in the Work, and the results of tests run on the rejected material will not be
included in the original lot acceptance tests.
1-06.2(2)D Quality Level Analysis
1-06.2(2)D1 General
The quality level calculations for HMA and other materials are completed using the
formulas in Section 1-06.2(2)D4. For HMA, the definition of the “x” value used in the
calculations and the definition of the upper and lower specification limit are in Section
1-06.2(2)D2. For other materials, the definition of the “x” value used in the calculations
and the definition of the upper and lower specification limit are in Section 1-06.2(2)D3.
All other terms and variables are the same for all calculations.
1-06.2(2)D2 Hot Mix Asphalt
x = difference between an individual test value and the job mix formula (JMF)
USL = maximum allowable limit in Section 9-03.8(7)
LSL = minimum allowable limit in Section 9-03.8(7)
1-06.2(2)D3 Other Materials
x = individual test value
USL = upper specification limit
LSL = lower specification limit
1-06.2(2)D4 Quality Level Calculation
The procedures for determining the quality level and pay factors for a material are
as follows:
1. Determine the arithmetic mean, Xm, for each specified material constituent:
∑x
Xm =
n
1
(∑ x )  2
2 Where:
∑ = summation of x
− 1)  n = total number test values

∑x
X m = deviation, “S”, for each constituent:
2. Compute the sample standard n
1
 n ∑ x 2 − (∑ x )2  2
S=  
 n (n − 1)  ∑x
X =
∑ xm n
Where: X 1m =
n
 n ∑ x 2 − (∑ x )  summation
1 = 2 2
of the squares of individual test values
S = 2
 n∑ x  − (∑nx(n) − 1)=  summation of the individual test values squared
2 2
S=    
(n − 1) the upper quality index, (QU), for each constituent:
 3. nCompute
USL – X
QUQ= = USL − X m m
u SS
4. Compute the lower quality index, (QL), for each constituent:
X – LSL
QL = USLm− X
Q = X Sm
− LSL
Q Lu =− Xm
USL S
Q u5.
= For each m constituent
S determine PU (the percent within the upper Specification limit
whichS corresponds to a given Q ) from Table 1. If USL is 100.00 percent or is not
U
specified, PU will be 100. For negative values of QU, PU (e.g., N = 15 and QU = -0.5
willXresult
− LSL in PU = 30) is equal to 100 minus the table PU. If the value of QU does not
QL =
Q = m
X mLcorrespond
− LSL S f PF
6. For CPF
each =
( ) ( )
1
exactly
constituent
( )
to a figure in the table, use the next higher value.
1 = f 2 PF2 + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + f i PFi
determine PL (the percent within the lower Specification limit
S ∑f
which corresponds to ai given QL) from Table 1. If LSL is zero or not specified, PL will
be 100. For negative values of QL, PL is equal to 100 minus the table PL. If the value
( ) ( )
of QL doesf PFnot( )= fcorrespond exactly to a figure in the table, use the next higher value.
2 PF2 + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ + f i PFi
CPF =
( ) ( )
1 = ( )
CPFi = 11 to 1j
7. For
f1 PFeach f constituent
fi 2 2
PF + ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ +f
∑ ii idetermine
f PF the quality level (the total percent within
Specification limits):
∑ fi
Quality Level = (PU + PL) – 100
8. Using
i = 1 tothej quality level from step 7, determine the pay factor (PFi) from Table 2 for
each constituent
i = 1 to j fi tested.
9. fi Determine the Composite Pay Factor (CPF) for each lot.
f1(PF1) + f2(PF2) + ... + fi(PFi)
CPF = Σfi
i = 1 to j
Where:
fi = price adjustment factor listed in these Specifications for the
applicable material
j = number of constituents being evaluated
1-06.3 Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance
When authorized by these Specifications or the Special Provisions and prior to use,
the Engineer may accept certain materials on the basis of a Manufacturer’s Certificate of
Compliance as an alternative to material inspection and testing.
The Contractor may request, in writing, authority from the Engineer to install such
materials prior to submitting the required certification; however, no payment will be made
for the Work in the absence of an acceptable Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. The
Contracting Agency reserves the right to deny the request for good cause. If for any reason
the Contractor has not provided an acceptable Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance by
the Physical Completion Date established by Section 1-08.5, the Contracting Agency will
assess the usefulness of the installed material. At the Engineer’s discretion, the Contracting
Agency will either require replacement of the material by the Contractor at no expense to
the Contracting Agency or process the final payment as provided by Section 1-09.9 without

paying for the materials or any portion of the Work performed to install the materials provided
on such a basis. The unit Contract prices for the Work shall be used to determine the amount
to be withheld. Where unit Contract prices do not exist, as in a lump sum item, the amount
to be withheld shall be an equitable adjustment, covering labor, equipment and materials,
determined in accordance with Section 1-09.4.
The Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance must identify the manufacturer, the type
and quantity of material being certified, the applicable Specifications being affirmed, and
the signature of a responsible corporate official of the manufacturer and include supporting
mill tests or documents. A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance shall be furnished with
each lot of material delivered to the Work and the lot so certified shall be clearly identified in
the certificate.
All materials used on the basis of a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance may be
sampled and tested at any time. Any material not conforming to the requirements will be
subject to rejection whether in place or not. The Contracting Agency reserves the right to
refuse to accept materials on the basis of a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.
1-06.4 Handling and Storing Materials
In storage and handling, the Contractor shall protect materials against damage from
careless handling, from exposure to weather, from mixture with foreign matter, and from
all other causes. The Engineer will reject and refuse to test materials improperly handled
or stored.
The Contractor shall repair, replace, or make good all Contracting Agency-provided
materials that are damaged or lost due to the Contractor’s operation or while in the
Contractor’s possession, at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
1-06.5 Owners Manuals and Operating Instructions
For equipment and materials that are permanently incorporated in the Work, the Contractor
shall provide to the Engineer all owners manuals and operating instructions furnished by the
equipment or material manufacturer.
1-06.6 Recycled Materials
The Contractor shall make their best effort to utilize recycled materials in the construction
of the project; the use of recycled concrete aggregate as specified in Section 1-06.6(1)A is a
requirement of the Contract.
The Contractor shall submit a Recycled Material Utilization Plan as a Type 1 Working
Drawing within 30 calendar days after the Contract is executed. The plan shall provide the
Contractor’s anticipated usage of recycled materials for meeting the requirements of these
Specifications. The quantity of recycled materials will be provided in tons and as a percentage
of the Plan quantity for each material listed in Section 9-03.21(1)E Table on Maximum
Allowable percent (By Weight) of Recycled Material. When a Contract does not include Work
that requires the use of a material that is included in the requirements for using materials the
Contractor may state in their plan that no recycled materials are proposed for use.
Prior to Physical Completion the Contractor shall report the quantity of recycled materials
that were utilized in the construction of the project for each of the items listed in Section
9-03.21. The report shall include hot mix asphalt, recycled concrete aggregate, recycled
glass, steel furnace slag and other recycled materials (e.g. utilization of on-site material and
aggregates from concrete returned to the supplier). The Contractor’s report shall be provided
on WSDOT Form 350-075, Recycled Materials Reporting.

1-06.6(1) Recycling of Aggregate and Concrete Materials

1-06.6(1)A General
The minimum quantity of recycled concrete aggregate shall be 25 percent of the total
quantity of aggregate that is incorporated into the Contract for those items listed in Section
9-03.21(1)E Table on Maximum Allowable percent (By Weight) of Recycled Material that
allow the use of recycled concrete aggregate. The percentage of recycled material incorporated
into the project for meeting the required percentage will be calculated in tons based on the
quantity of recycled concrete used on the entire Contract and not as individual items.
If the Contractor’s total cost for Work with recycled concrete aggregate is greater than
without the Contractor may choose to not use recycled concrete aggregate. If the Recycled
Material Utilization Plan does not indicate the minimum usage of recycled concrete aggregate
required above, or if completed project quantities do not meet the minimum usage required,
the Contractor shall develop the following:
1. A cost estimate for each material listed in Section 9-03.21(1)E that is utilized on the
Contract. The cost estimate shall include the following:
a. The estimated costs for the Work for each material with 25 percent recycled concrete
aggregate. The cost estimate shall include for each material a copy of the price quote
from the supplier with the lowest total cost for the Work.
b. The estimated costs for the Work for each material without recycled
concrete aggregate.
The Contractor’s cost estimates shall be submitted as an attachment to the Recycled
Material Utilization Plan, or with the Reporting form.

1-07 Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public

1-07.1 Laws to be Observed
The Contractor shall always comply with all Federal, State, tribal, or local laws,
ordinances, and regulations that affect Work under the Contract. The Contractor shall
indemnify, defend, and save harmless the State (including the Governor, Commission,
Secretary, and any agents, officers, and employees) against any claims that may arise because
the Contractor (or any employee of the Contractor or Subcontractor or materialperson)
violated a legal requirement.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all workers and shall comply with
all appropriate state safety and health standards, codes, rules, and regulations, including,
but not limited to, those promulgated under the Washington Industry Safety and Health
Act RCW 49.17 (WISHA) and as set forth in Title 296 WAC (Department of Labor
and Industries). In particular the Contractor’s attention is drawn to the requirements of
WAC 296.800 which requires employers to provide a safe workplace. More specifically
WAC 296.800.11025 prohibits alcohol and narcotics from the workplace. The Contractor shall
likewise be obligated to comply with all federal safety and health standards, codes, rules, and
regulations that may be applicable to the Contract Work. A copy of all safety plans (e.g., fall
protection work plan) that are developed by the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer
as a Type 1 Working Drawing. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide
training to Contracting Agency employees working on-site for any activity covered by a safety
plan. Costs for training that is provided solely to Contracting Agency employees will be paid
to the Contractor in accordance with Section 1-09.4.
U.S. Mine Safety and Health Administration rules apply when the project includes pit or
quarry operations. Among other actions, these regulations require the Contractor to notify the
nearest Mine Safety and Health sub district office (1) of the project before it begins, (2) of the
starting date, and (3) of the Physical Completion Date.
Without usurping the authority of other agencies, the Contracting Agency will cooperate
with them in their efforts to enforce legal requirements. Upon awareness of a violation of
a legal requirement, the Engineer will notify the Contractor in an effort to achieve compliance.
The Engineer may also notify the agency responsible for enforcement if the Engineer deems
that action is necessary to achieve compliance with legal requirements. The Engineer will
also assist the enforcement agency to obtain Contractor compliance to the extent such
assistance is consistent with the provisions of the Contract.
The Contracting Agency will not adjust payment to compensate the Contractor for
changes in legal requirements unless those changes are specifically within the scope of
RCW 39.04.120. For changes under RCW 39.04.120, the Contracting Agency will compensate
the Contractor by negotiated change order as provided in Section 1-04.4.
Under certain conditions, the Contracting Agency will adjust payment to compensate for
tax changes. First, the changes shall involve federal or state taxes on materials or fuel used in
or consumed for the project. Second, the changes shall increase or decrease Contractor-paid
taxes by more than $500. For items in the original Contract, the tax change must occur after
the Bid opening date. For negotiated Contracts or items in a supplemental agreement, the tax
change must take place after the execution date of the Contract or agreement. Within these
conditions, the Contracting Agency will adjust compensation by the actual dollar amounts
of increase or decrease caused by the tax changes. If the Engineer requests it, the Contractor
shall certify in writing that the Contract price does not include any extra amount to cover a
possible change in taxes.
The Contracting Agency may audit the records of the Contractor as provided in
Section 1-09.12, to verify any claim for compensation because of changes in laws or taxes.

Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public 1-07
1-07.2 State Taxes

The Washington State Department of Revenue has issued special rules on the state sales
tax. Sections 1-07.2(1) through 1-07.2(3) are meant to clarify those rules. The Contracting
Agency will not adjust its payment if the Contractor bases a Bid on a misunderstood
tax liability.
The Contracting Agency may deduct from its payments to the Contractor, retainage or lien
the bond, in the amount the Contractor owes the State Department of Revenue, whether the
amount owed relates to the Contract in question or not. Any amount so deducted will be paid
into the proper State fund on the contractor’s behalf. For additional information on tax rates
and application refer to applicable RCWs, WACs or the Department of Revenue website.
1-07.2(1) State Sales Tax: WAC 458-20-171 – Use Tax
For Work designated as Rule 171, Use Tax, the Contractor shall include for compensation
the amount of any taxes paid in the various unit Bid prices or other Contract amounts.
Typically, these taxes are collected on materials incorporated into the project and items
such as the purchase or rental of; tools, machinery, equipment, or consumable supplies not
integrated into the project.
The Summary of Quantities in the Contract Plans identifies those parts of the project that
are subject to Use Tax under Section 1-07.2(1).
1-07.2(2) State Sales Tax: WAC 458-20-170 – Retail Sales Tax
For Work designated as Rule 170, Retail Sales Tax, the Contractor shall collect from the
Contracting Agency, Retail Sales Tax on the full Contract price. The Contracting Agency will
automatically add this Retail Sales Tax to each payment to the Contractor and for this reason;
the Contractor shall not include the Retail Sales Tax in the unit Bid prices or in any other
Contract amount. The Contractor (Prime or Subcontractor) shall include sales or use tax on the
purchase or rental of tools, machinery, equipment, or consumable supplies not integrated into
the project, in the unit bid prices.
The Summary of Quantities in the Contract Plans identifies those parts of the project that
are subject to Retail Sales Tax under Section 1-07.2(2).
1-07.2(3) Services
Any contract wholly for professional or other applicable services is generally not subject
to Retail Sales Tax and therefore, the Contractor shall not collect Retail Sales Tax from the
Contracting Agency on those Contracts. Any incidental taxes paid as part of providing the
services shall be included in the payments under the contract.
1-07.3 Forest Protection and Merchantable Timber Requirements
1-07.3(1) Forest Fire Prevention
When the Work is in or next to State or Federal forests, the Contractor shall know and
observe all laws and rules (State or Federal) on fire prevention and sanitation. The Contractor
shall ask the local forest supervisor or regional manager to outline requirements for permits,
sanitation, firefighting equipment, and burning.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to prevent and suppress forest fires.
In case of forest fire, the Contractor shall immediately notify the nearest forest headquarters
of its exact site and shall make every effort to suppress it. If needed, the Contractor shall
require his/her employees and those of any Subcontractor to work under forest officials in
fire‑control efforts.
1-07.3(1)A Fire Prevention Control and Countermeasures Plan
The Contractor shall prepare and implement a project-specific fire prevention, control, and
countermeasures plan (FPCC Plan) for the duration of the project. The Contractor shall submit
a Type 2 Working Drawing no later than the date of the preconstruction conference.

1-07.3(1)A1 FPCC Implementation Requirements

The Contractor’s FPCC Plan shall be fully implemented at all times. The Contractor shall
update the FPCC Plan throughout project construction so that the plan reflects actual site
conditions and practices. The Contractor shall update the FPCC Plan at least annually and
maintain a copy of the updated FPCC Plan that is available for inspection on the project site.
Revisions to the FPCC Plan and the Industrial Fire Precaution Level (IFPL) shall be discussed
at the weekly project safety meetings.
1-07.3(1)A2 FPCC Plan Element Requirements
The FPCC Plan shall include the following:
1. The names, titles, and contact information for the personnel responsible for
implementing and updating the plan.
2. The names and telephone numbers of the Federal, State, and local agencies the
Contractor shall notify in the event of a fire.
3. All potential fire causing activities such as welding, cutting of metal, blasting, fueling
operations, etc.
4. The location of fire extinguishers, water, shovels, and other firefighting equipment.
5. The response procedures the Contractor shall follow in the event of a fire.
Most of Washington State is covered under the IFPL system which, by law, is managed by
the Department of Natural Resources (DNR). It is the Contractor’s responsibility to be familiar
with the DNR requirements and to verify whether or not IFPL applies to the specific project.
If the Contractor wishes to continue a work activity that is prohibited under an industrial
fire precaution level, the Contractor shall obtain a waiver from the DNR and provide a copy to
the Engineer prior to continuation of work on the project.
If the IFPL requirements prohibit the Contractor from performing Work the Contractor may
be eligible for an unworkable day in accordance with Section 1-08.5.
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of these provisions at no additional cost
to the Contracting Agency.
1-07.3(2) Merchantable Timber Requirements
When merchantable timber is to be cut, the Contractor shall obtain a permit from the
appropriate regional office of the State Department of Natural Resources and comply fully
with the State Forest Practices Act.
No person may export from the United States, or sell, trade, exchange, or otherwise convey
to any other person for the purpose of export from the United States, timber originating from
the project.
The Contractor shall comply with the Forest Resources Conservation and Shortage
Relief Amendments Act of 1993 (Public Law 103-45) and the Washington State Log Export
Regulations (WAC 240-15).
1-07.4 Sanitation
1-07.4(1) General
The Contractor shall provide employees with all accommodations required by the State
Department of Health and other agencies. These accommodations shall be kept clean, neat,
and sanitized, and shall not create any public nuisance. The Contractor shall keep all campsites
clean, properly dispose of all refuse, and leave each site in a neat and sanitary condition.
1-07.4(2) Health Hazards
Biological hazards and associated physical hazards may be present in the worksite. The
Contractor shall take precautions and perform any necessary Work to provide and maintain
a safe and healthful worksite in accordance with applicable laws. Payment for Work necessary
to provide and maintain a safe worksite will be incidental to associated items of Contract Work
unless the Contract includes provisions to the contrary.

1-07.5 Environmental Regulations

1-07.5(1) General
Throughout the Work, the Contractor shall comply with all current rules of the resource
agencies having jurisdiction over the affected areas. Some, though not all, of these rules are
summarized below. Any of these agencies may, without prejudice to the Contracting Agency,
add rules as needed to protect game, fish, or the environment.
The Contractor shall be responsible to immediately report to the Engineer any deviation
from the contract provisions pertaining to environmental compliance, including but not limited
to spills, unauthorized fill in waters of the State including wetlands, water quality standards,
noise, air quality, etc.
The following restrictions apply to all Work:
1. No Work shall occur within the jurisdictional areas unless authorized in the Contract
Provisions and associated environmental permits.
2. No materials shall be placed below the ordinary high water line except as may be
specified in the Contract.
3. No equipment shall enter waters of the State, except as may be specified in the Contract.
1-07.5(2) State Department of Fish and Wildlife
In doing the Work, the Contractor shall:
1. Not degrade water in a way that would harm fish. (Criteria: Washington State Water
Quality Regulations.)
2. Release any fish stranded by the project into a flowing stream or open water.
3. Replant any stream bank or shoreline area if the project disturbs vegetative cover.
Replanted trees, brush, or grasses shall resemble the type and density of surrounding
growth, unless the Special Provisions permit otherwise.
4. Leave, when the Work is complete, an open-water channel at the lowest level of any
isolated pothole to connect it with the main body of water.
5. Prevent any fish-threatening silt buildup on the bed or bottom of any body of water.
6. Never block stream flow or fish passage.
7. Never remove gravel or other bottom material from the high-water flow channel bed of
any stream or from the bottom of any other body of water, except as may be permitted
by the Special Provisions
8. Dispose of any project debris by removal, burning, or placement above high-water flows.
9. Immediately notify the Engineer and stop all work causing impacts, if at any time,
as a result of project activities, fish are observed in distress or a fish kill occurs.
If the Work in (1) through (3) above differs little from what the Contract requires, the
Contracting Agency will measure and pay for it at unit Contract prices. But if Contract items
do not cover those areas, the Contracting Agency will pay pursuant to Section 1-09.4. Work in
(4) through (8) above will be incidental to Contract pay items.
1-07.5(3) State Department of Ecology
In doing the Work, the Contractor shall:
1. Get a waste discharge permit from the Ecology Department before:
a. Washing aggregate; or
b. Discharging water from pit sites or excavations into a ground or surface waterway
when the water contains turbidity, silt, or foreign materials.
2. Give the Engineer a copy of each waste discharge permit before the Work begins.
3. Control drainage and erosion in a manner that reduces waterway pollution.
4. Perform Work in such a manner that all materials and substances not specifically
identified in the Contract documents to be placed in the water do not enter waters of

the State, including wetlands. These include, but are not limited to, petroleum products,
hydraulic fluid, fresh concrete, concrete wastewater, process wastewater, slurry
materials and waste from shaft drilling, sediments, sediment-laden water, chemicals,
paint, solvents, or other toxic or deleterious materials.
5. Use equipment that is free of external petroleum-based products.
6. Remove accumulations of soil and debris from drive mechanisms (wheels, tracks,
tires) and undercarriage of equipment prior to using equipment below the ordinary
high water line.
7. Clean loose dirt and debris from all materials placed below the ordinary high water
line. No materials shall be placed below the ordinary high water line without the
Engineer’s approval.
8. Notify the Engineer and Ecology Department immediately should oil, chemicals,
or sewage spill into waters of the State.
1-07.5(4) Air Quality
The Contractor shall comply with all rules of local air pollution authorities. If there are
none, air-quality rules of the State Department of Ecology shall govern the Work.
The Washington Clean Air Act requires that rock crushing, rock drilling, asphalt batch
plants, and concrete plants receive an air quality permit in advance of the operation. The
air quality permit process may include additional State Environment Policy Act (SEPA)
requirements. Contractors or operators should contact the appropriate air pollution control
authority well in advance of intended start-up. The permit process may require up to 30 days.
When the Work includes demolition of any existing facility, the Contractor shall comply
with the requirements of the National Emission Standards for Asbestos. Any requirement
included in state or Federal regulations on this subject that applies to the “owner or operator”
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
1-07.6 Permits and Licenses
Contractors shall obtain all required permits and licenses and give any notices these call for.
The Contracting Agency will support the Contractor in efforts to obtain a temporary
operating permit in its name if:
1. A local rule or an agency policy prevent issuing the permit to a private firm;
2. The Contractor takes all action to obtain the permit;
3. The permit will serve the public interest;
4. The permit applies only to Work under the Contract;
5. The Contractor agrees in writing: (a) to comply with all the issuing agency requires,
and (b) to hold the Contracting Agency harmless for any Work-related liability incurred
under the permit; and
6. The permit costs the Contracting Agency nothing.
1-07.7 Load Limits
1-07.7(1) General
While moving equipment or materials on any public Highway, the Contractor shall comply
with all laws that control traffic or limit loads. The Contract neither exempts the Contractor
from such laws nor licenses overloads. At the Engineer’s request, the Contractor shall provide
any facts needed to compute the equipment’s weight on the Roadway.
When the Contractor moves equipment or materials within the project limits as shown in
the Plans, legal load limits shall apply on:
1. Any road open to and in use by public traffic; or
2. Any existing road not scheduled for major reconstruction under the current Contract; or

3. Any newly paved road (with final lift in place) built under this Contract. The Contractor
may haul overloads (not more than 25 percent above load limits) on such roads not open
to public traffic if this does not damage completed Work. The Contractor shall pay all
repair costs of any overload damage.
Elsewhere on the project, the Contractor may operate equipment with only the load-limit
restrictions in 1, 2, and 3 in Section 1-07.7(2). The Contractor shall remain responsible,
however, for all load-caused damage. All vehicles subject to license on a tonnage basis
shall be licensed to maximum legal capacity before operating under these limits.
If necessary and safe to do so, and if the Contractor submits a Type 2E Working Drawing,
the Engineer may allow higher load limits than those in the load-limit restrictions in 1, 2, and
3 in Section 1-07.7(2). The submittal shall:
1. Describe loading details;
2. Describe the arrangement, movement, and position of equipment on the Structure or
over culverts and pipes; and
3. State that the Contractor assumes all risk for damage.
Unit prices shall cover all costs for operating over bridges and culverts. Nothing in this
section affects the Contractor’s other responsibilities under these Specifications or under
public Highway laws.
1-07.7(2) Load-Limit Restrictions
1. Structures Designed for Direct Bearing of Live Loads – The gross or maximum
load on each vehicle axle shall not exceed the legal load limit by more than 35 percent.
No more than one vehicle shall operate over any Structure at one time. The Contractor
shall immediately remove any dirt, rock, or debris that may gather on the Structure’s
Roadway surface.
If the Contractor desires to utilize work methods resulting in load that exceed any
of the restrictions described above, the Contractor shall submit a Type 3E Working
Drawing consisting of calculations and other supporting information (as specified in
Section 6-01.6 for bridges under construction).
2. Underpasses and Reinforced Concrete Box Culverts Under Embankments – Loads
shall not exceed 24,000 pounds on a single axle and 16,000 pounds each on tandem
axles spaced less than 10 feet apart. These limits are permitted only if the embankment
has: (a) been built to Specifications, and (b) reached at least 3 feet above the top of the
underpass or culvert.
When the embankment has reached 5 feet above the top of the underpass or culvert,
the Contractor may increase per-axle loads up to 100,000 pounds if outside wheel
spacing is at least 7 feet on axle centers.
3. Pipe Culverts and Sewer Pipes – Loads over pipe culverts and sewer pipes shall not
exceed 24,000 pounds on a single axle and 16,000 pounds each on tandem axles spaced
less than 10 feet apart. These limits are permitted only if: (a) the culvert or pipe has
been installed and backfilled to Specifications, and (b) the embankment has reached at
least 2 feet above the top limit of pipe compaction.
When the embankment has reached 5 feet above the top limit of pipe compaction, the
Contractor may increase per-axle loads up to 100,000 pounds if outside wheel spacing
is at least 7 feet on axle centers, except that:
a. For Class III reinforced concrete pipes, the embankment shall have risen above the
top limit of compaction at least 6 feet.
b. For Class II reinforced concrete pipes, the maximum load for each axle shall be
80,000 pounds if outside wheel spacing is at least 7 feet on axle centers. In this case,
the embankment shall have risen above the top limit of compaction at least 6 feet.

1-07.8 High-Visibility Apparel

The Contractor shall require all personnel under their control (including service providers,
Subcontractors, and lower tier subcontractors) that are on foot in the work zone and are
exposed to vehicle traffic or construction equipment to wear the high-visibility apparel
described in this section.
The Contractor shall ensure that a competent person as identified in the MUTCD selects
the appropriate high-visibility apparel suitable for the jobsite conditions.
High-visibility garments shall always be the outermost garments.
High-visibility garments shall be labeled as, and in a condition compliant with the
ANSI/ISEA 107 (2004 or later version) and shall be used in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations.
1-07.8(1) Traffic Control Personnel
All personnel performing the Work described in Section 1-10 (including traffic control
supervisors, flaggers, spotters, and others performing traffic control labor of any kind) shall
comply with the following:
1. During daylight hours with clear visibility, workers shall wear a high-visibility ANSI/
ISEA 107 Class 2 or 3 vest or jacket, and hardhat meeting the high-visibility headwear
requirements of WAC 296-155-305; and
2. During hours of darkness (½ hour before sunset to ½ hour after sunrise) or other
low-visibility conditions (snow, fog, etc.), workers shall wear a high-visibility ANSI/
ISEA 107 Class 2 or 3 vest or jacket, high-visibility lower garment meeting ANSI/ISEA
107 Class E, and hardhat meeting the high-visibility headwear requirements of
WAC 296-155-305.
1-07.8(2) Non-Traffic Control Personnel
All personnel, except those performing the Work described in Section 1-10, shall wear
high-visibility apparel meeting the ANSI/ISEA 107 Class 2 or 3 standard.
1-07.9 Wages
1-07.9(1) General
This Contract is subject to the minimum wage requirements of RCW 39.12 and to
RCW 49.28 (as amended or supplemented). On Federal-aid projects, Federal wage laws
and rules also apply. The hourly minimum rates for wages and fringe benefits are listed in
the Contract Provisions. When Federal wage and fringe benefit rates are listed, the rates
match those identified by the U.S. Department of Labor’s “Decision Number” shown in
the Contract Provisions.
The Contractor, any Subcontractor, and all individuals or firms required by RCW 39.12,
WAC 296-127, or the Federal Davis-Bacon and Related Acts (DBRA) to pay minimum
prevailing wages, shall not pay any worker less than the minimum hourly wage rates and
fringe benefits required by RCW 39.12 or the DBRA. Higher wages and benefits may be paid.
By including the hourly minimum rates for wages and fringe benefits in the Contract
Provisions, the Contracting Agency does not imply that the Contractor will find labor available
at those rates. The Contractor shall be responsible for any amounts above the minimums that
will actually have to be paid. The Contractor shall bear the cost of paying wages above those
shown in the Contract Provisions.
When the project is subject to both State and Federal hourly minimum rates for wages
and fringe benefits and when the two rates differ for similar kinds of labor, the Contractor
shall not pay less than the higher rate unless the State rates are specifically preempted by
Federal law. When the project involves highway Work, heavy Work, and building Work, the
Contract Provisions may list a Federal wage and fringe benefit rate for the highway Work,
and a separate Federal wage and fringe benefit rate for both heavy Work and building Work.
The area in which the worker is physically employed shall determine which Federal wage
and fringe benefit rate shall be used to compare against the State wage and fringe benefit rate.
If employing labor in a class not listed in the Contract Provisions on state funded projects
only, the Contractor shall request a determination of the correct wage and benefits rate for that
class and locality from the Industrial Statistician, Washington State Department of Labor and
Industries (State L&I), and provide a copy of those determinations to the Engineer.
If employing labor in a class not listed in the Contract Provisions on federally funded
projects, the Contractor shall request a determination of the correct wage and benefit for
that class and locality from the U.S. Secretary of Labor through the Engineer. Generally, the
Contractor initiates the request by preparing standard form 1444 Request for Authorization
of Additional Classification and Rate, available at www.wdol.gov/docs/sf1444.pdf, and
submitting it to the Engineer for further action.
The Contractor shall ensure that any firm (Supplier, Manufacturer, or Fabricator)
that falls under the provisions of RCW 39.12 because of the definition “Contractor” in
WAC 296‑127-010, complies with all the requirements of RCW 39.12.
The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with the requirements of the
DBRA and RCW 39.12 by all firms (Subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, Suppliers,
Manufacturers, or Fabricators) engaged in any part of the Work necessary to complete this
Contract. Therefore, should a violation of this Subsection occur by any firm that is providing
Work or materials for completion of this Contract whether directly or indirectly responsible
to the Contractor, the Contracting Agency will take action against the Contractor, as provided
by the provisions of the Contract, to achieve compliance, including but not limited to,
withholding payment on the Contract until compliance is achieved.
In the event the Contracting Agency has an error (omissions are not errors) in the listing
of the hourly minimum rates for wages and fringe benefits in the Contract Provisions, the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any lower tier subcontractor, or any other firm that is required
to pay prevailing wages, shall be required to pay the rates as determined to be correct by State
L&I (or by the U.S. Department of Labor when that agency sets the rates). A change order will
be prepared to ensure that this occurs. The Contracting Agency will reimburse the Contractor
for the actual cost to pay the difference between the correct rates and the rates included in the
Contract Provisions, subject to the following conditions:
1. The affected firm relied upon the rates included in the Contract Provisions to prepare its
Bid and certifies that it did so;
2. The allowable amount of reimbursement will be the difference between the rates
listed and rates later determined to be correct plus only appropriate payroll markup
the employer must pay, such as, social security and other payments the employer must
make to the Federal or State Government;
3. The allowable amount of reimbursement may also include some overhead cost, such as,
the cost for bond, insurance, and making supplemental payrolls and new checks to the
employees because of underpayment for previously performed Work; and
4. Profit will not be an allowable markup.
Firms that anticipated, when they prepared their Bids, paying a rate equal to, or higher
than, the correct rate as finally determined will not be eligible for reimbursement.
Listing Recovery Act (and other) new hire opportunities with the Employment
Security Department.
There are many talented people currently unemployed. As the signs on the Contracting
Agency’s projects advertise, the Recovery Act is about creating jobs and putting people back
to work. As a companion effort, the Employment Security Department has been charged
with giving people the opportunity to compete for these jobs. Their tool for doing so is
WorkSource. WorkSource is a free service located across the State that screens, shortlists,
and refers qualified candidates.
WorkSource employees are aware that the Contractor has other commitments as part of
your business practices and as part of the Contract. Contractors may be subject to hiring
commitments such as Equal Employment Opportunity or union commitments. However,
utilizing WorkSource can be an essential effort as part of their various good faith efforts.
WorkSource is a resource that is available across the State. Contractors who have
been awarded WSDOT Contracts shall be prepared to discuss their recruitment plans and
how WorkSource will be incorporated into that effort at the preconstruction conference.
WorkSource has a simple process for requesting and reporting new hires.
The Contractor may contact the ARRA Business Unit at 877-453-5906 (toll free)
or ARRA@esd.wa.gov. There is additional information available on the website at
https://fortress.wa.gov/esd/worksource.
1-07.9(2) Posting Notices
Notices and posters shall be placed in areas readily accessible to read by employees.
The Contractor shall ensure the following are posted:
1. EEOC - P/E-1(revised 11/09, supplemented 09/15) – Equal Employment Opportunity
IS THE LAW published by US Department of Labor. Post for projects with federal-
aid funding.
2. FHWA 1022 (revised 05/15) – NOTICE Federal-Aid Project published by Federal
Highway Administration (FHWA). Post for projects with federal-aid funding.
3. WH 1321 (revised 04/09) – Employee Rights Under the Davis-Bacon Act published
by US Department of Labor. Post for projects with federal-aid funding.
4. WHD 1088 (revised 07/09) – Employee Rights Under the Fair Labor Standards Act
published by US Department of Labor. Post on all projects.
5. WHD 1420 (revised 02/13) – Employee Rights and Responsibilities Under The
Family And Medical Leave Act published by US Department of Labor. Post on
all projects.
6. WHD 1462 (revised 01/16) – Employee Polygraph Protection Act published by US
Department of Labor. Post on all projects.
7. F416-081-909 (revised 09/15) – Job Safety and Health Law published by Washington
State Department of Labor and Industries. Post on all projects.
8. F242-191-909 (revised 12/12) – Notice To Employees published by Washington State
Department of Labor and Industries. Post on all projects.
9. F700-074-909 (revised 06/13) – Your Rights as a Worker in Washington State
by Washington State Department of Labor and Industries (L&I). Post on all projects.
10. EMS 9874 (revised 10/15) – Unemployment Benefits published by Washington State
Employment Security Department. Post on all projects.
11. Post one copy of the approved “Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages” for
the Contractor, each Subcontractor, each lower tier subcontractor, and any other firm
(Supplier, Manufacturer, or Fabricator) that falls under the provisions of RCW 39.12
because of the definition of “Contractor” in WAC 296-127-010.
12. Post one copy of the prevailing wage rates for the project.
1-07.9(3) Apprentices
If employing apprentices, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer written evidence
showing:
1. Each apprentice is enrolled in a program approved by the Washington State
Apprenticeship and Training Council;
2. The progression schedule for each apprentice; and
3. The established apprentice-journey level ratios and wage rates in the project locality
upon which the Contractor will base such ratios and rates under the Contract. Any
worker for whom an apprenticeship agreement has not been registered and approved
by the Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council shall be paid at the
prevailing hourly journey level rate as provided in RCW 39.12.021.

1-07.9(4) Disputes
If labor and management cannot agree in a dispute over the proper prevailing wage rates,
the Contractor shall refer the matter to the Director of State L&I (or to the U.S. Secretary of
Labor when that agency sets the rates). The Director’s (or Secretary’s) decision shall be final,
conclusive, and binding on all parties.
1-07.9(5) Required Documents
On forms provided by the Industrial Statistician of State L&I, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer the following for itself and for each firm covered under RCW 39.12 that
provided Work and materials for the Contract:
1. A copy of an approved “Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages” State L&I’s
form number F700-029-000. The Contracting Agency will make no payment under this
Contract for the Work performed until this statement has been approved by State L&I
and a copy of the approved form has been submitted to the Engineer.
2. A copy of an approved “Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid”, State L&I’s form number
F700-007-000. The Contracting Agency will not grant Completion until all approved
Affidavit of Wages paid for Contractor and all Subcontractors have been received by the
Engineer. The Contracting Agency will not release to the Contractor any funds retained
under RCW 60.28.011 until all of the “Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid” forms have
been approved by State L&I and a copy of all the approved forms have been submitted
to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting these forms from State L&I and for
paying any approval fees required by State L&I.
Certified payrolls are required to be submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer, for the
Contractor and all Subcontractors or lower tier subcontractors, on all Federal-aid projects
and, when requested in writing by the Engineer, on projects funded with only Contracting
Agency funds. If these payrolls are not supplied within 10 calendar days of the end of the
preceding weekly payroll period for Federal-aid projects or within 10 calendar days from
the date of the written request on projects with only Contracting Agency funds, any or all
payments may be withheld until compliance is achieved. Also, failure to provide these payrolls
could result in other sanctions as provided by State laws (RCW 39.12.050) and/or Federal
regulations (29 CFR 5.12). All certified payrolls shall be complete and explicit. Employee
labor descriptions used on certified payrolls shall coincide exactly with the labor descriptions
listed on the minimum wage schedule in the Contract unless the Engineer approves an
alternate method to identify the labor used by the Contractor to compare with the labor listed
in the Contract Provisions. When an apprentice is shown on the certified payroll at a rate less
than the minimum prevailing journey wage rate, the apprenticeship registration number for
that employee from the State Apprenticeship and Training Council shall be shown along with
the correct employee classification code.
1-07.9(6) Audits
The Contracting Agency may inspect or audit the Contractor’s wage and payroll records
as provided in Section 1-09.12.
1-07.10 Worker’s Benefits
The Contractor shall make all payments required for unemployment compensation under
Title 50 RCW and for industrial insurance and medical aid required under Title 51 RCW.
If any payment required by Title 50 or Title 51 is not made when due, the Contracting Agency
may retain such payments from any money due the Contractor and pay the same into the
appropriate fund. Such payment will be made only after giving the Contractor 15 days prior
written notice of the Contracting Agency’s intent to disburse the funds to the Washington State
Department of Labor and Industries or Washington State Employment Security Department
as applicable. The payment will be made upon expiration of the 15 calendar day period if
no legal action has been commenced to resolve the validity of the claim. If legal action is

instituted to determine the validity of the claim prior to the expiration of the 15-day period,
the Contracting Agency will hold the funds until determination of the action or written
settlement agreement of the appropriate parties.
For Work on or adjacent to water, the Contractor shall make the determination as
to whether workers are to be covered under the Longshoremen’s and Harbor Worker’s
Compensation Act administered by the U.S. Department of Labor, or the State Industrial
Insurance coverage administered by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries.
The Contractor shall include in the various items in the Bid Proposal all costs for payment
of unemployment compensation and for providing either or both of the insurance coverages.
The Contractor will not be entitled to any additional payment for: (1) failure to include such
costs, or (2) determinations made by the U.S. Department of Labor or the Washington State
Department of Labor and Industries regarding the insurance coverage.
The Public Works Contract Division of the Washington State Department of Labor and
Industries will provide the Contractor with applicable industrial insurance and medical aid
classification and premium rates. After receipt of a Revenue Release from the Washington
State Department of Revenue, the Contracting Agency will verify through the Department of
Labor and Industries that the Contractor is current with respect to the payments of industrial
insurance and medical aid premiums.
1-07.11 Requirements for Nondiscrimination
1-07.11(1) General Application
Discrimination in all phases of contracted employment, contracting activities and training
is prohibited by Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, Section 162(a) of the Federal-Aid
Highway Act of 1973, Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, the Age Discrimination
Act of 1975, the Justice System Improvement Act of 1979, the American with Disabilities
Act of 1990, the Civil Rights Restoration Act of 1987, 49 CFR Part 21, RCW 49.60 and other
related laws and statutes. The referenced legal citations establish the minimum requirements
for affirmative action efforts and define the basic nondiscrimination provisions as required by
this section of these Standard Specifications.
1-07.11(2) Contractual Requirements
1. The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for contracted
employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the
presence of any physical, sensory or mental disability.
2. The Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, state that all
qualified applicants will be considered for employment, without regard to race, creed,
color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory,
or mental disability.
3. The Contractor shall insert the following notification in all solicitations for
bids for Work or material subject to federal laws and regulations and made in
connection with all program and activities and, in adapted form in all proposals for
negotiated agreements:
The Contractor in accordance to Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, 78
Stat.252, 42 U.S. Code 2000d to 2000d-4, and Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations,
Part 21, hereby notifies all bidders that it will affirmatively ensure that in any
contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority business enterprises
will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation and
will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color national origin and
sex in consideration for an award.
4. The Contractor shall make decisions with regard to selection and retention of
subcontractors, procurement of materials and equipment and similar actions related to
the Contract without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status,
or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability.

5. The Contractor shall send to each labor union, employment agency, or representative
of workers with which the Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement or other
contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency or
worker’s representative, of the Contractor’s commitments under this Contract with
regard to nondiscrimination.
6. The Contractor shall permit access to its books, records and accounts by the
Contracting Agency for the purpose of investigating to ascertain compliance with
these Specifications. In the event that information required of a Contractor is in the
possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information, the Contractor
shall describe, in writing, what efforts were made to obtain the information.
7. The Contractor shall maintain records with the name and address of each minority/
female worker referred to the Contractor and what action was taken with respect to
the referred worker.
8. The Contractor shall notify the Contracting Agency whenever the union with which the
Contractor has a collective bargaining agreement has impeded the Contractor’s efforts
to effect minority/female workforce utilization. This being the case, the Contractor
shall show what relief they have sought under such collective bargaining agreements.
9. The Contractor is encouraged to participate in Contracting Agency and Washington
State Human Rights Commission approved program(s) designed to train craft-workers
for the construction trades.
1-07.11(2)A Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) Responsibilities
Title VI Responsibilities
During the performance of this Contract, the Contractor, for itself, its assignees and
successors in interest (hereinafter referred to as the “Contractor”) agrees as follows:
1. Compliance With Regulations – The Contractor shall comply with the Regulations
relative to nondiscrimination in federally assisted programs of the Department of
Transportation (hereinafter DOT), Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, part 21, as
they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations),
which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this Contract.
2. Nondiscrimination – The Contractor, with regard to the Work performed by it during
the Contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, sex, or national
origin in the selection and retention of Subcontractors, including procurement of
materials and leases of equipment. The Contractor shall not participate either directly or
indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by Section 21.5 of the Regulations, including
employment practices when the Contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of
the Regulations.
3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurement of Materials and
Equipment – In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiations made by
the Contractor for Work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurement
of materials or leases of equipment, each potential Subcontractor or supplier shall
be notified by the Contractor of the Contractor’s obligations under this Contract and
the Regulations relative to nondiscrimination on the ground of race, color, sex, or
national origin.
4. Information and Reports – The Contractor shall provide all information and reports
required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant thereto, and shall permit
access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities
as may be determined by the Washington State Department of Transportation or the
Federal Highway Administration to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such
Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a Contractor is
in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information,
the Contractor shall so certify to the Washington State Department of Transportation,
or the Federal Highway Administration as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts
it has made to obtain the information.
5. Sanctions for Noncompliance – In the event of the Contractor’s noncompliance with

the nondiscrimination provisions of this Contract, the Washington State Department
of Transportation shall impose such Contract sanctions as it or the Federal Highway
Administration may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to:
a. Withholding of payments to the Contractor under the Contract until the Contractor
complies, and/or;
b. Cancellation, termination, or suspension of the Contract, in whole or in part.
6. Incorporation of Provisions – The Contractor shall include the provisions of
paragraphs (1) through (5) in every subcontract, including procurement of materials and
leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant
thereto. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any Subcontractor or
procurement as the Washington State Department of Transportation or the Federal
Highway Administration may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including
sanctions for noncompliance.
Provided, however, that in the event a Contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened
with, litigation with a Subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the
Contractor may request the Washington State Department of Transportation enter into
such litigation to protect the interests of the state and, in addition, the Contractor may
request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the
United States.
1-07.11(3) Equal Employment Opportunity Officer
The Contractor shall officially designate and make known to the Engineer during the
preconstruction conference and discussions the firm’s Equal Employment Opportunity Officer
(hereinafter referred to as the EEO Officer). The EEO Officer will also be responsible for
making him/herself known to each of the Contractor’s employees. The EEO Officer must
possess the responsibility, authority, and capability for administering and promoting an active
and effective Contractor program of equal employment opportunity.
1-07.11(4) Dissemination of Policy
1-07.11(4)A Supervisory Personnel
All members of the Contractor’s staff who are authorized to hire, supervise, promote, and
discharge employees, or who recommend such action, or who are substantially involved in
such action, shall be made fully cognizant of, and shall implement the Contractor’s equal
employment opportunity policy and contractual responsibilities to provide equal employment
opportunity in each grade and classification of employment. To ensure that the above
agreement will be met, the following actions shall be taken as a minimum:
1. EEO Meetings – Periodic meetings of supervisory and personnel office employees
shall be conducted before the start of Work and then not less often than once every
6 months, at which time the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy and
its implementation shall be reviewed and explained. The meetings shall be conducted
by the EEO Officer or other knowledgeable company official.
2. EEO Indoctrination – All new supervisory or personnel office employees shall be
given a thorough indoctrination by the EEO Officer or other knowledgeable company
official covering all major aspects of the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity
obligations within 30 days following their reporting for duty with the Contractor.
3. Internal EEO Procedures – All personnel who are engaged in direct recruitment for
the project shall be instructed by the EEO Officer or appropriate company official in the
Contractor’s procedures for locating and hiring minority group and female employees.

1-07.11(4)B Employees, Applicants, and Potential Employees

In order to make the Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy known to all
employees, prospective employees, and potential sources of employees, e.g., schools,
employment agencies, labor unions (where appropriate), college placement officers,
and community organizations, the Contractor shall take the following actions:
1. Notices and Posters – Notices and posters setting forth the Contractor’s equal
employment opportunity policy shall be placed in areas readily accessible to
employees, applicants for employment, and potential employees.
2. EEO Indoctrination – The Contractor’s equal employment opportunity policy and
the procedures to implement such policy shall be brought to the attention of employees
by means of meetings, employee handbooks, or other appropriate means.
1-07.11(5) Sanctions
In the event of the Contractor is found in noncompliance with the provisions of
Section 1-07.11, the Contracting Agency may impose such Contract sanctions as it or the
Federal Highway Administration may determine necessary to gain compliance including,
but not limited to:
1. Progress payment requests may not be honored until the noncompliance is remedied
to the satisfaction of the Contracting Agency.
2. The Contract may be suspended, in whole or in part, until such time as the Contractor
is determined to be in compliance by the Contracting Agency.
3. The Contractor’s pre-qualification may be suspended or revoked pursuant to
WAC 468-16. The Contracting Agency may refer the matter to the Federal Highway
Administration (FHWA) for possible federal sanctions.
4. The Contract may be terminated.
1-07.11(6) Incorporation of Provisions
The Contractor shall include the provisions of Section 1-07.11(2) Contractual
Requirements (1) through (4) and the Section 1-07.11(5) Sanctions in every subcontract
including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The Contractor shall take such
action or enforce sanctions with respect to a Subcontractor or supplier as the Contracting
Agency or the FHWA may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. In the event a
Contractor becomes involved in litigation with a Subcontractor or supplier as a result of
such direction, the Contractor may request the Contracting Agency enter into such litigation
to protect their interests and the Contracting Agency may request the federal government to
enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States.
1-07.11(7) Vacant
1-07.11(8) Vacant
1-07.11(9) Subcontracting, Procurement of Materials, and Leasing of Equipment
Nondiscrimination – The Contractor shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color,
religion, sex, national origin, age, or disability in the selection and retention of Subcontractors,
including procurement of materials and leases of equipment.
Solicitation and Utilization – The Contractor shall use their best effort to solicit bids
from, and to utilize, disadvantaged, minority, and women Subcontractors, or Subcontractors
with meaningful minority and women representation among their employees.
Subcontractor EEO Obligations – The Contractor shall notify all potential
Subcontractors and suppliers of the EEO obligations required by the Contract. The Contractor
shall use their efforts to ensure Subcontractors compliance with their equal employment
opportunity obligations.

1-07.11(10) Records and Reports

1-07.11(10)A General
The Contractor shall keep such records as are necessary to determine compliance with the
Contractor’s equal employment opportunity obligations. The records kept by the Contractor
shall be designated to indicate:
1. Work Force Data – The number of minority and nonminority group members and
women employed in each work classification on the project.
2. Good Faith Efforts – Unions – The progress and efforts being made in cooperation
with unions to increase employment opportunities for minorities and women
(applicable only to contractors who rely in whole or in part on unions as a source
of their work force).
3. Good Faith Efforts – Recruitment – The progress and efforts being made in locating,
hiring, training, qualifying, and upgrading minority and female employees.
4. Subcontracting – The progress and efforts being made in securing the services of
disadvantaged, minority, and women Subcontractors or Subcontractors with meaningful
minority and female representation among their employees.
1-07.11(10)B Required Records and Retention
All records must be retained by the Contractor for a period of three years following
acceptance of the Contract Work. All records shall be available at reasonable times and places
for inspection by authorized representatives of either the Washington State Department of
Transportation or the Federal Highway Administration.
Federal-Aid Highway Construction Contractors Annual EEO Report
FHWA #1391 – This form is required for all federally assisted projects provided the
Contract is equal to or greater than $10,000 and for every associated subcontract equal to
or greater than $10,000. Each Contract requires separate reports filed for the Contractor and
each Subcontractor (subject to the above noted criteria). These forms are due by August 25th
in every year during which Work was performed in July. The payroll period to be reflected
in the report is the last payroll period in July in which Work was performed. This report is
required of each Contractor and Subcontractor for each federally assisted Contract on which
the Contractor or Subcontractor performs Work during the month of July.
Monthly Employment Utilization Reports
WSDOT Form 820-010 – This form (or substitute form as approved by the Contracting
Agency) is required for all federally assisted projects if the Contract is equal to or greater then
$10,000 and for every associated subcontract equal to or greater than $10,000. These monthly
reports are to be maintained in the respective Contractor or Subcontractor’s records.
1-07.12 Federal Agency Inspection
Federal laws, rules, and regulations shall be observed by the Contractor on Federal-aid
projects. This Work is subject to inspection by the appropriate Federal agency. The Contractor
shall cooperate with the Federal agencies in these inspections. These inspections shall not
make the Federal Government a party to the Contract and shall not constitute an interference
with the rights of the Contracting Agency or the Contractor.
1-07.13 Contractor’s Responsibility for Work
1-07.13(1) General
All Work and material for the Contract, including any change order Work, shall be at the
sole risk of the Contractor until the entire improvement has been completed as determined by
the Engineer, except as provided in this section.
The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore, and make good all damages to any portion of
the permanent or temporary Work occurring before the Physical Completion Date and shall

bear all the expense to do so, except damage to the permanent Work caused by: (a) acts of
God, such as earthquake, floods, or other cataclysmic phenomenon of nature, or (b) acts of the
public enemy or of governmental authorities; or (c) slides in cases where Section 2-03.3(11)
is applicable; Provided, however, that these exceptions shall not apply should damages result
from the Contractor’s failure to take reasonable precautions or to exercise sound engineering
and construction practices in conducting the Work.
If the performance of the Work is delayed as a result of damage by others, an extension
of time will be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-08.8.
Nothing contained in this section shall be construed as relieving the Contractor of
responsibility for, or damage resulting from, the Contractor’s operations or negligence,
nor shall the Contractor be relieved from full responsibility for making good any defective
Work or materials as provided for under Section 1-05.
1-07.13(2) Relief of Responsibility for Completed Work
Upon written request, the Contractor may be relieved of the duty of maintaining and
protecting certain portions of the Work, as described below, which have been completed in all
respects in accordance with the requirements of the Contract. If the Engineer provides written
approval, the Contractor will be relieved of the responsibility for damage to said completed
portions of the Work resulting from use by public traffic or from the action of the elements
or from any other cause, but not from damage resulting from the Contractor’s operations
or negligence.
Portions of the Work for which the Contractor may be relieved of the duty of maintenance
and protection as provided in the above paragraph include but are not limited to the following:
1. The completion of ¼ mile of Roadway or ¼ mile of one Roadway of a divided
Highway or a frontage road including the Traveled Way, Shoulders, drainage control
facilities, planned Roadway protection Work, lighting, and any required traffic control
and access facilities.
2. A bridge or other Structure of major importance.
3. A complete unit of a traffic control signal system or of a Highway lighting system.
4. A complete unit of permanent Highway protection Work.
5. A building that is functionally complete and open to the public.
6. Any Contract Proposal item.
1-07.13(3) Relief of Responsibility for Damage by Public Traffic
When it is necessary for public traffic to utilize a Highway facility during construction,
the Contractor will be relieved of responsibility for damages to permanent Work by public
traffic under the following circumstances:
1. The Work is in accordance with the Contract Plans or approved stage construction plans,
2. The Work is on a section of Roadway required by the Contract to be opened to public
traffic, and
3. The traffic control is in accordance with the approved traffic control plans.
If traffic is relocated to another section of Roadway, the Contractor shall resume
responsibility for the Work until such time as the section of Roadway is again open to public
traffic or the Contractor submits a written request for Work that is completed to a point where
relief can be granted in accordance with Section 1-07.13(2).
1-07.13(4) Repair of Damage
The Contractor shall promptly repair all damage to either temporary or permanent Work
as ordered by the Engineer. For damage qualifying for relief under Sections 1-07.13(1),
1-07.13(2), 1-07.13(3), or 8-17.5, payment will be made in accordance with Section 1-09.4,
using the estimated Bid item “Reimbursement for Third Party Damage”.

In the event the Contracting Agency pays for damage to the Contractor’s Work or for
damage to the Contractor’s equipment caused by third parties, any claim the Contractor had
or may have had against the third party shall be deemed assigned to the Contracting Agency,
to the extent of the Contracting Agency’s payment for such damage.
Payment will be limited to repair of damaged Work only. No payment will be made for
delay or disruption of Work.
For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency
has entered an amount for “Reimbursement for Third Party Damage” in the Proposal to
become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor.
1-07.14 Responsibility for Damage
The State, Governor, Commission, Secretary, and all officers and employees of the State,
including but not limited to those of the Department, will not be responsible in any manner:
for any loss or damage that may happen to the Work or any part; for any loss of material or
damage to any of the materials or other things used or employed in the performance of Work;
for injury to or death of any persons, either workers or the public; or for damage to the public
for any cause which might have been prevented by the Contractor, or the workers, or anyone
employed by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for any liability imposed by law for injuries to, or the
death of, any persons or damages to property resulting from any cause whatsoever during the
performance of the Work, or before final acceptance.
Subject to the limitations in this section, and RCW 4.24.115, the Contractor shall
indemnify, defend, and save harmless the State, Governor, Commission, Secretary, and all
officers and employees of the State from all claims, suits, or actions brought for injuries to, or
death of, any persons or damages resulting from construction of the Work or in consequence
of any negligence or breach of Contract regarding the Work, the use of any improper materials
in the Work, caused in whole or in part by any act or omission by the Contractor or the agents
or employees of the Contractor during performance or at any time before final acceptance. In
addition to any remedy authorized by law, the State may retain so much of the money due the
Contractor as deemed necessary by the Engineer to ensure the defense and indemnification
obligations of this section until disposition has been made of such suits or claims.
Subject to the limitations in this section and RCW 4.24.115, the Contractor shall indemnify,
defend, and save harmless any county, city, or region, its officers, and employees connected
with the Work, within the limits of which county, city, or region the Work is being performed,
all in the same manner and to the same extent as provided above for the protection of the State,
its officers and employees, provided that no retention of money due the Contractor be made by
the State except as provided in RCW 60.28, pending disposition of suits or claims for damages
brought against the county, city, or district.
Pursuant to RCW 4.24.115, if such claims, suits, or actions result from the concurrent
negligence of (a) the indemnitee or the indemnitee’s agents or employees and (b) the
Contractor or the Contractor’s agent or employees, the indemnity provisions provided in
the preceding paragraphs of this section shall be valid and enforceable only to the extent
of the Contractor’s negligence or the negligence of its agents and employees.
The Contractor shall bear sole responsibility for damage to completed portions of the
project and to property located off the project caused by erosion, siltation, runoff, or other
related items during the construction of the project. The Contractor shall also bear sole
responsibility for any pollution of rivers, streams, ground water, or other waters that may
occur as a result of construction operations.
The Contractor shall exercise all necessary precautions throughout the life of the Project
to prevent pollution, erosion, siltation, and damage to property.
The Contracting Agency will forward to the Contractor all claims filed against the State
according to RCW 4.92.100 that are deemed to have arisen in relation to the Contractor’s
Work or activities under this Contract, and, in the opinion of the Contracting Agency, are

subject to the defense, indemnity, and insurance provisions of these Standard Specifications.
Claims will be deemed tendered to the Contractor and insurer, who has named the State as
a named insured or an additional insured under the Contract’s insurance provisions, once
the claim has been forwarded via certified mail to the Contractor. The Contractor shall be
responsible to provide a copy of the claim to the Contractor’s designated insurance agent
who has obtained/met the Contract’s insurance provision requirements.
Within 60 calendar days following the date a claim is sent by the Contracting Agency to the
Contractor, the Contractor shall notify the Claimant and WSDOT (Risk Management Office,
PO Box 47418, Olympia, WA 98504-7418) of the following:
a. Whether the claim is allowed or is denied in whole or in part, and, if so, the specific
reasons for the denial of the individual claim, and if not denied in full, when payment
has been or will be made to the claimant(s) for the portion of the claim that is
allowed, or
b. If resolution negotiations are continuing. In this event, status updates will be reported
no longer than every 60 calendar days until the claim is resolved or a lawsuit is filed.
If the Contractor fails to provide the above notification within 60 calendar days, then
the Contractor shall yield to the Contracting Agency sole and exclusive discretion to allow
all or part of the claim on behalf of the Contractor, and the Contractor shall be deemed to
have WAIVED any and all defenses, objections, or other avoidances to the Contracting
Agency’s allowance of the claim, or the amount allowed by the Contracting Agency,
under common law, constitution, statute, or the Contract and these Standard Specifications.
If all or part of a claim is allowed, the Contracting Agency will notify the Contractor via
certified mail that it has allowed all or part of the claim and make appropriate payments to
the claimant(s) with State funds.
Payments of State funds by the Contracting Agency to claimant(s) under this section will
be made on behalf of the Contractor and at the expense of the Contractor, and the Contractor
shall be unconditionally obligated to reimburse the Contracting Agency for the “total
reimbursement amount”, which is the sum of the amount paid to the claimant(s), plus all costs
incurred by the Contracting Agency in evaluating the circumstances surrounding the claim,
the allowance of the claim, the amount due to the claimant, and all other direct costs for the
Contracting Agency’s administration and payment of the claim on the Contractor’s behalf.
The Contracting Agency will be authorized to withhold the total reimbursement amount from
amounts due the Contractor, or, if no further payments are to be made to the Contractor under
the Contract, the Contractor shall directly reimburse the Contracting Agency for the amounts
paid within 30 days of the date notice that the claim was allowed was sent to the Contractor.
In the event reimbursement from the Contractor is not received by the Contracting Agency
within 30 days, interest shall accrue on the total reimbursement amount owing at the rate of
12 percent per annum calculated at a daily rate from the date the Contractor was notified that
the claim was allowed. The Contracting Agency’s costs to enforce recovery of these amounts
are additive to the amounts owing.
The Contractor specifically assumes all potential liability for actions brought by employees
of the Contractor and, solely for the purpose of enforcing the defense and indemnification
obligations set forth in Section 1-07.14, the Contractor specifically waives any immunity
granted under the State industrial insurance law, Title 51 RCW. This waiver has been mutually
negotiated by the parties. The Contractor shall similarly require that each Subcontractor
it retains in connection with the project comply with the terms of this paragraph, waive
any immunity granted under Title 51 RCW, and assume all liability for actions brought by
employees of the Subcontractor.
1-07.15 Temporary Water Pollution Prevention
1-07.15(1) Spill Prevention, Control, and Countermeasures Plan
The Contractor shall prepare a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a project-specific
spill prevention, control, and countermeasures plan (SPCC Plan), and shall implement

the plan for the duration of the project. No on-site construction activities may commence
until the Contracting Agency accepts an SPCC Plan for the project. An SPCC Plan
template and guidance information is available at www.wsdot.wa.gov/environment/hazmat/
spillprevention.htm.
The SPCC Plan shall address all fuels, petroleum products, hazardous materials,
and other materials defined in Chapter 447 of the WSDOT Environmental Manual M 31-11.
Occupational safety and health requirements that may pertain to SPCC Plan implementation
are contained in, but not limited to, WAC 296-824 and WAC 296-843. The SPCC Plan shall
address conditions that may be required by Section 3406 of the current International Fire
Code, or as approved by the local Fire Marshal.
Implementation Requirements
The Contractor shall update the SPCC Plan throughout project construction so that the
written plan reflects actual site conditions and practices. The Contractor shall update the
SPCC Plan at least annually and maintain a copy of the updated SPCC Plan on the project site.
The Contractor shall fully implement the SPCC Plan, as accepted and updated, at all times.
SPCC Plan Element Requirements
The SPCC Plan shall set forth the following information in the following order:
1. Responsible Personnel – Identify the names, titles, and contact information for
the personnel responsible for implementing and updating the plan and for responding
to spills.
2. Spill Reporting – List the names and telephone numbers of the Federal, State, and local
agencies the Contractor shall notify in the event of a spill.
3. Project and Site Information – Describe the following items:
a. The project Work.
b. The site location and boundaries.
c. The drainage pathways from the site.
d. Nearby waterways and sensitive areas and their distances from the site.
4. Potential Spill Sources – Describe each of the following for all potentially hazardous
materials brought or generated on-site including but not limited to materials used for
equipment operation, refueling, maintenance, or cleaning:
a. Name of material and its intended use.
b. Estimated maximum amount on-site at any one time.
c. Location(s) (including any equipment used below the ordinary high water line)
where the material will be staged, used, and stored and the distance(s) from nearby
waterways and sensitive areas.
5. Preexisting Contamination – Describe any preexisting contamination and contaminant
sources (such as buried pipes or tanks) in the project area that are described in the
Contract provisions and Plans. Identify equipment and Work practices that shall be used
to prevent the release of contamination.
6. Spill Prevention and Response Training – Describe how and when all project
personnel, including refueling personnel and other Subcontractors, shall be trained in
spill prevention, containment, and response and in the location of spill response kits.
7. Spill Prevention – Describe the following items:
a. The contents and locations of spill response kits that the Contractor shall supply
and maintain that are appropriately stocked, located in close proximity to hazardous
materials and equipment, and immediately accessible.
b. Security measures for potential spill sources to prevent accidental spills
and vandalism.
c. Methods used to prevent stormwater from contacting hazardous materials.

d. Secondary containment for each potential spill source listed in 4, above.

Secondary containment structures shall be in accordance with Section S9.D.9 of
Ecology’s Construction Stormwater General NPDES Permit, where secondary
containment means placing tanks or containers within an impervious structure
capable of containing 110 percent of the volume contained in the largest tank
within the containment structure. Double-walled tanks do not require additional
secondary containment.
e. BMP methods and locations where they are used to prevent discharges to ground
or water during mixing and transfer of hazardous materials and fuel. Methods
to control pollutants shall use BMPs in accordance with Ecology’s Construction
Stormwater General NPDES Permit. BMP guidance is provided in Ecology’s
Stormwater Management Manuals, such as Volume II – Construction Stormwater
Pollution Prevention, BMP C153, and Volume IV – Source Control BMPs.
f. Refueling procedures for equipment that cannot be moved from below the ordinary
high water line.
g. Daily inspection and cleanup procedures that ensure all equipment used below the
ordinary high water line is free of all external petroleum-based products.
h. Routine equipment, storage area, and structure inspection and maintenance practices
to prevent drips, leaks, or failures of hoses, valves, fittings, containers, pumps, or
other systems that contain or transfer hazardous materials.
i. Site inspection procedures and frequency.
8. Spill Response – Outline the response procedures the Contractor shall follow for
each scenario listed below, indicating that if hazardous materials are encountered or
spilled during construction, the Contractor shall do everything possible to control and
contain the material until appropriate measures can be taken. Include a description of
the actions the Contractor shall take and the specific on-site spill response equipment
that shall be used to assess the spill, secure the area, contain and eliminate the spill
source, clean up spilled material, decontaminate equipment, and dispose of spilled
and contaminated material:
a. A spill of each type of hazardous material at each location identified in 4, above.
b. Stormwater that has come into contact with hazardous materials.
c. A release or spill of any preexisting contamination and contaminant source described
in 5, above.
d. A release or spill of any unknown preexisting contamination and contaminant
sources (such as buried pipes or tanks) encountered during project Work.
e. A spill occurring during Work with equipment used below the ordinary high
water line.
If the Contractor will use a Subcontractor for spill response, provide contact information
for the Subcontractor under item 1 (above), identify when the Subcontractor shall be
used, and describe actions the Contractor shall take while waiting for the Subcontractor
to respond.
9. Project Site Map – Provide a map showing the following items:
a. Site location and boundaries.
b. Site access roads.
c. Drainage pathways from the site.
d. Nearby waterways and sensitive areas.
e. Hazardous materials, equipment, and decontamination areas identified in 4, above.
f. Preexisting contamination or contaminant sources described in 5, above.
g. Spill prevention and response equipment described in 7 and 8, above.
10. Spill Report Forms – Provide a copy of the spill report form(s) that the Contractor
shall use in the event of a release or spill.

Payment
Payment will be made for the following Bid item when it is included in the Proposal:
“SPCC Plan”, lump sum.
When the written SPCC Plan is accepted by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall
receive 50 percent of the lump sum Contract price for the plan.
The remaining 50 percent of the lump sum price will be paid after the materials and
equipment called for in the plan are mobilized to the project.
The lump sum payment for the “SPCC Plan” shall be full pay for all costs associated
with creating and updating the accepted SPCC Plan, and all costs associated with the set
up of prevention measures and for implementing the current SPCC Plan as required by
this Specification.
1-07.16 Protection and Restoration of Property
1-07.16(1) Private/Public Property
The Contractor shall not use Contracting Agency owned or controlled property other
than that directly affected by the Contract Work without the approval of the Engineer. If the
Engineer grants such approval, the Contractor shall then vacate the area when ordered to do
so by the Engineer. Approval to temporarily use the property shall not create any entitlement
to further use or to compensation for any conditions or requirements imposed.
The Contractor shall protect private or public property on or in the vicinity of the Work
site. The Contractor shall ensure that it is not removed, damaged, destroyed, or prevented
from being used unless the Contract so specifies.
Property includes land, utilities, trees, landscaping, improvements legally on the right of
way, markers, monuments, buildings, Structures, pipe, conduit, sewer or water lines, signs,
and other property of all description whether shown on the Plans or not.
If the Engineer orders, or if otherwise necessary, the Contractor shall install protection,
acceptable to the Engineer, for property such as that listed in the previous paragraph. The
Contractor is responsible for locating and protecting all property that is subject to damage by
the construction operation.
If the Contractor (or agents/employees of the Contractor) damage, destroy, or interfere with
the use of such property, the Contractor shall restore it to original condition. The Contractor
shall also halt any interference with the property’s use. If the Contractor refuses or does not
respond immediately, the Engineer may have such property restored by other means and
subtract the cost from money that will be or is due the Contractor.
The Contractor may access the worksite from adjacent properties. The Contractor shall
not use or allow others to use this access to merge with public traffic. During non-working
hours, the Contractor shall provide a physical barrier that is either locked or physically unable
to be moved without equipment. The access shall not go through any existing Structures. The
access may go through fencing. The Contractor shall control or prevent animals from entering
the worksite to the same degree that they were controlled before the fence was removed.
The Contractor shall prevent persons not involved in the Contract Work from entering the
worksite through the access or through trails and pathways intersected by the access. If the
Contract documents require that existing trails or pathways be maintained during construction,
the Contractor will insure the safe passage of trail or pathway users. The Contractor shall
effectively control airborne particulates that are generated by use of the access. The location
and use of the access shall not adversely affect wetlands or sensitive areas in any manner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all haul road agreements, permits and/
or easements associated with the access. The Contractor shall replace any fence, repair
any damage and restore the site to its original state when the access is no longer needed.
The Contractor shall bear all costs associated with this worksite access.

1-07.16(2) Vegetation Protection and Restoration

Existing vegetation, where shown in the Plans or designated by the Engineer, shall
be saved and protected through the life of the Contract. The Engineer will designate the
vegetation to be saved and protected by a site preservation line, high visibility fencing, or
individual flagging.
Damage which may require replacement of vegetation includes torn bark stripping, broken
branches, exposed root systems, cut root systems, poisoned root systems, compaction of
surface soil and roots, puncture wounds, drastic reduction of surface roots or leaf canopy,
changes in grade greater than 6 inches, or any other changes to the location that may
jeopardize the survival or health of the vegetation to be preserved.
When large roots of trees designated to be saved are exposed by the Contractor’s operation,
they shall be wrapped with heavy, moist material, such as burlap or canvas, for protection and
to prevent excessive drying. The material shall be kept moist and securely fastened until the
roots are covered to finish grade. All material and fastening material shall be removed from the
roots before covering. All roots 1 inch or larger in diameter, that are damaged, shall be pruned
with a sharp saw or pruning shear. Damaged, torn, or ripped bark shall be removed as ordered
by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
Any pruning activity required to complete the Work as specified shall be performed by
a Certified Arborist at the direction of the Engineer.
If due to, or for any reason related to the Contractor’s operation, any tree, shrub, ground
cover or herbaceous vegetation designated to be saved is destroyed, disfigured, or damaged
to the extent that continued life is questionable as determined by the Engineer, it shall be
removed by the Contractor at the direction of the Engineer.
The Contractor will be assessed damages equal to triple the value of the vegetation as
determined in the Guide for Plant Appraisal, Current Edition, published by the International
Society of Arboriculture or the estimated cost of restoration with a similar species. Shrub,
ground cover, and herbaceous plant values will be determined using the Cost of Cure Method.
Any damage so assessed will be deducted from the monies due or that may become due
the Contractor.
1-07.16(2)A Wetland and Sensitive Area Protection
Existing wetland and other environmentally sensitive areas, where shown in the Plans
or designated by the Engineer, shall be saved and protected through the life of the Contract.
When applicable, a site preservation line has been established as a boundary between work
zones and sensitive environmental areas.
The Contractor shall install high visibility fence as shown in the Plans or designated
by the Engineer in accordance with Section 8-01.3(1). The areas to be protected include
critical environmental areas, buffer zones, and other areas of vegetation to be preserved.
The Contractor shall keep areas identified by the site preservation lines free of construction
equipment, construction materials, debris, and runoff. No access, including, but not limited
to, excavation, clearing, staging, or stockpiling, shall be performed inside the protected area.
1-07.16(3) Fences, Mailboxes, Incidentals
The Contractor shall maintain any temporary fencing to prevent pedestrians from entering
the worksite and to preserve livestock, crops, or property when working through or adjacent
to private property. The Contractor is liable for all damages resulting from not complying
with this requirement.
The usefulness of existing mail or paper boxes shall not be impaired. If the
Contract anticipates removing and reinstalling the mail or paper boxes, the provisions
of Section 8-18 will apply. If the mail or paper boxes are rendered useless solely by acts
(or inaction) of the Contractor or for the convenience of the Contractor, the Work shall be
performed as provided in Section 8-18 at the Contractor’s expense.

1-07.16(4) Archaeological and Historical Objects

Archaeological or historical objects, such as ruins, sites, buildings, artifacts, fossils, or
other objects of antiquity that may have significance from a historical or scientific standpoint,
which may be encountered by the Contractor, shall not be further disturbed. The Contractor
shall immediately notify the Engineer of any such finds.
The Engineer will determine if the material is to be salvaged. The Contractor may be
required to stop Work in the vicinity of the discovery until such determination is made. The
Engineer may require the Contractor to suspend Work in the vicinity of the discovery until
salvage is accomplished.
If the Engineer finds that the suspension of Work in the vicinity of the discovery increases
or decreases the cost or time required for performance of any part of the Work under this
Contract, the Engineer will make an adjustment in payment or the time required for the
performance of the Work in accordance with Sections 1-04.4 and 1-08.8.
1-07.16(4)A Inadvertent Discovery of Human Skeletal Remains
If human skeletal remains are encountered by the Contractor, they shall not be further
disturbed. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any such finds, and
shall cease all work adjacent to the discovery, in an area adequate to provide for the total
security and protection of the integrity of the skeletal remains. The Engineer may require the
Contractor to suspend Work in the vicinity of the discovery until final determinations are made
and removal of the skeletal remains is completed.
If the Engineer finds that the suspension of Work in the vicinity of the discovery increases
or decreases the cost or time required for performance of any part of the Work under this
Contract, the Engineer will make an adjustment in payment or the time required for the
performance of the Work in accordance with Sections 1-04.4 and 1-08.8.
1-07.16(5) Payment
All costs to comply with this section and for the protection and repair specified in this
section, unless otherwise stated, are incidental to the Contract and are the responsibility of the
Contractor. The Contractor shall include all related costs in the unit Bid prices of the Contract.
1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities
The Contractor shall protect all private and public utilities from damage resulting from
the Work. Among others, these utilities include: telephone, telegraph, and power lines;
pipelines, sewer and water lines; railroad tracks and equipment; and highway lighting and
signing systems, and intelligent transportation systems (ITS). All costs required to protect
public and private utilities shall be at the Contractor’s expense, except as provided otherwise
in this section.
RCW 19.122 relates to underground utilities. In accordance with this RCW, the Contractor
shall call the One-Number Locator Service for field location of utilities. If no locator service is
available for the area, notice shall be provided individually to those owners of utilities known
to, or suspected of, having underground facilities within the area of the proposed excavation.
1-07.17(1) Utility Construction, Removal, or Relocation by the Contractor
If the Work requires removing or relocating a utility, the Contract will assign the task
to the Contractor or the utility owner. When the task is assigned to the Contractor it shall
be performed in accordance with the Plans and Special Provisions. New utility construction
shall be performed according to the appropriate Contract requirements.
To ease or streamline the Work for its own convenience, the Contractor may desire to
ask utility owners to move, remove, or alter their equipment in ways other than those listed
in the Plans or Special Provisions. The Contractor shall make the arrangements and pay all
costs that arise from work performed by the utility owner at the Contractor’s request. The
Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of plans and details describing
the scope and schedule of all work performed at the Contractor’s request by the utility owner.

In some cases, the Plans or Special Provisions may not show all underground facilities.
If the Work requires these to be moved or protected, the Engineer will assign the task to others
or issue a written change order requiring the Contractor to do so as provided in Section 1-04.4.
1-07.17(2) Utility Construction, Removal, or Relocation by Others
Any authorized agent of the Contracting Agency or utility owners may enter the Highway
right of way to repair, rearrange, alter, or connect their equipment. The Contractor shall
cooperate with such effort and shall avoid creating delays or hindrances to those doing the
work. As needed, the Contractor shall arrange to coordinate work schedules.
If the Contract provides notice that utility work (including furnishing, adjusting, relocating,
replacing, or constructing utilities) will be performed by others during the prosecution of the
Work, the Special Provisions will establish the utility owner’s anticipated completion. The
Contractor shall carry out the Work in a way that will minimize interference and delay for all
forces involved. Any costs incurred prior to the utility owners anticipated completion (or if no
completion is specified, within a reasonable period of time) that results from the coordination
and prosecution of the Work regarding utility adjustment, relocation, replacement, or
construction shall be at the Contractor’s expense as provided in Section 1-05.14.
When others delay the Work through late performance of utility work, the Contractor shall
adhere to the requirements of Section 1-04.5.The Contracting Agency will either suspend
Work according to Section 1-08.6, or order the Contractor to coordinate the Work with the
work of the utility owner in accordance with Section 1-04.4. When ordered to coordinate the
Work with the work of the utility owner, the Contractor shall prosecute the Work in a way that
will minimize interference and delay for all forces involved.
1-07.18 Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain and keep in force the following policies of insurance.
The policies shall be with companies or through sources approved by the State Insurance
Commissioner pursuant to RCW 48.05. Unless otherwise indicated below, the policies shall
be kept in force from the execution date of the Contract until the date of acceptance by the
Secretary (Section 1-05.12).
1. Owners and Contractors Protective (OCP) Insurance providing bodily injury and
property damage liability coverage, with limits of $3,000,000 per occurrence and
per project in the aggregate for each policy period, written on Insurance Services
Office (ISO) form CG0009 1204, together with Washington State Department of
Transportation amendatory endorsement CG 2908 1195, specifying the Contracting
Agency, the State, the Governor, the Commission, the Secretary, the Department,
and all officers and employees of the State as named insured.
2. Commercial General Liability (CGL) Insurance written under ISO Form CG0001 or its
equivalent, with minimum limits of $3,000,000 per occurrence and in the aggregate for
each 1-year policy period. This coverage may be any combination of primary, umbrella,
or excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less than $3,000,000
per occurrence and in the aggregate. Products and completed operations coverage shall
be provided for a period of 3 years following Substantial Completion of the Work.
3. Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance providing bodily injury and property
damage liability coverage for all owned and nonowned vehicles assigned to or used
in the performance of the Work, with a combined single limit of not less than $1,000,
000 per occurrence. This coverage may be any combination of primary, umbrella, or
excess liability coverage affording total liability limits of not less than $1,000,000
per occurrence, with the State named as an additional insured or designated insured
in connection with the Contractor’s Performance of the Contract. If pollutants are to
be transported, MCS 90 and CA 99 48 endorsements are required on the Commercial
Automobile Liability insurance policy unless in-transit pollution risk is covered under
a Pollution Liability insurance policy.

4. The Contractor shall be Named Insured and the Contracting Agency, the State, the
Governor, the Commission, the Secretary, the Department, all officers and employees
of the State, and their respective members, directors, officers, employees, agents, and
consultants (collectively the “Additional Insureds”) shall be included as Additional
Insureds for all policies and coverages specified in this section, with the exception
of the OCP policy. Said insurance coverage shall be primary and noncontributory
insurance with respect to the insureds and the Additional Insureds. Any insurance
or self-insurance beyond that specified in this Contract that is maintained by any
Additional Insured shall be in excess of such insurance and shall not contribute with
it. All insurance coverage required by this section shall be written and provided by
“occurrence-based” policy forms rather than by “claims made” forms.
All endorsements adding Additional Insureds to required policies shall be issued on
(i) form CG 20 10 11 85 or a form deemed equivalent by the Contracting Agency,
providing the Additional Insureds with all policies and coverages set forth in this
section, with the exception of the OCP and Commercial Auto policies or (ii) form CA
20 48 or forms deemed equivalent by Contracting Agency, providing the Additional
Insureds with all coverages required under the Commercial Automobile Liability.
5. The coverage limits to be provided by the Contractor for itself and to the Contracting
Agency and Additional Insureds pursuant to this section or any Special Provision,
shall be on a “per project” aggregate basis with the minimum limits of liability as
set forth herein for both general liability and products/completed operations claims.
The additional insured coverage required under this section for products/completed
operations claims shall remain in full force and effect for not less than 3 years following
Substantial Completion of the project. If the Contractor maintains, at any time, coverage
limits for itself in excess of limits set forth in this Section 1-07.18 or any Special
Provision, then those additional coverage limits shall also apply to the Contracting
Agency and the Additional Insured. This includes, but is not limited to, any coverage
limits provided under any risk financing program of any description, whether such
limits are primary, excess, contingent, or otherwise.
6. All insurance policies and coverages required under Sections 1-07.18 and 1-07.10
shall contain a waiver of subrogation against the Contracting Agency, the State, and
any Additional Insureds, and their respective departments, agencies, boards, and
commissions, and their respective officers, officials, agents, and employees for losses
arising from Work performed by or on behalf of the Contractor. This waiver has been
mutually negotiated by the parties.
7. Where applicable, the Contractor shall cause each Subcontractor to provide insurance
that complies with all applicable requirements of the Contractor-provided insurance
as set forth herein, in circumstances where the Subcontractor is not covered by the
Contractor-provided insurance. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for
determining the limits of coverage required, if any, to be obtained by Subcontractors,
which determination shall be made in accordance with reasonable and prudent business
practices. In the event that a Subcontractor is required to add the Contractor as an
Additional Insured pursuant to its contract for Work at the Project, then the Contractor
shall also cause each Subcontractor to include the Contracting Agency and the
Additional Insureds, as Additional Insureds as well, for primary and noncontributory
limits of liability under each Subcontractor’s Commercial General Liability,
Commercial Automobile Liability, and any other coverages that may be required
pursuant to a “Special Provision”.
8. Unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents, the parties to this
Contract do not intend by any of the provisions of this Contract to cause the public or
any member thereof or any other Person to be a third-party beneficiary of the Contract
Documents. Nothing in this Contract authorizes anyone not a party to this Contract
or a designated third-party beneficiary to this Contract to maintain a suit for personal

injuries or property damage pursuant to the terms or provisions of this Contract. It is
the further intent of the Contracting Agency and the Contractor in executing the Form
of Contract that no individual, firm, corporation, or any combination thereof that
supplies materials, labor, services, or equipment to the Contractor for the performance
of the Work shall become thereby a third-party beneficiary of this Contract.
The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of
any kind between the Contracting Agency and a Subcontractor or any other Person
except the Contractor.
9. The Owners and Contractors Protective Insurance policy shall not be subject to a
deductible or contain provisions for a deductible. The Commercial General Liability
policy and the Commercial Automobile Liability Insurance policy may, at the discretion
of the Contractor, contain such provisions. If a deductible applies to any claim under
these policies, then payment of that deductible will be the responsibility of the
Contractor, notwithstanding any claim of liability against the Contracting Agency.
However, in no event shall any provision for a deductible provide for a deductible in
excess of $50,000.00.
10. With the exception of the Commercial Automobile liability coverage, no policies of
insurance required under this section shall contain an arbitration or alternative dispute
resolution clause applicable to disputes between the insurer and its insureds. Any and
all disputes concerning (i) terms and scope of insurance coverage afforded by the
policies required hereunder and/or (ii) extra contractual remedies and relief, which may
be afforded policy holders in connection with coverage disputes, shall be resolved in
Washington Superior Court, applying Washington law.
11. Prior to Contract execution, the Contractor shall file with the Department of
Transportation, Contract Payment Section, PO Box 47420, Olympia, WA 98504-7420,
ACORD Form Certificates of Insurance evidencing the minimum insurance coverages
required under these Specifications. Within 30 days of being awarded a Contract, the
Contractor shall provide the Department with complete copies, which may be electronic
copies, of all insurance policies required under this section and any Special Provisions.
12. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer of any policy cancellations
and provide the Department of Transportation, Contract Payment Section, PO Box
47420, Olympia, WA 98504-7420, by U.S. Mail, notice of any policy cancellation
within two business days of receipt of cancellation.
13. Failure on the part of the Contractor to maintain the insurance as required, or not
to provide certification and copies of the insurance prior to the time specified in
Subsection 11 above, shall constitute a material breach of Contract upon which the
Contracting Agency may, after giving 5-business days notice to the Contractor to
correct the breach, immediately terminate the Contract or, at its discretion, procure or
renew such insurance and pay any and all premiums in connection therewith, with any
sums so expended to be repaid to the Contracting Agency on demand, or at the sole
discretion of the Contracting Agency, offset against funds due the Contractor from the
Contracting Agency. All costs for insurance, including any payments of deductible
amounts, shall be considered incidental to and included in the unit Contract prices and
no additional payment will be made.
1-07.19 Gratuities
The Contractor shall not extend any loan, gratuity, or gift of money in any form whatsoever
to any employee or officer of the Contracting Agency; nor will the Contractor rent or purchase
any equipment or materials from any employee or officer of the Contracting Agency. Before
payment of the final estimate will be made, the Contractor shall execute and furnish the
Contracting Agency an affidavit certifying compliance with these provisions of the Contract.
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable sections of the State Ethics law,
RCW 42.52, which regulates gifts to State officers and employees. Under that statute, any

Contracting Agency officer or employee who has or will participate with the Contractor
regarding any aspect of this Contract is prohibited from seeking or accepting any gift, gratuity,
favor or anything of economic value from the Contractor. Accordingly, neither the Contractor
nor any agent or representative shall offer anything of economic value as a gift, gratuity, or
favor directly or indirectly to any such officer or employee.
1-07.20 Patented Devices, Materials, and Processes
The Contractor shall assume all costs arising from the use of patented devices, materials,
or processes used on or incorporated in the Work, and agrees to indemnify, defend, and save
harmless the State, Governor, Commission, Secretary, and their duly authorized agents and
employees from all actions of any nature for, or on account of the use of any patented devices,
materials, or processes.
1-07.21 Rock Drilling Safety Requirements
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain safe working conditions during rock
drilling, by keeping dust concentration below the threshold limit value or by providing those
protective devices that may be required by the State Department of Labor and Industries.
1-07.22 Use of Explosives
When using explosives, the Contractor shall use the utmost care to protect life and
property, to prevent slides, and to leave undisturbed all materials, outside the neat lines of the
cross-section.
Explosives shall be handled, marked, stored, and used in compliance with WAC 296-52
and such local laws, rules, and regulations that may apply. The stricter provisions shall apply.
All explosives shall be stored securely as required by all laws and ordinances that apply.
Each storage place shall be clearly marked: “Dangerous-Explosives”. No explosives shall be
left unprotected.
If public utilities or railroads own equipment near the blast site, the Contractor shall notify
the owners of the location, date, time, and approximate duration of the blasting. This notice
shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable all owners to take any steps as they deem
necessary to protect their property from injury.
Blasting near proposed Structures shall be completed before Work on them begins. When
the use of explosives is necessary for the prosecution of the Work, the Contractor’s insurance
shall contain a special clause permitting the blasting.
1-07.23 Public Convenience and Safety
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate safeguards, safety devices,
protective equipment, and any other needed actions to protect the life, health, and safety of
the public, and to protect property in connection with the performance of the Work covered by
the Contract. The Contractor shall perform any measures or actions the Engineer may deem
necessary to protect the public and property. The responsibility and expense to provide this
protection shall be the Contractor’s except that which is to be furnished by the Contracting
Agency as specified in other sections of these Specifications. Nothing contained in this
Contract is intended to create any third-party beneficiary rights in favor of the public or any
individual utilizing the Highway facilities being constructed or improved under this Contract.
1-07.23(1) Construction Under Traffic
The Contractor shall conduct all operations with the least possible obstruction and
inconvenience to the public. The Contractor shall have under construction no greater length
or amount of Work than can be prosecuted properly with due regards to the rights of the
public. To the extent possible, the Contractor shall finish each section before beginning Work
on the next. The Contractor shall enter interstate Highways only through legal movements
from existing roads, streets, and through other access points specifically allowed by the
Contract documents.

To disrupt public traffic as little as possible, the Contractor shall permit traffic to pass
through the Work with the least possible inconvenience or delay. The Contractor shall maintain
existing roads, streets, sidewalks, and paths within the project limits, keeping them open and
in good, clean, safe condition at all times. Accessibility to existing or temporary pedestrian
push buttons shall not be impaired. Deficiencies caused by the Contractor’s operations
shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense. The Contractor shall also maintain roads,
streets, sidewalks, and paths adjacent to the project limits when affected by the Contractor’s
operations. Snow and ice control will be performed by the Contracting Agency on all
projects. Cleanup of snow and ice control debris will be at the Contracting Agency’s expense.
The Contractor shall perform the following:
1. Remove or repair any condition resulting from the Work that might impede traffic
or create a hazard.
2. Keep existing traffic signal and Highway lighting systems in operation as the
Work proceeds. (The Contracting Agency will continue the routine maintenance
on such system.)
3. Maintain the striping on the Roadway at the Contracting Agency’s expense. The
Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling when to renew striping, subject to the
approval of the Engineer. When the scope of the project does not require Work on the
Roadway, the Contracting Agency will be responsible for maintaining the striping.
4. Maintain existing permanent signing. Repair of signs will be at the Contracting
Agency’s expense, except those damaged due to the Contractor’s operations.
5. Keep drainage Structures clean to allow for free flow of water. Cleaning of existing
drainage Structures will be at the Contracting Agency’s expense when approved by
the Engineer, except when flow is impaired due to the Contractor’s operations.
To protect the rights of abutting property owners, the Contractor shall:
1. Conduct the construction so that the least inconvenience as possible is caused to
abutting property owners;
2. Maintain ready access to driveways, houses, and buildings along the line of Work;
3. Provide temporary approaches to crossing or intersecting roads and keep these
approaches in good condition; and
4. Provide another access before closing an existing one whenever the Contract calls for
removing and replacing an abutting owner’s access.
When traffic must pass through grading areas, the Contractor shall:
1. Make cuts and fills that provide a reasonably smooth, even Roadbed;
2. Place, in advance of other grading Work, enough fill at all culverts and bridges to permit
traffic to cross;
3. Make Roadway cuts and fills, if ordered by the Engineer, in partial-width lifts,
alternating lifts from side to side to permit traffic to pass on the side opposite the Work;
4. Install culverts on half the width of the Traveled Way, keeping the other half open to
traffic and unobstructed until the first half is ready for use;
5. After rough grading or placing any subsequent layers, prepare the final Roadbed to a
smooth, even surface (free of humps and dips) suitable for use by public traffic; and
6. Settle dust with water, or other dust palliative, as the Engineer may order.
If grading Work is on or next to a Roadway in use, the Contractor shall finish the grade
immediately after rough grading and place surfacing materials as the Work proceeds.
The Contractor shall conduct all operations to minimize any drop-offs (abrupt changes
in roadway elevation) left exposed to traffic during nonworking hours. Unless otherwise
specified in the Traffic Control Plan, drop-offs left exposed to traffic during nonworking
hours shall be protected as follows:
1. Drop-offs up to 0.20 foot, unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, may remain
exposed with appropriate warning signs alerting motorists of the condition.

2. Drop-offs more than 0.20 foot that are in the Traveled Way or Auxiliary Lane will not
be allowed unless protected with appropriate warning signs and further protected as
indicated in 3b or 3c below.
3. Drop-offs more than 0.20 foot, but no more than 0.50 foot, that are not within the
Traveled Way shall be protected with appropriate warning signs and further protected
by having one of the following:
a. A wedge of compacted stable material placed at a slope of 4:1 or flatter.
b. Channelizing devices (Type I barricades, plastic safety drums, or other devices
36 inches or more in height) placed along the traffic side of the drop-off and a
new edge of pavement stripes placed a minimum of 3 feet from the drop-off.
The maximum spacing between the devices in feet shall be the posted speed in
miles per hour. Pavement drop-off warning signs shall be placed in advance and
throughout the drop-off treatment.
c. Temporary concrete barrier or other approved barrier installed on the traffic side
of the drop-off with 2 feet between the drop-off and the back of the barrier and
a new edge of pavement stripe a minimum of 2 feet from the face of the barrier.
An approved terminal, flare, or impact attenuator will be required at the beginning
of the section. For night use, the barrier shall have standard delineation such as
paint, reflective tape, lane markers, or warning lights.
4. Drop-offs more than 0.50 foot not within the Traveled Way or Auxiliary Lane shall be
protected with appropriate warning signs and further protected as indicated in 3a, 3b,
or 3c if all of the following conditions are met:
a. The drop-off is less than 2 feet;
b. The total length throughout the project is less than 1 mile;
c. The drop-off does not remain for more than 3 working days;
d. The drop-off is not present on any of the holidays listed in Section 1-08.5; and
e. The drop-off is only on one side of the Roadway.
5. Drop-offs more than 0.50 foot that are not within the Traveled Way or Auxiliary Lane
and are not otherwise covered by No. 4 above shall be protected with appropriate
warning signs and further protected as indicated in 3a or 3c.
6. Open trenches within the Traveled Way or Auxiliary Lane shall have a steel-plate
cover placed and anchored over them. A wedge of suitable material, if required,
shall be placed for a smooth transition between the pavement and the steel plate.
Warning signs shall be used to alert motorists of the presence of the steel plates.
1-07.23(2) Construction and Maintenance of Detours
Unless otherwise approved, the Contractor shall maintain two-way traffic during
construction. The Contractor shall build, maintain in a safe condition, keep open to traffic,
and remove when no longer needed:
1. Detours and detour bridges that will accommodate traffic diverted from the Roadway,
bridge, sidewalk, or path during construction;
2. Detour crossings of intersecting Highways; and
3. Temporary approaches.
Unit Contract prices will cover construction, maintenance, and removal of all detours
shown in the Plans or proposed by the Contracting Agency.
The Contractor shall pay all costs to build, maintain, and remove any other detours,
whether built for the Contractor’s convenience or to facilitate construction operations.
Any detour proposed by the Contractor shall not be built until the Engineer approves.
Surfacing and paving shall be consistent with traffic requirements.

Upon failure of the Contractor to immediately provide, maintain, or remove detours or

detour bridges when ordered to do so by the Engineer, the Contracting Agency may, without
further notice to the Contractor or the Surety, provide, maintain, or remove the detours or
detour bridges and deduct the costs from any payments due or coming due the Contractor.
1-07.24 Rights of Way
All rights of way for the completed facility will be provided by the Contracting Agency
in advance of construction. Any exceptions will be noted in the Special Provisions. Should
the necessary Right of Way not be available as provided in the Contract, an extension of time
will be considered in accordance with Section 1-08.8.
1-07.25 Opening of Sections to Traffic
The Contracting Agency reserves the right to use and open to traffic any portion of
the Work before the Physical Completion Date of the entire Contract without constituting
acceptance of any of the Work. This action will not cause the Contracting Agency to incur
any liability to the Contractor except as may otherwise be provided in the Contract.
If the Contracting Agency opens any portion of the Work prior to the Physical Completion
Date of the entire Contract because early opening is specified in the Contract or when the
Contractor has failed to prosecute the Work continuously and efficiently, any Work remaining
shall be performed by the Contractor at the unit Contract prices for the items of Work
involved. No additional payment will be made for costs incurred by the Contractor because
of: (1) inconvenience, additional length of travel to conform to established traffic patterns
and planned access features; (2) compliance with statutes governing traffic regulations and
limitations of loads; or (3) additional flagging costs necessary to protect the operations and
the traveling public. The Contractor shall take all costs due to traffic using portions of the
Work into account when submitting the Bid Proposal, and the unit Contract prices for the
various items of Work involved shall include these costs.
1-07.26 Personal Liability of Public Officers
Neither the Governor, the Commission, the Secretary, the Engineer, nor any other officer
or employee of the State shall be personally liable for any acts or failure to act in connection
with the Contract, it being understood that in such matters, they are acting solely as agents
of the State.
1-07.27 No Waiver of State’s Legal Rights
The State shall not be precluded or estopped by any measurement, estimate, or certificate
made either before or after the completion and acceptance of the Work and payment therefore
from showing the true amount and character of the Work performed and materials furnished by
the Contractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue
or incorrectly made, or that the Work or materials do not conform in fact to the Contract. The
State shall not be precluded or estopped, notwithstanding any such measurement, estimate,
or certificate, and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and
the Sureties such damages as it may sustain by reason of the Contractor’s failure to comply
with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by the Secretary, nor any payment
for the whole or any part of the Work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken
by the State shall operate as a waiver of any portion of the Contract or of any power herein
reserved or any right to damages herein provided, or bar recovery of any money wrongfully
or erroneously paid to the Contractor. A waiver of any breach of the Contract shall not be
held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach.
The Contractor and the State recognize that the impact of overcharges to the State
by the Contractor resulting from antitrust law violations by the Contractor’s suppliers
or Subcontractors adversely affects the State rather than the Contractor. Therefore, the
Contractor agrees to assign to the State any and all claims for such overcharges.

1-08 Prosecution and Progress

1-08.1 Subcontracting
Work done by the Contractor’s own organization shall account for at least 30 percent of
the Awarded Contract price. Before computing this percentage, however, the Contractor may
subtract (from the Awarded Contract price) the costs of any subcontracted Work on items the
Contract designates as specialty items.
The Contractor shall not subcontract Work unless the Engineer approves in writing. Each
request to subcontract shall be on the form the Engineer provides. If the Engineer requests,
the Contractor shall provide proof that the Subcontractor has the experience, ability, and
equipment the Work requires. The Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to comply
with Section 1-07.9 and to furnish all certificates and statements required by the Contract.
Prior to subcontracting any Work, the Contractor shall verify that every first tier
Subcontractor meets the responsibility criteria stated below at the time of subcontract
execution. The Contractor shall include these responsibility criteria in every subcontract,
and require every Subcontractor to:
1. Possess any electrical contractor license required by RCW 19.28 or elevator contractor
license required by RCW 70.87, if applicable;
2. Have a certificate of registration in compliance with chapter RCW 18.27;
3. Have a current State unified business identifier number;
4. If applicable, have:
a. Industrial insurance coverage for the bidder’s employees working in Washington
(Title 51 RCW);
b. An employment security department number (Title 50 RCW);
c. A State excise tax registration number (Title 82 RCW);
5. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010
or RCW 39.12.065(3).
6. Verify these responsibility criteria for every lower tier subcontractor at the time of
subcontract execution; and,
7. Include these responsibility criteria in every lower tier subcontract.
Along with the request to sublet, the Contractor shall submit the names of any contracting
firms the Subcontractor proposes to use as lower tier subcontractors. Collectively, these lower
tier subcontractors shall not do Work that exceeds 25 percent of the total amount subcontracted
to a Subcontractor. When a Subcontractor is responsible for construction of a specific Structure
or Structures, the following Work may be performed by lower tier Subcontractors without
being subject to the 25 percent limitation:
1. Furnishing and driving of piling, or
2. Furnishing and installing concrete reinforcing and post-tensioning steel.
Except for the 25 percent limit, lower tier subcontractors shall meet the same requirements
as Subcontractors.
The Engineer will approve the request only if satisfied with the proposed Subcontractor’s
record, equipment, experience, and ability. Approval to subcontract shall not:
1. Relieve the Contractor of any responsibility to carry out the Contract,
2. Relieve the Contractor of any obligations or liability under the Contract and the
Contractor’s bond,
3. Create any contract between the Contracting Agency and the Subcontractor, or
4. Convey to the Subcontractor any rights against the Contracting Agency.
The Contracting Agency will not consider as subcontracting: (1) purchase of sand, gravel,
crushed stone, crushed slag, batched concrete aggregates, ready-mix concrete, off-site
fabricated structural steel, other off-site fabricated items, and any other materials supplied by

Prosecution and Progress 1-08
established and recognized commercial plants; or (2) delivery of these materials to the Work
site in vehicles owned or operated by such plants or by recognized independent or commercial
hauling companies hired by those commercial plants. However, the Washington State
Department of Labor and Industries may determine that RCW 39.12 applies to the employees
of such firms identified in 1 and 2 above in accordance with WAC 296-127. If this should
occur, the provisions of Section 1-07.9, as modified or supplemented, shall apply.
On all projects, the Contractor shall certify to the actual amounts paid to all firms that
were used as Subcontractors, lower tier subcontractors, manufacturers, regular dealers, or
service providers on the Contract. This includes all Disadvantaged, Minority, Small, Veteran or
Women’s Business Enterprise firms. This Certification shall be submitted to the Engineer on a
monthly basis each month between Execution of the Contract and Physical Completion of the
Contract using the application available at: https://wsdot.diversitycompliance.com. A monthly
report shall be submitted for every month between Execution of the Contract and Physical
Completion regardless of whether payments were made or work occurred.
The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of RCW 39.04.250, 39.76.011,
39.76.020, and 39.76.040, in particular regarding prompt payment to Subcontractors.
Whenever the Contractor withholds payment to a Subcontractor for any reason including
disputed amounts, the Contractor shall provide notice within 10 calendar days to the
Subcontractor with a copy to the Contracting Agency identifying the reason for the
withholding and a clear description of what the Subcontractor must do to have the withholding
released. Retainage withheld by the Contractor prior to completion of the Subcontractors work
is exempt from reporting as a payment withheld and is not included in the withheld amount.
The Contracting Agency’s copy of the notice to Subcontractor for deferred payments shall
be submitted to the Engineer concurrently with notification to the Subcontractor.
If dissatisfied with any part of the subcontracted Work, the Engineer may request in writing
that the Subcontractor be removed. The Contractor shall comply with this request at once and
shall not employ the Subcontractor for any further Work under the Contract.
1-08.1(1) Prompt Payment, Subcontract Completion and Return of Retainage Withheld
The following procedure shall apply to all subcontracts entered into as a part of
this Contract:
Requirements
1. Upon request, the Engineer will provide a copy of any or all progress payment
estimates, with regard to contract payments to any interested party to the project.
2. The Contractor shall make payment to the Lower Tier Subcontractor not later than ten
calendar days after receipt of payment for work satisfactorily completed by the Lower
Tier Subcontractor, to the extent of the Lower Tier Subcontractor’s interest therein.
3. In the event the Contractor believes they have the right under the Contract or
Subcontract to withhold payment in part or whole from a Lower Tier Subcontractor they
shall provide immediate notification to that Lower Tier Subcontractor and the Engineer.
The notice shall include an accounting of payments to date, the value and reason for the
withheld amount, and an explanation of what must be done to have the withheld amount
released. The Lower Tier Subcontractor shall be paid within eight calendar days after
the Subcontractor completes the remedial action identified.
4. Every subcontract and lower tier subcontract shall have a dispute resolution process
incorporated for resolving issues between the parties to the subcontract, or one shall be
established as necessary.
5. If the parties agree, the Contracting Agency will make a third party neutral available
provided the parties to the dispute agree that the cost of doing so is split between them.
6. The Engineer will withhold the same amount of funds from the Contractor as was
withheld if the issue is not resolved by the next progress estimate.

7. Failure by a Contractor or Subcontractor to comply with these requirements may result

in one or more of the following:
a. Reflected in the Prime Contractor’s Performance Evaluation.
b. Cancellation, termination or suspension of the Contract, in whole or in part.
c. Sanctions as provided by the Contract; subcontract; or by law under applicable
prompt payment statutes including RCW 39.04.250.
8. The Subcontractor shall make a written request to the Contractor for the release of the
Subcontractor’s retainage or retainage bond.
9. Within 10 calendar days of the request, the Contractor shall determine if the subcontract
has been satisfactorily completed including any required lien releases, documentation
and material testing and shall inform the Subcontractor, in writing, of the Contractor’s
determination.
10. If the Contractor determines that the subcontract has been satisfactorily completed, the
Subcontractor’s retainage or retainage bond shall be released by the Contractor within
10 calendar days from the date of the written notice. If the Contractor determines that
the Subcontractor has not achieved satisfactory completion of the subcontract, the
Contractor must provide the Subcontractor with written notice, stating specifically why
the subcontract Work is not satisfactorily completed and what has to be done to achieve
completion. The Contractor shall release the Subcontractor’s retainage or retainage
bond within 10 calendar days after the Subcontractor has satisfactorily completed the
Work identified in the notice.
11. In determining whether satisfactory completion has been achieved, the Contractor may
require the Subcontractor to provide documentation such as certifications and releases,
showing that all laborers, lower-tiered Subcontractors, suppliers of material and
equipment, and others involved in the Subcontractor’s Work have been paid in full. The
Contractor may also require any documentation from the Subcontractor that is required
by the subcontract or by the Contract between the Contractor and Contracting Agency
or by law such as affidavits of wages paid, and material acceptance certifications to the
extent that they relate to the Subcontractor’s Work.
12. If the Contractor fails to comply with the requirements of the Specification and the
Subcontractor’s retainage or retainage bond is wrongfully withheld, the Contractor will
be subject to the actions described in No. 7 listed above. The Subcontractor may also
seek recovery against the Contractor under applicable prompt pay statutes in addition
to any other remedies provided for by the subcontract or by law.
Conditions
1. This clause does not create a contractual relationship between the Contracting Agency
and any Subcontractor as stated in Section 1-08.1. Also, it is not intended to bestow
upon any Subcontractor, the status of a third-party beneficiary to the Contract between
the Contracting Agency and the Contractor.
2. This section of the Contract does not apply to retainage withheld by the Contracting
Agency from monies earned by the Contractor. The Contracting Agency shall continue
to process the release of that retainage based upon the Completion Date of the project as
defined in Section 1-08.5 Time for Completion and in accordance with the requirements
and procedures set forth in RCW 60.28.
Payment
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any additional costs involved in paying
retainage to the Subcontractors prior to total project completion. Those costs shall be
incidental to the respective Bid items.

1-08.2 Assignment
The Contractor shall not assign all or any part of the Work unless the Engineer approves
in writing. The Engineer will not approve any proposed assignment that would relieve the
original Contractor or Surety of responsibility under the Contract.
Money due (or that will become due) to the Contractor may be assigned. If given written
notice, the Contracting Agency will honor such an assignment to the extent the law permits.
But the assignment shall be subject to all setoffs, withholdings, and deductions required by law
and the Contract.
1-08.3 Progress Schedule
1-08.3(1) General Requirements
The Contractor shall submit Type A or Type B Progress Schedules and Schedule Updates
to the Engineer for approval. Schedules shall show Work that complies with all time and order
of Work requirements in the Contract. Scheduling terms and practices shall conform to the
standards established in Construction Planning and Scheduling, Second Edition, published by
the Associated General Contractors of America. Except for Weekly Look-Ahead Schedules,
all schedules shall meet these General Requirements, and provide the following information:
1. Include all activities necessary to physically complete the project.
2. Show the planned order of Work activities in a logical sequence.
3. Show durations of Work activities in working days as defined in Section 1-08.5.
4. Show activities in durations that are reasonable for the intended Work.
5. Define activity durations in sufficient detail to evaluate the progress of individual
activities on a daily basis.
6. Show the Physical Completion of all Work within the authorized Contract time.
Total float belongs to the project and shall not be for the exclusive benefit of any party.
The Contracting Agency allocates its resources to a Contract based on the total time
allowed in the Contract. The Contracting Agency may accept a Progress Schedule indicating
an early Physical Completion Date but cannot guarantee the Contracting Agency’s resources
will be available to meet an accelerated schedule. No additional compensation will be allowed
if the Contractor is not able to meet their accelerated schedule due to the unavailability of
Contracting Agency’s resources or for other reasons beyond the Contracting Agency’s control.
If the Engineer determines that the Progress Schedule or any necessary Schedule Update
does not provide the required information, then the schedule will be returned to the Contractor
for correction and resubmittal.
The Engineer’s approval of any schedule shall not transfer any of the Contractor’s
responsibilities to the Contracting Agency. The Contractor alone shall remain responsible for
adjusting forces, equipment, and Work schedules to ensure completion of the Work within the
time(s) specified in the Contract.
1-08.3(2) Progress Schedule Types
Type A Progress Schedules are required on all projects that do not contain the Bid item for
Type B Progress Schedule. Type B Progress Schedules are required on all projects that contain
the Bid item for Type B Progress Schedule. Weekly Look-Ahead Schedules and Schedule
Updates are required on all projects.
1-08.3(2)A Type A Progress Schedule
The Contractor shall submit five copies of a Type A Progress Schedule no later than
10 days after the date the contract is executed, or some other mutually agreed upon submittal
time. The schedule may be a critical path method (CPM) schedule, bar chart, or other standard
schedule format. Regardless of which format is used, the schedule shall identify the critical
path. The Engineer will evaluate the Type A Progress Schedule and approve or return the
schedule for corrections within 15 calendar days of receiving the submittal.

1-08.3(2)B Type B Progress Schedule

The Contractor shall submit a preliminary Type B Progress Schedule no later
than 5 calendar days after the date the Contract is executed. The preliminary Type B
Progress Schedule shall comply with all of these requirements and the requirements of
Section 1-08.3(1), except that it may be limited to only those activities occurring within the
first 60 working days of the project.
The Contractor shall submit five copies of a Type B Progress Schedule depicting the entire
project no later than 30 calendar days after the date the Contract is executed. The schedule
shall be a critical path method (CPM) schedule developed by the Precedence Diagramming
Method (PDM). Restraints may be utilized, but may not serve to change the logic of the
network or the critical path. The schedule shall display at least the following information:
Contract Number and Title
Construction Start Date
Critical Path
Activity Description
Milestone Description
Activity Duration
Predecessor Activities
Successor Activities
Early Start (ES) and Early Finish (EF) for each activity
Late Start (LS) and Late Finish (LF) for each activity
Total Float (TF) and Free Float (FF) for each activity
Physical Completion Date
Data Date
The Engineer will evaluate the Type B Progress Schedule and approve or return the
schedule for corrections within 15 calendar days of receiving the submittal.
1-08.3(2)C Vacant
1-08.3(2)D Weekly Look-Ahead Schedule
Each week that Work will be performed, the Contractor shall submit a Weekly Look-Ahead
Schedule showing the Contractor’s and all Subcontractors’ proposed Work activities for the
next two weeks. The Weekly Look-Ahead Schedule shall include the description, duration and
sequence of Work, along with the planned hours of Work. This schedule may be a network
schedule, bar chart, or other standard schedule format. The Weekly Look-Ahead Schedule
shall be submitted to the Engineer by the midpoint of the week preceding the scheduled
Work or some other mutually agreed upon submittal time.
1-08.3(3) Schedule Updates
The Engineer may request a Schedule Update when any of the following events occur:
1. The project has experienced a change that affects the critical path.
2. The sequence of Work is changed from that in the approved schedule.
3. The project is significantly delayed.
4. Upon receiving an extension of Contract time.
The Contractor shall submit five copies of a Type A or Type B Schedule Update within
15 calendar days of receiving a written request, or when an update is required by any other
provision of the Contract. A “significant” delay in time is defined as 10 working days or
10 percent of the original Contract time, whichever is greater.
In addition to the other requirements of this section, Schedule Updates shall reflect the
following information:

1. The actual duration and sequence of as-constructed Work activities, including

changed Work.
2. Approved time extensions.
3. Any construction delays or other conditions that affect the progress of the Work.
4. Any modifications to the as-planned sequence or duration of remaining activities.
5. The Physical Completion of all remaining Work in the remaining Contract time.
Unresolved requests for time extensions shall be reflected in the Schedule Update
by assuming no time extension will be granted, and by showing the effects to follow-on
activities necessary to physically complete the project within the currently authorized time
for completion.
1-08.3(4) Measurement
No specific unit of measurement shall apply to the lump sum item for Type B Progress
Schedule.
1-08.3(5) Payment
“Type B Progress Schedule”, lump sum.
The lump sum price shall be full pay for all costs for furnishing the Type B Progress
Schedule and preliminary Type B Progress Schedule.
Payment of 80 percent of the lump sum price will be made upon approval of the
Progress Schedule.
Payment will be increased to 100 percent of the lump sum price upon completion of
80 percent of the original total Contract Award amount.
All costs for providing Type A Progress Schedules and Weekly Look-Ahead Schedules
are considered incidental to other items of Work in the Contract.
No payment will be made for Schedule Updates that are required due to the Contractors
operations. Schedule Updates required by events that are attributed to the actions of the
Contracting Agency will be paid for in accordance with Section 1-09.4.
1-08.4 Prosecution of Work
The Contractor shall begin Work within 21 calendar days from the date of execution of the
Contract by the Contracting Agency, unless otherwise approved in writing. The Contractor
shall diligently pursue the Work to the Physical Completion Date within the time specified in
the Contract. Voluntary shutdown or slowing of operations by the Contractor shall not relieve
the Contractor of the responsibility to complete the Work within the time(s) specified in
the Contract.
When shown in the Plans, the first order of work shall be the installation of high visibility
fencing to delineate all areas for protection or restoration, as described in the Contract.
Installation of high visibility fencing adjacent to the roadway shall occur after the placement
of all necessary signs and traffic control devices in accordance with Section 1-10.1(2). Upon
construction of the fencing, the Contractor shall request the Engineer to inspect the fence.
No other work shall be performed on the site until the Contracting Agency has accepted the
installation of high visibility fencing, as described in the Contract.
1-08.5 Time for Completion
The Contractor shall complete all physical Contract Work within the number of “working
days” stated in the Contract Provisions or as extended by the Engineer in accordance with
Section 1-08.8. Every day will be counted as a “working day” unless it is a nonworking day
or an Engineer determined unworkable day. A nonworking day is defined as a Saturday, a
Sunday, a whole or half day on which the Contract specifically prohibits Work on the critical
path of the Contractor’s approved progress schedule, or one of these holidays: January 1, the
third Monday of January, the third Monday of February, Memorial Day, July 4, Labor Day,

November 11, Thanksgiving Day, the day after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. When any
of these holidays fall on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be counted a nonworking day.
When the holiday falls on a Saturday, the preceding Friday shall be counted a nonworking day.
The days between December 25 and January 1 will be classified as nonworking days.
An unworkable day is defined as a half or whole day the Engineer declares to be
unworkable because of weather or conditions caused by the weather that prevents satisfactory
and timely performance of the Work shown on the critical path of the Contractor’s approved
progress schedule. Other conditions beyond the control of the Contractor may qualify for an
extension of time in accordance with Section 1-08.8.
Contract time shall begin on the first working day following the 21st calendar day after the
date the Contracting Agency executes the Contract. If the Contractor starts Work on the project
at an earlier date, then Contract time shall begin on the first working day when on-site Work
begins. The Contract Provisions may specify another starting date for Contract time, in which
case, time will begin on the starting date specified.
Each working day shall be charged to the Contract as it occurs, until the Contract Work
is physically complete. If Substantial Completion has been granted and all the authorized
working days have been used, charging of working days will cease. Each week the Engineer
will provide the Contractor a statement that shows the number of working days: (1) charged
to the Contract the week before; (2) specified for the Physical Completion of the Contract;
and (3) remaining for the Physical Completion of the Contract. The statement will also show
the nonworking days and any half or whole day the Engineer declares as unworkable. Within
10 calendar days after the date of each statement, the Contractor shall file a written protest
of any alleged discrepancies in it. To be considered by the Engineer, the protest shall be in
sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of time disputed.
By not filing such detailed protest in that period, the Contractor shall be deemed as having
accepted the statement as correct.
The Engineer will give the Contractor written notice of the Physical Completion Date for
all Work the Contract requires. That date shall constitute the Physical Completion Date of the
Contract, but shall not imply the Secretary’s acceptance of the Work or the Contract.
The Engineer will give the Contractor written notice of the Completion Date of the
Contract after all the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract have been performed by the
Contractor. The following events must occur before the Completion Date can be established:
1. The physical Work on the project must be complete; and
2. The Contractor must furnish all documentation required by the Contract and required
by law, to allow the Contracting Agency to process final acceptance of the Contract.
The following documents must be received by the Engineer prior to establishing a
Completion Date:
a. Certified Payrolls (Federal-aid Projects)
b. Material Acceptance Certification Documents
c. Monthly Reports of Amounts Paid as MBE/WBE Participants, or Monthly Reports
of Amounts Credited as DBE Participation, as required by the Contract Provisions
d. Final Contract Voucher Certification
e. Copies of the approved “Affidavit of Prevailing Wages Paid” for the Contractor
and all Subcontractors
1-08.6 Suspension of Work
The Engineer may order suspension of all or any part of the Work if:
1. Unsuitable weather prevents satisfactory and timely performance of the Work; or
2. The Contractor does not comply with the Contract; or
3. It is in the public interest.
When ordered by the Engineer to suspend or resume Work, the Contractor shall do so
immediately.

If the Work is suspended for reason (1) above, the period of Work stoppage will be counted
as unworkable days. But if the Engineer believes the Contractor should have completed the
suspended Work before the suspension, all or part of the suspension period may be counted
as working days. The Engineer will set the number of unworkable days (or parts of days) by
deciding how long the suspension delayed the entire project.
If the Work is suspended for reason (2) above, the period of Work stoppage will be counted
as working days. The lost Work time, however, shall not relieve the Contractor from any
Contract responsibility.
If the performance of all or any part of the Work is suspended, delayed, or interrupted for
an unreasonable period of time by an act of the Contracting Agency in the administration
of the Contract, or by failure to act within the time specified in the Contract (or if no time is
specified, within a reasonable time), the Engineer will make an adjustment for any increase
in the cost or time for the performance of the Contract (excluding profit) necessarily caused
by the suspension, delay, or interruption. However, no adjustment will be made for any
suspension, delay, or interruption if (1) the performance would have been suspended, delayed,
or interrupted by any other cause, including the fault or negligence of the Contractor, or (2) an
equitable adjustment is provided for or excluded under any other provision of the Contract.
If the Contractor believes that the performance of the Work is suspended, delayed, or
interrupted for an unreasonable period of time and such suspension, delay, or interruption
is the responsibility of the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall immediately submit a
written notice of protest to the Engineer as provided in Section 1-04.5. No adjustment shall
be allowed for any costs incurred more than 10 calendar days before the date the Engineer
receives the Contractor’s written notice of protest. If the Contractor contends damages have
been suffered as a result of such suspension, delay, or interruption, the protest shall not be
allowed unless the protest (stating the amount of damages) is asserted in writing as soon
as practicable, but no later than the date of the Contractor’s signature on the Final Contract
Voucher Certification. The Contractor shall keep full and complete records of the costs and
additional time of such suspension, delay, or interruption and shall permit the Engineer to have
access to those records and any other records as may be deemed necessary by the Engineer to
assist in evaluating the protest.
The Engineer will determine if an equitable adjustment in cost or time is due as provided
in this section. The equitable adjustment for increase in costs, if due, shall be subject to the
limitations provided in Section 1-09.4, provided that no profit of any kind will be allowed
on any increase in cost necessarily caused by the suspension, delay, or interruption.
Request for extensions of time will be evaluated in accordance with Section 1-08.8.
The Engineer’s determination as to whether an adjustment should be made will be final
No claim by the Contractor under this clause shall be allowed unless the Contractor has
followed the procedures provided in this section and in Sections 1-04.5 and 1-09.11.
1-08.7 Maintenance During Suspension
Before and during any suspension (as described in Section 1-08.6) the Contractor shall
protect the Work from damage or deterioration. Suspension shall not relieve the Contractor
from anything the Contract requires unless this section states otherwise.
At no expense to the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall provide through the
construction area safe, smooth, and unobstructed roadways and pedestrian access routes for
public use during the suspension (as required in Section 1-07.23 or the Special Provisions).
This may include a temporary road, alternative pedestrian access route or detour.
If the Engineer determines that the Contractor failed to pursue the Work diligently before
the suspension, or failed to comply with the Contract or orders, then the Contractor shall
maintain the temporary Roadway in use during suspension. In this case, the Contractor shall
bear the maintenance costs. If the Contractor fails to maintain the temporary Roadway, the
Contracting Agency will do the Work and deduct all resulting costs from payments due to
the Contractor.
If the Engineer determines that the Contractor has pursued the Work diligently before the
suspension, then the Contracting Agency will maintain the temporary Roadway (and bear
its cost). This Contracting Agency-provided maintenance work will include only routine
maintenance of:
1. The Traveled Way, Auxiliary Lanes, Shoulders, and detour surface;
2. Roadway drainage along and under the traveled Roadway or detour; and
3. All barricades, signs, and lights needed for directing traffic through the temporary
Roadway or detour in the construction area.
The Contractor shall protect and maintain all other Work in areas not used by traffic.
All costs associated with protecting and maintaining such Work shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor except those costs associated with implementing the TESC Plan according
to Section 8-01.
After any suspension during which the Contracting Agency has done the routine
maintenance, the Contractor shall accept the traveled Roadway or detour as is when Work
resumes. The Contractor shall make no claim against the Contracting Agency for the condition
of the Roadway or detour.
After any suspension, the Contractor shall resume all responsibilities the Contract assigns
for the Work.
1-08.8 Extensions of Time
The Contractor shall submit any requests for time extensions to the Engineer in writing
no later than 10 working days after the delay occurs. The requests for time extension shall be
limited to the effect on the critical path of the Contractor’s approved schedule attributable to
the change or event giving rise to the request.
To be considered by the Engineer, the request shall be in sufficient detail (as determined by
the Engineer) to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of the time requested.
The request shall include an updated schedule that supports the request and demonstrates
that the change or event: (1) had a specific impact on the critical path, and except in cases of
concurrent delay, was the sole cause of such impact, and (2) could not have been avoided by
resequencing of the Work or by using other reasonable alternatives. If a request combined
with previous extension requests, equals 20 percent or more of the original Contract time
then the Contractor’s letter of request must bear consent of Surety. In evaluating any request,
the Engineer will consider how well the Contractor used the time from Contract execution
up to the point of the delay and the effect the delay has on any completion times included in
the Special Provisions. The Engineer will evaluate and respond within 15 calendar days of
receiving the request.
The authorized time for Physical Completion will be extended for a period equal to the
time the Engineer determines the Work was delayed because of:
1. Adverse weather causing the time requested to be unworkable, provided that the
Engineer had not already declared the time to be unworkable and the Contractor has
filed a written protest according to Section 1-08.5.
2. Any action, neglect, or default of the Contracting Agency, its officers, or employees,
or of any other contractor employed by the Contracting Agency.
3. Fire or other casualty for which the Contractor is not responsible.
4. Strikes.
5. Any other conditions for which these Specifications permit time extensions such as:
a. In Section 1-04.4 if a change increases the time to do any of the Work including
unchanged Work.
b. In Section 1-04.5 if increased time is part of a protest that is found to be a
valid protest.
c. In Section 1-04.7 if a changed condition is determined to exist that caused a
delay in completing the Contract.

d. In Section 1-05.3 if the Contracting Agency does not approve properly prepared
and acceptable drawings within 30 calendar days.
e. In Section 1-07.13 if the performance of the Work is delayed as a result of damage
by others.
f. In Section 1-07.17 if the removal or the relocation of any utility by forces other
than the Contractor caused a delay.
g. In Section 1-07.24 if a delay results from all the Right of Way necessary for
the construction not being purchased and the Special Provisions does not make
specific provisions regarding unpurchased Right of Way.
h. In Section 1-08.6 if the performance of the Work is suspended, delayed, or
interrupted for an unreasonable period of time that proves to be the responsibility
of the Contracting Agency.
i. In Section 1-09.11 if a dispute or claim also involves a delay in completing the
Contract and the dispute or claim proves to be valid.
j. In Section 1-09.6 for Work performed on a force account basis.
6. If the actual quantity of Work performed for a Bid item was more than the original
Plan quantity and increased the duration of a critical activity. Extensions of time will
be limited to only that quantity exceeding the original Plan quantity.
7. Exceptional causes not specifically identified in items 1 through 6, provided the request
letter proves the Contractor had no control over the cause of the delay and could have
done nothing to avoid or shorten it.
Working days added to the Contract by time extensions, when time has overran, shall only
apply to days on which liquidated damages or direct engineering have been charged, such as
the following:
If Substantial Completion has been granted prior to all of the authorized working days
being used, then the number of days in the time extension will eliminate an equal number
of days on which direct engineering charges have accrued. If the Substantial Completion
Date is established after all of the authorized working days have been used, then the
number of days in the time extension will eliminate an equal number of days on which
liquidated damages or direct engineering charges have accrued.
The Engineer will not allow a time extension for any cause listed above if it resulted from
the Contractor’s default, collusion, action or inaction, or failure to comply with the Contract.
The Contracting Agency considers the time specified in the Special Provisions as sufficient
to do all the Work. For this reason, the Contracting Agency will not grant a time extension for:
1. Failure to obtain all materials and workers unless the failure was the result of
exceptional causes as provided above in Subsection 7;
2. Changes, protests, increased quantities, or changed conditions (Section 1-04) that do
not delay the completion of the Contract or prove to be an invalid or inappropriate time
extension request;
3. Delays caused by nonapproval of drawings or plans as provided in Section 1-05.3;
4. Rejection of faulty or inappropriate equipment as provided in Section 1-05.9;
5. Correction of thickness deficiency as provided in Section 5-05.5(1)B.
The Engineer will determine whether the time extension should be granted, the reasons
for the extension, and the duration of the extension, if any. Such determination will be final
1-08.9 Liquidated Damages
Time is of the essence of the Contract. Delays inconvenience the traveling public, obstruct
traffic, interfere with and delay commerce, and increase risk to Highway users. Delays also
cost tax payers undue sums of money, adding time needed for administration, engineering,
inspection, and supervision.

1-08 Q L = X m − LSL Prosecution and Progress
S
Because the Contracting Agency finds it impractical to calculate the actual cost of delays,
it has adopted the following formula to calculate liquidated damages for failure to complete
the physical Work of a Contract on time.
Accordingly, ( ) ( )
CPF = 1the1Contractor
( )
f PF = f 2 PF2 + ⋅agrees:
⋅ ⋅ + f i PFi
1. To pay (according to∑the f i following formula) liquidated damages for each working day
beyond the number of working days established for Physical Completion, and
2. To authorize the Engineer to deduct these liquidated damages from any money due or
i = 1 due
coming to j to the Contractor.
fi
Liquidated Damages Formula
0.15C
LD =
T
Where:
LD = liquidated damages per working day (rounded to the nearest dollar)
C = original Contract amount
T = original time for Physical Completion
When the Contract Work has progressed to the extent that the Contracting Agency has
full use and benefit of the facilities, both from the operational and safety standpoint, all the
initial plantings are completed and only minor incidental Work, replacement of temporary
substitute facilities, plant establishment periods, or correction or repair remains to physically
complete the total Contract, the Engineer may determine the Contract Work is substantially
complete. The Engineer will notify the Contractor in writing of the Substantial Completion
Date. For overruns in Contract time occurring after the date so established, the formula for
liquidated damages shown above will not apply. For overruns in Contract time occurring after
the Substantial Completion Date, liquidated damages shall be assessed on the basis of direct
engineering and related costs assignable to the project until the actual Physical Completion
Date of all the Contract Work. The Contractor shall complete the remaining Work as promptly
as possible. Upon request by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish a written schedule for
completing the physical Work on the Contract.
Liquidated damages will not be assessed for any days for which an extension of time
is granted. No deduction or payment of liquidated damages will, in any degree, release the
Contractor from further obligations and liabilities to complete the entire Contract.
1-08.10 Termination of Contract
1-08.10(1) Termination for Default
The Contracting Agency may terminate the Contract upon the occurrence of any one or
more or the following events:
1. If the Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or
equipment;
2. If the Contractor refuses or fails to prosecute the Work with such diligence as will
ensure its Physical Completion within the original Physical Completion time and any
extensions of time which may have been granted to the Contractor by change order
or otherwise;
3. If the Contractor is adjudged bankrupt or insolvent, or makes a general assignment
for the benefit of creditors, or if the Contractor or a third party files a petition to take
advantage of any debtor’s act or to reorganize under the bankruptcy or similar laws
concerning the Contractor, or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for the Contractor or
for any of the Contractor’s property on account of the Contractor’s insolvency, and the
Contractor or its successor in interest does not provide adequate assurance of future
performance in accordance with the Contract within 15 calendar days of receipt of a
request for assurance from the Contracting Agency;
4. If the Contractor disregards laws, ordinances, rules, codes, regulations, orders or similar
requirements of any public entity having jurisdiction;

5. If the Contractor disregards the authority of the Contracting Agency;

6. If the Contractor performs Work which deviates from the Contract, and neglects or
refuses to correct rejected Work; or
7. If the Contractor otherwise violates in any material way any provisions or requirements
of the Contract.
Once the Contracting Agency determines that sufficient cause exists to terminate the
Contract, written notice shall be given to the Contractor and its Surety indicating that the
Contractor is in breach of the Contract and that the Contractor is to remedy the breach within
15 calendar days after the notice is sent. In case of an emergency such as potential damage
to life or property, the response time to remedy the breach after the notice may be shortened.
If the remedy does not take place to the satisfaction of the Contracting Agency, the Engineer
may, by serving written notice to the Contractor and Surety either:
1. Transfer the performance of the Work from the Contractor to the Surety; or
2. Terminate the Contract and at the Contracting Agency’s option prosecute it to
completion by contract or otherwise. Any extra costs or damages to the Contracting
Agency shall be deducted from any money due or coming due to the Contractor under
the Contract.
If the Engineer elects to pursue one remedy, it will not bar the Engineer from pursuing
other remedies on the same or subsequent breaches.
Upon receipt of a notice that the Work is being transferred to the Surety, the Surety shall
enter upon the premises and take possession of all materials, tools, and appliances for the
purpose of completing the Work included under the Contract and employ by contract or
otherwise any person or persons satisfactory to the Engineer to finish the Work and provide the
materials without termination of the Contract. Such employment shall not relieve the Surety of
its obligations under the Contract and the bond. If there is a transfer to the Surety, payments on
estimates covering Work subsequent to the transfer shall be made to the extent permitted under
law to the Surety or its agent without any right of the Contractor to make any claim.
If the Engineer terminates the Contract or provides such sufficiency of labor or materials
as required to complete the Work, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further
payments on the Contract until all the Work contemplated by the Contract has been fully
performed. The Contractor shall bear any extra expenses incurred by the Contracting Agency
in completing the Work, including all increased costs for completing the Work, and all
damages sustained, or which may be sustained, by the Contracting Agency by reason of such
refusal, neglect, failure, or discontinuance of Work by the Contractor. If liquidated damages
are provided in the Contract, the Contractor shall be liable for such liquidated damages until
such reasonable time as may be required for Physical Completion of the Work. After all the
Work contemplated by the Contract has been completed, the Engineer will calculate the total
expenses and damages for the completed Work. If the total expenses and damages are less than
any unpaid balance due the Contractor, the excess will be paid by the Contracting Agency to
the Contractor. If the total expenses and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor
and the Surety shall be jointly and severally liable to the Contracting Agency and shall pay
the difference to the State of Washington, Department of Transportation on demand.
In exercising the Contracting Agency’s right to prosecute the Physical Completion of the
Work, the Contracting Agency shall have the right to exercise its sole discretion as to the
manner, method, and reasonableness of the costs of completing the Work. In the event that
the Contracting Agency takes Bids for remedial Work or Physical Completion of the project,
the Contractor shall not be eligible for the Award of such Contracts.
In the event the Contract is terminated, the termination shall not affect any rights of
the Contracting Agency against the Contractor. The rights and remedies of the Contracting
Agency under the Termination Clause are in addition to any other rights and remedies
provided by law or under this Contract. Any retention or payment of monies to the
Contractor by the Contracting Agency will not release the Contractor from liability.

If a notice of termination for default has been issued and it is later determined for any
reason that the Contractor was not in default, the rights and obligations of the parties shall be
the same as if the notice of termination had been issued pursuant to Termination for Public
Convenience in Section 1-08.10(2). This shall include termination for default because of
failure to prosecute the Work, and the delay was found to be excusable under the provisions
of Section 1-08.8.
1-08.10(2) Termination for Public Convenience
The Engineer may terminate the Contract in whole, or from time to time in part, whenever:
1. The Contractor is prevented from proceeding with the Work as a direct result of an
Executive Order of the President with respect to the prosecution of war or in the interest
of national defense; or an Executive Order of the President or Governor of the State
with respect to the preservation of energy resources;
2. The Contractor is prevented from proceeding with the Work by reason of a preliminary,
special, or permanent restraining order of a court of competent jurisdiction where the
issuance of such restraining order is primarily caused by acts or omissions of persons
or agencies other than the Contractor; or
3. The Engineer determines that such termination is in the best interests of the
Contracting Agency.
1-08.10(3) Termination for Public Convenience Payment Request
After receipt of Termination for Public Convenience as provided in Section 1-08.10(2),
the Contractor shall submit to the Contracting Agency a request for costs associated with the
termination. The request shall be prepared in accordance with the claim procedures outlined
in Sections 1-09.11 and 1-09.12. The request shall be submitted promptly but in no event later
than 90 calendar days from the effective date of termination.
The Contractor agrees to make all records available to the extent deemed necessary by the
Engineer to verify the costs in the Contractor’s payment request.
1-08.10(4) Payment for Termination for Public Convenience
Whenever the Contract is terminated in accordance with Section 1-08.10(2), payment
will be made in accordance with Section 1-09.5 for the actual Work performed.
If the Contracting Agency and the Contractor cannot agree as to the proper amount
of payment, then the matter will be resolved as outlined in Section 1-09.13 except that,
if the termination occurs because of the issuance of a restraining order as provided in
Section 1-08.10(2), the matter will be resolved through mandatory and binding arbitration
as described in Sections 1-09.13(3)A and B, regardless of the amount of the claim.
1-08.10(5) Responsibility of the Contractor and Surety
Termination of a Contract shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities under
the Contract for Work performed. Nor shall termination of the Contract relieve the Surety
or Sureties of obligations under the Contract Bond or retainage bond for Work performed.

Measurement and Payment 1-09
1-09 Measurement and Payment

1-09.1 Measurement of Quantities
In measuring all acceptably completed Bid items of Work, the Engineer will:
1. Use United States standard measure;
2. Make all measurements as described in this section, unless individual Specifications
require otherwise;
3. Follow methods generally recognized as conforming to good engineering practice;
4. Conform to the usual practice of the Contracting Agency by carrying measurements
and computations to the proper significant figure or fraction of units for each item; and
5. Measure horizontally or vertically (unless otherwise specified).
The terms listed below shall be defined as follows in all measurements under this section:
“Lump Sum” (when used as an item of payment): complete payment for the Work
described for that item in the Contract.
“Gage” (in measurement of plates): the U.S. Standard Gage.
“Gage” (in measurement of galvanized sheets used to manufacture corrugated metal pipe,
metal plate pipe culverts and arches, and metal cribbing): that specified in AASHTO M 36,
M 167, M 196, M 197, or M 219.
“Gage” (in measurement of wire): that specified in AASHTO M 32.
“Ton”: 2,000 pounds of avoirdupois weight.
Items of payment that have “Lump Sum” or “Force Account” in the Bid item of Work shall
have no specific unit of measurement requirement.
For each basis of measurement listed below, the Engineer will use the method of
measurement described. For Bid items or materials measured on the basis of:
Hour – Measured for each hour that Work is actually performed. Portions of an hour will
be rounded up to a half hour.
Square Yard or Square Foot – The measurement shall be a calculation from the neat
dimensions shown in the Plans or as altered by the Engineer. If there is an exception within
the measured area where the item of Work is not performed (such as a drainage vault within
a measured sidewalk) and if the exception area is greater than 9 square feet, then the area of
the exception will be subtracted from the payment area calculated from the neat dimensions.
Linear Foot (pipe culverts, guard rail, underdrains, etc.) – Measured parallel to the
Structure’s base or foundation, unless the Plans require otherwise.
Weight – Weighed as required in Section 1-09.2.
Volume (of excavation and embankment) – Measured by the average-end-area method or
by the finite element analysis method utilizing digital terrain modeling techniques. All or some
computations may be based on ground elevations and other data derived photogrammetrically.
The Engineer may correct for curvature.
Volume (in the hauling vehicle) – Measured at the point of delivery. Hauling vehicles
may be of any size or type the Engineer approves provided that the body is of such shape that
the actual contents may be readily and accurately determined. If the Engineer requires, the
Contractor shall level loads at the delivery point to facilitate measurement.
For each item listed below, the Engineer will use the method of measurement described.
Structures – Measured on the neat lines shown in the Plans or as altered by the Engineer.
When a complete Structure or structural unit is specified as the unit of measurement, the unit
shall include all fittings and accessories.
Timber – Measured by the thousand board feet (MBM) actually used in the Structure.
Measurements will be based on nominal widths and thicknesses and the extreme length of
each piece.

Standard Manufactured Items (fence, wire, plates, rolled shapes, pipe conduit, etc.,
when specified) – Measured by the manufacturer’s identification of gage, unit weight, section
dimension, etc. The Engineer will accept manufacturing tolerances set by each industry unless
cited Specifications require more stringent tolerances.
Cement – Measured by the pound, ton, or sack. A sack shall be 94 pounds.
Asphalt – Measured by the gallon or ton. If measured by gallon, measurement will be
made at 60 F (or will be corrected to the volume at 60 F in keeping with ASTM D1250).
If shipped by rail, truck, or transport, measurement will be by net certified scale masses
or certified volumes (corrected for material lost en route or not actually incorporated into
the Work).
No measurement will be made for:
1. Work performed or materials placed outside lines shown in the Plans or set by
the Engineer;
2. Materials wasted, used, or disposed of in a manner contrary to the Contract;
3. Rejected materials (including those rejected after placement if the rejection resulted
from the Contractor’s failure to comply with the Contract);
4. Hauling and disposing of rejected materials;
5. Material remaining on hand after the Work is completed, except as provided in
Sections 1-09.5 and 1-09.10; or
6. Any other Work or material contrary to any Contract Provision.
1-09.2 Weighing Equipment
1-09.2(1) General Requirements for Weighing Equipment
Unless specified otherwise, any Highway or bridge construction materials to be
proportioned or measured and paid for by weight shall be weighed on a scale.
Scales – Scales shall:
1. Be accurate to within 0.5 percent of the correct weight throughout the range of use;
2. Not include spring balances;
3. Include beams, dials, or other reliable readout equipment;
4. Be built to prevent scale parts from binding, vibrating, or being displaced and to
protect all working parts from falling material, wind, and weather; and
5. Be carefully maintained, with bunkers and platforms kept clear of accumulated
materials that could cause errors and with knife edges given extra care and protection.
Scale Operations – “Contractor-provided scale operations” are defined as operations
where a scale is set up by the Contractor specifically for the project and most, if not all,
material weighed on the scale is utilized for Contract Work. In this situation, the Contractor
shall provide a person to operate the project scale, write tickets, perform scale checks and
prepare reports.
“Commercial scale operations” include the use of established scales used to sell materials
to the public on a regular basis. In addition, for the purposes of this Specification, all batch,
hopper, and belt scales are considered to be commercial scales. When a commercial scale is
used as the project scale, the Contractor may utilize a commercial scale operator provided it
is at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
In addition, the Contractor shall ensure that:
1. The Engineer is allowed to observe the weighing operation and check the daily scale
weight record;
2. Scale verification checks are performed at the direction of the Contracting Agency
(see Section 1-09.2(5));
3. Several times each day, the scale operator records and makes certain the platform scale
balances and returns to zero when the load is removed; and

4. Test results and scale weight records for each day’s hauling operations are provided to
the Engineer daily. Unless otherwise approved, reporting shall utilize WSDOT Form
422-027 Scaleman’s Daily Report.
Trucks and Tickets – Each truck to be weighed shall bear a unique identification
number. This number shall be legible and in plain view of the scale operator. Each vehicle
operator shall obtain a weigh or load ticket from the scale operator. The Contracting Agency
will provide item quantity tickets for scales that are not self-printing. The Contractor
shall provide tickets for self-printing scales. All tickets shall, at a minimum, contain the
1. Date of haul;
2. Contract number;
3. Contract unit Bid item;
4. Unit of measure;
5. Identification number of hauling vehicle; and
6. Weight delivered:
a. Net weight in the case of batch and hopper scales.
b. Gross weight, tare and net weight in the case of platform scales (tare may be omitted
if a tare beam is used).
c. Approximate load out weight in the case of belt conveyor scales.
The vehicle operator shall deliver the ticket in legible condition to the material receiver at
the material delivery point. The material delivery point is defined as the location where the
material is incorporated into the permanent Work.
1-09.2(2) Specific Requirements for Batching Scales
Each batching scale shall be designed to support a weighing container. The arrangement
shall make it convenient for the operator to remove material from the weighing container
while watching readout devices. Any weighing container mounted on a platform scale shall
have its center of gravity directly over the platform centerline. Batching scales used for
portland cement concrete or hot mix asphalt shall not be used for batching other materials.
Readout devices used for batching or hopper scales shall be marked at intervals evenly
spaced throughout and shall be based on the scale’s nominal rated capacity. These intervals
shall not exceed one-tenth of 1 percent of the nominal rated capacity. Before use at a new site
and then at 6-month intervals, all batching and hopper scales shall be: approved under rules
of the Weights and Measures Section of the Washington State Department of Agriculture, or
serviced and tested with at least 10,000 pounds by an agent of its manufacturer. In either case,
the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a copy of the final test results.
1-09.2(3) Specific Requirements for Platform Scales
Each platform scale shall be able to weigh the entire hauling vehicle or combination
of connected vehicles at one time. No part of the vehicle or vehicle combination will be
permitted off the platform as it is weighed. A tare weight shall be taken of each hauling vehicle
at least once daily.
Any platform scale shall be installed and maintained with the platform level and with rigid
bulkheads at either end to prevent binding or shifting. The readout device shall be marked at
intervals of no more than 40 pounds. Test records shall show results to the nearest 20 pounds.
During weighing operations, weights shall be read and recorded to the nearest 100 pounds.
Before use at a new site and then at 6-month intervals, any platform scale shall be: approved
under rules of the Washington State Department of Agriculture’s Weights and Measures
Section, or serviced and tested with at least 10,000 pounds by an agent of its manufacturer.
In either case, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a copy of the final test results.

1-09.2(4) Specific Requirements for Belt Conveyor Scales

The Engineer may approve conveyor-belt weighing of untreated materials if the method
and device meet all general requirements for weighing equipment. The recording tape,
odometer, totalizer, calibration adjustment, and clock-time imprinter shall be kept locked and
the Engineer shall retain all keys. All belt-conveyor scales shall comply with the requirements
for Belt-Conveyor Scales in the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST)
Handbook No. 44, except where these Specifications modify those requirements.
A static load test shall be made: each day after the belt-conveyor has run continuously
for about 30 minutes, and again, immediately after the air temperature changes significantly.
If the static load test reveals a need for adjustment, the Contractor shall perform a chain
test. The Contractor shall make the computation of the test chain calibration, the calibration
procedures and results, and related records available for the Engineer’s review. The test
chain shall be clearly marked with its calibration, carried in a suitable container, and kept
immediately available for testing.
1-09.2(5) Measurement
Scale Verification Checks – The Engineer will verify the accuracy of each batch, hopper,
or platform scale. The frequency of verification checks will be such that at least one test
weekly is performed for each scale used in weighing contract items of Work.
Verification checks may not be routinely conducted for weighed material, whose proposal
quantity multiplied by the unit Bid price, has a value less than $20,000.
The verification will consist of one of the following methods and be at the Contractor’s
option:
1. Weigh a loaded truck on a separate certified platform scale designated by the
Contractor, for the purpose of scale verification.
2. Weigh a vehicle that weighs at least 10,000 pounds on a separate certified scale and
then check the project scale with it.
3. Establish a certified fixed load weighing at least 10,000 pounds as a check-weight. The
certification shall consist of an affidavit affirming the correct weight of the fixed load.
Should the scale verification check reveal a weight difference of more than 0.5 percent,
a second scale verification check shall be performed immediately. If the weight differences
of both comparison checks exceed the 0.5-percent limit and the scale has been overweighing,
the Contractor shall immediately stop weighing and the scale shall be recertified at
the Contractor’s expense. If the weight difference of both comparison checks exceed
the 0.5 percent limit and the scale is underweighing, it shall be adjusted immediately.
Contractor will not be compensated for any loss from underweighing.
Belt Scales – To test the accuracy of a belt-conveyor scale, the Contractor shall weigh five
or more payloads from sequential hauling units and compare these weights with weights of
the same payloads taken on a separate certified platform scale. If the test results fluctuate, the
Engineer may require more than five check loads. Conveyor weights will be based on tonnage
values taken from the sealed odometer at the beginning and end of each check period.
If scale verification checks shows the scale has been under weighing, it shall be adjusted
immediately. The Contractor shall not be compensated for any loss from under weighing.
If scale verification checks show the scale has been overweighing, its operation will cease
immediately until adjusted.
Minor Construction Items – If the Specifications and Plans require weight measurement
for minor construction items, the Contractor may request permission to convert volume to
weight. If the Engineer approves, an agreed factor may be used to make this conversion and
volume may be used to calculate the corresponding weight for payment.

1-09.2(6) Payment
Unless specified otherwise, the Contracting Agency will pay for no materials received by
weight unless they have been weighed as required in this section or as required by another
method the Engineer has approved in writing.
The Contractor shall not be compensated for any loss from underweighing that is revealed
by scale verification checks.
If scale verification checks reveal that the scale is overweighing, then payment for all
material weighed since the last valid scale verification check will be adjusted. The Contracting
Agency will calculate the combined weight of all materials weighed after the last verification
check showing accurate results. This combined weight will then be reduced for payment by
the percentage of scale error that exceeds 0.5 percent unless the Contractor demonstrates to
the satisfaction of the Engineer that the defect in the scale was present for a lesser period
of time.
Unit Contract prices for the various pay items of the project cover all costs related to
weighing and proportioning materials for payment. These costs include but are not limited to:
1. Furnishing, installing, certifying, and maintaining scales;
2. Providing a weigher to operate a Contractor-provided scale;
3. Providing a weigher to operate a commercial scale, if necessary;
4. Providing self-printing tickets, if necessary;
5. Rerouting a truck for verification weighing;
6. Assisting the Engineer with scale verification checks;
7. Any other related costs associated with meeting the requirements of this section.
1-09.3 Scope of Payment
The payment provided for in the Contract shall be full payment to the Contractor for:
1. Furnishing all materials and performing all Work under the Contract (including changes
in the work, materials, or Plans) in a complete and acceptable manner;
2. All risk, loss, damage, or expense of whatever character arising out of the nature or
prosecution of the work; and
3. All expense incurred resulting from a suspension or discontinuance of the Work as
specified under the Contract.
The payment of any estimate or retained percentage shall not relieve the Contractor of the
obligation to make good any defective Work or materials.
Unless the Plans and Special Provisions provide otherwise, the unit Contract prices for the
various Bids items shall be full payment for all labor, materials, supplies, equipment, tools,
and all other things required to completely incorporate the item into the Work as though the
item were to read “In Place”.
If the “Payment” clause in the Specifications, for an item included in the Proposal, covers
and considers all Work and material essential to that item, then the Work or materials will not
be measured or paid for under any other item that may appear elsewhere in the Proposal or
Specifications.
Certain payment items appearing in these Specifications may be modified in the Plans and
Proposal to include:
1. The words “For Structure”, “For Concrete Barrier”, “For Bridge”, etc., with the intent
of clarifying specific use of the item; or
2. The words “Site (Site Designation)”, with the intent of clarifying where a specific item
of Work is to be performed.
Modification of payment items in this manner shall in no way change the intent of the
Specifications relating to these items.

1-09.4 Equitable Adjustment

The equitable adjustment provided for elsewhere in the Contract shall be determined in
one or more of the following ways:
1. If the parties are able to agree, the price will be determined by using:
a. Unit prices; or
b. Other agreed upon prices;
2. If the parties cannot agree, the price will be determined by the Engineer using:
a. Unit prices; or
b. Other means to establish costs.
The following limitations shall apply in determining the amount of the equitable
adjustment:
1. The equipment rates shall be actual cost but shall not exceed the rates set forth in
the AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement in effect at the time the Work is
performed as referred to in Section 1-09.6, and
2. To the extent any delay or failure of performance was concurrently caused by the
Contracting Agency and the Contractor, the Contractor shall be entitled to a time
extension for the portion of the delay or failure of performance concurrently caused,
provided it make such a request pursuant to Section 1-08.8; however, the Contractor
shall not be entitled to any adjustment in Contract price.
3. No claim for anticipated profits on deleted, terminated, or uncompleted Work will
be allowed.
4. No claim for consequential damages of any kind will be allowed.
1-09.5 Deleted or Terminated Work
The Engineer may delete Work by change order as provided in Section 1-04.4 or may
terminate the Contract in whole or part as provided in Section 1-08.10(2). When the Contract
is terminated in part, the partial termination shall be treated as a deletion change order for
payment purposes under this section.
Payment for completed items will be at unit Contract prices.
When any item is deleted in whole or in part by change order or when the Contract is
terminated in whole or in part, payment for deleted or terminated Work will be made as follows:
1. Payment will be made for the actual number of units of Work completed at the unit
Contract prices unless the Engineer determines the unit prices are inappropriate for
the Work actually performed. When that determination is made by the Engineer,
payment for Work performed will be as mutually agreed. If the parties cannot agree
the Engineer will determine the amount of the equitable adjustment in accordance
with Section 1-09.4;
2. Payment for partially completed lump sum items will be as mutually agreed. If the
parties cannot agree, the Engineer will determine the amount of the equitable
adjustment in accordance with Section 1-09.4;
3. To the extent not paid for by the Contract prices for the completed units of Work,
the Contracting Agency will pay as part of the equitable adjustment those direct costs
necessarily and actually incurred by the Contractor in anticipation of performing the
Work that has been deleted or terminated;
4. The total payment for any one item in the case of a deletion or partial termination shall
not exceed the Bid price as modified by approved change orders less the estimated cost
(including overhead and profit) to complete the Work and less any amount paid to the
Contractor for the item;
5. The total payment where the Contract is terminated in its entirety shall not exceed the
total Contract price as modified by approved change orders less those amounts paid to
the Contractor before the effective date of the termination; and

6. No claim for damages of any kind or for loss of anticipated profits on deleted or
terminated Work will be allowed because of the termination or change order.
Contract time shall be adjusted as the parties agree. If the parties cannot agree, the
Engineer will determine the equitable adjustment for Contract time.
Acceptable materials ordered by the Contractor prior to the date the Work was terminated
as provided in Section 1-08.10(2) or deleted as provided in Section 1-04.4 by the Engineer,
will either be purchased from the Contractor by the Contracting Agency at the actual cost
and shall become the property of the Contracting Agency, or the Contracting Agency will
reimburse the Contractor for the actual costs connected with returning these materials
to the suppliers.
1-09.6 Force Account
The terms of the Contract or of a change order may call for Work or material to
be paid for by force account. If so, then the objective of this Specification is to reimburse
the Contractor for all costs associated with the Work, including costs of labor, small tools,
supplies, equipment, specialized services, materials, applicable taxes and overhead and
to include a profit commensurate with those costs. The amount to be paid shall be determined
as described in this section.
1. For Labor – Labor reimbursement calculations shall be based on a “Project Labor
List” (List) prepared and submitted by the Contractor and by any Subcontractor before
that firm commences force account Work. Once a List is approved by the Engineer,
it shall be used to calculate force account labor payment until a new List is submitted
and approved. The Engineer may compare the List to payrolls and other documents
and may, at any time, require the Contractor to submit a new List. The Contractor may
submit a new List at any time without such a requirement. Prior payment calculations
shall not be adjusted as a result of a new List.
To be approved, the List must be accurate and meet the requirements of this
section. It shall include regular time and overtime rates for all employees (or work
classifications) expected to participate in force account Work. The rates shall include
the basic wage and fringe benefits, the current rates for Federal Insurance Compensation
Act (FICA), Federal Unemployment Tax Act (FUTA) and State Unemployment Tax
Act (SUTA), the company’s present rates for Medical Aid and Industrial Insurance
premiums and the planned payments for travel and per diem compensation.
In the event that an acceptable initial List or requested revised List is not received
by the time that force account calculations are begun, the Engineer will develop a List
unilaterally, utilizing the best data available, that will be used until a Contractor’s List
is received and approved. Again, prior calculations, prepared using the Engineer’s List,
will not be revised as a result of differences with the Contractor’s List.
In addition to compensation for direct labor costs defined above, the Contracting
Agency will pay Contractor 29 percent of the sum of the costs calculated for labor
reimbursement to cover project overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding,
insurance required by Sections 1-07.10 and 1-07.18, Business & Occupation tax,
and any other costs incurred. This amount will include any costs of safety training
and health tests, but will not include such costs for unique force account Work that is
different from typical Work and which could not have been anticipated at time of Bid.
2. For Materials – The Contracting Agency will reimburse invoice cost for Contractor-
supplied materials. For the purpose of this provision, “Materials” shall include those
items incorporated into the Work, supplies used during the Work and items consumed.
This cost shall include freight and handling charges and applicable taxes. Before Work
is started, the Engineer may require the Contractor to obtain multiple quotations for the
materials to be utilized and select the vendor with prices and terms most advantageous

The Contracting Agency will provide a list of the types and quantities of Contractor-
supplied materials witnessed by the Contracting Agency as being utilized in force
account Work. The list will be furnished promptly after the material is incorporated,
on a daily basis unless agreed otherwise. The Contractor may propose corrections to
the list and will supply prices for the materials and other costs and return the list to the
Contracting Agency. To support the prices, the Contractor shall attach valid copies of
vendor invoices. If invoices are not available for materials from the Contractor’s stocks,
the Contractor shall certify actual costs (at a reasonable level) by affidavit. The Engineer
will review the prices and any Contractor-proposed corrections and, if reasonable,
approve the completed list. Once approved, the prices will be utilized in the calculation
of force account reimbursement for materials.
If, in the case of non-invoiced materials supported by Contractor affidavit, the price
appears to be unreasonable, the Engineer will determine the cost for all or part of
those materials, utilizing the best data available.
The Contracting Agency reserves the right to provide materials. In this case, the
Contractor will receive no payment for any costs, overhead, or profit arising from
the value of the materials themselves. Additional costs to handle and place the
Agency‑furnished material shall be compensated as described in this Specification.
In addition to compensation for direct materials cost, the Contracting Agency
will pay the Contractor 21 percent of the sum of the costs calculated for materials
reimbursement to cover project overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding,
insurance, required by Sections 1-07.10 and 1-07.18, Business & Occupation tax, and
any other costs incurred.
3. For Equipment – The Contracting Agency will reimburse the Contractor for the cost
of equipment utilized in the Work. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be
of modern design and in good working condition. For the purpose of this provision,
“provided” shall mean that the equipment is owned (either through outright ownership
or through a long-term lease) and operated by the Contractor or Subcontractor or that
the equipment is rented and operated by the Contractor or Subcontractor. Equipment
that is rented with operator shall not be included here, but shall be considered a service
and addressed according to Subsection 4 of this provision.
The amount of payment for any Contractor-owned equipment that is utilized shall be
determined according to the version of the AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement
which is in effect at the time the force account is authorized. The rates listed in the
Rental Rate Blue Book (as modified by the current AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental
Agreement) shall be full compensation for all fuel, oil, lubrication, ordinary repairs,
maintenance, and all other costs incidental to furnishing and operating the equipment
except labor for operation.
Payment for rented equipment will be made on the basis of a valid invoice, covering
the time period of the Work. Before Work is started, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to obtain multiple quotations for the rental of equipment to be utilized
and select the vendor with prices and terms most advantageous to the Contracting
Agency. In the event that prior quotations are not obtained and the vendor is not a firm
independent from the Contractor or Subcontractor, then after-the-fact quotations may
be obtained by the Engineer from the open market in the vicinity and the lowest such
quotation may be used in place of submitted invoice.
In addition to the payments for Contractor-owned and rented equipment, one or more
lump-sum payments may be made for small tools. The amount to be paid shall be
determined as outlined in the AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement.
The Contracting Agency will add 21 percent to equipment costs to cover project
overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding, insurance, required by Sections
1-07.10 and 1-07.18, Business & Occupation tax, and any other costs incurred.

This markup will be over and above those equipment costs and will not be adjusted for
any equipment overhead amounts included in the Blue Book rates.
Copies of the AGC/WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement will be maintained on the
Contracting Agency’s website at www.wsdot.wa.gov.
4. For Services – Compensation under force account for specialized services shall be
made on the basis of an invoice from the providing entity. A “specialized service”
is a work operation that is not typically done by worker classifications as defined by
the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries and by the Davis Bacon Act,
and therefore bills by invoice for work in road, bridge and municipal construction.
Before Work is started, the Engineer may require the Contractor to obtain multiple
quotations for the service to be utilized and select the provider with prices and terms
most advantageous to the Contracting Agency. In the event that prior quotations are
not obtained and the service invoice is submitted by a Subcontractor, then after-the-fact
quotations may be obtained by the Engineer from the open market in the vicinity and
the lowest such quotation may be used in place of the submitted invoice.
Except as noted below, the Contracting Agency will pay the Contractor an additional
21 percent of the sum of the costs included on invoices for specialized services to cover
project overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding, insurance, required by
Sections 1-07.10 and 1-07.18, Business & Occupation tax, and any other costs incurred.
When a supplier of services is compensated through invoice, but acts in the
manner of a Subcontractor, as described in Subsection 6 of this provision, then
markup for that invoice shall be according to Subsection 6, “Contractor Markup on
Subcontractors’ Work”.
5. For Mobilization – Force account mobilization is defined as the preparatory Work
performed by the Contractor including procurement, loading and transportation of
tools and equipment, and personal travel time (when such travel time is a contractual
obligation of the Contractor or a customary payment for the Contractor to all
employees). Mobilization also includes the costs incurred during demobilization.
Pro‑rata adjustments may be made when the mobilization applies to both force account
and other Contract Work. The Contracting Agency will pay for mobilization for off-
site preparatory Work for force account items provided that notice has been provided
sufficiently in advance to allow the Engineer to witness the activity, if desired.
Any costs experienced during mobilization activities for labor, equipment, materials
or services shall be listed in those sections of the force account summary and
paid accordingly.
6. For Contractor Markup on Subcontractor’s Work – When Work is performed
on a force account basis by one or more approved Subcontractors, by lower-tier
subcontractors or suppliers, or through invoice by firm(s) acting in the manner of a
Subcontractor, the Contractor will be allowed an additional markup, from the table
below, applied to the costs computed for Work done by each Subcontractor through
Subsections 1, 2, 3, and 4, to compensate for all administrative costs, including project
overhead, general company overhead, profit, bonding, insurance required by Sections
1-07.10 and 1-07.18, Business & Occupation tax, and any other costs incurred.
A firm may be considered to be acting as a Subcontractor when the Engineer observes
one or more of the following characteristics:
a. The person in charge of the firm’s activities takes an active role in managing
the overall project, including extensive coordination, interpretation of Plans,
interaction with the Contracting Agency or management of a complex and
interrelated operation.
b. Rented equipment is provided fueled, operated and maintained by the firm.
Operators of rented equipment are supervised directly by the firm’s representative.
There is little interaction between the Contractor and the employees of the firm.

c. The firm appears to be holding the risk of performance and quality of the Work.
d. The firm appears to be responsible for liability arising from the Work.
Markups on Work Performed by Subcontractor(s):
(1) On amounts paid for Work performed by each Subcontractor
on each force account and calculated through
Subsections 1-4, up to $25,000 12 percent
(2) On amounts greater than $25,000 up to $100,000 10 percent
(3) On amounts greater than $100,000 7 percent
The amounts and markup rates shall be calculated separately for each Subcontractor
on each force account item established.
The payments provided above shall be full payment for all Work done on a force account
basis. The calculated payment shall cover all expenses of every nature, kind, and description,
including those listed above and any others incurred on the Work being paid through force
account. Nothing in this provision shall preclude the Contractor from seeking an extension
of time or time-related damages to unchanged Work arising as a result of the force account
Work. The amount and costs of any Work to be paid by force account shall be computed by
the Engineer, and the result shall be final as provided in Section 1-05.1.
An item that has been Bid at a unit price or lump sum in the Proposal will not be paid as
force account unless a change as defined in Section 1-04.4 has occurred and the provisions
require a payment adjustment. Items which are included in the Proposal as Force Account or
which are added by change order as Force Account may, by agreement of the parties at any
time, be converted to agreed unit prices or lump sums applicable to the remaining Work.
1-09.7 Mobilization
Mobilization consists of preconstruction expenses and the costs of preparatory Work and
operations performed by the Contractor which occur before 10 percent of the total original
Contract amount is earned from other Contract items. Items which are not to be included in
the item of Mobilization include but are not limited to:
1. Any portion of the Work covered by the specific Contract item or incidental Work
which is to be included in a Contract item or items.
2. Profit, interest on borrowed money, overhead, or management costs.
3. Any costs of mobilizing equipment for force account Work.
Based on the lump sum Contract price for “Mobilization”, partial payments will be made
as follows:
1. When 5 percent of the total original Contract amount is earned from other Contract
items, excluding amounts paid for materials on hand, 50 percent of the amount Bid for
mobilization, or 5 percent of the total original Contract amount, whichever is the least,
will be paid.
2. When 10 percent of the total original Contract amount is earned from other Contract
items, excluding amounts paid for materials on hand, 100 percent of the amount Bid for
mobilization, or 10 percent of the total original Contract amount, whichever is the least,
will be paid.
3. When the Substantial Completion Date has been established for the project, payment of
any amount Bid for mobilization in excess of 10 percent of the total original Contract
amount will be paid.
Nothing herein shall be construed to limit or preclude partial payments otherwise provided
by the Contract.

1-09.8 Payment for Material on Hand

The Contracting Agency may reimburse the Contractor for materials purchased before their
use in the Work if they:
1. Meet the requirements of the Plans and Specifications;
2. Are delivered to or stockpiled near the project or other Engineer-approved storage
sites; and
3. Consist of: sand, gravel, surfacing materials, aggregates, reinforcing steel, bronze
plates, structural steel, machinery, piling, timber and lumber (not including forms or
falsework), large signs unique to the project, prestressed concrete beams or girders,
or other materials the Engineer may approve.
The Contracting Agency may reimburse the Contractor for traffic signal controllers
as follows:
1. Fifty percent when the traffic signal controller and all components are received and
assembled into a complete unit at the State Materials Laboratory.
2. One hundred percent when the traffic signal controller is approved for shipment to
the project by the State Materials Laboratory.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient written evidence of production costs to enable
the Engineer to compute the cost of Contractor-produced materials (such as sand, gravel,
surfacing material, or aggregates). For other materials, the Contractor shall provide invoices
from material suppliers. Each invoice shall be detailed sufficiently to enable the Engineer to
determine the actual costs. Payment for materials on hand shall not exceed the total Contract
cost for the Contract item.
If payment is based upon an unpaid invoice, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
with a paid invoice within 60 calendar days after the Contracting Agency’s initial payment
for materials on hand. If the paid invoice is not furnished in this time, any payment the
Contracting Agency had made will be deducted from the next progress estimate and withheld
until the paid invoice is supplied.
The Contracting Agency will not pay for material on hand when the invoice cost is less
than $2,000. As materials are used in the Work, credits equaling the partial payments for them
will be taken on future estimates. Partial payment for materials on hand shall not constitute
acceptance. Any material will be rejected if found to be faulty even if partial payment for it
has been made.
1-09.9 Payments
The basis of payment will be the actual quantities of Work performed according to the
Contract and as specified for payment.
The Contractor shall submit a breakdown of the cost of lump sum Items to enable the
Engineer to determine the Work performed on a monthly basis. Lump sum item breakdowns
shall be submitted prior to the first progress payment that includes payment for the Bid Item in
question. A breakdown is not required for lump sum Items that include a basis for incremental
payments as part of the respective Specification. Absent a lump sum breakdown, the Engineer
will make a determination based on information available. The Engineer’s determination of
the cost of Work shall be final.
Payments will be made for Work and labor performed and materials furnished under the
Contract according to the price in the Proposal unless otherwise provided.
Partial payments will be made once each month, based upon partial estimates prepared by
the Engineer. The determination of payments under the Contract will be final in accordance
with Section 1-05.1. Unless otherwise provided, payments will be made from the Motor
Vehicle Fund.
Failure to perform any of the obligations under the Contract by the Contractor may be
decreed by the Contracting Agency to be adequate reason for withholding any payments until
compliance is achieved.

Upon completion of all Work and after final inspection (Section 1-05.11), the amount
due the Contractor under the Contract will be paid based upon the final estimate made by the
Engineer and presentation of a Final Contract Voucher Certification signed by the Contractor.
Such voucher shall be deemed a release of all claims of the Contractor unless a claim is
filed in accordance with the requirements of Section 1-09.11 and is expressly excepted
from the Contractor’s certification on the Final Contract Voucher Certification. The date the
Secretary signs the Final Contract Voucher Certification constitutes the final acceptance date
(Section 1-05.12).
If the Contractor fails, refuses, or is unable to sign and return the Final Contract Voucher
Certification or any other documentation required for completion and final acceptance of
the Contract, the Contracting Agency reserves the right to establish a Completion Date
(for the purpose of meeting the requirements of RCW 60.28) and unilaterally accept the
Contract. Unilateral final acceptance will occur only after the Contractor has been provided
the opportunity, by written request from the Engineer, to voluntarily submit such documents.
If voluntary compliance is not achieved, formal notification of the impending establishment
of a Completion Date and unilateral final acceptance will be provided by certified letter
from the Secretary to the Contractor, which will provide 30 calendar days for the Contractor
to submit the necessary documents. The 30 calendar day period will begin on the date the
certified letter is received by the Contractor. The date the Secretary unilaterally signs the Final
Contract Voucher Certification shall constitute the Completion Date and the final acceptance
date (Section 1-05.12). The reservation by the Contracting Agency to unilaterally accept the
Contract will apply to Contracts that are Physically Completed in accordance with Section
1-08.5, or for Contracts that are terminated in accordance with Section 1-08.10. Unilateral
final acceptance of the Contract by the Contracting Agency does not in any way relieve the
Contractor of their responsibility to comply with all Federal, State, tribal, or local laws,
ordinances, and regulations that affect the Work under the Contract.
Payment to the Contractor of partial estimates, final estimates, and retained percentages
shall be subject to controlling laws.
1-09.9(1) Retainage
Pursuant to RCW 60.28, a sum of 5 percent of the monies earned by the Contractor will be
retained from progress estimates. Such retainage shall be used as a trust fund for the protection
and payment (1) to the State with respect to taxes imposed pursuant to Title 82 RCW, and
(2) the claims of any person arising under the Contract.
Monies retained under the provisions of RCW 60.28 shall, at the option of the Contractor, be:
1. Retained in a fund by the Contracting Agency; or
2. Deposited by the Contracting Agency in an escrow (interest-bearing) account in a bank,
mutual saving bank, or savings and loan association (interest on monies so retained
shall be paid to the Contractor). Deposits are to be in the name of the Contracting
Agency and are not to be allowed to be withdrawn without the Contracting Agency’s
written authorization. The Contracting Agency will issue a check representing the sum
of the monies reserved, payable to the bank or trust company. Such check shall be
converted into bonds and securities chosen by the Contractor as the interest accrues.
At the time the Contract is executed the Contractor shall designate the option desired. The
Contractor in choosing option (2) agrees to assume full responsibility to pay all costs that may
accrue from escrow services, brokerage charges or both, and further agrees to assume all risks
in connection with the investment of the retained percentages in securities. The Contracting
Agency may also, at its option, accept a bond in lieu of retainage.
Release of the retainage will be made 60 days following the Completion Date (pursuant to
RCW 39.12, and RCW 60.28) provided the following conditions are met:
1. On Contracts totaling more than $35,000, a release has been obtained from the
Washington State Department of Revenue.
2. Affidavits of Wages Paid for the Contractor and all Subcontractors are on file with the
Contracting Agency (RCW 39.12.040).
3. A certificate of Payment of Contributions Penalties and Interest on Public Works

Contract is received from the Washington State Employment Security Department.
4. Washington State Department of Labor and Industries (in accordance with
Section 1-07.10) shows the Contractor is current with payments of industrial insurance
and medical aid premiums.
5. All claims, as provided by law, filed against the retainage have been resolved. In
the event claims are filed and provided the conditions of 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met, the
Contractor will be paid such retained percentage less an amount sufficient to pay any
such claims together with a sum determined by the Contracting Agency sufficient to
pay the cost of foreclosing on claims and to cover attorney’s fees.
1-09.10 Payment for Surplus Processed Materials
After the Contract is completed, the Contractor will be reimbursed actual production costs
for surplus processed material produced by the Contractor from Contracting Agency-provided
sources if its value is $3,000 or more (determined by actual production costs).
The quantity of surplus material eligible for reimbursement of production costs shall be the
quantity produced (but an amount not greater than 110 percent of Plan quantity or as specified
by the Engineer), less the actual quantity used. The Contracting Agency will determine the
actual amount of surplus material for reimbursement.
The Contractor shall not dispose of any surplus material without permission of the
Engineer. Surplus material shall remain the property of the Contracting Agency without
reimbursement to the Contractor if it is not eligible for reimbursement.
1-09.11 Disputes and Claims
When protests occur during a Contract, the Contractor shall pursue resolution through the
Engineer. The Contractor shall follow the procedures outlined in Section 1-04.5.
If the negotiations using the procedures outlined in Section 1-04.5 fail to provide
satisfactory resolution of protests, then the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with written
notification that the Contractor will continue to pursue the dispute in accordance with the
provisions of Section 1-09.11. The written notification shall be provided within 7 calendar
days after receipt of the Engineer’s written determination that the Contractor’s protest is
invalid pursuant to Section 1-04.5. The Contractor’s written notice of dispute shall indicate
whether the Contractor prefers to resolve the dispute through the use of a Disputes Review
Board as outlined in Section 1-09.11(1), or to submit a formal claim directly to the Contracting
Agency pursuant to Section 1-09.11(2).
If a Disputes Review Board is requested by the Contractor, the Contracting Agency will
notify the Contractor in writing whether the use of a Disputes Review Board is agreed upon
within 7 calendar days after receiving the Contractors written notice of dispute. If both parties
to the dispute agree, then the dispute will be referred to a Disputes Review Board according
to Section 1-09.11(1). If the parties do not mutually agree to establish a Disputes Review
Board then none shall be used, and the Contractors shall submit a formal claim directly to
the Contracting Agency as outlined in Section 1-09.11(2), Claims.
In spite of any protest or dispute, the Contractor shall proceed promptly with the Work
as the Engineer orders.
1-09.11(1) Disputes Review Board
In order to assist in the resolution of disputes arising out of the Work of this project, the
Contract provides for the establishment of a Disputes Review Board, hereinafter called the
“Board”. The Board is created when negotiations using the procedures outlined in Section
1-04.5 fail to provide a satisfactory resolution and the Contracting Agency and Contractor
mutually agree to use a Board as part of the disputes resolution process prior to the
Contractor filing a formal claim pursuant to Section 1-09.11(2).
The Board will consider disputes referred to it and furnish recommendations to the
Contracting Agency and Contractor to assist in the resolution of the differences between

them. The purpose of the Board response to such issues is to provide nonbinding findings
and recommendations designed to expose the disputing parties to an independent view of
the dispute.
The Board members will be especially knowledgeable in the type of construction involved
in the Project and shall discharge their responsibilities impartially and independently
considering the facts and conditions related to the matters under consideration and the
provisions of the Contract.
1-09.11(1)A Disputes Review Board Membership
The Board shall consist of one member selected by the Contracting Agency and one
member selected by the Contractor, with these two members to select the third member.
The first two members shall be mutually acceptable to both the Contracting Agency and the
Contractor. If one or both of the two members selected are not acceptable to the Contracting
Agency or Contractor, another selection shall be made.
The Contracting Agency and Contractor shall each select their respective Board member
and negotiate an agreement, separate and apart from this Contract, with their respective Board
member within 14 calendar days after the parties have agreed to establish a Board, as outlined
in Section 1-09.11(1).
The agreements with these two Board members shall contain language imposing the
“Scope of Work” and “Suggested Administrative Procedures” for Disputes Review Boards
available at www.wsdot.wa.gov/business/consulting. These negotiated agreements shall also
include clauses that require the respective selected members to immediately pursue selection
of a third member. The goal is to obtain a third Board member who will complement the first
two by furnishing a needed expertise, which will facilitate the Board’s operations.
In case a member of the Board needs to be replaced, the replacement member will be
appointed in the same manner as the replaced member was appointed. The appointment
of a replacement Board member will begin promptly upon determination of the need for
replacement and shall be completed within 30 calendar days.
Service of a Board member may be terminated at any time with not less than 30 calendar
days notice as follows:
1. The Contracting Agency may terminate service of the Contracting Agency
appointed member.
2. The Contractor may terminate service of the Contractor appointed member.
3. The third member’s services may be terminated by agreement of the other two members.
4. By resignation of the member.
Termination of a member will be followed by appointment of a substitute as
specified above.
No member shall have a financial interest in the Contract, except for payments for services
on the Board. The Contracting Agency-selected member and the Contractor-selected member
shall not have been employed by the party who selected them within a period of 1 year;
except that, service as a member of other Disputes Review Boards on other contracts will not
preclude a member from serving on the Board for this Contract.
Compensation for the Board members, and the expenses of operation of the Board, shall
be shared by the Contracting Agency and Contractor in accordance with the following:
1. The Contracting Agency will compensate directly the wages and travel expense for
its selected member.
2. The Contractor shall compensate directly the wages and travel expense for its
selected member.
3. The Contracting Agency and Contractor shall share equally in the third member’s
wages and travel expense, and all of the operating expenses of the Board. These equally
shared expenses shall be billed to and paid by the Contracting Agency. The Contractor’s
share will be deducted from monies due or coming due the Contractor.

4. The Contracting Agency, through the Engineer, will provide administrative services,
such as conference facilities and secretarial services, to the Board and the Contracting
Agency will bear the costs for this service.
The Contracting Agency and Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Board
Members from and against all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited
to, attorney’s fees arising out of and resulting from the actions and recommendations of
the Board.
1-09.11(1)B Disputes Review Board Procedures
The Board, the Contracting Agency, and the Contractor shall develop by agreement the
Board’s rules of operation and procedures to be followed for the Project. In developing the
agreement, the parties shall take into consideration their respective duties and responsibilities
set forth in the “Scope of Work” section of their agreements.
The parties may also consider the “Suggested Administrative Procedures” for the Board’s
operation included in their agreements. These Procedures express, in general terms, the policy
for the creation and operation of the Board.
No dispute shall be referred to the Board unless the Contractor has complied with the
requirements of Sections 1-04.5 and 1-09.11 and the parties have mutually agreed to refer the
dispute to the Board in an attempt to resolve the dispute prior to the Contractor filing a claim
according to Section 1-09.11(2). If the dispute is referred to the Board, then the Board will
consider the matter in dispute and provide recommendations concerning:
1. The interpretation of the Contract.
2. Entitlement to additional compensation or time for performance.
3. The amount of additional compensation or time for performance following a
recommendation of entitlement by the Board provided that; (1) the parties were not
able to reach a resolution as to the amount of the equitable adjustment or time; (2) the
Engineer has made a unilateral determination of the amount of compensation for time;
and (3) the Contractor has protested the Engineer’s unilateral determination.
4. Other subjects mutually agreed by the Contracting Agency and Contractor to be
a Board issue.
Once the Board is established, the dispute resolution process shall be as follows:
1. Board hearing dates will be scheduled by agreement of the parties.
2. The Contractor and the Contracting Agency shall each be afforded an opportunity
to be heard by the Board and to offer evidence. Either party furnishing any written
evidence or documentation to the Board must furnish copies of such information to the
other party a minimum of 15 calendar days prior to the date the Board sets to convene
the hearing for the dispute. Either party shall produce such additional evidence as the
Board may deem necessary to an understanding and determination of the dispute and
furnish copies to the other party.
3. After the hearing is concluded, the Board shall meet in private and reach a conclusion
supported by two or more members. Its findings and recommendations, together with its
reasons shall then be submitted as a written report to both parties. The recommendations
shall be based on the pertinent Contract Provisions and facts and circumstances
involved in the dispute. The Contract shall be interpreted and construed in accordance
with the laws of the State of Washington. The Board shall make every effort to reach
a unanimous decision. If this proves impossible, the dissenting member may prepare
a minority report.
4. Within 30 calendar days of receiving the Board recommendations, both the Contracting
Agency and the Contractor shall respond to the other in writing signifying that the
dispute is either resolved or remains unresolved. Although both parties should place
weight upon the Board recommendations, the recommendations are not binding.

In the event the Board’s recommendations do not lead to resolution of the dispute,
all Board records and written recommendations, including any minority reports, will be
admissible as evidence in any subsequent litigation.
If the Board’s assistance does not resolve the dispute, the Contractor must file a claim
according to Section 1-09.11(2) before seeking any form of judicial relief.
1-09.11(2) Claims
If the Contractor claims that additional payment is due and the Contractor has pursued
and exhausted all the means provided in Sections 1-04.5 and 1-09.11(1) to resolve a dispute,
including the use of a Disputes Review Board if one was established, the Contractor may file
a claim as provided in this section. The Contractor agrees to waive any claim for additional
payment if the written notifications provided in Section 1-04.5 are not given, or if the Engineer
is not afforded reasonable access by the Contractor to complete records of actual cost and
additional time incurred as required by Section 1-04.5, or if a claim is not filed as provided
in this section. The fact that the Contractor has provided a proper notification, provided a
properly filed claim, or provided the Engineer access to records of actual cost, shall not in
any way be construed as proving or substantiating the validity of the claim. If the claim, after
consideration by the Engineer, is found to have merit, the Engineer will make an equitable
adjustment either in the amount of costs to be paid or in the time required for the Work,
or both. If the Engineer finds the claim to be without merit, no adjustment will be made.
All claims filed by the Contractor shall be in writing and in sufficient detail to enable the
Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of the claim. All claims shall be submitted to the
Engineer as provided in Section 1-05.15. As a minimum, the following information must
accompany each claim submitted:
1. A detailed factual statement of the claim for additional compensation and time, if any,
providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of Work affected by the claim.
2. The date on which facts arose which gave rise to the claim.
3. The name of each Contracting Agency individual, official, or employee involved
in or knowledgeable about the claim.
4. The specific provisions of the Contract which support the claim and a statement
of the reasons why such provisions support the claim.
5. If the claim relates to a decision of the Engineer which the Contract leaves to the
Engineer’s discretion or as to which the Contract provides that the Engineer’s decision
is final, the Contractor shall set out in detail all facts supporting its position relating
to the decision of the Engineer.
6. The identification of any documents and the substance of any oral communications
that support the claim.
7. Copies of any identified documents, other than Contracting Agency documents and
documents previously furnished to the Contracting Agency by the Contractor, that
support the claim (manuals which are standard to the industry, used by the Contractor,
may be included by reference).
8. If an extension of time is sought:
a. The specific days and dates for which it is sought,
b. The specific reasons the Contractor believes a time extension should be granted,
c. The specific provisions of Section 1-08.8 under which it is sought, and
d. The Contractor’s analysis of its progress schedule to demonstrate the reason for
a time extension.
9. If additional compensation is sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that
amount into the following categories:
a. Labor;
b. Materials;

c. Direct equipment. The actual cost for each piece of equipment for which a claim
is made or in the absence of actual cost, the rates established by the AGC/WSDOT
Equipment Rental Agreement which was in effect when the Work was performed.
In no case shall the amounts claimed for each piece of equipment exceed the
rates established by that Equipment Rental Agreement even if the actual cost for
such equipment is higher. The Contracting Agency may audit the Contractor’s
cost records as provided in Section 1-09.12 to determine actual equipment cost.
The following information shall be provided for each piece of equipment:
(1) Detailed description (e.g., Motor Grader Diesel Powered Caterpillar 12 “G”,
Tractor Crawler ROPS & Dozer Included Diesel);
(2) The hours of use or standby; and
(3) The specific day and dates of use or standby;
d. Job overhead;
e. Overhead (general and administrative);
f. Subcontractor’s claims (in the same level of detail as specified herein is required
for any Subcontractor’s claims); and
g. Other categories as specified by the Contractor or the Contracting Agency.
10. A notarized statement shall be submitted to the Engineer containing the following
language:
Under the penalty of law for perjury or falsification, the undersigned,
____________________________, ______________________________
(name) (title)

of _________________________________________________________
(company)
hereby certifies that the claim for extra compensation and time, if any, made
herein for Work on this Contract is a true statement of the actual costs incurred
and time sought, and is fully documented and supported under the Contract
between the parties.

Dated __________________________/s/__________________________
Subscribed and sworn before me this ___________ day of ____________
___________________________________________________________
Notary Public
My Commission Expires:______________________________________
It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to keep full and complete records of the costs
and additional time incurred for any alleged claim. The Contractor shall permit the Engineer
to have access to those records and any other records as may be required by the Engineer to
determine the facts or contentions involved in the claim. The Contractor shall retain those
records for a period of not less than three years after final acceptance.
The Contractor shall pursue administrative resolution of any claim with the Engineer or
the designee of the Engineer.
Failure to submit with the Final Contract Voucher Certification such information and
details as described in this section for any claim shall operate as a waiver of the claims by the
Contractor as provided in Section 1-09.9.

Provided that the Contractor is in full compliance with all the provisions of this section and
after the formal claim document has been submitted, the Contracting Agency will respond,
in writing, to the Contractor as follows:
1. Within 45 calendar days from the date the claim is received by the Contracting Agency
if the claim amount is less than $100,000;
2. Within 90 calendar days from the date the claim is received by the Contracting Agency
if the claim amount is equal to or greater than $100,000; or
3. If the above restraints are unreasonable due to the complexity of the claim under
consideration, the Contractor will be notified within 15 calendar days from the date
the claim is received by the Contracting Agency as to the amount of time which will
be necessary for the Contracting Agency to prepare its response.
Full compliance by the Contractor with the provisions of this section is a contractual
condition precedent to the Contractor’s right to seek judicial relief.
1-09.11(3) Time Limitation and Jurisdiction
For the convenience of the parties to the Contract it is mutually agreed by the parties
that any claims or causes of action which the Contractor has against the State of Washington
arising from the Contract shall be brought within 180 calendar days from the date of final
acceptance (Section 1-05.12) of the Contract by the State of Washington; and it is further
agreed that any such claims or causes of action shall be brought only in the Superior Court of
Thurston County. The parties understand and agree that the Contractor’s failure to bring suit
within the time period provided, shall be a complete bar to any such claims or causes of action.
It is further mutually agreed by the parties that when any claims or causes of action which the
Contractor asserts against the State of Washington arising from the Contract are filed with the
State or initiated in court, the Contractor shall permit the State to have timely access to any
records deemed necessary by the State to assist in evaluating the claims or action.
1-09.12 Audits
1-09.12(1) General
The Contractor’s wage, payroll, and cost records on this Contract shall be open to
inspection or audit by representatives of the Contracting Agency during the life of the Contract
and for a period of not less than 3 years after the date of final acceptance of the Contract. The
Contractor shall retain these records for that period. The Contractor shall also guarantee that
the wage, payroll, and cost records of all Subcontractors and all lower tier Subcontractors
shall be retained and open to similar inspection or audit for the same period of time. The audit
may be performed by employees of the Contracting Agency or by an auditor under contract
with the Contracting Agency. The Contractor, Subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors
shall provide adequate facilities, acceptable to the Engineer, for the audit during normal
business hours. The Contractor, Subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors shall make a
good faith effort to cooperate with the auditors. If an audit is to be commenced more than
60 calendar days after the final acceptance date of the Contract, the Contractor will be given
20 calendar days notice of the time when the audit is to begin. If any litigation, claim, or audit
arising out of, in connection with, or related to this Contract is initiated, the wage, payroll,
and cost records shall be retained until such litigation, claim, or audit involving the records
is completed.
1-09.12(2) Claims
All claims filed against the Contracting Agency shall be subject to audit at any time
following the filing of the claim. Failure of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or lower tier
subcontractors to maintain and retain sufficient records to allow the auditors to verify all
or a portion of the claim or to permit the auditor access to the books and records of the
Contractor, Subcontractors, or lower tier subcontractors shall constitute a waiver of a claim
and shall bar any recovery thereunder.

1-09.12(3) Required Documents for Audits

As a minimum, the auditors shall have available to them the following documents:
1. Daily time sheets and supervisor’s daily reports.
2. Collective Bargaining Agreements.
3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records.
4. Payroll registers.
5. Earnings records.
6. Payroll tax forms.
7. Material invoices and requisitions.
8. Material cost distribution worksheet.
9. Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates, etc.).
10. Vendors’, rental agencies’, Subcontractors’, and lower tier subcontractors’ invoices.
11. Contracts between the Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, and all lower-tier
subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts.
12. Subcontractors’ and lower tier subcontractors’ payment certificates.
13. Canceled checks (payroll and vendors).
14. Job cost reports, including monthly totals.
15. Job payroll ledger.
16. General ledger.
17. Cash disbursements journal.
18. Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on this Contract. In addition,
the Contracting Agency may require, if it deems appropriate, additional financial
statements for 3 years preceding execution of the Contract and 3 years following final
acceptance of the Contract.
19. Depreciation records on all company equipment whether these records are maintained
by the company involved, its accountant, or others.
20. If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for the Contractor’s
internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment,
all such other source documents.
21. All documents which relate to each and every claim together with all documents which
support the amount of damages as to each claim.
22. Worksheets or software used to prepare the claim establishing the cost components for
items of the claim including but not limited to labor, benefits and insurance, materials,
equipment, Subcontractors, all documents which establish the time periods, individuals
involved, the hours for the individuals, and the rates for the individuals.
23. Worksheets, software, and all other documents used by the Contractor to prepare its Bid.
An audit may be performed by employees of the Contracting Agency or a representative
of the Contracting Agency. The Contractor and its Subcontractors shall provide adequate
facilities acceptable to the Contracting Agency for the audit during normal business hours.
The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall cooperate with the Contracting Agency’s auditors.
1-09.13 Claims Resolution
1-09.13(1) General
Prior to seeking claim resolution through nonbinding alternative dispute resolution
processes, binding arbitration, or litigation, the Contractor shall proceed under the
administrative procedures in Sections 1-04.5 and 1-09.11, and any Special Provision provided
in the Contract for resolution of disputes. The provisions of these sections must be complied
with in full, as a condition precedent to the Contractor’s right to seek claim resolution through
any nonbinding alternative dispute resolution process, binding arbitration or litigation.

1-09.13(2) Nonbinding Alternative Disputes Resolution (ADR)

Nonbinding ADR processes are encouraged and available upon mutual agreement
of the Contractor and the Contracting Agency for all claims submitted in accordance
with Section 1-09.11, provided that:
1. All the administrative remedies provided for in the Contract have been exhausted;
2. The Contracting Agency has been given the time and opportunity to respond to the
Contractor as provided in Section 1-09.11(2); and
3. The Contracting Agency has determined that it has sufficient information concerning
the Contractor’s claims to participate in a nonbinding ADR process.
The Contracting Agency and the Contractor mutually agree that the cost of the nonbinding
ADR process shall be shared equally by both parties with each party bearing its own
preparation costs.
The type of nonbinding ADR process shall be agreed upon by the parties and shall be
conducted within the State of Washington at a location mutually acceptable to the parties.
The Contractor agrees that the participation in a nonbinding ADR process does not in any
way waive the requirement that binding arbitration or litigation proceedings must commence
within 180 calendar days of final acceptance of the Contract, the same as any other claim or
causes of action as provided in Section 1-09.11(3).
1-09.13(3) Claims $250,000 or Less
The Contractor and the Contracting Agency mutually agree that those claims which
total $250,000 or less, submitted in accordance with Section 1-09.11 and not resolved by
nonbinding ADR processes, shall be resolved through mandatory and binding arbitration
as described herein.
1-09.13(3)A Administration of Arbitration
Arbitration shall be as agreed by the parties or, if the parties cannot agree, arbitration
shall be administered through the American Arbitration Association (AAA) using the
following arbitration methods:
1. The current version of the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules and Mediation
Fast Track Procedures shall be used for claims with an amount less than $75,000.
2. The current version of the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules and Mediation
Regular Track Procedures shall be used for claims with an amount equal to or greater
than $75,000 and less than $250,000.
The Contracting Agency and the Contractor mutually agree the venue of any arbitration
hearing shall be within the State of Washington and any such hearing shall be conducted
within the State of Washington.
The Contracting Agency and the Contractor mutually agree to be bound by the decision
of the arbitrator, and judgment upon the award rendered by the arbitrator may be entered in
the Superior Court of Thurston County. The decision of the arbitrator and the specific basis for
the decision shall be in writing. The arbitrator shall use the Contract as a basis for decisions.
1-09.13(3)B Procedures to Pursue Arbitration
If the dispute cannot be resolved through administrative procedures provided in Sections
1-04.5 and 1-09.11, and any Special Provision provided in the Contract for resolution of
disputes or through a mutually agreed upon nonbinding ADR process, the Contractor shall
advise the Engineer, in writing, that mandatory and binding arbitration is desired. The parties
may agree on an arbitration process, or, if the parties cannot agree a demand for arbitration
shall be filed by the Contractor, in accordance with the AAA rules, with the Contracting
Agency, and with the AAA. Selection of the arbitrator and the administration of the arbitration
shall proceed in accordance with AAA rules using arbitrators from the list developed by
the AAA, except that: for claims under $25,000 using the Northwest Region Expedited
Commercial Arbitration Rules, arbitration selection shall proceed pursuant to Section 55

of the Expedited Procedure of the Construction Industry Arbitration Rules. Arbitration shall

proceed utilizing the appropriate rule of the AAA as determined by the dollar amount of the
claim as provided in Section 1-09.13(3)A.
Unresolved disputes which do not involve delays or impacts to unchanged Work may
be brought to binding arbitration prior to Physical Completion of the project, provided that:
1. All the administrative remedies provided for in the Contract have been exhausted;
2. The dispute has been pursued to the claim status as provided in Section 1-09.11(2); and
3. The Contractor certifies in writing that claims for delays or impacts to the Work will not
result from the dispute.
Unless the Contracting Agency and the Contractor agree otherwise, all other unresolved
claims (disputes which have been pursued to the claim status) which arise from a Contract
must be brought in a single arbitration hearing and only after Physical Completion of the
Contract. The total of those unresolved claims cannot be greater than $250,000 to be eligible
for arbitration.
In addition, the Contractor agrees arbitration proceedings must commence, by filing of the
aforementioned demand for arbitration, within 180 calendar days of final acceptance of the
contract, the same as any other claim or causes of action as provided in Section 1-09.11(3).
The scope and extent of discovery shall be determined by the arbitrator in accordance with
AAA rules. In addition, each party for claims greater than $25,000 shall serve upon the other
party a “statement of proof”. The statement of proof shall be served, with a copy to the AAA,
no less than 20 calendar days prior to the arbitration hearing and shall include:
1. The identity, current business address, and residential address of each witness who will
testify at the hearing;
2. The identity of a witness as an expert if an expert witness is to be called, a statement
as to the subject matter and the substance of the facts and opinions on which the expert
is expected to testify, a summary of the grounds for each opinion, and a resume of the
expert’s qualifications; and
3. A list of each document that the party intends to offer in evidence at the arbitration
hearing. Either party may request from the other party a copy of any document listed.
If such a request is made, a copy of the document shall be provided within 5 calendar
days from the date the request is received.
The arbitrator may permit a party to call a witness or offer a document not shown or
included in the statement of proof only upon a showing of good cause.
1-09.13(4) Claims in Excess of $250,000
The Contractor and the Contracting Agency mutually agree that those claims in excess
of $250,000, submitted in accordance with Section 1-09.11 and not resolved by nonbinding
ADR processes, shall be resolved through litigation unless the parties mutually agree to
resolve the claim through binding arbitration.

1-10 Temporary Traffic Control

1-10.1 General
Temporary traffic control refers to the control of all types of traffic, including vehicles,
bicyclists, and pedestrians (including pedestrians with disabilities). The Contractor, utilizing
contractor labor and contractor-provided equipment and materials (except when such labor,
equipment, or materials are to be provided by the Contracting Agency as specifically identified
herein), shall plan, manage, supervise, and perform all temporary traffic control activities
needed to support the Work of the Contract.
1-10.1(1) Materials
Materials shall meet the requirements of the following Sections:
Stop/Slow Paddles 9-35.1
Construction Signs 9-35.2
Wood Sign Posts 9-35.3
Sequential Arrow Signs 9-35.4
Portable Changeable Message Signs 9-35.5
Barricades 9-35.6
Traffic Safety Drums 9-35.7
Traffic Cones 9-35.9
Tubular Markers 9-35.10
Warning Lights and Flashers 9-35.11
Transportable Attenuator 9-35.12
Tall Channelizing Devices 9-35.13
Portable Temporary Traffic Control Signal 9-35.14
1-10.1(2) Description
The Contractor shall provide flaggers and all other personnel required for labor
for traffic control activities that are not otherwise specified as being furnished by the
Contracting Agency.
The Contractor shall perform all procedures necessary to support the Contract Work.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Contract or approved by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall keep all existing pedestrian routes and access points (including sidewalks, paths, and
crosswalks) open and clear at all times.
The Contractor shall keep lanes, on-ramps, and off-ramps, open to traffic at all times except
when Work requires closures. Ramps shall not be closed on consecutive interchanges at the
same time, unless approved by the Engineer. Lanes and ramps shall be closed for the minimum
time required to complete the Work. When paving hot mix asphalt the Contractor may apply
water to the pavement to shorten the time required before reopening to traffic.
The Contractor shall provide signs and other traffic control devices not otherwise specified
as being furnished by the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall erect and maintain all
construction signs, warning signs, detour signs, and other traffic control devices necessary to
warn and protect the public at all times from injury or damage as a result of the Contractor’s
operations, which may occur on or adjacent to Highways, roads, streets, sidewalks, or paths.
No Work shall be done on or adjacent to any Traveled Way until all necessary signs and traffic
control devices are in place.
The traffic control resources and activities described shall be used for the safety of the
public, of the Contractor’s employees, and of the Contracting Agency’s personnel and to
facilitate the movement of the traveling public. Traffic control resources and activities may
be used for the separation or merging of public and construction traffic when such use is in
accordance with a specific approved traffic control plan.

Temporary Traffic Control 1-10
Upon failure of the Contractor to immediately provide flaggers; erect, maintain, and
remove signs; or provide, erect, maintain, and remove other traffic control devices when
ordered to do so by the Engineer, the Contracting Agency may, without further notice to
the Contractor or the Surety, perform any of the above and deduct all of the costs from the
Contractor’s payments.
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate labor, sufficient signs, and other
traffic control devices, and for performing traffic control procedures needed for the protection
of the Work and the public at all times regardless of whether or not the labor, devices or
procedures have been ordered by the Engineer, furnished by the Contracting Agency, or paid
for by the Contracting Agency.
Wherever possible when performing Contract Work, the Contractor’s equipment shall
follow normal and legal traffic movements. The Contractor’s ingress and egress of the Work
area shall be accomplished with as little disruption to traffic as possible. Traffic control devices
shall be removed by picking up the devices in a reverse sequence to that used for installation.
This may require moving backwards through the work zone. When located behind barrier or at
other locations shown on approved traffic control plans, equipment may operate in a direction
opposite to adjacent traffic.
The Contractor is advised that the Contracting Agency may have entered into operating
agreements with one or more law enforcement organizations for cooperative activities. Under
such agreements, at the sole discretion of the Contracting Agency, law enforcement personnel
may enter the work zone for enforcement purposes and may participate in the Contractor’s
traffic control activities. The responsibility under the Contract for all traffic control resides
with the Contractor and any such participation by law enforcement personnel in Contractor
traffic control activities will be referenced in the Special Provisions or will be preceded by
an agreement and, if appropriate, a cost adjustment. Nothing in this Contract is intended to
create an entitlement, on the part of the Contractor, to the services or participation of the law
enforcement organization.
1-10.2 Traffic Control Management
1-10.2(1) General
It is the Contractor’s responsibility to plan, conduct, and safely perform the Work. The
Contractor shall manage temporary traffic control with his or her own staff. Traffic control
management responsibilities shall be formally assigned to one or more company supervisors
who are actively involved in the planning and management of field Contract activities. The
Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a copy of the formal assignment. The duties of
traffic control management may not be subcontracted.
The Contractor shall designate an individual or individuals to perform the duties of the
primary Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS). The designation shall also identify an alternate
TCS who can assume the duties of the primary TCS in the event of that person’s inability to
perform. The TCS shall be responsible for safe implementation of approved Traffic Control
Plans provided by the Contractor.
The primary and alternate TCS shall be certified by one of the organizations listed in the
Special Provisions. Possession of a current Washington State TCS card and flagging card by
the primary and alternate TCS is mandatory. A traffic control management assignment and a
TCS designation are required on all projects that will utilize traffic control.
The Contractor shall maintain 24-hour telephone numbers at which the Contractor’s
assigned traffic control management personnel and the TCS can be contacted and be available
upon the Engineer’s request at other than normal working hours. These persons shall have
the resources, ability and authority to expeditiously correct any deficiency in the traffic
control system.

1-10.2(1)A Traffic Control Management

The responsibilities of the Contractor’s traffic control management personnel shall include:
1. Overseeing and approving the actions of the Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) to ensure
that proper safety and traffic control measures are implemented and consistent with
the specific requirements created by the Contractor’s work zones and the Contract.
Some form of oversight shall be in place and effective even when the traffic control
management personnel are not present at the jobsite.
2. Providing the Contractor’s designated TCS with approved Traffic Control Plans (TCPs)
which are compatible with the Work operations and traffic control for which they will
be implemented. Having the latest adopted edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD), including the Washington State
Modifications to the MUTCD M 24-01 the most current edition of the Public Rights-of-
Way Accessibility Guidelines (PROWAG), which can be downloaded from the United
States Access Board website at www.access-board.gov/prowac under Revised Draft
Guidelines (2005), and applicable standards and Specifications available at all times
on the project.
3. Discussing proposed traffic control measures and coordinating implementation of
the Contractor-adopted traffic control plan(s) with the Engineer.
4. Coordinating all traffic control operations, including those of Subcontractors and
suppliers, with each other and with any adjacent construction or maintenance
operations.
5. Coordinating the project’s activities (such as ramp closures, road closures, and lane
closures) with appropriate police, fire control agencies, city or county engineering,
medical emergency agencies, school districts, and transit companies.
6. Overseeing all requirements of the Contract that contribute to the convenience, safety,
and orderly movement of vehicular and pedestrian traffic.
7. Reviewing the TCS’s diaries daily and being aware of field traffic control operations.
8. Being present on-site a sufficient amount of time to adequately satisfy the above-listed
responsibilities.
Failure to carry out any of the above-listed responsibilities shall be a failure to comply
with the Contract and may result in a suspension of Work as described in Section 1-08.6.
1-10.2(1)B Traffic Control Supervisor
A Traffic Control Supervisor (TCS) shall be present on the project whenever flagging or
other traffic control labor is being utilized or less frequently, as authorized by the Engineer.
The TCS shall personally perform all the duties of the TCS. During nonwork periods,
the TCS shall be available to the job site within a 45-minute time period after notification
by the Engineer.
The TCS’s duties shall include:
1. Having a current set of approved traffic control plans (TCPs), applicable Contract
Provisions as provided by the Contractor, the latest adopted edition of the MUTCD,
including the Washington State Modifications to the MUTCD, the book Quality
Guidelines for Temporary Work Zone Traffic Control Devices, the most current
edition of the PROWAG, and applicable standards and Specifications.
2. Inspecting traffic control devices and nighttime lighting for proper location, installation,
message, cleanliness, and effect on the traveling public. Traffic control devices shall be
inspected at least once per hour during working hours except that Class A signs need
to be checked once a week and nighttime lighting need to be checked only once a shift.
Traffic control devices left in place for 24 hours or more shall also be inspected once
during the nonworking hours when they are initially set up (during daylight or darkness,
whichever is opposite of the working hours). The TCS shall correct, or arrange to have
corrected, any deficiencies noted during these inspections.

3. Preparing a daily traffic control diary on each day that traffic control is performed
using WSDOT Form 421-040A and 421-040B, and submitting them to the Engineer
no later than the end of the next working day. The Contractor may use alternate forms
if approved by the Engineer. Diary entries shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Time of day when signs and traffic control devices are installed and removed,
b. Location and condition of signs and traffic control devices,
c. Revisions to the traffic control plan,
d. Lighting utilized at night, and
e. Observations of traffic conditions.
4. Making minor revisions to the traffic control plan to accommodate site conditions
provided that the original intent of the traffic control plan is maintained and the revision
has the concurrence of both the Contractor and the Engineer.
5. Attending traffic control coordinating meetings or coordination activities as necessary
for full understanding and effective performance.
6. Ensuring that all needed traffic control devices and equipment are available and in good
working condition prior to the need to install or utilize them.
7. Ensuring that all pedestrian routes or access points, existing or temporary, are kept
clear and free of obstructions and that all temporary pedestrian routes or access
points are detectable and accessible to persons with disabilities as provided for in the
approved Plans.
The TCS may perform the Work described in Section 1-10.3(1)A Flaggers or in Section
1-10.3(1)B Other Traffic Control Labor and be compensated under those Bid items, provided
that the duties of the TCS are accomplished.
1-10.2(2) Traffic Control Plans
The traffic control plan or plans appearing in the Contract documents show a method
of handling vehicle, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic. All construction signs, flaggers, and
other traffic control devices are shown on the traffic control plan(s) except for emergency
situations. If the Contractor proposes adding the use of flaggers to a plan, this will constitute a
modification requiring approval by the Engineer. The modified plans shall show locations for
all the required advance warning signs and a safe, protected location for the flagging station.
If flagging is to be performed during hours of darkness, the plan shall include appropriate
illumination for the flagging station.
When the Contractor’s chosen method of performing the Work in the Contract requires
some form of temporary traffic control, for vehicles, bicyclists, or pedestrians, the Contractor
shall either: (1) submit a Type 1 Working Drawing designating and adopting, in writing,
the traffic control plan or plans from the Contract documents that support that method; or
(2) submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the Contractor’s plan that modifies,
supplements or replaces a plan from the Contract documents. Any Contractor-proposed
modification, supplement or replacement shall show the necessary construction signs, flaggers,
and other traffic control devices required to support the Work. Any Contractor-proposed traffic
control plan shall conform to the established standards for plan development as shown in the
MUTCD, Part 6 and the most current edition of the PROWAG. The Contractor shall be solely
responsible for submitting any proposed traffic control plan or modification, obtaining the
Engineer’s acceptance and providing copies of the accepted Traffic Control Plans to the Traffic
Control Supervisor.
1-10.2(3) Conformance to Established Standards
Flagging, signs, and all other traffic control devices and procedures furnished or provided
shall conform to the standards established in the latest WSDOT adopted edition of the
MUTCD, published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and the Washington State
Modifications to the MUTCD, and the most current edition of the Public Rights-of-Way
Accessibility Guidelines (PROWAG). Judgment of the quality of devices furnished will be

based upon Quality Guidelines for Temporary Traffic Control Devices, published by the
American Traffic Safety Services Association. Copies of the MUTCD and Quality Guidelines
for Temporary Control Devices may be purchased from the American Traffic Safety Services
Association, 15 Riverside Parkway, Suite 100, Fredericksburg, VA 22406-1022. The
Washington State Modifications to the MUTCD may be obtained from the Department of
Transportation, Olympia, WA 98504. The most current edition of the Public Rights-of-Way
Accessibility Guidelines (PROWAG) can be downloaded from the United States Access
Board website at www.access-board.gov/prowac under Revised Draft Guidelines (2005).
In addition to the standards of the MUTCD described above, the Contracting Agency has
crashworthiness requirements for most work zone devices. The National Cooperative Highway
Research Project (NCHRP) Report 350 and the AASHTO Manual for Assessing Safety
Hardware (MASH) have established requirements for crash testing. Work zone devices are
divided into four categories. Each of those categories is described below:
Category 1 includes those items that are small and lightweight, channelizing, and
delineating devices that have been in common use for many years and are known to be
crashworthy by crash testing of similar devices or years of demonstrable safe performance.
These include cones, tubular markers, flexible delineator posts, and plastic drums. All
Category 1 devices used on the project shall meet the requirements of NCHRP 350 or MASH
as certified by the manufacturer of the device.
Category 2 includes devices that are not expected to produce significant vehicular velocity
change, but may otherwise be hazardous. Examples of this class are barricades, portable
sign supports and signs. All Category 2 devices shall meet the requirements of NCHRP 350
or MASH. For the purpose of definition, a sign support and sign shall be considered a single
unit. A new sign may be purchased for an existing sign support and the entire unit will be
defined as “existing equipment”.
Category 3 is for hardware expected to cause significant velocity changes or other
potentially harmful reactions to impacting vehicles. Barriers, fixed sign supports, crash
cushions, transportable attenuators and other work zone devices not meeting the definitions
of Category 1 or 2 are examples from this category. Many Category 3 devices are defined in
the design of the project. Where this is the case, NCHRP 350 or MASH requirements have
been incorporated into the design and the Contractor complies with the requirements by
constructing devices according to the Plans and Specifications. Where the device is a product
chosen by the Contractor, the device chosen must be compliant with the requirements of
NCHRP 350 or MASH.
Category 4 includes portable or trailer-mounted devices such as arrow displays, temporary
traffic signals, area lighting supports, and portable changeable message signs. Crash testing is
not required for these devices.
The condition of signs and traffic control devices shall be acceptable or marginal as defined
in the book Quality Guidelines for Temporary Traffic Control Devices, and will be accepted
based on a visual inspection by the Engineer. The Engineer’s decision on the condition of a
sign or traffic control device shall be final. A sign or traffic control device determined to be
unacceptable shall be removed from the project and replaced within 12 hours of notification.
1-10.3 Traffic Control Labor, Procedures, and Devices
1-10.3(1) Traffic Control Labor
The Contractor shall furnish all personnel for flagging, for the execution of all procedures
related to temporary traffic control and for the setup, maintenance and removal of all
temporary traffic control devices and construction signs necessary to control vehicular,
bicycle, and pedestrian traffic during construction operations.
Vests and other high-visibility apparel shall be in conformance with Section 1-07.8.

1-10.3(1)A Flaggers
Flaggers shall be posted where shown on approved Traffic Control Plans or where directed
by the Engineer. All flaggers shall possess a current flagging card issued by the State of
Washington, Oregon, Montana, or Idaho. The flagging card shall be immediately available and
shown to the Contracting Agency upon request.
Flagging stations shall be shown on Traffic Control Plans at locations where construction
operations require stopping or diverting public traffic. Flagging stations shall be staffed only
when flagging is required. This staffing may be continuous or intermittent, depending on
the nature of the construction activity. Whenever a flagger is not required to stop or divert
traffic, the flagger shall move away from the flagging station to a safer location. During hours
of darkness, flagging stations shall be illuminated in a manner that insures that flaggers can
easily be seen but that does not cause glare to the traveling public.
Flagger station illumination shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD and
these Specifications.
The Contractor shall provide portable lighting equipment capable of sufficiently
illuminating a flagger and their station without creating glare for oncoming motorists, yet
will meet the mobility requirements of the operation. The lighting stations shall be located on
the same side of the roadway as the flagger and aimed either parallel or perpendicular to the
traveled lanes to minimize glare. The lighting devices shall be located 5 to 10 feet from the
edge of the travel lane with a mounting height of 15 to 25 feet above the ground. The flagger
should be visible and discernable as a flagger from a distance of 1,000 feet.
Flaggers shall be equipped with portable two-way radios, with a range suitable for the
project. The radios shall be capable of having direct contact with project management
(foremen, superintendents, etc.).
The Contractor shall furnish Stop/Slow paddles conforming to the requirements of
Section 9-35.1 for all flagging operations.
1-10.3(1)B Other Traffic Control Labor
In addition to flagging duties, the Contractor shall provide personnel for all other traffic
control procedures required by the construction operations and for the labor to install, maintain
and remove any traffic control devices shown on Traffic Control Plans.
1-10.3(2) Traffic Control Procedures
1-10.3(2)A One-Way Traffic Control
The project Work may require that traffic be maintained on a portion of the Roadway
during the progress of the Work using one-way traffic control. If this is the case, the
Contractor’s operation shall be confined to one-half the Roadway, permitting traffic on the
other half. If shown on an approved traffic control plan or directed by the Engineer, one-way
traffic control, in accordance with the MUTCD, shall be provided and shall also conform to
the following requirements:
In any one-way traffic control configuration, side roads and approaches will be closed or
controlled by a flagger or by appropriate approved signing. A side road flagger will coordinate
with end flaggers where there is line of sight and with the pilot car where the end flaggers
cannot be seen.
Queues of vehicles will be allowed to take turns passing through the work zone in the single
open lane. When one-way traffic control is in effect, Contractor vehicles shall not use the open
traffic lane except while following the same rules and routes required of the public traffic.
As conditions permit, the Contractor shall, at the end of each day, leave the Work area in
such condition that it can be traveled without damage to the Work, without danger to traffic,
and without one-way traffic control. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, one-way traffic control
cannot be dispensed with after working hours, then the operation will be continued throughout
the non-working hours.

1-10.3(2)B Rolling Slowdown

Rolling slowdown traffic control operations are not to be used for routine Work that can
be addressed by standard lane or shoulder closure traffic control. When a short-term roadway
closure is needed for an infrequent, nonrepetitive Work operation such as a sign bridge
removal or utility wire crossing, the Contractor may implement a rolling slowdown on a
multilane roadway, as part of an accepted traffic control plan.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of a traffic control plan
detailing the expected delay time, interchange ramp control, and rolling slowdown distance.
A portable changeable message sign shall be placed ahead of the starting point of the traffic
control to warn traffic of the slowdown. The sign shall be placed far enough ahead of the Work
to avoid any expected backup of vehicles.
A rolling slowdown shall use traffic control vehicles with flashing amber lights. At least
one traffic control vehicle will be used for every two lanes to be slowed, plus a control vehicle
will serve as a following (chase) vehicle for traffic ahead of the blockade. The traffic control
vehicles shall enter the roadway and form a moving blockade to reduce traffic speeds and
create a clear area ahead of the blockade in which to accomplish the Work without a total
stoppage of traffic.
The location where the traffic control vehicles shall begin the slowdown and the speed at
which the moving blockade will be allowed to travel will be calculated to accommodate the
estimated time needed for closure. The chase control vehicle shall follow the slowest vehicle
ahead of the blockade. When the chase vehicle passes, the Contractor may begin the Work
operation. In the event that the Work operation is not completed when the moving blockade
reaches the site, all Work except that necessary to clear the Roadway shall cease immediately
and the Roadway shall be cleared and reopened as soon as possible.
All ramps and entrances to the Roadway between the moving blockade and Work operation
shall be temporarily closed using flaggers. Radio communications between the Work operation
and the moving blockade shall be established and utilized to adjust the speed of the blockade
to accommodate the closure time needed.
1-10.3(2)C Lane Closure Setup/Takedown
Where allowed by the Contract and where shown on approved traffic control plans or
directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall set up traffic control measures to close one
or more lanes of a multi-lane facility. When this is to occur, the following sequence shall
be followed:
1. If the Plans show a portable changeable message sign, it shall be established in
advance of the operation, far enough back to provide warning of both the operation
and any queue of traffic that has formed during the operation.
2. Advance warning signs are set up on the Shoulder of the Roadway opposite the lane
to be closed.
3. Advance warning signs are set up on the same Shoulder as the lane to be closed.
4. A transportable attenuator, with arrow board, is moved into place at the beginning
of the closure taper.
5. Channelization devices are placed to mark the taper and the length of the closure
as shown on the traffic control plan.
Once the lane is closed, the transportable attenuator/arrow board combination shall
be replaced with an arrow board without attenuator.
If additional lanes are to be closed, this shall be done in sequence with previous lane
closures using the same sequence of activities. A transportable attenuator with arrow board
is required during the process of closing each additional lane and is to be replaced with an
arrow board without attenuator after the lane is closed. Each closed lane shall be marked
with a separate arrow board at all times.

Channelization devices shall not be moved by traffic control personnel across an open lane
of traffic. If an existing setup or staging of traffic control devices require crossing an open
lane of traffic, the traffic control devices shall be taken down completely and then set up in the
new configuration.
Traffic control for lane closures shall be removed in the reverse order of its installation.
1-10.3(2)D Mobile Operations
Where construction operations are such that movement along the length of a Roadway
is continuous or near-continuous to the extent that a stationary traffic control layout will not
be effective, the Contractor may implement a moving, or mobile, traffic control scheme.
Such moving control shall always be conducted in the same direction as the adjacent traffic.
Where shown on an approved traffic control plan or where directed by the Engineer, mobile
traffic control shall consist of portable equipment, moving with the operation. A portable
changeable message sign shall be established in advance of the operation, far enough back to
provide warning of both the operation and of any queue of traffic that has formed during the
operation. The advance sign shall be continuously moved to stay near the back of the queue at
all times. A transportable attenuator, with arrow board, shall be positioned and maintained at a
fixed distance upstream of the Work. A shadow vehicle, with transportable attenuator shall be
positioned and maintained immediately upstream of the Work.
1-10.3(2)E Patrol and Maintain Traffic Control Measures
At all times, when temporary traffic control measures are in place, the Contractor shall
provide for patrolling and maintaining these measures. The Work shall consist of resetting
errant devices, assuring visibility of all devices, cleaning and repairing where necessary,
providing maintenance for all equipment, including replacing batteries and light bulbs as well
as keeping motorized and electronic items functioning, and adjusting the location of devices
to respond to actual conditions, such as queue length, unanticipated traffic conflicts and other
areas where planned traffic control has proven ineffective.
This Work shall be performed by the Contractor, either by or under the direction of the
Traffic Control Supervisor. Personnel, with vehicles if necessary, shall be dispatched so that
all traffic control can be reviewed at least once per hour during working hours and at least
once during each non-working day.
1-10.3(3) Traffic Control Devices
Traffic control devices, including signs, furnished or provided shall conform to the
standards established in the latest WSDOT-adopted edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic
Control Devices for Streets and Highways (MUTCD) published by the U.S. Department of
Transportation and the Washington State Modifications to the MUTCD. Requirements for
pedestrian traffic control devices are addressed in the MUTCD.
1-10.3(3)A Construction Signs
All construction signs required by approved traffic control plans, as well as any other
appropriate signs directed by the Engineer shall be furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor
shall provide the posts or supports and erect and maintain the signs in a clean, neat, and
presentable condition until the need for them has ended. Post mounted signs shall be installed
as shown in the Standard Plans. When the need for construction signs has ended, the
Contractor, upon approval of the Engineer, shall remove all signs, posts, and supports from
the project and they shall remain the property of the Contractor.
No passing zones on the existing Roadway that are marked with paint striping and which
striping is to be obliterated by construction operations shall be replaced by “Do Not Pass” and
“Pass With Care” signs. The Contractor shall provide and install the posts and signs. The signs
shall be maintained by the Contractor until they are removed or until the Contract is Physically
Completed. When the project includes striping by the Contractor, the signs and posts shall be
removed by the Contractor when the no passing zones are reestablished by striping. The signs

and posts will become the property of the Contractor. When the Contractor is not responsible
for striping and when the striping by others is not completed when the project is Physically
Completed, the posts and signs shall be left in place and shall become the property of the
Contracting Agency.
All existing signs, new permanent signs installed under this Contract, and construction
signs installed under this Contract that are inappropriate for the traffic configuration at a
given time shall be removed or completely covered in accordance with Section 8-21.3(3).
Construction signs will be divided into two classes. Class A construction signs are those signs
that remain in service throughout the construction or during a major phase of the Work. They
are mounted on posts, existing fixed Structures, or substantial supports of a semi-permanent
nature. Class A signs will be designated as such on the approved Traffic Control Plan.
“Do Not Pass” and “Pass With Care” signs are classified as Class A construction signs. Sign
and support installation for Class A signs shall be in accordance with the Contract Plans or
the Standard Plans. Class B construction signs are those signs that are placed and removed
daily, or are used for short durations which may extend for 1 to 3 days. They are mounted on
portable or temporary mountings. Tripod-mounted signs in place more than 3 days in any one
location, unless approved by the Engineer, shall be required to be post-mounted and shall be
classified as Class A construction signs.
Where it is necessary to add weight to signs for stability, sand bags or other similar ballast
may be used, but the top of ballast shall not be more than 4 inches above the Roadway surface,
and shall not interfere with the breakaway features of the device. The Contractor shall follow
the manufacturer’s recommendations for sign ballasting.
Signs, posts, or supports that are lost, stolen, damaged, destroyed, or which the Engineer
deems to be unacceptable while their use is required on the project shall be replaced by
the Contractor.
1-10.3(3)B Sequential Arrow Signs
Where shown on an approved traffic control plan or where ordered by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall provide, operate and maintain sequential arrow signs. A sequential arrow
sign is required for all lane closure tapers on a multilane facility. A separate sequential arrow
sign shall be used for each closed lane. The arrow sign shall not be used to laterally shift
traffic. When used in the caution mode, the four corner mode shall be used.
1-10.3(3)C Portable Changeable Message Sign
Where shown on an approved traffic control plan or where ordered by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain portable changeable message signs (PCMS).
A PCMS shall be placed behind a barrier or guardrail whenever possible, but shall at
a minimum provide 4 feet of lateral clearance to edge of travelled lane and be delineated by
channelization devices. The Contractor shall remove the PCMS from the clear zone when not
in use unless protected by barrier or guardrail.
1-10.3(3)D Barricades
Contractor shall provide, install and maintain barricades. Barricades shall be kept in good
repair and shall be removed immediately when, in the opinion of the Engineer, they are no
longer functioning as designed.
Where it is necessary to add weight to barricades for stability, sand bags or other similar
ballast may be used, but the height shall not be more than 4 inches above the Roadway surface
and shall not interfere with the breakaway features of the device. The Contractor shall follow
the manufacturer’s recommendation for sign ballasting.
1-10.3(3)E Traffic Safety Drums
Where shown on an approved Traffic Control Plan, or where ordered by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall provide, install, and maintain traffic safety drums.

Used drums may be utilized, provided all drums used on the project are of essentially the
same configuration and the devices conform to Section 1-10.2(3).
The drums shall be designed to resist overturning by means of a weighted lower unit that
will separate from the drum when impacted by a vehicle.
Drums shall be regularly maintained to ensure that they are clean and that the drum and
reflective material are in good condition. If the Engineer determines that a drum has been
damaged beyond usefulness, or provides inadequate reflectivity, a replacement drum shall
be furnished.
When the Engineer determines that the drums are no longer required, they shall
be removed from the project and shall remain the property of the Contractor.
1-10.3(3)F Vacant
1-10.3(3)G Traffic Cones and Tall Channelizing Devices
Contractor shall provide, install and maintain traffic cones or tall channelizing devices. Cones
and tall channelizing devices shall be kept in good repair and shall be removed immediately
when directed by the Engineer. Where wind or moving traffic frequently displaces cones
or tall channelizing devices, an effective method of stabilizing them, such as stacking two
together at each location, shall be employed, or heavier weighted bases may be necessary.
1-10.3(3)H Tubular Markers
Where shown on an approved traffic control plan or where ordered by the Engineer,
the Contractor shall provide, install, and maintain tubular markers. Tubular markers shall
be kept in good repair and shall be removed immediately when directed by the Engineer.
Tubular markers are secondary devices and are not to be used as substitutes for cones or
other delineation devices without an approved traffic control plan.
Where the Traffic Control Plan shows pavement-mounted tubular markers, the adhesive
used to fasten the base to the pavement shall be suitable for the purpose, as approved by the
Engineer. During the removal of pavement-mounted tubular markers, care shall be taken to
avoid damage to the existing pavement. Any such damage shall be repaired by the Contractor
at no cost to the Contracting Agency.
1-10.3(3)I Warning Lights and Flashers
Where shown attached to traffic control devices on an approved traffic control plan or
where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide and maintain flashing warning
lights. Lights attached to advance warning signs shall be Type B, high-intensity. Lights
attached to traffic safety drums, barricades or other signs shall be Type C, steady-burning
low intensity or, where attention is to be directed to a specific device, Type A, flashing
low‑intensity units.
1-10.3(3)J Transportable Attenuator
Contractor shall provide, operate, and maintain transportable impact attenuators consistent
with the requirements of Section 9-35.12. These attenuators shall be available, on-site, for
the entire duration of their projected use.
The transportable attenuator shall be positioned to separate and protect construction work
zone activities from normal traffic flow.
During use, the attenuator shall be in the full down-and-locked position. For stationary
operations, the host vehicle’s parking brake shall be set.
A transportable attenuator may be used in lieu of a temporary impact attenuator when
approved by the Engineer as part of a stage traffic control shift to protect an object such
as blunt barrier end or bridge pier column that is located within the work zone clear zone.
This use of a transportable attenuator is restricted to a maximum of 3 days or approved
extension by the Engineer.

1-10.3(3)K Portable Temporary Traffic Control Signal

Where shown on an approved traffic control plan, the Contractor shall provide, operate,
maintain, and remove a portable temporary traffic control signal system to provide alternating
one-lane traffic operations on a two-way facility. A portable temporary traffic control signal
system shall be defined as two traffic control units that operate together. The system shall be
trailer-mounted, fully self-contained, and designed so that it can be easily transported and
deployed at different locations.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the manufacturer’s
specifications for the portable temporary traffic control signal. A manufacturer’s representative
is required to demonstrate the capabilities of the temporary portable signal prior to approval
and provide training to contractor personnel as necessary.
Remote manual control of the portable traffic control signal by the Traffic Control
Supervisor (TCS) or a qualified operator may be allowed if necessitated by Work area or
traffic conditions and as allowed by the Engineer.
Maximum length between signal heads shall be 1,500 feet unless otherwise shown on the
Plans or ordered by the Engineer in accordance with Section 1-04.4.
The Engineer or designee will inspect the signal system at initial installation/operation
and approve the signal timing. Final approval will be based on the results of the operational
inspection.
The Traffic Control Supervisor shall monitor and ensure that the Portable Temporary
Traffic Control Signal is fully operational and maintained as specified by the manufacturer.
This Work may include cleaning and replacing lamps and other routine maintenance
as needed.
If repairs or adjustments are required the Contractor shall respond immediately and provide
flagger traffic control, if the Roadway cannot be safely reopened to two-way traffic, until such
time that repairs can be made. The Contractor shall either repair the signal or replace with a
backup unit within 24 hours.
The Engineer will monitor the traffic, signal operation and order adjustments as needed
based on traffic conditions. Timing adjustments require the approval of the Engineer.
As shown on the traffic control plan, temporary stop bars and “STOP HERE ON RED”
Signs (R10-6) shall be provided at the location traffic is expected to stop during the red
display. The stop bar locations shall be illuminated at night. The illumination shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor and shall be adjusted to ensure minimal glare to motorists.
When not in operation, remove signal heads from the view of traffic or cover signal heads
with bags made of non-ripping material specifically designed for covering signal heads.
Do not use trash bags of any type. Remove, cover, fold, or turn all inappropriate signs so that
they are not readable by oncoming traffic.
The Contractor shall provide and install all field wiring to make a complete and operational
portable traffic control signal and shall maintain the system throughout the life of the Contract.
Portable temporary traffic signals shall not be installed within 300 feet of at-grade
railroad crossing, or if driveways or Roadway access points are located between the portable
temporary traffic control signals.
1-10.4 Measurement
1-10.4(1) Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items)
When the Bid Proposal contains the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control”, there will
be no measurement of unit items for Work defined by Section 1-10 except as described in
Section 1-10.4(3). Also, except as described in Section 1-10.4(3), all of Sections 1-10.4(2)
and 1-10.5(2) are deleted.

1-10.4(2) Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals

When the Bid Proposal does not contain the item “Project Temporary Traffic Control”,
Sections 1-10.4(1) and 1-10.5(1) are deleted and the Bid Proposal will contain some or all
of the following items, measured as noted.
“Flaggers” will be measured by the hour. Hours will be measured for each flagging station,
shown on an approved Traffic Control Plan, when that station is staffed in accordance with
Section 1-10.3(1)A. When a flagging station is staffed on an intermittent basis, no deduction
will be made in measured hours provided that the person staffing the station is in a standby
mode and is not performing other duties.
“Other Traffic Control Labor” will be measured by the hour. Time spent on activities other
than those described herein will not be measured under this item. The hours of one person
will be measured for each patrol route that the Contractor performs the Work described under
Section 1-10.3(2)E, Patrol and Maintain Traffic Control Measures, regardless of the actual
number of persons per route. Hours will be measured for each person engaged in any one of
the following activities:
• Operating a pilot vehicle during one-way piloted traffic control.
• Operating a traffic control vehicle or a chase vehicle during a rolling
slowdown operation.
• Operating a vehicle or placing/removing traffic control devices during the setup or
takedown of a lane closure. Performing preliminary Work to prepare for placing and
removing these devices.
• Operating any of the moving traffic control equipment, or adjusting signing during a
mobile operation as described in Section 1-10.3(2)D.
• Placing and removing Class B construction signs. Performing preliminary Work to
prepare for placing and removing these signs.
• Relocation of Portable Changeable Message Signs within the project limits.
• Installing and removing Barricades, Traffic Safety Drums, Cones, Tubular Markers and
Warning Lights and Flashers to carry out approved Traffic Control Plan(s). Performing
preliminary Work to prepare for installing these devices.
“Construction Signs, Class A” will be measured by the square foot of panel area for each
sign designated on an approved Traffic Control Plan as Class A or for each construction
sign installed as ordered by the Engineer and designated as Class A at the time of the order.
Class A signs may be used in more than one location and will be measured for each new
installation. Class B construction signs will not be measured. Sign posts or supports will not
be measured.
“Sequential Arrow Sign” will be measured by the hour for the time that each sign
is operating as shown on an approved Traffic Control Plan.
“Portable Changeable Message Sign” will be measured by the hour for the time that each
sign is operating as shown on an approved Traffic Control Plan.
“Transportable Attenuator” will be measured per each one time only for each host vehicle
with mounted or attached impact attenuator used on the project. The final pay quantity shall
be the maximum number of transportable attenuators in place at any one time.
“Operation of Transportable Attenuator” will be measured by the hour for each
transportable attenuator manned and operated. Manned and operated shall be when the
transportable attenuator has an operator and is required to move, in operating position, with
the construction operation or when moving the transportable attenuator from one position
to another on the project.

1-10.4(3) Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control

The Contract Provisions may establish the project as lump sum, in accordance with Section
1-10.4(1) and also include one or more of the items included above in Section 1-10.4(2). When
that occurs, the corresponding measurement provision in Section 1-10.4(2) is not deleted and
the Work under that item will be measured as specified.
1-10.4(4) Owner-Provided Resources
The Contract Provisions may call for specific items of labor, materials, or equipment,
noted in Section 1-10 as the responsibility of the Contractor, to be supplied by the Contracting
Agency. When this occurs, there will be no adjustment in measurement of unit quantities.
1-10.5 Payment
1-10.5(1) Lump Sum Bid for Project (No Unit Items)
“Project Temporary Traffic Control”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract payment shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by
the Contractor in performing the Contract Work defined in Section 1-10 except for costs
compensated by Bid Proposal items inserted through Contract Provisions as described
1-10.5(2) Item Bids With Lump Sum for Incidentals
“Traffic Control Supervisor”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract payment shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by the
Contractor in performing the Work defined in Section 1-10.2(1)B.
“Pedestrian Traffic Control”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract payment shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by the
Contractor in performing the Work for pedestrian traffic control defined in Section 1-10.
“Flaggers”, per hour.
The unit Contract price, when applied to the number of units measured for this item in
accordance with Section 1-10.4(2), shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by the
Contractor in performing the Work defined in Section 1-10.3(1)A.
“Other Traffic Control Labor”, per hour.
accordance with Section 1-10.4(2), shall be full compensation for all labor costs incurred by
the Contractor in performing the Work specified for this item in Section 1-10.4(2).
“Construction Signs Class A”, per square foot.
accordance with Section 1-10.4(2), shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by the
Contractor in performing the Work described in Section 1-10.3(3)A. In the event that “Do
Not Pass” and “Pass With Care” signs must be left in place, a change order, as described in
Section 1-04.4, will be required. When the Bid Proposal contains the item “Sign Covering”,
then covering those signs indicated in the Contract will be measured and paid according
to Section 8-21.
“Sequential Arrow Sign”, per hour.
Contractor in performing the Work described in Section 1-10.3(3)B.
“Portable Changeable Message Sign”, per hour.
Contractor in performing the Work for procuring all portable changeable message signs
required for the project and for transporting these signs to and from the project.

“Transportable Attenuator”, per each.

The unit Contract price, when applied to the number of units measured for this item
in accordance with Section 1-10.4(2), shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by
the Contractor in performing the Work described in Section 1-10.3(3)J except for costs
compensated separately under the items “Operation of Transportable Attenuator” and “Repair
Transportable Attenuator”.
“Operation of Transportable Attenuator”, per hour.
Contractor in performing the Work for operating transportable attenuators on the project.
“Repair Transportable Attenuator”, by force account.
All costs of repairing or replacing transportable attenuators that are damaged by the
motoring public while in use as shown on an approved Traffic Control Plan will be paid for
by force account as specified in Section 1-09.6. To provide a common Proposal for all Bidders,
the Contracting Agency has estimated the amount of force account for “Repair Transportable
Attenuator” and has entered the amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total Bid
by the Contractor. Transportable attenuators damaged due to the Contractor’s operation
or damaged in any manner when not in use shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor
at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
“Other Temporary Traffic Control”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract payment shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by
the Contractor in performing the Work defined in Section 1-10, and which costs are not
compensated by one of the above-listed items.
“Portable Temporary Traffic Control Signal”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract payment shall be full compensation for all costs incurred by the
Contractor in performing the Work as described in Section 1-10.3(3)K, including all costs for
traffic control during manual control, adjustment, malfunction, or failure of the portable traffic
control signals and during replacement of failed or malfunctioning signals.
1-10.5(3) Reinstating Unit Items With Lump Sum Traffic Control
The Contract Provisions may establish the project as lump sum, in accordance
with Section 1-10.4(1) and also reinstate the measurement of one or more of the items
described in Section 1-10.4(2). When that occurs, the corresponding payment provision
in Section 1-10.5(2) is not deleted and the Work under that item will be paid as specified.


Division 2 Earthwork
2-01 Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup
2-01.1 Description
The Contractor shall clear, grub, and clean up those areas staked or described in the Special
Provisions. This Work includes protecting from harm all trees, bushes, shrubs, or other objects
selected to remain.
“Clearing” means removing and disposing of all unwanted material from the surface,
such as trees, brush, down timber, or other natural material.
“Grubbing” means removing and disposing of all unwanted vegetative matter from
underground, such as sod, stumps, roots, buried logs, or other debris.
“Roadside cleanup”, whether inside or outside the staked area, means Work done
to give the roadside an attractive, finished appearance.
“Debris” means all unusable natural material produced by clearing, grubbing,
or roadside cleanup.
2-01.2 Disposal of Usable Material and Debris
The Contractor shall meet all requirements of state, county, and municipal regulations
regarding health, safety, and public welfare in the disposal of all usable material and debris.
The Contractor shall dispose of all debris by one or more of the disposal methods
described below.
2-01.2(1) Disposal Method No. 1 – Open Burning
The open burning of residue resulting from land clearing is restricted by Chapter 173‑425
of the Washington Administrative Code (WAC). No commercial open burning shall be
conducted without authorization from the Washington State Department of Ecology or the
appropriate local air pollution control authority. All burning operations shall be strictly in
accordance with these authorizations.
2-01.2(2) Disposal Method No. 2 – Waste Site
Debris shall be hauled to a waste site obtained and provided by the Contractor
in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C.
2-01.2(3) Disposal Method No. 3 – Chipping
Wood chips may be disposed of on-site in accordance with the following:
1. Chips shall be no larger than 6 square inches and no thicker than ½ inch.
2. Chips shall be disposed outside of environmentally sensitive areas, and in areas that
aren’t in conflict with permanent Work.
3. Chips shall not be incorporated into the embankment but may be spread on slopes
where feasible at depths no greater than 2 inches.
4. Chips shall be tractor-walked into the ground.
2-01.3 Construction Requirements
2-01.3(1) Clearing
The Contractor shall:
1. Fell trees only within the area to be cleared.
2. Close-cut parallel to the slope of the ground all stumps to be left in the cleared area
outside the slope stakes.

2-01 Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup
3. Follow these requirements for all stumps that will be buried deeper than 5 feet from
the top, side, or end surface of the embankment or any structure and are in a location
that will not be terraced as described in Section 2-03.3(14):
a. Close-cut stumps under 18 inches in diameter.
b. Trim stumps that exceed 18 inches in diameter to no more than 12 inches above
original ground level.
4. Leave standing any trees or native growth indicated by the Engineer.
5. Trim all trees to be left standing to the height specified by the Engineer, neatly cutting
all limbs close to the tree trunk.
6. Thin clumps of native growth as the Engineer may direct.
7. Protect, by fencing if necessary, all trees or native growth from any damage caused
by construction operations.
2-01.3(2) Grubbing
1. Grub deep enough to remove all stumps, large roots, buried logs, and other
vegetative material.
2. Grub all areas:
a. Indicated by the Engineer or by the Special Provisions.
b. To be excavated, including area staked for slope treatment.
c. Where subdrainage trenches will be dug, unsuitable material removed,
or Structures built.
d. In which hillsides or existing embankments will be terraced as described
e. Upon which embankments will be placed, except stumps may be close-cut
or trimmed as allowed in Section 2-01.3(1) item 3.
A Contract may include grubbing without mentioning clearing or roadside cleanup. In that
case, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of all upturned stumps and roots of windfalls
that lie within the cleared area of the Right of Way, even though they are outside the area
staked for grubbing. Such Work shall be incidental to other Work covered by the Contract.
2-01.3(3) Vacant
2-01.3(4) Roadside Cleanup
Roadside cleanup, as ordered by the Engineer, consists of Work not otherwise provided
for in the Contract. Such Work may include:
1. Removing trees, snags, down timber, upturned stumps, large rocks and boulders,
and other unsightly matter outside the areas staked for clearing or grubbing.
2. Thinning trees or brush.
3. Filling holes, and smoothing and contouring the ground.
4. Shaping the ends of cuts and fills to fit adjacent terrain and to enhance the area’s
appearance.
5. Obliterating abandoned roads and reshaping the areas to blend naturally with
surroundings.
Methods and equipment used in roadside cleanup shall be approved by the Engineer.

Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup 2-01
2-01.4 Measurement
When clearing and grubbing is paid per acre, the following areas will be excluded
from measurement:
1. Any area along an existing Highway that requires no Work.
2. Any gap that requires no Work, provided the gap is at least 50 feet long when measured
parallel to the center line and contains at least 2,500 square feet.
Isolated areas of less than 2,500 square feet that require Work lying between areas excluded
from measurement will be counted as having 2,500 square feet. If these isolated areas occur
intermittently, the final measurement shall not exceed the total area containing the several
isolated areas when measured as continuous.
Clearing and grubbing may be combined in the Proposal. If the Proposal calls for such
combined Work to be measured “per acre”, the measurement methods described above will
apply. If the Proposal designates such combined Work as “lump sum”, the Contracting Agency
will not base payment on any unit of measurement.
2-01.5 Payment
Payment will be made for the following Bid items when they are included in the Proposal:
“Clearing and Grubbing”, per acre or lump sum.
The unit Contract price per acre or lump sum for “Clearing and Grubbing” shall be full pay
for all Work described in this section except “Roadside Cleanup”.
“Roadside Cleanup”, by force account as provided in Section 1-09.6.
To provide a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered
an amount in the Proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total Bid.

2-02 Removal of Structures and Obstructions

2-02.1 Description
The Work described in this section includes removing and disposing of, or salvaging,
materials named in the Special Provisions or identified by the Engineer. The Work also
includes the backfilling of trenches, holes, or pits that result from such removal.
2-02.2 Vacant
With certain exceptions, the Contractor shall raze, remove, and dispose of all buildings
and foundations, Structures, fences, and other obstructions that lie wholly or partially within
the Right of Way. The exceptions are utility-owned equipment and any other items the
Contracting Agency may direct the Contractor to leave intact.
When salvageable material is to remain Contracting Agency property, the Special
Provisions will identify the material and describe how the Contractor shall remove it and
where it will be stored.
Any material not named in the Special Provisions as Contracting Agency property will
become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project.
The Contractor may dispose of waste material in Contracting Agency-owned sites if the
Special Provisions or the Engineer permits it. Otherwise, the Contractor shall arrange to
dispose of waste at no expense to the Contracting Agency and the disposal shall meet the
requirements of Section 2-03.3(7)C.
2-02.3(1) Removal of Foundations
When removing foundations the Contractor shall:
1. Remove foundations to a depth of at least 5 feet below finished ground elevation
or Subgrade elevation, whichever is lower.
2. Break up basement floors to promote drainage.
3. Fill basements or other cavities left by the removal of Structures. The fill shall match
the level of surrounding ground. Fill within the slopes of the Roadbed shall be
compacted to meet the requirements of Section 2-03.3(14)C, Method B.
2-02.3(2) Removal of Bridges, Box Culverts, and Other Drainage Structures
When salvaging any steel or wooden bridge that will remain Contracting Agency property,
the Contractor shall prevent unnecessary damage to the material. Steel members shall be
match-marked.
Unless otherwise directed, the Contractor shall remove foundations of existing Structures
to a point 2 feet below: the finished ground elevation, the adjacent ground elevation, or the
natural stream bottom. If a foundation lies wholly or partially on the site of a new Structure,
it shall be removed to a level that accommodates building the new Structure.
Any blasting shall be subject to the Engineer’s approval. The Contractor must complete
all blasting before the placement of new Work.
2-02.3(2)A Bridge and Structure Removal
2-02.3(2)A1 Bridge Demolition Plan Submittal
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing consisting of a bridge demolition
plan, showing the method of removing the existing bridge(s), or portions of bridges,
as specified.
The bridge demolition plan shall show all equipment, sequence of operations, and details
required to complete the work, including containment, collection, and disposal of all debris.
The plan shall include a crane foundation stability analysis and crane load calculations for the
work. The plan shall detail the containment, collection, and disposal of all debris. The plan
shall show all stages of demolition.

Removal of Structures and Obstructions 2-02
When the bridge removal work includes removal of a truss, and when the Contractor’s
removal method involves use of a crane or cranes to pick, lift, and remove the truss, the
Contractor shall confirm the truss dead load weight prior to beginning the truss removal
operation. The operation of confirming the truss dead load shall be performed at both ends of
the truss, and shall ensure that the truss is broken free of its support bearings. The Contractor’s
method of confirming the truss dead load, whether by hydraulic jacks or other means, shall
be included in the Contractor’s bridge demolition plan submittal.
When the bridge removal work involves removing portions of existing concrete without
replacement, the methods and tools used to achieve the smooth surface and profile specified in
Section 2-02.3(2)A2 shall be included in the Contractor’s bridge demolition plan submittal.
2-02.3(2)A2 Removing Portions of Existing Concrete
Care shall be taken in removing concrete to prevent overbreakage or damage to portions
of the existing Structure which are to remain. Before concrete removal begins, a saw cut shall
be made into the surface of the concrete at the perimeter of the removal limits. The saw cut
shall be ¾-inch deep when the steel reinforcement is to remain, and may be deeper when the
steel reinforcement is removed with the concrete.
Concrete shall be completely removed (exposing the deformed surface of the bar) from
existing steel reinforcing bars which extend from the existing members and are specified
to remain. Steel reinforcing bars that are not designated to remain shall be cut a minimum
of 1-inch behind the final surface. The void left by removal of the steel reinforcing bar shall
be filled with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2). The mortar shall match the color of
the existing concrete surface as nearly as practicable.
The Contractor shall roughen, clean, and saturate existing concrete surfaces, against which
fresh concrete will be placed, in accordance with Section 6-02.3(12)B. When a portion of
existing concrete is to be removed without replacement, concrete shall be removed to a clean
line with a smooth surface of less than 1/16 inch profile.
2-02.3(2)A3 Use of Explosives for Bridge Demolition
Explosives shall not be used for bridge demolition, except as specifically allowed by the
Special Provisions.
2-02.3(3) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters
In removing pavement, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters, the Contractor shall:
1. Haul broken-up pieces into the Roadway embankment or to some off-project site.
2. Material that is to be incorporated into the embankment shall be broken into pieces not
exceeding 18 inches in any dimension, and no part of any piece shall be within 3 feet
of the top, side, or end surface of the embankment or any Structure.
3. Make a vertical full depth saw cut between any existing pavement, sidewalk, curb, or
gutter that is to remain and the portion to be removed. For portland cement concrete
pavement removal, a second vertical full depth relief saw cut offset 12 to 18 inches
from and parallel to the initial saw cut is also required, unless the Engineer approves
otherwise. For removal of bituminous pavement, asphalt planing equipment may be
used in lieu of sawcutting provided that a clean vertical edge remains.
4. Replace at no expense to the Contracting Agency any existing pavement designated
to remain that is damaged during the removal of other pavement.
2-02.4 Vacant

2-02.5 Payment
Payment shall be made for the following Bid item when it is included in the Proposal:
“Removal of Structures and Obstructions”, lump sum.
If pavements, sidewalks, curbs, or gutters lie within an excavation area, their removal will
be paid for as part of the quantity removed in excavation.
“Removing Existing Bridge___”, lump sum.
“Removing Existing Structure___”, lump sum.
“Removing Portion of Existing Bridge___”, lump sum.
“Removing Portion of Existing Structure___”, lump sum.

Roadway Excavation and Embankment 2-03
2-03 Roadway Excavation and Embankment

2-03.1 Description
The Work described in this section, regardless of the nature or type of the materials
encountered, includes excavating and grading the Roadway, excavating in borrow pits,
excavating below grade, excavating channels and ditches, removing slide material, and
disposing of all excavated material. These activities may be performed in making cuts,
embankments, slopes, Roadway ditches, approaches, parking areas, Highway-driveway
intersections, and in completing related Work. The Work includes the removal of pavement,
sidewalks, curbs and gutters as described in Section 2-02 when these items lie within an
excavation area.
The Work excludes these items if they are designated as pay items in the Contract:
1. Haul.
2. Excavation for Structures and ditches.
3. Removal of unsuitable materials.
The Plans may divide the project into separate areas (Roadway Excavation, Area A,
Roadway Excavation, Area B, etc.). Such division does not imply any classification
of materials in the areas. The boundaries of the areas shall not be changed regardless
of how similar or dissimilar the materials are from one area to another.
All Work described here must reasonably conform to the alignment, grade, and
cross‑sections shown in the Plans or established by the Engineer.
2-03.2 Vacant
2-03.3(1) Widening of Cuts
If routine cuts do not supply enough material to form the embankment, the Contractor shall
obtain more material from areas inside or outside the Right of Way and/or from widening one
or both sides of existing cuts as determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall dress the
sides of the cuts to any slopes the Engineer may require. If the Contractor has dressed a cut
before the Engineer determines to widen it, the Contracting Agency will pay for the resloping
as provided in Section 1-04.4. In addition, material obtained from areas beyond the cuts shown
in the Plans that result in additional haul will be paid by the Contracting Agency as provided
in Section 1-04.4.
2-03.3(2) Rock Cuts
1. Preserving Rock Below Subgrade – The Contractor shall take care not to break down,
loosen, or damage the rock under the Subgrade line, except as provided by Section
2-03.3(3). Normally cuts will be made from the top, lift by lift, to protect the rock bench
that will remain. The Contractor shall be responsible for methods used and for any
damage caused to the Roadbed, regardless of any previous approvals by the Engineer.
2. Scaling and Dressing – To leave rock cuts in a safe, stable condition, the Contractor
shall scale and dress them, removing all loose fragments and rocks not firmly fastened
to the rock slope. The Contractor shall also remove any overhanging rock the Engineer
sees as a hazard to Roadway users.
If the Engineer requires it, the Contractor shall remove loose fragments and rocks lying
outside the slope stakes. Payment for such extra Work shall be by force account as
provided in Section 1-09.6. The Contracting Agency will pay for loading and hauling
these materials at the unit Contract prices that apply or as provided in Section 1-04.4.
3. Drilling and Blasting – Not less than 2 weeks prior to commencing drilling and
blasting operations or at any time the Contractor proposes to change the drilling and
blasting methods, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting
of a blasting plan. The blasting plan shall contain the full details of the drilling and

blasting patterns and controls the Contractor proposes to use for both the controlled and
production blasting. The blasting plan submittal is required for all blasting operations
and shall contain at least the following information:
a. Station limits of proposed shot.
b. Plan and section views of proposed drill pattern including free face, burden, blast
hole spacing, blast hole diameter, blast hole angles, lift height, and subdrill depth.
c. Loading diagram showing type and amount of explosives, primers, initiators, and
location and depth of stemming.
d. Initiation sequence of blast holes including delay times and delay system.
e. Manufacturer’s data sheets for all explosives, primers, and initiators to be employed.
Review of the blasting plan by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility for the accuracy and adequacy of the plan when implemented in the field.
4. Controlled Blasting – When blasting to establish slopes 0.5:1 or steeper, and more than
10 feet high, the Contractor shall use controlled blasting. The Engineer may require the
Contractor to use controlled blasting to form the faces of other slopes, even if the slopes
could be formed by nonblasting methods.
Controlled blasting refers to the controlled use of explosives and blasting accessories
in carefully spaced and aligned drill holes to provide a free surface or shear plane in
the rock along the specified backslope. Controlled blasting techniques covered by
this Specification include presplitting and cushion blasting.
In addition to the blasting plan submittal, when using controlled blasting the
Contractor shall:
a. Prior to commencing full-scale blasting operations, the Contractor shall demonstrate
the adequacy of the proposed blast plan by drilling, blasting, and excavating short
test sections, up to 100 feet in length, to determine which combination of method,
hole spacing, and charge works best. When field conditions warrant, the Contractor
may be ordered to use test section lengths less than 100 feet.
Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall begin the tests
with the controlled blast holes spaced 30 inches apart, then adjust if needed, until
the Engineer accepts the spacing to be used for full-scale blasting operations.
b. The Contractor shall completely remove all overburden, soil, and loose or
decomposed rock along the top of the excavation for a distance of at least 30 feet
beyond the end of the production hole drilling limits, or to the end of the cut, before
drilling the presplitting holes.
c. The controlled blast holes shall be not less than 2½ inches nor more than 3 inches
in diameter.
d. The Contractor shall control drilling operations by the use of the proper equipment
and technique to ensure that no hole deviates from the plane of the planned slope by
more than 9 inches either parallel or normal to the slope. Drill holes exceeding these
limits will not be paid for unless satisfactory slopes are being obtained.
e. Controlled blast holes shall extend a minimum of 30 feet beyond the limits of the
production holes to be detonated, or to the end of the cut as applicable.
f. The length of controlled blast holes for any individual lift shall not exceed 20 feet
unless the Contractor can demonstrate to the Engineer the ability to stay within
the above tolerances and produce a uniform slope. If greater than 5 percent of
the presplit holes are misaligned in any one lift, the Contractor shall reduce the
height of the lifts until the 9-inch alignment tolerance is met. Upon satisfactory
demonstration, the length of holes may be increased to a maximum of 60 feet with
written acceptance of the Engineer.

g. When the cut height requires more than one lift, a maximum 2-foot offset between
lifts will be permitted to allow for drill equipment clearances. The Contractor shall
begin the controlled blast hole drilling at a point that will allow for necessary offsets
and shall adjust, at the start of lower lifts, to compensate for any drift that may have
occurred in the upper lifts.
h. Before placing charges, the Contractor shall determine that the hole is free of
obstructions for its entire depth. All necessary precautions shall be exercised so
that the placing of the charges will not cause caving of material from the walls
of the holes.
i. The maximum diameter of explosives used in presplit holes shall not be greater than
½ the diameter of the presplit hole.
j. Only standard explosives manufactured especially for controlled blasting shall
be used in controlled blast holes, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. Bulk
ammonium nitrate and fuel oil (ANFO) shall not be loaded in the presplit holes.
k. If fractional portions of standard explosive cartridges are used, they shall be firmly
affixed to the detonating cord in a manner that the cartridges will not slip down the
detonating cord nor bridge across the hole. Spacing of fractional cartridges along the
length of the detonating cord shall not exceed 30 inches center to center and shall be
adjusted to give the desired results.
l. Continuous column cartridge type of explosives used with detonating cord shall
be assembled and affixed to the detonating cord in accordance with the explosive
manufacturer’s instructions, a copy of which shall be submitted as a Type 1
Working Drawing.
m. The bottom charge of a presplit hole may be larger than the line charges but shall
not be large enough to cause overbreak. The top charge of the presplitting hole
shall be placed far enough below the collar, and reduced sufficiently, to avoid
overbreaking and heaving.
n. The upper portion of all presplit holes, from the top most charge to the hole collar,
shall be stemmed. Stemming materials shall be sand or other dry angular material,
all of which passes a ⅜-inch sieve.
o. If presplitting is specified, the detonation of these holes shall be fired first.
p. If cushion blasting is specified, the detonation of these holes shall be fired last on
an instantaneous delay after all other blasting has taken place in the excavation.
q. Production blast holes shall not be drilled closer than 6 feet to the controlled blast
line, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. The bottom of the production holes
shall not be lower than the bottom of the controlled blast holes. Production holes
shall not exceed 6 inches in diameter, unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer.
Detonation of production holes shall be on a delay sequence toward a free face.
r. The use of horizontal blast holes for either production or controlled blasting
is prohibited.
2-03.3(3) Excavation Below Subgrade
Rock Excavation – When the Contractor finds rock or other hard material at the Subgrade
elevation, it shall be excavated the full width of the Roadbed to at least 6 inches below
Subgrade, then backfilled with rock fragments, gravel, or other free-draining material not more
than 4 inches in diameter.
If the Contractor uses a Subgrade trimmer, the backfill shall be rock, gravel, or other
free-draining material not more than 2 inches in diameter. The Contractor shall save the finer
free-draining material from excavations or borrow pits to use in backfilling the top 6 inches of
the Subgrade. All such material shall be approved by the Engineer.

Sub excavation – At any time, the Engineer may order excavation below Subgrade to
remove soft and uncompactible material. The replacement material shall be free-draining and
granular, or other materials as determined by the Engineer.
Draining Rock Pockets – If blasting below Subgrade leaves a rock pocket that will not
drain, the Contractor shall dig a trench from the pocket bottom to the roadside ditch, then
backfill both the pocket and the trench with rock fragments, gravel, or other material approved
by the Engineer, at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
Compaction – If the density of the natural earth under any area of the Roadway is less
than that required in Section 2-03.3(14)C, Method B, the Engineer may order the Contractor
to perform any or all of the following:
1. Scarify the earth to a depth of 6 inches.
2. Aerate or water.
3. Compact the scarified area to the required density.
4. Excavate to a specific depth.
5. Backfill the excavated area in layers, using the previously excavated material or
other material.
6. Compact each layer to meet the compaction requirements for embankments.
2-03.3(4) Sluicing
The Contractor shall not excavate by sluicing unless the Special Provisions specifically
call for it.
2-03.3(5) Slope Treatment
The tops of all Roadway cut slopes, except solid rock cuts, shall be rounded in accordance
with the Standard Plans. Unless otherwise noted in the Plans or Special Provisions, Class A
slope treatment shall be utilized.
If a layer of earth covers a rock cut, the slope shall be rounded above the rock as if it were
an earth slope.
When the Contractor removes stumps or any embedded material from the rounded area,
the void shall be backfilled and stabilized to prevent erosion.
All Work required to complete slope treatment, including excavation, haul, and slope
rounding, shall be included in the unit Bid price for Roadway excavation.
2-03.3(6) Deposit of Rock for the Contracting Agency’s Use
At the Engineer’s direction, the Contractor shall deposit excavated rock at the roadside
or elsewhere. If this requires the Contractor to use material that would otherwise have gone
into an embankment, the Contracting Agency will pay for the extra cubic yards of excavation
needed to complete the embankment. Any such rock deposit shall be Contracting Agency
property. The Contractor shall be responsible for safekeeping the deposit until the Contracting
Agency has removed it or until the Contract is completed.
2-03.3(7) Disposal of Surplus Material
2-03.3(7)A General
The Contractor shall haul all excavation to the nearest embankment unless the Engineer
declares the hauling distance to be too great. If excavation yields more material than needed
for nearby embankments, the Contractor shall dispose of the excess in keeping with the
Special Provisions or as the Engineer directs.
2-03.3(7)B Haul
When the Contract includes a payment item for haul, the Contracting Agency will pay as
follows for hauling excess excavation to a disposal site:

1. If the Contracting Agency provides a site, but the Contractor chooses to haul elsewhere,
the Contracting Agency will pay for the actual distance up to but not exceeding the
distance that would have been necessary using the Contracting Agency site.
2. If the Contracting Agency does not provide a site, the Contracting Agency will pay for
the actual distance up to but not exceeding the distance necessary to haul to a site 1 mile
from the project limits.
2-03.3(7)C Contractor-Provided Disposal Site
If the Contracting Agency provides no waste site, but requires disposal of excess
excavation or other materials, the Contractor shall arrange for disposal at no expense to the
Contracting Agency, except as provided in Section 2-03.3(7)B, item 2.
The Contractor shall acquire all permits and approvals required for the use of the disposal
sites before any waste is hauled off the project. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working
Drawing consisting of copies of the permits and approvals for any disposal sites to be used.
The cost of any such permits and approvals shall be included in the Bid prices for other Work.
Disposal of excess material within a wetland area will not be allowed without a Section
404 permit issued by the U.S. Corps of Engineers and approval by the local agency with
jurisdiction over the wetlands.
The Contractor shall protect, indemnify, and save harmless the Contracting Agency from
any damages that may arise from the Contractor’s activities in making these arrangements.
Such indemnity shall be in accordance with RCW 4.24.115 as amended by CH. 305,
Laws of 1986. Any action required to satisfy any permit and/or any approval requirements
in a Contractor-provided disposal site shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional
expense to the Contracting Agency.
Reclamation of a Contractor-supplied waste site must conform to the requirements
of Section 3-03.
2-03.3(8) Wasting Material
If, against the Engineer’s orders, the Contractor wastes material needed for the
embankment, it shall be replaced at no expense to the Contracting Agency with material the
Engineer approves.
2-03.3(9) Roadway Ditches
At each transition from cut to fill, the Contractor shall divert any Roadway ditch away
from the embankment in natural ground. Ditches shall never permit water to flow into or
upon embankment material.
2-03.3(10) Selected Material
When the Contract or the Engineer calls for it, selected material shall be used for finishing
the top part of the Subgrade, for structural or other backfill, or for other purposes. Unless the
Special Provisions specify otherwise, the Engineer may identify as “selected” any material
excavated within the right-of-way, including the excavation of local borrow.
Direct Hauling – If it is practical, the Contractor shall haul selected material immediately
from excavation to its final place on the Roadbed. The Contracting Agency will pay for such
Work at the unit Contract prices for excavating, hauling, watering, and compacting.
Delayed Excavation – If it is impractical to haul selected material to its final place at once,
the Contractor shall delay excavation until the placement will be workable. The Contracting
Agency will not pay extra for delayed excavation.
Stockpiling – The Engineer may allow the Contractor to stockpile selected materials if
delaying the excavation will hamper grading or force impractical movements of equipment.
In this case, the Engineer will direct where and when the Contractor shall excavate, stockpile,
haul, and place the selected materials.

Sections 2-03.4 and 2-03.5 describe how the Contracting Agency will measure and pay for
excavating and hauling these stockpiled selected materials. The neat line volume of material
removed will provide the basis for measuring material taken from the stockpile.
2-03.3(11) Slides
If a slide occurs on a finished slope before final acceptance of the Work, the Contractor
shall remove or replace the slide material. The Contractor shall also refinish the slope to the
condition and with the materials required by the Engineer.
The Contracting Agency will pay for the excavation at the unit Contract price and for
resloping on a force account basis. The Engineer may authorize payment for the excavation
by agreed price or force account if:
1. The slide material cannot be measured accurately, or
2. Excavation of slide material requires equipment not available on the project.
If the Contractor undercuts or destroys a slope, or has failed to implement erosion
control devices as shown in the Contract or in the TESC plan, it shall be resloped to
the original alignment or to a new one established by the Engineer at no expense to the
Contracting Agency.
2-03.3(12) Overbreak
Overbreak includes that part of any material excavated, displaced, or loosened outside
the staked or reestablished slope or grade. Such material is considered overbreak whether
its movement resulted from blasting, from the character of the material itself, or from any
other cause. Overbreak, however, does not include material from slides as described in
Section 2-03.3(11).
If the Engineer does not approve use of the overbreak, the Contractor shall remove, haul,
and dispose of it at no expense to the Contracting Agency. In this case, the Contractor shall
follow the procedure for handling surplus described in Section 2-03.3(7).
If the Engineer approves, the Contractor may use overbreak:
1. To complete an embankment when the excavated material unexpectedly falls short
of the amount required. The Contracting Agency will pay the Roadway excavation
Contract price for the volume of material the overbreak replaces, and will pay the
Contract price for haul. However, no payment will be made if overbreak is used
when other material is available within the neat lines of the Roadway prism.
2. To replace borrow excavation originally planned for an embankment. The Contracting
Agency will pay for overbreak used this way at the unit Contract price for Roadway
or borrow excavation, whichever costs less. The Engineer will include haul to be paid
as in the original Proposal in comparing the costs under the two payment methods.
2-03.3(13) Borrow
Borrow is the excavation of material outside the Roadway prism or outside the limits of
any other excavation area required by the Contract. Before any borrow site can be used, it
must be measured and approved by the Engineer. Any material excavated from a borrow site
before the site is measured will not be paid for. The widening of Roadway cuts and ditches
will be considered Roadway excavation, not borrow.
If the Contract documents designate borrow sources, the Contractor may utilize those
sources or may obtain borrow from other sites. If borrow is obtained from a Contractor-
provided site, there will be no additional cost to the Contracting Agency beyond the Contract
unit price for the excavated borrow material. There will be no payment for aeration of the
borrowed material from a Contractor-provided site, even if the Contract contains an item for
aeration and even if the Contract documents designate borrow sources.
If neither the Plans nor the Special Provisions name a source for borrow, the Contractor
shall provide a source at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
The Contractor shall reclaim all borrow sites, Contracting Agency-owned, Contracting
Agency-supplied, or obtained by the Contractor, in keeping with Section 3-03.
2-03.3(14) Embankment Construction

The Contracting Agency classifies embankment construction as:
1. Rock Embankment – In which the material in all or any part of an embankment
contains 25 percent or more, by volume, gravel or stone 4 inches or more in diameter.
Section 2-03.3(14)A.
2. Earth Embankment – Made of any material other than that used in rock embankment.
Section 2-03.3(14)B.
Unstable Base – If the Engineer believes the natural earth base will impair an embankment
or make it unstable, the Contractor shall stabilize or remove and dispose of the base material
in keeping with this section or Section 2-03.3(14)E.
Hillside Terraces – The Contractor shall terrace the original ground or embankment when
the slope of the surface is 2H:1V or steeper unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The
face of each terrace shall be a minimum of 1 foot and a maximum of 5 feet in height and
shall be vertical or near vertical as required to remain stable during material placement and
compaction. The bench of the terrace shall slope outward to drain and shall not be inclined
steeper than 0.05 foot per foot. Terraces damaged during work shall be reestablished. The
Engineer may order the Contractor to place gravel backfill, pipe drains or both to drain
any seepage.
All costs for building terraces shall be included in the prices for other Work.
Soft Base – On wet or swampy ground, the Contractor shall haul and spread embankment
material by methods that will disturb the base as little as possible. If the Engineer approves,
the Contractor may place the lower part of the fill by dumping and spreading successive loads
to form a uniform layer just thick enough to support equipment used to place and compact
upper layers.
Normally the Contractor shall not increase the planned depth of the embankment over a
soft base merely to permit the use of heavier equipment. But if the Contractor proves that the
planned depth will not support light hauling vehicles, the Engineer may approve a deeper
fill. The Contractor shall not claim extra pay if these restrictions require the use of lighter
equipment or different construction methods than originally planned for use on the soft base.
2-03.3(14)A Rock Embankment Construction
The Contractor shall build rock embankments in horizontal layers. No layer shall be deeper
than 18 inches unless the rocks in the fill material average more than 18 inches in diameter.
The Contractor shall separate and distribute the larger pieces of rock and fill the spaces
between them with smaller rocks and earth. With the Engineer’s approval, the Contractor may
dispose of rocks larger than the average size instead of placing them in the embankment.
Compacting – The Contractor shall use a 50-ton compression roller or a vibratory roller
having a dynamic force of at least 40,000 pounds impact per vibration and at least 1,000
vibrations per minute. In either case, the roller shall make one full coverage for each 6 inches,
or any fraction of 6 inches, of lift depth.
When lift depth is 18 inches or less, the Contractor may use a 10-ton compression roller or
a vibratory roller having a dynamic force of at least 30,000-pounds impact per vibration and at
least 1,000 vibrations per minute. In either case, the roller shall make four full coverages for
each 6 inches, or any fraction of 6 inches, of lift depth.
Rollers must exert reasonably even pressure over the area covered. The Contractor shall
limit the speed of compression rollers to no more than 4 mph, and the speed of vibratory
rollers to no more than 1½ mph.
If possible, the Contractor shall compact the material even further by routing empty and
loaded hauling equipment evenly over the entire width of the embankment.
When the Engineer believes rolling to be physically impractical, rolling may be omitted
on part or all of a layer.

Should excessive moisture threaten the stability of the embankment the Engineer may
order the Contractor to alter the operation. This may include alternating layers of wet and dry
materials, drying materials before placing, or halting Work in the problem areas. In this case
the Contracting Agency will not increase payment, but will pay the unit Contract prices for
the pay items that apply.
Top Layer – The Contractor shall build each rock embankment up to 6 inches below
Subgrade. The top 6-inch layer of embankment shall be of rock, gravel, or other free-draining
material that does not exceed 4 inches in diameter. When the Plans require use of a Subgrade
trimmer, these materials in the top layer may not exceed 2 inches in diameter.
When practical, and as approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall save the finer free-
draining material from excavations or borrow pits for use in topping rock fills. If selected
materials suitable for topping are available, the Contracting Agency will pay for them as
described in Section 2-03.3(10). If such materials are not available on site, the Contracting
Agency will pay for imported materials by including them in the unit Contract price for
gravel borrow or borrow excavation, each including haul. If the Proposal does not include
these items, the Contracting Agency will pay as provided in Section 1-04.4.
2-03.3(14)B Earth Embankment Construction
The Contractor shall place earth embankments in horizontal layers of uniform thickness.
These layers shall run full width from the top to the bottom of the embankment. Slopes shall
be compacted to the required density as part of embankment compaction.
During grading operations, the Contractor shall shape the surfaces of embankments and
excavations to uniform cross-sections and eliminate all ruts and low places that could hold
water. The Contractor shall raise the center of an embankment above the sides. When the
surface of an embankment intersects a side hill, the surface shall be sloped away at a rate
not to exceed 20:1.
2-03.3(14)C Compacting Earth Embankments
This section describes three methods (A, B, and C) for building earth embankments.
The Contractor shall use Method B unless the Special Provisions require another method.
Method A – Each embankment shall be made of layers no more than 2 feet thick. The
Contractor shall compact each layer by routing loaded haul equipment over its entire width.
If the Engineer approves, the Contractor may use end dumping to begin placing a side hill
fill too narrow for hauling equipment. When the fill is wide enough, the remaining layers
shall be compacted by the loaded hauling equipment.
Method B – The top 2 feet of each embankment shall be compacted to 95 percent
of the maximum density as determined by the compaction control tests described in
Section 2-03.3(14)D. All material below the 2-foot level shall be compacted to 90 percent
of the same maximum density.
In the top 2 feet, horizontal layers shall not exceed 4 inches in depth before compaction.
No layer below the top 2 feet shall exceed 8 inches in depth before compaction.
The Contractor shall use compacting equipment approved by the Engineer.
Method C – Each layer of the entire embankment shall be compacted to 95 percent
of the maximum density as determined by the compaction control tests described in
Section 2-03.3(14)D.
In the top 2 feet, horizontal layers shall not exceed 4 inches in depth before compaction.
No layer below the top 2 feet shall exceed 8 inches in depth before compaction.
The Contractor shall use compacting equipment approved by the Engineer.
Under Methods B or C, the Engineer may permit the Contractor to increase layer
thickness up to 18 inches before compaction, provided:
1. The layer is more than 2 feet below the top of the embankment,
2. An approved vibratory roller is used, and
3. The required density is obtained throughout the full depth and width of each layer.
Whatever the method used, any embankment inaccessible to large compacting equipment
shall be compacted with small mechanical or vibratory compactors.
Moisture Content – The Contractor shall adjust moisture content during compaction
to produce a firm, stable and unyielding embankment. The embankment shall be free from
pumping and rutting due to excessive moisture and is the Contractor’s responsibility to
manage and adjust as necessary.
The Contracting Agency will consider all costs for drying embankment material to be
incidental to other Work, including excessive moisture due to inclement weather. If, however,
the Contract includes an aeration item, the Contracting Agency will pay for such Work as
specified in Sections 2-03.4 and 2-03.5.
The Contractor shall repair, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, any partial or
complete embankment that loses stability because of continued hauling across it. Evidence of
lost stability includes pumping, rutting or lateral displacement of embankment. The Contractor
shall also alter hauling equipment or procedures to prevent further damage.
2-03.3(14)D Compaction and Moisture Control Tests
Maximum density and optimum moisture content shall be determined by one of the
following methods:
1. Materials with less than 30 percent by weight retained on the No. 4 sieve shall be
determined using FOP for AASHTO T 99 Method A.
2. Materials with 30 percent or more by weight retained on the No. 4 sieve and less than
30 percent retained on the ¾-inch sieve shall be determined by WSDOT T 606 or FOP
for AASHTO T 180 Method D. The determination of which test procedure to use will
be made solely by the Contracting Agency.
3. Materials with 30 percent or more retained on the ¾-inch sieve shall be determined by
WSDOT T 606.
In place density will be determined using Test Methods FOP for AASHTO T 310 and
WSDOT SOP 615.
2-03.3(14)E Unsuitable Foundation Excavation
When the Contract or the Engineer requires it, the Contractor shall excavate unstable
natural ground before building any embankment over it. This unstable material may include
peat, muck, swampland, buried logs and stumps, or other material not fit for an embankment
base. The Contractor shall excavate such material to the boundaries set by the Engineer.
The Work will not be considered unsuitable foundation excavation if the materials:
1. Came from the Roadway cut, ditch, or channel-change prisms.
2. Resulted from Structure excavation Class A or B.
3. Are covered in Section 2-03.3(3).
If the Contract provides no Bid item for unsuitable foundation excavation, the Contracting
Agency will pay as provided in Section 1-04.4.
2-03.3(14)F Displacement of Unsuitable Foundation Materials
If the Contract requires it, the Contractor shall displace or remove any overburden of peat,
muck, or other unstable material to permit placing the embankment on underlying firm ground.
The Engineer will determine the elevation at which the ground is firm enough to support
the embankment.
To displace such material, the Contractor shall use explosives or any other method the
Engineer requires. If this Work upheaves overburden material outside the slopes of the new
fill, the Contractor shall level the material to make it presentable.
The Contracting Agency will pay for the Work described in this section by force account.
Any other costs related to the Work shall be incidental to building the embankment and shall
be included in the unit Contract prices for the Work items that apply.

2-03.3(14)G Backfilling
When water fills an area after the removal of soft or unstable materials, the Contractor
shall, if possible, drain the site so that any backfill may be compacted. If drainage is not
possible, the Contractor shall use granular material for backfilling in water, including areas
where blasting has displaced the soft material. The Special Provisions may require other
backfilling methods.
The costs of pumping or digging temporary drainage ditches shall be incidental to and
included in other items of Work that apply.
2-03.3(14)H Prefabricated Vertical Drains
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor, equipment and materials, and perform
all operations necessary for the installation of prefabricated vertical drains in accordance
with the details shown in the Plans and with the requirements of these Specifications.
The prefabricated drain shall consist of a continuous plastic drainage core wrapped in
a nonwoven geotextile material as specified in the Contract.
The drains shall be free of defects, rips, holes, or flaws. During shipment and storage,
the drain shall be wrapped in a heavy-duty protective covering. The storage area shall
protect the drain material from sunlight, mud, dirt, dust, debris, and detrimental substances.
Manufacturer certification shall be provided for all drain materials delivered to the project.
Vertical drains shall be staked by the Contractor and constructed prior to
embankment construction.
Prior to installation of vertical drains, a sand drainage blanket shall be placed on
the ground surface for use as a working platform. This platform shall have a minimum
depth of 2 feet and shall consist of uncompacted material meeting the requirements of
Section 9-03.13(1).
Vertical drains shall be installed with equipment that will cause a minimum of subsoil
disturbance. A mandrel or sleeve shall be advanced through the subsoil using vibratory,
constant load, or constant rate of advance methods. The mandrel shall have a maximum
cross‑sectional area of 14 square inches, shall protect the prefabricated drain material from
tears, cuts, and abrasions during installation, and shall be provided with an “anchor” plate
or rod. The “anchor” plate or rod shall provide sufficient strength to prevent the soil from
entering the bottom during installation and shall anchor the bottom of the drain at the required
depth when the mandrel is removed. Use of falling weight impact hammers or jetting will not
be allowed within the compressible subsoil to be drained.
The prefabricated drains shall be installed vertically from the working surface to the
required elevations and in a sequence that will not require equipment to travel over previously
installed drains. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a suitable means of verifying
the plumbness of the equipment and determining the depth of the drain at any time. The
equipment shall not deviate more than 0.25 inches per foot from vertical.
Splices or connections in the prefabricated drain material shall be done in a professional
manner to ensure continuity of the wick material. The prefabricated drain shall be cut to leave
at least 6 inches protruding above the working platform at each drain location.
Where obstructions are encountered which cannot be penetrated the Contractor shall
abandon the hole. A maximum of two attempts shall be made to install a new drain within
18 inches of the obstructed hole. Drains that otherwise deviate from the Plan location by
more than 6 inches, or that are damaged or improperly installed, will be rejected.
Installation of the drains should consider and be coordinated with the geotechnical
instrumentation shown in the Plans. Special care shall be taken when installing drains near
instrumentation already in place. Replacement of instrumentation damaged by the Contractor
will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

The Contractor shall demonstrate that the equipment, method, and materials produce
a satisfactory installation in accordance with these Specifications. For this purpose, the
Contractor shall be required to install trial drains at different locations within the Work area.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of details of the
sequence and method of installation. The submittal shall, at a minimum, contain the
dimensions and length of mandrel, a detailed description of the proposed method(s) for
overcoming obstructions, and the proposed method(s) for splicing drains.
Approval by the Engineer will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to install
prefabricated vertical drains in accordance with the Plans, Special Provisions, and these
Specifications. If, at any time, the Engineer considers the method of installation does not
produce a satisfactory drain, the Contractor shall alter the method and equipment as necessary.
2-03.3(14)I Embankments at Bridge and Trestle Ends
This Work consists of filling around the ends of trestles and bridges, the area defined in
Section 1-01.3. The Contractor shall begin and complete this Work as soon as possible after
each bridge is completed or when the Engineer requires.
The Contractor shall select fill material from the excavation sources elsewhere on the
project. Bridge Approach Embankments shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of the
maximum density as determined by the tests described in Section 2-03.3(14)D. In any
embankment area where piles will be installed, the Contractor shall remove all solid material,
rocks, broken concrete, etc., larger than 3 inches across that would interfere with pile driving.
To prevent the bridge from being distorted or displaced, the Contractor shall place backfill
evenly around all sides and parts of the Structure. The Contractor shall not backfill any
abutment prior to placing the Superstructure. After the Superstructure is in place, use of small
compactors may be required to compact the backfill around the Structure. Embankments and
backfill behind the abutments shall be brought up in layers and compacted concurrently. The
difference in backfill height against each abutment shall not exceed 2 feet unless otherwise
allowed by the Engineer.
The Contractor may request to place the abutment backfill (either full or partial height)
prior to placement of the Superstructure by submitting Type 2E Working Drawings consisting
of calculations confirming that the abutment is stable, both for overturning and sliding,
without the Superstructure in place. The stability calculations shall assume a loading of 30 lbs/
ft3 equivalent fluid pressure and include at least a 2-foot surcharge for the backfill placement
equipment. If the abutment backfill is allowed to be placed prior to completion of the
Superstructure, the Contractor shall bear any added cost that results from the change.
The Contractor shall build the embankment under the bridge to the dimensions shown in
the Standard Plans or detailed in the Plans.
Cost related to all Work described in this section shall be incidental to other Work and
included in the unit Contract prices that apply.
2-03.3(14)J Gravel Borrow Including Haul
When required by the Plans or the Engineer, the Contractor shall use gravel borrow
meeting the requirements of Section 9-03.14(1) to:
1. Build structural embankments.
2. Backfill excavation of unsuitable foundation material above the ground water table.
3. Backfill below-grade excavation above the ground water table.
4. Construct mechanically stabilized earth walls.
5. Construct reinforced soil slopes.
Gravel borrow shall be compacted according to Sections 2-03.3(14)C and 2-03.3(14)D.

2-03.3(14)K Select or Common Borrow Including Haul

When required by the Plans or the Engineer, the Contractor shall use select borrow meeting
the requirements of Section 9-03.14(2), or common borrow meeting the requirements of
Section 9-03.14(3) to:
1. Build embankments.
2. Backfill excavation of unsuitable foundation material above the ground water table.
3. Backfill below-grade excavation above the ground water table.
Where specified, select borrow may be used for constructing reinforced slopes.
Select borrow and common borrow shall be compacted according to Sections 2-03.3(14)C
and 2-03.3(14)D.
2-03.3(14)L Embankment Widening for Guardrail
Embankments widened for the installation of beam guardrail shall be terraced in
accordance with the requirements for hillside terraces in Section 2-03.3(14). Compaction shall
be in accordance with Method A, as specified in Section 2-03.3(14)C. Guardrail posts shall
not be installed until the embankment widening is completed and compacted.
2-03.3(14)M Excavation of Channels and Ditches
Channel Excavation includes open excavations 8 feet wide or more at the bottom,
but excludes channels that are part of the Roadway.
Ditch Excavation includes open excavations less than 8 feet wide at the bottom,
but excludes ditches that are part of the Roadway.
Before excavating channels or ditches, the Contractor shall clear and grub the area
in accordance with Section 2-01.
2-03.3(15) Aeration
The Contracting Agency may include aeration as a Contract item if material from test holes
in excavation or borrow sites is too wet to compact properly. Even if the Contract includes
such an item, the Contractor shall make every effort to reduce the need for aeration. The
Contractor shall do so by using methods known to be effective in building embankments with
wet materials. Such methods include open ditching to drain excavation areas or alternating
layers of wet and dry materials. These and similar methods will be incidental to excavation
and their costs shall be included in the unit Contract price for Roadway excavation, for borrow
excavation (including haul), and for haul.
If aeration is not a Contract item, its cost shall be incidental to and included in the
excavation and embankment items.
Aeration Equipment – The Engineer may direct the Contractor to use aeration equipment
in these areas: Roadway excavation, borrow sites, or embankments. The Contracting Agency
does not guarantee the moisture-reducing effectiveness of any single type of equipment.
The Engineer may, however, require the use of any type that will best aerate a given area.
If the Contractor uses any of the following types of equipment, it shall meet these
minimum requirements:
1. Heavy-Duty Power Grader – This machine shall have a moldboard measuring 12 feet
long, 24 inches high, and ¾ inch thick. Each grader shall carry its maximum number
of standard scarifier-rippers or discs.
2. Heavy-Duty Gang Plow – It shall have at least five 16-inch bottoms. Its tractor shall be
able to move no less than 1½ mph while plowing at least 9 inches deep through fairly
wet material.
3. Heavy-Duty Tandem Discs – This machine shall cut a swath at least 8 feet wide
with discs no less than 28 inches in diameter. Its tractor shall be able to turn fairly wet
material at least 6 inches deep while moving at 2 mph or more.

4. Heavy-Duty Self-Propelled, Rotary Pulverizer – This machine shall have paddles

attached to a transverse shaft. It shall travel 1½ mph or more while aerating a swath at
least 6 feet wide to a depth of 6 inches.
The Contractor shall not use any aerating equipment listed above in tandem nor use any of
this equipment to carry out other Bid items of Work while aerating.
The Engineer may halt aerating Work when weather conditions prevent satisfactory results.
2-03.3(16) End Slopes
The Engineer will determine when and where to build end slopes, whether these occur at
the beginning or end of a project, at the borders of excavation or embankments, at bridge ends,
or elsewhere. The Contractor shall build end slopes not detailed in the Plans to the line and
grade designated by the Engineer regardless of centerline limits shown in the Plans. All Work
to complete and maintain these end slopes shall be considered as Work to be performed under
the Contract.
2-03.3(17) Snow Removal
If snow deep enough to interfere with the Work covers a cut or an embankment, the
Contractor shall remove and deposit it outside the slope stakes. Snow removal must be done at
least 100 feet ahead of excavation and embankment Work. The Contractor shall remove snow
at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
2-03.3(18) Stepped Slope Construction
When the Plans or the Engineer requires it, the Contractor shall shape slopes cut in soft
rock to a stepped pattern conforming closely to the typical cross-section in the Plans. Stepped
slopes shall meet these requirements:
1. Each step shall be 1 to 2 feet high.
2. The horizontal depth of each step will depend on its relationship to the staked slope
ratio. The approximate midpoint of each horizontal tread shall occur on the staked
slope line.
3. The treads shall be approximately level in all directions.
4. The ends of the steps shall be blended into the natural ground, with loose material
removed from transitional areas.
5. If the Contractor cannot rip a rock outcropping within a cut, the steps shall be blended
into the rock.
6. Large rocks and material that may fall into the ditch line or onto the Roadway shall be
removed, but scaling is not required.
The compaction and seeding requirements of Section 8-01.3(2) shall not apply to stepped
slope construction.
The Contracting Agency will measure stepped slope excavation by the area defined by the
staked slope line. The unit Contract price per cubic yard for Roadway or borrow excavation
shall be full pay for all labor and equipment required to build stepped slopes.
2-03.3(19) Removal of Pavement, Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters
The requirements of Section 2-02.3(3) shall also apply when pavements, sidewalks, curbs,
and gutters lie within an excavation.
2-03.4 Measurement
Roadway excavation, channel excavation, ditch excavation, unsuitable foundation
excavation, and common borrow items will be measured by the cubic yard. All excavated
material will be measured in the position it occupied before the excavation was performed.
An original ground measurement will be taken using cross-section or digital terrain modeling
survey techniques. For Roadway excavation, channel excavation, and ditch excavation items,
the original ground will be compared with the planned finished section shown in the Plans.
Slope/ground intercept points defining the limits of the measurement will be as staked. For

unsuitable foundation excavation and common borrow items, the original ground will be
compared with a survey of the excavation area taken after the Work is completed. When the
Contracting Agency requires excavated material to be stockpiled, re-excavated and moved
again, a second measurement will be made, adding quantity for the same item used in the
original excavation. The second measurement will be a comparison of the original cross-
section of the stockpile with a cross-section of the stockpile area after the second excavation
is completed.
If the excavation item does not include Haul, then the measurement provisions of
Section 2-04 shall apply.
Gravel borrow and select borrow will be measured by the cubic yard or ton. Measurement
by cubic yard will be made in the hauling vehicle.
Sand drainage blanket will be measured by the ton with deductions made for the weight
of moisture above 8 percent.
Embankment compaction (Methods B and C in Section 2-03.3(14)C) will be measured by
the cubic yard. An original ground measurement will be taken using cross-section or digital
terrain modeling survey techniques. Quantities will be determined based on a comparison
of the original ground measurement with the finished embankment section as staked. No
allowance will be made for material that settles. No deduction will be taken for other items
constructed within the embankment (bridge abutments, piers, columns, backfill, pipes, etc.).
The Contracting Agency will exclude from compaction measurement material that is wasted
or placed under water and not compacted in layers as provided by Sections 2-03.3(14)A
and 2-03.3(14)C. In cuts, where excavation has been made below the planned Subgrade
elevation, and in fills where excavation has been made below original ground, compaction
will be measured by the cubic yard in the cross-section of compacted backfill material. When
material below grade in cuts or in original ground beneath fills is scarified and recompacted,
embankment compaction will be measured by its compacted depth, up to a maximum of
6 inches. There is no specific unit of measure and no measurement will be made for method
A compaction as described in Section 2-03.3(14)C.
Controlled blasting of rock face will be measured by the linear foot of hole drilled. Holes
will be measured from the top of the rock surface to the elevation of the Roadway ditch or
to a bench elevation set by the Engineer. Quantities shown in the Plans are based on 30-inch
hole spacing. Actual quantities will depend on field conditions and results from test sections.
Prefabricated vertical drains will be measured by the linear foot. Trial drains will be
measured and included in the payment quantity for the prefabricated vertical drains. The
drains will be measured from the top of the working platform to the bottom of each hole.
2-03.5 Payment
Payment will be made for each of the following Bid items that are included in the Proposal:
“Roadway Excavation”, per cubic yard.
“Roadway Excavation Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
“Roadway Excavation – Area ____”, per cubic yard.
“Roadway Excavation Incl. Haul – Area ____”, per cubic yard.
“Channel Excavation”, per cubic yard.
“Channel Excavation Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
“Ditch Excavation”, per cubic yard.
“Ditch Excavation Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Roadway Excavation”, “Roadway Excavation
Incl. Haul”, “Roadway Excavation – Area __”, “Roadway Excavation Incl. Haul – Area
___”, “Channel Excavation”, “Channel Excavation Incl. Haul”, “Ditch Excavation”, and
“Ditch Excavation Incl. Haul” shall be full compensation for all costs incurred for excavating,
loading, placing, or otherwise disposing of the material.

For “Haul”, the unit Contract price as provided in Section 2-04 shall apply, except when
the pay item is shown as including Haul. In that case the unit Contract price per cubic yard
shall include “Haul”. When a bid item is not included in the proposal for channel excavation
or ditch excavation, all costs shall be included in roadway excavation.
When the Engineer orders Work according to Section 2-03.3(3), unit Contract prices shall
apply unless the Work differs materially from the excavation above Subgrade, then payment
will be in accordance with Section 1-04.4.
“Unsuitable Foundation Excavation”, per cubic yard.
“Unsuitable Foundation Excavation Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Unsuitable Foundation Excavation” and
“Unsuitable Foundation Excavation Incl. Haul” shall be full payment for all costs incurred
for excavating, loading, and disposing of the material. For “Haul”, the unit Contract price as
provided in Section 2-04 shall apply, except when the Bid item is shown as including Haul.
In that case, the unit Contract price per cubic yard shall include “Haul”.
“Common Borrow Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Common Borrow Incl. Haul” shall be full
compensation for all costs incurred for excavating, loading, hauling, placing, or otherwise
disposing of the material. The unit Contract price includes removing, disposing of, wasting,
or stockpiling any material in the borrow site that does not meet the Specifications for
“Common Borrow”.
“Select Borrow Incl. Haul”, per ton.
“Select Borrow Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
“Gravel Borrow Incl. Haul”, per ton.
“Gravel Borrow Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
“Sand Drainage Blanket”, per ton.
The unit Contract price per ton or cubic yard for “Select Borrow Incl. Haul”, “Gravel
Borrow Incl. Haul” and “Sand Drainage Blanket” shall be full compensation for all costs
incurred for excavating, loading, hauling, and placing the material unless otherwise specified
in the Proposal.
“Embankment Compaction”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Embankment Compaction” shall be
full compensation for all costs incurred for all material, labor, tools, equipment, and
incidentals required.
When embankments are constructed using Method A compaction, payment for
embankment compaction will not be made as a separate item. All costs for embankment
compaction shall be included in other Bid items involved.
If the Bid item “Embankment Compaction” is not provided in the Proposal, compensation
for costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 2-03.3(14), Embankment
Construction, shall be included in payment for other items of Work in the Contract.
“Aeration”, by force account.
“Aeration” will be paid for by force account as specified in Section 1-09.6. The payment
for aeration and other related unit Contract prices shall be full compensation for all costs
incurred to perform the Work described in Section 2-03.3(15). Should the Contractor fail to
seal an aerated area prior to inclement weather, additional aeration to restore the area to its
previous condition shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
has entered an amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor.
“Controlled Blasting of Rock Face”, per linear foot.

The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Controlled Blasting of Rock Face” shall be
full compensation for all costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 2-03.3(2).
Measurement and payment for Roadway excavation and haul related to blasting shall be as
provided under those items in this section and shall include the volume of material excavated
from the benches or setbacks approved for drilling separate lifts.
“Prefabricated Vertical Drain”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot shall be full compensation for all costs incurred to
perform the Work, including trial drains, as described in Section 2-03.3(14)H.

Haul 2-04
2-04 Haul
2-04.1 Description
This Work consists of transporting excavated material from its original site to its final place
in the Work.
The balance points shown in the Plans are only approximate. The Engineer may change
the balance points to help equalize quantities of materials or to dispose of surpluses.
When the Plans require hauling, the Contractor shall not substitute wasting or borrowing.
The Contracting Agency will not pay extra for cross-hauling unless the Engineer so orders.
2-04.2 Vacant
2-04.3 Vacant
2-04.4 Measurement
The Contracting Agency will measure haul in units of haul where one unit equals
100-cubic yards of excavated material hauled 100 feet.
Excavated material will be measured in its original position. The Engineer will provide
a copy of the location mass diagram upon request.
Haul On Right of Way – To compute units of haul, the Contracting Agency will measure
haul distance parallel to the centerline (or base line) of the Highway. Lateral distance
(cross‑hauling) will not be measured.
Quantities to be measured in this way include: (1) material from the Roadway prism or
prisms; (2) borrow from widened cuts; (3) waste deposited in the Right of Way or alongside
it; and (4) material from Auxiliary Lanes – Frontage Roads, speed change lanes, paralleling
and loop ramps, cross roads, and other lanes that supplement through-traffic movements.
If the Plans show more than one centerline or base line (as in a multi-lane Highway),
the Plans or Special Provisions will describe the line by which haul will be computed.
Waste Haul Off Right of Way – The Contracting Agency will measure the cross-section
and length of any waste embankment to calculate waste quantities. If the Plans or Special
Provisions do not specify a haul route, the Contracting Agency will compute haul along the
long axis of the waste embankment, thence along a line running perpendicular to the Highway
center line, starting at the center line and ending at the nearest end of the waste embankment.
However, when a route is specified, haul distance will be measured along that route. If the
Contractor chooses to use a route shorter than that computed or specified, the Contracting
Agency will base payment on the length of the route actually used.
2-04.5 Payment
“Haul”, per unit.

2-05 Vacant
2-05 Vacant

Subgrade Preparation 2-06
2-06 Subgrade Preparation

2-06.1 Description
This Work consists of preparing graded Roadbed for surfacing or surfaced Roadbed
for paving.
2-06.2 Vacant
2-06.3(1) Subgrade for Surfacing
In preparing the Roadbed for surfacing, the Contractor shall:
1. Remove from the Roadbed, immediately before placing surfacing materials, all brush,
weeds, vegetation, grass, and other debris.
2. Dispose of all debris as the Engineer directs.
3. Drain water from all low spots or ruts.
4. Shape the entire Subgrade to a uniform surface running reasonably true to the line,
grade, and cross-section as staked.
5. If necessary, the Contractor shall process the Subgrade in cut areas to remove materials
too coarse for mechanical trimming and recompaction.
6. Compact the Subgrade to a depth of 6 inches. Compaction shall achieve 95 percent
of the maximum density determined under the tests described in Section 2-03.3(14)D.
If the underlying material is too soft to permit proper compaction of the Subgrade,
the Contractor shall loosen, aerate (or excavate and remove), and compact the
Subgrade until the top layer can be compacted as required.
7. Remove excess material that does not drift to low spots during grading and shaping.
The Contractor shall dispose of this excess by placing it where the Subgrade lacks
material or by wasting it, as the Engineer directs.
8. Add materials as the Engineer directs where the Subgrade needs more to bring it up
to grade. The Contractor shall water and compact these added materials as needed
to produce a true finished Subgrade.
If the Contract requires a trimming machine, it shall:
1. Maintain the grade and transverse slopes automatically through sensors that respond
to reference lines on both edges of each Roadway.
2. Create a smooth, uniform surface free from chatter and ripples.
2-06.3(2) Subgrade for Pavement
Before any paving is placed, the Contractor shall bring the Subgrade to the required line,
grade, and cross-section. The Contractor shall compact the Subgrade to a depth of 6 inches
to 95 percent of maximum density as determined by the compaction control tests for granular
materials. The compacted area shall be wide enough to let paving machines operate without
visible distortion of surfacing material.
The Contractor shall maintain the Subgrade in the required condition until the pavement
is placed. The Contractor may remove material just before paving if the Plans require thicker
areas of pavement.
2-06.4 Vacant

2-06 Subgrade Preparation
2-06.5 Measurement and Payment

2-06.5(1) Subgrade Constructed Under Same Contract
Surfacing or Treated Base – If the Contractor builds a Subgrade for surfacing or treated
base, the Contracting Agency will consider Subgrade preparation as part of the construction
Work. In this case, measurement and payment will conform to Section 2-03. Such payment
shall be the full price for all Subgrade preparation Work.
Pavement – If the Contractor builds a Subgrade for pavement, the Contracting Agency will
follow the criteria in Section 5-04 (for HMA pavement) or Section 5-05 (for cement concrete
pavement) to measure and pay for materials used to prepare the Subgrade. The Contracting
Agency will measure and pay for water as specified in Section 2-07.
2-06.5(2) Subgrade Not Constructed Under Same Contract
When the Contractor prepares an existing Subgrade for surfacing (one not built under the
present Contract), the Contracting Agency will measure and pay for the Work by these criteria:
1. Final Conditioning – All the following Work on the Subgrade shall be included
in other Contract Bid items: clearing vegetation and other debris, draining water,
smoothing to prepare for staking, grading, shaping, and compacting to a 6-inch depth
to final line, grade, and cross-section.
2. Excess Materials – If the Contractor must dispose of excess materials during grading
and shaping, the Contracting Agency will measure and pay for the Work as Roadway
excavation. If the Contract includes no pay item for Roadway excavation, the
Contracting Agency will measure and pay as provided in Section 1-04.4.
3. Added Materials – If the Subgrade requires more materials, the Contracting Agency
will pay the unit Contract price for each kind of material the Contractor provides.
The unit Contract price shall be full pay for furnishing, placing, and compacting the
materials. When unit Contract prices do not apply, the Contracting Agency will measure
and pay for the Work as provided in Section 1-04.4.
4. Excavation and Backfill – If the Engineer orders the Contractor to excavate unstable
spots in the Subgrade, the Contracting Agency will measure and pay for the Work as
Roadway excavation. If the Contract does not include Roadway excavation as a pay
item, payment will be by agreed price or force account. The Contracting Agency will
pay unit Contract prices for suitable backfill material when included in the Contract
and will pay as provided in Section 1-04.4 when not included.
5. Subgrade Protection – No payment shall be made for protecting the Subgrade.

Watering 2-07
2-07 Watering
2-07.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing, hauling, and applying water for compacting
embankments, constructing Subgrade, placing of crushed surfacing, dust control,
and as the Engineer requires.
2-07.2 Vacant
The Contractor shall apply water by means of tank trucks equipped with spray bars.
Spray controls shall ensure that the water flows evenly and in the amounts required by the
Engineer. The Engineer may direct that the Contractor apply water at night or early in the
morning to reduce evaporation losses.
2-07.4 Measurement
Water will be measured by the gallon using tanks or tank trucks of known capacity
or by meters approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall supply and install any meters
2-07.5 Payment
“Water”, per M gal.
The unit Contract price per M gallon for “Water” shall be full pay for all labor, materials,
tools, and equipment necessary to furnish, haul, and apply the water.
When the Contract does not include water as a pay item, providing and applying the water
shall be incidental to construction. All costs shall be included in the other Contract pay items.

2-08 Vacant
2-08 Vacant

Structure Excavation 2-09
2-09 Structure Excavation

2-09.1 Description
Structure excavation consists of excavating and disposing of all natural material or
man‑made objects that must be removed to make way for bridge foundations, retaining
walls, culverts, trenches for pipelines, conduits, and other Structures as shown in the Plans.
This Work also includes, unless the Contract provides otherwise, removing whole or partial
Structures, grubbing Structure sites that would not otherwise be grubbed, building and later
removing shoring, cofferdams, or caissons, pumping or draining excavated areas, protecting
excavated materials from the weather, and placing and compacting backfill.
2-09.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections:
Portland Cement 9-01
Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete 9-03.1(2)
Admixture for Concrete 9-23.6
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag 9-23.10
Water 9-25
All Structure excavation, trenching, and shoring shall be performed in strict compliance
with WAC 296-155 as well as all other applicable local, Contracting Agency, and Federal laws
and regulations.
2-09.3(1)A Staking, Cross-Sectioning, and Inspecting
The Contractor shall not begin excavating until after the stakes have been set to locate
and/or outline the Structure and taken cross-sections to determine how much material to
remove. The Engineer will occasionally inspect material taken from and material remaining
in the excavation.
2-09.3(1)B Depth of Excavation
The Contractor shall excavate foundation pits to the depth the Plans require, or to any
revised depth ordered by the Engineer.
2-09.3(1)C Removal of Unstable Base Material
When the material at the bottom of an excavation is not stable enough to support the
Structure, the Contractor shall excavate below grade and replace the unstable material with
gravel backfill.
Gravel backfill shall meet the requirements of Section 9-03.12. It shall be placed in layers
not more than 6 inches thick with each layer compacted to 95 percent of the maximum density
determined by the Compaction Control Test, Section 2-03.3(14)D.
2-09.3(1)D Disposal of Excavated Material
The Engineer may direct the Contractor to dispose of excavated material in embankments,
backfills, or remove it from the site.
All costs for disposing of excavated material within the project limits shall be included in
the unit Contract price for Structure excavation, Class A or B. If, however, the Contractor must
load and haul the material to a disposal site, the Contracting Agency will pay as provided in
Section 1-04.4 for loading and hauling. The Contracting Agency will not pay for handling at
the disposal site. Any such disposal shall meet the requirements of Section 2-03.3(7)C.
If the Contract includes Structure excavation, Class A or B, including haul, the
unit Contract price shall include all costs for loading and hauling the material the full
required distance.

2-09.3(1)E Backfilling
The backfilling of openings dug for Structures shall be a necessary part of and incidental
to the excavation. Unless the Engineer directs otherwise, backfill material shall be nonclay
material containing no pieces more than 3 inches across, no frozen lumps, and no wood or
other foreign material.
When specified in the Contract or when approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
supply controlled density fill as backfill material.
Alternative Sources. When material from Structure excavation is unsuitable for use
as backfill, the Engineer may require the Contractor to:
1. Use other material covered by the Contract if such substitution involves Work that
does not differ materially from what would otherwise have been required,
2. Substitute selected material in accordance with Section 2-03.3(10),
3. Use Controlled Density Fill (CDF) also known as Controlled Low Strength Material
(CLSM)), or
4. Obtain material elsewhere. Material obtained elsewhere will be paid for in accordance
Controlled Density Fill (CDF) or Controlled Low-Strength Material (CLSM) – CDF
is a self compacting, cementitious, flowable material requiring no subsequent vibration or
tamping to achieve consolidation. The Contractor shall provide a mix design in writing to the
Engineer on WSDOT Form 350-040 and utilize ACI 229 as a guide to develop the CDF mix
design. No CDF shall be placed until the Engineer has reviewed the mix design. CDF shall be
designed to have a minimum 28-day strength of 50 psi and a maximum 28-day strength not to
exceed 300 psi. The CDF consistency shall be flowable (approximate slump 3 to 10 inches).
The following testing methods shall be used by the Contractor to develop the CDF mix design:
28-day compressive strength – ASTM D4832;
Unit weight, yield, and air content – ASTM D6023;
Slump – FOP for AASHTO T 119.
The water/cement ratio shall be calculated on the total weight of cementitious material.
Cementitious materials are those listed in Section 5-05.2.
Admixtures used in CDF shall meet the requirements of Section 9-23.6, Admixtures
for Concrete, and foaming agents, if used, shall meet the requirements of ASTM C869.
Admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and
non‑chloride accelerating admixtures may be used to accelerate the hardening of CDF.
CDF shall meet the requirement of Section 6-02.3(5)C and shall be accepted based on
a Certificate of Compliance. The producer shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for each
truckload of CDF in accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)B.
Stockpiling – The Engineer may require the Contractor to selectively remove and stockpile
any usable material excavated for a Structure. If this material meets the requirements for
gravel backfill for walls it may replace gravel as wall or abutment backfill.
If the Contractor stockpiles excavated material for use as backfill, it shall be protected with
plastic sheeting or by some other method from contamination and weather damage. If the
material becomes too wet or contaminated in the stockpile, the Contractor shall dispose of
and replace it with an equal amount of suitable material, all at no expense to the Contracting
Agency. All costs for storing, protecting, rehandling, and placing stockpiled material shall
be included in the unit Contract price for Structure excavation, Class A or B.
Compaction – Backfill from Structure excavation shall be placed and compacted
in keeping with the following requirements:
1. Backfill supporting Roadbed, Roadway embankments, or Structures, including
backfill providing lateral support for noise barrier wall foundations, luminaire poles,
traffic signal standards, and roadside and overhead sign Structure foundations shall
be placed in horizontal layers no more than 6 inches thick with each layer compacted

to 95 percent of the maximum density determined by the Compaction Control Test

according to Section 2-03.3(14)D.
2. Gravel backfill for drains shall be placed in horizontal layers no more than 12 inches
thick, with each layer compacted by at least three passes of a vibratory compactor
approved by the Engineer.
3. All other structure excavation backfill shall be placed in layers no more than 2 feet thick
(loose), with each layer tamped and graded so that final settling will leave the backfill
flush with surrounding ground.
4. Compaction of controlled density fill will not be required.
Timing – Backfill shall not be placed against any concrete Structure until the concrete has
attained 90 percent of its design strength and a minimum age of 14 days, except that reinforced
concrete retaining walls 15 feet in height or less may be backfilled after the wall has attained
90 percent of its design compressive strength and curing requirements of Section 6-02.3(11)
are met. Footings and columns may be backfilled as soon as forms have been removed, so long
as the backfill is brought up evenly on all sides.
The Engineer may order the Contractor to use lean concrete in backfilling around piers
and in front of abutments and walls. The Contracting Agency will pay for such backfilling
If water prevents the Contractor from properly placing and compacting backfill, it shall
be removed by pumping or other means.
All costs not defined in this section that relate to providing, placing, and compacting
backfill shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
2-09.3(1)F Items to Remain
If the Contractor damages or removes pavement or anything else meant to remain outside
the excavation area, it shall be repaired or replaced at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
2-09.3(2) Classification of Structure Excavation
1. Class A – Structure excavation required for bridge and retaining wall footings, precast
reinforced concrete three sided structure footings, geosynthetic retaining walls,
structural earth walls, sign structure footings, pile or drilled shaft caps, seals, wingwall
footings, precast reinforced concrete box culverts, precast reinforced concrete split box
culverts, detention vaults, and noise barrier wall footings shall be classified as Structure
excavation Class A. If the excavation requires a cofferdam, structural shoring, or extra
excavation, the work outside the neat lines of the Structure excavation Class A shall
be classified as shoring or extra excavation Class A.
2. Class B – All other Structure excavation shall be Class B. If this excavation requires
cofferdams, shoring, or extra excavation, the work outside the neat lines of the Structure
excavation Class B shall be classified as shoring or extra excavation Class B.
2-09.3(3) Construction Requirements, Structure Excavation, Class A
2-09.3(3)A Preservation of Channel
When foundations or Substructures are to be built in or next to running streams, the
Contractor shall:
1. Excavate inside cofferdams, caissons, or sheet piling unless dredging or open pit
excavation is permitted.
2. Backfill foundations placed inside cofferdams and behind sheet piling prior to removing
cofferdams or sheet piling. This backfill shall be level with the original streambed and
shall prevent scouring.
3. Remove any excavation material that may have been deposited in or near the stream
so that the watercourse is free from obstruction.

4. Maintain water depth and horizontal clearances required for traffic to pass on navigable
streams, furnishing any channel signals or lights required during construction.
5. Place riprap around the outside of cofferdams, as specified, to repair local scour.
2-09.3(3)B Excavation Using Open Pits – Extra Excavation
The Contractor may dig open pits or perform extra excavation without shoring or
cofferdams, if:
1. Footings can be placed in dry material away from running water.
2. The integrity of the completed Structure and its surroundings is not reduced.
3. Worker safety is ensured as required by law.
4. The excavation does not disturb the existing pavement or any other adjacent
structural elements.
If a slide occurs in an open pit, the Contractor shall remove the slide material. If the
slide disturbs an area over which a Highway will be built, the Contractor shall backfill and
compact the site to the original ground line as approved by the Engineer. If the slide damages
an existing facility such as a Roadway or Structure, the Contractor shall repair the damage
caused by the slide. The Contractor shall pay all costs related to removing slide material and
restoring the slide area, including the repair of any pavement or structural elements damaged
by the slide.
The Contractor shall drain or pump any water from the pit, taking care not to stir up or
soften the bottom. If equipment in the pit or inadequate water removal makes the foundation
material unstable, the Contractor shall, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, remove and
replace it with material acceptable to the Engineer.
When the Engineer believes ground water flow may impair a concrete footing, the
Contractor shall place under it a layer of gravel at least 6 inches thick. Before placing the
gravel, the Contractor shall excavate to whatever grade the Engineer requires. This provision
shall not apply to the building of concrete seals.
The Contractor may omit forms when the earthen sides of a footing excavation will stand
vertically. In this case, the Contractor may excavate to the neat line dimensions of the footing
and pour concrete against the undisturbed earth. If the hole is larger than neat line dimensions,
the Contractor shall bear the cost of the extra concrete.
For open temporary cuts, the following requirements shall be met:
1. No vehicular or construction traffic, or construction surcharge loads will be allowed
within a distance of 5 feet from the top of the cut.
2. Exposed soil along the slope shall be protected from surface erosion.
3. Construction activities shall be scheduled so that the length of time the temporary
cut is left open is reduced to the extent practical.
4. Surface water shall be diverted away from the excavation.
Submittals and Design Requirements – The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working
Drawings with supporting calculations showing the geometry and construction sequencing
of the proposed excavation slopes.
The excavation stability design shall be conducted in accordance with the WSDOT
Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03. The stability of the excavation slopes shall be designed
for site specific conditions which shall be shown and described in the Working Drawings.
Examples of such items that shall be shown on the excavation submittal and supported
by calculations include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Excavation geometry and controlling cross sections showing adjacent existing
foundations, utilities, site constraints, and any surcharge loading conditions that could
affect the stability of the slope;
2. A summary clearly describing subsurface soil and groundwater conditions, sequencing
considerations, and governing assumptions;

3. Any supplemental subsurface explorations made to meet the requirements for

geotechnical design of excavation slopes, in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical
Design Manual M 46-03;
4. Supporting geotechnical calculations used to design the excavation, the soil and
material properties selected for design, and the justification for the selection for those
properties, in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03;
5. Safety factors, or load and resistance factors used, and justification for their selection,
in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03, and referenced
AASHTO design manuals;
6. Location and weight of construction equipment adjacent to the excavation top, and
location of adjacent traffic; and
7. A monitoring plan to evaluate the excavation performance throughout its design life.
2-09.3(3)C Preparation for Placing Foundations
When a foundation will rest on rock, excavation shall penetrate it at least 1 foot, or more
if the Plans require, to form a key for the footing. The Contractor shall cut the bottom of the
excavation to a firm surface, level, stepped, or serrated as the Engineer directs, and remove
all loose material.
For an arch abutment, the back face shall be trimmed to true lines so that concrete can
be poured against undisturbed material.
If concrete will rest on any excavated surface other than solid rock, the Contractor shall
not disturb the bottom of the excavation. The Contractor shall also remove all loose or soft
material just before pouring the concrete.
Upon completing any foundation excavation, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer.
No concrete or other permanent part of the Structure may be placed until the Engineer has
given permission to proceed.
2-09.3(3)D Shoring and Cofferdams
Definitions – Structural shoring is defined as a shoring system that is installed prior to
excavation. Structural shoring shall provide lateral support of soils and limit lateral movement
of soils supporting Structures, Roadways, utilities, railroads, etc., such that these items are not
damaged as a result of the lateral movement of the supporting soils.
Structural shoring systems includes driven cantilever sheet piles, sheet piles with tiebacks,
sheet pile cofferdams with wale rings or struts, prestressed spud piles, cantilever soldier piles
with lagging, soldier piles with lagging and tiebacks, and multiple tier tieback systems.
Trench boxes, sliding trench shields, jacked shores, shoring systems that are installed after
excavation, and soldier pile, sheet pile, or similar shoring walls installed in front of a pre-
excavated slope, are not allowed as structural shoring.
A cofferdam is any watertight enclosure, sealed at the bottom and designed for the
dewatering operation, that surrounds the excavated area of a Structure. The Contractor shall
use steel sheet pile or interlocking steel pile cofferdams in all excavation that is under water
or affected by ground water.
Submittals and Design Requirements – The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working
Drawings with supporting calculations showing the proposed methods and construction details
of structural shoring or cofferdams in accordance with Sections 1-05.3 and 6-02.3(16).
Structural shoring and cofferdams shall be designed for conditions stated in this section
using methods shown in Division I Section 5 of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for
Highway Bridges Seventeenth Edition – 2002 for allowable stress design, or the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, Third Edition, 2004 and current interims for load and
resistance factor design. The USS Steel Sheet Piling Design Manuals, published by United
States Steel, may be used for shoring walls that do not support other Structures and that
are 15 feet in height or less. Allowable stresses for materials shall not exceed stresses and

conditions allowed by Section 6-02.3(17)B. The shoring design shall also be in compliance
with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03. In the case of conflict or discrepancy
between manuals, the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 shall govern.
For open temporary cuts associated with a shoring system, the requirements for open
temporary cuts specified in Section 2-09.3(3)B shall be met.
The structural shoring system shall be designed for site specific conditions which shall be
shown and described in the Working Drawings. The structural shoring system design shall
include the design of the slopes for stability above and below the shoring system. Except
as otherwise noted, the design height of all structural shoring in design calculations and
Working Drawings shall be for the depth of excavation as required by the Plans, plus an
additional 2 feet to account for the possibility of overexcavation. If the Contractor provides
written documentation to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the soil conditions at the site
are not likely to require overexcavation, the Engineer may waive the requirement for 2 feet
of overexcavation design height.
Examples of such items that shall be shown on the structural shoring submittal and
supported by calculations include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Heights; soil slopes; soil benches; and controlling cross sections showing adjacent
existing foundations, utilities, site constraints, and any surcharge loading conditions
that could affect the stability of the shoring system, including any slopes above or below
the shoring.
2. A summary clearly describing performance objectives, subsurface soil and groundwater
conditions, sequencing considerations, and governing assumptions.
3. Any supplemental subsurface explorations made to meet the requirements for
geotechnical design of excavation slopes, shoring walls, and other means of ground
support, in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.
4. Supporting geotechnical calculations used to design the shoring system, including the
stability evaluation of the shoring system in its completed form as well as intermediate
shoring system construction stages, the soil and material properties selected for design,
and the justification for the selection for those properties, in accordance with the
WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03.
5. Safety factors, or load and resistance factors used, and justification for their selection.
6. Location and weight of construction equipment adjacent to the excavation; location
of adjacent traffic; and structural shoring system material properties, spacing, size,
connection details, weld sizes, and embedment depths.
7. Structural shoring installation and construction sequence, procedure, length of time for
procedure and time between operations; proof load testing procedure if any; deadman
anchor design and geometry; no load zones; grouting material and strengths; and a list
of all assumptions.
8. Methods and materials to be used to fill voids behind lagging, when soldier piles with
lagging are used as structural shoring.
9. A monitoring/testing plan to evaluate the performance of the excavation/shoring system
throughout its design life, and
10. An estimate of expected displacements or vibrations, threshold limits that would trigger
remedial actions, and a list of potential remedial actions should thresholds be exceeded.
Thresholds shall be established to prevent damage to adjacent facilities, as well as
degradation of the soil properties due to deformation.
Construction Requirements – Structural shoring or cofferdams shall be provided for
all excavations near completed Structures (foundations of bridges, walls, or buildings), near
utilities, and near railroads.
All other excavations 4 feet or more in depth shall either be shored with structural shoring
or cofferdams, or shall meet the open-pit requirements of Section 2-09.3(3)B.

Existing foundations shall be supported with structural shoring if the excavation is within
the limits defined by a plane which extends out from the nearest edge of the existing footing
a level distance of ½ the width of the existing footing and then down a slope of 1.5:1.
When structural shoring or cofferdams are utilized, all excavation and structural shoring
shall be constructed in accordance with the processed structural shoring submittal, including
any required construction sequence noted in the Working Drawings. The Contractor shall
remain responsible for satisfactory results.
If soldier piles are placed in drilled holes, and lagging is installed concurrently with the
excavation, all backfill above the bottom of the lagging shall consist of controlled-density
fill or lean concrete. Backfill below the bottom of the lagging may consist of pea gravel.
If full-height steel sheet lagging is installed prior to excavation, soldier pile holes may
be backfilled with pea gravel.
If lagging is used, void space behind the lagging shall be minimized. If the Engineer
determines that the voids present could result in damage or serviceability problems for the
structural shoring system or any Structures or facilities adjacent to the structural shoring
system, the Contractor shall cease excavation and lagging installation, and shall fill the voids
specified by the Engineer in accordance with the approved structural shoring submittal.
Further excavation and lagging placement shall not continue until the specified voids are
filled to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Excavation shall not proceed ahead of lagging installation by more than 4 feet or by
the height that the soil will safely stand, whichever is least. For tieback shoring systems,
excavation shall not proceed ahead by more than 4 feet of the tie installation and proof testing.
In using cofferdams or structural shoring, the Contractor shall:
1. Extend cofferdams well below the bottom of the excavation, and embed structural
shoring as shown in the structural shoring submittal as approved by the Engineer.
2. Provide enough clearance for constructing forms, inspecting concrete exteriors, and
pumping water that collects outside the forms. If cofferdams tilt or move laterally
during placement, the Contractor, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, shall
straighten or enlarge them to provide the required clearance.
3. Secure the cofferdam in place to prevent tipping or movement.
4. Place structural shoring or cofferdams so that they will not interfere with any pile
driving required.
5. Not place any shoring, braces, or kickers inside the cofferdams and structural shoring
that will induce stress, shock, or vibration to the permanent Structure.
6. Vent cofferdams at the elevation commensurate with seal weight design, or as shown
in the Plans.
7. Remove all bracing extending into the concrete being placed.
When the Work is completed, the Contractor shall:
1. Remove all structural shoring to at least 2 feet below the finished ground line.
2. Remove all cofferdams to the natural bed of the waterway.
2-09.3(3)E Bearing Tests
The Engineer may stop the excavation to make bearing tests at any time. The Contractor
shall assist with these tests in any way the Engineer requires.
During any test period, the Contractor shall, at no expense to the Contracting Agency,
maintain ordinary working conditions at the bottom of the hole. The Contracting Agency
will pay force account for all labor and materials the Contractor supplies for such tests.
A single test shall not exceed 72 hours.

2-09.3(4) Construction Requirements, Structure Excavation, Class B

The above requirements for Structure excavation Class A, shall apply also to Structure
excavation Class B, except as revised below. In addition, the Contractor shall follow
Division 7 of these Specifications as it applies to the specific kinds of Work.
The hole for any catch basin or manhole shall provide at least 1 foot of clearance between
outside structural surfaces and the undisturbed earth bank.
If workers enter any trench or other excavation 4 feet or more in depth that does not meet
the open pit requirements of Section 2-09.3(3)B, it shall be shored or other safety method
constructed in conformance with WISHA requirements. The Contractor alone shall be
responsible for worker safety and the Contracting Agency assumes no responsibility.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings in accordance with
Section 2-09.3(3)D.
Trench boxes may be used for Structure excavation, Class B. Acceptance of trench boxes
as a shoring method for Class B Structure excavation can be done by the Engineer provided
it is not used to support adjacent traffic, existing footings, or other Structures. The Working
Drawing submittal shall include the manufacturer’s certified trench box plans with depth
restrictions, and the serial number for field verification of the trench box.
Upon completing the Work, the Contractor shall remove all shoring unless the Plans
or the Engineer direct otherwise.
2-09.4 Measurement
Excavated materials will be measured in their original position by the cubic yard. The
Contracting Agency will measure and pay for only the material excavated from inside the
limits this section defines. If the Contractor excavates outside these limits or performs extra
excavation as described in Section 2-09.3(3)B, it shall be considered for the Contractor’s
benefit and shall be included in the cost of other Bid items.
Horizontal Limits – The Contracting Agency will use the sides of the trench or pit
as horizontal limits in measuring excavation. No payment for Structure excavation will
be made for material removed (1) more than 1 foot outside the perimeter of any pile cap,
footing, or seal; (2) more than 3 feet beyond the Roadway side of a wing wall; (3) more
than 1 foot beyond the other sides and end of a wing wall; (4) more than 1 foot outside
the perimeter of the soil reinforcement area for geosynthetic and structural earth walls; and
(5) more than 4-feet beyond the inside opening of precast reinforced concrete box culverts
and precast reinforced concrete split box culverts. For precast reinforced concrete three sided
structures, no payment for Structure excavation will be made for material removed more than
1 foot outside the perimeter of the footing or more than 4 feet beyond the inside opening,
whichever is greater.
For all pipes, pipe arches, structural plate pipes, and underpasses, the Structure excavation
quantity will be calculated based on the following trench widths:
For drain and underdrain pipes, trench width = I.D. + 12 inches.
For pipes 15 inches and under, trench width = I.D. + 30 inches.
For pipes 18 inches and over, trench width = (1.5 × I.D.) + 18 inches.
For a manhole, catch basin, grate inlet, or drop inlet, the limits will be 1 foot outside the
perimeter of the Structure.
For drywells, the limits shall be in accordance with the Standard Plans.
Lower Limits – For a pile cap, footing, or seal, the bottom elevation shown in the Plans,
or set by the Engineer, will serve as the lower limit in measuring Structure excavation. For a
wing wall, the lower limit will follow a line parallel to the bottom and 1 foot below it. Any
swell from pile driving will be excluded from excavation quantities.
For pipelines the lower limit in measuring structure excavation will be the foundation level
as shown in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer.

Upper Limits – The top surface of the ground or streambed as the Work begins will be
the upper limit for measuring excavation. If the Contract, or a separate contract, includes a
pay item for grading to remove materials, the upper limit will be the neat lines of the grading
section shown in the Plans.
The Engineer may order the Contractor to partially build the embankment before placing
pipe. In this case, the upper limit for measurement will be not more than 4 feet above the
invert of the pipe. For a structural plate pipe, pipe arch, or underpass, the upper limit will
be the top of the embankment at the time of installation as specified in Section 7-03.3(1)A.
Gravel Backfill – Gravel backfill, except when used as bedding for culvert, storm sewer,
sanitary sewer, manholes, and catch basins, will be measured by the cubic yard in place
determined by the neat lines required by the Plans.
Shoring or Extra Excavation – No specific unit of measurement shall apply to the lump
sum item of shoring or extra excavation Class A. Shoring or extra excavation Class B will
be measured by the square foot as follows:
The area for payment will be one vertical plane measured along the centerline of the
trench, including Structures. Measurement will be made from the existing ground line to the
bottom of the excavation and for the length of the Work actually performed. If the Contract
includes a pay item for grading to remove materials, the upper limit for measurement will be
the neat lines of the grading section shown in the Plans. The bottom elevation for measurement
will be the bottom of the excavation as shown in the Plans or as otherwise established by
the Engineer.
Controlled density fill will be measured by the cubic yard for the quantity of material
placed in accordance with the producer’s invoice.
2-09.5 Payment
“Structure Excavation Class A”, per cubic yard.
“Structure Excavation Class B”, per cubic yard.
“Structure Excavation Class A Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
“Structure Excavation Class B Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
Payment for reconstruction of surfacing and paving within the limits of Structure
excavation will be at the applicable unit prices for the items involved.
If the Engineer orders the Contractor to excavate below the elevations shown in the Plans,
the unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Structure Excavation Class A or B” will apply.
But if the Contractor excavates deeper than the Plans or the Engineer requires, the Contracting
Agency will not pay for material removed from below the required elevations. In this case, the
Contractor, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, shall replace such material with concrete
or other material the Engineer approves.
“Shoring or Extra Excavation Cl. A _____”, lump sum.
When extra excavation is used in lieu of constructing the shoring, cofferdam or caisson,
the lump sum Contract price shall be full pay for all excavation, backfill, compaction, and
other Work required. If select backfill material is required for backfilling within the limits of
Structure excavation, it shall also be required as backfill material for the extra excavation at
the Contractor’s expense.
If it is necessary to place riprap outside of cofferdams to repair local scour, it shall be paid
by agreed price or force account.
If the Engineer requires shoring, cofferdams, or caissons when the Contract provides no
Bid item for such Work, the Contracting Agency will pay as provided in Section 1-04.4.
If the Engineer requires the Contractor to build shoring or extra excavation Class A that
extends below the elevation shown in the Plans, the Contracting Agency shall pay the lump
sum price and no more when the extra depth does not exceed 3 feet. For depths greater
than 3 feet below the elevations shown, payment will be as provided in Section 1-04.4.

“Shoring or Extra Excavation Class B”, per square foot.

The unit Contract price per square foot shall be full pay for all excavation, backfill,
compaction, and other Work required when extra excavation is used in lieu of constructing
shoring. If select backfill material is required for backfilling within the limits of the Structure
excavation, it shall also be required as backfill material for the extra excavation at the
Contractor’s expense.
If there is no Bid item for shoring or extra excavation Class B on a square foot basis and
the nature of the excavation is such that shoring or extra excavation is required as determined
by the Engineer, payment to the Contractor for the Work will be made in accordance with
Section 1-04.4.
“Gravel Backfill (_____________)”, per cubic yard.
“Controlled Density Fill”, per cubic yard.

Vacant 2-10
2-10 Vacant

2-11 Trimming and Cleanup
2-11 Trimming and Cleanup

2-11.1 Description
This Work consists of dressing and trimming the entire Roadway(s) improved under the
Contract, including Frontage Roads, connecting ramps, Auxiliary Lanes, and approach roads.
This Work extends to Roadbeds, Shoulders, and ditches.
2-11.2 Vacant
1. Trim Shoulders and ditches to produce smooth surfaces and uniform cross-sections that
conform to the grades set by the Engineer.
2. Open and clean all channels, ditches, and gutters to ensure proper drainage.
3. Dress the back slope of any ditch or borrow pit that will remain adjacent to the
Roadway. Round off the top of the back slope and distribute the material evenly along
its base.
4. Remove and dispose of all weeds, brush, refuse, and debris that lie on the Roadbed,
Shoulders, ditches, and slopes.
5. Remove from paved Shoulders all loose rocks and gravel.
6. Distribute evenly along the embankment any material not needed to bring the Shoulders
to the required cross-section.
The Contractor shall not:
1. Use heavy equipment (tractors, graders, etc.) to trim the Shoulders of an existing or new
bituminous surface.
2. Drag, push, or scrape Shoulder material across completed surfacing or pavement.
When the Contract requires the Contractor to rebuild part of a Roadway only the rebuilt
areas shall be trimmed and cleaned up. If the Contractor’s Work obstructs ditches or side
roads, they shall be cleared and the debris disposed of as the Engineer directs.
2-11.4 Vacant
2-11.5 Payment
Payment shall be made for the following Bid item when it is included in the Proposal:
“Trimming and Cleanup”, lump sum.

Construction Geosynthetic 2-12
2-12 Construction Geosynthetic

2-12.1 Description
The Contractor shall furnish and place construction geosynthetic in accordance with the
details shown in the Plans.
2-12.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the requirements of the following section:
Geosynthetic roll identification, storage, and handling shall be in conformance to
ASTM D4873. During periods of shipment and storage, the geosynthetic shall be stored off
the ground. The geosynthetic shall be covered at all times during shipment and storage such
that it is fully protected from ultraviolet radiation including sunlight, site construction damage,
precipitation, chemicals that are strong acids or strong bases, flames including welding sparks,
temperatures in excess of 160ºF, and any other environmental condition that may damage the
physical property values of the geosynthetic.
Unless specified otherwise in the Plans, the geotextile required for underground drainage
shall be “Moderate Survivability” and “Drainage Class C” and permanent erosion control
applications shall be “High Survivability” and “Drainage Class C”.
The area to be covered by the geosynthetic shall be graded to a smooth, uniform condition
free from ruts, potholes, and protruding objects such as rocks or sticks. The geosynthetic
shall be spread immediately ahead of the covering operation. The geosynthetic shall not be
left exposed to sunlight during installation for a total of more than 14 calendar days. The
geosynthetic shall be laid smooth without excessive wrinkles. Under no circumstances shall
the geosynthetic be dragged through mud or over sharp objects which could damage the
geosynthetic. The cover material shall be placed on the geosynthetic such that the minimum
initial lift thickness required will be between the equipment tires or tracks and the geosynthetic
at all times. Construction vehicles shall be limited in size and weight, to reduce rutting in the
initial lift above the geosynthetic, to not greater than 3 inches deep to prevent overstressing the
geosynthetic. Turning of vehicles on the first lift above the geosynthetic will not be permitted.
Soil piles or the manufacturer’s recommended method, shall be used as needed to hold the
geosynthetic in place until the specified cover material is placed.
Should the geosynthetic be torn, punctured, or the overlaps or sewn joints disturbed,
as evidenced by visible geosynthetic damage, Subgrade pumping, intrusion, or Roadbed
distortion, the backfill around the damaged or displaced area shall be removed and the
damaged area repaired or replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
The repair shall consist of a patch of the same type of geosynthetic placed over the damaged
area. The patch shall overlap the existing geosynthetic from the edge of any part of the
damaged area by the minimum required overlap for the application.
If geotextile seams are to be sewn in the field or at the factory, the seams shall consist
of one row of stitching unless the geotextile where the seam is to be sewn does not have a
selvage edge. If a selvage edge is not present, the seams shall consist of two parallel rows of
stitching, or shall consist of a J-seam, Type SSn-1, using a single row of stitching. The two
rows of stitching shall be 1.0 inch apart with a tolerance of plus or minus 0.5 inch and shall
not cross except for restitching. The stitching shall be a lock-type stitch. The minimum seam
allowance, i.e., the minimum distance from the geotextile edge to the stitch line nearest to
that edge, shall be 1½ inches if a flat or prayer seam, Type SSa-2, is used. The minimum seam
allowance for all other seam types shall be 1.0 inch. The seam, stitch type, and the equipment
used to perform the stitching shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the geotextile
and as approved by the Engineer.
The seams shall be sewn in such a manner that the seam can be inspected readily by the
Engineer or a representative. The seam strength will be tested and shall meet the requirements
stated herein.
2-12.3(1) Underground Drainage

Trench walls shall be smooth and stable. The geotextile shall be placed in a manner
which will ensure intimate contact between the soil and the geotextile (i.e., no voids, folds,
or wrinkles).
The geotextile shall either be overlapped a minimum of 12 inches at all longitudinal and
transverse joints, or the geotextile joints shall be sewn for medium survivability drainage
applications. In those cases where the trench width is less than 12 inches, the minimum
overlap shall be the trench width.
In moderate survivability geotextile underdrain applications, the minimum overlap shall
be 12 inches, or the geotextile joints shall be sewn, except where the geotextile is used in
area drains. An area drain is defined as a geotextile layer placed over or under a horizontal
to moderately sloping layer of drainage aggregate. For area drains, the geotextile shall be
overlapped a minimum of 2 feet at all longitudinal and transverse joints, or the geotextile
joints shall be sewn together. The minimum initial lift thickness over the geotextile in the
area drain shall be 12 inches.
In all cases, the upstream geotextile sheet shall overlap the next downstream sheet.
2-12.3(2) Separation
The geotextile shall either be overlapped a minimum of 2 feet at all longitudinal and
transverse joints, or the geotextile joints shall be sewn together. The initial lift thickness
shall be 6 inches or more.
2-12.3(3) Soil Stabilization
The geotextile shall either be overlapped a minimum, of 2 feet at all longitudinal and
transverse joints, or the geotextile shall be sewn together. The initial lift thickness shall be
12 inches or more. Compaction of the first lift above the geotextile shall be by Method A
according to Section 2-03.3(14)C. No vibratory compaction will be allowed on the first lift.
2-12.3(4) Permanent Erosion Control and Ditch Lining
Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, the geotextile shall either be overlapped a minimum
of 2 feet at all longitudinal and transverse joints, or the geotextile joints shall be sewn together.
If overlapped, the geotextile shall be placed so that the upstream strip of geotextile will
overlap the next downstream strip. When placed on slopes, each strip shall overlap the next
downhill strip.
Placement of aggregate and riprap or other cover material on the geotextile shall start at
the toe of the slope and proceed upwards. The geotextile shall be keyed at the top and the
toe of the slope as shown in the Plans. The geotextile shall be secured to the slope, but shall
be secured loosely enough so that the geotextile will not tear when the riprap or other cover
material is placed on the geotextile. The geotextile shall not be keyed at the top of the slope
until the riprap or other cover material is in place to the top of the slope.
All voids in the riprap or other cover material that allow the geotextile to be visible shall
be backfilled with quarry spalls or other small stones, as designated by the Engineer, so that
the geotextile is completely covered. When an aggregate cushion between the geotextile and
the riprap or other cover material is required, it shall have a minimum thickness of 12 inches.
An aggregate cushion will be required to facilitate drainage when hand placed riprap,
as specified in Section 9-13.1(4), is used with the geotextile.
Grading of slopes after placement of the riprap or other cover material will not be allowed
if grading results in stone movement directly on the geotextile. Under no circumstances shall
stones with a weight of more than 100 pounds be allowed to roll down slope. Stones shall
not be dropped from a height greater than 3 feet above the geotextile surface if an aggregate
cushion is present, or 1 foot if a cushion is not present. Lower drop heights may be required if
geotextile damage from the stones is evident, as determined by the Engineer. If the geotextile
is placed on slopes steeper than 2:1, the stones shall be placed on the slope without free-fall
for moderate survivability, high survivability, and ditch lining geotextiles.

2-12.4 Measurement
Construction geotextile, with the exception of temporary silt fence geotextile and
underground drainage geotextile used in trench drains, will be measured by the square yard for
the ground surface area actually covered.
Underground drainage geotextile used in trench drains will be measured by the square yard
for the perimeter of drain actually covered.
2-12.5 Payment
“Construction Geotextile for Underground Drainage”, per square yard.
“Construction Geotextile for Separation”, per square yard.
“Construction Geotextile for Soil Stabilization”, per square yard.
“Construction Geotextile for Permanent Erosion Control”, per square yard.
“Construction Geotextile for Ditch Lining”, per square yard.
Sediment removal behind silt fences will be paid by force account under temporary water
pollution/erosion control. If a new silt fence is installed in lieu of sediment removal, the silt
fence will be paid for at the unit Contract price per linear foot for “Construction Geotextile
for Temporary Silt Fence”.


Aggregate Production
Division 3 and Acceptance
3-01 Production From Quarry and Pit Sites
3-01.1 Description
This Work shall consist of manufacturing and producing crushed and screened aggregates
including pit run aggregates of the kind, quality, and grading specified for use in the
construction of portland cement concrete, hot mix asphalt, crushed surfacing, maintenance
rock, ballast, gravel base, gravel backfill, gravel borrow, riprap, and bituminous surface
treatments of all descriptions.
The requirements specified shall apply whether the source is ledge rock, talus, gravel,
sand, or any combination thereof.
3-01.2 Material Sources, General Requirements
3-01.2(1) Approval of Source
Material sources must be approved in advance of use in the Work in accordance with the
requirements of Section 1-06. This approval of source may require sampling and testing.
If sampling is required, the samples must be taken at locations designated and witnessed
by the Engineer or a designated representative. The Contractor is responsible for providing
representative preliminary samples of aggregate sources to the Engineer.
3-01.2(2) Preparation of Site
The portion of the quarry or pit site to be used shall be cleared and grubbed, and the
area from which materials are to be taken shall be stripped of overburden as provided in
Section 3-01.2(3). All combustible debris resulting from these operations shall be disposed
of by the Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient space as required for the setup and operation
of the Contracting Agency’s field testing facilities at the site of crushing or hot mix
asphalt production.
As directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide one of the following to ensure
24-hour per day operation of the Contracting Agency’s laboratory trailer(s) that may be set
up at the site during production:
1. A power source and a power cord of sufficient length to reach the Contracting Agency’s
laboratory trailer(s) which may be set up at the site. The cord shall be capable of
carrying at least 120/240 volts, 60 cycles at a sustained load of up to 200 amps. The
cord and trailer(s) electrical hookup shall meet the NEC code. Power shall be provided
and connected when requested by the Engineer. The laboratory trailer(s) hookup shall
be protected by a 2 pole 50 amp 240 VAC circuit breaker.
2. A daily supply of fuel adequate for operation of the Contracting Agency’s generator(s).
Potable water shall be provided to the Contracting Agency’s laboratory trailer(s) for use
during plant operations when requested by the Engineer.
3-01.2(3) Stripping Quarries and Pits
Stripping of quarries and pits shall consist of the removal, after clearing and grubbing,
of the surface material and overburden which is unsuitable for the kind of material to be
borrowed or produced for use. Materials from stripping, to be used later as provided on the
site reclamation plan specified in Section 3-03, shall be deposited within the quarry or pit
site at such a location as not to interfere with future development within the site.

3-01.2(4) Production Requirements

All oversize stones, rock fragments, or boulders occurring in the source, up to and
including those measuring 18 inches in the greatest dimension, shall be utilized in the
manufacture of crushed material.
If the grading or quality of raw material in sources used for the manufacture of products
covered by this section is such that the fracture, grading, or quality of the product specified
cannot be obtained by utilizing the natural material, fine portions of the raw material shall
be rejected to the extent necessary to produce products meeting all requirements of these
Specifications. Failure of the Contracting Agency to include a scalping requirement in
the Special Provisions shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for rejecting
fine portions of the material if such becomes necessary to produce products meeting all
requirements of these Specifications. Scalping shall be performed after the pit-run or
quarry‑run material has passed through the primary crusher.
When scalping over a screen of a specified size is required in the Special Provisions,
the scalping screen shall be of such size and capacity that enough of the fine material will
be removed to produce Work that conforms to the Specifications.
Washing and reclaiming of the reject material and subsequent addition of this material
to any finished products will not be allowed unless specifically authorized in writing by
the Engineer.
Surplus screenings accumulated during the crushing and screening of specified Roadway
materials will be considered separate and distinct from reject material resulting from
scalping operations.
Both fine and coarse concrete aggregates shall be thoroughly washed in order to remove
clay, loam, alkali, bark, sticks, organic castings, or other deleterious matter. Washing will be
required in the production of other materials if necessary to produce products meeting all the
quality requirements of these Specifications.
When producing screened gravel or sand materials, the Contractor shall remove all
oversize material by screening at the pit site. The Contractor’s operations in the pit shall be
conducted so that the grading of individual loads will be reasonably uniform. In general,
the Contractor shall utilize the most suitable materials available and shall make as many
moves of the loading equipment as may be necessary to fulfill these requirements.
Where pit-run materials meet Specifications, screening or processing will not be required.
3-01.2(5) Final Cleanup
Upon completion of the Contractor’s operation, the quarry or pit shall be cleared of all
rubbish, temporary Structures, and equipment, and shall be left in a neat and presentable
condition. The pit or quarry shall be reclaimed in accordance with the approved site
reclamation plan specified in Section 3-03.
3-01.3 State Furnished Material Sources
Unless specified in the Special Provisions, no Contracting Agency material sources are
provided and the Contractor shall bear full responsibility for furnishing all materials.
3-01.3(1) Quality and Extent of Material
Contracting Agency furnished material sources will be shown in the Plans and described
in the Special Provisions. The quality of material in such sources will be acceptable in
general, but the Contractor shall determine the amount of Work required to produce the
material meeting these Specifications. It shall be understood that it is not feasible to ascertain
from samples, the limits for an entire source, and that variations shall be considered as usual
and are to be expected. The Engineer may order procurement of material from any portion
of a source and may reject portions of the source as unacceptable.
Since many material sources are acquired in fee by the Contracting Agency for use on
future projects as well as for this Contract, it is in the public interest to preserve the future

Production From Quarry and Pit Sites 3-01
usefulness and adequacy of a source insofar as may be practical. To achieve this end, the
Contractor shall not perform any Work within the source until receiving the Engineer’s
approval of the Contractor’s work plan within the limits of the source.
3-01.3(2) When More Than One Site is Provided
When more than one quarry or pit site is provided in the Special Provisions, the Contractor
may obtain material from any of the sources. The Contracting Agency will specify the quantity
of raw material available, as determined by tests, in each quarry or pit site. If the Contractor
sets up in a site, and it is found that the quantity of raw material from that site, when the site
is exhausted, is less than that specified by the Contracting Agency, then the provisions of
Section 3-01.3(5) will apply.
3-01.3(3) Reject Materials
All scalpings that are unsatisfactory for use under these Specifications or Special
Provisions shall be considered as reject material, subject to disposal as approved by the
Engineer. Reject material shall be placed at such a location as not to interfere with future
development within the site.
3-01.3(4) Surplus Screenings
The surplus screenings accumulated during the production of the specified materials shall
be stockpiled at a location within the site provided and become the property of the Contracting
Agency. The stockpile site shall be prepared and constructed by the Contractor in accordance
with the provisions of Section 3-02. All costs incurred in producing, hauling, and stockpiling
the surplus screenings shall be incidental to the production of the specified materials and shall
be included by the Contractor in the unit Bid prices in the Contract.
3-01.3(5) Moving Plant
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, there should be insufficient suitable material in any
quarry or pit site made available by the Contracting Agency, the Contracting Agency will
acquire at its expense an additional source, in which event the Contractor will be required
to move the crushing plant to the new quarry or site. Under such conditions, payment for
the Contractor’s costs for the move will be made on a force account basis. Payment will be
limited to the labor, equipment, and materials required for the move, and no allowance will
be made for payment of standby costs for the crushing plant nor other equipment which may
be temporarily idle as a result of the move.
The clearing, grubbing, and preparing of the new quarries or pit sites as specified
in Section 3-01.2(2) will be paid for in the manner provided in these Specifications for
“Clearing”, “Grubbing”, and “Stripping Including Haul”. If there is no Bid item applicable,
the payment for the preparation of the new site will be as provided in Section 1-04.4.
If the moving of the plant due to shortage of the supply of material necessitates a longer
haul on materials than required from the original source, the Contracting Agency will
reimburse the Contractor for the additional haul at the rate of $0.25 per ton-mile haul. The
unit ton-mile shall be the equivalent of 1 ton of material hauled a distance of 1 mile. The haul
distance will be measured in ½-mile units, fractional half-miles being allowed as full half-
miles. If the requirement for moving of the crushing plant results in a delay of performance
of Work which is critical to completion of the project, as shown by the Contractor’s approved
progress schedule, the Engineer will authorize a suspension of Work for the time required for
the move.
The above allowances, insofar as they may be applicable, shall be full pay for all claims
of any kind or description by reason of the necessity of changing from one site to another
due to shortage of the supply from sources made available by the Contracting Agency. Before
moving a crushing plant as outlined above, the Contractor shall secure from the Engineer an
order in writing to do so. Should the Contractor fail to secure such order, it shall be considered
sufficient proof that the move was immaterial insofar as to cost, and no allowance or pay will
be made by reason of such move.

3-01.4 Contractor Furnished Material Sources

3-01.4(1) Acquisition and Development
If, under the terms of the Contract, the Contractor is required to provide a source of
materials, or if the Contractor elects to use materials from sources other than those provided
by the Contracting Agency, the Contractor shall, at no expense to the Contracting Agency,
make all necessary arrangements for obtaining the material and shall ensure the quantity of
suitable material is available. Preliminary samples shall be taken by or in the presence of the
Engineer or a designated representative unless the Engineer permits otherwise. Approval of
the source does not relieve the Contractor from meeting these Specification requirements,
nor does it guarantee that the material will meet these requirements without additional or
proper processing. The Engineer may require additional preliminary samples at any time.
Approval of a Contractor’s source offered in lieu of a Contracting Agency-provided source
will be contingent upon the material therein being of equal quality, and no additional costs
will accrue to the Contracting Agency as a result of such approval. Equivalency of quality
will be based on those test values listed in the Special Provisions as being representative of
material in the Contracting Agency-provided source. If no such values are listed, the minimum
Specification requirements will apply. When measurement by weight is specified and when
the specific gravity of material produced from the Contractor’s source is greater than that from
the Contracting Agency-furnished source, any additional material required to construct the
minimum specified surfacing depth shall be furnished by the Contractor at no expense to the
Contracting Agency.
The Contractor shall notify the State Departments of Ecology, Fish and Wildlife, and
Natural Resources, in writing, of the intent to furnish the source, and shall, at no expense
to the Contracting Agency, make all necessary arrangements with these agencies for the
determinations of regulations which might be imposed upon the Contractor during removal
of materials from the source.
The source shall be selected so that, after the materials have been removed, the pit will
drain to a natural drainage course and no ponding will result. Should the source selected by
the Contractor be one which would not drain as outlined herein, permission shall be obtained
by the Contractor from the governing body of the city or county for the removal of materials
from the pit or quarry.
The Contractor will not be permitted to operate a pit or a quarry site visible from a State
Highway unless it can be demonstrated to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer that no
unsightly condition will result from or remain as a result of the Contractor’s operations. If, in
the opinion of the Engineer, unsightly conditions exist after removal of materials from the site,
the Contractor shall correct such unsightly conditions as hereinafter provided.
Following removal of materials from the pit, the entire site shall be cleared of all rubbish,
temporary Structures, and equipment which have resulted from the Contractor’s occupancy
and operations. The Contractor shall obliterate or screen to the satisfaction of the Engineer
any unsightly conditions that remain. The Contractor shall secure a written release from the
permitter upon fulfillment of these requirements. All costs for cleaning up the pit site and
for the installation or erection of screening or for other work required to correct unsightly
conditions shall be at the Contractor’s expense. The requirements of this paragraph shall
not apply to pits being operated commercially.
All costs in connection with acquiring the rights to take materials from the source, for
exploring and developing the site, for complying with the regulations of the aforesaid State
agencies, for preparing the site as provided in Sections 3-01.2(2) and 3-03, for cleaning up
the site, and for correcting unsightly conditions, shall be included in the unit Contract prices
for the various pay items of Work involved.

Production From Quarry and Pit Sites 3-01
3-01.4(2) Surplus Screenings

Surplus screenings accumulated during the manufacture of specified material shall remain
the property of the Contractor.
3-01.4(3) Substitution of Gravel Deposit in Lieu of Ledge Rock or Talus Source
Provided by the Contracting Agency
If the Contractor elects to substitute a gravel deposit of an approved source for the
manufacture of ballast, crushed surfacing, or mineral aggregate in lieu of a ledge rock or talus
source provided by the Contracting Agency in the Contract, all pit run materials passing a
½-inch-square sieve, or larger if ordered by the Engineer, shall be removed prior to crushing.
3-01.4(4) Gravel Base
If the Contract requires the Contractor to provide the source of Gravel Base, or if the
Contractor elects to furnish said material from sources other than those provided by the
Contracting Agency, the material shall be produced from approved sources in accordance
with the requirements of Section 3-01. The grading and quality shall be as specified
in Section 9-03.10.
Measurement and payment will be in accordance with Section 4-02.
3-01.5 Measurement
For payment purposes, all crushed, screened, or naturally occurring materials that are to
be paid for by the ton, dependent upon their grading, will be limited to the following water
contents naturally occurring in the material source:
Percent By Weight Maximum Water Content
Passing No. 4 Percent By Weight
Less than 20 4
20 or more 8
Water in excess of the maximum permissible amounts naturally occurring in the material
source, as determined by the Engineer, will be deducted from the tonnage of material to be
paid for on a daily basis.
If the Contractor uses the Central Plant Mix Method of mixing water and surfacing
materials in accordance with Section 4-04, the added water will be measured in accordance
with Section 4-04.4. All other water added to the materials by the Contractor will be deducted
from the weight of the aggregates including the added water, on a daily basis.
Clearing and grubbing of quarries and pit sites will be measured in accordance with
Section 2-01 when the Proposal includes such Bid items and such Work is required on a source
provided by the Contracting Agency, except as modified in Section 3-01.3(5).
Stripping of quarries and pit sites will be measured in cubic yards in its original position
by cross-sectioning when the Proposal includes such Bid item and such stripping is required
on a source provided by the Contracting Agency, except as modified in Section 3-01.3(5).
Measurement of the particular materials or aggregates to be produced will be as specified
in the appropriate section of these Specifications.
3-01.6 Payment
All costs, except as specified, in connection with the production of materials meeting all
quality requirements of these Specifications shall be included in the unit Contract prices of the
various Bid items involved.
Clearing and grubbing of quarries and pit sites will be paid in accordance with Section 2-01
when the Proposal includes such Bid items and such Work is required on a source provided by
the Contracting Agency, except as modified in Section 3-01.3(5).
“Stripping Incl. Haul”, shall be paid for at the unit Contract price per cubic yard when the
Proposal includes such Bid item and such stripping is required on a source provided by the
Contracting Agency, except as modified in Section 3-01.3(5).

3-02 Stockpiling Aggregates

3-02.1 Description
This Work shall consist of preparing the stockpile sites and placing the specified aggregates
in the stockpiles at the sites and in the amounts as shown in the Plans or as approved by
the Engineer.
This section also includes the requirements pertaining to the removal of aggregates
from stockpiles and the requirements for dressing up the stockpiles and stockpile site at the
completion of the Work.
3-02.2 General Requirements
3-02.2(1) Stockpile Sites Provided by the Contracting Agency
The Contracting Agency may acquire and make available to the Contractor suitable areas
as shown in the Plans for the construction of stockpiles. The stockpiled aggregates may be
for use in the immediate Work or may be for future use as more fully described below. In
either event, if the aggregates are required by these Specifications to be stockpiled, all costs
in connection with the preparation of the stockpile sites as required in Section 3-02.2(5)
shall be included in the various Bid items involved in the Contract; except that clearing and
grubbing of the site will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section 2-01 only when
such Bid items are included in the Proposal. In the event there is no Bid item included in the
Proposal for construction and maintenance of haul roads to the stockpile site, the Contractor
shall construct and maintain the haul roads as necessary and the cost thereof shall be included
in the various Bid items in the Contract.
3-02.2(2) Stockpile Site Provided by the Contractor
If the Plans do not provide a stockpile site for the use of the Contractor in stockpiling
certain types and sizes of aggregates which are required by these Specifications to be
stockpiled prior to use in the immediate Work, all costs in connection with the acquisition
of a site, the preparation of the site, construction of the stockpiles, and the removal of the
aggregates from the stockpiles shall be included in the Contract prices of the various Bid
items of Work involved.
3-02.2(3) Stockpiling Aggregates for Future Use
The Contracting Agency may require the production and stockpiling of aggregates on sites
provided by the Contracting Agency for use on future construction or maintenance projects to
be performed under a subsequent contract or by Contracting Agency forces.
When the Contract includes the Bid item or items for specific aggregates in stockpile and
these aggregates are not to be used in Work required under the Contract, the Contractor shall
produce or furnish these aggregates complying with the quality and grading requirements
of these Specifications and shall prepare the site and place the aggregates in stockpile in
accordance with the requirements of this section or as ordered by the Engineer in accordance
3-02.2(4) Stockpiling Aggregates for Immediate Use
If the Contractor elects to stockpile aggregates from a source owned or controlled by
the Contracting Agency prior to use in the immediate Work, the stockpiling shall be done
within the area of the site provided by the Contracting Agency and in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications. If the Contractor elects to lease land to stockpile the
aggregates, the stockpiling shall be done in accordance with these Specifications and upon
proof that the lease will extend for a period of not less than one year beyond the completion
date of the Contract. All excess aggregates remaining in stockpiles after satisfying the needs of
the Contract—whether upon the site provided by the Contracting Agency or upon land leased
by the Contractor—shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 1-09.10. All costs resulting
from the production of the excess aggregates shall be included in the cost of production of the
aggregates actually incorporated in the Work.

Stockpiling Aggregates 3-02
If the Contractor elects to stockpile aggregates from a source not provided by the
Contracting Agency prior to use in the immediate Work, it will be subject to the approval
of the Engineer and provided that the aggregates comply with the quality and grading
requirements of these Specifications. All costs in connection with the acquisition of the
stockpile site, the preparation of the site, construction of the stockpiles, and the removal of
the aggregates from the stockpiles shall be included in the Contract prices of the various
Bid items of Work involved.
3-02.2(5) Preparation of Site
Before placing aggregates upon the stockpile site, the site shall be cleared of vegetation,
trees, stumps, brush, rocks, or other debris and the ground leveled to a smooth, firm, uniform
surface. The debris resulting from clearing and preparing the site shall be disposed of in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
3-02.2(6) Construction of Stockpiles
Stockpiles shall be constructed upon the prepared sites in accordance with stakes set by
the Engineer. The piles when completed shall be neat and regular in shape. The stockpile
height shall be limited to a maximum of 24 feet.
Stockpiles in excess of 200 cubic yards shall be built up in layers not more than 4 feet in
depth. Stockpile layers shall be constructed by trucks, clamshells, or other methods approved
by the Engineer. Pushing aggregates into piles with a bulldozer will not be permitted. Each
layer shall be completed over the entire area of the pile before depositing aggregates in the
succeeding layer. The aggregate shall not be dumped so that any part of it runs down and
over the lower layers in the stockpile. The method of dropping from a bucket or spout in one
location to form a cone shaped pile will not be permitted. Any method of placing aggregates
in stockpiles, which in the opinion of the Engineer, breaks, degrades, or otherwise damages
the aggregate, will not be permitted. Plank runways will be required, when deemed necessary
by the Engineer, for operating trucks on stockpiles to avoid tracking dirt or other foreign
matter onto the stockpiled materials. Stockpiles of less than 200 cubic yards shall be piled
in a manner to prevent segregation of the various sizes of material.
No equipment other than pneumatic tired equipment shall be used in constructing the
stockpiles of processed or manufactured aggregates.
Stockpiles of different types or sizes of aggregate shall be spaced far enough apart, or
separated by suitable walls or partitions, to prevent the mixing of the aggregates. Aggregate
shall not be deposited where traffic, vehicles, or Contractor’s equipment will either run over
or through the piles, or in any way cause foreign matter to become mixed with the aggregates.
3-02.2(7) Removing Aggregates From Stockpiles
Aggregates shall be removed from stockpile in a manner to avoid separation of sizes or
admixture of dirt or foreign material. The method and equipment used for loading will be
No equipment other than pneumatic tired equipment shall be used on stockpiles of
processed or manufactured aggregates in removing the materials from the stockpiles. When
removing materials from the face of the stockpile, the equipment shall be operated in a
manner to face-load from the floor to the top of the stockpile to obtain maximum uniformity
of material.
The Contractor shall remove only the amount of materials from the stockpile required to
satisfy the needs of the Contract. If a surplus remains in the stockpile, the Contractor shall
leave the surplus material in neat, compact piles, free of foreign matter. The entire stockpile
site shall be left in a neat and presentable condition.

3-02.3 Additional Requirements for Specific Aggregates

3-02.3(1) Washed Aggregates
Drainpipes under the stockpile shall be provided at the Contractor’s expense when, in the
opinion of the Engineer, such drains are necessary to properly drain the aggregates.
The roads and ground adjacent to the stockpile shall be kept free of dust. Washed aggregate
that has become coated with foreign material prior to use shall be washed until free of all
foreign material or it may be rejected.
Washed aggregate shall drain in hauling conveyances or stockpiles at least 12 hours before
being weighed or measured for batching and for a longer time if so directed by the Engineer.
3-02.4 Measurement
Clearing and grubbing of the stockpile site will be measured in accordance with
Section 2-01 when the Proposal includes such Bid items and such Work is required on
a stockpile site provided by the Contracting Agency.
Specific materials or aggregates designated in the Proposal to be in stockpile will be
measured by the ton unless the Proposal shows by the cubic yard. The cubic yard volume
for pay quantity will be determined by cross-sectioning the completed stockpile or by
computation of the volume between the original ground surface and the stockpile surface
using digital terrain modeling survey techniques.
Specific materials or aggregates designated in the Proposal to be from stockpile will be
measured by the ton or by the cubic yard, whichever is shown in the Proposal. If payment
is to be made on the basis of cubic yards, measurement will be made of the volume in the
hauling vehicle at the point of delivery on the Roadway.
3-02.5 Payment
All costs involved in preparing stockpile sites shall be included in the unit Contract prices
for the various Bid items being stockpiled, excepting that clearing and grubbing will be paid
in accordance with Section 2-01 when the Proposal includes such Bid items and such Work
is required on a stockpile site provided by the Contracting Agency.

Site Reclamation 3-03
3-03 Site Reclamation

3-03.1 Description
This Work shall consist of reclaiming land used for borrowing material, mining for
aggregates, sorting, or wasting materials as specified.
3-03.2(1) Contracting Agency-Provided Sites
All borrow, quarry, or pit sites of over 3 acres in size of disturbed land or resulting
in pit walls more than 30 feet high and steeper than a one to one slope which are owned
or furnished by the Contracting Agency shall be reclaimed as shown in the Plans and as
designated by the Engineer.
Ultimate reclamation plans are not normally required for borrow, quarry, or pit sites not
meeting the above criteria or for stockpile or waste sites. However, all such sites shall be
reclaimed to the extent necessary to control erosion and provide a satisfactory appearance
consistent with anticipated future use.
3-03.2(2) Contractor-Provided Sites
All borrow, quarry, and pit sites of over 3 acres in size of disturbed land or resulting in
pit walls more than 30 feet high and steeper than a 1:1 slope which are owned or furnished
by the Contractor shall be reclaimed in accordance with the conditions and requirements
of an approved reclamation permit acquired from the Department of Natural Resources.
When the Contractor obtains a reclamation permit from the Department of Natural
Resources, evidence of such approval shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to any Work
within the site.
Ultimate reclamation plans are not required for borrow, quarry, or pit sites not meeting the
above criteria or for stockpile or waste sites. However, all such sites shall be reclaimed to the
extent necessary to control erosion and provide a satisfactory appearance consistent with
anticipated future use.
Compliance with the State Environmental Policy Act (SEPA) is required for sites involving
more than 100 cubic yards of excavation or landfill throughout the lifetime of the site unless
the local agency in which the project is located establishes a greater amount. Sites involving
more than 500 cubic yards of excavation or landfill throughout the lifetime of the site always
require compliance with SEPA.
Under no circumstance will the Contractor be allowed to waste material within a wetland
as defined in Section 2-03.3(7).
3-03.2(3) Out-of-State Sites
All out-of-State borrow, quarry or pit, stockpile, and waste sites which are furnished
by the Contractor exclusively for use on this Contract shall be reclaimed in accordance with
an approved reclamation plan that is in compliance with local area restrictions.
3-03.3 Reclamation Plans
Reclamation plans for all borrow, quarry, or pit sites which are owned or furnished by
the Contracting Agency will normally be furnished by the Contracting Agency and the
requirements thereof included in the Contract documents. Should conditions require operations
within a Contracting Agency-owned or Contracting Agency-furnished site not provided for
in the Plans, the Contractor shall reclaim these sites in accordance with a reclamation plan
furnished by the Engineer.

3-03 Site Reclamation

A plan will not be required except on specific request for those sources of material for
which the Contractor has obtained a valid surface mining permit issued by the Department
of Natural Resources and has paid all required fees.
3-03.4(1) Erosion Control
All sites owned or furnished by the Contracting Agency will specify the kind and amount
of erosion control, if any, and include the requirements thereof in the Contract documents.
All sites owned or furnished by the Contractor shall, if specified on a reclamation plan
approved by the Engineer, require erosion control in accordance with Section 8-01 or plant
materials in accordance with Section 8-02.
3-03.4(2) Deviations From Approved Reclamation Plans
Reclamation of any site which deviates from the approved reclamation plan will not
be permitted without first revising the approved reclamation plan and obtaining the approval
of the Engineer.
3-03.5 Payment
All costs in connection with reclaiming sites to the full extent required by the Contract
shall be included in the costs of other items of Work involved in the project.
Payment will be made for any Work described in Sections 8-01 or 8-02 at applicable unit
Contract prices.
All costs involved in complying with the requirements of a reclamation permit acquired
from the Department of Natural Resources, complying with the requirements of a reclamation
plan approved by the Engineer, or with reclaiming sites to the full extent required by the
Contract shall be included in the costs of other items of Work involved in the project.

Acceptance of Aggregate 3-04
3-04 Acceptance of Aggregate

3-04.1 Description
This work shall consist of acceptance of aggregate as provided for under statistical or
nonstatistical evaluation.
All aggregates shall meet the requirements in Section 9-03.
Acceptance of aggregate by statistical evaluation is administered under Section 1-06.2.
Statistical evaluation will be used for an aggregate material when the proposed plan quantity
of the aggregate material exceeds two sublots as shown in Table 1.
Nonstatistical evaluation will be used for the acceptance of aggregate materials when the
proposed plan quantity is equal to or less than two sublots as shown in Table 1.
3-04.2 Materials
Material shall meet the requirements of the following section:
Aggregates 9-03
3-04.3(1) General
For the purpose of statistical and nonstatistical acceptance sampling and testing, all test
results obtained for a material type will be evaluated collectively. Sublot sampling and testing
will be performed on a random basis at the frequency of one sample per sublot. Based on plan
quantities, the sublot size will be determined to the nearest 100 tons (50 cy). The maximum
sublot size will be as defined in Table 1.
3-04.3(2) Point of Acceptance
The point of acceptance shall be as designated by the Engineer. Multiple sources shall
not be placed within the same limits of each separate spreading operation or in such a way
that the intermingling of different sources occurs. Individual compaction lifts may be of a
different source.
3-04.3(3) Sampling
The sampling of aggregate materials shall be performed on a random basis using WSDOT
T 716, Method of Random Sampling. Samples for acceptance testing shall be obtained by
the Engineer, or their designated representative. If ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall obtain the sample in the presence of the Engineer or their representative. The aggregate
material shall be sampled in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 2 and Section 1-05.6. The
sample size shall be equal to the minimum requirements of FOP for AASHTO T 2.
3-04.3(4) Testing Results
The results of all acceptance testing performed in the field and the Composite Pay Factor
(CPF) of the lot after three sublots have been tested will be available to the Contractor through
WSDOT’s website.
3-04.3(5) Nonstatistical Evaluation
Each lot of aggregate materials produced under nonstatistical evaluation and having all
constituents falling within the specification limits shall be accepted with no further evaluation.
When one or more constituents fall outside the specification limits, the material will be
statistically evaluated. A minimum of three sublots will be sampled and tested, when less
than three sublots exist additional samples shall be tested to provide a minimum of three sets
of results for evaluation. The test results of the sublots shall be evaluated in accordance with
Section 1-06.2 using the price adjustment factors from Table 2 to determine the appropriate
CPF. The maximum CPF shall be 1.00. If the CPF is below 1.00 but is equal to or above 0.75,
a price adjustment will be calculated in accordance with Section 3-04.3(8).
When the aggregate does not have established price adjustment factors, use the appropriate
price adjustment factors from “Other Materials” as listed in Table 2.

3-04.3(6) Statistical Evaluation

For statistical evaluation a lot is defined as 15 sublots, the final lot will be increased to
a maximum of 25 sublots. All test results obtained for a material type will be evaluated in
accordance with Section 1-06.2. Each lot of aggregate materials produced under statistical
evaluation will be determined to be acceptable if the Composite Pay Factor (CPF) when
calculated in accordance with Section 1-06.2(2) using the price adjustment factors from
Table 2 is 1.00 or greater. The Contractor shall be paid the unit bid price for aggregate
materials with a CPF of 1.00 or greater. If the CPF is below 1.00 but is equal to or above
0.75, calculate the price adjustment in accordance with Section 3-04.3(8).
When the aggregate does not have established price adjustment factors, use the
appropriate price adjustment factors from “Other Materials” as listed in Table 2.
3-04.3(7) Rejected Work
3-04.3(7)A General
Work that is defective or does not conform to Contract requirements shall be rejected.
3-04.3(7)B Rejection by Contractor
The Contractor may, prior to sampling, elect to remove any defective material and
replace it with new material. Any such new material will be sampled, tested, and evaluated
for acceptance.
3-04.3(7)C Rejection Without Testing
The Engineer may, without sampling, reject any load or stockpile that appears defective.
Material rejected before placement shall not be incorporated into the work. Any rejected work
shall be removed.
No payment will be made for the rejected materials unless the Contractor requests that
the rejected material be tested. If the Contractor elects to have the rejected material tested, a
minimum of three representative samples shall be obtained and tested. Acceptance of rejected
material will be based on conformance with the statistical acceptance Specification. If the CPF
for the rejected material is less than 0.75, no payment will be made for the rejected material;
in addition, the cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor. If the CPF is
greater than or equal to 0.75, the cost of sampling and testing will be borne by the Contracting
Agency. If the material is rejected before placement and the CPF is greater than or equal to
0.75, compensation for the rejected material will be at a CPF of 0.75. If rejection occurs after
placement and the CPF is greater than 0.75, compensation for the rejected mix will be at the
calculated CPF with an addition of 25 percent of the unit Contract price added for the cost of
removal and disposal.
3-04.3(7)D Lots and Sublots
3-04.3(7)D1 A Partial Sublot
In addition to the preceding random acceptance sampling and testing, the Engineer may
also isolate from a normal sublot any material that is suspected of being defective.
Such isolated material will not include an original sample location. A minimum of three
random samples of the suspect material will be obtained and tested. The material will then
be evaluated as an independent lot in accordance with Section 1-06.2(2).
3-04.3(7)D2 An Entire Sublot
An entire sublot that is suspect of being defective may be rejected. When a sublot is
rejected a minimum of two additional samples from this sublot will be obtained. These
additional samples and the original sublot will be evaluated as an independent lot in
accordance with Section 1-06.2(2).

3-04.3(7)D3 A Lot in Progress

The Contractor shall shut down operations and shall not resume placement of the aggregate
until such time as the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the specification can be
produced:
a. When the Composite Pay Factor (CPF), for a lot in progress, is less than 1.00 and the
contractor is taking no corrective action; or
b. When the Pay Factor (PF) for any component of the lot in progress, is less than 0.95
and the contractor is taking no corrective action; or
c. When either the PFi for any constituent or the CPF for a lot in progress is less than 0.75.
3-04.3(7)D4 An Entire Lot
An entire lot with a CPF of less than 0.75 will be rejected.
3-04.3(8) Price Adjustments for Quality of Aggregate
All aggregate material will be subject to price adjustments. The maximum attainable
Composite Pay Factor (CPF) shall be 1.00. The aggregate Compliance Price Adjustment for
acceptance of the aggregate will be calculated as follows:
Aggregate Compliance Price Adjustment = (Composite Pay Factor – 1.00)
(quantity of material) (unit bid price or Contingent Unit Price as shown in Table 1,
whichever is higher)
For aggregate materials lacking a separate unit bid price, the unit bid prices shall be taken
as the value listed in Table 1 for “Contingent Unit Price”.
If a component is not measured in accordance with these specifications, its individual pay
factor will be considered 1.00 in calculating the composite pay factor.
3-04.4 Vacant
3-04.5 Payment
“Aggregate Compliance Price Adjustment”, by calculation.
“Aggregate Compliance Price Adjustment” shall be calculated and paid for as described
under Section3-04.3(8) Price Adjustments for Quality of Aggregate.

Table 1
Aggregate Acceptance Parameters
Contingent
Contingent
Size (Tons)
Unit Price
Unit Price
Maximum
Maximum
Size (CY)
Per Ton
Per CY
Sublot
Sublot
Standard
Specifications Item
9-03.1 Concrete Aggregate (except pavement) 2000 10001 $15.002 $30.002
9-03.1 Concrete Aggregate (pavement) 4000 20001 $15.002 $30.002
9-03.4(2) Crushed Screening3 1000 500 $20.00 $40.00
9-03.8(2) HMA Aggregate 2000 $15.00
9-03.9(1) Ballast 2000 1000 $20.00 $40.00
9-03.9(2) Permeable Ballast 2000 1000 $25.00 $50.00
9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing 2000 1000 $20.00 $40.00
9-03.9(4) Maintenance Rock 2000 1000 $20.00 $40.00
9-03.10 Gravel Base 4000 2000 $15.00 $30.00
9-03.11(1) Streambed Sediment 500 250 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.12(1)A Gravel Backfill for Foundations Class A 1000 500 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.12(1)B Gravel Backfill for Foundations Class B 1000 500 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.12(2) Gravel Backfill for Walls 1000 500 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.12(3) Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding 1000 500 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.12(4) Gravel Backfill for Drains 500 250 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.12(5) Gravel Backfill for Drywells 500 250 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.13 Backfill for Sand Drains 2000 1000 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.13(1) Sand Drainage Blanket 4000 2000 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.14(1) Gravel Borrow 4000 2000 $15.00 $30.00
9-03.14(2) Select Borrow 4000 2000 $15.00 $30.00
9-03.14(4) Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Walls 4000 2000 $30.00 $60.00
9-03.17 Foundation Material, Class A and B 1000 500 $25.00 $50.00
9-03.18 Foundation Material Class C 1000 500 $25.00 $50.00
9-03.19 Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill 4000 2000 $30.00 $60.00
1Based on 1000 CY of Concrete.
2 Priceadjustment only applies to the actual quantity of aggregate used in the concrete.
3Contingent unit price per S.Y. is $0.30.

Table 2
Price Adjustment Factors
Other Specifications
Nominal Maximum
Sieves: #8 to #100
Sieve: 100% Pass
Size Sieve: 100%
Sand Equivalent
Maximum Size
Sieves #4 and
Specification
#200 Sieve
Fracture2
Larger
Pass1
Other
Standard
Specifications Item
9-03.1 Concrete Aggregate 2 2 2 10 20
(all concrete aggregate
-including pavement)
9-03.4(2) Crushed Screening 2 2 5 5 20 15
9-03.8(2) HMA Aggregate 15 15 Uncompacted
Void
Content 15
9-03.9(1) Ballast 2 2 5 5 10 15 Dust Ratio 15
9-03.9(2) Permeable Ballast 2 2 5 5 15
9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing 2 2 5 5 10 15 15
9-03.9(4) Maintenance Rock 2 2 5 5 10 15 15
9-03.10 Gravel Base 2 5 6 10 Dust Ratio 10
9-03.11(1) Streambed Sediment 2 2 5 5 10
9-03.12(1)A Gravel Backfill for
Foundations Class A3
9-03.12(1)B Gravel Backfill for 2 5 6 10 Dust Ratio 10
Foundations Class B
9-03.12(2) Gravel Backfill for Walls 2 2 5 6 10 Dust Ratio 10
9-03.12(3) Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone 2 2 5 5 6 10
Bedding
9-03.12(4) Gravel Backfill for Drains 2 2 5 6
9-03.12(5) Gravel Backfill for Drywells 2 2 5 6
9-03.13 Backfill for Sand Drains 2 5 3 10
9-03.13(1) Sand Drainage Blanket 2 5 3 10
9-03.14(1) Gravel Borrow 2 2 5 5 5 10
9-03.14(2) Select Borrow 2 2 5 5 6 10
9-03.14(4) Gravel Borrow for Structural 2 2 5 5 5 10 Other4
Earth Walls
9-03.17 Foundation Material, Class 2 3
A&B
9-03.18 Foundation Material Class C 2 3
9-03.19 Bank Run Gravel for Trench 2 2 5 6 10 Dust Ratio 10
Backfill
Other Materials 2 2 5 5 10 15 15 Dust Ratio 10
1For Aggregate, the nominal maximum size sieve is the largest standard sieve opening listed in the applicable specification upon
which more than 1-percent of the material by weight is permitted to be retained. For concrete aggregate, the nominal maximum
size sieve is the smallest standard sieve opening through which the entire amount of aggregate is permitted to pass.
2Price adjustment factor applies where criteria is contained in the material specification.
3Use the price adjustment factors for the material that is actually used.
4Resistivity 10, pH 10, Chlorides 5, and Sulfates 5.


Division 4 Bases
4-01 Vacant

4-02 Gravel Base
4-02 Gravel Base

4-02.1 Description
This Work shall consist of constructing one or more layers of gravel base upon a prepared
Subgrade in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades,
depth, and typical cross-section shown in the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
4-02.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the requirements of the following section:
Gravel Base 9-03.10
Gravel base shall be uniformly spread upon the prepared Subgrade to the depth, width,
and cross-section shown in the Plans. Construction methods used shall meet the applicable
requirements of Sections 4-04.3.
4-02.4 Measurement
Gravel base will be measured in the same manner prescribed for the measurement
of crushed surfacing materials as set forth in Section 4-04.4.
4-02.5 Payment
Payment will be made for the following Bid item when shown in the Proposal:
“Gravel Base”, per ton, or per cubic yard.

Vacant 4-03
4-03 Vacant

4-04 Ballast and Crushed Surfacing

4-04.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing one or more courses of crushed stone upon a prepared
Subgrade in accordance with these Specifications in conformity with the lines, grades, depth,
and typical cross-sections shown in the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
Surfacing materials and ballast may also be specified to be placed in stockpiles for
future use.
4-04.2 Materials
Ballast 9-03.9(1)
Permeable Ballast 9-03.9(2)
Crushed Surfacing 9-03.9(3)
Maintenance Rock 9-03.9(4)
4-04.3(1) Equipment
All equipment necessary for the satisfactory performance of this construction shall be
on the project and approved by the Engineer prior to beginning work. If central mix plant
methods are used, the central mixing plant shall comply with the following requirements:
The cold aggregate feeder shall be mechanically operated and adjustable to the extent
necessary to provide a uniform and continuous flow of materials. These materials shall be
deposited in an approved mixer with a sufficient amount of water being added to obtain
the required density when spread and compacted. The water shall be weighed or metered,
and dispensed through a device providing uniform dispersion across the mixer.
The mixing plant shall be provided with weighing or calibrating devices, feeders,
provisions for sampling, and other devices and equipment so designed, coordinated, and
operated to produce a uniform mixture, and to permit the sampling of the materials before
and after mixing. The mixer shall be kept in good condition, and mixing blades or paddles
shall be of proper size, adjustment, and clearance to provide positive and uniform mixing
of the mixture at all times.
The capacity of the plant and equipment furnished for the Work shall be adequate at all
times to provide for efficient and continuous operations insofar as practical.
4-04.3(2) Subgrade
The Subgrade shall be prepared as specified in Section 2-06 and shall be approved by the
Engineer before placing ballast or surfacing materials.
4-04.3(3) Mixing
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor may use either, or both, of the following
described methods:
1. Central Plant Mix Method – The surfacing material and water shall be mixed in an
approved mixing plant as described in Section 4-04.3(1). The completed mixture shall
be a thoroughly mixed combination of proportioned materials and water, uniform in
distribution of particle sizes and moisture content. A mixture containing water in excess
of the proportion established by the Engineer will not be accepted.
2. Road Mix Method – After material for each layer of surfacing has been placed, the
material shall be mixed until uniform throughout by motor graders or other equipment
approved by the Engineer. Water to facilitate mixing and compacting shall be added in
amounts approved by the Engineer.

Ballast and Crushed Surfacing 4-04
4-04.3(4) Placing and Spreading

1. Central Plant Mix Method – After mixing, material for each layer of surfacing shall
be transported to the Roadway in approved vehicles. Vehicles for hauling the mixture
shall be capable of depositing the mixture within the receiving hopper of the spreading
equipment, or in windrows of uniform size in front of the spreading equipment, with a
minimum of segregation of the mix.
A motor grader may be used as the spreading machine or the spreading machine shall be
capable of receiving the material by direct deposit in its hopper from the hauling vehicle
or from a uniform windrow, and be capable of spreading and screeding the material to a
depth and surface that when compacted will be true to line, grade, depth of course, and
cross-section without further shaping.
2. Road Mix Method – Each layer of surfacing material shall be spread by equipment
that is approved by the Engineer. Equipment that causes segregation of the surfacing
material during the spreading operation will not be allowed. Similar types of spreading
equipment shall be used throughout the limits of each separate spreading operation.
Spreading on small areas of less than 2,000 square yards or on areas irregular in shape,
may be accomplished by other means as approved by the Engineer.
The following nominal depth of compacted material shall not be exceeded in any one
course without the approval of the Engineer:
Ballast 0.50 foot
Gravel Base 0.75 foot
Crushed Surfacing 0.35 foot
4-04.3(5) Shaping and Compaction
Immediately following spreading and final shaping, each layer of surfacing shall be
compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density determined by the requirements of
Section 2-03.3(14)D before the next succeeding layer of surfacing or pavement is placed.
The determination of field in-place density shall be made by the Nuclear gauge. When the
thickness of surfacing is less than 0.15 foot, density testing will not be required and the
Engineer will determine the number of coverages required for the particular compaction
equipment available. Vibratory compactors and rollers shall obtain the specified density
for each layer. A mist spray of water shall be applied as needed to replace moisture lost by
evaporation. The completed layer shall have a smooth, tight, uniform surface true to the
line, grade, and cross-section shown in the Plans, or as staked.
4-04.3(6) Keystone
When necessary, as determined by the Engineer, crushed surfacing top course shall be
used for keystone to key the top surface of ballast, gravel base, crushed surfacing base course,
or any other surfacing course that requires keying. The keystone shall be spread evenly on
top of the surfacing course by means of approved spreading equipment. The surface shall be
watered and, if necessary, bladed lightly until the keystone is worked into the interstices of
the surfacing course without excessive displacement and shall be compacted. The operations
of adding keystone, wetting, blading, and compacting shall be continued until the course has
become thoroughly keyed and compacted.
When keystone is required, that is subject to public traffic, it shall be placed before
terminating each day’s operation.
Keystone placed for the convenience of the Contractor, with approval of the Engineer, for
the purpose of creating a more dense surface on which to pave will be allowed within the top
0.20 foot of crushed surfacing base course, gravel base, or ballast. Keystone placed for this
purpose will be paid for at the lower unit Contract price for either the base material being
keyed or crushed surfacing top course.

4-04.3(7) Miscellaneous Requirements

The surface of each layer of surfacing material shall be maintained true to line, grade, and
cross-section by grading, watering, and rolling until placing the next succeeding course. The
first course of surfacing material shall be placed on all available Subgrade before placing the
succeeding course unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Unless otherwise approved,
there shall be a distance of not less than one station between the construction of any two
courses of surfacing or ballast.
Should irregularities develop in any surface during or after compaction, they shall be
remedied by loosening the surface and correcting the defects after which the entire area
including the surrounding surface shall be thoroughly recompacted. Any additional materials
necessary to make the repairs shall be furnished by the Contractor at the unit Contract price.
4-04.3(8) Weather Limitations
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the weather is such that satisfactory results cannot be
obtained, the Contractor shall suspend operations until the weather is favorable. No surfacing
materials shall be placed in snow or on a soft, muddy, or frozen Subgrade.
4-04.3(9) Hauling
Hauling equipment shall be routed over the Roadway in a manner to be most effective
in the compacting of the surfacing. Hauling over any of the surfacing in the process of
construction will not be permitted when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the effect will be
detrimental. All loads shall be of uniform capacity unless deviation is expressly authorized
by the Engineer.
4-04.3(10) Hours of Work
The Contractor shall arrange surfacing operations so that the placing of materials will be
accomplished during daylight hours. However, when necessary to complete the project within
the time specified, or to avoid peak periods of public traffic, Work may be undertaken during
the hours of darkness, provided the Contractor furnishes and operates adequate lighting.
Inability to demonstrate reliable and satisfactory results will be reason to order termination
of night operations, and the Contractor shall procure additional equipment and personnel
necessary to satisfactorily complete the Work as specified while operating during daylight
hours only.
4-04.3(11) Permeable Ballast
Permeable ballast shall not be placed until the abutting pavement has been completed
unless designated by the Engineer. Permeable ballast shall be placed through a spreader box
in one lift. Processing of the permeable ballast course on the Roadway will not be permitted.
Compaction shall be accomplished by making a minimum of three passes over the aggregate
with a vibratory compactor of a type acceptable to the Engineer. The density requirements
of Section 4-04.3(5) shall not apply.
4-04.4 Measurement
Crushed surfacing top course, base course, ballast, and gravel base, when mixed at a central
plant, will be measured by the ton. The weight of water added at the plant will be deducted
on a daily basis from the total tonnage of aggregates, including water, placed that day which
were processed through the central plant and placed on the Roadway. The resultant tonnage
of surfacing materials will be paid for at the unit Contract price. The weight of deducted
water will be converted to gallons and will be paid for at the unit Contract price for water.
Crushed surfacing top course, base course, ballast, and gravel base, when mixed by
the road mix method, will be measured by the ton or by the cubic yard. If measured by the
cubic yard, measurement will be made in the hauling conveyance at the point of delivery on
the Roadway.
Permeable ballast will be measured by the ton or by the cubic yard.

Ballast and Crushed Surfacing 4-04
Crushed surfacing materials for placement in stockpile will be measured by the ton or
cubic yard. If measured by the cubic yard, the volume will be determined by cross-sectioning
the stockpile.
Maintenance rock will be measured in the same manner prescribed for crushed surfacing
materials.
Water used in placing and compacting surfacing materials on the Roadway will be
measured in accordance with Section 2-07.
4-04.5 Payment
“Crushed Surfacing Top Course (or Base Course)”, per ton, or per cubic yard.
“Crushed Surfacing Top Course (or Base Course) in Stockpile”, per ton, or per cubic yard.
“Crushed Surfacing Top Course (or Base Course) from Stockpile”, per ton, or per cubic yard.
“Ballast”, per ton, or per cubic yard.
“Ballast in Stockpile”, per ton, or per cubic yard.
“Ballast from Stockpile”, per ton, or per cubic yard.
“Permeable Ballast”, per ton, or per cubic yard.
“Permeable Ballast in Stockpile”, per ton or per cubic yard.
“Permeable Ballast from Stockpile”, per ton or per cubic yard.
“Maintenance Rock ½ In. Minus in Stockpile”, per ton, or per cubic yard.


Division 5 Surface Treatments and Pavements
5-01 Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation
5-01.1 Description
This Work consists of rehabilitating or replacing section(s) of cement concrete pavement in
accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with the lines, grades, thicknesses, and
typical cross-sections shown in the Plans or established by the Engineer.
5-01.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the following requirements of the following sections:
Cement 9-01
Fine Aggregate 9-03
Coarse Aggregate 9-03
Combined Aggregate 9-03
Joint Filler 9-04.1
Joint Sealants 9-04.2
Closed Cell Foam Backer Rod 9-04.2(3)A
Dowel Bars 9-07.5
Tie Bars 9-07.6
Concrete Patching Material 9-20
Curing Materials and Admixtures 9-23
Water 9-25
Epoxy Resins (bonding agents) 9-26
Parting Compound shall be a curing compound, grease or other substance approved
by the Engineer.
Dowel Bar Retrofit
Dowel bar expansion caps shall be tight fitting and made of non-metallic material, which
will allow for ¼ inch of movement at each end of the bar.
Chairs for supporting the dowel bar shall be epoxy coated according to Section 9-07.3
or made from non-metallic material.
The foam insert shall be closed cell foam faced with poster board material or plastic faced
material on each side commonly referred to as foam core board by office suppliers. The foam
insert shall be capable of remaining in a vertical position and tight to all edges during the
placement of the concrete patching material. Caulking filler used for sealing the transverse
joint at the bottom and sides of the slot shall be a silicone caulk.
5-01.3(1) Vacant
5-01.3(1)A Mix Designs
The Contractor shall use either concrete patching materials or cement concrete for the
rehabilitation of cement concrete pavement. Concrete patching materials shall be used
for spall repair and dowel bar retrofitting and cement concrete shall be used for concrete
panel replacement.
5-01.3(1)A1 Concrete Patching Materials
1. Materials – The prepackaged concrete patching material and the aggregate extender
shall conform to Section 9-20.
2. Submittals and Mix Approval – The Contractor shall use the Manufacturer’s
recommended proportions for the mix design to be submitted to the Engineer for the

concrete patching material. The Contractor’s submittal shall include the mix proportions
of the prepackaged concrete patching material, water, aggregate extender, and the
proposed sources for all aggregates. If not approved for use on the QPL, submit test
data indicating compliance with Section 9-20.
5-01.3(1)A2 Cement Concrete for Panel Replacement
Cement concrete for panel replacement shall meet the requirements of Sections 5-05.3(1)
and 5-05.3(2) and be air entrained with a design air content of 5.5 percent. Cement concrete
for panel replacement may use rapid hardening hydraulic cement meeting the requirements
of Section 9-01.2(2). Rapid hardening hydraulic cement will be considered a cementitious
material for the purpose of calculating the water/cementitious materials ratio and the minimum
cementitious materials requirement.
5-01.3(1)B Equipment for Panel Replacement
In addition to Sections 5-05.3(3)A, 5-05.3(3)B, 5-05.3(3)D, and 5-05.3(3)E the following
shall apply:
1. Mobile volumetric mixers shall be calibrated in accordance with Section 6-09.3(1)H.
The references to the latex admixture shall not apply.
2. The equipment for grinding cement concrete pavement shall use diamond embedded
saw blades gang mounted on a self propelled machine that is specifically designed to
smooth and texture concrete pavement. The equipment shall not damage the underlying
surface, cause fracture, or spalling of any joints.
5-01.3(2) Material Acceptance
5-01.3(2)A Concrete Patching Material
Acceptance shall be based on field verification of the prepackaged patching material,
and whether the amount of added water and aggregate extender complies with the mix design.
5-01.3(2)B Cement Concrete for Panel Replacement
The point of acceptance will be at the discharge of the placement system.
The concrete producer shall provide a certificate of compliance for each truckload
of concrete in accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)B.
Acceptance testing for compliance of air content and 28-day compressive strength shall
be conducted from samples obtained according to FOP for WAQTC TM 2. Air content shall
be determined by conducting FOP for AASHTO T 152. Compressive Strength shall be
determined by AASHTO T 22 and FOP for AASHTO T 23. The lower Specification limit
for air content shall be 3 percent, and the upper Specification limit for air content shall be
7 percent. The lower Specification limit for compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi.
The Contractor shall provide cure boxes in accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)H, and
protect concrete cylinders in cure boxes from excessive vibration and shock waves during
the curing period in accordance with Section 6-02.3(6)D. Payment for cure boxes shall be
5-01.3(2)B1 Conformance to Mix Design
Acceptance of cement concrete pavement for panel replacement shall be in accordance
with Section 5-01.3(2)B. The cement, coarse, and fine aggregate weights shall be within the
tolerances of the mix design in accordance with Section 5-05.3(1).
5-01.3(2)B2 Rejection of Concrete
Rejection by the Contractor: The Contractor may, prior to sampling, elect to remove any
defective material and replace it with new material at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
The replacement material will be sampled, tested and evaluated for acceptance.
Rejection without Testing: The Engineer may reject any load that appears defective prior to
placement. Material rejected before placement shall not be incorporated into the pavement. No

Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation 5-01
payment will be made for the rejected materials unless the Contractor requests that the rejected
material be tested. If the Contractor elects to have the rejected materials tested, a sample will
be taken and both the air content and strength shall be tested by WSDOT.
Payment for rejected material will be based on the results of the one sample, which was
taken and tested. If the rejected material fails either test, no payment will be made for the
rejected material and in addition, the cost of sampling and testing, at the rate of $250.00 per
sample shall be borne by the Contractor. If the rejected material passes both tests the mix will
be compensated for at actual invoice cost and the cost of the sampling and testing will borne
by the Contracting Agency.
5-01.3(3) Vacant
5-01.3(4) Replace Cement Concrete Panel
Curing, cold weather Work, concrete pavement construction in adjacent lanes, and
protection of pavement shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(13) through
Section 5-05.3(15).
Concrete slabs to be replaced as shown in the Plans or staked by the Engineer shall be
at least 6.0 feet long and full width of an existing pavement panel. The portion of the panel
to remain in place shall have a minimum dimension of 6 feet in length and full panel width;
otherwise the entire panel shall be removed and replaced. There shall be no new joints closer
than 3.0 feet to an existing transverse joint or crack. A vertical full depth saw cut is required
along all longitudinal joints and at transverse locations and, unless the Engineer approves
otherwise, an additional vertical full depth relief saw cut located 12 to 18 inches from and
parallel to the initial longitudinal and transverse saw cut locations is also required. Removal
of existing cement concrete pavement shall not cause damage to adjacent slabs that are to
remain in place. The Contractor, at no cost to the Contracting Agency, shall repair any damage
caused by the Contractor’s operation. In areas that will be ground, slab replacements shall be
performed prior to pavement grinding.
When new concrete pavement is to be placed against existing cement concrete pavement,
tie bars and dowel bars shall be drilled and grouted into the existing pavement with either Type
I or IV epoxy resin as specified in Section 9-26.
Dowel bars shall be placed at the mid depth of the concrete slab, centered over the
transverse joint, and parallel to the centerline and to the Roadway surface.
Placement Tolerances for Dowel Bars
1. ± 1 inch of the middle of the concrete slab depth.
2. ± 1 inch of being centered over the transverse joint.
3. ± ½ inch from parallel to the centerline.
4. ± ½ inch from parallel to the Roadway surface.
Dowel bars may be adjusted to avoid contact with existing dowel bars in the transverse
joint at approach slabs or existing panels without exceeding specified tolerances.
Tie bars shall be placed at the mid depth of the concrete slab, centered over the joint,
perpendicular to centerline, and parallel to the Roadway surface.
Placement Tolerances for Tie Bars
1. ±1 inch of the middle of the concrete slab depth.
2. ±1 inch of being centered over the joint.
3. ±1 inch from perpendicular to the centerline.
4. ±1 inch from parallel to the Roadway surface.
The horizontal position of tie bars may be adjusted to avoid contact with existing tie bars
in the longitudinal joint where panel replacement takes place.
Dowel bars and tie bars shall be placed according to the Standard Plan when multiple
panels are placed.

Panels shall be poured separately from the bridge approach slab.

Dowel bars to be drilled into existing concrete or at a new transverse contraction joint shall
have a parting compound, such as curing compound, grease, or other Engineer approved equal,
applied to them prior to placement.
The tie bar and dowel bar holes shall be blown clean with compressed air before grouting.
The bar shall be centered in the hole and all voids around the bar completely filled with grout.
Dams, if needed, shall be placed at the front of the holes to confine the grout and center the
bars in the holes. The dams shall permit the escape of air without leaking grout and shall not
be removed until the grout has cured in the hole.
The Contractor shall smooth the surfacing below the removed panel and compact it
to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Crushed surfacing base course, or hot mix asphalt may be
needed to bring the surfacing to grade prior to placing the new concrete.
If the material under the removed panel is uncompactable and the Engineer requires it, the
Contractor shall excavate the Subgrade 2 feet, place a soil stabilization construction geotextile
meeting the requirements of Section 9-33, and backfill with crushed surfacing base course.
This Work may include:
1. Furnishing and hauling crushed surfacing base course to the project site.
2. Excavating uncompactable material.
3. Furnishing and placing a soil stabilization construction geotextile.
4. Backfilling and compacting crushed surfacing base course.
5. Removing, hauling and restocking any unused crushed surfacing base course.
Side forms shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(7)B whenever a sawed full depth
vertical face cannot be maintained.
Grade control shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
All panels shall be struck off level with the adjacent panels and floated to a smooth surface.
Final finish texturing shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(11).
In areas where the Plans do not require grinding, the surface smoothness will be measured
with a 10-foot straightedge by the Engineer in accordance with Section 5-05.3(12). If the
replacement panel is located in an area that will be ground as part of portland cement concrete
pavement grinding in accordance with Section 5-01.3(9), the surface smoothness shall be
measured, by the Contractor, in conjunction with the smoothness measurement done in
All transverse and longitudinal joints shall be sawed and sealed in accordance with
Section 5-05.3(8). The Contractor may use a hand pushed single blade saw for sawing joints.
Opening to traffic shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(17).
Replacement panels that crack shall be repaired as specified in Section 5-05.3(22)
at no cost to the Contracting Agency. Epoxy-coated dowel bars meeting the requirements
of Section 9-07.5(1) may be substituted for the corrosion resistant dowel bars specified.
5-01.3(5) Partial Depth Spall Repair
Removal of the existing pavement shall not damage any pavement to be left in place. Any
existing pavement that is to remain that has been damaged shall be repaired at the Contractor’s
expense. If jackhammers are used for removing pavement, they shall not weigh more than
30 pounds, and chipping hammers shall not weigh more than 15 pounds. All power driven
hand tools used for the removal of pavement shall be operated at angles less than 45 degrees
as measured from the surface of the pavement to the tool. The patch limits shall extend beyond
the spalled area a minimum of 3 inches. Repair areas shall be kept square or rectangular.
Repair areas that are within 12 inches of another repair area shall be combined.
A vertical saw cut shall be made to a minimum depth of 2 inches around the area to be
patched as marked by the Engineer. The Contractor shall remove material within the perimeter
of the saw cut to a depth of 2 inches, or to sound concrete as determined by the Engineer.

The surface patch area shall be sand blasted and all loose material removed.
All sandblasting residue shall be removed using dry oil-free air.
Spall repair shall not be done in areas where dowel bars are encountered.
When a partial depth repair is placed directly against an adjacent longitudinal joint, a bond-
breaking material such as polyethylene film, roofing paper, or other material as approved by
the Engineer shall be placed between the existing concrete and the area to be patched.
Patches that abut working transverse joints or cracks require placement of a compressible
insert. The new joint or crack shall be formed to the same width as the existing joint or
crack. The compressible joint material shall be placed into the existing joint 1 inch below the
depth of repair. The compressible insert shall extend at least 3 inches beyond each end of the
patch boundaries.
Patches that abut the lane/Shoulder joint require placement of a formed edge, along the slab
edge, even with the surface.
The patching material shall be mixed, placed, consolidated, finished, and cured according
to manufacturer’s recommendations. Slab/patch interfaces that will not receive pavement
grinding shall be sealed (painted) with a 1:1 cement-water grout along the patch perimeter.
The Contractor shall reseal all joints in accordance with Section 5-05.3(8)B.
Opening to traffic shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(17).
5-01.3(6) Dowel Bar Retrofit
Dowel bars shall be installed in the existing concrete pavement joints and transverse cracks
where shown in the Plans or as marked by the Engineer.
Saw cut slots will be required in the pavement to place the center of the dowel at mid-depth
in the concrete slab. The completed slot shall provide a level, secure surface for the feet of
the dowel bar chairs. Slots that intersect longitudinal or random cracks shall not be retrofitted.
When gang saws are used, slots that are not used shall be cleaned and sealed with either Type I
or IV epoxy resin as specified in Section 9-26. The transverse joint between cement concrete
pavement and a Bridge approach slab shall not be retrofitted.
Saw cut slots shall be prepared such that dowel bars can be placed at the mid depth
of the concrete slab, centered over the transverse joint, and parallel to the centerline and
to the Roadway surface.
Placement Tolerances for Dowel Bars
1. ± 1 inch of the middle of the concrete slab depth.
2. ± 1 inch of being centered over the transverse joint.
3. ± ½ inch from parallel to the centerline.
4. ± ½ inch from parallel to the Roadway surface.
If jackhammers are used to break loose the concrete they shall weigh less than 30 pounds.
All slot surfaces shall be cleaned to bare concrete by sand blasting. The cleaning shall
remove all slurry, parting compound, and other foreign materials prior to installation of
the dowel. Any damage to the concrete shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the
Contracting Agency. Traffic shall not be allowed on slots where concrete has been removed.
Prior to placement, the dowel bars shall be lightly coated with a parting compound and
placed on a chair that will provide a minimum of ½-inch clearance between the bottom of the
dowel and the bottom of the slot.
The chair design shall hold the dowel bar tightly in place during placement of the concrete
patching material. If the transverse joint or crack is open ¼ inch or more, the Contractor shall
caulk the transverse joint or crack at the bottom and sides of the slot as shown in the Plans
immediately prior to placement of the dowel bar and concrete patching material. The caulking
filler shall not be placed any farther than ½ inch outside either side of the joint or crack. The
transverse joint or crack shall be caulked sufficiently to satisfy the above requirements and
to prevent any of the patching material from entering the joint/crack at the bottom or sides of
the slot.

A ⅜-inch-thick foam insert shall be placed at the middle of the dowel to maintain the
transverse joint. The foam insert shall fit tightly around the dowel and to the bottom and edges
of the slot and extend to the top of the existing pavement surface. The foam insert shall be
capable of remaining in a vertical position and held tightly to all edges during placement of the
patch. If for any reason the foam insert shifts during placement of the patch the Work shall be
rejected and redone at the Contractor’s expense.
Patching material shall be consolidated by using a 1-inch or less diameter vibrator as
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not overwork the patching material during the
patch consolidation process.
The patching material on the surface of the dowel bar slots shall not be overworked,
causing segregation and leaving the fine material on the surface. The patching material shall
be left ⅛ to ¼ inch high and not finished flush with the existing concrete surface.
The joint shall be maintained by saw cutting the surface with a hand pushed single blade
saw. The cut width shall be 3⁄16 to 5⁄16 inch and the depth 1½ inches. The cut length shall be
2¼ feet long centered over the three retrofit dowel bars and shall be sawed within 24 hours
after placement of the concrete patching material.
5-01.3(7) Sealing Existing Concrete Random Cracks
The Contractor shall route, clean and seal existing concrete random cracks where indicated
by the Engineer. Cracks smaller than 5⁄16 inch in width shall be routed to 5⁄16 inch wide by 1 inch
deep prior to placing the sealant. Cracks over 5⁄16 inch in width shall be cleaned and sealed.
All incompressible material shall be completely removed from the existing random crack
to a depth of ¾ inch. Immediately prior to sealing, the cracks shall be blown clean with dry,
oil free compressed air.
The top surface of the sealant shall be at least ¼ inch below the surface of the pavement.
5-01.3(8) Sealing Existing Longitudinal and Transverse Joint
The Contractor shall clean and seal existing longitudinal and transverse joints where shown
in the Plans or as marked by the Engineer.
Old sealant and incompressible material shall be completely removed from the joint to the
depth of the new reservoir with a diamond blade saw in accordance with the detail shown in
the Standard Plans. The removed sealant shall become the property of the Contractor and be
removed from the jobsite.
Removal of the old sealant for the entire depth of the joint is not required if the depth of
the new reservoir is less than the depth of the existing joint.
Joints constructed with joint tape do not require cleaning and sealing.
Immediately prior to sealing, the cracks shall be blown clean with dry oil-free compressed
air. If shown in the Plans, a backer rod shall be placed at the base of the sawn reservoir.
The joints shall be completely dry before the sealing installation may begin. Immediately
following the air blowing and backer rod replacement, if required, the sealant material shall
be installed in conformance to manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with
Section 5-05.3(8)B.
The top surface of the sealant shall be at least ¼ inch below the surface of the pavement.
5-01.3(9) Cement Concrete Pavement Grinding
Pavement grinding shall begin within 10 working days of placing dowel bar retrofit
patching materials. Once the grinding operation has started it shall be continuous until
completed. If new cement concrete pavement, in accordance with Section 5-05, is to be
placed next to rehabilitated cement concrete pavement, grind one pass along the edge of the
rehabilitated cement concrete pavement adjacent to where the new cement concrete pavement
is to be placed before the new cement concrete pavement is placed.

The pavement shall be ground in a longitudinal direction beginning and ending at lines
normal to the pavement centerline. Ninety-five percent of the surface area of the pavement
to be ground shall have a minimum of ⅛ inch removed by grinding.
Bridge decks, bridge approach slabs, and bridge overlay insets shall not be ground.
The ground pavement shall be feathered to match the elevation of the above features.
5-01.3(9)A Surface Finish
The final surface texture shall be uniform in appearance with longitudinal corduroy type
texture. The grooves shall be between 3⁄32 and 5⁄32 inches wide, and no deeper than 1⁄16 inch.
The land area between the grooves shall be between 1⁄16 and ⅛ inches wide.
5-01.3(10) Pavement Smoothness
Perform the Work described in Section 5-05.3(12), and the following:
Where the pavement is ground, calculation of the profile index shall exclude dips and
depressions in the existing Roadway. The profilograph generated reports shall be provided
to the Engineer prior to payment. The smoothness perpendicular to the centerline will be
measured with a 10-foot straightedge within the lanes. There shall be no vertical elevation
differences of more than a ¼ inch between lanes.
5-01.3(11) Concrete Slurry and Grinding Residue
All concrete slurry and grinding residue shall be removed from the pavement surface
on a continual basis immediately behind the grinding or cutting operations. Slurry shall
not be allowed to drain into an area open to traffic, off of the paved surface, into any
drainage structure, water of the state, or wetlands.
The Contractor shall collect the concrete slurry and grinding residue from the pavement
surface and dispose of it in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C. The Contractor shall submit
copies of all disposal tickets to the Engineer within 5 calendar days.
Opening to traffic shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(17).
5-01.4 Measurement
Replacement cement concrete panels will be measured by the square yard, based on
the actual width and length of the surface area placed.
Retrofit dowel bars will be measured per each for the actual number of bars used in
the completed Work.
Sealing existing concrete random cracks will be measured by the linear foot, measured
along the crack sealed.
Sealing existing longitudinal and transverse joint will be measured by the linear foot,
measured along the line of the completed joint.
Cement concrete pavement grinding will be measured by the square yard, based on the
actual width and length of area ground. Extra passes to meet the Specifications or overlaps
will not be measured.
5-01.5 Payment
Payment will be made for each of the following Bid items that are included in the Proposal:
“Replace Cement Concrete Panel”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard shall be full payment for all costs to complete
the Work as specified, including saw cutting full depth, removal and disposal of the existing
panels off of the Contracting Agency’s Right of Way, preparing the surfacing below the new
panel, provide, place and compact the crushed surfacing or hot mix asphalt, furnishing and
placing polyethylene film or building paper, furnishing and placing the cement concrete,
drilling the holes, providing and anchoring the dowel bars and tie bars, and for all incidentals
required to complete the Work as specified.
“Retrofit Dowel Bars”, per each.

The unit Contract price per each shall be full payment for all costs to complete the Work
as specified, including furnishing and installing parting compound, dowel bar expansion caps,
caulking filler, foam core insert material, cement patch where pavement is removed for dowel
bar retrofit and for all incidentals required to complete the Work as specified.
“Partial Depth Spall Repair”, by force account as provided in Section 1-09.6.
To provide a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an
amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor.
“Sealing Existing Concrete Random Crack”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Sealing Existing Concrete Random Crack”
shall be full payment for all costs to complete the Work as specified, including removing
incompressible material, preparing and sealing existing random cracks where existing random
cracks are cleaned and for all incidentals required to complete the Work as specified.
“Sealing Existing Longitudinal and Transverse Joint”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Sealing Existing Longitudinal and Transverse
Joint”, shall be full payment for all costs to complete the Work as specified, including
removing incompressible material, preparing and sealing existing transverse and longitudinal
joints where existing transverse and longitudinal joints are cleaned and for all incidentals
required to complete the Work as specified.
“Cement Concrete Pavement Grinding”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Cement Concrete Pavement Grinding”, when
multiplied by the number of units measured, shall be full payment for all costs to complete
the Work as specified. The costs of any additional pavement grinding and profiling required
to complete the Work as specified is also included in this payment.
“Replace Uncompactable Material”, by force account as provided in Section 1-09.6.
Payment for “Replace Uncompactable Material” will be by force account as provided
in Section 1-09.6 and will be full payment for all work required to replace uncompactable
material and provide base for the Concrete panel. This will include, but not be limited
to, excavating the subgrade, placement of a soil stabilization construction geotextile, and
backfilling with crushed surfacing base course, as well as the work detailed in items 1 through
5 noted in Section 5-01.3(4). For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for Bidders, the
Contracting Agency has entered an amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by
the Contractor.
All costs associated with the containment, collection and disposal of concrete slurry and
grinding residue shall be included in the applicable concrete grinding or cutting items of Work.

Bituminous Surface Treatment 5-02
5-02 Bituminous Surface Treatment

5-02.1 Description
This Work shall consist of constructing a single or multiple course bituminous surface
treatment (BST) in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with the lines
and cross-sections shown in the Plans or as designated by the Engineer.
5-02.1(1) New Construction
This method of treatment requires two applications of emulsified asphalt and three
applications of aggregate. The first application of emulsified asphalt is applied to an untreated
Roadway that is followed with an application of aggregate. The second application of
emulsified asphalt is followed with two additional applications of aggregate.
5-02.1(2) Seal Coats
This method requires the placing of one application of emulsified asphalt and one or more
sizes of aggregate as specified to an existing pavement to seal and rejuvenate the surface
and to produce a uniform Roadway surface with acceptable nonskid characteristics.
5-02.1(3) Pavement Sealers – Fog Seal
This method of treatment requires an application of emulsified asphalt over an existing
or newly constructed pavement as specified.
5-02.2 Materials
Cationic Emulsified Asphalt 9-02.1(6)
Aggregates for Bituminous Surface Treatment 9-03.4
Each source of aggregate for bituminous surface treatment shall be evaluated separately
for acceptance in accordance with Section 3-04.
5-02.3(1) Equipment
The equipment used by the Contractor shall be subject to approval by the Engineer before
its use.
The distributor shall be capable of uniformly applying emulsified asphalt at the required
application temperature and rate. A temperature measuring device shall be capable of reporting
the temperature of emulsified asphalt in the tank. A tachometer shall be required to accurately
control the application of emulsified asphalt. Distributors shall be equipped with an adjustable
spray bar with pressure pump and gauge. The power for operating the pressure pump shall be
supplied by a power unit which will provide a uniform spray from each of the nozzles across
the spray bar and extensions. The distributor truck shall have a volume control gauge. All
reading devices and gauges shall be easily accessible by Inspectors from the ground.
Rollers for seal coats shall be self-propelled pneumatic tired rollers. Rollers for new
construction shall be a combination of self-propelled pneumatic tired rollers and smooth-
wheeled rollers. Each roller shall not weigh less than 12 tons and shall be capable of
providing constant contact pressure. Operation of the roller shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Aggregate spreading equipment shall be self-propelled, supported on at least four
pneumatic tires, with an approved device for accurately metering and distributing the
aggregate uniformly over the Roadway surface. Spreading equipment shall be so equipped
that the operator has positive width control. This control shall allow the operator to adjust
the spreading width of aggregates in 6-inch increments without stopping the machine.
Brooms shall be motorized and capable of controlling vertical pressure.

Other equipment necessary to satisfactorily perform the Work as specified herein or

as designated by the Engineer shall be subject to approval by the Engineer before its use
in the Work.
Additional units shall be used in the Work when, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is
considered necessary in order to fulfill the requirements of these Specifications, or to complete
the Work within the time specified.
5-02.3(2) Preparation of Roadway Surface
5-02.3(2)A New Construction
The existing Roadway surface shall be shaped to a uniform grade and cross-section as
shown in the Plans, or as designated by the Engineer.
The Roadway shall be dampened, bladed and rolled until the entire Roadway surface
shows a uniform grading and conforms to the line, grade, and cross-section shown in the
Plans, or as staked. During the operation of blading and rolling, water shall be applied, if
necessary, in the amount and at the locations designated by the Engineer.
The entire surface shall be rolled with a smooth-wheeled or pneumatic-tired roller, or
both, as designated by the Engineer, except that the final rolling shall be accomplished with a
smooth-wheeled roller as specified in Section 5-02.3(1). Rolling shall continue until the entire
Roadway presents a firm, damp and unyielding surface.
Immediately before the first application of emulsified asphalt, the Roadway surface shall
be in the following condition: firm and unyielding, damp, free from irregularities and material
segregation, and true to line, grade, and cross-section.
No traffic will be allowed on the prepared surface until the first application of emulsified
asphalt and aggregate has been completed.
5-02.3(2)B Seal Coats
The existing bituminous surface shall be swept with a power broom until it is free from
dirt or other foreign matter. Hand push brooms shall be used to clean omissions of the power
broom. In addition to power and hand brooms, the use of other equipment may be necessary
to thoroughly clean the Roadway prior to the application of emulsified asphalt. Berms created
by the removal of dirt or other foreign matter shall be evenly distributed over the fore slope.
Repair of existing pavement shall be done in accordance with Section 5-04. The HMA
in repaired areas shall be fog sealed. HMA repaired areas may require a second fog seal
depending on surface texture as required by the Engineer. The pavement surface shall be dry
prior to fog sealing.
5-02.3(2)C Pavement Sealing – Fog Seal
Where shown in the Plans or directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall apply a fog
seal. Before application of the fog seal, all surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, soil,
pavement grindings, and other foreign matter. The existing pavement surface shall be dry.
5-02.3(2)D Soil Residual Herbicide
Where shown in the Plans, soil residual herbicide shall be applied in accordance with
Section 5-04. Application of the BST shall begin within 24 hours after application of
the herbicide.
5-02.3(2)E Crack Sealing
Where shown in the Plans, seal cracks and joints in the pavement in accordance with
Section 5-04.3(4)A1 and the following:
1. Cracks ¼ inch to 1 inch in width – fill with hot poured sealant.
2. Cracks greater than 1 inch in width – fill with sand slurry.

5-02.3(3) Application of Emulsified Asphalt and Aggregate

Upon the properly prepared Roadway surface, emulsified asphalt of the grade specified in
the Special Provisions shall be uniformly applied with distributors and specified aggregates
spread at the following rates:
Application Rate
Undiluted Emulsified Asphalt Aggregate Application
(gal. per sq. yd.) Applied Aggregate Size Rate (lbs. per sq. yd.)
New Construction
½ inch - No. 4
First Application 0.35-0.65 25-45
or ¾ inch - ½ inch
Second Application 0.35-0.60 ½ inch - No. 4 25-40
Choke Stone N/A No. 4 - 0 4-6
Seal Coats
⅝ inch – No. 4 ⅝ inch - No. 4 25-45
0.40-0.65
Choke Stone No. 4 - 0 4-6
½ inch – No. 4 ½ inch - No. 4 20-35
0.35-0.55
Choke Stone No. 4 - 0 4-6
⅜ inch – No. 4 0.35-0.55 ⅜ inch - No. 4 20-30
Choke Stone N/A No. 4 - 0 4-6
The Engineer will determine the application rates. The second application of emulsified
asphalt shall be applied the next day, or as approved by the Engineer.
Longitudinal joints will be allowed at only the centerline of the Roadway, the center of
the driving lanes, or the edge of the driving lanes.
To ensure uniform distribution of emulsified asphalt and that the distributor is correctly
calibrated, the Contractor shall provide a minimum 1,000-foot test strip when beginning a
BST section.
To avoid gaps and ridges at transverse junctions of separate applications of emulsified
asphalt and aggregate, the Contractor shall spread sufficient building paper over the treated
surface to ensure that the distributor will be functioning normally when the untreated surface
is reached. If ordered by the Engineer, the joints shall be cut back to a neat edge prior to
placing the building paper.
Should ridges, overlaps, or gaps occur at transverse joints, the Contractor shall repair the
defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In lieu of repair the Engineer may elect to accept
the completed joints and will deduct from monies due or that may become due the Contractor,
the sum of $200 for each joint where the deviations described above are found. Should
longitudinal joints occur outside the centerline of the Roadway, the center of the driving lanes,
or the edge of the driving lanes, the Contractor shall repair the defects to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
All costs involved in making the corrections to defects described above shall be borne
by the Contractor and no payment will be made for this Work.
Omissions (skips) by the distributor or tire marks on the uncovered emulsified asphalt
shall be immediately covered by hand patching with the same grade of emulsified asphalt
and aggregate used on the project.
The area covered by any one spread of emulsified asphalt shall be no more than can
be covered with aggregate within 1 minute from the time of application upon any part
of the spread. If field conditions warrant, this time may be increased as designated by
the Project Engineer.
Unless otherwise designated by the Engineer, emulsified asphalt shall be spread toward the
source of aggregate to avoid injury to the freshly treated surface.

Before application to the Roadway, emulsified asphalt shall be heated to the following
temperatures or that recommended by the manufacturer:
Type and Grade of Distributor Temperature
Emulsified Asphalt Min. °F Max. °F
New Construction and Seal Coats
CRS-1, CRS-2, CRS-2P 125 195
CMS-2, CMS-2S, CMS-2h 125 185
Fog Seal
CSS-1, CSS-1h 70 140
Before application of the fog seal, all surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of dust, soil,
pavement grindings, and other foreign matter. The fog seal emulsified asphalt shall be CSS-1
or CSS-1h diluted with water at a rate of one part water to one part emulsified asphalt unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. The fog seal shall be uniformly applied to the pavement
at a diluted rate of 0.10 – 0.18 gal/sy. The finished application shall be free of streaks and
bare spots.
Fog sealing shall be applied no sooner than 3 days, but no later than 14 days after new
construction or seal coat. If required, newly placed aggregates shall be swept prior to the
fog seal application. Rebrooming for fog seal applications shall be paid under “Additional
Brooming”, per hour as specified in Section 5-02.5.
5-02.3(4) Vacant
5-02.3(5) Application of Aggregates
All aggregate stockpiles shall be watered down to provide aggregates that are uniformly
damp at the time of placement on the Roadway.
After the emulsified asphalt has been spread evenly over the Roadway surface, aggregates
of the type specified shall be evenly applied to the Roadway surface by spreader equipment.
The aggregate shall be spread in one operation in such a manner that an 8-inch strip of
emulsified asphalt is left exposed along the longitudinal joint to form a lap for the succeeding
applications of emulsified asphalt. If necessary, thin or bare spots in the spread of aggregate
shall be corrected immediately by re-spreading with the chip spreader or by hand spreading
the aggregate.
A minimum of three pneumatic tired rollers providing a minimum of two complete
coverages to the Roadway immediately behind the spreading equipment for the coarse
aggregate shall be required.
The maximum rate of roller travel shall be limited to 8 mph.
The Contractor shall apply choke stone to the Roadway with additional spreading
equipment immediately following the initial rolling of the coarse aggregate unless otherwise
specified in the Contract documents or specified by the Engineer. Excess aggregate shall be
removed from the Roadway. A minimum of one pass with a pneumatic roller shall be made
across the entire width of the applied choke stone.
The operation of trucks hauling aggregate from the stockpile shall be so regulated that
no damage, as determined by the Engineer, will result to the Highway or the freshly applied
asphalt surface.
The completed surface shall be allowed to cure and then broomed as soon as practical.
If brooming causes rock to be turned or if the Engineer determines that additional cure
is needed, the Contractor shall broom the Roadway when directed by the Engineer. If, after
completion of the initial brooming, the Engineer determines the need to remobilize for
additional brooming, the Contractor shall rebroom the areas designated by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall apply water for dust control during brooming operations when safety or
environmental concerns arise, or as otherwise determined by the Project Engineer.

The Contractor shall be held responsible for protecting all surface waters, riparian habitats,
or other sensitive areas that may be encroached upon by brooming operations. Materials such
as dirt, foreign material, or aggregates removed from these areas shall become the property of
the Contractor and shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7).
The Contractor shall use a pickup broom in all curbed areas, on all bridges, within city
limits, within environmentally sensitive areas, and where shown in the Plans both before the
application of emulsified asphalt and during the final brooming operation. When the pickup
broom does not satisfactorily pickup the aggregate, manual methods shall be used. Materials
collected by the pick up broom shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
disposed of in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7).
Aggregates accumulated in intersections and driveways due to brooming operations
shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of in accordance with
Section 2-03.3(7).
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the brooming for each section is considered
complete. The Engineer will indicate acceptance or inform the Contractor of deficiencies
within 24 hours of notification.
5-02.3(6) Additional Emulsified Asphalt and Aggregate
If the application of emulsified asphalt or aggregate, or both, is insufficient or excessive for
the required results, the Engineer may require the Contractor to make an additional application
of one or both materials in accordance with these Specifications, or at the direction of the
Engineer. Additional emulsified asphalt or aggregate used will be paid for at the unit Contract
prices for the materials used.
5-02.3(7) Patching and Correction of Defects
Omissions by the distributor or damage to the treated surface of any coat shall be
immediately covered by hand patching with emulsified asphalt in adequate quantities.
Holes which develop in the surface shall be patched in the same manner as specified in
Section 5-02.3(2)A. All costs incurred by the Contractor, in coating omissions and patching,
shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the materials used.
Defects such as raveling, lack of uniformity, or other imperfections caused by faulty
workmanship shall be corrected and new Work shall not be started until such defects have
been remedied.
All improper workmanship and defective materials resulting from overheating, improper
handling or application, shall be removed from the Roadway by the Contractor and be
replaced with approved materials and workmanship at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
If the Engineer determines a fog seal is necessary at any time during the life of the
Contract, the Contractor shall apply a fog seal. The CSS-1 or CSS-1h emulsified asphalt may
be diluted with water at a rate of one part water to one part emulsified asphalt unless otherwise
specified by the Engineer.
5-02.3(8) Progress of Work
The Contractor shall organize the Work so that no longitudinal joints shall remain
open overnight.
5-02.3(9) Protection of Structures
The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting monument covers, sewer lids, manhole
covers, water valve covers, drainage grates, inlets, railroad tracks, bridge handrails and
expansion joints, guardrails, curbs, road signs, guide posts, or other facilities from the
application of emulsified asphalt and aggregates. This protective effort is to include uncovering
these items the same working day that the completed BST or seal coat construction has passed
the protected locations. If needed, drainage inlets shall be cleaned out immediately after final
brooming is completed. All costs incurred by the Contractor in necessary protective measures
shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various Bid items of Work involved.

5-02.3(10) Unfavorable Weather

Emulsified asphalt shall not be applied to a wet Roadway. Subject to the determination of
the Engineer, emulsified asphalt shall not be applied during rainfall, sand or dust storms, or
before any imminent storms that might damage the construction. The Engineer will have the
discretion as to whether the surface and materials are dry enough to proceed with construction.
The application of any emulsified asphalt to the Roadway shall be restricted to the
following conditions:
1. The Roadway surface temperature shall be at least 55ºF. The air temperature shall be
at least 60ºF and rising. The air temperature shall be not less than 70ºF when falling
and the wind shall be less than 10 mph as estimated by the Engineer.
2. The surface temperature shall be not more than 130º F or as otherwise determined by
the Engineer.
3. No emulsified asphalt shall be applied which cannot be covered 1 hour before darkness.
The Engineer may require the Contractor to delay application of emulsified asphalt until
the atmospheric and Roadway conditions are satisfactory.
4. Construction of bituminous surface treatments shall not be carried out before May 1
or after August 31 of any year except upon written order of the Project Engineer.
5-02.3(11) Temporary Pavement Markings
During bituminous surface treatment paving operations, temporary pavement markings
shall be maintained throughout the project. Temporary pavement markings shall be installed
on the Roadway that was paved that day. Temporary pavement markings shall be in
accordance with Section 8-23.
5-02.4 Measurement
Processing and finishing will be measured by the mile to the nearest 0.01 mile along
the main line Roadway. All related supplemental Roadways and irregular shaped areas will
be incidental.
Emulsified asphalt of the grade or grades specified will be measured by the ton in
accordance with Section 1-09.
Asphalt for fog seal will be measured by the ton, before dilution, in accordance with
Section 1-09.
Aggregate from stockpile for BST will be measured by the cubic yard in trucks at the
point of delivery on the Roadway.
Furnishing and placing crushed aggregate will be measured by the cubic yard in trucks
at the point of delivery on the Roadway, or by the ton in accordance with Section 1-09.1.
Additional brooming will be measured by the hour.
Water will be measured in accordance with Section 2-07.
5-02.5 Payment
“Processing and Finishing”, per mile.
The unit Contract price per mile for “Processing and Finishing” shall be full pay for
all costs to perform the specified Work including blading, scarifying, processing, leveling,
finishing, and the manipulation of aggregates as required. In the event the Proposal does not
include a Bid item for “Processing and Finishing” then all costs for processing and finishing
shall be included in other related items of Work.
“Emulsified Asphalt (_______)”, per ton.
The unit Contract price per ton for “Emulsified Asphalt (_______) shall be full pay for
all costs to perform the specified Work including furnishing, heating, hauling, and spreading
the emulsified asphalt on the Roadway.
“Asphalt for Fog Seal”, per ton.

The unit Contract price per ton for “Asphalt for Fog Seal” shall be full pay for all costs
to perform the specified Work for fog seal.
“Agg. from Stockpile for BST”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Aggregate from Stockpile for BST” shall be
full pay for all costs to perform the specified Work including loading, transporting, and placing
the material in the finished Work.
“Furnishing and Placing Crushed (_______)”, per cubic yard.
“Furnishing and Placing Crushed (_______)”, per ton.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard or per ton for “Furnishing and Placing Crushed
(_______) shall be full pay for all costs to perform the specified Work including furnishing,
transporting, and placing the material in the finished Work.
“Additional Brooming”, per hour.
The unit Contract price per hour for “Additional Brooming” shall be full pay for all costs
to perform the specified Work including rebrooming the Roadway.
“Water”, per M gal.
Payment for “Water” shall be in accordance with Section 2-07.5.
If the Proposal does not include a Bid item for water, the Contractor shall dampen
stockpiled or furnished aggregate as required, and the cost thereof shall be included in other
related items of the Work.
Any incidental Work required to complete the bituminous surface treatment that is not
specifically mentioned as included with the Bid items above shall be performed by the
Contractor and shall be included in the unit Contract prices of the various related Bid items.

5-03 Vacant
5-03 Vacant

Hot Mix Asphalt 5-04
5-04 Hot Mix Asphalt

This Section 5-04 is written in a style which, unless otherwise indicated, shall be
interpreted as direction to the Contractor.
5-04.1 Description
This Work consists of providing and placing one or more layers of plant-mixed hot mix
asphalt (HMA) on a prepared foundation or base, in accordance with these Specifications and
the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross-sections shown in the Plans. The manufacture
of HMA may include warm mix asphalt (WMA) processes in accordance with these
Specifications.
HMA shall be composed of asphalt binder and mineral materials as required, and may
include reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) or reclaimed asphalt shingles (RAS), mixed in the
proportions specified to provide a homogeneous, stable, and workable mix.
5-04.2 Materials
Provide materials as specified in these sections:
Asphalt Binder 9-02.1(4)
Cationic Emulsified Asphalt 9-02.1(6)
Anti-Stripping Additive 9-02.4
Warm Mix Asphalt Additive 9-02.5
Aggregates 9-03.8
Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) 9-03.8(3)B
Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles (RAS) 9-03.8(3)B
Mineral Filler 9-03.8(5)
Recycled Material 9-03.21
5-04.2(1) How to Get an HMA Mix Design on the QPL
Comply with each of the following:
• Develop the mix design in accordance with WSDOT SOP 732.
• Develop a mix design that complies with Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9-03.8(6).
• Develop a mix design no more than 6 months prior to submitting it for QPL evaluation.
• Submit mix designs to the WSDOT State Materials Laboratory in Tumwater, including
WSDOT Form 350-042.
• Include representative samples of the materials that are to be used in the HMA
production as part of the mix design submittal.
• Identify the brand, type, and percentage of anti-stripping additive in the mix
design submittal.
• Include with the mix design submittal a certification from the asphalt binder supplier that
the anti-stripping additive is compatible with the crude source and the formulation of
asphalt binder proposed for use in the mix design.
• Do not include warm mix asphalt (WMA) additives when developing a mix design or
submitting a mix design for QPL evaluation. The use of warm mix asphalt (WMA)
additives is not part of the process for obtaining approval for listing a mix design on the
QPL. Refer to Section 5-04.2(2)B.
The Contracting Agency’s basis for approving, testing, and evaluating HMA mix designs
for approval on the QPL is dependent on the contractual basis for acceptance of the HMA
mixture, as shown in Table 1.

Table 1
Basis for Contracting Agency Evaluation of HMA Mix Designs for Approval on the QPL
Contractual Basis for Basis for Contracting Agency Contracting Agency Materials
Acceptance of HMA Mixture Approval of Mix Design for Testing for Evaluation of the
[see Section 5-04.3(9)] Placement on QPL Mix Design
The Contracting Agency
will test the mix design
Statistical Evaluation WSDOT Standard Practice QC-8
materials for compliance with
Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9-03.8(6).
The Contracting Agency may elect
Review of Form 350-042 to test the mix design materials,
Visual Evaluation for compliance with or evaluate in accordance with
Sections 9-03.8(2) and 9-03.8(6)) WSDOT Standard Practice QC-8,
at its sole discretion.
If the Contracting Agency approves the mix design, it will be listed on the QPL for
12 consecutive months. The Contracting Agency may extend the 12 month listing provided
the Contractor submits a certification letter to the Qualified Products Engineer verifying that
the aggregate source and job mix formula (JMF) gradation, and asphalt binder crude source
and formulation have not changed. The Contractor may submit the certification no sooner than
three months prior to expiration of the initial 12 month mix design approval. Within 7 calendar
days of receipt of the Contractor’s certification, the Contracting Agency will update the QPL.
The maximum duration for approval of a mix design and listing on the QPL will be 24 months
from the date of initial approval or as approved by the Engineer.
5-04.2(1)A Mix Designs Containing RAP and/or RAS
Mix designs are classified by the RAP and/or RAS content as shown in Table 2.
Table 2
Mix Design Classification Based on RAP/RAS Content
RAP/RAS Classification RAP/RAS Content1
Low RAP/No RAS 0% ≤ RAP% ≤ 20% and RAS% = 0%
20% < RAP% ≤ Maximum Allowable RAP2
High RAP/Any RAS and/or
0% < RAS% ≤ Maximum Allowable RAS2
1Percentages in this table are by total weight of HMA.
2See Table 4 in Section 5-04.2(1)A2 to determine the limits on the maximum amount RAP and/or RAS.
5-04.2(1)A1 Low RAP/No RAS – Mix Design Submittals for Placement on QPL
For Low RAP/No RAS mix designs, comply with the following additional requirements:
1. Develop the mix design with or without the inclusion of RAP.
2. The asphalt binder grade shall be the grade indicated in the Bid item name or as
otherwise required by the Contract.
3. Submit samples of RAP if used in development of the mix design.
4. Testing RAP or RAS stockpiles is not required for obtaining approval for placing these
mix designs on the QPL.
5-04.2(1)A2 High RAP/Any RAS – Mix Design Submittals for Placement on QPL
For High RAP/Any RAS mix designs, comply with the following additional requirements:
1. For mix designs with any RAS, test the RAS stockpile (and RAP stockpile if any RAP
is in the mix design) in accordance with Table 3.
2. For High RAP mix designs with no RAS, test the RAP stockpile in accordance with
Table 3.

3. For mix designs with High RAP/Any RAS, construct a single stockpile for RAP
and a single stockpile for RAS and isolate (sequester) these stockpiles from further
stockpiling before beginning development of the mix design. Test the RAP and RAS
during stockpile construction as required by item 1 and 2 above. Use the test data in
developing the mix design, and report the test data to The Contracting Agency on
WSDOT Form 350-042 as part of the mix design submittal for approval on the QPL.
Account for the reduction in asphalt binder contributed from RAS in accordance with
AASHTO PP 78. Do not add to these stockpiles after starting the mix design process.
Table 3
Test Frequency of RAP/RAS During RAP/RAS Stockpile Construction For
Approving a High RAP/Any RAS Mix Design for Placement on the QPL
Test Frequency1 Test for Test Method
• 1/1000 tons of RAP (minimum
of 10 per mix design) and Asphalt Binder Content and Sieve FOP for AASHTO T 308
Analysis of Fine and Coarse and
• 1/100 tons of RAS (minimum Aggregate FOP for WAQTC T 27/T 11
of 10 per mix design)
1“tons”, in this table, refers to tons of the reclaimed material before being incorporated into HMA.
4. Limit the amount of RAP and/or RAS used in a High RAP/Any RAS mix design by the
amount of binder contributed by the RAP and/or RAS, in accordance with Table 4.
Table 4
Maximum Amount of RAP and/or RAS in HMA Mixture
Maximum Amount of Binder Contributed from:
RAP RAS
40%1 minus contribution of binder from RAS 20%2
1 Calculated as the weight of asphalt binder contributed from the RAP as a percentage of the total weight of asphalt binder
in the mixture.
2 Calculated as the weight of asphalt binder contributed from the RAS as a percentage of the total weight of asphalt binder
in the mixture.
5. Develop the mix design including RAP, RAS, recycling agent, and new binder.
6. Extract, recover, and test the asphalt residue from the RAP and RAS stockpiles to
determine the percent of recycling agent and/or grade of new asphalt binder needed
to meet but not exceed the performance grade (PG) of asphalt binder required by
the Contract.
a. Perform the asphalt extraction in accordance with AASHTO T 164 or ASTM D 2172
using reagent grade solvent.
b. Perform the asphalt recovery in accordance with AASHTO R 59 or ASTM D 1856.
c. Test the recovered asphalt residue in accordance with AASHTO R 29 to determine
the asphalt binder grade in accordance with Section 9-02.1(4).
d. After determining the recovered asphalt binder grade, determine the percent of
recycling agent and/or grade of new asphalt binder in accordance with ASTM
D 4887.
e. Test the final blend of recycling agent, binder recovered from the RAP and RAS,
and new asphalt binder in accordance with AASHTO R 29. The final blended binder
shall meet but not exceed the performance grade of asphalt binder required by the
Contract and comply with the requirements of Section 9-02.1(4).
7. Include the following test data with the mix design submittal:
a. All test data from RAP and RAS stockpile construction.
b. All data from testing the recovered and blended asphalt binder.

8. Include representative samples of the following with the mix design submittal:
a. RAP and RAS.
b. 150 grams of recovered asphalt residue from the RAP and RAS that are to be used in
the HMA production.
5-04.2(1)B Commercial HMA – Mix Design Submittal for Placement on QPL
For HMA used in the Bid item Commercial HMA, in addition to the requirements of
Section 5-04.2(1) identify the following in the submittal:
1. Commercial HMA
2. Class of HMA
3. Performance grade of binder
4. Equivalent Single Axle Load (ESAL)
The Contracting Agency may elect to approve Commercial HMA mix designs without
evaluation.
5-04.2(1)C Mix Design Resubmittal for QPL Approval
Develop a new mix design and resubmit for approval on the QPL when any of the
following changes occur. When these occur, discontinue using the mix design until after it is
reapproved on the QPL.
1. Change in the source of crude petroleum used in the asphalt binder.
2. Changes in the asphalt binder refining process.
3. Changes in additives or modifiers in the asphalt binder.
4. Changes in the anti-strip additive, brand, type or quantity.
5. Changes to the source of material for aggregate.
6. Changes to the job mix formula that exceed the amounts as described in item 2 of
Section 9-03.8(7), unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
7. Changes in the percentage of material from a stockpile, when such changes exceed
5 percent of the total aggregate weight.
a. For Low RAP/No RAS mix designs developed without RAP, changes to
the percentage of material from a stockpile will be calculated based on the total
aggregate weight not including the weight of RAP.
b. For Low RAP/No RAS mix designs developed with RAP, changes to the percentage
of material from a stockpile will be calculated based on the total aggregate weight
including the weight of RAP.
c. For High RAP/Any RAS mix designs, changes in the percentage of material from a
stockpile will be based on total aggregate weight including the weight of RAP (and/
or RAS when included in the mixture).
Prior to making any change in the amount of RAS in an approved mix design, notify the
Engineer for determination of whether a new mix design is required, and obtain the Engineer’s
approval prior to implementing such changes.
5-04.2(2) Mix Design – Obtaining Project Approval
Use only mix designs listed on the Qualified Products List (QPL). Submit WSDOT Form
350-041 to the Engineer to request approval to use a mix design from the QPL. Changes
to the job mix formula (JMF) that have been approved on other contracts may be included.
The Engineer may reject a request to use a mix design if production of HMA using that mix
design on any contract is not in compliance with Section 5-04.3(11)D, E, F, and G for mixture
or compaction.

5-04.2(2)A Changes to the Job Mix Formula

The approved mix design obtained from the QPL will be considered the starting job
mix formula (JMF) and shall be used as the initial basis for acceptance of HMA mixture, as
detailed in Section 5-04.3(9).
During production the Contractor may request to adjust the JMF. Any adjustments to the
JMF will require approval of the Engineer and shall be made in accordance with item 2 of
Section 9-03.8(7). After approval by the Engineer, such adjusted JMFs shall constitute the
basis for acceptance of the HMA mixture.
5-04.2(2)B Using Warm Mix Asphalt Processes
The Contractor may, at the Contractor’s discretion, elect to use warm mix asphalt (WMA)
processes for producing HMA. WMA processes include organic additives, chemical additives,
and foaming. The use of WMA is subject to the following:
• Do not use WMA processes in the production of High RAP/Any RAS mixtures.
• Before using WMA processes, obtain the Engineer’s approval using WSDOT Form
350-076 to describe the proposed WMA process.
5-04.3(1) Weather Limitations
Do not place HMA for wearing course on any Traveled Way beginning October 1st through
March 31st of the following year, without written concurrence from the Engineer.
Do not place HMA on any wet surface, or when the average surface temperatures are less
than those specified in Table 5, or when weather conditions otherwise prevent the proper
handling or finishing of the HMA.
Table 5
Minimum Surface Temperature for Paving
Compacted Thickness (Feet) Wearing Course Other Courses
Less than 0.10 55°F 45°F
0.10 to 0.20 45°F 35°F
More than 0.20 35°F 35°F
5-04.3(2) Paving Under Traffic

These requirements apply when the Roadway being paved is open to traffic.
In hot weather, the Engineer may require the application of water to the pavement to
accelerate the finish rolling of the pavement and to shorten the time required before reopening
to traffic.
During paving operations, maintain temporary pavement markings throughout the project.
Install temporary pavement markings on the Roadway prior to opening to traffic. Temporary
pavement markings shall comply with Section 8-23.
5-04.3(3) Equipment
5-04.3(3)A Mixing Plant
Equip mixing plants as follows:
1. Use tanks for storage and preparation of asphalt binder which:
• Heat the contents by means that do not allow flame to contact the contents or the
tank, such as by steam or electricity.
• Heat and hold contents at the required temperatures.
• Continuously circulate contents to provide uniform temperature and consistency
during the operating period.
• Provide an asphalt binder sampling valve, in either the storage tank or the supply
line to the mixer.
2. Provide thermometric equipment:

• In the asphalt binder feed line near the charging valve at the mixer unit, capable of
detecting temperature ranges expected in the HMA and in a location convenient and
safe for access by Inspectors.
• At the discharge chute of the drier to automatically register or indicate the
temperature of the heated aggregates, and situated in full view of the plant operator.
3. When heating asphalt binder:
• Do not exceed the maximum temperature of the asphalt binder recommended by the
asphalt binder supplier.
• Avoid local variations in heating.
• Provide a continuous supply of asphalt binder to the mixer at a uniform average
temperature with no individual variations exceeding 25°F.
4. Provide a mechanical sampler for sampling mineral materials that:
• Meets the crushing or screening requirements of Section 1-05.6.
5. Provide HMA sampling equipment that complies with WSDOT T 168.
• Use a mechanical sampling device installed between the discharge of the silo and the
truck transport, approved by the Engineer, or
• Platforms or devices to enable sampling from the truck transport without entering
the truck transport for sampling HMA.
6. Provide for setup and operation of the Contracting Agency’s field testing:
• As required in Section 3-01.2(2).
7. Provide screens or a lump breaker:
• When using any RAP or any RAS, to eliminate oversize RAP or RAS particles from
entering the pug mill or drum mixer.
5-04.3(3)B Hauling Equipment
Provide HMA hauling equipment with tight, clean, smooth metal beds and a cover of
canvas or other suitable material of sufficient size to protect the HMA from adverse weather.
Securely attach the cover to protect the HMA whenever the weather conditions during the
work shift include, or are forecast to include, precipitation or an air temperature less than 45°F.
Prevent HMA from adhering to the hauling equipment. Spray metal beds with an
environmentally benign release agent. Drain excess release agent prior to filling hauling
equipment with HMA. Do not use petroleum derivatives or other coating material that
contaminate or alter the characteristics of the HMA. For hopper trucks, operate the conveyer
during the process of applying the release agent.
5-04.3(3)C Pavers
Use self-contained, power-propelled pavers provided with an internally heated vibratory
screed that is capable of spreading and finishing courses of HMA in lane widths required by
the paving section shown in the Plans.
When requested by the Engineer, provide written certification that the paver is equipped
with the most current equipment available from the manufacturer for the prevention of
segregation of the coarse aggregate particles. The certification shall list the make, model, and
year of the paver and any equipment that has been retrofitted to the paver.
Operate the screed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and in a
manner to produce a finished surface of the required evenness and texture without tearing,
shoving, segregating, or gouging the mixture. Provide a copy of the manufacturer’s
recommendations upon request by the Contracting Agency. Extensions to the screed will be
allowed provided they produce the same results, including ride, density, and surface texture as
obtained by the primary screed. In the Traveled Way do not use extensions without both augers
and an internally heated vibratory screed.

Equip the paver with automatic screed controls and sensors for either or both sides of the
paver. The controls shall be capable of sensing grade from an outside reference line, sensing
the transverse slope of the screed, and providing automatic signals that operate the screed to
maintain the desired grade and transverse slope. Construct the sensor so it will operate from a
reference line or a mat referencing device. The transverse slope controller shall be capable of
maintaining the screed at the desired slope within plus or minus 0.1 percent.
Equip the paver with automatic feeder controls, properly adjusted to maintain a uniform
depth of material ahead of the screed.
Manual operation of the screed is permitted in the construction of irregularly shaped and
minor areas. These areas include, but are not limited to, gore areas, road approaches, tapers
and left-turn channelizations.
When specified in the Contract, provide reference lines for vertical control. Place reference
lines on both outer edges of the Traveled Way of each Roadway. Horizontal control utilizing
the reference line is permitted. Automatically control the grade and slope of intermediate
lanes by means of reference lines or a mat referencing device and a slope control device.
When the finish of the grade prepared for paving is superior to the established tolerances and
when, in the opinion of the Engineer, further improvement to the line, grade, cross-section,
and smoothness can best be achieved without the use of the reference line, a mat referencing
device may be substituted for the reference line. Substitution of the device will be subject to
the continued approval of the Engineer. A joint matcher may be used subject to the approval of
the Engineer. The reference line may be removed after completion of the first course of HMA
when approved by the Engineer. Whenever the Engineer determines that any of these methods
are failing to provide the necessary vertical control, the reference lines will be reinstalled by
the Contractor.
Furnish and install all pins, brackets, tensioning devices, wire, and accessories necessary
for satisfactory operation of the automatic control equipment.
If the paving machine in use is not providing the required finish, the Engineer may suspend
Work as allowed by Section 1-08.6.
5-04.3(3)D Material Transfer Device or Material Transfer Vehicle
Use a material transfer device (MTD) or material transfer vehicle (MTV) to deliver the
HMA from the hauling equipment to the paving machine for any lift in (or partially in) the top
0.30 feet of the pavement section used in traffic lanes. However, an MTD/V is not required for
HMA placed in irregularly shaped and minor areas such as tapers and turn lanes, or for HMA
mixture that is accepted by Visual Evaluation. At the Contractor’s request the Engineer may
approve paving without an MTD/V; the Engineer will determine if an equitable adjustment
in cost or time is due. If a windrow elevator is used, the Engineer may limit the length of the
windrow in urban areas or through intersections.
To be approved for use, an MTV:
1. Shall be self-propelled vehicle, separate from the hauling vehicle or paver.
2. Shall not be connected to the hauling vehicle or paver.
3. May accept HMA directly from the haul vehicle or pick up HMA from a windrow.
4. Shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to placement into
the paving machine.
5. Shall mix the HMA sufficiently to obtain a uniform temperature throughout the mixture.
To be approved for use, an MTD:
1. Shall be positively connected to the paver.
2. May accept HMA directly from the haul vehicle or pick up HMA from a windrow.
3. Shall mix the HMA after delivery by the hauling equipment and prior to placement into
the paving machine.
4. Shall mix the HMA sufficiently to obtain a uniform temperature throughout the mixture.

5-04.3(3)E Rollers
Operate rollers in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. When requested
by the Engineer, provide a Type 1 Working Drawing of the manufacturer’s recommendation
for the use of any roller planned for use on the project. Do not use rollers that crush aggregate,
produce pickup or washboard, unevenly compact the surface, displace the mix, or produce
other undesirable results.
5-04.3(4) Preparation of Existing Paved Surfaces
Before constructing HMA on an existing paved surface, the entire surface of the pavement
shall be clean. Entirely remove all fatty asphalt patches, grease drippings, and other deleterious
substances from the existing pavement to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Thoroughly clean all
pavements or bituminous surfaces of dust, soil, pavement grindings, and other foreign matter.
Thoroughly remove any cleaning or solvent type liquids used to clean equipment spilled on
the pavement before paving proceeds. Fill all holes and small depressions with an appropriate
class of HMA. Level and thoroughly compact the surface of the patched area.
Apply a uniform coat of asphalt (tack coat) to all paved surfaces on which any course of
HMA is to be placed or abutted. Apply tack coat to cover the cleaned existing pavement with
a thin film of residual asphalt free of streaks and bare spots. Apply a heavy application of tack
coat to all joints. For Roadways open to traffic, limit the application of tack coat to surfaces
that will be paved during the same working shift. Equip the spreading equipment with a
thermometer to indicate the temperature of the tack coat material.
Do not operate equipment on tacked surfaces until the tack has broken and cured. Repair
tack coat damaged by the Contractor’s operation, prior to placement of the HMA.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, use cationic emulsified asphalt CSS-1, CSS-
1h, STE-1, or Performance Graded (PG) asphalt for tack coat. The CSS-1 and CSS-1h may
be diluted with water at a rate not to exceed one part water to one part emulsified asphalt. Do
not allow the tack coat material to exceed the maximum temperature recommended by the
asphalt supplier.
When shown in the Plans, prelevel uneven or broken surfaces over which HMA is to be
placed by using an asphalt paver, a motor patrol grader, or by hand raking, as approved by
the Engineer.
5-04.3(4)A Crack Sealing
5-04.3(4)A1 General
When the Proposal includes a pay item for crack sealing, seal all cracks ¼ inch in width
and greater.
Cleaning: Ensure that cracks are thoroughly clean, dry and free of all loose and foreign
material when filling with crack sealant material. Use a hot compressed air lance to dry and
warm the pavement surfaces within the crack immediately prior to filling a crack with the
sealant material. Do not overheat pavement. Do not use direct flame dryers. Routing cracks is
not required.
Sand Slurry: For cracks that are to be filled with sand slurry, thoroughly mix the
components and pour the mixture into the cracks until full. Add additional CSS-1 cationic
emulsified asphalt to the sand slurry as needed for workability to ensure the mixture will
completely fill the cracks. Strike off the sand slurry flush with the existing pavement surface
and allow the mixture to cure. Top off cracks that were not completely filled with additional
sand slurry. Do not place the HMA overlay until the slurry has fully cured.
Hot Poured Sealant: For cracks that are to be filled with hot poured sealant, apply the
material in accordance with these requirements and the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Furnish a Type 1 Working Drawing of the manufacturer’s product information and
recommendations to the Engineer prior to the start of work, including the manufacturer’s
recommended heating time and temperatures, allowable storage time and temperatures after
initial heating, allowable reheating criteria, and application temperature range. Confine hot

poured sealant material within the crack. Clean any overflow of sealant from the pavement
surface. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor’s method of sealing the cracks with
hot poured sealant results in an excessive amount of material on the pavement surface, stop
and correct the operation to eliminate the excess material.
5-04.3(4)A2 Crack Sealing Areas Prior to Paving
In areas where HMA will be placed, use sand slurry to fill the cracks.
5-04.3(4)A3 Crack Sealing Areas Not to be Paved
In areas where HMA will not be placed, fill the cracks as follows:
1. Cracks ¼ inch to 1 inch in width - fill with hot poured sealant.
2. Cracks greater than 1 inch in width – fill with sand slurry.
5-04.3(4)B Soil Residual Herbicide
Where shown in the Plans, apply one application of an approved soil residual herbicide.
Comply with Section 8-02.3(3)B. Complete paving within 48 hours of applying the herbicide.
Use herbicide registered with the Washington State Department of Agriculture for
use under pavement. Before use, obtain the Engineer’s approval of the herbicide and the
proposed rate of application. Include the following information in the request for approval of
the material:
1. Brand Name of the Material,
2. Manufacturer,
3. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Registration Number,
4. Material Safety Data Sheet, and
5. Proposed Rate of Application.
5-04.3(4)C Pavement Repair
Excavate pavement repair areas and backfill these with HMA in accordance with the details
shown in the Plans and as staked. Conduct the excavation operations in a manner that will
protect the pavement that is to remain. Repair pavement not designated to be removed that is
damaged as a result of the Contractor’s operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no cost
to the Contracting Agency. Excavate only within one lane at a time unless approved otherwise
by the Engineer. Do not excavate more area than can be completely backfilled and compacted
during the same shift.
Unless otherwise shown in the Plans or determined by the Engineer, excavate to a depth of
1.0 feet. The Engineer will make the final determination of the excavation depth required.
The minimum width of any pavement repair area shall be 40 inches unless shown
otherwise in the Plans. Before any excavation, sawcut the perimeter of the pavement
area to be removed unless the pavement in the pavement repair area is to be removed by
a pavement grinder.
Excavated materials shall be the property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of in
a Contractor-provided site off the Right of Way or used in accordance with Sections 2-02.3(3)
or 9-03.21.
Apply a heavy application of tack coat to all surfaces of existing pavement in the pavement
repair area, in accordance with Section 5-04.3(4).
Place the HMA backfill in lifts not to exceed 0.35-foot compacted depth. Thoroughly
compact each lift by a mechanical tamper or a roller.
5-04.3(5) Producing/Stockpiling Aggregates, RAP, & RAS
Produce aggregate in compliance with Section 3-01. Comply with Section 3-02 for
preparing stockpile sites, stockpiling, and removing from stockpile each of the following:
aggregates, RAP, and RAS. Provide sufficient storage space for each size of aggregate, RAP
and RAS. Fine aggregate or RAP may be uniformly blended with the RAS as a method of

preventing the agglomeration of RAS particles. Remove the aggregates, RAP and RAS from
stockpile(s) in a manner that ensures minimal segregation when being moved to the HMA
plant for processing into the final mixture. Keep different aggregate sizes separated until they
have been delivered to the HMA plant.
5-04.3(5)A Stockpiling RAP or RAS for High RAP/Any RAS Mixes
Do not place any RAP or RAS into a stockpile which has been sequestered for a High
RAP/Any RAS mix design. Do not incorporate any RAP or RAS into a High RAP/Any RAS
mixture from any source other than the stockpile which was sequestered for approval of that
particular High RAP/Any RAS mix design.
RAP that is used in a Low RAP/No RAS mix is not required to come from a sequestered
stockpile.
5-04.3(6) Mixing
The asphalt supplier shall introduce anti-stripping additive, in the amount designated on the
QPL for the mix design, into the asphalt binder prior to shipment to the asphalt mixing plant.
Anti-strip is not required for temporary work that will be removed prior to
Physical Completion.
Use asphalt binder of the grade, and from the supplier, in the approved mix design.
Prior to introducing reclaimed materials into the asphalt plant, remove wire, nails, and
other foreign material. Discontinue use of the reclaimed material if the Engineer, in their sole
discretion, determines the wire, nails, or other foreign material to be excessive.
Size RAP and RAS prior to entering the mixer to provide uniform and thoroughly mixed
HMA. If there is evidence of the RAP or RAS not breaking down during the heating and
mixing of the HMA, immediately suspend the use of the RAP or RAS until changes have been
After the required amount of mineral materials, RAP, RAS, new asphalt binder and
recycling agent have been introduced into the mixer, mix the HMA until complete and uniform
coating of the particles and thorough distribution of the asphalt binder throughout the mineral
materials, RAP and RAS is ensured.
Upon discharge from the mixer, ensure that the temperature of the HMA does not exceed
the optimum mixing temperature shown on the approved Mix Design Report by more than
25°F, or as approved by the Engineer. When a WMA additive is included in the manufacture of
HMA, do not heat the WMA additive (at any stage of production including in binder storage
tanks) to a temperature higher than the maximum recommended by the manufacturer of the
WMA additive.
A maximum water content of 2 percent in the mix, at discharge, will be allowed providing
the water causes no problems with handling, stripping, or flushing. If the water in the HMA
causes any of these problems, reduce the moisture content.
During the daily operation, HMA may be temporarily held in approved storage facilities.
Do not incorporate HMA into the Work that has been held for more than 24 hours after
mixing. Provide an easily readable, low bin-level indicator on the storage facility that indicates
the amount of material in storage. Waste the HMA in storage when the top level of HMA
drops below the top of the cone of the storage facility, except as the storage facility is being
emptied at the end of the working shift. Dispose of rejected or waste HMA at no expense to
the Contracting Agency.

5-04.3(7) Spreading and Finishing

Do not exceed the maximum nominal compacted depth of any layer in any course, as
shown in Table 6, unless approved by the Engineer:
Table 6
Maximum Nominal Compacted Depth of Any Layer
HMA Class Wearing Course Other than Wearing Course
1 inch 0.35 feet 0.35 feet
¾ and ½ inch 0.30 feet 0.35 feet
⅜ inch 0.15 feet 0.15 feet
Use HMA pavers complying with Section 5-04.3(3) to distribute the mix. On areas where
irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical spreading and finishing
equipment impractical, the paving may be done with other equipment or by hand.
When more than one JMF is being utilized to produce HMA, place the material produced
for each JMF with separate spreading and compacting equipment. Do not intermingle HMA
produced from more than one JMF. Each strip of HMA placed during a work shift shall
conform to a single JMF established for the class of HMA specified unless there is a need
to make an adjustment in the JMF.
5-04.3(8) Aggregate Acceptance Prior to Incorporation in HMA
Sample aggregate for meeting the requirements of Section 3-04 prior to being incorporated
into HMA. (The acceptance data generated for the Section 3-04 acceptance analysis will
not be commingled with the acceptance data generated for the Section 5-04.3(9) acceptance
analysis.) Aggregate acceptance samples shall be taken as described in Section 3-04.
Aggregate acceptance testing will be performed by the Contracting Agency. Aggregate
contributed from RAP and/or RAS will not be evaluated under Section 3-04.
For aggregate that will be used in HMA mixture which will be accepted by Statistical
Evaluation, the Contracting Agency’s acceptance of the aggregate will be based on:
1. Samples taken prior to mixing with asphalt binder, RAP, or RAS;
2. Testing for the materials properties of fracture, uncompacted void content, and
sand equivalent;
3. Evaluation by the Contracting Agency in accordance with Section 3-04, including price
adjustments as described therein.
For aggregate that will be used in HMA which will be accepted by Visual Evaluation,
evaluation in accordance with items 1, 2, and 3 above is at the discretion of the Engineer.

5-04.3(9) HMA Mixture Acceptance

The Contracting Agency will evaluate HMA mixture for acceptance by one of two methods
as determined from the criteria in Table 7.
Table 7
Basis of Acceptance for HMA Mixture
Visual Evaluation Statistical Evaluation
• Commercial HMA placed at any location • All HMA mixture other than that
• Any HMA placed in: accepted by Visual Evaluation
– sidewalks
– road approaches
– ditches
– slopes
Criteria for
– paths
Selecting the
Evaluation Method – trails
– gores
– prelevel
– temporary pavement1
– pavement repair
• Other nonstructural applications of HMA
as approved by the Engineer
1 Temporary pavement is HMA that will be removed before Physical Completion of the Contract.
5-04.3(9)A Test Sections

This section applies to HMA mixture accepted by Statistical Evaluation. A test section is
not allowed for HMA accepted by Visual Evaluation.
The purpose of a test section is to determine whether or not the Contractor’s mix design
and production processes will produce HMA meeting the Contract requirements related
to mixture. Construct HMA mixture test sections at the beginning of paving, using at least
600 tons and a maximum of 1,000 tons or as specified by the Engineer. Each test section shall
be constructed in one continuous operation.
5-04.3(9)A1 Test Section – When Required, When to Stop
Use Tables 8 and 9 to determine when a test section is required, optional, or not allowed,
and to determine when performing test sections may end. Each mix design will be evaluated
independently for the test section requirements.
If more than one test section is required, each test section shall be evaluated separately
by the criteria in Tables 8 and 9.
Table 8
Criteria for Conducting and Evaluating HMA Mixture Test Sections
(For HMA Mixture Accepted by Statistical Evaluation)

High RAP/Any RAS Low RAP/No RAS
Is Mixture Test Section Optional
Mandatory 1 At Contractor’s Option
or Mandatory?
Waiting period after paving the
4 calendar days2 4 calendar days2
test section.
Meet “Results Required to Stop Provide samples and respond to
What Must Happen to Stop
Performing Test Sections” in WSDOT test results required by
Performing Test Sections?
Table 9 for High RAP/Any RAS. Table 9 for Low RAP/No RAS.
1 If a mix design has produced an acceptable test section on a previous contract (paved in the same calendar year, from the same
plant, using the same JMF) the test section may be waived if approved by the Engineer.
2 This is to provide time needed by the Contracting Agency to complete testing and the Contractor to adjust the mixture in response
to those test results. Paving may resume when this is done.

Table 9
Results Required to Stop Performing HMA Mixture Test Sections1
Type of HMA
Test Property
Minimum PFi of 0.95 based on the
Gradation None4
criteria in Section 5-04.3(9)B42
Asphalt Binder None4
Va None4
Hamburg Wheel Track Meet requirements of These tests will not be done as part
Indirect Tensile Strength Section 9-03.8(2)3 of Test Section.
Aggregates
Nonstatistical Evaluation
Sand Equivalent
in accordance with the None3
Uncompacted Void Content
requirements of Section 3-043
Fracture
1 In addition to the requirements of this table, acceptance of the HMA mixture used in each test section is subject to the acceptance
criteria and price adjustments for Statistical Evaluation (see Table 9a in Section 5-04.3(9)A2).
2 Divide the test section lot into three sublots, approximately equal in size. Take one sample from each sublot, and test each sample
for the properties in the first column.

3 Take one sample for each test section lot. Test the sample for the property in the first column.
4 Divide the test section lot into three sublots, approximately equal in size. Take one sample from each sublot, and test each sample
for the property in the first column. There are no criteria for discontinuing test sections for these mixes; however, the contractor must
comply with Section 5-04.3(11)F before resuming paving.
5-04.3(9)A2 Test Section – Evaluating the HMA Mixture in a Test Section

The Engineer will evaluate the HMA mixture in each test section for rejection, acceptance,
and price adjustments based on the criteria in Table 9a using the data generated from the
testing required by Table 9 in Section 5-04.3(9)A1. Each test section shall be considered a
separate lot.
Table 9a
Acceptance Criteria for HMA Mixture Placed in a Test Section
Type of HMA
Test Property
Gradation
Asphalt Binder Statistical Evaluation Statistical Evaluation
Va
Hamburg Wheel Track Pass/Fail for the requirements
N/A
Indirect Tensile Strength of Section 9-03.8(2)1
HMA Aggregate Nonstatistical Evaluation in Nonstatistical Evaluation in
Sand Equivalent accordance with the requirements accordance with the requirements
Uncompacted Void Content of Section 3-04 of Section 3-04
1Failure to meet the specifications for Hamburg and/or IDT will cause the mixture in the test section to be rejected.
Refer to Section 5-04.3(11).

5-04.3(9)B Mixture Acceptance – Statistical Evaluation

5-04.3(9)B1 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Lots and Sublots
HMA mixture which is accepted by Statistical Evaluation will be evaluated by the
Contracting Agency dividing that HMA tonnage into mixture lots, and each mixture lot will
be evaluated using stratified random sampling by the Contracting Agency sub-dividing each
mixture lot into mixture sublots. All mixture in a mixture lot shall be of the same mix design.
The mixture sublots will be numbered in the order in which the mixture (of a particular mix
design) is paved.
Each mixture lot comprises a maximum of 15 mixture sublots, except:
• The final mixture lot of each mix design on the Contract will comprise a maximum of
25 sublots.
• A mixture lot for a test section will consist of three sublots.
Each mixture sublot shall be approximately uniform in size with the maximum mixture
sublot size as specified in Table 10. The quantity of material represented by the final mixture
sublot of the project, for each mix design on the project, may be increased to a maximum of
two times the mixture sublot quantity calculated.
Table 10
Maximum HMA Mixture Sublot Size
For HMA Accepted by Statistical Evaluation
HMA Original Plan Quantity (tons)1 Maximum Sublot Size (tons)2
< 20,000 1,000
20,000 to 30,000 1,500
>30,000 2,000
1“Plan quantity” means the plan quantity of all HMA of the same class and binder grade which is accepted by Statistical Evaluation.
2The maximum sublot size for each combination of HMA class and binder grade shall be calculated separately.
• For a mixture lot in progress with a mixture CPF less than 0.75, a new mixture lot will
begin at the Contractor’s request after the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming
to the Specifications can be produced. See also Section 5-04.3(11)F.
• If, before completing a mixture lot, the Contractor requests a change to the JMF
which is approved by the Engineer, the mixture produced in that lot after the approved
change will be evaluated on the basis of the changed JMF, and the mixture produced
in that lot before the approved change will be evaluated on the basis of the unchanged
JMF; however, the mixture before and after the change will be evaluated in the same
lot. Acceptance of subsequent mixture lots will be evaluated on the basis of the
changed JMF.
5-04.3(9)B2 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Sampling
Comply with Section 1-06.2(1).
Samples of HMA mixture which is accepted by Statistical Evaluation will be randomly
selected from within each sublot, with one sample per sublot. The Engineer will determine the
random sample location using WSDOT Test Method T 716. The Contractor shall obtain the
sample when ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor shall sample the HMA mixture in the
presence of the Engineer and in accordance with FOP for WAQTC T 168.
5-04.3(9)B3 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Acceptance Testing
The Contracting Agency will test the mixture sample from each sublot (including sublots in
a test section) for the properties shown in Table 11.

Table 11
Testing Required for each HMA Mixture Sublot
Test Procedure Performed by
Va WSDOT SOP 731 Engineer
Asphalt Binder Content FOP for AASHTO T 308 Engineer

Gradation: percent Passing
1½″, 1″, ¾″, ½″, ⅜″, No. 4, FOP for WAQTC T 27/T 11 Engineer
No. 8, No. 200
The mixture samples and tests taken for the purpose of determining acceptance of the test
section (as described in Section 5-04.3(9)A) shall also be used as the test results for acceptance
of the mixture described in Sections 5-04.3(9)B3, 5-04.3(9)B4, 5-04.3(9)B5, and 5-04.3(9)B6.
5-04.3(9)B4 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Pay Factors
The Contracting Agency will determine a pay factor (PFi) for each of the properties in
Table 11 of Section 5-04.3(9)B3, for each mixture lot, using the quality level analysis in
Section 1-06.2(2)D. For Gradation, a pay factor will be calculated for each of the sieve sizes
listed in Table 11 of Section 5-04.3(9)B3, which is equal to or smaller than the maximum
allowable aggregate size (100 percent passing sieve) of the HMA mixture. The USL and
LSL shall be calculated using the Job Mix Formula Tolerances (for Statistical Evaluation) in
Section 9-03.8(7).
If a constituent is not measured in accordance with these Specifications, its individual pay
factor will be considered 1.00 in calculating the Composite Pay Factor (CPF).
5-04.3(9)B5 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Composite Pay Factors (CPF)
In accordance with Section 1-06.2(2)D4, the Contracting Agency will determine a
Composite Pay Factor (CPF) for each mixture lot from the pay factors calculated in Section
5-04.3(9)B4, using the price adjustment factors in Table 12. Unless otherwise specified, the
maximum CPF for HMA mixture shall be 1.05.
Table 12
HMA Mixture Price Adjustment Factors
Constituent Factor “f”
All aggregate passing: 1½″, 1″, ¾″, ½″, ⅜″ and No.4 sieves 2
All aggregate passing No. 8 sieve 15
All aggregate passing No. 200 sieve 20
Asphalt binder 40
Air Voids (Va) 20
5-04.3(9)B6 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Price Adjustments

For each HMA mixture lot, a Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment will be determined
and applied, as follows:
JMCPA = [0.60 × (CPF – 1.00)] × Q × UP
Where
JMCPA = Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment for a given lot of mixture ($)
CPF = Composite Pay Factor for a given lot of mixture (maximum is 1.05)
Q = Quantity in a given lot of mixture (tons)
UP = Unit price of the HMA in a given lot of mixture ($/ton)

5-04.3(9)B7 Mixture Statistical Evaluation – Retests

The Contractor may request that a mixture sublot be retested. To request a retest, submit
a written request to the Contracting Agency within 7 calendar days after the specific test
results have been posted to the website or emailed to the Contractor, whichever occurs first.
The Contracting Agency will send a split of the original acceptance sample for testing by
the Contracting Agency to either the Region Materials Laboratory or the State Materials
Laboratory as determined by the Engineer. The Contracting Agency will not test the split of
the sample with the same equipment or by the same tester that ran the original acceptance
test. The sample will be tested for a complete gradation analysis, asphalt binder content, and
Va, and the results of the retest will be used for the acceptance of the HMA mixture in place
of the original mixture sublot sample test results. The cost of testing will be deducted from
any monies due or that may come due the Contractor under the Contract at the rate of $250
per sample.
5-04.3(9)C Vacant
5-04.3(9)D Mixture Acceptance – Visual Evaluation
Visual Evaluation of HMA mixture will be by visual inspection by the Engineer or, in the
sole discretion of the Engineer, the Engineer may sample and test the mixture.
5-04.3(9)D1 Mixture Visual Evaluation – Lots, Sampling, Testing, Price Adjustments
HMA mixture accepted by Visual Evaluation will not be broken into lots unless the
Engineer determines that testing is required. When that occurs, the Engineer will identify
the limits of the questionable HMA mixture, and that questionable HMA mixture shall
constitute a lot. Then, the Contractor will take samples from the truck, or the Engineer will
take core samples from the roadway at a minimum of three random locations from within
the lot, selected in accordance with WSDOT Test Method T 716, taken from the roadway in
accordance with WSDOT SOP 734, and tested in accordance with WSDOT SOP 737. The
Engineer will test one of the samples for all constituents in Section 5-04.3(9)B3. If all
constituents from that test fall within the Job Mix Formula Tolerances (for Visual Evaluation)
in Section 9-03.8(7), the lot will be accepted at the unit Contract price with no
further evaluation.
When one or more constituents fall outside those tolerance limits, the other samples will be
tested for all constituents in Section 5-04.3(9)B3, and a Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment
will be calculated in accordance with Table 13.
Table 13
Visual Evaluation – Out of Tolerance Procedures
Comply with the Following1
Pay Factors1 Section 5-04.3(9)B4
Composite Pay Factors2 Section 5-04.3(9)B5
Price Adjustments Section 5-04.3(9)B6
1The Visual Evaluation tolerance limits in Section 9-03.8(7) will be used in the calculation of the PFi.
2The maximum CPF shall be 1.00.
5-04.3(9)E Mixture Acceptance – Notification of Acceptance Test Results

The results of all mixture acceptance testing and the Composite Pay Factor (CPF) of the lot
after three sublots have been tested will be available to the Contractor through the Contracting
Agency’s website.
The Contracting Agency will endeavor to provide written notification (via email to the
Contractor’s designee) of acceptance test results through its web-based materials testing
system Statistical Analysis of Materials (SAM) within 24 hours of the sample being made
available to the Contracting Agency. However, the Contractor agrees:

1. Quality control, defined as the system used by the Contractor to monitor, assess, and
adjust its production processes to ensure that the final HMA mixture will meet the
specified level of quality, is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
2. The Contractor has no right to rely on any testing performed by the Contracting Agency,
nor does the Contractor have any right to rely on timely notification by the Contracting
Agency of the Contracting Agency’s test results (or statistical analysis thereof), for
any part of quality control and/or for making changes or correction to any aspect of the
HMA mixture.
3. The Contractor shall make no claim for untimely notification by the Contracting
Agency of the Contracting Agency’s test results or statistical analysis.
5-04.3(10) HMA Compaction Acceptance
For all HMA, the Contractor shall comply with the General Compaction Requirements
in Section 5-04.3(10)A. The Contracting Agency will evaluate all HMA for compaction
compliance with one of the following - Statistical Evaluation, Visual Evaluation, or Test Point
Evaluation - determined by the criteria in Table 14:
Table 14
Criteria for Determining Method of Evaluation for HMA Compaction1
Statistical Evaluation of HMA Visual Evaluation of HMA Test Point Evaluation of HMA
Compaction is Required For: Compaction is Required For: Compaction is Required For:
• Any HMA for which the specified • “HMA for Preleveling…” • Any HMA not meeting the criteria
course thickness is greater than • “HMA for Pavement Repair…” for Statistical Evaluation or
0.10 feet, and the HMA is in: Visual Evaluation
– traffic lanes, including but
not limited to:
• ramp lanes
• truck climbing lanes
• weaving lanes
• speed change lanes
1 This table applies to all HMA, and shall be the sole basis for determining the acceptance method for compaction.
The Contracting Agency may, at its sole discretion, evaluate any HMA for compliance with
the Cyclic Density requirements of Section 5-04.3(10)B.
5-04.3(10)A HMA Compaction – General Compaction Requirements
Immediately after the HMA has been spread and struck off, and after surface irregularities
have been adjusted, thoroughly and uniformly compact the mix. The completed course shall
be free from ridges, ruts, humps, depressions, objectionable marks, and irregularities and shall
conform to the line, grade, and cross-section shown in the Plans. If necessary, alter the JMF in
accordance with Section 9-03.8(7) to achieve desired results.
Compact the mix when it is in the proper condition so that no undue displacement,
cracking, or shoving occurs. Compact areas inaccessible to large compaction equipment by
mechanical or hand tampers. Remove HMA that becomes loose, broken, contaminated, shows
an excess or deficiency of asphalt, or is in any way defective. Replace the removed material
with new HMA, and compact it immediately to conform to the surrounding area.
The type of rollers to be used and their relative position in the compaction sequence
shall generally be the Contractor’s option, provided the specified densities are attained. An
exception shall be that pneumatic tired rollers shall be used for compaction of the wearing
course beginning October 1st of any year through March 31st of the following year. Coverage
with a steel wheel roller may precede pneumatic tired rolling. Unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer, operate rollers in the static mode when the internal temperature of the mix is less
than 175°F. Regardless of mix temperature, do not operate a roller in a mode that results in
checking or cracking of the mat.

On bridge decks and on the five feet of roadway approach immediately adjacent to the end
of bridge/back of pavement seat, operate rollers in static mode only.
5-04.3(10)B HMA Compaction – Cyclic Density
Low cyclic density areas are defined as spots or streaks in the pavement that are less than
90 percent of the theoretical maximum density. At the Engineer’s discretion, the Engineer may
evaluate the HMA pavement for low cyclic density, and when doing so will follow WSDOT
SOP 733. A $500 Cyclic Density Price Adjustment will be assessed for any 500-foot section
with two or more density readings below 90 percent of the theoretical maximum density.
5-04.3(10)C HMA Compaction Acceptance – Statistical Evaluation
HMA compaction which is accepted by Statistical Evaluation will be based on acceptance
testing performed by the Contracting Agency, and statistical analysis of those acceptance tests
results. This will result in a Compaction Price Adjustment.
5-04.3(10)C1 HMA Compaction Statistical Evaluation – Lots and Sublots
HMA compaction which is accepted by Statistical Evaluation will be evaluated by the
Contracting Agency dividing the project into compaction lots, and each compaction lot will
be evaluated using stratified random sampling by the Contracting Agency sub-dividing each
compaction lot into compaction sublots. All mixture in any individual compaction lot shall be
of the same mix design. The compaction sublots will be numbered in the order in which the
mixture (of a particular mix design) is paved.
Each compaction lot comprises a maximum of 15 compaction sublots, except for the
final compaction lot of each mix design on the Contract, which comprises a maximum of
25 sublots.
Each compaction sublot shall be uniform in size as shown in Table 15, except that the last
compaction sublot of each day may be increased to a maximum of two times the compaction
sublot quantity calculated. Minor variations in the size of any sublot shall not be cause to
invalidate the associated test result.
Table 15
HMA Compaction Sublot Size
HMA Original Plan Quantity (tons)1 Compaction Sublot Size (tons)
<20,000 100
20,000 to 30,000 150
>30,000 200
1In determining the plan quantity tonnage, do not include any tons accepted by test point evaluation.
The following will cause one compaction lot to end prematurely and a new compaction lot
to begin:
• For a compaction lot in progress with a compaction CPF less than 0.75, a new
compaction lot will begin at the Contractor’s request after the Engineer is
satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be produced. See also
Section 5-04.3(11)F.
All HMA which is paved on a bridge and accepted for compaction by Statistical Evaluation
will compose a bridge compaction lot. If the contract includes such HMA on more than
one bridge, compaction will be evaluated on each bridge individually, as separate bridge
compaction lots.
Bridge compaction sublots will be determined by the Engineer subject to the following:
• All sublots on a given bridge will be approximately the same size.
• Sublots will be stratified from the lot.
• In no case will there be less than 3 sublots in each bridge compaction lot.
• No sublot will exceed 50 tons.
• Compaction test locations will be determined by the Engineer in accordance with
WSDOT Test Method T 716.
5-04.3(10)C2 HMA Compaction Statistical Evaluation – Acceptance Testing

The location of HMA compaction acceptance tests will be randomly selected by the
Contracting Agency from within each sublot, with one test per sublot. The Contracting Agency
will determine the random sample location using WSDOT Test Method T 716.
Use Table 16 to determine compaction acceptance test procedures and to allocate
compaction acceptance sampling and testing responsibilities between the Contractor and the
Contracting Agency. HMA cores shall be taken or nuclear density testing shall occur after
completion of the finish rolling, prior to opening to traffic, and on the same day that the mix
is placed.
Table 16
HMA Compaction Acceptance Testing Procedures and Responsibilities
When Contract Includes
Bid Item “HMA Core When Contract Does Not Include Bid Item “HMA
– Roadway” or “HMA Core – Roadway” or “HMA Core – Bridge”4
Core – Bridge”4
Basis for Test: Cores Cores3 Nuclear Density Gauge3
Contractor shall Contracting Agency
take cores1 using will take cores1 using
WSDOT SOP 7342 WSDOT SOP 734
Contracting Agency,
In-Place Density
using WSDOT FOP for
Determined by: Contracting Agency Contracting Agency
AASHTO T 355
will determine core will determine core
density using FOP for density using FOP for
AASHTO T 166 AASHTO T 166
Theoretical Maximum
Contracting Agency, using FOP for AASHTO T 209
Density Determined by:
Rolling Average of
Theoretical Maximum Contracting Agency, using WSDOT SOP 729
Densities Determined by:
Percent Compaction Contracting Agency,
Contracting Agency, using Contracting Agency, using
in Each Sublot using WSDOT FOP for
WSDOT SOP 736 WSDOT SOP 736
Determined by: AASHTO T 355
1 The core diameter shall be 4-inches unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
2 The Contractor shall take the core samples in the presence of the Engineer, at locations designated by the Engineer, and deliver
the core samples to the Contracting Agency.
3 The Contracting Agency will determine, in its sole discretion, whether it will take cores or use the nuclear density gauge to
determine in-place density. Exclusive reliance on cores for density acceptance is generally intended for small paving projects and is
not intended as a replacement for nuclear gauge density testing on typical projects.
4 The basis for test of all compaction sublots in a bridge compaction lot shall be cores. These cores shall be taken by the Contractor
when the Proposal includes the bid item “HMA Cores – Bridge”. When there is no bid item for “HMA Cores – Bridge”, the Engineer
will be responsible for taking HMA cores for all compaction sublots in a bridge compaction lot. In either case, the Engineer will
determine core location, in-place density of the core, theoretical maximum density, rolling average of theoretical maximum density,
and percent compaction using the procedure called for in this section.
When using the nuclear density gauge for acceptance testing of pavement density, the
Engineer will follow WSDOT SOP 730 for correlating the nuclear gauge with HMA cores.
When cores are required for the correlation, coring and testing will be by the Contracting
Agency. When a core is taken for gauge correlation at the location of a sublot, the relative
density of the core will be used for the sublot test result and is exempt from retesting.
5-04.3(10)C3 HMA Statistical Compaction – Price Adjustments
For each HMA compaction lot (that is accepted by Statistical Evaluation) which has
less than three compaction sublots, for which all compaction sublots attain a minimum of
91 percent compaction determined in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO T 355

(or WSDOT SOP 736 when provided by the Contract), the HMA will be accepted at the unit
Contract price with no further evaluation.
For each HMA compaction lot (that is accepted by Statistical Evaluation) which does
not meet the criteria in the preceding paragraph, the compaction lot shall be evaluated in
accordance with Section 1-06.2(2) to determine the appropriate Compaction Price Adjustment
(CPA). All of the test results obtained from the acceptance samples from a given compaction
lot shall be evaluated collectively. Additional testing by either a nuclear density gauge or cores
will be completed as required to provide a minimum of three tests for evaluation.
For the statistical analysis in Section 1-06.2, use the following values:
x = percent compaction of each sublot
USL = 100
LSL = 91
Each CPA will be determined as follows:
CPA = [0.40 × (CPF – 1.00)] × Q × UP
Where
CPA = Compaction Price Adjustment for the compaction lot ($)
CPF = Composite Pay Factor for the compaction lot (maximum is 1.05)
Q = Quantity in the compaction lot (tons)
UP = Unit price of the HMA in the compaction lot ($/ton)
5-04.3(10)C4 HMA Statistical Compaction – Requests for Retesting
For a compaction sublot that has been tested with a nuclear density gauge that did not meet
the minimum of 91 percent of the theoretical maximum density in a compaction lot with a
CPF below 1.00 and thus subject to a price reduction or rejection, the Contractor may request
that a core, taken at the same location as the nuclear density test, be used for determination of
the relative density of the compaction sublot. The relative density of the core will replace the
relative density determined by the nuclear density gauge for the compaction sublot and will be
used for calculation of the CPF and acceptance of HMA compaction lot. When cores are taken
by the Contracting Agency at the request of the Contractor, they shall be requested by noon of
the next workday after the test results for the compaction sublot have been provided or made
available to the Contractor. Traffic control shall be provided by the Contractor as requested
by the Engineer. Failure by the Contractor to provide the requested traffic control will result
in forfeiture of the request for retesting. When the CPF for the compaction lot based on the
results of the cores is less than 1.00, the Contracting Agency will deduct the cost for the coring
from any monies due or that may become due the Contractor under the Contract at the rate of
$200 per core and the Contractor shall pay for the cost of the traffic control.
5-04.3(10)D HMA Compaction – Visual Evaluation
Visual Evaluation will be the basis of acceptance for compaction of the Bid items “HMA
for Pavement Repair Cl. ___ PG ___” and “HMA for Prelevelling Class___ PG___”. This
HMA shall be thoroughly compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer. HMA that is used
to prelevel wheel ruts shall be compacted with a pneumatic tire roller.
5-04.3(10)E HMA Compaction – Test Point Evaluation
When compaction acceptance is by Test Point Evaluation, compact HMA based on a test
point evaluation of the compaction train. Perform the test point evaluation in accordance with
instructions from the Engineer. The number of passes with an approved compaction train,
required to attain the maximum test point density, shall be used on all subsequent paving.
5-04.3(10)F HMA Compaction Acceptance – Notification of Acceptance Test Results
The obligations and responsibilities for notifying the Contractor of compaction acceptance
test results are the same as for mixture acceptance test results. See Section 5-04.3(9)E.

5-04.3(11) Reject Work

This section applies to HMA and all requirements related to HMA (except aggregates prior
to being incorporated into HMA). For rejection of aggregate prior to its incorporation into
HMA refer to Section 3-04.
5-04.3(11)A Reject Work – General
Work that is defective or does not conform to Contract requirements shall be rejected.
The Contractor may propose, in writing, alternatives to removal and replacement of rejected
material. Acceptability of such alternative proposals will be determined at the sole discretion
of the Engineer.
5-04.3(11)B Rejection by Contractor
The Contractor may, prior to acceptance sampling and testing, elect to remove any
defective material and replace it with new material. Any such new material will be sampled,
tested, and evaluated for acceptance.
5-04.3(11)C Rejection Without Testing (Mixture or Compaction)
The Engineer may, without sampling, reject any batch, load, or section of Roadway
that appears defective. Material rejected before placement shall not be incorporated into
the pavement.
No payment will be made for the rejected materials or the removal of the materials
unless the Contractor requests the rejected material to be tested. If the Contractor requests
testing, acceptance will be by Statistical Evaluation, and a minimum of three samples will be
obtained and tested. When uncompacted material is required for testing but not available, the
Engineer will determine random sample locations on the roadway in accordance with WSDOT
Test Method T 716, take cores in accordance with WSDOT SOP 734, and test the cores in
accordance with WSDOT SOP 737.
If the CPF for the rejected material is less than 0.75, no payment will be made for the
rejected material; in addition, the cost of sampling and testing shall be borne by the Contractor.
If the CPF is greater than or equal to 0.75, the cost of sampling and testing will be borne by
the Contracting Agency. If the material is rejected before placement and the CPF is greater
than or equal to 0.75, compensation for the rejected material will be at a CPF of 0.75. If
rejection occurs after placement and the CPF is greater than or equal to 0.75, compensation for
the rejected material will be at the calculated CPF with an addition of 25 percent of the unit
Contract price added for the cost of removal and disposal.
5-04.3(11)D Rejection – A Partial Sublot (Mixture or Compaction)
In addition to the random acceptance sampling and testing, the Engineer may also isolate
from a mixture or compaction sublot any material that is suspected of being defective in
relative density, gradation or asphalt binder content. Such isolated material will not include
an original sample location. The Contracting Agency will obtain a minimum of three random
samples of the suspect material and perform the testing. When uncompacted material is
required for testing but is not available, the Engineer will select random sample locations
on the roadway in accordance with WSDOT Test Method T 716, take cores samples in
accordance with WSDOT SOP 734, and test the material in accordance with WSDOT
SOP 737. The material will then be statistically evaluated as an independent lot in accordance
with Section 1-06.2(2).
5-04.3(11)E Rejection – An Entire Sublot (Mixture or Compaction)
An entire mixture or compaction sublot that is suspected of being defective may be
rejected. When this occurs, a minimum of two additional random samples from this sublot
will be obtained. When uncompacted material is required for the additional samples but
the material has been compacted, the Contracting Agency will take and test cores from the
roadway as described in Section 5-04.3(11)D. The additional samples and the original sublot
will be evaluated as an independent lot in accordance with Section 1-06.2(2).

5-04.3(11)F Rejection - A Lot in Progress (Mixture or Compaction)

The Contractor shall shut down operations and shall not resume HMA placement until
such time as the Engineer is satisfied that material conforming to the Specifications can be
produced when:
1. the Composite Pay Factor (CPF) of a mixture or compaction lot in progress drops below
1.00 and the Contractor is taking no corrective action, or
2. the Pay Factor (PFi) for any constituent of a mixture or compaction lot in progress drops
below 0.95 and the Contractor is taking no corrective action, or
3. either the PFi for any constituent (or the CPF) of a mixture or compaction lot in
progress is less than 0.75.
5-04.3(11)G Rejection – An Entire Lot (Mixture or Compaction)
An entire lot with a CPF of less than 0.75 will be rejected.
5-04.3(12) Joints
5-04.3(12)A HMA Joints
5-04.3(12)A1 Transverse Joints
Conduct operations such that the placement of the top or wearing course is a continuous
operation or as close to continuous as possible. Unscheduled transverse joints will be
allowed, but the roller may pass over the unprotected end of the freshly laid HMA only when
the placement of the course is discontinued for such a length of time that the HMA will
cool below compaction temperature. When the Work is resumed, cut back the previously
compacted HMA to produce a slightly beveled edge for the full thickness of the course.
Construct a temporary wedge of HMA on a 50H:1V where a transverse joint as a result
of paving or planing is open to traffic. Separate the HMA in the temporary wedge from the
permanent HMA upon which it is placed by strips of heavy wrapping paper or other methods
approved by the Engineer. Remove the wrapping paper and trim the joint to a slightly beveled
edge for the full thickness of the course prior to resumption of paving.
Waste the material that is cut away and place new HMA against the cut. Use rollers or
tamping irons to seal the joint.
5-04.3(12)A2 Longitudinal Joints
Offset the longitudinal joint in any one course from the course immediately below by
not more than 6 inches nor less than 2 inches. Locate all longitudinal joints constructed in
the wearing course at a lane line or an edge line of the Traveled Way. Construct a notched
wedge joint along all longitudinal joints in the wearing surface of new HMA unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer. The notched wedge joint shall have a vertical edge of not less than
the maximum aggregate size nor more than ½ of the compacted lift thickness, and then taper
down on a slope not steeper than 4H:1V. Uniformly compact the sloped portion of the HMA
notched wedge joint.
On one-lane ramps a longitudinal joint may be constructed at the center of the traffic lane,
subject to approval by the Engineer, if:
1. The ramp must remain open to traffic, or
2. The ramp is closed to traffic and a hot-lap joint is constructed.
a. Two paving machines shall be used to construct the hot-lap joint.
b. The pavement within 6 inches of the hot-lap joint will not be excluded from random
location selection for compaction testing.
c. Construction equipment other than rollers shall not operate on any
uncompacted HMA.
When HMA is placed adjacent to cement concrete pavement, construct longitudinal
joints between the HMA and the cement concrete pavement. Saw the joint to the dimensions

shown on Standard Plan A-40.10 and fill with joint sealant meeting the requirements of
Section 9-04.2.
5-04.3(12)B Bridge Paving Joint Seals
5-04.3(12)B1 HMA Sawcut and Seal
Prior to placing HMA on the bridge deck, establish sawcut alignment points at both ends
of the bridge paving joint seals to be placed at the bridge ends, and at interior joints within
the bridge deck when and where shown in the Plans. Establish the sawcut alignment points
in a manner that they remain functional for use in aligning the sawcut after placing the
HMA overlay.
Submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the sealant manufacturer’s
application procedure.
Construct the bridge paving joint seal as specified in the Plans and in accordance with
the detail shown in the Standard Plans. Construct the sawcut in accordance with Section
5-05.3(8). Apply the sealant in accordance with Section 5-05.3(8)B and the manufacturer’s
application procedure.
5-04.3(12)B2 Paved Panel Joint Seal
Construct the paved panel joint seal in accordance with the requirements specified in
Section 5-04.3(12)B1 and the following requirement:
1. Clean and seal the existing joint between concrete panels in accordance with
Section 5-01.3(8) and the details shown in the Standard Plans.
5-04.3(13) Surface Smoothness
The completed surface of all courses shall be of uniform texture, smooth, uniform as to
crown and grade, and free from defects of all kinds. The completed surface of the wearing
course shall not vary more than ⅛ inch from the lower edge of a 10-foot straightedge placed
on the surface parallel to the centerline. The transverse slope of the completed surface of the
wearing course shall vary not more than ¼ inch in 10 feet from the rate of transverse slope
shown in the Plans.
When deviations in excess of the above tolerances are found that result from a high place
in the HMA, correct the pavement surface by one of the following methods:
1. Remove material from high places by grinding with an approved grinding machine, or
2. Remove and replace the wearing course of HMA, or
3. By other method approved by the Engineer.
Correct defects until there are no deviations anywhere greater than the allowable
tolerances.
Deviations in excess of the above tolerances that result from a low place in the HMA and
deviations resulting from a high place where corrective action, in the opinion of the Engineer,
will not produce satisfactory results will be accepted with a price adjustment. The Engineer
shall deduct from monies due or that may become due to the Contractor the sum of $500.00
for each and every section of single traffic lane 100 feet in length in which any excessive
deviations described above are found.
When portland cement concrete pavement is to be placed on HMA, the surface tolerance of
the HMA shall be such that no surface elevation lies above the Plan grade minus the specified
Plan depth of portland cement concrete pavement. Prior to placing the portland cement
concrete pavement, bring any such irregularities to the required tolerance by grinding or other
means approved by the Engineer.
When utility appurtenances such as manhole covers and valve boxes are located in
the Traveled Way, pave the Roadway before the utility appurtenances are adjusted to the
finished grade.

5-04.3(14) Planing Bituminous Pavement

Plane in such a manner that the underlying pavement is not torn, broken, or otherwise
damaged by the planing operation. Delamination or raveling of the underlying pavement
will not be construed as damage due to the Contractor’s operations. Pavement outside the
limits shown in the Plans or designated by the Engineer that is damaged by the Contractor’s
operations shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the
Contracting Agency.
For mainline planing operations, use equipment with automatic controls and with sensors
for either or both sides of the equipment. The controls shall be capable of sensing the grade
from an outside reference line, or a mat-referencing device. The automatic controls shall have
a transverse slope controller capable of maintaining the mandrel at the desired transverse slope
(expressed as a percentage) within plus or minus 0.1 percent.
Remove all loose debris from the planed surface before opening the planed surface to
traffic. The planings and other debris resulting from the planing operation shall become
the property of the Contractor and be disposed of in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C,
or as otherwise allowed by the Contract.
5-04.3(15) Sealing Pavement Surfaces
Apply a fog seal where shown in the Plans. Construct the fog seal in accordance with
Section 5-02.3. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, apply the fog seal prior to opening
to traffic.
5-04.3(16) HMA Road Approaches
Construct HMA approaches at the locations shown in the Plans or where staked by the
Engineer, in accordance with Section 5-04.
5-04.4 Measurement
HMA Cl. ___ PG ___, HMA for ___ Cl. ___ PG ___, and Commercial HMA will
be measured by the ton in accordance with Section 1-09.2, with no deduction being made
for the weight of asphalt binder, mineral filler, or any other component of the HMA. If the
Contractor elects to remove and replace HMA as allowed by Section 5-04.3(11), the material
removed will not be measured.
Roadway cores will be measured per each for the number of cores taken.
Crack Sealing-LF will be measured by the linear foot along the line of the crack.
Soil residual herbicide will be measured by the mile for the stated width to the nearest
0.01 mile or by the square yard, whichever is designated in the Proposal.
Pavement repair excavation will be measured by the square yard of surface marked prior
to excavation.
Asphalt for fog seal will be measured by the ton, as provided in Section 5-02.4.
Longitudinal joint seals between the HMA and cement concrete pavement will be
measured by the linear foot along the line and slope of the completed joint seal.
HMA sawcut and seal, and paved panel joint seal, will be measured by the linear foot along
the line and slope of the completed joint seal.
Planing bituminous pavement will be measured by the square yard.
Temporary pavement marking will be measured by the linear foot as provided in
Section 8-23.4.
Water will be measured by the M gallon as provided in Section 2-07.4.
5-04.5 Payment
“HMA Cl. ___ PG ___”, per ton.
“HMA for Approach Cl. ___ PG ___”, per ton.

“HMA for Preleveling Cl. ___ PG ___”, per ton.

“HMA for Pavement Repair Cl. ___ PG ___”, per ton.
“Commercial HMA”, per ton.
The unit Contract price per ton for “HMA Cl. ___ PG ___”, “HMA for Approach Cl.
___ PG ___”, “HMA for Preleveling Cl. ___ PG ___”, “HMA for Pavement Repair Cl. ___
PG ___”, and “Commercial HMA” shall be full compensation for all costs, including anti-
stripping additive, incurred to carry out the requirements of Section 5-04 except for those
costs included in other items which are included in this Subsection and which are included in
the Proposal.
“Crack Sealing-FA”, by force account.
“Crack Sealing-FA” will be paid for by force account as specified in Section 1-09.6. For
the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has
entered an amount in the Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor.
“Crack Sealing-LF”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Crack Sealing-LF” shall be full payment for all
costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 5-04.3(4)B.
“Soil Residual Herbicide ____ ft. Wide”, per mile, or
“Soil Residual Herbicide”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per mile or per square yard for “Soil Residual Herbicide” shall be
full payment for all costs incurred to obtain, provide and install herbicide in accordance with
Section 5-04.3(4)B.
“Pavement Repair Excavation Incl. Haul”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Pavement Repair Excavation Incl. Haul” shall
be full payment for all costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 5-04.3(4)C
with the exception, however, that all costs involved in the placement of HMA shall be included
in the unit Contract price per ton for “HMA for Pavement Repair Cl. ___ PG ___”, per ton.
“Asphalt for Fog Seal”, per ton.
Payment for “Asphalt for Fog Seal” is described in Section 5-02.5.
“Longitudinal Joint Seal”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Longitudinal Joint Seal” shall be full payment
for all costs incurred to construct the longitudinal joint between HMA and cement concrete
pavement, as described in Section 5-04.3(12)B.
“HMA Sawcut And Seal”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “HMA Sawcut And Seal” shall be full payment
for all costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 5-04.3(12)B1.
“Paved Panel Joint Seal”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Paved Panel Joint Seal” shall be full payment
for all costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 5-04.3(12)B2.
“Planing Bituminous Pavement”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Planing Bituminous Pavement” shall be full
payment for all costs incurred to perform the Work described in Section 5-04.3(14).
“Temporary Pavement Marking”, per linear foot.
Payment for “Temporary Pavement Marking” is described in Section 8-23.5.
“Water”, per M gallon.
Payment for “Water” is described in Section 2-07.5.
“Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment”, by calculation.
“Job Mix Compliance Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described
in Section 5-04.3(9)B6 and 5-04.3(9)D1.
“Compaction Price Adjustment”, by calculation.

“Compaction Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in Section
5-04.3(10)C3.
“HMA Core – Bridge”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “HMA Core – Bridge” shall be full payment for all
costs, including traffic control, associated with taking HMA density cores in pavement that
is on a bridge deck.
“HMA Core – Roadway”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “HMA Core – Roadway” shall be full payment for
all costs, including traffic control, associated with taking HMA density cores in pavement that
is not on a bridge deck.
“Cyclic Density Price Adjustment”, by calculation.
“Cyclic Density Price Adjustment” will be calculated and paid for as described in
Section 5-04.3(10)B.

Cement Concrete Pavement 5-05
5-05 Cement Concrete Pavement

5-05.1 Description
This Work shall consist of constructing a pavement composed of portland cement concrete
on a prepared Subgrade or base in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity with
the lines, grades, thicknesses, and typical cross-sections shown in the Plans or established by
the Engineer.
5-05.2 Materials
Fine Aggregate 9-03
Coarse Aggregate 9-03
Combined Aggregate 9-03
Joint Filler 9-04.1
Corrosion Resistant Dowel Bars 9-07.5(2)
Tie Bars 9-07.6
Concrete Patching Material 9-20
Water 9-25
Epoxy Resins 9-26
Cementitious materials are considered to be the following: portland cement, blended
hydraulic cement, fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, microsilica fume, and
metakaolin.
5-05.3(1) Concrete Mix Design for Paving
The Contractor shall provide a concrete mix design for each design of concrete specified
in the Contract. The Contractor shall use ACI 211.1 as a guide to determine proportions.
Concrete strength, placement, and workability shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Following approval of the Contractor’s proposal, all other requirements of Section 5-05
shall apply.
1. Materials – Materials shall conform to Section 5-05.2. Fine aggregate shall
conform to Section 9-03.1(2), Class 1. Coarse aggregate shall conform to Section
9-03.1(4), AASHTO grading No. 467. An alternate combined gradation conforming
to Section 9-03.1(5) may be proposed, that has a nominal maximum aggregate size
equal to or greater than a 1½-inch sieve.
Fly ash, if used, shall not exceed 35 percent by weight of the total cementitious
material, shall conform to Section 9-23.9 and shall be limited to Class F with a
maximum CaO content of 15 percent by weight.
Ground granulated blast furnace slag, if used, shall not exceed 30 percent by weight
of the total cementitious material and shall conform to Section 9-23.10. When both
ground granulated blast furnace slag and fly ash are included in the concrete mix,
the total weight of both these materials is limited to 35 percent by weight of the total
cementitious material. As an alternative to the use of fly ash, ground granulated blast
furnace slag and cement as separate components, a blended hydraulic cement that
meets the requirements of Section 9-01.2(1)B Blended Hydraulic Cements may be used.
Cementitious materials are those listed in Section 5-05.2. The minimum cementitious
material for any mix design shall be 564 pounds per cubic yard.
2. Submittals – The Contractor’s submittal shall include the mix proportions per cubic
yard, test results from beams and cylinders, and the proposed sources for all ingredients

including the fly ash. The mix shall be capable of providing a minimum flexural
strength of 650 psi at 14 days. Evaluation of strength shall be based on statistically
analyzed results of five beam specimens made according to WSDOT T 808 and
tested according to WSDOT T 802 that demonstrate a quality level of not less than
80 percent analyzed in accordance with Section 1-06.2(2)D. In addition the Contractor
shall fabricate, cure, and test five sets of cylinders, for evaluation of 28-day strengths,
according to AASHTO T 22 and FOP for AASHTO T 23 using the same mix design as
used in fabrication of the beams.
Mix designs submitted by the Contractor shall provide a unique identification for each
proposal and shall include test data confirming that concrete made in accordance with
the proposed design will meet the requirements of these Specifications and the 28-day
compressive strength result. Test data shall be from an independent testing lab or from
a commercial concrete producer’s lab. If the test data is developed at a producer’s lab,
the Engineer or a representative may witness all testing.
3. Mix Design Modifications – The Contractor may initiate adjustments to the aggregate
proportions of the approved mix design. An adjustment in both the fine and coarse
aggregate batch target weights of plus or minus 200 pounds per cubic yard will be
allowed without resubmittal of the mix design. The adjusted aggregate weights shall
become the new batch target weights for the mix design.
4. Conformance to Mix Design – Cement and coarse and fine aggregate weights shall
be within the following tolerances of the batch target weights of the mix design:
Portland Cement Concrete Batch Weights
Cement +5% -1%
Coarse Aggregate + 2% - 2%
Fine Aggregate + 2% - 2%
If the total cementitious material weight is made up of different components, these
component weights shall be within the following tolerances:
a. Portland cement weight plus 5 percent or minus 1 percent of that specified in the
mix design.
b. Fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag weight plus or minus 5 percent
of that specified in the mix design.
c. Microsilica weight plus or minus 10 percent of that specified in the mix design.
Water shall not exceed the maximum water specified in the mix design.
The Contractor may initiate minor adjustments to the approved mix proportions
within the tolerances noted above without resubmitting the mix design.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any proposed modification. A new
mix design will designate a new lot.
5-05.3(2) Consistency
The materials shall be mixed with sufficient water to produce a stiff concrete which will
hold its shape when deposited upon the Subgrade. Concrete placed during wet weather must
be mixed with sufficient water to produce a very stiff mixture. The consistency shall be such
that separation of the mortar from the coarse aggregate will not occur in handling.
The water/cementitious material ratio, by weight, shall not exceed 0.44. When slip-form
paving equipment is used, the Contractor shall further control concrete consistency to ensure
that edge slump conforms to the requirements of Section 5-05.3(11).
5-05.3(3) Equipment
Equipment necessary for handling materials and performing all parts of the Work shall
conform to the following requirements:

5-05.3(3)A Batching Plant and Equipment

1. General – The batching plant shall include bins, weighing hoppers, and scales for the
fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate. If cement is used in bulk, a bin,
hopper, and separate scale for cement shall be included. The weighing hoppers shall
be properly sealed and vented to preclude dusting during operation. The batching plant
shall be equipped with a suitable batch counter that cannot be reset, which will correctly
indicate the number of batches proportioned.
2. Bins and Hoppers – Bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate and
for each size of the coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant.
5-05.3(3)B Mixing Equipment
1. General – Concrete may be mixed at a batching plant or wholly or in part in truck
mixers. Each mixer shall have attached in a prominent place a manufacturer’s plate
showing the capacity of the drum in terms of volume of mixed concrete and the speed
of rotation of the mixing drum or blades.
2. Batching Plant – Mixing shall be in an approved mixer capable of combining the
aggregates, cement, and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform weight within the
specified mixing period.
Mixers shall be cleaned at suitable intervals. The pickup and throw-over blades in
the drum shall be repaired or replaced when they are worn down ¾ inch or more.
The Contractor shall have available at the jobsite a copy of the manufacturer’s design,
showing dimensions and arrangements of the blades in reference to original height and
depth, or provide permanent marks on blades to show points of ¾ inch wear from new
conditions. Drilled holes ¼ inch in diameter near each end and at midpoint of each
blade are recommended.
3. Truck Mixers and Truck Agitators – Truck mixers used for mixing and hauling
concrete, and truck agitators used for hauling plant-mixed concrete, shall conform to
the requirements of Section 6-02.3(4)A.
4. Nonagitator Trucks – Bodies of nonagitating hauling equipment for concrete shall be
smooth, mortar-tight, metal containers and shall be capable of discharging the concrete
at a satisfactory controlled rate without segregation. Covers shall be provided when
needed for protection. Plant-mixed concrete may be transported in nonagitated vehicles
provided that concrete is in a workable condition when placed and:
a. discharge is completed within 45 minutes after the introduction of mixing water
to the cement and aggregates, or
b. discharge is completed within 60 minutes after the introduction of mixing water
to the cement and aggregates, provided the concrete mix temperature is 70°F or
below during placement, or
c. discharge is completed within 60 minutes after the introduction of mixing water to
the cement and aggregates, provided the mix contains an approved set retarder at the
manufacturer’s minimum dosage rate.
5-05.3(3)C Finishing Equipment
The standard method of constructing concrete pavement on State Highways shall be with
approved slip-form paving equipment designed to spread, consolidate, screed, and float-finish
the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine so a dense and homogeneous
pavement is achieved with a minimum of hand finishing. On other roads and on WSDOT
projects requiring less than 1,000 square yards of cement concrete pavement or requiring
individual placement areas of less than 1,000 square yards, irregular areas, intersections,
and at locations inaccessible to slip-form paving equipment, cement concrete pavement may
be placed with approved placement and finishing equipment utilizing stationary side forms.
Hand screeding and float finishing of cement concrete pavement may only be utilized on
small irregular areas as allowed by the Engineer.

5-05.3(3)D Joint Sawing Equipment

The Contractor shall provide approved power driven concrete saws for sawing joints,
adequate in number of units and power to complete the sawing at the required rate. The
Contractor shall provide at least one standby saw in good working order. An ample supply of
saw blades shall be maintained at the site of the Work at all times during sawing operations.
The Contractor shall provide adequate artificial lighting facilities for night sawing. All of
this equipment shall be on the job both before and continuously during concrete placement.
Sawing equipment shall be available immediately and continuously upon call by the Engineer
on a 24-hour basis, including Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays.
5-05.3(3)E Smoothness Testing Equipment
The Contractor shall provide a California-type computerized profilograph, complete with
recorder, for determining the profile index of the pavement according to WSDOT T 807.
The profilograph shall be on the project, calibrated, in good working condition, and ready
for operation before construction of any concrete pavement begins. The operator shall be
competent and experienced in operation of the equipment.
5-05.3(4) Measuring and Batching Materials
The batch plant site, layout, equipment, and provisions for transporting material shall
ensure a continuous supply of material to the Work.
1. Measuring Materials
a. Aggregates – The fine aggregate and each size of coarse aggregate shall be
measured by weighing, the weight for the particular aggregates used being
proportional to their respective bulk specific gravities. The weighing of each
size of material shall be a separate and distinct operation.
Corrections shall be made for variations in weight of materials due to the
moisture content.
The equipment for weighing aggregates shall conform to the requirements
of Section 1-09.2.
b. Cement – Cement shall be weighed on scales meeting the requirements of
Section 1-09.2. Adequate provision shall be made to prevent loss of cement
between the batch box and the mixer.
c. Water – Water may be measured either by volume or by weight. The accuracy
of measuring the water shall be within a range of error of not over 1 percent.
2. Batching Materials – On all projects requiring more than 2,500 cubic yards of
portland cement concrete for paving, the batching plant shall be equipped to proportion
aggregates and cement by weight by means of automatic and interlocked proportioning
devices of approved type.
5-05.3(4)A Acceptance of Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
Acceptance of portland cement concrete pavement shall be as provided under statistical
or nonstatistical acceptance. Determination of statistical or nonstatistical shall be based on
Proposal quantities and shall consider the total of all Bid items involving of a specific class.
Statistical acceptance will apply only to Contracts advertised, Awarded and administered
by WSDOT, unless specifically provided otherwise in the Special Provisions. Contracting
agencies other than WSDOT must specifically invoke statistical acceptance in their Special
Provisions if it is desired.
Statistical Acceptance, (1) applies only to WSDOT projects, (2) is administered under
the provisions of Section 5-05.5, and (3) will be used for a class of mix when the Proposal
quantities for that class of mix is 1,500 cubic yards or greater.
Nonstatistical Acceptance will be used (1) for a class of mix when the Proposal quantities
for that class of mix is less than 1,500 cubic yards and (2) all contracts advertised, Awarded
and administered by agencies other than WSDOT.

The point of acceptance will be per WAQTC TM 2 or at the point of discharge when
a pump is used.
Acceptance of Concrete. The concrete producer shall provide a certificate of compliance
for each truckload of concrete in accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)B.
For the purpose of acceptance sampling and testing, a lot is defined as having a maximum
of 15 sublots that was produced for the same class of mix. The final lot may be increased to
25 sublots. All of the test results obtained from the same lot shall be evaluated collectively.
The quantity represented by each sample will constitute a sublot. Sampling and testing shall
be performed on a random basis at the frequency of one sample per sublot. Sublot size shall
be determined to the nearest 10 cubic yards to provide not less than three uniform sized
sublots with a maximum sublot size of 500 cubic yards.
Acceptance testing for compliance of air content and 28-day compressive strength shall be
conducted from samples prepared according to FOP for WAQTC TM 2. Air content shall be
determined by conducting FOP for AASHTO T 152. Compressive strength shall be determined
by FOP for AASHTO T 23 and AASHTO T 22.
The Contractor shall provide cure boxes in accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)H, and
protect concrete cylinders in cure boxes from excessive vibration and shock waves during
the curing period in accordance with Section 6-02.3(6)D. Payment for cure boxes shall be
Rejection of Concrete
1. Rejection by the Contractor – The Contractor may, prior to sampling, elect to remove
any defective material and replace it with new material at no expense to the Contracting
Agency. Any such new material will be sampled, tested, and evaluated for acceptance.
2. Rejection Without Testing – The Engineer may reject any load that appears defective
prior to placement. Material rejected before placement shall not be incorporated into
the pavement. No payment will be made for the rejected materials unless the Contractor
requests that the rejected material be tested. If the Contractor elects to have the rejected
materials tested, a sample will be taken and both the air content and strength shall
be tested by WSDOT.
Payment for rejected material will be based on the results of the one sample, which was
taken and tested. If the rejected material fails either test, no payment will be made for the
rejected material; in addition, the cost of sampling and testing at the rate of $250.00 per
sample shall be borne by the Contractor. If the rejected material passes both tests, the mix
will be compensated at a CPF of 1.00 and the cost of the sampling and testing will borne
by the Contracting Agency.
Statistical Acceptance
The results of all acceptance testing performed in the field and the Composite Pay Factor
(CPF) of the lot after three sublots have been tested will be available to the contractor through
WSDOT’s website.
The Specification limits as defined in Section 1-06.2(2)D shall be as follows. The lower
Specification limit for Air Content shall be 3 percent, and the upper Specification limit for
Air Content shall be 7 percent. The lower Specification limit for compressive strength shall
be 4,000 psi.
The price adjustment factor (fi) defined in Section 1-06.2(2)D shall be six for compressive
strength and four for air content.
If either the air content or compressive strength is not measured in accordance with this
section its individual pay factor will be considered to be 1.00 in calculating the Composite
Pay Factor.
Non-Statistical Acceptance
Concrete will be accepted based on conformance to the requirement for air content and
the compressive strength at 28 days for sublots as tested and determined by the Contracting

Agency. The lower Specification limit for air content shall be 3 percent, and the upper
Specification limit for air content shall be 7 percent. The lower Specification limit for
compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi.
Each sublot will be deemed to have met the specified compressive strength requirement
when both of the following conditions are met:
1. Individual strength tests do not fall below the lower specification limit for strength
by more than 12½ percent, or 500 psi, whichever is least.
2. An individual strength test averaged with the two preceding individual strength tests
meets or exceeds the lower specification limit for strength.
When compressive strengths fail to satisfy one or both of the above requirements, the
Contractor may request acceptance of in-place concrete strength based on core results. This
method will not be used if the Engineer determines coring would be harmful to the integrity
of the Structure. Cores, if allowed, will be obtained by the Contractor in accordance with
AASHTO T 24 and delivered to the Contracting Agency for testing in accordance with
AASHTO T 22. If the concrete in the Structure will be dry under service conditions, the core
will be air-dried at a temperature of between 60°F and 80°F and at a relative humidity of less
than 60 percent for 7 days before testing, and will be tested air dry.
Acceptance for each sublot by the core method requires that the average compressive
strength of three cores be at least 85 percent of the specified strength with no one core less
than 75 percent of the specified strength. When the Contractor requests strength analysis by
coring, the results obtained will be accepted by both parties as conclusive and supersede all
other strength data for the concrete sublot.
If the Contractor elects to core, cores shall be obtained no later than 50 days after initial
concrete placement. The Engineer will concur in the locations to be cored. Repair of cored
areas shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The cost incurred in coring and testing
these cores, including repair of core locations, shall be borne by the Contractor.
5-05.3(5) Mixing Concrete
The concrete may be mixed in a batching plant or in truck mixers. The mixer shall be of
an approved type and capacity. Mixing time shall be measured from the time all materials
are in the drum. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance with the
requirements of Sections 6-02.3(4), 6-02.3(4)A, and 6-02.3(4)B.
When mixed in a batching plant, the mixing time shall not be less than 50 seconds nor
more than 90 seconds.
The mixer shall be operated at a drum speed as shown on the manufacturer’s nameplate
on the mixer. Any concrete mixed less than the specified time shall be discarded and disposed
of by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency. The volume of concrete mixed
per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s rated capacity, as shown on the manufacturer’s standard
rating plate on the mixer.
Each concrete mixing machine shall be equipped with a device for counting automatically
the number of batches mixed during the day’s operation.
Retempering concrete by adding water or by other means will not be permitted.
5-05.3(5)A Limitations of Mixing
Concrete shall not be mixed, placed, or finished when the natural light is inadequate,
as determined by the Engineer, unless an adequate and approved artificial lighting system
is operated.
Mixing and placing concrete shall be discontinued when a descending air temperature in
the shade away from artificial heat reaches 40ºF and shall not be resumed until an ascending
air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat reaches 35ºF unless authorized in
writing by the Engineer.

When mixing and placing is authorized during cold weather, the aggregates may be heated
by either steam or dry heat prior to being placed in the mixer. The apparatus used shall heat the
mass uniformly and shall be arranged to preclude the possible occurrence of overheated areas
which might injure the materials. Unless otherwise authorized, the temperature of the mixed
concrete shall be not less than 50ºF and not more than 90ºF at the time of discharge into the
hauling conveyance. No concrete shall be mixed with frozen aggregates.
5-05.3(6) Surface Preparation
The Subgrade surface shall be prepared and compacted a minimum of 3 feet beyond each
edge of the area which is to receive concrete pavement in order to accommodate the slip-
form equipment.
Concrete shall not be placed during a heavy rainfall. Prior to placing concrete:
1. The surface shall be moist;
2. Excess water (e.g., standing, pooling or flowing) shall be removed from the surface.
3. The surface shall be clean and free of any deleterious materials.
4. The surface temperature shall not exceed 120°F or be frozen.
5-05.3(7) Placing, Spreading, and Compacting Concrete
The provisions relating to the frequency and amplitude of internal vibration shall be
considered the minimum requirements and are intended to ensure adequate density in the
hardened concrete. Referee testing of hardened concrete will be performed by cutting cores
from the finished pavement after a minimum of 24 hours of curing. Density determination
will be made based on the water content of the core as taken. WSDOT T 810 shall be used for
the determination of core density. Reference cores will be taken at the minimum rate of one
for each 500 cubic yards of pavement, or fraction thereof. These same cores will be used for
thickness measurements as required by Section 5-05.5(1).
The average density of the cores shall be at least 97 percent of the approved mix design
density or the actual concrete density when determined by the Contractor using AASHTO
T 121 with no cores having a density of less than 96 percent.
Failure to meet the above requirement will be considered as evidence that the minimum
requirements for vibration are inadequate for the job conditions, and additional vibrating
units or other means of increasing the effect of vibration shall be employed so that the density
of the hardened concrete as indicated by further referee testing shall conform to the above
listed requirements. Primary units of pavement, as defined in Section 5-05.5(1), not meeting
the prescribed minimum density shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory material.
At the option of the Engineer, noncompliant material may be accepted at a reduced price.
5-05.3(7)A Slip-Form Construction
The concrete shall be distributed uniformly into final position by a self-propelled slip-form
paver without delay. The alignment and elevation of the paver shall be regulated from outside
reference lines established for this purpose, or by an electronic control system capable of
controlling the line and grade within required tolerances. The paver shall vibrate the concrete
for the full width and depth of the strip of pavement being placed and the vibration shall
be adequate to provide a consistency of concrete that will stand normal to the surface with
sharp well-defined edges. The sliding forms shall be rigidly held together laterally to prevent
spreading of the forms.
The plastic concrete shall be effectively consolidated by internal vibration with transverse
vibrating units for the full width of pavement and/or a series of equally spaced longitudinal
vibrating units. The space from the outer edge of the pavement to the outer longitudinal
unit shall not exceed 9 inches. The spacing of internal units shall be uniform and not exceed
18 inches.
The term internal vibration means vibration by vibrating units located within the specified
thickness of pavement section.

The rate of vibration of each vibrating unit shall be not less than 7,500 cycles per minute,
and the amplitude of vibration shall be sufficient to be perceptible on the surface of the
concrete along the entire length of the vibrating unit and for a distance of at least 1 foot.
The frequency of vibration or amplitude shall be varied proportionately with the rate of
travel to result in a uniform density and air content. The paving machine shall be equipped
with a tachometer or other suitable device for measuring and indicating the actual frequency
of vibrations.
The concrete shall be held at a uniform consistency. The slip-form paver shall be operated
with as nearly a continuous forward movement as possible and all operations of mixing,
delivering, and spreading concrete shall be coordinated to provide uniform progress with
stopping and starting of the paver held to a minimum. If, for any reason, it is necessary to stop
the forward movement of the paver, the vibratory and tamping elements shall also be stopped
immediately. No tractive force shall be applied to the machine, except that which is controlled
from the machine.
When concrete is being placed adjacent to an existing pavement, that part of the equipment
which is supported on the existing pavement shall be equipped with protective pads on crawler
tracks or rubber-tired wheels on which the bearing surface is offset to run a sufficient distance
from the edge of the pavement to avoid breaking the pavement edge.
5-05.3(7)B Stationary Side Form Construction
Side form sections shall be straight, free from warps, bends, indentations, or other defects.
Defective forms shall be removed from the Work. Metal side forms shall be used unless other
forms are approved by the Engineer.
Side forms may be built up by rigidly attaching a section to either top or bottom of forms.
If such buildup is attached to the top of metal forms, the buildup shall be of metal.
Side forms shall be of sufficient rigidity, both in the form and in the interlocking
connection with adjoining forms, that springing will not occur under the weight of grading
and paving equipment or from the pressure of concrete. The Contractor shall provide sufficient
forms so that there will be no delay in placing the concrete due to lack of forms.
Before placing side forms, the underlying material shall be at the proper grade. Side forms
shall be placed to the required grade and alignment of the edge of the finished pavement.
Wood wedges may be used to adjust the form elevation provided they do not extend into
the concrete. The forms shall be firmly supported during the entire operation of placing,
compacting, and finishing the pavement.
Forms shall be drilled in advance of being placed to line and grade to accommodate tie
bars where these are specified.
Immediately in advance of placing concrete and after all Subgrade operations are
completed, side forms shall be trued and maintained to the required line and grade for a
distance sufficient to prevent delay in placing concrete.
Side forms shall remain in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed, and
in all cases until the edge of the pavement no longer requires the protection of the forms.
Curing compound shall be applied to the concrete immediately after the forms are removed.
Side forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and oiled each time they are used and before
concrete is placed against them.
Concrete shall be spread, screeded, shaped, and consolidated by one or more self-
propelled machines. These machines shall uniformly distribute and consolidate concrete
without segregation so that completed pavement will conform to required cross section with
a minimum of handwork.
The number and capacity of machines furnished shall be adequate to perform the Work
required at a rate equal to that of concrete delivery.
Concrete for the full paving width shall be effectively consolidated by means of surface
vibrators, in combination with internal vibrators, or by some other method of consolidation
that produces equivalent results without segregation.

When vibrators are used to consolidate concrete, the rate of vibration shall be not less
than 3,500 cycles per minute for surface vibrators and shall be not less than 7,000 cycles
per minute for internal vibrators. Amplitude of vibration shall be sufficient to be perceptible
on the surface of the concrete more than 1 foot from the vibrating element. The Contractor
shall furnish a tachometer or other suitable device for measuring and indicating frequency
of vibration.
Power to vibrators shall be connected so that vibration ceases when forward or backward
motion of the machine is stopped.
5-05.3(8) Joints
Joints in cement concrete pavement will be designated as longitudinal and transverse
contraction joints, longitudinal and transverse construction joints, or isolation joints, and shall
be constructed as shown in the Plans and in accordance with the following provisions:
All contraction joints shall be constructed at the locations, intervals, and depths shown in
the Standard Plans. The faces of all joints shall be constructed perpendicular to the surface of
the cement concrete pavement.
5-05.3(8)A Contraction Joints
All transverse and longitudinal contraction joints shall be formed with suitable power-
driven concrete saws. The Contractor shall provide sufficient sawing equipment capable of
completing the sawing to the required dimensions and at the required rate to control cracking.
The Contractor shall provide adequate artificial lighting facilities for night sawing. Joints shall
not vary from the specified or indicated line by more than ¾ inch.
Commencement of sawing transverse contraction joints will be dependent upon the setting
time of the concrete and shall be done at the earliest possible time following placement of the
concrete without tearing or raveling the adjacent concrete excessively.
Longitudinal contraction joints shall be sawed as required to control cracking and as soon
as practical after the initial control transverse contraction joints are completed.
Any damage to the curing material during the sawing operations shall be repaired
immediately after the sawing is completed.
When cement concrete pavement is placed adjacent to existing cement concrete pavement,
the vertical face of all existing working joints shall be covered with a bond-breaking material
such as polyethylene film, roofing paper, or other material as approved by the Engineer.
5-05.3(8)B Sealing Sawed Contraction Joints
Sawed contraction joints shall be filled with a joint sealant filler conforming to the
requirements of Section 9-04.2. Joints shall be thoroughly clean at the time of sealing and
if the hot-poured type is used the joints shall be dry. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets.
The hot-poured compound shall be applied in two or more layers, if necessary. The hot-poured
compound and the cold-poured compound shall be applied under sufficient pressure to fill the
groove from bottom to top and the cured joint sealant shall be between ¼ and ⅝ inch below
the top surface of the concrete. The joint filled with cold-poured compound shall then be
covered with a strip of nonabsorbent paper at least twice as wide as the joint and the paper
shall be left in place.
5-05.3(8)C Construction Joints
When placing of concrete is discontinued for more than 45 minutes, a transverse
construction joint shall be installed. Construction joints shall be as shown in the
Standard Plans.
Transverse construction joints shall be constructed between cement concrete pavement
and reinforced concrete bridge approach slabs.
All transverse and longitudinal construction joints, including the joint between new and
existing pavement when widened, shall be sawed and sealed with joint filler conforming to
the requirements of Sections 5-05.3(8)A and 9-04.2.

5-05.3(8)D Isolation Joints

Premolded joint filler in accordance with Section 9-04.1(2) shall be placed as detailed
in the Plans through the full depth of concrete pavement when drainage features are placed
within the concrete pavement.
5-05.3(9) Vacant
5-05.3(10) Tie Bars and Corrosion Resistant Dowel Bars
Tie bars shall be placed at all longitudinal contraction and construction joints, in
accordance with the requirements shown in the Standard Plans. In addition, tie bars shall
be installed when concrete Shoulders are placed as a separate operation or when widening
existing pavement.
Tie bars shall be placed at longitudinal construction joints between lanes in a manner that
the individual bars are located at the required elevation and spaced as shown in the Standard
Plans and in a manner that the vertical edge of the concrete is not deformed or otherwise
damaged during placement of the bars.
Placement tolerances for tie bars shall be within 1 inch of the middle of the concrete slab,
within 1 inch of being centered over the joint and placed parallel or perpendicular to centerline
within 1 inch of the vertical and horizontal plane.
Corrosion resistant dowel bars will be required for the construction joint at the end of
paving operations each day and they shall be placed in accordance with the Standard Plans.
Corrosion resistant dowel bars shall be placed at all transverse contraction joints as shown
in the Contract or in accordance with the Standard Plans. All dowel bars shall have a parting
compound, such as curing compound, grease or other Engineer approved equal applied to
them prior to placement. Any dowel bar delivered to the project that displays rust/oxidation,
pinholes, questionable blemishes, or deviates from the round shall be rejected.
The Contractor shall furnish a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance in accordance
with Section 1-06.3, including mill test report verifying conformance to the requirements
of Section 9-07.5(2) as well as written certification identifying the patching material, when
applicable, used at cut dowel bar ends.
Only one type of corrosion resistant dowel bars will be allowed per contract; intermixing
of different corrosion resistant dowel bar types will not be allowed.
Placement tolerances for dowel bars shall be within 1 inch of the middle of the concrete
slab, within 1 inch of being centered over the transverse joint and parallel to centerline within
½ inch of the vertical and the horizontal plane.
Cutting of stiffeners within the dowel bar cage is not allowed.
When fresh concrete pavement is to be placed against pre-project existing cement concrete
pavement, tie bars shall be drilled and set into the existing pavement with an epoxy bonding
agent in accordance with the Standard Plans and specified tolerances for placement of tie bars.
The epoxy-bonding agent shall be either Type I or IV epoxy resin as specified in Section 9-26.
The Contractor may use any method for drilling the holes, provided the method selected
does not damage the existing concrete. Any damage caused by the Contractor’s operations
shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Contracting Agency in accordance with
Section 1-07.13.
The tie bar holes shall be blown clean with compressed air before grouting. The bar shall
be centered in the hole for the full length of embedment before grouting. The grout shall then
be pumped into the hole around the bar in a manner that the back of the hole will be filled first.
Blocking or shimming shall not impede the flow of the grout into the hole. Dams, if needed,
shall be placed at the front of the holes to confine the grout. The dams shall permit the escape
of air without leaking grout and shall not be removed until grout has cured in the hole.

5-05.3(11) Finishing
After the concrete has been given a preliminary finish by means of finishing devices
incorporated in the slip-form paving equipment, the surface of the fresh concrete shall be
checked by the Contractor with a straightedge device not less than 10 feet in length. High
areas indicated by the straightedge device shall be removed by the hand-float method. Each
successive check with the straightedge device shall lap the previous check path by at least
½ of the length of the straightedge. The requirements of this paragraph may be waived if
it is successfully demonstrated that other means will consistently produce a surface with
a satisfactory profile index and meeting the 10-foot straightedge requirement specified in
Section 5-05.3(12).
Any edge slump of the pavement, exclusive of specified edging, in excess of ¼ inch
shall be corrected before the concrete has hardened. If edge slump on any 1 foot or greater
length of hardened concrete exceeds 1 inch, the concrete shall be repaired as provided in
Section 5-05.3(22).
The standard method of surface finish shall be longitudinal tining. In advance of curing
operations, where longitudinal tining is required, the pavement shall be given an initial and
a final texturing. Initial texturing shall be performed with a burlap drag or broom device that
will produce striations parallel with the centerline. Final texturing shall be performed with a
wire comb tine device that will produce grooves parallel with the centerline. The wire comb
tine device shall be operated within 5 inches, but not closer than 3 inches, of pavement edges.
Burlap drags, brooms, and tine devices shall be installed on self-propelled equipment
having external alignment control. The installation shall be such that, when texturing, the
area of burlap in contact with the pavement surface shall be maintained constant at all
times. Broom and tine devices shall be provided with positive elevation control. Downward
pressure on pavement surface shall be maintained at all times during texturing so as to achieve
uniform texturing without measurable variations in pavement profile. Self-propelled texturing
machines shall be operated so that travel speed when texturing is maintained constant. Failure
of equipment to conform to all provisions in this paragraph shall constitute cause for stopping
placement of concrete until the equipment deficiency or malfunction is corrected. The wire
comb of the final texturing device shall be rectangular in cross section, 3/32 to 1/8 inch wide,
on ¾-inch centers, ± 1/8-inch, and of sufficient length, thickness, and resilience to form grooves
approximately 1/8 inch deep in the fresh concrete surface. Final texture shall be uniform in
appearance with substantially all of the grooves having a depth between 1/16 and 3/16 inch.
On projects requiring less than 1,000 square yards of cement concrete pavement, for
irregular areas or areas not accessible to slip-form pavers, the surface finish may be either
longitudinal tined or transverse tined.
Transverse tining shall be done by texturing with a wire comb perpendicular to the
centerline of the pavement. The wire comb tines shall be rectangular in cross section, 3/32 to
1/8 inch wide, on ½-inch centers ± 1/8 inch, and of sufficient length, thickness, and resilience
to form grooves approximately 1/8 inch deep in the fresh concrete surface. Final texture shall
be uniform in appearance with substantially all of the grooves having a depth between 1/16 to
3/16 inch. Finishing shall take place with the elements of the wire comb as nearly perpendicular
to the concrete surface as is practical, to eliminate dragging the mortar.
If the tining equipment has not been previously approved, a test section shall be
constructed prior to approval of the equipment.
Regardless of the surface finish, if the pavement has a raised curb without a formed
concrete gutter, the texturing shall end 2 feet from the curb line.
At the beginning and end of paving each day, the Contractor shall, with an approved stamp,
indent the concrete surface near the right hand edge of the panel to indicate the date, month,
and year of placement.
At approximate 500-foot intervals where designated by the Engineer the Contractor shall,
with an approved stamp, indent the concrete surface near the right hand edge of the pavement
with the stationing of the Roadway.

5-05.3(12) Surface Smoothness

The pavement smoothness will be checked with equipment furnished and operated by
the Contractor, under supervision of the Engineer, within 48 hours following placement of
concrete. Smoothness of all pavement placed, except shoulders, ramp tapers, intersections,
tight horizontal curves, and small or irregular areas as defined by Section 5-05.3(3),
unless specified otherwise, will be measured with a recording profilograph, as specified in
Section 5-05.3(3), parallel to centerline, from which the profile index will be determined in
accordance with WSDOT T 807. Tight horizontal curves are curves having a centerline radius
of curve less than 1,000 feet and pavement within the superelevation transition of those curves.
For the purpose of qualifying the equipment and methods used by the Contractor, a daily
profile index will be computed. For pavement placed in a 12-foot width or less, the daily
profile index will be the average of two profiles made approximately 3 feet from and parallel
to each edge of the pavement. If the pavement is placed in a width greater than 12 feet, the
daily profile index will be computed as the average of profiles made approximately 3 feet from
and parallel to each edge and at the approximate location of each planned longitudinal joint.
The daily profile index of the finished pavement thus determined will be 7 inches per mile,
or less. Only equipment and methods that consistently produce a finished surface meeting this
requirement shall be used. Should the daily profile index exceed the rate of 7 inches per mile,
the paving operations shall be discontinued until other methods or equipment are provided by
the Contractor. Such revised methods and equipment shall again be discontinued if they do not
produce a finished surface having a daily profile index of 7 inches per mile, or less. Operations
shall not be resumed until the Engineer approves further changes in methods and equipment as
proposed by the Contractor.
All areas representing high points having deviations in excess of 0.3 inch as determined
by procedures described in WSDOT T 807, shall be reduced by abrasive methods until such
deviations do not exceed 0.1 inch as determined by reruns of the profilograph. High areas
of individual profiles shall be reduced by abrasive means so that the profile index will not
exceed 0.7 inch in any 0.1-mile section. All high areas in excess of 0.1 inch shall be reduced
to 0.0 inch prior to reducing any high points of 0.1 inch or less. Low spots exceeding .25 inch
shall be corrected in a manner approved by the Engineer.
When any of the daily profile indexes exceed 7 inches per mile, final acceptance of the
pavement for smoothness parallel to the centerline will be based on profile indexes as
measured with the profilograph, operating by the Contractor under the supervision of the
Engineer, along a line parallel to the edge of pavement and each longitudinal joint and will not
be averaged for acceptance purposes. The final acceptance profile indexes will be measured
after all corrective Work is complete and will demonstrate that all 0.1-mile sections on the
project are within the 0.7-inch Specification.
When cement concrete pavement abuts bridges, the finished pavement parallel to centerline
within 15 feet of the abutting joint shall be uniform to a degree that no variations greater than
⅛ inch are present when tested with a 10-foot straightedge.
When paving intersections, small or irregular areas, as defined in Section 5-05.3(3),
surface smoothness will be measured with a 10-foot straightedge no later than 5:00 p.m. of
the day following the placing of the concrete. A 10-foot straightedge will be placed parallel
to the centerline so as to bridge any depressions and touch all high spots. Should the surface
vary more than ⅛ inch from the lower edge of the straightedge, the high portion shall be
reduced by the Contractor to the ⅛-inch tolerance by abrasive means at no expense to the
Contracting Agency. It is further provided that if reduction of high portions of the surface
involves breaking, dislodging, or other disturbance of the aggregates, such cutting will not be
permitted until the pavement has achieved its design strength. If in the opinion of the Engineer
irregularities cannot be satisfactorily removed by such methods, the Contractor shall remove
and replace the pavement at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
Smoothness perpendicular to the centerline will be measured with a 10-foot straightedge
across all lanes with the same cross slope, including shoulders when composed of cement

concrete pavement. The overlapping 10-foot straightedge measurement shall be discontinued

at a point 6 inches from the most extreme outside edge of the finished cement concrete
pavement. The transverse slope of the finished pavement shall be uniform to a degree such
that no variations greater than ¼ inch are present when tested with a 10-foot long straightedge
laid in a direction perpendicular to the centerline. Any areas that are in excess of this specified
tolerance shall be corrected by abrasive means.
5-05.3(13) Curing
Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed and as soon as marring of
the concrete will not occur, the entire surface of the newly placed concrete shall be cured in
accordance with one of the following methods the Contractor may elect.
5-05.3(13)A Curing Compound
Liquid membrane-forming concrete curing compound Type 2 meeting the requirements of
Section 9-23.2 shall be applied to the entire area of the exposed surface of the concrete with
an approved mechanical spray machine. The spray fog shall be protected from the wind with
an adequate shield. It shall be applied uniformly at the rate of one gallon to not more than
150-square feet.
The compound shall be applied with equipment of the pressure tank or pump type equipped
with a feed tank agitator which ensures continuous agitation of the compound during spraying
operations. The nozzle shall be of the two-line type with sufficient air to properly atomize
the compound.
The curing compound shall not be applied during or immediately after rainfall. If it
becomes necessary to leave the pavement uncoated overnight, it shall be covered with
polyethylene sheeting, which shall remain in place until weather conditions are favorable
for the application of the curing compound.
In the event that rain falls on the newly coated pavement before the film has dried
sufficiently to resist damage, or in the event of damage to the film from any cause, the
Contractor shall apply a new coat of curing compound in one or two applications to the
affected area at the rate which, in the opinion of the Engineer, will result in a film of curing
value equal to that specified in the original coat.
Before placing the curing compound in the spray tank, it shall be thoroughly agitated
as recommended by the Manufacturer. The compound shall not be diluted by the addition
of solvents nor be altered in any manner. If the compound has become chilled to the extent
that it is too viscous for proper stirring or application or if portions of the vehicle have been
precipitated from solution, it shall be heated to restore proper fluidity but it shall not be heated
above 100ºF. All curing compound shall have approval prior to placing in the spray tanks.
The curing compound shall be applied immediately after the concrete has been finished and
after any bleed water that has collected on the surface has disappeared, or at a time designated
by the Engineer. If hair checking develops in the pavement before finishing is completed, the
Engineer may order the application of the curing compound at an earlier stage, in which event
any concrete cut from the surface in finishing operations shall be removed entirely from the
pavement. If additional mortar is then needed to fill torn areas, it shall be obtained ahead of
the spraying operations. All areas cut by finishing tools subsequent to the application of the
curing compound shall immediately be given new applications at the rate specified above.
The curing compound, after application, shall be protected by the Contractor from injury
until the pavement has reached a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi. All traffic, either
by foot or otherwise, shall be considered as injurious to the film of the applied compound.
The Contractor shall provide on the job a sufficient quantity of white polyethylene sheeting
to cover all the pavement laid in 3 hours of maximum operation. This sheeting shall be
reserved exclusively for the protection of the pavement in case of rain or breakdown of the
spray equipment used for applying the curing compound. The protective sheeting shall be
placed over the pavement when ordered, and in the manner specified by the Engineer.

Areas from which it is impossible to exclude traffic shall be protected by a covering of

sand or earth not less than 1 foot in thickness or by other suitable and effective means. The
protective covering shall be placed no earlier than 24 hours after application of the compound.
The Contractor shall assume all liabilities for and protect the Contracting Agency from any
damages or claims arising from the use of materials or processes described herein.
5-05.3(13)B White Polyethylene Sheeting
The sheeting shall be placed over the pavement immediately after finishing operations are
completed, or at a time designated by the Engineer.
The sheeting shall be laid so that individual sheets overlap at least 2 feet, and the lapped
areas shall be held in close contact with the pavement by weighting with earth or boards to
prevent movement by the wind. The sheeting shall extend downward to cover the edges of the
pavement and shall be secured to the Subgrade with a continuous bank of earth or surfacing
material. Any holes occurring in the sheeting shall be patched immediately to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. The sheeting shall be maintained against injury and remain in place until the
pavement has reached a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi.
5-05.3(13)C Wet Curing
Wet curing shall be accomplished by applying a continuous fog or mist spray to the
entire pavement surface until it has reached a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi.
If water runoff is not a concern, continuous sprinkling is acceptable. Sprinkling shall not
begin until the concrete has achieved initial set as determined by AASHTO T 197 or other
approved method.
5-05.3(14) Cold Weather Work
When the air temperature is expected to reach the freezing point during the day or night
and the pavement has not reached 50 percent of its design strength or 2,500 psi which ever
is greater the concrete shall be protected from freezing. The Contractor shall, at no expense
to the Contracting Agency, provide a sufficient supply of straw, hay, grass, earth, blankets,
or other suitable blanketing material and spread it over the pavement to a sufficient depth
to prevent freezing of the concrete. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality and
strength of the concrete thus cured. Any concrete injured by frost action or freezing shall be
removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense in accordance with these Specifications.
5-05.3(15) Concrete Pavement Construction in Adjacent Lanes
Unless otherwise shown in the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the pavement shall
be constructed in multiple lanes; that is, two or more adjacent lanes paved in a single
operation. Longitudinal contraction joints shall be used between adjacent lanes that are
paved concurrently, and construction joints shall be used when lanes are paved separately.
Tie bars shall be installed during initial lane construction.
The Contractor shall replace, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, any panels on the
new pavement that are cracked or broken as a result of the Contractor’s operations.
5-05.3(16) Protection of Pavement
The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances from any damage.
Protection shall include personnel to direct traffic and the erection and maintenance of warning
signs, lights, barricades, temporary take-down bridges across the pavement with adequate
approaches, and whatever other means may be necessary to accommodate local traffic and
to protect the pavement during the curing period or until opened to traffic as determined by
the Engineer.
The operation of construction equipment on the new pavement will not be allowed until
the pavement has developed a compressive strength of 2,500 psi as determined from cylinders,
made at the time of placement, cured under comparable conditions, and tested in accordance
with AASHTO T 22. Exceptions would be one track from a slip-form paving machine when
paving adjacent lanes or light vehicles required for sawing operations or taking cores.

Placement of Shoulder material may commence when the pavement has developed a
compressive strength of 1,800 psi as determined from cylinders made at the time of placement,
cured under comparable conditions, and tested in accordance with AASHTO T22 as long as
construction equipment is not operated on the new pavement.
A continuous barrier of the design shown in the Plans shall be constructed and maintained
along the edge of the pavement being constructed and adjacent to the portion of the Roadway
used for traffic. The barriers shall be left in place until the new pavement is ready to be opened
to traffic and shall then be removed by the Contractor.
Any damage to the pavement occurring prior to final acceptance shall be replaced or
repaired in accordance with Section 5-05.3(22).
5-05.3(17) Opening to Traffic
The pavement may be opened to traffic when the concrete has developed a compressive
strength of 2,500 psi as determined from cylinders, made at the time of placement, cured under
comparable conditions, and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22.
Fabrication, curing, and testing of cylinders to measure early strength shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall obtain the services of an independent
Laboratory to perform these activities and these laboratories shall be approved by the
Engineer. At the Contractor’s option, the time for opening pavement may be determined
through the use of the maturity test in accordance with ASTM C1074. The Contractor shall
develop the maturity-strength relationship and provide maturity curves along with supporting
data for approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, including
thermal or maturity meter, thermocouples, wire, and qualified personnel to monitor maturity
and provide information to the Engineer. Field procedures to monitor maturity shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to use. The pavement shall not be opened to
traffic until the maturity-strength relationship shows the pavement has a compressive strength
of 2,500 psi and approved by the Engineer.
The pavement shall be cleaned prior to opening to traffic.
All costs associated with early-strength cylinders shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
5-05.3(18) Vacant
5-05.3(19) Vacant
5-05.3(20) Vacant
5-05.3(21) Vacant
5-05.3(22) Repair of Defective Pavement Slabs
Broken slabs, slabs with random cracks, nonworking contraction joints near cracks,
edge slumping and spalls along joints and cracks shall be replaced or repaired as specified
at no expense to the Contracting Agency, and shall be accomplished prior to completion of
joint sealing.
Pavement slabs containing more than one crack shall be entirely removed and replaced.
Pavement slabs containing a single crack shall be removed and replaced such that the
minimum dimension of the removed slab is 6 feet long and full panel width. The portion of
the panel to remain in place shall have a minimum dimension of 6 feet in length and full panel
width, otherwise entire removal and replacement of the slab is required. There shall be no new
joints closer than 3 feet to an existing transverse joints. Saw cutting full pavement depth is
required along all longitudinal joints and at transverse locations. Tie bars and dowel bars shall
be used in accordance Section 5-05.3(10).
Spalls and edge slumping shall be repaired by making vertical saw cuts at least 3 inches
outside the affected area and to a minimum depth of 2 inches. Spall repairs that encounter
dowel bars or are within 6 inches of a dowel bar will not be permitted. These spall areas shall
be repaired by replacing a half or full panel as permitted by the Engineer. Removal of the

existing pavement shall not damage any pavement to be left in place. If jackhammers are used
for removing pavement, they shall not weigh more than 30 pounds, and chipping hammers
shall not weigh more than 15 pounds. All power-driven hand tools used for the removal of
pavement shall be operated at angles less than 45 degrees as measured from the surface of
the pavement to the tool. The patch limits shall extend beyond the spalled area a minimum
of 3 inches. Repair areas shall be kept square or rectangular. Repair areas that are within
12 inches of another repair area shall be combined.
The Contractor shall remove material within the perimeter of the saw cut to a depth of
2 inches, or to sound concrete as determined by the Engineer. The surface patch area shall be
sandblasted and all loose material removed. All sandblasting residue shall be removed using
dry oil-free air.
When a partial depth repair is placed directly against an adjacent longitudinal joint, a bond-
breaking material such as polyethylene film, roofing paper, or other material as approved by
the Engineer shall be placed between the existing concrete and the area to be patched.
Patches that abut working transverse joints or cracks require placement of a compressible
insert. The new joint or crack shall be formed to the same width as the existing joint or
crack. The compressible joint material shall be placed into the existing joint 1 inch below the
depth of repair. The compressible insert shall extend at least 3 inches beyond each end of the
patch boundaries.
Patches that abut the lane/shoulder joint require placement of a formed edge, along the slab
edge, even with the surface.
The patching material shall be mixed, placed, consolidated, finished, and cured according
to manufacturer’s recommendations. Slab/patch interfaces that will not receive pavement
grinding shall be sealed (painted) with a 1:1 cement-water grout along the patch perimeter.
The Contractor shall reseal all joints in accordance with Section 5-05.3(8)B.
Opening to traffic shall meet the requirements of Section 5-05.3(17).
Low areas which grinding cannot feasibly remedy, shall be sandblasted, filled with
epoxy bonded mortar, and textured by grinding. The epoxy bonding agent shall meet the
requirements of Section 9-26.1(1)B for Type II epoxy.
5-05.4 Measurement
Cement concrete pavement will be measured by the cubic yard for the completed
pavement. The volume will be determined from measurements taken as listed below.
1. The width measurement will be the width of the pavement shown on the typical cross-
section in the Plans, additional widening where called for, or as otherwise specified in
writing by the Engineer.
2. The length will be measured along the center of each Roadway or ramp.
3. The depth will be determined from the reference cores. The depth utilized to calculate
the volume shall not exceed the Plan depth plus 0.04 feet.
The volume of the pavement section represented by the reference core shall equal the
measured length × width × reference core depth.
Corrosion resistant dowel bar will be measured per each for the actual number of bars used
in the completed Work.
Tie bar with drill hole will be measured per each for the actual number of bars used
in the completed Work. Tie bars with drill holes in cement concrete pavement placed under
the Contract will not be measured.
The ride smoothness compliance adjustment calculation is the volume of pavement,
in cubic yards, represented by the profilograph.
The calculation for portland cement concrete compliance adjustment is the volume
of concrete represented by the CPF and the Thickness deficiency adjustment.

5-05.5 Payment
“Cement Conc. Pavement”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Cement Conc. Pavement” shall be full
compensation for all costs incurred to carry out the requirements of Section 5-05, except for
those costs included in other items, which are included in this Subsection and are included
in the Proposal.
“Corrosion Resistant Dowel Bar”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Corrosion Resistant Dowel Bar” shall be full payment
for furnishing, and installing corrosion resistant dowel bars and any costs for drilling holes,
placing dowel bars with baskets, furnishing and installing parting compound and all other
costs associated with completing the installation of corrosion resistant dowel bars.
“Tie Bar with Drill Hole”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each, “Tie Bar with Drill Hole” shall be full payment for
furnishing, and installing tie bars and any costs for drilling holes, and all other costs associated
with installation of tie bars. All costs for tie bars with drill holes in cement concrete pavement
placed under the Contract shall be included in the unit Contract price per cubic yard for
“Cement Conc. Pavement”.
“Ride Smoothness Compliance Adjustment”, by calculation.
Payment for “Ride Smoothness Compliance Adjustment” will be calculated by multiplying
the unit Contract price for cement concrete pavement, times the volume for adjustment, times
the percent of adjustment determined from the schedule below.
1. Adjustment will be based on the initial profile index before corrective Work.
2. “Ride Smoothness Compliance Adjustment” will be calculated for each 0.1-mile section
represented by profilogram using the following schedule:
Ride Smoothness Profile Index (Inches per mile) Compliance Adjustment (percent adjustment)
1.0 or less +4
over 1.0 to 2.0 +3
over 2.0 to 3.0 +2
over 3.0 to 4.0 +1
over 4.0 to 7.0 0
over 7.0 -2*
*Also requires correction to 7 inches per mile.
“Portland Cement Concrete Compliance Adjustment”, by calculation.
Payment for “Portland Cement Concrete Compliance Adjustment” will be calculated by
multiplying the unit Contract price for the cement concrete pavement, times the volume for
adjustment, times the percent of adjustment determined from the calculated CPF and the
Deficiency Adjustment listed in Section 5-05.5(1)A.
5-05.5(1) Pavement Thickness
Cement concrete pavement shall be constructed in accordance with the thickness
requirements in the Plans and Specifications. Tolerances allowed for Subgrade construction
and other provisions, which may affect thickness, shall not be construed to modify such
thickness requirements.
A primary unit of pavement is defined as the area of pavement placed in each day’s paving
operations or a complete intersection. Within such primary unit of pavement, there may be
an area or areas, which are deficient in thickness by more than 0.05 foot. This deficient area
or areas will be defined as a secondary unit or units. If secondary units are found to exist,
the primary unit area will be reduced by the secondary unit area included therein. At a time
determined by the Engineer, thickness measurements will be made in each primary unit of

pavement at the minimum rate of one measurement for each 500 cubic yards of pavement,
or fraction thereof. The exact location and number of thickness measurements within each
primary unit, both longitudinally and transversely, will be determined by the Engineer.
In general, thickness measurements will be made at uniform intervals throughout each
primary unit of pavement.
If thickness deficiencies greater than 0.05 foot are found to exist, supplemental thickness
measurements will be made in accordance with Section 5-05.5(1)B. Pavement thickness
variations, if any, from the thickness requirements in the Plans and Specifications will be
determined by comparing the actual thickness measurement with the thickness specified
at the location where the measurement was made. Such variation will be determined to the
nearest 0.01 foot as either excess or deficient thickness.
Additional cores may be requested by the Contractor to isolate the area that has a thickness
deficiency within the 0.05 feet of the design thickness. These cores will be used to create a
secondary unit. All costs for the additional cores including grouting the core holes will be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
5-05.5(1)A Thickness Deficiency of 0.05 Foot or Less
If no thickness measurements in a primary unit are deficient by more than 0.05 foot, all
thickness measurements in such unit will be averaged to the nearest 0.01 foot to determine
the average thickness deficiency, if any, in that primary unit. For the purpose of determining
the average thickness deficiency, an excess thickness variation of more than 0.04 foot will be
considered to be 0.04 foot greater than the specified thickness.
For each primary unit of pavement which is deficient in average thickness by not more
than 0.05 foot, the Contractor shall pay to the Contracting Agency, or the Contracting Agency
may deduct from any moneys due or that may become due the Contractor under the Contract,
a sum computed by multiplying the deficiency adjustment from the following table by the unit
Contract price by the volume of such unit.
Average Thickness Deficiency (feet) Deficiency Adjustment (per cubic yard)
0.01 2%
0.02 4%
0.03 9%
0.04 16%
0.05 25%
5-05.5(1)B Thickness Deficiency of More Than 0.05 Foot

Where a thickness deficiency greater than 0.05 foot is encountered, the Engineer will
determine from supplemental thickness measurements the limits of the secondary unit area.
Thickness measurements will be made in each panel of pavement adjacent transversely
and longitudinally to the panel of the original measurement. This procedure will continue,
regardless of unit boundaries, until such secondary unit area is bounded by panels with a
thickness deficiency of 0.05 foot or less. Cores taken to isolate the secondary unit will not
be used to compute average thickness of the primary unit.
Panels are the areas bounded by longitudinal and transverse joints and pavement edges.
If longitudinal or transverse joints are eliminated by the Special Provisions, by the Plans, or
for any other reasons, the limits of panels will be determined by the Engineer as if such joints
had been constructed.
The secondary unit area will be made up of entire panels only. The entire panel will be
considered to be of the thickness shown by measurement.
After the Engineer has determined the limits of the secondary unit area, a further
determination will be made whether any panels within this area are usable and may be left in
place. Following this determination, the Contractor shall remove and replace at no expense
to the Contracting Agency such panels as the Engineer may designate in accordance with
the following:
If the area to be removed is not bounded by longitudinal or transverse joints, the Contractor
shall saw, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, weakened plane joints at the locations
designated by the Engineer. The Subgrade shall be lowered to meet the full thickness
requirements. The replaced pavement will be tested for thickness by means of additional
measurements and will be subject to all of the requirements of the Specifications.
Usable panels may be removed and replaced as outlined above at the option of the
Contractor, or these panels will be permitted to remain in place, provided that no payment
will be made for any panels which are left in place, and that a further penalty will be assessed
in the amount of 25 percent of the Contractor’s unit Bid price for all such panels. The
Contracting Agency may deduct such amount from any moneys due or that may become due
the Contractor under the Contract.
The cost of all thickness measurements made to determine the secondary unit areas,
including filling the core holes with concrete, will be deducted at the rate of $150.00 per
core from any moneys due or that may become due the Contractor under the Contract.
All additional Work required and any delay to the Contractor’s operations as a result of
this Specification shall not be cause for additional pay nor for an extension of time.


Division 6 Structures
6-01 General Requirements for Structures
6-01.1 Description
This section relates to structural and incidental items used in any or all types of existing
or proposed Structures. These provisions supplement the detailed Specifications supplied for
any given Structure. These provisions apply only when relevant and when they do not conflict
with the Plans or Special Provisions.
6-01.2 Foundation Data
Foundation data in the Plans (from test borings, test pits, or other sources) were obtained
only to guide the Department in planning and designing the project. These data reasonably
represent the best information available to the Department concerning conditions and materials
at the test sites at the time the investigations were made.
6-01.3 Clearing the Site
The Contractor shall clear the entire site of the proposed Structure to the limits staked
by the Engineer.
6-01.4 Appearance of Structures
To achieve a more pleasing appearance, the Engineer may require the Contractor to adjust
the height and alignment of bridge railings, traffic barrier, and structural curbs.
6-01.5 Vacant
6-01.6 Load Restrictions on Bridges Under Construction
Bridges under construction shall remain closed to all traffic, including construction
equipment, until the Substructure and the Superstructure, through the bridge deck, are
complete for the entire Structure, except as provided herein. Completion includes release
of all falsework, removal of all forms, and attainment of the minimum design concrete
strength and specified age of the concrete in accordance with these Specifications. Once the
Structure is complete, Section 1-07.7 shall govern all traffic loading, including construction
traffic (equipment).
If necessary and safe to do so, and if the Contractor requests it through a Type 2E Working
Drawing, the Engineer may allow traffic on a bridge prior to completion. The maximum
distributed load at each construction equipment support shall not exceed the design load
by more than 33 percent. The written request shall:
1. Describe the extent of the Structure completion at time of the proposed
equipment loading;
2. Describe the loading magnitude, arrangement, movement, and position of traffic
(equipment) on the bridge, including but not limited to the following:
a. Location of construction equipment, including outriggers, spreader beams and
supports for each, relative to the bridge framing plan (bridge girder layout);
b. Mechanism of all load transfer (load path) to the bridge;
3. Provide stress calculations under the design criteria specified in the AASHTO LRFD
Bridge Design Specifications, current edition, including at a minimum the following:
a. Supporting calculations showing that the flexural and shear stresses in the main load
carrying members due to the construction load are within the allowable stresses;
b Supporting calculations showing that the flexural and shear stresses in the bridge
deck due to the construction load are within the allowable stresses;

6-01 General Requirements For Structures
4. Provide supporting material properties, catalogue cuts, and other information describing
the construction equipment and all associated outriggers, spreader beams, and
supports; and
5. State that the Contractor assumes all risk for damage.
6-01.7 Navigable Streams
The Contractor shall keep navigable streams clear so that water traffic may pass safely,
providing and maintaining all lights and signals required by the U.S. Coast Guard. The
Contractor shall also comply with all channel depth and clearance line requirements of
the U.S. Corps of Engineers. This may require removing material deposited in the channel
during construction.
6-01.8 Approaches to Movable Spans
No bridge deck or sidewalk slab on the approach span at either end of a movable span may
be placed until after the movable span has been completed, adjusted and closed.
6-01.9 Working Drawings
All Working Drawings required for bridges and other Structures shall conform
to Section 1-05.3.
6-01.10 Utilities Supported by or Attached to Bridges
Installation of utility pipes and conduit systems shall conform to the details shown in
the Plans and as specified in the utility agreement between the utility company and the
Contracting Agency.
All utility pipes and conduit systems supported by or attached to bridges shall be labeled
with Type I reflective sheeting conforming to Section 9-28.12, and the following:
Label
Content Background Color Lettering Utility Color
Electrical Power Red Black
Gas, Oil, Steam, Petroleum, and other gaseous materials Yellow Black
CATV, Telecommunication, Alarm, and Signal Orange Black
Potable Water Blue White
Reclaimed Water, Irrigation, Slurry Purple White
Sewer and Storm Drain Green White
The purple color background for the label for reclaimed water, irrigation, and slurry, shall
be generated by placing transparent film over white reflective material. The purple tint of the
transparent film shall match Federal Standard 595, Color No. 37100.
The label text shall identify the utility contents and include the One-Number Locator
Service phone number 1-800-424-5555.
The minimum length of the label color field shall be the longer of either 1 letter width
beyond each end of the label text, or the length specified below:
Minimum Pipe Maximum Pipe Minimum Length of Label
O.D. (inches) O.D. (inches) Color Field (inches) Letter Height (inches)
¾ 1¼ 8 ½
1½ 2 8 ¾
2½ 6 12 1¼
8 10 24 2½
12 32 3½

General Requirements For Structures 6-01
Utility pipes and conduit systems shall be labeled on both sides of each bridge pier, and
adjacent to each entrance hatch into a box girder cell. For utility pipes and conduit systems
within bridge spans exceeding 300 feet, labels shall also be applied to the utility pipes and
conduit systems between the piers at a maximum spacing of 300 feet. The label shall be
visible at a normal eye height.
6-01.11 Name Plates
The Contractor shall install no permanent plates or markers on a Structure unless the
Plans show it.
6-01.12 Final Cleanup
When the Structure is completed, the Contractor shall leave it and the entire site in a
clean and orderly condition. Structure decks shall be swept and washed. Temporary buildings,
falsework, piling, lumber, equipment, and debris shall be removed. The Contractor shall level
and fine grade all excavated material not used for backfill, and shall fine grade all slopes and
around all piers, bents, and abutments.
The Contractor is advised that after the Structure is complete, a representative(s) of
the WSDOT Bridge Preservation Office may perform an Inventory Inspection of the
Structure. The purpose of the Inventory Inspection is to field verify certain Contract details,
to provide a base-line condition assessment of the Structure, and to identify any potential
maintenance features.
6-01.13 Vacant
6-01.14 Premolded Joint Filler
When the Plans call for premolded joint filler, the Contractor shall fasten it with galvanized
wire nails to 1 side of the joint. The nails must be no more than 6 inches apart and shall be
1½ inches from the edges over the entire joint area. The nails shall be at least 1½ inches longer
than the thickness of the filler.
The Contractor may substitute for the nails any adhesive acceptable to the Engineer.
This adhesive, however, shall be compatible with the material specified in Section 9-04.1(2)
and capable of bonding the filler to portland cement concrete.
6-01.15 Normal Temperature
Bridge Plans state dimensions at a normal temperature of 64ºF. Unless otherwise noted,
these dimensions are horizontal or vertical.

6-02 Concrete Structures

6-02.1 Description
This Work consists of the construction of all Structures (and their parts) made of portland
cement concrete with or without reinforcement, including bridge approach slabs. Any part of a
Structure to be made of other materials shall be built as these Specifications require elsewhere.
6-02.2 Materials
Aggregates for Portland Cement Concrete 9-03.1
Gravel Backfill 9-03.12
Joint and Crack Sealing Materials 9-04
Reinforcing Steel 9-07
Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel 9-07
Pigmented Sealer Materials for Coating of Concrete Surface 9-08.3
Grout 9-20.3
Mortar 9-20.4
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Microsilica Fume 9-23.11
Metakaolin 9-23.12
Plastic Waterstop 9-24
Water 9-25
Fabricated Bridge Bearing Assemblies 9-31
6-02.3(1) Classification of Structural Concrete
The class of concrete to be used shall be as noted in the Plans and these Specifications.
The class includes the specified minimum compressive strength in psi at 28 days (numerical
class) and may include a letter suffix to denote structural concrete for a specific use. Letter
suffixes include A for bridge approach slabs, D for bridge decks, P for piling and shafts, and
W for underwater. The numerical class without a letter suffix denotes structural concrete for
general purposes.
Concrete of a numerical class greater than 4000 shall conform to the requirements specified
for either Class 4000 (if general-purpose) or for the appropriate Class 4000 with a letter suffix,
as follows:
1. Mix design and proportioning specified in Sections 6-02.3(2), 6-02.3(2)A and 6-02.3(2)A1.
2. Consistency requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(4)C.
3. Temperature and time for placement requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(4)D.
4. Curing requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(11).
The Contractor may request, in writing, permission to use a different class of concrete
with either the same or a higher compressive strength than specified. The substitute concrete
shall be evaluated for acceptance based on the specified class of concrete. The Engineer will
respond in writing. The Contractor shall bear any added costs that result from the change.
6-02.3(2) Proportioning Materials
The soluble chloride ion content shall be determined by the concrete supplier and included
with the mix design. The soluble chloride ion content shall be determined by (1) testing mixed
concrete cured at least 28 days or (2) totaled from tests of individual concrete ingredients
(cement, aggregate, admixtures, water, fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag, and
other supplementary cementing materials). Chloride ion limits for admixtures and water
are provided in Sections 9-23 and 9-25. Soluble chloride ion limits for mixed concrete

Concrete Structures 6-02
shall not exceed the following percent by mass of cement when tested in accordance with
AASHTO T260:
Category Acid-Soluble Water-Soluble
Prestressed concrete 0.08 0.06
Reinforced concrete 0.10 0.08
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall use Type I or II portland cement in all
concrete as defined in Section 9-01.2(1).
The use of fly ash is required for Class 4000P concrete, except that ground granulated
blast furnace slag may be substituted for fly ash at a 1:1 ratio. The use of fly ash and
ground granulated blast furnace slag is optional for all other classes of concrete and may be
substituted for portland cement at a 1:1 ratio as noted in the table below.
Cementitious Requirement for Concrete
Minimum percent Maximum percent
Minimum Replacement of Fly Ash Maximum percent Replacement of
Cementitious or Ground Granulated Replacement Ground Granulated
Content Blast Furnace Slag for of Fly Ash for Blast Furnace Slag
Class of Concrete (Pounds) Portland Cement Portland Cement for Portland Cement
4000 564 * 35 50
4000A 564 * 20 30
4000P 600 15 35 50
4000W 564 * 35 50
3000 564 * 35 50
Commercial Concrete **564 * 35 50
Pumpable Lean Concrete * * *** ***
Lean Concrete ****145 * 35 50
*No minimum specified.
**For Commercial Concrete, the minimum cementitious content is only required for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters.
***No maximum specified.
****Maximum of 200 pounds
When both ground granulated blast furnace slag and fly ash are included in the concrete
mix, the total weight of both these materials is limited to 40 percent by weight of the total
cementitious material for concrete class 4000A, and 50 percent by weight of the total
cementitious material for all other classes of concrete.
Cementitious materials are those listed in Section 5-05.2. With the Engineer’s written
concurrence, microsilica fume and metakaolin can be used in all classifications of Class
4000, Class 3000, and commercial concrete and is limited to a maximum of 10 percent of the
cementitious material.
As an alternative to the use of fly ash, ground granulated blast furnace slag and cement
as separate components, a blended hydraulic cement that meets the requirements of
Section 9-01.2(1)B Blended Hydraulic Cements may be used.
6-02.3(2)A Contractor Mix Design
The Contractor shall provide a mix design in writing to the Engineer for all classes of
concrete specified in the Plans except for lean concrete and commercial concrete. No concrete
shall be placed until the Engineer has reviewed the mix design. The required average 28-day
compressive strength shall be selected in accordance with ACI 301, Chapter 4, Section 4.2.3.3.
ACI 211.1 shall be used to determine proportions. All proposed concrete mixes except
Class 4000D shall meet the requirements in Cementitious Requirement for Concrete

The Contractor’s submittal of a mix design shall be on WSDOT Form 350-040 and shall
provide a unique identification for each mix design and shall include the mix proportions per
cubic yard, the proposed sources, the average 28-day compressive strength for which the mix
is designed, the fineness modulus, and the water cement ratio. The mix design submittal shall
also include test results no older than one year showing that the Aggregates do not contain
Deleterious Substances in accordance with Section 9-03. Concrete placeability, workability,
and strength shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall notify the
Engineer in writing of any mix design modifications.
Fine aggregate shall conform to Section 9-03.1(2) Class 1 or Class 2.
Coarse aggregate shall conform to Section 9-03. An alternate combined aggregate
gradation conforming to Section 9-03.1(5) may also be used. The nominal maximum size
aggregate for Class 4000P shall be ⅜ inch. The nominal maximum size aggregate for Class
4000A shall be 1 inch.
Nominal maximum size for concrete aggregate is defined as the smallest standard sieve
opening through which the entire amount of the aggregate is permitted to pass.
A retarding admixture is required in concrete Class 4000P.
Air content for concrete Class 4000D shall conform to Section 6-02.3(2)A1. For all other
concrete, air content shall be a minimum of 4.5 percent and a maximum of 7.5 percent for all
concrete placed above the finished ground line.
6-02.3(2)A1 Contractor Mix Design for Concrete Class 4000D
All Class 4000D concrete shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Aggregate shall use combined gradation in accordance with Section 9-03.1(5) with
a nominal maximum aggregate size of 1½ inches.
2. Permeability shall be less than 2,000 coulombs at 56 days in accordance with
AASHTO T277.
3. Freeze-thaw durability shall be provided by one of the following methods:
a. The concrete shall maintain an air content between 4.5 and 7.5 percent.
b. The concrete shall maintain a minimum air content that achieves a durability factor
of 90 percent, minimum, after 300 cycles in accordance with AASHTO T 161,
Procedure A. This air content shall not be less than 3.0 percent. Test samples shall be
obtained from concrete batches of a minimum of 3.0 cubic yards.
4. Shrinkage at 28 days shall be less than 0.032 percent in accordance with AASHTO
T 160.
5. Modulus of elasticity shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C469.
6. Density shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C138.
The Contractor shall submit the mix design in accordance with Section 6-02.3(2)A.
The submittal shall include test reports for all tests listed above that follow the reporting
requirements of the AASHTO/ASTM procedures. Mix designs using shrinkage reducing
admixture shall state the specific quantity required. Samples for testing may be obtained
from either laboratory or concrete plant batches. If concrete plant batches are used, the
minimum batch size shall be 3.0 cubic yards. Testing samples of mixes using shrinkage
reducing admixture shall use the admixture amount specified in the mix design submittal.
The Contractor shall submit the mix design to the Engineer at least 30 calendar days prior to
the placement of concrete in the bridge deck.
6-02.3(2)A2 Contractor Mix Design for Self-Consolidating Concrete
Self-consolidating concrete (SCC) is concrete that is able to flow under its own weight and
completely fill the formwork without the need for vibration while maintaining homogeneity,
even in the presence of dense reinforcement. SCC shall be capable of being pumped, and of
flowing through the steel reinforcing bar cage without segregation or buildup of differential
head inside or outside of the steel reinforcing bar cage.
Type III cement may be used in SCC.
SCC may be used for the following concrete Structure elements:

1. All cast-in-place concrete elements except bridge decks, bridge approach slabs, and any
cast-in-place concrete element excluded by the Special Provisions.
2. Prestressed concrete girders in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(25).
3. All precast concrete elements identified in Section 6-02.3(27)A.
The mix design submittal shall include items specified in Section 6-02.3(2)A and results
of the following tests conducted on concrete that has slump flow within the slump flow range
defined below:
1. Slump Flow.
a. The mix design shall specify the target slump flow in inches, in accordance with
WSDOT FOP for ASTM C1611. The slump flow range is defined as the target slump
flow plus or minus 2-inches.
b. The visual stability index (VSI) shall be less than or equal to 1, in accordance with
ASTM C1611, Appendix X1, using Filling Procedure B.
c. The T50 flow rate results shall be less than 6-seconds in accordance with
ASTM C1611, Appendix X1, using Filling Procedure B.
2. Column Segregation.
a. The maximum static segregation shall be 10-percent in accordance with
ASTM C1610.
b. The Maximum Hardened Visual Stability Index (HVSI) shall be 1 in accordance with
AASHTO PP 58.
3. J ring test results for passing ability shall be less than or equal to 1.5-inches in
accordance with the WSDOT FOP for ASTM C1621.
4. Rapid assessment of static segregation resistance of self-consolidating concrete using
penetration test in accordance with ASTM C1712 shall be less than or equal to 15 mm.
5. Air content shall be tested in accordance with WSDOT Test Method T 818, and shall
conform to Section 6-02.3(2)A.
6. Concrete unit weight results in pounds per cubic foot shall be recorded in accordance
with AASHTO T 121, except that the concrete shall not be consolidated in the test mold.
7. The temperature of all concrete laboratory test samples shall be tested in accordance
with AASHTO T 309 and shall conform to the placement limits specified
in Section 6-02.3(4)D.
8. The modulus of elasticity in pounds per square inch at 28 days shall be recorded in
accordance with ASTM C469.
In lieu of a Contractor-Provided mix design for SCC for Section 6-02.3(27)A Structure
elements 3, 7 and 8, a representative full-size example Structure element shall be cast for
inspection by the Contracting Agency in accordance with Section 6-02.3(27)B as a component
of the precast fabricating facility’s annual plant approval process.
6-02.3(2)B Commercial Concrete
Commercial concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 3,000 psi
in accordance with AASHTO T 22. Commercial concrete placed above the finished ground
line shall be air entrained and have an air content from 4.5 percent to 7.5 percent in accordance
with FOP for AASHTO T 152. Commercial concrete does not require mix design or source
approvals for cement, aggregate, and other admixtures.
Where concrete Class 3000 is specified for items such as, culvert headwalls, plugging
culverts, concrete pipe collars, pipe anchors, monument cases, Type PPB, PS, I, FB and RM
signal standards, pedestals, cabinet bases, guardrail anchors, fence post footings, sidewalks,
curbs, and gutters, the Contractor may use commercial concrete. If commercial concrete
is used for sidewalks, curbs, and gutters, it shall have a minimum cementitious material
content of 564 pounds per cubic yard of concrete, shall be air entrained, and the tolerances
of Section 6-02.3(5)C shall apply.
6-02.3(2)C Vacant
6-02.3(2)D Lean Concrete
Lean concrete shall meet the cementitious requirements of Section 6-02.3(2) and have a
maximum water/cement ratio of 2.
6-02.3(3) Admixtures
Concrete admixtures shall be added to the concrete mix at the time of batching the concrete
or in accordance with the manufacturer’s written procedure and as accepted by the Engineer.
A copy of the manufacturer’s written procedure shall be furnished to the Engineer prior to
use of any admixture. Any deviations from the manufacturer’s written procedures shall be
submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing. Admixtures shall not be added to the concrete with
the modified procedures until the Engineer has concurred in writing.
When the Contractor is proposing to use admixtures from different admixture
manufacturers they shall provide evidence to the Engineer that the admixture will be
compatible and not adversely affect the air void system of the hardened concrete. Test results
complying with ASTM C457 shall be provided as the evidence to satisfy this requirement.
Admixture combinations which have been previously tested and which are in compliance with
ASTM C457 shall be listed in the Qualified Products List (QPL). Proposed combinations not
found in the QPL shall meet this requirement.
Accelerators shall not be used.
Air entrained cement shall not be used to air entrain concrete.
6-02.3(4) Ready-Mix Concrete
All concrete, except commercial concrete and lean concrete shall be batched in
a prequalified manual, semi-automatic, or automatic plant as described in Section 6-02.3(4)A.
The Engineer is not responsible for any delays to the Contractor due to problems in getting the
plant certified.
6-02.3(4)A Qualification of Concrete Suppliers
Batch Plant Prequalification requires a certification by the National Ready Mix Concrete
Association (NRMCA). Information concerning NRMCA certification may be obtained from
the NRMCA at 900 Spring Street, Silver Springs, MD 20910 or online at www.nrmca.org.
The NRMCA certification shall be valid for a 2-year period from the date of certificate. The
following documentation shall be submitted to the Engineer; a copy of the current NRMCA
Certificate of Conformance, the concrete mix design(s) (WSDOT Form 350-040), along with
copies of the truck list, batch plant scale certification, admixture dispensing certification, and
volumetric water batching devices (including water meters) verification.
For central-mixed concrete, the mixer shall be equipped with a timer that prevents the
batch from discharging until the batch has been mixed for the prescribed mixing time.
A mixing time of 1 minute will be required after all materials and water have been introduced
into the drum. Shorter mixing time may be allowed if the mixer performance is tested in
accordance with (AASHTO M157 Annex A1 Concrete Uniformity Requirements). Tests
shall be conducted by an independent testing lab or by a commercial concrete producer’s lab.
If the tests are performed by a producer’s lab, the Engineer or a representative will witness
all testing.
For shrink-mixed concrete, the mixing time in the stationary mixer shall not be less than
30 seconds or until the ingredients have been thoroughly blended.
For transit-mixed or shrink-mixed concrete, the mixing time in the transit mixer shall be
a minimum of 70 revolutions at the mixing speed designated by the manufacturer of the mixer.
Following mixing, the concrete in the transit mixer may be agitated at the manufacturer’s
designated agitation speed. A maximum of 320 revolutions (total of mixing and agitation) will
be permitted prior to discharge.

All transit-mixers shall be equipped with an operational revolution counter and a functional
device for measurement of water added. All mixing drums shall be free of concrete buildup
and the mixing blades shall meet the minimum Specifications of the drum manufacturer.
A copy of the manufacturer’s blade dimensions and configuration shall be on file at the
concrete producer’s office. A clearly visible metal data plate (or plates) attached to each mixer
and agitator shall display: (1) the maximum concrete capacity of the drum or container for
mixing and agitating, and (2) the rotation speed of the drum or blades for both the agitation
and mixing speeds. Mixers and agitators shall always operate within the capacity and
speed-of-rotation limits set by the manufacturer. Any mixer, when fully loaded, shall keep
the concrete uniformly mixed. All mixers and agitators shall be capable of discharging the
concrete at a steady rate. Only those transit-mixers which meet the above requirements will be
allowed to deliver concrete to any Contracting Agency project covered by these Specifications.
In transit-mixing, mixing shall begin within 30 seconds after the cement is added
to the aggregates.
Central-mixed concrete, transported by truck mixer/agitator, shall not undergo more
than 250 revolutions of the drum or blades before beginning discharging. To remain below
this limit, the suppler may agitate the concrete intermittently within the prescribed time
limit. When water or admixtures are added after the load is initially mixed, an additional
30 revolutions will be required at the recommended mixing speed.
For each project, at least biannually, or as required, the Plant Manager will examine
mixers and agitators to check for any buildup of hardened concrete or worn blades. If this
examination reveals a problem, or if the Engineer wishes to test the quality of the concrete,
slump tests may be performed with samples taken at approximately the ¼ and ¾ points as
the batch is discharged. The maximum allowable slump difference shall be as follows:
If the average of the two slump tests is < 4 inches, the difference shall be < 1 inch or
if the average of the two slump tests is >4 inches, the difference shall be < 1½ inches.
If the slump difference exceeds these limits, the equipment shall not be used until the
faulty condition is corrected. However, the equipment may continue in use if longer mixing
times or smaller loads produce batches that pass the slump uniformity tests.
All concrete production facilities will be subject to verification inspections at the discretion
of the Engineer. Verification inspections are a check for: current scale certifications; accuracy
of water metering devices; accuracy of the batching process; and verification of coarse
aggregate quality.
If the concrete producer fails to pass the verification inspection, the following actions will
be taken:
1. For the first violation, a written warning will be provided.
2. For the second violation, the Engineer will give written notification and the Contracting
Agency will assess a price reduction equal to 15 percent of the invoice cost of the
concrete that is supplied from the time of the infraction until the deficient condition
is corrected.
3. For the third violation, the concrete supplier is suspended from providing
concrete until all such deficiencies causing the violation have been permanently
corrected and the plant and equipment have been reinspected and meets all the
prequalification requirements.
4. For the fourth violation, the concrete supplier shall be disqualified from supplying
concrete for 1 year from the date of disqualification. At the end of the suspension period
the concrete supplier may request that the facilities be inspected for prequalification.
6-02.3(4)B Jobsite Mixing
For small quantities of concrete, the Contractor may mix concrete on the job site provided
the Contractor has requested in writing and received written permission from the Engineer.
The Contractor’s written request shall include a mix design, batching and mixing procedures,
and a list of the equipment performing the job-site mixing. All job site mixed concrete shall
be mixed in a mechanical mixer.
If the Engineer permits, hand mixing of concrete will be permitted for pipe collars, pipe
plugs, fence posts, or other items receiving the concurrence of the Engineer, provided the hand
mixing is done on a watertight platform in a way that distributes materials evenly throughout
the mass. Mixing shall continue long enough to produce a uniform mixture. No hand mixed
batch shall exceed ½ cubic yard.
Concrete mixed at the jobsite is never permitted for placement in water.
6-02.3(4)C Consistency
The maximum slump for concrete shall be:
1. 3½ inches for vibrated concrete placed in all bridge decks, bridge approach slabs,
and flat slab bridge Superstructures.
2. 4½ inches for all other vibrated concrete.
3. 7 inches for non-vibrated concrete. (Includes Class 4000P)
4. 9 inches for shafts when using Class 4000P, provided the water cement ratio does not
exceed 0.44 and a water reducer is used meeting the requirements of Section 9-23.6.
5. 5½ inches for all concrete placed in curbs, gutters, and sidewalks.
When a high range water reducer is used, the maximum slump listed in 1, 2, 3, and
5 above, may be increased an additional 2 inches.
For self-consolidating concrete (SCC), the slump requirements specified above do not
apply, and are instead replaced by the target slump flow and slump flow range specified as part
of the SCC mix design.
6-02.3(4)D Temperature and Time For Placement
Concrete temperatures shall remain between 55°F and 90°F while it is being placed,
except that Class 4000D concrete temperatures shall remain between 55°F and 75°F during
placement. Precast concrete that is heat cured in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)D shall
remain between 50°F and 90°F while being placed. The batch of concrete shall be discharged
at the project site no more than 1½ hours after the cement is added to the concrete mixture.
The time to discharge may be extended to 1¾ hours if the temperature of the concrete being
placed is less than 75°F. With the concurrence of the Engineer and as long as the temperature
of the concrete being placed is below 75°F, the maximum time to discharge may be extended
to 2 hours. When conditions are such that the concrete may experience an accelerated initial
set, the Engineer may require a shorter time to discharge. The time to discharge may be
extended upon written request from the Contractor. This time extension will be considered
on a case by case basis and requires the use of specific retardation admixtures and the
concurrence of the Engineer.
6-02.3(5) Acceptance of Concrete
6-02.3(5)A General
Concrete for the following applications will be accepted based on a Certificate of
Compliance to be provided by the supplier as described in Section 6-02.3(5)B:
1. Lean concrete.
2. Commercial concrete.
3. Class 4000P concrete for Roadside Steel Sign Support Foundations.
4. Class 4000P concrete for Type II, III, and CCTV Signal Standard Foundations that are
12’-0” or less in depth.
5. Class 4000P concrete for Type IV and V Strain Pole Foundations that are 12’-0” or less
in depth.
6. Class 4000P concrete for Steel Light Standard Foundations Types A & B.
Slip-form barrier concrete will be accepted based on conformance to the requirements
for temperature, air content and compressive strength at 28 days for sublots as tested
and determined by the Contracting Agency. All other concrete will be accepted based on

conformance to the requirement for temperature, slump, air content for concrete placed above
finished ground line, and the specified compressive strength at 28 days for sublots as tested
and determined by the Contracting Agency.
A sublot is defined as the material represented by an individual strength test. An individual
strength test is the average compressive strength of cylinders from the same sample
of material.
Each sublot will be deemed to have met the specified compressive strength requirement
when both of the following conditions are met:
1. Individual strength tests do not fall below the specified strength by more than
12½ percent or 500 psi, whichever is least.
2. An individual strength test averaged with the two preceding individual strength tests
meets or exceeds specified strength (for the same class and exact mix I.D. of concrete
on the same Contract).
When compressive strengths fail to satisfy one or both of the above requirements, the
Contractor may:
1. Request acceptance based on the Contractor/Suppliers strength test data for
cylinders made from the same truckload of concrete as the Contracting Agency
cylinders; provided:
a. The Contractor’s test results are obtained from testing cylinders fabricated, handled,
and stored for 28 days in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 23 and tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 22. The test cylinders shall be the same size cylinders
as those cast by the Contracting Agency.
b. The technician fabricating the cylinders is qualified by either ACI, Grade 1 or
WAQTC to perform this Work.
c. The Laboratory performing the tests in accordance with AASHTO T 22 has an
equipment calibration/certification system, and a technician training and evaluation
process in accordance with AASHTO R-18.
d. Both the Contractor and Contracting Agency have at least 15 test results from the
same mix to compare. The Contractor’s results could be used if the Contractor’s
computed average of all their test results is within one standard deviation of the
Contracting Agency’s average test result. The computed standard deviation of the
Contractor’s results must also be within plus or minus 200 psi of the Contracting
Agency’s standard deviation.
2. Request acceptance of in-place concrete strength based on core results. This method
will not be used if the Engineer determines coring would be harmful to the integrity of
the Structure. Cores, if allowed, will be obtained by the Contractor in accordance with
AASHTO T 24 and delivered to the Contracting Agency for testing in accordance with
AASHTO T 22. If the concrete in the Structure will be dry under service conditions,
the core will be air dried at a temperature of between 60°F and 80°F and at a relative
humidity of less than 60 percent for 7 days before testing, and will be tested air dry.
Acceptance for each sublot by the core method requires that the average compressive
strength of three cores be at least 85 percent of the specified strength with no one core less
than 75 percent of the specified strength. When the Contractor requests strength analysis by
coring, the results obtained will be accepted by both parties as conclusive and supersede all
other strength data for the concrete sublot.
If the Contractor elects to core, cores shall be obtained no later than 50 days after initial
concrete placement. The Engineer will concur in the locations to be cored. Repair of cored
areas shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The cost incurred in coring and testing
these cores, including repair of core locations, shall be borne by the Contractor.

6-02.3(5)B Certification of Compliance

The concrete producer shall provide a Certificate of Compliance for each truckload
of concrete. The Certificate of Compliance shall verify that the delivered concrete is in
compliance with the mix design and shall include:
Manufacturer plant (batching facility)
Contracting Agency Contract number.
Date
Time batched
Truck No.
Initial revolution counter reading
Quantity (quantity batched this load)
Type of concrete by class and producer design mix number
Cement producer, type, and Mill Certification No. (The mill test number as required
by Section 9-01.3 is the basis for acceptance of cement.)
Fly ash (if used) brand and Class
Accepted aggregate gradation designation
Mix design weight per cubic yard and actual batched weights for:
Cement
Fly ash (if used)
Coarse concrete aggregate and moisture content (each size)
Fine concrete aggregate and moisture content
Water (including free moisture in aggregates)
Admixtures brand and total quantity batched
Air-entraining admixture
Water-reducing admixture
Other admixture
For concretes that use combined aggregate gradation, the Certificate of Compliance
shall include the aggregate components and moisture contents for each size in lieu of the
aggregate information described above.
In lieu of providing a machine produced record containing all of the above information,
the concrete producer may use the Contracting Agency-provided printed forms, which shall be
completed for each load of concrete delivered to the project.
For commercial concrete, the Certificate of Compliance shall include, as a minimum, the
batching facility, date, and quantity batched per load.
6-02.3(5)C Conformance to Mix Design
Cement, coarse and fine aggregate weights shall be within the following tolerances of the
mix design:
Batch Volumes less than or equal to 4 cubic yards Batch Volumes more than 4 cubic yards
Cement +5% -1% Cement +5% -1%
Aggregate +10% -2% Aggregate +2% -2%
If the total cementitious material weight is made up of different components, these

component weights shall be within the following tolerances:
1. Portland cement weight plus 5 percent or minus 1 percent of that specified in the
mix design.
2. Fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag weight plus or minus 5 percent of
that specified in the mix design.
3. Microsilica weight plus or minus 10 percent of that specified in the mix design.
Water shall not exceed the maximum water specified in the mix design.

6-02.3(5)D Test Methods

Acceptance testing will be performed by the Contracting Agency in accordance with the
WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01. The test methods to be used with this Specification are:
AASHTO T 22 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens
FOP for AASHTO T 23 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens
in the Field
FOP for AASHTO T 119 Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
FOP for WAQTC TM 2 Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
FOP for AASHTO T 152 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
FOP for AASHTO T 231 Capping Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
FOP for AASHTO T 309 Temperature of Freshly Mixed Portland
Cement Concrete
ASTM C1611 Standard Test Method for Slump Flow of
Self-Consolidating Concrete (Inverted Mold
Method only)
ASTM C1621 Standard Test Method for Passing Ability of Self-
Consolidating Concrete by J-Ring (Inverted Mold
Method only)
6-02.3(5)E Point of Acceptance
Determination of concrete properties for acceptance will be made based on samples taken
as follows:
Bridge decks, overlays, bridge approach slabs, and barriers at the discharge of the
placement system. All other placements at the truck discharge.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to provide adequate and representative samples
of the fresh concrete to a location designated by the Engineer for the testing of concrete
properties and making of cylinder specimens. Samples shall be provided as directed in
Sections 1-06.1 and 1-06.2. Once the Contractor has turned over the concrete for acceptance
testing, no more mix adjustment will be allowed. The concrete will either be accepted
or rejected.
6-02.3(5)F Water/Cement Ratio Conformance
The actual water cement ratio shall be determined from the certified proportions of the mix,
adjusting for on the job additions. No water may be added after acceptance testing or after
placement has begun, except for concrete used in slip forming. For slip-formed concrete, water
may be added during placement but shall not exceed the maximum water cement ratio in the
mix design, and shall meet the requirements for consistency as described in Section 6-02.3(4)C.
If water is added, an air and temperature test shall be taken prior to resuming placement to
ensure that Specification conformance has been maintained.
6-02.3(5)G Sampling and Testing for Temperature, Consistency, and Air Content
Concrete properties shall be determined from concrete as delivered to the project and as
accepted by the Contractor for placement. The Contracting Agency will perform acceptance
testing on all concrete for temperature and air content, if applicable. Concrete that is not self-
consolidating concrete will be tested for slump. The following additional acceptance tests will
be performed on self-consolidating concrete:
1. Slump flow within the target slump flow range.
2. J ring passing ability less than or equal to 1.5 inches.
3. VSI less than or equal to 1.

Sampling and testing will be performed before concrete placement from the first load.
Concrete shall not be placed until all tests have been completed by the Engineer, and the
results indicate that the concrete is within acceptable limits. If the concrete is not within
acceptable limits, sampling and testing will continue before concrete placement for each load
until one load meets all of the applicable acceptance requirements. After one test indicates that
the concrete is within specified limits, the concrete may be placed and the sampling and testing
frequency may decrease to one for every 100 cubic yards. Sampling shall be performed in
accordance with FOP for WAQTC TM 2 and random samples shall be selected in accordance
with WSDOT T 716. After the first acceptable load of concrete, up to ½ cubic yard may be
placed from subsequent loads to be tested prior to testing for acceptance.
When the results for any subsequent acceptance test indicates that the concrete as delivered
and approved by the Contractor for placement does not conform to the specified limits, the
sampling and testing frequency will be resumed for each load. Whenever one subsequent
test indicates that the concrete is within the specified limits, the random sampling and testing
frequency of one for every 100 cubic yards may resume.
Sampling and testing for a placement of one class of concrete consisting of 50 cubic
yards or less will be as listed above, except that after one set of tests indicate that the
concrete is within specified limits, the remaining concrete to be placed may be accepted by
visual inspection.
6-02.3(5)H Sampling and Testing for Compressive Strength and Initial Curing
Acceptance testing for compressive strength shall be conducted at the same frequency
as the acceptance tests for temperature, consistency, and air content.
The Contractor shall provide and maintain a sufficient number of cure boxes in accordance
with FOP for AASHTO T 23 for curing concrete cylinders. The cure boxes shall be readily
accessible and no more than 500 feet from the point of acceptance testing, unless otherwise
allowed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall also provide, maintain and operate all necessary
power sources and connections needed to operate the cure boxes. The cure boxes shall be
in-place and functioning at the specified temperature for curing cylinders prior to concrete
placement. Concrete cylinders shall be cured in the cure boxes in accordance with FOP for
AASHTO T 23. The cure boxes shall have working locks and the Contractor shall provide
the Engineer with one key to each of the locks. Once concrete cylinders are placed in the cure
box, the cure box shall not be disturbed until the cylinders have been removed. The Contractor
shall retain the cure box Temperature Measuring Device log and provide it to the Engineer
upon request.
The Contractor shall protect concrete cylinders in cure boxes from excessive vibration
and shock waves during the curing period in accordance with Section 6-02.3(6)D.
All cure box costs shall be incidental to the associated item of work.
6-02.3(5)I Test Section for Cast-In-Place SCC
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct a test section of
the element being constructed of cast-in-place SCC. The Contractor shall confirm, through the
SCC placement operation in the test section, the SCC flows the distance required, completely
filling the forms and encapsulating the reinforcement as required without leaving voids and
pockets and causing segregation of the SCC mix. The test section forms, reinforcing steel and
concrete placing operations shall be identical to those to be used in the production elements.
For horizontal elements, the test section shall simulate the flow of concrete for the
maximum distance anticipated during production concrete placement. The depth and width of
the test section for horizontal element may be smaller than the actual depth and width of the
element to be cast. For vertical elements, the test section shall be a minimum of 33-percent of
the height of the tallest element to be constructed. The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working
Drawings consisting of formwork and reinforcement details of the test section and SCC
placement procedures.

After removing the forms, the test section will be inspected for signs of honeycombs,
cracks, aggregate segregation, sedimentation, cold joints, and other surface and concrete
placement defects. If such defects are present, the Contractor shall revise the formwork and
SCC placement procedures as necessary to eliminate such defects.
Acceptance of the test section and the SCC mix design is contingent on acceptable visual
inspection, and a minimum of two 4-inch minimum diameter core samples taken from the
placement location and the furthest-most limits of the concrete as identified by the Engineer.
The number of core locations will be specified by the Engineer. The difference in average unit
weight of the locations represented by the core samples shall be less than 5-percent.
The Contractor shall use the same SCC placement procedures confirmed by the Engineer
accepted test section for casting the production members.
6-02.3(5)J Vacant
6-02.3(5)K Rejecting Concrete
Rejection Without Testing – The Engineer, prior to sampling, may reject any batch or
load of concrete that appears defective in composition; such as cement content or aggregate
proportions. Rejected material shall not be incorporated in the Structure.
6-02.3(5)L Concrete With Non-Conforming Strength
Concrete with cylinder compressive strengths (fc) that fail to meet acceptance level
requirements shall be evaluated for structural adequacy. If the material is found to be adequate,
payment shall be adjusted in accordance with the following formula:
2(f’c – fc)(UP)(Q)
Pay adjustment =
f’c
Where:
f’c = Specified minimum compressive strength at 28 days.
fc = Compressive strength at 28 days as determined by AASHTO
Test Methods.
UP = Unit Contract price per cubic yard for the class of concrete involved.
Q = Quantity of concrete represented by an acceptance test based on the
required frequency of testing.
Concrete that fails to meet minimum acceptance levels using the coring method will be
evaluated for structural adequacy. If the material is found to be adequate, payment shall be
adjusted in accordance with the following formula:
3.56(.85f’c – f cores)(UP)(Q)
Pay adjustment =
f’c
Where:
f’c = Specified minimum compressive strength at 28 days.
f cores = Compressive strength of the cores as determined by AASHTO T 22.
UP = Unit Contract price per cubic yard for the class of concrete involved.
Q = Quantity of concrete represented by an acceptance test based on the
required frequency of testing.
Where these Specifications designate payment for the concrete on other than a per cubic
yard basis, the unit Contract price of concrete shall be taken as $300 per cubic yard for
concrete Class 4000, 5000, and 6000. For concrete Class 3000, the unit contract price for
Concrete shall be $160 per cubic yard.
6-02.3(6) Placing Concrete
The Contractor shall not place concrete:
1. On frozen or ice-coated ground or Subgrade;
2. Against or on ice-coated forms, reinforcing steel, structural steel, conduits, precast
members, or construction joints;
3. Under rainy conditions; placing of concrete shall be stopped before the quantity of
surface water is sufficient to affect or damage surface mortar quality or cause a flow
or wash the concrete surface;
4. In any foundation until the Engineer has accepted its depth and character;
5. In any form until the Engineer has accepted it and the placement of any reinforcing
in it; or
6. In any Work area when vibrations from nearby Work may harm the concrete’s initial
set or strength.
When a foundation excavation contains water, the Contractor shall pump it dry before
placing concrete. If this is impossible, an underwater concrete seal shall be placed that
complies with Section 6-02.3(6)B. This seal shall be thick enough to resist any uplift.
All foundations, forms, and contacting concrete surfaces shall be moistened with water just
before the concrete is placed. Any standing water on the foundation, on the concrete surface,
or in the form shall be removed.
The Contractor shall place concrete in the forms as soon as possible after mixing. The
concrete shall always be plastic and workable. For this reason, the Engineer may reduce the
time to discharge even further. Concrete placement shall be continuous, with no interruption
longer than 30 minutes between adjoining layers unless the Engineer allows a longer time. The
Type 2 Working Drawing submittal shall include justification that the concrete mix design will
remain fluid for interruptions longer than 30 minutes between placements. Each layer shall be
placed and consolidated before the preceding layer takes initial set. After initial set, the forms
shall not be jarred, and projecting ends of reinforcing bars shall not be disturbed.
In girders or walls, concrete shall be placed in continuous, horizontal layers 1½ to 2½ feet
deep. Compaction shall leave no line of separation between layers. In each part of a form, the
concrete shall be deposited as near its final position as possible.
Any method for placing and consolidating shall not segregate aggregates or displace
reinforcing steel. Any method shall leave a compact, dense, and impervious concrete with
smooth faces on exposed surfaces. Plastering is not permitted. Any section of defective
concrete shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense.
To prevent aggregates from separating, the length of any conveyor belt used to transport
concrete shall not exceed 300 feet. If the mix needs protection from sun or rain, the
Contractor shall cover the belt. When concrete pumps are used for placement, a Contractor’s
representative shall, prior to use on the first placement of each day, visually inspect the pumps
water chamber for water leakage. No pump shall be used that allows free water to flow past
the piston.
If a concrete pump is used as the placing system, the pump priming slurry shall be
discarded before placement. Initial acceptance testing may be delayed until the pump priming
slurry has been eliminated from the concrete being pumped. Eliminating the priming slurry
from the concrete may require that several cubic yards of concrete are discharged through the
pumping system and discarded. Use of a concrete pump requires a reserve pump (or other
backup equipment) at the site.
If the concrete will drop more than 5 feet, it shall be deposited through a sheet metal (or
other accepted) conduit. If the form slopes, the concrete shall be lowered through accepted
conduit to keep it from sliding down one side of the form. No aluminum conduits or tremies
shall be used to pump or place concrete.
Before placing bridge deck concrete on steel spans, the Contractor shall release the
falsework under the bridge and let the span swing free on its supports. Concrete in flat slab
bridges shall be placed in one continuous operation for each span or series of continuous spans.
Concrete for bridge decks and the stems of T-beams or box-girders shall be placed in
separate operations if the stem of the beam or girder is more than 3 feet deep. First the beam
or girder stem shall be filled to the bottom of the slab fillets. Bridge deck concrete shall not be
placed until enough time has passed to permit the earlier concrete to shrink (at least 12 hours).

If stem depth is 3 feet or less, the Contractor may place concrete in 1 continuous operation if
the Engineer concurs.
Between expansion or construction joints, concrete in beams, girders, bridge decks,
piers, columns, walls, and traffic and pedestrian barriers, etc., shall be placed in a
continuous operation.
No traffic or pedestrian barrier shall be placed until after the bridge deck is complete for
the entire Structure. No concrete barriers shall be placed until the falsework has been released
and the span supports itself. The Contractor may choose not to release the deck overhang
falsework prior to the barrier placement. The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working
Drawings consisting of calculations indicating the loads induced into the girder webs due
to the barrier weight and any live load placed on the Structure do not exceed the design
capacity of the girder component. This analysis is not required for bridges with concrete
Superstructures. No barrier, curb, or sidewalk shall be placed on steel or prestressed concrete
girder bridges until the bridge deck reaches a compressive strength of at least 3,000 psi.
The Contractor may construct traffic and pedestrian barriers by the slipform method.
However, the barrier may not deviate more than ¼ inch when measured by a 10-foot
straightedge held longitudinally on the front face, back face, and top surface. Electrical
conduit within the barrier shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements
of Section 8-20.3(5).
When placing concrete in arch rings, the Contractor shall ensure that the load on the
falsework remains symmetrical and uniform.
Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, arch ribs in open spandrel arches shall be placed
in sections. Small key sections between large sections shall be filled after the large sections
have shrunk.
6-02.3(6)A Weather and Temperature Limits to Protect Concrete
6-02.3(6)A1 Hot Weather Protection
The Contractor shall provide concrete within the specified temperature limits. Cooling of
the coarse aggregate piles by sprinkling with water is permitted provided the moisture content
is monitored and the mixing water is adjusted for the free water in the aggregate. Shading
or cooling aggregate piles (sprinkling of fine aggregate piles with water is not allowed). If
sprinkling of the coarse aggregates is to be used, the piles moisture content shall be monitored
and the mixing water adjusted for the free water in the aggregate. In addition, when removing
the coarse aggregate, it shall be removed from at least 1 foot above the bottom of the pile.
Refrigerating mixing water; or replacing all or part of the mixing water with crushed ice,
provided the ice is completely melted by placing time.
If air temperature exceeds 90°F, the Contractor shall use water spray or other accepted
methods to cool all concrete-contact surfaces to less than 90°F. These surfaces include forms,
reinforcing steel, steel beam flanges, and any others that touch the mix.
6-02.3(6)A2 Cold Weather Protection
Concrete shall be maintained at or above a temperature of 40°F during the first seven
days of the Cold Weather Protection Period and at or above a temperature of 35°F during the
remainder of the Cold Weather Protection Period. Cold weather protection requirements do not
apply to concrete in shafts and piles placed below the ground line.
Prior to placing concrete in cold weather, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working
Drawing with a written procedure for cold weather concreting. The procedure shall detail how
the Contractor will adequately cure the concrete and prevent the concrete temperature from
falling below the minimum temperature. Extra protection shall be provided for areas especially
vulnerable to freezing (such as exposed top surfaces, corners and edges, thin sections, and
concrete placed into steel forms). Concrete placement will only be allowed if the Contractor’s
cold weather protection plan has been accepted by the Engineer.

Prior to concrete placement, the Contractor shall review the 7-day temperature predictions
for the job site from the Western Region Headquarters of the National Weather Service (www.
wrh.noaa.gov). When temperatures below 35°F are predicted, the Contractor shall:
1. Install temperature sensors in each concrete placement. One sensor shall be installed for
every 100 cubic yards of concrete placed. Sensors shall be installed at locations directed
by the Engineer, and shall be placed 1.5 inches from the face of concrete.
2. Immediately after concrete placement, temperature sensors shall be installed on the
concrete surface at locations directed by the Engineer. One sensor shall be installed for
every 100 cubic yards of concrete placed.
Temperatures shall be measured and recorded a minimum of every hour for the duration
of the Cold Weather Protection Period. Temperature data shall be submitted to the Engineer
as a Type 1 Working Drawing within three days following the end of the Cold Weather
Protection Period.
For each day that the concrete temperature falls below 40°F during the first seven days
of the Cold Weather Protection Period, no curing time is awarded for that day and the Cold
Weather Protection Period is extended for one additional day. If the concrete temperature
falls below 35°F during the Cold Weather Protection Period, the concrete may be rejected by
the Engineer.
6-02.3(6)B Placing Concrete in Foundation Seals
If the Plans require a concrete seal, the Contractor shall place the concrete underwater
inside a watertight cofferdam, tube, or caisson. Seal concrete shall be placed in a compact
mass in still water. It shall remain undisturbed and in still water until fully set. While seal
concrete is being deposited, the water elevation inside and outside the cofferdam shall
remain equal to prevent any flow through the seal in either direction. The cofferdam shall be
vented at the vent elevation shown in the Plans. The thickness of the seal is based upon this
vent elevation.
The seal shall be at least 18 inches thick unless the Plans show otherwise. The Engineer
may change the seal thickness during construction which may require redesign of the footing
and the pier shaft or column. Although seal thickness changes may result in the use of more or
less concrete, reinforcing steel, and excavation, payment will remain as originally defined in
unit Contract prices.
To place seal concrete underwater, the Contractor shall use a concrete pump or tremie.
The tremie shall have a hopper at the top that empties into a watertight tube at least 10 inches
in diameter. The discharge end of the tube on the tremie or concrete pump shall include a
device to seal out water while the tube is first filled with concrete. Tube supports shall permit
the discharge end to move freely across the entire Work area and to drop rapidly to slow
or stop the flow. One tremie may be used to concrete an area up to 18 feet per side. Each
additional area of this size requires one additional tremie.
Throughout the underwater concrete placement operation, the discharge end of the tube
shall remain submerged in the concrete and the tube shall always contain enough concrete to
prevent water from entering. The concrete placement shall be continuous until the Work is
completed, resulting in a seamless, uniform seal. If the concreting operation is interrupted,
the Engineer may require the Contractor to prove by core drilling or other tests that the seal
contains no voids or horizontal joints. If testing reveals voids or joints, the Contractor shall
repair them or replace the seal at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
Concrete Class 4000W shall be used for seals, and it shall meet the consistency
requirements of Section 6-02.3(4)C.
6-02.3(6)C Dewatering Concrete Seals and Foundations
After a concrete seal is constructed, the Contractor shall pump the water out of the
cofferdam and place the rest of the concrete in the dry. This pumping shall not begin until the
seal has set enough to withstand the hydrostatic pressure (3 days for gravity seals and 10 days

for seals containing piling or shafts). The Engineer may extend these waiting periods to ensure
structural safety or to meet a condition of the operating permit.
If weighted cribs are used to resist hydrostatic pressure at the bottom of the seal, the
Contractor shall anchor them to the foundation seal. Any method used (such as dowels or
keys) shall transfer the entire weight of the crib to the seal.
No pumping shall be done during or for 24 hours after concrete placement unless done
from a suitable sump separated from the concrete Work by a watertight wall. Pumping shall
be done in a way that rules out any chance of concrete being carried away.
6-02.3(6)D Protection Against Vibration
Freshly placed concrete shall not be subjected to excessive vibration and shock waves
during the curing period until it has reached a 2,000 psi minimum compressive strength for
structural concrete and lower-strength classes of concrete.
After the first 5 hours from the time the concrete has been placed and consolidated, the
Contractor shall keep all vibration producing operations at a safe horizontal distance from
the freshly placed concrete by following either the prescriptive safe distance method or the
monitoring safe distance method. These requirements for the protection of freshly placed
concrete against vibration shall not apply for plant cast concrete, nor shall they apply to the
vibrations caused by the traveling public.
6-02.3(6)D1 Prescriptive Safe Distance Method
After the concrete has been placed and consolidated, the Contractor shall keep all vibration
producing operations at a safe horizontal distance from the freshly placed concrete as follows:
Minimum Compressive Safe Horizontal Distance1
Strength, f’c Equipment Class L2 Equipment Class H3
< 1,000 psi 75 feet 125 feet
1,000 to < 1,400 psi 30 feet 50 feet
1,400 to 2,000 psi 15 feet 25 feet
1The safe horizontal distance shall be reduced to 10 feet for small rubber tire construction equipment like backhoes under
50,000 pounds, concrete placing equipment, and legal Highway vehicles if such equipment travels at speeds of:
• ≤ 5 mph on relatively smooth Roadway surfaces or
• ≤ 3 mph on rough Roadway surfaces (i.e., with potholes)
2Equipment Class L (Low Vibration) shall include tracked dozers under 85,000 pounds, track vehicles, trucks (unless excluded
above), hand-operated jack hammers, cranes, auger drill rig, caisson drilling, vibratory roller compactors under 30,000 pounds,
and grab-hammers.
3Equipment Class H (High Vibration) shall include pile drivers, vibratory hammers, machine-operated impact tools, pavement
breakers, and other large pieces of equipment.
After the concrete has reached a minimum compressive strength specified above, the safe
horizontal distance restrictions would no longer apply.
6-02.3(6)D2 Monitoring Safe Distance Method
The Contractor may monitor the vibration producing operations in order to decrease the
safe horizontal distance requirements of the prescriptive safe distance method. If this method
is chosen, all construction operations that produce vibration or shock waves in the vicinity
of freshly placed concrete shall be monitored by the Contractor with monitoring equipment
sensitive enough to detect a minimum peak particle velocity (PPV) of 0.10 inches per second.
Monitoring devices shall be placed on or adjacent to the freshly placed concrete when the
measurements are taken. During the time subsequent to the concrete placement, the Contractor
shall cease all vibration or shock producing operations in the vicinity of the newly placed
concrete when the monitoring equipment detects excessive vibration and shock waves defined
as exceeding the following PPVs:

Minimum Compressive Strength, f’c Maximum PPV

< 1,000 psi 0.10 in/sec
1,000 to < 1,400 psi 1.0 in/sec
1,400 to 2,000 psi 2.0 in/sec
After the concrete has reached a minimum compressive strength specified above, the safe
horizontal distance restrictions would no longer apply.
6-02.3(7) Vacant
6-02.3(8) Vacant
6-02.3(9) Vibration of Concrete
The Contractor shall supply enough vibrators to consolidate the concrete (except that
placed underwater) according to the requirements of this section. Each vibrator shall:
1. Be designed to operate while submerged in the concrete,
2. Vibrate at a rate of at least 7,000 pulses per minute, and
3. Receive the Engineer’s acceptance on its type and method of use.
Immediately after concrete is placed, vibration shall be applied in the fresh batch at the
point of deposit. In doing so, the Contractor shall:
1. Space the vibrators evenly, no farther apart than twice the radius of the visible effects
of the vibration;
2. Ensure that vibration intensity is great enough to visibly affect a weight of 1-inch
slump concrete across a radius of at least 18 inches;
3. Insert the vibrators slowly to a depth that will effectively vibrate the full depth of each
layer, penetrating into the previous layer on multilayer pours;
4. Protect partially hardened concrete (i.e., nonplastic, which prevents vibrator penetration
when only its own weight is applied) by preventing the vibrator from penetrating it or
making direct contact with steel that extends into it;
5. Not allow vibration to continue in one place long enough to form pools of grout;
6. Continue vibration long enough to consolidate the concrete thoroughly, but not so long
as to segregate it;
7. Withdraw the vibrators slowly when the process is complete; and
8. Not use vibrators to move concrete from one point to another in the forms.
When vibrating and finishing top surfaces that will be exposed to weather or wear, the
Contractor shall not draw water or laitance to the surface. In high lifts, the top layer shall be
shallow and made up of a concrete mix as stiff as can be effectively vibrated and finished.
To produce a smooth, dense finish on outside surfaces, the Contractor shall hand tamp
the concrete.
Vibration of SCC shall only be used as described below or as approved by the Engineer:
1. To prevent the formation of a cold joint in between placement of successive batches
of SCC.
2. Near the end of an SCC placement to aid in leveling the SCC in the forms.
When vibration of SCC is allowed, the magnitude and duration of the applied vibration
shall be kept as minimal as possible.
6-02.3(10) Bridge Decks and Bridge Approach Slabs
6-02.3(10)A Pre-Deck Pour Meeting
A pre-deck pour meeting shall be held 5 to 10 working days before placing deck concrete
to discuss construction procedures, personnel, equipment to be used, concrete sampling and
testing and deck finishing and curing operations. Those attending shall include, at a minimum,

the superintendent, foremen in charge of placing and finishing concrete, and representatives
from the concrete supplier and the concrete pump truck supplier.
If the project includes more than one bridge deck, and if the Contractor’s key personnel
change between concreting operations, or at request of the Engineer, additional conferences
shall be held before each deck placement.
6-02.3(10)B Screed Rail Supports
The Contractor shall place screed rails outside the finishing area. When screed rails
cannot be placed outside the finishing area as determined by the Engineer, they shall rest
on adjustable supports that can be removed with the least possible disturbance to the
screeded concrete. The supports shall rest on structural members or on forms rigid enough
to resist deflection. Supports shall be removable to at least 2 inches below the finished
surface. For staged constructed bridge decks, the finishing machine screed rails shall not be
supported on the completed portion of deck and shall deflect with the portion of structure
under construction.
Screed rails (with their supports) shall be strong enough and stiff enough to permit the
finishing machine to operate effectively on them. All screed rails shall be placed and secured
for the full length of the deck/slab before the concreting begins. If the Engineer concurs in
advance, the Contractor may move rails ahead onto previously set supports while concreting
progresses. However, such movable rails and their supports shall not change the set elevation
of the screed.
On steel truss and girder spans, screed rails and bulkheads may be placed directly
on transverse steel floorbeams, with the strike-board moving at right angles to the centerline
of the Roadway.
6-02.3(10)C Finishing Equipment
The finishing machine shall be self-propelled and be capable of forward and reverse
movement under positive control. The finishing machine shall be equipped with a rotating
cylindrical single or double drum screed not exceeding 60 inches in length. The finishing
machine shall have the necessary adjustments to produce the required cross section, line, and
grade. Provisions shall be made for the raising and lowering of all screeds under positive
control. The upper vertical limit of screed travel shall permit the screed to clear the finished
concrete surface.
For bridge deck widening of 20 feet or less, and for bridge approach slabs, or where jobsite
conditions do not allow the use of the conventional configuration finishing machines described
above, the Contractor may submit a Type 2 Working Drawing proposing the use of a hand-
operated motorized power screed such as a “Texas” or “Bunyan” screed. This screed shall be
capable of finishing the bridge deck and bridge approach slab to the same standards as the
finishing machine.
On bridge decks, the Contractor may use hand-operated strike-boards only when the
Engineer concurs for special conditions where self-propelled or motorized hand-operated
screeds cannot be employed. These boards shall be sturdy and able to strike off the full
placement width without intermediate supports. Strike-boards, screed rails, and any specially
made auxiliary equipment shall receive the Engineer’s concurrence before use. All finishing
requirements in these Specifications apply to hand-operated finishing equipment.
6-02.3(10)D Concrete Placement, Finishing, and Texturing
6-02.3(10)D1 Test Slab Using Bridge Deck Concrete
After the Contractor receives the Engineer’s acceptance of the Class 4000D concrete mix
design, and a minimum of seven calendar days prior to the first placement of bridge deck
concrete, the Contractor shall construct a test slab using concrete of the accepted mix design.
The test slab may be constructed on grade, shall have a minimum thickness of 8-inches,
shall have minimum plan dimensions of 10-feet along all four edges, and shall be square
or rectangular.

During construction of the test slab, the Contractor shall demonstrate concrete sampling
and testing, use of the concrete temperature monitoring system, the concrete fogging system,
concrete placement system, and the concrete finishing operation. The Contractor shall
conduct the demonstration using the same type of equipment to be used for the production
bridge decks, except that the Contractor may elect to finish the test slab with a hand-operated
strike-board.
After the construction of the test slab and the demonstration of bridge deck construction
operations is complete, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of the test slab in accordance
with Sections 2-02.3 and 2-03.3(7)C.
6-02.3(10)D2 Preparation for Concrete Placement
Before placing bridge approach slab concrete, the subgrade shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 2-06 and 5-05.3(6).
Before any concrete is placed, the finishing machine shall be operated over the entire
length of the deck/slab to check screed deflection. Concrete placement may begin only if the
Engineer accepts after this test.
Immediately before placing concrete, the Contractor shall check (and adjust if necessary)
all falsework and wedges to minimize settlement and deflection from the added mass of the
concrete deck/slab. The Contractor shall also install devices, such as telltales, by which the
Engineer can readily measure settlement and deflection.
6-02.3(10)D3 Concrete Placement
The placement operation shall cover the full width of the bridge deck or the full width
between construction joints. The Contractor shall locate any construction joint over a beam or
web that can support the deck/slab on either side of the joint. The joint shall not occur over a
pier unless the Plans permit. Each joint shall be formed vertically and in true alignment. The
Contractor shall not release falsework or wedges supporting bridge deck placement sections
on either side of a joint until each side has aged as these Specifications require.
Placement of concrete for bridge decks and bridge approach slabs shall comply with
Section 6-02.3(6). In placing the concrete, the Contractor shall:
1. Place it (without segregation) against concrete placed earlier, as near as possible
to its final position, approximately to grade, and in shallow, closely spaced piles;
2. Consolidate it around reinforcing steel by using vibrators before strike-off by the
finishing machine;
3. Not use vibrators to move concrete;
4. Not revibrate any concrete surface areas where workers have stopped prior to screeding;
5. Remove any concrete splashed onto reinforcing steel in adjacent segments before
concreting them;
6. Maintain a slight excess of concrete in front of the screed across the entire width of the
placement operation;
7. Operate the finishing machine to create a surface that is true and ready for final finish
without overfinishing or bringing excessive amounts of mortar to the surface; and
8. Leave a thin, even film of mortar on the concrete surface after the last pass of the
finishing machine pan.
Workers shall complete all post screeding operations without walking on the concrete.
This may require work bridges spanning the full width of the deck/slab.
After removing the screed supports, the Contractor shall fill the voids with concrete
(not mortar).
If the surface left by the finishing machine is porous, rough, or has minor irregularities,
the Contractor shall float the surface of the concrete. Floating shall leave a smooth and even
surface. Float finishing shall be kept to the minimum number of passes necessary to seal the
surface. The floats shall be at least 4-feet long. Each transverse pass of the float shall overlap

the previous pass by at least half the length of the float. The first floating shall be at right
angles to the strike-off. The second floating shall be at right angles to the centerline of the
span. A smooth riding surface shall be maintained across construction joints.
The edge of completed roadway slabs at expansion joints and compression seals shall have
a ⅜-inch radius.
After floating, but while the concrete remains plastic, the Contractor shall test the entire
deck/slab for flatness (allowing for crown, camber, and vertical curvature). The testing shall
be done with a 10-foot straightedge held on the surface. The straightedge shall be advanced
in successive positions parallel to the centerline, moving not more than one half the length of
the straightedge each time it advances. This procedure shall be repeated with the straightedge
held perpendicular to the centerline. An acceptable surface shall be one free from deviations of
more than ⅛-inch under the 10-foot straightedge.
If the test reveals depressions, the Contractor shall fill them with freshly mixed concrete,
strike off, consolidate, and refinish them. High areas shall be cut down and refinished.
Retesting and refinishing shall continue until a surface conforming to the requirements
specified above is produced.
6-02.3(10)D4 Monitoring Bridge Deck Concrete Temperature After Placement
The Contractor shall measure and record the concrete temperature and ambient temperature
a minimum of every hour for seven calendar days after concrete placement. The Contractor
shall place two temperature sensors in the bridge deck at locations specified by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall measure ambient temperature near the locations where concrete
temperature is being measured. When the bridge deck is being enclosed and heated to meet
cold weather requirements, ambient temperature readings shall be taken within the enclosure.
The Contractor shall submit the concrete temperature and ambient temperature data as a
Type 1 Working Drawing in spreadsheet format within 14 calendar days from placing the
bridge deck concrete.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the type and model of
each device and the method used to measure and record the temperatures.
6-02.3(10)D5 Bridge Deck Concrete Finishing and Texturing
Except as otherwise specified for portions of bridge decks receiving an overlay or sidewalk
under the same Contract, the Contractor shall texture the surface of the bridge deck as follows:
The Contractor shall texture the bridge deck using diamond tipped saw blades mounted
on a power driven, self-propelled machine that is designed to texture concrete surfaces.
The grooving equipment shall provide grooves that are ⅛" ± 1/64" wide, 3/16" ± 1/16" deep,
and spaced at ¾" ± ⅛". The bridge deck shall not be textured with a metal tined comb.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the type
of grooving equipment to be used. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the method
and equipment for texturing the bridge deck will not chip, spall or otherwise damage
the deck.
Unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall texture the concrete
bridge deck surface either in a longitudinal direction, parallel with centerline or in a
transverse direction, perpendicular with centerline. The Contractor shall texture the
bridge deck surface to within 3-inches minimum and 15-inches maximum of the edge
of concrete at expansion joints, within 1-foot minimum and 2-feet maximum of the curb
line, and within 3-inches minimum and 9-inches maximum of the perimeter of bridge
drain assemblies.
The Contractor shall contain and collect all concrete dust and debris generated by the
bridge deck texturing process, and shall dispose of the collected concrete dust and
debris in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C.
If the Plans call for placement of a sidewalk or an HMA or concrete overlay on the bridge
deck, the Contractor shall produce the final finish of these areas by dragging a strip of damp,

seamless burlap lengthwise over the bridge deck or by brooming it lightly. Approximately
3-feet of the drag shall contact the surface, with the least possible bow in its leading edge.
It shall be kept wet and free of hardened lumps of concrete. When the burlap drag fails to
produce the required finish, the Contractor shall replace it. When not in use, it shall be lifted
clear of the bridge deck.
After the bridge deck has cured, the surface shall conform to the surface smoothness
requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(10)D3.
The surface texture on any area repaired to address out-of-tolerance surface smoothness
shall match closely that of the surrounding bridge deck area at the completion of the repair.
Methods used to remove high spots shall cut through the mortar and aggregate without
breaking or dislodging the aggregate or causing spalls.
6-02.3(10)D6 Bridge Approach Slab Finishing and Texturing
Bridge approach slabs that are being built as part of a bridge construction project shall
be textured in accordance with Section 6-02.3(10)D5. All other bridge approach slabs shall
be textured using metal tined combs in the transverse direction, except bridge approach
slabs receiving an overlay in the same Contract shall be finished as specified in Section
6-02.3(10)D5 only.
The comb shall be made of a single row of metal tines. It shall leave striations in the fresh
concrete approximately 3/16-inch deep by ⅛-inch wide and spaced approximately ½-inch
apart. The Engineer will decide actual depths at the site. If the comb has not been accepted,
the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s acceptance by demonstrating it on a test section.
The Contractor may operate the combs manually or mechanically, either singly or with several
placed end to end. The timing and method used shall produce the required texture without
displacing larger particles of aggregate.
Texturing shall end 2-feet from curb lines. This 2-foot untextured strip shall be hand
finished with a steel trowel.
Surface smoothness, high spots, and low spots shall be addressed as specified in Section
6-02.3(10)D5. The surface texture on any area cut down or built up shall match closely that
of the surrounding bridge approach slab area. The entire bridge approach slab shall provide
a smooth riding surface.
6-02.3(10)E Sidewalk
Concrete for sidewalk shall be well compacted, struck off with a strike-board, and floated
with a wooden float to achieve a surface that does not vary more than ⅛ inch under a 10-foot
straightedge. An edging tool shall be used to finish all sidewalk edges and expansion joints.
The final surface shall have a granular texture that will not turn slick when wet.
6-02.3(10)F Bridge Approach Slab Orientation and Anchors
Bridge approach slabs shall be constructed full bridge deck width from outside usable
Shoulder to outside usable Shoulder at an elevation to match the Structure. Unless otherwise
shown in the Plans, the pavement end of the bridge approach slab shall be constructed normal
to the Roadway centerline. The bridge approach slabs shall be modified as shown in the Plans
to accommodate the grate inlets at the bridge ends if the grate inlets are required.
Bridge approach slab anchors shall be installed as detailed in the Plans, and the anchor
rods, couplers, and nuts shall conform to Section 9-06.5(1). The steel plates shall conform
to ASTM A36. All metal parts of the approach expansion anchor shall receive one coat
of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)F or be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO
M232. The pipe shall be any nonperforated PE or PVC pipe of the diameter specified in
the Plans. Polystyrene shall conform to Section 9-04.6. The anchors shall be installed parallel
both to profile grade and centerline of Roadway. The Contractor shall secure the anchors to
ensure that they will not be misaligned during concrete placement. For Method B anchor
installations, the epoxy bonding agent used to install the anchors shall be Type IV conforming
to Section 9-26.1. The compression seal shall be as noted in the Contract documents. Dowel

bars shall be installed in the bridge approach slabs in accordance with the requirements of the
Standard Plans and Section 5-05.3(10).
The compression seal shall be a 2½ inch wide gland selected from the current Qualified
Products List.
After curing bridge approach slabs in accordance with Section 6-02.3(11), the
bridge approach slabs may be opened to traffic when a minimum compressive strength
of 2,500 psi is achieved.
6-02.3(11) Curing Concrete
After placement, concrete surfaces shall be cured as follows:
1. Bridge sidewalks, roofs of cut and cover tunnels – curing compound covered by white,
reflective type sheeting or continuous wet curing. Curing by either method shall be for
at least 10 days.
2. Bridge decks — See Section 6-02.3(11)B.
3. Bridge approach slabs (Class 4000A concrete) – Two coats of curing compound and
continuous wet cure for at least 10 days.
4. Concrete barriers and rail bases – See Section 6-02.3(11)A.
5. All other concrete surfaces – Continuous wet cure for at least 3 days.
During the continuous wet cure, the Contractor shall keep all exposed concrete surfaces
saturated with water. Formed concrete surfaces shall be kept in a continuous wet cure by
leaving the forms in place. If forms are removed during the continuous wet cure period, the
Contractor shall treat the concrete as an exposed concrete surface. Runoff water shall be
collected and disposed of in accordance with all applicable regulations. In no case shall runoff
water be allowed to enter any lakes, streams, or other surface waters.
When curing Class 4000A, two coats of curing compound that complies with Section
9-23.2 shall be applied immediately (not to exceed 15 min.) after tining any portion of the
bridge approach slab. The continuous wet cure shall be established as soon as the concrete has
set enough to allow covering without damaging the finish.
For all other concrete requiring curing compound, the Contractor shall apply two coats
(that complies with Section 9-23.2) to the fresh concrete. The compound shall be applied
immediately after finishing. Application of the second coat shall run at right angles to that
of the first. The two coats shall total at least 1 gallon per 150 square feet and shall obscure
the original color of the concrete. If any curing compound spills on construction joints or
reinforcing steel, the Contractor shall clean it off before the next concrete placement.
If the Plans call for an asphalt overlay on the bridge approach slab, the Contractor shall use
the clear curing compound (Type 1, Class B), applying at least 1 gallon per 150 square feet to
the concrete surface. Otherwise, the Contractor shall use white pigmented curing compound
(Type 2), agitating it thoroughly just before and during application. If other materials are to
be bonded to the surface, the Contractor shall remove the curing compound by sandblasting
or acceptable high pressure water washing.
The Contractor shall have on the site, back-up spray equipment, enough workers, and
a bridge from which they will apply the curing compound. The Engineer may require the
Contractor to demonstrate (at least 1 day before the scheduled concrete placement) that the
crew and equipment can apply the compound acceptably.
The Contractor shall cover the top surfaces with white, reflective sheeting, leaving it in
place for at least 10 days. Throughout this period, the sheeting shall be kept in place by taping
or weighting the edges where they overlap.
6-02.3(11)A Curing and Finishing Concrete Traffic and Pedestrian Barrier
The Contractor shall supply enough water and workers to cure and finish concrete barrier
as required in this section. Unit contract prices shall cover all curing and finishing costs.

6-02.3(11)A1 Fixed-Form Barrier

The edge chamfers shall be formed by attaching chamfer strips to the barrier forms.
After troweling and edging a barrier (while the forms remain in place), the Contractor shall:
1. Brush the top surface with a fine bristle brush;
2. Cover the top surface with heavy, quilted blankets; and
3. Spray water on the blankets and forms at intervals short enough to keep them
thoroughly wet for 3 days.
After removing the forms, the Contractor shall:
1. Remove all lips and edgings with sharp tools or chisels;
2. Fill all holes with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2);
3. True up corners of openings;
4. Remove concrete projecting beyond the true surface by stoning or grinding;
5. Cover the barrier with heavy, quilted blankets (not burlap);
6. Keep the blankets continuously wet for at least 7 days.
The Contractor may do the finishing Work described in steps 1 through 4 above during
the second (the 7-day) curing period if the entire barrier is kept covered except the immediate
Work area. Otherwise, no finishing Work may be done until at least 10 days after pouring.
After the 10-day curing period, the Contractor shall remove from the barrier all form-
release agent, mud, dust, and other foreign substances in either of two ways: (1) by light
sandblasting and washing with water, or (2) by spraying with a high-pressure water jet.
The water jet equipment shall use clean fresh water and shall produce (at the nozzle) at least
1,500 psi with a discharge of at least 3 gpm. The water jet nozzle shall have a 25-degree tip
and shall be held no more than 9 inches from the surface being washed.
After cleaning, the Contractor shall use brushes to rub mortar conforming to
Section 9-20.4(2) at a ratio of 1:1 cement/aggregate ratio into air holes and small crevices on
all surfaces except the brushed top. As soon as the mortar takes its initial set, the Contractor
shall rub it off with a piece of sacking or carpet. The barrier shall then be covered with wet
blankets for at least 48 hours.
No curing compound shall be used on fixed-form concrete barrier. The completed surface
of the concrete shall be even in color and texture.
6-02.3(11)A2 Slip-Form Barrier
The edge radius shall be formed by attaching radius strips to the barrier slip form.
The Contractor shall finish slip-form barrier by: (1) steel troweling to close all surface
pockmarks and holes; and (2) for plain surface barrier, lightly brushing the front and back face
with vertical strokes and the top surface with transverse strokes.
After finishing, the Contractor shall cure the slip-form barrier by using either Method A
(curing compound) or B (wet blankets) described below.
Method A – Under the curing compound method, the Contractor shall:
1. Spray two coats of clear curing compound (Type 1) on the concrete surface after the
free water has disappeared. (Coverage of combined coats shall equal at least 1 gallon
per 150 square feet.)
2. No later than the morning after applying the curing compound, cover the barrier with
white, reflective sheeting for at least 10 days.
3. After the 10-day curing period, remove the curing compound as necessary by light
sandblasting or by spraying with a high-pressure water jet to produce an even surface
appearance. The water jet equipment shall use clean fresh water and shall produce
(at the nozzle) at least 2,500 psi with a discharge of at least 4 gpm. The water jet
nozzle shall have a 25-degree tip and shall be held no more than 9 inches from the
surface being cleaned. The Contractor may propose to use a curing compound/concrete

sealer. The Engineer will evaluate the proposal and if found acceptable, will accept the
proposal in writing. As a minimum, the Contractor’s proposal shall include:
Product identity
Manufacturer’s recommended application rate
Method of application and necessary equipment
Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS)
Sample of the material for testing
Allow 14 working days for evaluating the proposal and testing the material.
Method B – Under the wet cure method, the Contractor shall:
1. Provide an initial cure period by continuous fogging or mist spraying for at least the
first 24 hours.
2. After the initial cure period, cover the barrier with a heavy quilted blanket.
3. Keep the blankets continuously wet for at least 10 days. (No additional finishing is
required at the end of the curing period.)
6-02.3(11)B Curing Bridge Deck
6-02.3(11)B1 Equipment
The Contractor shall maintain a wet sheen, without developing pooling or sheeting water,
using a fogging apparatus consisting of pressure washers with a minimum nozzle output of
1,500 psi, or other means accepted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the bridge
deck curing plan a minimum 14 calendar days prior to the pre-concreting conference.
The Contractor’s plan shall describe the sequence and timing that will be used to fog the
bridge deck, apply pre-soaked burlap, install soaker hoses and cover the deck with white
reflective sheeting.
6-02.3(11)B2 Curing
The fogging apparatus shall be in place and charged for fogging prior to beginning concrete
placement for the bridge deck.
The Contractor shall presoak all burlap to be used to cover the deck during curing.
Immediately after the finishing machine passes over finished concrete, the Contractor shall
implement the following tasks:
1. The Contractor shall fog the bridge deck while maintaining a wet sheen without
developing pooling or sheeting water.
2. The Contractor shall apply the presoaked burlap to the top surface to fully cover the
deck without damaging the finish, other than minor marring of the concrete surface.
The Contractor shall not apply curing compound.
3. The Contractor shall continue to keep the burlap wet by fog spraying until the burlap
is covered by soaker hoses and white reflective sheeting. The Contractor shall place
the soaker hoses and white reflective sheeting after the concrete has achieved initial
set. The Contractor shall charge the soaker hoses frequently so as to keep the burlap
covering the entire deck wet during the course of curing.
As an alternative to tasks 2 and 3 above, the Contractor may propose a curing system
using proprietary curing blankets specifically manufactured for bridge deck curing.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of details of the proprietary
curing blanket system, including product literature and details of how the system is to be
installed and maintained.
The wet curing regime as described shall remain in place for at least 14 consecutive
calendar days.

6-02.3(12) Construction Joints

6-02.3(12)A Construction Joints in New Construction
If the Engineer allows, the Contractor may add, delete, or relocate construction joints
shown in the Plans. Any request for such changes shall be in writing, accompanied by
a drawing that depicts them. The Contractor will bear any added costs that result from
such changes.
All construction joints shall be formed neatly with grade strips or other accepted methods.
The Contracting Agency will not accept irregular or wavy pour lines. All joints shall be
horizontal, vertical, or perpendicular to the main reinforcement. The Contractor shall not use
an edger on any construction joint, and shall remove any lip or edging before making the
adjacent pour.
If the Plans require a roughened surface on the joint, the Contractor shall strike it off to
leave grooves at right angles to the length of the member. Grooves shall be installed using one
of the following options:
1. Grooves shall be ½ to 1 inch wide, ¼ to ½ inch deep, and spaced equally at twice the
width of the groove. Grooves shall terminate approximately 1½-inches from the face
of concrete.
2. Grooves shall be 1 to 2 inches wide, a minimum of ½-inch deep, and spaced
a maximum of three times the width of the groove. Grooves shall terminate
approximately 1½-inches from the face of concrete.
If the Engineer allows, the Contractor may use an alternate method to produce a roughened
surface on the joint, provided that such an alternate method leaves a roughened surface of
at least a ¼-inch amplitude.
If the first strike-off does not produce the required roughness, the Contractor shall repeat
the process before the concrete reaches initial set. The final surface shall be clean and without
laitance or loose material.
If the Plans do not require a roughened surface, the Contractor shall include shear keys at
all construction joints. These keys shall provide a positive, mechanical bond. Shear keys shall
be formed depressions and the forms shall not be removed until the concrete has been in place
at least 12 hours. Forms shall be slightly beveled to ensure ready removal. Raised shear keys
are not allowed.
Shear keys for the tops of beams, at tops and bottoms of boxed girder webs, in diaphragms,
and in crossbeams shall:
1. Be formed with 2 by 8-inch wood blocks;
2. Measure 8 inches lengthwise along the beam or girder stem;
3. Measure 4 inches less than the width of the stem, beam, crossbeam, etc.
(measured transverse of the stem); and
4. Be spaced at 16 inches center to center.
Unless the Plans show otherwise, in other locations (not named above), shear keys shall
equal approximately ⅓ of the joint area and shall be approximately 1½ inches deep.
Before placing fresh concrete against cured concrete, the Contractor shall thoroughly clean
and saturate the cured surface. All loose particles, dust, dirt, laitance, oil, or film of any sort
shall be removed by method(s) as accepted by the Engineer. The cleaned surface shall be
saturated with water for a minimum of four hours before the fresh concrete is placed.
Before placing the reinforcing mat for footings on seals, the Contractor shall: (1) remove
all scum, laitance, and loose gravel and sediment; (2) clean the construction joint at the top
of the seals; and (3) chip off any high spots on the seals that would prevent the footing steel
from being placed in the position required by the Plans.

6-02.3(12)B Construction Joints Between Existing and New Construction

If the Plans or Special Provisions require a roughened surface on the joint, the Contractor
shall thoroughly roughen the existing surface to a uniformly distributed ¼-inch minimum
amplitude surface profile, with peaks spaced at a maximum of 1 inch.
If the Plans or Special Provisions do not require a roughened surface on the joint, the
Contractor shall remove all loose particles, dust, dirt, laitance, oil, or film of any sort.
Before placing fresh concrete against existing concrete, the Contractor shall thoroughly
clean and saturate the existing surface. All loose particles, dust, dirt, laitance, oil, or film of
any sort shall be removed. The cleaned surface shall be saturated with water for a minimum
of 4 hours before the fresh concrete is placed.
6-02.3(13) Expansion Joints
This section outlines the requirements of specific expansion joints shown in the Plans.
The Plans may require other types of joints, seals, or materials than those described here.
Joints made of a vulcanized, elastomeric compound (with neoprene as the only polymer)
shall be installed with a lubricant adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. The length
of a seal shall match that required in the Plans without splicing or stretching.
Open joints shall be formed with a template made of wood, metal, or other suitable
material. Insertion and removal of the template shall be done without chipping or breaking
the edges or otherwise damaging the concrete.
Any part of an expansion joint running parallel to the direction of expansion shall provide
a clearance of at least ½ inch (produced by inserting and removing a spacer strip) between the
two surfaces. The Contractor shall ensure that the surfaces are precisely parallel to prevent any
wedging from expansion and contraction.
All poured rubber joint sealer (and any required primer) shall conform with Section 9-04.2(2).
6-02.3(13)A Strip Seal Expansion Joint System
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the strip seal
expansion joint shop drawings. These plans shall include, at a minimum, the following:
1. Plan, elevation, and sections of the joint system and all components, with dimensions
and tolerances.
2. All material designations.
3. Manufacturer’s written installation procedure. The installation procedure shall
indicate how the extrusions set into the two sides of the joint will be allowed to move
independently of one another.
4. Corrosion protection system used on the metal components.
5. Locations of welded shear studs, lifting mechanisms, temperature setting devices,
and construction adjustment devices.
6. Method of sealing the system to prevent leakage of water through the joint.
7. Details of the temporary supports for the steel extrusions while the encapsulating
concrete of the headers is placed and cured.
8. The gland installation procedure, including the means and methods used to install the
gland and assure correct seating of the gland within the steel extrusions.
The strip seal shall be removable and replaceable.
The metal components shall conform to ASTM A36, ASTM A992, or ASTM A572,
and shall be protected against corrosion by one of the following methods:
1. Zinc metallized in accordance with Section 6-07.3(14).
2. Hot-dip galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111.
3. Paint in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9). The color of the top coat shall be Federal
Standard 595 Color No. 26420. The surfaces embedded in concrete shall be painted
only with a shop primer coat of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)C.

If the gland is installed in the field, the Contractor shall have the services of a strip seal
expansion joint system manufacturer’s technical representative physically present at the
job site. The manufacturer’s technical representative shall train the Contractor’s personnel
performing the field installation of the gland, provide technical assistance for installing the
gland, and observe and inspect the installation of at least the first complete joint.
The strip seal gland shall be continuous for the full length of the joint with no splices
permitted, unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
Other than items shown in the Plans, threaded studs used for construction adjustments are
the only items that may be welded to the steel shapes provided they are removed by grinding
after use, and the area repaired by application of an accepted corrosion protection system.
After the joint system is installed, the joint shall be flooded with water and inspected, from
below the joint, for leakage. If leakage is observed, the joint system shall be repaired by the
Contractor, as recommended by the manufacturer.
6-02.3(13)B Compression Seal Expansion Joint System
Compression seal glands shall be selected from the current Qualified Products List and
sized as shown in the Plans.
The compression seal expansion joint system shall be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written recommendations. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working
Drawing consisting of the manufacturer’s written installation procedure and repair procedures
if leakage testing fails.
After the joint system is installed, the joint area shall be flooded with water and inspected,
from below the joint, for leakage. If leakage is observed, the joint system shall be repaired by
the Contractor, as recommended by the manufacturer.
6-02.3(14) Finishing Concrete Surfaces
All concrete shall show a smooth, dense, uniform surface after the forms are removed.
If it is porous, the Contractor shall bear the cost of repairing it. The Contractor shall clean and
refinish any stained or discolored surfaces.
Subsections A and B (below) describe two classes of surface finishing.
6-02.3(14)A Class 1 Surface Finish
The Contractor shall apply a Class 1 finish to all surfaces of concrete members to the limits
designated in the Contract Plans.
The Contractor shall follow steps 1 through 8 below. When steel forms have been used
and when the surface of filled holes matches the texture and color of the area around them,
the Contractor may omit steps 3 through 8. To create a Class 1 surface, the Contractor shall:
1. Remove all bolts and all lips and edgings where form members have met;
2. Fill all holes greater than ¼ inch and float to an even, uniform finish with mortar
conforming to Section 9-20.4(2) at a 1:2 cement/aggregate ratio;
3. Thoroughly wash the surface of the concrete with water;
4. Brush on a mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2) at a 1:1 cement/aggregate ratio,
working it well into the small air holes and other crevices in the face of the concrete;
5. Brush on no more mortar than can be finished in 1 day;
6. Rub the mortar off with burlap or a piece of carpet as soon as it takes initial set (before
it reaches final set);
7. Fog-spray water over the finish as soon as the mortar paint has reached final set; and
8. Keep the surface damp for at least 2 days.
If the mortar becomes too hard to rub off as described in step 6, the Contractor shall
remove it with a Carborundum stone and water. Random grinding is not permitted.

6-02.3(14)B Class 2 Surface Finish

The Contractor shall apply a Class 2 finish to all above-ground surfaces not receiving a
Class 1 finish as specified above unless otherwise indicated in the Contract. Surfaces covered
with fill do not require a surface finish.
To produce a Class 2 finish, the Contractor shall remove all bolts and all lips and edgings
where form members have met and fill all form tie holes.
6-02.3(14)C Pigmented Sealer for Concrete Surfaces
The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the pigmented sealer
manufacturer’s written instructions covering, at a minimum, the following:
1. Surface preparation.
2. Application methods.
3. Requirements for concrete curing prior to sealer application.
4. Temperature, humidity and precipitation limitations for application.
5. Rate of application and number of coats to apply.
All surfaces specified in the Plans to receive pigmented sealer shall receive a Class 2
surface finish (except that concrete barrier surfaces shall be finished in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(11)A). The Contractor shall not apply pigmented sealer from a batch greater
than 12 months past the initial date of color sample acceptance of that batch by the Engineer.
The pigmented sealer color or colors for specific concrete surfaces shall be as specified in
the Special Provisions.
The final appearance shall be even and uniform without blotchiness, streaking or uneven
color. Surface finishes deemed unacceptable by the Engineer shall be re-coated in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency.
For concrete surfaces such as columns, retaining walls, pier walls, abutments, concrete
fascia panels, and noise barrier wall panels, the pigmented sealer shall extend to 1 foot below
the finish ground line, unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
6-02.3(14)D General Requirements for Concrete Surface Finishes Produced by
Form Liners
Horizontal and vertical joints shall be spliced in accordance with the manufacturer’s
printed instructions. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the
manufacturer’s joint splice instructions.
Horizontal splicing of ABS and plastic form liners to achieve the required height is not
permitted and there shall be no horizontal joints. The concrete formed with ABS and plastic
form liners shall be given a light sandblast to remove the glossy finish.
Once the forms are removed, the Contractor shall treat the joint areas by patching or light
sandblasting as required by the Engineer to ensure that the joints are not visible.
Form liners shall be cleaned, reconditioned, and repaired before each use. Form liners
with repairs, patches, or defects which, in the opinion of the Engineer, would result in
adverse effects to the concrete finish shall not be used.
Care shall be taken to ensure uniformity of color throughout the textured surface.
A change in form release agent will not be allowed.
All surfaces formed by the form liner shall also receive a Class 2 surface finish. Form ties
shall be a type that leaves a clean hole when removed. All spalls and form tie holes shall be
filled as specified for a Class 2 surface finish.
6-02.3(15) Date Numerals
Standard date numerals shall be placed where shown in the Plans. The date shall be for
the year in which the Structure is completed. When an existing Structure is widened or
when traffic barrier is placed on an existing Structure, the date shall be for the year in which
the original Structure was completed. Unit Contract prices shall cover all costs relating to
these numerals.
6-02.3(16) Plans for Falsework and Formwork

The Contractor shall submit all plans for falsework and formwork as Type 2E Working
Drawings. A submittal is not required for footing or retaining wall formwork if the concrete
placement is 4 feet or less in height.
The design of falsework and formwork shall be based on:
1. Applied loads and conditions which are no less severe than those described
in Section 6-02.3(17)A;
2. Allowable stresses and deflections which are no greater than those described
in Section 6-02.3(17)B;
3. Special loads and requirements no less severe than those described
in Section 6-02.3(17)C;
4. Conditions required by other Sections of 6-02.3(17).
The falsework and formwork plans shall be scale drawings showing the details of
proposed construction, including: sizes and properties of all members and components;
spacing of bents, posts, studs, wales, stringers, wedges and bracing; rates of concrete
placement, placement sequence, direction of placement, and location of construction joints;
identification of falsework devices and safe working loads as well as identification of any
bolts or threaded rods used with the devices including their diameter, length, type, grade, and
required torque. The falsework plans shall show the proximity of falsework to utilities or any
nearby Structures including underground Structures. Formwork accessories shall be identified
according to Section 6-02.3(17)H. All assumptions, dimensions, material properties, and other
data used in making the structural analysis shall be noted on the drawing.
The Contractor shall furnish associated design calculations to the Engineer as part of the
submittal. The design calculations shall include the structural and geotechnical design of the
foundation and shall show the stresses and deflections in all load-carrying members that are
part of the falsework system. Construction details which may be shown in the form of sketches
on the calculation sheets shall be shown in the falsework or formwork drawings as well.
Falsework or formwork plans will not be accepted in cases where it is necessary to refer to
the calculation sheets for information needed for complete understanding of the falsework and
formwork plans or how to construct the falsework and formwork.
6-02.3(16)A Vacant
6-02.3(16)B Pre-Contract Review of Falsework and Formwork Plans
The Contractor may request pre-contract review of formwork plans for abutments,
wingwalls, diaphragms, retaining walls, columns, girders and beams, box culverts, railings,
and bulkheads. Plans for falsework supporting the bridge deck for interior spans between
precast prestressed concrete girders may also be submitted for pre-contract review.
To obtain pre-contract review, the Contractor shall electronically submit drawings and
design calculations in PDF format directly to: BridgeConstructionSupport@wsdot.wa.gov
The Bridge and Structures Office, Construction Support Engineer will return the falsework
or formwork plan to the Contractor with review notes, an effective date of review, and any
revisions needed prior to use.
For each contract on which the pre-reviewed falsework or formwork plans will be used, the
Contractor shall submit a copy to the Engineer. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer
has given concurrence.
If the falsework or formwork being constructed has any deviations to the preapproved
falsework or formwork plan, the Contractor shall submit plan revisions for review and
approval in accordance with Section 6-02.3(16).
6-02.3(17) Falsework and Formwork
Formwork and falsework are both structural systems. Formwork contains the lateral
pressure exerted by concrete placed in the forms. Falsework supports the vertical and/

or the horizontal loads of the formwork, reinforcing steel, concrete, and live loads
during construction.
The Contractor shall set falsework, to produce in the finished Structure, the lines
and grades indicated in the Contract Plans. The setting of falsework shall allow for
shrinkage, settlement, falsework girder camber, and any structural camber the Plans or
the Engineer require.
Concrete forms shall be mortar tight, true to the dimensions, lines, and grades of the
Structure. Curved surfaces shown in the Contract Plans shall be constructed as curved
surfaces and not chorded, except as allowed in Section 6-02.3(17)J. Concrete formwork
shall be of sufficient strength and stiffness to prevent overstress and excess deflection as
defined in Section 6-02.3(17)B. The rate of depositing concrete in the forms shall not exceed
the placement rate in the formwork plan Working Drawing. The interior form shape and
dimensions shall also ensure that the finished concrete will conform with the Contract Plans.
If the new Structure is near or part of an existing one, the Contractor shall not use the
existing Structure to suspend or support falsework unless the Plans or Special Provisions
state otherwise. For prestressed girder and T-beam bridge widenings or stage construction,
the bridge deck and the diaphragm forms may be supported from the existing Structure or
previous stage, if accepted by the Engineer. For steel plate girder bridge widenings or stage
construction, only the bridge deck forms may be supported from the existing Structure or
previous stage, if accepted by the Engineer. See Section 6-02.3(17)E for additional conditions.
On bridge decks, forms designed to stay in place made of steel or precast concrete panels
shall not be used.
For post-tensioned Structures, both falsework and forms shall be designed to carry the
additional loads caused by the post-tensioning operations. The Contractor shall construct
supporting falsework in a way that leaves the Superstructure free to contract and lift off the
falsework during post-tensioning. Forms that will remain inside box girders to support the
placement of the bridge deck concrete shall, by design, resist girder contraction as little as
possible. See Section 6-02.3(26) for additional conditions.
6-02.3(17)A Design Loads
The design load for falsework shall consist of the sum of dead and live vertical loads, and
a design horizontal load. The minimum total design load for any falsework shall not be less
than 100 lbs/sf for combined live and dead load regardless of Structure thickness.
The entire Superstructure cross-section, except traffic barrier, shall be considered to be
placed at one time for purposes of determining support requirements and designing falsework
girders for their stresses and deflections, except as follows:
For concrete box girder bridges, the girder stems, diaphragms, crossbeams, and
connected bottom slabs, if the stem wall is placed more than 5 days prior to the top slab,
may be considered to be self supporting between falsework bents at the time the top slab is
placed, provided that the distance between falsework bents does not exceed four times the
depth of the portion of the girder placed in the preceding concrete placements.
Falsework bents shall be designed for the entire live load and dead load, including all load
transfer that takes place during post-tensioning, and braced for the design horizontal load.
Dead loads shall include the weight of all successive placements of concrete, reinforcing
steel, forms and falsework, and all load transfer that takes place during post-tensioning. The
weight of concrete with reinforcing steel shall be assumed to be not less than 160 pounds per
cubic foot.
Live loads shall consist of a minimum uniform load of not less than 25 psf, applied over
the entire falsework plan area, plus the greater of:
1. Actual weights of the deck finishing equipment applied at the rails, or;
2. A minimum load of 75 pounds per linear foot applied at the edge of the bridge deck.

The design horizontal load to be resisted by the falsework bracing system in any direction
shall be:
The sum of all identifiable horizontal loads due to equipment, construction sequence,
side-sway caused by geometry or eccentric loading conditions, or other causes, and an
allowance for wind plus an additional allowance of 1 percent of the total dead load to
provide for unexpected forces. In no case shall the design horizontal load be less than
3 percent of the total dead load.
The minimum horizontal load to be allowed for wind on each heavy-duty steel shoring
tower having a vertical load carrying capacity exceeding 30 kips per leg shall be the sum of
the products of the wind impact area, shape factor, and the applicable wind pressure value for
each height zone. The wind impact area is the total projected area of all the elements in the
tower face normal to the applied wind. The shape factor for heavy-duty steel shoring towers
shall be taken as 2.2. Wind pressure values shall be determined from the following table:
Wind Pressure on Heavy-Duty Steel Shoring Towers
Wind Pressure Value
Height Zone (Feet Above Ground) Adjacent to Traffic At Other Locations
0 to 30 20 psf 15 psf
30 to 50 25 psf 20 psf
50 to 100 30 psf 25 psf
Over 100 35 psf 30 psf
The minimum horizontal load to be allowed for wind on all other types of falsework,
including falsework girders and forms supported on heavy-duty steel shoring towers, shall be
the sum of the products of the wind impact area and the applicable wind pressure value for
each height zone. The wind impact area is the gross projected area of the falsework support
system, falsework girders, forms and any unrestrained portion of the permanent Structure,
excluding the areas between falsework posts or towers where diagonal bracing is not used.
Wind pressure values shall be determined from the following table:
Wind Pressure on All Other Types of Falsework
Wind Pressure Value
For Members Over and Bents
Height Zone (Feet Above Ground) Adjacent to Traffic Openings At Other Locations
0 to 30 2.0 Q psf 1.5 Q psf
30 to 50 2.5 Q psf 2.0 Q psf
50 to 100 3.0 Q psf 2.5 Q psf
Over 100 3.5 Q psf 3.0 Q psf
The value of Q in the above tabulation shall be determined as follows:

Q = 1 + 0.2W; but Q shall not be more than 10.
Where:
W = is the width of the falsework system, in feet, measured normal to the
direction of the wind force being considered.
The falsework system shall also be designed so that it will be sufficiently stable to resist
overturning prior to the placement of the concrete. The minimum factor of safety against
falsework overturning in all directions from the assumed horizontal load for all stages
of construction shall be 1.25. If the required resisting moment is less than 1.25 times the
overturning moment, the difference shall be resisted by bracing, cable guys, or other means
of external support.
Design of falsework shall include the vertical component (whether positive or negative)
of bracing loads imposed by the design horizontal load. Design of falsework shall investigate

the effects of any horizontal displacement due to stretch of the bracing. This is particularly
important when using cable or rod bracing systems.
If the concrete is to be post-tensioned, the falsework shall be designed to support any
increased or redistributed loads caused by the prestressing forces.
6-02.3(17)B Allowable Design Stresses and Deflections
The maximum allowable stresses listed in this section are based on the use of identifiable,
undamaged, high-quality materials. Stresses shall be appropriately reduced if lesser quality
materials are to be used.
These maximum allowable stresses include all adjustment factors, such as the short-term
load duration factor. The maximum allowable stresses and deflections used in the design of
the falsework and formwork shall be as follows:
6-02.3(17)B1 Deflection
Deflection resulting from dead load and concrete pressure for exposed visible surfaces,
1⁄360 of the span.
Deflection resulting from dead load and concrete pressure for unexposed non-visible
surfaces, including the bottom of the deck slab between girders, 1⁄270 of the span.
In the foregoing, the span length shall be the center line to center line distance between
supports for simple and continuous spans, and from the center line of support to the end of the
member for cantilever spans. For plywood supported on members wider than 1½ inches, the
span length shall be taken as the clear span plus 1½ inches. Also, dead load shall include the
weight of all successive placements of concrete, reinforcing steel, forms and falsework self
weight. Only the self weight of falsework girders may be excluded from the calculation of
the above deflections provided that the falsework girder deflection is compensated for by the
installation of camber strips.
Where successive placements of concrete are to act compositely in the completed
Structure, deflection control becomes extremely critical. Maximum deflection of supporting
members — 1⁄500 of the span for members constructed in several successive placements
(such as concrete box girder and concrete T-beam girder Structures) falsework components
shall be sized, positioned, and/or supported to minimize progressive increases in deflection
of the Structure which would preload the concrete or reinforcing steel before it becomes
fully composite.
6-02.3(17)B2 Timber
Each species and grade of timber/lumber used in constructing falsework and formwork
shall be identified in the drawings. The allowable stresses and loads shall not exceed the lesser
of stresses and loads given in the table below or factored stresses for designated species and
grade in Table 7.3 of the Timber Construction Manual, latest edition, by the American Institute
of Timber Construction.
Compression perpendicular to the grain reduced to 300 psi for use when moisture content 450 psi
is 19 percent or more (areas exposed to rain, concrete curing water, green lumber).
Compression parallel to the grain but not to exceed 1,500 psi. 480,000 psi
(L/d)2
Flexural stress for members with a nominal depth greater than 8 inches. 1,800 psi
Flexural stress psi for members with a nominal depth of 8 inches or less. 1,500 psi
The maximum horizontal shear. 140 psi
AXIAL tension. 1,200 psi
The maximum modulus of elasticity (E) for timber. 1,600,000 psi
Where:
L is the unsupported length; and
d is the least dimension of a square or rectangular column, or the width of a square of equivalent
cross-sectional area for round columns.

The allowable stress for compression perpendicular to the grain, and for horizontal shear
shall not be increased by any factors such as short duration loading. Additional requirements
are found in other parts of Section 6-02.3(17). Criteria for the design of lumber and timber
connections are found in Section 6-02.3(17)I.
Plywood for formwork shall be designed in accordance with the methods and stresses
allowed in the APA Design/Construction Guide for Concrete Forming as published by
the American Plywood Association, Tacoma, Washington. As concrete forming is a
special application for plywood, wet stresses shall be used and then adjusted for forming
conditions such as duration of load, and experience factors. Concrete pour pressures shall be
in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)J.
6-02.3(17)B3 Steel
For identified grades of steel, design stresses shall not exceed those specified in the Steel
Construction Manual, latest edition, by the American Institute of Steel Construction, except
as follows:
Compression, flexural but not to exceed 0.6Fy 12,000,000 psi
Ld/bt
The modulus of elasticity (E) shall be 29,000,000 psi
When the grade of steel cannot be positively identified as with salvaged steel and if rivets
are present, design stresses shall not exceed the following:
Yield point fy 30,000 psi
Tension, axial, and flexural 16,000 psi
Compression, axial except L/r shall not exceed 120 14,150 - 0.37(KL/r)2 psi
Shear on gross section of the web of rolled shapes 9,500 psi
Web crippling for rolled shapes 22,500 psi
Compression, flexural but not to exceed 16,000 psi and L/b not greater than 39 16,000 - 5.2(L/b)2 psi
The modulus of elasticity (E) shall be 29,000,000 psi
Where:
L is the unsupported length;
d is the least dimension of rectangular columns, or the width of a square
of equivalent cross-sectional area for round columns, or the depth of beams;
b is the flange width;
t is the thickness of the compression flange;
r is the radius of gyration of the compression flange about the weak axis of the member; and
Fy is the specified minimum yield stress, psi, for the grade of steel used.
All dimensions are expressed in inches.
6-02.3(17)C Falsework and Formwork at Special Locations
In addition to the minimum requirements specified in Sections 6-02.3(17)A and
6-02.3(17)B, falsework towers or posts supporting beams directly over Roadways or
railroads which are open to traffic or the public shall be designed and constructed so that
the falsework will be stable if subjected to impact by vehicles. The use of damaged materials,
unidentifiable material, salvaged steel or steel with burned holes or questionable weldments
shall not be used for falsework described in this section. For the purposes of this Specification
the following public or private facilities shall also be considered as “Roadways”: pedestrian
pathways and other Structures such as bridges, walls, and buildings.
The dimensions of the clear openings to be provided through the falsework for Roadways,
railroads, or pedestrian pathways shall be as specified in the Contract.
Falsework posts or shoring tower systems which support members that cross over
a Roadway or railroad shall be considered as adjacent to Roadways or railroads. Other
falsework posts or shoring towers shall be considered as adjacent to Roadways or railroads
only if the following conditions apply:

1. Located in the row of falsework posts or shoring towers nearest to the Roadway or
railroad; and
2. Horizontal distance from the traffic side of the falsework to the edge of pavement is less
than the total height of the falsework and forms; or
3. The total height of the falsework and forms is greater than the horizontal clear distance
between the base of the falsework and a point 10 feet from the centerline of track.
The Contractor shall provide any additional features for the Work needed to ensure that
the falsework will be stable for impact by vehicles; providing adequate safeguards, safety
devices, protective equipment, and any other needed actions to protect property and the life,
health, and safety of the public; and shall comply with the provisions in Sections 1-07.23
and 6-02.3(17)M. The falsework design at special locations, shall incorporate the minimum
requirements detailed in this section, even if protected by concrete median barrier.
The vertical load used for the design of falsework posts and towers which support the
portion of the falsework over openings, shall be the greater of the following:
1. 150 percent of the design load calculated in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)B,
but not including any increased or redistributed loads caused by the post-tensioning
forces; or
2. 100 percent of the design load plus the increased or redistributed loads caused by the
post-tensioning forces.
Each falsework post or each shoring tower leg adjacent to Roadways or railroads shall
consist of either steel with a minimum section modulus about each axis of 9.5 inches cubed
or sound timbers with a minimum section modulus about each axis of 250 inches cubed.
Each falsework post or shoring tower leg adjacent to Roadways or railroads shall be
mechanically connected to its supporting footing at its base, or otherwise laterally restrained,
to withstand a force of not less than 2,000 pounds applied at the base of the post or tower leg
in any direction except toward the Roadway or railroad track. Posts or tower legs shall be
connected to the falsework cap and stringer by mechanical connections capable of resisting
a load in any horizontal direction of not less than 1,000 pounds.
For falsework spans over Roadways and railroads, all falsework stringers shall be
mechanically connected to the falsework cap or framing. The mechanical connections shall
be capable of resisting a load in any direction, including uplift on the stringer, of not less
than 500 pounds. All associated connections shall be installed before traffic is allowed to
pass beneath the span.
When timber members are used to brace falsework bents which are located adjacent to
Roadways or railroads, all connections shall be bolted through the members using ⅝-inch
diameter or larger bolts.
Concrete traffic barrier shall be used to protect all falsework adjacent to traveled
Roadways. The falsework shall be located so that falsework footings, mudsills, or piles are
at least 2 feet clear of the traffic barrier and all other falsework members shall also be at least
2 feet clear of the traffic barrier. Traffic barrier used to protect falsework shall not be fastened,
guyed, or blocked to any falsework but shall be fastened to the pavement according to details
shown in the Plans. The installation of concrete traffic barrier shall be completed before
falsework erection is begun. The traffic barrier at the falsework shall not be removed until
allowed by the Engineer. Falsework openings which are provided for the Contractor’s own use
(not for public use) shall also use concrete traffic barrier to protect the falsework, except the
minimum clear distance between the barrier and falsework footings, mudsills, piles, or other
falsework members shall be at least 3 inches.
Falsework bents within 20 feet of the center line of a railroad track shall be braced to resist
the required horizontal load or 2,000 pounds whichever is greater.
Pedestrian openings through falsework shall be paved or surfaced with full width
continuous wood walks which shall be wheel chair accessible and shall be kept clear.
Pedestrians shall be protected from falling objects and water falling from construction above.

Overhead protection for pedestrians shall extend at least 4 feet beyond the edge of the bridge
deck. Plans and details of the overhead protection and pathway shall be submitted with the
falsework Working Drawings. Pedestrian openings through falsework shall be illuminated
by temporary lighting, constructed and maintained by the Contractor. The temporary lighting
shall be constructed in accordance with local electrical code requirements. The temporary
lighting shall be steady burning 60-watt, 120-volt lamps with molded waterproof lamp holders
spaced at 25-foot centers maximum. All costs relating to pedestrian pathway paving, wood
walks, overhead protection, maintenance, operating costs, and temporary pedestrian lighting
shall be incidental to applicable adjacent items of Work.
6-02.3(17)D Falsework Support Systems: Foundations, Manufactured Shoring Towers,
Caps, and Posts
Foundations for falsework shall be designed for conditions stated in this Section using
methods shown in the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges Seventeenth
Edition – 2002 for allowable stress design, the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications
for load and resistance factor design or the AASHTO Guide Design Specifications for Bridge
Temporary Works. Allowable stresses for materials shall not exceed stresses and conditions
allowed by Section 6-02.3(17)B.
6-02.3(17)D1 Vacant
6-02.3(17)D2 Vacant
6-02.3(17)D3 Bents, Shoring Towers, Piling, Posts, and Caps
Plans for falsework bents or shoring tower systems, including manufactured tower systems
shall have plan, cross-section, and elevation view scale drawings showing all geometry.
Show in the falsework plans the proximity of falsework to utilities or any nearby Structures
including underground Structures. The ground elevation, cross-slopes, relation of stringers to
one another, and dimensions to posts or piling shall be shown in the falsework plans. Column,
pile, or tower heights shall be indicated. Member sizes, wall thickness and diameter of steel
pipe columns or piles shall be shown in the falsework plans. Location of wedges, minimum
bearing area and type of wedge material shall be identified in the falsework plans. Bracing
size, location, material and all connections shall be described in the falsework plans.
The relationship of the falsework bents or shoring tower systems to the permanent
Structure’s pier and footing shall be shown. Load paths shall be as direct as possible. Loads
shall be applied through the shear centers of all members to avoid torsion and buckling
conditions. Where loads cause twisting, biaxial bending, or axial loading with bending, the
affected members shall be designed for combined stresses and stability.
Posts or columns shall be constructed plumb with tops and bottoms carefully cut to provide
full end bearing. Caps shall be installed at all bents supported by posts or piling unless the
falsework Working Drawings specifically permit otherwise. Caps shall be fastened to the
piling or posts. The falsework shall be capable of supporting non uniform or localized loading
without adverse effect. For example, the loading of cantilevered ends of stringers or caps shall
not cause a condition of instability in the adjacent unloaded members.
Timber posts and piling shall be fastened to the caps and mudsills by through-bolted
connections, drift pins, or other accepted connections. The minimum diameter of round timber
posts shall be shown in the falsework plans. Timber caps and timber mudsills shall be checked
for crushing from columns or piling under maximum load.
Steel posts and piling shall be welded or bolted to the caps, and shall be bolted or welded to
the foundation. Steel members shall be checked for buckling, web yielding, and web crippling.
Wedges shall be used to permit formwork to be taken up and released uniformly. Wedges
shall be oak or close-grained Douglas fir. Cedar wedges or shims shall not be used anywhere
in a falsework or forming system. Wedges shall be used at the top or bottom of shores, but
not at both top and bottom. After the final adjustment of the shore elevation is complete, the
wedges shall be fastened securely to the sill or cap beam. Only one set of wedges (with one

optional block) shall be used at one location. Screw jacks (or other allowed devices) shall
be used under arches to allow incremental release of the falsework.
Sand jacks may be used to support falsework and are used for falsework lowering only.
Sand jacks shall be constructed of steel with snug fitting steel or concrete pistons. Sand jacks
shall be filled with dry sand and the jack protected from moisture throughout its use. They
shall be designed and installed in such a way to prevent the unintentional migration or loss
of sand. All sand jacks shall be tested in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)G.
When falsework is over or adjacent to Roadways or railroads, all details of the falsework
system which contribute to the horizontal stability and resistance to impact shall be installed at
the time each element of the falsework is erected and shall remain in place until the falsework
is removed. For other requirements see Section 6-02.3(17)C.
Transverse construction joints in the Superstructure shall be supported by falsework at the
joint location. The falsework shall be constructed in such a manner that subsequent pours will
not produce additional stresses in the concrete already in place.
6-02.3(17)D4 Manufactured Shoring Tower Systems and Devices
Manufactured proprietary shoring tower systems shall be identified in the falsework plans
by make and model and safe working load capacity per leg. The safe working load for shoring
tower systems shall be based upon a minimum 2½ to 1 factor of safety.
The safe working load capacity, anticipated deflection (or settlement), make and model
shall be identified in the falsework plans for manufactured devices such as: single shores,
overhang brackets, support bracket and jack assemblies, friction collars and clamps, hangers,
saddles, and sand jacks. The safe working load for shop manufactured devices shall be
based on a minimum ultimate strength safety factor of 2 to 1. The safe working load for field
fabricated devices and all single shores shall be based on a minimum ultimate strength safety
factor of 3 to 1.
The safe working load of all devices shall not be exceeded. The design loads shall be
as defined by Section 6-02.3(17)A. The maximum allowable free end deflection of deck
overhang brackets under working loads applied shall not exceed 3⁄16 inch measured at the
edge of the concrete slab regardless of the fact that the deflection may be compensated for
by pre-cambering or of setting the elevations high. The Contractor shall comply with all
manufacturer’s Specifications; including those relating to bolt torque, placing washers under
nuts and bolt heads, cleaning and oiling of parts, and the reuse of material. Devices which are
deteriorated, bent, warped, or have poorly fitted connections or welds, shall not be installed.
Shoring tower or device capacity as shown in catalogs or brochures published by the
manufacturer shall be considered as the maximum load which the shoring is able to safely
support under ideal conditions. These maximum values shall be reduced for adverse loading
conditions; such as horizontal loads, eccentricity due to unbalanced spans or placing sequence,
and uneven foundation settlement.
Copies of catalog data and/or other technical data shall be furnished with the falsework
plans to verify the load-carrying capacity, deflection, and manufacturers installation
requirements of any manufactured product or device proposed for use. Upon request by the
Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish manufacturer certified test reports and results showing
load capacity, deflection, test installation conditions, and identify associated components
and hardware for shoring tower systems or other devices. In addition to manufacturer’s
requirements, the criteria shown in the following sections for manufactured proprietary
shoring tower systems and devices shall be complied with when preparing falsework plans,
calculations, and installing these shoring tower systems and devices as falsework.
Alternative criteria and/or systems shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing
consisting of a written statement on the manufacturer’s letterhead, signed by the shoring
or device manufacturer (not signed by a material supplier or the Contractor) addressing
the following:
1. Identity of the specific Contract on which the alternative criteria and/or system will apply;
2. Description of the alternative criteria and/or system;
3. Technical data and test reports;

4. The conditions under which the particular alternative criteria may be followed; and
5. That a design based on the alternative criteria will not overstress or over deflect any
shoring component or device nor reduce the required safety factor.
In any case where the falsework drawings detail a manufactured product and the
manufacturer’s safe working load, load versus deflection curves, factor of safety, and
installation requirements cannot be found in any catalog, the Engineer may require load
testing in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)G to verify the safe working load and
deflection characteristics.
Tower leg loads shall not exceed the limiting values under any loading condition or
sequence. Frame extensions and any reduced capacity shall be shown in the falsework plans.
Screw jacks shall fit tight in the leg assemblies without wobble. Screw jacks shall be plumb
and straight. Shoring towers shall be installed plumb, and load distribution beams shall
be arranged such that vertical loads are distributed to all legs for all successive concrete
placements. There shall be no eccentric loads on shoring tower heads unless the heads have
been designed for such loading. Shoring towers shall remain square or rectangular in plan
view and shall not be skewed. There shall be no interchanging of parts from one manufactured
shoring system to another. Bent or faulty components shall not be used.
For manufactured shoring towers that allow ganging of frames, the number of ganged
frames shall be limited to one frame per opposing side of a tower, and the total number of legs
per ganged tower shall not exceed eight legs. Ganged frames shall be installed in accordance
with the manufacturer’s published standards using the manufacturer’s components. Other gang
arrangements shall not be used.
For manufactured steel shoring tower systems, the Contractor shall have bracing
designed and installed for horizontal loads and falsework overturning in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(17)A. Minimum bracing criteria and allowable leg loads are described in
the following paragraphs.
All shoring tower systems and bracing shall be thoroughly inspected by the Contractor
for plumb vertical support members, secure connections, and straight bracing members
immediately prior to, at intervals during, and immediately after every concrete placement.
For manufactured shoring tower systems, the maximum allowable deviation from the vertical
is ⅛ inch in 3 feet. If this tolerance is exceeded, concrete shall not be placed until adjustments
have brought the shoring towers within the acceptable tolerance.
6-02.3(17)E Stringers, Beams, Joists, Bridge Deck Support, and Deck Overhangs
All stringers, beams, joists, and bridge deck support shall be designed for the design loads,
deflections, and allowable stresses described in the preceding Section 6-02.3(17)A, B, and C
and for the following conditions.
At points of support, stringers, beams, joists, and trusses shall be restrained against rotation
about their longitudinal axis. The effect of biaxial bending shall be investigated in all cases
where falsework beams are not set plumb and the Structure cross-slope exceeds 3 percent.
For box girder and T-beam bridges, the centerline of falsework beams or stringers shall
be located within 2 feet of the bridge girder stems and preferably directly under the stems or
webs. Stringers supporting formwork for concrete box girder and T-beam slab overhangs shall
be stiff enough so that the differential deflection due to the placement of bridge deck concrete
is no more than 3/16 inch between the outside edge of the bridge deck and the exterior web
even if camber strips can compensate for the deflection.
Friction shall not be relied upon for lateral stability of beams or stringers. If the
compression flange of a beam is not laterally restrained, the allowable bending stress shall be
reduced to prevent flange buckling. If flange restraint is provided and since it is impossible
to predict the direction in which a compression flange will buckle, positive restraint shall be
provided in both directions. Flange restraint shall be designed for a minimum load of 2 percent
of the calculated compression force in the beam flange at the point under consideration.

Camber strips shall be used to compensate for falsework take-up and deflection, vertical
alignment, and the anticipated Structure dead load deflection shown in the camber diagram
in the Contract Plans. Camber is the adjustment to the profile of a load-supporting beam or
stringer so that the completed Structure will have the lines and grades shown in the Plans.
The dead load camber diagram shown in the Contract Plans is the predicted Structure dead
load deflection due to self mass. This dead load camber shall be increased by:
1. Amount of anticipated falsework take up,
2. Anticipated deflection of the falsework beam or stringer under the actual load
imposed, and
3. Any vertical curve compensation.
Camber strips shall be fastened by nailing to the top of wood members, or by clamping or
banding in the case of steel members. Camber strips shall have sufficient contact bearing area
to prevent crushing under total load. As a general rule, camber strips are not required unless
the total camber adjustment exceeds ¼ inch for exterior falsework stringers and ½ inch for
interior stringers.
On concrete box girder Structures, the forms supporting the bridge deck shall rest on
ledgers or similar supports and shall not be supported from the bottom slab except as provided
below. The form supports shall be fastened within 18 inches of the top of the web walls,
producing a clear span between web walls. The bridge deck forms may be supported or posted
from the bottom slab if the following conditions are met:
1. Permanent access, shown in the Contract Plans, is provided to the cells, and the
centerline to centerline distance between web walls is greater than 10 feet;
2. Falsework stringers designed for total load, stresses and deflections in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(17)A and B are located directly below each row of posts;
3. Posts have adequate lateral restraint; and
4. All forms (including the bridge deck forms), posts, and bracing are completely removed.
The falsework and forms on concrete box girder Structures supporting a sloping web and
deck overhang shall consist of a lateral support system which is designed to resist all rotational
forces acting on the stem, including those caused by the placement of bridge deck concrete,
bridge deck formwork mass, finishing machine, and other live loads. Stem reinforcing
steel shall not be stressed by the construction of the bridge deck slab placement. Overhang
brackets shall not be used for the support of bridge deck forms from sloping web concrete box
girder bridges.
Deck slab forms between girders or webs shall be constructed such that there is no
differential settlement relative to the girders. The support systems for form panels supporting
concrete deck slabs and overhangs on girder bridges (such as steel plate girders and
prestressed girders) shall be designed as falsework. Falsework supporting deck slabs and
overhangs on girder bridges shall be supported directly by the girders so that there will
be no differential settlement between the girders and the deck forms during placement of
deck concrete.
6-02.3(17)F Bracing
All falsework bracing systems shall be designed to resist the horizontal design load in
all directions with the falsework in either the loaded or unloaded condition. All bracing,
connection details, specific locations of connections, and hardware used shall be shown
in the falsework plans. Falsework diagonal bracing shall be thoroughly analyzed with
particular attention given to the connections. The allowable stresses in the diagonal braces
may be controlled by the joint strength or the compression stability of the diagonal. Timber
bracing for timber falsework bents shall have connections designed in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(17)I. Any damaged cross-bracing, such as split timber members shall be
replaced. Steel strapping shall avoid making sharp angles or right-angle bends. A means
of preventing accidental loss of tension shall be provided for steel strapping. See Sections
6-02.3(17)A, B, and C for design loads and allowable stresses.

Bracing shall not be attached to concrete traffic barrier, guardrail posts, or guardrail.
To prevent falsework beam or stringer compression flange buckling, cross-bracing
members and connections shall be designed to carry tension as well as compression. All
components, connection details and specific locations shall be shown in the falsework plans.
Bracing, blocking, struts, and ties required for positive lateral restraint of beam flanges shall
be installed at right angles to the beam in plan view. If possible, bracing in adjacent bays shall
be set in the same transverse plane. However, if because of skew or other considerations, it is
necessary to offset the bracing in adjacent bays, the offset distance shall not exceed twice the
depth of the beam.
All falsework and bracing shall be inspected by the Contractor for plumbness of vertical
support members, secure connections, tight cables, and straight bracing members immediately
prior to, during, and immediately after every concrete placement.
Bracing shall be provided to withstand all imposed loads during erection of the falsework
and all phases of construction for falsework adjacent to any Roadway, sidewalk, or railroad
track which is open to the public. All details of the falsework system which contribute to
horizontal stability and resistance to impact, including the bolts in bracing, shall be installed
at the time each element of the falsework is erected and shall remain in place until the
falsework is removed. The falsework plans shall show provisions for any supplemental
bracing or methods to be used to conform to this requirement during each phase of erection
and removal. Wind loads shall be included in the design of such bracing or methods. Loads,
connections, and materials for falsework adjacent to Roadways, shall also be in accordance
with Section 6-02.3(17)C.
6-02.3(17)F1 Cable or Tension Bracing Systems
When cables, wire rope, steel rod, or other types of tension bracing members are used as
external bracing to resist horizontal forces, or as temporary bracing to support bents while
falsework is being erected or removed adjacent to traffic, all elements of the bracing system
shall be shown in the falsework plans. Bracing shall not be attached to concrete traffic barrier,
guardrail posts, or guardrail. Any damaged bracing, such as frayed and kinked guying systems
shall be replaced. Wire rope shall avoid making sharp angles or right-angle bends and a means
of preventing accidental loss of tension shall be provided. The following information shall be
submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing:
1. Cable diameter, rod, or tension member size, and allowable working load.
2. Location and method of attaching the cable, rod, or tension member to the falsework.
The connecting device shall be designed to transfer both horizontal and vertical forces
to the cable without overstressing any falsework component.
3. The type of cable connectors or fastening devices (such as U-bolt clips, plate clamps,
etc.) to be used and the efficiency factor for each type. If cables are to be spliced, the
splicing method shall be shown.
4. Method of tightening cables, rods, or tension members after installation if tightening is
necessary to ensure their effectiveness. Method of preventing accidental loosening.
5. Anchorage details, including the size and mass of concrete anchor blocks, the assumed
coefficient of friction for surface anchorages, and the assumed lateral soil bearing
capacity for buried anchorages.
6. Method of pre-stretching or preloading cable or tension members.
7. Determination of the potential stretch or elongation of the tension member under the
design load and if the resulting lateral deflection will cause excessive secondary stresses
in the falsework.

Copies of manufacturer’s catalog or brochure showing technical data pertaining to the type
of cable to be used shall be furnished with the falsework plans. Technical data shall include the
cable diameter, the number of strands and the number of wires per strand, ultimate breaking
strength or recommended safe working strength, and any other information as may be needed
to identify the cable.
In the absence of sufficient technical data to identify the cable, or if it is old and obviously
worn, the Contractor shall perform cable breaking tests to establish the safe working load for
each reel of cable furnished. For static guy cable the minimum factor of safety shall be 3 to 1.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer an opportunity to witness these tests.
When cable bracing is used to prevent the overturning of heavy-duty shoring, attention
shall be given to the connections by which forces are transferred from the shoring to
the cables. Cable restraint shall be designed to act through the cap system to prevent the
inadvertent application of forces which the shoring is not designed to withstand. Cables shall
not be attached to any tower component.
Cable splices made by lapping and clipping with “Crosby” type clamps shall not be used.
Other splicing methods may be used; however, at each location where the cable is spliced,
cable strength shall be verified by a load test.
When cables are used as external bracing to resist overturning of a falsework system, the
horizontal load to be carried by the cables shall be calculated as follows:
1. When used with heavy-duty shoring systems, cables shall be designed to resist the
difference between 1.25 times the total overturning moment and the resistance to
overturning provided by the individual falsework towers.
2. When used with pipe-frame shoring systems where supplemental bracing is required,
cables shall be designed to resist the difference between 1.25 times the total overturning
moment and the resistance to overturning provided by the shoring system as a whole.
3. When used as external bracing to prevent overturning of all other types of falsework,
including temporary support during erection and removal of falsework at traffic
openings, cables shall be designed to resist 1.25 times the total overturning moment.
The maximum allowable cable design load shall be determined using the following criteria:
1. If the cable is new, or is in uniformly good condition, and if it can be identified by
reference to a manufacturer’s catalog or other technical publication, the allowable load
shall be the ultimate strength of the cable as specified by the manufacturer, multiplied
by the efficiency of the cable connector, and divided by a safety factor of 3 (i.e., safe
working load = breaking strength × connector efficiency/safety factor).
2. If the cable is used but still in serviceable condition, or is new or nearly new but cannot
be found in a manufacturer’s catalog, the Contractor shall perform load breaking tests.
In this case, the cable design load shall not exceed the breaking strength, as determined
by the load test, multiplied by the connector efficiency factor, and divided by a safety
factor of 3.
3. If the cable is used and still in serviceable condition, or is a new or nearly new cable
which cannot be identified, and if load breaking tests are not performed, the cable
design load shall not exceed the safe working load shown in the wire rope capacities
table multiplied by the cable connector efficiency.
Cable connectors shall be designed in accordance with criteria shown in the following
tables “Efficiency of Wire Rope Connections” and “Applying Wire Rope Clips”.
Cable safe working loads are provided in table “Wire Rope Capacities”.

Efficiency of Wire Rope Connections

(As compared to Safe Loads on Wire Rope)
Type of Connection Connector Efficiency
Wire Rope 100%
Sockets – Zink Type 100%
Wedge Sockets 70%
Clips – Crosby Type With Thimble 80%
Knot and Clip (Contractors Knot) 50%
Plate Clamp – 3 Bolt Type With Thimble 80%
Spliced Eye and Thimble:
¼″ and smaller 100%
⅜″ to ¾″ 95%
⅞″ to 1″ 88%
1⅛″ to 1½″ 82%
1⅝″ to 2″ 75%
2⅛″ and larger 70%
Wire Rope Capacities

Safe Load in Pounds for New Plow Steel Hoisting Rope
6 Strands of 19-Wires, Hemp Center (Safety Factor of 6)
Diameter inches Weight Lbs./Ft. Safe Load Lbs.
¼ 0.10 1,050
5⁄ 0.16 1,500
16
⅜ 0.23 2,250
7⁄16 0.31 3,070
½ 0.40 4,030
9⁄16 0.51 4,840
⅝ 0.63 6,330
¾ 0.95 7,930
⅞ 1.29 10,730
1 1.60 15,000
1⅛ 2.03 18,600
1¼ 2.50 23,000
1⅜ 3.03 25,900
1½ 3.60 30,700
1⅝ 4.23 35,700
1¾ 4.90 41,300
6-02.3(17)F2 Applying Wire Rope Clips

The only correct method of attaching U-bolt wire rope clips to rope ends is to place the
base (saddle) of the clip against the live end of the rope, while the “U” of the bolt presses
against the dead end.
The clips are usually spaced about six rope diameters apart to give adequate holding
power. A wire-rope thimble shall be used in the loop eye to prevent kinking when wire rope
clips are used. The correct number of clips for safe application, and spacing distances, are
shown below:

Number of Clips and Spacing for Safe Application

Number of Clips Minimum
Improved Plow Steel
Rope Diameter inches Drop Forged Other Material Spacing (Inches)
⅜ 2 3 3
½ 3 4 3½
⅝ 3 4 4
¾ 4 5 4½
⅞ 4 5 5¼
1 5 6 6
1⅛ 6 6 6¾
1¼ 6 7 7½
1⅜ 7 7 8¼
1½ 7 8 9
6-02.3(17)F3 Anchor Blocks

Concrete anchor blocks and connections used to resist forces from external bracing shall
be shown in the falsework plans. Concrete anchor blocks shall be proportioned to resist both
sliding and overturning. When designing anchor block stability, the mass of the anchor block
shall be reduced by the vertical component of the cable or brace tension to obtain the net or
effective mass to be used in the anchorage computations. The coefficient of friction assumed in
the design shall not exceed the following:
Friction Coefficient
Anchor block set on sand 0.40
Anchor block set on clay 0.50
Anchor block set on gravel 0.60
Anchor block set on pavement 0.60
Multiply the friction coefficient by 0.67 if it is likely the supporting material is wet or
will become wet during the construction period.
The method of connecting the cable or brace to the anchor block is part of the anchor
block design. The connection shall be designed to resist both horizontal and vertical forces.
6-02.3(17)F4 Temporary Bracing for Bridge Girders During Erection
Steel girders shall be braced in accordance with Section 6-03.3(7)A.
Prestressed concrete girders shall be braced sequentially during girder erection. The
bracing shall be designed and detailed by the Contractor and shall be shown in the falsework/
formwork Working Drawings. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and remove the bracing at
no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
At a minimum, the Contractor shall brace girders at each end and at midspan to prevent
lateral movement or rotation. This bracing shall be placed prior to the release of each
girder from the erection equipment. If the bridge is constructed with cast-in-place concrete
diaphragms, the bracing may be removed once the concrete in the diaphragms has been placed
and cured for a minimum of 24 hours.
6-02.3(17)F5 Temporary Bracing for Bridge Girders During Diaphragm and Bridge
Deck Concrete Placement
Prestressed concrete girders shall be braced to resist forces that would cause rotation or
torsion in the girders caused by the placing of precast concrete deck panels and concrete for
the bridge deck.

Bracing shall be designed and detailed by the Contractor and shall be shown in the
falsework/formwork Working Drawings. These braces shall be furnished, installed, and
removed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. The Contractor
may consider the bracing effects of the diaphragms in developing the falsework/formwork
plans. The Contractor shall account for the added load from concrete finishing machines and
other construction loadings in the design of the bracing.
Falsework support brackets and braces shall not be welded to structural steel bridge
members or to steel reinforcing bars.
6-02.3(17)G Testing Falsework Devices
The Contractor shall establish the load capacity and deflection (or settlement) of all friction
collars and clamps, brackets, hangers, saddles, sand jacks, and similar devices utilizing a
recognized independent testing Laboratory accepted by the Engineer. Laboratory tests shall
use the same materials and design that will be used on the project. Test loads shall be applied
to the device in the same manner that the device will experience loading on the project. Any
bolts or threaded rods used with the device shall be identified as to diameter, length, type,
grade, and torque. Any wedges, blocks, or shims used with the device on the project shall also
be tested with the device. Any adjustable jack system used as a part of a device shall be tested
with the device and shall have its maximum safe working extended height identified. Devices
shall not be tested in contact with the permanent Structure. Independent members with the
same properties as the permanent Structure shall be used to test device connections.
At least 14 days prior to the test, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing
consisting of the test procedure and scale drawing showing how the device will be tested
and how data will be collected. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer an opportunity to
witness these tests.
The independent testing Laboratory shall provide a certified test report which shall be
signed and dated. The test report shall clearly identify the device tested including trademarks
and model numbers; identify all parts and materials used, including grade of steel, or lumber,
member section dimensions; location, size, and the maximum tested extended height of any
adjustable jacks; indicate condition of materials used in the device; indicate the size, length
and location of all welds; indicate how much torque was used with all bolts and threaded rods.
The report shall describe how the device was tested, report the results of the test, provide a
scale drawing of the device showing the location(s) of where deflections or settlements were
measured, and show where load was applied. Deflections or settlements shall be measured
at load increments and the results shall be clearly graphed and labeled. Prior to installation
of falsework devices named in this section, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working
Drawings consisting of the certified test reports.
The safe working load for shop manufactured devices named in this section shall be
derived by dividing the ultimate strength by a safety factor of 2.0. The safe working load for
field fabricated or field modified devices (including the use of timber blocks or wedges with
the device) shall be determined by dividing the ultimate strength by a safety factor of 3.0.
Working load shall include masses of all successive concrete placements, falsework, forms,
all load transfer that takes place during post-tensioning, and any live loads; such as workers,
Roadway finishing machines, and concrete delivery systems. The maximum allowable free
end deflection of deck overhang brackets with combined dead and live working loads applied
shall be 3⁄16 inch even though deflection may be compensated for by pre-cambering or setting
the elevations high. The Contractor shall comply with all manufacturer’s Specifications;
including those relating to bolt torque, cleaning and oiling of parts, and the reuse of material.
Devices which are deteriorated, bent, warped or have poorly fitted connections or welds,
shall not be installed.
6-02.3(17)H Formwork Accessories
Formwork accessories such as form ties, form anchors, form hangers, anchoring inserts,
and similar hardware shall be specifically identified in the formwork plans including the name

and size of the hardware, manufacturer, safe working load, and factor of safety. The grade of
steel shall also be indicated for threaded rods, coil rods, and similar hardware. Wire form ties
shall not be used. Welding or clamping formwork accessories to Contract Plan reinforcing
steel will not be allowed. Driven types of anchorages for fastening forms or form supports
to concrete, and Contractor fabricated “J” hooks shall not be used. Field drilling of holes in
prestressed girders is not allowed.
Taper ties may be used provided the following conditions are met:
1. The structure is not designed to resist water pressure (pontoons, floating dolphins,
detention vaults, etc.).
2. After the taper tie is removed, plugs designed and intended for plugging taper tie
holes shall be installed at each face of concrete. The plug shall be installed a minimum
of 1½ inches clear from the face of concrete.
3. After the plug is installed, the hole shall be cleaned of all grease, contamination and
foreign matter.
4. Holes on the exposed faces of concrete shall be patched and finished to match the
surrounding concrete.
The following table from ACI 347R-88 provides minimum safety factors for formwork
accessories. The hardware proposed shall meet these minimum ultimate strength requirements
or the manufacturer’s minimum requirements, whichever provides the greater factor of safety.
The Contractor shall attach copies of the manufacturer’s catalog cuts and/or test data of
hardware proposed, to the formwork plans and submit the falsework and formwork Working
Drawings with supporting calculations in accordance with Section 6-02.3(16). In situations
where catalog cuts and/or test data are not available, testing shall be performed in accordance
with Section 6-02.3(17)G.
Minimum Safety Factors of Formwork Accessories*
Accessory Safety Factor Type of Construction
Form Tie 2.0 All applications.
Form Anchor 2.0 Formwork supporting form mass and concrete pressures only.
Form Anchor 3.0 Formwork supporting masses of forms, concrete, construction live loads, and
impact.
Form Hangers 2.0 All applications.
Anchoring Inserts 2.0 Placed in previous opposing concrete placement to act as an anchor for form tie.
*Safety factors are based on ultimate strength of the formwork accessory.
The bearing area of external holding devices shall be adequate to prevent excessive bearing
stress on form lumber. Form ties and form hangers shall be arranged symmetrically on the
supporting members to minimize twisting or rotation of the members. Form tie elongation
shall not exceed the allowable deflection of the wale or member that it supports. Inserts, bolts,
coil rods, and other fasteners shall be analyzed and designed for appropriately combined
bending, shear, torsion, and tension stresses. The formwork shall not be attached to Contract
Plan rebar or rebar cages. However, the Contractor may install additional reinforcing steel for
formwork anchorage.
Frictional resistance shall not be considered as contributing to the stability of any
connection or connecting device, except those designed as friction connectors such as U-bolt
friction-type connectors.
Form anchors and anchoring inserts shall be designed considering concrete strength at time
of loading, available embedment, location in the member, and any other factors affecting their
working strength, and shall be installed in concrete in accordance with the manufacturer’s
published requirements. Form anchors and anchoring inserts embedded in previous concrete
placements shall not be loaded until the concrete has reached the required design strength.
The required design strength of concrete for loading of an anchor shall be shown in the

formwork drawing if it is assumed that the anchor will be loaded before the concrete has
reached its 28-day strength.
Installation of permanent concrete inserts, such as form ties hangers, or embedded anchor
assemblies, shall permit removal of all metal to at least ½ inch below the concrete surface.
Holes shall be patched in accordance with Section 6-02.3(14). During removal of the outer
unit, the bond between the concrete and the inner unit or rod shall not be broken.
6-02.3(17)I Timber Connections
Timber connections shall be designed in accordance with the methods, stresses, and loads
allowed in the Timber Construction Manual, Third Edition by the American Institute of Timber
Construction (AITC). Timber falsework and formwork connections shall be designed using
wet condition stresses for all installations West of the Cascade Range crest line and by criteria
provided in the following sections. Frictional resistance shall not be considered as contributing
to the stability of any timber connection.
6-02.3(17)I1 Bolted Connections
Tabulated values in the AITC Timber Construction Manual, Current Edition are based on
square posts. For a round post or pile, the main member thickness shall be the side of a square
post having the same cross-sectional area as the round post used.
The AITC Table 6.20 for Douglas Fir-Larch bolt Group 3 and for Hem-Fir bolt Group
8 show design values for bolts to be used when the load is applied either parallel or
perpendicular to the direction of the wood grain. When the load is applied at an angle to the
grain, as is the case with falsework bracing, the design value for the main member shall be
obtained from the Hankinson formula shown in the AITC manual.
Design values in the AITC Table 6.20 apply only to three-member joints (bolt in double-
shear) in which the side members are each ½ the thickness of the main member. This joint
configuration is not typical of bridge falsework where side members are usually much
smaller than main members. For two-member joints (single shear bolt condition), the AITC
Table 6.20 values shall be adjusted by a single shear load factor as follows:
1. 0.75 for installations East of the Cascade Range crest line, except as shown in item
3 below;
2. 0.50 for installations West of the Cascade Range crest line; and
3. 0.50 for load acting at an angle to the bolt axis, as is the case with longitudinal bracing
when falsework bents are skewed.
Except for connections in falsework adjacent to or over railroads or Roadways, threaded
rods and coil rods may be used in place of bolts of the same diameter with no reduction in
the tabulated values. At openings for Roadways and railroads, all connections shall be bolted
using ⅝-inch diameter or larger through bolts.
Bolt holes shall be a minimum 1⁄32 inch to a maximum ⅛ inch larger than the bolt diameter.
A washer not less than a standard cut washer shall be installed between the wood and the bolt
head and between the wood and the nut to distribute the bearing stress under the bolt head and
nut and to avoid crushing the fibers. In lieu of standard cut washers, metal plates or straps with
dimensions at least equal to that of a standard cut washer may be substituted.
When steel bars or shapes are used as diagonal bracing, the tabulated design values shown
in AITC Table 6.20 for the main members loaded parallel to grain (P value) are increased
75 percent for joints made with bolts ½ inch or less in diameter, 25 percent for joints made
with bolts 1½ inch in diameter, and proportionally for intermediate diameters. No increase in
the tabulated values is allowed for perpendicular-to-grain loading (Q value).
Clearance requirements for end, edge, and bolt spacing distance shall be as shown below.
All distances are measured from the end or side of the wood member to the center of the bolt
hole. For members which are subject to load reversals the larger controlling distances shall be
used for design. For parallel-to-grain loading, the minimum distances for full design load:
1. In tension, minimum end distance shall be seven times the bolt diameter;

2. In compression, minimum end distance shall be four times the bolt diameter; and
3. In tension or compression, the minimum edge distance shall be one and one-half times
the bolt diameter.
For perpendicular-to-grain loading, the minimum distance for full design load:
1. Minimum end distance shall be four times the bolt diameter;
2. Edge distance toward which the load is acting shall be at least four times the bolt
diameter; and
3. Distance on the opposite edge shall be at least 1½-bolt diameters.
Minimum clearance (spacing) between adjacent bolts in a row shall be four times the bolt
diameter, measured center-to-center of the bolt holes.
When more than two bolts are used in a line parallel to the axis of the side member,
additional requirements shall be followed as shown in the AITC manual.
6-02.3(17)I2 Lag Screw Connections
Design values for lag screws subject to withdrawal loading are found in AITC Table 6.27.
Values for wood having a specific gravity of 0.51 for Douglas Fir-Larch or 0.42 for Hem‑Fir
shall be assumed when using the table. The withdrawal values are in pounds per inch of
penetration of the threaded part of the lag screw into the side grain of the member holding
the point, with the axis of the screw perpendicular to that member. The maximum load on
a given screw shall not exceed the allowable tensile strength of the screw at the root section.
AITC recommends against subjecting lag screws to end-grain withdrawal loading.
However, if this condition cannot be avoided, the design value shall be 75 percent of the
corresponding value for withdrawal from the side grain.
Values in the Group II wood species column shall be used for Douglas Fir-Larch and the
Group III wood species column shall be used for Hem-Fir. When the load is applied at an
angle to the grain, as is the case with falsework bracing, the design value shall be obtained
from the Hankinson formula shown in the AITC manual.
When lag screws are subjected to a combined lateral and withdrawal loading, as would
be the case with longitudinal bracing when the falsework bents are skewed, the effect of the
lateral and withdrawal forces shall be determined separately. The withdrawal component of
the applied load shall not exceed the allowable value in withdrawal. The lateral component
of the applied load shall not exceed the allowable lateral load value.
Lag screws shall be inserted in lead holes as follows:
1. The clearance hole for the shank shall have the same diameter as the shank, and the
same depth of penetration as the length of unthreaded shank;
2. The lead hole for the threaded portion shall have a diameter equal to 60 to 75 percent
of the shank diameter and a length equal to at least the length of the threaded portion.
The larger percentile figure in each range shall apply to screws of the greater diameters
used in Group II wood species;
3. The threaded portion of the screw shall be inserted in its lead hole by turning with
a wrench, not by driving with a hammer; and
4. To facilitate insertion, soap or other lubricant shall be used on the screws or in the
lead hole.
6-02.3(17)I3 Drift Pin and Drift Bolt Connections
When drift pins or drift bolts are used, the required length and penetration shall be
determined using the following criteria. The lateral load-carrying capacity of drift pins and
drift bolts driven into the side grain of a wood member shall be limited to 75 percent of the
design values for a common bolt of the same diameter and length in the main member. For
drift pin connections, the pin penetration into the connected members shall be increased
to compensate for the absence of a bolt head and nut. For drift bolts or pins driven into the
end grain of a member, the lateral load-carrying capacity shall be limited to 60 percent of

the allowable side grain load (perpendicular to grain value) for an equal diameter bolt with
nut. To develop this allowable load the drift bolt or pin shall penetrate at least 12 diameters
into the end grain. To fully develop the allowable load of the drift bolts or pins, they shall
be driven into predrilled holes, 1⁄16 inch less in diameter than the drift pin or bolt diameter.
The criteria shown in the AITC Timber Construction Manual, Current Edition shall apply
to drift bolt or pin connection allowable loads for the following conditions:
1. Withdrawal resistance; and
2. When there are more than two drift bolts or pins in a joint, allowable loads shall be further
reduced by applying applicable modification factors shown in the AITC Table 6.3.
6-02.3(17)I4 Nailed and Spiked Joints
Joints using nails or spikes shall conform to the provisions of AITC. For side grain
withdrawal, the values in AITC Table 6.35 for wood having a specific gravity of 0.51 for
Douglas Fir-Larch and a specific gravity of 0.42 for Hem-Fir shall be used. End grain
withdrawal shall not be used. For lateral loading, the values in AITC Table 6.36 for wood
species Group II for Douglas Fir-Larch and wood species Group III for Hem-Fir shall be used.
Diameters listed in the tables apply to fasteners before application of any protective coating.
When more than one nail or spike is used in a joint, the total design value for the joint in
withdrawal or lateral resistance shall be the sum of the design values for the individual nails
or spikes.
The tabulated design values for lateral loads are valid only when the nail penetrates
into the main member at least 11 diameters for Douglas Fir-Larch and 13 diameters for
Hem-Fir. Note that the values are maximum values for the type and size of fastener shown.
The tabulated values shall not be increased even if the actual penetration is exceeded.
When main member penetration is less than 11 diameters for Douglas Fir-Larch and
13 diameters for Hem-Fir, the design value shall be determined by straight-line interpolation
between zero and the tabulated load, except that penetration shall not be less than ⅓ of
that specified.
Double-headed or duplex nails used in falsework and formwork construction are shorter
than common wire nails or box nails of the same size designation. They have less penetration
into the main member and therefore their load-carrying capacity shall be adjusted accordingly.
Nail and spike minimum spacing in timber connections shall be as follows:
1. The average center-to-center distance between adjacent nails, measured in any
direction, shall not be less than the required penetration into the main member for
the size of nail being used; and
2. The minimum end distance in the side member, and the minimum edge distance
in both the side member and the main member, shall not be less than ½ of the
required penetration.
Allowable values for withdrawal and lateral load resistance are reduced when toe nails
are used in accordance with the following:
1. For withdrawal loading, the design load shall not exceed ⅔ of the value shown in
the applicable design table; and
2. For lateral loading, the design load shall not exceed 5⁄6 of the value shown in the
applicable design table.
Toe nails are recommended to be driven at an approximate angle of 30 degrees with the
piece and started approximately ⅓ of the length of the nail from the end or side of the piece.
6-02.3(17)I5 Timber Connection Adjustment for Duration of Load
Tabulated values for timber fasteners are for normal duration of load and may be increased
for short duration loading, except for connections used in falsework and formwork for post
tensioned Structures and staged construction sequences. Duration of load adjustment for
timber connections shall not be allowed for all post tensioned Structures and for staged

construction sequences where delayed and/or staged loading occurs for any type of concrete
Structure. The adjustment for duration of load as described in this section applies only
to design values for timber connectors, such as nails, bolts, and lag screws. Allowable
stresses for timber and structural steel components used in the connection, as described in
Section 6-02.3(17)B, are maximums and thus shall not be increased.
Tabulated values for nails, bolts, and lag screws may be adjusted by the following duration-
of-load factors:
1. 1.25 for falsework design governed by the minimum design horizontal load or greater
(3 percent or greater of the dead load),
2. 1.33 for falsework design governed by wind load, and
3. 2.00 for falsework design governed by impact loading.
6-02.3(17)J Face Lumber, Studs, Wales, and Metal Forms
Elements of this section shall be designed for the loads, allowable stresses, deflections,
and conditions which pertain from other Subsections of Section 6-02.3(17).
Forms battered or inclined above the concrete will tend to lift up as concrete is placed
and shall have positive anchorage or counterweights designed to resist uplift and shall be
shown in the formwork plans. Where the concrete pouring sequence causes fresh concrete
to be significantly higher along one side of tied forms than the opposite side, a positive form
anchorage system shall be designed capable of resisting the imbalance of horizontal thrust,
and prevent the dislocation and sliding of the entire form unit.
Wooden forms shall be faced with smooth sanded, exterior plywood. This plywood shall
meet the requirements of the National Bureau of Standards, U.S. Product Standard PS 1, and
the Design Specification of the American Plywood Association (APA). Each full sheet shall
bear the APA stamp. The Contractor shall list in the form plans the grade and class of plywood.
If the Engineer accepts the manufacturer’s certification of structural properties, the Contractor
may use plywood that does not carry the APA stamp. Plywood panels stamped “shop” or “shop
cutting”, shall not be used.
Plyform is an APA plywood specifically designed and manufactured for concrete forming.
Plyform differs from conventional exterior plywood grades in strength and the exterior face
panels are sanded smooth and factory oiled. Likewise, there is a significant difference between
grades designated Class 1, Class 2, and Structural I Plyform.
The grades of plywood for various form applications shall be as follows:
1. Traffic and Pedestrian Barriers (except those that will receive an architectural
surface treatment) – Plywood used for these surfaces shall be APA grade High-Density
Overlaid (HDO) Plyform Class I. But if the Contractor coats the form to prevent it
from leaving joint and grain marks on the surface, plywood that meets or exceeds APA
grades B-B Plyform Class I or B-C (Group I species) may be used. Under this option,
the Contractor shall provide for the Engineer’s acceptance a 4-foot-square, test panel
of concrete formed with the same plywood and coating as proposed in the form plans.
This panel shall include one form joint along its centerline. The Contractor shall apply
coating material, according to the manufacturer’s instructions, before applying chemical
release agents.
2. Other Exposed Surfaces (all but those on traffic and pedestrian barriers) – Plywood
used to form these surfaces shall meet or exceed the requirements of APA grades B-B
Plyform Class I or B-C (Group I series). If one face is less than B quality, the B (or
better) face shall contact the concrete.
3. Unexposed Surfaces (such as the underside of the bridge deck between girders, the
interiors of box girders, etc., and traffic and pedestrian barriers where surfaces will
receive an architectural treatment) – Plywood used to form these surfaces may be APA
grade CDX, provided the Contractor complies with stress and deflection requirements
stated elsewhere in these Specifications.

Form joints on an exposed surface shall be in a horizontal or vertical plane. But in

wingwalls and box girders, side form joints shall be placed at right angles and parallel to the
Roadway grade. Joints parallel to studs or joists shall be backed by a stud or joist. Joints at
right angles to studs and joists shall be backed by a stud or other backing the Engineer accepts.
Perpendicular backing is not required if studs or joists are spaced:
1. Nine inches or less on center and covered with ½-inch plywood, or
2. Twelve inches or less on center and covered with ¾-inch plywood.
The face grain of plywood shall run perpendicular to studs or joists unless shown otherwise
on the Contractor’s formwork Working Drawings. Proposals to deviate from the perpendicular
orientation shall be accompanied by supporting calculations of the stresses and deflections.
Forming for all exposed curved surfaces shall follow the shape of the curve shown in the
Contract Plans and shall not be chorded except as follows. On any retaining wall that follows
a horizontal circular curve, the wall stems may be a series of short chords if:
1. The chords within the panel are the same length, unless otherwise allowed
by the Engineer;
2. The chords do not vary from a true curve by more than ½ inch at any point; and
3. All panel points are on the true curve.
Where architectural treatment is required, the angle point for chords in wall stems shall
fall at vertical rustication joints.
For exposed surfaces of abutments, wingwalls, piers, retaining walls, and columns,
the Contractor shall build forms of plywood at least ¾ inch thick with studs no more than
12 inches on center. The Engineer may allow exceptions, but deflection of the plywood,
studs, or wales shall never exceed 1⁄360 of the span (or 1⁄270 of the span for unexposed surfaces,
including the bottom of the deck slab between girders).
All form plywood shall be at least ½ inch thick except on sharply curved surfaces.
There, the Contractor may use ¼-inch plywood if it is backed firmly with heavier material.
Round columns or rounded pier shafts shall be formed with a self-supporting metal shell
form or form tube that leaves a smooth, nonspiralling surface. Wood forms are not permitted.
Metal forms shall not be used elsewhere unless the Engineer is satisfied with the surface
and allows use in writing. The Engineer may withdraw allowing use of metal forms at any
time. If permitted to use a combination of wood and metal in forms, the Contractor shall coat
the forms so that the texture produced by the wood matches that of the metal. Aluminum shall
not be used for metal forms.
For design purposes, the Contractor shall assume that on vertical surfaces concrete exerts
150 pounds per square foot per foot of depth. However, when the depth is reached where the
rate of placement controls the pressure, the following table applies:

Pressure, Pounds per Square Foot for Temperature of Concrete as Shown

Rate of Placing Feet per Hour 60°F 70°F and Above
2 470 375
3 640 565
4 725 625
5 815 690
6 900 750
7 990 815
8 1,075 875
9 1,165 935
10 1,250 1,000
15 1,670 1,300
The pressures in the above table have been increased to provide an allowance for the
vibration and impact.
All corners shall be beveled ¾ inch. However, footings, footing pedestals, and seals need
not be beveled unless required in the Plans.
All forms shall be as mortar-tight as possible with no water standing in them as the
concrete is placed.
The Contractor shall apply a parting compound on forms for exposed concrete surfaces.
This compound shall be a chemical release agent that permits the forms to separate cleanly
from the concrete. The compound shall not penetrate or stain the surface and shall not
attract dirt or other foreign matter. After the forms are removed, the concrete surface shall
be dust-free and have a uniform appearance. The Contractor shall apply the compound at the
manufacturer’s recommended rate to produce a surface free of dusting action and yet provide
easy removal of the forms.
The Engineer may reject any forms that will not produce a satisfactory surface.
6-02.3(17)K Concrete Forms on Steel Spans
Concrete forms on all steel Structures shall be removable and shall not remain in place.
Where needed, the forms shall have openings for truss or girder members. Each opening shall
be large enough to leave at least 1½ inches between the concrete and steel on all sides of the
steel member after the forms have been removed. Unit Contract prices cover all costs related
to these openings.
The Contractor shall not weld any part of the form to any steel member.
The compression member or bottom connection of cantilever formwork support
brackets shall bear either within 6 inches maximum vertically of the bottom flange or
within 6 inches maximum horizontally of a vertical web stiffener. The Contractor’s bridge
deck form system shall be designed to prevent rotation of the steel girder. This can be
achieved by temporary struts and ties or other methods the Contractor shows to be effective.
Partial depth cantilever formwork support brackets that do not conform to the above
requirements shall not be used unless the Contractor submits Type 2E Working Drawings
consisting of details showing the additional formwork struts and ties used to brace the steel
girder against web distortion caused by the partial depth bracket.
If the Engineer permits bolt holes in the web to support form brackets, the holes shall be
shop drilled unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall fill the holes
with fully torqued ASTM F3125 Grade A325 bolts in accordance with Section 6-03.3(33).
Each bolt head shall be placed on the exterior side of the web. There shall be no holes made in
the flanges.

6-02.3(17)L Finishing Machine Support System

Before using any finishing machine, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing
consisting of detailed drawings that show the system proposed to support it. The Contractor
shall not attach this (or any other) equipment support system to the sides or suspend it from
any girder unless the Engineer permits. The Engineer will not permit such a method if it will
unduly alter stress patterns or create too much stress in the girder.
6-02.3(17)M Restricted Overhead Clearance Sign
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 15 working days before the
anticipated start of each falsework and girder erection operation whenever such falsework or
girders will reduce clearances available to the public traffic. Falsework openings shall not be
more restrictive to traffic than shown in the Contract Plans.
Where the height of vehicular openings through falsework is less than 15 feet, a
W 12-2 “Low Clearance Symbol Sign” shall be erected on the Shoulder in advance of the
falsework and two or more W 12-301 and/or W 12-302 signs shall be attached to the falsework
to provide accurate usable clearance information over the entire falsework opening. The
posted low clearance shall include an allowance for anticipated falsework girder deflection
(rounded-up to the next whole inch) due to design dead load, including all successive concrete
pours. W 12-302 signs shall be used to designate prominent clearance restrictions and limits of
usable clearance. In addition, where the clearance is less than the legal height limit (14 feet),
a W 12-2 sign shall be erected in advance of the nearest intersecting road or wide point in the
road at which a vehicle can detour or turn around. A W 13-501 sign indicating the distance
to the low clearance shall be installed below the advance sign. The Engineer will furnish the
above noted signs and the Contractor shall erect and maintain them, all in accordance with
Section 1-10.3(3).
When erecting falsework that restricts overhead clearance above a railroad track, the
Contractor shall immediately (as soon as the restriction occurs) place restricted overhead
clearance signs. Sign details are shown in the Standard Plans. Unit Contract prices cover
all costs relating to these signs.
6-02.3(17)N Removal of Falsework and Forms
If the Engineer does not specify otherwise, the Contractor may request to remove forms
based on the criteria in the table below. Both compressive strength and minimum time criteria
shall be met if both are listed in the applicable row. The minimum time shall be from the time
of the last concrete placement in the forms. In no case shall the Contractor remove forms or
falsework without the Engineer’s concurrence.
Percent of
Specified Minimum Minimum
Compressive Compressive Minimum
Concrete Placed In Strength1 Strength1 Time
Side forms not supporting the concrete weight, including 3 days
columns, walls, crossbeams, nonsloping box girder webs, or
abutments, and traffic and pedestrian barriers. 1,400 psi 18 hours
Side forms of footings, pile caps, and shaft caps.2 18 hours
Crossbeams, sloping box girder webs, struts, inclined
columns, inclined walls, and other forms that support the 80 5 days
concrete weight.
Bridge decks supported on stringers, beam, or girders.3 80 10 days
Box girders, T-beam girders, and flat-slab Superstructure.3 80 14 days
Arches3 80 21 days
1Strength shall be proved by test cylinders made from the last concrete placed into the form. The cylinders shall be cured according
to FOP for AASHTO T 23.
2Curing compound shall be immediately applied to the sides when forms are removed.
3Where continuous spans or segments are involved, the time for all spans will be determined by the last concrete placed affecting
any span.
Before releasing supports from beneath beams and girders, the Contractor shall remove
forms from columns to enable the Engineer to inspect the column concrete.
Curing shall comply with the requirements of Section 6-02.3(11). The concrete surface
shall not become dry during form removal if removed during the cure period.
Before placing forms for traffic and pedestrian barriers, the Contractor shall completely
release all falsework under spans.
The Engineer may allow leaving in place forms for footings in cofferdams or cribs. This
decision will be based on whether removing them would harm the cofferdam or crib and
whether the forms will show in the finished Structure.
All cells of a box girder Structure which have permanent access shall have all forms
completely removed, including the bridge deck forms. All debris and all projections into the
cells shall be removed. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, the bridge deck interior forms in
all other cells where no permanent access is available, may be left in place.
Falsework and forms supporting sloping exterior webs shall not be released until the
bridge deck and deck overhang concrete has obtained its removal strength and number of
days criteria listed in the table above. Stem reshoring shall not be used.
Open joints shown in the Plans shall have all forms completely removed, including
Styrofoam products and form anchors, allowing the completed Structure to move freely.
If the Contractor intends to support or suspend falsework and formwork from the bridge
Structure while the falsework and formwork is being removed, the Contractor shall submit
a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the falsework and formwork removal plan and
calculations. The falsework and formwork removal plan shall include the following:
1. The location and size of any cast-in-place falsework lowering holes and how the holes
are to be filled;
2. The location, capacity, and size of any attachments, beams, cables, and other hardware
used to attach to the Structure or support the falsework and formwork;
3. The type, capacity and factor of safety, weight, and spacing of points of reaction of
lowering equipment; and
4. The weight at each support point of the falsework and formwork being lowered.
All other forms shall be removed whether above or below the level of the ground or water.
Sections 6-02.3(7) and 6-02.3(8) govern form removal for concrete exposed to sea water or
to alkaline water or soil. The forms inside of hollow piers, girders, abutments, etc., shall be
removed through openings shown in the Plans or as allowed by the Engineer.
6-02.3(17)O Early Concrete Test Cylinder Breaks
The fabrication, curing, and testing of the early cylinders shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor. Early cylinders are defined as all cylinders tested in advance of the design age of
28 days whose purpose is to determine the in-place strength of concrete in a Structure prior
to applying loads or stresses. The Contractor shall retain a testing Laboratory to perform this
Work. Testing Laboratories’ equipment shall be calibrated within 1 year prior to testing and
testers shall be either ACI certified or qualified in accordance with AASHTO R 18.
The concrete cylinders shall be molded in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 23 from
concrete last placed in the forms and representative of the quality of concrete placed
in that pour.
The cylinders shall be cured in the field in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 23
Section 10.2 Field Curing.
The concrete cylinders shall be tested for compressive strength in accordance with
AASHTO T 22. The number of early cylinder breaks shall be in accordance with the
Contractor’s need and as allowed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of all test results, proof
of equipment calibration, and tester’s certification. The Contractor shall not remove forms
without the concurrence of the Engineer.

All costs in connection with furnishing cylinder molds, fabrication, curing, and testing
of early cylinders shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various Bid items
of Work involved.
6-02.3(18) Placing Anchor Bolts
The Contractor shall comply with the following requirements in setting anchor bolts
in piers, abutments, or pedestals:
1. If set in the wet concrete, the bolts shall be accurately placed before the concrete
is placed.
2. If the bolts are set in drilled holes, hole diameter shall exceed bolt diameter
by at least 1 inch. Grouting shall comply with Section 6-02.3(20).
3. If the bolts are set in pipe, grouting shall comply with Section 6-02.3(20).
4. If freezing weather occurs before bolts can be grouted into sleeves or holes, they shall
be filled with an accepted antifreeze solution (non-evaporating).
6-02.3(19) Bridge Bearings
6-02.3(19)A Submittals of Acceptance Test Reports and Certificates
The Contractor shall submit the following production samples and test reports and
certificates for fabricated bridge bearing assemblies as applicable:
1. A Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a six-inch square by 1/8-inch thick sample
of PTFE taken from the lot of production material.
2. A Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a six-inch square by 1-inch thick sample
of pre-formed fabric pad taken from the lot of production material.
3. Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of Manufacturers’ Certificates of Compliance for
the PTFE, polyether urethane, pre-formed fabric pad duck, silicone grease, epoxy gel,
and resin filler.
4. Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of certified mill test reports for all steel and
stainless steel in the bearing assemblies.
5. Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of certified test reports confirming that the pre-
formed fabric pads meet the specific requirements of proof load.
6-02.3(19)B Bridge Bearing Assemblies
For all fixed, sliding, or rolling bearings, the Contractor shall:
1. Machine all sliding and rolling surfaces true, smooth, and parallel to the movement
of the bearing;
2. Polish all sliding surfaces;
3. Anchor expansion bearings securely, setting them true to line and grade;
4. Avoid placing concrete in such a way that it might interfere with the free action
of any sliding or rolling surface.
Grout placement under steel bearings shall comply with Section 6-02.3(20).
6-02.3(20) Grout for Anchor Bolts and Bridge Bearings
Grout shall conform to Section 9-20.3(2) for anchor bolts and for bearing assemblies with
bearing plates. Grout shall conform to Section 9-20.3(3) for elastomeric bearing pads and
fabric pad bearings without bearing plates.
Grout shall be a workable mix with a viscosity that is suitable for the intended application.
The Contractor shall receive concurrence from the Engineer before using the grout.
Field grout cubes shall be made in accordance with WSDOT T 813 for either prepackaged
grout or a Contractor-provided mix when requested by the Engineer, but not less than one per
bridge pier or one per day.

Before placing grout, the concrete on which it is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned,
roughened, and wetted with water to ensure proper bonding. The grout pad shall be cured as
recommended by the manufacturer or kept continuously wet with water for 3 days. The grout
pad may be loaded when a minimum of 4,000 psi compressive strength is attained.
Before placing grout into anchor bolt sleeves or holes, the cavity shall be thoroughly
cleaned and wetted to ensure proper bonding.
To grout bridge bearing masonry plates, the Contractor shall:
1. Build a form approximately 4 inches high with sides 4 inches outside the base of each
masonry plate,
2. Fill each form to the top with grout,
3. Work grout under all parts of each masonry plate,
4. Remove each form after the grout has hardened,
5. Remove the grout outside each masonry plate to the base of the masonry plate,
6. Bevel off the grout neatly to the top of the masonry, and
7. Place no additional load on the masonry plate until the grout has set at least 72 hours.
After all grout under the masonry plate and in the anchor bolt cavities has attained a
minimum strength of 4,000 psi, the anchor bolt nuts shall be tightened to snug tight. “Snug
tight” means either the tightness reached by (1) a few blows from an impact wrench, or (2) the
full effort of a person using a spud wrench. Once the nut is snug tight, the anchor bolt threads
shall be burred just enough to prevent loosening of the nut.
6-02.3(21) Drainage of Box Girder Cells
To drain box girder cells, the Contractor shall provide and install, according to details
in the Plans, short lengths of nonmetallic pipe in the bottom slab at the low point of each
cell. The pipe shall have a minimum inside diameter of 4 inches. If the difference in Plan
elevation is 2 inches or less, the Contractor shall install pipe in each end of the box girder
cell. All drainage holes shall be screened in accordance with the Plan details.
6-02.3(22) Drainage of Substructure
The Contractor shall use weep holes and gravel backfill that complies with
Section 9-03.12(2) to drain fill material behind retaining walls, abutments, tunnels, and
wingwalls. To maintain thorough drainage, weep holes shall be placed as low as possible.
Weep holes shall be covered with geotextile meeting the requirements of Section 9-33.2,
Table 2 Class C before backfilling. Geotextile screening shall be bonded to the concrete
with an accepted adhesive. Gravel backfill shall be placed and compacted as required in
Section 2-09.3(1)E. In addition, if the Plans require, tiling, French or rock drains, or other
drainage devices shall be installed.
If underdrains are not installed behind the wall or abutment, all backfill within 18 inches
of weep holes shall comply with Section 9-03.12(4). Unless the Plans require otherwise,
all other backfill behind the wall or abutment shall be gravel backfill for walls.
6-02.3(23) Opening to Traffic
Bridges with a bridge deck made of portland cement concrete shall remain closed to all
traffic, including construction equipment, until the concrete has reached the 28-day specified
compressive strength. This strength shall be determined with cylinders made of the same
concrete as the bridge deck and cured under the same conditions. A concrete deck bridge shall
never be opened to traffic earlier than 10 days after the deck concrete was placed and never
before the Engineer allows.
For load restrictions on bridges under construction, refer to Section 6-01.6.

6-02.3(24) Reinforcement
Although a bar list is normally included in the Plans, the Contracting Agency does not
guarantee its accuracy and it shall be used at the Contractor’s risk. Reinforcement fabrication
details shall be determined from the information provided in the Plans.
Before delivery of the reinforcing bars, the Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working
Drawings consisting of two informational copies of the supplemental bending diagrams.
6-02.3(24)A Field Bending
Field bending of AASHTO M31 Grade 60 and ASTM A706 Grade 60 reinforcement
shall be done in accordance with the requirements of this section. Field bending of all other
reinforcement shall require a Type 2 Working Drawing showing the bend radii, bending and
heating procedures, and any inspection or testing requirements.
Field bending shall not be done on reinforcement within the top or bottom third of column
lengths or within plastic hinge regions identified in the Plans. Field bending shall not be done
on bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18.
In field-bending steel reinforcing bars, the Contractor shall:
1. Make the bend gradually using a bending tool equipped with a bending diameter
as listed in Table 1. Bending shall not be done by means of hammer blows and
pipe sleeves. When bending to straighten a previously bent bar, move a hickey bar
progressively around the bend.
2. Apply heat as described below for bending bar sizes No. 6 through No. 11 and
for bending bar sizes No. 5 and smaller when the bars have been previously bent.
Previously unbent bars of sizes No. 5 and smaller may be bent without heating when
the bar temperature is 40°F or higher. When previously unbent bars of sizes No. 5 and
smaller have a bar temperature lower than 40°F, they shall be heated to within the range
of 100°F to 150°F prior to bending. In applying heat for field-bending steel reinforcing
bars, the Contractor shall:
a. Avoid damage to the concrete by insulating any concrete within 6 inches of the
heated bar area;
b. Apply two heat tips simultaneously at opposite sides of bar sizes No. 7 or larger;
c. Heat the bar to within the required temperature range shown in Table 2 as verified by
using temperature-indicating crayons or other suitable means;
d. Heat a minimum bar length as shown in Table 3. Locate the heated section of the bar
to include the entire bending length;
e. Bend immediately after the required temperature range has been achieved. Maintain
the bar within the required temperature range during the entire bending process;
f. Do not cool bars artificially with water, forced air, or other means.
3. Limit any bend or straightening to these maximum angles: 135 degrees for bar sizes
No. 8 or smaller, and 90 degrees for bar sizes No. 9 through No. 11.
4. Repair epoxy coating on epoxy coated bars in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)H.
Table 1
Bending Diameters for Field-Bending Reinforcing Bars
Bend Diameter/Bar Diameter Ratio
Bar Size Heat Not Applied Heat Applied
No. 4, No. 5 8 8
No. 6 through No. 9 Not Permitted 8
No. 10, No. 11 Not Permitted 10
The minimum bending diameters for stirrups and ties for No. 4 and No. 5 bars when heat
is not applied shall be specified in Section 9-07.

Table 2
Preheating Temperatures for Field-Bending Reinforcing Bars
Temperature (F)
Bar Size Minimum Maximum
No. 4 1,200 1,250
No. 5, No. 6 1,350 1,400
No. 7 through No. 9 1,400 1,450
No. 10, No. 11 1,450 1,500
Table 3
Minimum Bar Length to be Heated (d = nominal diameter of bar)
Bend Angle
Bar Size 45° 90° 135°
No. 4 through No. 8 8d 12d 15d
No. 9 8d 12d Not Permitted
No. 10, No. 11 9d 14d Not Permitted
6-02.3(24)B Protection of Materials

The Contractor shall protect reinforcing steel from all damage. When placed into the
Structure, the steel shall be free from dirt, loose rust or mill scale, paint, oil, and other
foreign matter.
When transporting, storing, or constructing in close proximity to bodies of salt water, plain
and epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bar shall be kept in enclosures that provide protection from
the elements.
If plain or epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bar is exposed to mist, spray, or fog that may
contain salt, it shall be flushed with fresh water prior to concrete placement.
When the Engineer requires protection for reinforcing steel that will remain exposed for
a length of time, the Contractor shall protect the reinforcing steel:
1. By cleaning and applying a coat of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B over all
exposed surfaces of steel, or
2. By cleaning and painting paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B on the first 6 inches
of the steel bars protruding from the concrete and covering the bars with polyethylene
sleeves.
The paint shall have a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil.
6-02.3(24)C Placing and Fastening
The Contractor shall position reinforcing steel as the Plans require and shall ensure that the
steel does not move as the concrete is placed.
When spacing between bars is 1 foot or more, they shall be tied at all intersections. When
spacing is less than 1 foot, every other intersection shall be tied. If the Plans require bundled
bars, they shall be tied together with wires at least every 6 feet. All epoxy-coated bars in the
top mat of the bridge deck shall be tied at all intersections. Other epoxy-coated bars shall also
be tied at all intersections, but shall be tied at alternate intersections when spacing is less than
1 foot in each direction. Wire used for tying epoxy-coated reinforcing steel shall be plastic
coated. Tack welding is not permitted on reinforcing steel.
Abrupt bends in the steel are permitted only when one steel member bends around another.
Vertical stirrups shall pass around main reinforcement or be firmly attached to it.
For slip-formed concrete, the reinforcing steel bars shall be tied at all intersections
and cross braced to keep the cage from moving during concrete placement. Cross bracing
shall be with additional reinforcing steel. Cross bracing shall be placed both longitudinally
and transversely.
After reinforcing steel bars are placed in a traffic or pedestrian barrier and prior to slip‑form
concrete placement, the Contractor shall check clearances and reinforcing steel bar placement.
This check shall be accomplished by using a template or by operating the slip-form machine
over the entire length of the traffic or pedestrian barrier. All clearance and reinforcing steel
bar placement deficiencies shall be corrected by the Contractor before slip‑form concrete
placement.
Mortar blocks (or other accepted devices) shall be used to maintain the concrete coverage
required by the Plans. The Mortar blocks shall:
1. Have a bearing surface measuring not greater than 2 inches in either dimension, and
2. Have a compressive strength equal to that of the concrete in which they are embedded.
In slabs, each mortar cube shall have either: (1) a grooved top that will hold the reinforcing
bar in place, or (2) an embedded wire that protrudes and is tied to the reinforcing steel. If this
wire is used around epoxy-coated bars, it shall be coated with plastic.
Mortar blocks may be accepted based on a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.
In lieu of mortar blocks, the Contractor may use metal or plastic chair supports to hold
uncoated bars. Any surface of a metal chair support that will not be covered by at least ½ inch
of concrete shall be one of the following:
1. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in keeping with AASHTO M232 Class D;
2. Coated with plastic firmly bonded to the metal. This plastic shall be at least 3⁄32 inch
thick where it touches the form and shall not react chemically with the concrete when
tested in the State Materials Laboratory. The plastic shall not shatter or crack at or
above -5°F and shall not deform enough to expose the metal at or below 200°F; or
3. Stainless steel that meet the requirements of ASTM A493, Type 302. Stainless steel
chair supports are not required to be galvanized or plastic coated.
In lieu of mortar blocks, epoxy-coated reinforcing bars may be supported by one of
the following:
1. Metal chair supports coated entirely with a dielectric material such as epoxy or plastic,
2. Other epoxy-coated reinforcing bars, or
3. Plastic chair supports.
Plastic chair supports shall be lightweight, non-porous, and chemically inert in concrete.
Plastic chair supports shall have rounded seatings, shall not deform under load during normal
temperatures, and shall not shatter or crack under impact loading in cold weather. Plastic
chair supports shall be placed at spacings greater than 1 foot along the bar and shall have at
least 25 percent of their gross place area perforated to compensate for the difference in the
coefficient of thermal expansion between plastic and concrete. The shape and configuration
of plastic supports shall permit complete concrete consolidation in and around the support.
In bridge decks, a “mat” is two adjacent and perpendicular layers of reinforcing steel. Top
and bottom mats shall be supported adequately enough to hold both in their proper positions.
If No. 4 bars make up the lower layer of steel in a mat, it shall be blocked at not more than
3-foot intervals (or 4-foot intervals for bars No. 5 and larger). Wire ties to girder stirrups shall
not be considered as blocking. To provide a rigid mat, the Contractor shall add other supports
and tie wires to the top mat as needed.
If a bar will interfere with a bridge drain, it shall be bent in the field to bypass the drain.
Clearances for main bars shall be at least:
4 inches between: Bars and the surface of any concrete masonry exposed to
the action of salt or alkaline water.
3 inches between: Bars and the surface of any concrete deposited against earth
without intervening forms.
2½ inches between: Adjacent bars in a layer. Bridge deck and bridge approach slab
bars and the top of the slab.

2 inches between: Adjacent layers. Bars and the surface of concrete exposed
to earth. Reinforcing bars and the faces of forms for exposed
aggregate finish. Bars and the surface of concrete when not
specified otherwise in this section or in the Plans.
1½ inches between: Barrier and curb bars and the surface of concrete.
1 inch between: Bridge deck bars and the bottom of the bridge deck. Slab bars
and the top surface of the bottom slab of a cast-in-place concrete
box girder.
Except for top cover in bridge decks and bridge approach slabs, cover to ties and stirrups
may be ½ inch less than the values specified for main bars but shall not be less than 1 inch.
Minimum concrete cover and clearances to headed steel reinforcing bars shall also be provided
to the outermost part of the head of the bar.
Reinforcing steel bars shall not vary more than the following tolerances from their position
shown in the Plans:
Members 10 inches or less in thickness ±¼ in.
Members more than 10 inches in thickness ±⅜ in.
Drilled Shafts top of rebar cage elevation +6 in./-3 in.
Except:
The clearance to the top surface of the bridge decks
and bridge approach slabs +¼ in./-0”
Longitudinal spacing of bends and ends of bars ±1 in.
Length of bar laps -1½ in.
Embedded length
No 3 through No. 11 -1 in.
No. 14 through No. 18 -2 in.
When reinforcing steel bars are to be placed at equal spacing within a plane:
Stirrups and ties ±1 in.
All other reinforcement ±1 bar dia.
Before placing any concrete, the Contractor shall:
1. Clean all mortar from reinforcement, and
2. Obtain the Engineer’s permission to place concrete after the Engineer has inspected
the placement of the reinforcing steel. (Any concrete placed without the Engineer’s
permission shall be rejected and removed.)
6-02.3(24)D Splicing
The Contractor shall supply steel reinforcing bars in the full lengths the Plans require.
Unless the Engineer concurs in writing, the Contractor shall not change the number, type,
or location of splices.
The Engineer may permit the Contractor to use thermal or mechanical splices in place of
the method shown in the Plans if they are of an accepted design. Use of a new design may
be granted if:
1. The Contractor provides technical data and proof from the manufacturer that the
design will perform satisfactorily, and
2. Sample splices and materials from the manufacturer pass the Engineer’s tests.
1. Not lap-splice reinforcing bars Nos. 14 or 18.
2. Not permit any welded or mechanical splice to deviate in alignment more than ¼ inch
per 3½ feet of bar.
3. Distribute splices evenly, grouping them together only at points of low tensile stress.

4. Ensure at least 2 inches clearance between any splice and the nearest bar or the surface
of the concrete (or 1½ inch for the length of the sleeve on mechanical splices).
5. Rigidly clamp or wire all splices in a way accepted by the Engineer.
6. Place lap-spliced bars in contact for the length of the splice and tie them together near
each end.
7. Securely fasten the ends and edges of welded-wire-fabric reinforcement, overlapping
them enough to maintain even strength.
6-02.3(24)E Welding Reinforcing Steel
Welding of steel reinforcing bars shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWS D1.4
Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel, latest edition, except where superseded by the
Special Provisions, Plans, and these Specifications.
Before any welding begins, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing
consisting of the welding procedure for each type of welded splice to be used, including
the weld procedure Specifications and joint details. The weld procedure Specifications shall
be written on a form taken from AWS D1.4 Annex A, or equivalent. Test results of tensile
strength, macroetch, and visual examination shall be included. The form shall be signed
and dated.
Welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.4. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the testing and qualification of welders, and shall submit Type 2 Working
Drawings consisting of welder qualification and retention records. The weld joint and
welding position a welder is qualified in shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4. The welder
qualifications shall remain in effect indefinitely unless, (1) the welder is not engaged in a given
process of welding for which the welder is qualified for a period exceeding 6 months, or (2)
there is some specific reason to question a welder’s ability.
Filler metals used for welding reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with AWS D1.4
Table 5.1. All filler metals shall be low-hydrogen and handled in compliance with low-
hydrogen practices specified in the AWS code.
Short circuiting transfer with gas metal arc welding will not be allowed. Slugging of welds
will not be allowed.
For the purpose of compatibility with AWS D1.4, welded lap splices for spiral or hoop
reinforcing shall be considered Flare-V groove welds, indirect butt joints.
The Contractor is responsible for using a welding sequence that will limit the alignment
distortion of the bars due to the effects of welding. The maximum out-of-line permitted will
be ¼ inch from a 3.5-foot straightedge centered on the weld and in line with the bar.
The ground wire from the welding machine shall be clamped to the bar being welded.
Where epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bars are specified to be spliced by welding, the
epoxy coating shall be left off or removed from the surfaces to be heated, but in no cases
less than six inches of each bar being welded. After the welding is complete, the Contractor
shall apply epoxy patching material to the uncoated portions of the bar in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(24)H.
6-02.3(24)F Mechanical Splices
The Contractor shall form mechanical splices with an Engineer-accepted system using
sleeve filler metal, threaded coupling, or another method that complies with this section.
If necessary to maintain required clearances after the splices are in place, the Contractor
shall adjust, relocate, or add stirrups, ties, and bars.
Before splicing, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with the following information
for each shipment of splice material:
1. The type or series identification (and heat treatment lot number for threaded-sleeve
splices),
2. The grade and size of bars to be spliced,

3. A manufacturer’s catalog with complete data on material and procedures,

4. A written statement from the manufacturer that the material is identical to that used
earlier by the Engineer in testing and accepting the system design, and
5. A written statement from the Contractor that the system and materials will be used
according to the manufacturer’s instructions and all requirements of this section.
All splices shall meet these criteria:
1. Mechanical splices shall develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of
the unspliced bar. The ultimate tensile strength of the mechanical splice shall exceed
that of the unspliced bar.
2. The total slip of the bar within the spliced sleeve of the connector after loading in
tension to 30.0 ksi and relaxing to 3.0 ksi shall not exceed the following measured
displacements between gage points clear of the splice sleeve:
a. 0.01 inches for bar sizes up to No. 14.
b. 0.03 inches for No. 18 bars.
3. The maximum allowable bar size for mechanical laps splices shall be No. 6.
The Engineer will visually inspect the splices and accept all that appear to conform with
the test samples. For sleeve-filler splices, the Engineer will allow voids within the limits on
file in the Working Drawing design submittal. If the Engineer considers any splice defective,
it shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
In preparing sleeve-filler metal splices, the Contractor shall:
1. Clean the bar surfaces by: (a) oxyacetylene torch followed by power wire brushing,
or (b) abrasive blasting;
2. Remove all slag, mill scale, rust, and other foreign matter from all surfaces within and
2 inches beyond the sleeve;
3. Grind down any projection on the bar that would prevent placing the sleeve;
4. Prepare the ends of the bars as the splice manufacturer recommends and as the accepted
procedure requires; and
5. Preheat, just before adding the filler, the entire sleeve and bar ends to 300°F, plus or
minus 50°F. (If a gas torch is used, the flame shall not be directed into the sleeve.)
When a metallic, sleeve-filler splice is used (or any other system requiring special
equipment), both the system and the operator shall qualify in the following way under the
supervision of the State Materials and Fabrication Inspector. The operator shall prepare six
test splices (three vertical, three horizontal) using bars having the same AASHTO Designation
and size (maximum) as those to be used in the Work. Each test sample shall be 42 inches
long, made up of two 21-inch bars joined end-to-end by the splice. The bar alignment shall
not deviate more than ⅛ inch from a straight line over the whole length of the sample. All six
samples must meet the tensile strength and slip criteria specified in this section.
The Contractor shall provide labor, materials, and equipment for making these test samples
at no expense to the Contracting Agency. The Contracting Agency will test the samples at no
cost to the Contractor.
6-02.3(24)G Job Control Tests
As the Work progresses, the Engineer may require the Contractor to provide a sample
splice (thermal or mechanical) to be used in a job control test. The operator shall create this
sample on the job site with the Engineer present using bars of the same size as those being
spliced in the Work. The sample shall comply with all requirements of these Specifications,
and is in addition to all other sample splices required for qualification. The Engineer will
require no more than two samples on any project with fewer than 200 splices and no more
than one sample per 100 splices on any project with more than 200 splices.

6-02.3(24)H Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bar

This Work is furnishing, fabricating, coating, and placing epoxy-coated steel reinforcing
bars as the Plans, these Specifications, and the Special Provisions require. Coating material
shall be applied electrostatically, by spraying, or by the fluidized-bed method.
All epoxy-coated bars shall comply with the requirements of Section 9-07. Fabrication may
occur before or after coating.
The Contractor shall protect epoxy-coated bars from damage using padded or nonmetallic
slings and straps free from dirt or grit. To prevent abrasion from bending or sagging, the
Contractor shall lift bundled bars with a strong-back, multiple supports, or a platform bridge.
Bundled bars shall not be dropped or dragged. During shop or field storage, bars shall rest
on wooden or padded cribbing. The Contractor may substitute other methods for protecting
the bars if the Engineer concurs. If the Engineer believes the coated bars have been badly
damaged, they will be rejected.
Metal chairs and supports shall be coated with epoxy (or another inert coating accepted by
the Engineer). The Contractor may use other support devices with the Engineer’s concurrence.
Plastic coated tie wires (accepted by the Engineer) shall be used to protect the coated bars
from being damaged during placement.
The bars shall be placed as the Plans require and held firmly in place during placing and
setting of the concrete. All bars shall be placed and fastened as specified in Section 6-02.3(24)C.
In the interval between installing coated bars and concreting the deck, the Contractor shall
protect the coating from damage that might result from other construction Work.
The Engineer will inspect the coated bars after they are placed and before the deck
concrete is placed. The Contractor shall patch any areas that show significant damage
(as defined below).
Significant damage means any opening in the coating that exposes the steel in an area
that exceeds:
1. 0.05 square inch (approximately ¼ inch square or ¼ inch in diameter or the equivalent).
2. 0.012 square inches (approximately ⅛ inch square or ⅛ inch in diameter) when the
opening is within ¼ inch of another opening of equal or larger size.
3. 6 inches long, any width.
4. 0.50 square inch aggregate area in any 1 foot length of bar.
The Contractor shall patch significantly damaged areas with a patching material obtained
from the epoxy resin manufacturer and accepted by the Engineer. This material shall be
compatible with the coating and inert in concrete. Areas to be patched shall be clean and free
of surface contaminants. Patching shall be done before oxidation occurs and according to the
resin manufacturer’s instructions.
6-02.3(25) Prestressed Concrete Girders
The Contractor shall perform quality control inspection. The manufacturing plant of
prestressed concrete girders shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute’s
Plant Certification Program for the type of prestressed member to be produced and shall
be approved by WSDOT as a Certified Prestress Concrete Fabricator prior to the start
of production. WSDOT certification will be granted at, and renewed during, the annual
prestressed plant review and approval process in accordance with WSDOT Materials Manual
M 46-01.04 Standard Practice QC 6.
Prior to the start of production of girders, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the
production schedule. The Contractor shall give the Inspector safe and free access to the Work.
If the Inspector observes any nonspecification Work or unacceptable quality control practices,
the Inspector will advise the plant manager. If the corrective action is not acceptable to the
Engineer, the girder(s) will be subject to rejection by the Engineer.
The Contracting Agency intends to perform Quality Assurance Inspection. By its
inspection, the Contracting Agency intends only to facilitate the Work and verify the quality

of that Work. This inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for
identifying and replacing defective material and workmanship.
The various types of prestressed concrete girders are:
Prestressed Concrete I Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete girder with a flanged
I shaped cross section, requiring a cast-in-place concrete deck to support traffic loads.
WSDOT standard girders in this category include Series W42G, W50G, W58G, and W74G.
Prestressed Concrete Wide Flange I Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete girder
with an I shaped cross section with wide top and bottom flanges, requiring a cast-in-place
concrete deck to support traffic loads. WSDOT standard girders in this category include
Series WF36G, WF42G, WF50G, WF58G, WF66G, WF74G, WF83G, WF95G, and WF100G.
Prestressed Concrete Wide Flange Deck Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete wide
flange I girder with extended top flange widths designed to support traffic loads, and designed
to be mechanically connected at the flange edges to adjacent girders at the job site. WSDOT
standard girders in this category include Series WF39DG, WF45DG, WF53DG, WF61DG,
WF69DG, WF77DG, WF86DG, WF98DG, and WF103DG.
Prestressed Concrete Wide Flange Thin Deck Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete
wide flange I girder with extended top flange widths requiring a cast-in-place concrete deck
to support traffic loads. Flange edges extend to flange edges of adjacent girders at the job site.
WSDOT standard girders in this category include Series WF36TDG, WF42TDG, WF50TDG,
WF58TDG, WF66TDG, WF74TDG, WF83TDG, WF95TDG, and WF100TDG.
Prestressed Concrete Deck Bulb Tee Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete girder
with a top flange designed to support traffic loads, and designed to be mechanically connected
at the flange edges to adjacent girders at the job site. WSDOT standard girders in this category
include Series W35DG, W41DG, W53DG, and W65DG.
Prestressed Concrete Slab Girder – Refers to a prestressed concrete slab girder, with or
without voids. Prestressed concrete ribbed section girders and prestressed concrete double tee
girders shall conform to the requirements specified for prestressed concrete slab girders.
Prestressed Concrete Tub Girder – Refers to prestressed concrete tub girders with a U
shaped cross section, requiring a cast-in-place concrete deck to support traffic loads. WSDOT
standard girders in this category include Series U**G* or Series UF**G*, where U specifies
webs without top flanges, UF specifies webs with top flanges, ** specifies the girder height
in inches, and * specifies the bottom flange width in feet.
Spliced Prestressed Concrete Girder – Refers to prestressed concrete girders initially
fabricated in segments which are longitudinally spliced together with cast-in-place concrete
closures and post tensioning. Post tensioning materials and construction shall conform to
Section 6-02.3(26), except that ducts for prestressed concrete wide flange I girders may be
24-gage, semi-rigid, galvanized, corrugated, ferrous metal. WSDOT prestressed concrete
wide flange I girders in this category include Series WF74PTG, WF83PTG, WF95PTG,
and WF100PTG. WSDOT prestressed concrete tub girders in this category include Series
U**PTG* and UF**PTG* where U, UF, **, and * are as defined for prestressed concrete
tub girders.
6-02.3(25)A Shop Drawings
Shop drawings for prestressed concrete girders shall be submitted as Type 2 Working
Drawings. The only deviations to the Plans that will be permitted are those approved by the
annual plant approval process and those listed below:
1. Addition of inserts for construction purposes including falsework.
2. Small penetrations no larger than 1-inch diameter for construction purposes including
overhang bracket supports, deck formwork hangers and temporary girder bracing.
Penetrations in top flanges shall be offset from the edge of the flange the minimum
distance shown in the Plans.
3. Small penetrations no larger than 2-inch in diameter for girder shipping tie-downs.

4. Small adjustments in girder length to account for elastic shortening, creep and shrinkage
5. Strand adjustments, as long as the center of gravity of the strands remains at the
location shown in the plans and concrete cover is not reduced.
6. Diaphragm web hole vertical adjustments to avoid harped strands.
7. Substitution of welded wire reinforcement for conventional reinforcing steel.
Shop drawings shall show the size and location of all inserts and penetrations. Penetrations
for deck formwork and falsework shall match the deck formwork Working Drawings. Field-
drilled holes in prestressed concrete girders are not allowed.
Deformed welded wire reinforcement conforming to Sections 9-07.7 and 9-07.8 may
be substituted for the mild steel reinforcement shown in the plans. The substitution shall be
submitted as a Type 2E Working Drawing. The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specification
requirements (latest edition including interims) shall be satisfied, including at a minimum the
following Articles:
5.8.2.6 Types of Transverse Reinforcement
5.8.2.8 Design and Detailing Requirements
5.10.3 Spacing of Reinforcement
5.10.6.3 Ties
5.10.7 Transverse Reinforcement for Flexural Members
5.10.8 Shrinkage and Temperature Reinforcement
5.10.10 Pretensioned Anchorage Zones
5.11.2.5 Welded Wire Fabric
5.11.2.6.3 Anchorage of Wire Fabric Reinforcement
5.11.6 Splices of Welded Wire Fabric
Yield strengths in excess of 75.0 ksi shall not be used for welded wire reinforcement.
The spacing of vertical welded wire reinforcement within slabs and girder webs shall not
exceed 18 inches or the height of the member minus 3 inches, whichever is less. Longitudinal
wires and welds are permitted in girder flanges but shall be excluded from girder webs. For
vertical welded wire reinforcement in prestressed concrete slab girders, no welded joints other
than those required for anchorage shall be permitted. Epoxy-coated wire and welded wire
reinforcement shall conform to Section 9-07.3 with the exception that ASTM A884 Class A
Type I shall be used instead of ASTM A775.
Shop drawings for spliced prestressed concrete girders shall also conform to Section
6-02.3(26)A. The Working Drawings for spliced prestressed concrete girders shall include
all details related to the post-tensioning operations in the field, including details of hardware
required, tendon geometry, blockout details, and details of additional or modified steel
reinforcing bars required in cast-in-place closures.
6-02.3(25)B Prestressing
Each stressing system shall have a pressure gauge or load cell that will measure jacking
force. The gauge shall display pressure accurately and readably with a dial at least 6 inches
in diameter or with a digital display. Each jack and its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit
and shall be accompanied by a certified calibration chart. The Contractor shall submit a
Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of one copy of this chart. The cylinder extension during
calibration shall be in approximately the position it will occupy at final jacking force.
Jacks and gauges shall be recalibrated and recertified:
1. Annually,
2. After any repair or adjustment, and
3. Anytime there are indications that the jack calibration is in error.

The Engineer may use load cells to check jacks, gauges, and calibration charts before and
during tensioning.
All load cells shall be calibrated and shall have an indicator that shows prestressing force
in the strand. The range of this cell shall be broad enough that the lowest 10 percent of the
manufacturer’s rated capacity will not be used to measure jacking force.
From manufacture to encasement in concrete, prestressing strand shall be protected against
dirt, oil, grease, damage, and all corrosives. Strand shall be stored in a dry, covered area
and shall be kept in the manufacturer’s original packaging until placement in the forms. If
prestressing strand has been damaged or pitted, it will be rejected. Prestressing strand with rust
shall be spot-cleaned with a nonmetallic pad to inspect for any sign of pitting or section loss.
Once the prestressing steel has been installed, no welds or grounds for welders shall be made
on the forms or the steel in the girder, except as specified.
Post-tensioning of spliced prestressed concrete girders shall conform to Section 6-02.3(26)
and the following requirements:
1. Before tensioning, the Contractor shall remove all side forms from the cast-in-place
concrete closures. From this point until 48 hours after grouting the tendons, the
Contractor shall keep all construction and other live loads off the Superstructure and
shall keep the falsework supporting the superstructure in place.
2. The Contractor shall not tension the post-tensioning reinforcement until the concrete
in the cast-in-place closures reaches the minimum compressive strength specified in
the Plans. This strength shall be measured with concrete cylinders made of the same
concrete and cured under the same conditions as the cast-in-place closures.
3. All post-tensioning shall be completed before placing the sidewalks and barriers on the
Superstructure.
6-02.3(25)C Casting
Side forms shall be steel except that cast-in-place concrete closure forms for spliced
prestressed concrete girders, interior forms of prestressed concrete tub girders, and end
bulkhead forms of prestressed concrete girders may be wood. Interior voids for prestressed
concrete slab girders with voids shall be formed by either wax soaked cardboard or expanded
polystyrene forms. The interior void forms shall be secured in the position as shown in the
Working Drawings, and shall remain in place.
All concrete mixes to be used shall be preapproved in the WSDOT plant certification
process. The temperature of the concrete when placed shall be between 50°F and 90°F.
Slump shall not exceed 4 inches for normal concrete nor 7 inches with the use of a
high range water-reducing admixture, nor 9 inches when both a high range water-reducing
admixture is used and the water/cement ratio is less than or equal to 0.35. For self-
consolidating concrete (SCC), the slump requirements specified above do not apply, and are
instead replaced by the target slump flow and slump flow range specified as part of the SCC
mix design.
Air-entrainment is not required in the concrete placed into prestressed concrete girders,
including cast-in-place concrete closures for spliced prestressed concrete girders.
6-02.3(25)C1 Acceptance Testing of Concrete for Prestressed Concrete Girders
Compressive strength cylinders and concrete acceptance testing shall be performed
once per prestressed concrete girder or once per fabrication line of prestressed concrete
girders. Concrete shall not be placed until fresh concrete testing indicates concrete is within
acceptable limits.
Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Contractor and test results shall be submitted
to the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted below, the test methods described in Section
6-02.3(5)D shall be followed. Concrete compressive strength shall be in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(25)E.

Concrete that is not self-consolidating concrete will be accepted as follows:

1. Temperature within the allowable temperature band.
2. Slump below the maximum allowed.
Concrete that is self-consolidating concrete will be accepted as follows:
2. Slump flow within the target slump flow range
3. VSI less than or equal to 1 in accordance with ASTM C1611, Appendix X1, using
Filling Procedure B.
4. J ring passing ability less than or equal to 1.5-inches.
5. Rapid assessment of static segregation resistance of self-consolidating concrete using
penetration test in accordance with ASTM C1712 shall be less than or equal to 15 mm.
6-02.3(25)D Curing
During curing, the Contractor shall keep the girder in a saturated curing atmosphere until
the girder concrete has reached the required release strength. If the Engineer concurs, the
Contractor may shorten curing time by heating the outside of impervious forms. Heat may be
radiant, convection, conducted steam, or hot air. With steam, the arrangement shall envelop the
entire surface with saturated steam. Hot air curing will not be allowed, unless the Contractor
submits Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the proposed method to envelop and maintain
the girder in a saturated atmosphere. Saturated atmosphere means a relative humidity of at
least 90 percent. The Contractor shall never allow dry heat to touch the girder surface at
any point.
Under heat curing methods, the Contractor shall:
1. Keep all unformed girder surfaces in a saturated atmosphere throughout the curing time;
2. Embed a thermocouple (linked with a thermometer accurate to plus or minus 5°F) 6 to
8 inches from the top or bottom of the girder on its centerline and near its midpoint;
3. Monitor with a recording sensor (accurate to plus or minus 5°F) arranged and calibrated
to continuously record, date, and identify concrete temperature throughout the
heating cycle;
4. Make this temperature record available for the Engineer to inspect;
5. Heat concrete to no more than 100°F during the first 2 hours after placing the concrete,
and then increase no more than 25°F per hour to a maximum of 175°F;
6. Cool concrete, after curing is complete, no more than 25°F per hour, to 100°F; and
7. Keep the temperature of the concrete above 60°F until the girder reaches release
strength.
The Contractor may strip side forms from prestressed concrete girders once the concrete
has reached a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi. All damage from stripping is the
Contractor’s responsibility.
Curing of cast-in-place concrete closures for spliced prestressed concrete girders shall
conform to Section 6-02.3(11).
6-02.3(25)E Contractors Control Strength
Concrete strength shall be measured on test cylinders cast from the same concrete as that in
the girder. These cylinders shall be cured under time-temperature relationships and conditions
that simulate those of the girder. If the forms are heated by steam or hot air, test cylinders will
remain in the coolest zone throughout curing. If forms are heated another way, the Contractor
shall provide a record of the curing time-temperature relationship for the cylinders for each
girder to the Engineer. When two or more girders are cast in a continuous line and in a
continuous pour, a single set of test cylinders may represent all girders provided the Contractor
demonstrates uniformity of casting and curing to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

The Contractor shall mold, cure, and test enough of these cylinders to satisfy Specification
requirements for measuring concrete strength. The Contractor may use 4- by 8-inch or 6- by
12-inch cylinders.
Test cylinders may be cured in a moist room or water tank in accordance with FOP
for AASHTO T 23 after the girder concrete has obtained the required release strength. If,
however, the Contractor intends to ship the girder prior to the standard 28-day strength
test, the design strength for shipping shall be determined from cylinders placed with the
girder and cured under the same conditions as the girder. These cylinders may be placed in
a noninsulated, moisture-proof envelope.
To measure concrete strength in the girder, the Contractor shall randomly select two test
cylinders. The average compressive strength of the two cylinders shall be equal or greater than
the specified strength and neither cylinder shall have a compressive strength that is more than
5 percent below the specified strength.
If too few cylinders were molded to carry out all required tests on the girder, the Contractor
shall remove and test cores from the girder under the surveillance of the Engineer. If the
Contractor casts cylinders to represent more than one girder, all girders in that line shall
be cored and tested. Cores shall avoid all prestressing strands, steel reinforcing bars and
interior voids.
For prestressed concrete slab girders, a test shall consist of four cores measuring 3 inches
in diameter by 6 inches in length (for slabs) or by the thickness of the web (for ribbed and
double tee sections). Two cores shall be taken from each side of the girder with one on each
side of the girder span midpoint, at locations accepted by the Engineer. The core locations
for prestressed concrete ribbed and double tee sections shall be immediately beneath the
top flange.
For prestressed concrete tub girders, a test shall consist of four cores measuring
3 inches in diameter by the thickness of the web. Two cores shall be taken from each web
approximately 3 feet to the left and to the right of the center of the girder span.
For all other prestressed concrete girders, a test shall consist of three cores measuring
3 inches in diameter by the thickness of the web and shall be removed from just below the
top flange; one at the midpoint of the girder’s length and the other two approximately 3 feet
to the left and approximately 3 feet to the right.
The cores shall be taken in accordance with AASHTO T 24 and shall be tested in
accordance with AASHTO T 22. The Engineer may accept the girder if the average
compressive strength of the all test cores from the girder are at least 85 percent of the specified
compressive strength with no one core less than 75 percent of specified compressive strength.
If there are more than four cored holes in a girder, the prestressing reinforcement shall
not be released until the holes are patched and the patch material has attained a minimum
compressive strength equal to the required release compressive strength.
All cored holes shall be patched and cured prior to shipment of the girder. The girder
shall not be shipped until tests show the patch material has attained a minimum compressive
strength of 4,000 psi.
If the annual plant approval includes procedures for patching cored holes, the cored holes
shall be patched in accordance with this procedure. Otherwise, the Contractor shall submit a
core hole patching procedure as a Type 2 Working Drawing.
6-02.3(25)F Prestress Release
Side and flange forms that restrain deflection shall be removed before release of the
prestressing reinforcement.
All strands shall be released in a way that will minimize eccentricity of the prestressing
force about the centerline of the girder. This release shall not occur until tests show each girder
has reached the minimum compressive strength required by the Plans.

The Contractor may request permission to release the prestressing reinforcement at a

minimum concrete compressive strength less than specified in the Plans. This request shall
be submitted as a Type 2E Working Drawing analyzing changes in vertical deflection, girder
lateral stability and concrete stresses in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L2.
6-02.3(25)G Protection of Exposed Reinforcement
When a girder is removed from its casting bed, all prestressing reinforcement strands
projecting from the girder shall be cleaned and painted with a minimum dry film thickness
of 1 mil of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B, and all steel reinforcing bars, including
welded wire fabric, projecting from the girder shall be protected in accordance with Section
6-02.3(24)B. During handling and shipping, projecting reinforcement shall be protected
from bending or breaking. Just before placing concrete around the painted projecting bars or
strands, the Contractor shall remove from them all spattered concrete remaining from girder
casting, dirt, oil, and other foreign matter.
6-02.3(25)H Finishing
The Contractor shall apply a Class 1 finish, as defined in Section 6-02.3(14), to:
1. The exterior surfaces of the outside girders; and
2. The bottoms, sides, and tops of the lower flanges on all girders, including the top of the
bottom slab between the tub girder webs.
All other girder surfaces shall receive a Class 2 finish.
The interface on girders that contact a cast-in-place concrete deck shall have a finish of
dense, screeded concrete without a smooth sheen or laitance on the surface. After vibrating
and screeding, and just before the concrete reaches initial set, the Contractor shall texture
the interface. This texture shall be applied with a steel brooming tool that etches the surface
transversely leaving grooves ⅛ to ¼ inch wide, between ⅛ and ¼ inch deep, and spaced ¼ to
½ inch apart.
On prestressed concrete wide flange deck girders, deck bulb tee girders, ribbed section
girders and double tee girders, the Contractor shall test the top surface for flatness and make
corrections in accordance with Section 6-02.3(10)D3 except that the straightedge need not
exceed the width of the girder top flange when checking the transverse direction. The top
surface shall be finished in accordance with Section 6-02.3(10)D6.
The Contractor may repair defects in the girder provided the repair is covered in the annual
plant approval package. Any repairs that are not covered by the annual plant approval process
shall be submitted to the Engineer as Type 2 Working Drawings or shall be submitted through
the email resolution process.
6-02.3(25)I Fabrication Tolerances
The girders shall be fabricated as shown in the processed shop drawings, and shall meet
the dimensional tolerances listed below. Construction tolerances of cast-in-place closures
for spliced prestressed concrete girders shall conform to the tolerances specified for spliced
prestressed concrete girders. Actual acceptance or rejection will depend on how the Engineer
believes a defect outside these tolerances will affect the Structure’s strength or appearance:
1. Length: ± ¼ inch per 25 feet of beam
length, up to a maximum of
± 1½ inches
2. Width:
Flanges and webs: + ⅜ inch, - ¼ inch
Slab girders: ± ¼ inch
3. Girder Depth (overall): ± ¼ inch
4. Flange Depth: ± ¼ inch

5. Strand Position:
Individual strands: ± ¼ inch
Bundled strands: ± ½ inch
Harped strand group center of gravity at the girder ends: ± 1 inch
6. Longitudinal Location of Harp Points for Harped
Strands from Design Locations: ± 20 inches
7. Position of an Interior Void, vertically and horizontally: ± ½ inch
8. Bearing Recess (center of recess to girder end): ± ⅝ inch
9. Girder Ends (deviation from square or designated skew):
Horizontal: ± ⅛ inch per foot of girder
width, up to a maximum of
± ½ inch
Vertical: ± 3/16 inch per foot of girder
depth, up to a maximum of
± 1 inch
10. Bearing Area Deviation from Plane
(in length or width of bearing): ± ⅛ inch.
11. Stirrup Reinforcing Spacing: ± 1 inch.
12. Stirrup Projection from Top of Girder:
Wide flange thin deck and slab girders: ± ¼ inch
All other girders: ± ¾ inch
13. Mild Steel Concrete Cover: - ⅛ inch, + ⅜ inch.
14. Local smoothness of any surface: ± ¼ inch. in 10 feet
15. Differential Camber between Girders in a Span (measured in place at the job site):
For wide flange deck and deck bulb tee Cambers shall be equalized when the
girders with a cast-in-place reinforced differences in cambers between adjacent
concrete deck: girders exceeds ± ¾ inch
For wide flange deck, deck bulb tee Cambers shall be equalized when the
and slab girders without a cast-in-place differences in cambers between adjacent
reinforced deck: girders exceeds ± ¼ inch
16. Position of Inserts for Structural Connections: ± 1 inch.
17. Position of Lifting Embedments: ± 3 inches longitudinal, ± ¼ inch transverse.
18. Weld Ties: ± ½ inch longitudinal, ± ⅛ inch vertical.
19. Position of post tensioning ducts in spliced prestressed concrete girders: ± ¼ inch.
20. Deviation from a smooth curve for post-tensioning ducts at closures based on the sum
total of duct placement and alignment tolerances: ± ⅜ inch.
6-02.3(25)J Horizontal Alignment
The Contractor shall check and record the horizontal alignment (sweep) of each girder at
the following times:
1. Initial – Upon removal of the girder from the casting bed
2. Shipment – Within 14 days prior to shipment; and
3. Erection – After girder erection and cutting temporary top strands but prior to any
equalization, welding ties or placement of diaphragms.
Horizontal alignment of the top and bottom flanges shall be checked and recorded.
Alternatively, the Contractor may check and record the horizontal alignment of the web near
mid-height of the girder. Each check shall be made by measuring the maximum offset at
mid-span relative to a chord that starts and stops at the girder ends. The Contractor shall check
and record the alignment at a time when the girder is not influenced by temporary differences
in surface temperature. Records for the initial check (item 1 above) shall be included in the

Contractor’s prestressed concrete certificate of compliance. Records for all other checks shall
be submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing.
For each check (items 1 to 3 above), the alignment shall not be offset more than ⅛ inch for
each 10 feet of girder length. Girders not meeting this tolerance for the shipment check (item
2 above) shall require an analysis of girder lateral stability and stresses in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(25)L1. The Contractor shall perform this analysis and submit it as a Type 2E
Working Drawing prior to shipment of the girder. Any girder that exceeds an offset of ⅛ inch
for each 10 feet of girder length for the erection check (item 3 above) shall be corrected at the
job site to the ⅛ inch maximum offset per 10 feet of girder length before concrete is placed
into the diaphragms. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing for any required
corrective action.
The maximum distance between the side of a prestressed concrete slab girder, or the edge
of the top flange of a wide flange deck, wide flange thin deck or deck bulb tee girder, and a
chord that extends the full length of the girder shall be ± ½ inch after erection (item 3 above).
6-02.3(25)K Vertical Deflection
The Contractor shall check and record the vertical deflection (camber) of each girder at the
following times:
1. Initial – Upon removal of the girder from the casting bed;
2. Shipment – Within 14 days prior to shipment;
3. Erection – After girder erection and cutting temporary top strands but prior to any
equalization, welding ties or placement of diaphragms.
At a minimum, survey data shall be taken at each girder end and at midspan. The
Contractor shall perform and record each check at a time when the alignment of the girder
is not influenced by temporary differences in surface temperature. Records for the initial
check (Item 1 above) shall be included in the Contractor’s Prestressed Concrete Certificate of
Compliance. Records for all other checks shall be submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing.
Girders with vertical deflections not meeting the limit shown in the Plans for the shipment
check (item 2 above) shall require an analysis of girder lateral stability and stresses in
accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L1. The Contractor shall perform this analysis and submit
it as a Type 2E Working Drawing prior to shipment.
The “D” dimensions shown in the Plans are computed upper and lower bounds of girder
vertical deflections at midspan based on a time lapse of 40 and 120 days after release of the
prestressing strands. Any temporary top strands are assumed to be cut 30 days prior to these
elapsed times (10 and 90 days after release of the prestressing strands). Any diaphragms
are assumed to be placed. The “D” dimensions are intended to advise the Contractor of the
expected range of girder vertical deflection at the time of deck placement. A positive (+) “D”
dimension indicates upward deflection.
If the girder vertical deflection measured for the erection check (item 3 above) is not
between the lower “D” dimension bound shown in the Plans and the upper “D” dimension
bound shown in the Plans plus ¾ inches, the Engineer may require corrective action. The
Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing for any required corrective action.
6-02.3(25)L Handling and Storage
During handling and storage, each prestressed concrete girder shall always be kept plumb
and upright. It shall be lifted only by the lifting embedments (strand lift loops or high-strength
threaded steel bars) at either end.
For strand lift loops, only ½-inch diameter or 0.6-inch diameter strand conforming to
Section 9-07.10 shall be used, and a minimum 2-inch diameter straight pin of a shackle shall
be used through the loops. Multiple loops shall be held level in the girder during casting in
a manner that allows each loop to carry its share of the load during lifting. The minimum
distance from the end of the girder to the centroid of the strand lift loops shall be 3 feet. The
loops for all prestressed concrete girders, with the exception of prestressed concrete slab

girders, shall project a minimum of 1′-6″ from the top of the girder. The loops for prestressed
concrete slab girders shall project a minimum of 4 inches. Loops shall extend to within
3 inches clear of the bottom of the girder, terminating with a 9-inch long 90-degree hook.
Loads on individual loops shall be limited to 12 kips, and all girders shall be picked up at a
minimum angle of 60 degrees from the top of the girder.
For high-strength threaded steel bars, a minimum of two 1⅜-inch diameter bars
conforming to Section 9-07.11 shall be used at each end of the girder. The lifting hardware
that connects to the bars shall be designed, detailed, and furnished by the Contractor. The
minimum distance from the end of the girder to the centroid of the lifting bars shall be 3 feet.
Lifting bars shall extend to within 3 inches clear of the bottom of the girder and shall be
anchored in the bottom flange with steel plates and nuts. The minimum size of embedded
plates for lifting bars shall be ½ inch thick by 3 inches square. Lifting forces on the lifting bars
shall not exceed 58 kips on an individual bar, and shall be within 10 degrees of perpendicular
to the top of the girder.
For some girders, straight temporary top flange strands may be specified in the Plans.
The lifting locations and concrete release strengths shown in the girder schedule in the Plans
assume that these temporary strands are pretensioned. Alternatively, these temporary strands
may be post-tensioned provided the strands are stressed on the same day that the permanent
prestress is released into the girder and the strands are tensioned prior to lifting the girder.
These temporary strands shall be of the same diameter and shall be tensioned to the same force
as the permanent strands. The inside diameter of the debonding sleeves shall be large enough
such that the temporary strands fully retract upon cutting. When temporary top strands are
specified for spliced prestressed concrete girders, the temporary top strands shall be post-
tensioned prior to lifting the assembled girder. When the post-tensioned alternative is used,
the Contractor shall be responsible for properly sizing the anchorage plates, and configuring
the reinforcement adjacent to the anchorage plates, to prevent bursting or splitting of the
concrete in the top flange. Temporary strands shall be cut or released in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(25)N.
If girders are to be stored, the Contractor shall place them on a stable foundation that will
keep them in a vertical position. Stored girders shall be supported at the bearing recesses or,
if there are no recesses, approximately 2 to 3 feet from the girder ends. After post-tensioning,
spliced prestressed concrete girders shall be supported at points between 2 and 5 feet from
the girder ends, unless otherwise shown in the Plans. For long-term storage of girders with
initial horizontal curvature, the Contractor may wedge one side of the bottom flange, tilting the
girders to control curvature. If the Contractor elects to set girders out of plumb during storage,
the Contractor shall have the proposed method analyzed by the Contractor’s engineer to ensure
against damaging the girder.
6-02.3(25)L1 Girder Lateral Stability and Stresses
The Contractor shall be responsible for safely lifting, storing, shipping and erecting
prestressed concrete girders.
The Contract documents may provide shipping and handling details for girders including
lifting embedment locations (L), shipping support locations (L1 and L2), minimum shipping
support rotational spring constants (Kθ), minimum shipping support center-to-center wheel
spacings (Wcc), vertical deflections and number of temporary top strands. These shipping and
handling details have been determined in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L2.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing analyzing girder lateral stability
and concrete stresses during lifting, storage, shipping and erection in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(25)L2 in the following cases:
1. Any of the analysis assumptions listed in Section 6-02.3(25)L2 are invalid.
Determination of validity shall be made by the Contractor, except that analysis
assumptions shall be considered invalid if the actual values are outside of the
provided tolerances.

2. The Contractor intends to alter the shipping and handling details provided in the
Contract documents.
3. The Contract documents do not provide shipping and handling details.
6-02.3(25)L2 Lateral Stability and Stress Analysis
Analysis for girder lateral stability and concrete stresses during lifting, storage, shipping
and erection shall be in accordance with the PCI Recommended Practice for Lateral Stability
of Precast, Prestressed Concrete Bridge Girders, First Edition, Publication CB-02-16-E
and the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications edition identified in the Contract
documents. The following design criteria shall be met:
1. Factor of Safety against cracking shall be at least 1.0
2. Factor of Safety against failure shall be at least 1.5
3. Factor of Safety against rollover shall be at least 1.5
4. Allowable concrete stresses shall be as specified in Section 6-02.3(25)L3
The analysis shall address any effects on girder vertical deflection (camber), “A”
dimensions at centerline of bearings and deck screed cambers (C).
Shipping and handling details provided in the Contract documents have been determined
using the following analysis assumptions:
1. Girder dimensions, strand locations and lifting embedment locations are within the
tolerances specified in Section 6-02.3(25)I
2. Girder horizontal alignment (sweep) is within the tolerance specified in
Section 6-02.3(25)J
3. Girder vertical deflection (camber) at midspan is less than or equal to the value shown
in the Plans for shipping
4. Minimum concrete compressive strength at release (f’ci) has been reached before initial
lifting from casting bed. Minimum concrete compressive strength at 28 days (f’c) has
been reached before shipping.
5. Height of girder bottom above roadway at shipping supports is less than or equal to
72 inches
6. Height of shipping support roll center above roadway is 24 inches, ± 2 inches
7. Shipping support longitudinal placement (L1 and L2) tolerance is ± 6 inches
8. Shipping support lateral placement tolerance is ±1 inches
9. Shipping supports provide the minimum shipping support rotational spring constant
(Kθ) and minimum shipping support center-to-center wheel spacings (Wcc) shown
in the Plans
10. For shipping at highway speeds a ±20 percent dynamic load allowance (impact) is
included with a typical roadway superelevation of 2 percent
11. For turning at slow speeds, no dynamic load allowance (impact) is included with a
maximum roadway superelevation of 6 percent
12. Wind, centrifugal and seismic forces are not considered
6-02.3(25)L3 Allowable Stresses
Prestressed concrete girder stresses shall be limited to the following values at all stages of
construction and in service:

Temporary
Transfer
Casting and Tensile
Bed
Prestressed concrete girderIn stresses shall bebonded
limited totoresist
the following values at′′all
Compressive reinforcement sufficient thein 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
sufficient to resist the tensile force ′≤ 0.2
All areas
locationswithout 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ≤
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 0.2
Stress
Lifting
stages atfrom
Condition
of Stress
construction and in tensile
service:
In
the areas
concrete without
with
force Location
bonded
in thebonded reinforcement
concrete Allowable Stress (ksi)
Concrete Structures
Temporary
TransferBed and Compressive reinforcement
In
All areas
locationswithout sufficient
bonded to resist the 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′
′ ′ 0.2
′
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ≤ 6-02
Casting Tensile reinforcement
sufficient to sufficient
resist the to resist
tensile force thein 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ≤ 0.2
Condition
Stress
Lifting atfrom Stress tensile force
reinforcement
In areas without in the
Location concrete
sufficient
bonded to resist the Allowable Stress
0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
≤ (ksi)
0.2
tensile
In
the areas
concrete without
force
with in the
bondedbonded
concrete
reinforcement 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Temporary
Transfer
Casting Bed
Condition and Compressive
Stress
Tensile tensile
All
sufficient force
locations
reinforcement inLocation
to resistthethe concrete
sufficient to resist
tensile resist
force 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
thein 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Allowable ′′′ ′
Stress ≤ ′ (ksi)
0.2
reinforcement
In areas with
without sufficient
bondedbonded to
reinforcement the 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≤ 0.2
Stress atfrom Tensile
Lifting
Temporary tensile
In areas force
with in the
bonded concrete
reinforcement
Temporary In tensile
areas
the
sufficient force
without
concrete
reinforcement in
bonded
to resistthe concrete
reinforcement
thereinforcement
sufficient tensile sufficient
force
to resist thein 0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
′ ′ ′
Transfer
Casting
Stress
Temporary
Temporary Stress Compressive In
and Tensile
atBed All areas
locations
sufficient
toareas
with bonded
totensile
resist without
the resist the
force tensile force in 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
in the concrete
′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≤
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ 0.2
Stress
Lifting atfrom Tensile
In
the
In concrete
tensile
sufficient
areas force to
with in the
resist
bondedbonded
concrete
the tensile
reinforcementforce in 0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Shipping
at Transfer
Stressandat and the
In concrete
areas with bonded reinforcement
and Tensile
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Temporary
Transfer Tensile reinforcement
In areas with bonded sufficient
reinforcement to resist the 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
sufficient 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ ≤ ′′ 0.2
Casting
Lifting from Bed
Erection
Shipping
Stress at and Compressive the All
In
locations
concrete
sufficient
sufficient
areas
to resist
tensile
to
to
with
without
the
force
resist
resist
bonded
tensile
in the
the tensile
the
bonded tensile force
reinforcementforce in
force in the concrete
concrete in 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Lifting from Tensile
Temporary
Casting Bed the concrete 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Erection
Transfer
Shipping and
andCompressive the concrete
sufficient
reinforcement to when
to resist shipping
the
sufficient tensile atforce
to resist6%thein 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′
Casting
Stress atBed Compressive All sufficient
In areas
locationswith resist
bonded
All the
locations tensile
reinforcementforce 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
in 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≤ ′ 0.2
Lifting from Tensile
Temporary
Erection superelevation,
In
the areas
tensile
the without
with
force
concrete
sufficient to bonded
when
in the
resist bonded
without
concrete
the impact
reinforcement
shipping
tensile at 6%
force in
0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Shipping and
CastingatBed Compressive InIn
Stress areas without
areas
reinforcement
sufficient
superelevation,
All
the locations
concrete
with bonded
bonded
totensile
resist
when
reinforcement
sufficient
the
without reinforcement
to resist
tensile
shippingimpact
sufficient
6%thein
force
atforce 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
in 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
′′
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≤ 0.2
Erection
Temporary
Shipping and Tensile to resist
sufficient theto
withoutresist force in the concrete
the
bonded tensile
tensile
In
the areas force
concrete
superelevation,with in the
bonded concrete
without reinforcement
impact 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Stress at
Erection Compressive All
areas
the
All locations
Compressive Inreinforcement with bonded
concrete
locations when reinforcement
shipping sufficient
atforce
6%thein 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
to 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Temporary Stressand Compressive sufficient sufficient
to resist the to resist
tensile 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ ′
0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ≤ 0.2
Temporary
Shipping Tensile
Tensile All
In resist the
locations
areas
superelevation,
tensile
In areas force
withtensilewithout
without in force in the concrete
the
bondedbonded
concreteimpact
reinforcement 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
at Shipping the concrete when shipping at 6%
Stress at
Erection reinforcement
In areas
sufficient withto bonded sufficient
resist reinforcement
the tensileto resist thein 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
sufficient
force ′
0.0 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐≤
Compressive All locations ′ ′ 0.2
and Erection Tensile superelevation,
Precompressed without
tensile impact
zone 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Temporary
Shipping and toIn areas
resist
tensile
In the without
tensile
force
concrete
areas with in the
bonded
bonded
force in the
concrete concrete when
reinforcement 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′
Compressive
Tensile the
All locations
Precompressed
reinforcement when shipping
tensile
sufficient zoneto at 6%
resist the 0.0
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′′ ≤ 0.2
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Stress at
Erection shipping
sufficient at 6% superelevation,
to resist the without
tensile impact
force in 0.0948𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 ′
Final Tensile superelevation,
Effective prestress without
and impact
permanent 0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Temporary
Shipping andCompressive
Tensile
Compressive tensile
In areas force
Precompressed
All locationswithwhenin the
bonded
All concrete
tensile
locations reinforcement
zone at 6% 0.0 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Stresses
Final at the
loads concrete
Effective prestress shipping
and permanent
Stress at
Erection sufficient to resist the tensile ′ ′
Service Tensile
Tensile superelevation,
Precompressed
Precompressed without
tensile zone
tensile zoneforce in
impact 0.19𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.0 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Final Load
Stresses
Temporary
Shipping atand Compressive In areas
loads
Compressive Effective
All
the locations
concrete
InEffective
areas
with
with
bonded
prestress
bonded
when and reinforcement
permanent
reinforcement
shipping atloads
6% 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
FinalService
Stresses
Stress atLoad Compressive
Tensile Effective
sufficient
Precompressed prestress,
prestress
to resist and permanent
the
tensile permanent
tensile
zone force loadsin
force 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.0 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Stresses
Erection
Final
Temporary at Tensile loads
sufficient
superelevation, to resist the
without tensile
impact in 0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
at Service Load andCompressive
Shipping Effective
and
the transient
Effective
concrete
Effective prestress
(live)
prestress,
prestress, and
loads permanent
permanent
permanent loadsloads
and 0.24𝜆𝜆𝜆𝜆�𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ ′
Service
Stresses
Stress atLoad
at Compressive In
All
the areas
locations
concrete with bonded
when reinforcement
shipping at 6% 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Final
Erection Tensile loads
and transient
Precompressed
Effective (live)
transient
prestress
prestress, tensileloads
(live)
and loads
zone
permanent
permanent loadsin 0.0
Service
ShippingLoad
Final and Compressive sufficient
superelevation,
Fatigue to resist
I Load the
without
Combination tensile
impact force
plus 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′ ′
Stresses at Compressive In
FinalStresses loads
All
and areas
Fatigue
the I with
locations
transient
concrete
Effective Load bonded
(live)
Combination
when
prestress,
reinforcement
loads
shippingplus one-half
permanent at 6%
loads
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Stresses
Erection
Final
Service
at Fatigue
at Compressive
Compressive
LoadLoad Compressive
Tensile one-half
Fatigue
Effective
Precompressed effective
effectiveIprestress
sufficient Load
to resist
prestress prestress
Combination
the
and
tensile
and tensile and
permanent
zone
permanent plus
force
loads in
0.0 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Fatigue Load superelevation,
and transient
permanent without
(live)
loads loads impact 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′′ 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Stresses
Final at Compressive
Compressive Fatigue one-half
Effective
the concrete
loads
All effective
prestress,
I Load
locations when prestress
permanent
shipping
Combination and loads
atplus
6% 0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Fatigue
Final
Variables
Service
Stresses are
Load
at Tensile
asare
defined in the in
Compressive Precompressed
permanent
AASHTO
and transient
Effective
superelevation,
one-half loads
LRFD tensile
(live)
prestress
effective Bridge
withoutloads
and zone
prestress Design
permanent
impact and Specifications. 0.0 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′
FinalVariables as defined the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
at Compressive Fatigue I Load Combination plus 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Stresses Load
Fatigue Effective
All locations
loads
permanent prestress,
loadsLRFD permanent loads 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′′
Variables
6-02.3(25)M Shipping
Stresses at are as
Tensile
Final Load Compressive defined
Compressive in the
one-half
EffectiveAASHTO
Precompressed
Fatigue effective
prestress
I Load prestress
and
tensile
Combination Bridge
zone and
permanent Design
plus Specifications.
0.0 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
Service and transient (live) loads 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
Fatigue
After Load
the girder
Variables
Stresses at are Compressive
has reached
as defined its
in
Compressive one-halfpermanent
All
the
loads locations
28-day design
AASHTO
Effectiveeffective loads strength,
LRFD
prestress,prestress the
Bridge
permanent girder
Design
andloads and a 0.65𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
completed
Specifications. ′
0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′
Certification
Service
Final of
Load Tensile
Compliance,
Compressive signed Precompressed
by a Precast/Prestressed
Fatigue
Effective I Load
prestress tensile
Combination
and zone Concrete
permanentplus 0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.0
Institute Certified 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Fatigue
Variables are and
thetransient
as defined inpermanent AASHTO (live)
loads LRFD loads Bridge Design Specifications.
0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′ If the
Technician
Stressesor aatProfessional
Compressive Engineer,
loadsshalleffective
Effective
one-half be submitted
prestress, to the
permanent
prestress andEngineer
loads for inspection.
0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′
EngineerFinalVariables
findsLoad
Service
Final
Fatigue
Tensile
are as defined
the certification
Compressive and Precompressed
inEffective
thetransient
the
and
Fatigue AASHTO
girder
permanent prestress
I Load
tensile
LRFD
to(live)
loads and
beCombination zone
acceptable,
loads Bridge
permanenttheDesign
plus Engineer will0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
0.0 𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐 the
Specifications.
stamp
Stresses at for 0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′
girderStresses
“Approved at Compressive loads effective
Shipment”. one-half
Effective prestress,prestress
permanent and loads 0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
FinalVariables are as defined Effective
inFatigue
thetransient
AASHTO prestress LRFD and Bridge
permanent Design 0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′′
Service
NoFinal
Fatigue
Stresses
Load
prestressed
Load
at
Compressive
concrete and
slab girder shall
permanent I Load
be Combination
(live)
shipped
loads loads
for at leastplus 3 daysSpecifications.
after concrete
0.45𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
Stresses atprestressed
Compressive loads
Effective
one-half prestress,
effective permanent
prestress loads
andtee 0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′
placement.
Service No Load concrete
Compressive wide flange deck, deck bulb or tub girder shall𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐′be
shipped FinalVariables
Fatigue
for atLoad are as defined in
least 7 days after concrete the
and AASHTO
transient
Fatigueplacement,
permanent I Load LRFD
(live) loads
loadsCombination Bridge
thatplusDesign Specifications.
Effective prestress,except permanent they
loads may be shipped 3 days
′
Stresses at
after concrete Compressive
placement when L/(bd)one-half
is less effective
than or prestress
equal to andwhere L equals0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
5.0, 0.60𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
the shipping
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
FinalVariables are as defined in and
the
Fatiguetransient
AASHTO
I Load (live)
LRFD loads
Combination Bridge Design
plus Specifications.
lengthFatigue Load b equals the girder
of the girder, permanent
top flange loadswidth (for prestressed concrete wide flange
′
deck andStresses
deckatbulbCompressive
tee girders) or one-half
the bottom effective
flange prestress
width (forand prestressed concrete 0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓
tub𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
FinalVariables
Fatigue Load Fatigue
are as defined inpermanent
the AASHTO I Load
loads Combination
LRFD Bridgeplus Design Specifications.
girders), and datequals
Stresses the girder depth,
Compressive one-halfall ineffective
feet. Noprestress
other girder and shall be shipped for at
0.40𝑓𝑓𝑓𝑓 ′ least
𝑐𝑐𝑐𝑐
10 days after
Fatigue concrete
Variables
Loadare as placement.
defined inpermanent
the AASHTO loadsLRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
Girder support locations during shipping shall be no closer than the girder depth to the ends
of the girderVariables
at the are as defined
girder in the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications.
centerline.
Girder lateral stability and stresses during shipping shall be in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(25)L1.
If the Contractor elects to assemble spliced prestressed concrete girders into shipping
configurations not shown in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2E
Working Drawing analyzing girder lateral stability and concrete stresses in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(25)L2 before shipping.
6-02.3(25)N Prestressed Concrete Girder Erection
Before erecting any prestressed concrete girders, the Contractor shall submit an
erection plan as a Type 2E Working Drawing. The erection plan shall conform Section
6-02.3(25)L1. The erection plan shall provide complete details of the erection process
including at a minimum:

1. Temporary falsework support, bracing, guys, deadmen, and attachments to other

Structure components or objects;
2. Procedure and sequence of operation;
3. Girder stresses during progressive stages of erection;
4. Girder weights, lift points, lifting embedments and devices, spreaders, and angle of
lifting cables in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)L, etc.;
5. Crane(s) make and model, mass, geometry, lift capacity, outrigger size, and reactions;
6. Girder launcher or trolley details and capacity (if intended for use); and
7. Locations of cranes, barges, trucks delivering girders, and the location of cranes and
outriggers relative to other Structures, including retaining walls and wing walls.
The erection plan shall include drawings, notes, catalog cuts, and calculations clearly
showing the above listed details, assumptions, and dimensions. Material properties and
Specifications, structural analysis, and any other data used shall also be included.
The concrete in piers and crossbeams shall reach at least 80 percent of design strength
before girders are placed on them.
The Contractor shall hoist girders only by the lifting embedments at the ends, always
keeping the girders plumb and upright. When the girders are to receive a cast-in-place concrete
deck, lifting embedments shall be removed after erection to provide a minimum 2½-inch
clearance to the top of the deck. When the girders are not to receive a cast-in-place concrete
deck, lifting embedments shall be removed 1-inch below the girder surface and grouted with
an epoxy grout conforming to Section 9-26.3(1)A.
The girders shall be braced in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(17)F4 and 6-02.3(17)F5.
When temporary strands in the top flange are used, they shall be cut after the girders
are braced and before girder deflections are equalized and the intermediate diaphragms
are cast.
Instead of the oak block wedges shown in the Plans, the Contractor may use Douglas fir
blocks if the grain is vertical. The height of oak block wedges at the girder centerline shall not
exceed the width.
The Contractor shall fill all block-out holes with a mortar or grout acceptable to
the Engineer.
Stop plates and dowel bars for prestressed concrete girders shall be set with either
epoxy grout conforming to Section 9-26.3 or type IV epoxy bonding agent conforming to
Section 9-26.1.
6-02.3(25)O Girder to Girder Connections
When differential camber between adjacent girders in a span exceeds the tolerance in
Section 6-02.3(25)I, the Contractor shall submit a method of equalizing deflections as a Type 1
Working Drawing. Any temporary strands in the top flange shall be cut in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(25)N prior to equalizing girder deflections.
Prestressed concrete girders shall be constructed in the following sequence:
1. If required, deflections shall be equalized in accordance with the Contractor’s
equalization plan.
2. Any intermediate diaphragms shall be placed and any weld ties shall be welded in
accordance with Section 6-03.3(25). Welding ground shall be attached directly to the
steel plates being welded when welding the weld-ties.
3. Any keyways between adjacent girders shown in the Plans to receive grout shall be
filled flush with the surrounding surfaces using a grout conforming to Section 9-20.3(2).
4. Equalization equipment shall not be removed and other construction equipment shall
not be placed on the structure until intermediate diaphragms and keyway grout have
attained a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi.

6-02.3(26) Cast-In-Place Prestressed Concrete

Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, concrete for cast-in-place prestressed bridge members
shall be Class 4000D in the bridge deck, and Class 4000 at all other locations. Air entrainment
shall conform to Sections 6-02.3(2)A and 6-02.3(3).
The Contractor shall construct supporting falsework in a way that leaves the Superstructure
free to contract and lift off the falsework during post-tensioning. Forms that will remain
inside box girders to support the bridge deck shall, by design, resist girder contraction as little
as possible.
Before tensioning, the Contractor shall remove all side forms from girders. From this point
until 48 hours after grouting the tendons, the Contractor shall keep all construction and other
live loads off the Superstructure and shall keep the falsework supporting the Superstructure
in place.
Once the prestressing steel is installed, no welds or welding grounds shall be attached to
metal forms, structural steel, or reinforcing bars of the structural member.
The Contractor shall not stress the strands until all concrete has reached a compressive
strength of at least 4,000 psi (or the strength shown in the Plans). This strength shall be
measured on concrete test cylinders made of the same concrete cured under the same
conditions as the cast-in-place unit.
All post-tensioning shall be completed before sidewalks and barriers are placed.
Before casting the structural elements, the Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working
Drawings of the prestressing system shop drawings.
These shop drawings shall show complete details of the methods, materials, and equipment
the Contractor proposes to use in prestressing Work. The shop drawings shall follow the
design conditions shown in the Plans unless the Engineer permits equally effective variations.
In addition, the shop drawings shall show:
1. The method and sequence of stressing.
2. Technical data on tendons and steel reinforcement, anchorage devices, anchorage device
efficiency and acceptance test results and records, anchoring stresses, types of tendon
conduit, and all other data on prestressing operations.
3. Stress and elongation calculations. Separate stress and elongation calculations shall be
submitted for each tendon if the difference in tendon elongations exceeds 2 percent.
4. That tendons in the bridge will be arranged to locate their center of gravity as the
Plans require.
5. Details of additional or modified reinforcing steel required by the stressing system.
6. Procedures and lift-off forces at both ends of the tendon for performing a force
verification lift-off in the event of discrepancies between measured and calculated
elongations.
Couplings or splices will not be permitted in prestressing strands. Couplings or splices in
bar tendons are subject to the Engineer’s acceptance.
Friction losses used to calculate forces of the post-tensioning steel shall be based on the
assumed values used for the design. The assumed anchor set, friction coefficient “μ”, and
friction wobble coefficient “k” values for design are shown in the Plans. The post-tensioning
supplier may revise the assumed anchor set value provided all the stress and force limits listed
in Section 6-02.3(26)G are met.
The Contractor shall determine all points of interference between the mild steel
reinforcement and the paths of the post-tensioning tendons. Details to resolve interferences
shall be submitted with the shop drawings for approval. Where reinforcing bar placement
conflicts with post-tensioning tendon placement, the tendon profile shown in the Plans shall
be maintained.

The Contractor may deviate from the processed shop drawings only after submitting a new
Type 2E Working Drawing that describes the proposed changes.
Before physical completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer
with reproducible originals of the shop drawings (and any processed changes). These shall
be clear, suitable for microfilming, and on permanent sheets that measure no smaller than
11 by 17 inches. Alternatively, the shop drawings may be provided in an electronic format
with the concurrence of the Bridge and Structures Engineer.
6-02.3(26)B General Requirements for Anchorages
Post-tensioning reinforcement shall be secured at each end by means of an accepted
anchorage device, which shall not kink, neck down, or otherwise damage the post-tensioning
reinforcement. The anchorage assembly shall be grouted to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
The structure shall be reinforced with steel reinforcing bars in the anchorage zone in the
vicinity of the anchorage device. This reinforcement shall be categorized into two zones.
The first or local zone shall be the concrete surrounding and immediately ahead of the
anchorage device. The second or general zone shall be the overall anchorage zone, including
the local zone.
The steel reinforcing bars required for concrete confinement in the local zone shall be
determined by the post-tensioning system supplier and shall be shown in the shop drawings.
The calculations shall be submitted with the shop drawings. The local zone steel reinforcing
bars shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor, at no additional cost to the Contracting
Agency, in addition to the structural reinforcement required by the Plans. The steel reinforcing
bars required in the general zone shall be as shown in the Plans and are included in the
appropriate Bid items.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of details, certified
test reports, and/or supporting calculations, as specified below, which verify the structural
adequacy of the anchorage devices. This requirement does not apply where the anchorage
devices have been previously accepted by the Contracting Agency for the same Structure
configuration. The Contractor shall also submit any necessary changes to the Contract Plans.
The test report shall specify all pertinent test data.
Dead ended anchorages will not be permitted. Dead ended anchorages are defined as
anchorages that cannot be accessed during the stressing operations.
Materials and workmanship shall conform to the applicable requirements of Sections 6-03
and 9-06.
Before installing the anchorage device, the Contractor shall submit a Manufacturer’s
Certificate of Compliance.
Anchorage devices shall meet the requirements listed in either Sections 6-02.3(26)C
or 6-02.3(26)D.
All anchorages shall develop at least 96 percent of the actual ultimate strength of the
prestressing steel, when tested in an unbonded state, without exceeding anticipated set.
This anchor efficiency test shall be performed, or inspected and certified, by an independent
testing agency accepted by the Engineer.
6-02.3(26)C Normal Anchorage Devices
Normal anchorage devices, defined as post-tensioning anchorage assemblies conforming
to the factored bearing resistance requirements specified in this section, shall provide a
factored bearing resistance greater than or equal to 1.2 times the maximum jacking force.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of calculations showing
that the factored bearing resistances of the anchorage devices are not exceeded.
The factored bearing resistance of the anchorages shall be taken as:
Pr = φfnAb

2(f ' c − fc )(UP )(Q )
f 'c
For which fn is the lesser of:
A
f n = 0.7 f ci′ , and
Ag
f n = 2.25 f ci′
Where:
φ = Resistance factor of 0.70
56(.85 f= ' c − Maximum
3.A f cores )(UP
area)(of ) portion of the supporting surface that is similar to
Q the
the loaded area and concentric with it and does not overlap similar areas
f ' cadjacent anchorage devices (square inches)
for
Ab f ' cm= Effective net area of the bearing plate calculated as the area Ag, minus the
area of openings in the bearing plate (square inches)
Ag = Gross bearing area of the bearing plate calculated in accordance with the
requirements specified below (square inches)
f’ci = Nominal compressive strength of concrete at the time of application of
the tendon force (ksi)
The full bearing plate area may be used for Ag and the calculation of Ab if the plate
material does not yield at the factored tendon force and the slenderness of the bearing plate,
n/t, conforms to:
(n/t) ≤ 0.08(Eb/fb)0.33
Where:
Eb = Modulus of elasticity of the bearing plate material (ksi)
fb = Stress in the anchor plate at a section taken at the edge of the wedge hole
or holes (ksi)
= Projection of the base plate beyond the wedge hole or wedge plate, as
appropriate (inches)
t = average thickness of the bearing plate (inches)
For anchorages with separate wedge plates, n may be taken as the largest distance from
the outer edge of the wedge plate to the outer edge of the bearing plate. For rectangular
bearing plates, this distance shall be measured parallel to the edges of the bearing plate.
If the anchorage has no separate wedge plate, n may be taken as the projection beyond the
outer perimeter of the group of holes in the direction under consideration.
For bearing plates that do not meet the slenderness requirement specified above,
the effective gross bearing area, Ag, shall be taken as:
1. For anchorages with separate wedge plates, the area geometrically similar to the
wedge plate, with dimensions increased by twice the bearing plate thickness.
2. For anchorages without separate wedge plates, the area geometrically similar to the
outer perimeter of the wedge holes, with dimensions increased by twice the bearing
plate thickness.
6-02.3(26)D Special Anchorage Devices
Special anchorage devices, defined as post-tensioning anchorage assemblies that do not
conform to the factored bearing pressure requirements specified in Section 6-02.3(26)C,
shall conform to the acceptance test requirements specified below. Acceptance testing shall
be performed, or inspected and certified, by an independent testing agency accepted by the
Engineer. Results of the special anchorage device acceptance testing shall be recorded and
submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing.

6-02.3(26)D1 Test Block Requirements

The test block shall be a rectangular prism of sufficient size to contain all the special
anchorage device components that will also be embedded in the concrete of the Structure
being post-tensioned. The arrangement of the special anchorage device components shall
conform to practical application to the project and the special anchorage device manufacturer’s
recommendations. The test block shall contain an empty duct of a size appropriate for the
maximum tendon size that can be accommodated by the special anchorage device.
6-02.3(26)D2 Test Block Dimensions
The dimensions of the test block perpendicular to the tendon in each direction shall be the
smaller of twice the minimum edge distance or the minimum spacing specified by the special
anchorage device manufacturer, with the stipulation that the concrete cover over any confining
reinforcing steel or supplementary skin reinforcement shall be appropriate for the project-
specific application and circumstances. The length of the block along the axis of the tendon
shall be at least two times the larger of the cross-section dimensions.
6-02.3(26)D3 Local Zone Reinforcement for Confinement
The confining reinforcing steel in the local zone of the test block shall be the same as that
recommended by the special anchorage device manufacturer.
6-02.3(26)D4 Supplementary Skin Reinforcement
In addition to the special anchorage device and the associated local zone reinforcement for
confinement, supplementary skin reinforcement may be provided throughout the test block.
Such supplementary skin reinforcement shall be as specified by the special anchorage device
manufacturer, but shall not exceed a volumetric ratio of 0.01.
The Contractor shall furnish and install supplementary skin reinforcement in the
anchorage zone of the Structure similar in configuration and equivalent in volumetric ratio
to the supplementary skin reinforcement used in the test block at no additional cost to the
Contracting Agency. The steel reinforcing bars shown in the Plans in corresponding portions
of the general zone may be counted toward this reinforcement requirement.
6-02.3(26)D5 Test Block Concrete Strength
The compressive strength of the test block at the time of acceptance testing shall not exceed
the compressive strength of the Structure being post-tensioned at the time of post-tensioning.
6-02.3(26)D6 Special Anchorage Device Acceptance Testing
Special anchorage device acceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with one
of the following test methods:
1. Cyclic load test.
2. Sustained load test.
3. Monotonic load test.
The loads specified for the tests are specified in fractions of the ultimate load Fpu of the
largest tendon that the special anchorage device is designed to accommodate. The specimen
shall be loaded in accordance with conventional usage of the device in post-tensioning
applications, except that the load may be applied directly to the wedge plate or equivalent area.
6-02.3(26)D7 Cyclic Loading Test
A load of 0.8Fpu shall be applied. The load shall then be cycled between 0.1Fpu and 0.8Fpu
until crack widths stabilize, but for not less than ten cycles. Crack widths are considered
stabilized if they do not change by more than 0.001 inches over the last three readings. Upon
completion of the cyclic loading portion of the test, the specimen shall be loaded to failure, or,
if limited by the capacity of the loading equipment, to at least 1.1Fpu.

Crack widths and crack patterns shall be recorded at the initial load of 0.8Fpu, at least at
the last three consecutive peak loadings before termination of the cyclic loading portion of
the test, and at 0.9Fpu. The maximum load shall also be reported.
6-02.3(26)D8 Sustained Loading Test
A load of 0.8Fpu shall be applied and held constant until crack widths stabilize, but not
less than 48 hours. Crack widths are considered stabilized if they do not change by more than
0.001 inches over the last three readings. Upon completion of the sustained loading portion
of the test, the specimen shall be loaded to failure, or, if limited by the capacity of the loading
equipment, to at least 1.1Fpu.
Crack widths and crack patterns shall be recorded at the initial load of 0.8Fpu, at least three
times at intervals of not less than 4 hours during the last 12 hours of the sustained loading time
period, and at 0.9Fpu. The maximum load shall also be reported.
6-02.3(26)D9 Monotonic Loading Test
A load of 0.9Fpu shall be applied and held constant for 1 hour. Upon completion of the
1-hour load hold period, the specimen shall be loaded to failure, or, if limited by the capacity
of the loading equipment, to at least 1.2Fpu.
Crack widths and crack patterns shall be recorded at 0.9Fpu, at the conclusion of the 1-hour
load hold period, and at 1.0Fpu. The maximum load shall also be reported.
6-02.3(26)D10 Special Anchorage Device Test Performance Requirements
The test block shall conform to the following load requirements under test load:
1. The maximum test load for cyclic loading and sustained loading tests shall be
1.1Fpu minimum.
2. The maximum test load for monotonic loading tests shall be 1.2Fpu minimum.
The test block shall conform to the following crack width requirements under test load:
1. Cracks shall not exceed 0.010 inches in width at 0.8Fpu at completion of the cyclic
loading test or sustained loading test, or at 0.9Fpu after the 1-hour load hold period
of the monotonic loading test.
2. Cracks shall not exceed 0.016 inches at 0.9Fpu for the cyclic loading test or the
sustained loading test, or at 1.0Fpu for the monotonic loading test.
6-02.3(26)D11 Test Series Requirements
A test series shall consist of three test specimens. Each one of the tested specimens shall
conform to the acceptance criteria specified above. If one of the three specimens fails to
pass the test, a supplementary test series of three additional specimens shall be conducted.
The three additional test specimens shall conform to the specified acceptance criteria.
6-02.3(26)D12 Special Anchorage Device Acceptance Testing Results Report
The special anchorage device acceptance testing results report shall be a Type 1 Working
Drawing consisting of the following:
1. Dimensions of the test specimen.
2. Working drawings with details and dimensions of the special anchorage device,
including all confining reinforcing steel.
3. Amount and arrangement of supplementary skin reinforcement.
4. Type and yield strength of reinforcing steel.
5. Type and compressive strength of the concrete at the time of testing.
6. Type of testing procedure and all measurements specified for each specimen under
the test.
The special anchorage device manufacturer shall specify auxiliary and confining
reinforcement, minimum edge distance, minimum anchor spacing, and minimum concrete
strength at the time of stressing required for proper performance of the local zone.

6-02.3(26)E Ducts
Ducts shall be round, except that ducts for transverse post-tensioning of bridge deck slabs
may be rectangular. Ducts shall conform to the following requirements for internal embedded
installation and external exposed installation. Elliptical shaped duct may be used if allowed by
the Engineer.
6-02.3(26)E1 Ducts for Internal Embedded Installation
Ducts, including their splices, shall be semi-rigid, air and mortar tight, corrugated plastic
ducts of virgin polyethylene or polypropylene materials, free of water-soluble chlorides or
other chemicals reactive with concrete or post-tensioning reinforcement. Ducts, including their
splices, shall either have a white coating on the outside or shall be of a white material with
ultraviolet stabilizers added. Ducts, including their splices, shall be capable of withstanding
concrete pressures without deforming or permitting the intrusion of cement paste during
placement of concrete. All fasteners shall be appropriate for use with plastic ducts, and all
clamps shall be of an accepted plastic material.
Polyethylene ducts shall conform to ASTM D3350 with a cell classification of 345464A.
Polypropylene ducts shall conform to ASTM D4101 with a cell classification range of
PP0340B14541 to PP0340B67884. Resins used for duct fabrication shall have a minimum
oxidation induction time of 20 minutes, in accordance with ASTM D3895, based on tests
performed by the duct fabricator on samples taken from the lot of finished product. The duct
thickness shall be as specified in Section 10.8.3 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications, latest edition and current interims.
All duct splices, joints, couplings, and connections to anchorages shall be made with
devices or methods (mechanical couplers, plastic sleeves, shrink sleeves) that are accepted
by the duct manufacturer and produce a smooth interior alignment with no lips or kinks. All
connections and fittings shall be air and mortar tight. Taping is not acceptable for connections
and fittings.
Each duct shall maintain the required profile within a placement tolerance of plus or minus
¼ inch for longitudinal tendons and plus or minus ⅛ inch for transverse slab tendons during
all phases of the work. The minimum acceptable radius of curvature shall be as recommended
by the duct manufacturer and as supported by documented industry standard testing. The ducts
shall be completely sealed to keep out all mortar.
Each duct shall be located to place the tendon at the center of gravity alignment shown in
the Plans. To keep friction losses to a minimum, the Contractor shall install ducts to the exact
lines and grades shown in the Plans. Once in place, the ducts shall be tied firmly in position
before they are covered with concrete. During concrete placement, the Contractor shall not
displace or damage the ducts.
The ends of the ducts shall:
1. Permit free movement of anchorage devices, and
2. Remain covered after installation in the forms to keep out all water or debris.
Immediately after any concrete placement, the Contractor shall force blasts of oil-free,
compressed air through the ducts to break up and remove any mortar inside before it hardens.
Before deck concrete is placed, the Contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that ducts are
unobstructed and contain nothing that could interfere with tendon installation, tensioning, or
grouting. If the tendons are in place, the Contractor shall show that they are free in the duct.
Ducts shall be capped and sealed at all times until the completion of grouting to prevent
the intrusion of water.
Strand tendon duct shall have an inside cross-sectional area large enough to accomplish
strand installation and grouting. The area of the duct shall be at least 2.5 times the net area
of prestressing steel in the duct. The maximum duct diameter shall be 4½ inches.
The inside diameter of bar tendon duct shall at least be ¼ inch larger than the bar diameter.
At coupler locations the duct diameter shall at least be ¼ inch larger than the coupler diameter.

Ducts installed and cast into concrete prior to prestressing steel installation, shall be
capable of withstanding at least 10 feet of concrete fluid pressure.
Ducts shall have adequate longitudinal bending stiffness for smooth, wobble free
placement. A minimum of three successful duct qualification tests are required for each
diameter and type of duct, as follows:
1. Ducts with diameters 2 inches and smaller shall not deflect more than 3 inches under
its own weight, when a 10-foot duct segment is supported at its ends.
2. Ducts larger than 2 inches in diameter shall not deflect more than 3 inches under its
own weight, when a 20-foot duct segment is supported at its ends.
3. Duct shall not dent more than ⅛ inch under a concentrated load of 100 pounds applied
between corrugations by a #4 steel reinforcing bar.
When the duct must be curved in a tight radius, more flexible duct may be used, subject to
the Engineer’s concurrence.
6-02.3(26)E2 Ducts for External Exposed Installation
Duct shall be high-density polyethylene (HDPE) conforming to ASTM D3035. The cell
classification for each property listed in the table below:
Property Cell Classification
1 3 or 4
2 2, 3, or 4
3 4 or 5
4 4 or 5
5 2 or 3
6 2, 3, or 4
The color code shall be C.

Duct for external tendons, including their splices, shall be water tight, seamless or welded,
and be capable of resisting at least 150 psi grout pressure.
Transition couplers between ducts shall conform to either the standard pressure ratings of
ASTM D3035 or the hydrostatic design stresses of ASTM F714 at 73°F. The inside diameter
through the coupled length shall not be less than that produced by the dimensional tolerances
specified in ASTM D3035.
Workers performing HDPE pipe welding shall have satisfactorily completed a certified
HDPE pipe welding course and shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in welding
HDPE pipe.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the name and HDPE
pipe welding work experience of each HDPE pipe welder proposed to perform this Work in
the project. The experience submittal for each HDPE pipe welder shall include:
1. The name of the pipe welder.
2. The name, date, and location of the certified HDPE pipe welding course, with the
course completion certificate.
3. A list of at least three projects in the last 5 years where the pipe welder performed
HDPE pipe welding, including:
a. The project name and location, and date of construction.
b. The Governmental Agency/Owner.
c. The name, address, and phone number of the Governmental Agency/Owner’s
representative.
The Engineer may require the HDPE pipe welder to demonstrate test HDPE pipe welding
before receiving final acceptance.

6-02.3(26)E3 Transitions
Transitions between ducts and wedge plates shall have adequate length to reduce the angle
change effect on the performance of strand-wedge connection, friction loss at the anchorage,
and fatigue strength of the post-tensioning reinforcement.
6-02.3(26)E4 Vents, Grout Injection Ports, Drains, and Caps
The Contractor shall install vents at high points and drains at low points of the tendon
profile (and at other places if the Plans require). Vents at high points shall consist of a set of
three vents: one to be installed at the high point of the duct, and flanking vents to be installed
on either side of the high-point vent at locations where the duct profile is 8 to 12 inches below
the elevation of the high-point vent. Vents shall include grout injection ports.
Vents and drains shall have a minimum inside diameter of ¾ inches, and shall be of
either stainless steel, nylon, or polyolefin materials, free of water-soluble chlorides or other
chemicals reactive with concrete or post-tensioning reinforcement. Stainless steel vents and
drains shall conform to ASTM A240 Type 316. Nylon vents and drains shall conform to
cell classification S-PA0141 (weather-resistant). Polyolefin vents and drains shall contain
an antioxidant with a minimum oxidation induction time of 20 minutes in accordance with
ASTM D3895. Polyolefin vents and drains shall also have a stress crack resistance of 3 hours
minimum when tested at an applied stress of 350 psi in accordance with ASTM F2136.
All fasteners shall be appropriate for use with plastic ducts, and all clamps shall be of
an accepted plastic material. Taping of connections is not allowed. Valves shall be positive
mechanical shut-off valves. Valves, and associated caps, shall have a minimum pressure rating
of 100 psi.
Vents shall point upward and remain closed until grouting begins. Drains shall point
downward and remain open until grouting begins. Ends of stainless steel vents and drains
shall be removed 1 inch inside the concrete surface after grouting has been completed. Ends of
nylon or polyolefin vents and drains may be left flush to the surface unless otherwise specified
by the Engineer. Vents, except for grout injection, are not required for transverse post-
tensioning ducts in the bridge deck unless specified in the Plans.
Caps shall be made of either stainless steel or fiber reinforced polymer (FRP). Stainless
steel caps shall conform to ASTM A240 Type 316L. The resin for FRP caps shall be either
nylon, polyester, or acrylonitrite butadiene styrene (ABS). Nylon shall conform to cell
classification S-PA0141 (weather-resistant). Caps shall be sealed with “O” ring seals or
precision-fitted flat gaskets placed against the bearing plate. Caps shall be fastened to the
anchorage with stainless steel bolts conforming to ASTM A240 Type 316L.
6-02.3(26)E5 Leak Tightness Testing
The Contractor shall test each completed duct assembly for leak tightness after placing
concrete but prior to placing post-tensioning reinforcement. The Contractor shall submit
a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the equipment used to conduct the leak tightness
testing and to monitor and record the pressure maintained in and lost from the closed
assembly, and the process to be followed in conducting the leak-tightness testing along with
the post-tensioning system shop drawings in accordance with Section 6-02.3(26)A.
Prior to testing, all grout caps shall be installed and all vents, grout injection ports, and
drains shall either be capped or have their shut-off valves closed. The Contractor shall
pressurize the completed duct assembly to an initial air pressure of 50 psi. This pressure
shall be held for five minutes to allow for internal adjustments within the assembly. After
five minutes, the air supply valve shall be closed. The Contractor shall monitor and measure
the pressure maintained within the closed assembly, and any subsequent loss of pressure,
over a period of one minute following the closure of the air supply valve. The maximum
pressure loss for duct assemblies equal to or less than 150 feet in length shall be 25 psig. The
maximum pressure loss for duct assemblies greater than 150 feet in length shall be 15 psig.
If the pressure loss exceeds the allowable, locations of leakage shall be identified, repaired
or reconstructed using methods accepted by the Engineer. The repaired system shall then

be retested. The cycle of testing, repair and retesting of each completed duct assembly shall
continue until the completed duct assembly completes a test with pressure loss within the
specified amount.
6-02.3(26)F Prestressing Reinforcement
All prestressing reinforcement strand shall comply with Section 9-07.10. They shall not be
coupled or spliced. Tendon locations shown in the Plans indicate final positions after stressing
(unless the Plans say otherwise). No tendon made of 7-wire strands shall contain more than
37 strands of ½-inch diameter, or more than 27 strands of 0.6-inch diameter.
All prestressing reinforcement bar shall conform to Section 9-07.11. They shall not be
coupled or spliced except as otherwise specified in the Plans or Special Provisions.
Prestressing reinforcement not conforming to either Section 9-07.10 or 9-07.11 will not be
allowed except as otherwise noted. Such reinforcement may be used provided it is specifically
allowed by the Plans or Special Provisions, it satisfies all material and performance criteria
specified in the Plans or Special Provisions, and receives the Engineer’s acceptance.
From manufacture to encasement in concrete or grout, prestressing strand shall be
protected against dirt, oil, grease, damage, and all corrosives. Strand shall be stored in a
dry, covered area and shall be kept in the manufacturer’s original packaging. If prestressing
strand has been damaged or pitted, it will be rejected. Prestressing strand with rust shall be
spot-cleaned with a nonmetallic pad to inspect for any sign of pitting or section loss. If the
prestressing reinforcement will not be stressed and grouted for more than 7 calendar days after
it is placed in the ducts, the Contractor shall place an accepted corrosion inhibitor conforming
to Federal Specification MIL-I-22110C in the ducts.
The feeding ends of the strand tendons shall be equipped with a bullet nosing or similar
apparatus to facilitate strand tendon installation.
Strand tendons may be installed by pulling or pushing. Any equipment capable to
performing the task may be used, provided it does not damage the strands and conforms to
the following:
1. Pulling lines shall have a capacity of at least 2.5 times the dead weight of the tendons
when used for essentially horizontal tendon installation.
2. Metal pushing wheels shall not be used.
3. Bullets for checking duct clearance prior to concreting shall be rigid and be ⅛ inch
smaller than the inside diameter of the duct. Bullets for checking duct after concreting
shall be less than ¼ inch smaller than the inside diameter of the duct.
6-02.3(26)G Tensioning
Equipment for tensioning post-tensioning reinforcement shall meet the following
requirements:
1. Stressing equipment shall be capable of producing a jacking force of at least 81 percent
of the specified tensile strength of the post-tensioning reinforcement.
2. Jacking force test capacity shall be at least 95 percent of the specified tensile strength
of the post-tensioning reinforcement.
3. Wedge seating methods shall assure uniform seating of wedge segments and uniform
wedge seating losses on all strand tendons.
4. Accumulation of differential seating losses during tensioning cycling shall be prevented
by proper devices.
5. Jacks used for stressing tendons less than 20 feet long shall have wedge power
seating capability.
The Contractor shall not begin to tension the tendons until:
1. All concrete has reached a compressive strength of at least 4,000 psi or the strength
specified in the Plans. When tensioning takes place prior to 28-day compressive
strength testing on concrete sampled in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)H,

compressive strength shall be verified on field cured cylinders in accordance with the
FOP for AASHTO T23.
2. The Engineer is satisfied that all strands are free in the ducts.
Tendons shall be tensioned to the values shown in the Plans (or processed shop drawings)
with hydraulic jacks. When stressing from both ends of a tendon is specified, it need not be
simultaneous unless otherwise specified in the Plans. The jacking sequence shall follow the
processed shop drawings.
Each jack shall have a pressure gauge that will determine the load applied to the tendon.
The gauge shall display pressure accurately and readably with a dial at least 6 inches in
diameter or with a digital display. Each jack and its gauge shall be calibrated as a unit and
shall be accompanied by a certified calibration chart. The Contractor shall provide one copy
of this chart to the Engineer for use in monitoring. The cylinder extension during calibration
shall be in approximately the position it will occupy at final jacking force.
All jacks and gauges must be recalibrated and recertified: (1) at least every 180 days, and
(2) after any repair or adjustment. The Engineer may use pressure cells to check jacks, gauges,
and calibration charts before and during tensioning.
These stress limits apply to all tendons (unless the Plans set other limits):
1. During jacking prior to seating: 90 percent of the yield strength of the steel.
2. At anchorages after seating: 70 percent of the specified tensile strength of the steel.
3. At service limit state after losses: 80 percent of the yield strength of the steel.
Tendons shall be anchored at initial stresses that will ultimately maintain service loads at
least as great as the Plans require.
As stated in Section 6-02.3(26)A, the assumed design friction coefficient “μ” and wobble
coefficient “k” shown in the Plans shall be used to calculate the stressing elongation. These
coefficients may be revised by the post-tensioning supplier by the following method provided
it is accepted by the Engineer:
Early in the project, the post-tensioning supplier shall test, in place, two representative
tendons of each size and type shown in the Plans, for the purpose of accurately determining
the friction loss in a strand and/or bar tendon.
The test procedure shall consist of stressing the tendon at an anchor assembly with load
cells at the dead end and jacking end. The test specimen shall be tensioned to 80 percent
of the specified tensile strength in 10 increments. For each increment, the gauge pressure,
elongation, and load cell force shall be recorded and the data furnished to the Engineer.
The theoretical elongations and post-tensioning forces shown on the post-tensioning shop
drawings shall be re-evaluated by the post-tensioning supplier using the results of the tests
and corrected as necessary. Revisions to the theoretical elongations shall be submitted as a
Type 2E Working Drawing. The apparatus and methods used to perform the tests shall be
proposed by the post-tensioning supplier and be subject to the Engineer’s acceptance.
All costs associated with testing and evaluating test data shall be included in the unit
Contract prices for the applicable items of Work involved.
As tensioning proceeds, the Engineer will be recording the applied load, tendon elongation,
and anchorage seating values.
Elongation measurements shall be made at each stressing location to verify that the tendon
force has been properly achieved. If proper anchor set has been achieved and the measured
elongation of each strand tendon is within plus or minus 7 percent of the accepted calculated
elongation, the stressed tendon represented by the elongation measurements is acceptable to
In the event discrepancies greater than 7 percent exist between the measured and calculated
elongations, the jack calibration shall be checked and stressing records reviewed for any
evidence of wire or strand breakage. If the jack if properly calibrated and there is no evidence
of wire or strand breakage, a force verification lift off shall be performed to verify the force

in the tendon. The post-tensioning supplier force verification lift off procedure shall provide
access for visual verification of anchor plate lift off. The jacking equipment shall be capable
of bridging and lifting off the anchor plate. The tendon is acceptable if the verification lift off
force is not less than 99 percent of the accepted calculated force nor more than 70 percent
of the specified tensile strength of the prestressing steel or as accepted by the Engineer.
Elongation measurements shall be recorded for bar tendons to verify proper tensioning
only. Acceptance will be by force verification lift off. The bar tendon is acceptable if the
verification lift off force is not less than 95 percent nor more than 105 percent of the accepted
calculated force or as accepted by the Engineer.
When removing the jacks, the Contractor shall relieve stresses gradually before cutting the
prestressing reinforcement. The prestressing strands shall be cut a minimum of 1 inch from the
face of the anchorage device.
6-02.3(26)H Grouting
Grout for post-tensioning reinforcement shall conform to Section 9-20.3(1). Prepackaged
components of the grout mix shall be used within 6 months or less from date of manufacture
to date of usage. Grout for post-tensioning reinforcement will be accepted based on
manufacturer’s certificate of compliance in accordance with Section 1-06.3, except that the
water-cementitious material ratio of 0.45 maximum shall be field verified.
All grout produced for any single structure shall be furnished by one supplier.
All grouting operations shall be conducted by ASBI-certified grout technicians.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the grouting
operation Plan. The grouting operation Plan shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Names of the grout technicians, accompanied by documentation of their ASBI
certification.
2. Type, quantity, and brand of materials used in the grouting operations, including all
manufacturer’s certificates of compliance.
3. Type of equipment to be used, including meters and measuring devices used to
positively measure the quantity of materials used to mix the post-tensioning grout,
the equipment capacity in relation to demand and working conditions, and all back-up
equipment and spare parts.
4. General grouting procedure.
5. Duct leak tightness testing and repair procedures as specified in Section 6-02.3(26)E.
6. Methods used to control the rate of grout flow within the ducts.
7. Theoretical grout volume calculations, and target flow rates recommended by the
grout manufacturer as a function of the mixer equipment and the expected range of
ambient temperatures.
8. Grout mixing and pumping procedures.
9. Direction of grouting.
10. Sequence of use of the grout injection ports, vents, and drains.
11. Procedures for handling blockages.
12. Procedures for postgrouting repairs.
Post-tensioning grout shall be mixed in accordance with the prepackaged grout
manufacturer’s recommendations using high-shear colloidal mixers. Mechanical paddle
mixers will not be allowed. The grout produced for filling post-tensioning ducts shall be free
of lumps and undispersed cement. All equipment used to mix each batch of post-tensioning
grout shall be equipped with appropriate meters and measuring devices to positively measure
all quantities of all materials used to produce the mixed grout. The field test for water-
cementitious materials ratio shall be performed prior to beginning the grout injection process.
Grouting shall not begin until the material properties of each batch of grout have been
confirmed as acceptable.

After tensioning the tendons, the Contractor shall again blow oil-free, compressed air
through each duct. All drains shall then be closed and the vents opened. Grout caps shall be
installed at tendon ends prior to grouting. After completely filling the duct with grout, the
Contractor shall pump the grout from the low end at a pressure of not more than 250 psig,
except for transverse tendons in deck slabs the grout pressure shall not exceed 100 psig. Grout
shall be continuously wasted through each vent until no more air or water pockets show. At
this point, all vents shall be closed and grouting pressure at the injector held between 100
and 200 psig for at least 10 seconds, except for transverse tendons in deck slabs the grouting
pressure shall be held between 50 and 75 psig for at least 10 seconds. The Contractor shall
leave all plugs, caps, and valves in place and closed for at least 24 hours after grouting.
Grouting equipment shall:
1. Include a pressure gauge with an upper end readout of between 275 and 325 psig;
2. Screen the grout before it enters the pump with an easily reached screen that has clear
openings of no more than 0.125 inches;
3. Be gravity fed from an attached, overhead hopper kept partly full during pumping; and
4. Be able to complete the largest tendon on the project in no more than 20 minutes of
continuous grouting.
In addition, the Contractor shall have standby equipment (with a separate power source)
available for flushing the grout when the regular equipment cannot maintain a one-way flow
of grout. This standby equipment shall be able to pump at 250 psig.
The grout mix shall be injected within 30 minutes after the water is added to the cement.
Temperature of the surrounding concrete shall be at least 35°F from the time the grout
injecting begins until 2-inch cubes of the grout have a compressive strength of 800 psi. Cubes
shall be made in accordance with WSDOT T 813 and stored in accordance with FOP for
AASHTO T 23. If ambient conditions are such that the surrounding concrete temperature may
fall below 35°F, the Contractor shall provide a heat source and protective covering for the
Structure to keep the temperature of the surrounding concrete above 35°F. Grout temperature
shall not exceed 90°F during mixing and pumping. If conditions are such that the temperature
of the grout mix may exceed 90°F, the Contractor will make necessary provisions, such as
cooling the mix water and/or dry ingredients, to ensure that the temperature of the grout mix
does not exceed 90°F.
6-02.3(27) Concrete for Precast Units
Precast units shall not be removed from forms until the concrete has attained a minimum
compressive strength of 70 percent of the specified design strength as verified by rebound
number determined in accordance with FOP for ASTM C805. Type III portland cement is
permitted to be used in precast concrete units.
Precast units shall not be shipped until the concrete has reached the specified design
strength as determined by testing cylinders made from the same concrete as the precast
units. The cylinders shall be made, handled, and stored in accordance with FOP for
AASHTO T 23 and compression tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22 and AASHTO
T 231.
6-02.3(27)A Use of Self-Consolidating Concrete for Precast Units
Self-consolidating concrete (SCC) may be used for the following precast concrete structure
elements:
1. Precast roof, wall, and floor panels and retaining wall panels in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(28).
2. Precast reinforced concrete three-sided structures, box culverts and split box culverts
in accordance with Section 7-02.3(6).
3. Precast concrete barrier in accordance with Section 6-10.3(1).
4. Precast concrete wall stem panels in accordance with Section 6-11.3(3).

5. Precast concrete noise barrier wall panels in accordance with Section 6-12.3(6).
6. Structural earth wall precast concrete facing panels in accordance with
Section 6-13.3(4).
7. Precast drainage structure elements in accordance with Section 9-05.50.
8. Precast junction boxes, cable vaults, and pull boxes in accordance with Section 9-29.2.
6-02.3(27)B Submittals for Self-Consolidating Concrete for Precast Units
With the exception of items 3, 7, and 8 in Section 6-02.3(27)A, the Contractor shall submit
the mix design for SCC to the Engineer for annual plant approval in accordance with Section
6-02.3(28)B. The mix design submittal shall include items specified in Sections 6-02.3(2)A
and 6-02.3(2)C1.
Items 3, 7, and 8 in Section 6-02.3(27)A require the precast plant to cast one representative
structure acceptable to the Engineer and have the structure sawn in half for examination by the
Contracting Agency to determine that segregation has not occurred. The Contracting Agency’s
acceptance of the sawn structure will constitute acceptance of the precast plant’s use of SCC,
and a concrete mix design submittal is not required.
6-02.3(27)C Acceptance Testing of Concrete for Precast Units
Acceptance testing shall be performed by the Contractor and test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer. Concrete shall conform to the requirements specified in Section
6-02.3(2)A. Unless otherwise noted below, the test methods described in Section 6-02.3(5)D
shall be followed. Concrete compressive strength shall be in accordance with Section
6-02.3(27). Compressive strength testing shall be performed a minimum of once per day
and once for every 20 cubic yards of concrete that is placed.
Concrete for items 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 in Section 6-02.3(27)A that is not self-consolidating
concrete will be accepted as follows:
2. Slump below the maximum allowed.
3. Air content within the required range.
SCC for items 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6 in Section 6-02.3(27)A will be accepted as follows:
2. Slump flow within the target slump flow range.
3. VSI less than or equal to 1 in accordance with ASTM C1611, Appendix X1, using
Filling Procedure B.
4. J ring passing ability less than or equal to 1.5-inches.
5. Air content within the required range.
SCC for concrete barrier will be accepted in accordance with temperature, air, and
compressive strength testing listed above.
SCC for precast junction boxes, cable vaults, and pull boxes will be accepted in accordance
with the temperature and compressive strength testing listed above.
SCC for precast drainage structure elements will be accepted in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO M199.
6-02.3(28) Precast Concrete Panels
The Contractor shall perform quality control inspection. The manufacturing plant for
precast concrete panels shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute’s
Plant Certification Program for the type of precast member to be produced, or the National
Precast Concrete Association’s Plant Certification Program or be an International Congress
Building Officials or International Code Council Evaluation Services recognized fabricator of
structural precast concrete products, and shall be approved by WSDOT as a Certified Precast
Concrete Fabricator prior to the start of production. WSDOT Certification will be granted at,
and renewed during, the annual precast plant review and approval process in accordance with

WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01 Standard Practice QC 7. Products that shall conform to
this requirement include noise barrier panels, wall panels, floor and roof panels, marine pier
deck panels, retaining walls, pier caps, and bridge deck panels. Precast concrete panels that are
prestressed shall meet all the requirements of Section 6-02.3(25).
Prior to the start of production of the precast concrete panels, the Contractor shall advise
the Engineer of the production schedule. The Contractor shall give the Inspector safe and
free access to the Work. If the Inspector observes any nonspecification Work or unacceptable
quality control practices, the Inspector will advise the plant manager. If the corrective action
is not acceptable to the Engineer, the panel(s) will be rejected.
Before casting the structural elements, the Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working
Drawings of the precast panel shop drawings.
These shop drawings shall show complete details of the methods, materials, and
equipment the Contractor proposes to use in prestressing/precasting Work. The shop drawings
shall follow the design conditions shown in the Plans unless the Engineer concurs with equally
effective variations.
The shop drawings shall contain as a minimum:
1. Panel shapes (elevations and sections) and dimensions.
2. Finishes and method of constructing the finish (i.e., forming, rolling).
3. Reinforcing, joint, and connection details.
4. Lifting, bracing, and erection inserts.
5. Locations and details of hardware attached to the Structure.
6. Relationship to adjacent material.
The Contractor may deviate from the processed shop drawings only after submitting a Type
2E Working Drawing that describes the proposed changes.
Before completion of the Contract, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with
reproducible originals of the shop drawings (and any processed changes). These shall be clear,
suitable for microfilming, and on permanent sheets that conform with the size requirements
of Section 6-01.9.
6-02.3(28)B Casting
Before casting precast concrete panels, the Contractor and Fabrication Inspector shall have
possession of a processed set of shop drawings.
Concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 6-02.3(25)B for annual preapproval of
the concrete mix design and slump. If SCC is used, the concrete shall conform to Sections
6-02.3(27)B and 6-02.3(27)C.
Precast panels shall not be removed from forms until the concrete has attained a minimum
compressive strength of 70 percent of the specified design strength. A minimum compressive
strength at other than 70 percent may be used for specific precast panels if the fabricator
requests and receives acceptance as part of the WSDOT plant certification process.
Forms may be steel or plywood faced, providing they impart the required finish to
the concrete.
6-02.3(28)C Curing
Concrete in the precast panels shall be cured by either moist or accelerated curing methods.
The methods to be used shall be preapproved in the WSDOT plant certification process.
1. For moist curing, the surface of the concrete shall be kept covered or moist until such
time as the compressive strength of the concrete reaches the strength specified for
stripping. Exposed surfaces shall be kept continually moist by fogging, spraying, or
covering with moist burlap or cotton mats. Moist curing shall commence as soon as
possible following completion of surface finishing.

2. For accelerated curing, heat shall be applied at a controlled rate following the initial set
of concrete in combination with an effective method of supplying or retaining moisture.
Moisture may be applied by a cover of moist burlap, cotton matting, or other effective
means. Moisture may be retained by covering the panel with an impermeable sheet.
Heat may be radiant, convection, conducted steam or hot air. Heat the concrete to no more
than 100°F during the first 2 hours after placing the concrete, and then increase no more than
25°F per hour to a maximum of 175°F. After curing is complete, cool the concrete no more
than 25°F per hour to 100°F. Maintain the concrete temperature above 60°F until the panel
reaches stripping strength.
Concrete temperature shall be monitored by means of a thermocouple embedded in the
concrete (linked with a thermometer accurate to plus or minus 5°F). The recording sensor
(accurate to plus or minus 5°F) shall be arranged and calibrated to continuously record,
date, and identify concrete temperature throughout the heating cycle. This temperature
record shall be made available to the Engineer for inspection and become a part of the
documentation required.
The Contractor shall never allow dry heat to directly touch exposed panel surfaces at
any point.
6-02.3(28)D Contractors Control Strength
The concrete strength at stripping and the verification of design strength shall be
determined by testing cylinders made from the same concrete as the precast panels. The
cylinders shall be made, handled, and stored in accordance with WSDOT FOP for AASHTO
T 23 and compression tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22 and AASHTO T 231.
For accelerated cured panels, concrete strength shall be measured on test cylinders cast
from the same concrete as that in the panel. These cylinders shall be cured under time-
temperature relationships and conditions that simulate those of the panel. If the forms are
heated by steam or hot air, test cylinders will remain in the coolest zone throughout curing.
If forms are heated another way, the Contractor shall provide a record of the curing time-
temperature relationship for the cylinders for each panel to the Engineer. When two or more
panels are cast in a continuous line and in a continuous operation, a single set of test cylinders
may represent all panels provided the Contractor demonstrates uniformity of casting and
curing to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall mold, cure, and test enough of these cylinders to satisfy Specification
requirements for measuring concrete strength. The Contractor may use 4- by 8-inch or 6- by
12-inch cylinders. The Contractor shall let cylinders cool for at least ½ hour before testing for
release strength.
Test cylinders may be cured in a moist room or water tank in accordance with FOP for
AASHTO T 23 after the panel concrete has obtained the required release strength. If, however,
the Contractor intends to ship the panel prior to standard 28-day strength test, the design
strength for shipping shall be determined from cylinders placed with the panel and cured under
the same conditions as the panel. These cylinders may be placed in a noninsulated, moisture-
proof envelope.
To measure concrete strength in the precast panel, the Contractor shall randomly select
two test cylinders and average their compressive strengths. The compressive strength in either
cylinder shall not fall more than 5 percent below the specified strength. If these two cylinders
do not pass the test, two other cylinders shall be selected and tested.
6-02.3(28)E Finishing
The Contractor shall provide a finish on all relevant concrete surfaces as defined
in Section 6-02.3(14), unless the Plans or Special Provisions require otherwise.

6-02.3(28)F Tolerances
The panels shall be fabricated as shown in the Plans, and shall meet the dimensional
tolerances listed in the latest edition of PCI-MNL-116, unless otherwise required by the
Plans or Special Provisions.
6-02.3(28)G Handling and Storage
The Contractor shall lift all panels only by adequate devices at locations designated
on the shop drawings. When these devices and locations are not shown in the Plans,
Section 6-02.3(25)L shall apply.
Precast panels shall be stored off the ground on foundations suitable to prevent differential
settlement or twisting of the panels. Stacked panels shall be separated and supported by
dunnage of uniform thickness capable of supporting the panels. Dunnage shall be arranged in
vertical planes. The upper panels of a stacked tier shall not be used as storage areas for shorter
panels unless substantiated by engineering analysis and accepted by the Engineer.
6-02.3(28)H Shipping
Precast panels shall not be shipped until the concrete has reached the specified design
strength, and the Engineer has reviewed the fabrication documentation for Contract
compliance and stamped the precast concrete panels “Approved for Shipment”. The panels
shall be supported in such a manner that they will not be damaged by anticipated impact on
their dead load. Sufficient padding material shall be provided between tie chains and cables
to prevent chipping or spalling of the concrete.
6-02.3(28)I Erection
When the precast panels arrive on the project, the Engineer will confirm that they are
stamped “Approved for Shipment”. The Engineer will evaluate the present panels for damage
before accepting them.
The Contractor shall lift all panels by suitable devices at locations designated on the
shop drawings. Temporary shoring or bracing shall be provided, if necessary. Panels shall
be properly aligned and leveled as required by the Plans. Variations between adjacent panels
shall be leveled out by a method accepted by the Engineer.
6-02.4 Measurement
Except as noted below, all classes of concrete shall be measured in place by the cubic yard
to the neat lines of the Structure as shown in the Plans.
Exception: concrete in cofferdam seals. Payment for Class 4000W concrete used in these
seals will be based on the volume calculated using the neatline dimensions for the seal as
shown in the Contract Plans. For calculated purposes, the horizontal dimension will be
increased by 1 foot outside the seal neatline perimeter. The vertical dimension is the distance
between the top and bottom neatline elevations. No payment will be made for any concrete
that lies outside of these limits to accommodate the Contractor’s cofferdam configuration.
If the Engineer eliminates the seal in its entirety a Contract change order will be issued.
Exception: concrete in a separate lump-sum, Superstructure Bid item. Any concrete
quantities noted under this item in the Special Provisions will not be measured. Although
the Special Provisions list approximate quantities for the Contractor’s convenience, the
Contracting Agency does not guarantee the accuracy of these estimates. Before submitting
a Bid, the Contractor shall have verified the quantities. Even though actual quantities used may
vary from those listed in the Special Provisions, the Contracting Agency will not adjust the
lump sum Contract price for Superstructure (except for processed changes).
The Contracting Agency will pay for no concrete placed below the established elevation
of the bottom of any footing or seal.
Lean concrete will be measured by the cubic yard for the quantity of material placed
in accordance with the producer’s invoice, except that lean concrete included in other Contract
items will not be measured.

No deduction will be made for pile heads, reinforcing steel, structural steel, bolts, weep
holes, rustications, chamfers, edgers, joint filler, junction boxes, miscellaneous hardware, ducts
or less than 6-inch diameter drain pipes when computing concrete quantities for payment.
All reinforcing steel will be measured by the computed weight of all steel required by
the Plans. The weight of mechanical splices will be based on the weight specified in the
manufacturer’s existing catalog cut for the specific item. Splices noted as optional in the plans
but installed by the Contractor will be included in the measurement. Epoxy-coated bars will be
measured before coating. The Contractor shall furnish (without extra allowance):
1. Bracing, spreaders, form blocks, wire clips, and other fasteners.
2. Extra steel in splices not shown in the Plans or specified in the Plans as optional.
3. Extra shear steel at construction joints not shown in the Plans when the Engineer
permits such joints for the Contractor’s convenience.
The following table shall be used to compute weight of reinforcing steel:
Steel Reinforcing Bar
Deformed Bar Designation Number Nominal Diameter Inches Unit Weight Pounds per Foot
3 0.375 0.376
4 0.500 0.668
5 0.625 1.043
6 0.750 1.502
7 0.875 2.044
8 1.000 2.670
9 1.128 3.400
10 1.270 4.303
11 1.410 5.313
14 1.690 7.650
18 2.260 13.600
Gravel backfill will be measured as specified in Section 2-09.4.

Expansion joint system___seal - superstr. will be measured by the linear foot along its
completed line and slope.
Expansion joint modification will be measured by the linear foot of expansion joint
modified along its completed line and slope.
Prestressed concrete girder will be measured by the linear foot of girder specified in the
Proposal.
Bridge approach slab will be measured by the square yard.
6-02.5 Payment
“Conc. Class ____”, per cubic yard.
“Commercial Concrete”, per cubic yard.
All concrete, except in Superstructure when this is covered by a separate Bid item, will be
paid for at the unit Contract price per cubic yard in place for the various classes of concrete.
All costs in connection with concrete curing, producing concrete surface finish with form
liners, and furnishing and applying pigmented sealer to concrete surfaces as specified, shall be
included in the unit contract price per cubic yard for “Conc. Class ____”. If the concrete is to
be paid for other than by class of concrete, then the costs shall be included in the associated
item of work.
“Superstructure (name bridge)”, lump sum.

All costs in connection with constructing, finishing and removing the bridge deck test slab
as specified in Section 6-02.3(10)D1 shall be included in the lump sum Contract price for
“Superstructure___” or “Bridge Deck___” for one bridge in each project, as applicable.
All costs in connection with providing holes for vents, for furnishing and installing cell
drainage pipes for box girder Structures, and furnishing and placing grout and shims under
steel shoes shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various Bid items involved.
All costs in connection with the construction of weep holes, including the gravel backfill
for drains surrounding the weep holes except as provided in Section 2-09.4, shall be included
by the Contractor in the unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Conc. Class ____”.
“Lean Concrete”, per cubic yard.
Lean concrete, except when included in another Bid item, will be paid for at the unit
Contract price per cubic yard.
“St. Reinf. Bar ____”, per pound.
“Epoxy-Coated St. Reinf. Bar ____”, per pound.
Payment for reinforcing steel shall include the cost of drilling holes in concrete for, and
setting, steel reinforcing bar dowels with epoxy bonding agent, and furnishing, fabricating,
placing, and splicing the reinforcement. In Structures of reinforced concrete where there are
no structural steel Bid items, such minor metal parts as expansion joints, bearing assemblies,
and bolts will be paid for at the unit Contract price for “St. Reinf. Bar ____” unless
otherwise specified.
“Gravel Backfill for Foundation Class A”, per cubic yard.
“Gravel Backfill for Foundation Class B”, per cubic yard.
“Gravel Backfill for Wall”, per cubic yard.
“Deficient Strength Conc. Price Adjustment”, by calculation.
“Deficient Strength Conc. Price Adjustment” shall be calculated and paid for as described
in Section 6-02.3(5)L. For the purpose of providing a common Proposal for all Bidders,
the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item “Deficient Strength Conc. Price
Adjustment” in the Bid Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor. The
item “Deficient Strength Conc. Price Adjustment” covers all applicable classes of concrete.
“Expansion Joint System _____ - Superstr.”, per linear foot.
“Expansion Joint Modification - ___”, per linear foot.
“Prestressed Conc. Girder ___”, per linear foot.
“Bridge Approach Slab”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Bridge Approach Slab” shall be full pay
for providing, placing, and compacting the crushed surfacing base course, furnishing and
placing Class 4000A concrete, and furnishing and installing compression seal, anchors, and
reinforcing steel.

Steel Structures 6-03
6-03 Steel Structures

6-03.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing, fabricating, erecting, cleaning, and painting steel
Structures and the structural steel parts of nonsteel Structures
6-03.2 Materials
Structural Steel and Related Materials 9-06
Paints 9-08
Grout 9-20.3
Structural steel shall be classified as:
1. Structural carbon steel (to be used whenever the Plans do not specify another
classification),
2. Structural low alloy steel, and
3. Structural high-strength steel.
Unless the Plans or Special Provisions state otherwise, the following shall be classified as
structural carbon steel: shims; ladders; stairways; anchor bolts and sleeves; pipe, fittings, and
fastenings used in handrails; and other metal parts, even if made of other materials, for which
payment is not specified.
All AASHTO M270 material used in what the Plans show as main load-carrying tension
members or as tension components of flexural members shall meet the Charpy V-notch
requirements of AASHTO M270 temperature zone 2. All AASHTO M270 material used in
what the Plans show as fracture critical members shall meet the Charpy V-notch requirements
of AASHTO M270, Fracture Critical Impact Test Requirements, temperature zone 2.
Charpy V-notch requirements for other steel materials shall be as specified in the Plans and
Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings describing the methods for visibly
marking the material so that it can be traced. These marks shall remain visible at least through
the fit-up of the main load-carrying tension members. The marking method shall permit the
Engineer to verify: (1) material Specification designation, (2) heat number, and (3) material
test reports to meet any special requirements.
For steel in main load-carrying tension members and in tension components of flexural
members, the Contractor shall include the heat numbers on the reproducible copies of the
as‑built shop plans.
Structural steel fabricators of plate and box girders, floorbeams, truss members, stringers,
cross frames, diaphragms, and laterals shall be certified under the AISC Certification Program
for Steel Bridge Fabricators, Advanced Bridges Category. When fracture critical members
are specified in the Contract, structural steel fabricators shall also meet the supplemental
requirements F, Fracture Critical, under the AISC Quality Certification Program for Steel
Bridge Fabricators.
6-03.3(1) Vacant
6-03.3(2) Facilities for Inspection
The Contractor shall provide all facilities the Inspector requires to inspect material and
workmanship. Inspectors shall be given safe and free access to all areas in the mill and shop.
6-03.3(3) Inspector’s Authority
The Inspector may reject materials or workmanship that does not comply with these
Specifications. In any dispute, the Contractor may appeal to the Engineer whose decision
shall be final.

By its inspection at the mill and shop, the Contracting Agency intends only to facilitate the
Work and prevent errors. This inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility
for identifying and replacing defective material or workmanship.
6-03.3(4) Rejections
Even if the Inspector accepts materials or finished members, the Contracting Agency may
later reject them if defective. The Contractor shall promptly replace or make good any rejected
materials or workmanship.
6-03.3(5) Mill Orders and Shipping Statements
The Contractor shall furnish as many copies of mill orders and shipping statements as the
Engineer requires.
6-03.3(6) Weighing
Structural steel need not be weighed unless the Plans or Special Provisions require it.
When a weight is required, it may either be calculated or obtained by scales. The Contractor
shall furnish as many copies of the calculations or weight slips as the Engineer requires.
If scale weights are used, the Contractor shall record separately the weights of all tools,
erection material, and dunnage.
6-03.3(7) Shop Plans
The Contractor shall submit all shop detail plans for fabricating the steel as Type 2
Working Drawings.
If these plans will be submitted directly from the fabricator, the Contractor shall so notify
the Engineer in writing.
No material shall be fabricated until: (1) the Working Drawing review is complete, and
(2) the Engineer has accepted the materials source.
Before physical completion of the project, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer one
set of reproducible copies of the as built shop plans. The reproducible copies shall be clear,
suitable for microfilming, and on permanent sheets that measure no smaller than 11 by
17 inches. Alternatively, the shop drawings may be provided in an electronic format with the
approval of the Engineer.
6-03.3(7)A Erection Methods
Before beginning to erect any steel Structure, the Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working
Drawings consisting of the erection plan and procedure describing the methods the Contractor
intends to use.
The erection plan and procedure shall provide complete details of the erection process
including, at a minimum, the following:
1. Temporary falsework support, bracing, guys, deadmen, and attachments to other
Structure components or objects;
2. Procedure and sequence of operation;
3. Girder stresses during progressive stages of erection;
4. Girder masses, lift points, and lifting devices, spreaders, glommers, etc.;
5. Crane(s) make and model, mass, geometry, lift capacity, outrigger size and reactions;
6. Girder launcher or trolley details and capacity (if intended for use); and
7. Locations of cranes, barges, trucks delivering girders, and the location of cranes and
outriggers relative to other Structures, including retaining walls and wing walls.
As part of the erection plan Working Drawings, the Contractor may submit details of
an engineered and fabricated lifting bracket bolted to the girder top flanges providing the
following requirements are satisfied:
1. The lifting bracket shall be engineered and supporting calculations shall be submitted
with the erection plan;

2. The calculations shall include critical stresses in the girder including local stresses in
the flanges at lifting bracket locations;
3. The calculations shall include computation of the lifting bracket and associated bolt
hole locations and the expected orientation of the girder during picking operation;
4. The lifting bracket shall be load tested and certified for a load at least 2 times the
working load and at all angles it will be used (angle of load or rigging). Certification
documentation from a previous project may be submitted;
5. Bolt holes in girders added for the lifting bracket connections shall be shown in the
shop plans and shall be drilled in the shop. Field drilling of bolt holes for lifting
brackets will not be permitted;
6. Bolt holes in girder top flanges shall be filled with high strength bolts after erection
in accordance with Section 6-02.3(17)K.
The erection plan shall include drawings, notes, catalog cuts, and calculations clearly
showing the above listed details, assumptions, and dimensions. Material properties,
Specifications, structural analysis, and any other data used shall also be included.
6-03.3(8) Substitutions
The Contractor shall not substitute sections that differ from Plan dimensions unless the
Engineer approves in writing. If the Contractor requests and receives approval to substitute
heavier members, the Contracting Agency shall not pay any added cost.
6-03.3(9) Handling, Storing, and Shipping of Materials
Markings applied at the mill shall distinguish structural low alloy steel from structural
carbon steel. The fabricator shall keep the two classes of steel carefully separated.
Before fabrication, all material stored at the fabricating plant shall be protected from rust,
dirt, oil, and other foreign matter. The Contracting Agency will accept no rust-pitted material.
After fabrication, all material awaiting shipment shall be subject to the same storage
requirements as unfabricated material.
All structural steel shall arrive at the job in good condition. As the Engineer requires, steel
damaged by salt water shipment shall be thoroughly cleaned by high pressure water flushing,
chemical cleaning, or sandblasting, and repainted with the specified shop coat.
All material shall be stored so as to prevent rust and loss of small parts. Piled material shall
not rest on the ground or in water but on skids or platforms.
The loading, transporting, unloading, and piling of the structural steel material shall be
so conducted that the metal will be kept clean and free from injury from rough handling.
In field assembly of structural parts, the Contractor shall use methods and equipment not
likely to twist, bend, deform, or otherwise injure the metal. Any member slightly bent or
twisted shall be corrected before it is placed. The Contracting Agency will reject any member
with serious handling damage.
Girder sections shall be handled so as to prevent damage to the girders. If necessary,
the Contractor shall provide temporary stiffeners to prevent buckling during erection.
6-03.3(10) Straightening Bent Material
If the Engineer permits in writing, plates, angles, other shapes, and built-up members
may be straightened. Straightening methods shall not fracture or injure the metal. Distorted
members shall be straightened mechanically. A limited amount of localized heat may
be applied only if carefully planned and supervised, and only in accordance with the
heat‑straightening procedure Working Drawing submittal.
Parts to be heat-straightened shall be nearly free from all stress and external forces except
those that result from the mechanical pressure used with the heat.
After straightening, the Contractor shall inspect the member for fractures using a method
proposed by the Contractor and accepted by the Contracting Agency.

The Contracting Agency will reject metal showing sharp kinks and bends.
The procedure for heat straightening of universal mill (UM) plates by the mill or the
fabricator shall be submitted as a Type 2 Working Drawing.
6-03.3(11) Workmanship and Finish
Workmanship and finish shall be first-class, equaling the best practice in modern bridge
fabrication shops. Welding, shearing, burning, chipping, and grinding shall be done neatly
and accurately. All parts of the Work exposed to view shall be neatly finished.
Wherever the Plans show a surface finish symbol, the surface shall be machined.
6-03.3(12) Falsework
All falsework shall meet the requirements of Section 6-02.
6-03.3(13) Fabricating Tension Members
Plates for main load-carrying tension members or tension components of flexural members
shall be:
1. Blast cleaned entirely or blast cleaned on all areas within 2 inches of welds to
SSPC‑SP6, Commercial Blast Cleaning; and
2. Fabricated from plate stock with the primary rolling direction of the stock parallel to
the length of the member, or as shown in the Plans.
6-03.3(14) Edge Finishing
All rolled, sheared, and thermal cut edges shall be true to line and free of rough corners
and projections. Corners along exposed sheared or cut edges shall be broken by light grinding
or another method acceptable to the Engineer to achieve an approximate 1⁄16-inch chamfer
or rounding.
Sheared edges on plates more than ⅝ inch thick shall be planed, milled, ground, or thermal
cut to a depth of at least ⅛ inch.
Re-entrant corners or cuts shall be filleted to a minimum radius of 1 inch.
Exposed edges of main load-carrying tension members or tension components of flexural
members shall have a surface roughness no greater than 250-micro inches as defined by the
American National Standards Institute, ANSI B46.1, Surface Texture. Exposed edges of other
members shall have surface roughness no greater than 1,000-micro inches.
The Rockwell hardness of thermal-cut edges of structural low alloy or high-strength steel
flanges, as specified in Sections 9-06.2 and 9-06.3, for main load-carrying tension members
or tension components of flexural members shall not exceed RHC 30. The fabricator shall
prevent excessive hardening of flange edges through preheating, post heating, or control of
the burning process as recommended by the steel manufacturer.
Hardness testing shall consist of testing thermal-cut edges with a portable hardness tester.
The hardness tester, and its operating test procedures, shall be submitted as a Type 1 Working
Drawing. The hardness tester shall be convertible to Rockwell C scale values.
At two locations, two tests shall be performed on each thermal-cut edge, one each within
¼ inch of the top and bottom surfaces. The tests shall be located ¼ the length of each thermal-
cut edge from each end of the cut. If one or more readings are greater than RHC 30, the entire
length of the edge shall be ground or machined to a depth sufficient to provide acceptable
readings upon further retests. If thermal-cutting operations conform to procedures established
by the steel manufacturer, and hardness testing results are consistently within acceptable
limits, the Engineer may authorize a reduction in the testing frequency.
6-03.3(15) Planing of Bearing Surfaces
Ends of columns that bear on base and cap plates shall be milled to true surfaces and
accurate bevels.

When assembled, caps and base plates of columns and the sole plates of girders and
trusses shall have a fit tolerance within 1⁄32 inch for 75 percent of the contact area. If warped
or deformed, the plates shall be heat straightened, planed, or corrected in some other way
to produce accurate, even contact. If necessary for proper contact, bearing surfaces that will
contact other metal surfaces shall be planed or milled. Surfaces of warped or deformed base
and sole plates that will contact masonry shall be rough finished.
On the surface of expansion bearings, the cut of the planer shall be in the direction
of expansion.
Where mill to bear is specified in the Plans, the bearing end of the stiffener shall be flush
and square with the flange and shall have at least 75 percent of this area in contact with
the flange.
6-03.3(16) Abutting Joints
Abutting ends of compression members shall be faced accurately so that they bear evenly
when in the Structure. On built-up members, the ends shall be faced or milled after fabrication.
Ends of tension members at splices shall be rough finished to produce neat, close joints.
A contact fit is not required.
6-03.3(17) End Connection Angles
On floorbeams and stringers, end connection angles shall be flush with each other and set
accurately in relationship to the position and length of the member. Unless the Plans require it,
end connection angles shall not be finished. If, however, faulty assembly requires them to be
milled, milling shall not reduce thickness by more than ¹⁄16 inch.
6-03.3(18) Built Members
The various pieces forming one built member shall be straight and close fitting, true to
detailed dimensions, and free from twists, bends, open joints, or other defects.
When fabricating curved girders, localized heat or the use of mechanical force shall not be
used to bend the girder flanges about an axis parallel to girder webs.
6-03.3(19) Hand Holes
Hand holes, whether punched or cut with burning torches, shall be true to sizes and shapes
shown in the Plans. Edges shall be true to line and ground smooth.
6-03.3(20) Lacing Bars
Unless the Plans state otherwise, ends of lacing bars shall be neatly rounded.
6-03.3(21) Plate Girders
6-03.3(21)A Web Plates
If web plates are spliced, gaps between plate ends shall be set at shop assembly to measure
¼ inch, and shall not exceed ⅜ inch.
6-03.3(21)B Vacant
6-03.3(21)C Web Splices and Fillers
Web splice plates and fillers under stiffeners shall fit within ⅛ inch at each end. In lieu of
the steel material specified in the Plans or Special Provisions, the Contractor may substitute
ASTM A1008 or ASTM A1011 steel for all filler plates less than ¼ inch thickness, provided
that the grade of filler plate steel meets or exceeds that of the splice plates.
6-03.3(22) Eyebars
Eyebars shall be straight, true to size, and free from twists or folds in the neck or head and
from any other defect that would reduce their strength. Heads shall be formed by upsetting,
rolling, or forging. Dies in use by the manufacturer may determine the shape of bar heads
if the Engineer approves. Head and neck thickness shall not overrun by more than ¹⁄16 inch.
Welds shall not be made in the body or head of any bar.
Each eyebar shall be properly annealed and carefully straightened before it is bored.
Pinholes shall be located on the centerline of each bar and in the center of its head. Holes
in bar ends shall be so precisely located that in a pile of bars for the same truss panel the
pins may be inserted completely without driving. All eyebars made for the same locations
in trusses shall be interchangeable.
6-03.3(23) Annealing
All eyebars shall be annealed by being heated uniformly to the proper temperature, then
cooled slowly and evenly in the furnace. At all stages, the temperature of the bars shall be
under full control.
Slight bends on secondary steel members may be made without heat. Crimped web
stiffeners need no annealing.
6-03.3(24) Pins and Rollers
Pins and rollers shall be made of the class of forged steel the Plans specify. They shall be
turned accurately to detailed dimensions, smooth, straight, and flawless. The final surface shall
be produced by a finishing cut.
Pins and rollers 9 inches or less in diameter may either be forged and annealed or made of
cold-finished carbon steel shafting.
Pins more than 9 inches in diameter shall have holes at least 2 inches in diameter bored
longitudinally through their centers. Pins with inner defects will be rejected.
The Contractor shall provide pilot and driving nuts for each size of pin unless the Plans
state otherwise.
6-03.3(24)A Boring Pin Holes
Pin holes shall be bored true to detailed dimensions, smooth and straight, and at right
angles to the axis of the member. Holes shall be parallel with each other unless the Plans state
otherwise. A finishing cut shall always be made.
The distance between holes shall not vary from detailed dimensions by more than ¹⁄32 inch.
In tension members, this distance shall be measured from outside to outside of holes;
in compression members, inside to inside.
6-03.3(24)B Pin Clearances
Each pin shall be ¹⁄50 inch smaller in diameter than its hole. All pins shall be numbered
after being fitted into their holes in the assembled member.
6-03.3(25) Welding and Repair Welding
Welding and repair welding of all steel bridges shall comply with the AASHTO/AWS
D1.5M/D1.5, latest edition, Bridge Welding Code. Welding and repair welding for all other
steel fabrication shall comply with the AWS D1.1/D1.1M, latest edition, Structural Welding
Code. The requirements described in the remainder of this section shall prevail whenever they
differ from either of the above welding codes.
The Contractor shall weld structural steel only to the extent shown in the Plans.
No welding, including tack and temporary welds shall be done in the shop or field unless
the location of the welds is shown on the approved shop drawings reviewed and accepted
by the Engineer.
Welding procedures shall accompany the shop drawing Working Drawing submittal.
The procedures shall specify the type of equipment to be used, electrode selection, preheat
requirements, base materials, and joint details. When the procedures are not prequalified by
AWS or AASHTO, evidence of qualification tests shall be submitted.
Welding shall not begin until completion of the shop plan Working Drawing review as
required in Section 6-03.3(7). These plans shall include procedures for welding, assembly, and
any heat-straightening or heat-curving.

Any welded shear connector longer than 8 inches may be made of two shorter shear
connectors joined with full-penetration welds.
In shielded metal-arc welding, the Contractor shall use low-hydrogen electrodes.
In submerged-arc welding, flux shall be oven-dried at 550ºF for at least 2 hours, then stored
in ovens held at 250ºF or more. If not used within 4 hours after removal from a drying or
storage oven, flux shall be redried before use.
Preheat and interpass temperatures shall conform to the applicable welding code as
specified in this section. When welding main members of steel bridges, the minimum preheat
shall not be less than 100ºF.
If groove welds (web-to-web or flange-to-flange) have been rejected, they may be repaired
no more than twice. If a third failure occurs, the Contractor shall:
1. Trim the members, if the Engineer concurs, at least ½ inch on each side of the weld; or
2. Replace the members at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
By using extension bars and runoff plates, the Contractor shall terminate groove welds in a
way that ensures the soundness of each weld to its ends. The bars and plates shall be removed
after the weld is finished and cooled. The weld ends shall then be ground smooth and flush
with the edges of abutting parts.
The Contractor shall not:
1. Weld with electrogas or electroslag methods,
2. Weld nor flame cut when the ambient temperature is below 20ºF, or
3. Use coped holes in the web for welding butt splices in the flanges unless the Plans
show them.
6-03.3(25)A Welding Inspection
The Contractor’s inspection procedures, techniques, methods, acceptance criteria, and
inspector qualifications for welding of steel bridges shall be in accordance with the AASHTO/
AWS D1.5M/D1.5: 2010 Bridge Welding Code. The Contractor’s inspection procedures,
techniques, methods, acceptance criteria, and inspector qualifications for welding of steel
Structures other than steel bridges shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, latest
edition, Structural Welding Code. The requirements described in the remainder of this
section shall prevail whenever they differ from either of the above welding codes.
Nondestructive testing in addition to visual inspection shall be performed by the
Contractor. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions,
the extent of inspection shall be as specified in this section. Testing and inspection shall apply
to welding performed in the shop and in the field.
After the Contractor’s welding inspection is complete, the Contractor shall allow the
Engineer sufficient time to perform quality assurance ultrasonic welding inspection.
6-03.3(25)A1 Visual Inspection
All welds shall be 100 percent visually inspected. Visual inspection shall be performed
before, during, and after the completion of welding.
6-03.3(25)A2 Radiographic Inspection
Complete penetration tension groove welds in Highway bridges shall be 100 percent
radiographically inspected. These welds include those in the tension area of webs, where
inspection shall cover the greater of these two distances: (a) 15 inches from the tension
flange, or (b) ⅓ of the web depth. In addition, edge blocks conforming to the requirements of
AASHTO/AWS D1.5M/D1.5: 2010 Bridge Welding Code Section 6.10.14 shall be used for
radiographic inspection.
The Contractor shall maintain the radiographs and the radiographic inspection report in
the shop until the last joint to be radiographed in that member is accepted by the radiographer
representing the Contractor. Within 2 working days following this acceptance, the Contractor

shall mail the film and two copies of the radiographic inspection report to the Materials
Engineer, Department of Transportation, PO Box 47365, Olympia, WA 98504-7365.
6-03.3(25)A3 Ultrasonic Inspection
Complete penetration groove welds on plates thicker than 5⁄16 inch in the following welded
assemblies or Structures shall be 100 percent ultrasonically inspected:
1. Welded connections and splices in Highway bridges and earth retaining Structures,
excluding longitudinal butt joint welds in beam or girder webs.
2. Bridge bearings and modular expansion joints.
3. Sign bridges, cantilever sign Structures, and bridge mounted sign brackets excluding
longitudinal butt joint welds in beams.
4. Light, signal, and strain pole standards, as defined in Section 9-29.6.
A minimum of 30 percent of complete penetration vertical welds on steel column jackets
thicker than 5/16-inch, within 1.50 column jacket diameter of the top and bottom of each
column, shall be inspected. If any rejectable flaws are found, 100 percent of the weld within
the specified limits shall be inspected. The largest column cross section diameter for tapered
column jackets shall constitute one column jacket diameter.
The testing procedure and acceptance criteria for tubular members shall conform to the
requirements of the AWS D1.1/D1.1M latest edition, Structural Welding Code.
6-03.3(25)A4 Magnetic Particle Inspection
1. Fillet and partial penetration groove welds:
At least 30 percent of each size and type of fillet welds (excluding intermittent fillet
welds) and partial penetration groove welds in the following welded assemblies or
Structures shall be tested by the magnetic particle method:
a. Flange-to-web connections in Highway bridges.
b. End and intermediate pier diaphragms in Highway bridges.
c. Stiffeners and connection plates in Highway bridges.
d. Welded connections and splices in earth retaining Structures.
e. Boxed members of trusses.
f. Bridge bearings and modular expansion joints.
g. Sign bridges, cantilever sign Structures, and bridge mounted sign brackets.
h. Light, signal, and strain pole standards, as defined in Section 9-29.6.
2. Longitudinal butt joint welds in beam and girder webs:
At least 30 percent of each longitudinal butt joint weld in the beam and girder webs
shall be tested by the magnetic particle method.
3. Complete penetration groove welds on plates 5⁄16 inch or thinner (excluding steel
column jackets) shall be 100 percent tested by the magnetic particle method. Testing
shall apply to both sides of the weld, if backing plate is not used. The ends of each
complete penetration groove weld at plate edges shall be tested by the magnetic
particle method.
4. A minimum of 30 percent of complete penetration vertical welds on steel column
jackets 5/16 inch or thinner, within 1.50 column jacket diameters of the top and bottom
of each column, shall be magnetic particle inspected. The largest column cross section
diameter for tapered column jackets shall constitute one column jacket diameter.
Where 100 percent testing is not required, the Engineer reserves the right to select the
location(s) for testing.
If rejectable flaws are found in any test length of weld in item 1 or 2 above, the full length
of the weld or 5 feet on each side of the test length, whichever is less, shall be tested. If any
rejectable flaws are found in any test length of item 4 above, 100 percent of the weld within
the specified limits shall be inspected.

6-03.3(26) Screw Threads
Screw threads shall be U.S. Standard and shall fit closely in the nuts.
6-03.3(27) High-Strength Bolt Holes
At the Contractor’s option under the conditions described in this section, holes may
be punched or subpunched and reamed, drilled or subdrilled and reamed, or formed by
numerically controlled drilling operations.
The hole for each high-strength bolt shall be ¹⁄16 inch larger than the nominal diameter of
the bolt.
In fabricating any connection, the Contractor may subdrill or subpunch the holes then ream
full size after assembly or drill holes full size from the solid with all thicknesses of material
shop assembled in the proper position. If the Contractor chooses not to use either of these
methods, then the following shall apply:
1. Drill bolt holes in steel splice plates full size using steel templates.
2. Drill bolt holes in the main members of trusses, arches, continuous beam spans, bents,
towers, plate girders, box girders, and rigid frames at all connections as follows:
a. A minimum of 30 percent of the holes in one side of the connection shall be made
full size using steel templates.
b. A minimum of 30 percent of the holes in the second side shall be made full size
assembled in the shop.
c. All remaining holes may be made full size in unassembled members using
steel templates.
3. Drill bolt holes in crossframes, gussets, lateral braces, and other secondary members
full size using steel templates.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of a detailed outline of
the procedures proposed to accomplish the Work from initial drilling through shop assembly.
6-03.3(27)A Punched Holes
For punched holes, die diameter shall not exceed punch diameter by more than ¹⁄16 inch.
Any hole requiring enlargement to admit the bolt shall be reamed. All holes shall be cut clean
with no torn or ragged edges. The Contracting Agency will reject components having poorly
matched holes.
6-03.3(27)B Reamed and Drilled Holes
Reaming and drilling shall be done with short taper reamers or twist drills, producing
cylindrical holes perpendicular to the member. Reamers and drills shall be directed
mechanically, not hand-held. Connecting parts that require reamed or drilled holes shall
be assembled and held securely as the holes are formed, then match-marked before
disassembly. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a diagram showing these match-
marks. The Contracting Agency will reject components having poorly matched holes.
Burrs on outside surfaces shall be removed. If the Engineer requires, the Contractor
shall disassemble parts to remove burrs.
If templates are used to ream or drill full-size connection holes, the templates shall be
positioned and angled with extreme care and bolted firmly in place. Templates for reaming
or drilling matching members or the opposite faces of one member shall be duplicates.
All splice components shall be match-marked unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
6-03.3(27)C Numerically Controlled Drilled Connections
In forming any hole described in Section 6-03.3(27), the fabricator may use numerically
controlled (N/C) drilling or punching equipment if it meets the requirements in this
Subsection.
The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of a detailed outline of
proposed N/C procedures. This outline shall:

1. Cover all steps from initial drilling or punching through check assembly;
2. Include the specific members of the Structure to be drilled or punched, hole sizes,
locations of the common index and other reference points, makeup of check assemblies,
and all other information needed to describe the process fully.
N/C holes may be drilled or punched to size through individual pieces, or may be drilled
through any combination of tightly clamped pieces.
When the Engineer requires, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the N/C procedure
consistently produces holes and connections meeting the requirements of these Specifications.
6-03.3(27)D Accuracy of Punched, Subpunched, and Subdrilled Holes
After shop assembly and before reaming, all punched, subpunched, and subdrilled
holes shall meet the following standard of accuracy. At least 75 percent of the holes in each
connection shall permit the passage of a cylindrical pin ⅛ inch smaller in diameter than
nominal hole size. This pin shall pass through at right angles to the face of the member without
drifting. All holes shall permit passage of a pin ³⁄16 inch smaller in diameter than nominal hole
size. The Contracting Agency will reject any pieces that fail to meet these standards.
6-03.3(27)E Accuracy of Reamed and Drilled Holes
At least 85 percent of all holes in a connection of reamed or drilled holes shall show no
offset greater than ¹⁄32 inch between adjacent thicknesses of metal. No hole shall have an offset
greater than ¹⁄16 inch.
Centerlines from the connection shall be inscribed on the template and holes shall be
located from these centerlines. Centerlines shall also be used for accurately locating the
template relative to the milled or scribed ends of the members.
Templates shall have hardened steel bushing inserted into each hole. These bushings may
be omitted, however, if the fabricator satisfies the Engineer (1) that the template will be used
no more than five times, and (2) that use will produce no template wear.
Each template shall be at least ½ inch thick. If necessary, thicker templates shall be used
to prevent buckling and misalignment as holes are formed.
6-03.3(27)F Fitting for Bolting
Before drilling, reaming, and bolting begins, all parts of a member shall be assembled,
well pinned, and drawn firmly together. If necessary, assembled pieces shall be taken apart to
permit removal of any burrs or shavings produced as the holes are formed. The member shall
be free from twists, bends, and other deformation.
In shop-bolted connections, contacting metal surfaces shall be sandblasted clean
before assembly. Sandblasting shall meet the requirements of the SSPC Specifications for
Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP 6).
Any drifting done during assembly shall be no more than enough to bring the parts into
place. Drifting shall not enlarge the holes or distort the metal.
6-03.3(28) Shop Assembly
6-03.3(28)A Method of Shop Assembly
Unless the Contract states otherwise, the Contractor shall choose one of the five shop
assembly methods described below that will best fit the proposed erection method. The
Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of both the shop assembly and the erection
methods before Work begins.
1. Full Truss or Girder Assembly – Each truss or girder is completely assembled over
the full length of the Superstructure.
2. Progressive Truss or Girder Assembly – Each truss or girder is assembled in stages
longitudinally over the full length of the Superstructure.
a. For Trusses – The first stage shall include at least three adjacent truss panels.
Each truss panel shall include all of the truss members in the space bounded by

the top and bottom chords and the horizontal distance between adjacent bottom
chord Joints.
b. For Girders – The first stage shall include at least three adjacent girder shop
sections. Shop sections are measured from the end of the girder to the first field
splice or from field splice to field splice.
c. For Trusses and Girders – After the first stage has been completed, each
subsequent stage shall be assembled to include: at least one truss panel or girder
shop section of the previous stage and two or more truss panels or girder shop
sections added at the advancing end. The previous stages shall be repositioned if
necessary, and pinned to ensure accurate alignment. For straight sections of bridges
without skews or tapers, girders in each subsequent stage may be assembled to
include one girder shop section from the previous stage and one or more girder shop
sections at the advancing end.
If the bridge is longer than 150 feet, each longitudinal stage shall be at least
150 feet long, regardless of the length of individual continuous truss panels or
girder shop sections.
The Contractor may begin the assembly sequence at any point on the bridge and
proceed in either or both directions from that point.
Unless the Engineer approves otherwise, no assembly shall have less than three truss
panels or girder shop sections.
3. Full Chord Assembly – The full length of each chord for each truss is assembled with
geometric angles at the joints. Chord connection bolt holes are drilled/reamed while
members are assembled. The truss web member connections are drilled/reamed to steel
templates set by relating geometric angles to the chord lines.
At least one end of each web member shall be milled or scribed at right angles to its
long axis. The templates at both ends of the member shall be positioned accurately from
the milled end or scribed line.
4. Progressive Chord Assembly – Adjacent chord sections are assembled in the same
way as specified for Full Chord Assembly, using the procedure specified for Progressive
Truss or Girder Assembly.
5. Special Complete Structure Assembly – All structural steel members (Superstructure
and Substructure, including all secondary members) are assembled at one time.
6-03.3(28)B Check of Shop Assembly
The Contractor shall check each assembly for alignment, accuracy of holes, fit of milled
joints, and other assembly techniques. Drilling or reaming shall not begin until the Engineer
has given approval. If the Contractor uses N/C drilling, this approval must be obtained before
the assembly or stage is dismantled.
6-03.3(29) Welded Shear Connectors
Installation, production control, and inspection of welded shear connectors shall conform
to Chapter 7 of the AASHTO/AWS D1.5M/D1.5:2010 Bridge Welding Code. If welded shear
connectors are installed in the shop, installation shall be completed prior to applying the shop
primer coat in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9)G. If welded shear connectors are installed
in the field, the steel surface to be welded shall be prepared to SSPC-SP 11, power tool
cleaning, just prior to welding.
6-03.3(30) Painting
All painting shall be in accordance with Section 6-07.
6-03.3(30)A Vacant
6-03.3(30)B Vacant

6-03.3(30)C Erection Marks

Erection marks to permit identification of members in the field shall be painted on
previously painted surfaces.
6-03.3(30)D Machine Finished Surfaces
As soon as possible and before they leave the shop, machine-finished surfaces on abutting
chord splices, column splices, and column bases shall be covered with grease. After erection,
the steel shall be cleaned and painted as specified.
All surfaces of iron and steel castings milled to smooth the surface shall be painted with
the primer called for in the specified paint system.
While still in the shop, machine-finished surfaces and inaccessible surfaces of rocker or
pin-type bearings shall receive the full paint system. Surfaces of pins and holes machine-
finished to specific tolerances shall not be painted. But as soon as possible and before they
leave the shop, they shall be coated with grease.
6-03.3(31) Alignment and Camber
Before beginning field bolting, the Contractor shall:
1. Adjust the Structure to correct grade and alignment,
2. Regulate elevations of panel points (ends of floorbeams), and
3. Delay bolting at compression joints until adjusting the blocking to provide full and
even bearing over the whole joint.
On truss spans, a slight excess camber will be permitted as the bottom chords are bolted.
But camber and relative elevations of panel points shall be correct before the top chord joints,
top lateral system, and sway braces are bolted.
6-03.3(31)A Measuring Camber
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a diagram for each truss that shows camber
at each panel point. This diagram shall display actual measurements taken as the truss is
being assembled.
6-03.3(32) Assembling and Bolting
To begin bolting any field connection or splice, the Contractor shall install and tighten
to snug tight enough bolts to bring all parts into full contact with each other prior to
tightening these bolts to the specified minimum tension. “Snug tight” means either the
tightness reached by (l) a few blows from an impact wrench or (2) the full effort of a person
using a spud wrench.
As erection proceeds, all field connections and splices for each member shall be securely
drift pinned and bolted in accordance with 1 or 2 below before the weight of the member can
be released or the next member is added. Field erection drawings shall specify pinning and
bolting requirements that meet or exceed the following minimums:
1. Joints in Normal Structures – Fifty percent of the holes in a single field connection
and 50 percent of the holes on each side of a single joint in a splice plate shall be
filled with drift pins and bolts. Thirty percent of the filled holes shall be pinned.
Seventy percent of the filled holes shall be bolted and tightened to snug tight. Once all
these bolts are snug tight, each bolt shall be systematically tightened to the specified
minimum tension. “Systematically tightened” means beginning with bolts in the most
rigid part, which is usually the center of the joint, and working out to its free edges.
The fully tensioned bolts shall be located near the middle of a single field connection
or a single splice plate.
2. Joints in Cantilevered Structures – Seventy-five percent of the holes in a single field
connection and 75 percent of the holes on each side of a single joint in a splice plate
shall be filled with drift pins and bolts. Fifty percent of the filled holes shall be pinned.
Fifty percent of the filled holes shall be bolted and tightened to snug tight. Once all
these bolts are snug tight, each bolt shall be systematically tightened to the specified

minimum tension. The fully tensioned bolts shall be located near the middle of a single
field connection or a single splice plate.
Cylindrical erection pins (drift pins) shall be placed throughout each field connection and
each field joint with the greatest concentration in the outer edges of a splice plate or member
being bolted. Drift pins shall be double-tapered barrel pins of hardened steel. The diameter of
the drift pins shall be at least 1/32 inch larger than the diameter of the bolts in the connection
or the full hole diameter.
To complete a joint following one of the methods listed above, the Contractor shall fill
all remaining holes of the field connection or splice plate with bolts and tighten to snug
tight. Once all of these bolts are snug tight, each bolt shall be systematically tightened to
the specified minimum tension. After these bolts are tightened to the specified minimum
tension, the Contractor shall replace the drift pins with bolts tightened to the specified
minimum tension.
The Contractor shall complete the joint or connection within ten calendar days of
installing the first bolt or within a duration approved by the Engineer. Any bolts inserted in
an incomplete connection, either loose or tightened snug-tight, which exceed the specified
duration for completing the connection, shall be subject to the following requirements:
1. Three assemblies for each size and length shall be removed from connection(s) that are
to be tensioned. Rotational capacity tests shall be performed on the removed assemblies
to demonstrate the assembly has sufficient lubricant to be tensioned satisfactorily.
2. Five assemblies shall be removed from the connection to establish the
inspection torque.
3. In the case of tension controlled bolts, three assemblies shall be removed and tested in
accordance with Section 6-03.3(33)A to verify the minimum specified tension can be
achieved prior to shearing of the spline.
Assemblies removed for the purpose of rotational capacity testing, determination of the
inspection torques, or verification of tension controlled bolt performance shall be replaced
with new bolts at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. To minimize the number
of removed assemblies, the Contractor may combine rotational capacity testing and inspection
torque determination as approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor may complete a field bolted connection or splice in a continuous operation
before releasing the mass of the member or adding the next member. The Contractor shall
utilize drift pins to align the connection. The alignment drift pins shall fill between 15 and
30 percent of the holes in a single field connection and between 15 and 30 percent of the
holes on each side of a single joint in a splice plate. Once the alignment drift pins are in
place, all remaining holes shall be filled with bolts and tightened to snug tight starting from
near the middle and proceeding toward the outer gage lines. Once all of these bolts are snug
tight, the Contractor shall systematically tighten all these bolts to the specified minimum
tension. The Contractor shall then replace the drift pins with bolts. Each of these bolts shall
be tightened to the specified minimum tension.
All bolts shall be placed with heads toward the outside and underside of the bridge.
All high-strength bolts shall be installed and tightened before the falsework is removed.
The Contractor may erect metal railings as erection proceeds. But railings shall not be
bolted or adjusted permanently until the falsework is released and the deck placed.
The Contractor shall not begin painting until the Engineer has inspected and accepted
field bolting.
6-03.3(33) Bolted Connections
Fastener components shall consist of bolts, nuts, washers, tension control bolt assemblies,
and direct tension indicators. Fastener components shall meet the requirements of
Section 9-06.5(3).

The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings providing documentation

of the bolt tension calibrator, including brand, capacity, model, date of last calibration,
and manufacturer’s instructions for use. The Contractor shall supply the bolt tension
calibrator and all accompanying hardware and calibrated torque wrenches to conduct all
testing and inspections described herein. Use of the bolt tension calibrator shall comply
with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Fastener components shall be protected from dirt and moisture in closed containers at
the site of installation. Only as many fastener components as are anticipated to be installed
during the Work shift shall be taken from protected storage. Fastener components that are
not incorporated into the Work shall be returned to protected storage at the end of the Work
shift. Fastener components shall not be cleaned or modified from the as-delivered condition.
Fastener components that accumulate rust or dirt shall not be incorporated into the Work.
Tension control bolt assemblies shall not be relubricated, except by the manufacturer.
All bolted connections are slip critical. Painted structures require either Type 1 or Type
3 bolts. Bolts shall not be galvanized unless specified in the Contract documents. Unpainted
structures require Type 3 bolts. ASTM F3125 Grade A490 bolts shall not be galvanized and
shall not be used in contact with galvanized metal.
Washers are required under turned elements for bolted connections and as required in
the following:
1. Washers shall be used under both the head and the nut when ASTM F3125 Grade A490
bolts are to be installed in structural carbon steel, as specified in Section 9-06.1.
2. Where the outer face of the bolted parts has a slope greater than 1:20 with respect to
a plane normal to the bolt axis, a beveled washer shall be used.
3. Washers shall not be stacked unless otherwise specified by the Engineer.
4. It is acceptable to place a washer under the unturned element.
All galvanized nuts shall be lubricated by the manufacturer with a lubricant containing
a visible dye so a visual check for the lubricant can be made at the time of field installation.
Black bolts shall be lubricated by the manufacturer and shall be “oily” to the touch
when installed.
After assembly, bolted parts shall fit solidly together. They shall not be separated by
washers, gaskets, or any other material. Assembled joint surfaces, including those next to
bolt heads, nuts, and washers, shall be free of loose mill scale, burrs, dirt, and other foreign
material that would prevent solid seating.
When all bolts in a joint are tight, each bolt shall carry at least the proof load shown in
Table 1 below:
Table 1
Minimum Bolt Tension
ASTM F3125 Grade A325 and ASTM F3125
Bolt Size (inches) Grade F1852 (pounds) Grade A490 (pounds)
½ 12,050 14,900
⅝ 19,200 23,700
¾ 28,400 35,100
⅞ 39,250 48,500
1 51,500 63,600
1⅛ 56,450 80,100
1¼ 71,700 101,800
1⅜ 85,450 121,300
1½ 104,000 147,500
Prior to final tightening of any bolts in a bolted connection, the connection shall be
compacted to a snug tight condition. Snug tight shall include bringing all plies of the
connection into firm contact and snug tightening all bolts in accordance with Section 6-03.3(32).
Final tightening may be done by the Turn-of-Nut Method, the direct-tension indicator
method, or the twist off-type tension control structural bolt/nut/washer assembly method.
Preferably, the nut shall be turned tight while the bolt is prevented from rotating. However,
if required by either turn-of-nut or direct-tension-indicator methods because of bolt entering
and/or wrench operational clearances, tightening may be done by turning the bolt while the
nut is prevented from rotating.
1. Turn-of-Nut Method – After all specified bolting conditions are satisfied, and before
final tightening, the Contractor shall match-mark with crayon or paint the outer face
of each nut and the protruding part of the bolt. Each bolt shall be final tightened to the
specified minimum tension by rotating the amount specified in Table 2. To ensure this
tightening method is followed, the Engineer will (1) observe as the Contractor installs,
snug tightens, and final tightens all bolts and (2) inspect each match-mark.
Table 2
Turn-of-Nut Tightening Method Nut Rotational From Snug Tight Condition
Disposition of Outer Faces of Bolted Parts
Bolt Length Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
L <= 4D ⅓-turn ½-turn ⅔-turn
4D < L<= 8D ½-turn ⅔-turn 5⁄6-turn
8D < L<= 12D ⅔-turn 5⁄6-turn 1-turn
Bolt length measured from underside of head to top of nut.
Condition 1 – Both faces at right angles to bolt axis.
Condition 2 – One face at right angle to bolt axis, one face sloped no more than 1:20,
without bevel washer.
Condition 3 – Both faces sloped no more than 1:20 from right angle to bolt axis,
without bevel washer.
Nut rotation is relative to the bolt regardless of which element (nut or bolt) is being
turned. Tolerances permitted plus or minus 30 degrees (1⁄12-turn) for final turns of
½-turn or less; plus or minus 45 degrees (⅛-turn) for final turns of ⅔-turn or more.
D = nominal bolt diameter of bolt being tightened.
When bolt length exceeds 12D, the rotation shall be determined by actual tests in which
a suitable tension device simulates actual conditions.
2. Direct Tension Indicator Method (DTIs) – Shall not be used under the turned
element. DTIs shall be placed under the bolt head with the protrusions facing the bolt
head when the nut is turned. DTIs shall be placed under the nut with the protrusions
facing the nut when the bolt is turned.
Gap refusal shall be measured with a 0.005 inch tapered feeler gage. After all specified
bolting conditions are satisfied, the snug tightened gaps shall meet Table 3 snug
tight limits.
Each bolt shall be final-tightened to meet Table 3 final-tighten limits. If the bolt
is tensioned so that no visible gap in any space remains, the bolt and DTI shall be
removed and replaced by a new properly tensioned bolt and DTI.
The Contractor shall tension all bolts, inspecting all DTIs with a feeler gage, in the
presence of the Engineer. DTIs shall be installed by two-person (or more) crews, with
one individual (1) preventing the element at the DTI from turning and (2) measuring
the gap of the DTI to determine the proper tension of the bolt.
If a bolt, that has had its DTI brought to full load, loosens during the course of
bolting the connection, it shall be rejected. Reuse of the bolt and nut are subject to
the provisions of this section. The used DTI shall not be reinstalled.

Table 3
Direct Tension Indicator Requirements
DTI Spaces Maximum Snug Tight Refusals Minimum Final Tighten Refusals
Bolt Size ASTM F3125 ASTM F3125 ASTM F3125 ASTM F3125 ASTM F3125 ASTM F3125
(inches) Grade A 325 Grade A490 Grade A 325 Grade A490 Grade A 325 Grade A490
½ 4 5 1 2 2 3
⅝ 4 5 1 2 2 3
¾ 5 6 2 2 3 3
⅞ 5 6 2 2 3 3
1 6 7 2 3 3 4
1⅛ 6 7 2 3 3 4
1¼ 7 8 3 3 4 4
1⅜ 7 8 3 3 4 4
1½ 8 9 3 4 4 5
3. Twist Off-Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assembly Method

(Tension Control Bolt Assembly) – Tension control bolt assemblies shall include the
bolt, nut, and washer(s) packaged and shipped as a single assembly. Unless otherwise
accepted by the Engineer, tension control bolt assembly components shall not be
interchanged for testing or installation and shall comply with all provisions of ASTM
F3125 Grade F1852. If accepted by the Engineer, the tension control bolt assembly
components may be interchanged within the same component lot for girder web slices
or other locations where access to both sides of the connection is restricted.
The tension control bolts shall incorporate a design feature intended to either indirectly
indicate, or to automatically provide, the minimum tension specified in Table 1.
The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings of the tension control bolt
assembly, including bolt capacities; type of bolt, nut, and washer lubricant; method
of packaging and protection of the lubricated bolt; installation equipment; calibration
equipment; and installation procedures.
The tension control bolt manufacturer’s installation procedure shall be followed for
installation of bolts in the verification testing device, in all calibration devices, and
in all structure connections.
In some cases, proper tensioning of the bolts may require more than one cycle of
systematic partial tightening prior to final yield or fracture of the tension control
element of each bolt. If yield or fracture of the tension control element of a bolt
occurs prior to the final tightening cycle, that bolt shall be replaced with a new one.
Additional field verification testing shall be performed as requested by the Engineer.
All bolts and connecting hardware shall be stored and handled in a manner to prevent
corrosion and loss of lubricant. Bolts that are installed without the same lubricant
coating as tested under the verification test will be rejected, and they shall be removed
from the joint and be replaced with new lubricated bolts at no additional cost to the
Contracting Agency.
ASTM F3125 Grade A490 bolts, galvanized ASTM F3125 Grade A325 bolts, and ASTM
F3125 Grade F1852 tension control bolt assemblies shall not be reused. Black ASTM F3125
Grade A325 bolts may be reused once if accepted by the Engineer. All bolts to be reused shall
have their threads inspected for distortion by reinstalling the used nut on the bolt and turning
the nut for the full length of the bolt threads by hand. Bolts to be reused shall be relubricated
in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation. Used bolts shall be subject to a
rotational capacity test as specified in Section 6-03.3(33)A Pre-Erection Testing. Touching
up or retightening bolts previously tightened by the Turn-of-Nut Method, which may have
been loosened by the tightening of adjacent bolts shall not be considered as reuse, provided

the snugging up continues from the initial position and does not require greater rotation,
including the tolerance, than that required by Table 2.
6-03.3(33)A Pre-Erection Testing
High-strength bolt assemblies (bolt, nut, direct tension indicator, and washer), both black
and galvanized, shall be subjected to a field rotational capacity test, as outlined below, prior
to any permanent fastener installation. For field installations, the rotational capacity test
shall be conducted at the jobsite. Each combination of bolt production lot, nut production
lot, washer production lot, and direct tension indicator production lot shall be tested as an
assembly, except tension control bolt assemblies, which shall be tested as supplied by the
manufacturer. Each rotational capacity test shall include three assemblies. Once an assembly
passes the rotational capacity test, it is accepted for use for the remainder of the project unless
the Engineer deems further testing is necessary. All tests shall be performed in a bolt tension
calibrator by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. High-strength bolt assemblies
used in this test shall not be reused. The bolt assemblies shall meet the following requirements
after being pretensioned to 15 percent of the minimum bolt tension in Table 1. The assembly
shall be considered as nonconforming if the assembly fails to pass any one of the following
specified requirements:
1. The measured torque to produce the minimum bolt tension shall not exceed the
maximum allowed torque value obtained by the following equation:
Torque = 0.25 PD
Where:
Torque = Calculated Torque (foot-pounds)
P = Measured Bolt Tension (pounds)
D = Normal Bolt Diameter (feet)
2. After placing the assembly through two cycles of the required number of turns, where
turns are measured from the 15 percent pretension condition, as indicated in Table 2,
a. The maximum recorded tension after the two turns shall be equal to or greater than
1.15 times the minimum bolt tension listed in Table 1.
b. Each assembly shall be successfully installed to the specified number of turns.
c. The fastener components in the assembly shall not exhibit shear failure or stripping
of the threads as determined by visual examination of bolt and nut threads
following removal.
d. The bolts in the assembly shall not exhibit torsional or torsional/tension failure.
3. If any specimen fails, the assembly will be rejected. Elongation of the bolt between the
bolt head and the nut is not considered to be a failure.
Bolts that are too short to test in the bolt tension calibrator shall be tested in a steel joint.
The Contractor shall (1) install the high-strength bolt assemblies (bolt, nut, direct tension
indicator, and washer) in a steel joint of the proper thickness; (2) tighten to the snug tight
condition; (3) match-mark the outer face of each nut and the protruding part of the bolt with
crayon or paint; (4) rotate to the requirements of Table 2; and (5) record the torque that is
required to achieve the required amount of rotation. The assembly shall be considered as
nonconforming if the assembly fails to pass any one of the following specified requirements:
1. The recorded torque to produce the minimum rotation shall not exceed the maximum
allowed torque value obtained by the following equation:
Torque = 0.25 PD
Where:
Torque = Calculated Maximum Allowed Torque (foot-pounds)
P = Specified Bolt Tension per Table 1, multiplied by a factor of
1.15 (pounds)
D = Normal Bolt Diameter (feet)

2. After placing the assembly through two cycles of the required number of turns, where
turns are measured from the snug tight condition specified in Section 6-03.3(32):
a. Each assembly shall be successfully installed to the specified number of turns.
b. The fastener components in the assembly shall not exhibit shear failure or stripping
of the threads as determined by visual examination of bolt and nut threads
following removal.
c. The bolts in the assembly shall not exhibit torsional or torsional/tension failure.
3. If any specimen fails, the assembly will be rejected. Elongation of the bolt between
the bolt head and the nut is not considered to be a failure.
The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of the manufacturer’s
detailed procedure for pre-erection (rotational capacity) testing of tension control
bolt assemblies.
Three DTIs, per lot, shall be tested in a bolt tension calibrator. The bolts shall be tensioned
to 105 percent of the tension shown in Table 1. If all of the DTI protrusions are completely
crushed (all five openings with zero gap), this lot of DTIs is rejected.
Three twist off-type tension controlled bolt assemblies, per assembly lot, shall be tested in
a bolt tension calibrator. The bolts shall first be tensioned to a snug tight condition. Tensioning
shall then be completed by tightening the assembly nut in a continuous operation using a
spline drive installation tool until the spline shears from the bolt. The bolt assembly tension
shall meet the requirements of Table 1. If any specimen fails, the assembly lot is rejected.
6-03.3(33)B Bolting Inspection
The Contractor, in the presence of the Engineer, shall inspect the tightened bolt using a
calibrated inspection torque wrench, regardless of bolting method. The Contractor shall supply
the inspection torque wrench. Inspection shall be performed within seven calendar days from
the completion of each bolted connection or as specified by the Engineer.
If the bolts to be installed are not long enough to fit in the bolt tension calibrator, five bolts
of the same grade, size, and condition as those under inspection shall be tested using Direct-
Tension-Indicators (DTIs) to measure bolt tension. This tension measurement test shall be
done at least once each inspection day. The Contractor shall supply the necessary DTIs. The
DTI shall be placed under the bolt head. A washer shall be placed under the nut, which shall
be the element turned during the performance of this tension measurement test. Each bolt
shall be tightened by any convenient means to the specified minimum tension as indicated
by the DTI. The inspecting wrench shall then be applied to the tightened bolt to determine
the torque required to turn the nut 5 degrees (approximately 1 inch at a 12-inch radius) in the
tightening direction. The job inspection torque shall be taken as the average of three values
thus determined after rejecting the high and low values.
Five representative bolts/nuts/washers and DTIs if used (provided by the Contractor) of
the same grade, size, and condition as those under inspection shall be placed individually in a
bolt tension calibrator to measure bolt tension. This calibration operation shall be done at least
once each inspection day. There shall be a washer under the part turned in tightening each bolt
if washers are used on the Structure. In the bolt tension calibrator, each bolt shall be tightened
by any convenient means to the specified tension. The inspection torque wrench shall then be
applied to the tightened bolt to determine the torque required to turn the nut or head 5 degrees
(approximately 1 inch at a 12-inch radius) in the tightening direction. The job-inspection
torque shall be taken as the average of three values thus determined after rejecting the high
and low values.
Ten percent (at least two), or as specified by the Engineer, of the tightened bolts on the
Structure represented by the test bolts shall be selected at random in each connection. The
job-inspection torque shall then be applied to each with the inspecting wrench turned in the
tightening direction, with no restraint applied to the opposite end of the bolt. If this torque
turns no bolt head or nut, the Contracting Agency will accept the connection as being properly
tightened. If the torque turns one or more bolt heads or nuts, the job-inspection torque shall

then be applied to all bolts in the connection. Except for tension control bolt assemblies and
DTIs with zero gap at all protrusion spaces, any bolt whose head or nut turns at this stage
shall be tightened and reinspected. Any tension control bolt assemblies or DTIs that have
zero gap at all protrusion spaces shall be replaced if the head or nut turns at this stage.
The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of the manufacturer’s
detailed procedure for routine observation to ensure proper use of the tension control
bolt assemblies.
6-03.3(34) Adjusting Pin Nuts
All pin nuts shall be tightened thoroughly. The pins shall be placed so that members bear
fully and evenly on the nuts. The pins shall have enough thread to allow burring after the nuts
are tightened.
6-03.3(35) Setting Anchor Bolts
Anchor bolts shall be set in masonry as required in Section 6-02.3(18). Anchor bolts shall
be grouted in after the shoes, masonry plates, and keeper plates have been set and the span or
series of continuous spans are completely erected and adjusted to line and camber.
6-03.3(36) Setting and Grouting Masonry Plates
The following procedure applies to masonry plates for all steel spans, including shoes,
keeper plates, and turning racks on movable bridges.
To set masonry plates, the Contractor shall:
1. Set masonry plates on the anchor bolts;
2. Place steel shims under the masonry plates to position pin centers or bearings to line
and grade and in relationship to each other. Steel shims shall be the size and be placed
at the locations shown in the Plans;
3. Level the bases of all masonry plates;
4. Draw anchor bolt nuts down tight;
5. Recheck pin centers or bearings for alignment; and
6. Leave at least ¾ inch of space under each masonry plate for grout.
After the masonry plates have been set and the span or series of continuous spans are
completely erected and swung free, the space between the top of the masonry and the top of
the concrete bearing seat shall be filled with grout. Main masonry plates for cantilever spans
shall be set and grouted in before any steel Work is erected.
Grout shall conform to Section 9-20.3(2) and placement shall be as required in
Section 6-02.3(20).
6-03.3(37) Setting Steel Bridge Bearings
Masonry plates, shoes, and keeper plates of expansion bearings shall be set and adjusted to
center at a normal temperature of 64ºF. Adjustment for an inaccuracy in fabricated length shall
be made after dead-load camber is out.
6-03.3(38) Placing Superstructure
The concrete in piers and crossbeams shall reach at least 80 percent of design strength
before girders are placed on them.
6-03.3(39) Swinging the Span
Forms weighing less than 5 pounds per square foot of bridge deck area and uniformly
distributed along the steel spans may be placed before the spans swing free on their supports.
Steel reinforcing bars or concrete bridge deck shall not be placed on steel spans until the
spans swing free on their supports and elevations are recorded. No simple span or any series
of continuous spans will be considered as swinging free until all temporary supports have
been released. Reinforcing steel or concrete bridge decks shall not be placed on any simple
or continuous span steel girder bridge until all its spans are adjusted and its masonry plates,

shoes, and keeper plates grouted. For this specification, the structure shall be considered as
continuous across hinged joints.
After the falsework is released (spans swung free), the masonry plates, shoes, and keeper
plates are grouted, and before any load is applied, the Contractor (or the Engineer if the
Contracting Agency is responsible for surveying) shall survey elevations at the tenth points
along the centerline on top of all girders and floorbeams. The Contractor shall calculate the
theoretical top of girder or floorbeam flange elevations and compare the calculated elevations
to the surveyed elevations. The theoretical pad or haunch depth shown in the Plans shall be
increased or decreased by the difference between the theoretical and surveyed top of girder or
floorbeam elevations. The soffit (deck formwork) shall be set based on the Plan bridge deck
thickness and the adjusted pad or haunch depth.
The Contractor shall submit all survey data and calculations to the Engineer for review ten
working days prior to placing any load, beyond the maximum five pounds per square foot of
form weight allowed, on the Structure.
6-03.3(40) Draining Pockets
The Contractor shall provide enough holes to drain all water from pockets in trusses,
girders, and other members. Unless shown on approved shop plans, drain holes shall not be
drilled without the written approval of the Engineer.
All costs related to providing drain holes shall be included in the unit Contract prices for
structural or cast steel.
6-03.3(41) Vacant
6-03.3(42) Surface Condition
As the Structure is erected, the Contractor shall keep all steel surfaces clean and free from
dirt, concrete, mortar, oil, paint, grease, and other stain-producing foreign matter. Any surfaces
that become stained shall be cleaned as follows:
Painted steel surfaces shall be cleaned by methods required for the type of staining. The
Contract shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing of the cleaning method.
Unpainted steel surfaces shall be cleaned by sandblasting. Sandblasting to remove
stains on publicly visible surfaces shall be done to the extent that, in the Engineers opinion,
the uniform weathering characteristics of the Structure are preserved.
6-03.3(43) Castings, Steel Forgings, and Miscellaneous Metals
Castings, steel forgings, and miscellaneous metals shall be built to comply with
Section 9-06.
6-03.3(43)A Shop Construction, Castings, Steel Forgings, and Miscellaneous Metals
This section’s requirements for structural steel (including painting requirements) shall also
apply to castings, steel forgings, and miscellaneous metals.
Castings shall be:
1. True to pattern in form and dimensions;
2. Free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in places
that would affect strength, appearance, or value;
3. Clean and uniform in appearance;
4. Filleted boldly at angles; and
5. Formed with sharp and perfect arises.
Iron and steel castings and forgings shall be annealed before any machining, unless the
Plans state otherwise.

6-03.4 Measurement
Cast or forged metal (kind) shown in the Plans will be measured by the pound or will
be paid for on a lump sum basis, whichever is shown on the Proposal.
6-03.5 Payment
“Structural Carbon Steel”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract price for “Structural Carbon Steel” shall be full pay for all costs
in connection with furnishing all materials, labor, tools, and equipment necessary for the
manufacture, fabrication, transportation, erection, and painting of all structural carbon steel
used in the completed Structure, including the providing of such other protective coatings
or treatment as may be shown in the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
For steel Structures, the estimated weight of the structural carbon steel in the project will
be shown in the Plans or in the Special Provisions. In the event any change in the Plans is
made which will affect the weight of materials to be furnished, payment for the additional
structural carbon steel required as a result of the change in the Plans will be made at a unit
price per pound obtained by dividing the Contractor’s lump sum Bid for structural carbon
steel by the total estimated weight of structural carbon steel shown in the Plans or in the
Special Provisions.
Reductions in weight due to a change in the Plans will be made at the same rate as
determined above and will be deducted from payments due the Contractor.
Prospective Bidders shall verify the estimated weight of structural carbon steel before
submitting a Bid. No adjustment other than for approved changes shall be made in the lump
sum Bid even though the actual weight may deviate from the stated estimated weight.
For concrete and timber Structures, where the structural carbon steel is a minor item, no
estimated weight will be given for the structural carbon steel. In the event any change in the
Plans is necessary which will affect the weight of material to be furnished for this type of
Structure, the payment or reduction for the revision in quantity will be made at a unit price per
pound obtained by dividing the Contractor’s lump sum Bid for the structural carbon steel by
the calculated weight of the original material. The calculated weight will be established by the
Engineer and will be based on an estimated weight of 490 pounds per cubic foot for steel.
Any change in the Plans which affects the weight of material to be furnished as provided
herein will be subject to the provisions of Section 1-04.4.
“Structural Low Alloy Steel”, lump sum.
“Structural High Strength Steel”, lump sum.
Payment for “Structural Low Alloy Steel” and “Structural High Strength Steel” shall be
made on the same lump sum basis as specified for structural carbon steel.
“(Cast or Forged) Steel”, lump sum or per pound.
“(Cast, Malleable, or Ductile) Iron”, lump sum or per pound.
“Cast Bronze”, lump sum or per pound.
Payment for “(Cast or Forged) Steel”, “(Cast, Malleable or Ductile) Iron”, and
“Cast Bronze” will be made at the lump sum or per pound Contract prices as included
in the Proposal.
For the purpose of payment, such minor items as bearing plates, pedestals, forged steel
pins, anchor bolts, field bolts, shear connectors, etc., unless otherwise provided, shall be
considered as structural carbon steel even though made of other materials.
When no Bid item is included in the Proposal and payment is not otherwise provided,
the castings, forgings, miscellaneous metal, and painting shall be considered as incidental to
the construction, and all costs therefore shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the
payment items involved and shown.

6-04 Timber Structures

6-04.1 Description
This Work is the building of any Structure or parts of Structures (except piling) made
of treated timber, untreated timber, or both. The Contractor shall erect timber Structures
on prepared foundations. The Structures shall conform to the dimensions, lines, and grades
required by the Plans, the Engineer, and these Specifications.
Any part of a timber Structure made of nontimber materials shall comply with the
sections of these Specifications that govern those materials.
6-04.2 Materials
Structural Steel and Related Material 9-06
Bolts, Washers, Other Hardware 9-06.22
Paints 9-08
Timber and Lumber 9-09
6-04.3(1) Storing and Handling Material
At the Work site, the Contractor shall store all timber and lumber in piles. Weeds and
rubbish under and around these piles shall have been removed before the lumber is stacked.
Untreated lumber shall be open stacked at least 12 inches above the ground. It shall be
piled to shed water and prevent warping.
Treated timber shall be:
1. Cut, framed, and bored (whenever possible) before treatment;
2. Close stacked and piled to prevent warping;
3. Covered against the weather if the Engineer requires it;
4. Handled carefully to avoid sudden drops, broken outer fibers, and surface penetration
or bruising with tools; and
5. Lifted and moved with rope or chain slings (without use of cant dogs, peaveys, hooks,
or pike poles).
6-04.3(2) Workmanship
The Contractor shall employ only competent bridge carpenters. All their Work shall be true
and exact. Nails and spikes shall be driven with just enough force to leave heads flush with
wood surfaces. The Contractor shall discharge any worker who displays poor workmanship by
leaving deep hammer marks in wood surfaces. Workmanship on metal parts shall comply with
requirements for steel Structures.
6-04.3(3) Shop Details
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of shop detail plans for
all treated timber. These plans shall show dimensions for all cut, framed, or bored timbers.
6-04.3(4) Field Treatment of Cut Surfaces, Bolt Holes, and Contact Surfaces
All cut surfaces, bolt holes, and contact surfaces shall be treated in accordance with
Section 9-09.3 for all timber and lumber requiring preservative treatment.
All cuts and abrasions in treated piles or timbers shall be trimmed carefully and treated

Timber Structures 6-04
6-04.3(5) Holes for Bolts, Dowels, Rods, and Lag Screws

Holes shall be bored:
1. For drift pins and dowels – with a bit 1⁄16 inch smaller in diameter than the pins
and dowels.
2. For truss rods or bolts – with a bit the same diameter as the rods or bolts.
3. For lag screws – in two parts: (a) with the shank lead hole the same diameter as the
shank and as deep as the unthreaded shank is long; and (b) with the lead hole for
the threaded part approximately ⅔ of the shank diameter.
6-04.3(6) Bolts, Washers, and Other Hardware
Bolts, dowels, washers, and other hardware, including nails, shall be black or galvanized
as specified in the Plans, but if not so specified shall be galvanized when used in treated
timber Structures.
Washers of the size and type specified shall be used under all bolt heads and nuts that
would otherwise contact wood.
All bolts shall be checked by burring the threads after the nuts have been finally tightened.
Vertical bolts shall have nuts on the lower ends.
Wherever bolts fasten timber to timber, to concrete, or to steel, the members shall be bolted
tightly together at installation and retightened just before the Contracting Agency accepts the
Work. These bolts shall have surplus threading of at least ⅜ inch per foot of timber thickness
to permit future tightening.
6-04.3(7) Countersinking
Countersinking shall be done wherever smooth faces are required. Each recess shall be
treated in accordance with Section 9-09.3.
6-04.3(8) Framing
The Contractor shall cut and frame lumber and timber to produce close-fitting, full-contact
joints. Each mortise shall be true to size for its full depth, and its tenon shall fit it snugly.
Neither shimmed nor open joints are permitted.
6-04.3(9) Framed Bents
Mudsills shall be of pressure-treated timber, firmly and evenly bedded to solid bearing,
and tamped in place.
Concrete pedestals that support framed bents shall be finished so that sills will bear evenly
on them. To anchor the sills, the Contractor shall set dowels in the pedestals when they are
cast. The dowels shall be at least ¾ inch in diameter and protrude at least 6 inches above
the pedestal tops. Pedestal concrete shall comply with Section 6-02.
Each sill shall rest squarely on mudsills, piles, or pedestals. It shall be drift-bolted
to mudsills or piles with ¾-inch diameter or larger bolts that extend at least 6 inches into
them. When possible, the Contractor shall remove any earth touching the sills to permit free
air circulation around them.
Each post shall be fastened to sills with ¾-inch diameter or larger dowels that extend at
least 6 inches into the post.
6-04.3(10) Caps
Timber caps shall rest uniformly across the tops of posts or piles and cap ends shall be
aligned evenly. Each cap shall be fastened with a drift bolt ¾ inch in diameter or larger that
penetrates the post or pile at least 9 inches. The bolt shall be approximately in the center of
the pile or post.
If the Roadway grade exceeds 2 percent, each cap shall be beveled to match the grade.

6-04.3(11) Bracing
When pile bents are taller than 10 feet, each shall be braced transversely and every other
pair shall be braced longitudinally. No single cross-bracing shall brace more than 20 feet of
vertical distance on the piles. If the vertical distance exceeds 20 feet, more than one cross-
bracing shall be used. Each brace end shall be bolted through the pile, post, or cap with a bolt
¾ inch in diameter or larger. Other brace/pile intersections shall be bolted or boat-spiked as the
Plans require. Cross-bracing shall lap both upper or lower caps and shall be bolted to the caps
or sills at each end.
6-04.3(12) Stringers
All stringers that carry laminated decking or vary more than ⅛ inch in depth shall be sized
to an even depth at bearing points. Outside stringers shall be butt jointed and spliced. Interior
stringers shall be lapped so that each rests over the full width of the cap or floorbeam at each
end. Except on sharp horizontal and vertical curves, stringers may cover two spans. In this
case, joints shall be staggered and the stringers either toenailed or drift bolted as the Plans
require. To permit air circulation on untreated timber Structures, the ends of lapped stringers
shall be separated. This separation shall be done by fastening across the lapping face a 1 by
3-inch wood strip cut 2 inches shorter than the depth of the stringer.
Any cross-bridging or solid bridging shall be neatly and accurately framed, then securely
toenailed at each end (with two nails for cross-bridging and four nails for solid bridging).
The Plans show bridging size and spacing.
6-04.3(13) Wheel Guards and Railings
Wheel guards and railings shall be built as Section 6-06.3(1) requires.
6-04.3(14) Single-Plank Floors
Single-plank floors shall be made of a single thickness of plank on stringers or joists.
Unless the Engineer directs otherwise, the planks shall be:
1. Laid heart side down with tight joints,
2. Spiked to each joist or nailing strip with at least two spikes that are at least 4 inches
longer than the plank thickness,
3. Spiked at least 2½ inches from the edges,
4. Cut off on a straight line parallel to the centerline of the Roadway,
5. Arranged so that no adjacent planks vary in thickness by no more than 1⁄16 inch, and
6. Surfaced on one side and one edge (S1S1E) unless otherwise specified.
6-04.3(15) Laminated Floors
The strips shall be placed on edge and shall be drawn down tightly against the stringer or
nailing strip and the adjacent strip and, while held in place, shall be spiked. Each strip shall
extend the full width of the deck, unless some other arrangement is shown in the Plans or
permitted by the Engineer.
Each strip shall be spiked to the adjacent strip at intervals of not more than 2 feet, the
spikes being staggered 8 inches in adjacent strips. The spikes shall be of sufficient length to
pass through two strips and at least halfway through the third. In addition, unless bolting is
specified in the Plans, each strip shall be toenailed to alternate stringers with 40d common
nails and adjacent strips shall be nailed to every alternate stringer. The ends of all pieces shall
be toenailed to the outside stringer. The ends of the strips shall be cut off on a true line parallel
to the centerline of the Roadway. When bolts are used to fasten laminated floors to stringers,
the bolts shall be placed at the spacing shown in the Plans, and the pieces shall be drawn down
tightly to the bolting strips. The bolt heads shall be driven flush with the surface of the deck.
Double nuts or single nuts and lock nuts shall be used on all bolts. The strips shall be spiked
together in the same manner as specified above.

Timber Structures 6-04
6-04.3(16) Plank Subfloors for Concrete Decks

Any plank subfloor shall be laid surfaced side down with close joints at right angles to the
centerline of the Roadway. Planks shall be spiked in place as required in Section 6-04.3(14).
Floor planks shall be treated in accordance with Section 9-09.3.
6-04.3(17) Trusses
Completed trusses shall show no irregularities of line. From end to end, chords shall be
straight and true in horizontal projection. In vertical projection they shall show a smooth curve
through panel points that conforms to the correct camber. The Engineer will reject any pieces
cut unevenly or roughly at bearing points. Before placement of the hand railing, the Contractor
shall complete all trusses, swing them free of their falsework, and adjust them for line and
camber (unless the Engineer directs otherwise).
6-04.3(18) Painting
Section 6-07.3(13) governs painting of timber Structures.
6-04.4 Measurement
The criteria in Section 6-03.4 will be used to determine the weight of structural metal other
than hardware.
Timber and lumber (treated or untreated) will be measured by the 1,000-board feet (MBM),
using nominal thicknesses and widths. Lengths will be actual lengths of individual pieces
in the finished Structure with no deduction for daps, cuts, or splices. To measure laminated
timber decking, the Contracting Agency will use the number and after-dressing sizes of pieces
required in the Plans. The length of each lamination shall be the length remaining in the
finished Structure.
6-04.5 Payment
1. “Timber and Lumber (untreated or name treatment)”, per MBM.
2. “Structural Metal”, lump sum.
Where no item for structural metal is included in the Proposal, full pay for furnishing
and placing metal parts shall be included in the unit Contract price per MBM for “Timber
and Lumber”.
When no Bid item is included in the Proposal and is not otherwise provided, painting shall
be considered as incidental to the construction, and all costs therefore shall be included in the
unit Contract prices for the payment items involved and shown.

6-05 Piling
6-05 Piling
6-05.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and driving piles (timber, precast concrete, cast-in-place
concrete, and steel) of the sizes and types the Contract or the Engineer require. This Work also
includes cutting off or building up piles when required. In furnishing and driving piles, the
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of this Section, the Contract, and the Engineer.
6-05.2 Materials
Prestressing Steel 9-07.10
Timber Piling 9-10.1
Concrete Piling 9-10.2
Cast-In-Place Concrete Piling 9-10.3
Steel Pile Tips and Shoes 9-10.4
Steel Piling 9-10.5
Mortar 9-20.4
6-05.3(1) Piling Terms
Concrete Piles – Concrete piling may be precast or precast-prestressed concrete, or steel
casings driven to the ultimate bearing resistance called for in the Contract which are filled with
concrete (cast-in-place) after driving.
Steel Piles – Steel piles may be open-ended or closed-ended pipe piles, or H-piles.
Overdriving – Over-driving of piles occurs when the ultimate bearing resistance
calculated from the equation in Section 6-05.3(12), or the wave equation driving criteria
if applicable, exceeds the ultimate bearing resistance required in the Contract in order to reach
the minimum tip elevation specified in the Contract, or as required by the Engineer.
Maximum Driving Resistance – The maximum driving resistance is either the pile
ultimate bearing resistance, or ultimate bearing resistance plus overdriving to reach minimum
tip elevation as specified in the Contract, whichever is greater.
Wave Equation Analysis – Wave equation analysis is an analysis performed using the
wave equation analysis program (WEAP) with a version dated 1987 or later. The wave
equation may be used as specified herein to verify the Contractor’s proposed pile driving
system. The pile driving system includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the pile, the
hammer, the helmet, and any cushion. The wave equation may also be used by the Engineer
to determine pile driving criteria as may be required in the Contract.
Ultimate Bearing Resistance – Ultimate bearing resistance refers to the vertical
load carrying resistance (in units of force) of a pile as determined by the equation in
Section 6-05.3(12), the wave equation analysis, pile driving analyzer and CAPWAP, static load
test, or any other means as may be required by the Contract, or the Engineer.
Allowable Bearing Resistance – Allowable bearing resistance is the ultimate bearing
resistance divided by a factor of safety. The Contract may state the factor of safety to be used
in calculating the allowable bearing resistance from the ultimate bearing resistance. In the
absence of a specified factor of safety, a value of three shall be used.
Rated Hammer Energy – The rated energy represents the theoretical maximum amount
of gross energy that a pile driving hammer can generate. The rated energy of a pile driving
hammer will be stated in the hammer manufacturer’s catalog or Specifications for that pile
driving hammer.
Developed Hammer Energy – The developed hammer energy is the actual amount of
gross energy produced by the hammer for a given blow. This value will never exceed the rated
hammer energy. The developed energy may be calculated as the ram weight times the drop

Piling 6-05
(or stroke) for drop, single acting hydraulic, single acting air/steam, and open-ended diesel
hammers. For double acting hydraulic and air/steam hammers, the developed hammer energy
shall be calculated from ram impact velocity measurements or other means approved by the
Engineer. For closed-ended diesel hammers, the developed energy shall be calculated from the
measured bounce chamber pressure for a given blow. Hammer manufacturer calibration data
may be used to correlate bounce chamber pressure to developed hammer energy. For a single
acting diesel hammer the developed energy is determined using the blows per minute.
Transferred Hammer Energy – The transferred hammer energy is the amount of energy
transferred to the pile for a given blow. This value will never exceed the developed hammer
energy. Factors that cause transferred hammer energy to be lower than the developed hammer
energy include friction during the ram down stroke, energy retained in the ram and helmet
during rebound, and other impact losses. The transferred energy can only be measured directly
by use of sensors attached to the pile. A pile driving analyzer (PDA) may be used to measure
transferred energy.
Pile Driving Analyzer – A pile driving analyzer (PDA) is a device which can measure the
transferred energy of a pile driving system, the compressive and tensile stresses induced in the
pile due to driving, the bending stresses induced by hammer misalignment with the pile, and
estimate the ultimate resistance of a pile at a given blow.
Pile Driving System – The pile driving system includes, but is not necessarily limited to,
the hammer, leads, helmet or cap, cushion and pile.
Helmet – The helmet, also termed the cap, drive cap, or driving head, is used to transmit
impact forces from the hammer ram to the pile top as uniformly as possible across the pile
top such that the impact force of the ram is transmitted axially to the pile. The term helmet
can refer to the complete impact force transfer system, which includes the anvil or striker
plate, hammer cushion and cushion block, and a pile cushion if used, or just the single piece
unit into which these other components (anvil, hammer cushion, etc.) fit. The helmet does not
include a follower, if one is used. For hydraulic hammers, the helmet is sometimes referred to
as the anvil.
Hammer Cushion – The hammer cushion is a disk of material placed on top of the helmet
but below the anvil or striker plate to relieve impact shock, thus protecting the hammer and
the pile.
Pile Cushion – The pile cushion is a disk of material placed between the helmet and the
pile top to relieve impact shock, primarily to protect the pile.
Follower – A follower is a structural member placed between the hammer assembly, which
includes the helmet, and the pile top when the pile head is below the reach of the hammer.
Pile Driving Refusal – Pile driving refusal is defined as 15 blows per inch for the last
4 inches of driving. This is the maximum blow count allowed during overdriving.
Minimum Tip Elevation – The minimum tip elevation is the elevation to which the pile
tip shall be driven. Driving deeper in order to obtain the required ultimate bearing resistance
may be required.
6-05.3(2) Ordering Piling
The Contractor shall order all piling (except cast-in-place concrete and steel piles) from
an itemized list the Engineer will provide. This list, showing the number and lengths of piles
required, will be based on test-pile driving (or other) data. The list will show lengths below the
cutoff point. The Contractor shall supply (and bear the cost of supplying) any additional length
required for handling or driving.
The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for buying more or longer piles than those
shown on the list provided by the Engineer. All piles purchased on the basis of the Engineer’s
list but not used in the finished Structure shall become the property of the Contracting Agency.
The Contractor shall deliver these as the Engineer directs. The Contractor shall keep pile
cutoffs that are 8 feet or under and any longer ones the Contracting Agency does not require.

6-05 Piling
When ordering steel casings for cast-in-place concrete and steel piling, the Contractor shall
base lengths on information derived from driving test piles and from subsurface data. The
Contractor shall also select the wall thickness of steel piles or steel casings for cast-in-place
piles which will be necessary to prevent damage during driving and handling. The selection of
wall thickness for steel piles or steel casings shall also consider the effects of lateral pressures
from the soil or due to driving of adjacent piles. Steel piles and steel casings must be strong
and rigid enough to resist these pressures without deforming or distorting. The Contractor shall
select the wall thickness based on information derived from test piles, subsurface data and/or
wave equation analysis. Wave equation analysis is required prior to ordering piling for piles
with specified ultimate bearing resistances of 300 tons or greater. If a wave equation analysis
is performed, the Contractor shall base the selection of wall thickness on the maximum driving
resistance identified in the Contract to reach the minimum tip elevation, if the maximum
driving resistance is greater than the specified ultimate bearing resistance and if a minimum
tip elevation is specified. The wave equation analysis shall be submitted by the Contractor as
required in Section 6-05.3(9)A. The Engineer will not supply any list for piling of these types.
6-05.3(3) Manufacture of Precast Concrete Piling
Precast concrete piles shall consist of concrete sections reinforced to withstand handling
and driving stresses. These may be reinforced with deformed steel bars or prestressed with
steel strands. The Plans show dimensions and details. If the Plans require piles with square
cross-sections, the corners shall be chamfered 1 inch.
Precast or prestressed piles shall meet the requirements of the Standard Plans.
Temporary stress in the prestressing reinforcement of prestressed piles (before loss from
creep and shrinkage) shall be 75 percent of the minimum ultimate tensile strength. (For short
periods during manufacture, the reinforcement may be overstressed to 80 percent of ultimate
tensile strength if stress after transfer to concrete does not exceed 75 percent of that strength.)
Prestressed concrete piles shall have a final (effective) prestress of at least 1,000 psi.
Unless the Engineer approves splices, all piles shall be full length.
The Contracting Agency intends to perform Quality Assurance Inspection. By its
inspection, the Contracting Agency intends only to facilitate the Work and verify the quality of
that Work. This inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility for identifying
and replacing defective material and workmanship.
6-05.3(3)A Casting and Stressing
Reinforcing bars, hoops, shoes, etc., shall be placed as shown in the Contract, with all parts
securely tied together and placed to the specified spacing. No concrete shall be cast until all
reinforcement is in place in the forms.
The Contractor shall perform quality control inspection. The manufacturing plant for
precast concrete piling shall be certified by the Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute’s Plan
Certification Program for the type of precast piling to be produced and shall be approved
by WSDOT as a Certified Precast Concrete Fabricator prior to start of production. WSDOT
Certification will be established or renewed during the annual precast plant review and
approval process.
Prior to the start of production of the piling, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the
If the Inspector observes any nonspecification Work or unacceptable quality control practices,
Engineer, the piling(s) will be subject to rejection by the Engineer.
In casting concrete piles, the Contractor shall:
1. Cast them either vertically or horizontally;
2. Use metal forms (unless the Engineer approves otherwise) with smooth joints and
inside surfaces that can be reached for cleaning after each use;
3. Brace and stiffen the forms to prevent distortion;

Piling 6-05
4. Place concrete continuously in each pile, guarding against horizontal or diagonal

cleavage planes;
5. Ensure that the reinforcement is properly embedded;
6. Use internal vibration around the reinforcement during concrete placement to prevent
rock pockets from forming; and
7. Cast test cylinders with each set of piles as concrete is placed.
Forms shall be metal and shall be braced and stiffened to retain their shape under pressure
of wet concrete. Forms shall have smooth joints and inside surfaces easy to reach and clean
after each use. That part of a form which will shape the end surface of the pile shall be a true
plane at right angles to the pile axis.
Each pile shall contain a cage of nonprestressed reinforcing steel. The Contractor shall
follow the Contract in the size and location of this cage, and shall secure it in position during
concrete placement. Spiral steel reinforcing shall be covered by at least 1½ inches of concrete
measured from the outside pile surface.
Prestressing steel shall be tensioned as required in Section 6-02.3(25)C.
The Plans specify tensioning stress for strands or wires. Tension shall be measured by jack
pressure as described in Section 6-02.3(25)C. Mechanical locks or anchors shall temporarily
maintain cable tension. All jacks shall have hydraulic pressure gauges (accurately calibrated
and accompanied by a certified calibration curve no more than 180 days old) that will permit
stress calculations at all times.
All tensioned piles shall be pretensioned. Post-tensioning is not allowed.
The Contractor shall not stress any pile until test cylinders made with it reach
a compressive strength of at least 3,300 psi.
6-05.3(3)B Finishing
As soon as the forms for precast concrete piles are removed, the Contractor shall fill all
holes and irregularities with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2) mixed at a 1:2 cement/
aggregate ratio. That part of any pile that will be underground or below the low-water line
and all parts of any pile to be used in salt water or alkaline soil shall receive only this mortar
treatment. That part of any pile that will show above the ground or water line shall be given
a Class 2 finish as described in Section 6-02.3(14)B.
6-05.3(3)C Curing
Precast Concrete Piles – The Contractor:
1. Shall keep the concrete continuously wet with water after placement for at least 10 days
with Type I or II portland cement or at least 3 days with Type III.
2. Shall remove side forms no sooner than 24 hours after concrete placement, and then
only if the surrounding air remains at no less than 50°F for 5 days with Type I or II
portland cement or 3 days with Type III.
3. May cure precast piles with saturated steam or hot air, as described in
Section 6-02.3(25)D, provided the piles are kept continuously wet until the concrete has
reached a compressive strength of 3,300 psi.
Precast-Prestressed Concrete Piles – These piles shall be cured as required in
6-05.3(4) Manufacture of Steel Casings for Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles
The diameter of steel casings shall be as specified in the Contract. A full-penetration groove
weld between welded edges is required.
6-05.3(5) Manufacture of Steel Piles
Steel piles shall be made of rolled steel H-pile sections, steel pipe piles, or of other
structural steel sections described in the Contract. A full penetration groove weld between
welded edges is required.

6-05 Piling
At least 14-days prior to the start of production of the piling, the Contractor shall advise
the Engineer of the production schedule. The Contractor shall give the Inspector safe and
free access to the Work. If the Inspector observes any nonspecification Work or unacceptable
quality control practices, the Inspector will advise the plant manager. If the corrective action
is not acceptable to the Engineer, the piling(s) will be subject to rejection by the Engineer.
6-05.3(6) Splicing Steel Casings and Steel Piles
The Engineer will normally permit steel piles and steel casings for cast-in-place concrete
piles to be spliced. But in each case, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings
supporting the need and describing the method for splicing. Welded splices shall be spaced at a
minimum distance of 10 feet. Only welded splices will be permitted.
Splice welds for steel piles shall comply with Section 6-03.3(25) and AWS D1.1/
D1.1M, latest edition, Structural Welding Code. Splicing of steel piles shall be performed in
accordance with an approved weld procedure. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working
Drawing consisting of the weld procedure. For ASTM A252 material, mill certification for
each lot of pipe to be welded shall accompany the submittal. The ends of all steel pipe piling
shall meet the fit-up requirements of AWS D1.1/D1.1M, latest edition, Structural Welding
Code Section 5.22.3.1, “Girth Weld Alignment (Tubular),” when the material is spliced
utilizing a girth weld.
Splice welds of steel casings for cast-in-place concrete piles shall be the Contractor’s
responsibility and shall be welded in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, latest edition,
Structural Welding Code. A weld procedure submittal is not required for steel casings used for
cast-in-place concrete piles. Casings that collapse or are not watertight, shall be replaced at the
6-05.3(7) Storage and Handling
The Contractor shall store and handle piles in ways that protect them from damage.
6-05.3(7)A Timber Piles
Timber piling shall be stacked closely and in a manner to prevent warping. The ground
beneath and around stored piles shall be cleared of weeds, brush, and rubbish. Piling shall be
covered against the weather if the Engineer requires it.
The Contractor shall take special care to avoid breaking the surface of treated piles. They
shall be lifted and moved with equipment, tools, and lifting devices which do not penetrate
or damage the piles. If timber piles are rafted, any attachments shall be within 3 feet of the
butts or tips. Any surface cut or break shall be repaired in accordance with Section 9-09.3. The
Engineer may reject any pile because of a cut or break.
6-05.3(7)B Precast Concrete Piles
The Contractor shall not handle any pile until test cylinders made with the same batch of
concrete as the pile reach a compressive strength of at least 3,300 psi.
Storing and handling methods shall protect piles from fractures by impact and undue
bending stresses. Handling methods shall never stress the reinforcement more than 12,000 psi.
An allowance of twice the calculated load shall be made for impact and shock effects. The
Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the method of lifting the piles.
The Contractor will take extra care to avoid damaging the surface of any pile to be used in
seawater or alkaline soil.
6-05.3(7)C Steel Casings and Steel Piles
The Engineer will reject bent, deformed, or kinked piles that cannot be straightened
without damaging the metal.

Piling 6-05
6-05.3(8) Pile Tips and Shoes

The Contracting Agency prefers that timber piles be driven with squared ends. But if
conditions require, they may be shod with metal shoes. Pile tips and shoes shall be securely
attached to the piles in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Where called for in the Contract, conical steel pile tips shall be used when driving steel
casings. The tips shall be inside fit, flush-mounted such that the tip and/or weld bead does not
protrude more than 1⁄16 inch beyond the nominal outside diameter of the steel casing.
If conical tips are not specified, the lower end of each casing shall have a steel driving
plate that is thick enough to keep the casing watertight and free from distortion as it is driven.
The diameter of the steel driving plate shall not be greater than the outside diameter of the
steel casing.
Where called for in the Contract, inside-fit cutting shoes shall be used when driving
open-ended steel piles. The cutting shoes shall be flush-mounted such that the shoe and/or
weld bead does not protrude more than 1⁄16 inch beyond the nominal outside diameter of the
steel pile. The cutting shoe shall be of an inside diameter at least ¾ inch less than the nominal
inside diameter of the steel pile.
Pile tips or shoes shall be of a type denoted in the Qualified Products List. If pile tips or
shoes other than those denoted in the Qualified Products List are proposed, the Contractor
shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of shop drawings of the proposed pile
tip along with design calculations, Specifications, material chemistry and installation
requirements, along with evidence of a pile driving test demonstrating suitability of the
proposed pile tip. The test shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer or an acceptable
independent testing agency. The test shall consist of driving a pile fitted with the proposed
tip. If the pile cannot be visually inspected (Section 6-05.3(11)F), a sacrificial pile fitted with
the proposed tip shall be driven outside the proposed foundation limits. The pile shall be
driven to a depth sufficient to develop the required ultimate bearing resistance as called for
in the Contract, in ground conditions determined to be equivalent to the ground conditions
at the project site. For closed-ended casings or piles, the pile need not be removed if, in the
opinion of the Engineer, the pile can be inspected for evidence of damage to the pile or the
tip. For open-ended steel casings or piles, timber piles or H-piles, the pile shall be removed
for inspection.
6-05.3(9) Pile Driving Equipment
6-05.3(9)A Pile Driving Equipment Approval
Prior to driving any piles, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings
consisting of details of each proposed pile driving system. The pile driving system shall
meet the minimum requirements for the various combinations of hammer type and pile type
specified in this section. These requirements are minimums and may need to be increased in
order to ensure that the required ultimate bearing resistance can be achieved, that minimum tip
elevations can be reached, and to 2(fprevent
' c − fc )(pile
UP )(damage.
Q)
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E f ' cWorking Drawings consisting of a wave equation
analysis for all pile driving systems used to drive piling with required maximum driving
resistances of greater than 300 tons. The wave equation analysis shall be performed in
3.56(.of
accordance with the requirements 85fthis
' c −section
f coresand)(UPthe
)(Quser’s
) manual for the program. The
wave equation analysis shall verify that the f ' cpile driving system proposed does not produce
stresses greater than 50,000 psi or 90 percent of the yield stress whichever is less, for steel
piles, or steel casings for cast-in-place concrete piles. For prestressed concrete piles, the
allowable driving stress shall be 3 f ' cm plus prestress in tension, and 0.85f’c minus prestress
in compression. For precast concrete piles that are not prestressed, the allowable driving stress
shall be 70 percent of the yield stress of the steel reinforcement in tension, and 0. 85f’c in
compression. The wave equation shall also verify that the pile driving system does not exceed
the refusal criteria at the depth of penetration anticipated for achieving the required ultimate
bearing resistance and minimum tip elevation. Furthermore, the wave equation analysis

6-05 Piling
shall verify that at the maximum driving resistance specified in the Contract, the driving
resistance is 100 blows per foot or less. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, or directed
by the Engineer, the following default values shall be used as input to the wave equation
analysis program:
Output option (IOUT) 0
Factor of safety applied to (Rult) 1.0
Type of damping Smith
Residual stress option No
Rult is the resistance of the pile used in the wave equation analyses. If the ultimate bearing
resistance equals the maximum driving resistance, a setup factor of 1.3 may be used in the
wave equation analysis to account for pile setup. To use a setup factor in the wave equation
analysis, Rult in the analysis is the ultimate bearing resistance divided by 1.3. If the maximum
driving resistance exceeds the ultimate bearing resistance, no setup factor should be used, and
Rult is equal to the maximum driving resistance of the pile.
For Analysis of For Analysis of
Hammer Efficiencies Driving Resistance Driving Stresses
Single acting diesel hammers 0.72 0.84
Closed-ended diesel hammers 0.72 0.84
Single acting air/steam hammers 0.60 0.70
Double acting air/steam hammers 0.45 0.53
Hydraulic hammers or other external combustion hammers having ram 0.85 1.00
velocity monitors that may be used to assign an equivalent stroke.
Changes to the pile driving system after completion of the Working Drawing review
require a revised Working Drawing Submittal.
6-05.3(9)B Pile Driving Equipment Minimum Requirements
For each drop hammer used, the Contractor shall weigh it in the Engineer’s presence
or submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of a certificate of its weight. The exact weight
shall be stamped on the hammer. Drop hammers shall weigh not less than:
1. 3,000 pounds for piles under 50 feet long that have an ultimate bearing resistance of not
more than 60 tons, and
2. 4,000 pounds for piles 50 feet and longer or that have an ultimate bearing resistance
of 60 to 90 tons.
If a drop hammer is used for timber piles, it is preferable to use a heavy hammer and
operate with a short drop.
For each diesel, hydraulic, steam, or air-driven hammer used, the Contractor shall submit
a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the manufacturer’s Specifications and catalog. These
shall show all data needed to calculate the developed energy of the hammer used.
Underwater hammers may be used only with permission of the Engineer.
Drop hammers on timber piles shall have a maximum drop of 10 feet. Drop hammers shall
not be used to drive timber piles that have ultimate bearing resistance of more than 60 tons.
When used on timber piles, diesel, hydraulic, steam, or air-driven hammers shall provide at
least 13,000 foot-pounds of developed energy per blow. The ram of any diesel hammer shall
weigh at least 2,700 pounds.
Precast concrete and precast-prestressed concrete piles shall be driven with a single-acting
steam, air, hydraulic, or diesel hammer with a ram weight of at least half as much as the
weight of the pile, but never less than the minimums stated below. The ratio of developed
hammer energy to ram weight shall not exceed 6. Steel casings for cast-in-place concrete,
steel pipe, and steel H-piles shall also be driven with diesel, hydraulic, steam, or air hammers.
These hammers shall provide at least the following developed energy per blow:

Piling 6-05
Minimum Developed Energy per Blow (ft-lbs)

Maximum Driving Air or Steam Open Ended Closed Ended
Resistance (Tons) Hammers Diesel Hammers Diesel Hammers Hydraulic Hammers
Up to 165 21,500 23,000 30,000 18,500
166 to 210 27,500 29,500 38,000 23,500
211 to 300 39,000 41,500 54,000 33,500
301 to 450 59,000 63,000 81,000 50,500
In addition, the ram of any diesel or hydraulic hammer shall have the following minimum
weights:
Maximum Driving Resistance (Tons) Minimum Ram Weight (lbs)
Up to 165 2,700
166 to 210 4,000
211 to 300 5,000
301 to 450 6,500
These requirements for minimum hammer size may be waived if a Type 2E Working
Drawing is submitted consisting of a wave equation analysis demonstrating the ability of the
hammer to obtain the required bearing resistance and minimum tip elevation without damage
to the pile.
Vibratory hammers may be used to drive piles provided the location and plumbness
requirements of this section are met. The required bearing resistance for all piles driven with
vibratory hammers will be determined according to Section 6-05.3(12) by driving the pile
at least an additional 2 feet using an impact hammer. This method of determining bearing
resistance will be accepted provided the blows per inch are either constant or increasing.
If the pile cannot be driven 2 feet, the pile will be considered acceptable for bearing if the
pile is driven to refusal.
If water jets are used, the number of jets and water volume and pressure shall be enough
to erode the material next to the pile at the tip. The equipment shall include a minimum of
two water-jet pipes and two ¾ inch jet nozzles. The pump shall produce a constant pressure
of at least 100 psi at each nozzle.
6-05.3(9)C Pile Driving Leads
All piles shall be driven with fixed-lead drivers. The leads shall be fixed on the top and
bottom during the pile driving operation. Leads shall be long enough to eliminate the need for
any follower (except for timber piles as specified in Section 6-05.3(11)E). To avoid bruising or
breaking the surface of treated timber piles, the Contractor shall use spuds and chocks as little
as possible. In building a trestle or foundation with inclined piles, leads shall be adapted for
driving batter piles.
A helmet of the right size for the hammer shall distribute the blow and protect the top of
steel piling or casings from driving damage. The helmet shall be positioned symmetrically
below the hammer’s striking parts, so that the impact forces are applied concentric to the
pile top.
Pile driving leads other than those fixed at the top and bottom may be used to complete
driving, if permitted by the Engineer, when all of the following criteria are met:
1. Each plumb and battered pile is located and initially driven at least 20 feet in true
alignment using fixed leads or other approved means.
2. The pile driving system (hammer, cushion and pile) will be analyzed by Pile Driving
Analyzer (PDA) to verify driving stresses in the pile are not increased due to eccentric
loading during driving, and transferred hammer energy is not reduced due to eccentric
loading during driving, for all test piles and at least one production pile per pier.
Unless otherwise specified, the cost of PDA testing shall be incidental to the various
unit Contract prices for driving piles.
6-05 Piling
6-05.3(10) Test Piles
If the Contract or the Engineer call for it, the Contractor shall drive test piles to determine
pile lengths required to reach the required ultimate bearing resistance, penetration, or both.
Test piles shall be:
1. Made of the same material and have the same tip diameter as the permanent piles
(although test piles for treated timber piles may be either treated or untreated);
2. Driven with pile tips if the permanent piles will have tips;
3. Prebored when preboring is specified for the permanent piles;
4. Identical in cross-section and other characteristics to the permanent piles when
the test piles are steel casings for cast-in-place concrete piles, precast concrete,
precast‑prestressed concrete or steel pipe or H-pile;
5. Long enough to accommodate any soil condition;
6. Driven with equipment and methods identical to those to be used for the
permanent piles;
7. Located as the Engineer directs; and
8. Driven before permanent piles in a given pier.
Test piles may also be driven by the Contractor (at no cost to the Contracting Agency)
as evidence that the pile driving system selected will not damage the pile or result in refusal
prior to reaching any specified minimum tip elevation.
Timber test piles shall be driven outside the footing and cut off 1 foot below the finished
ground line. Timber test piles shall not be used in place of permanent piles.
Steel and all types of concrete test piles shall become permanent piles. The Contracting
Agency has reduced the number of permanent piles by the number of test piles.
The Contractor shall base test pile length on test-hole data in the Contract. Any test piles
that prove to be too short shall be replaced (or spliced if the Contract allows splicing) at the
In foundations and trestles, test piles shall be driven to at least 15 percent more than the
ultimate bearing resistance required for the permanent piles, except where pile driving criteria
is determined by the wave equation. When pile driving criteria is specified to be determined
by the wave equation, the test piles shall be driven to the same ultimate bearing resistance as
the production piles. Test piles shall penetrate at least to any minimum tip elevation specified
in the Contract. If no minimum tip elevation is specified, test piles shall extend at least 10 feet
below the bottom of the concrete footing or ground line, and 15 feet below the bottom of the
concrete seal.
When any test pile to be left as a permanent pile has been so damaged by handling or
driving that the Engineer believes it unfit for use, the Contractor shall remove and replace
the pile at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. The Engineer may direct the
Contractor to overdrive the test pile to more than 15 percent above the ultimate bearing
resistance for permanent piles, or if the wave equation is used to determine driving criteria,
the Engineer may direct the Contractor to overdrive the test pile above the ultimate bearing
resistance. In these cases, the overdriving shall be at the Contractor’s expense. But if pile
damage results from this overdriving, any removal and replacement will be at the Contracting
Agency’s expense.
6-05.3(11) Driving Piles
6-05.3(11)A Tolerances
For elevated pier caps, the tops of piles at cut-off elevation shall be within 2 inches of the
horizontal locations indicated in the Contract. For piles capped below final grade, the tops
of piles at cut-off elevation shall be within 6 inches of the horizontal locations indicated in
the Contract. No pile edge shall be nearer than 4 inches from the edge of any footing or cap.
Piles shall be installed such that the axial alignment of the top 10 feet of the pile is within

Piling 6-05
4 percent of the specified alignment. No misaligned steel or concrete piles shall be pulled
laterally. A properly aligned section shall not be spliced onto a misaligned section for any
type of pile. Unless the Contract shows otherwise, all piles shall be driven vertically.
6-05.3(11)B Foundation Pit Preparation
The Contractor shall replace (and bear the cost of replacing) any pile damaged or destroyed
before or during driving.
The Contractor shall completely dig all foundation pits (and build any required cofferdams
or cribs) before driving foundation piles. The Contractor shall adjust pit depths to allow for
upheaval caused by pile-driving, judging the amount of adjustment by the nature of the soil.
Before constructing the footing or pile cap, the Contractor shall restore the pit bottom to
correct elevation by removing material or by backfilling with granular material.
6-05.3(11)C Preparation for Driving
Treated and untreated timber piles shall be freshly cut square on the butt ends just before
they are driven. If piles will be driven into hard material, caps, collars, or bands shall be placed
on the butt ends to prevent crushing or brooming. If the head area of the pile is larger than that
of the hammer face, the head shall be snipped or chamfered to fit the hammer. On treated piles,
the heads shall be snipped or chamfered to at least the depth of the sapwood to avoid splitting
the sapwood from the pile body.
The Contractor shall match timber pile sizes in any single bent to prevent sway braces from
undue bending or distorting.
When driven, pile faces shall be turned as shown in the Plans or as the Engineer directs.
No precast-prestressed pile shall be driven until test cylinders poured with it reach at
least the specified compressive strength shown in the Contract. On all other precast piles, the
cylinders must reach a compressive strength of at least 4,000 psi before the piles are driven.
Helmets of approved design shall protect the heads of all precast concrete piles as they
are driven. Each helmet shall have fitted into it a cushion next to the pile head. The bottom
side of the helmet shall be recessed sufficiently to accommodate the required pile cushion
and hold the pile in place during positioning and driving. The inside helmet diameter shall be
determined before casting the pile, and the head of the pile shall be formed to fit loosely inside
the helmet.
Steel Casing, steel pipe or H-piles shall have square-cut ends.
6-05.3(11)D Achieving Minimum Tip Elevation and Bearing
Once pile driving has started, each pile shall be driven continuously until the required
ultimate bearing resistance shown in the Contract has been achieved. Pauses during pile
driving, except for splicing, mechanical breakdown, or other unforeseen events, shall not
be allowed.
If the Contract specifies a minimum tip elevation, the pile shall be driven to at least the
minimum tip elevation, even if the ultimate bearing resistance has been achieved, unless the
Engineer directs otherwise. If a pile does not develop the required ultimate bearing resistance
at the minimum tip elevation, the Contractor shall continue driving the pile until the required
bearing resistance is achieved. If no minimum tip elevation is specified, then the piles
shall be driven to the ultimate bearing resistance shown in the Contract and the following
minimum penetrations:
Pile supporting cross-beams, bents,
elevated pile caps elevation 10 feet below final top of ground
Piles supporting foundations 10 feet below bottom of foundation
Piles with a concrete seal 15 feet below bottom of seal
If overdriving is required in order to reach a specified minimum tip elevation, the
Contractor shall provide a pile driving system which will not result in damage to the pile
or refusal before the minimum tip elevation is reached. The cost of overdriving shall be
incidental to the various unit Contract prices for furnishing and driving piles.

6-05 Piling
So long as the pile is not damaged and the embankment or foundation material being
driven through is not permanently damaged, the Contractor shall use normal means
necessary to:
1. Secure the minimum depth specified,
2. Penetrate hard material that lies under a soft upper layer,
3. Penetrate through hard material to obtain the specified minimum tip elevation, or
4. Penetrate through a previously placed embankment.
Normal means refer to methods such as preboring, spudding, or jetting piles. Blasting or
drilling through obstructions are not considered normal means.
Prebored holes and pile spuds shall have a diameter no larger than the least outside
dimension of the pile. After the pile is driven, the Contractor shall fill all open spaces between
the pile and the soil caused by the preboring or spudding with dry sand, or pea gravel, or
controlled density fill as approved by the Engineer.
If water jets are used, the jets shall be withdrawn before the pile reaches its final
penetration, and the pile shall then be driven to its final penetration and ultimate bearing
resistance. The pile shall be driven a minimum of 2 feet to obtain the ultimate bearing
resistance after the jets are withdrawn, or to refusal, whichever occurs first. If the water jets
loosen a pile previously driven, it shall be redriven in place or pulled and replaced by a new
pile. To check on pile loosening, the Contractor shall attempt to redrive at least one in every
five piles, but no less than one pile per bent or pier.
The various unit Contract prices for driving piles shall cover all costs related to the
use of water jets, preboring, or spudding. The Contracting Agency will not pay any costs
the Contractor incurs in redriving piles loosened as a result of using water jets, preboring,
or spudding.
If the Engineer requires, the Contractor shall overdrive the pile beyond the ultimate bearing
resistance and minimum tip elevation shown in the Contract. In this case, the Contractor will
not be required to:
1. Use other than normal means to achieve the additional penetration,
2. Bear the expense of removing or replacing any pile damaged by overdriving, or
3. Bear the expense of overdriving the pile more than 3 feet as specified in Section 6-05.5.
In driving piles for footings with seals, the Contractor shall use no method (such as jetting
or preboring) that might reduce friction resistance.
6-05.3(11)E Use of Followers for Driving
Followers shall not be used to drive concrete or steel piles. On timber piles, the Contractor
may use steel (not wooden) followers if the follower fits snugly over the pile head. If a
follower is used, the Contractor shall, in every group of 10 piles, drive one long pile without
a follower, but no less than one pile per bent or pier, to the required ultimate bearing resistance
and minimum tip elevation. This long pile shall be used to test the bearing resistance of the
piles driven with a follower in the group. The tip elevation of the long pile shall be similar
to the elevation of the piles driven with the follower. If the tip elevations are significantly
different, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor shall redrive the remaining piles in the
group to the tip elevation of the longer pile.
6-05.3(11)F Pile Damage
The Contractor shall remove and replace (and bear the cost of doing so) any pile that is
damaged as determined by the Engineer.
After driving a steel casing for a cast-in-place concrete pile, the Contractor shall leave it
empty until the Engineer has inspected and accepted it. The Contractor shall make available
to the Engineer a light suitable for inspecting the entire length of its interior. The Engineer
will reject any casing that is improperly driven, that shows partial collapse that would reduce
its ultimate bearing resistance, or that has been reduced in diameter, or that will not keep out
water. The Contractor shall replace (and bear the cost of replacing) any rejected casing.
Piling 6-05
Pile heads which have been broomed, rolled, or otherwise significantly damaged as
determined by the Engineer shall be cut back to undamaged material before proceeding with
driving as well as final acceptance of the pile.
6-05.3(11)G Pile Cutoff
The Contractor shall trim the tops of all piles to the true plane shown in the Contract and
to the elevation the Engineer requires. If a pile is driven below cutoff elevation without the
Engineer’s permission, the Contractor shall remove and replace it (and bear the costs of doing
so), even if this requires a longer pile. Any pile that rises as nearby piles are driven, shall be
driven down again if the Engineer requires.
Any piles under timber caps or grillages shall be sawed to the exact plane of the Structure
above them and fit it exactly. No shimming on top of timber piles to adjust for inaccurate pile
top elevations will be permitted. If a timber pile is driven out of line, it shall be straightened
without damage before it is cut off or braced.
Steel casing shall be cut off at least 6 inches below the finished ground line or at the low
water line if the casing will be visible as determined by the Engineer.
6-05.3(11)H Pile Driving From or Near Adjacent Structures
The Contractor shall not drive piling from an existing Structure unless all of the following
conditions are met:
1. The existing Structure will be demolished within the Contract;
2. The existing Structure is permanently closed to traffic; and
3. Type 2E Working Drawings are submitted in accordance with Sections 1-05.3 and
6-02.3(16), showing the structural adequacy of the existing Structure to safely support
all of the construction loads.
Freshly placed concrete in the vicinity of the pile driving operation shall be protected
against vibration in accordance with Section 6-02.3(6)D.
6-05.3(12) Determination of Bearing Values
The following formula shall be used to determine ultimate bearing resistances:
P = F × E × Ln(10N)
Where :
P = ultimate bearing resistance, in tons
F = 1.8 for air/steam hammers
= 1.2 for open ended diesel hammers and precast concrete or timber piles
= 1.6 for open ended diesel hammers and steel piles
= 1.2 for closed ended diesel hammers
= 1.9 for hydraulic hammers
= 0.9 for drop hammers
E = developed energy, equal to W times H1, in ft-kips
W = weight of ram, in kips
H = vertical drop of hammer or stroke of ram, in feet
N = average penetration resistance in blows per inch for the last
4 inches of driving
Ln = the natural logarithm, in base “e”
1For closed-end diesel hammers (double-acting), the developed hammer energy (E) is to be determined from the bounce
chamber reading. Hammer manufacturer calibration data may be used to correlate bounce chamber pressure to developed
hammer energy. For double acting hammer hydraulic and air/steam hammers, the developed hammer energy shall be
calculated from ram impact velocity measurements or other means acceptable to the Engineer. For open ended diesel
hammers (single-acting) use the blows per minute to determine the developed energy (E).
The above formula applies only when:

1. The hammer is in good condition and operating in a satisfactory manner.
2. A follower is not used.

6-05 Piling
3. The pile top is not damaged.

4. The pile head is free from broomed or crushed wood fiber.
5. The penetration occurs at a reasonably quick, uniform rate; and the pile has been driven
at least 2 feet after any interruption in driving greater than 1 hour in length.
6. There is no perceptible bounce after the blow. If a significant bounce cannot be avoided,
twice the height of the bounce shall be deducted from “H” to determine its true value in
the formula.
7. For timber piles, bearing resistances calculated by the formula above shall be
considered effective only when it is less than the crushing strength of the piles.
8. If “N” is greater than or equal to 1.0 blow/inch.
If “N” required to achieve the required ultimate bearing resistance using the above formula
is less than 1.0 blow/inch, the pile shall be driven until the penetration resistance is a minimum
of 1.0 blow/inch for the last 2 feet of driving.
The Engineer may require the Contractor to install a pressure gauge on the inboard end of
the hose to check pressure at the hammer.
If water jets are used in driving, bearing resistances shall be determined either: (1) by
calculating it with the driving data and the formula above after the jets have been withdrawn
and the pile is driven at least 2 feet, or (2) by applying a test load.
6-05.3(13) Treatment of Timber Pile Heads
After cutting timber piles to correct elevation, the Contractor shall thoroughly coat
the heads of all untreated piles with two coats of an approved preservative that meets the
requirements of Section 9-09 (except concrete-encased piles).
After cutting treated timber piles to correct elevation, the Contractor shall brush three
coats of a preservative that meets the requirements of Section 9-09 on all pile heads (except
those to be covered with concrete footings or concrete caps). The pile heads shall then be
capped with alternate layers of an approved roofing asphalt and a waterproofing fabric that
conforms to Section 9-11.2. The cap shall be made of four layers of an approved roofing
asphalt and three layers of fabric. The fabric shall be cut large enough to cover the pile top
and fold down at least 6 inches along all sides of the pile. After the fabric cover is bent down
over the pile, its edges shall be fastened with large-head galvanized nails or with three turns
of galvanized wire. The edges of the cover shall be neatly trimmed.
On any treated timber pile encased in concrete, the cut end shall receive two coats of an
approved preservative that meets the requirements of Section 9-09 and then a heavy coat of
an approved roofing asphalt.
6-05.3(14) Extensions and Buildups of Precast Concrete Piles
The Contractor shall add extensions, or buildups (if necessary) on precast concrete piles
after they are driven to the required ultimate bearing resistance and minimum tip elevation.
Before adding extensions or buildups to precast-prestressed piles, the Contractor
shall remove any spalled concrete, leaving the pile fresh-headed and with a top surface
perpendicular to the axis of the pile. The concrete in the buildup shall be Class 5000.
Before adding to non-prestressed precast concrete piles, the Contractor shall cut the pile
head away to a depth 40 times the diameter of the vertical reinforcing bar. The final cut shall
be perpendicular to the axis of the pile. Reinforcement of the same density and configuration
as used in the pile shall be used in the buildup and shall be fastened firmly to the projecting
steel. Forms shall be placed to prevent concrete from leaking along the pile. The concrete in
the buildup shall be Class 4000.
Just before placing the concrete for extensions or buildups to precast or precast-prestressed
concrete piles, the Contractor shall thoroughly wet the top of the pile. Forms shall remain in
place at least 3 days.

Piling 6-05
6-05.3(15) Completion of Cast-In-Place Concrete Piles

After acceptance by the Engineer, driven casings shall be cut off horizontally at the
required elevation. They shall be clean and free of water when concrete and reinforcing steel
are placed.
These piles shall consist of steel casings driven into the ground, reinforced as specified,
and filled with Class 4000P concrete.
6-05.3(15)A Reinforcement
All bars shall be fastened rigidly into a single unit, then lowered into the casing before the
concrete is placed. Loose bars shall not be used.
Spiral hooping reinforcement shall be deformed steel bar, plain steel bar, cold-drawn wire,
or deformed wire.
6-05.3(15)B Placing Concrete
Before placing concrete, the Contractor shall remove all debris and water from the casing.
If the water cannot be removed, the casing shall be removed (or cut off 2 feet below the
ground and filled with sand) and a new one driven.
The Contractor shall place concrete continuously through a 5-foot rigid conduit directing
the concrete down the center of the pile casing, ensuring that every part of the pile is filled and
the concrete is worked around the reinforcement. The top 5 feet of concrete shall be placed
with the tip of the conduit below the top of fresh concrete. The Contractor shall vibrate, as a
minimum, the top 10 feet of concrete. In all cases, the concrete shall be vibrated to a point at
least 5 feet below the original ground line.
6-05.4 Measurement
Measurement for driving (type) pile will be the number of piles driven in place.
In these categories, measurement will be the longer of either the number of linear feet
driven below cutoff or as shown in the Engineer’s order list:
1. Furnishing timber piling (untreated or name of treatment).
2. Precast concrete and precast-prestressed concrete piling.
In these categories, measurement will be the number of linear feet driven below cutoff,
but no Engineer’s order list will be provided:
1. Cast-in-place concrete piling.
2. Furnishing steel piling.
Measurement for furnishing and driving test piles will be the number actually furnished
and driven as the Contract requires.
Measurement for steel pile tips or shoes will be by the number of tips or shoes actually
installed and driven in place on steel casings or steel piles.
6-05.5 Payment
“Furnishing and Driving (type) Test Pile”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Furnishing and Driving (type) Test Pile” shall be
full pay for furnishing and driving test piles to the ultimate bearing resistance or penetration
required by the Engineer, furnishing and installing a pile tip when pile tips are specified for
the permanent piles, preboring when preboring is specified for the permanent piles, for pulling
the piles or cutting them off as required, and for removing them from the site or for delivery to
the Contracting Agency for salvage when ordered by the Engineer. For cast-in-place concrete
test piles, this price shall include furnishing, fabricating, and installing the steel reinforcing bar
cage, and furnishing, casting, and curing the concrete. This price shall also include all costs in
connection with moving all pile driving equipment or other necessary equipment to the site of
the Work and for removing all such equipment from the site after the piles have been driven.

6-05 Piling
If, after the test piles have been driven, it is found necessary to eliminate the piling from all
or any part of the Structure, no additional pay will be allowed for moving the pile driving
equipment to and from the site of the Work.
“Driving Timber Pile (untreated or name treatment)”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Driving Timber (type) Pile” shall include any metal
shoes which the Contractor has determined to be beneficial to the pile driving.
“Driving Conc. Pile (size)”, per each.
“Driving St. Pile”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Driving (type) Pile (____)” shall be full pay for
driving the pile to the ultimate bearing and/or penetration specified.
“Furnishing Timber Piling (untreated or name treatment)”, per linear foot.
“Furnishing Conc. Piling (size)”, per linear foot.
“Furnishing St. Piling”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Furnishing (type) Piling (____)” shall be full
pay for furnishing the piling specified, including furnishing, fabricating, and installing the steel
reinforcing bar cage, and furnishing casting, and curing the concrete, as required for concrete
piling. Such price shall also be full pay, for furnishing timber, precast concrete, or precast-
prestressed concrete piling length ordered from an Engineer’s order sheet but not driven.
“Precast Concrete Pile Buildup”, by force account.
Payment for buildups of precast or precast-prestressed concrete piles will be made on
the basis of force account Work as covered in Section 1-09.6. No payment will be made for
buildups or additional lengths of buildup made necessary because of damage to the piling
during driving. The length of splice for precast concrete piles includes the length cut off
to expose reinforcing steel for the splice. The length of splice for precast-prestressed piles
includes the length in which holes are drilled and reinforcing bars are grouted.
entered an amount for “Precast Concrete Pile Buildup” in the Proposal to become part of the
total Bid by the Contractor.
“Furnishing Steel Pile Tip or Shoe (size)”, per each.

Bridge Railings 6-06
6-06 Bridge Railings

6-06.1 Description
This Work consists of providing and building bridge railings that meet the requirements
of the Plans, these Specifications, and the Engineer.
6-06.2 Materials
Timber Railing 9-09
Metal Railing 9-06.18
6-06.3(1) Timber Railings
Wheel guards and railings shall be true to line and grade and framed accurately. The
Contractor shall follow Section 6-04 whenever this Subsection does not specify a construction
method.
Unless the Plans show otherwise, wheel guards shall be:
1. Beveled and surfaced on the Roadway side and surfaced on the top edge. They may be
surfaced on four sides (S4S).
2. Laid in sections at least 12 feet long.
3. Bolted through the floor plank and outside stringer (or nailing piece) with ¾ inch
diameter bolts spaced no more than 4 feet apart.
All rails and rail post material shall be S4S and painted as required in Section 6-07. Railing
members shall be fastened securely together, with the bolts tightened once at installation and
again just before the Contracting Agency’s final acceptance of the Contract.
6-06.3(2) Metal Railings
Metal railing includes posts, web members, and horizontal members of the sidewalk and
Roadway railing. Unless the Plans or Special Provisions show otherwise, these shall be made
of aluminum alloy or steel.
Before fabricating the railing, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings of the
shop plans. The Contractor may substitute other rail connection details for those shown in the
Plans if details of these changes show in the shop plans and if the Engineer accepts them in
the Working Drawing response comments. In reviewing the shop plans, the Engineer indicates
only that they are adequate and complete enough. The review does not indicate a check
on dimensions.
Anchor bolts shall be positioned with a template to ensure that bolts match the hole spacing
of the bottom channels or anchorage plates.
Where specified, cover plates shall fit the bottom channel tightly after being snapped
into position.
Metal railings shall be installed true to line and grade (or camber). After first setting the
railing, the Contractor shall readjust all or part of it, if necessary, to create an overall line and
grade pleasing to the eye.
6-06.4 Measurement
Timber railing will be measured by the thousand board feet (MBM) as shown in
Section 6-04.
Metal railing will be measured by the linear foot along the line and slope at the base of the
completed railing.

6-06 Bridge Railings
6-06.5 Payment
“Timber and Lumber (untreated or name treatment)”, per MBM.
“Bridge Railing Type ____”, per linear foot.
In case no item is included in the Contract for “Bridge Railing Type ____” and payment
is not otherwise provided, all metal railings shall be included in the lump sum Contract price
for “Structural Carbon St”. as specified in Section 6-03.

Painting 6-07
6-07 Painting
6-07.1 Description
This work consists of containment, surface preparation, shielding adjacent areas from
unwanted surface preparation, testing and disposing of surface preparation debris, furnishing
and applying paint, shielding adjacent areas from unwanted paint, and cleaning up after
painting is completed. The work shall comply with all requirements of the Plans, these
Specifications, and the Engineer. Terminology used herein is in accordance with the definitions
used in Volume 2, Systems and Specifications, of the SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual.
6-07.2 Materials
Paint 9-08.1
Powder Coating Materials for Coating Galvanized Surfaces 9-08.2
Abrasive Blast Media 9-08.4(1)
Lead Abatement Additive 9-08.4(2)
Bird Guano Treatment 9-08.5(1)
Fungicide Treatment 9-08.5(2)
Water 9-08.5(3)
Filter Fabric 9-08.6
Single Component Urethane Sealant 9-08.7
Foam Backer Rod 9-08.8
6-07.3(1) Work Force Qualifications
6-07.3(1)A Work Force Qualifications for Shop Application of Paint
Facilities for shop application of paint shall either be selected from one of the facilities
listed in the WSDOT Qualified Products List as an approved coating facility for new steel
structures or shall be approved through the WSDOT Request for Approval of Material process.
6-07.3(1)B Work Force Qualifications for Field Application of Paint
The Contractor preparing the surface and applying the paint shall be certified under
SSPC‑QP 1.
The Contractor removing and otherwise disturbing existing paint containing lead and other
hazardous materials shall be certified under SSPC-QP 2, Category A.
In lieu of the above SSPC certifications, the Contractor performing the specified work may
complete one of the following actions:
1. The Contractor may substitute documentation of successful completion of two bridge
painting projects in the past ten years involving complete paint removal, including paint
containing lead and other hazardous materials, with reapplication of a three-component
moisture-cured polyurethane paint system. The documentation shall include the name
and size of the project, the dates of the work, the owner’s name, and name and contact
information for an owner’s contact person.
2. The Contractor’s quality control inspector(s) for the project shall be NACE-certified
CIP Level 3.
6-07.3(2) Submittals
The Contractor shall submit a painting plan consisting of one comprehensive submittal
including all components described in this Section. The Contractor shall submit Type 2
Working Drawings of the painting plan components.
For shop application of paint, the painting plan shall include the documents and samples
listed in Sections 6-07.3(2)B, 6-07.3(2)C, and 6-07.3(2)E.
For field application of paint, the painting plan shall include the documents and samples
listed in Section 6-07.3(2)A through 6-07.3(2)F.
6-07 Painting
6-07.3(2)A Work Force Qualifications Submittal Component

The work force qualifications submittal component of the painting plan shall include
the following:
1. Documentation of the Contractor’s workforce qualifications as specified in
Section 6-07.3(1).
2. Resumé of qualifications and contact information for the Contractor’s on-site
supervisors. Each on-site supervisor shall have 3 years’ minimum of industrial painting
field experience with 1 year minimum of field supervisory or management experience
in bridge painting projects.
6-07.3(2)B Contractor’s Quality Control Program Submittal Component
The Contractor’s quality control program submittal component of the painting plan shall
include the following:
1. Description of the inspection procedures and techniques and the acceptance criteria for
all phases of work.
2. Procedure for implementation of corrective action.
3. The paint system manufacturer’s recommended methods of preventing defects.
4. The Contractor’s frequency of quality control inspection.
5. Description of the equipment used for inspection of prepared surfaces and inspection
of paint.
6. Example completed form(s) of the daily quality control report used to document the
inspection work and tests performed by the Contractor’s quality control personnel.
6-07.3(2)C Paint System Manufacturer and Paint System Information Submittal
Component
The paint system manufacturer and paint system information submittal component of the
painting plan shall include the following:
1. Product data sheets and information on the paint materials, paint preparation, and paint
application, as specified by the paint manufacturer, including:
a. Samples and documents specified in Section 6-07.3(7) for each paint and thinner.
b. All application instructions, including the mixing and thinning directions.
c. Recommended spray nozzles and pressures.
d. Minimum and maximum drying time between coats.
e. Restrictions on temperature and humidity.
f. Repair procedures as specified in Section 6-07.3(10)P.
g. Maximum dry film thickness for each coat.
h. Minimum wet film thickness for each coat to achieve the specified minimum dry
film thickness.
2. Identification of, and contact information for, the paint system manufacturer’s technical
representative.
3. For painting of new steel, the friction coefficient of the faying surface, including
test results and the paint manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance in support of the
friction coefficient.
6-07.3(2)D Hazardous Waste Containment, Collection, Testing, and Disposal
Submittal Component
The hazardous waste containment, collection, testing, and disposal submittal component
of the painting plan shall include the following:
1. Abrasive blasting containment system attachment and support in accordance with
Section 6-07.3(10)A, with a complete description of each attachment device.
2. Details of jobsite material storage facilities and containment waste storage facilities,
including location, security, and environmental control.
Painting 6-07
3. Methods and materials used to contain, collect, and dispose of all containment waste
and all construction-related waste, including transportation of waste.
4. Details of the containment waste sampling plan conforming to WAC 173-303 for
waste designated as dangerous waste or extremely hazardous waste.
5. The name of, and contact information for, the accredited analytical laboratory
performing the testing of the containment waste samples in accordance with
Section 6-07.3(10)F.
6. Process for tracking the disposal of hazardous waste, including a sample form of the
tracking documentation.
7. When a wind speed threshold is specified, a description of the method to lower or
withdraw tarps, plastic exterior, and other containment components presenting an
exposed face to wind, and the estimated time required to accomplish this action.
8. Provisions for dust and debris collection, ventilation, and auxiliary lighting within
the containment system.
6-07.3(2)E Cleaning and Surface Preparation Submittal Component
The cleaning and surface preparation submittal component of the painting plan shall
include the following:
1. Details of the abrasive blast cleaning operation, including:
a. Description of the abrasive blast cleaning procedure.
b. Type, manufacturer, and brand of abrasive blast material and all associated additives,
including Materials Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
c. Description of the abrasive blast cleaning equipment to be used.
6-07.3(2)F Paint Application Equipment and Operations Submittal Component
The paint application equipment and operations submittal component of the painting plan
shall include the following:
1. Description of the equipment used for paint application operations.
2. Details of jobsite material storage facilities, including location, security, and
environmental control.
3. Description of the supports and platforms used to support equipment, materials, and
workers, including scaffolds, platforms, accordion lifts, and barges, and the methods
used to attach, moor, and anchor these supports and platforms.
4. Drip tarps in accordance with Section 6-07.3(10)O.
5. Methods and materials used to protect surrounding structures, equipment, and property
from exposure to, and damage from, painting operations.
6. Details of paint application operations for areas of limited and restricted access.
7. Description of the method for the removal of any accidental spills or drips on traffic that
occur during the normal painting operations, and provisions for providing a vehicle-
cleaning station.
6-07.3(2)G Painting Plan Meeting
At the option of the Contracting Agency, a painting plan meeting may be scheduled
following review of the Contractor’s initial submittal of the plan. The Contractor shall
be represented by the superintendent, on-site supervisors, and quality control inspectors.
6-07.3(3) Quality Control and Quality Assurance
6-07.3(3)A Quality Control and Quality Assurance for Shop Application of Paint
For shop application of paint, quality control procedures shall be as accepted by
the Engineer.

6-07 Painting
6-07.3(3)B Quality Control and Quality Assurance for Field Application of Paint

For field application of paint, the Contractor shall conduct quality control inspections as
required by SSPC-PA 1, using the personnel and the processes outlined in the painting plan.
The Contractor shall maintain current copies of the SSPC Painting Manual, Volumes 1 and
2, at the project site at all times. The Contractor’s quality control operations shall include
monitoring and documenting the following:
1. Equipment, personnel, and materials used.
2. Environmental conditions (ambient air temperature and humidity, steel surface
temperature, dew point, wind direction, and velocity).
3. Steel surface condition, profile, and preparation.
4. Paint application and film thickness.
A Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the Contractor’s daily quality control report,
signed and dated by the Contractor’s quality control inspector, accompanied by copies of the
test results of quality control tests performed on the work covered by the daily quality control
report, shall be submitted to the Engineer before the end of the next day’s work shift.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer time and access to perform quality assurance
testing. Each painting operation phase shall be considered a hold point, from which the
Contractor shall not proceed with continuing work until receiving the Engineer’s acceptance.
The Engineer may perform quality assurance testing at each of the following phases of
painting operations:
1. After SSPC-SP 1 cleaning.
2. After abrasive blast cleaning, hand and power tool surface cleaning, and compressed
air surface cleaning.
3. After applying each coat when dry.
4. During final inspection of all work at the end of the project.
Quality assurance testing may include the following tests:
1. Environmental conditions for painting in accordance with ASTM D337.
2. Cleanness of abrasive blasting media and ionic contamination of abrasive blasting
media in accordance with ASTM D4940.
3. Cleanness of compressed air in accordance with ASTM D4285.
4. Pictorial of surface preparation standards in accordance with SSPC-VIS 1, 3, 4, and 5.
5. Surface profile by Keanne-Tator comparator in accordance with ASTM D4417.
6. Surface profile by replica tape in accordance with ASTM D4417.
7. Wet film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4414.
8. Dry film thickness by magnetic gage in accordance with SSPC-PA 2 modified.
9. Dry film thickness by Tooke gage in accordance with ASTM D4138.
The Contractor shall repair all damage to paint resulting from Contracting Agency’s quality
assurance inspections at no additional cost or time to the Contracting Agency.
6-07.3(4) Paint System Manufacturer’s Technical Representative
The paint system manufacturer’s technical representative shall be present at the jobsite for
the pre-painting conference and for the first day of paint application, and shall be available for
consultation for the full project duration.
6-07.3(5) Pre-Painting Conference
A pre-painting conference shall be held 5 to 10 working days before beginning painting
operations to discuss the painting plan, construction operations, personnel, and equipment to
be used. Those attending shall include:
1. (Representing the Contractor) The superintendent, on-site supervisors, and all crew
members in charge of cleaning and preparing the surfaces, containing, collecting and

Painting 6-07
disposing of all removed materials, applying the paint, and performing all quality
control inspections, measurements and tests; and the paint system manufacturer’s
technical representative; and
2. (Representing the Contracting Agency) The Engineer, key inspection assistants, and
representatives of the WSDOT HQ Construction Office.
If the Contractor’s key personnel change between any work operations, an additional
conference may be held.
For projects that include painting of multiple structures, a separate conference may be held
for each structure, at the discretion of the Engineer.
6-07.3(6) Paint Containers, Storage, and Handling
6-07.3(6)A Paint Containers
Paint container labels shall include the following information:
1. Manufacturer’s name and product name, with batch number and date of manufacture.
2. Color name and Federal Standard 595 color number, where applicable.
3. Shelf life of the product, from date of batch manufacture.
4. Storage requirements and temperature limits.
Paint containers shall conform to U.S. DOT hazardous material shipping regulations. Paint
shall be delivered to the jobsite in the manufacturer’s original unopened containers with the
original manufacturer’s label legible and intact. Paint will be rejected if the container has a
puncture or if the lid shows signs of paint leakage. Each container shall be filled with paint
and sealed airtight. Each container shall be filled with the amount of paint required to yield the
specified quantity when measured at 70°F. All paint shall be shipped in new suitable containers
having a capacity not greater than 5 gallons.
6-07.3(6)B Paint Storage
Paint materials shall not be used or stored on-site after the shelf life expiration date.
Paint material shipping, handling, and storage shall conform to Sections 1-06.4 and
9-08.1(4) and the following requirements:
1. Paint materials shall be stored in the manufacturer’s original containers in a weather-
tight space where the temperature is maintained within the storage temperature range
recommended by the paint manufacturer, but in no case where the temperature is lower
than 40°F or greater than 100°F.
2. The Contractor shall monitor the paint material storage facility with a high-low
recording thermometer device.
3. The paint material storage facility shall be separate from the storage facilities used for
storing painting equipment and used for storing containment waste and construction-
generated waste.
6-07.3(7) Paint Sampling and Testing
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer 1 quart of each paint and each thinner
representing each lot. Samples shall be accompanied with a Material Safety Data Sheet and
a paint drawdown sample.
If the quantity of paint required for each component of the paint system for the entire
project is 20 gallons or less, then the paint system components will be accepted as specified
in Section 9-08.1(7) with a paint drawdown sample.
Sampling and testing performed by the Contracting Agency shall not be construed as
determining or predicting the performance or compatibility of the individual paint or the
completed paint system.

6-07 Painting
6-07.3(8) Equipment
6-07.3(8)A Paint Film Thickness Measurement Gages
Paint dry film thickness measurements shall be performed with either a Type 1 pull-off
gage or a Type 2 electronic gage as specified in SSPC Paint Application Specification No. 2,
Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
Paint wet film thickness measurement gages shall be stainless steel with notches graduated
in 1-mil increments.
6-07.3(9) Painting New Steel Structures
All materials classified as nongalvanized structural steel shall be painted with a four-
coat paint system as specified in Section 6-07.3(9)A. The primer coat shall be shop-applied.
The intermediate, intermediate stripe, and top coats shall be field-applied after erection and
following any primer coating repair operations.
Steel surfaces embedded in concrete, and faying (contact) surfaces of bolted connections
(including all surfaces internal to the connection and all filler plates) shall receive the primer
coat only. Stainless steel surfaces are not required to be painted. Welded shear connectors
are not required to be painted except for the weld area.
Temporary attachments or supports for scaffolding or forms shall not damage the
paint system.
6-07.3(9)A Paint System
The paint system applied to new steel surfaces shall consist of the following:
Primer Coat 9-08.1(2)C
Intermediate Coat 9-08.1(2)G
Intermediate Stripe Coat 9-08.1(2)G
Top Coat 9-08.1(2)H
All paint coating components of the selected paint system shall be produced by the same
manufacturer. The paint system selected shall be used throughout the entire structure.
Paint formulations to be used on faying surfaces shall be Class B coatings with a mean slip
coefficient not less than 0.50. The slip coefficient shall be determined by testing in accordance
with “Test Method to Determine the Slip Coefficient for Coatings Used in Bolted Joints” as
adopted by the Research Council on Structural Connections.
6-07.3(9)B Paint Color
Each successive coat shall be a contrasting color to the previously applied coat. The color
of the top coat shall be as specified in the Plans or Special Provisions and shall conform to
Section 9-08.1(8).
6-07.3(9)C Mixing and Thinning Paint
Paint shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations
to a smooth, lump-free consistency. Mixing shall be done, to the extent possible, in the
original containers and shall be continued until all of the metallic powder or pigment is in
suspension. The mixed paint shall be kept under continuous agitation up to and during the
time of application.
6-07.3(9)D Coating Thickness
Dry film thickness shall be measured in accordance with SSPC Paint Application
Specification No. 2, Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages.
The minimum dry film thickness of the primer coat shall not be less than 2.5 mils.
The minimum dry film thickness of the intermediate, intermediate stripe and top coats
shall be not less than 3.0 mils.
The dry film thickness of each coat shall not be thicker than the paint manufacturer’s
recommended maximum thickness.

Painting 6-07
If the specified number of coats does not produce a combined dry film thickness of at least
the sum of the thicknesses required per coat, the Contractor shall apply another full coat of
the top coat of paint. The dry film thickness shall not be thicker than the paint manufacturer’s
recommended maximum thickness.
6-07.3(9)E Surface Temperature Requirements Prior to Application of Paint
For application of the paint system, the temperature of the steel surface shall be greater
than 40°F and less than 115°F.
6-07.3(9)F Shop Surface Cleaning and Preparation
A roughened surface profile shall be provided by an abrasive blasting procedure as
accepted by the Engineer. The profile shall be 1-mil minimum or in accordance with the
paint manufacturer’s recommendations, whichever is greater. The entire steel surface to be
painted, including surfaces specified in Section 6-07.3(9)G to receive a mist coat of primer,
shall be cleaned to a near white condition in accordance with SSPC-SP 10 and shall be in this
condition immediately prior to paint application.
6-07.3(9)G Application of Shop Primer Coat
After receiving the Engineer’s acceptance of the prepared surface, the primer shall be
applied so as to produce a uniform, even coating that has fully bonded with the metal. Primer
shall be applied with the spray nozzles and pressures recommended by the manufacturer of the
paint system, so as to attain the film thicknesses specified.
Steel girder top flanges and soldier pile flanges to be embedded in concrete shall be
prepared in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9)F and shall then receive a mist coat of the
specified primer with a dry film thickness of 0.5 to 1.0 mils.
The Contractor shall provide access to the steel to permit inspection by the Engineer. The
access shall not mar or damage any freshly painted surfaces.
High-strength field bolts shall not be painted before erection.
6-07.3(9)H Containment for Field Coating
The Contractor shall use a containment system in accordance with Section 6-07.3(10)A.
6-07.3(9)I Application of Field Coatings
An on-site supervisor shall be present for each work shift at the bridge site.
Prior to applying field coatings, the Contractor shall field install welded shear connectors
on the steel girder top flanges in accordance with Section 6-03.3(29) and as shown in
the Plans.
Upon completion of erection Work, all uncoated areas remaining, including bolts, nuts,
washers, and splice plates, shall be prepared in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9)F, followed
by a field primer coat of an organic zinc paint selected from the same approved paint system
and paint manufacturer as the other paint for the Structure. The intermediate and top coats
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s written recommendations.
The minimum drying time between coats shall be as shown in the product data sheets, but
not less than 12 hours. The Contractor shall determine whether the paint has cured sufficiently
for proper application of succeeding coats.
The maximum time between intermediate and top coats shall be in accordance with the
manufacturer’s written recommendations. If the maximum time between coats is exceeded,
all newly coated surfaces shall be prepared to SSPC-SP 7, brush-off blast cleaning,
and shall be repainted with the same paint that was cleaned, at no additional cost to the
Contracting Agency.
Dry film thickness measurements will be made in accordance with Section 6-07.3(9)D.
All paint damage that occurs shall be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer’s
written recommendations. On bare areas or areas of insufficient primer thickness, the repair
shall include the application of the field-applied organic zinc primer system, and the final two

6-07 Painting
coats of the paint system. On areas where the primer is at least equal to the minimum required
dry film thickness, the repair shall include the application of the final two coats of the paint
system. All paint repair operations shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost
or time to the Contracting Agency.
6-07.3(10) Painting Existing Steel Structures
Painting existing steel structures includes providing containment, cleaning, preparing the
surface, painting metal surfaces, and disposal of generated waste. Painting of existing steel
structures shall be done in the following sequence:
1. Containment.
2. Bird guano, fungus, and vegetation removal.
3. Dry cleaning.
4. Surface preparation.
5. Treatment of pack rust and gaps.
6. Paint system application.
6-07.3(10)A Containment
The containment system shall be in accordance with SSPC Technology Guide No. 6, Guide
for Containing Surface Preparation Debris Generated During Paint Removal Operations
Class 1. The containment system shall fully enclose the steel to be painted and not allow
any material to escape the containment system. The Contractor shall protect the surrounding
environment from all debris or damage resulting from the Contractor’s operations.
Except as otherwise specified in the Contract, the containment length shall not exceed the
length of a span (defined as pier to pier). The containment system shall not cause any damage
to the existing structure. Attachment devices shall not mark or otherwise damage the steel
member to which they are attached. Field-welding of attachments to the existing structure
will not be allowed. The Contractor shall not drill holes into the existing structure or through
existing structural members except as shown in the Contractor’s painting plan Working
Drawing submittal.
Emissions shall be assessed by Visible Emission Observations (Method A) in SSPC
Technology Update No. 7 Section 6.2 and shall be limited to the Level A Acceptance Criteria
Option Level 0 Emissions standard. If visible emissions occur or if failure to the containment
system occurs or if signs of failure to the containment system are present, the Contractor
shall stop work immediately. Work shall not resume until the failure has been corrected to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
The containment system shall not be removed until all cleaned and painted surfaces have
been inspected and accepted by the Engineer.
Prior to beginning work each day, all containment systems shall be inspected by the
Contractor to verify they are in place and functioning properly. Any necessary maintenance
to restore full function shall be completed prior to beginning work.
6-07.3(10)B Bird Guano, Fungus, and Vegetation Removal
Bird guano and bird nesting materials shall be removed in the dry. Following dry removal,
the Contractor shall apply a treatment solution in accordance with Section 9-08.5(1), followed
by hand-scrubbing and rinsing with water in accordance with Section 9-08.5(3). The bird
guano, bird nesting materials, and treatment solution shall be contained and collected.
The Contractor shall treat all areas of fungus growth and vegetative growth. The Contractor
shall apply a treatment solution in accordance with Section 9-08.5(2) to the fungus areas for
a period recommended by the solution manufacturer or as specified by the Engineer, but in
no case less than 5 minutes. The fungus, vegetative growth, and treatment solution shall be
contained and collected.
Bird guano, bird nesting materials, fungus, and vegetative growth shall be disposed of at
a land disposal site accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working

Painting 6-07
Drawing consisting of one copy of the disposal receipt, which shall include a description of
the disposed material.
6-07.3(10)C Dry Cleaning
Dry cleaning shall include removal of accumulated dirt and debris on the surfaces to be
painted. Collected dirt and debris shall be disposed of at a land disposal site accepted by the
Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of a copy of the
disposal receipt, which shall include a description of the disposed material
6-07.3(10)D Surface Preparation Prior to Overcoat Painting
The Contractor shall remove any visible oil, grease, and road tar in accordance with
SSPC‑SP 1.
Following any preparation by SSPC-SP1, all steel surfaces to be painted shall be prepared
in accordance with SSPC-SP 7, brush-off blast cleaning. Surfaces inaccessible to brush-
off blast shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP 15, commercial grade power tool
cleaning, as allowed by the Engineer.
Following brush-off blast cleaning, the Contractor shall perform spot abrasive blast
cleaning in accordance with SSPC-SP 6, commercial blast cleaning. Spot abrasive blast
cleaning shall be performed in such a manner that the adjacent areas of work are protected
from damage. Areas exhibiting coating failure down to the steel substrate, and those exhibiting
visible corrosion, shall be prepared down to clean bare steel in accordance with SSPC-SP 6.
Exposed steel areas that have an average exposed diameter of less than 1½ inches and no other
similar area closer than 4 inches do not require spot abrasive blast cleaning or edge feathering
unless required by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide a sharp angular surface profile
by an abrasive blasting procedure as accepted by the Engineer. The profile shall be 1 mil
minimum or in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations, whichever is
greater. For small areas, as allowed by the Engineer, the Contractor may substitute cleaning
in accordance with SSPC-SP 11, power tool cleaning. The prepared area shall extend at least
2 inches into adjacent tightly adhering, intact coating.
Following spot abrasive blast cleaning of exposed steel surfaces, edges of tightly adherent
coating remaining shall be feathered so that the recoated surface has a smooth appearance.
Immediately prior to painting, the Contractor shall clean all steel surfaces and staging areas
with dry, oil‑free compressed air conforming to ASTM D4285.
6-07.3(10)E Surface Preparation – Full Paint Removal
For structures where full removal of existing paint is specified, the Contractor shall remove
any visible oil, grease, and road tar in accordance with SSPC-SP 1.
Following preparation by SSPC-SP 1, all steel surfaces to be painted shall be prepared
in accordance with SSPC-SP 10, near-white metal blast cleaning. Surfaces inaccessible to
near-white metal blast cleaning shall be prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP 11, power tool
cleaning to bare metal, as allowed by the Engineer.
6-07.3(10)F Collecting, Testing, and Disposal of Containment Waste
The sealed waste containers shall be labeled as required by State and Federal laws. All
confined materials shall be collected and secured in sealed containers at the end of each shift
or daily at a minimum to prevent the weight of the confined materials from causing failure
to the containment system. The sealed waste containers shall be stored in accordance with
Section 1-06.4, the painting plan, and the following requirements:
1. The containers shall be stored on an impermeable surface that accommodates sweeping
or vacuuming.
2. Landside storage of the containers shall be at an elevation above the ordinary high
water level (OHWL) elevation. The container storage area shall not be in a stormwater
runoff course and shall not be in an area of standing water.

6-07 Painting
3. The container storage area shall be a fenced, secured site, separate from the storage
facilities for paint materials and paint equipment.
4. The containers shall not be stored at the on-site landside storage site for longer than
90 calendar days.
All material collected by and removed from the containment system shall be taken to a
landside staging area, provided by the Contractor, for further processing and storage prior to
transporting for disposal. Handling and storage of material collected by and removed from the
containment system shall conform to Section 1-06.4. Storage of containment waste materials
shall be in a facility separate from the storage facilities used for paint materials and paint
equipment.
Containment waste is defined as all paint chips and debris removed from the steel surface
and all abrasive blast media, as contained by the containment system. After all waste from the
containment system has been collected, the Contractor shall collect representative samples of
the components that field screening indicates are lead-contaminated material. The Contractor
shall collect at least one representative sample from each container. The Contractor may
choose to collect a composite sample of each container, but the composite sample must consist
of several collection points (a minimum of 3 random samples) that are representative of the
entire contents of the container and representative of the characteristics of the type of waste
in the container. In accordance with WAC 173–303-040, a representative sample means “a
sample which can be expected to exhibit the average properties of the sample source.”
The debris shall be tested for metals using the Toxicity Characteristics Leaching Procedure
(TCLP) and EPA Methods 1311 and 6010. At a minimum, the materials should be analyzed
for the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) 8 Metals (arsenic, barium,
cadmium, chromium, lead, mercury, selenium, and silver). Pursuant to the Dangerous Waste
(DW) Regulations Chapter 173-303-90(8)(c) WAC, “Any waste that contains contaminants
which occur at concentrations at or above the DW threshold must be designated as DW.” All
material within each individual container or containment system that designates as DW shall
be disposed of at a legally permitted Subtitle C Hazardous Waste Landfill. All material within
each individual container or containment system that designate below the DW threshold,
will be designated as “Solid Waste” and shall be disposed of at a legally permitted Subtitle D
Landfill. Disposal shall be in accordance with WAC 173-303 for waste designated “Dangerous
Waste” and pursuant to WAC 173-350 for waste designated as “Solid Waste”.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of two copies of the
transmittal documents or bill of lading listing the waste material shipped from the construction
site to the waste disposal site. One copy of the shipment list shall show the signature of the
Engineer and shall have the waste site operator’s confirmation for receipt of the waste.
In the event that the containment wastes are designated as “Dangerous Wastes” or
“Extremely Hazardous Waste” under WAC 173-303, the Contracting Agency will provide
to the Contractor the appropriate EPA identification number.
Unless noted otherwise, a waste site will not be provided by the Contracting Agency for
the disposal of excess materials and debris.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing of all TCLP results.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of waste disposal
documentation within 15 working days of each disposal. This documentation shall include the
quantity and type of waste disposed of with each disposal shipment.
6-07.3(10)G Treatment of Pack Rust and Gaps
Pack rust is defined as the condition where two or more pieces of steel fastened together
by rivets or bolts have been pressed apart by crevice corrosion caused by the buildup of
corrosion products at the interface of the steel pieces.
Pack rust forming a gap between steel surfaces of 1/16 inch or greater shall be cleaned to
a depth of one half of the gap width, up to a maximum of ¼ inch. The cleaned gap shall be
treated with rust penetrating sealer and caulked to form a watertight seal along the top edge

Painting 6-07
and the two sides of the steel pieces involved, using the rust penetrating sealer and caulk as
accepted by the Engineer. The bottom edge or lowest edge of the steel pieces involved shall
not be caulked.
The type of rust penetrating sealer and caulk used shall be compatible with the paint
system used and shall be applied in accordance with the rust penetrating sealer and caulk
manufacturer’s instructions.
When caulking joints where only one steel piece edge is exposed, a fillet of caulk shall be
formed that is not less than ⅛ inch or the width of the pack rust gap. The fillet is not required
where there is no separation of the steel pieces due to pack rust.
At locations where gaps between steel surfaces exceed ¼ inch, the Contractor shall fill the
gap with foam backer rod material and sealant as accepted by the Engineer. The foam backer
rod material shall be of sufficient diameter to fill the crevice or gap. The Contractor shall apply
sealant over the foam backer rod material to form a watertight seal.
6-07.3(10)H Paint System
The paint system applied to existing steel surfaces shall consist of the following five-coat
system:
Primer Coat 9-08.1(2)F
Primer Stripe Coat 9-08.1(2)F
Intermediate Coat 9-08.1(2)G
Intermediate Stripe Coat 9-08.1(2)G
Top Coat 9-08.1(2)H
All paint coating components of the selected paint system shall be produced by the same
manufacturer. Only one paint system from a singular manufacturer shall be used throughout
the project unless otherwise allowed in writing by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not
change to a different paint system once the initial paint system has been applied to any portion
of the bridge unless otherwise allowed in writing by the Engineer.
6-07.3(10)I Paint Color
Each of the five coats shall be a contrasting color to the previously applied full coat.
The color of the top coat shall be as specified in the Plans or Special Provisions and shall
conform to Section 9-08.1(8). Tinting shall occur at the factory at the time of manufacture and
placement in containers, prior to initial shipment. Application site tinting will not be allowed
except as otherwise allowed by the Engineer.
6-07.3(10)J Mixing and Thinning Paint
The Contractor shall thoroughly mix paint by mechanical means to ensure a uniform
composition. Paint shall not be mixed by means of air stream bubbling or boxing. Paint shall
be mixed in the original containers and mixing shall continue until all pigment or metallic
powder is in suspension. Care shall be taken to ensure that the solid material that has settled to
the bottom of the container is thoroughly dispersed. After mixing, the Contractor shall inspect
the paint for uniformity and to ensure that no unmixed pigment or lumps are present.
Catalysts, curing agents, hardeners, initiators, or dry metallic powders that are packaged
separately may be added to the base paint in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s written
recommendations and only after the paint is thoroughly mixed to achieve a uniform mixture
with all particles wetted. The Contractor shall then add the proper volume of curing agent to
the correct volume of base and mix thoroughly. The mixture shall be used within the pot life
specified by the manufacturer. Unused portions shall be discarded at the end of each work day.
The Contractor shall not add additional thinner at the application site except as
allowed by the Engineer. The amount and type of thinner, if allowed, shall conform to the
manufacturer’s specifications.
When recommended by the manufacturer, the Contractor shall constantly agitate paint
during application by use of paint pots equipped with mechanical agitators.

6-07 Painting
The Contractor shall strain all paint after mixing to remove undesirable matter, but without
removing the pigment or metallic powder.
Paint shall be stored and mixed in a secure, contained location to eliminate the potential for
spills into State waters and onto the ground and highway surfaces.
6-07.3(10)K Coating Thickness
The minimum dry film thickness of each coat (primer, intermediate, top, and all stripe
coats) shall not be less than 3.0 mils. The dry film thickness shall not be thicker than the paint
manufacturer’s recommended maximum thickness.
The minimum wet film thickness of each coat shall be specified by the paint manufacturer
to achieve the minimum dry film thickness.
Film thickness, wet and dry, will be measured by gages conforming to Section 6-07.3(8)A
Wet measurements will be taken immediately after the paint is applied in accordance with
ASTM D4414. Dry measurements will be taken after the coating is dry and hard in accordance
with SSPC Paint Application Specification Section No. 2.
Each painter shall be equipped with wet film thickness gages and shall be responsible for
performing frequent checks of the paint film thickness throughout application.
Coating thickness measurements may be made by the Engineer after the application of each
coat and before the application of the succeeding coat. In addition, the Engineer may inspect
for uniform and complete coverage and appearance. One hundred percent of all thickness
measurements shall meet or exceed the minimum wet film thickness. In areas where wet film
thickness measurements are impractical, dry film thickness measurements may be made. If a
question arises about an individual coat’s thickness or coverage, it may be verified by the use
of a Tooke gage in accordance with ASTM D4138.
If the specified number of coats does not produce a combined dry film thickness of at least
the sum of the thicknesses required per coat, if an individual coat does not meet the minimum
thickness, or if visual inspection shows incomplete coverage, the coating system will be
rejected and the Contractor shall discontinue painting and surface preparation operations
and shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing of the repair proposal. The repair proposal shall
include documentation demonstrating the cause of the less-than-minimum thickness, along
with physical test results, as necessary, and modifications to Work methods to prevent similar
results. The Contractor shall not resume painting or surface preparation operations until
receiving the Engineer’s acceptance of the completed repair.
6-07.3(10)L Environmental Condition Requirements Prior to Application of Paint
Paint shall be applied only during periods when:
1. Air temperature and paint temperature are between 35°F and 115°F.
2. Steel surface temperature is between 35°F and 115°F.
3. Steel surface does not show wet drops and is not wet.
4. Relative humidity is within the manufacturer’s recommended range.
5. The anticipated ambient temperature will remain above 35°F during the paint
drying period.
Application will not be allowed if conditions are not favorable for proper application and
performance of the paint.
Paint shall not be applied when weather conditions are unfavorable to proper curing.
If a paint system manufacturer’s recommendations allow for application of a paint under
environmental conditions other than those specified, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2
Working Drawing consisting of a letter from the paint manufacturer specifying the
environmental conditions under which the paint can be applied. Application of paint under
environmental conditions other than those specified in this section will not be allowed without
the Engineer’s concurrence.

Painting 6-07
6-07.3(10)M Steel Surface Condition Requirements Prior to Application of Paint

The steel surface to be painted shall be free of moisture, dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose,
peeling or, chalky paint, abrupt paint edges, salts, rust, mill scale, and other foreign matter and
substances that would prevent the bond of the succeeding application. The Contractor shall
protect freshly painted surfaces from contamination by abrasives, dust, or foreign materials
from any other source. The Contractor shall prepare contaminated surfaces to the satisfaction
of the Engineer before applying additional paint.
Prepared surfaces shall be kept clean at all times, before painting and between coats.
Edges of existing paint shall be feathered in accordance with SSPC-PA 1, Note 16.9.
6-07.3(10)N Field Coating Application Methods
The Contractor shall apply paint materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations by air or airless spray, brush, roller, or any combination of these methods
unless otherwise specified. Spray application of the paint shall be accomplished with spray
nozzles and at pressures as recommended by the paint manufacturer to ensure application
of paint at the specified film thickness. The Contractor shall use brushes to apply the stripe
coat, to ensure complete coverage around structural geometric irregularities and to push the
paint into gaps between existing steel surfaces and around rivets and bolts. All application
techniques shall conform to Section 7, SSPC-PA 1. Painters using brushes shall work from
pails containing a maximum of 2 gallons of paint. This is intended to minimize the impact
of any spill.
6-07.3(10)O Applying Field Coatings
An on-site supervisor shall be present for each work shift at the bridge site.
The first coat shall be a primer coat applied to steel surfaces cleaned to bare metal. The
second coat shall be a primer stripe coat applied to all steel surfaces cleaned to bare metal
and defined to receive a stripe coat. The third coat shall be an intermediate coat. The fourth
coat shall be an intermediate stripe coat applied to steel surfaces defined to receive a stripe
coat. The fifth coat shall be the top coat. The intermediate (third) and top (fifth) coats shall
encapsulate the entire surface area of the structure members specified to be painted.
Prior to the application of paint, the Contractor shall clean the bridge deck surface for the
purpose of dust control.
During painting operations the Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain drip
tarps below the areas to be painted to contain all spilled paint, buckets, brushes, and other
deleterious material, and prevent such materials from reaching the environment below or
adjacent to the structure being painted. Drip tarps shall be absorbent material and hung
to minimize puddling.
In addition to the requirements of the Specifications, paint application shall conform to:
1. The best practices of the trade.
2. The written recommendations of the paint manufacturer.
3. All applicable portions of the SSPC-PA 1.
No primer paint shall be applied to any surface until the surface has been inspected
and accepted by the Engineer. Any area to which primer paint has been applied without
the Engineer’s inspection and acceptance will be considered improperly cleaned. The
unauthorized application shall be completely removed and the entire area recleaned to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. After the area has been recleaned, inspected, and approved, the
Contractor may again initiate the painting sequence. No additional compensation or extension
of time in accordance with Section 1-08.8 will be allowed for the removal of any unauthorized
paint application and recleaning of the underlying surface.
All steel surfaces cleaned to bare metal by abrasive blast cleaning shall receive the primer
coat within the same working day as the cleaning to bare metal and before any rust begins
to form. Each successive coat shall be applied as soon as possible over the previous coat,
accounting for drying time of the preceding coat, weather, atmospheric temperature and other

6-07 Painting
environmental conditions, and the paint manufacturer’s recommendations. Each coat shall be
dry before recoating and shall be sufficiently cured so that succeeding or additional coats may
be applied without causing damage to the previous coat. Recoat times shall be as shown in the
paint manufacturer’s recommendations, but not less than 12 hours. Revision of recoat times to
other than recommended by the paint manufacturer requires the concurrence of the Engineer.
If the maximum time between coats is exceeded, all affected areas shall be prepared to SSPC-
SP 7, brush-off blast cleaning, and recoated with the Contract-specified system at no additional
expense or time to the Contracting Agency.
Each coat shall be applied in a uniform layer, completely covering the preceding coat.
The Contractor shall correct runs, sags, skips, or other deficiencies before application of
succeeding coats. Such corrective work may require recleaning, application of additional paint,
or other means as determined by the Engineer, at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
If fresh paint is damaged by the elements, the Contractor shall replace or repair the paint
to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
After applying the primer or intermediate coats, the Contractor shall apply a primer or
intermediate stripe coat, respectively, on all edges, corners, seams, crevices, interior angles,
junction of joint members, rivet or bolt heads, nuts and threads, weld lines, and any similar
surface irregularities. The coverage of each stripe coat shall extend at least 1 inch beyond the
irregular surface. The stripe coat shall be of sufficient thickness to completely hide the surface
being covered and shall be followed as soon as feasible by the application of the subsequent
coat to its specified thickness.
If the primer coat leaves unsealed cracks or crevices, these shall be sealed with single-
component urethane sealant conforming to Section 9-08.7 (applied in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations) before the intermediate coats are applied.
The Contractor shall correct paint deficiencies before application of succeeding coats.
Such corrective work may require recleaning, application of additional paint, or other
corrective measures in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations and as
specified by the Engineer. Such corrective work shall be completed at no additional expense
or time to the Contracting Agency.
Each application of primer, primer stripe, intermediate, intermediate stripe, and top coat
shall be considered as separately applied coats, including for the purposes of film thickness
and coverage requirements. The Contractor shall not use a preceding or subsequent coat to
remedy a deficiency in another coat. The Contractor shall apply the top coat to at least the
minimum specified top coat thickness, to provide a uniform appearance and consistent finish
coverage, even if the total thickness of the prime and intermediate coats is found to exceed
the specified total thickness for the primer and intermediate coats.
If roadway or sidewalk planks lie so close to the metal that they prevent proper cleaning
and painting, the Contractor shall remove or cut the planks to provide at least a 1-inch
clearance. Any plank removal or cutting shall be done with the concurrence of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall replace all planks after painting. If removal breaks or damages the
planks and makes them unfit for reuse, the Contractor shall replace them at no expense to the
Contracting Agency.
6-07.3(10)P Field Coating Repair
Paint repair shall conform to SSPC-PA 1. Repair areas shall be cleaned of all damaged
paint and the system reapplied using all coats typical to the paint system. Each coat shall be
thoroughly dry before applying subsequent coats. Paint repair shall be in accordance with the
paint manufacturer’s recommendations and as accepted by the Engineer.
6-07.3(10)Q Cleanup
Cleaning of equipment shall not be done in State waters nor shall resultant cleaning runoff
be allowed to enter State waters. No paint cans, lids, brushes, or other debris shall be allowed
to enter State waters. Solvents, paints, paint sludge, cans, buckets, rags, brushes, and other
waste associated with this project shall be collected and disposed of off-site. Paint products,

Painting 6-07
petroleum products, or other deleterious material shall not be wasted into, or otherwise enter,
State waters as a result of project activities.
Cleanup of the project site shall conform to Sections 1-04.11 and 6-01.12
6-07.3(11) Painting or Powder Coating of Galvanized Surfaces
Galvanized surfaces specified to be coated after galvanizing shall receive either paint
in accordance with Section 6-07.3(11)A or powder coating in accordance with Section
6-07.3(11)B. The color of the finish coat shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
6-07.3(11)A Painting of Galvanized Surfaces
All galvanized surfaces receiving paint shall be prepared for painting in accordance
with the ASTM D6386. The method of preparation shall be as agreed upon by the paint
manufacturer and the galvanizer. The Contractor shall not begin painting until receiving
the Engineer’s acceptance of the prepared galvanized surface.
6-07.3(11)A1 Environmental Conditions
Steel surfaces shall be:
• Greater than 35ºF, and
• Less than 115ºF.
or in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, whichever is more stringent.
6-07.3(11)A2 Paint Coat Materials
The Contractor shall paint the dry surface as follows:
Paint Type Name
First Coat Section 9-08.1(2)E Epoxy polyamide
Second Coat Section 9-08.1(2)H Moisture-cured aliphatic polyurethane
The Contractor shall select all coats from the approved products listed in the current
Qualified Products List. The coating material for the first and second coats shall be from the
same manufacturer.
Each coat shall be dry before the next coat is applied. All coats applied in the shop shall
be dried hard before shipment.
6-07.3(11)B Powder Coating of Galvanized Surfaces
Powder coating of galvanized surfaces shall consist of the following coats:
Paint Type Name
First Coat Section 9-08.2 Epoxy powder primer coat
Second Coat Section 9-08.2 Polyester finish coat
6-07.3(11)B1 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the following
information:
1. The name, location, and contact information (mail address, phone, and email) for the
firm performing the powder coating operation.
2. Quality control (QC) programs established and followed by the firm performing the
powder coating operation. Forms to document inspection and testing of coatings as
part of the QC program shall be included in the submittal.
3. Project-specific powder coating plan, including identification of the powder coating
materials used (and manufacturer), and specific cleaning, surface preparation,
preheating, powder coating application, curing, shop and field coating repair, handling,
and storage processes to be taken for the assemblies being coated for this project.
4. Product data and MSDS sheets for all powder coating and coating repair materials.

6-07 Painting
6-07.3(11)B2 Galvanizing
Prior to the galvanizing operation, the Contractor shall identify to the galvanizer the
specific assemblies and surfaces receiving the powder coating after galvanizing, to ensure that
the galvanizing method used on these assemblies is compatible with subsequent application
of a powder coating system. Specifically, such assemblies shall neither be water-quenched nor
receive a chromate conversion coating as part of the galvanizing operation.
6-07.3(11)B3 Galvanized Surface Cleaning and Preparation
Galvanized surfaces receiving the powder coating shall be cleaned and prepared for coating
in accordance with ASTM D6386, and the project-specific powder coating plan.
Assemblies conforming to the ASTM D6386 definition for newly galvanized steel shall
receive surface smoothing and surface cleaning in accordance with ASTM D6386, Section 5,
and surface preparation in accordance with ASTM D6386, Section 5.4.1.
Assemblies conforming to the ASTM D6386 definition for partially weathered galvanized
steel shall be checked and prepared in accordance with ASTM D6386, Section 6, before
then receiving surface smoothing and surface cleaning in accordance with ASTM D6386,
Section 5, and surface preparation in accordance with ASTM D6386, Section 5.4.1.
Assemblies conforming to the ASTM D6386 definition for weathered galvanized steel
shall be prepared in accordance with ASTM D6386, Section 7 before then receiving surface
smoothing and surface cleaning in accordance with ASTM D6386, Section 5, and surface
preparation in accordance with ASTM D6386, Section 5.4.1 except as follows:
1. Ferrous metal abrasives are prohibited as a blast media for surface preparation.
2. Surface preparation shall be accomplished using dry abrasive blasting through a blast
nozzle with compressed air. Abrasive blasting with a centrifugal wheel is prohibited.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of all surface cleaning and preparation activities
and shall provide the Engineer opportunity to perform quality assurance inspection, in
accordance with Section 1-05.6, at the completion of surface cleaning and preparation
activities prior to beginning powder coating application.
6-07.3(11)B4 Powder Coating Application and Curing
After surface preparation, the two-component powder coating shall be applied in
accordance with the powder coating manufacturer’s recommendations, the project-specific
powder coating plan, and as follows:
1. Preheat. The preheat shall be sufficient to prevent pinholes from forming in the finished
coating system.
2. Apply the epoxy primer coat, followed by a partial cure.
3. Apply the polyester finish coat, followed by the finish cure.
6-07.3(11)B5 Testing
The firm performing the powder coating operation shall conduct, or make arrangements
for, QC testing on all assemblies receiving powder coating for this project, in accordance with
the powder coating firm’s QC program as documented in item 2 of the Submittal Subsection
above. Testing may be performed on coated surfaces of production fabricated items, or on a
representative test panel coated alongside the production fabricated items being coated. There
shall be a minimum of one set of tests representing each cycle of production fabricated items
coated and cured. Additional tests shall be performed at the request of the Engineer. Repair
of damaged coatings on production fabricated items shall be the responsibility of the firm
applying the powder coating, and shall be in accordance with the project-specific powder
coating plan. At a minimum, the QC testing shall test for the following requirements:
1. Visual inspection for the presence of coating holidays and other unacceptable surface
imperfections.

Painting 6-07
2. Coating thickness measurement in accordance with Section 6-07.3(5). The minimum

thickness of the epoxy primer coating and polyester finish coating shall be 3 mils each.
3. Hardness testing in accordance with ASTM D3363, with the finish coat providing a
minimum hardness value of H.
4. Adhesion testing in accordance with ASTM D4541 for 400 psi minimum adhesion
for the complete two-component coating system.
5. Powder Coating Institute (PCI) #8 recommended procedure for solvent cure test.
The results of the QC testing shall be documented in a QC report and submitted as a Type 2
Working Drawing.
The Engineer shall be provided notice and access to all assemblies at the powder coating
facility for the purposes of Contracting Agency acceptance inspection, including notice and
access to witness all hardness and adhesion testing performed by the firm conducting the
QC testing, in accordance with Section 1-05.6.
Assemblies not meeting the above requirements will be subject to rejection by the
Engineer. Rejected assemblies shall be repaired or recoated by the Contractor, at no additional
expense to the Contracting Agency, in accordance with the project-specific powder coating
plan, until the assemblies satisfy the acceptance testing requirements.
Assemblies shall not be shipped from the powder coating firm’s facility to the project
site until the Contractor receives the Engineer’s acceptance of the QC Report and assembly
inspection performed by the Engineer.
6-07.3(11)B6 Coating Protection for Shipping, Storage, and Field Erection
After curing and acceptance, the Contractor shall protect the coated assemblies with
multiple layers of bubble wrap or other protective wrapping materials specified in the project-
specific powder coating plan.
During storage and shipping, each assembly shall be separated from other assemblies by
expanded polystyrene spacers and other spacing materials specified in the project-specific
powder coating plan.
After erection, all coating damage due to the Contractor’s shipping, storage, handling, and
erection operations shall be repaired by the Contractor in accordance with the project-specific
powder coating plan. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer access to all locations of
all powder-coated members for verification of coating conditions prior to and following all
coating repairs.
6-07.3(12) Painting Ferry Terminal Structures
Ferry terminal structures shall be painted as specified in the Special Provisions.
6-07.3(13) Painting Timber Structures
Timber structures shall be painted as specified in the Special Provisions.
6-07.3(14) Metallic Coatings
6-07.3(14)A General Requirements
This specification covers the requirements for thermal spray metallic coatings, with and
without additional paint coats, as a means to prevent corrosion.
The coating system consists of surface preparation by wash cleaning and abrasive blast
cleaning, thermal spray application of a metallic coating using a material made specifically
for that purpose, and, when specified, shop primer coat or shop primer coat plus top
coat in accordance with Section 6-07.3(11)A. The system also includes inspection and
acceptance requirements.

6-07 Painting
6-07.3(14)B Reference Standards

SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2 Near-White Blast Cleaning
SSPC CS 23.00 Guide for Thermal Spray Metallic Coating Systems
ASTM C633 Standard Test Method for Adhesion or Cohesion Strengths
of Thermal Spray Coatings
ASTM D4417 Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface
Profile of Blast-Cleaned Steel
ASTM D6386 Standard Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces
for Painting
ASTM D4541 Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings
Using Portable Adhesion Testers
ANSI/AWS C2.18 Guide for the Protection of Steel with Thermal Sprayed
Coatings of Aluminum, Zinc and their Alloys and Composites
6-07.3(14)C Quality Assurance
A representative sample of each lot of the coating material used shall be submitted to the
Engineer for analysis prior to use. Zinc shall have a minimum purity of 99.9 percent. Zinc
Aluminum 85/15 wire shall be 14 to 16 percent maximum aluminum.
The thermal sprayed coating shall have a uniform appearance. The coating shall not contain
any blisters, cracks, chips or loosely adhering particles, oil or other surface contaminants,
nodules, or pits exposing the substrate.
The thermal spray coating shall adhere to the substrate with a minimum bond of 700 psi.
The Contractor’s QA program shall include thermal spray coating bond testing.
The Engineer may cut through the coating with a knife or chisel. If upon doing so, any
part of the coating lifts away from the base metal ¼ inch or more ahead of the cutting blade
without cutting the metal, then the bond is considered not effective and is rejected.
Coated areas which have been rejected or damaged in the inspection procedure described
shall have the defective sections blast cleaned to remove all of the thermal sprayed coating and
shall then be recoated. Before resubmittal and inspection, those sections where coating has
not reached the required thickness shall be sprayed with additional metal until that thickness
is achieved.
6-07.3(14)D Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, prior to abrasive blast cleaning, a 12 inch
square steel plate, of the same material and approximate thickness of the steel to be coated,
blasted clean in accordance with Section 6-07.3(14)E. The sample plate will be checked for
specified angular surface pattern, the abrasive grit size and type used, and the procedure used.
This plate shall be used as the visual standard to determine the acceptability of the cleaned
surface. In the event the Contractor’s cleaning operation is inferior to the sample plate, the
Contractor shall be required to correct the cleaning operation to do a job comparable to the
specimen submitted.
At the same time as submitting the abrasive blast cleaned steel plate sample, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer, a second 12 inch square steel plate of the same material and
thickness, cleaned and thermal spray coated in accordance with the same processes and
with the same equipment as intended for use in applying the thermal spray coatings. The
Engineer may request additional cleaned and thermal spray coated samples to be produced and
submitted coincident with thermal spray coating of the items specified in the Plans to receive
thermal spray coatings.

Painting 6-07
6-07.3(14)E Surface Preparation

Surface irregularities (e.g., sharp edges and/or carburized edges, cracks, delaminations,
pits, etc.) interfering with the application of the coating shall be removed or repaired, prior
to wash cleaning. Thermal cut edges shall be ground to reduce hardness to attain the surface
profile required from abrasive blast cleaning.
All dirt, oil, scaling, etc. shall be removed prior to blast cleaning. All surfaces shall be wash
cleaned with either clean water at 8000 psi or water and detergent at 2000 psi with two rinses
with clean water.
The surface shall be abrasive blast cleaned to near white metal (SSPC-SP 10). The surface
profile shall be measured using a surface profile comparator, replica tape, or other method
suitable for the abrasive being used in accordance with ASTM D4417.
Where zinc coatings up to and including 0.009 inch thick are to be applied, one of the
following abrasive grits shall be used with pressure blast equipment to produce a 3.0 mils AA
anchor tooth pattern:
1. Aluminum oxide or silicon carbide
mesh size: SAE G-25 to SAE G-40
2. Hardened steel grit
3. Garnet, flint, or crushed nickel or black beauty coal slag
Where zinc coatings greater than 0.010 inch thick are to be applied, one of the following
abrasive grits shall be used with pressure blast equipment to produce a 5.0 mils AA anchor
tooth pattern:
1. Aluminum oxide or silicon carbide
2. Hardened steel grit
3. Garnet, flint, or crushed nickel or black beauty coal slag
The pressure of the blast nozzle, as measured with a needle probe gauge, with pressure type
blasting equipment shall be as follows:
1. With aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, flint, or slag - 50 psi minimum and
60 psi maximum.
2. With garnet or steel grit - 75 psi minimum.
The pressure at the blast nozzle, with siphon blasting (suction blasting), shall be as follows:
1. With aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, flint, or slag - 75 psi maximum.
2. With garnet or steel grit - 90 psi maximum.
The abrasive blast stream shall be directed onto the substrate surface at a spray angle of 75
to 90 degrees, and moved side to side. The nozzle to substrate distance shall be 4 to 12 inches.
6-07.3(14)F Application of Metallic Coating
No surface shall be sprayed which shows any sign of condensed moisture or which does
not comply with Section 6-07.3(14)E. If rust bloom occurs within the holding time between
abrasive blast cleaning and thermal spraying, the surface shall be reblasted at a blast angle
as close to perpendicular to the surface as possible to achieve a 2.0 to 4.0 mil anchor tooth
pattern. Thermal spraying shall not take place when the relative humidity is 90 percent or
greater, when the steel temperature is less than 5F above the dew point, or when the air or steel
temperature is less than 40F.
Clean, dry air shall be used with not less than 50 psi air pressure at the air regulator.
Not more than 50 feet of 3/8 inch. ID hose shall be used between the air regulator and the
metallizing gun. The metallizing gun shall be started and adjusted with the spray directed

6-07 Painting
away from the work. During the spraying operation and depending upon the equipment being
used, the gun shall be held as close to perpendicular as possible to the surface from 5 to
8 inches from the surface of the work.
Manual spraying shall be done in a block pattern, typically 2 feet by 2 feet square. The
sprayed metal shall overlap on each pass to ensure uniform coverage. The specified thickness
of the coating shall be applied in multiple layers. In no case are fewer than two passes of
thermal spraying, overlapping at right angles, acceptable.
At least one single layer of coating shall be applied within 4 hours of blasting and the
surface shall be completely coated to the specified thickness within 8 hours of blasting.
The minimum coating thickness shall be 6 mils unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
6-07.3(14)G Applications of Shop Coats and Field Coats
The surface shall be wiped clean with solvent immediately before applying the wash
primer. The wash primer shall have a low viscosity appropriate for absorption into the thermal
spray coating, and shall be applied within 8 hours after completion of thermal spraying or
before oxidation occurs. The dry film thickness of the wash primer shall not exceed 0.5 mils or
be less than 0.3 mils. It shall be applied using an appropriate spray gun except in those areas
where brush or roller application is necessary. The subsequent shop primer or field coats shall
be applied no less than one-half hour after a wash primer.
The shop primer coat, when specified, shall be applied in accordance with
Section 6-07.3(11)A and the paint manufacturer’s recommendations.
All field coats, when specified, shall be applied in accordance with Section 6-07.3(11)A
and the paint manufacturer’s recommendations. The color of the top coat shall conform
to Section 6-03.3(30) as supplemented in these Special Provisions.
6-07.4 Measurement
Cleaning, sealing, and caulking pack rust will be measured by the linear foot along the
edge of the steel connection interface cleaned, sealed, and caulked.
Spot abrasive blast cleaning of steel surfaces in accordance with Section 6-07.3(10)D
will be measured by the square foot of surface area to be cleaned to bare metal as specified
by the Engineer.
6-07.5 Payment
“Cleaning and Painting - _____”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract price for “Cleaning and Painting – _____” shall be full pay for
the Work as specified, including developing all submittals; arranging for and accommodating
contact and on-site attendance by the paint manufacturer’s technical representative; furnishing
and placing all necessary staging and rigging; furnishing, operating, and mooring barges;
furnishing and operating fixed and movable work platforms; accommodating Contracting
Agency inspection access; conducting the Contractor’s quality control inspection program;
providing material, labor, tools, and equipment; furnishing containers for containment waste,
collecting and storing containment waste; collecting, storing, testing, and disposing of all
containment waste not conforming to the definition in Section 6-07.3(10)F; performing
all cleaning and preparation of surfaces to be painted; applying all coats of paint and
sealant; correcting coating deficiencies; completing coating repairs; and completing project
site cleanup.
When a weather station is specified, all costs in connection with furnishing, installing,
operating, and removing the weather station, including furnishing mounting hardware and
repeaters, accessories and wireless display console units, processing and submitting daily
weather data reports, maintenance and upkeep, shall be included in the lump sum Contract
price for “Cleaning And Painting – _____”.

Painting 6-07
Progress payments for “Cleaning and Painting – _____” will be made on a monthly basis
and will be based on the percentage of the total estimated area satisfactorily cleaned and
coated as determined by the Engineer. Payment will not be made for areas that are otherwise
complete but have repairs outstanding.
“Cleaning, Sealing, and Caulking Pack Rust”, per linear foot.
The unit contract price per linear foot for “Cleaning, Sealing, and Caulking Pack Rust”
shall be full pay for performing the work as specified, including cleaning out the pack rust,
preparing the gap for the rust penetrating sealer and caulk, and applying the rust penetrating
sealer and caulk.
“Spot Abrasive Blast Cleaning”, per square foot.
The unit contract price per square foot for “Spot Abrasive Blast Cleaning” shall be full pay
for performing the spot abrasive blast cleaning work in accordance with Section 6-07.3(10)D.
“Containment of Abrasives”, lump sum.
The lump sum contract price for “Containment of Abrasives” shall be full payment for
all costs incurred by the Contractor in complying with the requirements as specified in
Section 6-07.3(10)A to design, construct, maintain, and remove containment systems for
abrasive blasting operations.
“Testing and Disposal of Containment Waste”, by force account as provided in
Section 1-09.6.
All costs in connection with testing containment waste, transporting containment waste
for disposal, and disposing of containment waste in accordance with Section 6-07.3(10)F will
be paid by force account in accordance with Section 1-09.6. For the purpose of providing a
common proposal for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item
“Testing and Disposal of Containment Waste” in the bid proposal to become part of the total
bid by the Contractor.
All costs in connection with producing the metallic coatings as specified shall be included
in the unit contract price for the applicable item or items of work.
Payment for painting new steel structures and painting or powder coating of galvanized
surfaces will be in accordance with Section 6-03.5. Painting of timber structures will be in
accordance with Section 6-04.5.

6-08 Bituminous Surfacing on Structure Decks

6-08.1 Description
This Work consists of removing and placing Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) or Bituminous
Surface Treatment (BST) directly on or over a Structure. This Work also includes performing
concrete bridge deck repair, applying waterproofing membrane, and sealing paving joints.
6-08.2 Materials
Bituminous Surface Treatment 5-02.2
Hot Mix Asphalt 5-04.2
Waterproofing Membrane (Deck Seal) 9-11
Bridge Deck Repair Material 9-20.5
6-08.3(1) Definitions
Adjusted Removal Depth – the Bituminous Pavement removal depth specified by the
Engineer to supersede the Design Removal Depth after review of the Contractor survey of the
existing Bituminous Pavement grade profile.
Bituminous Pavement – the surfacing material containing an asphalt binder.
Design Removal Depth – the value shown in the “pavement schedule” or elsewhere in the
Plans to indicate the design thickness of Bituminous Pavement to be removed.
Final Grade Profile – the compacted finished grade surface of completed Bituminous
Pavement surfacing consisting of a vertical profile and superelevation cross-slope, developed
by the Engineer for Grade Controlled Structure Decks based on the Contractor survey.
Grade Controlled – a Structure Deck requiring restriction of Bituminous Pavement
work, including restriction of pavement removal methods and restriction of overlay pavement
thicknesses.
Structure Deck – the bridge deck (concrete or timber), bridge approach slab, top of
concrete box culvert, or other concrete surfaces over or upon which existing Bituminous
Pavement is removed and new Bituminous Pavement is applied.
6-08.3(2) Contractor Survey for Grade Controlled Structure Decks
Prior to removing existing Bituminous Pavement from a Grade Controlled Structure Deck,
the Contractor shall complete a survey of the existing surface for use in establishing the
existing cross section and grade profile elevations. When removal of Bituminous Pavement is
to be achieved by rotary milling/planing, the Contractor’s survey shall also include the depths
of the existing surfacing at each survey point.
The Contractor is responsible for all calculations, surveying, installation of control points,
and measuring required for setting, maintaining and resetting equipment and materials
necessary for the construction of the overlay to the Final Grade Profile.
6-08.3(2)A Survey Requirements
The Contractor shall establish at least two primary survey control points for controlling
actual Bituminous Pavement removal depth and the Final Grade Profile. Horizontal control
shall be by station and offset which shall be tied to either the Roadway centerline or the
Structure centerline. Vertical control may be an assumed datum established by the Contractor.
Primary control points shall be described by station or milepost and offset on the baseline
selected by the Contractor. The Contractor may expand the survey control information to
include secondary horizontal and vertical control points as needed for the project.

Bituminous Surfacing on Structure Decks 6-08
Survey information collected shall include station or milepost, offset, and elevation for
each lane line and curb line. Survey information shall be collected at even 20 foot station
intervals, and along the centerline of each bridge expansion joint. The survey shall extend
300’-0” beyond the bridge back of pavement seat or end of Structure Deck. The survey
information shall include the top of Bituminous Pavement elevation and, when rotary milling/
planing equipment is used, the corresponding depth of Bituminous Pavement to the Structure
Deck. The Contractor shall ensure a surveying accuracy to within ± 0.01 feet for vertical
control and ± 0.2 feet for horizontal control.
Voids in HMA created by the Contractor’s Bituminous Pavement depth measurements
shall be filled by material conforming to Section 9-20 or another material acceptable to the
Engineer.
6-08.3(2)B Survey Submittal
The Contractor’s survey records shall include descriptions of all survey control points
including station/milepost, offset, and elevations of all secondary control points. The
Contractor shall maintain survey records of sufficient detail to allow the survey to be
reproduced. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the
compiled survey records and information. Survey data shall be submitted as an electronic file
in Microsoft Excel format.
6-08.3(2)C Final Grade Profile and Adjusted Removal Depth
Based on the results of the survey, the Engineer may develop a Final Grade Profile
and Adjusted Removal Depth. If they are developed, the Final Grade Profile and Adjusted
Removal Depth will be provided to the Contractor within three working days after receiving
the Contractor’s survey information. When provided, the Adjusted Removal Depth supersedes
the Design Removal Depth to become the Bituminous Pavement removal depth for that
Structure Deck.
6-08.3(3) General Bituminous Pavement Removal Requirements
Contractor shall remove Bituminous Pavement and associated deck repair material from
Structure Decks to the horizontal limits shown in the Plans and to either the specified or
adjusted Bituminous Pavement removal depth as applicable.
Removal of Bituminous Pavement within 12-inches of existing permanent features that
limit the reach of the machine or the edge of the following items shall be by hand or by hand
operated (nominal 30-pounds class) power tools: existing bridge expansion joint headers; steel
expansion joint assemblies; concrete butt joints between back of pavement seats and bridge
approach slabs, bridge drain assemblies; thrie beam post steel anchorage assemblies fastened
to the side or top of the Structure Deck.
When removing Bituminous Pavement with a planer, Section 5-04.3(14) shall apply. If
the planer contacts the Structure Deck in excess of the specified planing depth tolerance, or
contacts steel reinforcing bars at any time, the Contractor shall immediately cease planing
operations and notify the Engineer. Planing operations shall not resume until completion of
the appropriate adjustments to the planing machine and receiving the Engineer’s concurrence
to resume.
6-08.3(4) Partial Depth Removal of Bituminous Pavement from Structure Decks
The depth of surfacing removal, as measured to the bottom of the lowest milling groove
generated by the rotary milling/planing machine shall be +0.01, -0.02-feet of the specified or
Adjusted Removal Depth as applicable.

6-08.3(5) Full Depth Removal of Bituminous Pavement from Structure Decks

6-08.3(5)A Method of Removal
The Contractor shall perform full depth removal by a method that does not damage or
remove the Structure Deck in excess of the specified Bituminous Pavement removal tolerance.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the proposed methods
and equipment to be used for full depth removal.
6-08.3(5)B Planer Requirements for Full Depth Removal
The final planed surface shall have a finished surface with a tolerance of +0.01, -0.02 feet
within the planed surface profile, as measured from a 10-foot straight edge. Multiple passes of
planing to achieve smoothness will not be allowed.
In addition to Section 6-08.3(3), the planing equipment shall conform to the following
additional requirements:
1. The cutting tooth spacing on the rotary milling head shall be less than or equal to
¼ inch.
2. The rotary milling/planing machine shall have cutting teeth that leave a uniform plane
surface at all times. All teeth on the mill head shall be kept at a maximum differential
tolerance of ⅜-inch between the shortest and longest tooth, as measured by a straight
edge placed the full width of the rotary milling head.
3. Cutting tips shall be replaced when 30 percent of the total length of the cutting tip
material remains.
Prior to each day’s Bituminous Pavement removal operations, the Contractor shall
confirm to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the rotary head cutting teeth are within the
specified tolerances.
6-08.3(5)C Structure Deck Cleanup after Bituminous Pavement Removal
Waterproofing membrane that is loose or otherwise not firmly bonded to the Structure
Deck shall be removed as an incidental component of the Work of surfacing removal. Existing
waterproofing membrane bonded to the Structure Deck need not be removed.
6-08.3(6) Repair of Damage due to Bituminous Pavement Removal Operations
All concrete bridge deck, pavement seat, and steel reinforcing bar damage due to the
Contractor’s surfacing removal operations shall be repaired by the Contractor in accordance
with Section 1-07.13, and as specified below.
Damaged concrete in excess of the specified Bituminous Pavement removal tolerance shall
be repaired in accordance with Section 6-08.3(7), with the bridge deck repair material placed
to the level of the surrounding bridge deck and parallel to the final grade paving profile.
Damaged steel reinforcing bar shall be repaired as follows:
1. Damage to steel reinforcing bar resulting in a section loss less than 20-percent of the bar
with no damage to the surrounding concrete shall be left in place and shall be repaired
by removing the concrete to a depth ¾-inches around the top steel reinforcing bar and
placing bridge deck repair material accepted by the Engineer to the level of the bridge
deck and parallel to the final grade paving profile.
2. Damage to steel reinforcing bar resulting in a section loss of 20-percent or more in one
location, bars partially or completely removed from the bridge deck, or where there is
a lack of bond to the concrete, shall be repaired by removing the adjacent concrete and
splicing a new bar of the same size. Concrete shall be removed to provide a ¾-inch
minimum clearance around the bars. The splice bars shall extend a minimum of 40 bar
diameters beyond each end of the damage.

6-08.3(7) Concrete Deck Repair

This Work consists of repairing the concrete deck after Bituminous Pavement has
been removed.
6-08.3(7)A Concrete Deck Preparation
The Contractor, with the Engineer, shall inspect the exposed concrete deck to establish
the extent of bridge deck repair in accordance with Section 6-09.3(6), except item 4 in
Section 6-09.3(6) does not apply. Areas of Structure Deck left with existing well bonded
waterproof membrane after full depth Bituminous Pavement removal are exempt from this
inspection requirement.
All loose and unsound concrete within the repair area shall be removed with jackhammers
or chipping hammers no more forceful than the nominal 30 pounds class, or other mechanical
means acceptable to the Engineer, and operated at angles less than 45 degrees as measured
from the surface of the deck to the tool. If unsound concrete exists around the existing steel
reinforcing bars, or if the bond between concrete and steel reinforcing bar is broken, the
Contractor shall remove the concrete to provide a ¾ inch minimum clearance to the bar. The
Contractor shall take care to prevent damage to the existing steel reinforcing bars and concrete
to remain.
After removing sufficient concrete to establish the limits of the repair area, the Contractor
shall make ¾ inch deep vertical saw cuts and maintain square edges at the boundaries of the
repair area. The exposed steel reinforcing bars and concrete in the repair area shall be abrasive
blasted and blown clean just prior to placing the bridge deck repair material.
6-08.3(7)B Ultra-Low Viscosity, Two-Part Liquid, Polyurethane-Hybrid
Polymer Concrete
The ultra-low viscosity, two-part liquid, polyurethane-hybrid polymer concrete shall be
mixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Aggregate shall conform to the gradation limit requirements recommended by the
manufacturer. The aggregate and the ultra-low viscosity, two-part liquid, polyurethane-hybrid
polymer concrete shall be applied to the repair areas in accordance with the sequence and
procedure recommended by the manufacturer.
All repairs shall be float finished flush with the surrounding surface within a tolerance of
⅛ inch of a straight edge placed across the full width and breadth of the repair area.
6-08.3(7)C Pre-Packaged Cement Based Repair Mortar
The Contractor shall mix the pre-packaged cement based repair mortar using equipment,
materials and proportions, batch sizes, and process as recommended by the manufacturer.
All repairs shall be float finished flush with the surrounding surface within a tolerance of
⅛ inch of a straight edge placed across the full width and breadth of the repair area.
6-08.3(7)D Cure
All bridge deck repair areas shall be cured in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and attain a minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi before allowing
vehicular and foot traffic on the repair and placing waterproofing membrane on the bridge
deck over the repair.
6-08.3(8) Waterproof Membrane for Structure Decks
This work consists of furnishing and placing a waterproof sheet membrane system over a
prepared Structure Deck prior to placing an HMA overlay. The waterproof membrane system
shall consist of a sheet membrane adhered to the Structure Deck with a primer.
The Contractor shall comply with all membrane manufacturer’s installation
recommendations.

6-08.3(8)A Structure Deck Preparation

The Structure Deck and ambient air temperatures shall be above 50°F and the Structure
Deck shall be surface-dry at the time of the application of the primer and membrane.
All areas of a Structure Deck that have fresh cast bridge deck concrete less than 28 days
old (not including bridge deck repair concrete placed in accordance with Section 6-08.3(7))
shall cure for a period of time recommended by the membrane manufacturer, or as specified by
the Engineer, before application of the membrane.
The entire Structure Deck and the sides of the curb and expansion joint headers to the
height of the HMA overlay shall be free of all foreign material such as dirt, grease, etc. Prior
to applying the primer or sheet membrane, all dust and loose material shall be removed from
the Structure Deck with compressed air. All surface defects such as spalled areas, cracks,
protrusions, holes, sharp edges, ridges, etc., and other surface imperfections greater than
¼ inch in width shall be corrected prior to application of the membrane.
6-08.3(8)B Applying Primer
The primer shall be applied to the cleaned deck surfaces at the rate according to the
procedure recommended by the membrane manufacturer. All surfaces to be covered by
the membrane shall be thoroughly and uniformly coated with primer. Structure Deck areas
left with existing well bonded waterproof membrane after bituminous surfacing removal
shall receive an application of primer in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s
recommendations. Precautionary measures shall be taken to ensure that pools and thick layers
of primer are not left on the deck surface. The membrane shall not be applied until the primer
has cured or volatile material has substantially dissipated, in accordance with the membrane
manufacturer’s recommendations.
The primer and waterproof membrane shall extend from the bridge deck up onto the curb
face and expansion joint header face the thickness of the HMA overlay. The membrane shall
adhere to the vertical surface.
6-08.3(8)C Placing Waterproof Membrane
Membrane application shall begin at the low point on the deck, and continue in a lapped
shingle pattern. The overlap shall be a minimum of six inches or greater if recommended
by the membrane manufacturer. Membrane seams shall be sealed as recommended by the
membrane manufacturer. Hand rollers or similar tools shall be used on the applied membrane
to assure firm and uniform contact with the primed Structure surfaces.
The fabric shall be neatly cut and contoured at all expansion joints and drains. The cuts
at bridge drains shall be two right angle cuts made to the inside diameter of the bridge deck
drain outlet, after which the corners of the waterproof membrane shall be turned down into the
drains and laid in a coating of primer.
6-08.3(8)D Membrane Repair and Protection
The waterproof membrane will be visually inspected by the Engineer for uniformity,
tears, punctures, bonding, bubbles, wrinkles, voids and other defects. All such deficiencies
shall be repaired in accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s recommendations prior to
placement of the HMA overlay.
The membrane material shall be protected from damage due to the paving operations in
accordance with the membrane manufacturer’s recommendations. No traffic or equipment
except that required for the actual waterproofing and paving operations will be permitted to
travel or rest on the membrane until it is covered by the HMA overlay. The use of windrows is
not allowed for laydown of HMA on a membrane.
Where waterproofing membrane is placed in stages or applied at different times, a strip
of temporary paper shall be used to protect the membrane overlap from the HMA hand
removal methods.

6-08.3(9) Placing Bituminous Pavement on Structure Decks

HMA overlay shall be applied on Grade Controlled Structure Decks using reference lines
for vertical control in accordance with Section 5-04.3(3)C.
The compacted elevation of the HMA overlay on Structure Decks shall be within ± 0.02
feet of the specified overlay thickness or Final Grade Profile as applicable. Deviations from
the final grade paving profile in excess of the specified tolerance and areas of non-conforming
surface smoothness shall be corrected in accordance with Section 5-04.3(13).
Final grade Roadway transitions to a Structure Deck with Bituminous Pavement shall not
exceed a 0.20 percent change in grade in accordance with the bridge deck transition for HMA
overlay Standard Plan, unless shown otherwise in the Plans.
Final grade compacted HMA elevations shall be higher than an adjacent concrete edge
by ¼ inch ± ⅛ inch at all expansion joint headers and concrete butt joints as shown in the
concrete to asphalt butt joint details of the bridge paving joint seals Standard Plan. This also
applies to steel edges within the limits of the overlay such as bridge drain frames and steel
joint riser bars at bridge expansion joints.
6-08.3(9)A Protection of Structure Attachments and Embedments
The Contractor is responsible for protecting all Structure attachments and embedments
from the application of BST and HMA.
Drainage inlets that are to remain open, and expansion joints, shall be cleaned out
immediately after paving is completed. Materials passing through expansion joints shall be
removed from the bridge within 10 working days.
All costs incurred by the Contractor in protective measures and clean up shall be included
in the unit Contract prices for the associated Bid items of Work.
6-08.3(10) HMA Compaction on Structure Decks
Compaction of HMA on Structure Decks shall be in accordance with Section 5-04.3(10).
Work rejected in accordance with Section 5-04.3(11) shall include the materials, work,
and incidentals to repair an existing waterproof membrane damaged by the removal of the
rejected work.
6-08.3(11) Paved Panel Joint Seals and HMA Sawcut and Seals
Bridge paving joint seals shall be installed in accordance with Section 5-04.3(12)B and the
details shown in the Plans and Standard Plans.
When concrete joints are exposed after removal of Bituminous Pavement, the joints shall
be cleaned and sealed in accordance with Section 5-01.3(8) and the paved panel joint seal
details of the bridge paving joint seals Standard Plan, including placement of the closed
cell backer rod at the base of the cleaned joint. If waterproofing membrane is required, the
membrane shall be slack or folded at the concrete joint to allow for Structure movements
without stress to the membrane. After placement of the HMA overlay, the second phase of the
paved panel joint seal shall be completed by sawing the HMA and sealing the sawn joint in
accordance with Section 5-04.3(12)B2.
6-08.4 Measurement
Removing existing Bituminous Pavement from Structure Decks will be measured by the
square yard of Structure Deck surface area with removed overlay.
Bridge deck repair will be measured by the square foot surface area of deck concrete
removed with the measurement taken at the plane of the top mat of steel reinforcing bars.
Waterproof membrane will be measured by the square yard surface area of Structure Deck
and curb and header surface area covered by membrane.

6-08.5 Payment
“Structure Surveying”, lump sum.
“Removing Existing Overlay From Bridge Deck___”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Removing Existing Overlay From Bridge
Deck___”, shall be full pay for performing the Work as specified for full removal of
Bituminous Pavement on Structure Decks, including the removal of existing waterproof
membrane and disposing of materials.
“Bridge Deck Repair Br. No.___”, per square foot.
The unit Contract price per square foot for “Bridge Deck Repair Br. No.___” shall be full
pay for performing the Work as specified, including removing and disposing of the concrete
within the repair area and furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing the repair concrete.
“Waterproof Membrane Br. No.___”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Waterproof Membrane Br. No.___” shall be
full pay for performing the Work as specified, including repairing any damaged or defective
waterproofing membrane and repair of damaged HMA overlay.

Modified Concrete Overlays 6-09
6-09 Modified Concrete Overlays

6-09.1 Description
This Work consists of scarifying concrete bridge decks, preparing and repairing bridge
deck surfaces designated and marked for further deck preparation, and placing, finishing,
and curing modified concrete overlays.
6-09.2 Materials
Portland Cement 9-01.2(1)
Fine Aggregate 9-03.1(2)B
Coarse Aggregate 9-03.1(4)C
Mortar 9-20.4
Burlap Cloth 9-23.5
Admixtures 9-23.6
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Water 9-25.1
Portland cement shall be either Type I or Type II. Type III portland cement will not
be allowed.
Fine aggregate shall be Class 1. Coarse aggregate shall be AASHTO grading No. 7 or
No. 8.
Fly ash shall be Class F only.
Microsilica admixture shall be either a dry powder or a slurry admixture. Microsilica
will be accepted based on submittal of a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance. If the
microsilica is a slurry admixture, the microsilica content of the slurry shall be certified as
a percent by mass.
Latex admixture shall be a non-toxic, film-forming, polymeric emulsion in water to which
all stabilizers have been added at the point of manufacture. The latex admixture shall be
homogeneous and uniform in composition, and shall conform to the following:
Polymer Type Styrene Butadiene
Stabilizers:
Latex Non-ionic surfactants
Portland Cement Polydimethyl siloxane
Percent Solids 46.0 to 49.0
Weight per Gallon 8.4 pounds at 77ºF
Color White
PH (as shipped) 9 minimum
Freeze/Thaw Stability 5 cycles (5ºF to 77ºF)
Shelf Life 2 years minimum
Latex admixture will be accepted based on submittal of a Manufacturer’s Certificate of
Compliance.
High Molecular Weight Methacrylate (HMWM) resin for crack and joint sealing shall
conform to the following:
Viscosity <25 cps (Brookfield RVT with UL adaptor,
50 rpm at 77°F) … California Test 434
Density 8.5 to 8.8 pounds per gallon at 77°F… ASTM D2849
Flash Point >200°F, PMCC (Pinsky-Martens CC)
Vapor Pressure <0.04 inches Hg at 77°F, ASTM D323
Tg (DSC) >136°F, ASTM D3418
Gel Time 60 minutes minimum

The promoter/initiator system for the methacrylate resin shall consist of a metal drier
and peroxide.
Sand for abrasive finish shall be crushed sand, oven dried, and stored in moisture proof
bags. The sand shall conform to the following gradation:
Percent Passing
Sieve Size Minimum Maximum
No. 10 98 100
No. 16 55 75
No. 20 30 50
No. 30 8 25
No. 50 0 5
No. 100 0 3
All percentages are by weight.

6-09.3(1) Equipment
6-09.3(1)A Power Driven Hand Tools
Power driven hand tools may be used for concrete scarification in areas not accessible to
scarification machines, and for further deck preparation Work, except for the following:
1. Jack hammers more forceful than the nominal 30-pound class.
2. Chipping hammers more forceful than the nominal 15-pound class.
The power driven hand tools shall be operated at angles less than 45 degrees as measured
from the surface of the deck to the tool.
6-09.3(1)B Rotary Milling Machines
Rotary milling machines shall have a maximum operating weight of 50,000 pounds and
conform to the requirements in Section 1-07.7.
6-09.3(1)C Hydro-Demolition Machines
Hydro-demolition machines shall consist of filtering and pumping units operating in
conjunction with a remote-controlled robotic device, using high-velocity water jets to
remove ½ inch of sound concrete with the simultaneous removal of all deteriorated concrete.
Hydro‑demolition machines shall also clean any exposed reinforcing steel of all rust and
corrosion products.
6-09.3(1)D Shot Blasting Machines
Shot blasting machines shall consist of a self-contained mobile unit, using steel abrasive
to remove ½ inch of sound concrete. The shot blasting machine shall vacuum and store all
material removed from the scarified concrete surface into a self-contained unit.
6-09.3(1)E Air Compressor
Air compressors shall be equipped with oil traps to eliminate oil from being blown onto
the bridge deck during sandblasting and air cleaning.
6-09.3(1)F Vacuum Machine
Vacuum machines shall be capable of collecting all dust, concrete chips, freestanding water
and other debris encountered while cleaning during deck preparation. The machines shall
be equipped with collection systems that allow the machines to be operated in air pollution
sensitive areas and shall be equipped to not contaminate the deck during final preparation for
concrete placement.

6-09.3(1)G Water Spraying System

The water spraying system shall include a portable high-pressure sprayer with a separate
water supply of potable water. The sprayer shall be readily available to all parts of the deck
being overlaid and shall be able to discharge water in a fine mist to prevent accumulation of
free water on the deck. Sufficient water shall be available to thoroughly soak the deck being
overlaid and to keep the deck wet prior to concrete placement.
The Contractor shall certify that the water spraying system meets the following
requirements:
Pressure 2,200 psi minimum
Flow Rate 4.5 gpm minimum
Fan Tip 15° to 25° Range
6-09.3(1)H Mobile Mixer for Latex Modified Concrete
Proportioning and mixing shall be accomplished in self-contained, self-propelled,
continuous-mixing units conforming to the following requirements:
1. The mixer shall be equipped so that it can be grounded.
2. The mixer shall be equipped to provide positive measurement of the portland cement
being introduced into the mix. A recording meter, visible at all times and equipped with
a ticket printout, shall be used.
3. The mixer shall be equipped to provide positive control of the flow of water and latex
admixture into the mixing chamber. Water flow shall be indicated by a flow meter
with a minimum readability of ½ gallon per minute, accurate to ± 1 percent. The water
system shall have a bypass valve capable of completely diverting the flow of water.
Latex flow shall also be indicated by a flow meter with a minimum readability of
2 gallons per minute, accurate to ± 1 percent. The latex system shall be equipped with a
bypass valve suitable for obtaining a calibrated sample of admixture.
4. The mixer shall be equipped to be calibrated to automatically proportion and blend
all components of the specified mix on a continuous or intermittent basis as required
by the finishing operation, and shall discharge mixed material through a conventional
chute directly in front of the finishing machine.
Inspection of each mobile mixer shall be done by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer and in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Check the manufacturer’s inspection plate or mix setting chart for the serial number,
the proper operating revolutions per minute (rpm), and the approximate number of
counts on the cement meter to deliver 94 pounds of cement.
2. Make a general inspection of the mobile mixer to ensure cleanliness and good
maintenance practices.
3. Check to see that the aggregate bins are empty and clean and that the bin
vibrators work.
4. Verify that the cement aeration system operates, that the vent is open, and that the
mixer is equipped with a grounding strap. Check the cement meter feeder to ensure
that all fins and pockets are clean and free from accumulated cement. If the operator
cannot demonstrate, through visual inspection, that the cement meter feeder is clean,
all cement shall be removed from the bin and the cement meter feeder inspected. The
aeration system shall be equipped with a gauge or indicator to verify that the system
is operating.
5. Verify that the main belt is clean and free of any accumulated material.
6. Check the latex strainer to ensure cleanliness.

The initial calibration shall consist of the following items:

1. Cement Meter
a. Refer to the truck manufacturer’s mix setting chart to determine the specified
operating rpm and the approximate number of counts required on the cement meter
to deliver 94 pounds of cement.
b. Place at least 40 bags (about 4,000 pounds) of cement in the cement bin.
c. Ensure the mixer is resting on a level surface.
d. Ensure the mixer is grounded.
e. Adjust the engine throttle to obtain the specified rpm. Operate the unit, discharging
cement until the belt has made one complete revolution. Stop the belt. Reset
the cement meter to zero. Position a suitable container to catch the cement and
discharge approximately one bag of cement. With a stopwatch, measure the time
required to discharge the cement. Record the number of counts on the cement
meter and determine the weight of the cement in the container. Repeat the process
of discharging approximately one bag of cement until six runs have been made.
Reset the cement meter to zero for each run.
Example:
Run No. Cement Counts Weight of Cement Time In Seconds
1 66 95 31
2 68 96 31.2
3 67 95.5 31.0
4 66 95 29.8
5 67 95.25 30.5
6 66 95 30.8
TOTAL 400 571.75 184.3
Pounds of cement per count on cement meter:
Weight of Cement 571.75
= = 1.43 LB./Count
No. of Counts 400
Counts per bag (94 pounds):
94
= 65.7 Counts Bag
1.43
Pounds of cement discharged per second:
Weight of Cement 571.75
= = 3.10 LB./SEC.
Time in Seconds 184.3
Required time to discharge one bag:
94
Time = = 30.32 SEC./Bag
3.10
2. Latex Throttling Valve
a. Check to be sure that the latex strainer is unobstructed.
b. The latex throttling valve shall be adjusted to deliver 3.5 gallons of latex
(29.4 pounds) for each bag of cement. From the above calculation 30.32 seconds
are required to deliver one bag of cement.
c. With the unit operating at the specified rpm, discharge latex into a container for
30.3 seconds and determine the weight of latex. Continue adjusting the valve until
29.4 to 29.5 pounds of latex is discharged in 30.3 seconds. Verify the accuracy of
this valve setting three times.

3. Water Flow Meter

a. Set the water flow meter by adjusting it to flow at ½ gallon per minute.
b. Collect and weigh the water discharged during a 1-minute interval with the
equipment operating at the specified rpm. Divide the weight of water by 8.34
to determine the number of gallons.
c. Repeat items a. and b., above, with the flow meter adjusted to 1½ gallons
per minute.
4. Aggregate Bin Gates
a. Set the gate openings to provide the amount of aggregate required to produce
concrete having the specified proportions.
b. Discharge a representative sample of the aggregates through the gates and separate
on the No. 4 sieve. Aggregates shall meet the requirements for proportions in
accordance with Section 6-09.3(3)E.
c. Adjust the gate openings if necessary to provide the proper ratio of fine aggregate
to total aggregate.
5. Production of Trial Mix – Each mobile mixer shall be operated to produce at least
½ cubic yard of concrete, which shall be in compliance with these Specifications,
prior to acceptance of the mobile mixer for job use. The Engineer will perform yield,
slump, and air tests on the concrete produced by each mixer. Calibration of each mobile
mixer shall be done by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer. A complete
calibration is required on each mixer on each concrete placement unless, after the initial
calibration, the personnel having the responsibility of mixer calibration on subsequent
concrete placement were present during the initial calibration of the mixer and during
the concrete placement operations and are able to verify the dial settings of the initial
calibration and concrete placement.
If these criteria are met, a complete calibration need not be repeated provided that a single
trial run verifies the previous settings of the cement meter, latex throttling valve, water flow
meter, and aggregate gradations, and that the mixer has not left the project and the Engineer
is satisfied that a complete calibration is not needed.
6-09.3(1)I Ready-Mix Trucks for Fly Ash Modified and Microsilica Modified Concrete
Ready-mix trucks shall conform to Section 6-02.3(4)A.
6-09.3(1)J Finishing Machine
The finishing machine shall meet the requirements of Section 6-02.3(10) and the following
requirements:
The finishing machine shall be equipped with a rotating cylindrical double drum screed
not exceeding 60 inches in length preceded by a vibrating pan. The vibrating pan shall be
constructed of metal and be of sufficient length and width to properly consolidate the mixture.
The vibrating frequency of the vibrating pan shall be variable with positive control between
3,000 and 6,000 rpm. A machine with a vibrating pan as an integral part may be proposed.
Other finishing machines will be allowed subject to concurrence of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit the following Working Drawings in accordance with
Section 1-05.3:
1. A Type 1 Working Drawing of the type of machine (rotary milling, hydro-demolition,
or shot blasting) selected by the Contractor for use in this project to scarify
concrete surfaces.
2. A Type 1 Working Drawing of the axle loads and axle spacing of the rotary milling
machine (if used).
3. A Type 2 Working Drawing of the Runoff Water Disposal Plan (if a hydro-demolition
machine is used). The Runoff Water Disposal Plan shall describe all provisions for

the containment, collection, filtering, and disposal of all runoff water and associated
contaminants and debris generated by the hydro-demolition process, including
containment, collection and disposal of runoff water and debris escaping through breaks
in the bridge deck.
4. A Type 2 Working Drawing of the method and materials used to contain, collect, and
dispose of all concrete debris generated by the scarifying process, including provisions
for protecting adjacent traffic from flying debris.
5. A Type 1 Working Drawing of the mix design for concrete Class M, and either fly ash
modified concrete, microsilica modified concrete, or latex modified concrete, as selected
by the Contractor for use in this project in accordance with Section 6-09.3(3).
6. A Type 1 Working Drawing of samples of the latex admixture and the portland cement
for testing and compatibility (if latex modified concrete is used).
7. A Type 2 Working Drawing of the paving equipment Specifications and details of
the screed rail support system, including details of anchoring the rails and providing
rail continuity.
6-09.3(3) Concrete Overlay Mixes
6-09.3(3)A General
For fly ash, microsilica, and latex modified concrete, the Contractor shall adjust the slump
to accommodate the gradient of the bridge deck, subject to the maximum slump specified.
For fly ash and microsilica modified concrete, the maximum water/cement ratio shall be
calculated using all of the available mix water, including the free water in both the coarse
and fine aggregate, and in the microsilica slurry if a slurry is used.
For fly ash and microsilica modified concrete, all water-reducing and air entraining
admixtures, and superplasticizers, shall be used in accordance with the admixture
6-09.3(3)B Concrete Class M
Concrete Class M for further deck preparation patching concrete shall be proportioned in
accordance with the following mix design:
Portland Cement 705 pounds
Fine Aggregate 1,280 pounds
Coarse Aggregate 1,650 pounds
Water/Cement Ratio 0.37 maximum
Air (± 1½ percent) 6 percent
Slump (± 1 inch) 5 inches
The use of a water-reducing admixture conforming to AASHTO M194 Type A will
be required to produce patching concrete with the desired slump, and shall be used in
accordance with the admixture manufacturer’s recommendations. Air entraining admixtures
shall conform to AASHTO M154 and shall be used in accordance with the admixture
manufacturer’s recommendations. The use of accelerating admixtures or other types of
admixtures is not allowed.
6-09.3(3)C Fly Ash Modified Concrete
Fly ash modified concrete shall be a workable mix, uniform in composition and
consistency. Mix proportions per cubic yard shall be as follows:
Fly Ash 275 pounds
Fine Aggregate 38 percent of total aggregate
Coarse Aggregate 62 percent of total aggregate
Slump 7 inches maximum

6-09.3(3)D Microsilica Modified Concrete

Microsilica modified concrete shall be a workable mix, uniform in composition and
consistency. Mix proportions per cubic yard shall be as follows:
Microsilica Fume 52 pounds
Fine Aggregate 1,515 pounds
Coarse Aggregate 1,515 pounds
6-09.3(3)E Latex Modified Concrete
Latex modified concrete shall be a workable mix, uniform in composition and consistency.
Mix proportions per cubic yard shall be as follows:
Portland Cement 1.00 parts by weight
Fine Aggregate 2.40 to 2.75 parts by weight
Coarse Aggregate 1.75 to 2.00 parts by weight
Latex Admixture 3.50-gallons per bag of cement
Air Content of Plastic Mix 6 percent maximum
The aggregates shall be proportioned such that the amount of aggregate passing the No. 4
sieve is 65 ± 5 percent of the total aggregate (fine plus coarse). All calculations shall be based
on dry weights.
The moisture content of the fine aggregate and coarse aggregate shall be no more than
3.0 and 1.0 percent, respectively, above the saturated surface dry condition.
The water limit for calculating the water/cement ratio shall include the added water,
the free water in the aggregates, and 52 percent of the latex admixture.
6-09.3(4) Storing and Handling
6-09.3(4)A Aggregate
Aggregates shall be stored and handled in a manner to prevent variations of more than
1.0 percent in moisture content of the stockpile.
For latex modified concrete, the moisture content of the aggregate at the time of
proportioning shall be as specified in Section 6-09.3(3)E.
6-09.3(4)B Latex Admixture
The admixture shall be kept in suitable containers that will protect it from freezing and
from exposure to temperatures in excess of 85ºF. Containers of the admixture shall not be
stored in direct sunlight for periods in excess of 10 days. When stored in direct sunlight the
top and sides of the containers shall be covered with insulating blanket material.
Storage of the admixture may extend over a period greater than 10 days as long as the
conditions specified above are maintained and the latex admixture is agitated or stirred once
every 10 days. Stirring or agitation of the admixture shall be done mechanically in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendation. If the ambient temperature is higher than 85ºF at
any time during the storage period, the admixture shall be covered by insulated blankets or
other means that will maintain the admixture temperature below 85ºF.
The admixture shall be strained through a Number 10 strainer at the time it is introduced
into the mixing tank from the storage containers.

6-09.3(4)C High Molecular Weight Methacrylate Resin (HMWM)

The HMWM resin shall be stored in a cool dry place and protected from freezing and
exposure to temperature in excess of 100ºF. The promoter and initiator, if supplied separate
from the resin, shall not contact each other directly. Containers of promoters and initiators
shall not be stored together in a manner that will allow leakage or spillage from one to contact
the containers or material of the other.
6-09.3(5) Scarifying Concrete Surface
6-09.3(5)A General
The Contractor shall not begin scarifying a concrete bridge deck surface unless
completion of the scarification and concrete overlay can be accomplished within the current
construction season.
The Contractor shall protect adjacent traffic from flying debris generated by the
scarification process in accordance with item 4 of Section 6-09.3(2).
The Contractor shall collect, contain, and dispose of all concrete debris generated by the
scarification process in accordance with item 4 of Section 6-09.3(2).
All areas of the deck that are inaccessible to the selected scarifying machine shall be
scarified to remove the concrete surface matrix to a maximum depth of ½ inch by a method
acceptable to the Engineer. If these areas are hand-chipped then the equipment shall meet the
requirements as specified in Section 6-09.3(1)A.
Dense, sound areas of existing bridge deck repair material shall be sufficiently scarified
to provide 1-inch minimum clearance to the top of the fresh modified concrete overlay.
6-09.3(5)B Testing of Hydro-Demolition and Shot Blasting Machines
A trial area shall be designated by the Engineer to demonstrate that the equipment and
methods of operation are capable of producing results satisfactory to the Engineer. The trial
area shall consist of two patches each of approximately 30 square feet, one area in sound
concrete and one area of deteriorated concrete as determined by the Engineer.
In the “sound” area of concrete, the equipment shall be programmed to remove ½ inch
of concrete.
Following the test over sound concrete, the equipment shall be located over the
deteriorated concrete and using the same parameters for the sound concrete removal, remove
all deteriorated concrete. The Engineer will grant acceptance of the equipment based on
successful results from the trial area test.
6-09.3(5)C Hydro-Demolishing
Once the operating parameters of the Hydro-Demolition machine are defined by
programming and calibration as specified in Section 6-09.3(5)B, they shall not be changed as
the machine progresses across the bridge deck, in order to prevent the unnecessary removal of
sound concrete below the required minimum removal depth. The Contractor shall maintain a
minimum production rate of 250-square feet per hour during the deck scarifying process.
All water used in the Hydro-Demolition process shall be potable. Stream or lake water will
not be permitted.
All bridge drains and other outlets within 100 feet of the Hydro-Demolition machine shall
be temporarily plugged during the Hydro-Demolition operation. When scarifying a bridge
deck passing over traffic lanes, the Contractor shall protect the traffic below by restricting and
containing scarifying operations, and implementing traffic control measures.
The Contractor shall provide for the collection, filtering and disposal of all runoff water
generated by the Hydro-Demolition process, in accordance with the Runoff Water Disposal
Plan in accordance with item 3 of Section 6-09.3(2). The Contractor shall comply with
applicable regulations concerning such water disposal.

6-09.3(5)D Shot Blasting

Once the operating parameters of the Shot Blasting machine are defined by programming
and calibration, as specified in Section; 6-09.3(5)B, they shall not be changed as the machine
progresses across the bridge deck, in order to prevent the unnecessary removal of sound
concrete below the required minimum removal depth. The Contractor shall maintain a
minimum production rate of 250 square feet per hour during the deck scarifying process.
6-09.3(5)E Rotomilling
The entire concrete surface of the bridge deck shall be scarified to remove the surface
matrix to a maximum ½ inch depth of the concrete. The operating parameters of the rotary
milling machine shall be monitored in order to prevent the unnecessary removal of concrete
below the ½-inch maximum removal depth.
6-09.3(5)F Repair of Steel Reinforcing Bars Damaged by Scarifying Operations
All reinforcing steel damaged due to the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired by
the Contractor. For bridge decks not constructed under the same Contract as the concrete
overlay, damage to existing reinforcing steel shall be repaired and paid for in accordance
with Section 1-09.6 if the existing concrete cover is ½ inch or less. All other reinforcing
steel damaged due to the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired by the Contractor at no
additional expense to the Contracting Agency.
The repair shall be as follows or as directed by the Engineer:
1. Damage to epoxy coating, when present on existing steel reinforcing bars, shall be
repaired in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24)H.
2. Damage to bars resulting in a section loss of 20 percent or more of the bar area shall
be repaired by chipping out the adjacent concrete and splicing a new bar of the same
size. Concrete shall be removed to provide a ¾-inch minimum clearance around the
bars. The splice bars shall extend a minimum of 40 bar diameters beyond each end
of the damage.
3. Any bars partially or completely removed from the deck shall have the damaged
portions removed and spliced with new bars as outlined in item 2 above.
6-09.3(5)G Cleanup Following Scarification
After scarifying is completed, the lane or strip being overlaid shall be thoroughly cleaned
of all dust, freestanding water and loose particles. Cleaning may be accomplished by using
compressed air, water blasting, with a minimum pressure of 5,000 psi, or vacuum machines.
Vacuum cleaning shall be used when required by applicable air pollution ordinances.
6-09.3(6) Further Deck Preparation
Once the lane or strip being overlaid has been cleaned of debris from scarifying, the
Contractor, with the Engineer, shall perform an inspection of the completed work in
accordance with ASTM D4580, Method B, except as otherwise noted for concrete surfaces
scarified by hydro-demolition. The Contractor shall mark those areas of the existing bridge
deck that are authorized by the Engineer for further deck preparation by the Contractor.
When hydro-demolition is used as the method of scarification, the inspection for further
deck preparation shall be a visual inspection and shall take place after one pass of the
hydro‑demolition machine.
Further deck preparation will be required when any one of the following conditions
is present:
1. Unsound concrete.
2. Lack of bond between existing concrete and reinforcing steel.
3. Existing nonconcrete patches as authorized by the Engineer.
4. Additionally, for concrete surfaces scarified by rotomilling only, exposure of reinforcing
steel to a depth of one-half of the periphery of a bar for a distance of 12 inches or more
along the bar.

Further deck preparation performed beyond the areas authorized by the Engineer will be at
the Contractor’s expense in accordance with Section 1-05.7. If the concrete overlay is placed
on a bridge deck as part of the same Contract as the bridge deck construction, then all Work
associated with the further deck preparation shall be performed at no additional expense to the
Contracting Agency.
6-09.3(6)A Equipment for Further Deck Preparation
Further deck preparation shall be performed using either hand operated tools conforming
to Section 6-09.3(1)A, or hydro-demolishing machines conforming to Section 6-09.3(1)C.
6-09.3(6)B Deck Repair Preparation
All concrete in the repair area shall be removed by chipping, hydro demolishing, or other
approved mechanical means to a depth necessary to remove all loose and unsound concrete.
For concrete surfaces scarified by rotomilling, concrete shall be removed to provide a
¾-inch minimum clearance around the top mat of steel reinforcing bars only where unsound
concrete exists around the top mat of steel reinforcing bars, or if the bond between concrete
and top mat of steel is broken.
Care shall be taken in removing the deteriorated concrete to not damage any of the existing
deck or steel reinforcing bars that are to remain in place. All removal shall be accomplished
by making neat vertical cuts and maintaining square edges at the boundaries of the repair area.
Cuts made by using sawing or hydro demolishing machines shall be made after sufficient
concrete removal has been accomplished to establish the limits of the removal area. In no case
shall the depth of the vertical cut exceed ¾ inch or to the top of the top steel reinforcing bars,
whichever is less.
The exposed steel reinforcing bars and concrete in the repair area shall be sandblasted or
hydro-blasted and blown clean just prior to placing concrete.
Where existing steel reinforcing bars inside deck repair areas show deterioration exceeding
the limits defined in the Plans, the Contractor shall furnish and place steel reinforcing bars
alongside the deteriorated bars in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. Payment for
such extra Work will be by force account as provided in Section 1-09.6.
Bridge deck areas outside the repair area or steel reinforcing bar inside or outside the
repair area damaged by the Contractor’s operations, shall be repaired by the Contractor at no
additional expense to the Contracting Agency, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All steel reinforcing bars damaged due to the Contractor’s operations shall be repaired in
accordance with Section 6-09.3(5)F.
6-09.3(6)C Placing Deck Repair Concrete
Deck repair concrete for modified concrete overlays shall be either modified concrete or
concrete Class M as specified below.
Before placing any deck repair concrete, the Contractor shall flush the existing concrete
in the repair area with water and make sure that the existing concrete is well saturated. The
Contractor shall remove any freestanding water prior to placing the deck repair concrete.
The Contractor shall place the deck repair concrete onto the existing concrete while it is wet.
Type 1 deck repairs, defined as deck repair areas with a maximum depth of one-half
the periphery of the bottom bar of the top layer of steel reinforcement and not to exceed
12-continuous inches along the length of the bar, may be filled during the placement of the
concrete overlay. The Work of Type 1 further deck preparation shall consist of removing and
disposing of the concrete within the repair area.
Type 2 deck repairs, defined as deck repair areas not conforming to the definition of Type 1
deck repairs, shall be repaired with concrete Class M and wet cured for 42 hours in accordance
with Section 6-09.3(13), prior to placing the concrete overlay. The Work of Type 2 further
deck preparation shall consist of removing and disposing of concrete within the repair area,
and furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing the repair concrete. During the curing period, all
vehicular and foot traffic shall be prohibited on the repair area.

6-09.3(7) Surface Preparation for Concrete Overlay

Following the completion of any required further deck preparation the entire lane or strip
being overlaid shall be cleaned.
If either a rotary milling machine or a shot blasting machine is used for concrete
scarification, then the concrete deck shall be sandblasted or shot blasted, using equipment
identified in the Working Drawing submittals, until sound concrete is exposed. Care shall be
taken to ensure that all exposed reinforcing steel and the surrounding concrete is completely
blasted. Bridge grate inlets, expansion dams and barriers above the surface to be blasted shall
be protected from the blasting.
If a hydro-demolition machine is used for concrete scarification, then the concrete deck
shall be cleaned by water blasting with 7,000 psi minimum pressure, until sound concrete
is exposed.
The final surface of the deck shall be free from oil and grease, rust and other foreign
material that may reduce the bond of the new concrete to the old. These materials shall
be removed by detergent-cleaning or other method accepted by the Engineer followed
by sandblasting.
After all scarifying, chipping, sandblasting and cleaning is completed, the entire lane or
strip being overlaid shall be cleaned in final preparation for placing concrete using either
compressed air or vacuum machines. Vacuum machines shall be used when warranted by
applicable air pollution ordinances.
Scarifying with either rotary milling machines or shot blasting machines, hand tool
chipping, sandblasting and cleaning in areas adjacent to a lane or strip being cleaned in
final preparation for placing concrete shall be discontinued when final preparation is begun.
Scarifying and hand tool chipping shall remain suspended until the concrete has been placed
and the requirement for curing time has been satisfied. Sandblasting and cleaning shall remain
suspended for the first 24 hours of curing time after the completion of concrete placing.
If the hydro demolishing scarification process is used, scarification may proceed during the
final cleaning and overlay placement phases of the Work on adjacent portions of the Structure
so long as the hydro demolisher operations are confined to areas which are a minimum of
100 feet away from the defined limits of the final cleaning or overlay placement in progress.
If the hydro demolisher impedes or interferes in any way with the final cleaning or overlay
placement as determined by the Engineer, the hydro demolishing Work shall be terminated
immediately and the hydro demolishing equipment removed sufficiently away from the
area being prepared or overlaid to eliminate the conflict. If the grade is such that water and
contaminates from the hydro demolishing operation will flow into the area being prepared or
overlaid, the hydro demolishing operation shall be terminated and shall remain suspended for
the first 24 hours of curing time after the completion of concrete placement.
If, after final cleaning, the lane or strip being overlaid becomes wet, the Contractor shall
flush the surface with high-pressure water, prior to placement of the overlay. All freestanding
water shall be removed prior to concrete placement. Concrete placement shall begin within
24 hours of the completion of deck preparation for the portion of the deck to be overlaid.
If concrete placement has not begun within 24 hours, the lane or strip being overlaid shall be
cleaned by a light sand blasting followed by washing with the high-pressure water spray or
by cleaning with the high-pressure spray.
Traffic other than required construction equipment will not be permitted on any portion of
the lane or strip being overlaid that has undergone final preparation for placing concrete unless
allowed by the Engineer. To prevent contamination, all equipment allowed on the deck after
final cleaning shall be equipped with drip guards.

6-09.3(8) Quality Assurance

6-09.3(8)A Quality Assurance for Microsilica Modified and Fly Ash Modified
Concrete Overlays
The Engineer will perform slump, temperature, and entrained air tests for acceptance in
accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)D and as specified in this section after the Contractor has
turned over the concrete for acceptance testing. Concrete samples for testing shall be supplied
to the Engineer in accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)E. Concrete from the first truckload shall
not be placed until tests for acceptance have been completed by the Engineer and the results
indicate that the concrete is within acceptable limits. Sampling and testing will continue for
each load until two successive loads meet all applicable acceptance test requirements. Except
for the first load of concrete, up to ½ cubic yard may be placed prior to testing for acceptance.
After two successive tests indicate that the concrete is within specified limits, the sampling and
testing frequency may decrease to one for every three truckloads. Loads to be sampled will be
selected in accordance with the random selection process outlined in FOP for WAQTC TM2.
When the results of any subsequent acceptance test indicates that the concrete does not
conform to the specified limits, the sampling and testing frequency will be resumed for each
truckload. Whenever two successive subsequent tests indicate that the concrete is within the
specified limits, the random sampling and testing frequency of one for every three truck loads
may resume.
6-09.3(8)B Quality Assurance for Latex Modified Concrete Overlays
The Engineer will perform slump, temperature, and entrained air tests for acceptance
in accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)D and as specified in this section after the Contractor
has turned over the concrete for acceptance testing. The Engineer will perform testing as
the concrete is being placed. Samples shall be taken on the first charge through each mobile
mixer and every other charge thereafter. The sample shall be taken after the first 2 minutes of
continuous mixer operation. Concrete samples for testing shall be supplied to the Engineer in
accordance with Section 6-02.3(5)E.
During the initial proportioning, mixing, placing, and finishing operations, the Engineer
may require the presence of a technical representative from the latex admixture manufacturer.
The technical representative shall be capable of performing, demonstrating, inspecting, and
testing all of the functions required for placement of the latex modified concrete as specified
in Section 6-09.3(11). This technical representative shall aid in the proper installation of the
latex modified concrete. Recommendations made by the technical representative on or off
the jobsite shall be adhered to by the Contractor. The Engineer will advise the Contractor in
writing a minimum of 5 working days before such services are required.
6-09.3(9) Mixing Concrete For Concrete Overlay
6-09.3(9)A Mixing Microsilica Modified or Fly Ash Modified Concrete
Mixing of concrete shall be in accordance with Section 6-02, with the following exceptions:
1. The mixing shall be done at a batch plant.
2. The volume of concrete transported by truck shall not exceed 6-cubic yards per truck.
6-09.3(9)B Mixing Latex Modified Concrete
The equipment used for mixing the concrete shall be operated with strict adherence to the
procedures set forth by its manufacturer.
A minimum of two mixers will be required at the overlay site for each concrete placement
when the total volume of concrete to be placed during the concrete placement exceeds the
material storage capacity of a single mixer. Additional mixers may be required if conditions
require that material be stockpiled away from the jobsite. The Contractor shall have sufficient
mixers on hand to ensure a consistent and continuous delivery and placement of concrete
throughout the concrete placement.

Charging the mobile mixer shall be done in the presence of the Engineer. Mixing
capabilities shall be such that the finishing operation can proceed at a steady pace.
6-09.3(10) Overlay Profile and Screed Rails
6-09.3(10)A Survey of Existing Bridge Deck Prior to Scarification
Prior to beginning the scarifying concrete surface finish work specified under
Section 6-09.3(5), the Contractor shall complete a survey of the existing bridge deck(s)
specified to receive modified concrete overlay for use in establishing the existing cross
section and grade profile elevations.
The Contracting Agency will provide the Contractor with primary survey control
information consisting of descriptions of two primary control points used for the horizontal
and vertical control. Primary control points will be described by reference to the bridge or
project-specific stationing and elevation datum. The Contracting Agency will also provide
horizontal coordinates for the beginning and ending points and for each Point of Intersection
(PI) on each centerline alignment included in the project. The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer 21 calendar days notice in advance of scheduled concrete surface scarification work
to allow the Contracting Agency time to provide the primary survey control information.
The Contractor shall verify the primary survey control information furnished by the
Contracting Agency and shall expand the survey control information to include secondary
horizontal and vertical control points as needed for the project. The Contractor’s survey
records shall include descriptions of all survey control points, including coordinates and
elevations of all secondary control points.
The Contractor shall maintain detailed survey records, including a description of the work
performed on each shift, the methods utilized to conduct the survey, and the control points
used. The record shall be of sufficient detail to allow the survey to be reproduced. A Type 1
Working Drawing of each day’s survey record shall be provided to the Engineer within
3 working days after the end of the shift. The Contractor shall compile the survey information
in an electronic file format acceptable to the Contracting Agency (Excel spreadsheet format
is preferred).
Survey information collected shall include station, offset, and elevation for each lane line
and curb line. Survey information shall be collected at even 20-foot station intervals and
also at the centerline of each bridge expansion joint. The Contractor shall ensure a surveying
accuracy to within ± 0.01 feet for vertical control and ± 0.2 feet for horizontal control.
The survey shall extend 100 feet beyond the bridge back of pavement seat.
Except for the primary survey control information furnished by the Contracting Agency,
the Contractor shall be responsible for all calculations, surveying, and measuring required for
setting, maintaining, and resetting equipment and materials necessary for the construction of
the overlay to the final grade profile. The Contracting Agency may post-check the Contractor’s
surveying, but these post-checks shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for internal
survey quality control.
The Contracting Agency will establish the final grade profile based on the Contractor’s
survey, and will provide the final grade profile to the Contractor within three working days
after receiving the Contractor’s survey information.
The Contractor shall not begin scarifying concrete surface work specified under
Section 6-09.3(5) until receiving the final grade profile from the Engineer.
6-09.3(10)B Establishing Finish Overlay Profile
The finish grade profile shall be + ¼ inch/- ⅛ inch from the Engineer’s final grade profile.
The final grade profile shall be verified prior to the placement of modified concrete overlay
with the screed rails in place. The finishing machine shall be passed over the entire surface
to be overlaid and the final screed rail adjustments shall be made. If the resultant overlay
thickness is not compatible with the finish grade profile generated by the Contractor’s screed
rail setup, the Contractor shall make profile adjustments as specified by the Engineer. After the

finish overlay profile has been verified, changes in the finishing machine elevation controls
will not be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for setting screed control to obtain the
specified finish grade overlay profile as well as the finished surface smoothness requirements
specified in Section 6-02.3(10).
Screed rails upon which the finishing machine travels shall be placed outside the area to
be overlaid, in accordance with item 7 of Section 6-09.3(2). Interlocking rail sections or other
approved methods of providing rail continuity are required.
Hold-down devices shot into the concrete are not permitted unless the concrete is to
be subsequently overlaid. Hold-down devices of other types leaving holes in the exposed
area will be allowed provided the holes are subsequently filled with mortar conforming
to Section 9-20.4(2) mixed at a 1:2 cement/aggregate ratio. Hold-down devices shall not
penetrate the existing deck by more than ¾ inch.
Screed rails may be removed at any time after the concrete has taken an initial set.
Adequate precautions shall be taken during the removal of the finishing machine and rails
to protect the edges of the new surfaces.
6-09.3(11) Placing Concrete Overlay
Five to ten working days prior to modified concrete overlay placement, a preoverlay
conference shall be held to discuss equipment, construction procedures, personnel, and
previous results. Inspection procedures shall also be reviewed to ensure coordination.
Those attending shall include:
1. (Representing the Contractor) The superintendent and all foremen in charge of placing
and finishing the modified concrete overlay, and
2. (Representing the Contracting Agency) The Engineer and key inspection assistants.
If the project includes more than one bridge deck, an additional conference shall be held
just before placing modified concrete overlay for each subsequent bridge deck.
The Contractor shall not place modified concrete overlay until the Engineer agrees that:
1. Modified concrete overlay producing and placement rates will be high enough to
meet placing and finishing deadlines,
2. Finishers with enough experience have been employed, and
3. Adequate finishing tools and equipment are at the site.
Concrete placement shall be made in accordance with Section 6-02 and the following
requirements:
1. After the lane or strip to be overlaid has been prepared and immediately before placing
the concrete, it shall be thoroughly soaked and kept continuously wet with water for a
minimum period of 6 hours prior to placement of the concrete. All freestanding water
shall be removed prior to concrete placement. During concrete placement, the lane or
strip shall be kept moist.
The concrete shall then be promptly and continuously delivered and deposited on the
placement side of the finishing machine.
If latex modified concrete is used, the concrete shall be thoroughly brushed into the
surface and then brought up to final grade. If either microsilica modified concrete or fly
ash modified concrete are used, a slurry of the concrete, excluding aggregate, shall be
thoroughly brushed into the surface prior to the overlay placement.
Care shall be exercised to ensure that the surface receives a thorough, even coating
and that the rate of progress is limited so that the brushed concrete does not become
dry before it is covered with additional concrete as required for the final grade. All
aggregate which is segregated from the mix during the brushing operation shall be
removed from the deck and disposed of by the Contractor.
If either microsilica modified concrete or fly ash modified concrete are used, the
Contractor shall ensure that a sufficient number of trucks are used for concrete delivery

to obtain a consistent and continuous delivery and placement of concrete throughout the
concrete placement operation.
When concrete is to be placed against the concrete in a previously placed transverse
joint, lane, or strip, the previously placed concrete shall be sawed back 6 inches
to straight and vertical edges and shall be sandblasted or water blasted before new
concrete is placed. The Engineer may decrease the 6 inch saw back requirement to
2 inches minimum, if a bulkhead was used during previous concrete placement and the
concrete was hand vibrated along the bulkhead.
2. Concrete placement shall not begin if rain is expected. Adequate precautions shall be
taken to protect freshly placed concrete in the event that rain begins during placement.
Concrete that is damaged by rain shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no
additional expense to the Contracting Agency, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3. Concrete shall not be placed when the temperature of the concrete surface is less than
45ºF or greater than 75ºF, when the combination of air temperature, relative humidity,
fresh concrete temperature, and wind velocity at the construction site produces an
evaporation rate of 0.15 pound per square foot of surface per hour as determined from
Table 6-02.3(6), or when winds are in excess of 10 mph. If the Contractor elects to
Work at night to meet these criteria, adequate lighting shall be provided at no additional
4. If concrete placement is stopped for a period of ½ hour or more, the Contractor shall
install a bulkhead transverse to the direction of placement at a position where the
overlay can be finished full width up to the bulkhead. The bulkhead shall be full depth
of the overlay and shall be installed to grade. The concrete shall be finished and cured
in accordance with these Specifications.
Further placement is permitted only after a period of 12 hours unless a gap is left in the
lane or strip. The gap shall be of sufficient width for the finishing machine to clear the
transverse bulkhead installed where concrete placement was stopped. The previously
placed concrete shall be sawed back from the bulkhead, to a point designated by the
Engineer, to straight and vertical edges and shall be sandblasted or water blasted before
new concrete is placed.
5. Concrete shall not be placed against the edge of an adjacent lane or strip that is less
than 36 hours old.
6-09.3(12) Finishing Concrete Overlay
Finishing shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable portions of
Section 6-02.3(10) and as follows. Concrete shall be placed and struck-off approximately
½ inch above final grade and then consolidated and finished to final grade with a single
pass (the Engineer may require additional passes) of the finishing machine. Hand finishing
may be necessary to close up or seal off the surface. The final product shall be a dense
uniform surface.
Latex shall not be sprayed on a freshly placed latex modified concrete surface; however,
a light fog spray of water is permitted if required for finishing, as determined by the Engineer.
As the finishing machine progresses along the placed concrete, the surface shall be given
a final finish by texturing with a comb perpendicular to the centerline of the bridge. The
texture shall be applied immediately behind the finishing machine. The comb shall consist
of a single row of metal tines capable of producing ⅛-inch wide striations approximately
0.015 foot in depth at approximately ½-inch spacing. The combs may be operated manually
or mechanically, either singly or in gangs (several combs placed end to end). This operation
shall be done in a manner that will minimize the displacement of the aggregate particles. The
texture shall not extend into areas within 2 feet of the curb line. The non-textured concrete
within 2 feet of the curb line shall be hand finished with a steel or magnesium trowel.
Construction dams shall be separated from the newly placed concrete by passing a pointing
trowel along the inside surfaces of the dams. Care shall be exercised to ensure that this

trowel cut is made for the entire depth and length of the dams after the concrete has stiffened
sufficiently that it does not flow back.
After the burlap cover has been removed and the concrete surface has dried, but before
opening to traffic, all joints and visible cracks shall be filled and sealed with a high molecular
weight methacrylate resin (HMWM). Cracks 1⁄16 inch and greater in width shall receive two
applications of HMWM. Immediately following the application of HMWM, the wetted surface
shall be coated with sand for abrasive finish.
6-09.3(13) Curing Concrete Overlay
As the texturing portion of the finishing operation progresses, the concrete shall be
immediately covered with a single layer of clean, new or used, wet burlap. The burlap shall
have a maximum width of 6 feet. The Engineer will determine the suitability of the burlap for
reuse, based on the cleanliness and absorption ability of the burlap. Care shall be exercised
to ensure that the burlap is well drained and laid flat with no wrinkles on the deck surface.
Adjacent strips of burlap shall have a minimum overlap of 6 inches.
Once in place the burlap shall be lightly fog sprayed with water. A separate layer of white,
reflective type polyethylene sheeting shall immediately be placed over the wet burlap. The
concrete shall then be wet cured by keeping the burlap wet for a minimum of 42 hours after
which the polyethylene sheeting and burlap may be removed.
Traffic shall not be permitted on the finished concrete until the specified curing time is
satisfied and until the concrete has reached a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi as
verified by rebound number determined in accordance with ASTM C805.
6-09.3(14) Checking for Bond
After the requirements for curing have been met, the entire overlaid surface shall
be sounded by the Contractor, in a manner approved by and in the presence of the Engineer,
to ensure total bond of the concrete to the bridge deck. Concrete in unbonded areas shall
be removed and replaced by the Contractor with the same modified concrete as used in the
overlay. Removal and replacement of the overlay in unbonded areas shall be performed at the
expense of the Contracting Agency, except as specified in Section 6-09.3(6) when the overlay
is placed on a bridge deck as part of the same Contract as the bridge deck construction.
All cracks, except those that are significant enough to require removal, shall be thoroughly
filled and sealed as specified in Section 6-09.3(12).
After the curing requirements have been met, the Contractor may use compressed air to
accelerate drying of the deck surface for crack identification and sealing.
6-09.4 Measurement
Scarifying concrete surface will be measured by the square yard of surface
actually scarified.
Modified concrete overlay will be measured by the cubic foot of material placed. For
latex modified concrete overlay, the volume will be determined by the theoretical yield
of the design mix and documented by the counts of the cement meter less waste. For both
microsilica modified concrete overlay and fly ash modified concrete overlay, the volume will
be determined from the concrete supplier’s Certificate of Compliance for each batch delivered
less waste. Waste is defined as the following:
1. Material not placed.
2. Material placed in excess of 6 inches outside a longitudinal joint or transverse joint.
Finishing and curing modified concrete overlay will be measured by the square yard of
overlay surface actually finished and cured.
Further deck preparation for Type 1 deck repair and for Type 2 deck repair will be
measured by the square foot of surface area of deck concrete removed in accordance with
Section 6-09.3(6).

6-09.5 Payment
Payment will be made for each of the following Bid items that are included in the Bid
Proposal:
“Scarifying Conc. Surface”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Scarifying Conc. Surface” shall be full pay for
performing the Work as specified, including testing and calibration of the machines and tools
used, containment, collection, and disposal of all water and abrasives used and debris created
by the scarifying operation, measures taken to protect adjacent traffic from flying debris, and
final cleanup following the scarifying operation.
“Modified Conc. Overlay”, per cubic foot.
The unit contract price per cubic foot for “Modified Conc. Overlay” shall be full pay for
furnishing the modified concrete overlay, including the overlay material placed into Type 1
deck repairs in accordance with Section 6-09.3(6)C.
“Finishing and Curing Modified Conc. Overlay”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Finishing and Curing Modified Conc.
Overlay” shall be full pay for performing the Work as specified, including placing, finishing,
and curing the modified concrete overlay, checking for bond, and sealing all cracks.
“Further Deck Preparation for Type 1 Deck Repair”, per square foot.
“Further Deck Preparation for Type 2 Deck Repair”, per square foot.
“Structure Surveying”, lump sum.
The lump sum contract price for “Structure Surveying” shall be full pay to perform the
work as specified, including establishing secondary survey control points, performing survey
quality control, and recording, compiling, and submitting the survey records to the Engineer.

6-10 Concrete Barrier

6-10.1 Description
This section applies to building precast or cast-in-place cement concrete barriers as
required by the Plans, these Specifications, or the Engineer.
This Work may also include the removal, storage and resetting of permanent barrier at
the locations shown in the Plans or as specified by the Engineer.
6-10.2 Materials
Aggregates 9-03
Premolded Joint Fillers 9-04.1
Grout 9-20.3
Wire rope shall be Class 6 × 19, made of improved plow steel that has been galvanized and
preformed. Galvanizing shall meet ASTM A603. The wire rope shall have right regular lay and
a fiber core. It shall be ⅝ inch in diameter and have a minimum breaking strength of 15 tons.
All hardware (connecting pins, drift pins, nuts, washers, etc.) shall be galvanized in
keeping with AASHTO M 232.
Connecting pins, drift pins and steel pins for type 3 anchors shall conform to
Section 9-06.5(4) and be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. All other hardware
shall conform to Section 9-06.5(1) and be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232.
Grout for permanent installations of precast single slope barrier shall conform to
Section 9-20.3(3) and shall be placed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(20).
Single slope barrier shall be cast-in-place or slipformed, except when precast single slope
barrier is specified in the Plans or specified by the Engineer. Concrete barrier installed in
conjunction with light standard foundations and sign bridge foundations, regardless of the
barrier shape, shall be cast-in-place using stationary forms.
Concrete barrier transition Type 2 to bridge f-shape shall be precast.
Steel welded wire reinforcement deformed, conforming to Section 9-07.7, may be
substituted in concrete barrier in place of deformed steel bars conforming to Section 9-07.2,
subject to the following conditions:
1. Steel welded wire reinforcement spacing shall be the same as the deformed steel bar
spacing shown in the Standard Plans.
2. The minimum cross sectional area for steel welded wire reinforcement shall be no less
than 86 percent of the cross sectional area for the deformed steel bars being substituted.
3. Development lengths and splice lengths shall conform to requirements specified in the
AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, current edition.
6-10.3(1) Precast Concrete Barrier
The fabrication plant for precast concrete barriers shall be approved by Contracting Agency
prior to the use of barrier and the plant shall perform quality control testing and inspection on
all barrier used by the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the
production schedule for the fabrication of barrier.
Test results from the fabricators QC testing shall demonstrate compliance with Sections
6-02.3(4)C consistency, 6-02.3(4)D temperature and time of placement, 6-02.3(2)A
air content, and compressive strength. All tests will be conducted in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(5)D.
The fabricators QC tester conducting the sampling and testing shall be qualified by ACI,
Grade I to perform this Work. The equipment used shall be calibrated/certified annually.

Concrete Barrier 6-10
All test results and certifications shall be kept at the fabricator’s facility for review by
The Contracting Agency intends to perform Quality Assurance Inspection. This inspection
is for the qualification of the plant QC process. This inspection shall not relieve the Contractor
of any responsibility for identifying and replacing defective material and workmanship.
The concrete in precast barrier shall be Class 4000 and comply with the provisions of
Section 6-02.3. If Self-Consolidating Concrete is used, the concrete shall conform to Sections
6-02.3(27)B and 6-02.3(27)C. No concrete barrier shall be shipped until test cylinders made of
the same concrete and cured under the same conditions show the concrete has reached 4,000 psi.
The Contractor may use Type III portland cement, but shall bear any added cost.
Precast barrier shall be cast in steel forms. After release, the barrier shall be finished to an
even, smooth, dense surface, free from any rock pockets or holes larger than ¼ inch across.
Troweling shall remove all projecting concrete from the bearing surface.
Precast concrete barrier shall be cured in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)D except that
the barrier shall be cured in the forms until a rebound number test, or test cylinders which
have been cured under the same conditions as the barrier, indicate the concrete has reached a
compressive strength of a least 2,500 psi. No additional curing is required once the barrier is
removed from the forms.
The barrier shall be precast in sections as the Standard Plans require. All barrier in the
same project (except end sections and variable length units needed for closure) shall be
the same length. All barrier shall be new and unused. It shall be true to Plan dimensions.
The manufacturer shall be responsible for any damage or distortion that results from
manufacturing.
Only one section less than 20 feet long for single slope barrier and 10 feet long for all other
barriers may be used in any single run of precast barrier, and it shall be at least 8 feet long.
It may be precast or cast-in-place. Hardware identical to that used with other sections shall
interlock such a section with adjacent precast sections.
Barrier connection voids for permanent installations of precast single slope barrier shall
be filled with grout.
6-10.3(2) Cast-In-Place Concrete Barrier
Forms for cast-in-place concrete barrier, including traffic barrier, traffic-pedestrian barrier,
and pedestrian barrier on bridges and related Structures, shall be made of steel or exterior
plywood coated with plastic. The Contractor may construct the barrier by the slip-form
method.
The barrier shall be made of Class 4000 concrete that meets the requirements of
Section 6-02, except that the fine aggregate gradation used for slip-form barrier may be either
Class 1 or 2. The Contractor may use portland cement Type III at no additional expense to the
Contracting Agency.
In addition to the steel reinforcing bar tying and bracing requirements specified in
Section 6-02.3(24) C, the Contractor may also place small amounts of concrete to aid in
holding the steel reinforcing bars in place. These small amounts of concrete shall be not more
than 2-cubic feet in volume, and shall be spaced at a minimum of 10-foot intervals within
the steel reinforcement cage. These small amounts of concrete shall be consolidated and
shall provide 2 inches minimum clearance to the steel reinforcing bars on the outside face
of the barrier. All spattered and excess mortar and concrete shall be removed from the steel
reinforcing bars prior to slip-form casting.
Barrier expansion joints shall be spaced at 96-foot intervals, and dummy joints shall be
spaced at 12-foot intervals unless otherwise specified in the Contract.
Immediately after removing the forms, the Contractor shall complete any finishing Work
needed to produce a uniformly smooth, dense surface. The surface shall have no rock pockets
and no holes larger than ¼ inch across. The barrier shall be cured and finished in accordance
with Section 6-02.3(11)A.

The maximum allowable deviation from a 10-foot straightedge held longitudinally on

all surfaces shall be ¼ inch. For single sloped barrier the maximum allowable deviation
from a straightedge held along the vertical sloped face of the barrier shall be ¼ inch.
At final acceptance of the project, the barrier shall be free from stains, smears, and
any discoloration.
6-10.3(3) Removing and Resetting Permanent Concrete Barrier
The Contractor shall reset concrete barrier if the Plans or the Engineer require. If resetting
is impossible immediately after removal, the Contractor shall store the barrier at Engineer-
approved locations.
6-10.3(4) Joining Precast Concrete Barrier to Cast-In-Place Barrier
The Contractor may join segments of cast-in-place barrier to precast barrier where
transitions, split barriers, or gaps shorter than 10 feet require it. At each joint of this type, the
cast-in-place segment shall include hardware that ties both its ends to abutting precast sections.
6-10.3(5) Temporary Barrier
For temporary concrete barrier, the Contractor may use precast barrier or temporary steel
barrier. Temporary concrete barrier shall comply with Standard Plan requirements and cross-
sectional dimensions, except that: (1) it may be made in other lengths than those shown in the
Standard Plan, and (2) it may have permanent lifting holes no larger than 4 inches in diameter
or lifting loops. Temporary steel barrier shall be certified that it meets the requirements
of NCHRP 350 or MASH Test Level 3 or 4 and shall be installed in accordance with the
If the Contract calls for the removal and resetting of permanent barrier, and the permanent
barrier is not required to remain in place until reset, the permanent barrier may be substituted
for temporary concrete barrier. Any of the permanent barrier damaged during its use as
temporary barrier will become the property of the Contractor and be replaced with permanent
barrier when the permanent barrier is reset to its permanent location.
All barrier shall be in good condition, without cracks, chips, spalls, dirt, or traffic marks.
If any barrier segment is damaged during or after placement, the Contractor shall immediately
repair it to the Engineer’s satisfaction or replace it with an undamaged section.
Delineators shall be placed on the traffic face of the barrier 6 inches from the top and
spaced a maximum of 40 feet on tangents and 20 feet through curves. The reflector color shall
be white on the right side of traffic and yellow on the left side of traffic. The Contractor shall
maintain, replace and clean the delineators when ordered by the Engineer.
As soon as the temporary barrier is no longer needed, the Contractor shall remove it from
the project. Contracting Agency furnished barrier shall remain Contracting Agency property,
and the Contractor shall deliver it to a stockpile site noted in the Contract or to locations
as approved by the Engineer. Contractor furnished barrier shall remain the property of
the Contractor.
6-10.3(6) Placing Concrete Barrier
Precast concrete barrier Types 2 and 4, precast single slope barrier, and transitions shall
rest on a paved foundation shaped to a uniform grade and section. The foundation surface for
precast concrete barrier Types 2 and 4, precast single slope barrier, and transitions shall meet
this test for uniformity: When a 10-foot straightedge is placed on the surface parallel to the
centerline for the barrier, the surface shall not vary more than ¼ inch from the lower edge of
the straightedge. If deviations exceed ¼ inch, the Contractor shall correct them as required in
Section 5-04.3(13).
The Contractor shall align the joints of all precast segments so that they offset no more than
¼ inch transversely and no more than ¾ inch vertically. Grouting is not permitted, except as
previously stated for single slope barrier. If foundation grade and section are acceptable, the
Engineer may permit the Contractor to obtain vertical alignment of the barrier by shimming.

Concrete Barrier 6-10
Shimming shall be done with a polystyrene, foam pad (12 by 24 inches) under the end
12 inches of bearing surface.
Precast barrier shall be handled and placed with equipment that will not damage or
disfigure it.
6-10.4 Measurement
Precast concrete barrier will be measured by the linear foot along its completed line
and slope.
Temporary barrier will be measured by the linear foot along the completed line and slope
of the barrier, one time only for each setup of barrier protected area. Any intermediate moving
or resetting will not be measured.
Cast-in-place concrete barrier will be measured by the linear foot along its completed line
unless the Contract specifies that it be measured per cubic yard for concrete Class 4000 and
per pound for steel reinforcing bar (as required in Section 6-02.4).
Cast-in-place concrete barrier light standard section will be measured by the unit for each
light standard section installed.
Removing and resetting existing permanent barrier will be measured by the linear foot and
will be measured one time only for removing, storage, and resetting. No measure will be made
for barrier that has been removed and reset for the convenience of the Contractor.
Concrete barrier transition Type 2 to bridge F-shape will be measured by the linear
foot installed.
Single slope concrete barrier light standard foundation will be measured by the unit for
each light standard foundation installed.
Traffic barrier, traffic pedestrian barrier, and pedestrian barrier will be measured as
specified for cast-in-place concrete barrier.
6-10.5 Payment
“Precast Conc. Barrier Type ____”, per linear foot.
“Cast-In-Place Conc. Barrier”, per linear foot.
“Conc. Class 4000 _____”, per cubic yard.
“St. Reinf. Bar _____”, per pound.
“Removing and Resetting Existing Permanent Barrier”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Cast-In-Place Conc. Barrier” shall be full pay
for excavation, forms, placement, special construction features, and all other materials, tools,
equipment, and labor necessary to complete the Work as specified; except that when the
Contract specifies, the unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Conc. Class 4000 _____” and
the per pound for “St. Reinf. Bar _____”, shall be full pay for excavation, forms, placement,
special construction features, and all other materials, tools, equipment, and labor necessary
to complete the Work as specified.
“Traffic Barrier”, per linear foot.
“Traffic Pedestrian Barrier”, per linear foot.
“Pedestrian Barrier” per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Traffic Barrier”, “Traffic Pedestrian Barrier”,
and “Pedestrian Barrier” shall be full pay for constructing the barrier on top of the bridge
deck, and associated bridge approach slabs, curtain walls and wingwalls, excluding the
steel reinforcing bars that extend from the bridge deck, bridge approach slab, curtain walls,
and wingwalls.
“Single Slope Concrete Barrier”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Single Slope Concrete Barrier” shall be full
pay for either cast-in-place or precast single slope concrete barrier.

“Conc. Barrier Transition Type 2 to Bridge F-Shape”, per linear foot.

The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Conc. Barrier Transition Type 2 to Bridge
F-Shape” shall be full pay for performing the Work as specified, excluding bridge traffic
barrier modifications necessary for this installation.
“Single Slope Conc. Barrier Light Standard Foundation”, per each.
“Cast-In-Place Conc. Barrier Light Standard Section”, per each.
“Temporary Barrier”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Temporary Barrier” shall be full pay for all
costs, including furnishing, installing, connecting, anchoring, maintaining, temporary storage,
and final removal of the temporary barrier.
Payment for transition sections between different types of barrier shall be made at the unit
Contract price for the type of barrier indicated in the Plans for each transition section.

Reinforced Concrete Walls 6-11
6-11 Reinforced Concrete Walls

6-11.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing reinforced concrete retaining walls, including those
shown in the Standard Plans, L walls, and counterfort walls.
6-11.2 Materials
Cement 9-01
Premolded Joint Filler 9-04.1(2)
Steel Reinforcing Bar 9-07.2
Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bar 9-07.3
Concrete Curing Materials and Admixtures 9-23
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Water 9-25
Other materials required shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of excavation shoring
plans in accordance with Section 2-09.3(3)D.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings of falsework and formwork plans
in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(16) and 6-02.3(17).
If the Contractor elects to fabricate and erect precast concrete wall stem panels, Type 2E
Working Drawings of the following information shall be submitted in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(28)A:
1. Working drawings for fabrication of the wall stem panels, showing dimensions, steel
reinforcing bars, joint and joint filler details, surface finish details, lifting devices with
the manufacturer’s recommended safe working capacity, and material Specifications.
2. Working drawings and design calculations for the erection of the wall stem panels
showing dimensions, support points, support footing sizes, erection blockouts, member
sizes, connections, and material Specifications.
3. Design calculations for the precast wall stem panels, the connection between the precast
panels and the cast-in-place footing, and all modifications to the cast-in-place footing
details as shown in the Plans or Standard Plans.
6-11.3(2) Excavation and Foundation Preparation
Excavation shall conform to Section 2-09.3(3), and to the limits and construction stages
shown in the Plans. Foundation soils found to be unsuitable shall be removed and replaced in
accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)C.
6-11.3(3) Precast Concrete Wall Stem Panels
The Contractor may fabricate precast concrete wall stem panels for construction of
Standard Plan Retaining Walls. Precast concrete wall stem panels may be used for construction
of non-Standard Plan retaining walls if allowed by the Plans or Special Provisions. Precast
concrete wall stem panels shall conform to Section 6-02.3(28), and shall be cast with
Class 4000 concrete. If Self-Consolidating Concrete is used, the concrete shall conform to
Sections 6-02.3(27)B and 6-02.3(27)C.

6-11 Reinforced Concrete Walls
The precast concrete wall stem panels shall be designed in accordance with the
following codes:
1. For all loads except as otherwise noted – AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, latest edition and current interims. The seismic design shall use the
acceleration coefficient and soil profile type as specified in the Plans.
2. For all wind loads – AASHTO Guide Specifications for Structural Design of Sound
Barriers, latest edition and current interims.
The precast concrete wall stem panels shall be fabricated in accordance with the
dimensions and details shown in the Plans, except as modified in the shop drawings.
The precast concrete wall stem panels shall be fabricated full height, and shall be fabricated
in widths of 8, 16, and 24 feet.
The construction tolerances for the precast concrete wall stem panels shall be as follows:
Height ±¼ inch
Width ±¼ inch
Thickness +¼ inch
-⅛ inch
Concrete cover for steel reinforcing bar +⅜ inch
-⅛ inch
Width of precast concrete wall stem panel joints ±¼ inch
Offset of precast concrete wall stem panels ±¼ inch
(Deviation from a straight line extending 5 feet on each side of the panel joint)
The precast concrete wall stem panels shall be constructed with a mating shear key
between adjacent panels. The shear key shall have beveled corners and shall be 1½ inches in
thickness. The width of the shear key shall be 3½ inches minimum and 5½ inches maximum.
The shear key shall be continuous and shall be of uniform width over the entire height of the
wall stem.
The Contractor shall provide the specified surface finish as noted, and to the limits
shown, in the Plans to the exterior concrete surfaces. Special surface finishes achieved with
form liners shall conform to Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(14) as supplemented in the Special
Provisions. Rolled on textured finished shall not be used. Precast concrete wall stem panels
shall be cast in a vertical position if the Plans call for a form liner texture on both sides of the
wall stem panel.
The precast concrete wall stem panel shall be rigidly held in place during placement and
curing of the footing concrete.
The precast concrete wall stem panels shall be placed a minimum of 1 inch into the footing
to provide a shear key. The base of the precast concrete wall stem panel shall be sloped ½ inch
per foot to facilitate proper concrete placement.
To ensure an even flow of concrete under and against the base of the wall panel, a form
shall be placed parallel to the precast concrete wall stem panel, above the footing, to allow
a minimum 1-foot head to develop in the concrete during concrete placement.
The steel reinforcing bars shall be shifted to clear the erection blockouts in the precast
concrete wall stem panel by 1½ inches minimum.
All precast concrete wall stem panel joints shall be constructed with joint filler installed
on the rear (backfill) side of the wall. The joint filler material shall extend from 2 feet below
the final ground level in front of the wall to the top of the wall. The joint filler shall be a
nonorganic flexible material and shall be installed to create a waterproof seal at panel joints.
The soil bearing pressure beneath the falsework supports for the precast concrete wall
stem panels shall not exceed the maximum design soil pressure shown in the Plans for the
retaining wall.

Reinforced Concrete Walls 6-11
6-11.3(4) Cast-In-Place Concrete Construction

Cast-in-place concrete for concrete retaining walls shall be formed, reinforced, cast, cured,
and finished in accordance with Section 6-02, and the details shown in the Plans and Standard
Plans. All cast-in-place concrete shall be Class 4000.
The Contractor shall provide the specified surface finish as noted, and to the limits shown,
in the Plans to the exterior concrete surfaces. Special surface finishes achieved with formliners
shall conform to Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3(14) as supplemented in the Special Provisions.
Cast-in-place concrete for adjacent wall stem sections (between vertical expansion joints)
shall be formed and placed separately, with a minimum 12-hour time period between concrete
placement operations.
Premolded joint filler, ½ inch thick, shall be placed full height of all vertical wall stem
expansion joints in accordance with Section 6-01.14.
6-11.3(5) Backfill, Weepholes, and Gutters
Unless the Plans specify otherwise, backfill and weepholes shall be placed in accordance
with the Standard Plans and Section 6-02.3(22). Gravel backfill for drain shall be compacted
in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E. Backfill within the zone defined as Bridge Approach
Embankment in Section 1-01.3 shall be compacted in accordance with Method C of
Section 2-03.3(14)C. All other backfill shall be compacted in accordance with Method B of
Section 2-03.3(14)C, unless otherwise specified.
Cement concrete gutter shall be constructed as shown in the Standard Plans.
6-11.3(6) Traffic Barrier and Pedestrian Barrier
When shown in the Plans, traffic barrier and pedestrian barrier shall be constructed in
accordance with Sections 6-02.3(11)A and 6-10.3(2), and the details shown in the Plans and
Standard Plans.
6-11.4 Measurement
Concrete Class 4000 for retaining wall will be measured as specified in Section 6-02.4.
Steel reinforcing bar for retaining wall and epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bar for retaining
wall will be measured as specified in Section 6-02.4.
Traffic barrier and pedestrian barrier will be measured as specified in Section 6-10.4 for
cast-in-place concrete barrier.
6-11.5 Payment
Payment will be made for each of the following Bid items when they are included in the
Proposal:
“Conc. Class 4000 For Retaining Wall”, per cubic yard.
All costs in connection with furnishing and installing weep holes and premolded joint
filler shall be included in the unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Conc. Class 4000 for
Retaining Wall”.
“St. Reinf. Bar For Retaining Wall”, per pound.
“Epoxy-Coated St. Reinf. Bar For Retaining Wall”, per pound.
“Traffic Barrier”, per linear foot.
“Pedestrian Barrier”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “___ Barrier” shall be full pay for constructing
the barrier on top of the retaining wall, except that when these Bid items are not included in
the Proposal, all costs in connection with performing the Work as specified shall be included
in the unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Conc. Class 4000 For Retaining Wall”, and the
unit Contract price per pound for “___ Bar For Retaining Wall”.

6-12 Noise Barrier Walls

6-12.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing cast-in-place concrete, precast concrete, masonry, and
timber noise barrier walls, including those shown in the Standard Plans.
6-12.2 Materials
Cement 9-01
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers 9-06.5(1)
Paints 9-08
Grout 9-20.3
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Water 9-25
All noise barrier walls not constructed immediately adjacent to the Roadway, and that
require construction of access for Work activities, shall have a noise barrier wall access
plan. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the noise barrier
wall access plan. The noise barrier wall access plan shall include, but not be limited to, the
locations of access to the noise barrier wall construction sites, and the method, materials,
and equipment used to construct the access, remove the access, and recontour and reseed the
disturbed ground.
For construction of all noise barrier walls with shafts, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2
Working Drawing consisting of the shaft construction plan, including at a minimum the
1. List and description of equipment to be used to excavate and construct the shafts,
including description of how the equipment is appropriate for use in the expected
subsurface conditions.
2. The construction sequence and order of shaft construction.
3. Details of shaft excavation methods, including methods to clean the shaft excavation.
4. Details and dimensions of the shaft, and casing if used.
5. The method used to prevent ground caving (temporary casing, slurry, or other means).
6. Details of concrete placement including procedures for deposit through a conduit,
tremie, or pump.
7. Method and equipment used to install and support the steel reinforcing bar cage.
For construction of precast concrete noise barrier walls, the Contractor shall submit Type 2
Working Drawings consisting of shop drawings for the precast concrete panels in accordance
with Section 6-02.3(28)A. In addition to the items listed in Section 6-02.3(28)A, the precast
concrete panel shop drawings shall include the following:
1. Construction sequence and method of forming the panels.
2. Details of additional reinforcement provided at lifting and support locations.
3. Method and equipment used to support the panels during storage, transporting,
and erection.

Noise Barrier Walls 6-12
4. Erection sequence, including the method of lifting the panels, placing and adjusting
the panels to proper alignment and grade, and supporting the panels during bolting,
grouting, and backfilling operations.
The Contractor shall not begin noise barrier wall construction activities, including access
construction and precast concrete panel fabrication, until receiving the Engineer’s approval
of all appropriate and applicable submittals.
6-12.3(2) Work Access and Site Preparation
The Contractor shall construct Work access in accordance with the Work access plan. The
construction access roads shall minimize disturbance to the existing vegetation, especially
trees. Only trees and shrubs in direct conflict with the approved construction access road
alignment shall be removed. Only one access road into the noise barrier wall from the main
Roadway and one access road from the noise barrier wall to the main Roadway shall be
constructed at each noise barrier wall.
Existing vegetation that has been identified by the Engineer shall be protected in
accordance with Sections 1-07.16 and 2-01, and the Special Provisions.
6-12.3(3) Shaft Construction
The Contractor shall excavate and construct the shafts in accordance with the shaft
construction plan.
The shafts shall be excavated to the required depth as shown in the Plans. The excavation
shall be completed in a continuous operation using equipment capable of excavating through
the type of material expected to be encountered.
If the shaft excavation is stopped, the Contractor shall secure the shaft by installing a safety
cover over the opening. The Contractor shall ensure the safety of the shaft and surrounding
soil and the stability of the side walls. A temporary casing, slurry, or other methods
acceptable to the Engineer shall be used as necessary to ensure such safety and stability.
When caving conditions are encountered, the Contractor shall stop further excavation until
implementing the method to prevent ground caving as specified in the shaft construction plan.
When obstructions are encountered, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer promptly.
An obstruction is defined as a specific object (including, but not limited to, boulders, logs,
and man made objects) encountered during the shaft excavation operation, which prevents
or hinders the advance of the shaft excavation. When efforts to advance past the obstruction
to the design shaft tip elevation result in the rate of advance of the shaft drilling equipment
being significantly reduced relative to the rate of advance for the rest of the shaft excavation,
then the Contractor shall remove the obstruction under the provisions of Section 6-12.5.
The method of removal of such obstructions, and the continuation of excavation shall be
as proposed by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall use appropriate means to clean the bottom of the excavation of
all shafts. No more than 2 inches of loose or disturbed material shall be present at the bottom
of the shaft just prior to beginning concrete placement.
The Contractor shall not begin placing steel reinforcing bars and concrete in the shaft until
receiving the Engineer’s acceptance of the shaft excavation.
The steel reinforcing bar cage shall be rigidly braced to retain its configuration during
handling and construction. The Contractor shall not place individual or loose bars. The
Contractor shall install the steel reinforcing bar cage as specified in the shaft construction plan.
The Contractor shall maintain the minimum concrete cover shown in the Plans.
If casings are used, the Contractor shall remove the casing during concrete placement.
A minimum 5-feet head of concrete shall be maintained to balance soil and water pressure at
the bottom of the casing. The casing shall be smooth. Where the top of the shaft is above the
existing ground, the Contractor shall case the top of the hole prior to placing the concrete.
Concrete for shafts shall conform to Class 4000P. The Contractor shall place concrete
in the shaft immediately after completing the shaft excavation and receiving the Engineer’s

acceptance of the excavation. The Contractor shall place the concrete in one continuous
operation to the elevation shown in the Plans, using a method to prevent segregation of
aggregates. The Contractor shall place the concrete as specified in the shaft construction plan.
If water is present, concrete shall be placed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(6)B.
6-12.3(4) Trench, Grade Beam, or Spread Footing Construction
Where the noise barrier wall foundations exist below the existing ground line, excavation
shall conform to Section 2-09.3(4), and to the limits and construction stages shown in the
Plans. Foundation soils found to be unsuitable shall be removed and replaced in accordance
with Section 2-09.3(1)C.
Where the noise barrier wall foundations exist above the existing ground line, the
Contractor shall place and compact backfill material in accordance with Section 2-03.3(14)C.
Concrete for trench, grade beam, or spread footing foundations shall conform to Class 4000.
Cast-in-place concrete shall be formed, placed, and cured in accordance with Section 6-02,
except that concrete for trench foundations shall be placed against undisturbed soil.
The excavation shall be backfilled in accordance with item 1 of the Compaction Subsection
of Section 2-09.3(1)E.
The steel reinforcing bar cage and the noise barrier wall anchor bolts shall be installed
and rigidly braced prior to grade beam and spread footing concrete placement to retain their
configuration during concrete placement. The Contractor shall not place individual or loose
steel reinforcing bars and anchor bolts, and shall not install anchor bolts during or after
concrete placement.
6-12.3(5) Cast-In-Place Concrete Panel Construction
Construction of cast-in-place concrete panels for noise barrier walls shall conform to
Section 6-11.3(4). For noise barrier walls with traffic barrier, the construction of the traffic
barrier shall also conform to Section 6-10.3(2).
The top of the cast-in-place concrete panels shall conform to the top of wall profile shown
in the Plans. Where a vertical step is constructed to provide elevation change between adjacent
panels, the dimension of the step shall be 2 feet. Each horizontal run between steps shall be a
minimum of 48 feet.
6-12.3(6) Precast Concrete Panel Fabrication and Erection
The Contractor shall fabricate and erect the precast concrete panels in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(28), and the following requirements:
1. Concrete shall conform to Class 4000. If Self-Consolidating Concrete is used, the
concrete shall conform to Sections 6-02.3(27)B and 6-02.3(27)C.
2. Except as otherwise noted in the Plans and Special Provisions, all concrete surfaces
shall receive a Class 2 finish in accordance with Section 6-02.3(14)B.
3. The precast concrete panels shall be cast in accordance with Section 6-02.3(28)B.
The Contractor shall fully support the precast concrete panel to avoid
bowing and sagging surfaces.
After receiving the Engineer’s review of the shop drawings, the Contractor shall
cast one precast concrete panel to be used as the sample panel. The Contractor shall
construct the sample panel in accordance with the procedure and details specified in the
shop drawings. The Contractor shall make the sample panel available to the Engineer
for acceptance.
Upon receiving the Engineer’s acceptance of the sample panel, the Contractor
shall continue production of precast concrete panels for the noise barrier wall. All
precast concrete panels will be evaluated against the sample panel for the quality of
workmanship exhibited. The sample panel shall be retained at the fabrication site until
all precast concrete panels have been fabricated and accepted. After completing precast
concrete panel fabrication, the Contractor may utilize the sample panel as a production
noise barrier wall panel.
Noise Barrier Walls 6-12
4. In addition to the fabrication tolerance requirements of Section 6-02.3(28)F, the precast

concrete panels for noise barrier walls shall not exceed the following scalar tolerances:
Length and Width: ± ⅛ inch per 5 feet, not to exceed ¼ inch total.
Thickness: ± ¼ inch.
The difference obtained by comparing the measurement of the diagonal of the face of
the panels shall not be greater than ½ inch.
Dimension tolerances for the traffic barrier portion of precast concrete panels formed
with traffic barrier shapes shall conform to Section 6-10.3(2).
5. Precast concrete panels shall not be erected until the foundations for the panels have
attained a minimum compressive strength of 3,400 psi.
6. The bolts connecting the precast concrete panels to their foundation shall be tightened
to “snug tight” as defined in Section 6-03.3(32).
7. After erection, the precast concrete panels shall not exceed the joint space tolerances
shown in the Plans. The panels shall not exceed ⅜ inch out of plumb in any direction.
The Contractor shall seal the joints between precast concrete panels with a backer
rod and sealant system as specified. The Contractor shall seal both sides of the joint
full length.
The top of precast concrete panels shall conform to the top of wall profile shown in the
Plans. Where a vertical step is constructed to provide elevation change between adjacent
panels, the dimension of the step shall be 2 feet. Each horizontal run between steps shall be
a minimum of 48 feet.
6-12.3(7) Masonry Wall Construction
Construction requirements for masonry noise barrier wall panels shall be as specified in
6-12.3(8) Fabricating and Erecting Timber Noise Barrier Wall Panels
Construction requirements for timber noise barrier wall panels shall be as specified in the
Special Provisions.
6-12.3(9) Access Doors and Concrete Landing Pads
The Contractor shall install access doors and door frames as shown in the Plans and
Standard Plans. The Contractor shall install the access doors to open toward the Roadway
side. The door frames shall be set in place with grout conforming to either Section 9-20.3(2)
or 9-20.3(4) and placed in accordance with Section 6-02.3(20), with the grout completely
filling the void between the door frame and the noise barrier wall panel.
The Contractor shall apply two coats of paint, as specified in the Special Provisions,
to all exposed metal surfaces of access doors and frames, except for stainless steel surfaces.
Each coat shall be 3 mils minimum wet film thickness.
The Contractor shall construct concrete landing pads for each access door location
as shown in the Plans. The concrete shall conform to Section 6-02.3(2)B.
6-12.3(10) Finish Ground Line Dressing
The Contractor shall contour and dress the ground line on both sides of the noise barrier
wall, providing the minimum cover over the foundation as shown in the Plans. The Contractor
shall contour the ground adjacent to the barrier to ensure good drainage away from the barrier.
After the access roads are no longer needed for noise barrier wall construction activities,
the Contractor shall restore the area to the original condition. The Contractor shall recontour
the access roads to match into the surrounding ground and shall reseed all disturbed areas
in accordance with the Section 8-01 and the Special Provisions, and the noise barrier wall
access plan.

6-12.4 Measurement
Noise barrier wall will be measured by the square foot area of one face of the completed
wall panel in place. Except as otherwise noted, the bottom limit for measurement will be the
top of the trench footing, spread footing, or shaft cap. For Noise Barrier Type 5, the bottom
measurement limit will be the optional construction joint at the base of the traffic barrier.
For Noise Barrier Type 7, the bottom measurement limit will be base of the traffic barrier.
For Noise Barrier Types 8, 11, 12, 14, 15, and 20, the bottom measurement limit will be the
base of the wall panel.
Noise barrier wall access door will be measured once for each access door assembly with
concrete landing pad furnished and installed.
6-12.5 Payment
Proposal:
“Noise Barrier Wall Type __”, per square foot.
The unit Contract price per square foot for “Noise Barrier Wall Type __” shall be full pay
for constructing the noise barrier walls as specified, including constructing and removing
access roads, excavating and constructing foundations and grade beams, constructing cast-
in-place concrete, and masonry wall panels, fabricating and erecting precast concrete, and
timber wall panels, applying sealer, and contouring the finish ground line adjacent to the
noise barrier walls.
“Noise Barrier Wall Access Door”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Noise Barrier Wall Access Door” shall be full pay for
furnishing and installing the access door assembly as specified, including painting the installed
access door assembly and constructing the concrete landing pads.
“Removing Noise Barrier Wall Shaft Obstructions”, estimated.
Payment for removing obstructions, as defined in Section 6-12.3(3), will be made for the
changes in shaft construction methods necessary to remove the obstruction. The Contractor
and the Engineer shall evaluate the effort made and reach agreement on the equipment and
employees utilized, and the number of hours involved for each. Once these cost items and their
duration have been agreed upon, the payment amount will be determined using the rate and
markup methods specified in Section 1-09.6. For the purpose of providing a common proposal
for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item “Removing Noise
Barrier Wall Shaft Obstructions” in the bid proposal to become a part of the total bid by
the Contractor.
If the shaft construction equipment is idled as a result of the obstruction removal work
and cannot be reasonably reassigned within the project, then standby payment for the idled
equipment will be added to the payment calculations. If labor is idled as a result of the
obstruction removal work and cannot be reasonably reassigned within the project, then all
labor costs resulting from Contractor labor agreements and established Contractor policies will
be added to the payment calculations.
The Contractor shall perform the amount of obstruction work estimated by the Contracting
Agency within the original time of the contract. The Engineer will consider a time adjustment
and additional compensation for costs related to the extended duration of the shaft construction
operations, provided:
1. The dollar amount estimated by the Contracting Agency has been exceeded, and;
2. The Contractor shows that the obstruction removal work represents a delay to the
completion of the project based on the current progress schedule provided in accordance

Structural Earth Walls 6-13
6-13 Structural Earth Walls

6-13.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing structural earth walls (SEW).
6-13.2 Materials
Cement 9-01
Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Walls 9-03.14(4)
Mortar 9-20.4
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Water 9-25
Proprietary structural earth wall systems shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
The structural earth wall manufacturer shall provide a qualified and experienced
representative to resolve wall construction problems. The structural earth wall manufacturer’s
representative shall be present at the beginning of wall construction activities, and at other
times as needed throughout construction. Recommendations made by the structural earth wall
manufacturer’s representative shall be followed by the Contractor.
The completed wall shall meet the following tolerances:
1. Deviation from the design batter and horizontal alignment, when measured along
a 10‑foot straightedge, shall not exceed the following:
a. Welded wire faced structural earth wall: 2 inches
b. Precast concrete panel and concrete block faced structural earth wall: ¾ inch
2. Deviation from the overall design batter of the wall shall not exceed the following per
10 feet of wall height:
a. Welded wire faced structural earth wall: 1½ inches
b. Precast concrete panel and concrete block faced structural earth wall: ½ inch
3. The maximum outward bulge of the face between welded wire faced structural earth
wall reinforcement layers shall not exceed 2 inches. The maximum allowable offset in
any precast concrete facing panel joint shall be ¾ inch. The maximum allowable offset
in any concrete block joint shall be ¾ inch.
4. The base of the structural earth wall excavation shall be within 3 inches of the staked
elevations, unless otherwise accepted or specified by the Engineer.
5. The external structural earth wall dimensions shall be placed within 2 inches of that
staked on the ground.
6. The backfill reinforcement layers shall be located horizontally and vertically within
1 inch of the locations shown in the structural earth wall Working Drawings.
At least 5 working days prior to the Contractor beginning any structural earth wall Work at
the site, a structural earth wall preconstruction conference shall be held to discuss construction
procedures, personnel, and equipment to be used, and other elements of structural earth wall
construction. Those attending shall include:

1. (representing the Contractor) The superintendent, on site supervisors, and all foremen
in charge of excavation, leveling pad placement, concrete block and soil reinforcement
placement, and structural earth wall backfill placement and compaction.
2. (representing the Structural Earth Wall Manufacturer) The qualified and experienced
representative of the structural earth wall manufacturer as specified at the beginning of
this Section.
3. (representing the Contracting Agency) The Engineer, key inspection personnel, and
representatives from the WSDOT Construction Office and Materials Laboratory
Geotechnical Services Branch.
The Contractor, or the supplier as the Contractor’s agent, shall furnish a Manufacturer’s
Certificate of Compliance certifying that the structural earth wall materials conform to the
specified material requirements. This includes providing a Manufacturer’s Certificate of
Compliance for all concrete admixtures, cement, fly ash, steel reinforcing bars, reinforcing
strips, reinforcing mesh, tie strips, fasteners, welded wire mats, backing mats, construction
geotextile for wall facing, drainage geosynthetic fabric, block connectors, and joint materials.
The Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for geogrid reinforcement shall include the
information specified in Section 9-33.4(4) for each geogrid roll, and shall specify the geogrid
polymer types for each geogrid roll.
A Type 1 Working Drawing of all test results performed by the Contractor or the
Contractor’s supplier, which are necessary to ensure compliance with the specifications, shall
be submitted along with each Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.
Before fabrication, the Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of
the field construction manual for the structural earth walls, prepared by the wall manufacturer.
This manual shall provide step-by-step directions for construction of the wall system.
The Contractor, through the license/patent holder for the structural earth wall system, shall
submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of detailed design calculations and details. If
not prepared by the license/patent holder for the structural earth system, the design calculation
and working drawing submittal shall include documentation that the design calculation
and working drawing submittal has been reviewed by, and received the concurrence of, the
headquarters organization of the structural earth wall manufacturer as identified in the Special
Provisions. Review and concurrence by a sales representative office is not acceptable.
6-13.3(2)A Design Calculation Content Requirements
The design calculation submittal shall include detailed design calculations based on the
wall geometry and design parameters specified in the Plans and Special Provisions. The
calculations shall include detailed explanations of any symbols, design input, materials
property values, and computer programs used in the design of the walls. All computer output
submitted shall be accompanied by supporting hand calculations detailing the calculation
process. If MSEW 3.0, or a later version, is used for the wall design, hand calculations
supporting MSEW are not required.
The design calculations shall be based on the current AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications, including current interims, the current WSDOT Bridge Design Manual
LRFD (BDM), and the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual (GDM), and also based on
the following:
1. The wall design calculations shall address all aspects of wall internal stability for the
service, strength, and extreme event limit states.
2. The wall surcharge conditions (backfill slope) shown in the Plans.
3. If a highway is adjacent to and on top of the wall, a 2-foot surcharge shall be used in
the design.
4. If the Plans detail an SEW traffic barrier or SEW pedestrian barrier on top of the
wall, the barrier shall be designed for a minimum TL-4 impact load, unless otherwise
specified in the Plans or Special Provisions.
5. If the Plans detail an SEW traffic barrier or SEW pedestrian barrier on top of the wall,
the wall shall be designed for the impact load transferred from the barrier to the wall.
6. The geotechnical design parameters for the wall shall be as specified in the Special
Provisions.
7. The soil reinforcement length shall be as shown in the Plans. If the Plans do not show a
length, the length shall be either 6 feet or 0.7 times the wall design height H, whichever
is greater.
If there are differences in design requirements between the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design
Specifications and the BDM or GDM, the BDM and GDM requirements shall govern.
6-13.3(2)B Working Drawing Content Requirements
All design details shown in the working drawings shall be selected from the design details
and products specified for the specific structural earth wall manufacturer in the Preapproved
Wall Appendix in the current WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual (GDM). Geosynthetic
reinforcement shown in the working drawings shall be selected from the products listed in the
current WSDOT Qualified Products List (QPL). Substitution of design details and products not
listed in the current WSDOT GDM or QPL will not be allowed.
The working drawing submittal shall include all details, dimensions, quantities, and cross
sections necessary to construct the wall based on the wall geometry and design parameters
specified in the Plans and Special Provisions, and shall include, but not be limited to, the
following items:
1. A plan and elevation sheet or sheets for each wall, containing the following:
a. An elevation view of the wall that includes the following:
i. The elevation at the top of the wall, at all horizontal and vertical break points,
and at least every 50 feet along the wall;
ii. Elevations at the base of welded wire mats or the top of leveling pads and
foundations, and the distance along the face of the wall to all steps in the welded
wire mats, foundations, and leveling pads;
iii. The designation as to the type of panel, block, or module;
iv. The length, size, and number of geogrids or mesh or strips, and the distance
along the face of the wall to where changes in length of the geogrids or mesh or
strips occur; or
v. The length, size, and wire sizes and spacing of the welded wire mats and backing
mats, and the distance along the face of the wall to where changes in length, size,
and wire sizes and spacing of the welded wire mats and backing mats occur; and
vi. The location of the original and final ground line.
b. A plan view of the wall that indicates the offset from the construction centerline to
the face of the wall at all changes in horizontal alignment; the limit of the widest
module, geogrid, mesh, strip, or welded wire mat, and the centerline of any drainage
structure or drainage pipe that is behind or passes under or through the wall.
c. General notes, if any, required for design and construction of the wall.
d. All horizontal and vertical curve data affecting wall construction.
e. A listing of the summary of quantities provided on the elevation sheet of each wall
for all items, including incidental items.
f. A cross section showing limits of construction. In fill sections, the cross section
shall show the limits and extent of select granular backfill material placed above
original ground.
g. Limits and extent of reinforced soil volume.
2. All details, including steel reinforcing bar bending details. Bar bending details shall be
3. All details for foundations and leveling pads, including details for steps in the
foundations or leveling pads.
4. All modules and facing elements shall be detailed. The details shall show all dimensions
necessary to construct the element, all steel reinforcing bars in the element, and the
location of reinforcement element attachment devices embedded in the precast concrete
facing panel or concrete block.
5. All details for construction of the wall around drainage facilities, sign, signal, luminaire,
and noise barrier wall foundations, and structural abutment and foundation elements
shall be clearly shown.
6. All details for connections to SEW traffic or pedestrian barriers, coping, parapets, noise
barrier walls, and attached lighting shall be shown.
7. All details for the SEW traffic or pedestrian barrier attached to the top of the wall
(if shown in the Plans), including interaction with bridge approach slabs.
Excavation shall conform to Section 2-09.3(3). Foundation soils found to be unsuitable
shall be removed and replaced in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)C. The foundation for the
Structure shall be graded level for a width equal to or exceeding the length of reinforcing as
shown in the structural earth wall Working Drawings and, for walls with geogrid reinforcing,
in accordance with Section 2-12.3. Prior to wall construction, the foundation, if not in rock,
shall be compacted as accepted by the Engineer.
At the foundation level of the bottom course of precast concrete facing panels and concrete
blocks, an unreinforced concrete leveling pad shall be provided as shown in the Plans. The
leveling pad shall be cured a minimum of 12 hours and have a minimum compressive strength
of 1,500 psi before placement of the precast concrete facing panels or concrete blocks.
6-13.3(4) Precast Concrete Facing Panel and Concrete Block Fabrication
Concrete for precast concrete facing panels shall meet the following requirements:
1. Have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 pounds per square inch,
unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions for specific proprietary wall
systems. If Self-Consolidating Concrete is used, the concrete shall conform to
Sections 6-02.3(27)B and 6-02.3(27)C.
2. Contain a water-reducing admixture meeting AASHTO M194 Type A, D, F, or G.
3. Be air-entrained, 6 percent ± 1½ percent.
4. Have a maximum slump of 4 inches, or 6 inches if a Type F or G water reducer is used.
Concrete for dry cast concrete blocks shall meet the following requirements:
1. Have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi.
2. Conform to ASTM C1372, except as otherwise specified.
3. The lot of blocks produced for use in this project shall conform to the following
freeze-thaw test requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM C1262. Minimum
acceptable performance shall be defined as weight loss at the conclusion of 150 freeze-
thaw cycles not exceeding 1 percent of the block’s initial weight for a minimum of four
of the five block specimens tested.
4. The concrete blocks shall have a maximum water absorption of 1 percent above the
water absorption content of the lot of blocks produced and successfully tested for the
freeze-thaw test specified in item 3 above.
Precast concrete facing panels and concrete blocks will be accepted based on successful
compressive strength tests, WSDOT “Approved for Shipment” stamp or tag, and visual
inspection at the jobsite. The precast concrete facing panels and concrete blocks shall be
considered acceptable regardless of curing age when compressive test results indicate
that the compressive strength conforms to the 28-day requirements and when the visual
inspection is satisfactorily completed. Fabrication of precast concrete facing panels and blocks
shall conform to Section 6-02.3(28). Testing of dry cast concrete blocks shall conform to
ASTM C140.

All precast concrete facing panels shall be 5 feet square, except:

1. for partial panels at the top, bottom, and ends of the wall; and
2. as otherwise shown in the Plans.
All precast concrete facing panels shall be manufactured within the following tolerances:
1. All dimensions ± 3⁄16 inch.
2. Squareness, as determined by the difference between the two diagonals, shall not
exceed ½ inch.
3. Surface defects on smooth formed surfaces measured on a length of 5 feet shall not
exceed ⅛ inch. Surface defects on textured-finished surfaces measured on a length of
5 feet shall not exceed 5⁄16 inch.
All concrete blocks shall be manufactured within the following tolerances:
1. Vertical dimensions shall be + 1⁄16 inch of the Plan dimension, and the rear height shall
not exceed the front height.
2. The dimensions of the grooves in the top and bottom faces of the concrete blocks shall
be formed within the tolerances specified by the proprietary wall manufacturer, for the
fit required for the block connectors.
3. All other dimensions shall be + ¼ inch of the Plan dimension.
Tie attachment devices, except for geosynthetic reinforcement, shall be set in place to the
dimensions and tolerances shown in the Plans prior to casting.
The forms forming precast concrete facing panels, including the forms for loop pockets and
access pockets, and the forms forming the concrete blocks, shall be removed in accordance
with the recommendations of the wall manufacturer, without damaging the concrete.
The concrete surface for the precast concrete facing panel shall have the finish shown in the
Plans for the front face and an unformed finish for the rear face. The rear face of the precast
concrete facing panel shall be roughly screeded to eliminate open pockets of aggregate and
surface distortions in excess of ¼ inch.
The concrete surface for the front face of the concrete block shall be flat, and shall be a
conventional “split face” finish in accordance with the wall manufacturer’s Specifications.
The concrete surface of all other faces shall be Class 2 in accordance with Section 6-02.3(14)B.
The finish and appearance of the concrete blocks shall also conform to ASTM C1372. The color
of the concrete block shall be concrete gray, unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
The date of manufacture, production lot number, and the piece-mark, shall be clearly
marked on the rear face of each precast concrete facing panel, and marked or tagged on each
pallet of concrete blocks.
All precast concrete facing panels and concrete blocks shall be handled, stored, and
shipped in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(28)G and 6-02.3(28)H to prevent chipping,
cracks, fractures, and excessive bending stresses.
Precast concrete facing panels in storage shall be supported on firm blocking located
immediately adjacent to tie strips to avoid bending the tie strips.
6-13.3(5) Precast Concrete Facing Panel and Concrete Block Erection
The precast concrete facing panels shall be placed vertically. During erection, precast
concrete facing panels shall be handled by means of a lifting device set into the upper edge
of the panels.
Concrete blocks shall be erected in a running bond fashion in accordance with the wall
manufacturer’s field construction manual, and may be placed by hand. The top surface of each
course of concrete blocks, including all pockets and recesses, shall be cleaned of backfill and
all extraneous materials prior to connecting the reinforcing strips or geosynthetic reinforcing,
and placing the next course of concrete blocks. Concrete blocks receiving geosynthetic
reinforcement shall be connected as specified in the Special Provisions. Cap block top courses
shall be bonded to the lower course of concrete blocks as specified below. All other concrete
blocks shall be connected with block connectors or pins placed into the connector slots.
Precast concrete facing panels and concrete blocks shall be placed in successive horizontal
lifts as backfill placement proceeds in the sequence shown in the structural earth wall Working
Drawings as approved by the Engineer.
External bracing is required for the initial lift for precast concrete facing panels.
As backfill material is placed behind the precast concrete facing panels, the panels shall be
maintained in vertical position by means of temporary wooden wedges placed in the joint at
the junction of the two adjacent panels on the external side of the wall.
Reinforcing shall be placed normal to the face of the wall, unless otherwise shown in
the Plans or directed by the Engineer. Prior to placement of the reinforcing, backfill shall
be compacted.
Geosynthetic reinforcing shall be placed in accordance with Section 2-12.3 and as follows:
1. The Contractor shall stretch out the geosynthetic in the direction perpendicular to the
wall face to remove all slack and wrinkles, and shall hold the geosynthetic in place
with soil piles or other methods as recommended by the geosynthetic manufacturer,
before placing backfill material over the geosynthetic to the specified cover.
2. The geosynthetic reinforcement shall be continuous in the direction perpendicular to
the wall face from the back face of the concrete panel to the end of the geosynthetic or
to the last geogrid node at the end of the specified reinforcement length. Geosynthetic
splices parallel to the wall face will not be allowed.
At the completion of each course of concrete blocks and prior to installing any block
connectors or geosynthetic reinforcement at this level, the Contractor shall check the blocks
for level placement in all directions, and shall adjust the blocks by grinding or rear face
shimming, or other method as recommended by the structural earth wall manufacturer’s
representative and as approved by the Engineer, to bring the blocks into a level plane.
For concrete block wall systems receiving a cap block top course, the cap blocks shall be
bonded to the lower course either with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(3), or with an
adhesive capable of bonding the concrete block courses together.
6-13.3(6) Welded Wire Faced Structural Earth Wall Erection
The Contractor shall erect the welded wire wall reinforcement in accordance with the
wall manufacturer’s field construction manual. Construction geotextile for wall facing shall
be placed between the backfill material within the reinforced zone and the coarse granular
material immediately behind the welded wire wall facing, as shown in the Plans and the
structural earth wall Working Drawings. Geosynthetic reinforcing, when used, shall be placed
in accordance with Sections 2-12.3 and 6-13.3(5).
6-13.3(7) Backfill
Backfill placement shall closely follow erection of each course of welded wire mats and
backing mats, precast concrete facing panels, or concrete blocks. Backfill shall be placed in
such a manner as to avoid any damage or disturbance to the wall materials or misalignment
of the welded wire mats and backing mats, precast concrete facing panels, or concrete blocks.
Backfill shall be placed in a manner that segregation does not occur. Construction equipment
shall not operate directly on the wall reinforcement. A minimum backfill thickness of 6 inches
over the reinforcement shall be required prior to operation of vehicles or equipment.
The Contractor shall place wall backfill over geosynthetic reinforcement, or construction
geotextile for wall facing, in accordance with Section 2-12.3.
Misalignment or distortion of the precast concrete facing panels or concrete blocks due
to placement of backfill outside the limits of this Specification shall be corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Engineer.
The moisture content of the backfill material prior to and during compaction shall be
uniformly distributed throughout each layer of material. The moisture content of all backfill
material shall conform to Sections 2-03.3(14)C and 2-03.3(14)D.

Backfill shall be compacted in accordance with Method C of Section 2-03.3(14)C, except

as follows:
1. The maximum lift thickness after compaction shall not exceed 10 inches.
2. The Contractor shall decrease this lift thickness, if necessary, to obtain the specified
density.
3. The Contractor shall not use sheepsfoot rollers or rollers with protrusions for
compacting backfill reinforced with geosynthetic layers, or for compacting the first
lift of backfill above the construction geosynthetic for wall facing for each layer of
welded wire mats. Rollers shall have sufficient capacity to achieve compaction without
causing distortion to the face of the wall in accordance with the tolerances specified in
Section 6-13.3(1).
4. The Contractor shall compact the zone within 3 feet of the back of the wall facing
panels without causing damage to or distortion of the wall facing elements (welded
wire mats, backing mats, construction geotextile for wall facing, precast concrete facing
panels, and concrete blocks) by using a plate compactor. No soil density tests will be
taken within this area.
5. For wall systems with geosynthetic reinforcement, the minimum compacted backfill lift
thickness of the first lift above each geosynthetic reinforcement layer shall be 6 inches.
At the end of each day’s operation, the Contractor shall shape the last level of backfill to
permit runoff of rainwater away from the wall face. In addition, the Contractor shall not allow
surface runoff from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site.
6-13.3(8) Guardrail Placement
Where guardrail posts are required, the Contractor shall not begin installing guardrail
posts until completing the structural earth wall to the top of wall elevation shown in the Plans.
The Contractor shall install the posts in a manner that prevents movement of the precast
concrete facing panels or concrete blocks, and prevents ripping, tearing, or pulling of the
wall reinforcement.
The Contractor may cut welded wire reinforcement of welded wire faced structural
earth walls to facilitate placing the guardrail posts, but only in the top two welded wire
reinforcement layers and only with the permission of the Engineer in a manner that prevents
bulging of the wall face and prevents ripping or pulling of the welded wire reinforcement.
Holes through the welded wire reinforcement shall be the minimum size necessary for the
post. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer prior to beginning guardrail post
installation that the installation method will not rip, tear, or pull the wall reinforcement.
The Contractor shall place guardrail posts between the reinforcing strips, reinforcing mesh,
and tie strips of the non-geosynthetic reinforced precast concrete panel or concrete block faced
structural earth walls. Holes through the reinforcement of geosynthetic reinforced walls, if
necessary, shall be the minimum size necessary for the guardrail post.
6-13.3(9) SEW Traffic Barrier and SEW Pedestrian Barrier
The Contractor, in conjunction with the structural earth wall manufacturer, shall design and
detail the SEW traffic barrier and SEW pedestrian barrier in accordance with Section 6-13.3(2)
and the above ground geometry details shown in the Plans. The barrier Working Drawings and
supporting calculations shall be Type 2E and shall include, at a minimum, the following:
1. Complete details of barrier cross section geometry, including the portion below ground,
and accommodations necessary for bridge approach slabs, PCCP, drainage facilities,
underground utilities, and sign support, luminaire pole, traffic signal standard, and other
barrier attachments.
2. Details of the steel reinforcement of the barrier, including a bar list and bending
diagram in accordance with Section 6-02.3(24), and including additional reinforcement
required at sign support, luminaire pole, traffic signal standard, and other barrier
attachment locations.

3. Details of the interface of, and the interaction between, the barrier and the top layers of
structural earth wall reinforcement and facing.
4. When the Plans specify placement of conduit pipes through the barrier, details of
conduit pipe and junction box placement.
SEW traffic barrier and SEW pedestrian barrier shall be constructed in accordance with
Sections 6-02.3(11)A and 6-10.3(2), and the details in the Plans and in the structural earth
wall Working Drawings as approved by the Engineer. The moment slab supporting the SEW
traffic or pedestrian barrier shall be continuously wet cured for 3 days in accordance with
Section 6-02.3(11).
6-13.4 Measurement
Structural earth wall will be measured by the square foot of completed wall in place. The
bottom limits for vertical measurement will be the bottom of the bottom mat, for welded wire
faced structural earth walls, or the top of the leveling pad (or bottom of wall if no leveling pad
is present) for precast concrete panel or concrete block faced structural earth walls. The top
limit for vertical measurement will be the top of wall as shown in the Plans. The horizontal
limits for measurement are from the end of the wall to the end of the wall.
Gravel borrow for structural earth wall including haul will be measured by the cubic yard
in place determined by the limits shown in the Plans.
SEW traffic barrier, and SEW pedestrian barrier will be measured as specified in
Section 6-10.4 for cast-in-place concrete barrier.
6-13.5 Payment
Proposal:
“Structural Earth Wall”, per square foot.
The unit Contract price per square foot for “Structural Earth Wall” shall be full payment for
all costs to perform the Work in connection with constructing structural earth walls, including
leveling pads and copings when specified.
“Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Wall incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Wall
incl. Haul” shall be full payment for all costs to perform the Work in connection with
furnishing and placing backfill for structural earth wall, including hauling and compacting the
backfill, and furnishing and placing the wall-facing backfill for welded wire-faced structural
earth walls.
“SEW Traffic Barrier”, per linear foot.
“SEW Pedestrian Barrier”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “SEW ___ Barrier” shall be full pay for
constructing the barrier on top of the structural earth wall, except that when these Bid items
are not included in the Proposal, all costs in connection with performing the Work as specified
shall be included in the unit Contract price per square foot for “Structural Earth Wall”.

Geosynthetic Retaining Walls 6-14
6-14 Geosynthetic Retaining Walls

6-14.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing geosynthetic retaining walls, including those shown
in the Standard Plans.
6-14.2 Materials
Sand 9-03.13(1)
Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Wall 9-03.14(4)
Polyurethane Sealant 9-04.2(3)
Anchor Rods and Associated Nuts, Washers, and Couplers 9-06.5(4)
Wire Mesh for Concrete Reinforcement 9-07.7
Grout 9-20.3(4)
Anchor plate shall conform to ASTM A36, ASTM A572 Grade 50, or ASTM A588.
The requirements specified in Section 2-12.2 for geotextile shall also apply to geosynthetic
and geogrid materials used for permanent and temporary geosynthetic retaining walls.
Temporary geosynthetic retaining walls are defined as those walls and wall components
constructed and removed or abandoned before the Physical Completion Date of the project or
as shown in the Plans. All other geosynthetic retaining walls shall be considered as permanent.
The Contractor shall complete the base of the retaining wall excavation to within plus
or minus 3 inches of the staked elevations unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor shall place the external wall dimensions to within plus or minus 2 inches of that
staked on the ground. The Contractor shall space the reinforcement layers vertically and place
the overlaps to within plus or minus 1 inch of that shown in the Plans.
The completed wall(s) shall meet the following tolerances:
Permanent Temporary
Wall Wall
Deviation from the design batter and horizontal alignment for the face when measured 3 inches 5 inches
along a 10-foot straightedge at the midpoint of each wall layer shall not exceed:
Deviation from the overall design batter per 10 feet of wall height shall not exceed: 2 inches 3 inches
Maximum outward bulge of the face between backfill reinforcement layers shall 4 inches 6 inches
not exceed:
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of detailed plans for
each wall. As a minimum, the submittals shall include the following:
1. Detailed wall plans showing the actual lengths proposed for the geosynthetic
reinforcing layers and the locations of each geosynthetic product proposed for use
in each of the geosynthetic reinforcing layers.
2. The Contractor’s proposed wall construction method, including proposed forming
systems, types of equipment to be used, proposed erection sequence and details of how
the backfill will be retained during each stage of construction.

3. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, samples of the retaining wall geosynthetic

and sewn seams for the purpose of acceptance as specified.
4. Details of geosynthetic retaining wall corner construction, including details of the
positive connection between the wall sections on both sides of the corner.
5. Details of terminating a top layer of retaining wall geosynthetic and backfill due to a
changing retaining wall profile.
Approval of the Contractor’s proposed wall construction details and methods shall not
relieve the Contractor of their responsibility to construct the walls in accordance with the
requirements of these Specifications.
Excavation shall conform to Section 2-09.3(3). Foundations soils found to be unsuitable
shall be removed and replaced in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)C.
The Contractor shall direct all surface runoff from adjacent areas away from the retaining
wall construction site.
6-14.3(4) Erection and Backfill
The Contractor shall begin wall construction at the lowest portion of the excavation and
shall place each layer horizontally as shown in the Plans. The Contractor shall complete each
layer entirely before beginning the next layer.
Geotextile splices shall consist of a sewn seam or a minimum 1-foot overlap. Geogrid
splices shall consist of adjacent geogrid strips butted together and fastened using hog rings,
or other methods acceptable to the Engineer, in such a manner to prevent the splices from
separating during geogrid installation and backfilling. Splices exposed at the wall face shall
prevent loss of backfill material through the face. The splicing material exposed at the wall
face shall be as durable and strong as the material to which the splices are tied. The Contractor
shall offset geosynthetic splices in one layer from those in the other layers such that the splices
shall not line up vertically. Splices parallel to the wall face will not be allowed, as shown in
the Plans.
The Contractor shall stretch out the geosynthetic in the direction perpendicular to the
wall face to ensure that no slack or wrinkles exist in the geosynthetic prior to backfilling.
For geogrids, the length of the reinforcement required as shown in the Plans shall be
defined as the distance between the geosynthetic wrapped face and the last geogrid node at
the end of the reinforcement in the wall backfill.
The Contractor shall place fill material on the geosynthetic in lifts such that 6 inches
minimum of fill material is between the vehicle or equipment tires or tracks and the
geosynthetic at all times. The Contractor shall remove all particles within the backfill material
greater than 3 inches in size. Turning of vehicles on the first lift above the geosynthetic will
not be permitted. The Contractor shall not end dump fill material directly on the geosynthetic
without the prior permission of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall use a temporary form system to prevent sagging of the geosynthetic
facing elements during construction. A typical example of a temporary form system and
sequence of wall construction required when using this form are detailed in the Plans. Soil
piles or the geosynthetic manufacturer’s recommended method, in combination with the
forming system shall be used to hold the geosynthetic in place until the specified cover
material is placed.
The Contractor shall place and compact the wall backfill in accordance with the wall
construction sequence detailed in the Plans and Method C of Section 2-03.3(14)C, except
as follows:
1. The maximum lift thickness after compaction shall not exceed 10 inches
2. The Contractor shall decrease this lift thickness, if necessary, to obtain the
specified density.

Geosynthetic Retaining Walls 6-14
3. Rollers shall have sufficient capacity to achieve compaction without causing

distortion to the face of the wall in accordance with Section 6-14.3(1).
4. The Contractor shall not use sheepsfoot rollers or rollers with protrusions.
5. The Contractor shall compact the zone within 3 feet of the back of the wall facing
panels without causing damage to or distortion of the wall facing elements (welded
wire mats, backing mats, construction geotextile for wall facing, precast concrete
facing panels, and concrete blocks) by using a plate compactor. No soil density tests
will be taken within this area.
6. For wall systems with geosynthetic reinforcement, the minimum compacted backfill lift
thickness of the first lift above each geosynthetic reinforcement layer shall be 6 inches.
The Contractor shall construct wall corners at the locations shown in the Plans, and in
accordance with the wall corner construction sequence and method in the Working Drawing
submittal. Wall angle points with an interior angle of less than 150 degrees shall be considered
to be a wall corner. The wall corner shall provide a positive connection between the sections of
the wall on each side of the corner such that the wall backfill material cannot spill out through
the corner at any time during the design life of the wall. The Contractor shall construct the
wall corner such that the wall sections on both sides of the corner attain the full geosynthetic
layer embedment lengths shown in the Plans.
Where required by retaining wall profile grade, the Contractor shall terminate top layers
of retaining wall geosynthetic and backfill in accordance with the method in the Working
Drawing submittal. The end of each layer at the top of the wall shall be constructed in a
manner that prevents wall backfill material from spilling out the face of the wall throughout
the life of the wall. If the profile of the top of the wall changes at a rate of 1:1 or steeper, this
change in top of wall profile shall be considered to be a corner.
6-14.3(5) Guardrail Placement
The Contractor shall install guardrail posts as shown in the Plans after completing the
wall, but before the permanent facing is installed. The Contractor shall install the posts in
a manner that prevents bulging of the wall face and prevents ripping, tearing, or pulling of
the geosynthetic reinforcement. Holes through the geosynthetic reinforcement shall be the
minimum size necessary for the post. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer prior
to beginning guardrail post installation that the installation method will not rip, tear, or pull
the geosynthetic reinforcement.
6-14.3(6) Permanent Facing
The Contractor shall apply a permanent facing to the surface of all permanent geosynthetic
retaining walls as shown in the Plans. Shotcrete facing, if shown in the Plans, shall conform to
Section 6-18. Concrete fascia panel, if shown in the Plans, shall conform to Section 6-15.3(9),
if cast-in-place, and shall conform to Section 6-02.3(28), if precast.
6-14.3(7) Geosynthetic Retaining Wall Traffic Barrier and Geosynthetic Retaining
Wall Pedestrian Barrier
Geosynthetic wall traffic barrier (single slope and f-shape) and geosynthetic retaining wall
pedestrian barrier shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(11)A and 6-10.3(2),
and the details in the Plans. The moment slab supporting the geosynthetic wall traffic barrier
and geosynthetic wall pedestrian barrier shall be continuously wet cured for 3 days in
6-14.4 Measurement
Permanent geosynthetic retaining wall and temporary geosynthetic retaining wall will be
measured by the square foot of face of completed wall. Corner wrap area and extensions of the
geosynthetic wall beyond the area of wall face shown in the Plans or staked by the Engineer
are considered incidental to the wall construction and will not be included in the measurement
of the square foot of face of completed geosynthetic retaining wall.

Gravel borrow for structural earth wall will be measured as specified in Section 2-03.4.
Shotcrete facing and concrete fascia panel will be measured by the square foot surface area
of the completed facing or fascia panel, measured to the neat lines of the facing or panel as
shown in the Plans. When a footing is required, the measurement of the fascia panel area will
include the footing.
Geosynthetic wall single slope traffic barrier, geosynthetic wall f-shape traffic barrier, and
geosynthetic retaining wall pedestrian barrier will be measured as specified in Section 6-10.4
for cast-in-place concrete barrier.
6-14.5 Payment
Proposal:
“Geosynthetic Retaining Wall”, per square foot.
“Temporary Geosynthetic Retaining Wall”, per square foot.
All costs in connection with constructing the temporary or permanent geosynthetic
retaining wall as specified shall be included in the unit Contract price per square foot
for “Geosynthetic Retaining Wall” and “Temporary Geosynthetic Retaining Wall”,
including compaction of the backfill material and furnishing and installing the temporary
forming system.
“Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Wall Incl. Haul”, per ton or per cubic yard.
All costs in connection with furnishing and placing backfill material for temporary or
permanent geosynthetic retaining walls as specified shall be included in the unit Contract
price per ton or per cubic yard for “Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Wall Incl. Haul”.
“Concrete Fascia Panel For Geosynthetic Wall”, per square foot.
All costs in connection with constructing the concrete fascia panels as specified shall
be included in the unit Contract price per square foot for “Concrete Fascia Panel For
Geosynthetic Wall”, including all steel reinforcing bars, premolded joint filler, polyethylene
bond breaker strip, joint sealant, PVC pipe for weep holes, exterior surface finish, and
pigmented sealer (when specified), constructing and placing the concrete footing, edge beam,
anchor beam, anchor rod assembly, and backfill.
Shotcrete facing will be paid for in accordance with Section 6-18.5.
“Geosynthetic Wall Single Slope Traffic Barrier”, per linear foot.
“Geosynthetic Wall F-Shape Traffic Barrier”, per linear foot.
“Geosynthetic Retaining Wall Pedestrian Barrier”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Geosynthetic Wall Single Slope Traffic
Barrier”, “Geosynthetic Wall F-Shape Traffic Barrier”, and “Geosynthetic Retaining Wall
Pedestrian Barrier” shall be full pay for constructing the barrier on top of the geosynthetic
retaining wall.

Soil Nail Walls 6-15
6-15 Soil Nail Walls

6-15.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing soil nail walls.
6-15.2 Materials
Grout 9-20.3(4)
Prefabricated Drainage Mat 9-33.2(3)
Other materials required, including materials for soil nails, shall be as specified in the
Special Provisions.
6-15.3(1) General Description
Soil nailing shall consist of excavating to the layer limits shown in the Plans, drilling
holes at the specified angle into the native material, placing and grouting epoxy coated or
encapsulated steel reinforcing bars (soil nails) in the drilled holes, placing prefabricated
drainage material and steel reinforcement, and applying a shotcrete facing over the steel
reinforcement. After completing the wall to full height, the Contractor shall construct the
concrete fascia panels as shown in the Plans.
All proprietary items used in the soil nailed Structure shall be installed in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations. In the event of a conflict between the manufacturer’s
recommendations and these Specifications, these Specifications shall prevail.
6-15.3(2) Contractor’s Experience Requirements
The Contractor or Subcontractor performing this Work shall have completed at least
five projects, within the last 5 years, involving construction of retaining walls using soil
nails or ground anchors or shall have completed the construction of two or more projects
totaling at least 15,000 square feet of retaining wall with a minimum total of 500 soil nails
or ground anchors.
The Contractor shall assign an engineer with at least 3 years of experience in the design
and construction of permanently anchored or nailed Structures to supervise the Work. The
Contractor shall not use consultants or manufacturer’s representatives in order to meet the
requirements of this Section. Drill operators and on-site supervisors shall have a minimum
of 1 year experience installing permanent soil nails or ground anchors.
Contractors or Subcontractors that are specifically prequalified in Class 36 Work will
be considered to have met the above experience requirements.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings of the following information.
1. A brief description of each project satisfying the Contractors Experience Requirements
with the Owner’s name and current phone number (this item is not required if the
Contractor or Subcontractor is prequalified in Class 36).
2. A list identifying the following personnel assigned to this project and their experience
with permanently anchored or nailed Structures:
a. Supervising Engineer.
b. Drill Operators.
c. On-site Supervisors who will be assigned to the project.
3. The proposed detailed construction procedure that includes:
a. Proposed method(s) of excavation of the soil and/or rock.
b. A plan for the removal and control of groundwater encountered during excavation,
drilling, and other earth moving activities. Include a list of the equipment used to
remove and control groundwater.

c Proposed drilling methods and equipment.

d. Proposed hole diameter(s).
e. Proposed method of soil nail installation.
f. Mix design and procedures for placing the grout.
g. Shotcrete mix design with compressive strength test results.
h. Procedures for placing the shotcrete (include placement in conditions when
ground water is encountered).
i. Encapsulation system for additional corrosion protection selected for the soil
nails and anchorages requiring encapsulation.
4. Detailed Working Drawings of the method proposed for the soil nail testing
that includes:
a. All necessary drawings and details to clearly describe the proposed system of
jacking support, framing, and bracing to be used during testing.
b. Calibration data for each load cell, test jack, pressure gauge, stroke counter on
the grout pump, and master gauge to be used. The calibration tests shall have
been performed by an independent testing Laboratory, and tests shall have been
performed within 60 calendar days of the date submitted. Testing or Work shall
not commence until the Engineer has approved the load cell, jack, pressure gage,
and master pressure gauge calibrations.
5. Certified mill test results and typical stress-strain curves along with samples from
each heat, properly marked, for the soil nail steel. The typical stress-strain curve shall
be obtained by approved standard practices. The guaranteed ultimate strength, yield
strength, elongation, and composition shall be specified.
6-15.3(4) Preconstruction Conference
A soil nail preconstruction conference shall be held at least 5 working days prior to
the Contractor beginning any permanent soil nail Work at the site to discuss construction
procedures, personnel and equipment to be used. The list of materials specified on the Record
of Materials Form (ROM) for this item of Work will also be discussed. Those attending
shall include:
in charge of excavating the soil face, drilling the soil nail hole, placing the soil nail
and grout, placing the shotcrete facing, and tensioning and testing the soil nail.
If the Contractor’s key personnel change, or if the Contractor proposes a significant
revision of the approved permanent soil nail installation plan, an additional conference shall
be held before any additional permanent soil nail operations are performed.
6-15.3(5) Earthwork
The ground contour above the wall shall be established to its final configuration and slope
as shown in the Plans prior to beginning excavation of the soil for the first row of soil nails.
All excavation shall conform to Section 2-03.
The excavation shall proceed from the top down in a horizontal lift sequence with the
ground level excavated no more than 3 feet below the elevation of the row of nails to be
installed in that lift. The excavated vertical wall face shall not be left unshored more than
24 hours for any reason. A lift shall not be excavated until the nail installation and reinforced
shotcrete placement for the preceding lift has been completed and accepted. After a lift is
excavated, the cut surface shall be cleaned of all loose materials, mud, rebound, and other
foreign matter that could prevent or reduce shotcrete bond.

The accuracy of the ground cut shall be such that the required thickness of shotcrete can be
placed within a tolerance of plus or minus 2 inches from the defined face of the wall, and over
excavation does not damage overlying shotcrete sections by undermining or other causes.
The Contractor should review the geotechnical recommendations report prepared for this
project for further information on the soil conditions at the location of each wall. Copies of
the geotechnical recommendations report are available for review by prospective Bidders at
the location identified in the Special Provisions.
6-15.3(6) Soil Nailing
The Contractor shall not handle and transport the encapsulated soil nails until the
encapsulation grout has reached sufficient strength to resist damage during handling.
The Contractor shall handle the encapsulated soil nails in such a manner to prevent large
deflections or distortions during handling. When handling or transporting encapsulated soil
nails, the Contractor shall provide slings or other equipment necessary to prevent damage
to the soil nails and the corrosion protection. The Engineer may reject any encapsulated nail
which is damaged during transportation or handling. Damaged or defective encapsulation shall
be repaired in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Soil nails shall be handled and sorted in such a manner as to avoid damage or corrosion.
Prior to inserting a soil nail in the drilled hole, the Contractor and the Engineer will examine
the soil nail for damage. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the epoxy coating or bar has been
damaged, the nail shall be repaired. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the damage is beyond
repair, the soil nail shall be rejected.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the epoxy coating can be repaired, the Contractor shall
patch the coating with an Engineer approved patching material.
Nail holes shall be drilled at the locations shown in the Plans or as staked by the Engineer.
The nails shall be positioned plus or minus 6 inches from the theoretical location shown in the
Plans. The Contractor shall select the drilling method and the grouting pressure used for the
installation of the soil nail. The drill hole shall be located so that the longitudinal axis of the
drill hole and the longitudinal axis of the nail are parallel. At the point of entry the soil nail
shall be installed within plus or minus 3 degrees of the inclination from horizontal shown in
the Plans, and the nail shall be within plus or minus 3 degrees of a line drawn perpendicular
to the face of the wall unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
Water or other liquids shall not be used to flush cuttings during drilling, but air may be
used. The nail shall be inserted into the drilled hole with centralizers to the desired depth in
such a manner as to prevent damage to the drilled hole, sheathing or epoxy during installation.
The centralizers shall provide a minimum of 0.5 inches of grout cover over the soil nail and
shall be spaced no further than 8 feet apart. When the soil nail cannot be completely inserted
into the drilled hole without difficulty, the Contractor shall remove the nail from the drilled
hole and clean or redrill the hole to permit insertion. Partially inserted soil nails shall not be
driven or forced into the hole. Subsidence, or any other detrimental impact from drilling shall
be cause for immediate cessation of drilling and repair of all damages in a manner approved
by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
If caving conditions are encountered, no further drilling will be allowed until the
Contractor selects a method to prevent ground movement. The Contractor may use temporary
casing. The Contractor’s method to prevent ground movement shall be approved by the
Engineer. The casings for the nail holes, if used, shall be removed as the grout is being placed.
Where necessary for stability of the excavation face, a sealing layer of shotcrete may be
placed before drilling is started, or the Contractor shall have the option of drilling and grouting
of nails through a stabilizing berm of native soil at the face of the excavation. The stabilizing
berm shall extend horizontally from the soil face and from the face of the shotcrete a minimum
distance of 1 foot, and shall be cut down from that point at a safe slope, no steeper than 1H:1V
unless approved by the Engineer. The berm shall be excavated to final grade after installation
and full length grouting of the nails. Nails damaged during berm excavation shall be repaired

or replaced by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no added cost to the
Contracting Agency.
If sections of the wall are constructed at different times than the adjacent soil nail sections,
the Contractor shall use stabilizing berms, temporary slopes, or other measures acceptable
to the Engineer, to prevent sloughing or failure of the adjacent soil nail sections.
If cobbles and boulders are encountered at the soil face during excavation, the Contractor
shall remove all cobbles and boulders that protrude from the soil face into the design wall
section and fill the void with shotcrete. All shotcrete used to fill voids created by removal of
cobbles and boulders shall be incidental to shotcrete facing.
The grout equipment shall produce a grout free of lumps and undispersed cement.
A positive displacement grout pump shall be used. The pump shall be equipped with a
pressure gauge near the discharge end to monitor grout pressures. The pressure gauge shall
be capable of measuring pressures of at least 150 psi or twice the actual grout pressures used
by the Contractor, whichever is greater. The grouting equipment shall be sized to enable the
grout to be pumped in one continuous operation. The mixer shall be capable of continuously
agitating the grout.
The grout shall be injected from the lowest point of the drilled hole. The quantity of the
grout and the grout pressures shall be recorded. The grout pressures and grout takes shall be
controlled to prevent excessive ground heave.
The Contractor shall make and cure grout cubes once per day in accordance with WSDOT
T 813. These samples shall be retained by the Contractor until all associated verification and
proof testing of the soil nails has been successfully completed. If the Contractor elects to
test the grout cubes for compressive strength, testing shall be conducted by an independent
laboratory and shall be in accordance with the FOP for AASHTO T106.
6-15.3(7) Shotcrete Facing
Prior to placing any shotcrete on an excavated layer, the Contractor shall vertically
center prefabricated drainage mat between the columns of nails as shown in the Plans.
The prefabricated drainage mat shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. The permeable drain side shall be placed against the exposed soil face.
The prefabricated drainage mat shall be installed after each excavation lift and shall be
hydraulically connected with the prefabricated drainage mat previously placed, such that the
vertical flow of water is not impeded. The Contractor shall tape all joints in the prefabricated
drainage mat to prevent shotcrete intrusion during shotcrete application.
The Contractor shall place steel reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric, and apply the
shotcrete facing in accordance with Section 6-18 and the details shown in the Plans.
The shotcrete shall be constructed to the minimum thickness as shown in the Plans.
Costs associated with additional thickness of shotcrete due to over excavation or irregularities
in the cut face shall be borne by the Contractor.
Each soil nail shall be secured at the shotcrete facing with a steel plate as shown in the
Plans. The plate shall be seated on a wet grout pad of a pasty consistency similar to that of
mortar for brick-laying. The nut shall then be sufficiently tightened to achieve full bearing
surface behind the plate. After the shotcrete and grout have had time to gain the specified
strength, the nut shall be tightened with at least 100 foot-pounds of torque.
6-15.3(8) Soil Nail Testing and Acceptance
Both verification and proof testing of the nails is required. The Contractor shall supply
all materials, equipment, and labor to perform the tests. The Contractor shall submit Type 1
Working Drawings of all test data. Soil nails used for verification tests and proof tests shall
not be production soil nails, but instead shall be separate sacrificial soil nails not otherwise
incorporated into the Work.
The testing equipment shall include a dial gauge or vernier scale capable of measuring
to 0.001 inch of the ground anchor movement. A hydraulic jack and pump shall be used to

apply the test load. The movement-measuring device shall have a minimum travel equal
to the theoretical elastic elongation of the total nail length plus 1 inch. The dial gauge or
vernier scale shall be aligned so that its axis is within 5 degrees from the axis of the nail
and shall be monitored with a reference system that is independent of the jacking system
and excavation face.
The jack and pressure gauge shall be calibrated by an independent testing Laboratory as
a unit. Each load cell, test jack and pressure gauge, grout pump stroke counter, and master
gauge, shall be calibrated as specified in Section 6-15.3(3), item 4b. Additionally, the
Contractor shall not use load cells, test jacks and pressure gauges, grout pump stroke counters,
and master gauges, greater than 60 calendar days past their most recent calibration date, until
such items are re-calibrated by an independent testing Laboratory.
The pressure gauge shall be graduated in increments of either 100 psi or 2 percent of
the maximum test load, whichever is less. The pressure gauge shall be selected to place the
maximum test load within the middle ⅔ of the range of the gauge. The ram travel of the jack
shall not be less than the theoretical elastic elongation of the total length at the maximum test
load plus 1 inch. The jack shall be independently supported and centered over the nail so that
the nail does not carry the weight of the jack. The Contractor shall have a second calibrated
jack pressure gauge at the site. Calibration data shall provide a specific reference to the jack
and the pressure gauge.
The loads on the nails during the verification and proof tests shall be monitored to verify
consistency of load – defined as maintaining the test load within 5 percent of the specified
value. Verification and proof test loads less than 20,000 pounds or sustained for 5 minutes
or less shall be monitored by the jack pressure gauge alone. Verification and proof test
loads equal to or greater than 20,000 pounds and sustained for longer than 5 minutes shall
be monitored with the assistance of an electric or hydraulic load cell. The Contractor shall
provide the load cell, the readout device, and a calibration curve from the most recent
calibration as specified in Section 6-15.3(3), item 4b. The load cell shall be selected to place
the maximum test load within the middle ⅔ of the range of the load cell. The load cell shall
be mounted between the jack and the anchor plate. The stressing equipment shall be placed
over the nail in such a manner that the jack bearing plates, load cell and stressing anchorage
are in alignment.
Nails to be tested shall be initially grouted no closer to the excavation face than the
dimension shown in the Plans. After placing the grout, the nail shall remain undisturbed until
the grout has reached strength sufficient to provide resistance during testing. Test nails shall
be left in the ground after testing, with the exposed portion of the test nail cut and removed to
2 feet behind the excavated face or inside face of shotcrete. The drill holes for test nails shall
be completely backfilled with grout or nonstructural filler after testing on those test nails has
been completed.
Load testing shall be performed against a temporary reaction frame with bearing pads
that bear directly against the existing soil or the shotcrete facing. Bearing pads shall be kept
a minimum of 12 inches from the edges of the drilled hole and the load shall be distributed
to prevent failure of the soil face or fracture of the shotcrete. The Contractor shall submit
Type 2E Working Drawings of the reaction frame.
The soil nail load monitoring procedure for verification and proof test load greater than
20,000 pounds and sustained for longer than 5 minutes shall be as follows:
1. For each increment of load, attainment of the load shall be initially established and
confirmed by the reading taken from the jack gauge.
2. Once the soil nail anchor load has been stabilized, based on the jack gauge reading,
the load cell readout device shall immediately be read and recorded to establish the
load cell reading to be used at this load. The load cell reading is intended only as a
confirmation of a stable soil nail load, and shall not be taken as the actual load on
the soil nail.

3. During the time period that the load on the soil nail is held at this load increment,
the Contractor shall monitor the load cell reading. The Contractor shall adjust the
jack pressure as necessary to maintain the initial load cell reading. Jack pressure
adjustment for any other reason will not be allowed.
4. Soil nail elongation measurements shall be taken at each load increment as specified in
Sections 6-15.3(8)A and 6-15.3(8)B.
5. Steps 1 through 4 shall be repeated at each increment of load, in accordance with the
load sequence specified in Sections 6-15.3(8)A and 6-15.3(8)B.
6-15.3(8)A Verification Testing
Verification testing shall be performed on nails installed within the pattern of production
nails to verify the Contractor’s procedures, hole diameter, and design assumptions. No drilling
or installation of production nails will be permitted in any ground/rock unit unless successful
verification testing of anchors in that unit has been completed and approved by the Engineer,
using the same equipment, methods, nail inclination, nail length, and hole diameter as planned
for the production nails. Changes in the drilling or installation method may require additional
verification testing as determined by the Engineer and shall be done at no additional expense
to the Contracting Agency. Verification tests may be performed prior to excavation for the soil
nail wall.
Successful verification tests are required within the limits as specified in the Special
Provisions. Test nail locations within these limits shall be at locations selected by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of design details of the
verification testing, including the system for distributing test load pressures to the excavation
surface and appropriate nail bar size and reaction plate. The intent is to stress the bond
between the grout and the surrounding soil/rock to at least twice the design load transfer. Prior
to beginning verification testing, the Contractor shall measure and record the length of the
nonbonded zone for each verification test soil nail.
The bar shall be proportioned such that the maximum stress at 200 percent of the test load
does not exceed 80 percent of the yield strength of the steel. The jack shall be positioned at
the beginning of the test such that unloading and repositioning of the jack during the test will
not be required. The verification tests shall be made by incrementally loading the nails in
accordance with the following schedule of hold time:
AL 1 minute
0.25TL 10 minutes
0.50TL 10 minutes
0.75TL 10 minutes
1.00TL 10 minutes
1.25TL 10 minutes
1.50TL 60 minutes
1.75TL 10 minutes
2.00TL 10 minutes
AL = Nail Alignment Load
TL = Nail Test Load
The test load shall be determined by the following equation = Test Load (TL) = Bond
Length (BL) × Design Load Transfer (DLT).
The load shall be applied in increments of 25 percent of the test load. Each load increment
shall be held for at least 10 minutes. Measurement of nail movement shall be obtained at each
load increment. The load-hold period shall start as soon as the load is applied and the nail
movement with respect to a fixed reference shall be measured and recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3,
4, 5, 6, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 minutes.
The Engineer will evaluate the results of each verification test and make a determination
of the suitability of the test and of the Contractor’s proposed production nail design and
installation system. Tests that fail to meet the design criteria will require additional verification

testing or an approved revision to the Contractor’s proposed production nail design and
installation system. If a nail fails in creep, retesting will not be allowed.
A verification tested nail with a 60-minute load hold at 1.50TL is acceptable if:
1. The nail carries the test load with a creep rate that does not exceed 0.08 inch per log
cycle of time and is at a linear or decreasing creep rate.
2. The total movement at the test load exceeds 80 percent of the theoretical elastic
elongation of the non-bonded length.
Furthermore, a pullout failure shall not occur for the verification test anchor at the 2.0TL
maximum load. Pullout failure load is defined as the load at which attempts to increase the test
load result only in continued pullout movement of the test nail without a sustainable increase
in the test load.
6-15.3(8)B Proof Testing
Proof tests shall be performed on proof test soil nails installed within the pattern of the
production soil nails at the locations shown in the Plans. Proof test soil nails shall be installed
using the same equipment, methods, nail inclination, nail length, and hole diameter as for
adjacent production nails. The Contractor shall maintain the side-wall stability of the drill
hole for the non-grouted portion during the test. The bond length shall be determined from
the Nail Schedule and Test Nail Detail shown in the Plans. Prior to beginning proof testing,
the Contractor shall measure and record the length of the nonbonded zone for each proof test
soil nail.
Proof tests shall be performed by incrementally loading the nail in accordance with
the schedule below. The anchor movement shall be measured and recorded to the nearest
0.001 inch with respect to an independent fixed reference point in the same manner as for
the verification tests at the alignment load and at each increment of load. The load shall
be monitored in accordance with Section 6-15.3(8). The scheduling of hold times shall be
as follows:
AL 1 minute
0.25TL 5 minutes
0.50TL 5 minutes
0.75TL 5 minutes
1.00TL 5 minutes
1.25TL 5 minutes
1.50TL 10 minutes
AL = Nail Alignment Load
TL = Nail Test Load
The maximum load in a proof test shall be held for 10 minutes. The load hold period
shall start as soon as the maximum load is applied and the nail movement with respect to an
independent fixed reference shall be measured and recorded at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 minutes.
The nail movement between 1 and 10 minutes shall not exceed 0.04 inches. If the nail
movement between 1 and 10 minutes exceeds 0.04 inches, the maximum load shall be held an
additional 50 minutes. If the load hold is extended, the nail movement shall be recorded at 20,
30, 40, 50, and 60 minutes. If a nail fails in creep, retesting will not be allowed.
A proof tested nail is acceptable if:
1. The nail carries the maximum load with less than 0.04 inches of movement between
1 and 10 minutes, unless the load hold extended to 60 minutes, in which case the nail
would be acceptable if the creep rate does not exceed 0.08 inches per log cycle of time.
2. The total movement at the maximum load exceeded 80 percent of the theoretical elastic
elongation of the non-bonded length.
3 The creep rate is not increasing with time during the load hold period.
If a proof test fails, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to replace some or all of the
installed production nails between the failed test and an adjacent proof test nail that has met

the test criteria. The Engineer may also require additional proof testing. All additional proof
tests, and all installation of additional or modified nails, shall be performed at no additional
6-15.3(9) Concrete Fascia Panels
The Contractor shall construct the concrete fascia panels in accordance with Section 6-02
and the details in the Plans. The concrete fascia panels shall be cured in accordance with the
Section 6-02.3(11) requirements specified for retaining walls. The Contractor shall provide the
specified surface finish as noted, and to the limits shown, in the Plans to the exterior concrete
surface. When noted in the Plans, the Contractor shall apply pigmented sealer to the limits
shown in the Plans.
Asphalt or cement concrete gutter shall be constructed as shown in the Plans and as
specified in Section 8-04.
6-15.4 Measurement
Prefabricated drainage mat will be measured by the square yard of material furnished
and installed.
Soil nails will be measured per each for each soil nail installed and accepted.
Soil nail verification test and soil nail proof test will be measured per each for each
successfully completed soil nail verification test and soil nail proof test at the locations
specified in the Special Provisions and shown in the Plans.
Shotcrete facing and concrete fascia panel will be measured by the square foot surface area
of the completed facing or fascia panel, measured to the neat lines of the facing or panel as
shown in the Plans.
6-15.5 Payment
Proposal:
“Soil Nail – Epoxy Coated”, per each.
“Soil Nail – Encapsulated”, per each.
All costs in connection with furnishing and installing the soil nails as specified shall
be included in the unit Contract price per each for “Soil Nail - ___”, including all drilling,
grouting, centralizers, bearing plates, welded shear connectors, nuts, and other Work required
for installation of each soil nail.
“Prefabricated Drainage Mat”, per square yard.
“Soil Nail Verification Test and Soil Nail Proof Test”, per each.
All costs in connection with successfully completing soil nail verification tests and soil
nail proof tests as specified shall be included in the unit contract price per each for “Soil Nail
Verification Test and Soil Nail Proof Test”, including removal of the exposed portion of the
test nail and backfilling the drilled hole with grout or nonstructural filler.
“Concrete Fascia Panel”, per square foot.
All costs in connection with constructing the concrete fascia panels as specified shall be
included in the unit Contract price per square foot for “Concrete Fascia Panel”, including all
steel reinforcing bars, premolded joint filler, polyethylene bond breaker strip, joint sealant,
PVC pipe for weep holes, exterior surface finish, and pigmented sealer (when specified).
Shotcrete facing will be paid for in accordance with Section 6-18.5.
Unless otherwise specified, all costs in connection with excavation in front of the back
face of the shotcrete facing shall be included in the unit Contract price per cubic yard for
“Roadway Excavation” or “Roadway Excavation Incl. Haul” as specified in Section 2-03.5.

Soldier Pile and Soldier Pile Tieback Walls 6-16
6-16 Soldier Pile and Soldier Pile Tieback Walls

6-16.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing soldier pile walls and soldier pile tieback walls.
6-16.2 Materials
Controlled Density Fill 2-09.3(1)E
Cement 9-01
Welded Shear Studs 9-06.15
Paints 9-08
Timber Lagging 9-09.2
Preservative Treatment for Timber Lagging 9-09.3(1)
Soldier Piles 9-10.5
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Water 9-25
Prefabricated Drainage Mat 9-33.2(3)
The steel soldier piles shall be placed so that the centerline of the pile at the top is within
1 inch of the Plan location. The steel soldier pile shall be plumb, to within 0.5 percent of the
length based on the total length of the pile.
Welding, repair welding, and welding inspection shall conform to the Section 6-03.3(25)
requirements for welding, repair welding, and welding inspection for all other steel fabrication.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of shop plans as
specified in Section 6-03.3(7) for all structural steel, including the steel soldier piles, and shall
submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of shop plans and other details as specified in
Section 6-17.3(3) for permanent ground anchors.
The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of the permanent ground
anchor grout mix design and the procedures for placing the grout to the Engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of forming plans for
the concrete fascia panels, as specified in Sections 6-02.3(16) and 6-02.3(17).
1. Where the lateral pressure from concrete placement, as specified in Section 6-02.3(17)J,
is less than or equal to the design earth pressure, the Contractor may tie forms directly
to the soldier piles.
2. Where the lateral pressure from concrete placement, as specified in Section 6-02.3(17)J,
is greater than the design earth pressure, the Contractor shall follow one of the
following procedures:
a. Tie the forms to strongbacks behind the lagging, or use some other system that
confines the pressure from concrete placement between the lagging and the form
panels, in addition to the ties to the soldier piles.

b. Reduce the rate of placing concrete to reduce the pressure from concrete placement
to less than or equal to the design earth pressure in addition to the ties to the
soldier piles.
c. Follow a procedure with a combination of a. and b.
3. The Contractor shall design the forms for an appropriate rate of placing concrete so that
no cold joints occur, considering the wall thickness and height, and volume of concrete
to be placed.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of a shaft installation
plan. In preparing the submittal, the Contractor shall reference the available subsurface data
provided in the Contract test hole boring logs and the geotechnical report(s) prepared for
this project. This plan shall provide at least the following information:
1. An overall construction operation sequence and the sequence of shaft construction.
2. List, description, and capacities of proposed equipment including but not limited to
cranes, drills, augers, bailing buckets, final cleaning equipment, and drilling units.
The narrative shall describe why the equipment was selected, and describe equipment
suitability to the anticipated site and subsurface conditions. The narrative shall include
a project history of the drilling equipment demonstrating the successful use of the
equipment on shafts of equal or greater size in similar soil/rock conditions.
3. Details of shaft excavation methods including proposed drilling methods, methods
for cleanout of the shafts, disposal plan for excavated material and drilling slurry (if
applicable), and a review of method suitability to the anticipated site and subsurface
conditions.
4. Details of the method(s) to be used to ensure shaft stability (i.e., prevention of
caving, bottom heave, etc. using temporary casing, slurry, or other means) during
excavation and concrete placement. This shall include a review of method suitability
to the anticipated site and subsurface conditions. If temporary casings are proposed,
casing dimensions and detailed procedures for casing installation and removal shall
be provided. If slurry is proposed, detailed procedures for mixing, using, maintaining,
and disposing of the slurry shall be provided. A detailed mix design, and a discussion
of its suitability to the anticipated subsurface conditions shall also be provided for the
proposed slurry.
5. Details of soldier pile placement including internal support bracing and centralization
methods.
6. Details of concrete placement including proposed operational procedures for pumping
and/or tremie methods.
7. Details of the device used to prevent unauthorized entry into a shaft excavation.
8. The method to be used to form the horizontal construction joint at the top elevation
specified for concrete Class 4000P in the shaft.
6-16.3(3) Shaft Excavation
Shafts shall be excavated to the required depth as shown in the Plans. The minimum
diameter of the shaft shall be as shown in the Plans. The excavation shall be completed in
a continuous operation using equipment capable of excavating through the type of material
expected to be encountered.
The Contractor may use temporary telescoping casing to construct the shafts.
If the shaft excavation is stopped the shaft shall be secured by installation of a safety cover.
It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the safety of the shaft and surrounding soil
and the stability of the sidewalls. A temporary casing, slurry, or other methods specified in the
shaft installation plan shall be used if necessary to ensure such safety and stability.
Where caving in conditions are encountered, no further excavation will be allowed until the
Contractor has implemented the method to prevent ground caving as submitted in accordance
with item 4 of the Shaft Installation Plan.

No more than 2 inches of loose or disturbed material, for soldier piles with permanent
ground anchors, nor more than 12 inches of loose or disturbed material, for soldier piles
without permanent ground anchors, shall be present at the bottom of the shaft just prior to
beginning concrete placement.
The excavated shaft shall be inspected and receive acceptance by the Engineer prior to
proceeding with construction.
and man made objects) encountered during the shaft excavation operation that prevents or
hinders the advance of the shaft excavation. When efforts to advance past the obstruction
to the design shaft tip elevation result in the rate of advance of the shaft drilling equipment
being significantly reduced relative to the rate of advance for the rest of the shaft excavation,
then the Contractor shall remove the obstruction under the provisions of Section 6-16.5.
The method of removal of such obstructions, and the continuation of excavation shall be as
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
Excavation of shafts shall not commence until a minimum of 12 hours after the shaft
backfill for the adjacent shafts has been placed.
The temporary casings for the shafts shall be removed. A minimum 5-foot head of
concrete shall be maintained to balance the soil and water pressure at the bottom of the
casing. The casing shall be smooth.
6-16.3(4) Installing Soldier Piles
Soldier piles, if spliced, shall conform to all requirements of Section 6-05.3(6).
The prefabricated steel soldier piles shall be lowered into the drilled shafts and secured in
position. Concrete cover over the soldier pile shall be 3 inches minimum, except that the cover
over the soldier pile flange plate reinforcing at permanent ground anchor locations shall be
1½ inches minimum.
The steel soldier piles and attachments shall be shop painted after fabrication to the limits
shown in the Plans with one coat of inorganic zinc primer. Application of the one coat of
primer shall be in accordance with Section 6-07. The welded shear studs may be attached
before or after painting. Paint damaged by welding shear studs in place does not require repair.
6-16.3(5) Backfilling Shaft
The excavated shaft shall be backfilled with either controlled density fill (CDF), or
pumpable lean concrete, as shown in the Plans and subject to the following requirements:
1. Dry shaft excavations shall be backfilled with CDF.
2. Wet shaft excavations shall be backfilled with pumpable lean concrete.
3. Pumpable lean concrete shall be a Contractor designed mix providing a minimum
28-day compressive strength of 100 psi. Acceptance of pumpable lean concrete will
conform to the acceptance requirements specified in Section 2-09.3(1) for CDF.
4. A wet shaft is defined as a shaft where water is entering the excavation and remains
present to a depth of 6 inches or more.
5. When the Plans or test hole boring logs identify the presence of a water table at
or above the elevation of the bottom of soldier pile shaft, the excavation shall be
considered as wet, except as otherwise noted. Such a shaft may be considered a dry
shaft provided the Contractor furnishes and installs casing that is sufficiently sealed
into competent soils such that water cannot enter the excavation.
Placement of the shaft backfill shall commence immediately after completing the shaft
excavation and receiving the Engineer’s approval of the excavation. CDF or pumpable lean
concrete shall be placed in one continuous operation to the top of the shaft. Vibration of shaft
backfill is not required.

If water is not present, the shaft backfill shall be deposited by a method that prevents
segregation of aggregates. The shaft backfill shall be placed such that the free-fall is vertical
down the shaft without hitting the sides of the soldier pile or the excavated shaft. The
Contractor’s method for depositing the shaft backfill shall have approval of the Engineer prior
to the placement of the shaft backfill.
If water is present, the shaft backfill shall be deposited in accordance with Section 6-02.3(6)B.
6-16.3(6) Designing and Installing Lagging and Installing Permanent Ground Anchors
Lagging for soldier pile walls shall conform to one of the following two categories:
1. Temporary lagging is defined as lagging that is in service as a structural member for a
maximum of 36 months before a permanent load-carrying fascia is in place, except for
the following exception: Lagging for soldier pile walls in site soils conforming to an
excluded soil type as defined under Section 6-16.3(6)A will be classified as permanent
lagging conforming to Section 6-16.3(6)C, in which case this requirement will be
specified in the Plans along with design details for such lagging.
2. Permanent lagging is defined as all lagging not conforming to the definition of
temporary lagging as specified in category 1, above.
6-16.3(6)A Soil Classification
For the purposes of designing lagging for soldier pile walls, soils shall be categorized in
the classifications defined below.
Soil Type 1
The following shall be considered Type 1 soils:
1. Cohesive fine-grained soils either CL or CH of medium consistency with γH/Su < 5.
2. Cohesive fine-grained soils either CL or CH that are stiff to very stiff and nonfissured.
3. Fine-grained soils either ML or SM-ML that are above the water table.
4. Coarse-grained soils either GW, GP, GM, GC, SW, SP, or SM that are medium dense
to dense.
Soil Type 2
1. Cohesive fine-grained soils either CL or CH that are heavily overconsolidated
and fissured.
2. Fine-grained ML soils or coarse-grained SM-ML soils that are below the water table.
3. Coarse-grained SC soil that is medium dense to dense and is below the water table.
4. Coarse-grained soils either SW, SP, or SM that are loose.
Soil Type 3
1. Cohesive fine-grained soils either CL or CH that are soft with γH/Su > 5.
2. Fine-grained slightly plastic ML soil that is below the water table.
3. Coarse-grained SC soil that is loose and below the water table.
Exclusions
Regardless of whether site soils conform to one of the soil types defined above, site
soils under the following conditions are excluded from the Type 1, Type 2, and Type 3
soil classifications:
1. Disturbed soils such as those in landslides or known unstable areas.
2. Layered soils dipping into the excavation steeper than 4H:1V.
Lagging for soldier pile walls located in site soils excluded from the Type 1, Type 2,
and Type 3 soil classifications shall be designed in accordance with the latest AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Design Specifications with current interim specifications. Use of the table in
Section 6-16.3(6)B for timber lagging in these situations will not be allowed.

6-16.3(6)B Temporary Lagging

The Contractor shall design temporary lagging for all soldier pile walls. The temporary
lagging design shall be based on the following:
1. The AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, latest edition with current interim
specifications, except that timber members used for temporary lagging may be selected
based on the table below.
2. The soil type as specified in the Plans or as determined from the geotechnical report
prepared for the project.
3. The soil pressure diagram, either as shown in the Plans or as included in the
geotechnical report prepared for the project, including the surcharge for temporary
construction load when shown in the Plans.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of the soldier pile wall
lagging design details and supporting design calculations. The submittal shall include, at a
minimum, the following:
1. Description of the material used for the lagging, including identification of applicable
material specifications.
2. Installation method and sequence.
3. If the lagging material is to be removed during or after installation of the permanent
fascia, a description of how the lagging is removed without disturbing or damaging the
fascia, soldier piles, and retained soil, and a description of how, and with what material,
the void left by the removal of lagging is to be filled.
4. For all cases, except with timber for temporary lagging, a description with appropriate
details of how subsurface drainage is to be accommodated, either in accordance with
Section 6-16.3(7) for timber lagging, Section 6-15.3(7) for shotcrete facing, or other
means appropriate for the geotechnical site conditions and acceptable to the Engineer
for other lagging materials. Lagging materials and lagging installation methods that
cause the buildup of, and prevent the relief of, pore water pressure will not be allowed.
Free-draining materials are defined as those materials that exhibit a greater permeability
than the material being retained.
Temporary lagging may be untreated timber conforming to the Section 9-09.2 requirements
specified under Structures for timber lagging or another material selected by the Contractor.
Timber for temporary lagging shall conform to the minimum actual thickness specified
in the table below for the soil type, exposed wall height, and lagging clear span as shown in
the Plans.
Notwithstanding the requirements of Section 1-06.1, steel materials used by the Contractor
as temporary lagging may be salvaged steel provided that the use of such salvaged steel
materials shall be subject to visual inspection and acceptance by the Engineer. For salvaged
steel materials where the grade of steel cannot be positively identified, the design stresses for
the steel shall conform to the Section 6-02.3(17)B requirements for salvaged steel, regardless
of whether rivets are present or not.

Minimum Actual Thickness of Timber Used as Temporary Lagging

Soil Type1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3
Exposed Wall 25 and Over 25 25 and Over 25 15 and Over 15
Height (feet) under to 60 under to 60 under to 25 Over 25
Clear Span of
Minimum Actual Thickness of Rough Cut Timber Lagging (inches)3
Lagging (feet)
5 2 3 3 3 3 3 4
6 3 3 3 3 3 4 5
7 3 3 3 4 4 5 6
8 3 4 4 4 5 6 See Note2
9 4 4 4 5 See Note2 See Note2 See Note2
10 4 5 5 5 See Note2 See Note2 See Note2
1SoilType as defined in Section 6-16.3(6)A.
2For exposed wall heights exceeding the limits in the table above, or where minimum rough cut lagging thickness is not provided,
the Contractor shall design the lagging in accordance with the latest AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications with
current interim specifications.
3Table modified from FHWA document “Lateral Support Systems and Underpinning” (Report No. FHWA-RD-75-130).
6-16.3(6)C Permanent Lagging

Permanent lagging, including timber, shall be as shown in the Plans. The use of the table in
Section 6-16.3(6)B for the design of timber lagging for permanent lagging will not be allowed.
6-16.3(6)D Installing Lagging and Permanent Ground Anchors
The excavation and removal of CDF and pumpable lean concrete for the lagging
installation shall proceed in advance of the lagging and shall not begin until the CDF and
pumpable lean concrete are of sufficient strength that the material remains in place during
excavation and lagging installation. If the CDF or pumpable lean concrete separates from the
soldier pile, or caves or spalls from around the soldier pile, the Contractor shall discontinue
excavation and lagging installation operations until the CDF and pumpable lean concrete is
completely set. The bottom of the excavation in front of the wall shall be level. Excavation
shall conform to Section 2-03.
For walls without permanent ground anchors, the bottom of excavation shall not be more
than 3 feet below the bottom level of the lagging already installed, but in no case shall the
depth of excavation beneath the bottom level of installed lagging be such to cause instability
of the excavated face. For walls with permanent ground anchors, the bottom of excavation
shall be not more than 3 feet below the permanent ground anchor level until all permanent
ground anchors at that level are installed and stressed, but in no case shall the depth of
excavation beneath the permanent ground anchor level be such to cause instability of the
excavated face. Any caving that occurs during excavation shall be backfilled with free-
draining material.
Installing, stressing, and testing the permanent ground anchors shall be in accordance
with Section 6-17 and the construction sequence specified in the Plans.
The lagging shall be installed from the top of the soldier pile proceeding downward.
The lagging shall make direct contact with the soil. When and where lagging is not in full
contact with the soil being retained, either the lagging shall be wedged back to create contact
or the void shall be filled with a free-draining material.
When utilizing lagging in fill situations, the backfill layers shall be placed in accordance
with Section 2-03.3(14) except that all layers shall be compacted to 90 percent of
maximum density.

6-16.3(7) Prefabricated Drainage Mat

For walls with concrete fascia panels, a 4-foot-wide strip of prefabricated drainage mat
shall be installed full height of the concrete fascia panel, centered between soldier pile flanges,
unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
The prefabricated drainage mat shall be attached to the lagging in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. The fabric side shall face the lagging. Splicing of the
prefabricated drainage mat shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The Contractor shall ensure the hydraulic connection of the prefabricated drainage mat to
the previously installed material so that the vertical flow of water is not impeded.
The Contractor shall tape all joints in the prefabricated drainage mat to prevent concrete
intrusion during concrete fascia panel construction.
6-16.3(8) Concrete Fascia Panel
The Contractor shall construct the concrete fascia panels as shown in the Plans, and in
accordance with the forming plan. The concrete fascia panels shall be cured in accordance
with the Section 6-02.3(11) requirements specified for retaining walls.
The Contractor shall provide the specified surface finish as noted, and to the limits shown,
in the Plans to the exterior concrete surface. When noted in the Plans, the Contractor shall
apply pigmented sealer to the limits shown in the Plans.
Asphalt or cement concrete gutter shall be constructed as shown in the Plans.
6-16.4 Measurement
Soldier pile shaft construction will be measured by the linear foot of shaft excavated below
the top of ground line for the shaft, defined as the highest existing ground point within the
shaft diameter.
Furnishing soldier pile will be measured by the linear foot of pile assembly specified in the
Proposal, including adjustments to the Plan quantity made in accordance with Section 1-04.4.
Lagging will be measured by the square foot area of lagging installed. The quantity will
be computed based on the vertical dimension from the highest lagging elevation to the lowest
lagging elevation between each pair of adjacent soldier piles as the height dimension and the
center-to-center spacing of the soldier piles as the length dimension.
Prefabricated drainage mat will be measured by the square yard of material furnished
and installed.
Concrete fascia panel will be measured by the square foot surface area of the completed
fascia panel, measured to the neat lines of the panel as shown in the Plans.
6-16.5 Payment
Proposal:
“Shaft - ___ Diameter”, per linear foot.
All costs in connection with constructing soldier pile shafts shall be included in the
unit Contract price per linear foot for “Shaft - ___ Diameter”, including shaft excavation,
temporary casing if used, CDF, lean concrete, concrete Class 4000P, and installing the
soldier pile assembly.
“Furnishing Soldier Pile - ___”, per linear foot.
All costs in connection with furnishing soldier pile assemblies shall be included in the unit
Contract price per linear foot for “Furnishing Soldier Pile - ___”, including fabricating and
painting the pile assemblies, and field splicing and field trimming the soldier piles. Payment
will be made based on the quantity specified in the Proposal unless changes are made to
this quantity in accordance with Section 1-04.4, in which case the quantity specified in the
Proposal will be adjusted by the amount of the change and will be paid for in accordance

“Lagging”, per square foot.

All costs in connection with furnishing and installing lagging shall be included in the unit
contract price per square foot for “Lagging”, including design of temporary lagging and filling
voids behind the lagging with a free-draining material as approved by the Engineer.
“Prefabricated Drainage Mat”, per square yard.
“Concrete Fascia Panel”, per square foot.
All costs in connection with constructing the concrete fascia panels as specified shall be
included in the unit Contract price per square foot for “Concrete Fascia Panel”, including all
steel reinforcing bars, premolded joint filler, polyethylene bond breaker strip, joint sealant,
PVC pipe for weep holes, exterior surface finish, and pigmented sealer (when specified).
Unless otherwise specified, all costs in connection with non-shaft excavation, including
all excavation required for placement of timber lagging, shall be included in the unit Contract
price per cubic yard for “Roadway Excavation” or “Roadway Excavation Incl. Haul” as
specified in Section 2-03.5.
“Removing Soldier Pile Shaft Obstructions”, estimated.
Payment for removing obstructions, as defined in Section 6-16.3(3), will be made for the
changes in shaft construction methods necessary to remove the obstruction. The Contractor
and the Engineer shall evaluate the effort made and reach agreement on the equipment and
employees utilized, and the number of hours involved for each. Once these cost items and their
duration have been agreed upon, the payment amount will be determined using the rate and
markup methods specified in Section 1-09.6. For the purpose of providing a common proposal
for all bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an amount for the item “Removing Soldier
Pile Shaft Obstructions” in the bid proposal to become a part of the total bid by the Contractor.
If the shaft construction equipment is idled as a result of the obstruction removal work
and cannot be reasonably reassigned within the project, then standby payment for the idled
equipment will be added to the payment calculations. If labor is idled as a result of the
obstruction removal work and cannot be reasonably reassigned within the project, then all
labor costs resulting from Contractor labor agreements and established Contractor policies will
be added to the payment calculations.
The Contractor shall perform the amount of obstruction work estimated by the Contracting
Agency within the original time of the contract. The Engineer will consider a time adjustment
1. The dollar amount estimated by the Contracting Agency has been exceeded, and;
2. The Contractor shows that the obstruction removal work represents a delay to the

Permanent Ground Anchors 6-17
6-17 Permanent Ground Anchors

6-17.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing permanent ground anchors.
6-17.2 Materials
Materials required, including materials for permanent ground anchors, shall be as specified
in the Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall select the ground anchor type and the installation method, and
determine the bond length and anchor diameter. The Contractor shall install ground anchors
that will develop the load indicated in the Plans and verified by tests specified in Sections
6-17.3(8)A, 6-17.3(8)B, and 6-17.3(8)C.
Anchor Devices: The anchor head wedges or nuts that grip the prestressing steel.
Bearing Plate: The steel plate that evenly distributes the ground anchor force to
the Structure.
Bond Length: The length of the ground anchor that is bonded to the ground and transmits
the tensile force to the soil or rock.
Ground Anchor: A system, referred to as a tieback or as an anchor, used to transfer tensile
loads to soil or rock. A ground anchor includes all prestressing steel, anchorage devices, grout,
coatings, sheathings, and couplers if used.
Maintaining Consistency of Load: Maintaining the test load within 5 percent of the
specified value.
Minimum Guaranteed Ultimate Tensile Strength (MUTS): The minimum guaranteed
breaking load of the prestressing steel as defined by the specified standard.
Tendon Bond Length: The length of the tendon that is bonded to the anchor grout.
Tendon Unbonded Length: The length of the tendon that is not bonded to the anchor grout.
Total Anchor Length: The unbonded length plus the tendon bond length.
6-17.3(2) Contractor Experience Requirements
The Contractor or Subcontractor performing this Work shall have installed permanent
ground anchors for a minimum of 3 years. Prior to the beginning of construction, the
Contractor shall submit a list containing at least five projects on which the Contractor has
installed permanent ground anchors. A brief description of each project and a reference shall
be included for each project listed. As a minimum, the reference shall include an individual’s
name and current phone number.
The Contractor shall assign an engineer to supervise the Work with at least 3 years of
experience in the design and construction of permanently anchored Structures. The Contractor
shall not use consultants or manufacturer’s representatives in order to meet the requirements of
this Section. Drill operators and on-site supervisors shall have a minimum of 1 year experience
installing permanent ground anchors.
Contractors or Subcontractors that are specifically prequalified in Class 36 Work will be
considered to have met the above experience requirements.
The Contractor shall allow up to 15 calendar days for the Engineer’s review of the
qualifications and staff as noted above. Work shall not be started on any anchored wall
system nor materials ordered until approval of the Contractor’s qualifications are given.

The Contractor shall submit Type 2E Working Drawings consisting of details and structural
design calculations for the ground anchor system or systems intended for use.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of a detailed description
of the construction procedure proposed for use.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of ground anchor
schedule giving:
1. Ground anchor number
2. Ground anchor factored design load
3. Type and size of tendon
4. Minimum total bond length
5. Minimum anchor length
6. Minimum tendon bond length
7. Minimum unbonded length
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing detailing the ground anchor tendon
and the corrosion protection system. Include details of the following:
1. Spacers and their location
2. Centralizers and their location
3. Unbonded length corrosion protection system, including the permanent rubber
seal between the trumpet and the tendon unbonded length corrosion protection
and the transition between the tendon bond length and the unbonded tendon length
corrosion protection.
4. Bond length corrosion protection system
5. Anchorage and trumpet
6. Anchorage corrosion protection system
7. Anchors using non-restressable anchorage devices
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of shop plans as
specified in Section 6-03.3(7) for all structural steel, including the permanent ground anchors.
The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working Drawings consisting of the mix design for
the grout conforming to Section 9-20.3(4) and the procedures for placing the grout. The
Contractor shall also submit the methods and materials used in filling the annulus over the
unbonded length of the anchor.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the method proposed
to be followed for the permanent ground anchor testing. This shall include all necessary
drawings and details to clearly describe the method proposed.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of calibration data for
each load cell, test jack, pressure gauge and master pressure gauge to be used. The calibration
tests shall have been performed by an independent testing Laboratory and tests shall have been
performed within 60 calendar days of the date submitted.
6-17.3(4) Preconstruction Conference
A permanent ground anchor preconstruction conference shall be held at least 5 working
days prior to the Contractor beginning any permanent ground anchor Work at the site to
discuss construction procedures, personnel, and equipment to be used. The list of materials
specified on the Record of Materials Form (ROM) for this item of Work will also be discussed.
Those attending shall include:
in charge of drilling the ground anchor hole, placing the permanent ground anchor and
grout, and tensioning and testing the permanent ground anchor.

If the Contractor’s key personnel change, or if the Contractor proposes a significant
revision of the approved permanent ground anchor installation plan, an additional conference
shall be held before any additional permanent ground anchor operations are performed.
6-17.3(5) Tendon Fabrication
The tendons can be either shop or field fabricated. The tendon shall be fabricated as shown
in the shop plans.
The Contractor shall select the type of tendon to be used. The tendon shall be sized so the
factored design load does not exceed 80 percent of the minimum guaranteed ultimate tensile
strength of the tendon. In addition, the tendon shall be sized so the maximum test load does
not exceed 80 percent of the minimum guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of the tendon.
The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the bond length and tendon bond
length necessary to develop the factored design load indicated in the Plans in accordance with
Sections 6-17.3(8)A, 6-17.3(8)B, and 6-17.3(8)C. The minimum bond length shall be 10 feet
in rock and 15 feet in soil.
When the Plans require the tendon bond length to be encapsulated, the tendon bond length
portion of the tendon shall be corrosion protected by encapsulating the tendon in a grout-filled
PE or PVC tube as specified in Section 6-17.2 as supplemented in the Special Provisions. The
tendons can be grouted inside the encapsulation prior to inserting the tendon in the drill hole
or after the tendon has been placed in the drill hole. Expansive admixtures can be mixed with
the encapsulation grout if the tendon is grouted inside the encapsulation while outside the drill
hole. The tendon shall be centralized within the bond length encapsulation with a minimum
of 0.20 inches of grout cover. Spacers shall be used along the tendon bond length of multi-
element tendons to separate the elements of the tendon so the prestressing steel will bond to
the encapsulation grout.
Centralizers shall be used to provide a minimum of 0.5 inches of grout cover over the
tendon bond length encapsulation. Centralizers shall be securely attached to the encapsulation
and the center-to-center spacing shall not exceed 10 feet. In addition, the upper centralizer
shall be located a maximum of 5 feet from the top of the tendon bond length and the lower
centralizer shall be located a maximum of 1 foot from the bottom of the tendon bond length.
The centralizer shall be able to support the tendon in the drill hole and position the tendon
so a minimum of 0.5 inches of grout cover is provided and shall permit free flow of grout.
Centralizers are not required on encapsulated, pressure-injected ground anchor tendons
if the ground anchor is installed in coarse grained soils (more than 50 percent of the soil larger
than the number 200 sieve) using grouting pressures greater than 150 psi.
Centralizers are not required on encapsulated, hollow-stem-augered ground anchor tendons
if the ground anchor is grouted through and the hole is maintained full of a stiff grout (8-inch
slump or less) during extraction of the auger.
The minimum unbonded length of the tendon shall be the greater of 15 feet or that
indicated in the Plans.
Corrosion protection of the unbonded length shall be provided by a sheath completely
filled with corrosion inhibiting grease or grout. If grease is used under the sheath, provisions
shall be made to prevent the grease from escaping at the ends of the sheath. The grease shall
completely coat the tendon and fill the voids between the tendon and the sheath.
If the sheath is not fabricated from a smooth tube, a separate bond breaker shall be
provided. The bond breaker shall prevent the tendon from bonding to the anchor grout
surrounding the tendon unbonded length.
The total anchor length shall not be less than that indicated in the Plans or the approved
Working Drawing submittal.

Anchorage devices shall be capable of developing 95 percent of the minimum guaranteed

ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing steel tendon. The anchorage devices shall conform
to the static strength requirements of Section 3.1 of the Post Tensioning Institute Specification
for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons, First Edition – 1993.
Non-restressable anchorage devices may be used except where indicated in the Plans.
Restressable anchorages shall be provided on those ground anchors that require reloading.
The post-tensioning supplier shall provide a restressable anchorage compatible with the post-
tensioning system provided.
The bearing plates shall be sized so the bending stresses in the plate do not exceed the
yield strength of the steel when a load equal to 95 percent of the minimum guaranteed ultimate
tensile strength of the tendon is applied, and the average bearing stress on the concrete does
not exceed that recommended in Section 3.1.3 of the Post Tensioning Institute Specification
for Unbonded Single Strand Tendons, First Edition – 1993.
The trumpet shall have an inside diameter equal to or larger than the hole in the bearing
plate. The trumpet shall be long enough to accommodate movements of the Structure during
testing and stressing. For strand tendons with encapsulation over the unbonded length, the
trumpet shall be long enough to enable the tendon to make a transition from the diameter or
the tendon in the unbonded length to the diameter of the tendon at the anchor head without
damaging the encapsulation. Trumpets filled with corrosion-inhibiting grease shall have
a permanent rubber seal provided between the trumpet and the tendon unbonded length
corrosion protection. Trumpets filled with grout shall have a temporary seal provided between
the trumpet and the tendon unbonded length corrosion protection or the trumpet shall overlap
the tendon unbonded length corrosion protection.
6-17.3(6) Tendon Storage and Handling
Tendons shall be handled and stored in such a manner as to avoid damage or corrosion.
Damage to the prestressing steel as a result of abrasions, cut, nicks, welds and weld splatter
will be cause for rejection by the Engineer. The prestressing steel shall be protected if welding
is to be performed in the vicinity. Grounding of welding leads to the prestressing steel is
forbidden. Prestressing steel shall be protected from dirt, rust, and deleterious substances.
A light coating of rust on the steel is acceptable. If heavy corrosion or pitting is noted, the
Engineer will reject the affected tendons.
The Contractor shall use care in handling and storing the tendons at the site. Prior to
inserting a tendon in the drill hole, the Contractor and the Engineer will examine the tendon
for damage to the encapsulation and the sheathing. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the
encapsulation is damaged, the Contractor shall repair the encapsulation in accordance with
the tendon supplier’s recommendations and as approved by the Engineer. If, in the opinion
of the Engineer, the smooth sheathing has been damaged, the Contractor shall repair it with
ultra high molecular weight polyethylene (PE) tape. The tape shall be spiral wound around
the tendon so as to completely seal the damaged area. The pitch of the spiral shall ensure a
double thickness at all points.
6-17.3(7) Installing Permanent Ground Anchors
The Contractor shall select the drilling method, the grouting procedure, and the grouting
pressure used for the installation of the ground anchor.
When caving conditions are encountered, no further drilling will be allowed until
the Contractor selects a method to prevent ground movement. The Contractor may use a
temporary casing. The Contractor’s method to prevent ground movement shall be submitted as
a Type 2 Working Drawing. The casings for the anchor holes, if used, shall be removed. The
drill hole shall be located so the longitudinal axis of the drill hole and the longitudinal axis
of the tendon are parallel. The ground anchor shall not be drilled in a location that requires
the tendon to be bent in order to enable the bearing plate to be connected to the supported
Structure. At the point of entry the ground anchor shall be installed within plus or minus

3 degrees of the inclination from horizontal shown in the Plans or the Working Drawing
submittal. The ground anchors shall not extend beyond the Right of Way limits.
The tendon shall be inserted into the drill hole to the desired depth. When the tendon
cannot be completely inserted without difficulty, the Contractor shall remove the tendon from
the drill hole and clean or redrill the hole to permit insertion. Partially inserted tendons shall
not be driven or forced into the hole.
The Contractor shall use a grout conforming to Section 6-17.2 as supplemented in the
Special Provisions.
The grout equipment shall produce a grout free of lumps and undispersed cement.
A positive displacement grout pump shall be used. The pump shall be equipped with a
pressure gauge near the discharge end to monitor grout pressures. The pressure gauge shall
be capable of measuring pressures of at least 150 psi or twice the actual grout pressures used
by the Contractor, whichever is greater. The grouting equipment shall be sized to enable the
grout to be pumped in one continuous operation. The mixer shall be capable of continuously
agitating the grout.
The grout shall be injected from the lowest point of the drill hole. The grout may be
pumped through grout tubes, casing, or drill rods. The grout can be placed before or after
insertion of the tendon. The quantity of the grout and the grout pressures shall be recorded.
The grout pressures and grout takes shall be controlled to prevent excessive heave in soils
or fracturing of rock formations.
The Contractor shall make and cure grout cubes once per day in accordance with WSDOT
T 813. These samples shall be retained by the Contractor until all associated verification,
performance and proof testing of the permanent ground anchors has been successfully
completed. If the Contractor elects to test the grout cubes for compressive strength, testing
shall be conducted by an independent laboratory and shall be in accordance with the FOP for
AASHTO T 106.
After grouting, the tendon shall not be loaded for a minimum of 3 days.
No grout shall be placed above the top of the bond length during the time the bond
length grout is placed. The grout at the top of the drill hole shall not contact the back of the
Structure or the bottom of the trumpet. Except as otherwise noted, only nonstructural filler
shall be placed above the bond length grout prior to testing and acceptance of the anchor.
The Contractor may place structural grout above the bond length grout prior to testing and
acceptance of the anchor subject to the following conditions:
1. The anchor unbonded length shall be increased by 8 feet minimum.
2. The grout in the unbonded zone shall not be placed by pressure grouting methods.
The corrosion protection surrounding the unbonded length of the tendon shall extend up
beyond the bottom seal of the trumpet or 1 foot into the trumpet if no trumpet seal is provided.
If the protection does not extend beyond the seal or sufficiently far enough into the trumpet,
the Contractor shall extend the corrosion protection or lengthen the trumpet.
The corrosion protection surrounding the no load zone length of the tendon shown in the
Plans shall not contact the bearing plate or the anchor head during testing and stressing. If the
protection is too long, the Contractor shall trim the corrosion protection to prevent contact.
The bearing plate and anchor head shall be placed so the axis of the tendon and the drill
hole are both perpendicular to the bearing plate within plus or minus 3 degrees and the axis of
the tendon passes through the center of the bearing plate at the intersection of the trumpet and
the bearing plate when fully seated with the alignment load.
The trumpet shall be completely filled with corrosion inhibiting grease or grout. Trumpet
grease can be placed anytime during construction. Trumpet grout shall be placed after the
ground anchor has been tested. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that the
procedure selected by the Contractor for placement of either grease or grout produces a
completely filled trumpet.

All anchorages permanently exposed to the atmosphere shall be covered with a corrosion
inhibiting grease-filled or grout-filled cover. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer
that the procedures selected by the Contractor for placement of either grease or grout produces
a completely filled cover. If the Plans require restressable anchorages, corrosion inhibiting
grease shall be used to fill the anchorage cover and trumpet.
6-17.3(8) Testing and Stressing
Each ground anchor shall be tested. The test load shall be simultaneously applied to the
entire tendon. Stressing of single elements of multi-element tendons will not be permitted.
The Engineer will record test data.
The testing equipment shall consist of a dial gauge or vernier scale capable of measuring
to 0.001 inch and shall be used to measure the ground anchor movement. The movement-
measuring device shall have a minimum travel equal to the theoretical elastic elongation of
the total anchor length plus 1 inch. The dial gauge or vernier scale shall be aligned so that
its axis is within 5 degrees from the axis of the tieback. A hydraulic jack and pump shall be
used to apply the test load. The jack and pressure gauge shall be calibrated by an independent
testing Laboratory as a unit. Each load cell, test jack and pressure gauge, and master pressure
gauge, shall be calibrated as specified in Section 6-17.3(3). Additionally, the Contractor shall
not use load cells, test jacks and pressure gauges, and master pressure gauges, greater than
60 calendar days past their most recent calibration date, until such items are re-calibrated by
an independent testing Laboratory.
The pressure gauge shall be graduated in increments of either 100 psi or 2 percent of
the maximum test load, whichever is less. The pressure gauge will be used to measure the
applied load. The pressure gauge shall be selected to place the maximum test load within
the middle ⅔ of the range of the gauge. The ram travel of the jack shall not be less than the
theoretical elastic elongation of the total anchor length at the maximum test load plus 1 inch.
The jack shall be independently supported and centered over the tendon so that the tendon
does not carry the weight of the jack. The Contractor shall have a second calibrated jack
pressure gauge at the site. Calibration data shall provide a specific reference to the jack and
the pressure gauge.
The loads on the tiebacks during the performance and verification tests shall be monitored
to verify consistency of load as defined in Section 6-17.3(1). Performance test loads, and
verification test loads when specified in the Special Provisions, sustained for 5 minutes or less,
and all proof test leads, shall be monitored by the jack pressure gauge alone. Performance test
loads, and verification test loads when specified in the Special Provisions, sustained for longer
than 5 minutes shall be monitored with the assistance of an electric or hydraulic load cell.
The Contractor shall provide the load cell and a readout device. The load cell shall be mounted
between the jack and the anchor plate. The load cell shall be selected to place the maximum
test load within the middle ⅔ of the range of the load cell. The stressing equipment shall be
placed over the ground anchor tendon in such a manner that the jack, bearing plates, load cell
and stressing anchorage are in alignment.
The permanent ground anchor load monitoring procedure for performance test loads, and
verification test loads when specified in the Special Provisions, sustained for longer than
5 minutes shall be as follows:
1. For each increment of load, attainment of the load shall be initially established and
confirmed by the reading taken from the jack gauge.
2. Once the permanent ground anchor load has been stabilized, based on the jack gauge
reading, the load cell readout device shall immediately be read and recorded to establish
the load cell reading to be used at this load. The load cell reading is intended only as
a confirmation of a stable permanent ground anchor load, and shall not be taken as the
actual load on the permanent ground anchor.

3. During the time period that the load on the permanent ground anchor is held at this
load increment, the Contractor shall monitor the load cell reading. The Contractor
shall adjust the jack pressure as necessary to maintain the initial load cell reading.
Jack pressure adjustment for any other reason will not be allowed.
4. Permanent ground anchor elongation measurements shall be taken at each load
increment as specified in Sections 6-17.3(8)A and 6-17.3(8)B.
5. Steps 1 through 4 shall be repeated at each increment of load, in accordance with the
load sequence specified in Sections 6-17.3(8)A and 6-17.3(8)B.
6-17.3(8)A Verification Testing
Verification tests will be required only when specified in the Special Provisions.
6-17.3(8)B Performance Testing
Performance tests shall be done in accordance with the following procedures. Five percent
of the ground anchors or a minimum of three ground anchors, whichever is greater, shall be
performance tested. The Engineer shall select the ground anchors to be performance tested.
The first production anchor shall be performance tested.
The performance test shall be made by incrementally loading and unloading the ground
anchor in accordance with the following schedule, consistent with the Load Resistance Factor
Design (LRFD) design method. The load shall be raised from one increment to another
immediately after a deflection reading.
Performance Test Schedule
Load
AL
0.25FDL
AL
0.25FDL
0.50FDL
AL
0.25FDL
0.50FDL
0.75FDL
AL
0.25FDL
0.50FDL
0.75FDL
1.00FDL
AL
Jack to lock-off load
Where:
AL – is the alignment load
FDL – is the factored design load.
The maximum test load in a performance test shall be held for 10 minutes. The load-hold
period shall start as soon as the maximum test load is applied and the anchor movement, with
respect to a fixed reference, shall be measured and recorded at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 minutes.
If the anchor movement between 1 and 10 minutes exceeds 0.04 inches, the maximum test
load shall be held for an additional 50 minutes. If the load-hold is extended, the anchor
movement shall be recorded at 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 minutes. If an anchor fails in creep,
retesting will not be allowed. All anchors not performance tested shall be proof tested.

6-17.3(8)C Proof Testing

Proof tests shall be performed by incrementally loading the ground anchor in accordance
with the following schedule, consistent with the LRFD design method. The load shall be raised
from one increment to another immediately after a deflection reading. The anchor movement
shall be measured and recorded to the nearest 0.001 inches with respect to an independent
fixed reference point at the alignment load and at each increment of load. The load shall be
monitored with a pressure gauge. At load increments other than the maximum test load, the
load shall be held just long enough to obtain the movement reading.
Proof Test Schedule
Load
AL
0.25FDL
0.50FDL
0.75FDL
1.00FDL
Jack to lock-off load
Where:
AL – is the alignment load
FDL – is the factored design load
The maximum test load in a proof test shall be held for 10 minutes. The load-hold period
shall start as soon as the maximum test load is applied and the anchor movement with respect
to a fixed reference shall be measured and recorded at 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, and 10 minutes. If the
anchor movement between 1 and 10 minutes exceeds 0.04 inches, the maximum test load shall
be held of an additional 50 minutes. If the load-hold is extended, the anchor movements shall
be recorded at 20, 30, 40, 50, and 60 minutes. If an anchor fails in creep, retesting will not
be allowed.
6-17.3(9) Permanent Ground Anchor Acceptance Criteria
A performance or proof tested ground anchor with a 10 minute load hold is acceptable
if the:
1. Ground anchor carries the maximum test load with less than 0.04 inches of movement
between 1 and 10 minutes; and
2. Total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80 percent of the theoretical elastic
elongation of the tendon unbonded length.
A verification, performance or proof tested ground anchor with a 60-minute load hold is
acceptable if the:
1. Ground anchor carries the maximum test load with a creep rate that does not exceed
0.08 inches/log cycle of time and is a linear or decreasing creep rate.
2. Total movement at the maximum test load exceeds 80 percent of the theoretical elastic
elongation of the tendon unbonded length.
If the total movement of the ground anchors at the maximum test load does not exceed
80 percent of the theoretical elastic elongation of the tendon unbonded length, the Contractor
shall replace the ground anchor at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. Retesting of
a ground anchor will not be allowed.
When a ground anchor fails, the Contractor shall modify the design, the construction
procedures, or both. These modifications may include, but are not limited to, installing
replacement ground anchors, modifying the installation methods, increasing the bond length or
changing the ground anchor type. Any modification that requires changes to the Structure shall
have prior approval of the Engineer. Any modifications of design or construction procedures
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

Upon completion of the test, the load shall be adjusted to the lock-off load indicated in the
Plans and transferred to the anchorage device. The ground anchor may be completely unloaded
prior to lock-off. After transferring the load and prior to removing the jack a lift-off reading
shall be made. The lift-off reading shall be within 10 percent of the specified lock-off load.
If the load is not within 10 percent of the specified lock-off load, the anchorage shall be
reset and another lift-off reading shall be made. This process shall be repeated until the desired
lock-off load is obtained.
6-17.4 Measurement
Permanent ground anchors will be measured per each for each permanent ground anchor
installed and accepted.
Permanent ground anchor performance tests will be measured per each for each anchor
performance tested.
The permanent ground anchor verification testing program will not be measured but will
be paid for on a lump sum basis.
6-17.5 Payment
Proposal:
“Permanent Ground Anchor”, per each.
All costs in connection with furnishing and installing permanent ground anchors shall be
included in the unit Contract price per each for “Permanent Ground Anchor”, including proof
testing of the installed anchor as specified
“Permanent Ground Anchor Performance Test”, per each.
“Permanent Ground Anchor Verification Test”, lump sum.

6-18 Shotcrete Facing

6-18.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing shotcrete facing as shown on the Plans. Shotcrete
constructed as concrete slope protection shall be constructed in accordance with Section 8-16.
6-18.2 Materials
Cement 9-01
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Metakaolin 9-23.12
Water 9-25
Other materials required, including materials for shotcrete, shall be as specified in the
Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the following:
1. The shotcrete mix design with compressive strength test results.
2. Method and equipment used to apply, finish and cure the shotcrete facing.
3. Documentation of the experience of the nozzle operators in applying shotcrete.
6-18.3(2) Mix Design
Shotcrete shall be proportioned to produce a 4,000 psi compressive strength at 28 days.
Admixture shall be used only after receiving permission from the Engineer. If admixtures
are used to entrain air, to reduce water-cement ratio, to retard or accelerate setting time, or to
accelerate the development of strength, the admixtures shall be used at the rate specified by
the manufacturer.
6-18.3(3) Testing
The Contractor shall make shotcrete test panels for evaluation of shotcrete quality,
strength, and aesthetics. Both preproduction and production test panels shall be prepared.
The Contractor shall remove at least three cores from shotcrete test panels in accordance with
AASHTO T 24, except all cores obtained for the purpose of shotcrete strength testing shall
meet the following:
1. The core diameter shall be at least 3.0 times the maximum aggregate size, but not less
than 4 inches.
2. The core length shall be a minimum of 2.0 times the core diameter.
3. Cores shall be taken at a minimum distance of 1 inch from edge of core to edge of test
panel and a minimum clear distance of 1 inch between them.
4. Test panels shall be sized to meet the core spacing specified above, but in no case shall
be smaller than 12 by 12 inch.
Cores removed from the panels shall be wiped off to remove surface drill water and
immediately wrapped in wet burlap and sealed in a plastic bag. Cores shall be clearly marked
to identify from where they were taken and whether they are for preproduction or production
testing. If for production testing, the section of the wall represented by the cores shall be

Shotcrete Facing 6-18
clearly marked on the cores. Cores shall be delivered to the Engineer within 2 hours of coring.
The remainder of the panels shall remain the property of the Contractor.
6-18.3(3)A Preproduction Testing
At least three cores for each mix design shall be prepared for evaluation and testing of
the shotcrete quality and strength. One 48 by 48-inch qualification panel shall be prepared
for evaluation and approval of the proposed method for shotcrete installation, finishing, and
curing. Both the test panel and the 48-inch qualification panels shall be constructed using the
same methods and initial curing proposed to construct the shotcrete facing, except that the test
panel shall not include wire reinforcement. The test panel shall be constructed to the minimum
thickness necessary to obtain the required core samples. The 48-inch qualification panel
shall be constructed to the same thickness as proposed for the production facing. Production
shotcrete Work shall not begin until satisfactory test results are obtained and the panels are
accepted by the Engineer.
6-18.3(3)B Production Testing
The Contractor shall provide three cores for each section of facing shot. The production
panels shall be constructed using the same methods and initial curing used to construct
the shotcrete wall, but without wire reinforcement. The panels shall be constructed to
the minimum thickness necessary to obtain the required core samples. If the production
shotcrete is found to be unsuitable based on the results of the test panels, the section(s) of
the wall represented by the test panel(s) shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of
the Engineer at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency. Core acceptance testing for
the 28‑day compressive strength will be performed in accordance with AASHTO T 24.
6-18.3(4) Qualifications of Contractor’s Personnel
All nozzle operators shall have had at least 1 year of experience in the application of
shotcrete. Each nozzle operator will be qualified, by the Engineer, to place shotcrete, after
successfully completing one test panel for each shooting position and surface type which will
be encountered.
Qualification will be based on a visual inspection of the shotcrete density, void structure,
and finished appearance along with a minimum 7-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi
determined from the average test results from two cores taken from each test panel. The 7-day
core compressive strength shall be tested by the Contractor in accordance with AASHTO T 24.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 2 days prior to the shooting of a
qualification panel. The mix design for the shotcrete shall be the same as that slated for the
wall being shot.
Shotcrete shall be placed only by personnel qualified by the Engineer.
If shotcrete finish Alternative B or C is specified, evidence shall be provided that all
shotcrete crew members have completed at least three projects in the last 5 years where such
finishing, or sculpturing and texturing of shotcrete was performed.
6-18.3(5) Placing Wire Reinforcement
Reinforcement of the shotcrete shall be placed as shown in the Plans. The wire
reinforcement shall be securely fastened to the steel reinforcing bars so that it will be
1 to 1.5 inches from the face of the shotcrete at all locations, unless otherwise shown in the
Plans. Wire reinforcement shall be lapped 1.5 squares in all directions, unless otherwise
shown in the Plans.
6-18.3(6) Alignment Control
The Contractor shall install non-corroding alignment wires and thickness control pins to
establish thickness and plane surface. The Contractor shall install alignment wires at corners
and offsets not established by formwork. The Contractor shall ensure that the alignment wires
are tight, true to line, and placed to allow further tightening. The Contractor shall remove the
alignment wires after facing construction is complete.

6-18.3(7) Shotcrete Application

A clean, dry supply of compressed air sufficient for maintaining adequate nozzle velocity
for all parts for the Work and for simultaneous operation of a blow pipe for cleaning away
rebound shall be maintained at all times. Thickness, method of support, air pressure, and
rate of placement of shotcrete shall be controlled to prevent sagging or sloughing of freshly
applied shotcrete.
The shotcrete shall be applied from the lower part of the area upwards. Surfaces to be shot
shall be damp, but free of standing water.
The nozzles shall be held at an angle approximately perpendicular to the working face
and at a distance that will keep rebound at a minimum and compaction will be maximized.
Shotcrete shall emerge from the nozzle in a steady uninterrupted flow. If, for any reason,
the flow becomes intermittent, the nozzle shall be diverted from the Work until a steady
flow resumes.
Surface defects shall be repaired as soon as possible after initial placement of the
shotcrete. All shotcrete which lacks uniformity; which exhibits segregation, honeycombing, or
lamination; or which contains any dry patches, slugs, voids, or sand pockets, shall be removed
and replaced with fresh shotcrete by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no
cost to the Contracting Agency.
Construction joints in the shotcrete shall be uniformly tapered over a minimum distance
of twice the thickness of the shotcrete layer. The surface of the joints shall be cleaned and
thoroughly wetted before adjacent shotcrete is placed. Shotcrete shall be placed in a manner
that provides a finish with uniform texture and color across the construction joint.
The shotcrete shall be cured by applying a clear curing compound in accordance with
Section 9-23.2. The curing compound shall be applied immediately after final gunning. Two
coats of curing compound shall be applied to the shotcrete surface immediately after finishing.
When shotcrete is specified in the Plans as the final fascia finish, the curing requirements
specified in Section 6-02.3(11) shall apply.
If field inspection or testing, by the Engineer, indicates that any shotcrete produced, fails
to meet the requirements, the Contractor shall immediately modify procedures, equipment,
or system, as necessary to produce Specification Material. All substandard shotcrete already
placed shall be repaired by the Contractor, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, at no additional
cost to the Contracting Agency. Such repairs may include removal and replacement of all
affected materials.
6-18.3(8) Shotcrete Finishing
When the shotcrete facing is an interim coating to be covered by a subsequent shotcrete
coating or a cast-in-place concrete fascia later under the same Contract, the Contractor
shall strike off the surface of the shotcrete facing with a roughened surface as specified in
Section 6-02.3(12). The grooves of the roughened surface shall be either vertical or horizontal.
When the shotcrete facing provides the finished exposed final surface, the shotcrete face
shall be finished using the alternative aesthetic treatment shown in the Plans. The alternatives
are as follows:
• Alternative A – After the surface has taken its initial set (crumbling slightly when cut),
the surface shall be broom finished to secure a uniform surface texture.
• Alternative B – Shotcrete shall be applied in a thickness a fraction beyond the alignment
wires and forms. The shotcrete shall stiffen to the point where the surface does not pull
or crack when screeded with a rod or trowel. Excess material shall be trimmed, sliced,
or scraped to true lines and grade. Alignment wires shall be removed and the surface
shall receive a steel trowel finish, leaving a smooth uniform texture and color. Once the
shotcrete has cured, pigmented sealer shall be applied to the shotcrete face. The shotcrete
surface shall be completed to within a tolerance of ½ inch of true line and grade.

Shotcrete Facing 6-18
• Alternative C – Shotcrete shall be hand-sculptured, colored, and textured to simulate

the relief, jointing, and texture of the natural backdrop surrounding the facing. The
ends and base of the facing shall transition in appearance as appropriate to more nearly
match the color and texture of the adjoining Roadway fill slopes. This may be achieved
by broadcasting fine and coarse aggregates, rocks, and other native materials into the
final surface of the shotcrete while it is still wet, allowing sufficient embedment into
the shotcrete to become a permanent part of the surface.
6-18.4 Measurement
Shotcrete facing will be measured by the square foot surface area of the completed facing
measured to the neat lines of the facing as shown in the Plans.
6-18.5 Payment
Proposal:
“Shotcrete Facing”, per square foot.
All costs in connection with constructing shotcrete facing as specified shall be included in
the unit Contract price per square foot for “Shotcrete Facing” including all steel reinforcing
bars, premolded joint filler, polyethylene bond breaker strip, joint sealant, PVC pipe for weep
holes, exterior surface finish, and pigmented sealer (when specified).

6-19 Shafts
6-19 Shafts
6-19.1 Description
This work consists of constructing the shafts in accordance with the Plans, these
Specifications, and as designated by the Engineer.
6-19.2 Materials
Fly Ash 9-23.9
Water for Concrete 9-25.1
Permanent Casing 9-36.1(1)
Temporary Casing 9-36.1(2)
Mineral Slurry 9-36.2(1)
Synthetic Slurry 9-36.2(2)
Water Slurry 9-36.2(3)
Steel Reinforcing Bar Centralizers 9-36.3
CSL Tubes and Caps 9-36.4
Grout for CSL Tubes 9-36.5
6-19.3(1)A Shaft Construction Tolerances
Shafts shall be constructed so that the center at the top of the shaft is within the following
horizontal tolerances:
Shaft Diameter (feet) Tolerance (inches)
Less than or equal to 2 3
Greater than 2 and less than 5 4
5 or larger 6
Shafts shall be within 1.5 percent of plumb. For rock excavation, allowable tolerance can
be increased to 2 percent maximum.
During drilling or excavation of the shaft, the Contractor shall make frequent checks on
the plumbness, alignment, and dimensions of the shaft. Any deviation exceeding the allowable
tolerances shall be corrected with a procedure approved by the Engineer.
Shaft steel reinforcing bar placement tolerances shall conform to Section 6-02.3(24)C.
6-19.3(1)B Nondestructive Testing of Shafts
6-19.3(1)B1 Nondestructive Quality Assurance (QA) Testing of Shafts
Unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall perform
nondestructive QA testing of shafts, except for those constructed completely in the dry. Either
crosshole sonic log (CSL) testing in accordance with ASTM D 6760 or thermal integrity
profiling (TIP) testing in accordance with ASTM D 7949 shall be used.

Shafts 6-19
6-19.3(1)B2 Nondestructive Quality Verification (QV) Testing of Shafts

The Contracting Agency may perform QV nondestructive testing of shafts that have been
QA tested by the Contractor. The Contracting Agency may test up to ten percent of the shafts.
The Engineer will identify the shafts selected for QV testing and the testing method the
Contracting Agency will use.
The Contractor shall accommodate the Contracting Agency’s nondestructive testing.
6-19.3(1)C Shaft Preconstruction Conference
A shaft preconstruction conference shall be held at least 5 working days prior to the
Contractor beginning any shaft construction work at the site to discuss construction
procedures, personnel, and equipment to be used, and other elements of the approved shaft
installation narrative as specified in Section 6-19.3(2)B. Those attending shall include:
1. (Representing the Contractor) – The superintendent, on site supervisors, and all foremen
in charge of excavating the shaft, placing the casing and slurry as applicable, placing the
steel reinforcing bars, and placing the concrete. If synthetic slurry is used to construct
the shafts, the slurry manufacturer’s representative or approved Contractor’s employees
trained in the use of the synthetic slurry shall also attend.
2. (Representing the Contracting Agency) – The Engineer, key inspection personnel,
and representatives from the WSDOT Construction Office and Materials Laboratory,
Geotechnical Division.
If the Contractor proposes a significant revision of the approved shaft installation narrative,
as determined by the Engineer, an additional conference shall be held before any additional
shaft construction operations are performed.
6-19.3(2) Shaft Construction Submittal
The shaft construction submittal shall be comprised of the following four components:
construction experience; shaft installation narrative; shaft slurry technical assistance; and
nondestructive QA testing personnel. The submittals shall be Type 2 Working Drawings,
except the shaft slurry technical assistance and nondestructive QA testing personnel submittals
shall be Type 1.
6-19.3(2)A Construction Experience
The Contractor shall submit a project reference list to the Engineer for approval verifying
the successful completion by the Contractor of at least three separate foundation projects with
shafts of diameters and depths similar to or larger than those shown in the Plans, and ground
conditions similar to those identified in the Contract. A brief description of each listed project
shall be provided along with the name and current phone number of the project owner or the
owner’s Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit a list identifying the on-site supervisors and drill rig operators
potentially assigned to the project to the Engineer. The list shall contain a brief description of
each individual’s experience in shaft excavation operations and placement of assembled steel
reinforcing bar cages and concrete in shafts. The individual experience lists shall be limited to
a single page for each supervisor or operator.
1. On-site supervisors shall have a minimum 2 years experience in supervising
construction of shaft foundations of similar size (diameter and depth) and scope to
those shown in the Plans, and similar geotechnical conditions to those described in
the boring logs and summary of geotechnical conditions. Work experience shall be
direct supervisory responsibility for the on-site shaft construction operations. Project
management level positions indirectly supervising on-site shaft construction operations
is not acceptable for this experience requirement.
2. Drill rig operators shall have a minimum of 1 year experience in construction of
shaft foundations.

6-19 Shafts
The Engineer may suspend the shaft construction if the Contractor substitutes unapproved
personnel. The Contractor shall be fully liable for the additional costs resulting from the
suspension of work, and no adjustments in contract time resulting from the suspension of
work will be allowed.
6-19.3(2)B Shaft Installation Narrative
The Contractor shall submit a shaft installation narrative to the Engineer. In preparing the
narrative, the Contractor shall reference the available subsurface data provided in the contract
test hole boring logs, the Summary of Geotechnical Conditions provided in the Appendix to
the Special Provisions, and the geotechnical report(s) prepared for this project. This narrative
shall provide at least the following information:
1. Proposed overall construction operation sequence.
2. Description, size, and capacities of proposed equipment, including but not limited
to, cranes, drills, auger, bailing buckets, final cleaning equipment, and drilling unit.
The narrative shall describe why the equipment was selected, and describe equipment
suitability to the anticipated site conditions and work methods. The narrative shall
include a project history of the drilling equipment demonstrating the successful use
of the equipment on shafts of equal or greater size in similar soil/rock conditions.
The narrative shall also include details of shaft excavation and cleanout methods.
3. Details of the method(s) to be used to ensure shaft stability (i.e., prevention of caving,
bottom heave, using temporary casing, slurry, or other means) during excavation
(including pauses and stoppages during excavation) and concrete placement. If
permanent casings are required, casing dimensions and detailed procedures for
installation shall be provided.
4. A slurry mix design, including all additives and their specific purpose in the slurry mix,
with a discussion of its suitability to the anticipated subsurface conditions, shall be
submitted and include the procedures for mixing, using, and maintaining the slurry.
A detailed plan for quality control of the selected slurry, including tests to be performed,
test methods to be used, and minimum and/or maximum property requirements which
must be met to ensure the slurry functions as intended, considering the anticipated
subsurface conditions and shaft construction methods, in accordance with the slurry
manufacturer’s recommendations and these Special Provisions shall be included. As a
minimum, the slurry quality control plan shall include the following tests:
Property Test Method
Density Mud Weight (Density), API 13B-1, Section 1
Viscosity Marsh Funnel and Cup, API 13B-1, Section 2.2
PH Glass Electrode, pH Meter, or pH Paper
Sand Content Sand, API 13B-1, Section 5
5. Description of the method used to fill or eliminate all voids below the top of shaft
between the plan shaft diameter and excavated shaft diameter, when permanent casing
is specified.
6. Details of concrete placement, including proposed operational procedures for pumping
methods, and a sample uniform yield form to be used by the Contractor for plotting the
approximate volume of concrete placed versus the depth of shaft for all shaft concrete
placement (except concrete placement in the dry).
7. When shafts are constructed in water, the submittal shall include seal thickness
calculations, seal placement procedure, and descriptions of provisions for casing
shoring dewatering and flooding.
8. Description and details of the storage and disposal plan for excavated material and
drilling slurry (if applicable).
9. Reinforcing steel shop drawings with details of reinforcement placement, including
bracing, centering, and lifting methods, and the method to ensure the reinforcing cage
Shafts 6-19
position is maintained during construction, including use of bar boots and/or rebar
cage base plates, and including placement of rock backfill below the bottom of shaft
elevation, provided the conditions of Section 6-19.3(5)D are satisfied.
The reinforcing steel shop drawings and shaft installation narrative shall include,
at a minimum:
a. Procedure and sequence of steel reinforcing bar cage assembly.
b. The tie pattern, tie types, and tie wire gages for all ties on permanent reinforcing
and temporary bracing.
c. Number and location of primary handling steel reinforcing bars used during
lifting operations.
d. Type and location of all steel reinforcing bar splices.
e. Details and orientation of all internal cross-bracing, including a description of
connections to the steel reinforcing bar cage.
f. Description of how temporary bracing is to be removed.
g. Location of support points during transportation.
h. Cage weight and location of the center of gravity.
i. Number and location of pick points used for lifting for installation and for transport
(if assembled off-site).
j. Crane charts and a description and/or catalog cuts for all spreaders, blocks, sheaves,
and chockers used to equalize or control lifting loads.
k. The sequence and minimum inclination angle at which intermediate belly rigging
lines (if used) are released.
l. Pick point loads at 0, 45, 60, and 90 degrees and at all intermediate stages of
inclination where rigging lines are engaged or slackened.
m. Methods and temporary supports required for cage splicing.
n. For picks involving multiple cranes, the relative locations of the boom tips at
various stages of lifting, along with corresponding net horizontal forces imposed
on each crane.
The Engineer will evaluate the shaft installation narrative for conformance with the Plans,
Specifications, and Special Provisions, within the review time specified. If deemed necessary
by the Engineer, a Shaft Installation Narrative Submittal Teleconference Meeting will be
scheduled by the Contracting Agency following review of the Contractor’s initial submittal
of the narrative and prior to Contracting Agency’s formal response to the initial submittal.
Teleconference participants shall include the following:
1. (Representing the Contractor) – The superintendent, on-site supervisors, and other
Contractor personnel involved in the preparation of the shaft installation narrative.
2. (Representing the Contracting Agency) – The Engineer, key inspection personnel, and
representatives from the Materials Laboratory, Geotechnical Division, and the WSDOT
Construction Office.
6-19.3(2)C Shaft Slurry Technical Assistance
If slurry other than water slurry is used to construct the shafts, the Contractor shall provide
or arrange for technical assistance in the use of the slurry as specified in Section 6-19.3(4)A.
The Contractor shall submit the following to the Engineer:
1. The name and current phone number of the slurry manufacturer’s technical
representative assigned to the project, and the frequency of scheduled visits to the
project site by the synthetic slurry manufacturer’s representative.
2. The name(s) of the Contractor’s personnel assigned to the project and trained by the
slurry manufacturer in the proper use of the slurry. The submittal shall include a signed
training certification letter from the slurry manufacturer for each trained Contractor’s
employee listed, including the date of the training.

6-19 Shafts
6-19.3(2)D Nondestructive QA Testing Organization and Personnel

The Contractor shall submit the names of the testing organizations, and the names of
the personnel who will conduct nondestructive QA testing of shafts. The submittal shall
include documentation that the qualifications specified below are satisfied. For TIP testing,
the testing organization is the group that performs the data analysis and produces the
final report. The testing organizations and the testing personnel shall meet the following
minimum qualifications:
1. The testing organization shall have performed nondestructive tests on a minimum of
three deep foundation projects in the last two years.
2. Personnel conducting the tests for the testing organization shall have a minimum of one
year experience in nondestructive testing and interpretation.
3. The experience requirements for the organization and personnel shall be consistent with
the testing methods the Contractor has selected for nondestructive testing of shafts.
4. Personnel preparing test reports shall be a Professional Engineers, licensed under Title
18 RCW, State of Washington, and in accordance with WAC 196-23-020.
6-19.3(3) Shaft Excavation
Shafts shall be excavated to the required depth as shown in the Plans. Shaft excavation
operations shall conform to this section and the shaft installation narrative.
Shaft excavation shall not be started until the Contractor has received the Engineer’s
acceptance for the reinforcing steel centralizers required when the casing is to be pulled during
concrete placement.
Except as otherwise noted, the Contractor shall not commence subsequent shaft
excavations until receiving the Engineer’s acceptance of the first shaft, based on the results
and analysis of the nondestructive testing for the first shaft. The Contractor may commence
subsequent shaft excavations prior to receiving the Engineer’s acceptance of the first shaft,
provided the following condition is satisfied:
The Engineer permits continuing with shaft construction based on the Engineer’s
observations of the construction of the first shaft, including, but not limited to,
conformance to the shaft installation narrative in accordance with Section 6-19.3(2)B, and
the Engineer’s review of Contractor’s daily reports and Inspector’s daily logs concerning
excavation, steel reinforcing bar placement, and concrete placement.
6-19.3(3)A Conduct of Shaft Excavation Operations
Once the excavation operation has been started, the excavation shall be conducted in a
continuous operation until the excavation of the shaft is completed, except for pauses and
stops as noted, using approved equipment capable of excavating through the type of material
expected. Pauses during this excavation operation, except for casing splicing, tooling changes,
slurry maintenance, and removal of obstructions, are not allowed.
Pauses, defined as momentary interruptions of the excavation operation, will be allowed
only for casing splicing, tooling changes, slurry maintenance, and removal of obstructions.
Shaft excavation operation interruptions not conforming to this definition shall be considered
stops. Stops for uncased excavations (including partially cased excavations) shall not exceed
16 hours duration. Stops for fully cased excavations, excavations in rock, and excavations
with casing seated into rock, shall not exceed 65 hours duration.
For stops exceeding the time durations specified above, the Contractor shall stabilize the
excavation using one or both of the following methods:
1. For an uncased excavation, before the end of the work day, install casing in the hole
to the depth of the excavation. The outside diameter of the casing shall not be smaller
than 6 inches less than either the plan diameter of the shaft or the actual excavated
diameter of the hole, whichever is greater. Prior to removing the casing and resumption
of shaft excavation, the annular space between the casing and the excavation shall
be sounded. If the sounding operation indicates that caving has occurred, the casing

Shafts 6-19
shall not be removed and shaft excavation shall not resume until the Contractor has
stabilized the excavation in accordance with the shaft installation narrative conforming
to Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 3.
2. For both a cased and uncased excavation, backfill the hole with either CDF or granular
material. The Contractor shall backfill the hole to the ground surface, if the excavation
is not cased, or to a minimum of 5 feet above the bottom of casing (temporary or
permanent), if the excavation is cased. Backfilling of shafts with casing fully seated
into rock, as determined by the Engineer, will not be required.
During stops, the Contractor shall stabilize the shaft excavation to prevent bottom heave,
caving, head loss, and loss of ground. The Contractor bears full responsibility for selection and
execution of the method(s) of stabilizing and maintaining the shaft excavation, in accordance
with Section 1-07.13. Shaft stabilization shall conform to the shaft installation narrative in
accordance with Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 3.
If slurry is present in the shaft excavation, the Contractor shall conform to the requirements
of Section 6-19.3(4)B of this Special Provision regarding the maintenance of the slurry
and the minimum level of drilling slurry throughout the stoppage of the shaft excavation
operation, and shall recondition the slurry to the required slurry properties in accordance with
Section 9-36.2 prior to recommencing shaft excavation operations.
6-19.3(3)B Temporary and Permanent Shaft Casing
The Contractor shall furnish and install required temporary and permanent shaft casings
as shown in the Plans and as specified in the Special Provisions.
6-19.3(3)B1 General Shaft Casing Requirements
Shaft casing shall be watertight and clean prior to placement in the excavation.
The outside diameter of the casing shall not be less than the specified diameter of the shaft.
The inside diameter of the casing shall not be greater than the specified diameter of the shaft
plus 6 inches, except as otherwise noted for shafts 5 feet or less in diameter, and as otherwise
noted in Section 6-19.3(3)B4 for temporary telescoping casing. The inside diameter of casings
for shafts 5 feet or less in diameter shall not be greater than the specified diameter of the shaft
plus 1 foot.
6-19.3(3)B2 Permanent Shaft Casing
Permanent casing is defined as casing designed as part of the shaft structure and installed to
remain in place after construction is complete. All permanent casing shall be of ample strength
to resist damage and deformation from transportation and handling, installation stresses, and
all pressures and forces acting on the casing. Where the minimum thickness of permanent
casing is specified in the Plans, it is specified to satisfy structural design requirements only.
The Contractor shall increase the casing thickness as necessary to satisfy the requirements of
this section.
6-19.3(3)B3 Temporary Shaft Casing
Temporary casing is defined as casing installed to facilitate shaft construction only, which
is not designed as part of the shaft structure, and which shall be completely removed after
shaft construction is complete unless otherwise shown in the Plans. All temporary casing
shall be of ample strength to resist damage and deformation from transportation and handling,
installation and extraction stresses, and all pressures and forces acting on the casing. The
casing shall be capable of being removed without deforming and causing damage to the
completed shaft and without disturbing the surrounding soil.
To maintain stable excavations and to facilitate construction, the Contractor may furnish
and install temporary casing in addition to the required casing specified in the Special
Provisions. The Contractor shall provide temporary casing at the site in sufficient quantities
to meet the needs of the anticipated construction method.

6-19 Shafts
6-19.3(3)B4 Temporary Telescoping Shaft Casing

Where the acceleration coefficient used for seismic design of the structure, as specified in
the General Notes of the Structure Plans, is less than or equal to 0.16, the Contractor may use
temporary telescoping casing for the shafts at any bridge intermediate or interior pier, subject
to the following conditions:
1. The Contractor shall submit the request to use temporary telescoping casing as a Type 2
Working Drawing. The request shall specify the diameters of the temporary telescoping
casing, and shall specify the shafts where use is requested. The Contractor shall not
proceed with the use of temporary telescoping casing until receiving the Engineer’s
approval.
2. The minimum diameter of the shaft shall be as shown in the Plans.
3. The temporary telescoping casing shall conform to Sections 6-19.3(3)B1, 6-19.3(3)B3,
and 9-36.1(2).
The Contractor may use temporary telescoping casing for the shafts of any bridge end pier,
regardless of the acceleration coefficient used for the seismic design of the structure, subject
to conditions 2 and 3 specified above and the following two additional conditions:
4. A maximum of two telescoping casing diameter changes will be allowed.
5. The maximum diameter change at each casing diameter transition shall be 12 inches.
6-19.3(3)B5 Permanent Slip Casing
Permanent slip casing is defined as casing installed vertically inside the temporary casing
within the limits of the column-shaft splice zone, and wet-set into the shaft concrete no more
than 3 feet below the column-shaft construction joint, allowing subsequent removal of the
temporary casing. The casing diameter requirements of Section 6-19.3(3)B1 do not apply to
permanent slip casing, but the inside diameter of the permanent slip casing shall provide the
steel reinforcing bar clearance specified in Section 6-19.3(5)C.
6-19.3(3)C Conduct of Shaft Casing Installation and Removal and Shaft
Excavation Operations
The Contractor shall conduct casing installation and removal operations and shaft
excavation operations such that the adjacent soil outside the casing and shaft excavation
for the full height of the shaft is not disturbed. Disturbed soil is defined as soil whose
geotechnical properties have been changed from those of the original in situ soil, and
whose altered condition adversely affects the structural integrity of the shaft foundation.
6-19.3(3)D Bottom of Shaft Excavation
The Contractor shall use appropriate means such as a cleanout bucket or air lift to clean
the bottom of the excavation of all shafts. No more than 2 inches of loose or disturbed
material shall be present at the bottom of the shaft just prior to placing concrete.
The excavated shaft shall be inspected and accepted by the Engineer prior to proceeding
with construction. The bottom of the excavated shaft shall be sounded with an airlift pipe,
a tape with a heavy weight attached to the end of the tape, or other means acceptable to the
Engineer to determine that the shaft bottom meets the requirements in the Contract.
6-19.3(3)E Shaft Obstructions
and man made objects) encountered during the shaft excavation operation which prevents or
hinders the advance of the shaft excavation. When efforts to advance past the obstruction to
the design shaft tip elevation result in the rate of advance of the shaft drilling equipment being
significantly reduced relative to the rate of advance for the portion of the shaft excavation in
the geological unit that contains the obstruction, then the Contractor shall remove, break up, or
push aside the obstruction under the provisions of Section 6-19.5. The method of dealing with
such obstructions, and the continuation of excavation shall be as proposed by the Contractor
and accepted by the Engineer.
Shafts 6-19
6-19.3(3)F Voids Between Permanent Casing and Shaft Excavation

When permanent casing is specified, excavation shall conform to the specified outside
diameter of the shaft. After the casing has been filled with concrete, all void space occurring
between the casing and shaft excavation shall be filled with a material which approximates the
geotechnical properties of the in situ soils, in accordance with the shaft installation narrative
specified in Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 5.
6-19.3(3)G Operating Shaft Excavation Equipment From an Existing Bridge
Drilling equipment shall not be operated from an existing bridge, except as otherwise
noted. If necessary and safe to do so, and if the Contractor submits a Type 2 Working Drawing
consisting of a written request in accordance with Section 6-01.6, the Engineer may permit
operation of drilling equipment on a bridge.
6-19.3(3)H Seals for Shaft Excavation in Water
When shafts are constructed in water and the Plans show a seal between the casing shoring
and the upper portion of the permanent casing of the shaft, the Contractor shall construct a seal
in accordance with the shaft installation narrative specified in Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 7.
Concrete for the casing shoring seal shall be Class 4000W conforming to Section 6-02.
The seal thickness shown in the Plans is designed to resist the hydrostatic uplift force with
the corresponding seal weight and adhesion of the seal to the permanent casing and the casing
shoring of 20 psi, based on the casing shoring dimension and the seal vent water surface
elevation specified in the Plans. If the Contractor uses a casing shoring diameter other than
that specified in the Plans, the Contractor shall submit a revised seal design in accordance with
Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 7.
6-19.3(3)I Required Use of Slurry in Shaft Excavation
The Contractor shall use slurry, in accordance with Section 6-19.3(4), to maintain a
stable excavation during excavation and concrete placement operations once water begins
to enter the shaft excavation at an infiltration rate of 12 inches of depth or more in 1 hour.
If concrete is to be placed in the dry, the Contractor shall pump all accumulated water
in the shaft excavation down to a 3-inch maximum depth prior to beginning concrete
placement operations.
6-19.3(4) Slurry Installation Requirements
6-19.3(4)A Slurry Technical Assistance
If slurry other than water slurry is used, the manufacturer’s representative, as identified
to the Engineer in accordance with Section 6-19.3(2)C, shall:
1. Provide technical assistance for the use of the slurry,
2. Be at the site prior to introduction of the slurry into the first drilled hole requiring
slurry, and
3. Remain at the site during the construction of at least the first shaft excavated to adjust
the slurry mix to the specific site conditions.
After the manufacturer’s representative is no longer present at the site, the Contractor’s
employee trained in the use of the slurry, as identified to the Engineer in accordance with
Section 6-19.3(2)C, shall be present at the site throughout the remainder of shaft slurry
operations for this project to perform the duties specified in items 1 through 3 above.
6-19.3(4)B Minimum Level of Slurry in the Excavation
When slurry is used in a shaft excavation the following is required:
1. The height of the slurry shall be as required to provide and maintain a stable hole
to prevent bottom heave, caving, or sloughing of all unstable zones.
2. The Contractor shall provide casing, or other means, as necessary to meet these
requirements.

6-19 Shafts
3. The slurry level in the shaft while excavating shall be maintained above the
groundwater level the greater of the following dimensions:
a. Not less than 5 feet for mineral slurries.
b. Not less than 10 feet for water slurries.
c. Not less than 10 feet for synthetic slurries.
4. The slurry level in the shaft throughout all stops as specified in Section 6-19.3(3)A
and during concrete placement as specified in Section 6-19.3(7) shall be no lower than
the water level elevation outside the shaft.
6-19.3(4)C Slurry Sampling and Testing
Mineral slurry and synthetic slurry shall be mixed and thoroughly hydrated in slurry tanks,
ponds, or storage areas. The Contractor shall draw sample sets from the slurry storage facility
and test the samples for conformance with the specified viscosity and pH properties before
beginning slurry placement in the drilled hole. Mineral slurry shall conform to the material
specifications in Section 9-36.2(1). Synthetic slurry shall conform to Section 9-36.2(2),
the quality control plan included in the shaft installation narrative in accordance with
Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 4. A sample set shall be composed of samples taken at mid-height
and within 2 feet of the bottom of the storage area.
When synthetic slurry is used, the Contractor shall keep a written record of all additives
and concentrations of the additives in the synthetic slurry. These records shall be submitted as
a Type 1 Working Drawing once the slurry system has been established in the first drilled shaft
on the project. The Contractor shall provide revised data to the Engineer if changes are made
to the type or concentration of additives during construction.
The Contractor shall sample and test all slurry in the presence of the Engineer, unless
otherwise directed. The date, time, names of the persons sampling and testing the slurry, and
the results of the tests shall be recorded. A copy of the recorded slurry test results shall be
submitted to the Engineer at the completion of each shaft, and during construction of each
shaft when requested by the Engineer.
Sample sets of all slurry, composed of samples taken at mid-height and within 2 feet of
the bottom of the shaft and the storage area, shall be taken and tested once every 4 hours
minimum at the beginning and during drilling shifts and prior to cleaning the bottom of the
hole to verify the control of the viscosity and pH properties of the slurry. Sample sets of all
slurry shall be taken and tested at least once every 2 hours if the previous sample set did not
have consistent viscosity and pH properties. All slurry shall be recirculated, or agitated with
the drilling equipment, when tests show that the sample sets do not have consistent viscosity
and pH properties. Cleaning of the bottom of the hole shall not begin until tests show that
the samples taken at mid-height and within 2 feet of the bottom of the hole have consistent
viscosity and pH properties.
Sample sets of all slurry, as specified, shall be taken and tested to verify control of the
viscosity, pH, density, and sand content properties after final cleaning of the bottom of the
hole just prior to placing concrete. Placement of the concrete shall not start until tests show
that the samples taken at mid-height and within 2 feet of the bottom of the hole have consistent
specified properties.
6-19.3(4)D Maintenance of Required Slurry Properties
The Contractor shall clean, recirculate, de-sand, or replace the slurry to maintain the
required slurry properties.
6-19.3(4)E Maintenance of a Stable Shaft Excavation
The Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that stable conditions
are being maintained. If the Engineer determines that stable conditions are not being
maintained, the Contractor shall immediately take action to stabilize the shaft. The Contractor
shall submit a revised shaft installation narrative that addresses the problem and prevents

Shafts 6-19
future instability. The Contractor shall not continue with shaft construction until the damage
that has already occurred is repaired in accordance with the specifications, and until receiving
the Engineer’s review of the revised shaft installation narrative.
When mineral slurry conforming to Section 9-36.2(1) is used to stabilize the unfilled
portion of the shaft, the Contractor shall remove the excess slurry buildup inside of the shaft
diameter prior to continuing with concrete placement. The Contractor shall use the same
methods of shaft excavation and the same diameter of drill tools to remove the excess slurry
buildup as was used to excavate the shaft to its current depth.
6-19.3(4)F Disposal of Slurry and Slurry Contacted Spoils
The Contractor shall manage and dispose of the slurry wastewater in accordance with
Section 8-01.3(1)C. Slurry-contacted spoils shall be disposed of as specified in the shaft
installation narrative in accordance with Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 8, and in accordance with
the following requirements:
1. Uncontaminated spoils in contact with water-only slurry may be disposed of as
clean fill.
2. Uncontaminated spoils in contact with water slurry mixed with flocculants approved
in Section 8-01.3(1)C3 may be disposed of as clean fill away from areas that drain to
surface waters of the state.
3. Spoils in contact with synthetic slurry or water slurry with polymer-based additives or
flocculants not approved in Section 8-01.3(1)C3 shall be disposed of in accordance with
Section 2-03.3(7)C. With permission of the Engineer, the Contractor may re-use these
spoils on-site.
4. Spoils in contact with mineral slurry shall be disposed of in accordance with
Section 2-03.3(7)C. With permission of the Engineer, the Contractor may re-use these
spoils on-site.
6-19.3(5) Assembly and Placement of Reinforcing Steel
6-19.3(5)A Steel Reinforcing Bar Cage Assembly
The reinforcing cage shall be rigidly braced to retain its configuration during handling and
construction. Individual or loose bars will not be permitted. The Contractor shall show bracing
and any extra reinforcing steel required for fabrication of the cage on the shop drawings. Shaft
reinforcing bar cages shall be supported on a continuous surface to the extent possible. All
rigging connections shall be located at primary handling bars, as identified in the reinforcing
steel assembly and installation plan. Internal bracing is required at each support and lift point.
The reinforcement shall be carefully positioned and securely fastened to provide the
minimum clearances listed below, and to ensure no displacement of the reinforcing steel bars
occurs during placement of the concrete. The steel reinforcing bars shall be securely held in
position throughout the concrete placement operation.
6-19.3(5)B Steel Reinforcing Bar Cage Centralizers
The Contractor shall submit details of the proposed reinforcing cage centralizers along with
the shop drawings. The reinforcing steel centralizers at each longitudinal space plane shall
be placed at least at the quarter points around the circumference of the steel reinforcing bar
cage, and at a maximum longitudinal spacing of either 2.5 times the shaft diameter or 20 feet,
whichever is less. The Contractor shall furnish and install additional centralizers as required to
maintain the specified concrete cover throughout the length of the shaft.

6-19 Shafts
6-19.3(5)C Concrete Cover Over Steel Reinforcing Bars

Steel reinforcing bars shall be placed as shown in the Plans with minimum concrete cover
as shown below:
Minimum Concrete Cover, and
Concrete Cover Tolerance, Except at Minimum Concrete Cover at
Shaft Diameter (feet) Permanent Slip Casing (inches) Permanent Slip Casing (inches)
Less than or equal to 3 3, -1½ 1½
Greater than 3 and less than 4 4, -2 1½
Greater than or equal to 4 4, -2 2
and less than 5
5 or larger 6, -3 3
The concrete cover tolerances specified above apply to the concrete cover specified in the
Plans, even if it exceeds the minimum concrete cover.
6-19.3(5)D Steel Reinforcing Bar Cage Support at Base of Shaft Excavation

For shafts with temporary casing within 15 feet of the bottom of shaft elevation as specified
in the Plans, the Contractor may place quarry spalls or other rock backfill acceptable to the
Engineer into the shaft below the specified bottom of shaft elevation as a means to support
the steel reinforcing bar cage, provided that the materials and means to accomplish this have
been addressed by the shaft installation narrative, as specified in Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 9.
The use of bar boots and/or rebar cage base plates is required when quarry spalls or other rock
backfill is placed at the base of the shaft excavation.
6-19.3(6) Contractor Furnished Accessories for Nondestructive QA Testing
6-19.3(6)A Shafts Requiring Access Tubes
The Contractor shall furnish and install access tubes in all shafts receiving CSL testing or
the thermal probe method of TIP testing, except as otherwise noted in Section 6-19.3(1)B1.
6-19.3(6)B Orientation and Assembly of the Access Tubes
The Contractor shall securely attach the access tubes to the interior of the reinforcement
cage of the shaft. One access tube shall be furnished and installed for each foot of shaft
diameter, rounded to the nearest whole number, as shown in the Plans. The number of access
tubes for shaft diameters specified as “X feet 6 inches” shall be rounded up to the next
higher whole number. The access tubes shall be placed around the shaft, inside the spiral
or hoop reinforcement, and bundled with the vertical reinforcement. Where circumferential
components of the rebar cage bracing system prevent bundling the access tubes directly
to the vertical reinforcement, the access tubes shall be placed inside the circumferential
components of the rebar cage bracing system as close as possible to the nearest vertical steel
reinforcement bar.
The access tubes shall be installed in straight alignment and as near to parallel to the
vertical axis of the reinforcement cage as possible. The access tubes shall extend from the
bottom of the reinforcement cage to at least 2 feet above the top of the shaft. Splice joints
in the access tubes, if required to achieve full length access tubes, shall be watertight. The
Contractor shall clear the access tubes of all debris and extraneous materials before installing
the access tubes. The tops of access tubes shall be deburred. Care shall be taken to prevent
damaging the access tubes during reinforcement cage installation and concrete placement
operations in the shaft excavation.

Shafts 6-19
6-19.3(6)C Care for Access Tubes From Erection Through Nondestructive QA Testing
The access tubes shall be filled with potable water before concrete placement, and the
top watertight PVC caps shall be reinstalled and secured in accordance with Section 9-36.4.
The Contractor shall keep all of a shaft’s access tubes full of water through the completion of
nondestructive QA testing of that shaft. When temperatures below freezing are possible, the
Contractor shall protect the access tubes against freezing by wrapping the exposed tubes with
insulating material, adding antifreeze to the water in the tubes, or other methods acceptable
to the Engineer.
6-19.3(6)D Shafts Requiring Thermal Wire
The Contractor shall furnish and install thermal wire in all shafts receiving the thermal wire
method of TIP testing, except as otherwise noted in Section 6-19.3(1)B1.
6-19.3(6)E Thermal Wire and Thermal Access Points (TAPs)
The thermal wire and associated couplers shall be obtained from the source specified in the
Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall securely attach the thermal wire to the interior of the reinforcement
cage of the shaft in conformance with the supplier’s instructions. At a minimum, one thermal
wire shall be furnished and installed for each foot of shaft diameter, rounded to the nearest
whole number, as shown in the Plans. The number of thermal wires for shaft diameters
specified as “X feet 6 inches” shall be rounded up to the next higher whole number. The
thermal wires shall be placed around the shaft, inside the spiral or hoop reinforcement, and
tied to the vertical reinforcement with plastic “zip” ties at a maximum spacing of 2-feet. Steel
tie wire shall not be used.
The thermal wire shall be installed in straight alignment and taut, but with enough slack to
not be damaged during reinforcing cage lofting. The wires shall be as near to parallel to the
vertical axis of the reinforcement cage as possible. The thermal wire shall extend from the
bottom of the reinforcement cage to the top of the shaft, with 15-feet of slack wire provided
above the top of shaft. Care shall be taken to prevent damaging the thermal wires during
reinforcement cage installation and concrete placement operations in the shaft excavation.
After completing shaft reinforcement cage fabrication at the site and prior to installation
of the cage into the shaft excavation, the Contractor shall install and connect thermal access
points (TAPs) to the thermal wires. The TAPs shall record data for at least one hour after the
cage is placed in the excavation to measure the slurry temperature and enable the steel and
slurry temperatures to equilibrate prior to placing concrete in the shaft. The TAPs shall record
and store data every 15 minutes. The TAPs shall remain active for a minimum of 36 hours.
Prior to beginning concrete placement the TAPs shall be checked to ensure they are
recording data and that the wires have not been damaged. If a TAP unit is not functioning
due to a damaged wire, the Contractor shall repair or replace the wire. If a TAP unit fails or
a wire breaks after concrete placement has started, the Contractor shall not stop the concrete
placement operation to repair the wire.
6-19.3(6)F Use of Access Tubes for TIP Testing Under the Thermal Probe Method
The Contractor may use access tubes for TIP testing under the thermal probe method.
Access tubes shall be cared for in accordance with Section 6-19.3(6)C. Prior to TIP testing
under the thermal probe method, the water in each tube shall be removed, collected, and stored
in an insulated container. The access tube shall be blown dry and swabbed to remove residual
water. After TIP testing, the collected and stored tube water shall be introduced back into the
access tube. New potable water may be used, provided the water temperature is not more than
10°F cooler than the average concrete temperature measured by the probe.

6-19 Shafts

6-19.3(7)A Concrete Class for Shaft Concrete
Shaft concrete shall be Class 5000P conforming to Section 6-02.
6-19.3(7)B Concrete Placement Requirements
Concrete placement shall commence immediately after completion of excavation by
the Contractor and inspection by the Engineer. Immediately prior to commencing concrete
placement, the shaft excavation and the properties of the slurry (if used) shall conform to
Sections 6-19.3(3)D and 6-19.3(4), respectively. Concrete placement shall continue in one
operation to the top of the shaft, or as shown in the Plans. The Contractor shall place concrete
between the upper construction joint of the shaft and the top of the shaft in the dry.
During concrete placement, the Contractor shall monitor, and minimize, the difference
in the level of concrete inside and outside of the steel reinforcing bar cage. The Contractor
shall conduct concrete placement operations to maintain the differential concrete head as
1-foot maximum.
If water is not present, the concrete shall be deposited through the center of the
reinforcement cage by a method that prevents segregation of aggregates and splashing of
concrete on the reinforcement cage. The concrete shall be placed such that the free-fall is
vertical down the center of the shaft without hitting the sides, the steel reinforcing bars, or
the steel reinforcing bar cage bracing. The Section 6-02.3(6) restriction for 5 feet maximum
free fall shall not apply to placement of concrete into a shaft.
6-19.3(7)C Concrete Vibration Requirements
When placing concrete in the dry, only the top 5 feet of concrete shall be vibrated, in
accordance with Section 6-02.3(9), except that the entire depth of concrete placed in the
shaft-column steel reinforcing bar splice zone shall be vibrated. If a temporary casing is used,
it shall be removed before vibration. This requirement may be waived if a temporary casing is
used and removed with a vibratory hammer during the concrete placement operation. Vibration
of concrete does not affect the maximum slump allowed for the concrete class specified.
6-19.3(7)D Requirements for Placing Concrete Underwater
When placing concrete underwater, including when water in a shaft excavation exceeds
3 inches in depth, the Contractor shall place the concrete by pressure feed using a concrete
pump, with a watertight tube having a minimum diameter of 4 inches. The discharge end of
the tube on the concrete pump shall include a device to seal out water while the tube is first
filled with concrete. Alternatively, the Contractor may use a plug that is inserted at the hopper
of the concrete pump and travels through the tremie to keep the concrete separated from the
water and slurry. Concrete placement by gravity feed is not allowed.
Throughout the underwater concrete placement operation, the discharge end of the tube
shall remain submerged in the concrete at least 5 feet and the tube shall always contain enough
concrete to prevent water from entering. The concrete placement shall be continuous until the
work is completed, resulting in a seamless, uniform shaft.
6-19.3(7)E Testing and Repair of Shaft Concrete Placed Underwater
If the underwater concrete placement operation is interrupted, the Engineer may require the
Contractor to prove by core drilling or other tests that the shaft contains no voids or horizontal
joints. If testing reveals voids or joints, the Contractor shall repair them or replace the shaft at
no expense to the Contracting Agency. Responsibility for coring costs, and calculation of time
extension, shall be in accordance with Section 6-19.3(9)H.
6-19.3(7)F Cleaning and Removal of Previously Placed Shaft Concrete
Before placing any fresh concrete against concrete deposited in water or slurry, the
Contractor shall remove all scum, laitance, loose gravel, and sediment on the upper surface
of the concrete deposited in water or slurry and chip off any high spots on the upper surface

Shafts 6-19
of the existing concrete that would prevent the steel reinforcing bar cage from being placed
in the position required by the Plans.
Prior to performing any of the crosshole sonic log testing operations specified in
Section 6-19.3(9), the Contractor shall remove the concrete at the top of the shaft down
to sound concrete.
6-19.3(7)G Protection of Fresh and Curing Concrete From Vibration
The Contractor’s construction operation in the vicinity of a shaft excavation with freshly
placed concrete and curing concrete shall conform to Section 6-02.3(6)D.
6-19.3(7)H Uniform Yield Form
Except for shafts where the shaft concrete is placed in the dry, the Contractor shall
complete a uniform yield form, consistent with the sample form submitted to the Engineer
as part of the shaft installation narrative as specified in Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 6, for each
shaft and shall submit the completed form to the Engineer within 24 hours of completing the
concrete placement in the shaft.
6-19.3(7)I Requirements for Placing Concrete Above the Top of Shaft
Concrete shall not be placed above the top of shaft (for column splice zones, columns,
footings, or shaft caps) until the Contractor receives the Engineer’s acceptance of
nondestructive QA testing, if performed at that shaft, and acceptance of the shaft.
6-19.3(8) Casing Removal
6-19.3(8)A Concrete Head Requirements During Temporary Casing Removal
As the temporary casing is withdrawn, the Contractor shall maintain the concrete and slurry
inside the casing at a level sufficient to balance the hydrostatic pressure outside the casing.
6-19.3(8)B Removing Portions of Permanent Casing Above the Top of Shaft
Tops of permanent casings for the shafts shall be removed to the top of the shaft or finished
groundline, whichever is lower, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. For those shafts
constructed within a permanent body of water, tops of permanent casings for shafts shall be
removed to the low water elevation, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer.
6-19.3(8)C Requirements for Leaving Temporary Casing in Place
The Contractor shall completely remove all temporary casings, except as noted. The
Contractor may leave some or all of the temporary casing in place provided all the following
conditions are satisfied:
1. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing of the following information:
a. The Contractor shall completely describe the portion of the temporary casing
to remain.
b. The Contractor shall specify the reason(s) for leaving the portion of the temporary
casing in place.
c. The Contractor shall submit structural calculations, using the design specifications
and design criteria specified in the General Notes of the structure Plans, indicating
that leaving the temporary casing in place is compatible with the structure as
designed in the Plans.
6-19.3(9) Nondestructive QA Testing of Shafts
The Contractor shall provide nondestructive QA testing and analysis on all shafts with
access tubes or thermal wires and TAPs facilitating the testing (See Section 6-19.3(1)B).
The testing and analysis shall be performed by the testing organizations identified by the
Contractor’s submittal in accordance with Section 6-19.3(2)D.
The Engineer may direct that additional testing be performed at a shaft if anomalies or a
soft bottom are detected by the Contractor’s testing. If additional testing at a shaft confirms

6-19 Shafts
the presence of a defect(s) in the shaft, the testing costs and the delay costs resulting from the
additional testing shall be borne by the Contractor in accordance with Section 1-05.6. If the
additional testing indicates that the shaft has no defect, the testing costs and the delay costs
resulting from the additional testing will be paid by the Contracting Agency in accordance
with Section 1-05.6, and, if the shaft construction is on the critical path of the Contractor’s
schedule, a time extension equal to the delay created by the additional testing will be granted
6-19.3(9)A TIP Testing Using Thermal Probes or CSL Testing
If selected as the nondestructive QA testing method by the Contractor, TIP testing using
thermal probes, or CSL testing shall be performed after the shaft concrete has cured at least
96 hours. Additional curing time prior to testing may be required if the shaft concrete contains
admixtures, such as set retarding admixture or water-reducing admixture, added in accordance
with Section 6-02.3(3). The additional curing time prior to testing required under these
circumstances shall not be grounds for additional compensation or extension of time to the
Contractor in accordance with Section 1-08.8.
6-19.3(9)B Inspection of Access Tubes
After placing the shaft concrete and before beginning the crosshole sonic log testing of
a shaft, the Contractor shall inspect the access tubes. Each access tube that the test probe
cannot pass through shall be replaced, at the Contractor’s expense, with a 2-inch diameter
hole cored through the concrete for the entire length of the shaft. Unless directed otherwise
by the Engineer, cored holes shall be located approximately 6 inches inside the reinforcement
and shall not damage the shaft reinforcement. Descriptions of inclusions and voids in cored
holes shall be logged and a copy of the log shall be submitted to the Engineer. Findings from
cored holes shall be preserved, identified as to location, and made available for inspection by
the Engineer.
6-19.3(9)C TIP Testing With Thermal Wires and TAPs
If selected as the nondestructive QA testing method by the Contractor, TIP testing with
thermal wires and TAPs (See Section 6-19.3(6)E) shall be performed. The TIP testing shall
commence at the beginning of the concrete placement operation, recording temperature
readings at 15-minute intervals until the peak temperature is captured in the data. Additional
curing time may be required if the shaft concrete contains admixtures, such as set retarding
admixture or water-reducing admixture, added in accordance with Section 6-02.3(3). The
additional curing time required under these circumstances shall not be grounds for additional
compensation or extension of time to the Contractor in accordance with Section 1-08.8.
TIP testing shall be conducted at all shafts in which thermal wires and TAPs have been
installed for thermal wire analysis (Section 6-19.3(6)A).
6-19.3(9)D Nondestructive QA Testing Results Submittal
The Contractor shall submit the results and analysis of the nondestructive QA testing for
each shaft tested. The Contractor shall submit the test results within three working days of
testing. Results shall be a Type 1 Working Drawing presented in a written report.
TIP reports shall include:
1. A map or plot of the wire/tube location within the shaft and their position relative to a
known and identifiable location, such as North.
2. Graphical displays of temperature measurements versus depth of each wire or
tube for the analysis time selected, overall average temperature with depth, shaft
radius or diameter with depth, concrete cover versus cage position with depth, and
effective radius.
3. The report shall identify unusual temperatures, particularly significantly cooler local
deviations from the overall average.

Shafts 6-19
4. The report shall identify the location and extent where satisfactory or questionable
concrete is identified.
a. Satisfactory (S) – 0 to 6 percent Effective Radius Reduction and Cover Criteria Met
b. Questionable (Q) – Effective Local Radius Reduction > 6 percent, Effective Local
Average Diameter Reduction > 4 percent, or Cover Criteria Not Met
5. Variations in temperature between wire/tubes (at each depth) which in turn correspond
to variations in cage alignment.
6. Where shaft specific construction information is available (e.g. elevations of the top
of shaft, bottom of casing, bottom of shaft, etc.), these values shall be noted on all
pertinent graphical displays.
CSL reports shall include:
1. A map or plot of the tube location within the shaft and their position relative to a known
and identifiable location, such as North.
2. Graphical displays of CSL Energy versus Depth and CSL signal arrival time versus
depth or velocity versus depth.
3. The report shall identify the location and extent where good, questionable, and poor
concrete is identified, where no signal was received, or where water is present.
a. Good (G) – No signal distortion and decrease in signal velocity of 10 percent or less
is indicative of good quality concrete.
b. Questionable (Q) – Minor signal distortion and a lower signal amplitude with a
decrease in signal velocity between 10 percent and 20 percent.
c. Poor (P) – Severe signal distortion and much lower signal amplitude with a decrease
in signal velocity of 20 percent or more.
d. No Signal (NS) – No signal was received.
e. Water (W) – A measured signal velocity of nominally V = 4,800 to 5,000 fps.
All QA test reports will provide a recommendation to accept the shaft as-is,
recommendation for further review by the Engineer, or will provide a plan for further testing,
investigation or repair to address any deficiencies identified by the testing.
6-19.3(9)E Vacant
6-19.3(9)F Contractor’s Investigation and Remedial Action Plan
For all shafts determined to be unacceptable, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working
Drawing consisting of a plan for further investigation or remedial action. All modifications to
the dimensions of the shafts, as shown in the Plans, required by the investigation and remedial
action plan shall be supported by calculations and working drawings. All investigation and
remedial correction procedures and designs shall be submitted.
6-19.3(9)G Rejection of Shafts and Revisions to Concrete Placement Operations
If the Engineer determines that the concrete placed under slurry for a given shaft is
structurally inadequate, that shaft will be rejected. The placement of concrete under slurry
shall be suspended until the Contractor submits to the Engineer written changes to the methods
of shaft construction needed to prevent future structurally inadequate shafts, and receives the
Engineer’s written approval of the submittal.
6-19.3(9)H Cored Holes
At the Engineer’s request, the Contractor shall drill a corehole in any questionable quality
shaft (as determined from crosshole sonic log testing and analysis or by observation of the
Engineer) to explore the shaft condition.
Prior to beginning coring, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting
of the method and equipment used to drill and remove cores from shaft concrete. The coring
method and equipment shall provide for complete core recovery and shall minimize abrasion
and erosion of the core.

6-19 Shafts
If a defect is confirmed, the Contractor shall pay for all coring costs in accordance with
Section 1-05.6. If no defect is encountered, the Contracting Agency will pay for all coring
costs in accordance with Section 1-05.6, and, if the shaft construction is on the critical path
of the Contractor’s schedule, compensation for the delay will be granted by an appropriate
time extension in accordance with Section 1-08.8. Materials and Work necessary, including
engineering analysis and redesign, to effect corrections for shaft defects shall be furnished
to the Engineer’s satisfaction at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
6-19.3(9)I Requirements for Access Tubes and Cored Holes After CSL Testing
All access tubes and cored holes shall be dewatered and filled with grout conforming to
Section 9-36.5 after tests are completed. The access tubes and cored holes shall be filled using
grout tubes that extend to the bottom of the tube or hole or into the grout already placed.
6-19.3(10) Engineer’s Final Acceptance of Shafts
The Engineer will determine final acceptance of each shaft, based on the nondestructive
QA test results and analysis for the tested shafts, and will provide a response to the Contractor
within 3 working days after receiving the test results and analysis submittal.
6-19.4 Measurement
Constructing shafts will be measured by the linear foot. The linear foot measurement will
be calculated using the top of shaft elevation and the bottom of shaft elevation for each shaft
as shown in the Plans.
Rock excavation for shaft, including haul, will be measured by the linear foot of shaft
excavated. The linear feet measurement will be computed using the top of the rock line,
defined as the highest bedrock point within the shaft diameter, and the bottom elevation shown
in the Plans.
QA shaft test will be measured once per shaft tested.
6-19.5 Payment
“Constructing___Diam. Shaft”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Constructing___Diam. Shaft” shall be full pay
for performing the Work as specified, including:
1. Soil excavation for shaft, including all costs in connection with furnishing, mixing,
placing, maintaining, containing, collecting, and disposing of all mineral, synthetic and
water slurry, and disposing of groundwater collected by the excavated shaft.
2. Furnishing and placing temporary shaft casing, including temporary casing in addition
to the required casing specified in the Special Provisions, and including all costs in
connection with completely removing the casing after completing shaft construction.
3. Furnishing permanent casing for shaft.
4. Placing permanent casing for shaft.
5. Casing shoring, including all costs in connection with furnishing and installing casing
shoring above the specified upper limit for casing shoring but necessary to provide
for sufficient water head pressure to resist artesian water pressure present in the shaft
excavation, removing casing shoring, and placing seals when required.
6. Furnishing and placing steel reinforcing bar and epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bar,
including furnishing and installing steel reinforcing bar centralizers.
7. Installation of CSL tubes or thermal wires.
8. Furnishing, placing and curing concrete to the top of shaft or to the construction joint at
the base of the shaft-column splice zone as applicable.
Payment for “Constructing___Diam. Shaft” will be made upon Engineer acceptance of the
shaft, including completion of satisfactory QA shaft tests as applicable.

Shafts 6-19
“Rock Excavation For Shaft Including Haul”, per linear foot.

When rock excavation is encountered, payment for rock excavation is in addition to the
unit Contract price per linear foot for “Constructing___Diam. Shaft”
“Shoring Or Extra Excavation Cl. A - ___”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract price for “Shoring Or Extra Excavation Cl. A - ___” shall be full
pay for performing the Work as specified, including all costs in connection with all excavation
outside the limits specified for soil and rock excavation for shaft including haul, all temporary
telescoping casings, and all temporary casings beyond the limits of required temporary casing
specified in the Special Provisions.
“QA Shaft Test”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “QA Shaft Test” shall be full pay for performing the
Work as specified, including operating all associated accessories necessary to record and
process data and develop the summary QA test reports. Section 1-04.6 does not apply to this
bid item.
“Removing Shaft Obstructions”, estimated.
Payment for removing, breaking-up, or pushing aside shaft obstructions, as defined in
Section 6-19.3(3)E, will be made for the changes in shaft construction methods necessary to
deal with the obstruction. The Contractor and the Engineer shall evaluate the effort made and
reach agreement on the equipment and employees utilized, and the number of hours involved
for each. Once these cost items and their duration have been agreed upon, the payment amount
will be determined using the rate and markup methods specified in Section 1-09.6. For the
purpose of providing a common proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered
an amount for the item “Removing Shaft Obstructions” in the Bid Proposal to become a part
of the total Bid by the Contractor.
If drilled shaft tools, cutting teeth, casing or Kelly bar is damaged as a result of the
obstruction removal work, the Contractor will be compensated for the costs to repair this
equipment in accordance with Section 1-09.6.
If shaft construction equipment is idled as a result of the Work required to deal with the
obstruction and cannot be reasonably reassigned within the project, then standby payment for
the idled equipment will be added to the payment calculations. If labor is idled as a result of
the Work required to deal with the obstruction and cannot be reasonably reassigned within
the project, then all labor costs resulting from Contractor labor agreements and established
Contractor policies will be added to the payment calculations.
The Contractor shall perform the amount of obstruction Work estimated by the Contracting
Agency within the original time of the Contract. The Engineer will consider a time adjustment
1. The dollar amount estimated by the Contracting Agency has been exceeded, and
2. The Contractor shows that the obstruction removal Work represents a delay to the

6-19 Shafts

Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers,
Division 7 Sanitary Sewers, Water Mains, and Conduits
7-01 Drains
7-01.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing drain pipe and underdrain pipe in accordance with the
Plans, these Specifications and Standard Plans, at the locations staked.
7-01.2 Materials
Gravel Backfill for Drains 9-03.12(4)
Concrete Drain Pipe 9-05.1(1)
Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum Coated (Aluminized)
Corrugated Iron or Steel Drain Pipe 9-05.1(2)
Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Drain Pipe 9-05.1(3)
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Drain Pipe, Couplings and Fittings 9-05.1(5)
Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Drain Pipe, Couplings and Fittings
(up to 10 inch) 9-05.1(6)
Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Drain Pipe, Couplings and Fittings
(12 through 60 inch) 9-05.1(7)
Perforated Concrete Underdrain Pipe 9-05.2(2)
Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum Coated (Aluminized)
Corrugated Iron or Steel Underdrain Pipe 9-05.2(4)
Perforated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Underdrain Pipe 9-05.2(5)
Perforated Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Underdrain Pipe,
8-inch diameter maximum 9-05.2(6)
Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Underdrain Pipe
(up to 10 inch) 9-05.2(7)
Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene (PE) Underdrain Pipe
(12 through 60 inch) 9-05.2(8)
Drain pipes may be concrete, zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron, aluminum coated
(aluminized) corrugated iron, zinc coated (galvanized) steel, aluminum coated (aluminized)
steel, corrugated aluminum alloy, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or corrugated polyethylene (PE)
at the option of the Contractor unless the Plans specify the type to be used.
Underdrain pipe, other than AASHTO M36 Type III Class IV, shall be perforated. They
may be concrete, bituminized fiber, zinc coated (galvanized) corrugated iron, aluminum coated
(aluminized) corrugated iron, zinc coated (galvanized) steel, aluminum coated (aluminized)
steel, corrugated aluminum alloy, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), or corrugated polyethylene (PE)
at the option of the Contractor unless the Plans specify the type to be used.
It is not necessary that all drain or underdrain pipes on any one project be of the same kind
of material; however, all contiguous pipe shall be of the same kind.
A trench of the dimensions shown in the Plans or as specified by the Engineer shall be
excavated to the grade and line given by the Engineer.
7-01.3(1) Drain Pipe
Drain pipe shall be laid in conformity with the line and grades as shown in the Plans.
The drain pipe shall be laid with soiltight joints unless otherwise specified. Concrete drain
pipe shall be laid with the bell or larger end upstream. PVC drain pipe shall be jointed with a
bell and spigot joint using a flexible elastomeric seal as described in Section 9-04.8. The bell
shall be laid upstream. PE drain pipe shall be jointed with snap-on, screw-on, bell and spigot,
or wraparound coupling bands as recommended by the manufacturer of the tubing.
7-01 Drains
7-01.3(2) Underdrain Pipe

When underdrain pipe is being installed as a means of intercepting ground or surface
water, the trench shall be fine-graded in the existing soil 3 inches below the grade of the pipe
as shown in the Plans. Gravel backfill shall be used under the pipe. Gravel backfill shall be
placed to the depth shown in the Plans or as designated by the Engineer. All backfill shall
be placed in 12-inch maximum layers and be thoroughly compacted with three passes of a
vibratory compactor for each layer. The Contractor shall use care in placing the gravel backfill
material to prevent its contamination.
Class 2 perforations shall be used unless otherwise specified. When Class 1 perforations
are specified the perforated pipe shall be laid with the perforations down. Upon final
acceptance of the Work, all drain pipes shall be open, clean, and free draining. Perforated
pipe does not require a watertight joint. PVC underdrain pipe shall be jointed using either
the flexible elastomeric seal as described in Section 9-04.8 or solvent cement as described
in Section 9-04.9, at the option of the Contractor unless otherwise specified in the Plans.
The bell shall be laid upstream. PE drainage tubing underdrain pipe shall be jointed with
snap-on, screw-on, bell and spigot, or wraparound coupling bands, as recommended by the
manufacturer of the tubing.
7-01.4 Measurement
The length of drain or underdrain pipe will be the number of linear feet of completed
installation measured along the invert. Pipe placed in excess of the length designated by the
Engineer will not be measured or paid for.
Excavation of the trench will be measured as Structure excavation Class B or Structure
excavation Class B including haul by the cubic yard as specified in Section 2-09.
Gravel backfill for drains will be measured by the volume placed within the neatline limits
of Structure excavation Class B.
7-01.5 Payment
“Drain Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Underdrain Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Gravel Backfill for Drain”, per cubic yard.

Culverts 7-02
7-02 Culverts
7-02.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing culverts of the various types and classes in accordance
with the Plans, these Specifications, and the Standard Plans, at the locations staked.
Culverts may be used for transverse drains under the Roadway or as conduits for water
pipe or other utilities passing under the Roadway.
7-02.2 Materials
Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete 9-03.1
Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding 9-03.12(3)
Butyl Rubber Sealant 9-04.11
External Sealing Band 9-04.12
Plain Concrete Culvert Pipe 9-05.3(1)
Reinforced Concrete Culvert Pipe 9-05.3(2)
Beveled Concrete End Sections 9-05.3(3)
Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch 9-05.4
Steel Nestable Pipe and Pipe Arch 9-05.4(8)
Steel End Sections 9-05.4(9)
Aluminum Culvert Pipe 9-05.5
Aluminum End Sections 9-05.5(6)
Solid Wall PVC Culvert Pipe 9-05.12(1)
Profile Wall PVC Culvert Pipe 9-05.12(2)
Corrugated Polyethylene Culvert Pipe 9-05.19
Steel Rib Reinforced Polyethylene Culvert Pipe 9-05.21
High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe 9-05.23
Polypropylene Culvert Pipe 9-05.24
Wire Mesh 9-07.7
Deformed Wire 9-07.8
Cold Drawn Wire 9-07.9
Grout 9-20.3(2)
Mortar 9-20.4
Where steel or aluminum are referred to in this section in regard to a kind of culvert pipe,
pipe arch, or end sections, it shall be understood that steel is zinc coated (galvanized) or
aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated iron or steel, and aluminum is corrugated aluminum
alloy as specified in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5.
Thermoplastic culvert pipe includes solid wall PVC culvert pipe, profile wall PVC culvert
pipe, corrugated polyethylene culvert pipe, and polypropylene culvert pipe.
It is not necessary that all culvert pipe on any one project be of the same kind of material.
However, all contiguous pipe shall be of the same size, material, thickness, class, and
treatment and shall be that required for the maximum height of cover.
Measurement for payment of the Bid items associated with the drainage installation will
be based on the diameter of the culvert pipe described by the Bid item in the Proposal.
When schedule A, B, C, or D culvert pipe is specified in the Plans, the Contractor shall
provide the specified schedule and diameter but has the option of furnishing any of the
acceptable materials shown in the Culvert Pipe Schedules Table.
The use of tongue and groove concrete pipe shall only be allowed under side road
connections. All tongue and groove pipe shall be joined with cement mortar.

7-02 Culverts
Culvert Pipe Schedules

Schedule Diameter Aluminum Thermoplastic
(Fill Height) in inches Concrete Steel 2⅔″ × ½″ 2⅔″ × ½″ PE1, PVC2, or PP3
12, 18, 24 Plain or CI. IV .064″ (16 Ga.) .060″ (16 Ga.) PE, PVC, or PP
A
30, 36 Class III .064″ (16 Ga.) .075″ (14 Ga.) PE, PVC, or PP
2′ - 15′
42, 48 Class III .064″ (16 Ga.) .105″ (12 Ga.) PE, PVC, or PP
12, 18, 24 Class V .064″ (16 Ga.) .060″ (16 Ga.) PE, PVC, or PP
B
30, 36 Class V .064″ (16 Ga.) .075″ (14 Ga.) PE, PVC, or PP
15′ - 25′
42, 48 Class V .064″ (16 Ga.) .105″ (12 Ga.) PE, PVC, or PP
12, 18, 24 None .064″ (16 Ga.) .060″ (16 Ga.) None
C
30, 36 None .064″ (16 Ga.) .075″ (14 Ga.) None
25′ - 40′
42, 48 None .064″ (16 Ga.) .105″ (12 Ga.) None
12, 18 None .064″ (16 Ga.) .060″ (16 Ga.) None
D 24 None .064″ (16 Ga.) .075″ (14 Ga.) None
40′ - 60′ 30, 36 None .064″ (16 Ga.) .105″ (12 Ga.) None
42, 48 None .079″ (14 Ga.) .135″ (10 Ga.) None
1Corrugated polyethylene pipe.
2Polyvinylchloride pipe. Solid wall or profile wall for diameters through 27 inches Profile wall for diameters larger than 27 inches.
3Polypropylene pipe, 12 inch to 30 inch diameters approved for Schedule A and Schedule B, and 36 inch to 60 inch diameters
approved for Schedule A only.

Culverts shall be constructed in accordance with Section 7-08.3.
7-02.3(1) Placing Culvert Pipe – General
A dike or plug of impervious material shall be placed near the intake end of the culvert
to prevent piping. The dike shall be 2 feet long and adequately surround the pipe to form an
impervious barrier. When suitable impervious materials are not available at the site, suitable
backfill shall be obtained as provided in Section 2-09.3(1)E.
The ends of the pipe or pipe arch shall be rigidly supported to prevent movement before
and during the construction of end walls or headers.
Culverts shall not be left extending beyond the staked limits unless approved
by the Engineer.
All thermoplastic pipe shall be beveled to match the embankment or ditch slope but shall
not be beveled flatter than 4:1. The minimum length of each section of pipe that is to be
beveled shall be at least six times the diameter of the pipe when measured from the toe of the
bevel to the joint.
7-02.3(2) Installation of Metal End Sections
Metal end sections shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the Standard
Plans, the Plans, and applicable portions of these Specifications.
When flared metal end sections are installed on concrete pipe, Design B end sections will
be used on the inlet end only. Design C end sections will be used on the outlet ends only
according to the following schedule:

Culverts 7-02
Concrete Pipe Nominal End Section Nominal

Dia. in inches Dia. in inches
12 15
18 24
24 30
30 36
36 42
42 48
48 60
54 66
60 72
66 78
72 84
7-02.3(3) Headwalls
If headwalls are specified in the Plans, they shall be constructed as soon as the embankment
has been completed to a sufficient height over the Structure to allow the required Work.
Headwalls shall be constructed in accordance with applicable portions of Section 6-02.
7-02.3(4) Removing and Relaying Culverts
Where shown in the Plans or where designated by the Engineer, existing culverts shall
be removed and relaid in accordance with these Specifications. Any culvert damaged by the
Contractor’s operations shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting
Agency. In the case of concrete pipe, all joints of the pipe before being relaid shall be cleaned
so as to be free from all adhering material, including old mortar placed as a collar or seal in the
original construction.
All culvert sections removed and not relaid shall become the property of the Contractor.
7-02.3(5) Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe
When shown in the Plans, safety bars for culvert pipe shall be constructed in accordance
with the Standard Plans and shall meet the requirements of Section 9-05.18.
7-02.3(6) Precast Reinf. Conc. Three Sided Structures, Box Culverts and Split
Box Culverts
The Contractor shall design, fabricate, and erect precast reinforced concrete three sided
structures (PRCTSS), precast reinforced concrete box culverts (PRCBC), and precast
reinforced concrete split box culverts (PRCSBC) in accordance with these specifications and
the details shown in the Plans, including associated footings, slab bases, wingwalls, cutoff
walls, and headwalls.
When the Plans include a complete set of design details for a Structure (defining panel
shapes and dimensions, concrete strength requirements, and steel reinforcing bar, joint,
and connection details), the design and load rating preparation and calculation submittal
requirements of Sections 7-02.3(6)A1 and 7-02.3(6)A2 do not apply for the components
shown in the Plans, but all other requirements of this section remain in effect. The Contractor
may propose alternate concrete culvert designs, accommodating the same rise, span, and
length as shown in the Plans, to replace the Structure details shown in the Plans. If an alternate
concrete culvert design is proposed, all of the requirements of this section, including design
and load rating preparation and calculation submittal, apply.

7-02 Culverts
7-02.3(6)A General
Except as otherwise noted by these specifications, the precast Structures (PRCTSS,
PRCBC and PRCSBC) shall conform to all requirements of Section 6-02.3(28).
Tolerances for PRCTSS shall be as follows:
1. Internal Dimensions – The internal dimension shall not vary more than 1 percent or
2 inches, whichever is less, from the Plan dimensions. The haunch dimensions shall
not vary more than ¾ inch from the Plan dimensions.
2. Slab and Wall Thickness – The slab and wall thickness shall not be less than that
shown in the Plans by more than 5 percent or ½ inch, whichever is greater. A thickness
more than that required in the Plans will not be a cause for rejection if proper joining
is not affected.
3. Length of Opposite Surfaces – Variations in lengths of two opposite surfaces of the
three-sided section shall not be more than ¾ inch unless beveled sections are being
used to accommodate a curve in the alignment.
4. Reinforcing steel placement shall meet the tolerances specified in Section 6-02.3(24)C.
Tolerances for PRCBC and PRCSBC shall be as follows:
1. Internal Dimensions – The internal dimensions shall not vary more than 1 percent from
the Plan dimensions. If haunches are used, the haunch dimensions shall not vary more
than ¼ inch from the Plan dimensions.
2. Slab and Wall Thickness – The slab and wall thickness shall not be less than that shown
in the Plans by more than 5 percent or 3/16 inch, whichever is greater. A thickness more
than that required in the Plans will not be a cause for rejection.
3. Length of Opposite Box Segments – Variations in lengths of two opposite surfaces
of the box segments shall not be more than ⅛ inch per foot of internal span, with
a maximum of ⅝ inch for all sizes through 7 feet internal span, and a maximum of
¾ inch for internal spans greater than 7 feet, except where beveled sections are being
used to accommodate a curve in the alignment.
4. Length of Box Segments – The underrun in length of a segment shall not be more than
⅛ inch per foot of length with a maximum of ½ inch in any box segment.
5. Length of Legs and Slabs – The variation in length of the legs shall not be more
than ⅛ inch per foot of the rise of the leg per leg with a maximum of ⅝ inches. The
differential length between opposing legs of the same segment shall not be more than
½ inch. Length of independent top slab spans shall not vary by more than ⅛ inch per
foot of span of the top slab, with a maximum of ⅝ inches.
6. Reinforcing steel placement shall meet the tolerances specified in Section 6-02.3(24)C.
7-02.3(6)A1 Design Criteria
The precast Structures shall be designed for a minimum service life of 75-years in
accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03, WSDOT Bridge Design
Manual LRFD M 23-50, and AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, latest edition and
current interims in effect on the Bid advertising date, including an HL-93 vehicular live load.
Live load for the Extreme Event-I Limit State shall be applied in accordance with WSDOT
Bridge Design Manual LRFD M 23-50 Section 3.5.
Precast Structures with an overall span length greater than 20-feet (measured along the
centerline of Roadway from inside face to inside face of hydraulic opening) shall be designed
for seismic loads in accordance with FHWA-NHI-10-034, Technical Manual for Design and
Construction of Road Tunnels – Civil Elements, Chapter 13. The AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications Section 12.6.1 exemption from seismic loading does not apply. The
design shall evaluate the seismic effects of transient racking deformations.

Culverts 7-02
Wingwalls, cutoff walls, and headwalls associated with the precast Structures shall
be designed in accordance with the WSDOT Geotechnical Design Manual M 46-03 and
Chapter 11 of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications, latest edition and current
interims in effect on the Bid advertising date, including seismic loads.
The Contractor shall use the geotechnical report prepared for this project and available
through the source(s) specified in the Special Provisions under Section 1-02.4(2).
Whenever the minimum finished backfill or surfacing depth above the top of the Structure
is less than 1’-0” (except when the top of the Structure is directly exposed to vehicular traffic),
either all steel reinforcing bars in the span unit shall be epoxy-coated with 2" minimum
concrete cover from the face of concrete to the face of the top mat of steel reinforcing bars,
or the minimum concrete cover shall be 2½". Whenever the top of the Structure is directly
exposed to vehicular traffic, all steel reinforcing bars in the span unit shall be epoxy-coated
and the minimum concrete cover dimension from face of concrete to the face of the top mat
of steel reinforcing bars shall be 2½". Concrete cover from the face of any concrete surface to
the face of any steel reinforcement shall be 1-inch minimum end clearance at all joints, and
2-inches minimum at all other locations.
7-02.3(6)A2 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of the precast Structures. Fabrication shop
drawings replicating complete design details when shown in the Plans shall be Type 2 Working
Drawings. Submittals completing the design based on the schematic geometric requirements
shown in the Plans, or proposing a Contractor designed alternative concrete culvert Structure
shall be Type 2E Working Drawings with supporting design calculations.
In addition to items 1 through 6 under shop drawing content requirements in
Section 6-02.3(28)A, the following shop drawing details shall be submitted:
1. Footing and slab base details for PRCTSS.
2. Wingwall, headwall, and cutoff wall details.
3. Erection and backfill procedure.
4. Complete, site specific, itemized bar list for all steel reinforcement.
If water is expected to be present in the excavation, or is found to be present once
excavation begins, the Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a
dewatering plan.
For precast Structures with a span length greater than 20-feet (as defined in
Section 7-02.3(6)A1), except when the depth of fill above the top of culvert exceeds the
Structure span length, a Type 2E Working Drawing shall be submitted consisting of a load
rating report prepared in accordance with the AASHTO Manual for Bridge Evaluation and
Bridge Design Manual LRFD Chapter 13. Soil pressures used shall include effects from the
backfill material and compaction methods, and shall be in accordance with the Geotechnical
Design Manual M 46-03 and the geotechnical report prepared for the project.
7-02.3(6)A3 Casting
Concrete shall conform to Section 6-02.3(28)B, with a 28-day compressive strength as
specified in the Plans or the Working Drawings submittal.
7-02.3(6)A4 Excavation and Bedding Preparation
All excavated material shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)D.
If water is present within the excavation, the Contractor shall dewater the excavated
area in accordance with the dewatering plan Working Drawing submittal before placing the
bedding material.
The upper layer of bedding course shall be a 6-inch minimum thickness layer of culvert
bedding material, defined as granular material either conforming to Section 9-03.12(3) or to
AASHTO Grading No. 57 as specified in Section 9-03.1(4)C. The plan limits of the culvert
bedding material shall extend 1-foot beyond the plan limits of the culvert or the Structure

7-02 Culverts
footing as applicable. The culvert bedding material shall be compacted in accordance with the
Section 2-09.3(1)E requirements for gravel backfill for drains. After compaction, the culvert
bedding material shall be screeded transversely to the specified line and grade. Voids in the
screeded culvert bedding material shall be filled and then rescreeded prior to erecting the
precast Structure.
7-02.3(6)A5 Wingwalls and Retaining Walls
Wingwalls and retaining walls (including cutoff walls and headwalls) shall be constructed
in accordance with the Contractor’s design and Working Drawing submittal or when the Plans
include a complete set of design details for a wall (defining panel shapes and dimensions,
concrete strength requirements, and steel reinforcing bar, joint, and connection details), the
details shown in the Plans.
Precast concrete construction shall conform to Sections 6-02.3(28) and 6-11.3(3).
Culvert bedding material shall be furnished, placed, and compacted in accordance with
Section 7-02.3(6)A4.
7-02.3(6)B Precast Reinf. Conc. Three Sided Structures (PRCTSS)
7-02.3(6)B1 Design Criteria
In addition to the design criteria specified in Section 7-02.3(6)A1, the following
shall apply.
PRCTSS shall be precast rigid frames with monolithic upper corners internally reinforced
for moment and shear resistance, except as otherwise noted. Connecting separate and
individually precast concrete panels together to form the specified three sided frame geometry
is acceptable provided the Structure system provides moment and shear resistance from the
lateral load from backfill placed full width and full height at one side only of the PRCTSS.
7-02.3(6)B2 Finishing
The Contractor shall mark the following information, using waterproof paint, on the inside
of a vertical leg of each precast section of the Structure:
1. PRCTSS span and rise dimensions, minimum and maximum design earth cover
dimensions, and vehicular live load for design (HL-93).
2. WSDOT Contract Number and date of fabrication.
3. Name or trademark of the fabricator.
7-02.3(6)B3 Erection
PRCTSS shall be erected and backfilled in accordance with the erection sequence specified
in the processed Working Drawings, and the construction equipment restrictions specified in
Section 6-02.3(25)O.
Adjacent precast sections shall be connected by welding the weld-tie anchors in accordance
with Section 6-03.3(25). Welding ground shall be attached directly to the steel plates being
welded when welding the weld-ties. The weld-tie anchor spacing shall not exceed 6’-0”. After
connecting the weld-tie anchors, the Contractor shall paint the exposed metal surfaces with
one coat of field primer conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)F. Keyways shall be filled with grout
conforming to Section 9-20.3(2).
7-02.3(6)C Precast Reinf. Conc. Box Culverts (PRCBC) and Precast Reinf. Conc. Split
Box Culverts (PRCSBC)
7-02.3(6)C1 Casting
PRCSBC shall consist of lid elements and “U” shaped base elements. The vertical legs of
the “U” shaped base elements shall be full height matching the rise of the culvert, except as
otherwise specified for culvert spans greater than 20-feet. For PRCSBC spans greater than
20-feet (as defined in Section 7-02.3(6)A1), the lid elements may include vertical legs of a
maximum length of 4-feet.

Culverts 7-02
All vertical and horizontal joints of PRCBC and PRCSBC elements shall be tongue and
groove type joints, except PRCBC and PRCSBC of 20-foot span or less may have keyway
joints connected by weld-tie anchors in accordance with Section 6-02.3(25)O. The weld-tie
anchor spacing shall not exceed 6’-0”. There shall be at least two galvanized steel tie plates
across each top unit tongue and groove joint and each tongue and groove joint between
upper and lower units, unless otherwise shown in the Plans or required by the seismic design
completed in accordance with Section 7-02.3(6)A1.
7-02.3(6)C2 Finishing
The following information shall be legibly and permanently marked on one inside face
of each PRCBC element, or one inside face of each PRCSBC “U” shaped base element by
indentation, waterproof paint, or other means acceptable to the Engineer:
1. Box section span and rise dimensions, minimum and maximum design earth cover
dimensions, and vehicular live load for design (HL-93).
2. WSDOT Contract Number and date of fabrication.
3. Name or trademark of the fabricator.
7-02.3(6)C3 Erection
PRCBC and PRCSBC shall be erected and backfilled in accordance with the erection
sequence specified in the Working Drawing submittal, and the construction equipment
restrictions specified in Section 6-02.3(25)O.
The Contractor shall install a continuous strip of butyl rubber sealant within all tongue and
groove joints prior to connecting the precast elements together. The butyl rubber sealant shall
have a minimum cross section of ½-inch by 1½-inch, unless otherwise shown in the Plans.
After connecting the joints with weld-tie anchors, the Contractor shall paint the exposed
metal surfaces with one coat of field primer conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)F. Keyways shall
be filled with grout conforming to Section 9-20.3(2).
The Contractor shall wrap all exterior joints along the top and sides of the PRCBC and
PRCSBC with a 12-inch wide strip of external sealing band centered about the joint and
adhesively bonded to the concrete surface.
Backfill beside the PRCBC and PRCSBC shall be brought up in sequential layers,
compacted concurrently. The difference in backfill height on opposing sides of the Structure
shall not exceed 2-feet.
7-02.4 Measurement
The length of culvert pipe or pipe arch will be the number of linear feet of completed
installation measured along the invert. Pipe placed in excess of the length designated by the
Engineer will not be measured or paid for.
Beveled end sections will be considered as part of the culvert pipe and shall be measured
as culverts.
Flared steel and aluminum end sections will be measured by the number of integral units
of the dimension specified including toe plate extensions if called for in the Plans.
The pipe connector section of end section Design A shall be fabricated as a part of the
integral unit of the end section but will be measured as linear feet of pipe or pipe arch of the
treatment, thickness and dimensions of pipe to which it is attached. If there is no Bid item
for pipe of the proper dimensions for the end sections, the pipe connector sections will be
considered as part of the integral unit and will not be measured as pipe.
Pipe connector sections of end section Design B will be considered part of the integral unit
and measurement will be by number of integral units of the type and dimension specified.
The length of safety bars for culvert pipe will be the number of linear feet of each safety
bar installed.
Tapered end section with safety bars will be measured by the unit per each.
Culvert bedding material will be measured by the cubic yard of material placed.

7-02 Culverts
7-02.5 Payment
“Schedule ____ Culv. Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Plain Conc. Culv. Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear feet.
“Cl. ____ Reinf. Conc. Culv. Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Plain St. Culv. Pipe ____ In. Th. ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Tr. ____ St. Culv. Pipe ____ In. Th. ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Plain St. Culv. Pipe Arch ____ In. Th. ____ In. Span”, per linear foot.
“Tr. ____ St. Culv. Pipe Arch ____ In. Th. ____ In. Span”, per linear foot.
“Plain Nestable St. Pipe ____ In. Th. ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Tr. ____ Nestable St. Pipe ____ In. Th. ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Plain Al. Culv. Pipe ____ In. Th. ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Plain Al. Culv. Pipe Arch ____ In. Th. ____ In. Span”, per linear foot.
“Relaying (type of Pipe and Size)”, per linear foot.
“Solid Wall PVC Culv. Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Profile Wall PVC Culv. Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Corrugated Polyethylene Culv. Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“St. Rib Reinf Polyethylene Culv. Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Polypropylene Culvert Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
Where culvert pipes are to be removed but are not to be relaid, all costs in connection
with the removal shall be included in the unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Structure
Excavation Class B” or “Structure Excavation Class B Incl. Haul”.
“Flared End Section ____ In. Diam.”, per each.
“Flared End Section ____ In. Span”, per each.
“Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe Type ____”, per linear foot.
“Tapered End Sect. with Type ____ Safety Bars ____ In. Diam.”, per each.
“Precast Reinf. Conc. Three Sided Structure No.___”, lump sum.
“Precast Reinf. Conc. Box Culvert No.___”, lump sum.
“Precast Reinf. Conc. Split Box Culvert No.___”, lump sum.
“Culvert Bedding Material”, per cubic yard.

Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, Arch, and Underpass 7-03
7-03 Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, Arch, and Underpass

7-03.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing structural plate pipe, pipe arches, arches, and
underpasses of the various types and designs in accordance with the Plans, these
Specifications, and the Standard Plans, at the locations and in conformity with the lines
and grades staked.
Structural plate pipes shall be full circle of the type, gage or thickness, and
diameter specified.
Structural plate pipe arches shall be a multi-centered shape made up of four circular arcs
tangent to each other at their junctions and symmetrical about the vertical axis and of the type,
gage or thickness, and span specified.
Structural plate arches shall be a single-centered circular arc shape, placed on a reinforced
concrete foundation, and of the design, type, gage or thickness, and span as provided for in
the Plans.
Structural plate underpasses shall be a multi-centered shape made up of a variable number
of circular arcs tangent to each other at their junctions and symmetrical about the vertical axis
and of the design, type, gage or thickness, and span specified.
7-03.2 Materials
Concrete Class 3000 6-02
Corrugated Steel 9-05.6(8)
Corrugated Aluminum 9-05.6(8)
Alternate installations shown in the Proposal may be constructed provided there is
no increase in the total cost of the installation or detriment to the Contracting Agency.
Measurement for payment of the Bid items associated with the drainage installation will be
based on the size of the installation described by the Bid item in the Proposal.
If the Contractor elects to use an alternate installation, Type 2 Working Drawings
consisting of plans for the alternate shall be submitted.
7-03.3(1) Foundations, General
Structural plate pipes, pipe arches, underpasses, and bases for arches shall be placed
on stable foundations prepared to the widths, depth, and grade given by the Engineer. Soft
spots encountered in the base shall be excavated to a depth designated by the Engineer and
be backfilled with gravel or other suitable material and thoroughly compacted.
Rock, in either ledge or boulder formation, hard pan, or cemented gravel occurring in
the base material shall be excavated below grade and backfilled with suitable material so
there will be a minimum 8-inch cushion under the pipes, pipe arches, or underpasses.
When aluminum pipe or pipe arch is in contact with cement concrete, two coats of paint
shall be applied in accordance with Section 7-08.3(2)D.
7-03.3(1)A Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, and Underpass
The base for structural plate pipes, pipe arches and underpasses shall be shaped to conform
to their bottom and shall form firm and uniform bearing throughout their length. Where pipes,
pipe arches, or underpasses are to be installed in new embankment, the embankment shall be
constructed to the ⅓ point of structural plate pipes (measured from the invert of the pipe), to
the height of maximum horizontal dimension of structural plate pipe arches and as provided
for in the Standard Plans or, in the case of a special design, in the Plans for structural plate
underpasses, after which the trench shall be excavated and installation made.

7-03 Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, Arch, and Underpass
7-03.3(1)B Structural Plate Arch

The base for structural plate arches shall be as shown in the Plans.
7-03.3(2) Assembling
Structural plate pipes, pipe arches, arches, and underpasses shall be assembled in place
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, which shall accompany the shipment of
materials and show the position of each plate and the order of assembly.
Bolts and bolted connections shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 167 for
steel and AASHTO M 219 for aluminum.
7-03.3(3) Backfilling
After the structural plate pipe, pipe arch, arch, or underpass has been placed in position
it shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 7-08.3(3).
7-03.3(4) Invert Treatment
Earth, or other material as specified, shall be placed and compacted in the invert of
structural plate pipes, pipe arches, or underpasses in conformance with the Plans, Special
Provisions, or the Standard Plans.
7-03.3(5) Headwalls
If headwalls are specified in the Plans, they shall be constructed as soon as the embankment
has been completed to a sufficient height over the Structure to allow the required Work.
Headwalls shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 6-02.
When aluminum pipe or pipe arch is in contact with cement concrete, two coats of paint
shall be applied in accordance with Section 7-08.3(2)D.
7-03.3(6) Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe
When shown in the Plans, safety bars for culvert pipe shall be constructed in accordance
with the Standard Plans and shall meet the requirements of Section 9-05.18.
7-03.4 Measurement
The length of structural plate pipes, pipe arches, arches, and underpasses will be the
number of linear feet of completed installation measured along the invert. Pipe placed in
excess of the length designated by the Engineer will not be measured or paid for.
Concrete will be measured by the cubic yard as specified in Section 6-02.
Steel reinforcing bars will be measured by the pound as specified in Section 6-02.
Structure excavation Class B and Structure excavation Class B including haul will be
measured by the cubic yard as specified in Section 2-09.4.
Gravel backfill for foundation Class A or Class B will be measured by the cubic yard as
specified in Section 2-09.4.
Shoring or extra excavation will be measured as specified in Section 2-09.4.
The length of safety bars for culvert pipe will be the number of linear feet of each safety
bar installed.
Tapered end Section with safety bars will be measured by the unit per each.

Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, Arch, and Underpass 7-03
7-03.5 Payment
“St. Str. Plate Pipe ____ Gage ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“St. Str. Plate Pipe Arch ____ Gage ____ Ft. Span”, per linear foot.
“St. Str. Plate Arch ____ Gage ____ Ft. Span”, per linear foot.
“Design ____ St. Underpass ____ Gage ____ Ft. Span”, per linear foot.
All costs involved in obtaining, hauling, placing, and finishing earth to be placed in the
invert of the underpass shall be included in the unit Contract price for “Design ____ St.
Underpass ____ Gage ____ Ft. ____ In. Span”.
“Al. Str. Plate Pipe ____ In. Th. ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Al. Str. Plate Pipe Arch ____ In. Th. ____ Ft. ____ In. Span”, per linear foot.
“Al. Str. Plate Arch ____ In. Th. ____ Ft. ____ In. Span”, per linear foot.
“Design ____ Al. Underpass ____ In. Th. ____ Ft. ____ In. Span”, per linear foot.
All costs involved in obtaining, hauling, placing, and finishing earth to be placed in the
invert of the underpass shall be included in the unit Contract price for “Design ____ Al.
Underpass ____ In. Th. ____ Ft. ____ In. Span”.
“Conc. Class ____”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Conc. Class ____” shall be paid as specified in
Section 6-02.
“St. Reinf. Bar”, per pound.
The unit Contract price per pound for “St. Reinf. Bar” shall be paid as specified in
Section 6-02.
“Gravel Backfill for Foundation Class ____”, per cubic yard.
“Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe Type ____”, per linear foot.
“Tapered End Section with Type ____ Safety Bars ____ In. Diam.”, per each.
“Tapered End Section with Type ____ Safety Bars ____ In. Span”, per each.

7-04 Storm Sewers
7-04 Storm Sewers

7-04.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing storm sewer lines in accordance with the Plans,
these Specifications, and the Standard Plans, as staked.
7-04.2 Materials
Plain Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.7(1)
Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.7(2)
Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.9
Steel Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.10
Aluminum Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.11
Solid Wall PVC Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.12(1)
Profile Wall PVC Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.12(2)
Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.17
Corrugated Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.20
Steel Rib Reinforced Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.22
High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe 9-05.23
Polypropylene Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.24
Where steel or aluminum are referred to in this section in regard to a kind of storm
sewer pipe, it shall be understood that steel is zinc coated (galvanized) or aluminum coated
(aluminized) corrugated iron or steel and aluminum is corrugated aluminum alloy as specified
in Sections 9-05.4 and 9-05.5.
Thermoplastic storm sewer pipe includes solid wall PVC storm sewer pipe, profile wall
PVC storm sewer pipe, corrugated polyethylene storm sewer pipe, and polypropylene storm
sewer pipe.
Measurement for payment of the Bid items associated with the storm sewer installation
will be based on the diameter of the storm sewer pipe described by the Bid item in the Plans.
It is not necessary that all storm sewer pipe on any one project be of the same kind of
material. However, all contiguous pipe shall be of the same size, material, thickness, class,
and treatment and shall be that required for the maximum height of cover.
When schedule A or B storm sewer pipe is specified in the Plans, the Contractor shall
provide the specified schedule and diameter but has the option of furnishing any of the
acceptable materials shown in the Storm Sewer Pipe Schedules Table.
Storm sewers shall be constructed in accordance with Section 7-08.3.
7-04.3(1) Cleaning and Testing
7-04.3(1)A General
The requirements of Section 7-17.3(2)A shall apply to storm sewers.
7-04.3(1)B Exfiltration Test – Storm Sewers
Prior to making exfiltration leakage tests, the Contractor may fill the pipe with clear water
to permit normal absorption into the pipe walls.
Leakage shall be no more than 1 gallon per hour per inch of diameter per 100 feet of
storm sewer pipe, with a minimum test pressure of 6 feet of water column above the crown
at the upper end of the pipe or above the active ground water table, whichever is higher as
determined by the Engineer. The length of pipe tested shall be limited so that the pressure
on the invert of the lower end of the Section tested shall not exceed 16 feet of water column.
For each increase in pressure of 2 feet above a basic 6 feet measured above the crown at the
lower end of the test section, the allowable leakage shall be increased by 10 percent.

Storm Sewer Pipe Schedules
Aluminum
2⅔″ × ½″ Corr. Spiral Rib
Steel3 • Tr. 5 • Tr. 5
Storm Sewers
Schedules PE2 2⅔″ × ½″ • Plain With • Plain With

(Fill Ht.) Dia. (In.) Concrete PVC1 PP4 or Spiral Rib Gasketed Seams Gasketed Seams
12 Plain or Cl. IV SW or PW Allowed 0.064″ (16 Ga.) 0.060″ (16 Ga.) 0.060″ (16 Ga.)
A
30 Class III PW Allowed 0.064″ (16 Ga.) 0.075″ (14 Ga.) 0.060″ (16 Ga.)
2′ − 15′
2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

12 Class V SW or PW Allowed 0.064″ (16 Ga.) 0.060″ (16 Ga.) 0.060″ (16 Ga.)
B
30 Class V PW Allowed 0.064″ (16 Ga.) 0.075″ (14 Ga.) 0.075″ (14 Ga.)
15′ − 25′
1PVC = Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe, SW = Solid Wall PVC, PW = Profile Wall PVC
2PE = Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe
3Steel pipe options for either 2⅔″ × ½″ corrugations or spiral rib include: Tr. 5 galvanized, Tr. 2 galvanized with gasketed seams, Tr. 5 aluminized, or plain aluminized with gasketed seams.
4PP = Polypropylene Pipe, 12 inch to 30 inch approved for Schedule A and Schedule B and 36 inch to 60 inch diameters approved for Schedule A only.
Page 7-15
7-04
7-04 Storm Sewers
7-04.3(1)C Infiltration Test – Storm Sewers

Whenever the ground water table is above the crown of the higher end of the pipe
section at the time of testing, an infiltration test may be performed in lieu of the exfiltration
test upon written permission of the Engineer. The maximum allowable limit for infiltration
shall be 0.8 gallon per hour per inch of diameter per 100 feet of length with no allowance
for external hydrostatic head.
7-04.3(1)D Other Test Allowances – Storm Sewers
Other allowances for infiltration and exfiltration tests shall be in accordance with
Section 7-17.3(2)D.
7-04.3(1)E Low Pressure Air Test for Storm Sewers Constructed of Air
Permeable Materials
When air permeable pipe is subjected to a low-pressure air test, all of the provisions of
Section 7-17.3(2)E shall apply, except that the time in seconds for the pressure drop shall
be equal to or greater than the required time as shown in the table below:
Time in Seconds for Pressure Drop
Pipe Dia. Pipe Length (ft)
(in) 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
4 5 9 14 18 22 27 31 36 40 45
6 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 85 85
8 18 36 54 71 89 107 114 114 114 114
10 28 56 84 111 139 142 142 142 143 159
12 40 80 120 160 170 170 170 183 206 228
15 63 125 188 213 213 214 250 286 320 360
18 90 180 255 255 257 310 360 410 460 520
21 123 245 298 298 350 420 490 560 630 700
24 160 320 340 370 460 550 640 730 830 920
27 203 390 390 460 580 700 810 930 1040 1160
30 250 430 430 570 720 860 1000 1140 1290 1430
All time values listed in the table are in seconds. If a section to be tested includes more
than one pipe size, the total time required can be found by adding the time values for each size
of pipe and its corresponding length. Interpolate between valves for pipe lengths not shown.
Pipe over 30 inches in diameter shall be tested one joint at a time in accordance with
ASTM C1103.
7-04.3(1)F Low Pressure Air Test for Storm Sewers Constructed of Non Air Permeable
Materials
When non air permeable pipe is subjected to a low-pressure air test, all of the provisions
of Section 7-17.3(2)E shall apply, except that the time in seconds for the pressure drop shall
be equal to or greater than four times the time shown in the table listed in Section 7-04.3(1)E.
ASTM C1103.
Reaches of thermoplastic pipe containing no joints shall be exempt from testing
requirements.

Storm Sewers 7-04
7-04.4 Measurement
The length of storm sewer pipe will be the number of linear feet of completed installation
measured along the invert and will include the length through elbows, tees, and fittings.
The number of linear feet will be measured from the center of manhole to center of manhole
or to the inside face of catch basins and similar type Structures.
The length of testing storm sewer pipe in conformance with Section 7-17.3(2)A will be
the number of linear feet of completed installation actually tested.
7-04.5 Payment
“Plain Conc. Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Class ____ Reinf. Conc. Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Tr. ____ St. Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Th. ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Tr. ____ Al. Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Th. ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Solid Wall PVC Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Profile Wall PVC Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Corrugated Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Schedule ____ Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“St. Rib Reinf Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam”, per linear foot.
“High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Polypropylene Storm Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for storm sewer pipe of the kind and size specified
shall be full pay for all Work to complete the installation, including adjustment of inverts
to manholes.
“Testing Storm Sewer Pipe”, per linear foot.

7-05 Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins, and Drywells

7-05.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing manholes, inlets, drywells, and catch basins and
connecting to existing Structures of the types and sizes designated in accordance with
the Plans, these Specifications, and the Standard Plans, in conformity with the lines and
grades staked.
7-05.2 Materials
Concrete 6-02
Crushed Surfacing Base Course 9-03.9(3)
Gravel Backfill for Drywells 9-03.12(5)
Rubber Gaskets 9-04.4
Flexible Plastic Gaskets 9-04.5
Metal Castings 9-05.15
Grate Inlets and Drop Inlets 9-05.16
Concrete Blocks 9-12.1
Concrete Brick 9-12.2
Precast Concrete Manhole 9-05.50(2)
Precast Concrete Catch Basins 9-05.50(3)
Precast Concrete Inlets 9-05.50(4)
Precast Concrete Drywells 9-05.50(5)
Underground Drainage Geotextile, Moderate Survivability 9-33.1
Mortar 9-20.4
The excavation for all manholes, inlets, and catch basins shall be sufficient to leave 1 foot
in the clear between their outer surfaces and the earth bank.
The excavation for drywells shall be in accordance with the Standard Plans. The drywell
and gravel backfill for drywell shall be completely encased in moderate survivability
underground drainage geotextile in accordance with the Standard Plans and in conformance
with Section 2-12.3. During construction of the drywell, all necessary precautions shall be
taken to prevent debris and eroded material from entering the drywell.
The cover or grating of a manhole, catch basin, or inlet shall not be grouted to final grade
until the final elevation of the pavement, gutter, ditch, or sidewalk in which it is to be placed
has been established, and until permission thereafter is given by the Engineer to grout the
cover or grating in place. Covers shall be seated properly to prevent rocking. Leveling and
adjustment devices that do not modify the structural integrity of the metal frame, grate or
cover, and do not void the originating foundry’s compliance to these specifications and
warranty are allowed. Approved leveling devices are listed in the Qualified Products List.
Leveling and adjusting devices that interfere with the backfilling, backfill density, grouting
and asphalt density will not be allowed. The hardware for leveling and adjusting devices shall
be completely removed when specified by the Engineer.
The channels in manholes shall conform accurately to the sewer grade.
Ladder rungs shall be grouted in the precast concrete walls. Rungs shall be uniformly
spaced at 12 inches and be vertically aligned.
In the event any pipe enters the manhole through the precast concrete units, the Contractor
shall make the necessary cut through the manhole wall and steel mesh. The steel shall be cut
flush with the face of the concrete and shall be cut in such a manner that it will not loosen the
reinforcement in the manhole wall.
The ends of all pipes shall be trimmed flush with the inside walls.

Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins, and Drywells 7-05
Rubber gaskets or flexible plastic gaskets may be used in tongue and groove joints
of precast units. Joints between precast manhole units used for sanitary sewers shall be
rubber gasketed. All other joints and all openings cut through the walls shall be grouted
and watertight. Mortar shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-20.4(3).
If gaskets are used, handling of the precast units after the gasket has been affixed shall be
done carefully to avoid disturbing or damaging the gasket or contaminating it with foreign
material. Care shall be exercised to attain proper alignment before the joints are entirely
forced home. During insertion of the tongue or spigot, the units shall be partially supported
to minimize unequal lateral pressure on the gasket and to maintain concentricity until the
gasket is properly positioned.
Rigid pipes connecting to sanitary sewer manholes shall be provided with a flexible
joint at a distance from the face of the manhole of not more than 1½ times the nominal pipe
diameter or 18 inches, whichever is greater.
Flexible pipes connecting to sanitary sewer manholes shall be provided with an entry
coupling or gasket approved by the Engineer. No pipe joint in flexible pipe shall be placed
within 10 feet of the manhole.
Backfilling around the Work will not be allowed until the concrete or mortar has
thoroughly set.
Catch basins, manholes, and inlets shall be watertight.
Catch basin, grate inlet, and drop inlet connections to a sewer shall be so placed that the
connecting pipe may be easily rodded over its entire length. After the connections are made,
the Contractor shall rod all inlet and outlet pipes. All connections that cannot be successfully
rodded shall be removed and new connections made.
Backfilling of manholes, inlets, catch basins, and drywells shall be done in accordance
with the provisions of Section 2-09.
Manholes, catch basins, inlets, and drywells shall be constructed on a compacted or
undisturbed level foundation. If the Contractor elects to use a separate cast-in-place base,
the concrete shall be Class 4000. Upon final acceptance of the Work, all manholes, catch
basins, inlets, drywells, and other drainage Structures shall conform to the requirements of
the Standard Plans except as approved by the Engineer.
Any shoring or extra excavation required shall meet the requirements of Section 2-09.3.
7-05.3(1) Adjusting Manholes and Catch Basins to Grade
Where shown in the Plans or where directed by the Engineer, the existing manholes,
catch basins, or inlets shall be adjusted to the grade as staked or otherwise designated by
the Engineer.
The existing cast iron ring and cover on manholes and the catch basin and inlet frame
and grate shall first be removed and thoroughly cleaned for reinstalling at the new elevation.
From that point, the existing Structure shall be raised or lowered to the required elevation.
The materials and method of construction shall conform to the requirements specified above,
and the finished Structure shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Plans except as
7-05.3(2) Abandon Existing Manholes
Where it is required that an existing manhole be abandoned, the Structure shall be
broken down to a depth of at least 4 feet below the revised surface elevation, all connections
plugged, and the manhole filled with sand and compacted to 90 percent density as specified
in Section 2-03.3(14)C. Debris resulting from breaking the upper part of the manhole may
be mixed with the sand subject to the approval of the Engineer. The ring and cover shall be
salvaged and all other surplus material disposed of.

7-05.3(3) Connections to Existing Manholes

The Contractor shall verify invert elevations prior to construction. The crown elevation
of laterals shall be the same as the crown elevation of the incoming pipe unless specified.
The existing base shall be reshaped to provide a channel equivalent to that specified for a
new manhole.
The Contractor shall excavate completely around the manhole to prevent unbalanced
loading. The manhole shall be kept in operation at all times and the necessary precautions shall
be taken to prevent debris or other material from entering the sewer, including a tight pipeline
bypass through the existing channel if required. Water used for flushing and testing shall not
be allowed to enter the sewer.
All damage to the manhole resulting from the Contractor’s operation shall be repaired at
no expense to the Contracting Agency.
7-05.3(4) Drop Manhole Connection
Drop manhole connections shall be constructed in accordance with the Plans. One length
of ductile iron pipe shall be provided outside the manhole.
7-05.4 Measurement
Manholes will be measured per each. In addition to the measurement per each, manholes
in excess of 10 feet in height will be measured per linear foot for each additional foot of height
over 10 feet. Measurement of manhole heights for payment purposes will be the distance from
the flow line of the outlet pipe to the top of the manhole ring measured to the nearest foot.
Catch basins and inlets, will be measured per each.
Adjustment of manholes, catch basins, and inlets will be per each.
Structure excavation Class B and Structure excavation Class B including haul will be
measured by the cubic yard as specified in Section 2-09.
Abandon existing manholes will be measured per each.
Connections to existing drainage Structures will be measured per each.
Shoring or extra excavation will be measured as specified in Section 2-09.4.
Drop manhole connections will be measured per each.
Precast concrete drywell will be measured per each.
7-05.5 Payment
“Manhole ____ In. Diam. Type ____”, per each.
“Manhole Additional Height ____ In. Diam. Type ____”, per linear foot.
“Catch Basin Type ____”, per each.
“Catch Basin Type 2 ____ In. Diam.”, per each.
“Grate Inlet Type ____”, per each.
“Drop Inlet Type ____”, per each.
“Concrete Inlet”, per each
All costs associated with furnishing and installing gravel backfill for bedding manholes,
inlets and catch basins shall be included in the unit Contract price for the item installed.
“Precast Concrete Drywell”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Precast Concrete Drywell” shall be full pay for
furnishing and installing the drywell, including all Structure excavation, gravel backfill for
drywell, crushed surfacing base course, and drainage geotextile.
“Combination Inlet”, per each.

Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins, and Drywells 7-05
All costs associated with furnishing and installing gravel backfill for bedding manholes,
inlets, and catch basins shall be in the unit Contract price for the item installed.
“Adjust Manhole”, per each.
“Adjust Catch Basin”, per each.
“Adjust Inlet, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Adjust Manhole”, “Adjust Catch Basin”, or “Adjust
Inlet” shall be full pay for all costs necessary to make the adjustment including restoration of
adjacent areas in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
Structure excavation for concrete inlets is considered incidental to the cost of the inlets and
shall be included in the unit Contract price for the concrete inlet.
“Abandon Existing Manhole”, per each.
“Connection to Drainage Structure”, per each.
“Drop Manhole Connection”, per each.
The price paid per drop connection is in addition to the price paid for manholes and for the
specified sewer pipe that is replaced with ductile iron pipe.

7-06 Vacant
7-06 Vacant

Cleaning Existing Drainage Structures 7-07
7-07 Cleaning Existing Drainage Structures

7-07.1 Description
This Work consists of cleaning, removing, and disposing of all debris and obstructions
from existing culvert pipes, storm sewer pipes, drains, inlet Structures, manholes, box culverts,
grates, trash racks, or other drainage features within the limits of the project.
7-07.2 Vacant
All pipes and drainage Structures that require cleaning are identified in the Plans.
They shall be cleaned by flushing, rodding, or whatever means are necessary to provide
unobstructed drainage. All catch basin sumps, manholes, inlet and outlet Structures, and
debris racks shall also be freed of all dirt, rock, and debris. Existing drainage facilities shall
be cleaned as a first order of Work to enhance natural drainage off and through the project.
They shall be kept clean throughout the life of the project and be clean upon final acceptance
of the Work.
Material to be removed shall be disposed of in the following manner:
1. Structures specifically noted in the Contract that are suspected to contain contaminated
sediment shall be disposed of at a licensed disposal facility.
2. While performing the Work, if drainage water and/or soil appear oily, exhibit an unusual
color or odor, or if staining or corrosion is observed, the Contractor shall stop work and
immediately notify the Engineer. Additional work necessary in handling materials shall
be in accordance with Section 1-04.4.
3. If sediment and water from structures does not meet the conditions described in 1 or 2
above, material may be placed in an upland area with no possibility of surface runoff to
waters of the State, including wetlands.
While performing the Work, the Contractor shall implement all necessary best management
practices and measures to meet the conditions of Section 1-07.5.
7-07.4 Vacant
7-07.5 Payment
“Cleaning Existing Drainage Structure”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract price for “Cleaning Existing Drainage Structure” shall be full pay
for performing all Work as specified. In the event the Contract does not include a Bid item
for cleaning existing drainage Structure, such Work, if required, shall be performed by the
Contractor in accordance with Section 1-04.4.

7-08 General Pipe Installation Requirements

7-08.1 Description
This Work includes installing culverts, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. The Contractor
shall also follow Section 7-02, 7-04, or 7-17 as it applies to the specific kind of Work.
7-08.2 Materials
Gravel Backfill for Foundations 9-03.12(1)
7-08.3(1) Excavation and Preparation of Trench
7-08.3(1)A Trenches
The length of trench excavation in advance of pipe laying shall be kept to a minimum.
Excavations shall either be closed up at the end of the day or protected per Section 1-07.23(1).
The trench width shall be as specified in Section 2-09.4 and shall be excavated to the depth
and grade as staked by the Engineer.
Trenches must be of sufficient width in the pipe zone to permit proper installation and
bedding of the pipe and to provide the required compaction of backfill. Above the top of the
pipe zone, the Contractor may excavate to any width.
All ledgerock, boulders, and stones shall be removed to provide a minimum of 6 inches
clearance under all portions of the pipe.
Placement of bedding material shall precede the installation of all pipe. This shall include
necessary leveling of the native trench bottom or the top of the foundation material as well as
placement and compaction of required bedding material to a uniform grade so that the entire
length of pipe will be supported on a uniformly dense unyielding foundation.
When, after excavating to the foundation level, the material remaining in the trench
bottom is determined to be unsuitable by the Engineer, excavation shall be continued to such
additional depth and width as required by the Engineer. Unsuitable foundation materials shall
be disposed of at an approved site. The trench foundation shall be backfilled to the bottom of
the pipe zone with gravel backfill for foundations, gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding, or
other suitable material, and compacted to form a uniformly dense, unyielding foundation.
All material excavated from trenches and piled adjacent to the trench shall be maintained
so that the toe of the slope is at least 2 feet from the edge of the trench. It shall be piled to
cause a minimum of inconvenience to public travel, and provision shall be made for merging
traffic where necessary. Free access shall be provided to all fire hydrants, water valves, and
meters; and clearance shall be left to enable free flow of storm water in gutters, conduits, or
natural watercourses.
If any part of the excavated material meets the Specifications of Section 9-03.12(3), the
Engineer may require that such material, in the quantity required, be selectively removed,
stockpiled separately, and used as pipe bedding instead of quantities of gravel backfill for
pipe zone bedding. If material so stockpiled becomes contaminated, the Contractor shall
furnish suitable material in an amount equal to that lost by contamination at no expense to
the Contracting Agency. All costs involved in storing, protecting, re-handling, and placing
the material shall be included in other items of Work on the project.
Excavation for manholes and other Structures connected to the pipelines shall be sufficient
to provide a minimum of 12 inches between their surfaces and the sides of the excavation.
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and operate all necessary equipment to keep
excavations above the foundation level free from water during construction, and shall dewater
and dispose of the water so as not to cause injury to public or private property or nuisance
to the public. Sufficient pumping equipment in good working condition shall be available at
all times for all emergencies, including power outage, and shall have available at all times
competent workers for the operation of the pumping equipment.

General Pipe Installation Requirements 7-08
Where pipe is to be placed in a new embankment, the embankment shall be constructed

as shown in the Plans or as designated by the Engineer for a distance each side of the pipe
location of not less than five times the diameter and to a minimum height equal to ½ of the
outside diameter of the pipe. The embankment material shall be compacted to 95 percent
of maximum density and the moisture content at the time of compaction shall be between
optimum and 3 percentage points below optimum as determined by the Compaction Control
Tests specified in Section 2-03.3(14)D. The trench shall then be excavated to a width as
specified in Section 2-09.4, and the pipe installed in accordance with the Standard Plans.
7-08.3(1)B Shoring
The Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, and equipment necessary to shore
trenches to protect the Work, existing property, utilities, pavement, etc., and to provide safe
working conditions in the trench. The Contractor may elect to use any combination of shoring
and overbreak, tunneling, boring, sliding trench shield, or other method of accomplishing the
Work consistent with applicable local, State, or Federal safety codes.
If workers enter any trench or other excavation 4 feet or more in depth that does not meet
the open pit requirements of Section 2-09.3(3)B, it shall be shored. The Contractor alone shall
be responsible for worker safety, and the Contracting Agency assumes no responsibility.
Upon completing the Work, the Contractor shall remove all shoring unless the Plans or the
Engineer direct otherwise.
Shoring to be removed, or moveable trench shields or boxes, shall be located at least
2½ pipe diameters away from metal or thermoplastic pipe if the bottom of the shoring, shield,
or box extends below the top of the pipe, unless a satisfactory means of reconsolidating the
bedding or side support material disturbed by shoring removal can be demonstrated.
Damages resulting from improper shoring or failure to shore shall be the sole responsibility
of the Contractor.
7-08.3(1)C Bedding the Pipe
Pipe zone bedding material shall provide uniform support along the entire pipe barrel,
without load concentration at joint collars or bells. All adjustment to line and grade shall be
made by scraping away or filling in with bedding material under the body of the pipe and
not by blocking or wedging. Bedding disturbed by pipe movement, or by removal of shoring
movement of a trench shield or box, shall be reconsolidated prior to backfill.
Pipe zone bedding shall be as specified in the Standard Plans and shall be placed in loose
layers and compacted to 90 percent maximum density. Bedding shall be placed, spread, and
compacted before the pipe is installed so that the pipe is uniformly supported along the barrel.
Lifts of not more than 6 inches in thickness shall be placed and compacted along the sides of
the pipe to the height shown in the Standard Plans. Material shall be worked carefully under
the pipe haunches and then compacted.
If the Engineer determines that the material existing in the bottom of the trench is
satisfactory for bedding the pipe, the bedding material specified in the Standard Plans is not
required, provided the existing material is loosened, regraded, and compacted to form a dense,
unyielding base.
7-08.3(2) Laying Pipe
7-08.3(2)A Survey Line and Grade
Survey line and grade control hubs will be placed in a manner consistent with accepted
practices.
The Contractor shall transfer line and grade into the trench where they shall be carried by
means of a laser beam or taut grade line supported on firmly set batter boards at intervals of
not more than 30 feet. Not less than three batter boards shall be in use at one time. Grades
shall be constantly checked and in the event the batter boards do not line up, the Work shall
be immediately stopped, the Engineer notified, and the cause remedied before proceeding
with the Work. Any other procedure shall have the written approval of the Engineer.

7-08.3(2)B Pipe Laying – General

After an accurate grade line has been established, the pipe shall be laid in conformity with
the established line and grade in the properly dewatered trench. Mud, silt, gravel, and other
foreign material shall be kept out of the pipe and off the jointing surfaces.
All pipe laid in the trench to the specified line and grade shall be kept in longitudinal
compression until the backfill has been compacted to the crown of the pipe. All pipe shall
be laid to conform to the prescribed line and grade shown in the Plans, within the limits
that follow.
Pipe shall be laid to a true line and grade at the invert of the pipe and the Contractor shall
exercise care in matching pipe joints for concentricity and compatibility. In no case shall two
pipes be joined together with ends having the maximum manufacturer’s tolerance. The invert
line may vary from the true line and grade within the limits stated to develop uniformity,
concentricity, and uniform compression of jointing material provided such variance does not
result in a reverse sloping invert. The limit of the variance at the invert shall not exceed plus
or minus 0.03 feet at the time of backfill. Checking of the invert elevation of the pipe may
be made by calculations from measurements on the top of the pipe.
The pipe, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, shall be laid up grade from point
of connection on the existing pipe or from a designated starting point. The pipe shall be
installed with the bell end forward or upgrade. When pipe laying is not in progress, the
forward end of the pipe shall be kept tightly closed with an approved temporary plug.
Where pipe joints must be deflected within the manufacturer’s recommended limits
to accommodate required horizontal or vertical curvature, it shall first be joined in straight
alignment and then deflected as required.
Where pipe joints must be deflected to an amount greater than the manufacturer’s
recommended limits to accommodate required horizontal or vertical curvature, the curves
shall be achieved with a series of tangents and shop fabricated bends, subject to the approval
of the Engineer.
Upon final acceptance of the Work, all pipe and appurtenances shall be open, clean, and
free draining.
7-08.3(2)C Pipe Laying – Concrete
For concrete pipe with elliptical reinforcement, the markings indicating the minor axis
of the reinforcement shall be placed in a vertical plane (top or bottom) when the pipe is laid.
7-08.3(2)D Pipe Laying – Steel or Aluminum
Pipe with riveted or resistance spot welded seams shall be laid in the trench with the
outside laps of circumferential joints upgrade and with longitudinal laps positioned other
than in the invert, and firmly joined together with approved bands.
Aluminum pipe or pipe arch used in cement concrete shall be painted with two coats of
paint. The paint shall cover all the surfaces in contact with the cement concrete and extend
one inch beyond the point of contact. The aluminum pipe to be painted shall be cleaned with
solvent to remove contaminants. After cleaning, the pipe shall be painted with two coats of
paint conforming to Federal Specification TT-P-645 (primer, paint, zinc chromate, alkyd
vehicle). Aluminized steel pipe will not require painting when placed in Controlled Density
Fill (CDF) or when in contact concrete head walls.
All costs of cleaning and painting the aluminum surfaces as specified shall be included in
the unit Contract price per linear foot for the aluminum pipe or pipe arch.
7-08.3(2)E Rubber Gasketed Joints
In laying pipe with rubber gaskets, the pipe shall be handled carefully to avoid knocking
the gasket out of position or contaminating it with foreign material. Any gasket so disturbed
shall be removed, cleaned, relubricated if required, and replaced before joining the sections.

General Pipe Installation Requirements 7-08
The pipe shall be properly aligned before joints are forced home. Sufficient pressure shall
be applied in making the joint to ensure that the joint is home, as defined in the standard
installation instructions provided by the pipe manufacturer. The Contractor may use any
method acceptable to the Engineer for pulling the pipe together, except that driving or
ramming by hand or machinery will not be permitted. Any pipe damaged during joining and
joint tightening shall be removed and replaced at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
Care shall be taken to properly align the pipe before joints are entirely forced home. During
insertion of the tongue or spigot, the pipe shall be partially supported by hand, sling or crane
to minimize unequal lateral pressure on the gasket and to maintain concentricity until the
gasket is properly positioned. Since most gasketed joints tend to creep apart when the end of
the pipe is deflected and straightened, such movement shall be held to a minimum once the
joint is home.
Sufficient restraint shall be applied to the line to ensure that joints once home are held so
by compacting backfill material under and alongside the pipe or by other acceptable means.
At the end of the work day, the last pipe shall be blocked in such a manner as may be required
to prevent creep.
7-08.3(2)F Plugs and Connections
Plugs for pipe branches, stubs, or other open ends which are not to be immediately
connected shall be made of an approved material and shall be secured in a place with a joint
comparable to the main line joint, or stoppers may be of an integrally cast breakout design.
7-08.3(2)G Jointing of Dissimilar Pipe
Dissimilar pipe shall be jointed by use of a factory-fabricated adapter coupling or a pipe
collar as detailed in the Standard Plans.
7-08.3(2)H Sewer Line Connections
Storm and sanitary sewer line connections to trunks, mains, laterals, or side sewers shall be
left uncovered until after the Engineer has inspected and approved the Work. After approval
of the connection, the trench shall be backfilled as specified.
7-08.3(2)I Side Sewer Connections
Where a storm or sanitary side sewer is larger than the trunk, main, or lateral to which
it is to be connected, the connection shall be made only at a standard manhole unless
otherwise provided in the Plans or in the Special Provisions, or unless otherwise authorized
by the Engineer.
7-08.3(3) Backfilling
Placement of pipe zone backfill shall be performed in accordance with these requirements
and the Standard Plans. Trenches shall be backfilled as soon after the pipe laying as possible.
Pipe zone backfill material shall be clean earth or sand, free from clay, frozen lumps, roots,
or moisture in excess of that permitting required compaction. Rocks or lumps larger than
3 inches maximum shall not be used for pipe zone backfill.
Pipe zone backfill shall be placed in loose layers and compacted to 90 percent maximum
density. Backfill shall be brought up simultaneously on each side of the pipe to the top of
the pipe zone. The pipe shall then be covered to the top of the pipe zone and the materials
compacted in a manner to avoid damaging or disturbing the completed pipe.
Backfill above the pipe zone shall be accomplished in such a manner that the pipe will
not be shifted out of position nor damaged by impact or overloading. If pipe is being placed
in a new embankment, backfill above the pipe zone shall be placed in accordance with
Section 2-03.3(14)C. If pipe is being placed under existing paved areas, or Roadways, backfill
above the pipe zone shall be placed in horizontal layers no more than 6 inches thick and
compacted to 95 percent maximum density. If pipe is being placed in non-traffic areas, backfill
above the pipe zone shall be placed in horizontal layers no more than 6 inches thick and shall
be compacted to 85 percent maximum density. All compaction shall be in accordance with the

Compaction Control Test of Section 2-03.3(14)D. Material excavated from the trench shall be
used for backfill above the pipe zone, except that organic material, frozen lumps, wood, rocks,
or pavement chunks larger than 6 inches in maximum dimension shall not be used. Materials
determined by the Engineer to be unsuitable for backfill at the time of excavation shall be
removed and replaced with imported backfill material.
Backfilling of trenches in the vicinity of catch basins, manholes, or other appurtenances
will not be permitted until the cement in the masonry has become thoroughly hardened.
When it is required that a blanket of select material or bank run gravel is to be placed on
top of the native backfill, the backfill shall be placed to the elevations shown in the Plans, or to
the elevations specified by the Engineer. Compaction of the native material shall be as required
by the Contracting Agency and shall be performed prior to placing the select material. Surface
material shall be loosened to whatever depth is required to prevent bridging of the top layer,
but shall in no case be less than 18 inches.
The Contractor shall not operate tractors or other heavy equipment over the top of the pipe
until the backfill has reached a height of 2 feet above the top of the pipe.
7-08.3(4) Plugging Existing Pipe
Where shown in the Plans or where designated by the Engineer, existing pipes shall be
plugged on the inlet end for a distance of 2 diameters with commercial concrete. Care shall be
used in placing the concrete in the pipe to see that the opening of the pipe is completely filled
and thoroughly plugged.
7-08.4 Measurement
Gravel backfill for foundations, or gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding when used for
foundations, shall be measured by the cubic yard, including haul, as specified in Section 2-09.
Plugging pipes will be measured per each, for each plug installed, for pipe diameters up to
and including 36 inches. The concrete for plugging pipes in excess of 36 inches in diameter
will be measured by the cubic yard. Computations for corrugated metal pipes will be based
on the nominal diameter.
Excavation of the trench will be measured as Structure excavation Class B or Structure
excavation Class B including haul, by the cubic yard as specified in Section 2-09. When
excavation below grade is necessary, excavation will be measured to the limits ordered by
the Engineer.
Embankment construction before pipe placement under the applicable provisions of
Section 7-08.3(1)A will be measured in accordance with Section 2-03.
Shoring or extra excavation class B will be measured as specified in Section 2-09.4.
7-08.5 Payment
“Gravel Backfill for Foundations Class ____”, per cubic yard.
“Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding”, per cubic yard.
All costs associated with furnishing and installing bedding and backfill material within the
pipe zone in the installation of culvert, storm sewer, and sanitary sewer pipes shall be included
in the unit Contract price for the type and size of pipe installed.
“Plugging Existing Pipe”, per each.
“Commercial Concrete”, per cubic yard.
All costs in jointing dissimilar pipe with a coupling or concrete collar shall be included in
the unit Contract price per foot for the size and type of pipe being jointed.

Water Mains 7-09
7-09 Water Mains

7-09.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing water mains 16 inches in diameter and smaller in
accordance with the Plans, these Standard Specifications, the Special Provisions and the
Standard Plans, at the location shown on the Plans.
7-09.1(1)A Trench Widths
Trench width is from trench wall to trench wall, outside of shoring.
7-09.1(1)B Unsuitable Material
Material removed because it is unsatisfactory for foundations is defined as unsuitable
foundation material.
Material removed in trenching which is unsuitable for replacement in the backfill is defined
as unsuitable backfill material.
7-09.1(1)C Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding
Gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding is the method or material used to transmit load from
the pipe into the foundation or into the sidewall support.
7-09.1(1)D Pipe Zone Backfill
Pipe zone backfill includes material placed above the gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding
up to the depths shown on the Standard Plans.
7-09.1(1)E Trench Backfill
Trench backfill includes materials placed above the pipe zone backfill. Trench backfill
within the Roadway prism shall extend up to the underside of the pavement or surfacing
materials. Trench backfill outside the Roadway prism shall extend up to original ground
or finished grade.
7-09.2 Materials
Pipe for main line: 9-30.1
Ductile Iron Pipe 9-30.1(1)
Steel Pipe (6 inches and over) 9-30.1(4)A
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (4 inches and over) 9-30.1(5)A
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe (under 4 inches) 9-30.1(5)B
Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe (4 inches and over) 9-30.1(6)
Fittings for Main Lines: 9-30.2
Ductile Iron Pipe 9-30.2(1)
Steel Pipe (6 inches and over) 9-30.2(4)A
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (4 inches and over) 9-30.2(5)A
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (under 4 inches) 9-30.2(5)B
Restrained Joints 9-30.2(6)
Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe 9-30.2(7)
Restrained Flexible Couplings 9-30.2(8)
Grooved and Shouldered Joints 9-30.2(9)
Polyethylene (PE) Pipe (4 inches and over) 9-30.2(10)
Fabricated Steel Mechanical Slip-Type Expansion Joints 9-30.2(11)

7-09 Water Mains
Appurtenances:
Concrete Blocking 6-02.3(2)B
Detectable Marking Tape 9-15.18
Blow Off Assemblies 9-30.1, 9-30.2,
9-30.3, 9-30.6
Polyethylene Encasement 9-30.1(2)
Steel Pipe (4 inches and under) 9-30.1(4)B
Fittings for Steel Pipe (4 inches and under) 9-30.2(4)B
Aggregates:
Foundation Material 9-03.17, 9-03.18
Pipe Zone Backfill 9-03.19
Trench Backfill 9-03.15 or 9-03.19
It is not intended that materials listed herein are to be necessarily considered equal
or generally interchangeable for all applications. Those suitable for the project shall be
specified in the Special Provisions or shown on the Plans.
The pipe manufacturer shall test all pipe and fittings as required by these Standard
Specifications and the standards referenced. The Contractor shall submit Type 1 Working
Drawings consisting of all test results from the pipe manufacturer including a written
certification that material to be delivered is represented by the samples tested and that such
delivered materials meet or exceed the specified requirements. No pipe shall be delivered until
test results and certifications are in the hands of the Engineer.
The Engineer shall have free access to all testing and records pertaining to material
to be delivered to the job site. The Engineer may elect to be present at any or all material
testing operations.
The basis of acceptance shall be a certificate of compliance as described in Section 1-06.3,
accompanied by two copies of pressure test results of the pipe or fittings involved.
7-09.3(1) General
Trench excavation required for the installation of water mains and appurtenances shall
be unclassified. Material excavated from trenches and piled adjacent to the trench or in a
Roadway or public thoroughfare shall be piled and maintained so that the toe of the slope of
the spoil material is at least 2 feet from the edge of the trench. It shall be piled in a manner
to prevent surface water from flowing into the excavation and in a manner that will cause a
minimum of inconvenience to public travel. Free access shall be provided to all fire hydrants,
water valves, and meters; and clearance shall be left to enable the free flow of storm water in
gutters, conduits, and natural watercourses.
7-09.3(2) Ungraded Streets
On ungraded streets, when grading is not called for in the Contract, the depth of trench
excavation shall be as shown on the Plans and as staked.
Where the Plans show the pipe is to be laid above the existing ground surface, an
embankment fill shall be made and compacted to conform with the section shown on the
Plans, and the water main trench shall be excavated therein. That portion of the embankment
below the bottom of the pipe shall be compacted with rollers or mechanical compactors under
controlled moisture conditions as required under Method B of Section 2-03.3(14)C.
7-09.3(3) Clearing and Grubbing in Ungraded Streets
On ungraded streets, where clearing and grubbing is not called for in the Contract, the
area to be excavated or filled shall be cleared and grubbed by the Contractor. This Work shall
consist of the removal and disposal of logs, stumps, roots, brush, and other refuse within
5 feet of the centerline of the pipe. Such material shall be disposed of in accordance with the
Special Provisions.

Water Mains 7-09
7-09.3(4) Removal of Existing Street Improvements

Removal of existing street improvements and pavement from driveways and sidewalks
shall be performed as specified in Section 2-02. Stockpiling of waste materials along the
trench shall not be allowed.
7-09.3(5) Grade and Alignment
The location of blow off assemblies and combination air release/air vacuum valves are
shown on the Plans.
The Contractor shall verify the locations and establish the depth of the existing water mains
at the points where connections are to be made prior to trenching for the pipelines. The profile
shall be adjusted so no new high spots or low spots are created between the connection points
to the existing water mains.
The depth of trenching for water mains shall be such as to give a minimum cover of
36 inches over the top of the pipe unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. Deeper
excavation may be required due to localized breaks in grade, or to install the new main under
existing culverts or other utilities where necessary. Where the profile of the pipeline and
the ground surface is shown on the Plans, the pipeline shall be laid to the elevation shown
regardless of depth. The excavation shall be to such depth that the minimum cover over valve
operating nuts shall be 1 foot.
7-09.3(6) Existing Utilities
Existing utilities of record, except services, are shown on the Plans. These are shown for
convenience only, and the Engineer assumes no responsibility for improper locations or failure
to show utility locations on the Plans.
When utility services occupy the same space as the new water main, the Contractor shall
complete necessary excavation to fully expose such services. The Contractor shall protect said
services, and work around them during excavating and pipe laying operations. Any damages
to services resulting from the Contractor’s operation shall be reported to the appropriate utility.
Such damage shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.
7-09.3(7) Trench Excavation
The Contractor shall perform excavation of every description and in whatever materials
encountered to the depth indicated on the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
Excavations shall be made by open cut unless otherwise provided for. Trenches shall be
excavated to true and smooth bottom grades and in accordance with the lines given by the
Engineer or shown on the Plans. The trench bottom shall provide uniform bearing and support
for each length of pipe.
Bell holes shall be excavated to the extent necessary to permit accurate Work in making
and inspecting the joints. The banks of the trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as soil
conditions will permit, and where required to control trench width or to protect adjacent
Structures, the trench shall be sheeted and braced. Trench widths to 1 foot above the top of
the pipe shall not exceed 30 inches maximum or 1½ times the outside diameter of the pipe
plus 18 inches whichever is greater. Standard excavating equipment shall be adjusted so as to
excavate the narrowest trench possible.
The length of trench excavation in advance of pipe laying shall be kept to a minimum.
Excavations shall be either closed up at the end of the day or protected per Section 1-07.23(1).
The Contractor shall exercise sound engineering and construction practices in excavating
the trench and maintaining the trench so that no damage will occur to any foundation,
Structure, pole line, pipe line, or other facility because of slough or slopes, or from any
other cause. If, as a result of the excavation, there is disturbance of the ground, which may
endanger other property, the Contractor shall immediately take remedial action at no additional
expense to the Contracting Agency. No act, representation, or instruction of the Engineer
shall in any way relieve the Contractor from liability for damages or costs that result from
trench excavation.

7-09 Water Mains
Care shall be taken not to excavate below the depth specified. Excavation below that depth
shall be backfilled with foundation material and compacted as specified herein.
If workers have to enter any trench or other excavation 4 feet or more in depth that does not
meet the open pit requirements of Section 2-09.3(3)B, it shall be shored. The Contractor alone
shall be responsible for worker safety, and the Contracting Agency assumes no responsibility.
Upon completing the Work, the Contractor shall remove all shoring unless the Plans or the
Engineer direct otherwise.
7-09.3(7)A Dewatering of Trench
Where water is encountered in the trench, it shall be removed during pipe-laying operations
and the trench so maintained until the ends of the pipe are sealed and provisions are made to
prevent floating of the pipe. Trench water or other deleterious materials shall not be allowed
to enter the pipe at any time.
7-09.3(7)B Rock Excavation
Rock excavation shall cover the removal and disposal of rock that requires systematic
drilling and blasting for its removal, and also boulders exceeding ½ cubic yard. Ledge rock,
boulders, or stones shall be removed to provide a minimum clearance of 4 inches under
the pipe.
Hardpan, hard clay, glacial till, sandstone, siltstone, shale, or other sedimentary rocks,
which are soft, weathered, or extensively fissured will not be classified as rock excavation.
Rock is defined as one that has a modulus of elasticity of more than 200,000 psi or unconfined
compressive strength at field moisture content of more than 2,000 psi.
Materials removed shall be replaced with gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding, pipe zone
backfill or trench backfill as designated by the Engineer.
7-09.3(7)C Extra Trench Excavation
Changes in grades of the water main from those shown on the Plans, or as provided in the
Special Provisions, may be necessary because of unexpected utilities, or for other reasons.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is necessary to adjust, correct, relocate, or in any way
change the line and grade, such changes shall be made by the Contractor under the terms of
these Standard Specifications.
When pipeline grade is lowered in excess of 1 foot below the grade indicated on the Plans,
the Contractor shall make such extra excavation as necessary.
When the pipeline horizontal alignment is changed by more than 1 foot from the line
indicated on the Plans, after the trench has been excavated, the Contractor shall excavate the
trench at the changed location and backfill and compact the previous trench.
Additional excavation so required will be classified as extra trench excavation.
7-09.3(8) Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Materials
Whenever in excavating the trench for water mains, the bottom of the trench exposes peat,
soft clay, quicksand, or other unsuitable foundation material, such material shall be removed to
the depth directed by the Engineer and backfilled with foundation material. When determined
by the Engineer that silty soils or fine sandy soils are encountered, Class C foundation material
shall be required. Silty soils or fine sandy soils usually flow in the presence of a stream of
water. When determined by the Engineer that clay, peat, or other soft materials are encountered
that become saturated with water, but do not break down into fine particles and flow, Class A
or Class B foundation material shall be required.
Material removed from the trench that is unsuitable for trench backfill shall be removed
and hauled to a waste site. If material is not available within the limits of the project for
backfilling the trench, the Contractor shall furnish trench backfill meeting the requirements
of Section 9-03.12(3) or 9-03.19 as required.
Unsuitable material shall be loaded directly into trucks and hauled to a waste site obtained
by the Contractor. Stockpiling of unsuitable material at the project site shall not be allowed.

Water Mains 7-09
7-09.3(9) Bedding the Pipe

Gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall be select granular material free from wood
waste, organic material, and other extraneous or objectionable materials and shall have a
maximum dimension of 1½ inches. Gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall be placed to the
depths shown in the Standard Plans. Gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall be rammed
and tamped around the pipe to 95 percent of maximum density by approved hand-held tools,
so as to provide firm and uniform support for the full length of the pipe, valves, and fittings.
Care shall be taken to prevent any damage to the pipe or its protective coating.
7-09.3(10) Backfilling Trenches
Prior to backfilling, form lumber and debris shall be removed from the trench. Sheeting
used by the Contractor shall be removed just ahead of the backfilling.
Backfill up to 12 inches over the top of the pipe shall be evenly and carefully placed.
Materials capable of damaging the pipe or its coating shall be removed from the backfill
material. The remainder of the material shall be placed by dumping into the trench by any
method at the option of the Contractor, and shall be compacted as specified hereinafter.
A minimum 3 inch sand cushion shall be placed between the water main and existing
pipelines or other conduits when encountered during construction.
7-09.3(11) Compaction of Backfill
Backfill shall be compacted to at least 95 percent of maximum density as specified in
At locations where paved streets, Roadway Shoulders, driveways, or sidewalks will be
constructed or reconstructed over the trench, the backfill shall be spread in layers and be
compacted by mechanical tampers. In such cases, the backfill material shall be placed in
successive layers not exceeding 6 inches in loose thickness, and each layer shall be compacted
with mechanical tampers to the density specified herein. Mechanical tampers shall be of the
impact type as approved by the Engineer.
7-09.3(12) General Pipe Installation
Pipe shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed Specifications
and instructions, and to the standards of the AWWA for installing the type of pipe used.
The Contractor shall provide tools and equipment, including any special tools required for
installing each particular type of pipe used.
Short lengths of pipe supplied by the manufacturer shall be used whenever possible to
provide the proper spacing of valves, tees, or special fittings.
7-09.3(13) Handling of Pipe
Pipe shall be handled in a manner that will prevent damage to the pipe, pipe lining, or
coating. Pipe and fittings shall be loaded and unloaded using hoists and slings in a manner
to avoid shock or damage, and under no circumstances shall they be dropped, skidded, or
rolled against other pipe. If any part of the coating or lining is damaged, repair thereof shall
be made by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency and in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer. Damaged pipe shall be rejected, and the Contractor shall
immediately place damaged pipe apart from the undamaged and shall remove the damaged
pipe from the site within 24 hours.
Threaded pipe ends shall be protected by couplings or other means until laid.
Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects.
Dirt or other foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipe or pipe joint during
handling or laying operations, and any pipe or fitting that has been installed with dirt or
foreign material in it shall be removed, cleaned, and re-laid. At times when pipe laying is not
in progress, the open ends of the pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or by other means
approved by the Engineer to ensure cleanliness inside the pipe.

7-09 Water Mains
7-09.3(14) Cutting Pipe

Whenever it becomes necessary to cut a length of pipe, the cut shall be made by abrasive
saw or by a special pipe cutter. Pipe ends shall be square with the longitudinal axis of the pipe
and shall be reamed and otherwise smoothed so that good connections can be made. Threads
shall be cleanly cut. Oxyacetylene torch cutting of ductile iron pipe shall not be allowed.
7-09.3(15) Laying of Pipe on Curves
7-09.3(15)A Ductile Iron Pipe
Long radius curves, either horizontal or vertical, may be laid with standard pipe lengths by
deflecting the joints. If the pipe is shown curved on the Plans and no special fittings are shown,
the Contractor can assume that the curves can be made by deflecting the joints with standard
lengths of pipe. If shorter lengths are required, the Plans will indicate maximum lengths that
can be used. The amount of deflection at each pipe joint when pipe is laid on a horizontal or
vertical curve shall not exceed the manufacturer’s printed recommended deflections.
Where field conditions require deflection or curves not anticipated by the Plans, the
Engineer will determine the methods to be used. No additional payment will be made for
laying pipe on curves as shown on the Plans, or for field changes involving standard lengths
of pipe deflected at the joints. When special fittings not shown on the Plans are required to
meet field conditions, additional payment will be made for special fittings as provided in
Section 1-09.6.
When rubber gasketed pipe is laid on a curve, the pipe shall be jointed in a straight
alignment and then deflected to the curved alignment. Trenches shall be made wider on curves
for this purpose.
7-09.3(15)B Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (4 inches and Over)
PVC pipe may be bent to allow for slight changes in direction. The minimum bending
radius shall be as follows:
Size Minimum Bending Radius
4 inch 125 feet
6 inch 175 feet
8 inch 225 feet
10 inch 275 feet
12 inch 325 feet
14 inch 400 feet
Axial deflection at the pipe joints shall not be allowed.

For 16-inch diameter pipe, changes in direction may be accomplished by axial deflection of
the pipe joint. The maximum axial deflection allowed at each joint is 1 degree. For changes in
direction greater than 1 degree per pipe joint, fittings shall be used.
7-09.3(16) Cleaning and Assembling Joint
The pipe ends, couplings, fittings, and appurtenances shall be cleaned to remove oil, grit,
or other foreign matter from the joint. Care shall be taken to keep the joint from contacting
the ground.
Pipe not furnished with a depth mark shall be marked before assembly to ensure visual
observation of the Work.
7-09.3(17) Laying Ductile Iron Pipe With Polyethylene Encasement
Where shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall lay ductile iron pipe with a polyethylene
encasement. Pipe and polyethylene encasement shall be installed in accordance with
AWWA C105.

Water Mains 7-09
7-09.3(18) Coupled Pipe 4 inches in Diameter and Larger

Joints for steel pipe shall be bell and spigot or welded as specified in the
Special Provisions.
Component parts of couplings, rings, and bells shall receive a protective coating in the
same manner as specified for the steel pipe. Bolts and nuts, exposed edges, and flanges shall,
after installation, be covered with coal-tar protective coating conforming to AWWA C203 or
other coating approved by the Engineer.
Steel pipe 4 inches and larger for aboveground service shall be coupled with flanges,
compression type or grooved type couplings.
Pipe for outdoor service above ground shall be protected with a coal-tar protective coating
conforming to AWWA C203 or other coating approved by the Engineer.
7-09.3(19) Connections
7-09.3(19)A Connections to Existing Mains
Connections to the existing water main shall not be made without first making the
necessary scheduling arrangements with the Engineer in advance. Work shall not be started
until all the materials, equipment, and labor necessary to properly complete the Work are
assembled on the site.
Existing water mains shall be cut by the Contractor unless otherwise specified in the
Special Provisions. The Contractor shall remove the portions of pipe to provide for the
installation of the required fittings at the points of connection. Damage caused by the
Contractor’s operations to existing joints in piping to remain in-service shall be repaired
by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. The Contractor shall
determine the exact length of the existing water main that must be removed. The pipe ends
shall be beveled to prevent damage to the transition coupling gasket during installation of
the coupling. The exterior of the existing pipe end shall be cleaned to a sound, smooth finish
before installation of the coupling.
Transition couplings shall be installed by the Contractor and shall be provided with a
plastic film wrap. The plastic film wrap shall be wrapped loosely around the pipe, fittings, and
couplings, and secured with 2-inch-wide polyethylene adhesive tape. Pipelines in which the
couplings are installed shall be wrapped a minimum of 3 feet on each side of the coupling.
Joints or seams in the plastic film wrap shall be made using the 2-inch-wide polyethylene
adhesive tape. The plastic film wrap need not be watertight, but no part of the pipe or coupling
shall be exposed to the backfill. Care shall be exercised during backfilling to prevent the
plastic film wrap from being punctured or otherwise damaged. Plastic film wrap and its
installation shall conform to AWWA C105 except as modified herein.
Once Work is started on a connection, it shall proceed continuously without interruption
and as rapidly as possible until completed. No shutoff of mains will be permitted overnight,
over weekends, or on holidays.
If the connection to the existing system involves turning off the water, the Contractor shall
be responsible for notifying the residents affected by the shutoff. The Engineer will advise
which property owners are to be notified.
The Contractor may be required to perform the connection during times other than normal
working hours. The Contractor shall not operate any valves on the existing system without
specific permission of the Engineer.
The types of connections are varied and suggested piping arrangements have been shown
on the Plans. For the installation of these connections, the surfaced portion of the Roadway
shall not be penetrated unless the connecting point is directly under it. For connection by any
other method, the Contractor shall furnish a detailed sketch for approval not less than 2 weeks
prior to the expected construction.

7-09 Water Mains
7-09.3(19)B Maintaining Service

Where existing services are to be transferred from old to new mains, the Contractor shall
plan and coordinate its Work with that of the Utility so that service will be resumed with the
least possible inconvenience to customers.
To supply customers with water during the construction of a water main project where any
section of the pipe has passed satisfactory hydrostatic and bacteriological tests, the Utility
reserves the right to tap corporation stops into the section of new pipe and install service
connections at such locations as the Utility may elect. The installation of any such service
connections by the Utility shall not be construed by the Contractor as an acceptance by the
Contracting Agency of any part of the Work required under the Contract.
7-09.3(20) Detectable Marking Tape
Detectable marking tape shall be installed over nonmetallic water lines including services
lines. The tape shall be placed approximately 1 foot above the top of the line and shall extend
its full length. Detectable marking tape shall meet the requirements of Section 9-15.18.
7-09.3(21) Concrete Thrust Blocking
Concrete thrust blocking, as detailed on the Plans, shall be placed at bends, tees, dead
ends, and crosses. Blocking shall be commercial concrete meeting the requirement of
Section 6-02.3(2)B poured in place.
Concrete blocking shall bear against solid undisturbed earth at the sides and bottom of
the trench excavation and shall be shaped so as not to obstruct access to the joints of the pipe
or fittings.
7-09.3(22) Blowoff Assemblies
Blowoff Assemblies shall be constructed at the locations shown on the Plans and in
accordance with the Standard Plans.
7-09.3(23) Hydrostatic Pressure Test
Water main appurtenances and service connections to the meter setter shall be tested in
sections of convenient length under a hydrostatic pressure equal to 150 psi in excess of that
under which they will operate or in no case shall the test pressure be less than 225 psi. Pumps,
gauges, plugs, saddles, corporation stops, miscellaneous hose and piping, and measuring
equipment necessary for performing the test shall be furnished and operated by the Contractor.
Sections to be tested shall normally be limited to 1,500 feet. The Engineer may require that
the first section of pipe, not less than 1,000 feet in length, installed by each of the Contractor’s
crews, be tested in order to qualify the crew and the materials. Pipe laying shall not be
continued more than an additional 1,000 feet until the first section has been tested successfully.
The pipeline shall be backfilled sufficiently to prevent movement of the pipe under
pressure. Thrust blocks shall be in place and time allowed for the concrete to cure before
testing. Where permanent blocking is not required, the Contractor shall furnish and install
temporary blocking and remove it after testing.
The mains shall be filled with water and allowed to stand under pressure a sufficient
length of time to allow the escape of air and allow the lining of the pipe to absorb water. The
Contracting Agency will furnish the water necessary to fill the pipelines for testing purposes
at a time of day when sufficient quantities of water are available for normal system operation.
The test shall be accomplished by pumping the main up to the required pressure, stopping
the pump for 15 minutes, and then pumping the main up to the test pressure again. During the
test, the section being tested shall be observed to detect any visible leakage.
A clean container shall be used for holding water for pumping up pressure on the
main being tested. This makeup water shall be sterilized by the addition of chlorine to a
concentration of 50 mg/l.

Water Mains 7-09
The quantity of water required to restore the pressure shall be accurately determined by
pumping through a positive displacement water meter. The meter shall be approved by the
Engineer. Acceptability of the test will be determined as follows:
SD P
L=
266,400
The quantity of water lost from the main shall not exceed the number of gallons per hour
as determined by the formula:
Where:
L = allowable leakage, gallons/hour
D = nominal diameter of the pipe in inches
P = test pressure during the leakage test (psi)
S = gross length of pipe tested, feet
There shall not be an appreciable or abrupt loss in pressure during the 15-minute
test period.
Pressure gauges used in the test shall be accompanied with certifications of accuracy
from a testing Laboratory approved by the Engineer.
Any visible leakage detected shall be corrected by the Contractor regardless of the
allowable leakage specified above. Should the tested section fail to meet the pressure test
successfully as specified, the Contractor shall, at no additional expense to the Contracting
Agency, locate and repair the defects and then retest the pipeline.
Tests shall be made with the hydrant auxiliary gate valves open and pressure against the
hydrant valve. Each valve shall be tested by closing each in turn and relieving the pressure
beyond. This test of the valve will be acceptable if there is no immediate loss of pressure on
the gauge when the pressure comes against the valve being checked. The Contractor shall
verify that the pressure differential across the valve does not exceed the rated working pressure
of the valve.
Prior to calling out the Engineer to witness the pressure test, the Contractor shall have all
equipment set up completely ready for operation and shall have successfully performed the
test to ensure that the pipe is in satisfactory condition.
Defective materials or workmanship, discovered as a result of hydrostatic field test, shall be
replaced by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. Whenever it is
necessary to replace defective material or correct the workmanship, the hydrostatic test shall
be re-run at the Contractor’s expense until a satisfactory test is obtained.
7-09.3(23)A Testing Extensions From Existing Mains
When an existing water main is extended with new pipe to a new valve and the distance
from the existing pipe to the new valve is 18 feet or less, the section of new pipe installed
between the new valve and the end of the existing main shall be made with pretested,
prechlorinated pipe, and no hydrostatic test will be required. When the required hydrostatic
tests are conducted in the new main section beyond the installed new valve in the closed
position, the normal pressure of the existing main may be present against the other side of
the new valve.
Where the distance between the end of an existing water main pipe extension to the
new valve is more than 18 feet, the connection of the new pipe to existing pipe shall not be
made until after hydrostatic tests have been made to the required pressure in both directions
against the new valve. This shall be accomplished by a temporary cap or plug installed on
the end of the new pipe, beyond the new valve, as close as possible to the existing pipe for
testing purposes.
The short length of pipe between the temporary cap or plug end with the new valve in the
closed position, with no hydrostatic pressure active on the opposite side of the valve, shall
be subjected to the required test pressure. The same test shall be made against the other side

7-09 Water Mains
of the new valve when that section of pipe is tested with no hydrostatic pressure active in the
short section of pipe toward the existing main. The final connection to the existing main shall
be made with pretested prechlorinated pipe.
7-09.3(23)B Testing Section With Hydrants Installed
When hydrants are included with the section of main pipe to be tested, the testing shall be
conducted in three separate tests as follows:
Test No. 1 – Water main gate valves and hydrant auxiliary gate valves closed, with the
hydrant operating stem valves and hose ports wide open.
Test No. 2 – Water main gate valves and the hydrant operating the stem valves tightly
closed but the hydrant auxiliary gate valves and hose ports wide open.
Test No. 3 – Each hydrant shall be tested to the pressure indicated in Section 7-09.3(23)
with the hydrant auxiliary gate valve and hose ports closed and the hydrant operating stem
valve wide open.
7-09.3(23)C Testing Hydrants Installed on Existing Mains
For hydrants installed and connected to an existing main, the hydrant connection including
hydrant tee, connection pipe, and auxiliary gate valves, shall be installed with pretested
materials.
Before the hydrant connection is made to the existing main, the hydrant installation shall be
subjected to the hydrostatic Test No. 3 as specified in Section 7-09.3(23)B. Hydrants installed
and connected to an existing main shall have a satisfactory bacteriological sample obtained
following the hydrostatic test.
7-09.3(24) Disinfection of Water Mains
Before being placed into service, new water mains and repaired portions of, or extensions
to, existing mains shall be chlorinated and a satisfactory bacteriological report obtained. In
the event two unsatisfactory bacteriological reports are obtained on a section of pipe, the
Contractor shall revise his method of disinfection and the form of applied chlorine.
7-09.3(24)A Flushing
Sections of pipe to be disinfected shall first be flushed to remove any solids or
contaminated material that may have become lodged in the pipe. If a hydrant is not installed at
the end of the main, then a tap shall be provided large enough to develop a flow velocity of at
least 2.5 fps in the water main.
Taps required by the Contractor for temporary or permanent release of air, chlorination
or flushing purposes shall be provided by the Contractor as part of the construction of water
mains.
Where dry calcium hypochlorite is used for disinfection of the pipe, flushing shall be done
after disinfection.
The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal of treated water flushed from mains and
shall neutralize the wastewater for protection of aquatic life in the receiving water before
disposal into any natural drainage channel, i.e., receiving water, waters of the State, including
wetlands. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of disinfecting solution to the
satisfaction of the Contracting Agency and local authorities. At a minimum, chlorinated
water shall be dechlorinated to a concentration of 0.1 parts per million (ppm) or less, and pH
adjustment to within 6.5 – 8.5 standard units before discharging to surface waters of the State
or to a storm sewer system that drains to surface waters of the State.
If approved by the Engineer and by the local authority responsible for the sanitary sewer
system, disposal of treated water from mains may be made to an available sanitary sewer,
provided the rate of disposal will not overload the sewer.

Water Mains 7-09
7-09.3(24)B Requirement of Chlorine

Before being placed into service, new mains and repaired portions of, or extensions to,
existing mains shall be chlorinated so that a chlorine residual of not less than 25 mg/l remains
in the water after standing 24 hours in the pipe. The initial chlorine content of the water shall
be not less than 50 mg/l.
7-09.3(24)C Form of Applied Chlorine
Chlorine shall be applied by one of the methods which follow, to give a dosage of not less
than 50 mg/l of available chlorine.
7-09.3(24)D Dry Calcium Hypochlorite
As each length of pipe is laid, sufficient high-test calcium hypochlorite (65 to 70 percent
chlorine) shall be placed inside the pipe to yield a dosage of not less than 50 mg/l available
chlorine, calculated on the volume of the water that the pipe and appurtenances will contain.
The number of grams of 70 percent test calcium hypochlorite required for a 20-foot length
of pipe equals
0.238 × d2, in which “d” is the diameter in inches.
7-09.3(24)E Liquid Chlorine
A chlorine gas-water mixture shall be applied by means of a solution-feed chlorinating
device, or the dry gas may be fed directly through proper devices for regulating the rate of
flow and providing effective diffusion of the gas into the water within the pipe being treated.
Chlorinating devices for feeding solutions of the chlorine gas, or the gas itself, must provide
means for preventing the backflow of water into the chlorine.
7-09.3(24)F Chlorine-Bearing Compounds in Water
A mixture of water and high-test calcium hypochlorite (65 to 70 percent Cl) may be
substituted for the chlorine gas-water mixture. The dry powder shall first be mixed as a paste
and then thinned to a 1 percent chlorine solution by adding water to give a total quantity of
7.5 gallons of water per pound of dry powder. This solution shall be injected in one end of the
section of main to be disinfected while filling the main with water.
7-09.3(24)G Sodium Hypochlorite
Sodium hypochlorite, commercial grade (12.5 percent Cl) or in the form of liquid
household bleach (5 to 6 percent Cl), may be substituted for the chlorine gas-water mixture.
This liquid chlorine compound may be used full strength or diluted with water and injected
into the main in correct proportion to the fill water so that dosage applied to the water will be
at least 50 mg/l.
7-09.3(24)H Point of Application
The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of the pipeline
extension or any valved section of it, and through a corporation stop inserted in the horizontal
axis of the pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine-bearing water into the pipe
should be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the gate valve controlling the flow
into the pipeline extension. Alternate points of applications may be used when approved by
the Engineer.
7-09.3(24)I Rate of Application
Water from the existing distribution system, or other source of supply, shall be controlled
to flow very slowly into the newly-laid pipeline during application of the chlorine. The rate
of chlorine gas-water mixture or dry gas feed shall be in such proportion to the rate of water
entering the newly-laid pipe that the dosage applied to the water will be at least 50 mg/l.

7-09 Water Mains
7-09.3(24)J Preventing Reverse Flow

No connections shall be made between the existing distribution system and pipelines not
disinfected that are constructed under this Contract without a State Department of Health
approved backflow preventer installed in the connecting line.
7-09.3(24)K Retention Period
Treated water shall be retained in the pipe at least 24 hours. After this period, the chlorine
residual at pipe extremities and at other representative points shall be at least 25 mg/l.
7-09.3(24)L Chlorinating Valves, Hydrants, and Appurtenances
In the process of chlorinating newly laid pipe, valves, hydrants, and other appurtenances
shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with the chlorinating agent and under normal
operating pressure.
7-09.3(24)M Chlorinating Connections to Existing Water Mains and Water
Service Connections
The chlorinating procedure to be followed shall be as specified in AWWA Standard C651.
All closure fittings shall be swabbed with a very strong chlorine solution at least as strong
as liquid household bleach (5 to 6 percent Cl).
7-09.3(24)N Final Flushing and Testing
Following chlorination, treated water shall be flushed from the newly-laid pipe until the
replacement water throughout its length shows, upon test, the absence of chlorine. In the
event chlorine is normally used in the source of supply, then the tests shall show a residual
not in excess of that carried in the water supply system.
A sample tap shall be located ahead of the flushing hose for convenience and for
sanitary sampling.
Before placing the lines into service, a satisfactory report shall be received from the local
or State Health Department on samples collected from representative points in the new system.
Samples will be collected and bacteriological tests obtained by the Engineer.
At a minimum, chlorinated water shall be dechlorinated to a concentration of 0.1 parts
per million (ppm) or less, and pH adjustment to within 6.5 to 8.5 standard units, if necessary,
before discharging to surface waters of the State or to a storm sewer system that drains to
surface waters of the State.
7-09.3(24)O Repetition of Flushing and Testing
Should the initial treatment result in an unsatisfactory bacteriological test, the original
chlorination procedure shall be repeated by the Contractor until satisfactory results are
obtained. Failure to get a satisfactory test shall be considered as failure of the Contractor to
keep the pipe clean during construction, or to properly chlorinate the main.
7-09.4 Measurement
Measurement for payment of pipe for water mains will be by the linear foot of pipe laid
and tested and shall be measured along the pipe through fittings, valves, and couplings.
Measurement for payment of blowoff assembly will be per each.
When listed as a pay item, rock excavation will be measured in its original position by
volume in cubic yards. The quantity measured for payment will include only the material
excavated from within the limits hereinafter defined. Any additional excavation outside of
these limits will be considered as having been made for the Contractor’s benefit, and all costs
in connection with such excavation shall be included in the unit Contract prices for the various
items of Work.
The horizontal limits for measuring rock excavation will be the sides of the trench, except
no payment will be made for material removed outside of vertical planes extended beyond
the maximum trench widths, as specified in Section 7-09.3(7). Vertical distances shall be

Water Mains 7-09
measured from the upper surface of the rock to an elevation 6 inches below the underside
of the pipe barrel, or to the lower surface of the rock, whichever is less. Boulders exceeding
1 cubic yard in volume shall be paid for according to their measured volume.
Removal of the extra trench excavation as defined in Section 7-09.3(7)C will be measured
by the cubic yard. The depth shall be the actual depth removed for the changed line or
grade in accordance with Section 7-09.3(5) or as ordered by the Engineer in accordance
with Section 1-04.4. The width shall be the actual width removed for the changed line or
grade, but in no case shall the measured width exceed the allowable widths specified in
Section 7-09.3(7).
Removal and replacement of unsuitable material will be measured by the cubic yard.
The depth shall be the actual depth removed below the depth specified in Section 7-09.3(5).
The width shall be the actual width removed, but in no case shall the measured width exceed
the allowable widths specified in Section 7-09.3(7).
Measurement of bank run gravel for trench backfill will be by the cubic yard measured in
trucks at the point of delivery.
Shoring or extra trench excavation will be measured as specified in Section 2-09.4 for
shoring or extra excavation Class B.
7-09.5 Payment
“_________Pipe for Water Main_____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for each size and kind of “__________ Pipe for
Water Main _____ In. Diam.” shall be full pay for all Work to complete the installation of the
water main, including but not limited to, trench excavation, bedding, laying and jointing pipe
and fittings, backfilling, concrete thrust blocking, testing, disinfecting the pipeline, flushing,
dechlorination of water used for flushing, and cleanup.
Payment for restoration will be made under the applicable items shown in the Proposal.
If no pay items for restoration are included in the Proposal, restoration shall be considered
incidental to the Work of constructing the water main, and all costs thereof shall be included
in the unit Contract price Bid for “______ Pipe for Water Main ____ In. Diam.”
“Rock Excavation”, per cubic yard.
If no pay item is listed, rock excavation shall be considered incidental to the Work
to construct the water main and all costs shall be included in other items of Work specified
in Section 7-09.5.
“Extra Trench Excavation”, per cubic yard.
“Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material”, per cubic yard.
“Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill”, per cubic yard.
No separate payment will be made for clearing and grubbing, removal of existing street
improvements, furnishing and installing sand cushion, protection of existing utilities and
services, trench excavation and backfill, bedding the pipe, and compacting the backfill. These
items shall all be considered as incidental to the Work of constructing the water main, and all
costs thereof shall be included in the payment as specified in Section 7-09.5.
“Shoring or Extra Excavation Trench”, per square foot.
“Blowoff Assembly”, per each.
The unit Contract price Bid per each for “Blowoff Assembly” shall be full pay for all Work
to install the blowoff assembly, including but not limited to excavating, backfilling, laying and
jointing pipe, tapping the main, corporation stop, pipe and fittings, gate valve, meter box, and
cover and cleanup.

7-10 Vacant
7-10 Vacant

Vacant 7-11
7-11 Vacant

7-12 Valves for Water Mains
7-12 Valves for Water Mains

7-12.1 Description
Valves for water mains shall be suitable for ordinary waterworks service, intended to be
installed in a normal position on buried pipelines for water distribution systems.
Valves shall open counterclockwise and shall be equipped with a 2-inch-square AWWA
standard operating nut. Unless otherwise specified, all valves shall be the nonrising stem type.
7-12.2 Materials
Gate Valves (3 to 16 inches) 9-30.3(1)
Butterfly Valves 9-30.3(3)
Valve Boxes 9-30.3(4)
Valve Marker Posts 9-30.3(5)
Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum Valves 9-30.3(7)
End Connections 9-30.5(1)
Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly 9-30.3(8)
The valves shall be standard pattern of a manufacturer whose products are approved by
the Engineer and shall have the name or mark of the manufacturer, year valve casting was
made, size and working pressure plainly cast in raised letters on the valve body.
The valve bodies shall be cast iron, ductile iron, or other approved material mounted
with approved noncorrosive metals. All wearing surfaces shall be bronze or other approved
noncorrosive material, and there shall be no moving bearing or contact surfaces of iron in
contact with iron. Contact surfaces shall be machined and finished in the best workmanlike
manner, and all wearing surfaces shall be easily renewable.
All valves shall be inspected upon delivery in the field to ensure proper working order
before installation. They shall be set and jointed to the pipe in the manner as set forth in
the AWWA Standards for the type of connecting ends furnished. The valves shall also be
carefully inspected for injury to the outer protective coatings. At all places where the coating
has been ruptured or scraped off, the damaged area shall be cleaned to expose the iron base
installation, and the cleaned area shall then be recoated with two or more field coats of
approved protective coating.
Upon delivery at the work site, all valves shall be opened to prevent the collection of
water in the valve. Valves shall have the interiors cleaned of all foreign matter and shall be
inspected both in open and closed position prior to installation. Valves and valve boxes shall
be set plumb and valve boxes shall be placed over the valve or valve operator in a manner that
the valve box does not transmit shock or stress to the valve. The lower casting of the unit is
installed first, in a manner as to be supported by a minimum backfill or by a Styrofoam collar
not less than 2 inches in thickness. The casting shall not rest directly upon the body of the
valve or upon the water main. Backfill shall be carefully tamped around the valve box to a
distance of 3 feet on all sides or to the undisturbed face of the trench if it is closer. The cast
iron valve box cover shall be set flush with the Roadbed or finished paved surface.
The combination air release/air vacuum valves shall be installed as shown in the Plans.
All piping shall be sloped to permit escape of any entrapped air. Backfilling and compaction
shall be as specified in Section 7-09.
After installation, all valves shall be subjected to field testing and disinfected as outlined
in Section 7-09. Should any defects in design, materials, or workmanship appear during
these tests, the Contractor shall correct such defects with the least possible delay and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

Valves for Water Mains 7-12
7-12.3(1) Installation of Valve Marker Post

Where required, a valve marker post shall be furnished and installed with each valve.
Valve marker posts shall be placed at the edge of the Right of Way opposite the valve and be
set with 18 inches of the post exposed above grade. The exposed portion of the valve marker
posts shall be painted with two coats of concrete paint in a color selected by the Engineer, and
then the size of the valve and the distance in feet and inches to the valve shall be stenciled with
black paint on the face of the post, using a stencil which will produce letters 2 inches high.
7-12.4 Measurement
Measurement of valves shall be per each for each type and size actually installed.
7-12.5 Payment
“Gate Valve ____ In.”, per each.
“Butterfly Valve ____ In.”, per each.
“Comb. Air Release/Air Vacuum Valve Assembly ____ In.”, per each.
“Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly ____ In.”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for the valve specified shall be full pay for all Work to
furnish and install the valve complete in place on the water main, including trenching, jointing,
blocking of valve, painting, disinfecting, hydrostatic testing, valve box, and marker post.

7-13 Vacant
7-13 Vacant

Hydrants 7-14
7-14 Hydrants
7-14.1 Description
This Section covers the installation of dry barrel fire hydrants intended for ordinary water
works service.
7-14.2 Materials
Hydrants 9-30.5
End Connections 9-30.5(1)
Hydrant Dimensions 9-30.5(2)
Hydrant Extensions 9-30.5(3)
Hydrant Restraint 9-30.5(4)
Traffic Flange 9-30.5(5)
Guard Posts 9-30.5(6)
7-14.3(1) Setting Hydrants
Where shown in the Plans, hydrants shall be installed in accordance with the Standard
Plans. In addition, a minimum 3-foot radius unobstructed working area shall be provided
around all hydrants. The sidewalk flange shall be set 2 inches above finished grade.
All hydrants shall be set on concrete blocks as shown in the Standard Plans. The hydrant
barrel drain shall waste into a pit of porous gravel material situated at the base of the hydrant
as shown in the Standard Plans.
All hydrants shall be inspected upon delivery in the field to ensure proper working order.
After installation, fire hydrants, auxiliary gate valves, and other appurtenances thereto shall
be subjected to a hydrostatic test and disinfection procedures as specified in Section 7-09.
After all installation and testing is complete, the exposed portion of the hydrant shall be
painted with one field coat. The type and color of paint will be designated by the Engineer.
Any hydrant not in service shall be identified by covering with a burlap or plastic bag
properly secured.
7-14.3(2) Hydrant Connections
Hydrant laterals shall consist of one continuous section of 6-inch ductile iron pipe from
the main to the hydrant and shall include an auxiliary gate valve set vertically and placed in
accordance with the Standard Plans.
7-14.3(2)A Hydrant Restraints
The thrust created in the hydrant lateral shall be restrained as shown in the Standard Plans.
If applicable, shackle rods, after installation, shall be cleaned and painted with two coats of
asphalt varnish, or with such other bituminous coating as may be approved by the Engineer.
7-14.3(2)B Auxiliary Gate Valves and Valve Boxes
Auxiliary gate valves and valve boxes shall be installed in accordance with
Section 7-12 except that the end connections shall be provided with lugs for shackling, or the
bells shall provide sufficient clearance between the body of the valve and the hub to permit
the installation of shackles.
7-14.3(2)C Hydrant Guard Posts
Hydrant guard posts shall be constructed at the locations shown in the Plans. The exposed
portion of each guard post shall be painted with one coating of the type and color designated
by the Engineer.

7-14 Hydrants
7-14.3(3) Resetting Existing Hydrants

Where existing hydrants are shown in the Plans for adjustments to conform to a new street
alignment or grade or both, the hydrant shall be relocated without disturbing the location of
the hydrant lateral tee at the main.
The method for thrust restraint for the hydrant lateral shall be determined by the conditions
found in the field and shall be constructed as ordered by the Engineer at no additional cost to
This Work shall conform to Section 7-14.3(1).
7-14.3(4) Moving Existing Hydrants
Existing hydrants shall be moved where shown in the Plans. When the existing hydrant
lateral tee does not accommodate a new hydrant location, a new hydrant lateral tee shall be
installed in the main. The existing hydrant lateral tee shall be removed from the main (if said
main is to remain active), and a new section of pipe inserted into the water main in place of
the existing hydrant lateral tee. Where the existing main to which the existing hydrant lateral
tee is connected, and is to be abandoned or temporarily activated after the existing hydrant
is moved, the open end of the hydrant lateral pipeline shall be plugged (and temporary
thrust restrain provided if temporarily reactivated). All Work shall meet the requirements
of Section 7-14.3(1).
7-14.3(5) Reconnecting Existing Hydrants
Existing hydrants shall be reconnected where shown in the Plans. The location and
elevation of the existing hydrant shall remain unchanged, but the existing hydrant connection
is changed to connect with a new hydrant tee provided in a new main.
Where existing hydrants were not shackled to the old main, the new connection shall be
shackled with steel rods as shown in the Standard Plans, or by such other shackling method
as approved by the Engineer.
Hydrant reconnections shall meet the requirements of Sections 7-14.3(1) and 7-14.3(2).
7-14.3(6) Hydrant Extensions
The Contractor shall furnish and install hydrant extensions where required. The hydrant
extensions, operating stems for the hydrant main valves, and sidewalk flanges shall conform to
AWWA C502. After installation, the extended fire hydrant shall be subjected to a hydrostatic
pressure test and disinfection procedure as specified in Section 7-09.
7-14.4 Measurement
Measurement of hydrant assembly, resetting existing hydrants, moving existing hydrants,
and reconnecting existing hydrants will be made per each. Measurement of hydrant extension
will be made per linear foot.
7-14.5 Payment
“Hydrant Assembly”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Hydrant Assembly” shall be full pay for all Work
to furnish and install fire hydrant assemblies, including all costs for auxiliary gate valve,
shackles, tie rods, concrete blocks, gravel, and painting required for the complete installation
of the hydrant assembly as specified, except the pipe connecting the hydrant to the main and
the hydrant lateral tee will be paid for as specified in Section 7-09.5.
“Resetting Existing Hydrant”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Resetting Existing Hydrant” shall be full pay for all
Work to reset the existing hydrant, including shackling, painting, and reconnecting to the main.
New pipe required from the main to the hydrant will be paid as specified in Section 7-09.5.
“Moving Existing Hydrant”, per each.

Hydrants 7-14
The unit Contract price per each for “Moving Existing Hydrant” shall be full pay for all
Work to move the existing hydrant, including new hydrant lateral tee, shackling, painting, and
reconnecting to the main. New pipe for hydrant connections will be paid for as specified in
Section 7-09.5.
“Reconnecting Existing Hydrant”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Reconnecting Existing Hydrant” shall be full pay
for all Work to reconnect the existing hydrant, excepting however, that new pipe used for the
connection will be paid as specified in Section 7-09.5.
“Hydrant Extension”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Hydrant Extension” shall be full pay for all
Work to extend the hydrant vertically.

7-15 Service Connections
7-15 Service Connections

7-15.1 Description
This Work consists of installing 2 inch and smaller service connections from the main
to and including the meter setter for the premises served. Service connections larger than
2 inches shall be installed as detailed on the Plans or as described in the Special Provisions.
7-15.2 Materials
Saddles 9-30.6(1)
Corporation Stops 9-30.6(2)
Service Pipe 9-30.6(3)
Service Fittings 9-30.6(4)
Meter Setters 9-30.6(5)
Bronze Nipples and Fittings 9-30.6(6)
Meter Boxes 9-30.6(7)
All service connections to water mains, except to ductile iron pipe Class 52 or stronger,
shall be made using saddles as specified and be of the size and type suitable for use with
the pipe being installed. Ductile iron pipe Class 52 or stronger may be direct tapped for
corporation stops in accordance with the recommendations of DIPRA; unless direct taps are
prohibited by the Special Provisions. Service pipelines shall be installed perpendicular to the
main, unless shown otherwise in the Plans.
The depth of trenching for service connection piping shall provide a minimum of 3 feet
of cover over the top of the pipe. Particular care shall be exercised to ensure that the main
is not damaged by the Work undertaken to install the service. Excavating and backfilling
for service connections shall be as specified in Section 7-09, except that the service pipeline
shall be installed under pavement, curbs, and sidewalks by boring methods approved by the
governmental agency having jurisdiction over the Roadway.
Service pipes shall be cut using a tool or tools specifically designed to leave a smooth,
even, and square end on the piping material to be cut. Cut ends shall be reamed to the full
inside diameter of the pipe. Pipe ends to be connected using couplings which seal to the
outside surface of the pipe shall be cleaned to a sound, smooth finish before the couplings
are installed. The meter box shall be adjusted to the finished grade after the surface has been
acceptably restored.
Where shown in the Plans, existing service connections shall be reconnected to the
new mains. The location of existing service connections shall be verified in the field by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall notify affected customers of the service interruption at least
24 hours prior to service interruption.
Pipe materials used to extend or replace existing service connections beyond the
meter box shall be copper or polyethylene pipe. Insulating couplings shall be used at any
connection between galvanized steel or iron pipe and copper pipe. All fittings, appurtenances,
and other miscellaneous materials on the sections of existing pipe that have been removed
shall become the property of the Contractor.
7-15.3(1) Flushing and Disinfection
All service pipe and appurtenances shall be prechlorinated prior to installation.
After installation, the service connection shall be flushed prior to connecting the meter.
7-15.4 Measurement
Service connections will be measured per each for each size of service connection installed.

Service Connections 7-15
7-15.5 Payment
“Service Connection ____ In. Diam.”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Service Connection ____ In. Diam.” shall be full pay
for all Work to install the service connection, including but not limited to, excavating, tapping
the main, laying and jointing the pipe and fittings and appurtenances, backfilling, testing,
flushing, and disinfection of the service connection.

7-16 Vacant
7-16 Vacant

Sanitary Sewers 7-17
7-17 Sanitary Sewers

7-17.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing sanitary sewer lines in accordance with the Plans,
these Specifications, and the Standard Plans, as staked.
7-17.2 Materials
Pipe used for sanitary sewers may be:
Rigid Thermoplastic
Concrete ABS Composite
Vitrified Clay PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride)
Ductile Iron Polypropylene
All sanitary sewer pipe shall have flexible gasketed joints unless otherwise specified.
It is not intended that materials listed are to be considered equal or generally
interchangeable for all applications. The Engineer shall determine from the materials
listed those suitable for the project, and shall so specify in the Specifications or the Plans.
Materials shall meet the requirements of the following sections.
Plain Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.7(1)
Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe 9-05.7(2)
Vitrified Clay Sewer Pipe 9-05.8
Solid Wall PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe 9-05.12(1)
Profile Wall PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe 9-05.12(2)
Ductile Iron Sewer Pipe 9-05.13
ABS Composite Sewer Pipe 9-05.14
Polypropylene Sewer Pipe 9-05.24
All pipe shall be clearly marked with type, class, and thickness. Lettering shall be legible
and permanent under normal conditions of handling and storage.
Sanitary sewers shall be constructed in accordance with Section 7-08.3.
7-17.3(1) Protection of Existing Sewerage Facilities
All existing live sewers including septic tanks and drain fields shall be kept in service
at all times. Provision shall be made for disposal of sewage flow if any existing sewers are
damaged. Damage to existing sewers shall be repaired by the Contractor, at no expense to the
Contracting Agency, to a condition equal to or better than their condition prior to the damage.
Water accumulating during construction shall be removed from the new sewers but shall
not be permitted to enter the existing system. The Contractor shall be responsible for flushing
out and cleaning any existing sewers into which gravel, rocks, or other debris has entered
as a result of their operations, and shall repair lift stations or other facilities damaged by the
Contractor’s operations.
The physical connection to an existing manhole or sewer shall not be made until authorized
by the Engineer. Such authorization will not be given until all upstream lines have been
completely cleaned, all debris removed, and where applicable, a pipe temporarily placed in the
existing channel and sealed.
7-17.3(2) Cleaning and Testing
7-17.3(2)A General
Sewers and appurtenances, where required in the Plans, shall be cleaned and tested after
backfilling by either the exfiltration or low pressure air method at the option of the Contractor,
except where the ground water table is such that the Engineer may require the infiltration test.
All Work involved in cleaning and testing sewer lines between manholes or rodding inlets
as required shall be completed within 15 working days after backfilling of sewer lines and

Structures. Any further delay will require the written consent of the Engineer. The Contractor
shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary to make the test, clean the
lines, and perform all incidental Work. The Contractor shall perform the tests under the
direction and in the presence of the Engineer. Precautions shall be taken to prevent joints
from drawing during tests, and any damage resulting from these tests shall be repaired by the
Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency. The manner and time of testing shall be
subject to approval by the Engineer.
All wyes, tees, and stubs shall be plugged with flexible jointed caps, or acceptable
alternate, securely fastened to withstand the internal test pressure. Such plugs or caps shall
be readily removable, and their removal shall provide a socket suitable for making a flexible
jointed lateral connection or extension.
Testing side sanitary sewers shall be for their entire length from the public sewer in the
street to the connection with the building’s plumbing. Their testing shall be as required by the
local sanitary agency but in no case shall it be less thorough than that of filling the pipe with
water before backfilling and visually inspecting the exterior for leakage. The decision of the
Engineer as to acceptance of the side sanitary sewer shall be final.
If any sewer installation fails to meet the requirements of the test method used, the
Contractor shall determine, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, the source or sources
of leakage and shall repair or replace all defective materials or workmanship at no expense to
the Contracting Agency. The complete pipe installation shall meet the requirements of the test
method used before being considered acceptable.
7-17.3(2)B Exfiltration Test
Prior to making exfiltration leakage tests, the Contractor may fill the pipe with clear water
to permit normal absorption into the pipe walls provided, however, that after so filling the
pipe, the Contractor shall complete the leakage test within 24 hours after filling. When under
test, the allowable leakage shall be limited according to the provisions that follow. Specified
allowances assume pre-wetted pipe.
Leakage shall be no more than 0.28 gph per inch diameter per 100 feet of sewer, with a
hydrostatic head of 6 feet above the crown at the upper end of the test section, or above the
natural ground water table at the time of test, whichever is higher. The length of pipe tested
shall be limited so that the pressure at the lower end of the Section tested does not exceed
16 feet of head above the invert, and in no case shall be greater than 700 feet or the distance
between manholes when greater than 700 feet.
Where the test head is other than 6 feet, the maximum leakage shall not exceed the amount
determined from the following equation:
Maximum leakage (in gallons per hour) = 0.28 × (√H/√6) × D × (L/100)
Where:
D = diameter (in.)
L = length of pipe (ft.)
H = test head (ft.)
When the test is to be made one joint at a time, the leakage per joint shall not exceed the
computed allowable leakage per length of pipe.
7-17.3(2)C Infiltration Test
Where the natural ground water head over the pipe is 2 feet or less above the crown of pipe
at the upper end of the test section, the infiltration test leakage shall not exceed 0.16 gallons
per hour per inch of diameter per 100 feet of pipe length. The length of pipe tested shall not
exceed 700 feet or the distance between manholes when greater than 700 feet.
Where the natural ground water head is greater than 2 feet, the maximum leakage shall not
exceed the amount determined from the following equation:

Maximum leakage (in gallons per hour) = 0.16 × (√H/√2) × D × (L/100)

Where:
D = diameter (in.)
L = length of pipe (ft.)
H = natural ground water head (ft.)
When a suitable head of ground water exists above the crown of the pipe and when the
pipe is large enough to work inside, acceptance may be based on the repair of visible leakage
by means satisfactory to the Engineer.
7-17.3(2)D Other Test Allowances
For either the infiltration or exfiltration test, all lateral or side sewer branches included in
the test section shall be taken into account in computing allowable leakage. An allowance of
0.2 gallons per hour per foot of head above invert shall be made for each manhole included
in a test section.
Upon final acceptance of the Work all sewers, side sewers and fittings shall be open,
clean, and free draining.
7-17.3(2)E Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers Constructed of Air
Permeable Materials
Air permeable materials include concrete and vitrified clay. Low pressure air testing may
be used for air permeable pipes 30 inches in diameter and smaller.
The test equipment to be used shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be inspected
and approved by the Engineer prior to use. The Engineer may at any time require a calibration
test of gauges or other instrumentation that is incorporated into the test equipment. Calibration
tests shall be certified by an independent testing Laboratory.
Plugs used to close the pipe for the air test must be securely braced to prevent the
unintentional release of a plug, which can become a high velocity projectile. Gauges,
air piping manifold, and valves shall be located at the top of the ground. No one shall be
permitted to enter a manhole or catch basin where a plugged pipe is under pressure. Air testing
apparatus shall be equipped with a pressure release device, such as a rupture disk or a pressure
relief valve, designed to activate when the pressure in the pipe exceeds 2 psig above the
required test pressure.
If the pipe to be tested is submerged by groundwater, the backpressure on the pipe created
by the groundwater submergence must be determined. All gauge pressures described in the test
shall be increased by that amount.
The first section of pipe installed by each crew shall be tested in order to qualify the crew
and material. A successful test for the section shall be a prerequisite to further installation
by that crew. Following the initial test, pipes shall be tested from manhole to manhole, catch
basin to catch basin, or such shorter lengths as determined by the Contractor.
Air shall be slowly supplied to the plugged pipe section until the internal air pressure
reaches 4 psig. Wait at least 2 minutes to allow for pressure and temperature stabilization to
occur within the pipe.
When the pressure decreases to 3.5 psig, the air pressure test shall begin. The test shall
consist of measuring the time in seconds for the pressure in the pipe to drop from 3.5 psig to
2.5 psig. The pipe shall be considered acceptable if the time in seconds for the pressure drop
is equal to or greater than the required time as calculated below:

K = 0.0111d2L
C = 0.0003918dL
If CT <1, then time = KT
If 1 <CT <1.75, then time = KT/CT
If CT > 1.75, then time = KT/1.75
Where:
d = Pipe diameter (inches)
L = Pipe length (feet)
K = value for each length of pipe of a specific diameter
C = value for each length of pipe of a specific diameter
KT = sum of all K values
CT = sum of all C values
This method was developed based on an allowable air loss rate of 0.003 cubic feet per
minute (cfm) per square foot of internal pipe surface, with the total air loss rate not less than
2 cfm nor greater than 3.5 cfm. At the Contractor’s option, the pipe may be tested without
pre‑wetting; however, the allowable air loss rate assumes pre-wetted pipe.
ASTM C1103.
7-17.3(2)F Low Pressure Air Test for Sanitary Sewers Constructed of Non Air
Permeable Materials
Non air permeable materials include ductile iron, ABS composite, polyvinyl chloride
(PVC), and polyethylene (PE). When non air permeable pipe is subjected to a low-pressure
air test, all of the provisions of Section 7-17.3(2)E shall apply, except that the time in seconds
for the pressure drop shall be equal to or greater than four times the required time calculated
in Section 7-17.3(2)E.
ASTM C1103.
Reaches of thermoplastic pipe containing no joints shall be exempt from testing
requirements.
7-17.3(2)G Deflection Test for Thermoplastic Pipe
Sanitary sewers constructed of thermoplastic pipe shall be tested for deflection not less
than 30 days after the trench backfill and compaction has been completed. The test shall be
conducted by pulling a properly sized “go-nogo” mandrel through the completed pipeline.
Testing shall be conducted on a manhole-to-manhole basis and shall be done after the line
has been completely flushed out with water.
The mandrel shall be a rigid, nonadjustable mandrel having an effective length of not less
than its normal diameter and an odd-number of legs (9 legs minimum). Minimum diameter at
any point along the full length of the mandrel shall be 95 percent of the base inside diameter
of the pipe being tested.
Base inside diameter is derived by subtracting a statistical tolerance package from the
average inside diameter. The tolerance package is defined as the square root of the sum of
squared manufacturing tolerances. The tolerance package for controlled outside diameter
pipe consists of (1) outside diameter tolerance specified in applicable ASTM Standard,
(2) 12 percent of one wall thickness specified in applicable ASTM Standard, and (3) out
of roundness tolerance listed in appendix of applicable ASTM Standard. The items in the
tolerance package for controlled inside diameter pipe consists of (1) inside diameter tolerance
listed in appendix of applicable ASTM Standard and (2) out of roundness tolerance listed in
appendix of applicable ASTM Standard. When out of roundness tolerance is not listed, use
3 percent of average inside diameter.

The average inside diameter for pipe with controlled outside diameter shall be equal to the
average outside diameter as specified in applicable ASTM Standard minus 2 minimum wall
thicknesses as specified in applicable ASTM Standard and minus 2 times excess wall tolerance
of 6 percent. The average inside diameter for pipes with controlled inside diameter shall be the
average inside diameter as specified in applicable ASTM Standard.
The Contractor shall be required, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, to locate and
uncover any sections failing to pass the test and, if not damaged, reinstall the pipe. The use of
a vibratory re-rounding device or any process other than removal or reinstallation shall not be
acceptable. The Contractor shall retest the section after replacement of the pipe.
Pipe large enough to work inside of may be accepted on the basis of direct measurement.
7-17.3(2)H Television Inspection
The Engineer may require any or all sanitary sewer lines be inspected by the use of a
television camera before final acceptance. The costs incurred in making the initial inspection
shall be borne by the owner of the sanitary sewer.
The Contractor shall bear all costs incurred in correcting any deficiencies found during
television inspection including the cost of any additional television inspection that may be
required by the Engineer to verify the correction of said deficiency.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in any television inspection
performed solely for the benefit of the Contractor.
7-17.4 Measurement
The length of sewer pipe will be the number of linear feet of completed installation
measured along the invert and will include the length through elbows, tees and fittings.
The number of linear feet will be measured from the center of manhole to center of manhole
or to the inside face of catch basins and similar type Structures.
The length of testing sewer pipe in conformance with Section 7-17.3(2) will be the number
of linear feet of completed installation actually tested.
7-17.5 Payment
“Plain Conc. or V.C. Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Cl. ____ Reinf. Conc. Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Ductile Iron Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“ABS Composite Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Polypropylene Sewer Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for sewer pipe of the kind and size specified shall be
full pay for furnishing, hauling, and assembling in place the completed installation including
all wyes, tees, special fittings, joint materials, bedding and backfill material, and adjustment
of inverts to manholes for the completion of the installation to the required lines and grades.
“Testing Sewer Pipe”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Testing Sewer Pipe” shall be full pay
for all labor, material and equipment required to conduct the leakage tests required in
Section 7-17.3(2).
“Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable Material”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per cubic yard for “Removal and Replacement of Unsuitable
Material” shall be full pay for all Work to remove unsuitable material and replace and compact
suitable material as specified in Section 7-08.3(1)A.

7-18 Side Sewers
7-18 Side Sewers

7-18.1 Description
This Work shall consist of constructing side sewers in accordance with the Plans, these
Specifications, and the Standard Plans, at locations staked, on both the right of way and
private property between the main sanitary sewer line and the stubout from a residence or
other building.
7-18.2 Materials
Materials shall be the same as required for sanitary sewers in Section 7-17.
7-18.3(1) General
The construction requirements for sanitary sewers in Section 7-17 shall apply to the
construction of side sewers.
Side sewers shall not be backfilled prior to inspection.
Side sewers shall be constructed with a maximum joint deflection not to exceed the
manufacturer’s printed recommendations and in no case shall exceed 2 inches per foot in
any joint. Larger changes in direction shall be made by use of standard ⅛ bends.
7-18.3(2) Fittings
Side sewers shall be connected to the tee, wye, or riser provided in the public sewer,
where such is available, utilizing approved fittings or adapters. Where no tee, wye, or riser is
provided or available, connection shall be made by machine made tap and approved saddle.
7-18.3(3) Testing
All side sewers shall be tested after backfilling.
All side sewers constructed in conjunction with the main sewer shall, for purposes of
testing as specified in Section 7-17, have a 6-inch tee fitting pipe placed at the point where the
side sewer crosses the street or other public Right of Way margin. The tee opening shall be
positioned perpendicular to the side sewer slope, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
When side sewers are not tested simultaneously with the testing of the main sewer, the
Contractor, at no expense to the Contracting Agency, shall furnish and place an additional tee
in the first pipe out of the main sewer tee or wye branch, so that an inflatable rubber ball can
be inserted for sealing off the side sewer and thus permit separate tests.
7-18.3(4) Extending Side Sewers Into Private Property
Side sewers shall not be constructed on private property prior to completion and acceptance
of the main line and side sewer on public Right of Way or easement unless approved in writing
by the Engineer.
7-18.3(5) End Pipe Marker
The location of side sewers at the property line shall be marked by the Contractor with a
2 by 4-inch wooden stake 4 feet long buried in the ground a depth of 3 feet. The low end shall
have a 2 by 4-inch cleat nailed to it to prevent withdrawal of the stake. The exposed end shall
be painted traffic white and the depth to the side sewer or tee shall be indicated in black paint
on the 2 by 4. In addition, a length of 12-gage galvanized wire shall be provided to extend
from the plugged end of the side sewer or tee. The upper end shall emerge at the 4-foot stake,
but shall not be fastened to it.
7-18.4 Measurement
Measurement shall be as specified in Section 7-17.4.

Side Sewers 7-18
7-18.5 Payment
Payment shall be made for each of the Bid items shown in Section 7-17.5 that are included
in the Proposal.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for sewer pipe of the various kind and size specified
shall be full pay for all Work required for the completion of the installation including fittings
and end pipe marker.

7-19 Sewer Cleanouts
7-19 Sewer Cleanouts

7-19.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing sanitary sewer cleanouts in accordance with the Plans,
these Specifications, and the Standard Plans as staked.
7-19.2 Materials
All materials incorporated into the total cleanout Structure shall meet the requirements of
the various applicable sections of these Specifications.
A cleanout shall be provided for each total change of 90 degrees of grade or alignment and
in no case shall the spacing of cleanouts exceed 100 feet. No cleanout will be required at the
connection of the side sewer to a riser on the public sewer. A suitably located cleanout in the
house piping or plumbing may be considered as a cleanout for the side sewer. Cleanouts shall
consist of a wye branch in the side sewer.
All cleanouts located in public rights of way shall be extended to grade.
The extension of cleanouts to grade on private property will be optional with the property
owner. When extended to grade, cleanouts shall be full side sewer diameter and shall be
extended to a point not less than 6 inches nor more than 12 inches below the finished ground
surface and shall be plugged with a removable stopper which will prevent passage of dirt or
water. When specified, the Contractor shall install an approved casting to provide ready access
to the cleanout stopper. A ⅛ bend shall be used to deflect the side sewer upward as a cleanout
where the terminal end of the side sewer lies upstream from the last point of connection.
7-19.4 Measurement
Sewer cleanouts will be measured per each.
7-19.5 Payment
Payment will be made for the following Bid item when listed in the Proposal:
“Sewer Cleanout”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for cleanouts shall be full pay for furnishing and placing
the wye, pipe, pipe bends, pipe plug, castings, and collar as specified herein and as shown on
the Standard Plans.

Division 8 Miscellaneous Construction
8-01 Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control
8-01.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing, installing, maintaining, removing and disposing of
high visibility fence, and water pollution and erosion control items in accordance with these
Specifications and as shown in the Plans or as designated by the Engineer.
8-01.2 Materials
Corrugated Polyethylene Drain Pipe 9-05.1(6)
Quarry Spalls 9-13
Seed 9-14.2
Fertilizer 9-14.3
Mulch and Amendments 9-14.4
Tackifiers 9-14.4(7)
Erosion Control Devices 9-14.5
High Visibility Fence 9-14.5
Construction Geotextile 9-33
For all seed the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the following documentation:
1. The state or provincial seed dealer license and endorsements.
2. Copies of Washington State Department of Agriculture (WSDA) test results on each lot
of seed. Test results must be within six months prior to the date of application.
Recycled concrete, in any form, shall not be used for any Work defined in Section 8-01.
8-01.3(1) General
The Contractor shall install a high visibility fence along the site preservation lines shown in
the Plans or as instructed by the Engineer.
Throughout the life of the project, the Contractor shall preserve and protect the delineated
area, acting immediately to repair or restore any fencing damaged or removed.
Controlling pollution, erosion, runoff, and related damage requires the Contractor
to perform temporary Work items including but not limited to:
1. Providing ditches, berms, culverts, and other measures to control surface water.
2. Building dams, settling basins, energy dissipaters, and other measures, to control
downstream flows.
3. Controlling underground water found during construction.
4. Covering or otherwise protecting slopes until permanent erosion-control measures
are working.
To the degree possible, the Contractor shall coordinate this temporary Work with
permanent drainage and erosion control Work the Contract requires.
The Engineer may require additional temporary control measures if it appears pollution
or erosion may result from weather, the nature of the materials, or progress on the Work.
When natural elements rut or erode the slope, the Contractor shall restore and repair the
damage with the eroded material where possible, and remove and dispose of any remaining
material found in ditches and culverts. When the Engineer orders replacement with additional
or other materials, unit Contract prices will cover the quantities needed.

All sediment control devices including, but not limited to, sediment ponds, silt fencing,
or other sediment trapping BMPs shall be installed prior to any ground disturbing activity.
Clearing, grubbing, excavation, borrow, or fill within the Right of Way shall never expose
more erodible earth than as listed below, without written approval by the Engineer:
Western Washington Eastern Washington
(West of the Cascade Mountain Crest) (East of the Cascade Mountain Crest)
May 1 through September 30 17 Acres April 1 through October 31 17 Acres
October 1 through April 30 5 Acres November 1 through March 31 5 Acres
The Engineer may increase or decrease the limits based on project conditions.
Erodible earth is defined as any surface where soils, grindings, or other materials may
be capable of being displaced and transported by rain, wind, or surface water runoff.
Erodible earth not being worked, whether at final grade or not, shall be covered within
the specified time period (see the table below), using an approved soil covering practice.
October 1 through April 30 2 days maximum October 1 through June 30 5 days maximum
May 1 to September 30 7 days maximum July 1 through September 30 10 days maximum
If the Engineer, under Section 1-08.6, orders the Work suspended, the Contractor shall
continue to control erosion, pollution, and runoff during the shutdown.
Nothing in this section shall relieve the Contractor from complying with other Contract
requirements.
8-01.3(1)A Submittals
When a temporary Erosion and Sediment Control (TESC) Plan is included in the
Plans, the Contractor shall either adopt or modify the TESC Plan. The Contractor shall
provide a schedule for TESC Plan implementation and incorporate it into the Contractor’s
progress schedule.
The Contractor’s adoption of the TESC Plan as shown in the Plans shall be submitted
as a Type 1 Working Drawing. Modified TESC Plans shall be submitted as Type 2 Working
Drawings, conforming to all requirements of the current edition of the WSDOT Temporary
Erosion and Sediment Control Manual M 3109. The TESC Plan shall cover all areas that may
be affected inside and outside the limits of the project (including all Contracting Agency-
provided sources, disposal sites, and haul roads, and all nearby land, streams, and other bodies
of water).
Failure to accept all or part of any such Plan will not make the Contracting Agency liable
to the Contractor for any Work delays.
8-01.3(1)B Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Lead
The Contractor shall identify the ESC Lead at the preconstruction discussions and in the
TESC Plan. The ESC Lead shall have, for the life of the Contract, a current Certificate of
Training in Construction Site Erosion and Sediment Control from a course approved by the
Washington State Department of Ecology. The ESC Lead shall be listed on the Emergency
Contact List required under Section 1-05.13(1).
The ESC Lead shall implement the TESC Plan. Implementation shall include, but is not
limited to:
1. Installing and maintaining all temporary erosion and sediment control Best
Management Practices (BMPs) included in the TESC Plan to assure continued
performance of their intended function. Damaged or inadequate TESC BMP’s
shall be corrected immediately.
2. Updating the TESC Plan to reflect current field conditions.

Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control 8-01
When a TESC Plan is included in the Contract Plans, the ESC Lead shall also inspect all
areas disturbed by construction activities, all on-site erosion and sediment control BMP’s,
and all stormwater discharge points every calendar week and within 24 hours of runoff events
in which stormwater discharges from the site or as directed by the Engineer. Inspections
of temporarily stabilized, inactive sites may be reduced to once every calendar month. The
Erosion and Sediment Control Inspection Form (WSDOT Form 220-030) shall be completed
for each inspection and a copy shall be submitted to the Engineer no later than the end of the
next working day following the inspection.
8-01.3(1)C Water Management
Unless site water is to be managed in accordance with the conditions of a waste discharge
permit from a local permitting authority, site water shall be managed as follows:
8-01.3(1)C1 Disposal of Dewatering Water
When uncontaminated groundwater with a pH range of 6.5 – 8.5 is encountered in an
excavation on a project covered by a NPDES Construction Stormwater General Permit, it
may be disposed of as follows:
1. When the turbidity of the groundwater is 25 NTU or less, it may bypass detention and
treatment facilities and be discharged into the stormwater conveyance system at a rate
that will not cause erosion or flooding in the receiving surface water body.
2. When the turbidity of the groundwater is not more than 25 NTU above or 125 percent
of the turbidity of the site stormwater runoff, whichever is greater, the same detention
and treatment facilities as used to treat the site runoff may be used.
3. When the turbidity of the groundwater is more than 25 NTU above or 125 percent of
the turbidity of the site stormwater runoff, whichever is greater, the groundwater shall
be treated separately from the site stormwater.
Alternatively, the Contractor may pursue independent disposal and treatment alternatives
that do not use the stormwater conveyance system.
8-01.3(1)C2 Process Wastewater
Wastewater generated on-site as a byproduct of a construction process shall not be
discharged to surface waters of the State. Some sources of process wastewater may be
infiltrated in accordance with the NPDES Construction Stormwater General Permit.
8-01.3(1)C3 Shaft Drilling Slurry Wastewater
Wastewater generated on-site during shaft drilling activity shall be managed and disposed
of in accordance with the requirements below. No shaft drilling slurry wastewater shall be
discharged to surface waters of the State. Neither the sediment nor liquid portions of the
shaft drilling slurry wastewater shall be contaminated, as detectable by visible or olfactory
indication (e.g., chemical sheen or smell).
1. Water-only shaft drilling slurry or water slurry with approved flocculants may be
infiltrated on-site. Flocculants used shall meet the requirements of Section 9-14.5(1)
or shall be chitosan products listed as General Use Level Designation (GULD) on the
Department of Ecology’s stormwater treatment technologies webpage for construction
treatment. Infiltration is permitted if the following requirements are met:
a. Wastewater shall have a pH of 6.5 – 8.5 prior to discharge.
b. The source water meets drinking water standards or the Groundwater Quality
Criteria listed in WAC 173-200-040.
c. The amount of flocculant added to the slurry shall be kept to the minimum needed to
adequately settle out solids. The flocculant shall be thoroughly mixed into the slurry.
d. Infiltration locations shall be at least 100 feet away from surface waters, wells, on-
site sewage systems, aquifer-sensitive recharge areas, sole source aquifers, and well-
head protection areas. Before infiltration begins, there shall be a minimum of 5 feet
of unsaturated soil between the soil surface receiving the wastewater for infiltration
and the groundwater surface (i.e., saturated soil).
e. The slurry removed from the shaft shall be contained in a leak proof cell or tank for
a minimum of 3 hours.
f. Within a 24 hour period, a maximum of 21,000 gallons of slurry wastewater may be
infiltrated in an infiltration location. The infiltration rate shall be reduced if needed
to prevent wastewater from leaving the infiltration location. The infiltration site
shall be monitored regularly during infiltration activity. All wastewater discharged
to the ground must fully infiltrate and discharges must stop before the end of each
work day.
g. After infiltration activity is complete, loose sediment in the infiltration location
that may have resulted from the infiltration activity or the removal of BMPs
used to manage infiltration activity shall be stabilized to prevent mobilization by
stormwater runoff.
h. Drilling spoils and settled sediments remaining in the containment cell or tank shall
be disposed of in accordance with Section 6-19.3(4)F.
i. Infiltration locations shall be marked on the on-site temporary erosion and sediment
control (TESC) plan sheets before the infiltration activity begins.
j. Prior to infiltrating water-only shaft drilling slurry or water slurry with approved
flocculants, the Contractor shall submit a Shaft Drilling Slurry Wastewater Manage-
ment and Infiltration Plan as a Type 2 Working Drawing. This Plan shall be kept on-
site, adapted if needed to meet the construction requirements, and updated to reflect
what is being done in the field. The Working Drawing shall include, at a minimum,
the following information:
i. Plan sheet showing the proposed infiltration location and all surface waters,
wells, on-site sewage systems, aquifer-sensitive recharge areas, sole source
aquifers, and well-head protection areas within 150 feet.
ii. The proposed elevation of soil surface receiving the wastewater for infiltration
and the anticipated phreatic surface (i.e., saturated soil).
iii. The source of the water used to produce the slurry.
iv. The estimated total volume of wastewater to be infiltrated.
v. The approved flocculant to be used (if any).
vi. The controls or methods (e.g., trenches, traps, berms, silt fence, dispersion,
or discharge metering devices) that will be used to prevent surface wastewater
runoff from leaving the infiltration location. The Working Drawing shall in-clude
all pertinent design details (e.g., sizing of trenches or traps, placement or height
of berms, application techniques) needed to demonstrate the proposed controls
or methods are adequate to prevent surface wastewater runoff from leaving the
infiltration location.
vii. The strategy for removing slurry wastewater from the shaft and containing the
slurry wastewater once it has been removed from the shaft.
viii. The strategy for monitoring infiltration activity and adapting methods to ensure
compliance.
ix. A contingency plan that can be implemented immediately if it becomes evident
that the controls in place or methods being used are not adequate.
x. The strategy for cleaning up the infiltration location after the infiltration activity
is done. Cleanup shall include stabilizing any loose sediment on the surface
within the infiltration area generated as a byproduct of suspended solids in
the infiltrated wastewater or soil disturbance associated with BMP placement
and removal.
k. An infiltration event log of containing details of the infiltration activity shall be kept
on-site and updated during infiltration. The log shall record the date of infiltration,
approximate time of initiation and completion of infiltration, pH of the wastewater
prior to infiltration, approximate volume infiltrated, and the name of the individual
responsible for the infiltration.
2. Shaft drilling mineral slurry, synthetic slurry, or slurry with polymer additives not
approved for infiltration shall be contained and disposed of by the Contractor at
an approved disposal facility in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C. Spoils that
have come into contact with mineral slurry shall be disposed of in accordance with
Section 6-19.3(4)F.
8-01.3(1)C4 Management of Off-Site Water
Prior to disruption of the normal watercourse, the Contractor shall intercept the off-site
surface water and pipe it either through or around the project site to prevent it from coming
into contact with construction activity or mixing with construction stormwater. It shall be
discharged at its preconstruction outfall point in such a manner that there is no increase in
erosion downstream of the site. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing
consisting of the method for performing this Work.
8-01.3(1)D Dispersion/Infiltration
Water shall be conveyed only to dispersion or infiltration areas designated in the TESC
Plan or to sites approved by the Engineer. Water shall be conveyed to designated dispersion
areas at a rate such that, when runoff leaves the area and enters waters of the State, turbidity
standards are achieved. Water shall be conveyed to designated infiltration areas at a rate that
does not produce surface runoff.
8-01.3(1)E Detention/Retention Pond Construction
Whether permanent or temporary, ponds shall be constructed before beginning other
grading and excavation Work in the area that drains into that pond. Temporary conveyances
shall be installed concurrently with grading in accordance with the TESC Plan so that newly
graded areas drain to the pond as they are exposed.
8-01.3(2) Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching
8-01.3(2)A Preparation for Application
8-01.3(2)A1 Seeding
Areas to be cultivated are shown in the Plans or specified in the Special Provisions.
The areas shall be cultivated to the depths specified to provide a reasonably firm but friable
seedbed. Cultivation shall take place no sooner than 2 weeks prior to seeding.
All areas to be seeded, including excavated slopes shall be compacted and prepared unless
otherwise specified or ordered by the Engineer. A cleated roller, crawler tractor, or similar
equipment that forms longitudinal depressions at least 2 inches deep shall be used for
compaction and preparation of the surface to be seeded.
The entire area shall be uniformly covered with longitudinal depressions formed
perpendicular to the natural flow of water on the slope. The soil shall be conditioned with
sufficient water so the longitudinal depressions remain in the soil surface until completion
of the seeding.
Prior to seeding, the finished grade of the soil shall be 1 inch below the top of all curbs,
junction and valve boxes, walks, driveways, and other Structures. The soil shall be in a weed
free and bare condition.
All bags of seed shall be brought to the site in sealed bags and shall have seed labels
attached showing the seed meets the Specifications. Seed which has become wet, moldy,
or otherwise damaged in transit or storage will not be accepted.
8-01.3(2)A2 Temporary Seeding
A cleated roller, crawler tractor, or similar equipment, that forms longitudinal depressions
at least 2 inches deep shall be used for compaction and preparation of the surface to be seeded.
The entire area shall be uniformly covered with longitudinal depressions formed perpendicular
to the natural flow of water on the slope. The soil shall be conditioned with sufficient water so
the longitudinal depressions remain in the soil surface until completion of the seeding.

8-01.3(2)B Seeding and Fertilizing

Seed or seed and fertilizer shall be placed at the rate, mix and analysis specified in the
Special Provisions or as designated by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer
not less than 24 hours in advance of any seeding operation and shall not begin the Work
until areas prepared or designated for seeding have been approved. Following the Engineer’s
approval, seeding of the approved slopes shall begin immediately.
Seeding shall not be done during windy weather or when the ground is frozen, excessively
wet, or otherwise untillable. Seed or seed and fertilizer may be sown by one of the
following methods:
1. A hydro seeder that utilizes water as the carrying agent, and maintains continuous
agitation through paddle blades. It shall have an operating capacity sufficient to agitate,
suspend, and mix into a homogeneous slurry the specified amount of seed and water
or other material. Distribution and discharge lines shall be large enough to prevent
stoppage and shall be equipped with a set of hydraulic discharge spray nozzles that will
provide a uniform distribution of the slurry.
2. Blower equipment with an adjustable disseminating device capable of maintaining a
constant, measured rate of material discharge that will ensure an even distribution of
seed at the rates specified.
3. Helicopters properly equipped for aerial seeding.
4. Power-drawn drills or seeders.
5. Areas in which the above methods are impractical may be seeded by hand methods.
When seeding by hand, the seed shall be incorporated into the top ¼ inch of soil by
hand raking or other method that is approved by the Engineer.
Seed applied using a hydroseeder shall have a tracer added to visibly aid uniform
application. This tracer shall not be harmful to plant, aquatic, or and animal life. If Short-
Term Mulch is used as a tracer, the application rate shall not exceed 250 pounds per acre.
Seed and fertilizer may be applied in one application provided that the fertilizer is placed
in the hydroseeder tank no more than 1 hour prior to application.
8-01.3(2)C Vacant
8-01.3(2)D Mulching
Mulch of the type specified in the Special Provisions shall be furnished, hauled, and evenly
applied at the rates indicated and shall be spread on seeded areas within 48 hours after seeding
unless otherwise specified.
Distribution of straw mulch material shall be by means that utilizes forced air to blow
mulch material on seeded areas. Wood strand mulch shall be applied by hand or by straw
blower on seeded areas.
Mulch may be applied with seed and fertilizer West of the summit of the Cascade
Range. East of the summit of the Cascade Range, seed and fertilizer shall be applied in
a single application followed by the application of mulch. Mulch shall be suitable for
application with a hydroseeder as specified in Section 8-01.3(2)B.
Temporary seed applied outside the application windows established in Section 8-01.3(2)F,
shall be covered with a mulch containing either Moderate-Term Mulch or Long-Term Mulch,
as designated by the Engineer.
Short Term Mulch shall be hydraulically applied at the rate of 2500 pounds per acre and
may be applied in one lift.
Moderate Term Mulch and Long Term Mulch shall be hydraulically applied at the rate of
3500 pounds per acre with no more than 2000 pounds applied in any single lift.
Mulch sprayed on signs or sign Structures shall be removed the same day.
Areas not accessible by mulching equipment shall be mulched by approved hand methods.

8-01.3(2)E Tackifiers
Tackifiers applied using a hydroseeder shall have a mulch tracer added to visibly aid
uniform application. This tracer shall not be harmful to plant, aquatic, or animal life.
A minimum of 125 pounds per acre and a maximum of 250 pounds per acre of Short-Term
Mulch shall be used as a tracer. Tackifier shall be mixed and applied in accordance with the
Soil Binding Using Polyacrylamide (PAM) – The PAM shall be applied on bare soil
completely dissolved and mixed in water or applied as a dry powder. Dissolved PAM shall
be applied at a rate of not more than ⅔ pound per 1,000 gallons of water per acre. A minimum
of 200 pounds per acre of Short-Term Mulch shall be applied with the dissolved PAM. Dry
powder applications may be at a rate of 5 pounds per acre using a hand-held fertilizer spreader
or a tractor-mounted spreader.
PAM shall be applied only to areas that drain to completed sedimentation control BMPs
in accordance with the TESC Plan. PAM may be reapplied on actively worked areas after
a 48-hour period.
PAM shall not be applied during rainfall or to saturated soils.
8-01.3(2)F Dates for Application of Final Seed, Fertilizer, and Mulch
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the final application of seeding, fertilizing,
and mulching of slopes shall be performed during the following periods:
Western Washington1 Eastern Washington
March 1 through May 15 October 1 through November 15 only
September 1 through October 1
1 Where Contract timing is appropriate, seeding, fertilizing, and mulching shall be accomplished during the fall
period listed above.
All Roadway excavation and embankment slopes, including excavation and embankment
slopes that are partially completed to grade, shall be prepared and seeded during the first
available seeding window. When environmental conditions are not conducive to satisfactory
results, the Engineer may suspend Work until such time that the desired results are likely to
be obtained.
Temporary seeding may be performed at any time approved by the Engineer.
8-01.3(2)G Protection and Care of Seeded Areas
The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure a healthy stand of grass. The Contractor shall
restore eroded areas, clean up and properly dispose of eroded materials, and reapply the seed,
fertilizer, and mulch at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
In addition to the requirements of Section 1-07.13(1), the Contractor shall be responsible
for performing the following duties:
1. At the Contractor’s expense, seed, fertilizer, and mulch shall be reapplied in areas that
have been damaged through any cause prior to final inspection, and reapplied to areas
that failed to receive a uniform application at the specified rate.
2. Seeded areas within the planting area shall be considered part of the planting area.
Weeds within the seeded areas shall be controlled in accordance with Section 8-02.3(3).
8-01.3(2)H Inspection
Inspection of seeded areas will be made upon completion of seeding, temporary seeding,
fertilizing, and mulching. The Work in any area will not be measured for payment until a
uniform distribution of the materials is accomplished at the specified rate. Areas that have not
received a uniform application of seed, fertilizer, or mulch at the specified rate, as determined
by the Engineer, shall be reseeded, refertilized, or remulched at the Contractor’s expense prior
to payment.

8-01.3(2)I Mowing
When the Proposal contains the Bid item “Mowing” or mowing areas are defined, the
Contractor shall mow all grass growing areas and slopes 2.5 (H) to 1 (V) or flatter except
for naturally wooded and undergrowth areas. Trimming around traffic facilities, Structures,
planting areas, or other features extending above ground shall be accomplished preceding or
simultaneously with each mowing.
Each mowing shall be considered as one coverage of all grass areas to be mowed within
a defined area. Prospective Bidders shall verify the estimated acreage, the topography,
irregularity of the area, slopes involved, and access limitations to determine the appropriate
equipment to use for mowing. Equipment and tools shall be provided such as, but not limited
to, tractor operated rotary or flail-type grass cutting machines and tools or other approved
equipment. Power driven equipment shall not cause ruts or deformation of improved areas.
Sickle type grass cutters will be permitted only on slopes of drainage ditches, berms, or other
rough areas. The equipment and tools shall be in good repair and maintained so that a clean,
sharp cut of the grass will result at all times. The Engineer will determine the actual number
of mowings. The height of mowing will be 4 to 6 inches or as designated in the Plans or in
Mowing equipment shall be operated and equipped with suitable guards to prevent
throwing rocks or debris onto the Traveled Way or off the Right of Way. Equipment, which
pulls or rips the grass or damages the turf in any manner will not be permitted. The Engineer
will be the sole judge of the adequacy of the equipment, safeguards, and methods of use.
The Contractor will not be required to collect or remove clippings from the project except
on the Traveled Way, Shoulder, walkway, or other areas designated by the Engineer.
8-01.3(3) Placing Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket
Biodegradable Erosion Control Blankets are used as an erosion prevention device and to
enhance the establishment of vegetation. Erosion control blankets shall be installed according
to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Seeding and fertilizing shall be done prior to blanket installation.
Select erosion control blanket material for an area based on the intended function: slope
or ditch stabilization, and site specific factors including soil, slope gradient, rainfall, and flow
exposure. Erosion Control Blankets shall not be used on slopes or in ditches that exceed the
8-01.3(4) Placing Compost Blanket
Compost blanket shall be placed to a depth of 3 inches over bare soil. Compost blanket
shall be placed prior to seeding or other planting. An organic tackifier shall be placed over the
entire composted area when dry or windy conditions are present or expected before the final
application of mulch or erosion control blanket. The tackifier shall be applied immediately
after the application of compost to prevent compost from leaving the composted area.
Compost shall be Medium Compost.
8-01.3(5) Plastic Covering
Erosion Control – Plastic coverings used to temporarily cover stockpiled materials, slopes
or bare soils shall be installed and maintained in a way that prevents water from intruding
under the plastic and prevents the plastic cover from blowing open in the wind. Plastic
coverings shall be placed with at least a 12-inch overlap of all seams and be a minimum of
6 mils thick.
Containment – Plastic coverings used to line concrete washout areas, contain wastewaters,
or used in secondary containment to prevent spills, shall be seamless to prevent infiltration and
be a minimum of 10 mils thick.
Vegetation Management – Plastic covering shall be clear when placed over areas that
have been seeded, and shall be black when placed over areas where vegetation growth is to be
inhibited. Plastic covering for vegetation management shall be a minimum of 4 mils thick.

8-01.3(6) Check Dams

Check dams are used as an erosion and sediment control device in channels or conveyance
areas. Check dams shall be installed as soon as construction will allow, or when directed by
the Engineer. The Contractor may substitute a different check dam material, in lieu of what is
specified in the contract, with approval of the Engineer. Check dam materials shall meet the
requirements in Section 9-14.5(4). Straw bales shall not be used as check dams. The check
dam is a temporary or permanent structure, built across a minor channel placed perpendicular
to the flow of water. Water shall not flow freely through the check dam structure. Check
dams shall be constructed in a manner that creates a ponding area upstream of the dam to
allow pollutants to settle, with water from increased flows channeled over a spillway in the
check dam. The check dam shall be constructed to prevent erosion in the area below the
spillway. The outer edges shall extend up the sides of the conveyance to prevent water from
going around the check dam. Check dams shall be of sufficient height to maximize detention,
without causing water to leave the ditch.
Wattles, coir logs and compost sock used as check dams shall not be trenched in and shall
be installed as shown in the Standard Plans.
When wattles, coir logs, and compost socks are used as check dams they shall be measured
and paid as check dam in accordance with Section 8-01.4 and 8-01.5.
8-01.3(6)A Coir Log
Coir logs are used as erosion and sediment control or bank stabilizing device. Coir logs
shall be laid out, spaced, staked, and installed in accordance with the Standard Plans.
Live stakes in accordance with Section 9-14.6(1) can be used in addition to, but not as
a replacement for, wooden stakes.
8-01.3(7) Stabilized Construction Entrance
Temporary stabilized construction entrance shall be constructed in accordance with the
Standard Plans, prior to beginning any clearing, grubbing, embankment or excavation.
Material used for stabilized construction entrance shall be free of extraneous materials that
may cause or contribute to track out.
When the stabilized entrance no longer prevents track out of sediment or debris, the
Contractor shall either rehabilitate the existing entrance to original condition, or construct
a new entrance.
When the Contract requires a tire wash in conjunction with the stabilized entrance, the
Contractor shall include details for the tire wash and the method for containing and treating
the sediment-laden runoff as part of the TESC Plan. All vehicles leaving the site shall stop
and wash sediment from their tires.
8-01.3(8) Street Cleaning
Self-propelled pickup street sweepers shall be used to remove and collect sediment and
other debris from the Roadway, whenever required by the Engineer. The street sweeper
shall effectively collect these materials and prevent them from being washed or blown off
the Roadway or into waters of the State. Street sweepers shall not generate fugitive dust and
shall be designed and operated in compliance with applicable air quality standards.
Material collected by the street sweeper shall be disposed of in accordance with
Section 2-03.3(7)C.
Street washing with water will require the concurrence of the Engineer.
8-01.3(9) Sediment Control Barriers
Sediment control barriers shall be installed in accordance with TESC Plan or
manufacturer’s recommendations in the areas of clearing, grubbing, earthwork or drainage
prior to starting those activities.
The sediment control barriers shall be maintained until the soils are stabilized.

8-01.3(9)A Fencing
8-01.3(9)A1 High Visibility Fencing
High visibility fencing (HVF) shall be orange in color and installed along the site
preservation lines shown in the Plans or as specified by the Engineer. Post spacing and
attachment of the fencing material to the posts shall be as shown in the Standard Plans and in
accordance with Section 9-14.5(8). The HVF shall not be fastened to trees.
8-01.3(9)A2 Silt Fence
Silt fence shall be black in color and used as a sediment control device to prevent sediment
laden water from leaving project boundaries, to manage stormwater within the site, or to
create small detention areas. Silt fence shall be installed at locations shown in the Plans.
The geotextile shall be securely attached to the posts and support system. Post spacing and
attachments shall be as shown in the Standard Plans.
Geotextile material shall meet the requirements of Section 9-33.2(1), Table 6 and be
sewn together at the point of manufacture, or at a location approved by the Engineer, to form
geotextile lengths as required. All sewn seams and overlaps shall be located at a support post.
Posts shall be either wood or steel. Wood posts shall have minimum dimensions of 1¼ by
1¼ inches by the minimum length shown in the Plans.
When sediment deposits reach approximately ⅓ the height of the silt fence, the deposits
shall be removed and stabilized in accordance with Section 8-01.3(15).
If trenching is not feasible due to rocky soils or not advisable due to proximity to a
downslope sensitive area, a different sediment control device that does not require trenching
shall be used in place of silt fence.
Silt Fence with Backup Support
Backup support is needed for silt fence in areas where extra strength may be required, such
as the toe of steep cut or fill slopes or areas where equipment may push excessive soils toward
the fence. When backup support is used, wire shall have a maximum mesh spacing of 2 inches,
and the plastic mesh shall be as resistant to ultraviolet radiation as the geotextile it supports.
The strength of the wire or plastic mesh shall be equivalent to or greater than as required in
Section 9-33.2(1), Table 6, for unsupported geotextile (i.e., 180 lbs. grab tensile strength in the
machine direction). Post spacing and attachments shall be as shown in the Standard Plans.
8-01.3(9)A3 High Visibility Silt Fence
High visibility silt fence (HVSF) shall be orange in color and only be used for the dual
purpose of demarcating site preservation lines and a sediment control device in a location
where high visibility mesh fence and black silt fence would otherwise be used together at
same location. If use of HVSF is allowed the geotextile material shall meet the material
requirements of Section 9-33.2(1), Table 6. Post spacing and attachments shall be as shown
in the Standard Plans.
High Visibility Silt Fence with Backup Support
Backup support is needed for high visibility silt fence (HVSF) in areas where extra strength
may be required, such as the toe of steep cut or fill slopes or areas where equipment may push
excessive soils toward the sensitive or protected areas. When backup support is used, wire
shall have a maximum mesh spacing of 2 inches, and the plastic mesh shall be as resistant
to ultraviolet radiation as the geotextile it supports. The strength of the wire or plastic mesh
shall be equivalent to or greater than as required in Section 9-33.2(1), Table 6, for unsupported
geotextile (i.e., 180 lbs. grab tensile strength in the machine direction). Post spacing shall be as
shown in the Standard Plans.
When sediment deposits reach approximately ⅓ the height of the silt fence, or 8 inches
whichever is lower the deposits shall be removed and stabilized in accordance with
Section 8-01.3(15).

8-01.3(9)B Gravel Filter, Wood Chip, or Compost Berm

Filter berms shall retain sediment and direct flows. The gravel filter berm shall be a
minimum of 1 foot in height and shall be maintained at this height for the entire time
they are in use. Rock material used for filter berms shall meet the grading requirements in
Section 9-03.9(2), but shall not include any recycled materials as outlined in Section 9-03.21.
The wood chip berm shall be a minimum of 2 feet in height and shall be maintained at
this height for the entire time they are in use.
The Compost Berm shall be constructed in accordance with the detail in the Plans.
Compost shall be Medium Compost.
8-01.3(9)C Vacant
8-01.3(9)D Inlet Protection
Inlet protection shall be installed below or above, or as a prefabricated cover at each inlet
grate, as shown in the Plans. Inlet protection devices shall be installed prior to beginning
clearing, grubbing, or earthwork activities.
Geotextile fabric in all prefabricated inlet protection devices shall meet or exceed the
requirements of Section 9-33.2, Table 1, for Moderate Survivability, and the minimum
filtration properties of Table 2.
When the depth of accumulated sediment and debris reaches approximately ½ the height
of an internal device or ⅓ the height of the external device (or less when so specified by the
manufacturers), or as designated by the Engineer, the deposits shall be removed and stabilized
on‑site in accordance with Section 8-01.3(16).
Below Inlet Grate
Below Inlet Grate devices shall be prefabricated units specifically designed for inlet
protection and shall remain securely attached to the drainage Structure when fully loaded
with sediment and debris, or at the maximum level of sediment and debris specified by
the manufacturer.
Above Inlet Grate
Above Inlet Grate devices may be silt fence, sandbags, or prefabricated units specifically
designed for inlet protection.
The device shall remain securely in place around the drainage Structure under
all conditions.
Inlet Grate Cover
Inlet Grate Cover devices shall be prefabricated units specifically designed for inlet
protection and have the following features:
1. Be a sewn geotextile fabric unit fitted to the individual grate and completely enclosing
the grate.
2. Have built-in lifting devices to allow manual access of the stormwater system.
3. Utilize an orange monofilament geotextile fabric.
Check dams or functionally equivalent devices may be used as inlet protection devices
with the approval of the Engineer.
8-01.3(10) Wattles
Wattles are used as a flow control and sediment control device. Wattles shall be installed
as soon as construction will allow or when designated by the Engineer. Wattle installation
and trenching shall begin from the base of the slope and work uphill prior to any topsoil or
compost placement. Excavated material from trenching shall be spread evenly along the uphill
slope and be compacted using hand tamping or other method approved by the Engineer. On
gradually sloped or clay-type soils trenches shall be 2 to 3 inches deep. On loose soils, in high
rainfall areas, or on steep slopes, trenches shall be 3 to 5 inches deep, or half the thickness of
the wattle, whichever is greater.

Wattles shall be laid out, spaced, and staked in accordance with the Standard Plans.
Live stakes in accordance with Section 9-14.6(1) can be used in addition to, but not as a
replacement for, wooden stakes. If trenching and staking is not possible due to rocky soils,
compost socks shall be used instead of wattles.
The Contractor shall exercise care when installing wattles to ensure the method of
installation minimizes the disturbance of waterways and prevents sediment or pollutant
discharge into water bodies.
8-01.3(11) Outlet Protection
Outlet protection shall prevent scour at the outlets of ponds, pipes, ditches or other
conveyances. All quarry spall material used for outlet protection shall be free of extraneous
material and meet the gradation requirements in Section 9-13.1(5).
8-01.3(12) Compost Sock
Compost socks are used as a flow control and sediment control device. Compost socks
shall be installed as soon as construction will allow or when specified by the Engineer.
Compost socks shall be installed prior to any mulching or compost placement. Compost socks
shall be laced together end-to-end with coir rope or ends shall be securely overlapped to create
a continuous length. Terminal ends of the continuous length shall be curved 2 to 4 feet upward
into the slope to prevent concentrated flows from going around the terminal ends. Finished
grades shall be of a natural appearance with smooth transitions. Compost for compost socks
shall be Medium Compost.
Compost socks shall be laid out, spaced and staked in accordance with the Standard
Plans. Live stakes in accordance with Section 9-14.6(1) can be used in addition to, but not
as a replacement for, wooden stakes. If staking is not possible or if the compost sock is being
used on concrete, heavy blocks or an equivalent item shall be used to weigh down and secure
the sock.
The Contractor shall exercise care when installing compost socks to ensure that the
method of installation minimizes disturbance of waterways and prevents sediment or pollutant
discharge into water bodies. Stakes shall be removed to minimize soil disturbance.
8-01.3(13) Temporary Curb
Temporary curbs shall divert or redirect water around erodible soils.
Temporary curbs shall be installed along pavement edges to prevent runoff from flowing
onto erodible slopes. Water shall be directed to areas where erosion can be controlled. The
temporary curbs shall be a minimum of 4 inches in height. Ponding shall not be in roadways.
8-01.3(14) Temporary Pipe Slope Drain
Temporary pipe slope drain shall be Corrugated Polyethylene Drain Pipe and shall be
constructed in accordance with the Plans.
Water interceptor dikes or temporary curbs shall be used to direct water into pipe slope
drain. The entrance to the drain may consist of a prefabricated funnel device specifically
designed for application, rock, sand bags, or as approved by the Engineer.
Pipe shall be securely fastened together and have gasketed watertight fittings, and secured
to the slope with metal “T” posts, wood stakes, sand bags, or as approved by the Engineer.
The water shall be discharged to a stabilized conveyance, sediment trap, stormwater pond,
rock splash pad, vegetated strip, or as approved by the Engineer.
Placement of outflow of the pipe shall not pond water on road surface.
8-01.3(15) Maintenance
Erosion and sediment control BMP’s shall be maintained so they properly perform their
function until the Engineer determines they are no longer needed.
The BMP’s shall be inspected on the schedule outlined in Section 8-01.3(1)B for damage
and sediment deposits. Damage to or undercutting of BMP’s shall be repaired immediately.

In areas where the Contractor’s activities have compromised the erosion control functions
of the existing grasses, the Contractor shall overseed at no additional cost to the Contracting
Agency.
Unless otherwise specified, when the depth of accumulated sediment and debris reaches
approximately ⅓ the height of the BMP the deposits shall be removed. Debris or contaminated
sediment shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 2-03.3(7)C. Clean sediments may be
stabilized on-site using BMPs as approved by the Engineer.
Erosion and sediment control BMP’s that have been damaged shall be repaired or replaced
immediately by the Contractor, in accordance with Section 1-07.13(4).
8-01.3(16) Removal
When the Engineer determines that an erosion control BMP is no longer required,
the Contractor shall remove the BMP and all associated hardware from the project limits.
When the materials are biodegradable the Engineer may approve leaving the temporary
BMP in place.
The Contractor shall remove BMPs and associated hardware in a way that minimizes
soil disturbance. The Contractor shall permanently stabilize all bare and disturbed soil after
removal of BMP’s. If the installation and use of the erosion control BMP’s have compacted
or otherwise rendered the soil inhospitable to plant growth, such as construction entrances,
the Contractor shall take measures to rehabilitate the soil to facilitate plant growth. This may
include, but is not limited to, ripping the soil, incorporating soil amendments, or seeding with
the specified seed.
8-01.4 Measurement
ESC lead will be measured per day for each day that an inspection is made and a report
is filed.
Compost blanket, erosion control blanket and plastic covering will be measured by the
square yard along the ground slope line of surface area covered and accepted.
Check dams will be measured per linear foot one time only along the completed check
dam. No additional measurement will be made for check dams that are required to be
rehabilitated or replaced due to wear.
Stabilized construction entrance will be measured by the square yard for each entrance
constructed.
Tire wash facilities will be measured per each for each wash installed.
Street cleaning will be measured by the hour for the actual time spent cleaning pavement,
as authorized by the Engineer. Time to move the equipment to or from the area on which
street cleaning is required will not be measured.
Inlet protection will be measured per each for each initial installation at a
drainage Structure.
Silt fence, gravel filter, compost berms, and wood chip berms will be measured by
the linear foot along the ground line of completed barrier.
Wattle and compost sock will be measured by the linear foot.
Temporary curb will be measured by the linear foot.
Temporary pipe slope drain will be measured by the linear foot.
Seeding, fertilizing, liming, mulching, mowing, and tackifier will be measured by the acre
by ground slope measurement or through the use of design data.
Seeding and fertilizing by hand will be measured by the square yard. No adjustment
in area size will be made for the vegetation free zone around each plant.
Coir log will be measured by the linear foot along the ground line of the completed
installation.
Fencing will be measured by the linear foot along the ground line of the completed fence.
Outlet Protection will be measured per each initial installation at an outlet location.

8-01.5 Payment
“ESC Lead”, per day.
“Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket”, shall
be full pay for all costs to complete the specified Work.
“Compost Blanket”, per square yard.
“Plastic Covering”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Plastic Covering” shall be full payment to
perform the Work as specified in Section 8-01.3(5) and as shown in the Plans, including
removal and disposal at an approved disposal site.
“Check Dam”, per linear foot.
“Inlet Protection”, per each.
“Gravel Filter Berm”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Check Dam” and “Gravel Filter Berm” and
per each for “Inlet Protection” shall be full pay for all equipment, labor, and materials to
perform the Work as specified, including installation, removal, and disposal at an approved
disposal site.
“Stabilized Construction Entrance”, per square yard.
“Tire Wash”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for tire wash shall include all costs associated with
constructing, operating, maintaining, and removing the tire wash.
“Street Cleaning”, per hour.
“Silt Fence”, per linear foot.
“High Visibility Silt Fence”, per linear foot.
“Wood Chip Berm”, per linear foot.
“Compost Berm”, per linear foot.
“Wattle”, per linear foot.
“Compost Sock”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price for “Compost Sock” shall include removal and disposal of the
compost sock fabric if photodegradable fabric is used.
“Coir Log”, per linear foot.
“Erosion/Water Pollution Control”, by force account as provided in Section 1-09.6.
Maintenance and removal of erosion and water pollution control devices including removal
and disposal of sediment, stabilization and rehabilitation of soil disturbed by these activities,
and any additional Work deemed necessary by the Engineer to control erosion and water
pollution will be paid by force account in accordance with Section 1-09.6.
To provide a common Proposal for all Bidders, the Contracting Agency has entered an
amount in the Proposal to become a part of the Contractor’s total Bid.
“Temporary Curb”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Temporary Curb” shall include all costs to
install, maintain, remove, and dispose of the temporary curb.
“Temporary Pipe Slope Drain”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot shall be full pay for all Work to complete and
remove the installation of the pipe slope drain as shown in the Plans. All materials shall
become the property of the Contractor after removal.
“Mulching”, per acre
“Mulching with PAM”, per acre

“Mulching with Short-Term Mulch”, per acre.

“Mulching with Moderate-Term Mulch”, per acre.
“Mulching with Long-Term Mulch”, per acre.
“Temporary Seeding”, per acre.
“Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching”, per acre.
“Seeding and Fertilizing”, per acre.
“Seeding and Fertilizing by Hand”, per square yard.
“Second Application of Fertilizer”, per acre.
“Liming”, per acre.
“Mowing”, per acre.
“Seeding and Mulching”, per acre.
“Tackifier”, per acre
The unit Contract price per acre for “Tackifier” shall be full payment for all costs incurred
to complete the Work.
“High Visibility Fence”, per linear foot.
The unit contract price per linear foot for “High Visibility Fence” shall be full pay for all
costs to obtain, install, maintain, and remove the fence as specified. Once removed, the fencing
shall remain the property of the Contractor.
“Outlet Protection”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Outlet Protection” shall be full payment for all costs
incurred to complete the Work.

8-02 Roadside Restoration

8-02.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and placing topsoil, compost, and soil amendments,
and furnishing and planting bare root plants, container plants, balled and burlapped plants,
cuttings, fascines, live stakes, live poles, rhizomes, tubers, lawn installation, controlling
weeds, performing plant establishment activities, and soil bioengineering in accordance
with these Specifications and as shown in the Plans or as designated by the Engineer.
Trees, whips, shrubs, ground covers, cuttings, live stakes, live poles, rhizomes,
tubers, rootstock, and seedlings will hereinafter be referred to collectively as “plants”
or “plant material”.
8-02.2 Materials
Soil 9-14.1
Fertilizer 9-14.3
Mulch and Amendments 9-14.4
Erosion Control Blanket 9-14.5
Plant Materials 9-14.6
Stakes, Guys, and Wrapping 9-14.7
Irrigation Water 9-25.2
Botanical identification and nomenclature of plant materials shall be based on descriptions
by Hitchcock and Cronquist in “Flora of the Pacific Northwest”. Botanical identification and
nomenclature of plant material not found in "Flora" shall be based on Bailey in “Hortus Third”
or superseding editions and amendments or as referenced in the Plans.
8-02.3(1) Responsibility During Construction
The Contractor shall ensure adequate and proper care of all plant material and Work done
on this project until all plant establishment periods required by the Contract are complete or
until Physical Completion of the project, whichever is last. Existing vegetation shall not be
disturbed unless required by the Contract or approved by the Engineer.
Adequate and proper care shall include, but is not limited to, keeping all plant material in
a healthy, growing condition by watering, cultivating, pruning, and spraying. Plant material
crowns, runners, and branches shall be kept free of mulch at all times. This Work shall
include keeping the planted and seeded areas free from insect infestation, weeds or unwanted
vegetation, litter, and other debris along with retaining the finished grades and mulch in a
neat uniform condition.
The Contractor shall have sole responsibility for the maintenance and appearance of the
roadside restoration.
8-02.3(2) Work Plans
8-02.3(2)A Roadside Work Plan
Before starting any Work that disturbs the earth and as described in Sections 8-01, 8-02
and 8-03, the Contractor shall submit a roadside work plan. The roadside work plan shall
be submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing and shall define the Work necessary to provide
all Contract requirements, including: wetland excavation, soil preparation, habitat structure
placement, planting area preparation, seeding area preparation, bark mulch and compost
placement, seeding, planting, plant replacement, irrigation, and weed control in narrative form.
The Roadside Work Plan shall also include a copy of the approved progress schedule.

Roadside Restoration 8-02
8-02.3(2)B Weed and Pest Control Plan

The Weed and Pest Control Plan shall be submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing. The
weed and pest control plan shall include scheduling and methods of all control measures
required under the Contract or proposed by the Contractor including soil preparation methods
to meet the required soil surface conditions in the planting, bark mulch, and wetland areas. The
weed control plan shall show general weed control including hand, mechanical and chemical
methods, timing, application of herbicides including type, rate, use and timing, mowing, and
noxious weed control. Target weeds and unwanted vegetation to be removed shall be identified
and listed in the weed control plan.
The plan shall be prepared and signed by a licensed Commercial Pest Control Operator or
Consultant when chemical pesticides are proposed. The plan shall include methods of weed
control; dates of weed control operations; and the name, application rate, and Material Safety
Data Sheets of all proposed herbicides. In addition, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer
with a copy of the current product label for each pesticide and spray adjuvant to be used.
These product labels shall be submitted with the weed control plan for approval.
8-02.3(2)C Plant Establishment Plan
The Plant Establishment Plan shall be prepared in accordance with the requirements of
Section 8-02.3(13) and submitted as a Type 1 Working Drawing. The Plan shall show the
proposed scheduling of activities, materials, equipment to be utilized for the first-year plant
establishment, and an emergency contact person. The Plan shall include the management
of the irrigation system, when applicable. Should the plan become unworkable at any time
during the first-year plant establishment, the Contractor shall submit a revised plan prior to
proceeding with further Work.
8-02.3(3) Weed and Pest Control
The Contractor shall control weed and pest species within the project area using integrated
pest management principles consisting of mechanical, biological, and chemical controls that
are outlined in the Weed and Pest Control Plan or as designated by the Engineer.
Those weeds specified as noxious by the Washington State Department of Agriculture, the
local Weed District, or the County Noxious Weed Control Board and other species identified
by the Contracting Agency shall be controlled on the project in accordance with the weed and
pest control plan.
The Contractor shall control weeds not otherwise covered in accordance with
Section 8-02.3(3)A, Planting Area Weed Control, in all areas within the project limits,
including erosion control seeding areas and vegetation preservation areas, as designated by the
Engineer.
Grass, including grass applied in accordance with Section 8-01, growing within the mulch
ring of a plant shall be considered a weed and be controlled on the project in accordance with
the weed and pest control plan.
8-02.3(3)A Planting Area Weed Control
All planting areas shall be prepared so that they are weed and debris free at the time of
planting and until completion of the project. The planting areas shall include the entire ground
surface, regardless of cover, all planting beds, areas around plants, and those areas shown in
the Plans.
All applications of post-emergent herbicides shall be made while green and growing
tissue is present. Should unwanted vegetation reach the seed stage, in violation of these
Specifications, the Contractor shall physically remove and bag the seed heads. All
physically removed vegetation and seed heads shall be disposed of off-site at no cost to the
Contracting Agency.
Weed barrier mats shall be installed as shown in the Plans. Mats shall be 3 feet square and
shall be secured by a minimum of five staples per mat. Mats and staples shall be installed
according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.

8-02.3(3)B Chemical Pesticides
Application of chemical pesticides shall be in accordance with the label recommendations,
the Washington State Department of Ecology, local sensitive area ordinances, and Washington
State Department of Agriculture laws and regulations. Only those herbicides listed in the table
Herbicides Approved for Use on WSDOT Rights of Way may be used (www.wsdot.wa.gov/
maintenance/roadside/herbicide_use.htm).
The applicator shall be licensed by the state of Washington as a Commercial Applicator or
Commercial Operator, with additional endorsements as required by the Special Provisions or
the proposed weed control plan. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer evidence that all
operators are licensed with appropriate endorsements, and that the pesticide used is registered
for use by the Washington State Department of Agriculture. All chemicals shall be delivered
to the job site in the original containers. The licensed applicator or operator shall complete
a Commercial Pesticide Application Record (WSDOT Form 540-509) each day the pesticide
is applied and furnish a copy to the Engineer by the following business day.
The Contractor shall ensure confinement of the chemicals within the designated areas.
The use of spray chemical pesticides shall require the use of anti-drift and activating agents
and a spray pattern indicator unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall assume all responsibility for rendering any area unsatisfactory for
planting by reason of chemical application. Damage to adjacent areas, either on or off the
Highway Right of Way, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer or the property
owner, and the cost of such repair shall be borne by the Contractor.
8-02.3(4) Topsoil
Topsoil shall be evenly spread over the specified areas to the depth shown in the Plans or
as otherwise ordered by the Engineer. The soil shall be cultivated to a depth of 1 foot or as
specified in the Special Provisions or the Plans. After the topsoil has been spread, all large
clods, hard lumps, and rocks 2 inches in diameter and larger, and litter shall be raked up,
removed, and disposed of by the Contractor.
Topsoil stockpiled for project use shall be protected to prevent erosion and weed growth.
Weed growth on topsoil stockpile sites shall be immediately eliminated in accordance with the
approved Weed and Pest Control Plan.
Topsoil shall not be placed when the ground or topsoil is frozen, excessively wet, or in
the opinion of the Engineer, in a condition detrimental to the Work.
8-02.3(4)A Topsoil Type A
Topsoil Type A shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
8-02.3(4)B Topsoil Type B
Topsoil Type B shall be native topsoil taken from within the project limits and shall meet
the requirements of Section 9-14.1(2).
Topsoil Type B shall be taken from areas designated by the Engineer to the designated
depth and stockpiled at locations that will not interfere with the construction of the project,
as approved by the Engineer. Areas beyond the slope stakes shall be disturbed as little as
possible in the above operations.
When Topsoil Type B is specified, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to perform the
excavation operations in such a manner that sufficient material is set aside to satisfy the needs
of the project.
Upon Physical Completion of the Work, Topsoil Type B remaining and not required for use
on the project shall be disposed of by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency
Should a shortage of Topsoil Type B occur, and the Contractor has wasted or otherwise
disposed of topsoil material, the Contractor shall furnish Topsoil Type C at no expense to the
Contracting Agency.

Topsoil Type B will not be considered as selected material, as defined in Section 2-03.3(10),

and the conditions of said section shall not apply.
Materials taken from Roadway excavation, borrow, stripping, or other excavation items,
and utilized for topsoil, will not be deducted from the pay quantities for the respective items.
8-02.3(4)C Topsoil Type C
Topsoil Type C shall be native topsoil obtained from a source provided by the Contractor
outside of the Contracting Agency-owned Right of Way. Topsoil Type C shall meet the
requirements of Sections 8-02.3(4), 8-02.3(4)B, and 9-14.1(3).
8-02.3(5) Planting Area Preparation
The Work involved in preparing planting areas shall be conducted so the flow lines in
drainage channels are maintained. Material displaced by the Contractor’s operations that
interferes with drainage, shall be removed from the channel and disposed of as approved by
the Engineer.
Before planting and final grading takes place, the area shall be cultivated when specified
in the Plans or the Special Provisions.
The areas shall be brought to a uniform finished grade, 1 inch, or the specified depth of
mulch plus 1 inch, below walks, curbs, junction and valve boxes, catch basins, and driveways,
unless otherwise specified. All excess material and debris, stumps, and rocks larger than
3 inches, shall be removed and disposed of off the project site or as approved by the Engineer.
8-02.3(6) Soil Amendments
Soil amendments of the type, quality, and quantities specified shall be applied where shown
in the Plans or as specified in the Special Provisions. Areas receiving soil amendments shall
be bare soil or vegetation free prior to application. Compost used for soil amendments shall be
Fine Compost. All soil amendments shall be installed as shown in the Plans within 30 calendar
days after delivery to the project site.
8-02.3(7) Layout of Planting
The Contractor shall stake the location of all trees larger than 1-inch caliper and the
perimeter of all planting areas for approval by the Engineer prior to any installation activities.
All trees to be planted in mowable grass areas shall be located a minimum of 10 feet
from the edge of planting beds, other trees, fence lines, and bottom of ditches unless
otherwise specified.
Tree locations shown in the Plans shall be considered approximate unless shown with
stationing and offset distance. In irrigated areas, trees shall be located so their trunk is a
minimum of ⅓ of the spray radius away from the nearest sprinkler head.
Unless otherwise shown, planting beds located adjacent to Roadways shall begin at the
Shoulder Subgrade.
8-02.3(8) Planting
No plant material shall be planted until it has been inspected and approved for planting
by the Engineer. Rejected material shall be removed from the project site immediately.
All plants for the project or a sufficient quantity to plant 1-acre of the site, whichever is
less, shall be received on site prior to the Engineer beginning inspection of the plants.
Under no circumstances will planting be permitted during unsuitable soil or weather
conditions as determined by the Engineer. Unsuitable conditions may include frozen soil,
freezing weather, saturated soil, standing water, high winds, heavy rains, and high water
levels. All planting shall be accomplished during the following periods:
1. Non-Irrigated Plant Material
West of the summit of the Cascade Range – October 1 to March 1.
East of the summit of the Cascade Range – October 1 to November 15.
2. Irrigated Plant Material

In irrigated areas, plant material shall not be installed until the irrigation system is fully
operational. Trees and shrubs may be planted in irrigated areas during the non-irrigated
planting window before the irrigation system is functional with the written approval of the
Engineer only if the irrigation system is guaranteed to be operational prior to the end of the
non-irrigated planting window.
Plants shall not be placed below the finished grade.
Planting hole sizes for plant material shall be in accordance with the details shown in the
Plans. Any glazed surface of the planting hole shall be roughened prior to planting.
Plant material supplied in containers shall not be removed from the containers until the
time of planting at the planting location. Roots of bare root stock shall not be bunched, curled,
twisted, or unreasonably bent when placed in the planting hole. Root balls shall be loosened
prior to planting. All bare root plant material shall be dormant at the time of planting.
All cuttings shall be planted immediately if buds begin to swell.
All burlap, baskets, string, wire and other such materials shall be removed from the hole
when planting balled and burlapped plants. The plant material shall be handled in such a
manner that the root systems are kept covered and damp at all times. The root systems of
all bare root plant material shall be dipped in a slurry as specified in the Special Provisions
immediately prior to planting. The root systems of container plant material shall be moist
at the time of planting. In their final position, all plants shall have their top true root (not
adventitious root) no more than 1 inch below the soil surface, no matter where that root
was located in the original root ball or container. The backfill material and root ball shall
be thoroughly watered on the same day that planting occurs regardless of season.
8-02.3(9) Pruning, Staking, Guying, and Wrapping
Plants shall be pruned at the time of planting, only to remove minor broken or damaged
twigs, branches or roots. Pruning shall be done with a sharp tool and shall be done in such
a manner as to retain or to encourage natural growth characteristics of the plants. All other
pruning shall be performed only after the plants have been in the ground at least 1 year and
when plants are dormant.
Trees shall only be staked when so noted in the Plans. Each tree shall be staked or guyed
before completion of the backfilling in accordance with the details shown in the Plans.
All staking and guying shall be completely removed at the end of the first year of plant
establishment, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
8-02.3(10) Fertilizers
Fertilizers shall be applied in the form specified in the Special Provisions. Application
procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or as specified
in the Special Provisions. The Contractor shall submit for approval a guaranteed fertilizer
analysis label for the selected product.
8-02.3(11) Bark or Wood Chip Mulch
Bark or wood chip mulch of the type and depth specified shall be applied where shown
in the Plans or as specified in the Special Provisions. Any contamination of the mulch due
to the Contractor’s operations shall be corrected to its former condition at the Contractor’s
expense. Mulch shall be feathered to the base of the plant and 1 inch below the top of
junction and valve boxes, curbs, and pavement edges. All plant crowns shall be free of
mulch. Mulch placed to a thickness greater than specified shall be at no additional cost to
Areas receiving bark mulch shall be bare soil or vegetation free before application.
8-02.3(12) Completion of Initial Planting
Upon completion of the initial planting within a designated area, the Engineer will make
an inspection of all plant material and notify the Contractor, in writing, of any replacements

or corrective action necessary to meet the Contract Provisions. The Contractor shall replace
all materials rejected or missing and correct unsatisfactory conditions.
Completion of the initial planting within a designated area includes the following:
1. 100 percent of each of the plant material categories shall be installed as shown in the
Contract Plans.
2. Planting Area cleanup.
3. Repairs completed for the entire project, including but not limited to full operation of
the irrigation system, complete mulch coverage, and all weeds controlled.
8-02.3(13) Plant Establishment
Plant establishment shall consist of caring for all plants planted on the project and caring
for the planting areas within the project limits. The provisions of Sections 1-07.13(2) and
1-07.13(3) do not apply to this Section.
The first year of plant establishment shall begin immediately upon written notification
from the Engineer of the completion of initial planting for the project. The first-year plant
establishment period shall be a minimum of 1 calendar year. The 1 calendar year shall be
extended an amount equal to any periods where the Contractor does not comply with the plant
establishment plan.
During the first-year plant establishment period, the Contractor shall perform all Work
necessary to ensure the resumption and continued growth of the transplanted material. This
care shall include, but not be limited to, labor and materials necessary for removal of foreign,
dead, or rejected plant material, maintaining a weed-free condition, and the replacement of
all unsatisfactory plant material planted under the Contract. If plants are stolen or damaged
by the acts of others, the Contracting Agency will pay invoice cost only for the replacement
plants with no mark-up and the Contractor will be responsible for the labor to install the
replacement plants.
During the first year of plant establishment under psiPE (Plant Selection Including Plant
Establishment), the Contractor shall meet monthly with the Engineer for the purpose of joint
inspection of the planting material on a mutually agreed upon schedule. The Contractor shall
correct all conditions unsatisfactory to the Engineer within a 10-day period immediately
following the inspection. If plant replacement is required, the Contractor shall, within the
10-day period, submit a plan and schedule for the plant replacement to occur immediately at
the beginning of the planting period as designated in Section 8-02.3(8). Failure to comply with
corrective steps as outlined by the Engineer shall constitute justification for the Contracting
Agency to take corrective steps and to deduct all costs thereof from any monies due the
Contractor. At the end of the plant establishment period, plants that do not show normal
growth shall be replaced.
All automatic irrigation systems shall be operated fully automatic during the plant
establishment period and until final acceptance of the Contract. Payment for water used to
water in plants, or hand watering of plant material or lawn areas unless otherwise specified,
is the responsibility of the Contractor during the first-year plant establishment period.
8-02.3(14) Plant Replacement
The Contractor shall be responsible for growing or providing enough plants for
replacement of all plant material rejected through first-year plant establishment. All
replacement plant material shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to
installation. All rejected plant material shall be replaced at dates approved by the Engineer.
All replacement plants shall be of the same species and quality as the plants they replace.
Plants may vary in size reflecting one season of growth should the Contractor elect to hold
plant material under nursery conditions for an additional year to serve as replacement plants.
Replacement plant material larger than specified in the Plans shall meet the applicable section
requirements of the ASNS for container class, ball size, spread, and branching characteristics.

8-02.3(15) Live Fascines

Live fascines are constructed of live and dead cuttings bundled together with a minimum
diameter of 8 inches. Live cuttings shall be as shown in the Plans. Dead branches may be
cuttings from any woody, non-invasive plant, native to the project area. Dead branches may be
placed within the live fascine and on the side exposed to the air. Live branches shall be placed
in contact with the soil along their entire length. Each live fascine must contain a minimum
of eight live branches. Dead branches shall constitute no more than 40 percent of the total
fascine content.
The total length of each live fascine shall be a minimum of 5 feet. Branches shall be bound
with biodegradable twine spaced at 1-foot intervals along the entire length of the live fascine.
Live fascines shall be installed in a trench whose depth shall be ½ the diameter of the live
fascine. Secure the live fascine with live stakes 3 feet in length and ¾ inch in diameter placed
at 18-inch intervals. A minimum of three live stakes shall be used per fascine. The live stakes
shall be driven through the live fascine vertically into the slope. The ends of live fascines shall
be woven together so that no gap remains between the two sections of the live fascine.
8-02.3(16) Lawn Installation
8-02.3(16)A Lawn Installation
In irrigated areas, lawn installation shall not begin until the irrigation system
is fully operational.
Seed mix and rate of application shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, seeded lawn installation shall be performed
during the following time periods at the location shown:
March 1 through May 15 October 1 through November 15
September 1 through October 1
The Contractor shall have the option of sodding in lieu of seeding for lawn installation
at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency. Seeding in lieu of sodding will not
be allowed.
Topsoil for seeded or sodded lawns shall be placed at the depth and locations as shown in
the Plans. The topsoil shall be cultivated to the specified depth, raked to a smooth even grade
without low areas that trap water and compacted, all as approved by the Engineer.
Sod strips shall be placed within 48 hours of being cut. Placement shall be without voids
and have the end joints staggered. Following placement, the sod shall be rolled with a smooth
roller to establish contact with the soil.
Barriers shall be erected, with warning signs where necessary, to preclude pedestrian traffic
access to the newly placed lawn during the establishment period.
8-02.3(16)B Lawn Establishment
Lawn establishment shall consist of caring for all new lawn areas within the limits of
the project.
The lawn establishment period shall begin immediately after the lawn planting has been
accepted by the Engineer and shall extend to the end of four mowings or 20 working days
which ever is longer. The mowings shall be done in accordance with Section 8-02.3(16)C.
During the lawn establishment period, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure
the continuing healthy growth of the turf. This care shall include labor and materials necessary
to keep the project in a presentable condition, including but not limited to, removal of litter,
mowing, trimming, removal of grass clippings, edging, fertilization, insecticide and fungicide
applications, weed control, watering, repairing the irrigation system, and repair and reseeding
any and all damaged areas. Lawn mowing shall be performed once each week, or as ordered
by the Engineer, during the lawn establishment period with no additional compensation.

Temporary barriers shall be removed only on written permission from the Engineer.
All Work performed under lawn establishment shall comply with established turf
management practices.
Acceptance of lawn planting as specified shall be based on a uniform stand of grass and
a uniform grade at the time of final inspection. Areas that are bare or have a poor stand of
grass, and areas not having a uniform grade through any cause before final inspection, shall be
recultivated, regraded, reseeded, or resodded and refertilized as specified at no additional cost
8-02.3(16)C Lawn Mowing
Lawn mowing shall begin immediately after the lawn establishment period has been
accepted by the Engineer and shall extend to the end of the Contract or the first-year plant
establishment, whichever is last.
The Contractor shall accomplish the following minimum requirements:
1. Mowing, trimming, and edging shall be done as often as conditions dictate. Maximum
height of lawn shall not exceed 3 inches. The cutting height shall be 2 inches. Cuttings,
trimmings, and edgings shall be disposed of off the project site. When the Engineer
approves the use of a mulching mower, trimmings may be left in place.
2. Watering shall be as often as conditions dictate depending on weather and soil
conditions.
3. Provide fertilizer, weed control, and other measures as necessary to maintain a healthy
stand of grass.
8-02.4 Measurement
Topsoil, mulch and soil amendments will be measured by the acre along the grade and
slope of the area covered immediately after application.
Brush layer will be measured by the linear foot along the ground slope line.
Live pole will be measured per each.
Live stake row will be measured by the linear foot along the ground slope line.
Fascine will be measured by the linear foot along the ground slope line.
Live brush mattress will be measured by the surface square yard along the ground
slope line.
Compost will be measured by the acre along the grade and slope of the area covered
immediately after application.
The quantity of topsoil Type B used on the project will not be deducted from the total
quantity of Roadway excavation, borrow, strippings, or other excavation for which haul is
being paid.
The pay quantities for plant materials will be determined by count of the number of
satisfactory plants in each category accepted by the Engineer.
Weed barrier mat will be measured per each.
Fertilizer will be measured in pounds.
Water will be measured in accordance with Section 2-07.4. Measurement will be made of
only that water hauled in tank trucks or similar equipment.
Seeded lawn, sod installations, and lawn mowing will be measured along the ground slope
and computed in square yards of actual lawn completed, established, and accepted.
Plant selection will be measured per each.
PSIPE __ (Plant Selection Including Plant Establishment) will be measured per each.

8-02.5 Payment
Payment will be made for each of the following listed Bid items that are included in the
Proposal:
“Topsoil Type ____”, per acre.
The unit Contract price per acre for “Topsoil Type ____” shall be full payment for all costs
for the specified Work.
“Plant Selection ___”, per each.
“PSIPE ___”, per each.
The unit Contract price for “Plant Selection ___”, per each, and “PSIPE ___”, per each,
shall be full pay for all Work necessary for weed control within the planting area, planting area
preparation, fine grading, planting, cultivating, plant storage and protection, fertilizer and root
dip, staking, cleanup, and water necessary to complete planting operations as specified to the
end of first year plant establishment.
As the plants that include plant establishment are obtained, propagated, and grown, partial
payments shall be made as follows after inspection by the Engineer:
Payment of 5 percent of the unit Contract price, per each, when the plant materials have
been contracted, propagated, and are growing under nursery conditions. The Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with certification that the plant material has been procured or contracted
for delivery to the project for planting within the time limits of the project. The certification
shall state the location, quantity, and size of all material.
Payment shall be increased to 15 percent of the unit Contract price, per each, upon
completion of the initial weed control Work.
Payment shall be increased to 60 percent of the unit Contract price per each for the
contracted plant material in a designated unit area when planted.
Payment shall be increased to 70 percent of the unit Contract price per each for contracted
plant material at the completion of the initial planting.
Payment shall be increased to the appropriate percentage upon reaching the following plant
establishment milestones:
June 30th 80 percent
September 30th 90 percent
Completion of first-year plant establishment or after all 100 percent
replacement plants have been installed, whichever is later
Plant establishment milestones are achieved when plants meet conditions described in
Section 8-02.3(13).
As the plants that do not include plant establishment are obtained, propagated, and grown,
partial payments shall be made as follows:
Payment of 15 percent of the unit Contract price per each when the plant materials have
been contracted, propagated, and are growing under nursery conditions. The Contractor shall
provide the Engineer with certification that the plant material has been procured or contracted
for delivery to the project for planting within the time limits of the project. The certification
shall state the location, quantity, and size of all material.
Payment shall be increased to 90 percent of the unit Contract price per each for contracted
plant material at the completion of the initial planting.
Payment shall be increased to 100 percent at the Physical Completion of the Contract.
All partial payments shall be limited to the actual number of healthy vigorous plants that
meet the stage requirements, limited to plan quantity. Previous partial payments made for
materials rejected or missing will be deducted from future payments due the Contractor.
“Live Pole”, per each.
“Live Stake Row”, per linear foot.
“Live Brush Mattress”, per square yard.

“Brush Layer”, per linear foot.

“Fascines”, per linear foot.
“Weed Barrier Mat”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Weed Barrier Mat” shall be full pay to provide and
install the weed barrier mat as specified, to maintain the mat in place throughout the plant
establishment period, and to remove the mat when ordered by the Engineer.
“Fine Compost ”, per acre.
“Medium Compost”, per acre.
“Coarse Compost”, per acre.
The unit Contract price per acre for “Fine Compost”, “Medium Compost” or “Coarse
Compost” shall be full pay for furnishing and spreading the compost onto the existing soil.
“Fertilizer”, per pound.
The unit Contract price per pound for “Fertilizer” shall be full pay for furnishing and
applying the fertilizer.
“Weed and Pest Control” shall be paid in accordance with Section 1-09.6.
entered an amount for “Plant Establishment - ___ Year” and “Weed and Pest Control” in the
Proposal to become a part of the total Bid by the Contractor.
“Soil Amendment”, per acre.
The unit Contract price per acre for “Soil Amendment” shall be full pay for furnishing and
incorporating the soil amendment into the existing soil.
“Bark or Wood Chip Mulch”, per acre.
The unit Contract price per acre for “Bark or Wood Chip Mulch” shall be full pay
for furnishing and spreading the mulch onto the existing soil.
“Water”, per M Gal.
“Seeded Lawn Installation”, per square yard.
“Sod Installation”, per square yard.
“Lawn Mowing”, per square yard.
The unit Contract price per square yard for “Seeded Lawn Installation” or “Sod
Installation” shall be full pay for all costs necessary for weed control within the seeding or
sodding area, to prepare the area, plant or sod the lawn, erect barriers, and establish lawn areas
and for furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary to complete the Work as
specified and shall be paid in the following sequence for healthy, vigorous lawn:
Completion of Lawn Planting 60 percent of individual areas
Mid Lawn Establishment (after two mowings) 85 percent of individual areas
Completion of Lawn Establishment 100 percent of individual areas
(after four mowings)

8-03 Irrigation Systems

8-03.1 Description
This Work consists of installing an irrigation system in accordance with these Specifications
and the details shown in the Plans or as approved by the Engineer.
8-03.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the requirements of Sections 9-15 and 9-29.
Location of pipe, tubing, sprinkler heads, emitters, valves, and other equipment shall be
as shown in the Plans and shall be of the size and type indicated. No changes shall be made
except as approved by the Engineer.
Potable water supplies shall be protected against cross connections in accordance with
applicable Washington State Department of Health rules and regulations and approval by the
local health authority.
Construction of electrical systems shall conform to applicable portions of Sections 8-20
and 9-29.
8-03.3(1) Layout of Irrigation System
The Contractor shall stake the irrigation system following the schematic design shown in
the Plans. Approval must be obtained from the Engineer. Alterations and changes in the layout
may be expected in order to conform to ground conditions and to obtain full and adequate
coverage of plant material with water. However, no changes in the system as planned shall be
made without prior authorization by the Engineer.
8-03.3(1)A Locating Irrigation Sleeves
Existing underground irrigation sleeve ends shall be located by potholing. Irrigation sleeves
placed during general construction prior to installation of the irrigation system shall be marked
at both ends with a 2 by 4 by 24 inch wood stake extending 6 inches out of the soil and painted
blue on the exposed end.
8-03.3(2) Excavation
Pipe trenches shall be no wider at any point than is necessary to lay the pipe or install
equipment. The top 6 inches of topsoil, when such exists, shall be kept separate from subsoil
and shall be replaced as the top layer when backfill is made. Trench bottoms shall be relatively
smooth and consist of sand or other suitable material free from rocks, stones, or any material
that might damage the pipe. Trenches through rock or other material unsuitable for trench
bottoms and sides shall be excavated 6 inches below the required depth and shall be backfilled
to the top of the pipe with sand or other suitable material free from rocks or stones. Backfill
material shall not contain rocks 2 inches or greater in diameter or other materials that can
damage pipe.
The Contractor shall exercise care when excavating pipe trenches near existing trees to
minimize damage to tree roots. Where roots are 1½ inches or greater in diameter, the trench
shall be hand excavated and tunneled under the roots. When large roots are exposed, they shall
be wrapped with heavy, moist material, such as burlap or canvas, for protection and to prevent
excessive drying. The material must be kept moist until the trench is backfilled. Trenches
dug by machines adjacent to trees with roots less than 1½ inches in diameter shall have
severed roots cleanly cut. Trenches with exposed tree roots shall be backfilled within 24 hours
unless adequately protected by moist material as approved by the Engineer. All material and
fastenings used to cover the roots shall be removed before backfilling.
Detectable marking tape shall be placed in all trenches 6 inches directly above, parallel to,
and along the entire length of all nonmetallic water pipes and all nonmetallic and aluminum
sleeves, conduits, and casing pipes. The width of the tape and installation depth shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer for the depth of installation or as shown in the Plans.

Irrigation Systems 8-03
8-03.3(3) Piping
All water lines shall be a minimum of 18 inches below finished grade measured from the
top of the pipe or as shown in the Plans. All live water mains to be constructed under existing
pavement shall be placed in steel casing jacked under pavement as shown in the Plans. All
PVC or polyethylene pipe installed under areas to be paved shall be placed in irrigation
sleeves. Irrigation sleeves shall extend a minimum of 2 feet beyond the limits of pavement.
All jacking operations shall be performed in accordance with an approved jacking plan. Where
possible, mains and laterals or section piping shall be placed in the same trench. All lines shall
be placed a minimum of 3 feet from the edge of concrete sidewalks, curbs, guardrails, walls,
fences, and traffic barriers. Pipe pulling will not be allowed for installation and placement of
irrigation pipe.
Main lines and lateral lines shall be defined as follows:
Main Lines – All supply pipe and fittings between the water meter and the irrigation
control valves.
Lateral Lines – All supply pipe and fittings between the irrigation control valves and
the connections to the irrigation heads. Swing joints, thick-walled PVC or polyethylene
pipe, flexible risers, rigid pipe risers, and associated fittings are not considered part of the
lateral line but incidental components of the irrigation heads.
8-03.3(4) Jointing
During construction, pipe ends shall be plugged or capped to prevent entry of dirt, rocks,
or other debris.
All galvanized steel pipe shall have sound, clean cut, standard pipe threads well fitted.
All pipes shall be reamed to the full diameter and burrs removed before assembly. Threaded
galvanized steel joints shall be constructed using either a nonhardening, nonseizing
multipurpose sealant or Teflon® tape or paste as recommended by the pipe manufacturer or
as shown in the Plans. Threaded galvanized steel joints shall be constructed using either a
nonhardening, nonseizing multipurpose sealant or Teflon tape or paste as recommended by
the pipe manufacturer. All threaded joints shall be made tight with wrenches without the
use of handle extensions. Joints that leak shall be cleaned and remade with new material.
Caulking or thread cement to make joints tight shall not be permitted.
PVC pipe, couplings, and fittings shall be handled and installed in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendation. The outside of the PVC pipe shall be chamfered to
a minimum of ¹⁄16 inch at approximately 22 degrees. Pipe and fittings shall be joined by
solvent welding. Solvents used must penetrate the surface at both pipe and fitting, which
shall result in complete fusion at the joint. Use solvent and cement only as recommended
by the pipe manufacturer.
Threaded PVC joints shall be assembled using Teflon tape as recommended by the
pipe manufacturer.
On PVC or polyethylene-to-metal connections, work the metal connection first. Use a
nonhardening compound on threaded connections. Connections between metal and PVC or
polyethylene are to be threaded using female threaded PVC adapters with threaded Schedule
80 PVC nipples only.
Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. The ends of the polyethylene pipe shall be cut square, reamed smooth
inside and out, and inserted to the full depth of the fitting. Clamps for insert fittings shall be
stainless steel.
8-03.3(5) Installation
Galvanized pipe shall be used from the water meter or service connection through the cross
connection control device.
Final position of turf heads shall be between ½ and 1 inch above finished grade measured
from the top of the sprinkler. All sprinklers adjacent to walks, curbs, and pavement shall be
placed as shown in the Plans.
Shrub heads, unless otherwise specified, shall be placed on risers approximately 12 inches
above finished grade.
All automatic control valves, flow control valves, and pressure reducing valves shall be
installed in appropriately sized valve boxes. Manual control valves shall be installed in an
appropriately sized valve box and, where appropriate, upstream of the automatic control
valves. Manual and automatic valves installed together shall be in an appropriately sized box
with 3 inches of clearance on all sides.
Final position of valve boxes, capped sleeves, and quick coupler valves shall be between
½ and 1 inch above finished grade or mulch, or as shown in the Plans.
Quick coupler valves and hose bibs shall be installed in valve boxes, either separately or
within a control valve assembly box upstream of the control valves. Valves, quick couplers,
and hose bibs shall have 3 inches of clearance on all sides within the valve box.
Drip irrigation emitters shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Install drain valves at the lowest point of each zone in a minimum 8-inch
diameter round valve box over 3 cubic feet of washed gravel.
Automatic controller pedestals or container cabinets shall be installed on a concrete base
as shown in the Plans or in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide
three 1-inch diameter galvanized metal or PVC electrical wire conduits through the base and
3 inches minimum beyond the edge or side of the base, both inside and outside of the pedestal.
8-03.3(6) Electrical Wire Installation
All electrical work shall conform to the National Electric Code, NEMA Specifications,
and in accordance with Section 8-20. Electrical wiring between the automatic controller and
automatic valves shall be direct burial and may share a common neutral. Separate control
conductors shall be run from the automatic controller to each valve. When more than one
automatic controller is required, a separate common neutral shall be provided for each
controller and the automatic valves it controls. Electrical wire shall be installed in the trench
adjacent to or above the irrigation pipe, but no less than 12 inches deep. Plastic tape or
nylon tie wraps shall be used to bundle wires together at 10-foot intervals. If it is necessary
to run electrical wire in a separate trench from the irrigation pipe, the wire shall be placed
at a minimum depth of 18 inches and “snaked” from side to side in the trench. Each circuit
shall be identified at both ends and at all splices with a permanent marker identifying zone
and/or station.
Wiring placed under pavement and walls, or through walls, shall be placed in an electrical
conduit or within an irrigation sleeve. Electrical conduit shall not be less than 1 inch in
diameter and shall meet conduit specifications for PVC conduit as required in Section 9-29.1.
Splices will be permitted only in approved electrical junction boxes, valve boxes, pole
bases, or within control equipment boxes or pedestals. A minimum of 18 inches of excess
conductor shall be left at all splices, terminals, and control valves to facilitate inspection
and future splicing. The excess wire shall be neatly coiled to fit easily into the boxes.
All 120-volt electrical conductors and conduit shall be installed by a certified electrician,
including all wire splices and wire terminations.
All wiring shall be tested in accordance with Section 8-20.3(11).
Continuity ground and functionality testing shall be performed for all 24-volt direct burial
circuits. The Megger test, confirming insulation resistance of not less than 2 megohms to
ground in accordance with Section 8-20.3(11), is required.
8-03.3(7) Flushing and Testing
All gauges used in the testing of water pressures shall be certified as accurate by an
independent testing laboratory immediately prior to use on the project. Gauges shall be
retested when required by the Engineer.
Automatic controllers shall be tested by actual operation for a period of 2 weeks under
normal operating conditions. Should adjustments be required, the Contractor shall do so
according to the manufacturer’s direction and test until operation is satisfactory.
Main Line Flushing – All main supply lines shall receive two fully open flushings to
remove debris that may have entered the line during construction: the first before placement
of valves and the second after placement of valves and prior to testing.
Main Line Testing – All main supply lines shall be purged of air and tested with a
minimum static water pressure of 150 psi for 60 minutes without the introduction of additional
service or pumping pressure. Testing shall be done with one pressure gauge installed on
the line, in the location required by the Engineer. For systems using a pump, an additional
pressure gauge shall be installed at the pump when required by the Engineer. Lines that show
loss of pressure exceeding 5 psi at the ends of specified test periods will be rejected.
Lateral Line Flushing – All lateral lines shall receive one fully open flushing prior to
placement of sprinkler heads, emitters, and drain valves. The flushing shall be of sufficient
duration to remove all dirt or debris that has entered the lateral lines during construction.
Lateral Line Testing – All lateral lines shall be purged of air and tested in place at
operating line pressure with a pressure gauge and with all fittings capped or plugged. The
operating line pressure shall be maintained for 30 minutes with valves closed and without
the introduction of additional service or pumping pressure. Lines that show leaks or loss of
pressure exceeding 5 psi at the end of specified test periods will be rejected.
The Contractor shall correct and retest lateral line installations that have been rejected.
Throughout the life of the Contract, the Contractor shall repair, flush, and test, all main and
lateral lines that have sustained a break or disruption of service. Upon restoration of the water
service, the affected lines shall be brought up to operating pressure. The Contractor shall then
conduct a thorough inspection of all sprinkler heads, emitters, etc., located downstream of
the break or disruption of service, and make all needed repairs to ensure the entire irrigation
system is operating properly.
8-03.3(8) Adjusting System
Before final inspection, the Contractor shall adjust and balance all sprinklers to provide
adequate and uniform coverage. Spray patterns shall be balanced by adjusting individual
sprinkler heads with the adjustment screws or replacing nozzles to produce a uniform pattern.
Unless otherwise specified, sprinkler spray patterns will not be permitted to apply water to
pavement, walks, or Structures.
8-03.3(9) Backfill
Backfill shall not be started until all piping has been inspected, tested, and approved by the
Engineer, after which backfilling shall be completed as soon as possible. All backfill material
placed within 6 inches of the pipe shall be sand or other suitable material free of rocks, roots,
or other objectionable material that might cut or otherwise damage the pipe. Backfill from
the bottom of the trench to approximately 6 inches above the pipe shall be by continuous
compacting in a manner that will not damage pipe or wiring and shall proceed evenly on
both sides of the pipe. The remainder of the backfill shall be thoroughly compacted, except
that heavy equipment shall not be used within 18 inches of any pipe. The top 6 inches of the
backfill shall be of topsoil material or the first 6 inches of material removed in the excavation.
8-03.3(10) As Built Plans
Upon Physical Completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit As Built Plans
consisting of corrected shop drawings, schematic circuit diagrams, or other details necessary
to show the Work as constructed including the actual installed locations of the irrigation
system(s) equipment including, but not limited to, water meters, cross connection control
devices, electrical services, pipe and wire runs, splice boxes, controllers, valves, heads, and
other equipment. These drawings shall be on sheets conforming in size to the provisions of
Section 1-05.3. All drawings must be complete and legible.
Any corrections and additions ordered by the Engineer shall be made by the Contractor
prior to acceptance. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with 3 copies of parts lists,
catalog cuts, and service manuals for all equipment installed on the project.

8-03.3(11) System Operation

The irrigation system shall be completely installed, tested, and automatically operable
prior to planting in a unit area except where otherwise specified in the Plans or approved by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all maintenance, repair, testing,
inspecting, and automatic operation of the entire system until all Work is considered complete
as determined by the final inspection specified in Section 1-05.11. The final inspection of
the irrigation system will coincide with the end of the Contract or the end of first-year plant
establishment, whichever is later.
This responsibility shall include, but not be limited to, draining the system prior to winter
and reactivating the system in the spring and at other times as required by the Engineer.
For the life of the Contract, the Contractor shall be responsible for having annual
inspections and tests performed on all cross connection control devices as required and
specified by the Washington State Department of Health. Inspections and tests shall be
conducted at the time of initial activation and each spring prior to reactivating the irrigation
system. Potable water shall not flow through the cross-connection control device to any
downstream component until tested and approved for use by the local health authority in
In the spring, when the drip irrigation system is in full operation, the Contractor shall
make a full inspection of all emitters and irrigation heads. This shall involve visual inspection
of each emitter and irrigation head under operating conditions. All adjustments, flushing, or
replacements to the system shall be made at this time to ensure the proper operation of all
emitters and irrigation heads.
8-03.3(12) Cross Connection Control Device Installation
Cross connection control devices shall be installed, inspected, and tested by the local health
authority or designee in accordance with applicable portions of WAC 246-290-490 and other
applicable regulations as set forth by the Washington State Department of Health and WSDOT.
During the life of the Contract, these devices shall be inspected and tested annually,
or more often if successive inspections indicate repeated failures. Inspections and tests
shall be conducted at the time of initial installation, after repairs, and each spring prior to
reactivation of the irrigation system. These inspections and tests shall be completed and the
results recorded by a licensed Backflow Assembly Device Tester (BADT) Operator or by a
Contracting Agency Certified Water Works Operator with a CCS 1 or CCS 2 Classification
and shall document that the devices are in good operating condition prior to flushing and
testing of any downstream water lines. Devices that are defective shall be repaired or replaced.
Inspection and test results shall be recorded on WSDOT Form 540-020 and other forms
as may be required by the serving utility. The completed forms shall be submitted to the
appropriate health authority and to the serving utility when applicable.
8-03.3(13) Irrigation Water Service
All water meter(s) shall be installed by the serving utility. The Contracting Agency shall
arrange for water meter installation(s) for the irrigation system at the locations and sizes as
shown in the Plans at no cost to the Contractor. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to
contact the Engineer to schedule the water meter installation. The Contractor shall provide
a minimum of 60 calendar days notice to the Engineer prior to the desired water meter
installation date.
Construction activities for irrigation water service connections shall be in accordance with
the serving utility’s Service Agreement. A copy of the Service Agreement may be obtained
from the Engineer.

8-03.3(14) Irrigation Electrical Service

The Contracting Agency shall arrange for electrical service connection(s) for operation of
the automatic electrical controller(s) at the locations shown in the Plans. The Contractor shall
splice and run conduit and wire from the electrical service connection(s) or service cabinet
to the automatic electrical controller, and connect the conductors to the circuit(s) per the
controller manufacturer’s diagrams or recommendations.
The installation of conduits and wire for the electrical power service shall be in accordance
with the serving utility’s Service Agreement and these Specifications. A copy of the Service
Agreement may be obtained from the Engineer.
8-03.4 Vacant
8-03.5 Payment
Payment will be made for the following Bid items when included in the Proposal:
“Irrigation System”, lump sum.
All costs for furnishing and installing irrigation system equipment and components where
indicated and as detailed in the Plans, all costs of initial and annual inspections and tests
performed on cross connection control devices and electrical wire testing during the life of
the Contract and As Built Plans shall be included in the lump sum price for the complete
irrigation system as shown in the Plans or as otherwise approved by the Engineer.
The Contracting Agency will, at no cost to the Contractor, provide water and electrical
services needed for installation and operation of the irrigation system for the life of
the Contract.
As the irrigation system is installed, the payment schedule will be as follows:
Payment will be made in proportion to the amount of Work performed up to 90 percent of
the unit Contract price for irrigation system when the irrigation system is completed, tested,
inspected, and fully operational.
Payment shall be increased to 95 percent of the unit Contract price for irrigation system
upon completion and acceptance of initial planting and submittal of As Built Plans.
Payment shall be increased to 100 percent of the unit Contract price for irrigation system
upon completion and acceptance of the first-year plant establishment. When there is no first-
year plant establishment or when the Contract is completed, payment will be increased to
100 percent of the unit Contract price for irrigation system upon completion of As Built Plans.

8-04 Curbs, Gutters, and Spillways

8-04.1 Description
This Work consists of the construction of cement concrete curbs, curbs and gutters, gutters,
spillways, hot mix asphalt curbs, gutters, spillways, and metal spillways, of the kind and
design specified, at the locations shown in the Plans or where designated by the Engineer
in accordance with these Specifications and in conformity to the lines and grades as staked.
8-04.2 Materials
Aggregates 9-03
Premolded Joint Filler 9-04.1
Drain Pipe 9-05.1
Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch 9-05.4
Aluminum Culvert Pipe 9-05.5
Hand Placed Riprap 9-13.1(4)
Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) curbs, gutters, and spillways shall be constructed of an HMA
mix that will have a dense, uniform surface and will fully retain its shape, grade, and line
after placement. The mix components shall meet applicable requirements for asphalt concrete
specified in Section 5-04 and shall be approved by the Engineer.
8-04.3(1) Cement Concrete Curbs, Gutters, and Spillways
Cement concrete curb, curb and gutter, gutter, and spillway shall be constructed with
air entrained concrete Class 3000 conforming to the requirement of Section 6-02 except
at driveway entrances. Cement concrete curb or curb and gutter along the full width of a
driveway entrance shall be constructed with air entrained concrete Class 4000 conforming
to the requirements of Section 6-02.
The foundation for curbs, gutters, and spillways shall be thoroughly compacted and
required side forms shall rest throughout their length on firm ground. Side forms for straight
sections shall be full depth of the curb. They shall be either metal of suitable gage for the Work
or surfaced “construction” grade lumber not less than 2 inches (commercial) in thickness.
Forms used more than one time shall be thoroughly cleaned and any forms that have become
worn, splintered, or warped shall not be used again.
The foundation shall be watered thoroughly before the concrete is placed, and the concrete
shall be well tamped and spaded or vibrated in the forms. The exposed surfaces shall be
finished full width with a trowel and edger. Within 24 hours after the concrete is placed, the
forms of the Roadway face of curbs shall be removed, and the concrete treated with a float
finish. The top and face of the curb shall receive a light brush finish, and the top of the gutter
shall receive a broom finish.
Expansion joints in the curb or curb and gutter shall be spaced as shown in the Plans, and
placed at the beginning and ends of curb returns, drainage Structures, bridges, and cold joints
with existing curbs and gutters. The expansion joint shall be filled to full cross-section with
⅜-inch premolded joint filler. When curb or curb and gutter is placed adjacent to portland
cement concrete pavement, a ⅜-inch thick, 6 inch deep premolded joint filler shall be installed
between the two vertical surfaces to prevent cracking. When noted in the Plans, the Contractor
shall install the catch basin gutter pan at drainage Structures abutting the curb and gutter.
The concrete shall be cured for 72 hours by one of the methods specified for cement
concrete pavement in Section 5-05.

Curbs, Gutters, and Spillways 8-04
At the option of the Contractor, the curb and gutter may be constructed using approved
slip-form equipment. The curb and gutter shall be constructed to the same requirements as the
cast-in-place curb and gutter.
A water-reducing admixture conforming to the requirements of Section 9-26 may be used
provided the finished curb and gutter shall retain its line and shape.
8-04.3(1)A Extruded Cement Concrete Curb
Extruded cement concrete curb shall be placed, shaped, and compacted true to line and
grade with an approved extrusion machine. The extrusion machine shall be capable of shaping
and thoroughly compacting the concrete to the required cross section.
The pavement shall be dry and cleaned of loose and deleterious material prior to curb
placement. Cement concrete curbs shall be anchored to the existing pavement by placing steel
reinforcing bars 1 foot on each side of every joint.
Steel reinforcing bars shall meet the dimensions shown in the Standard Plans.
Joints in the curb shall be spaced at 10-foot intervals. Joints shall be cut vertically and to
the depth shown in the Standard Plans.
All other requirements for cement curb and cement concrete curb and gutter shall apply to
extruded cement concrete curb.
The Contractor may substitute extruded cement concrete curb for extruded HMA concrete
curb upon receiving written permission from the Engineer. There will be no change in unit
Contract price if this substitution is allowed.
8-04.3(1)B Roundabout Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter
Roundabout cement concrete curb and gutter and roundabout splitter island nosing curb
shall be shaped and finished to match the shape of the adjoining curb as shown in the Plans.
All other requirements for cement concrete curb and cement concrete curb and gutter shall
apply to roundabout cement concrete curb and gutter.
8-04.3(2) Extruded Asphalt Concrete Curbs and Gutters
Asphalt concrete curbs, gutters, and spillways shall be constructed of Commercial HMA
as specified in Section 5-04. The HMA will have a dense, uniform surface and will fully retain
its shape, grade, and line after placement. Just prior to placing the curb, a tack coat of asphalt
shall be applied to the existing pavement surface at the rate ordered by the Engineer.
Set forms will not be required for forming gutter if slip-form equipment of a type approved
by the Engineer is used. Gutter shall be shaped and compacted to the required line, grade,
and cross section. Connections to any type of outlet shall be constructed so as to form a
watertight joint.
8-04.3(3) Vacant
8-04.3(4) Metal Spillways
Round metal spillways shall be plain metal drain pipe 8-inch diameter and when specified
in the Contract, the joints shall be sealed with rubber gaskets conforming to the requirements
of Section 9-04.4(4). Half round metal spillways shall be half round metal culvert pipe of the
size, kind, and thickness shown in the Plans.
In the construction of metal spillways, sufficient bands, elbows, and joints shall be
furnished and placed by the Contractor to permit the construction and connection of the
spillways as indicated in the Plans so as to carry the drainage from gutters to the inlets and
spillways without percolation of the water under and around the Structure.
Spillway pipe shall be laid in a trench in the embankment slope and shall not be placed
until after the embankment slopes have been completed and dressed to the lines prescribed
by the Engineer. The lower end of the pipe spillway shall be adequately protected and
supported by hand placed riprap, concrete, or by other means as may be shown in the
Plans. After the spillway pipe has been placed and connected, the trench shall be backfilled,
thoroughly compacted, and the embankment slopes restored to their original condition.
8-04.3(5) Spillways at Bridge Ends

Where spillways are required to be constructed at bridge ends, they shall be constructed in
the embankment slopes as described above and arranged so that they will connect to the bridge
drains. The pipe shall be plain metal drain pipe 8-inch diameter and the joints shall be sealed
with rubber gaskets conforming to the requirements of Section 9-04.4(4).
8-04.4 Measurement
All curbs, gutters, and spillways will be measured by the linear foot along the line and
slope of the completed curbs, gutters, or spillways, including bends. Measurement of cement
concrete curb and cement concrete curb and gutter, when constructed across driveways or
sidewalk ramps, will include the width of the driveway or sidewalk ramp.
Roundabout splitter island nosing curb will be measured per each.
Except for metal spillways, excavation for these Structures shall be incidental to the
items involved. Structure excavation required for the installation of metal spillways will be
measured in accordance with the provisions of Section 2-09.
Hand placed riprap will be measured in accordance with Section 8-15.4.
8-04.5 Payment
“Cement Conc. Traffic Curb and Gutter”, per linear foot.
“Cement Conc. Traffic Curb”, per linear foot.
“Mountable Cement Conc. Traffic Curb”, per linear foot.
“Dual-Faced Cement Conc. Traffic Curb and Gutter”, per linear foot.
“Dual-Faced Cement Conc. Traffic Curb”, per linear foot.
“Cement Conc. Pedestrian Curb”, per linear foot.
“Roundabout Central Island Cement Concrete Curb”, per linear foot.
“Roundabout Truck Apron Cem. Conc. Curb and Gutter”, per linear foot.
“Roundabout Cement Concrete Curb and Gutter”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Roundabout Cement Concrete Curb and
Gutter” shall be full payment for all costs for the specified Work including transitioning the
roundabout cement concrete curb and gutter to the adjoining curb shape.
“Roundabout Splitter Island Nosing Curb”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Roundabout Splitter Island Nosing Curb” shall be
full payment for all costs for the specified Work including transitioning the roundabout splitter
island nosing curb to the adjoining curb shape.
“Extruded Curb”, per linear foot.
“Cement Conc. Gutter”, per linear foot.
“Cement Conc. Spillway”, per linear foot.
“Asphalt Conc. Gutter”, per linear foot.
“Asphalt Conc. Spillway”, per linear foot.
“Drain Pipe ___ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Half Round Plain St. Culv. Pipe ___ In. Th. ___ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Half Round Tr. 1 St. Culv. Pipe ___ In. Th. ___ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Half Round Plain Al. Culv. Pipe ___ In. Th. ___ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Half Round Tr. 1 Al. Culv. Pipe ___ In. Th. ___ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
“Hand Placed Riprap”, per cubic yard.
Hand placed riprap will be paid for as provided in Section 8-15.5.
When catch basin gutter pans are required in the Plans, all costs for providing the widened
area of gutter pan shall be included in the curb and gutter Bid item.

Vacant 8-05
8-05 Vacant

8-06 Cement Concrete Driveway Entrances
8-06 Cement Concrete Driveway Entrances

8-06.1 Description
This Work shall consist of constructing the types of cement concrete driveway entrances
shown in the Plans and in accordance with these Specifications and the Standard Plans.
The widths of the entrances shall be as noted in the Plans. When no width is noted in
the Plans, the entrance shall be constructed to the minimum dimensions shown in the
Standard Plans.
8-06.2 Materials
Aggregates 9-03
Cement concrete driveway approaches shall be constructed with air entrained concrete
Class 4000 conforming to the requirements of Section 6-02 or Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement conforming to the requirements of Section 5-05.
Driveway entrance concrete may be placed, compacted, and finished using hand methods.
The tools required for these operations shall be approved by the Engineer. After troweling
and before edging, the surface of the driveway entrance shall be brushed in a transverse
direction with a stiff bristled broom. Curing of the concrete shall be in accordance with
Section 5-05.3(13). The driveway entrances may be opened to traffic in accordance with
Section 5-05.3(17).
When noted in the Plans, the Contractor shall construct the driveway entrance in two or
more segments to permit access to an existing driveway. At these locations, the Contractor
shall provide a well-graded and drained temporary approach suitable for vehicular traffic
from the abutting Roadway to the existing driveway and a firm surface for pedestrians
crossing the approach. When the concrete in this segment of the entrance has reached the
desired compressive strength, the Contractor shall route traffic over it, remove the temporary
approach, and construct the remaining driveway entrance segment or segments. The joints
between segments shall be filled to full cross-section with ⅜-inch premolded joint filler.
8-06.4 Measurement
Cement concrete driveway entrances will be measured by the square yard of finished surface.
8-06.5 Payment
“Cement Conc. Driveway Entrance Type ___”, per square yard.
All costs in constructing the driveway entrance in segments and installing and removing
the temporary approach shall be included.

Precast Traffic Curb 8-07
8-07 Precast Traffic Curb

8-07.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and installing precast traffic sloped mountable curb, or
dual faced sloped mountable curb of the design and type specified in the Plans in accordance
with these Specifications and the Standard Plans in the locations indicated in the Plans or as
staked by the Engineer.
8-07.2 Materials
Precast Traffic Curb 9-18.1
Water Repellent Compound 9-18.4
Sodium Metasilicate 9-18.5
Mortar 9-20.4
Paint 9-34.2
8-07.3(1) Installing Curbs
The curb shall be firmly bedded for its entire length and breadth on a mortar bed
conforming to Section 9-20.4(3) composed of one part Portland cement and two parts of
concrete sand. The anchor grooves in the bottom of the curb shall be entirely filled with
the mortar.
Before the cement mortar bed is laid, all dirt shall be cleaned from the pavement surface
by washing.
All old pavements and any portion of new pavements constructed under this Contract,
which are covered with oil or grease within the curb limits, shall be further cleaned as follows:
1. The pavement shall be flushed with water.
2. While the pavement is still wet, sodium metasilicate, complying with the requirements
as specified elsewhere herein, shall be evenly distributed over the pavement surface at
a rate of 1 to 2 pounds per 100 square feet of pavement surface.
3. The sodium metasilicate shall remain on the pavement for at least 15 minutes. Where
patches of oil, tar, or grease occur, these areas shall be scrubbed with a brush or broom.
4. The pavement surface shall then be thoroughly rinsed.
All joints between adjacent pieces of curb except joints for expansion and/or drainage as
designated by the Engineer shall be filled with mortar composed of one part Portland cement
and two parts sand.
The alignment and the top surface of adjoining sections of curb shall be true and even with
a maximum tolerance of ¹⁄16 inch.
For sloped mountable curb installed in curves, the units shall be either curved blocks
precast to the radii shown in the Plans or tangent blocks sawn to the dimensions shown in the
Standard Plans to conform to the specified radii.
8-07.3(2) Painting of Curbs
Concrete curbing shall be painted with two full coats of paint conforming to
Section 9-34.2, as shown in the Plans or as designated by the Engineer. The paint can be
applied by brush or spray. The second coat shall have glass traffic paint beads sprinkled in
the wet paint at the rate of 12 pounds per 100 linear feet of curbing. The beads shall conform
to the requirements of Section 9-34.4.
8-07.4 Measurement
Sloped mountable curb will be measured by the linear foot along the front face of the curb.
Dual faced sloped mountable curb will be measured by the linear foot of tapered block and
nosing block installed. Only one face of dual faced curb will be measured.

8-07.5 Payment
“Precast Sloped Mountable Curb”, per linear foot.
“Precast Dual Faced Sloped Mountable Curb”, per linear foot.

Rumble Strips 8-08
8-08 Rumble Strips

8-08.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing centerline and shoulder rumble strips by grinding
hot mix asphalt. The Work shall include cleanup and disposal of cuttings and other resultant
debris. The Standard Plans show the patterns and construction details for the centerline
rumble strip and the four types of shoulder rumble strips.
8-08.2 Vacant
The equipment shall have a rotary type cutting head or series of cutting heads capable
of grinding one or more recesses in the hot mix asphalt as detailed in the Standard Plans.
The difference in the surface texture between the high and low surfaces from the grinding
shall not exceed ⅛ inch.
Rumble strips shall not be constructed on bridge decks, bridge approach slabs, or cement
concrete surfaces. In areas where monuments, drainage structures, induction loop lead‑ins,
pavement markings or other features will not allow the rumble strips to be constructed
as detailed, the rumble strips shall be eliminated or relocated as approved by the
Project Engineer.
The traveled lanes shall be kept free of cuttings and other construction debris at all times.
All cuttings, grinding debris, dust, and other loose materials shall become the property of the
Contractor and, upon completion of rumble strip grinding, shall be immediately removed and
disposed of outside the project limits. Cuttings and other debris shall not be allowed to enter
any waterways.
When shown in the Plans, the rumble strips shall be fog sealed in accordance with the
requirements of Section 5-02, following the completion of the shoulder rumble strip. All
pavement markings, junction boxes, drainage structures, and similar objects shall not be
fog sealed.
The accumulative error in the longitudinal spacing of the rumble strips and the gaps,
when required, shall not exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
8-08.4 Measurement
Centerline and shoulder rumble strips will be measured to the nearest 0.01 mile along
the mainline roadway for centerline or each shoulder. No deductions will be made for
required gaps shown on the Standard Plans or for the elimination of rumble strips across
bridge decks, bridge approach slabs, cement concrete areas, or other areas approved by
the Engineer.
Fog sealing, when shown in the Plans, will be measured as asphalt for fog seal in
8-08.5 Payment
“Shoulder Rumble Strip Type __”, per mile.
“Centerline Rumble Strip”, per mile.
Layout of the rumble strip pattern on the centerline or shoulders for grinding purposes is
the responsibility of the Contractor. All costs involved in this Work shall be included in the
appropriate Bid item.
Payment for fog sealing the shoulder, when shown in the Plans, shall be paid as asphalt
for fog seal in accordance with Section 5-02.5.

8-09 Raised Pavement Markers

8-09.1 Description
This Work shall consist of furnishing and installing pavement markers of the type specified
in the Plans, in accordance with these Specifications, and at the locations indicated in the Plans
or where designated by the Engineer. This Work also includes cleanup and disposal of cuttings
and other resultant debris. The color of pavement markers shall conform to the color of the
marking for which they supplement, substitute for, or serve as a positioning guide for.
8-09.2 Materials
Raised pavement marker (RPM) shall meet the requirements of the following sections:
RPM Type 1 9-21.1
RPM Type 2 9-21.2
RPM Type 3 9-21.3
Adhesive 9-02.1(8), 9-26.2
8-09.3(1) Preliminary Spotting
The Engineer will provide necessary control points at intervals agreed upon with the
Contractor to assist in preliminary spotting of the lines before marker placement begins.
The Contractor shall be responsible for preliminary spotting of the lines to be marked.
The color of the material used for spotting shall match the color of the raised pavement
markers. Approval by the Engineer is required before marking begins.
Markers shall not be placed over longitudinal or transverse joints in the pavement surface.
8-09.3(2) Surface Preparation
All sand, dirt, and loose extraneous material shall be swept or blown away from the marker
location and the cleaned surface prepared by one of the following procedures:
When deemed necessary by the Engineer all surface dirt within areas to receive markers
shall be removed. Large areas of tar, grease, or foreign materials may require sandblasting,
steam cleaning, or power brooming to accomplish complete removal.
When markers are placed on new cement concrete pavement, any curing compound
shall be removed in accordance with the requirements of this Section. All liquid membrane-
forming compounds shall be removed from the portland cement concrete pavement to
which Raised Pavement Markers are to be bonded. Curing compound removal shall not
be started until the pavement has attained sufficient flexural strength before opening to
traffic. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the proposed
removal method.
The pavement shall be surface dry. When applying Epoxy Adhesives in cool weather
the pavement surface shall be heated by intense radiant heat (not direct flame) for a
sufficient length of time to warm the pavement areas of marker application to a minimum
of 70ºF.
Application of markers shall not proceed until final authorization is received from
the Engineer.
8-09.3(3) Marker Preparation
Type 2 markers may be warmed prior to setting by heating to a maximum temperature of
120°F for a maximum of 10 minutes.
8-09.3(4) Adhesive Preparation
Epoxy adhesive shall be maintained at a temperature of 60ºF to 85ºF before use and
during application.
Component A shall be added to component B just before use and mixed to a smooth
uniform blend. The unused mixed adhesive shall be discarded when polymerization has
caused stiffening and reduction of workability.
Raised Pavement Markers 8-09
Flexible bituminous pavement marker adhesive shall be indirectly heated in an applicator

with continuous agitation or recurring circulation. Adhesive temperature shall not exceed the
maximum safe heating temperature stated by the manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide
the Engineer with manufacturers written instruction for application temperature and maximum
safe heating temperature.
8-09.3(5) Application Procedure
8-09.3(5)A Epoxy Adhesives
Epoxy adhesive shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-26.2.
The marker shall be affixed to the prepared pavement area with sufficient adhesive so as to
squeeze out a small bead of adhesive around the entire periphery of the marker.
The sequence of operations shall be as rapid as possible. Adhesive shall be in place and the
marker seated in not more than 30 seconds after the removal of the pavement preheat or warm
air blast. The marker shall not have cooled more than 1 minute before seating.
The length of the pavement preheat or warming shall be adjusted so as to ensure bonding
of the marker in not more than 15 minutes. Bonding will be considered satisfactory when
adhesive develops a minimum bond strength in tension of not less than 800 grams per
square inch or a total tensile strength of 25 pounds.
On Roadway sections which are not open to public traffic, the preheating of the markers
by dry heating before setting will not be required provided the adhesive develops the required
bond strength of 800 grams per square inch in less than 3 hours. If the Roadway section
is carrying public traffic during the installation of the markers, the 15 minute set-to-traffic
provision will be enforced, and necessary flagging and traffic control will be required.
8-09.3(5)B Flexible Bituminous Pavement Marker Adhesives
The flexible bituminous pavement marker adhesive shall conform to the requirements of
Section 9-02.1(8).
The adhesive shall be applied at temperatures recommended by the manufacturer.
The marker shall be affixed to the prepared pavement area with sufficient adhesive so as to
squeeze out a small bead of adhesive around the entire periphery of the marker. Markers shall
be placed immediately after application of the adhesive.
8-09.3(6) Recessed Pavement Marker
The Contractor shall construct recesses for pavement markers by grinding the pavement in
accordance with the dimensions shown in the Standard Plans. The Contractor shall ensure that
grinding of the pavement does not result in any damage, (e.g. chipping, spalling or raveling)
to the pavement to remain. The Contractor shall prepare the surface in accordance with
Section 8-09.3(2), and install Type 2 markers in the recess in accordance with the Standard
Plans and Section 8-09.3(4).
Recessed pavement markers shall not be constructed on bridge decks or on bridge
approach slabs.
8-09.3(7) Tolerances for Pavement Markers
Markers shall be spaced and aligned as shown in the Standard Plans and as specified by
the Engineer. A displacement of not more than ½ inch left or right of the established guideline
will be permitted. The Contractor shall remove and replace all improperly placed markers at
no expense to the Contracting Agency.
8-09.4 Measurement
Measurement of markers will be by units of 100 for each type of marker furnished and
set in place.

8-09.5 Payment
“Raised Pavement Marker Type 1”, per hundred.
“Raised Pavement Marker Type 2”, per hundred.
“Raised Pavement Marker Type 3-______ In.”, per hundred.
“Recessed Pavement Marker”, per hundred.
The unit Contract price per hundred for “Raised Pavement Marker Type 1”,
“Raised Pavement Marker Type 2”, “Raised Pavement Marker Type 3______ In.”, and
“Recessed Pavement Marker” shall be full pay for furnishing and installing the markers
in accordance with these Specifications including all cost involved with traffic control
except for reimbursement for other traffic control labor, and for flaggers in accordance

Guide Posts 8-10
8-10 Guide Posts

8-10.1 Description
This Work shall consist of furnishing and placing flexible guide posts of the type specified
in the Plans in accordance with these Specifications and the Standard Plans, at the locations
indicated in the Plans or where designated by the Engineer.
8-10.2 Materials
Flexible guide posts and reflective sheeting shall be selected from approved materials
listed in the Special Provisions or the Qualified Products List. Flexible guide posts shall be
preapproved in accordance with Section 9-17 prior to use on a project. If a producer lacks
access to a regularly conducted State Materials Laboratory test, the producer may submit
for consideration, performance data gained from independent testing attested by a registered
Engineer. Acceptance of independent data or repetition of selected or total tests, shall be the
prerogative of the State Materials Laboratory.
Adhesives for surface mounted guide posts shall meet the requirements of Sections
9-02.1(8) or 9-26.2. Other bonding agents may be approved by the Engineer.
Flexible guide posts shall be installed as shown in the Standard Plans or as specified by
the Engineer. The posts shall be installed plumb, plus or minus 1½ degrees.
Guide posts shall be of such length as to provide a height of 48 inches, plus or minus
3 inches, above the nearest edge of traveled pavement surface. Surface mounted guide posts
shall be bonded to the pavement surface.
Flexible guide posts shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 1 Working Drawing consisting of the manufacturer’s
recommended installation procedures. Only one type of ground mount or guardrail mount
flexible guide post shall be used on each project. When a guide post is placed on new cement
concrete pavement, any curing compound shall be removed. All liquid membrane-forming
compounds shall be removed from the portland cement concrete pavement to which guide
posts are to be bonded. Curing compound removal shall not be started until the pavement has
attained sufficient flexural strength before opening to traffic. The Contractor shall submit a
Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the proposed removal method.
The final guide posts lengths will be determined or verified by the Engineer at the request
of the Contractor.
If the ground adjacent to the posts is disturbed in any manner, it shall be backfilled
to the level of the existing surface and thoroughly compacted. The surface of the ground
adjacent to the post shall be replaced with like materials, including bituminous treatment
if previously existent.
8-10.4 Measurement
Flexible guide posts will be measured by the unit for each post furnished and installed.
8-10.5 Payment
Payment will be made for the following Bid item when included in the Proposal:
“Flexible Guide Post”, per each.

8-11 Guardrail
8-11 Guardrail
8-11.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing, modifying, removing, and resetting guardrail and
anchors of the kind and type specified in accordance with the Plans, these Specifications,
and the Standard Plans in conformity with the lines and grades as staked.
8-11.2 Materials
Beam Guardrail 9-16.3
Rail Element 9-16.3(1)
Posts and Blocks 9-16.3(2)
Galvanizing 9-16.3(3)
Hardware 9-16.3(4)
Anchors 9-16.3(5)
8-11.3(1) Beam Guardrail
8-11.3(1)A Erection of Posts
Posts shall be set to the true line and grade of the Highway. If the ends of a section of
guardrail are curved outward or downward, the posts shall be set to accommodate the curve.
The length of posts and post spacing shall be as shown in the Plans.
Posts may be placed in dug or drilled holes. Ramming or driving will be permitted only if
approved by the Engineer and if no damage to the pavement, Shoulders, and adjacent slopes
results there from.
In broken rock embankments, the pre-punching of holes will be permitted only prior to
final Shoulder or median compaction, surfacing, and paving.
The posts shall be protected from traffic at all times by attaching the rail elements or by
a method approved by the Engineer.
8-11.3(1)B Erection of Rail
All metal work shall be fabricated in the shop. No punching, cutting, or welding shall be
done in the field, except that holes necessary when additional posts are required or for special
details in exceptional cases may be drilled in the field when approved by the Engineer. The rail
shall be erected so that the bolts at expansion joints will be located at the centers of the slotted
holes. All holes shall be painted with two coats of paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B.
Rail plates shall be assembled with the splice joints lapping in the direction of the traffic.
When nested W-beam or thrie beam is specified, two sections of guardrail, one set inside
of the other shall be installed. The inside and outside rail elements shall not be staggered.
Galvanized steel rail plates shall be fastened to the posts with galvanized bolts, washers,
and nuts of the size and kind shown in the Plans.
All bolts, except where otherwise required at expansion joints, shall be drawn tight.
Bolts through expansion joints shall be drawn up as tight as possible without being tight
enough to prevent the rail elements from sliding past one another longitudinally. Bolts shall
be sufficiently long to extend at least ¼ inch beyond the nuts. Except where required for
adjustments, bolts shall not extend more than ½ inch beyond the nuts.
8-11.3(1)C Terminal and Anchor Installation
All excavation and backfilling required for installation of anchors shall be performed in
accordance with Section 2-09, except that the costs thereof shall be incidental to and included
in the unit Contract price for the type of anchor installed.

Guardrail 8-11
Bolts shall be tightened to the tension specified. The anchor cable shall be tightened
sufficiently to eliminate all slack. When tightening, the anchor cable shall be restrained to
prevent twisting of the cable.
When foundation tubes used with the Wood Breakaway Post are driven, they shall be
driven prior to installing the wood post.
Type 2 concrete anchors may either be precast or cast-in-place at the option of the
Contractor.
Assembly and installation of Beam Guardrail Flared Terminals and Beam Guardrail
Non-flared Terminals shall be supervised at all times by a manufacturer’s representative, or
an installer who has been trained and certified by the manufacturer. A copy of the installer’s
certification shall be provided to the Engineer prior to installation. Assembly and installation
shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Beam Guardrail Non-flared Terminals for Type 1 guardrail shall meet the crash test and
evaluation criteria of NCHRP 350 or the Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH).
Beam Guardrail Non-flared Terminals for Type 31 guardrail shall meet the crash test and
evaluation criteria of MASH.
8-11.3(1)D Removing Guardrail and Guardrail Anchor
Removal of the various types of guardrail shall include removal of the rail, cable elements,
hardware, and posts, including transition sections, expansion sections, terminal sections
and the rail element of anchor assemblies. Removal of the various types of guardrail anchors
shall include removal of the anchor assembly including concrete bases, rebar, steel tubes, and
any other appurtenances in the anchor assembly. All holes resulting from the removal of the
guardrail posts and anchors shall be backfilled with granular material in layers no more than
6 inches thick and compacted to a density similar to that of the adjacent material. The removed
guardrail items shall become the property of the Contractor.
The embedded anchors attaching guardrail posts and guardrail terminal sections specified
for removal to existing concrete Structures shall be removed to a minimum of 1 inch beneath
the existing concrete surface. The void left by removal of the embedded anchors shall be
coated with epoxy bonding agent and filled with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2).
The epoxy bonding agent shall be Type II, conforming to Section 9-26.1, with the grade
and class as recommended by the epoxy bonding agent manufacturer and as approved by
the Engineer.
8-11.3(1)E Raising Guardrail
For raising guardrail anchors and raising guardrail terminals, the existing guardrail posts
shall be raised to attain the guardrail height shown in the Plans, measured from the top of the
rail to the finished Shoulder surface. The material around each post shall be tamped to prevent
settlement of the raised post.
For raising all other guardrail, the existing guardrail posts shall not be raised to attain
the new mounting height. The existing rail elements and blocks shall be removed from the
guardrail post. The Contractor shall field drill new ¾-inch diameter holes in the existing posts
to accommodate the ⅝-inch diameter button head bolts. When existing guardrail posts are
galvanized steel, the new drill holes shall be painted with two coats of paint, conforming to
Section 9-08.1(2)B. The Contractor shall then reinstall the guardrail block and rail element at
the new mounting height shown in the Plans, measured from the top of the rail to the finished
Shoulder surface. The new position of the top of the block shall not be more than 4 inches
above the top of the guardrail post.
The Contractor shall remove and replace any existing guardrail posts and blocks that are
not suited for re-use, as staked by the Engineer. The void caused by removal of the post shall
be backfilled and compacted. The Contractor shall then furnish and install a new guardrail post
to provide the necessary mounting height.

8-11 Guardrail
8-11.3(1)F Removing and Resetting Beam Guardrail

The Contractor shall remove and reset existing guardrail posts, rail element, hardware and
blocks to the location shown in the Plans. The mounting height of reset rail element shall be at
the height shown in the Plans.
The Contractor shall remove and replace any existing guardrail posts and blocks that
are not suited for re-use, as staked by the Engineer. The void caused by the removal of the
post shall be backfilled and compacted. The Contractor shall then furnish and install a new
guardrail post to provide the necessary mounting height.
8-11.3(1)G Plans
The Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings of such additional detailed plans
and shop drawings of rail punching, fittings, and assemblies as may be required by the
Engineer.
8-11.3(1)H Guardrail Construction Exposed to Traffic
Any section of beam guardrail that is removed for modification shall be back in place
within 5 calendar days of the date the guardrail is removed.
The Contractor’s operations shall be conducted in such a manner that fixed objects and
beam guardrail posts shall be protected from traffic at all times by attachment of the rail
elements and all associated hardware or by a method approved by the Engineer.
At the end of each day, guardrail sections having an exposed end toward oncoming traffic
shall have a Type G terminal end section bolted securely in place.
8-11.4 Measurement
Measurement of beam guardrail and beam guardrail with long posts will be by the linear
foot measured along the line of the completed guardrail, including expansion section, and will
also include the end section for F connections.
Measurement of beam guardrail transition sections will be per each for the type of
transition section installed. End sections, except for F connections, will be considered part of
the transition section and will be included in the measurement of the transition section.
Measurement of beam guardrail _____ terminal and beam guardrail buried terminal Type 1
will be per each for the completed terminal.
Measurement of beam guardrail buried terminal Type 2 will be per linear foot for the
completed terminal.
Measurement of beam guardrail placement-25-foot span will be per each for the
completed span.
Measurement of beam guardrail anchors of the type specified will be per each for the
completed anchor, including the attachment of the anchor to the guardrail.
Measurement of removal of guardrail will be by the linear foot measured along the line
of guardrail removed including transition sections, expansion sections, guardrail anchor rail
elements and terminal sections.
Measurement of removal of guardrail anchors will be per each.
Measurement of raising beam guardrail and removing and resetting beam guardrail will be
by the linear foot measured along the line of guardrail actually raised or removed and reset.
This will include transition sections, expansion sections, anchors, and terminal sections.
Measurement of beam guardrail post used for raising beam guardrail will be per each.
Measurement of beam guardrail blocks used for raising beam guardrail will be per each.
8-11.5 Payment
“Beam Guardrail Type ____”, per linear foot.
“Beam Guardrail Type 1- ____ Ft. Long Post”, per linear foot.

Guardrail 8-11
“Beam Guardrail Type 31-____ Ft. Long Post”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Beam Guardrail Type____”, “Beam Guardrail
Type 1-____ Ft. Long Post”, and “Beam Guardrail Type 31-____ Ft. Long Post”, shall be
full payment for all costs to obtain and provide materials and perform the Work as described in
Sections 8-11.3(1)A and 8-11.3(1)B, including costs for additional rail elements when nested
rail is required, and when connections to concrete masonry Structures are required.
“Beam Guardrail Transition Section Type ____”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Beam Guardrail Transition Section Type ____”
shall be full payment for all costs to obtain and provide materials and perform the Work
as described in Sections 8-11.3(1)A and 8-11.3(1)B, including costs for additional
rail elements when nested rail is required and when connections to concrete masonry
Structures are required.
“Beam Guardrail Anchor Type ____”, per each.
“Beam Guardrail ____ Terminal”, per each.
“Beam Guardrail Buried Terminal Type 1”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Beam Guardrail Anchor Type ____”, “Beam
Guardrail ___ Terminal”, and “Beam Guardrail Buried Terminal Type 1” shall be full
payment for all costs to obtain and provide materials and perform the Work as described
in Section 8-11.3(1)C.
“Beam Guardrail Buried Terminal Type 2”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Beam Guardrail Buried Terminal Type 2”
shall be full payment for all costs to obtain and provide materials and perform the Work
as described in Section 8-11.3(1)C.
“Beam Guardrail Placement - 25’ Span”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Beam Guardrail Placement - 25’ Span” shall be full
payment for all costs to perform the Work as shown in the Plans and as described in Sections
8-11.3(1)A and 8-11.3(1)B, including all costs for CRT posts, blocks, and nested W-beam
rail elements.
“Removing and Resetting Beam Guardrail”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Removing and Resetting Beam Guardrail”
shall be full payment for all costs to perform the Work as described in Section 8-11.3(1)F,
except for replacement posts and blocks.
“Raising Existing Beam Guardrail”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Raising Existing Beam Guardrail” shall be
full payment for all costs to perform the Work as described in Section 8-11.3(1)E, except
for replacement posts and blocks.
“Removing Guardrail”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Removing Guardrail” shall be full payment
for all costs to perform the Work as described in Section 8-11.3(1)D.
“Removing Guardrail Anchor”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Removing Guardrail Anchor” shall be full payment
for all costs to perform the Work as described in Section 8-11.3(1)D, including rail removal, if
there isn’t a Bid item for Removing Guardrail in the run of guardrail connecting to the anchor.
“Beam Guardrail Post”, per each.
“Beam Guardrail Block”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Beam Guardrail Post” and “Beam Guardrail Block”
shall be full payment for all costs for furnishing and installing new posts and blocks, removal
and disposal of the existing posts and blocks, and backfilling and compacting the void created
by post removal when new posts or blocks are required for the Work described in Sections
8-11.3(1)E and 8-11.3(1)F.

8-11 Guardrail

Chain Link Fence and Wire Fence 8-12
8-12 Chain Link Fence and Wire Fence

8-12.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and constructing chain link fence and wire fence of the
types specified in accordance with the Plans, these Specifications, and the Standard Plans
at the locations shown in the Plans and in conformity with the lines as staked.
Chain link fence shall be of diamond woven wire mesh mounted on steel posts.
Wire fence shall be of barbed wire or barbed wire combined with wire mesh fastened to
posts. Steel posts and steel braces, or wood posts and wood braces may be used, provided only
one type shall be selected for use in any Contract.
Gates shall consist of a steel frame or frames covered with chain link or wire mesh.
8-12.2 Materials
Concrete 6-02
Paint 9-08.1(2)B
Chain Link Fence and Gates 9-16.1
Wire Fence and Gates 9-16.2
Grout 9-20.3
Clearing of the fence line will be required. Clearing shall consist of the removal and
disposal of all trees, brush, logs, upturned stumps, roots of down trees, rubbish, and debris.
For chain link type fences, the clearing width shall be approximately 10 feet. For wire type
fences, the clearing width shall be approximately 3 feet. Grubbing will not be required except
where short and abrupt changes in the ground contour will necessitate removal of stumps in
order to properly grade the fence line. All stumps within the clearing limits shall be removed
or close cut.
Grading of the fence line sufficient to prevent short and abrupt breaks in the ground
contour that will improve the aesthetic appearance of the top of the fencing when installed
shall be required. It is expected that in the performance of this Work, machine operations will
be required for chain link fencing, and handwork will be required for wire fencing except
where sufficient width exists for machine work.
The fence shall be constructed close to and inside the Right of Way line unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer or shown in the Plans. Deviations in alignment to miss obstacles will
be permitted only when approved by the Engineer and only when such deviation will not be
visible to the traveling public or adjacent property owners.
8-12.3(1) Chain Link Fence and Gates
8-12.3(1)A Posts
Posts shall be placed in a vertical position and, except where otherwise directed by the
Engineer, shall be spaced at 10-foot centers. Spacing will be measured parallel to the slope
of the ground.
All posts, except line posts, shall be set in concrete to the dimensions shown in the Plans.
All concrete footings shall be crowned so as to shed water. Line posts fences shall be
set in undisturbed earth either by driving or drilling, except as specified. Driving shall
be accomplished in such a manner as not to damage the post. Voids around the post shall
be backfilled with suitable material and thoroughly tamped.
Concrete footings shall be constructed to embed the line posts at grade depressions where
the tension on the fence will tend to pull the post from the ground.
Where solid rock is encountered without an overburden of soil, line posts shall be set
a minimum depth of 14 inches, and end, corner, gate, brace, and pull posts a minimum of
20 inches into the solid rock. The holes shall have a minimum width 1 inch greater than the

largest dimension of the post section to be set. The posts shall be cut before installation to
lengths that will give the required length of post above ground, or if the Contractor so elects,
an even length of post set at a greater depth into the solid rock may be used.
After the post is set and plumbed, the hole shall be filled with Grout Type 4. The grout
shall be thoroughly worked into the hole so as to leave no voids. The grout shall be crowned to
carry water from the post.
Where solid rock is covered by an overburden of soil or loose rock, the posts shall be set
to the full depth shown in the Plans unless penetration into solid rock reaches the minimum
depths specified above, in which case the depth of penetration may be terminated. Concrete
footings shall be constructed from the solid rock to the top of the ground. After the post is set
and plumbed, the hole in the portion of the post in solid rock shall be filled with Grout Type 4.
The grout shall be thoroughly worked into the hole so as to leave no voids.
Gate and pull posts shall be braced to the adjacent brace, end, or corner post(s) in the
manner shown in the Plans. Changes in line amounting to 2-foot tangent offset or more
between posts shall be considered as corners for all types of fence.
Steep slopes or abrupt topography may require changes in various elements of the fence.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all posts of sufficient length to
accommodate the chain link fabric.
All round posts shall have approved top caps fastened securely to the posts. The base of the
top cap fitting for round posts shall feature an apron around the outside of the posts.
8-12.3(1)B Vacant
8-12.3(1)C Tension Wire
Tension Wires shall be attached to the posts as detailed in the Plans or as approved
by the Engineer.
8-12.3(1)D Chain Link Fabric
Chain link fabric shall be attached after the cables and wires have been properly tensioned.
Chain link fabric shall be placed on the face of the post away from the Highway, except
on horizontal curves where it shall be placed on the face on the outside of the curve unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Chain link fabric shall be placed approximately 1 inch above the ground and on a straight
grade between posts by excavating high points of ground. Filling of depressions will be
permitted only upon approval of the Engineer.
The fabric shall be stretched taut and securely fastened to the posts. Fastening to end,
gate, corner, and pull posts shall be with stretcher bars and fabric bands spaced at intervals
of 15 inches or less or by weaving the fabric into the fastening loops of roll formed posts.
Fastening to posts shall be with tie wire, metal bands, or other approved method attached
at 14-inch intervals. The top and bottom edge of the fabric shall be fastened with hog rings
to the top and bottom tension wires as may be applicable, spaced at 24-inch intervals.
Rolls of wire fabric shall be joined by weaving a single strand into the ends of the rolls
to form a continuous mesh.
8-12.3(1)E Chain Link Gates
Chain link fabric shall be fastened to the end bars of the gate frame by stretcher bars and
fabric bands and to the top and bottom bars of the gate frames by tie wires in the same manner
as specified for the chain link fence fabric, or by other standard methods if approved by
the Engineer.
Welded connections on gate frames where the galvanized coating has been burned shall
be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and all traces of the welding flux and loose or
cracked galvanizing removed. The clean areas shall then be painted with two coats of paint,
conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B.

8-12.3(2) Wire Fence and Gates

8-12.3(2)A Posts
Line posts shall be spaced at intervals not to exceed 14 feet. All intervals shall be measured
center to center of posts. In general, in determining the spacing of posts, measurements will
be made parallel to the slope of the existing ground, and all posts shall be placed in a vertical
position except where otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Line posts may be driven in place provided the method of driving does not damage the
post. Steel corner, gate, and pull posts shall be set in concrete footings to the dimensions
shown in the Plans and crowned at the top to shed water.
Concrete footings shall be constructed to embed the lower part of steel line posts, and
wood anchors shall be placed on wood posts at grade depressions wherever the tension on the
line wires will tend to pull the post from the ground. The concrete footings shall be 3 feet deep
by 12 inches in diameter and crowned at the top.
Where solid rock is encountered without an overburden of soil, line posts shall be set
a minimum depth of 14 inches and end, corner, gate, and pull posts a minimum depth of
20 inches into the solid rock. The hole shall have a minimum dimension 1 inch greater than
the largest dimension of the post section to be set. The posts shall be cut before installation to
lengths that will give 4½ feet of post above ground, or if the Contractor so elects, 6-foot posts
set 18 inches into the solid rock may be used.
After the post is set and plumbed, the hole shall be filled with Grout Type 4. The grout
shall be thoroughly worked into the hole so as to leave no voids. The grout shall be crowned
to carry water away from the post. Where posts are set in the above manner, anchor plates and
concrete footings will not be required.
Where solid rock is covered by an overburden of soil or loose rock, the posts shall be set
to the full depth of 2½ feet unless the penetration into solid rock reaches the minimum depths
specified above, in which case the depth of penetration may be terminated. When the depth of
the overburden is greater than 12 inches, anchor plates will be required on the steel line posts,
and concrete footings shall be constructed from the solid rock to the top of the ground on steel
end, gate, corner, and pull posts. When the depth of overburden is 12 inches or less, anchor
plates and concrete footings will not be required. After the post is set and plumbed, the hole
in the portion of the post in solid rock shall be filled with Grout Type 4. The grout shall be
thoroughly worked into the hole so as to leave no voids.
Steel braces shall be anchored to soil or loose rock with a commercial concrete footing not
less than 18 inches on any one side and set in solid rock to a minimum depth of 10 inches in
the same manner as specified above for posts. The braces shall be set on the diagonal as shown
in the Plans and connected to the post with an approved connection.
Wood braces shall be dapped ¼ inch into the posts and shall be fastened to each post with
three 20d galvanized nails.
Wire braces shall consist of a 9-gage wire passed around the wood posts to form a double
wire. The wire shall be fastened to each post with two staples and fastened together to form
a continuous wire. The wires shall then be twisted together until the wire is in tension.
Where the new fence joins an existing fence, the two shall be attached in a manner
satisfactory to the Engineer, and end or corner posts shall be set as necessary.
Changes in alignment of 30 degrees or more shall be considered as corners, and corner
posts shall be installed. Where it is deemed by the Engineer that a change in alignment of less
than 30 degrees will materially lessen the strength of the fence, the line post at the angle shall
be supported by the addition of braces or wires in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.

8-12.3(2)B Barbed Wire and Wire Mesh

After the pull posts have been placed and securely braced, the barbed wire and mesh shall
be pulled taut to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and each longitudinal wire shall be cut and
securely fastened to the pull post with devices customarily used for the purpose. Wire or mesh
shall not be carried past a pull post, but shall be cut and fastened to the pull post independently
for the adjacent spans.
After the tensioning of the wire or mesh between two pull posts, all longitudinal wires shall
be properly fastened at proper height to each intervening line post.
Wire mesh and barbed wire shall be placed on the face of the post which is away from the
highway, except that on horizontal curves, the mesh and wires shall be fastened to the face on
the outside of the curve unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Where unusual ground depressions occur between posts, the fence shall be guyed to
the ground by means of a 9-gage galvanized wire attached to a deadman of approximately
100 pounds buried 2 feet in the ground. The guy wire shall be securely attached to each strand
of barbed wire and to the top and bottom wires of the wire mesh fabric in a manner to maintain
the entire fence in its normal shape. If necessary to guy the fence in solid rock, the guy wire
shall be grouted in a hole 2 inches in diameter and 10 inches deep. The operation of guying
shall leave the fence snug with the ground.
8-12.3(2)C Vertical Cinch Stays
Vertical cinch stays shall be installed midway between posts on both types of fence.
The wire shall be twisted in such a manner as to permit weaving into the horizontal fence
wires to provide rigid spacing. All barbed wires and the top, middle, and bottom wire of the
wire mesh shall be woven into the stay.
8-12.3(2)D Wire Gates
The wire mesh fabric shall be taut and securely tied to the frame and stays in accordance
with recognized standard practice for wire gate construction.
Welded connections on gate frames shall be treated as specified for chain link fence gates.
The drop bar locking device for double wire gates shall be provided with a footing of
commercial concrete 12 inches in diameter and 12 inches deep, crowned on top and provided
with a hole to receive the locking bar. The diameter and depth of the hole in the footing shall
be as specified by the manufacturer of the locking device.
8-12.3(2)E Access Control Gate
Access control gates shall be placed to line and grade as shown in the Plans or as staked.
After the posts have been set, the holes shall be backfilled. The postholes shall be of sufficient
dimension to allow placement and thorough compaction of selected backfill material
completely around the post. Selected backfill material shall consist of earth or fine sandy
gravel, free from organic matter, with no individual particles exceeding 1½ inches in diameter.
8-12.4 Measurement
Chain link fence and wire fence will be measured by the linear foot of completed fence,
along the ground line, exclusive of openings.
End, gate, corner, and pull posts for chain link fence will be measured per each for the
posts furnished and installed complete in place.
Gates will be measured by the unit for each type of gate furnished and installed.
Access control gates will be measured per each.

8-12.5 Payment
“Chain Link Fence Type ____”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Chain Link Fence Type ___” shall be full
payment for all costs for the specified Work including brace post installation and all other
requirements of Section 8-12 for Chain Link Fence, unless covered in a separate Bid Item
in this section.
Payment for clearing of fence line for “Chain Link Fence Type ____” shall be in
“End, Gate, Corner, and Pull Post for Chain Link Fence”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “End, Gate, Corner, and Pull Post for Chain Link
Fence” shall be full payment for all costs for the specified Work.
“Double 14 Ft. Chain Link Gate”, per each.
“Double 20 Ft. Chain Link Gate”, per each.
“Single 6 Ft. Chain Link Gate”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Double 14 Ft. Chain Link Gate”, “Double 20 Ft.
Chain Link Gate”, and “Single 6 Ft. Chain Link Gate”, shall be full payment for all costs
for the specified Work.
“Wire Fence Type ____”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per each for “Wire Fence Type ____” shall be full payment for
all costs for the specified Work including payment for clearing of the fence line.
“Single Wire Gate 14 Ft. Wide”, per each.
“Double Wire Gate 20 Ft. Wide”, per each.
The unit contract price per each for “Single Wire Gate 14 Ft. Wide” and “Double Wire
Gate 20 Ft. Wide” shall be full payment for all costs for the specified Work.
“Access Control Gate”, per each.
The unit contract price per each for “Access Control Gate” shall be full payment for all
costs to perform the specified work.

8-13 Monument Cases
8-13 Monument Cases

8-13.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and placing monument cases and covers, in accordance
with the Standard Plans and these Specifications, in conformity with the lines and locations
shown in the Plans or as staked.
8-13.2 Materials
Concrete 6-02
Monument Cases and Covers 9-22.1
The concrete base shall be placed on a well compacted foundation. The placing of the
monument case and base shall be performed in a manner that will not disturb the monument.
The monument case shall be installed by the Contractor after the final course of surfacing
has been placed. After the monument case has been in place for a minimum of 3 days, the
Roadway surface shall be patched in a workmanlike manner.
When the monument case and cover are placed in cement concrete pavement, the concrete
base will not be required.
The monument will be furnished and set by the Engineer.
8-13.4 Measurement
Measurement of monument case and cover will be by the unit for each monument case and
cover furnished and set.
8-13.5 Payment
“Monument Case and Cover”, per each.

Cement Concrete Sidewalks 8-14
8-14 Cement Concrete Sidewalks

8-14.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing cement concrete sidewalks in accordance with details
shown in the Plans and these Specifications and in conformity to lines and grades shown in
the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
8-14.2 Materials
Aggregates 9-03
The Contractor shall use one of the detectable warning surface products listed in the
Qualified Products List or seek approval through the WSDOT Request for Approval of
Material process. The detectable warning surface shall have the truncated dome shape shown
in the Plans. The minimum 2-foot-wide detectable warning surface area shall be yellow and
shall match Federal Standard 595, color number 33538. When painting a detectable warning
surface is required, such as on a steel detectable warning surface, the yellow paint shall
conform to Section 9-08.1(8) and shall match Federal Standard 595, color number 33538.
The concrete in the sidewalks and curb ramps shall be air entrained concrete Class 3000
in accordance with the requirements of Section 6-02.
8-14.3(1) Excavation
Excavation shall be made to the required depth and to a width that will permit the
installation and bracing of the forms. The foundation shall be shaped and compacted to a firm
even surface conforming to the section shown in the Plans. All soft and yielding material shall
be removed and replaced with acceptable material.
8-14.3(2) Forms
Forms shall be of wood or metal and shall extend for the full depth of the concrete. All
forms shall be straight, free from warp, and of sufficient strength to resist the pressure of the
concrete without springing. Bracing and staking of forms shall be such that the forms remain
in both horizontal and vertical alignment until their removal. After the forms have been set to
line and grade, the foundation shall be brought to the grade required and thoroughly wetted
approximately 12 hours before placing the concrete.
8-14.3(3) Placing and Finishing Concrete
The concrete shall be placed in the forms and struck off with an approved straightedge.
As soon as the surface can be worked, it shall be troweled smooth with a steel trowel.
After troweling and before installing the contraction joints or perimeter edging, the walking
surfaces of the sidewalk and curb ramps shall be brushed in a transverse direction with a stiff
bristled broom as shown in the Plans.
Expansion and contraction joints shall be constructed as shown in the Plans. When the
sidewalk abuts a cement concrete curb or curb and gutter, the expansion joints in the sidewalk
shall have the same spacing as the curb. The expansion joint shall be filled to full cross-section
of the sidewalk with ⅜ inch premolded joint filler.
Curb ramps shall be of the type specified in the Plans and shall include the detectable
warning surface.

8-14 Cement Concrete Sidewalks
8-14.3(4) Curing
Concrete sidewalks shall be cured for at least 72 hours. Curing shall be by means of moist
burlap or quilted blankets or other approved methods. During the curing period, all traffic,
both pedestrian and vehicular, shall be excluded. Vehicular traffic shall be excluded for such
additional time as the Engineer may specify.
8-14.3(5) Detectable Warning Surface
The detectable warning surface shall be located as shown in the Plans. Placement of the
detectable warning surface shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendation
for placement in fresh concrete, before the concrete has reached initial set, or on a hardened
cement concrete surface or asphalt pavement surface.
Vertical edges of the detectable warning surface shall be flush with the adjoining surface to
the extent possible (not more than ¼ inch above the surface of the pavement) after installation.
Embossing or stamping the wet concrete to achieve the truncated dome pattern or using
a mold into which a catalyst-hardened material is applied shall not be allowed.
8-14.4 Measurement
Cement concrete sidewalks will be measured by the square yard of finished surface and
will not include the surface area of the curb ramps.
Cement concrete curb ramp type ______ will be measured per each for the complete curb
ramp type installed and includes the installation of the detectable warning surface.
Detectable warning surfaces will be measured by the square foot of detectable warning
surface material installed as shown in the Plans.
8-14.5 Payment
Payment will be made for the following Bid items when included in the Proposal:
“Cement Conc. Sidewalk”, per square yard.
“Cement Conc. Sidewalk with Raised Edge”, per square yard.
“Monolithic Cement Conc. Curb and Sidewalk”, per square yard.
“Cement Conc. Curb Ramp Type ___”, per each
The unit Contract price per each for “Cement Conc. Curb Ramp Type____” shall be
full pay for installing the curb ramp as specified, including the “Detectable Warning Surface”.
Payment for excavation of material not related to the construction of the sidewalk but
necessary before the sidewalk can be placed, when and if shown in the Plans, will be made
in accordance with the provisions of Section 2-03. Otherwise, the Contractor shall make all
excavations including haul and disposal, regardless of the depth required for constructing the
sidewalk and curb ramps to the lines and grades shown, and shall include all costs thereof
in the unit Contract price per square yard for “Cement Conc. Sidewalk”, “Cement Conc.
Sidewalk with Raised Edge”, “Monolithic Cement Conc. Curb and Sidewalk”, or the unit
contract price per each for “Cement Conc. Curb Ramp Type ___”.
“Detectable Warning Surface”, per square foot.

Riprap 8-15
8-15 Riprap
8-15.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and placing riprap protection of the type specified at the
locations and in conformity with the lines and dimensions shown in the Plans or established
by the Engineer.
Riprap will be classified as heavy loose riprap, light loose riprap, and hand placed riprap.
8-15.2 Materials
Filter Blanket ____ (shall meet the gradation
requirements for Permeable Ballast) 9-03.9(2)
Gravel Backfill for Drains 9-03.12(4)
Heavy Loose Riprap 9-13
Light Loose Riprap 9-13
Hand Placed Riprap 9-13
Quarry Spalls 9-13
8-15.3(1) Excavation for Riprap
The foundation for riprap shall be excavated below probable scour or to the elevation
shown in the Plans, and no stone shall be laid or concrete placed until the footing is approved
by the Engineer. Excavation below the level of the intersection of the slope to be protected
and the adjacent original ground or the channel floor or slope shall be classified, measured,
and paid for as channel excavation or ditch excavation in accordance with Section 2-03. All
excavation or backfill above the level of the above described intersection and all dressing of
the slope to be protected shall be included in the Contract price for the class of riprap to be
placed. Before placing riprap, the slopes shall be dressed to the lines and grades as staked.
8-15.3(2) Loose Riprap
Loose riprap shall be placed in such a manner that all relatively large stones shall be
essentially in contact with each other, and all voids filled with the finer materials to provide
a well graded compact mass. The stone shall be dumped on the slope in a manner that will
ensure the riprap attains its specified thickness in one operation. When dumping or placing,
care shall be used to avoid disturbing the underlying material. Placing in layers parallel to the
slope will not be permitted. A 12-inch tolerance for loose riprap will be allowed from slope
plane and grade line in the finished surface.
8-15.3(3) Hand Placed Riprap
The stones shall be laid by hand on prepared slopes to such thickness as may be ordered
by the Engineer. The riprap shall be started at the toe of the embankment by digging a trench
and placing a course of the largest stones therein. Each stone shall be placed so that it shall rest
on the slope of the embankment and not wholly on the stone below, and it shall be thoroughly
tamped or driven into place. The exposed face of all hand placed riprap shall be made as
smooth as the shape and size of the stones will permit and shall not vary more than 3 inches
from a plane surface on the required slope.
8-15.3(4) Vacant
8-15.3(5) Vacant
8-15.3(6) Quarry Spalls
Quarry spalls shall be placed in ditches and on slopes to be protected, in accordance with
the Plans or as staked by the Engineer. After placement, the quarry spalls shall be compacted
to be uniformly dense and unyielding.

8-15 Riprap
8-15.3(7) Filter Blanket

When required, a filter blanket shall be placed on the prepared slope or area to the full
thickness specified in the Plans using methods which will not cause segregation of particle
sizes within the bedding. The surface of the finished layer shall be even and free from mounds
or windrows. Additional layers of filter material, when required, shall be placed using methods
that will not cause mixing of the materials in the different layers.
8-15.4 Measurement
Loose riprap will be measured by the ton or per cubic yard of riprap actually placed.
Hand placed riprap will be measured by the cubic yard of riprap actually placed.
Filter blanket will be measured by the ton or cubic yard of filter blanket actually placed.
Quarry spalls will be measured by the ton or per cubic yard of spalls actually placed.
Channel excavation will be measured by the cubic yard as specified in Section 2-03.
Ditch excavation will be measured by the cubic yard as specified in Section 2-03.
Excavation for toe walls and trenches will be measured by the cubic yard as ditch
excavation in accordance with the provisions of Section 2-03.
8-15.5 Payment
“Heavy Loose Riprap”, per ton or per cubic yard.
“Light Loose Riprap”, per ton or per cubic yard.
“Hand Placed Riprap”, per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per ton or per cubic yard for the class or kind of riprap specified
above shall be full pay for furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials required to
construct the riprap protection, except for excavation. When it is necessary to dump and sort
individual loads, payment will be made only for that portion accepted by the Engineer.
“Quarry Spalls”, per ton or per cubic yard.
The unit Contract price per ton or per cubic yard for “Quarry Spalls” shall be full pay for
all costs in furnishing, placing, and compacting spalls.
“Ditch Excavation”, per cubic yard.
“Filter Blanket”, per cubic yard or per ton.
The unit price for “Filter Blanket” shall be full payment for all costs incurred to perform
the work in Section 8-15.3(7).
“Channel Excavation”, per cubic yard.
“Channel Excavation Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
“Ditch Excavation Incl. Haul”, per cubic yard.
Payment for “Channel Excavation”, “Channel Excavation Incl. Haul”, “Ditch Excavation”
and “Ditch Excavation Incl. Haul” is described in Section 2-03.5.

Concrete Slope Protection 8-16
8-16 Concrete Slope Protection

8-16.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing concrete slope protection, in accordance with these
Specifications and the details shown in the Plans, at the locations and in conformity with the
lines, grades, and dimensions as staked.
Concrete slope protection shall consist of reinforced cement concrete poured or
pneumatically placed upon the slope with a rustication joint pattern or semi-open concrete
masonry units placed upon the slope closely adjoining each other.
8-16.2 Materials
Commercial Concrete 6-02.3(2)B
Concrete Slope Protection 9-13.5
Semi-Open Concrete Masonry Units Slope Protection 9-13.5(1)
Poured Portland Cement Concrete Slope Protection 9-13.5(2)
Pneumatically Placed Portland Cement Concrete
Slope Protection 9-13.5(3)
8-16.3(1) Footing and Preparation of Slope
The footing for the slope protection shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 2-09
and 6-02.
The construction of the footing will be incidental to the slope protection, and no separate
measurement or payment will be made.
The surface on which application is to be made shall be thoroughly compacted and neatly
trimmed to line and grade as necessary to conform to the detail in the Plans.
8-16.3(2) Placing Semi-Open Concrete Masonry Units
The concrete masonry units shall be placed in a uniform plane and in such a manner that
they rest firmly and evenly against the slope with no rocking. The concrete masonry units
shall be placed in horizontal parallel courses, and successive courses shall break joints with
the preceding course to form a running bond.
8-16.3(3) Poured in Place Cement Concrete
The wire mesh shall lap a minimum of one mesh spacing, and laps shall be securely
fastened at the ends. During the placement of the concrete, the reinforcement shall be held
so as to provide a minimum of 1¼ inch of cover.
Where commercial concrete is to be placed upon the slope, the method of depositing
and compacting shall result in a compact, dense, and impervious concrete which will show
a uniform plane surface.
The newly constructed concrete shall be finished by means of a wood float and shall
be striated with a rustication joint as shown in the Plans.
Curing shall be performed in accordance with Section 5-05.3(13).
8-16.3(4) Pneumatically Placed Concrete
Workers – Only workers experienced in pneumatically placed concrete shall be
employed; and satisfactory evidence of such experience shall be furnished when requested
by the Engineer.
Equipment – The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with two copies of the
manufacturer’s Specifications and operating instructions for the equipment used. Before
placement of any portion of the slope protection, the type of equipment and method of
operation shall be approved by the Engineer.

8-16 Concrete Slope Protection
Proportions of Materials – The sand/cement ratio shall be 4½ parts sand to one part
cement based on loose dry volume.
Water shall be maintained at a constant pressure that shall be at least 15 psi above
atmospheric pressure at the nozzle. For lengths of hose up to 100 feet, pneumatic pressure at
the gun shall be 45 psi or greater. Pressure shall be increased 5 psi for each additional 5 feet
of hose required. A steady pressure shall be maintained.
Method of Application – Portland cement and sand shall be mixed dry, passed through
a cement gun and conveyed by air through a flexible tube, hydrated at a nozzle at the end of
the flexible tube, and deposited in place by air pressure.
All surfaces are to be wetted, but application shall not be made on any surface on which
free water exists.
Reinforcement – The wire mesh shall lap a minimum of one mesh spacing, and laps shall
be securely fastened at the ends. During the placement of the concrete, the reinforcement shall
be held so as to provide a minimum of 1¾ inch of cover at the recess.
Finishing – The newly constructed concrete shall be finished by means of a wood float and
shall be striated with a rustication joint as shown in the Plans.
Curing – Curing shall be in accordance with Section 5-05.3(13).
Protection of Facilities – During the construction, the Contractor shall protect all retaining
walls, columns and Structures from concrete splash or overspray. Suitable covering shall be
provided if such protection is deemed necessary by the Engineer.
Test Cylinders – Two test cylinders shall be made for each full day’s operation.
The Contractor shall furnish cylinders 6 inches in diameter and 12 inches high made of ¾-inch
mesh hardware cloth. The test cylinder shall be filled with concrete by utilizing the same
pneumatic application described above.
The cylinders shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at the age of
28 days.
8-16.4 Measurement
Measurement for concrete slope protection will be by the square yard and will include the
actual area of the slope covered excluding the footings. The area will be computed on the basis
of slope measurements.
8-16.5 Payment
“Conc. Slope Protection”, per square yard.

Impact Attenuator Systems 8-17
8-17 Impact Attenuator Systems
8-17.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing, constructing, repairing, and removing permanent and
temporary impact attenuator systems selected from the approved list shown in the Plans.
8-17.2 Materials
Sand for inertial barrier systems shall not contain more than 5 percent water by weight.
Commercial grade urea shall be thoroughly mixed with the sand in an amount equal to
5 percent, by weight, of the sand.
Undamaged sand barrel impact attenuators that have been previously utilized may be
utilized in a temporary impact attenuator array only, if inspected and approved by the Engineer
prior to use.
The assembly and installation of all attenuator systems, except those utilizing sand barrels,
shall be supervised at all times by either a manufacturer’s representative or an installer who
has been trained and certified by the manufacturer of the system. If the supervision is provided
by a trained installer, a copy of the installer certification shall be provided to the Engineer
prior to installation.
Assembly and installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. This Work shall include the connection to a concrete barrier, bridge
abutment or a transition section identified in the Plans, construction of a steel reinforced
concrete pad or concrete backup, and anchorage to the pavement, if required by the
manufacturer’s assembly and installation procedures.
The Contractor shall have a complete set of replacement parts on the jobsite for each type
of temporary impact attenuator in use on the project and shall repair all damaged impact
attenuators immediately.
When the Engineer determines that a temporary impact attenuator is no longer needed,
then the Contractor shall remove that attenuator from the project. The removed equipment
shall remain the property of the Contractor.
8-17.4 Measurement
Temporary and permanent impact attenuators will be measured per each for each
installation. Only the maximum number of temporary impact attenuators installed at any one
time within the project limits will be measured for payment.
Resetting impact attenuators will be measured per each for each installation that is adjusted
or reset to a new location on the project. The Contracting Agency will not measure resetting
impact attenuators when it is for the benefit of the Contractor’s operations.
8-17.5 Payment
“Temporary Impact Attenuator”, per each.
The unit Contract price for “Temporary Impact Attenuator” shall be full pay for all Work
associated with the installation, maintenance, and the final removal of the temporary impact
attenuator.
“Permanent Impact Attenuator”, per each.
The unit Contract price for “Permanent Impact Attenuator” shall be full pay for all Work
associated with furnishing, installing and all other costs involved with installing the impact
attenuator in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
“Resetting Impact Attenuator”, per each.
The unit Contract price for “Resetting Impact Attenuator” shall be full pay for all Work
associated with the removing, transporting, and resetting an impact attenuator.
If an impact attenuator is damaged by a third party, repairs shall be made in accordance
with Section 1-07.13(4) under the Bid item “Reimbursement For Third Party Damage”. No
payment will be made for repair of impact attenuators damaged by the Contractor’s operations.
8-18 Mailbox Support

8-18.1 Description
This Work consists of removing, maintaining in temporary locations during construction,
and reinstalling in permanent locations, all mailboxes affected by Construction work in
accordance with the Plans, these Specifications, and the Standard Plans.
8-18.2 Materials
Steel Posts 9-32.1
Bracket, Platform, and Anti-Twist Plate 9-32.2
Type 2 Mailbox Support 9-32.7
Timber Sign Posts 9-28.14(1)
Fasteners 9-32.5
Snow Guard 9-32.6
Concrete Base 9-32.8
Steel Pipe 9-32.9
U-Channel Post 9-32.10
Mailboxes will be furnished by others.
During construction the mailboxes shall be moved to a temporary location where their
usefulness will not be impaired. The boxes shall be reinstalled at the original location or at
locations determined by the Engineer in accordance with the Standard Plans.
The existing mailboxes shall be reinstalled on new mailbox supports, in accordance with
the Standard Plans, within 24 hours of being removed. The existing mailbox posts shall be
removed and disposed of off the project site.
Excavation for new mailbox supports shall be backfilled with adjacent native material and
compacted to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
When a newspaper tube is attached to an existing mailbox installation, it shall be removed
and attached under the mailbox on the new support, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
8-18.3(1) Type 3 Mailbox Support
The concrete base shall be constructed using commercial concrete, with the pipe set to
the dimensions shown in the Standard Plans. The base shall be crowned so as to shed water.
The concrete may be mixed on the jobsite as specified in Section 6-02.3(4)B.
The U-channel post may be driven in place provided the method of driving does not
damage the post.
With the Engineer’s consent, a Type 3 Mailbox Support design, made of steel or other
durable material, that meets the NCHRP 350 or the Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware
(MASH) crash test criteria may be used in place of the design shown in the Standard Plans.
In which case, the manufacturer’s recommendations concerning installation shall be followed;
however, the mailbox itself shall be positioned on the Roadway according to the dimensions
shown in the Standard Plans.
8-18.4 Measurement
Mailbox supports will be measured by the unit for each kind of mailbox support furnished
and installed in its permanent location.
8-18.5 Payment
“Mailbox Support, Type ____”, per each.
All costs for the snow guard shall be included in the unit Contract price per mailbox
support involved.

Vacant 8-19
8-19 Vacant

8-20 Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and Electrical
8-20 Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation

Systems, and Electrical
8-20.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing, installing and field testing all materials and equipment
necessary to complete in place, fully functional system(s) of any or all of the following types
including modifications to an existing system all in accordance with approved methods,
the Plans, the Special Provisions, and these Specifications:
1. Traffic Signal System
2. Illumination System
3. Intelligent Transportation Systems (ITS)
Unless otherwise noted, the location of signals, controllers, standards, and appurtenances
shown in the Plans are approximate; and the exact location will be established by the Engineer
in the field.
8-20.1(1) Regulations and Code
All electrical equipment shall conform to the standards of the National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA), Electric Utility Service Equipment Requirements
Committee (EUSERC), and California Department of Transportation document entitled
Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications (TEES). Traffic signal control equipment
shall conform to the Contract and these Standard Specifications: EIA Electronic Industries
Alliance, IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, the American Society
for Testing and Materials (ASTM), the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO), the American National Standards Institute (ANSI),
whichever is applicable, and to other codes listed herein. In addition to the requirements
of these Specifications, the Plans, and the Special Provisions, all material and Work shall
conform to the requirements of the National Electrical Code, hereinafter referred to as the
Code, and any WACs and local ordinances, which may apply.
Wherever reference is made in these Specifications or in the Special Provisions to the
Code, the rules, or the standards mentioned above, the reference shall be construed to mean
the code, rule, or standard that is in effect on the Bid advertisement date.
In accordance with RCW 39.06.010, the Contractor need not be registered or licensed
if the Contractor has been prequalified as required by RCW 47.28.070.
Safe wiring labels normally required by the Department of Labor and Industries will not
be required on electrical Work within the Rights-of-Way of Contracting Agency Highways
as allowed in RCW 19.28.141.
Persons performing electrical Work shall be certified in accordance with RCW 19.28.161.
Proof of certification shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to the performance of the Work.
8-20.1(2) Industry Codes and Standards
The following electrical industry codes and standard procedures are listed for reference
purposes:
Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA), 30 West University Drive, Arlington
Heights, IL 60004.
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO),
444 North Capitol Street NW, Suite 225, Washington, D.C. 20001.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI), 70 East 45th Street, New York, NY.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), 1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA.
American Wood Protection Association (AWPA), 836 Seventeenth Street,
Washington, D.C.
Bell Company Research and Evaluation (Bellcore) 31220 La Baya DR, Westlake Village,
CA 91362.

Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and Electrical 8-20
Edison Electric Institute (EEI), 420 Lexington Avenue, New York, NY.
Electronics Industries Alliance (EIA), 101 Pennsylvania Avenue, Washington, D.C.
Electric Utility Service Equipment Requirements Committee (EUSERC).
Federal Communications Commission (FCC), 445 12th SW, Washington, D.C. 20554.
International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA), PO Box 539, 1115 North Main Street,
Newark, NY 14513.
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), 17th Floor, New York, NY 10016
International Telephony Communications Union (ITU) Place des Nations CH 1211 Geneva
20 Switzerland.
Institute of Transportation Engineers (ITE), 2029 K Street, Washington, D.C. 20005.
Insulated Power Cable Engineers’ Association (IPCEA), 283 Valley Road, Montclair, NJ.
National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA), 155 East 44th Street,
New York, NY.
National Fire Protection Association – National Electrical Code (NEC), 470 Atlantic
Avenue, Boston, MA.
National Television Standards Committee (NTSC), 445 12th SW, Washington, D.C. 20554.
National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocol (NTCIP).
Rural Utilities Service (RUS), 1400 Independence Avenue, Washington, D.C.
Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL), 207 East Ohio Street, Chicago, IL.
8-20.1(3) Permitting and Inspections
Electrical installations are subject to electrical inspection in accordance with
RCW 19.28.101. Electrical inspections may only be performed by an electrical inspector
meeting the requirements of RCW 19.28.321. Electrical installations will not be accepted until
they have been inspected and approved by an electrical inspector as required by this Section.
This inspection is required even if there is no new electrical service or new electrical meter
being installed in the Contract.
Installations within WSDOT right of way are subject to a minimum of a final inspection
by a WSDOT certified electrical inspector as allowed by RCW 19.28.141. A separate permit
is not required for electrical installations within WSDOT right of way. Additional inspections
may be required at the discretion of the Engineer.
Installations outside of WSDOT right of way are subject to permitting and inspection
by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries (L&I) or a local jurisdiction
approved for that location by L&I. Approved local jurisdictions and their contacts can be
found on the L&I website at www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/Electrical/FeePermInsp/
CityInspectors.
8-20.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the requirements of Section 9-29. Unless otherwise indicated in the
Plans or specified in the Special Provisions, all materials shall be new.
Where existing systems are to be modified, the existing material shall be incorporated
in the revised system, salvaged, or abandoned as specified in the Contract documents, or as
ordered by the Engineer.
8-20.2(2) Equipment List and Drawings
Within 20 days following execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer a completed “Request for Approval of Material” that describes the material
proposed for use to fulfill the Plans and Specifications.
If required to do so, the Contractor shall submit Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of
supplemental data, sample articles, or both, of the material proposed for use. Supplemental
data includes such items as catalog cuts, product Specifications, shop drawings, wiring
diagrams, etc.

If the luminaires are not listed in the Qualified Products List, the Contractor shall submit
Type 2 Working Drawings consisting of the following information for each different type of
luminaire required on the Contract:
1. Isocandela diagrams showing vertical light distribution, vertical control limits, and
lateral light distribution classification.
2. Details showing the lamp socket positions with respect to lamp and refractor for each
light distribution type. This requires that the Contracting Agency know what the light
pattern available are and the light distribution.
The Contractor shall submit for approval Type 3E Working Drawings in accordance with
Section 1-05.3 for each of the following types of standards called for on this project:
1. Light standards without preapproved plans.
2. Signal standards with or without preapproved plans.
The Contractor will not be required to submit shop drawings for approval for light
standards and traffic signal standards conforming to the preapproved plans listed in the Special
Provisions. The Contractor may use preapproved plans posted on the WSDOT website with a
more current revision date than stamped in the Special Provisions.
The Engineer’s acceptance of any submitted documentation shall in no way relieve the
Contractor from compliance with the safety and performance requirements as specified herein.
Submittals required shall include but not be limited to the following:
1. A Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a material staging plan, should the Contractor
propose Contracting Agency-owned property for staging areas.
2. A Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a cable vault installation plan showing the
exact proposed installation location by Roadway station, offset and the scheduled
sequence for each cable vault installation.
3. A Type 2E Working Drawing consisting of a pit plan, for each boring pit, depicting the
protection of traffic and pedestrians, pit dimensions, shoring, bracing, struts, walers,
sheet piles, conduit skids, and means of attachment, casing type, and casing size.
4. A Type 2E Working Drawing consisting of a boring plan depicting the boring system
and entire support system.
8-20.3(1) General
All workmanship shall be complete and in accordance with the latest accepted standards
of the industry.
Existing electrical systems, traffic signal or illumination, or approved temporary
replacements, shall be kept in effective operation during the progress of the Work, except
when shutdown is permitted to allow for alterations or final removal of the system.
If a portion of an existing communication conduit system is damaged due to the
Contractor’s activities, the affected system shall be restored to original condition. Conduit
shall be repaired. Communication cables shall be replaced and the communication system
shall be made fully operational within 24 hours of being damaged.
Damaged communication cable shall be replaced between existing termination or splice
points. No additional termination or splice points will be allowed. An existing termination or
splice point is defined as a location where all existing fiber strands or twisted pair wires are
terminated or spliced at one point. Communication cable shall be defined as either copper
twisted pair or fiber optic cables. The Contractor may use temporary splices to restore
WSDOT communication systems until the permanent communication cable system is restored.
When damage to an existing communication system has occurred, the Contractor shall
perform the following in addition to other restoration requirements:
1. Inspect the communication raceway system including locate wire or tape to determine
the extent of damage.

2. Contact the Engineer for Fiber Optic Cable and Twisted Pair (TWP) Copper Cable
acceptance testing requirements and communication system restoration requirements.
3. Initially perform the acceptance tests to determine the extent of damage and also
perform the acceptance tests after repairs are completed. Provide written certification
that the communication cable system, including the locate wire or tape, is restored to
test standard requirements.
Communication cables shall be restored by Contractor personnel that are WSDOT
prequalified for communication installation work. Restoration shall be considered electrical
work when the path of the communication system interfaces with electrical systems. Electrical
work of this nature shall be performed by Contractor personnel that are WSDOT prequalified
for work on both electrical and communication systems.
If the Contractor or Subcontractors are unable or unqualified to complete the restoration
work, the Engineer may have the communication or electrical systems restored by other means
and subtract the cost from the money that will be or is due the Contractor.
When field repair of existing conduit, innerduct or outerduct is required, the repair kits
shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendations. Repair kits and each connection point
between the repair kit and the existing raceway system shall be sealed to prevent air leakage
during future cable installation.
Illumination system shutdowns shall not interfere with the regular lighting schedule, unless
permitted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to performing any
Work on existing systems.
Work shall be so scheduled that each electrical system is operational prior to opening the
corresponding section of Roadway to traffic.
Traffic signals shall not be placed in operation for use by the public until all required
channelization, pavement markings, illumination, signs, and sign lights are substantially
complete and operational unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer.
The embedded anchors attaching existing electrical, illumination, and traffic signal systems
specified for removal to existing concrete Structures shall be removed a minimum of 1 inch
beneath the existing concrete surface. The void left by removal of the embedded anchors shall
be coated with epoxy bonding agent and filled with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2).
The epoxy bonding agent shall be Type II, conforming to Section 9-26.1, with the grade and
class as recommended by the epoxy bonding agent manufacturer and as approved by the
Engineer. The mortar shall consist of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions to
match the color of the existing concrete surface as near as practicable.
All costs incurred by the Contractor for providing effective operation of existing electrical
systems shall be included in the associated electrical Bid items.
8-20.3(2) Excavating and Backfilling
The excavations required for the installation of conduit, foundations, poles and other-
accessories shall be performed in a manner that prevents damage to the streets, sidewalks, and
other improvements. The trenches shall not be excavated wider than necessary for the proper
installation of the electrical accessories and foundations. Excavating shall not be performed
until immediately before installation of conduit and other accessories. The material from the
excavation shall be placed where the least interference to vehicular and pedestrian traffic,
and to surface drainage, will occur.
All surplus excavated material shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor
in accordance with Section 2-03, or as ordered by the Engineer in accordance with
Section 1-04.4.
The excavations shall be backfilled in conformance with the requirements of
Section 2-09.3(1)E, Structure Excavation.
At the end of each day’s Work and at all other times when construction operations are
suspended, all equipment and other obstructions shall be removed from that portion of the
Roadway open for use by public traffic.

Excavations in the street or Highway shall be performed in such a manner that not more
than one traffic lane is restricted in either direction at any time unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
8-20.3(3) Removing and Replacing Improvements
Improvements such as sidewalks, curbs, gutters, Portland cement concrete and hot mix
asphalt pavement, bituminous surfacing, base material, and any other improvements removed,
broken, or damaged by the Contractor, shall be replaced or reconstructed with the same kind
of materials as found on the Work or with other materials satisfactory to the Engineer.
Whenever a part of a square, slab, or section of existing concrete sidewalk, curb, gutter or
driveway is broken or damaged, the entire square, slab or section, curb, gutter, driveway shall
be removed and the concrete reconstructed as specified above.
The outline of all areas to be removed in Portland cement concrete sidewalks and
pavements and hot mix asphalt pavements shall be cut to a minimum depth of 3 inches with
a saw prior to removing the sidewalk, driveway, slabs and pavement material. The cut for
the remainder of the required depth may be made by a method satisfactory to the Engineer.
Cuts shall be neat and true with no shatter outside the removal area.
8-20.3(4) Foundations
Foundation concrete shall conform to the requirements for the specified class, be cast-in-
place concrete and be constructed in accordance with Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3. Concrete for
Type II, III, IV, V, and CCTV signal standards and light standard foundations shall be Class
4000P. Concrete for pedestals and cabinets, Type PPB, PS, I, FB, and RM signal standards
and other foundations shall be Class 3000. Concrete placed into an excavation where water is
present shall be placed using an approved tremie. If water is not present, the concrete shall be
placed such that the free-fall is vertical down the center of the shaft without hitting the sides,
the steel reinforcing bars, or the steel reinforcing bar cage bracing. The Section 6-02.3(6)
restriction for 5-feet maximum free-fall shall not apply to placement of Class 4000P concrete
into a shaft. Steel reinforcing bars for foundations shall conform to Section 9-07.
The bottom of concrete foundations shall rest on firm ground. If the portion of the
foundation beneath the existing ground line is formed or cased instead of being cast against
the existing soil forming the sides of the excavation, then all gaps between the existing
soil and the completed foundation shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with
Section 2-09.3(1)E.
Foundations shall be cast in one operation where practicable. The exposed portions shall
be formed to present a neat appearance.
The top edges of the luminaire foundation, traffic signal standard foundations, electrical
service foundations, traffic signal controller cabinets, Transformer cabinets, ITS Standards,
and ITS cabinets shall have a ¾-inch chamfer on the top edge of the foundation. Where one
or more of the above foundations directly abut each other, no chamfer shall be permitted.
Where soil conditions are poor, the Engineer may order the Contractor to extend the
foundations shown in the Plans to provide additional depth. Such additional Work will be
paid for according to Section 1-04.4.
When slip bases are installed the conduit, anchor bolts, and other obstructions shall
terminate at a height below the elevation of the top of the bottom slip plate. The galvanized
surfaces of the slip plates, the keeper plate and the luminaire base plate shall be smooth,
without irregularities, to reduce friction and to prevent slacking of bolt tension due to
flattening of the irregularities. Slip base luminaire foundations shall have a maximum
conduit size of 1-inch.
Forms shall be true to line and grade. Tops of foundations for posts and standards, except
special foundations, shall be finished to ground line or sidewalk grade, unless otherwise noted
in the Plans.

Forms shall be rigid and securely braced in place. Conduit ends and anchor bolts shall be
plumbed and rigidly placed in proper position and to proper height prior to placing concrete
and shall be held in place by means of a template until the forms are removed.
Anchor bolts shall be installed so that two full threads extend above the top of the top
heavy-hex nut, except that slip base anchor bolt extensions shall conform to the specified slip
base clearance requirements. Anchor bolts shall be installed plumb, plus or minus 1 degree.
See Section 8-20.3(9) for additional grounding requirements.
Plumbing of standards shall be accomplished by adjusting leveling nuts. Shims or other
similar devices for plumbing or raking will not be permitted except on power installed hot
dipped galvanized steel luminaire foundations.
The top heavy-hex nuts of light standards and signal standards shall be tightened in
accordance with Section 6-03.3(33), and as follows:
1. The top heavy-hex nuts for all clamping bolts of slip base light standards and Type RM
and FB signal standards, shall be tightened using a torque wrench to the torque specified
in Sections 8-20.3(13)A and 8-20.3(14)E, respectively.
2. The top heavy-hex nuts for type ASTM F1554 grade 105 anchor bolts shall be tightened
by the Turn-of-Nut Tightening Method to a minimum rotation of ¼ turn (90 degrees)
and a maximum rotation of ⅓ turn (120 degrees) past snug tight. Permanent marks shall
be set on the base plate and nuts to indicate nut rotation past snug tight.
3. The top hex nuts for type ASTM F1554 grade 55 anchor bolts shall be tightened by
the Turn-of-Nut Tightening Method to a minimum rotation of ⅛ turn (45 degrees) and
a maximum rotation of 1/6 turn (60 degrees) past snug tight. Permanent marks shall be
set on the base plate and nuts to indicate nut rotation past snug tight.
Both forms and ground which will be in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly
moistened before placing concrete; however, excess water in the foundation excavation will
not be permitted. Foundations shall have set at least 72 hours prior to the removal of the forms.
All forms shall be removed, except when the Plans or Special Provisions specifically allow or
require the forms or casing to remain.
Class 2 surface finish shall be applied to exposed surfaces of concrete in accordance with
the requirements of Section 6-02.3(14)B.
Where obstructions prevent construction of planned foundations, the Contractor shall
construct an effective foundation satisfactory to the Engineer.
The combined height of the light standard concrete foundation plus the anchor bolt stub
height shall not exceed 4-inches above the ground line.
8-20.3(5) Conduit
8-20.3(5)A General
The ends of all conduit, metallic and nonmetallic, shall be reamed to remove burrs and
rough edges. Field cuts shall be made square and true. The ends of unused conduits shall be
capped. When conduit caps are removed, the threaded ends of metal conduit shall be provided
with approved conduit bushings and non-metal conduit shall be provided with end bells.
Reducing couplings will not be permitted.
Existing conduit in place scheduled for installation of new conductor(s) shall first have any
existing conductor(s) removed and a cleaning mandrel shall be pulled through. The existing
conduit shall then be prepared subject to the same requirements outlined in this paragraph, for
new conduit and innerduct, unless otherwise indicated in the Plans. All new conduit and all
innerduct shall be blown clean with compressed air. Then in the presence of the Engineer, an
80 percent sizing mandrel, correctly sized for the raceway, shall be pulled through to ensure
that the raceway has not been deformed. This shall be done prior to pulling wire or fiber optic
cable and after final assembly is in place. Existing conductor(s) shall be reinstalled unless
otherwise indicated in the Plans.

Immediately after the sizing mandrel has been pulled through, install an equipment
grounding conductor if applicable (see Section 8-20.3(9)) and any new or existing wire or
cable as specified in the Plans. Where conduit is installed for future use, install a 200-pound
minimum tensile strength pull string with the equipment grounding conductor. The pull string
shall be attached to duct plugs or caps at both ends of the conduit.
8-20.3(5)A1 Fiber Optic Conduit
Where conduit to contain fiber optic cable or conduit identified to contain future fiber optic
cable is installed by open trenching, Detectable Underground Warning Tape shall be placed
12-inches above the conduit unless otherwise detailed in the Plans. Detectable Underground
Warning Tape shall extend 2-feet into boxes or vaults. Splicing of the tape shall be per the tape
manufacturer’s recommended materials and procedures.
8-20.3(5)A2 ITS and Cabinet Outer and Inner Duct Conduit
ITS conduit and both ends of conduit runs entering cabinets, with the exception of the
½-inch grounding conduit, shall be sealed with self expanding water proof foam or mechanical
plugs; unless otherwise required. At other locations conduit shall be sealed with Duct Seal.
Outer-duct conduit with non factory assembled innerduct shall be sealed around the
innerduct with self-expanding waterproof foam. Outer-duct conduit with factory assembled
innerduct shall be sealed around the innerduct with a multiplex expansion plug. Innerduct
containing one cable shall be plugged using an expandable split plug. Innerduct with multiple
cables shall be sealed with self-expanding waterproof foam. Duct plugs shall be installed in
all unused inner-ducts (those that are specified as empty) at the time of conduit installation.
Duct plugs shall be installed in all used inner-ducts (as specified in the Plans), at the time of
conduit installation, unless cable pulling for those inner-ducts will commence within 48-hours.
Installation shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Foam sealant shall be installed with the following additional requirements:
1. Penetration of the sealant into the conduit or duct shall be limited using a high
temperature backer rod material or rag.
2. Penetration of the sealant into the conduit shall be limited to 1-inch.
3. The foam sealant shall not project outside the end of the conduit or duct.
Where open trenching is allowed and conduit with innerduct is installed, a maximum
of 1000-feet of continuous open trench will be allowed unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer.
8-20.3(5)B Conduit Type
Conduit shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), high density polyethylene (HDPE), rigid
metal or flexible metal depending on the application.
Rigid metal conduit shall be installed at the following locations:
1. Within railroad right of way.
2. All surface-mounted conduit, with the exception of pole risers.
3. All runs within slip form placed concrete.
Unless otherwise required by the owning utility:
1. Service lateral runs shall be Schedule 80 PVC or Schedule 80 HDPE.
2. Pole risers shall be Schedule 80 PVC.
PVC and HDPE conduits shall be Schedule 80 unless installed as innerduct.
Flexible metal conduit is allowed only at locations called for in the Plans.
Except as described under Non-Metallic Conduit, unless otherwise indicated in the Plans
or Standard Plans, the same type of conduit shall be used for the entire length of the run, from
outlet to outlet.
Innerduct shall have a smooth wall non ribbed interior surface, with factory pre-lubricated
coating.

Innerduct within the Traveled Way or Shoulders and innerduct which is not factory
installed shall be Schedule 40 HDPE. The innerduct shall be continuous with no splices.
Innerduct which is pulled into the outer duct in the field shall be installed with an extra 2 feet
of conduit beyond each end of the outer-duct and shall be allowed to finish contracting for
21 calendar days before it is terminated. Innerduct shall be terminated with end bells flush
to ¼-inch out of the outer-duct and the space between the outer-duct and innerduct shall be
sealed with rodent and moisture resistant foam designed for this application and installed per
8-20.3(5)B1 Rigid Metal Conduit
Slip joints or running threads will not be permitted for coupling metallic conduit; however,
running threads will be permitted in traffic signal head spiders and rigid metal conduit (RMC)
outer-duct. When installing rigid metal conduit (RMC), if a standard coupling cannot be
used, an approved three-piece coupling shall be used. Conduit bodies, fittings and couplings
for rigid metal conduit (RMC) shall be cleaned first and then painted with one coat of paint
conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B. The paint shall have a minimum wet film thickness of
3-mils. The painted coating shall cover the entire coupling or fitting. The threads on all metal
conduit shall be rust-free, clean, and painted with colloidal copper suspended in a petroleum
vehicle before couplings are made. All metallic couplings shall be tightened so that a good
electrical connection will be made throughout the entire length of the conduit run. If the
conduit has been moved after assembly, it shall be given a final tightening from the ends prior
to backfilling.
Rigid metal conduit (RMC) ends shall be terminated with grounded end bushings. Rigid
metal conduit (RMC) entering cable vaults or pull boxes shall extend 2-inches beyond the
inside wall face. (for the installation of grounded end bushing and bonding.)
Rigid metal conduit (RMC) entering concrete shall be wrapped in 2-inch-wide pipe wrap
tape with a minimum 1-inch overlap for 12-inches on each side of the concrete face. Pipe wrap
tape shall be installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Rigid metal conduit (RMC) bends shall have a radius consistent with the requirements of
Code Article 344.24 and other articles of the Code. Where factory bends are not used, conduit
shall be bent, using an approved conduit bending tool employing correctly sized dies, without
crimping or flattening, using the longest radius practicable.
Where the coating on galvanized conduit has been damaged in handling or installing, such
damaged areas shall be thoroughly painted with paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B.
Metal conduit ends shall be threaded and protected with a snug fitting plastic cap that
covers the threads until wiring is started.
8-20.3(5)B2 Non-Metallic Conduit
Where non-metallic conduit is installed, care shall be used in excavating, installing, and
backfilling, so that no rocks, wood, or other foreign material will be left in a position to cause
possible damage.
PVC conduit ends shall be terminated with end bell bushings. PVC or HDPE conduit
entering cable vaults and pull boxes shall terminate with the end bell flush with the inside
walls of the Structure.
Non-metallic conduit bends, where allowed, shall conform to Article 352.24 of the Code.
Eighteen-inch radius elbows shall be used for PVC conduit of 2-inch nominal diameter or
less. Standard sweep elbows shall be used for PVC conduit with greater than 2-inch nominal
diameter unless otherwise specified in the Plans. In nonmetallic conduit less than 2-inch
nominal diameter, pull ropes or flat tapes for wire installation shall be not less than ¼-inch
diameter or width. In nonmetallic conduit of 2-inch nominal diameter or larger, pull ropes or
flat tapes for wire installation shall be not less than ½-inch diameter or width. When HDPE
conduit is used for directional boring, it shall be continuous, with no joints, for the full length
of the bore. The conduit run shall be extended to the associated outlets with the same schedule
HDPE or PVC conduit. Entry into associated junction box outlets shall be with the same

schedule PVC conduit and elbows. The same requirements apply for extension of an existing
HDPE conduit crossing.
PVC conduit and elbows shall be connected to HDPE conduit with an approved
mechanical coupling. The connection shall have minimum pullout strength of 700-pounds.
Prior to installation of a mechanical coupling, the HDPE conduit shall first be prepared with
a clean, straight edge. A water-based pulling lubricant may be applied to the threaded end
of the mechanical coupling before installation. Solvent cement or epoxy shall not be used
on the threaded joint when connecting the HDPE conduit to the mechanical coupling. The
mechanical coupling shall be rotated until the HDPE conduit seats approximately ¾ of the
distance into the threaded coupling depth.
For PVC installation through a directional bore, the PVC shall be in rigid sections
assembled to form a watertight bell and spigot-type mechanical joint with a solid retaining
ring around the entire circumference of the conduit installed per the manufacturer’s
recommendations. The conduit run shall be extended beyond the length of the bore, to the
associated outlets with the same mechanical coupled PVC or with standard PVC conduit of
the same schedule. The same requirements apply for extension of an existing PVC conduit
Roadway crossing.
PVC conduit shall be assembled using the solvent cement specified in Section 9-29.1.
Conduit ends shall be protected with a snug fitting plastic cap until wiring is started.
Conduit caps, end bells and the section of PVC between the coupling and end bell bushing
in cabinet foundations shall be installed without glue.
8-20.3(5)C Conduit Size
The size of conduit used shall be as shown in the Plans. Conduits smaller than 1-inch
electrical trade size shall not be used unless otherwise specified, except that grounding
conductors at service points may be enclosed in ½-inch-diameter conduit.
Conduit between light standards, PPB, PS, or Type 1 poles and the nearest junction
box shall be the diameter specified in the Plans. Larger size conduit is not allowed at these
locations. At other locations it shall be the option of the Contractor, at no expense to the
Contracting Agency, to use larger size conduit if desired, provided that junction box or vault
capacity is not exceeded. Where larger size conduit is used, it shall be for the entire length of
the run from outlet to outlet.
Conduit runs with innerduct, shall have 4-inch outer-duct and shall be installed with four
1-inch innerduct unless otherwise indicated in the Plans.
8-20.3(5)D Conduit Placement
Conduit shall be laid so that the top of the conduit is a minimum depth of:
1. 24-inches below the bottom of curb in the sidewalk area.
2. 24-inches below the top of the untreated surfacing on a Roadbed.
3. 48-inches below the bottom of ties under railroad tracks unless otherwise specified by
the railroad company.
4. 36-inches below finish grade when installed using conduit plowing method.
5. 24-inches below the finish grade in all other areas.
Conduit entering through the bottom of a junction box shall be located near the end walls
to leave the major portion of the box clear. At all outlets, conduit shall enter from the direction
of the run, terminating 6 to 8-inches below the junction box lid and within 3-inches of the box
wall nearest its entry location.
Conduit runs shown in the Plans are for Bidding purposes only and may be relocated with
approval of the Engineer, to avoid obstructions.

8-20.3(5)D1 Surface Mounting

Where surface mounting of conduit is required, supports shall consist of channel with
clamps sized for the conduit. Support spacing shall comply with the Code, with the exception
that spacing of channel supports for conduit shall not exceed 5-feet.
The minimum distance between adjacent clamps and between the clamp and the end of the
channel supports shall be 1-inch. Channel supports shall be installed with stops, to prevent
clamps from sliding out of the ends.
8-20.3(5)D2 Structures
All conduits attached to or routed within bridges, retaining walls, and other structures
shall be equipped with approved expansion, deflection, and/or combination expansion/
deflection fittings at all expansion joints and at all other joints where structure movement is
anticipated, including locations where the Contractor, due to construction method, installs
expansion and/or construction joints with movement. All conduit fittings shall have movement
capacity appropriate for the anticipated movement of the Structure at the joint. Approved
deflection fittings shall also be installed at the joint between the bridge end and the retaining
wall end, and the transition from bridge, wall, or other structure to the underground section
of conduit pipe.
8-20.3(5)E Method of Conduit Installation
Conduit shall be placed under existing pavement by approved directional boring, jacking,
or drilling methods at locations approved by the Engineer. The pavement shall not be disturbed
unless allowed in the Plans or with the approval of the Engineer in the event obstructions or
impenetrable soils are encountered. High density polyethylene (HDPE) conduit runs, which
enter the traveled way or shoulders, shall be installed using the directional boring method.
8-20.3(5)E1 Open Trenching
When open trenching is allowed, trench construction shall conform to the following:
1. The pavement shall be saw-cut a minimum of 3-inches deep. The cuts shall be parallel
to each other and extend 2-feet beyond the edge of the trench.
2. Pavement shall be removed in an approved manner.
3. Trench depth shall provide a minimum cover for conduit of 24-inches below the top
of the roadway base.
4. Trench width shall be 8-inches or the conduit diameter plus 2-inches, whichever
is larger.
5. Trenches located within paved Roadway areas shall be backfilled with Controlled
density fill (CDF) meeting the requirements of Section 2-09.3(1)E. The controlled
density fill shall be placed level to, and at the bottom of, the existing pavement. The
pavement shall be replaced with paving material that matches the existing pavement.
6. On new construction, conduit shall be placed prior to placement of base course
pavement.
8-20.3(5)E2 Conduit Plowing
All conduit plowing shall be supervised by a licensed electrical Contractor.
The starting point shall be anchored or held such that conduit movement at the start of the
plowing operation is kept to a minimum. The conduit reel shall be mounted on the vehicle
such that conduit movement is kept to a minimum once it is in the ground. Use of a stationary
reel is not allowed. The feed shoe shall have rollers which conform to the conduit at a radius
of not less than 15 times the diameter of the conduit. The conduit will not be permitted to pass
over stationary guides nor over rollers or sheaves, which will permit a bend radius of less than
15 times conduit diameter. The width of the tooth and feed shoe shall not exceed the conduit
diameter by more than two-inches.
The conduit shall be installed using a continuous reel, with no joints, for the full length of
the conduit run, unless conduit splicing is allowed as indicated below.

If an obstruction is encountered that cannot be plowed through, the following remedies

shall be attempted in order:
1. Contractor shall stop the plowing operation and attempt to remove the obstruction. If
the obstruction is removed, plowing operations shall continue along the approved path.
2. Deviations of up to one foot from the projected path may be authorized by the Engineer,
provided the new route does not result in total conduit run bends exceeding NEC
requirements. Deviations in excess of one foot from the projected path are not allowed
and the maximum taper rate is 1-inch per linear foot of conduit.
3. The Contractor may request approval to intercept the installed conduit and route another
section of HDPE to avoid the obstruction, provided the new route does not result in
total conduit run bends exceeding NEC requirements. Connection between the sections
shall be accomplished using an approved fusion splicing method, which is compatible
with the conduit manufacturer’s recommendations.
4. Where none of the above remedies are successful, all conduit installed so far in that run
shall be removed and a new plow path established to avoid the obstruction.
In the event of a breakage, all conduit installed in that run shall be removed.
The conduit run shall be extended to the associated outlets, subject to the same
requirements indicated when HDPE is installed using the directional boring method.
The depth of installation shall be continually adjusted as necessary to compensate for
changes in terrain.
Plowed conduit shall be laid so that the top of the conduit is a minimum depth of 36-inches
below the finish grade with the exception that the conduit shall be swept up to enter the knock
outs of associated pull boxes or cable vaults.
The plow placing the conduit shall be marked at a proper distance above the plow’s conduit
exit point to indicate when the minimum installation depth is not met. The mark shall be
visible from a safe distance from the plowing operation when it is exposed above ground.
While plowing this mark must remain below ground level at all times, with the exception of
the entry and exit points at the end of the run, in order to ensure that minimum burial depth of
the conduit is achieved.
If the depth mark on the plow comes above ground, the Contractor shall stop the plowing
operation and attempt to correct the placement depth. If the conduit depth can be verified
to meet the minimum burial requirements at the location where the depth mark came above
ground, the plowing operation shall resume subject to the Engineers approval.
The compacted surface shall be firm, non-yielding, and result in a finished surface that
matches the lines and grades of the terrain prior to plowing.
8-20.3(5)E3 Boring
Bore pits shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E.
Directional boring, jacking or drilling pits shall be a minimum of 2-feet from the edge of any
type of pavement, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Excessive use of water that
might undermine the pavement or soften the Subgrade will not be permitted.
When approved by the Engineer, small test holes may be cut in the pavement to locate
obstructions. When the Contractor encounters obstructions or is unable to install conduit
because of soil conditions, as determined by the Engineer, additional Work to place the conduit
will be paid in accordance with Section 1-04.4.
8-20.3(5)E4 Directional Boring
Directional boring for electrical installations shall be supervised by a licensed electrical
contractor in accordance with Section 8-20.1(1). Where directional boring is called for,
conduit shall be installed using a surface-launched, steerable drilling tool. Drilling shall be
accomplished using a high-pressure fluid jet tool-head. The drilling fluid shall be used to
maintain the stability of the tunnel, reduce drag on the conduit, and provide backfill between
the conduit and tunnel. A guidance system that measures the depth, lateral position, and

roll shall be used to guide the tool-head when creating the pilot hole. Once the pilot hole
is established, a reamer and swivel shall be used to install the conduit. Reaming diameter
shall not exceed 1.5 times the diameter of the conduits being installed. Conduit that is being
pulled into the boring shall be installed in such a manner that the conduit is not damaged
during installation. The pullback force on the conduit shall be controlled to prevent damage
to the conduit. A vacuum spoils extraction system shall be used to remove any excess spoils
generated during the installation. Excess drilling fluid and spoils shall be disposed of. The
method and location used for disposal of excess drilling fluid and spoils shall be subject to the
Engineer’s approval. Drilling fluid returns (caused by fracturing of formations) at locations
other than the entry and exit points shall be minimized. Any drilling fluid that surfaces through
fracturing shall be cleaned up immediately. Mobile spoils-removal equipment capable of
quickly removing spoils from entry or exit pits and areas with returns caused by fracturing
shall be used as necessary during drilling operations.
8-20.3(5)E5 Boring with Casing
Where boring with casing is called for, the casing shall be placed using an auger inside
the casing to remove the soil as the casing is jacked forward. The auger head shall proceed
no more than 4-inches ahead of the pipe being jacked. Boring operations shall be conducted
to prevent caving ahead of the pipe. Installed casing pipe shall be free from grease, dirt, rust,
moisture, and any other deleterious contaminants.
The space between the conduit and casing shall be plugged with sandbags and a grout seal
12-inches thick at each end of the casing. Casing abandoned due to an encountered obstruction
shall be grout sealed in the same manner. Grout shall conform to Section 9-20.3(4).
In lieu of sandbags and grout, unopened prepackaged concrete and grout may be used to
seal the casing.
Material shall not be removed from the boring pit by washing or sluicing.
All joints shall be welded by a Washington State certified welder. Welding shall conform to
AWS D 1.1-80 Structural Welding Code, Section 3, Workmanship.
8-20.3(6) Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull boxes
Standard Duty and Heavy-Duty junction boxes, pull boxes, and cable vaults shall be
installed at the locations shown in the Plans. The Contractor may install, at no expense to
the Contracting Agency, such additional boxes as may be desired to facilitate the Work.
Junction box installation shall conform to details in the Standard Plans.
Cable vaults and pull boxes shall be installed in accordance with the following:
1. Excavation shall be performed in accordance with Section 2-09.
2. Cable vaults and pull boxes shall be installed on 6-inches of crushed surfacing,
in accordance with Section 9-03.9(3), placed on a compacted or undisturbed
level foundation.
3. All openings around conduits shall be sealed and filled with grout in accordance
with Sections 6-02.3(20), and 9-20.3(4) to prevent water and debris from entering the
vaults or pull boxes.
4. Backfilling around the Work shall not be allowed until the concrete or mortar has set.
5. Pull boxes shall be installed in accordance with Plans and details.
6. Pull boxes shall be configured such that the tensile and bending limitations of the
fiber optic and other cables are not compromised. Pull boxes shall be configured to
mechanically protect the fiber optic and other cables against installation force as well
as inert forces after cable pulling operations.
7. Upon acceptance of Work, cable vaults, and pull boxes shall be free of debris and ready
for cable installation. All grounding requirements shall be met prior to cable installation.
8. Where installed near steel casings, the pull boxes and cable vaults shall be offset 3 feet,
minimum, from the centerline of the casing. Factory bends shall be used to route the
conduits to the cable vault or pull box.

Adjustments involving raising or lowering the junction boxes shall require conduit
modification if the resultant clearance between the top of the conduit and the junction
box lid becomes less than 6 inches or more than 10 inches in accordance with the Plans.
Cable vaults and pull boxes shall be adjusted to final grade using risers or rings
manufactured by the cable vault and pull box manufacturer. Cable vaults and pull boxes
with traffic bearing lids shall be raised to final grade using ring risers to raise the cover only.
All voids resulting from the adjustment shall be backfilled with materials matching adjacent
surfacing material and compacted in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)E.
Damage to the junction boxes, pull boxes, cable vaults and the associated conduit system,
or wiring resulting from the Contractor’s operations, shall be repaired to the Engineer’s
satisfaction at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
Both existing and new junction boxes, pull boxes, and cable vaults shall be adjusted to be
flush with the finished grade as well as with the grade during the various construction stages
proposed in the Contract.
Where conduit and junction boxes are placed in barrier, the Prime Contractor shall
coordinate the Work of the Contractor constructing the barrier and the electrical Contractor
so that each junction box placed in the barrier is placed in correct alignment with respect to
the barrier, with the face of the box flush or uniformly chamfered within ⅛ inch of the barrier
surface. If any point on the surface of the junction box placed in barrier is recessed more than
⅛ inch from the surface of the barrier, the Contractor shall install a box extension meeting the
Engineer’s approval and grout around the extension or remove and replace the entire section
of barrier.
Standard Duty pull boxes, cable vaults, and concrete junction boxes installed in sidewalks,
walkways, and shared-use paths shall have slip-resistant surfaces, be flush with the surface,
and match the grade of the sidewalk, walkway, and shared-use path. The boxes, vaults, and
junction boxes shall not be placed in curb ramps, curb ramp landings, or the gutter areas
associated with the curb ramps. Standard Duty nonconcrete junction boxes shall not be
installed in sidewalks, walkways, or shared-use paths.
8-20.3(7) Messenger Cable, Fittings
Messenger cable shall be secured to steel strain poles by means of pole bands, and to
timber poles by means of single strand guy eye bolts. Pole bands and eyebolts shall be
installed as detailed in the Plans.
Messenger cable shall be secured to eye bolts or strain clamps at poles by the use of
approved self-locking cable clamp type dead-ending devices. Messenger cable shall be
secured to bull rings and anchors by two approved U-bolt connectors and guy thimbles.
Traffic signal control cable shall be secured to the messenger cable by cable ties.
The ties shall be black nylon with ultraviolet protection and rated at 120-pound minimum
unlocking strength.
Down guy assemblies shall be installed as detailed in the Standard Plans.
8-20.3(8) Wiring
All underground wiring shall be installed in conduit unless specifically noted otherwise
in the Contract. All wiring in conduit shall be installed with a lubricant recommended by
cable/conductor manufacturer.
With the exception of induction loop circuits, magnetometer circuits and illumination
circuits, all wiring shall run continuously, without splices, from a terminal located in a
cabinet, compartment, pedestrian push button assembly, or signal head to a similarly located
terminal. Illumination circuit terminals and traffic circuit signal terminals located below grade
will not be allowed. Video detection systems cable installation shall follow manufacturer’s
Specification, except no below grade terminals will be allowed.

All splices in underground illumination circuits, induction loops circuits, and

magnetometer circuits shall be installed in junction boxes. The only splice allowed in
induction loop circuits and magnetometer circuits shall be the splice connecting the induction
loop lead in conductors or magnetometer lead in conductors to the shielded lead in cable.
Splices for induction loop circuits and magnetometer circuits shall be: heat shrink type with
moisture blocking, material sized for conductors, epoxy filled clear rigid mold splice kits or
rigid re-enterable type splice kits. Conductors for rigid mold kits shall be centered in the splice
mold prior to installation of the encapsulation material. Magnetometer and induction loop
splices shall be soldered. All connections with #10 and smaller wire shall use copper crimped
connectors installed with a positive action (ratchet) tool, except where setscrew connections
are allowed for quick disconnects as described in Section 9-29.7. The non-insulated die
shall be an indent type and insulated die shall be of a smooth shape capable of crimping
pre-insulated terminals and connectors. The tool shall be compound lever type with a ratchet
mechanism to ensure positive closure for full crimping cycle. The tool shall be field adjustable
to proper calibration with common tools and materials. All connectors installed in splices
shall be wrapped with two layers of electrical tape. All epoxy splice kits shall be physically
separated from other splices and wiring within the junction box to avoid damage from heat
during the casting process.
All termination for traffic signal control systems shall follow the conductor sequence color
code as shown in the following table.
Conductor Number Color Code Color Trace Use
1 R Red Red or Don’t Walk
2 O Orange Yellow or Spare
3 G Green Green or Walk
4 W White Neutral
5 B Black Ped Call or Spare
6 Wb White/Black Neutral or Spare
7 Bl Blue Ped Call or Spare
8 Rb Red/Black Red or Don’t Walk
9 Ob Orange/Black Yellow or Spare
10 Gb Green/Black Green or Walk
Splices and taps on underground circuits shall be made with solderless crimp connectors
meeting the requirements of Section 9-29.12.
Only one conductor or one multiconductor cable per wire entrance will be allowed in any
rigid mold splice.
Aerial illumination splices shall employ vice or crimp type pressure connectors. Splice
insulation may be epoxy, heat shrink, or tape. Tape splice insulation, where allowed, shall
consist of thermoplastic electrical insulating tape equivalent to the original wire insulation
rating. It shall be well lapped over the original insulation, and there shall be a coating of
moisture resistant varnish applied and allowed to dry. Two layers of friction tape will then
be applied, and the splice shall be finished with a second complete coating of moisture
resistant varnish.
Quick disconnect connectors shall be installed in the base of all poles supporting a
luminaire. Every conductor above ground potential shall be served by a fused quick disconnect
kit. Every conductor at ground potential shall be served by an unfused quick disconnect kit.
Pole and bracket cable meeting the requirements of Section 9-29.3(2)D shall be installed
between the quick disconnects and the luminaire and between the sign light hand hole and the
isolation switch. In addition, the conductors from the isolation switch and the sign light shall
be minimum AWG 14, meeting the requirements of Section 9-29.3(2)A or 9-29.3(2)B. Pole
and bracket cable jacket shall be removed from the quick disconnect to within 2 inches below
the support bracket clamp.

Sufficient slack wire shall be installed at each junction box to allow any conductor, cable,
or splice within the junction box to be raised a minimum of 18 inches outside of the box.
Insulated neutral conductors shall be identified in accordance with the NEC requirements.
Every conductor at every wire termination, connector, or device shall have an approved wire
marking sleeve bearing as its legend, the circuit number indicated in the Contract. All terminal
strips shall also bear the circuit number consistent with the Contract.
At all illumination circuit splices, each wire entering the splice shall have an approved
wire marking sleeve bearing as its legend the circuit number indicated in the Contract.
All wiring, exclusive of the previously mentioned illumination circuits, at junction
boxes and at the controller cabinet shall have an approved tag with legends as follows:
1. Individual conductors – the circuit number indicated in the Contract.
2. Multiconductor cable – the numbers of the signal heads and/or pedestrian push
buttons served.
3. Loop lead-in cable – the numbers of the loops served.
4. Magnetometer cable – the numbers of the magnetometers served.
5. Video detection camera lead-in cable – the numbers of the phases the camera served.
6. ITS cameras – the number of the camera indicated in the Contract and the number
of the associated cabinet as indicated in the Plans.
7. Communication cable – labeled as Comm.
Drip loops shall be provided on all aerial conductors where they enter poles, signal heads,
or weather heads.
When conductors, either cable or single, are being installed, the Contractor shall not exceed
the tension limitations recommended by the manufacturer. Conductors may be pulled directly
by hand or with mechanical assistance. If conductors are pulled by any mechanical means, a
dynamometer with drop-needle hand shall be used on every mechanically assisted pull.
On mechanically assisted pulls, insulation shall be stripped off the individual conductor
and the conductor formed into a pulling eye and firmly attached to the pulling rope/tape, or
a cable grip shall be used. The Contractor shall determine the maximum allowable pulling
tension, taking into account the direction of the pull, type of raceway, cable geometry, weight
of the cable, the coefficient of friction, and side wall pressure, using the information from
the cable manufacturer. If there are bends in the raceway or sheaves are used for the cable
pull, the contractor shall use the cable manufacture’s side wall pressure limits to determine
the maximum pulling tension. The maximum pulling force applied directly to the conductor
when pulling eyes are used or when the conductor is formed into a loop, shall be limited to
that shown in the following table for copper conductor. When a cable grip is applied over
nonmetallic sheathed cables, the maximum pulling force shall be limited to 1,000 pounds
provided this is not in excess of the force as determined above.
Conductor Pounds
8 132
6 210
4 334
3 421
2 531
1 669
1/0 845
2/0 1,065
3/0 1,342
4/0 1,693
250 Kcmil 2,000
500 Kcmil 4,000

Adequate lubrication of the proper type to reduce friction in conduit and duct pulls shall be
utilized. The grease and oil-type lubricants used on lead sheathed cables shall not be used on
nonmetallic sheathed cables.
When wiring is noted for future connection, the ends of each wire or cable shall be sealed
with an approved heat shrink end cap.
If loop lead splices are not installed immediately after the installation of the loop leads into
the adjacent junction box, the ends of the two conductor “home run” cable shall be sealed with
heat shrink end caps to prevent entry of moisture into the two conductor cable. All coaxial
cables shall have heat shrink end caps installed prior to aerial or underground installation of
the cables to prevent moisture entry into the cable.
Multiconductor cable for signal displays shall be installed entirely through the mounting
fitting to a point a minimum of 1 inch inside the signal display housing before the outer
insulation is stripped back for the connection of individual conductors to the terminal block.
Installation of coaxial or coaxial/Siamese cable or data cables with a 600 VAC rating will
be allowed in the same raceway with 480 VAC illumination cable.
8-20.3(9) Bonding, Grounding
All metallic appurtenances containing electrical conductors (luminaires, light standards,
cabinets, metallic conduit, etc.) shall be made mechanically and electrically secure to form
continuous systems that shall be effectively grounded.
Install an equipment grounding conductor in all new conduit, whether or not the equipment
grounding conductor is called for in the wire schedule.
For each new conduit with innerduct install an equipment grounding conductor in only one
of the innerducts unless otherwise required by the NEC or the plans.
Bonding jumpers and equipment grounding conductors meeting the requirements of
Section 9-29.3(2)A3 shall be minimum #8 AWG, installed in accordance with the NEC.
Where existing conduits are used for the installation of new circuits, an equipment grounding
conductor shall be installed unless an existing equipment ground conductor, which is
appropriate for the largest circuit, is already present in the existing raceway. The equipment
ground conductor between the isolation switch and the sign lighter fixtures shall be minimum
#14 AWG stranded copper conductor. Where parallel circuits are enclosed in a common
conduit, the equipment-grounding conductor shall be sized by the largest overcurrent device
serving any circuit contained within the conduit.
Junction boxes with metallic lids shall have one 4-foot long tinned braided copper
equipment bonding strap with full circle connector lugs installed from each metallic junction
box lid(s) to the junction box frame. A non-insulated stranded copper conductor, minimum
#8 AWG, with a full circle crimp on connector (crimped with a manufacturer recommended
crimper) shall be connected to the junction box frame or frame bonding stud, the other end
shall be crimped to the equipment bonding conductor, using a “C” type crimp connector.
The equipment ground conductor shall not be cut or spliced except at junction boxes.
Supplemental grounding shall be provided at light standards, signal standards, cantilever
and sign bridge Structures. Steel sign posts which support signs with sign lighting or flashing
beacons shall also have supplemental grounding. The supplemental ground conductor shall
be connected to the foundation rebar (all rebar crossings shall be wire tied) by means of a
grounding connector listed for use in concrete, and lead up directly adjacent to a conduit
installed within the foundation. The free end of the conductor shall be terminated to the
ground terminal, with an approved clamp, within the pole. If no ground terminal is provided,
bond to standard or post. Three-feet of slack shall be provided inside the standard. Where
a concrete and rebar foundation is not used the supplemental ground shall be a grounding
electrode placed in the hole next to the post prior to back fill. For light standards, signal
standards, cantilever and sign bridge Structures the supplemental grounding conductor shall
be #4 AWG non-insulated stranded copper conductor. For steel sign posts which support signs
with sign lighting or flashing beacons the supplemental grounding conductor shall be #6 AWG
non‑insulated stranded copper conductor.
All connectors between bonding jumpers and equipment grounding conductors shall be
installed in accordance with the NEC. Identification of the equipment grounding conductor
shall conform to all code requirements.
Bonding of the equipment grounding system and neutral at the service point shall be
accomplished as required under the NEC. Grounding of the neutral shall be accomplished
only at the service or at a separately derived system.
Install a two grounding electrode system at each service entrance point, at each electrical
service installation and at each separately derived power source. The service entrance
grounding electrode system shall conform to the “Service Ground” detail in the Standard
Plans. If soil conditions make vertical grounding electrode installation impossible an alternate
installation procedure as described in the NEC may be used. Maintain a minimum of 6 feet
of separation between any two grounding electrodes within the grounding system. Grounding
electrodes shall be bonded copper, ferrous core materials and shall be solid rods not less than
10 feet in length if they are ½ inch in diameter or not less than 8 feet in length if they are
⅝ inch or larger in diameter.
The connection of the grounding electrode conductor to the grounding electrode shall be
made with two approved ground clamps.
Messenger cable shall be bonded to steel strain poles by means of a bond strap connected
between an approved U-bolt connector and a bonding lug on the pole.
At points where shields or shielded conductors are grounded, the shields shall be neatly
wired and terminated on grounding terminal strip.
8-20.3(10) Service, Transformer, and Intelligent Transportation System (ITS) Cabinets
Power sources shown in the Plans are approximate only; exact location will be determined
in the field.
Aerial fed transformer cabinets and type A, type B, or type C service cabinets shall include
a timber pole, as specified in Section 9-29.6(3), a meter base, installed in accordance with
serving utility requirements, a 2- or 3-wire service breaker of size noted in the Plans, the
necessary conduit risers and ground assembly as noted in the Standard Plans. The timber
pole shall be set at a depth of 10 percent of the total pole length plus 2 feet. Modified type
B, type D and type E services shall be installed per Contract Plan, and service description
in Standard Plans. Pad mounted transformer cabinets shall be installed per Contract Plans.
The service breaker shall be a standard thermal circuit breaker encased in a raintight
housing that can be padlocked.
Upon request of the Contractor, the Engineer will make the necessary arrangements
with the serving utility to complete the service connections. Electrical energy used prior to
Completion of the Contract will be charged to the Contractor, except that the cost of energy
used for public benefit, when the Engineer orders such operation, will be borne by the
Contracting Agency.
The service, transformer and ITS cabinets shall be marked with the service agreement
letters and numbers as noted in the Plans. The markings shall be installed on the outside
cabinet door near the top of the cabinet. The markings shall be series C using stencils and
black enamel alkyd gloss paint conforming to Federal Specification TT-E-489F.
8-20.3(11) Testing
The Contractor shall conduct the following tests on all electrical circuits with nominal
operating voltage between 115-volts and 600-volts, in the presence of the Engineer:
1. Test the continuity of each circuit.
2. Test for grounds in each circuit, which shall consist of the physical examination of the
installation to ensure that all required ground jumpers, devices, and appurtenances do
exist and are mechanically firm.

3. Using a megohm meter, a 500-volt test on each new circuit between the conductor
and ground with all switch boards, panel boards, fuse holders, switches, receptacles,
and overcurrent devices in place. All readings shall be recorded. The Contractor shall
furnish the Engineer with three copies of the test results identifying observed readings
with their respective circuits.
The insulation resistance shall not be less than 50 megohms between the conductor
and ground on new circuits with a total single conductor length of 2,500 feet and over,
nor less than 50 megohms on new circuits with single conductor length of less than
2,500 feet.
Any change in the above stated minimum readings must be approved in writing by the
Engineer. Only those factors based on dialectric properties of conductor insulations,
splicing insulations, terminal strip castings, etc., will be cause for consideration of
a variance.
4. A functional test in which it is demonstrated that each and every part of the system
functions as specified.
For those new circuits below 115-volts nominal, except induction loop circuits and test
direct burial circuits, the circuits shall be tested with a 500-volt megger for continuity, ground,
and a test to demonstrate the circuit functions as specified. The megger test shall show an
insulation resistance of not less than 8-megohms to ground.
Any fault in any material or in any part of the installation revealed by these tests shall be
replaced or repaired by the Contractor in a manner approved by the Engineer, and the same
test shall be repeated until no fault appears.
When the project includes a traffic signal system, the Contractor shall conduct tests
noted in Section 8-20.3(14)D. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of
5 days advance written notice of the proposed traffic signal turn-on date and time. The
traffic signal turn-on procedure shall not begin until all required channelization, pavement
markings, illumination, signs, and sign lights are substantially complete and operational
unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide traffic control to
stop all traffic from entering the intersection. The Contracting Agency electronics technician
will program the controller and enter the timing data, then turn the traffic signal system to its
flash mode to verify proper flash indications. The Contracting Agency electronics technician
will then conduct functional tests to demonstrate that each part of the traffic signal system,
illumination system, or other electrical system, functions as specified. These demonstrations
shall be conducted in the presence of a Contracting Agency electronic technician, the
Contracting Agency electrical Inspector, and Regional Traffic Engineer or his/her designee.
The Contracting Agency electronics technician will then turn the traffic signal to stop and
go operation for no less than one full cycle. Based on the results of the turn-on, the Engineer
will direct the Contracting Agency electronics technician to either turn the traffic signal on
to normal stop and go operation, to turn the signal to flash mode for a period not to exceed
5 calendar days, or to turn the signal off and require the Contractor to cover all signal displays
and correct all deficiencies.
If the Contractor is directed to turn off the traffic signal, the Contractor shall schedule a
new turn-on date with the Engineer in accordance with the previously mentioned procedures.
Unless approved by the Engineer no change to signal stop and go operation will be allowed
between 6:00 a.m. to 10:00 a.m. and 2:00 p.m. to 7:00 p.m. on Monday through Thursday, nor
will signal operation changes be allowed on Friday, weekends, holidays, or the day preceding
a holiday.
8-20.3(12) Painting
All painting required shall be done in conformance with applicable portions of
Section 6-07.

8-20.3(13) Illumination Systems

8-20.3(13)A Light Standards
Light standards shall be handled when loading, unloading, and erecting in such a manner
that they will not be damaged. Any parts that are damaged due to the Contractor’s operations
shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s expense.
Light standards shall not be erected on concrete foundations until foundations have set at
least 72 hours or attained a compressive strength of 2,400 psi, and shall be raked sufficiently
to be plumb after all load has been placed.
Slip base installation shall conform to the following:
1. The slip plane shall be free of obstructions such as protruding conduit or anchor bolts.
The anchor bolts, and other obstructions shall terminate at a height below the elevation
of the top of the slip plate. Conduit shall extend a maximum of 1 inch above the top of
the foundation, including grounding end bushing or end bell bushing.
2. Washers in the slip plane shall be placed between the slip plate and the keeper plate.
3. Anchor bolts shall extend through the top heavy-hex nut two full threads to the extent
possible while conforming to the specified slip base clearance requirements. Anchor
bolts shall be tightened by the Turn-of-Nut Tightening Method in accordance with
Sections 6-03.3(33) and 8-20.3(4).
4. Clamping bolts shall be tightened in accordance with Sections 6-03.3(33) and 8-20.3(4).
The clamping bolts shall be tightened to the specified torque, plus or minus 2 percent,
in two stages using an accurately calibrated torque wrench before erecting the light
standard. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall install 1-inch diameter
clamping bolts in all slip bases to a torque of 95 foot-pounds.
5. The galvanized surfaces of the slip plates, the keeper plate and the luminaire base plate
shall be smooth, without irregularities, to reduce friction and to prevent slackening of
bolt tension due to flattening of the irregularities.
6. Anchor bolts damaged after the foundation concrete is placed shall not be repaired
by bending or welding. The Contractor’s repair procedure is to be submitted to
the Engineer for approval prior to making any repairs. The procedure is to include
removing the damaged portion of the anchor bolt, cutting threads on the undamaged
portion to remain, the installation of an approved threaded sleeve nut and stud,
and repairing the foundation with epoxy concrete. Epoxy concrete shall meet the
requirements of Section 9-26.3(1)B.
7. The grout pad shall not extend above the elevation of the bottom of the anchor plate.
8. Wiring for slip base installation shall conform to details in the Standard Plans.
Breakaway coupling installation shall conform to the following:
1. At existing foundations, the anchor nuts, pole, grout pad, and leveling nuts shall be
removed. Conduits shall be cut to a maximum height of 2 inches above the foundation
including grounding end bushing or end bell bushing. Paint, conforming to Section
9-08.1(2)B, shall be applied to the cut conduit that has been threaded. Anchor bolts
that are damaged shall be repaired with approved sleeve nuts as noted under slip base
installation procedures.
2. All existing anchor bolts shall be cut off 2½ to 3 inches above the foundation. At new
foundations, the anchor bolts shall be installed with top of bolt 2½ to 3 inches above
the foundation.
3. Couplings shall be installed to within ⅛ to ⅜ inch of the foundation. Couplings shall
then be leveled.
4. The pole shall be set and plumbed; and washers, nuts, and skirt installed per
5. The conduit installed in a luminaire foundation shall not exceed 1 inch, trade size.

Slip base insert installations shall conform to details in the Standard Plans, and shall
conform to items 1 through 8 above for slip base installation, except that the specified torque
for the ⅞-inch diameter clamping bolts shall be 50 foot-pounds.
Prior to installation all relocated metal light standards shall have existing painted
identification markings removed. Manufactures Identification tag shall not be removed.
Damaged surfaces and coatings shall be repaired with material matching the existing coating.
All new light standards shall have an approved metal tag riveted to the pole above the
handhole. The information provided on the tag shall be as noted on the preapproved drawings.
All new and relocated metal light standards shall be numbered for identification using
painted 4 inch block gothic letters (similar to series C highway lettering) and numbers
installed 3 feet above the base facing the Traveled Way. Paint shall be black enamel alkyd
gloss conforming to Federal Specification TT-E-489. The following information shall be
provided as shown in the Plans:
NN
CC-SSSS
VVV
Where:
NN =
Is the pole number as identified in the Plans. May be one or
more characters.
CC = Is the circuit letter as identified in the Plans. May be one or
more characters.
SSSS = Is the service cabinet number as identified in the Plans. Do not
include the two or three letter prefix. Up to four digits - do not include
leading zeros.
VVV = Is the operating voltage of the luminaire. Always three digits.
In setting timber poles, the Contractor shall provide a minimum burial of 10 percent of the
total pole length plus 2 feet and shall rake the poles as shown in the Plans.
8-20.3(13)B Vacant
8-20.3(13)C Luminaires
The Contractor shall mark the installation date on the inside of the luminaire ballast
or driver housing using a permanent marking pen.
All luminaires shall be mounted level, both transverse and longitudinally, as measured
across points specified by the manufacturer. Leveling and orientation shall be accomplished
after pole plumbing.
8-20.3(13)D Sign Lighting
Sign illumination equipment shall include fixtures, brackets, conduit, electrical wire, and
other material required to make the sign lighting system operable. Sign illumination fixtures
shall be fused according to the table in Section 9-29.7.
8-20.3(13)E Sign Lighting Luminaires
The sign lighting luminaire shall be supported by a lighting bracket assembly as detailed
in the Plans. If the sign Structure includes a maintenance walkway, the luminaire fixture
mounting plate shall be bolted to the walkway grating.
An isolation switch shall be provided in the line side conductors, mounted over
the Shoulder to de-energize all luminaires for maintenance purposes. The switch shall
be single pole, single throw, or double-pole, single throw as necessary to open all conductors
to the luminaires other than neutral and ground conductors. The switch shall contain 600-volt
terminal strips on the load side with solderless box lugs as required plus 4 spare lugs per strip.
The switch enclosure shall be rated NEMA 3R.

8-20.3(14) Signal Systems

8-20.3(14)A Signal Controllers
All control cabinets and control equipment shall be factory wired ready for operation.
Field work will be limited to placing cabinets and equipment and connecting the field wiring
to field terminal strips. All controller cabinets shall be installed on a silicone seal pad.
Controllers for portable traffic signal systems shall conform to the requirements of
Section 9-29.13(7).
8-20.3(14)B Signal Heads
Unless ordered otherwise by the Engineer, signal heads shall not be installed at any
intersection until all other signal equipment is installed and the controller is in place,
inspected, and ready for operation at that intersection, except that the signal heads may
be mounted if the faces are covered to clearly indicate the signal is not in operation.
Three section displays mounted on type M mounts shall have the plumbizer between the
top and second display. Four and five section vertical displays mounted on type M mounts
shall have the plumbizer between the second and third display.
8-20.3(14)C Induction Loop Vehicle Detectors
Induction loops shall be constructed as detailed in the Contract and the following:
1. Loop wire shall conform to Section 9-29.3.
2. When Type 2 or 6 foot round (R) loops are grouped at the stop line, the front edge of the
first loop shall be 1 foot behind the stop line. Each additional loop installed in the lane
shall be on 15-foot centers.
3. Lead-in cable shall conform to Section 9-29.3.
4. All loops shall be installed after grinding or prior to paving the final lift of asphalt
designated in the Contract. Loop conductors shall be held at the bottom of the saw
cut by high temperature backer rod (sized to fit snugly in the saw cut). Two-inch-long
pieces of the backer rod shall be installed on 24-inch centers along the entire loop and
home run(s) and at the entrance and exit of all turns greater than 45 degrees. If new
loops are installed over existing the old loops shall be removed by grinding and the
grinding shall be deep enough to destroy any existing operational loop conductors. If
not listed as incidental to another item or paid for under another Bid item the additional
Work to remove the existing loops shall be paid in accordance with Section 1-04.4.
5. Each loop shall be the size and number of turns indicated in the Plans.
6. No loop installation will be done in rainy weather or when the pavement is wet.
7. All sawcuts shall be cleaned with a high-pressure washer and dried with 100 psi
minimum air pressure, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If traffic is allowed over the
sawcut prior to wire installation, the sawcuts shall be cleaned again.
8. Wiring shall be installed with a blunt-nosed wooden wedge.
9. Prior to the installation of the high temperature backer rod all slack shall be removed
from the wiring. Kinks in wiring or folding back of excess wiring will not be allowed.
10. High temperature backer rod, sized for snug fit shall be installed in the saw cut on
2-foot centers and at all sharp turns.
11. Install sealant as per Contract or as approved by the Engineer.
12. Sealant shall be applied such that air bubbles or foam will not be trapped in the sawcut.
8-20.3(14)D Test for Induction Loops and Lead-In Cable
All tests shall be performed by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer for each
loop. The tests shall be performed at the amplifier location after complete installation of the
loop. All costs associated with testing shall be included in the unit Contract prices of the
respective Bid items.

Test A – The DC resistance between the two lead-in cable wires will be measured by
a volt ohmmeter. The resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms.
Test B – A megohm meter test at 500 volts DC shall be made between the lead-in
cable shield and grounding, prior to connection to grounding. The resistance shall equal
or exceed 100 megohms.
Test C – A megger test shall be made between the loop circuit and grounding.
The resistance shall equal or exceed 100-megohms.
Test D – An inductance test to determine the inductance level of each inductance
loop. The Contractor shall record the inductance level of each inductance loop installed
on the project and shall furnish the findings to the Engineer. An inductance level below
150 microhenries is considered a failure for a Type 1 loop, any one round loop and an
inductance level below 75 microhenries is considered a failure for a Type 2 loop.
If any of the installations fails to pass all tests, the loop installation or lead-in cable
shall be repaired and replaced and then retested.
8-20.3(14)E Signal Standards
Traffic signal standards shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the methods
and materials noted in the Contract and the following:
1. All dimensions and orientations will be field verified by the Engineer prior to
fabrication.
2. The signal standard component identification shall conform to details in the Plans.
3. Disconnect connectors complete with pole and bracket cable shall be installed in any
signal standard supporting a luminaire. Illumination wiring installation shall conform
to details in the Plans for slip base wiring.
4. No field drilling will be allowed on signal mast arms except for the installation of any
required pre-empt indicators, pre-empt detectors, microwave detector, or type “N”
signal mountings. The maximum diameter shall be 1 inch.
5. All pole entrances required for pole-mounted signal heads, cabinets, signs, pedestrian
push button assemblies, etc., shall be field drilled.
6. Damage to the galvanized pole surface resulting from field drilling shall be repaired
with approved zinc rich paint.
7. Field welding will not be allowed, except as shown in the Plans.
8. All tenons shall be factory installed.
9. All welding shall be completed prior to galvanizing.
10. Foundations shall be constructed to provide the pole orientation noted in the Plans.
Anchor bolts shall be tightened in accordance with Sections 6-03.3(33) and 8-20.3(4).
11. Slip base installation for Type RM and FB signal standards shall conform to the
slip base installation requirements specified in Section 8-20.3(13)A, except that the
specified torque for the ¾-inch diameter clamping bolts shall be 50 foot-pounds.
12. The pole shall be plumbed after signal heads are installed.
13. The space between the bottom base plate and the top of foundation shall be filled with
grout with a ⅜-inch plastic drain tube.
Signal standards shall not be erected on concrete foundations until the foundations have
attained 2,400 psi or 14 days after concrete placement. Signal standards without mast arms
may be erected after 72 hours. Type IV and V strain pole standards may be erected but the
messenger cable (span wire) shall not be placed until the foundation has attained 2400 psi
or 14 days after concrete placement.
Signal supports used with portable traffic signal systems shall provide a minimum of
two signal displays, spaced a minimum of 8 feet apart.

When portable traffic signals are used to provide alternating one-way control, a minimum
of one of the signal displays shall be suspended over the Traveled Way. The minimum vertical
clearance to the Traveled Way for this signal display is 16′ 6″.
Timber strain poles shall be set a burial depth of 10 percent of the total length plus 2 feet
and shall be raked as noted in the Plans.
8-20.3(15) Grout
Grout shall conform to the requirements of Section 6-02.3(20) and 9-20.3(4).
8-20.3(16) Reinstalling Salvaged Material
When the Contract requires salvaged electrical equipment to be reinstalled, the Contractor
shall furnish and install all necessary materials and equipment, including anchor bolts, nuts,
washers, concrete, etc., required to install the salvaged equipment.
8-20.3(17) “As Built” Plans
Upon Physical Completion of the Work, the Contractor shall submit corrected shop
drawings, schematic circuit diagrams, or other drawings necessary for the Engineer to prepare
corrected Plans to show the Work as constructed.
These drawings shall be on sheets conforming in size to the provisions of Section 1-05.3.
8-20.4 Measurement
Conduit of the kind and diameter specified will be measured, through the junction boxes,
by the linear foot of conduit placed, unless the conduit is included in an illumination system,
signal system, intelligent transportation system, or other type of electrical system lump sum
Bid item.
Casing will be measured by the linear foot for the actual length of casing placed, unless the
casing is included in an illumination, signal, or other electrical system lump sum Bid item.
Directional boring will be measured by the linear foot for the length of the boring tunnel.
8-20.5 Payment
“Illumination System ____”, lump sum.
“Traffic Signal System ____”, lump sum.
“ITS ____”, lump sum.
The lump sum Contract price for “Illumination System, ____”, “Traffic Signal System
____”, or “ITS _____” shall be full pay for the construction of the complete electrical system,
modifying existing systems, or both, including sign lighting systems, as described above
and as shown in the Plans, and herein specified, including excavation, backfilling, concrete
foundations, conduit, wiring, restoring facilities destroyed or damaged during construction,
salvaging existing materials, and for making all required tests. All additional materials and
labor, not shown in the Plans or called for herein and which are required to complete the
electrical system, shall be included in the lump sum Contract price.
“Conduit Pipe ____ In. Diam.”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Conduit Pipe____ In. Diam.” shall be full pay
for furnishing all pipe, pipe connections, elbows, bends, caps, reducers, conduits, unions,
junction boxes, and fittings; for placing the pipe in accordance with the above provisions,
including all excavation, jacking, or drilling required, backfilling of any voids around casing,
conduits, pits, or trenches; restoration of native vegetation disturbed by the operation, chipping
of pavement, and bedding of the pipe; and all other Work necessary for the construction of
the conduit, except that when conduit is included on any project as an integral part of an
illumination, traffic signal, or ITS system, and the conduit is not shown as a pay item, it shall
be included in the lump sum price for the system shown.

All costs for installing conduit containing both signal and illumination wiring shall be
included in the Contract prices for the signal system.
All costs for installing junction boxes containing both illumination and signal wiring shall
be included in the Contract prices for the signal system.
“Casing”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear feet for “casing” shall be full payment for boring, jacking
or drilling for installing casing, and backfilling any voids around the casing and pits or back
filling of the trenches required to install the casing. This cost will also include any restoration
of native vegetation disturbed by the operation.
“Directional Boring”, per linear foot
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Directional Boring”, shall be full pay for
furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and electrical supervision associated with the
directional boring.

8-21 Permanent Signing

8-21.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and installing permanent signing, sign removal, sign
relocation, and refacing existing signs in accordance with the Plans, these Specifications,
and at the locations shown in the Plans or where designated by the Engineer.
8-21.2 Materials
Roadside Sign Structures 9-06.16
Permanent Signs 9-28
Sign Support Structures 9-28.14
The Contractor shall submit a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for all permanent
signs in accordance with Section 1-06.3; a copy of the Manufacturer’s Certificate of
Compliance shall be available at the fabricator’s plant. Permanent signs will be inspected
at the fabricator’s plant prior to shipment to the project unless otherwise accepted by the
Engineer. Signs without an approved decal will not be installed on the project with the
exception of double-faced signs which do not receive decals or fabricator’s stickers.
8-21.3(1) Location of Signs
Signs are located in the Plans by station numbers. These are tentative locations subject to
change by the Engineer. The post lengths specified in the Plans are estimated for Bid purposes
only. Final lengths of timber posts will be determined or verified by the Engineer at the request
of the Contractor prior to fabrication. Final lengths of steel posts will be determined by the
Engineer prior to fabrication.
8-21.3(2) Placement of Signs
All reflectorized signs located less than 30 feet from the edge of the lane should be turned
out approximately 3 degrees from the pavement edge of oncoming traffic lanes, and those
located 30 feet or more from the edge of the lane should be turned in approximately 3 degrees
from the pavement edge of oncoming traffic lanes. All sign posts shall be plumb and signs
level. The signs shall be inspected at night by the Engineer and, if specular glare occurs from
failure to install at 3 degrees as stipulated, the Contractor shall reinstall the signs at no expense
to the Contracting Agency. The post holes shall be of sufficient dimensions to allow placement
and thorough compaction of selected backfill material completely around the post. Selected
backfill material shall consist of earth or fine sandy gravel free from organic matter with no
individual particles exceeding 1½ inches in diameter.
8-21.3(3) Sign Covering
When notified by the Engineer, the Contractor shall cover or uncover certain signs
to facilitate and control the operation of the project. The covering shall consist of 4 mils
minimum thickness black polyethylene sheeting of sufficient size to entirely cover the sign,
unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, and shall extend over the edges of the sign and
fastened on the back. The Contractor shall not use any type of adhesive tape on the face of
the signs. Other methods of covering may be considered if approved by the Engineer.
8-21.3(4) Sign Removal
Where shown in the Plans or ordered by the Engineer, the existing signs and,
if so indicated, the sign Structures shall be removed by the Contractor.
Sign Structures shall include sign bridges, cantilever sign Structures, bridge-mounted
sign brackets, and any other sign-mounting Structure shown in the Plans to be removed by
the Contractor.

Permanent Signing 8-21
The embedded anchors attaching signs and sign Structures specified for removal to existing
concrete Structures shall be removed a minimum of 1 inch beneath the existing concrete
surface. The void left by removal of the embedded anchors shall be coated with epoxy bonding
agent and filled with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(2). The epoxy bonding agent shall
be Type II, conforming to Section 9-26.1, with the grade and class as recommended by the
epoxy bonding agent manufacturer and as approved by the Engineer. The mortar shall consist
of cement and fine aggregate mixed in the proportions to match the color of the existing
concrete surface as near as practicable.
Where indicated, the Contractor shall remove concrete pedestals to a minimum of 2 feet
below Subgrade or finished ground elevation and backfill the hole to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Where an existing sign post is located within a sidewalk area, the Contractor shall
remove the post and finish the area so as to make the sidewalk continuous. Where signs are
removed from existing overhead sign Structures, the existing vertical sign support braces shall
also be removed. The removed aluminum signs, wood signs, wood sign posts, wood structures,
metal sign posts, wind beams, and other metal structural members and all the existing
fastening hardware connecting such members shall become the property of the Contractor
and shall be removed from the project. Salvage value of the removed signs and sign Structure
members shall be reflected in the Contractor’s Bid price for other items of Work.
8-21.3(5) Sign Relocation
Where shown in the Plans, the existing signs and, if so indicated, the sign Structures shall
be relocated by the Contractor to the location noted. Where the existing sign Structure is
mounted on concrete pedestals, the Contractor shall remove the pedestal to a minimum of
12 inches below finished grade and backfill the remaining hole with material similar to that
surrounding the hole. Where the existing Structure is to be relocated, the Contractor shall
provide necessary materials, labor, and hardware, and if so indicated, electrical conduit,
conductors, etc., electrical services, and connections so as to erect and provide an operable
unit to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All materials damaged by the Contractor shall be
replaced at no cost to the Contracting Agency. Unless otherwise allowed, relocation of each
existing sign and Structure shall be accomplished during the day in which it was removed.
Relocation of overhead signs and Structures shall be accomplished during the hours between
12 midnight and 4:00 a.m. or as approved by the Engineer.
8-21.3(6) Sign Refacing
Where indicated in the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall reface
existing signs with sheet aluminum overlay panels. Unless otherwise indicated in the Plans
or allowed by the Engineer, all Work shall be accomplished while the existing sign is in
place. Modifications to each sign shall be completed during the same day in which the Work
is commenced.
Prior to the installation of overlay panels, the existing legend (message and border) shall
be removed. The aluminum overlay panels shall be butt jointed. Aluminum or stainless steel
screws, a minimum of ½ inch in length, shall be used to attach overlay panels to existing
plywood signs. In addition to the screws, two ¼-inch diameter by 1-inch-long aluminum
or stainless steel bolts shall be installed through the top of each panel and the plywood
sign. Aluminum blind rivets shall be used to attach overlay panels to existing aluminum
signs. Screws or rivets shall be installed at 24-inch centers. Unless otherwise noted, sign
background material shall be in accordance with Section 9-28.
After installation of overlay panels, the existing legend shall be reinstalled or, where
indicated in the Plans, new legend or portions thereof shall be furnished and installed by
the Contractor. Direct applied legend shall be applied to the new face prior to resurfacing.
Layout and letter spacing shall be in accordance with Contracting Agency standards unless
otherwise approved by the Engineer. New legend components shall be of the same type and
size as the existing materials, and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to verify material
type and size. Materials damaged by the Contractor shall be replaced at no expense to the
Contracting Agency.

8-21.3(7) Sign Message Revision

Where indicated in the Plans or in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall revise
existing sign messages or layouts. The Contractor shall remove and reinstall portions of
or all of the existing message or furnish and install new message components as necessary
to provide the revised message as indicated. Prior to installing the revised message, the
Contractor shall thoroughly clean the sign face and plug all existing rivet holes with aluminum
blind rivets painted the same color as the sign background. Plugging screw holes in plywood
signs will not be required. Modifications to the sign shall be completed during the same day
in which Work is commenced and while the sign is in place. All new materials necessary to
accomplish this Work shall be the same type and size as the existing components, and it shall
be the Contractor’s responsibility to verify such component type and size. Materials damaged
by the Contractor shall be replaced at no expense to the Contracting Agency. Existing
materials not reinstalled shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed
from the project.
8-21.3(8) Sign Cleaning
Signs shall be cleaned after relocation or installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not use cleaning solvents that would be harmful to the sign finish.
8-21.3(9) Sign Structures
8-21.3(9)A Fabrication of Steel Structures
Fabrication shall conform to the applicable requirements of Sections 6-03 and 9-06.
All welded connections of sign bridge and cantilever sign Structure posts, arms, and beams,
including base and connection plates, shall be cleaned prior to welding to remove all mill
scale from within 2 inches of the weld. As an alternative to the blast cleaning requirements
of Section 6-03.3(13), the Contractor may perform the cleaning using power hand tools as
approved by the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the Plans or Special Provisions, metal
surfaces shall not be painted.
All fabrication, including repairs, adjustments or modifications of previously fabricated
sign structure members and connection elements, shall be performed in the shop, under
a Working Drawing prepared and submitted by the Contractor for the original fabrication or
the specific repair, adjustment or modification. Sign structure fabrication repair, adjustment
or modification of any kind in the field is not permitted. If fabrication repair, adjustment or
modification occurs after a sign structure member or connection element has been galvanized,
the entire member or element shall be re-galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 111.
8-21.3(9)B Erection of Steel Structures
Erection shall conform to the applicable requirements of Sections 6-03 and 8-21.3(9)F.
Section 8-21.3(9)F notwithstanding, the Contractor may erect a sign bridge prior to
completion of the shaft cap portion of one foundation for one post provided the following
conditions are satisfied:
1. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2E Working Drawing consisting of design
calculations and details of the temporary supports and falsework supporting the sign
bridge near the location of the incomplete foundation. The submittal shall include
the method of releasing and removing the temporary supports and falsework without
inducing loads and stress into the sign bridge.
2. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the method used
to secure the anchor bolt array in proper position with the sign bridge while casting the
shaft cap concrete to complete the foundation.
3. The Contractor shall erect the sign bridge and temporary supports and falsework,
complete the remaining portion of the incomplete foundation, and remove the
temporary supports and falsework, in accordance with the accepted Working Drawings.

8-21.3(9)C Timber Posts
Timber sign posts shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-28.14(1).
8-21.3(9)D Aluminum Structures
Welding of aluminum shall be in accordance with Section 9-28.14(3).
8-21.3(9)E Bridge Mounted Sign Brackets
The Contractor shall fabricate and install sign supports for mounting signs on bridge
Structures at the locations and as shown in the Plans, including inserts and anchor bolts.
Fabrication and installation shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of Sections
6-03 and 9-06. Metal surfaces shall not be painted.
The quantity of structural carbon steel shown in the Contract is listed only for the
convenience of the Contractor in determining the volume of Work involved and is not
guaranteed to be accurate. The prospective Bidders shall verify this quantity before submitting
a Bid. No adjustments other than for approved changes will be made in the lump sum Contract
price for the bridge mounted sign brackets, even though the actual quantity of structural
carbon steel required may deviate from that listed.
8-21.3(9)F Foundations
The excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 2-09.3. Where
obstructions prevent construction of planned foundations, the Contractor shall construct an
effective foundation satisfactory to the Engineer.
The bottom of concrete foundations shall rest on firm ground. If the portion of the
foundation beneath the existing ground line is formed or cased instead of being cast against
the existing soil forming the sides of the excavation, then all gaps between the existing
soil and the completed foundation shall be backfilled and compacted in accordance with
Section 2-09.3(1)E.
Concrete placed into an excavation where water is present shall be placed using an
approved tremie. If water is not present, the concrete shall be placed such that the free-fall is
vertical down the center of the shaft without hitting the sides, the steel reinforcing bars, or the
steel reinforcing bar cage bracing. The Section 6-02.3(6) restriction for 5-feet maximum free-
fall shall not apply to placement of Class 4000P concrete into a shaft.
Foundations shall be cast in one operation where practicable. The exposed portions shall
be formed to present a neat appearance. Class 2 surface finish shall be applied to exposed
surfaces of concrete in accordance with the requirements of Section 6-02.3(14)B.
Where soil conditions are poor, the Engineer may order the Contractor to extend the
foundations shown in the Plans to provide additional depth. Such additional work shall be
paid for according to Section 1-04.4.
Forms shall be true to line and grade. Tops of foundations for roadside sign structures shall
be finished to ground line unless otherwise shown in the Plans or directed by the Engineer.
Tops of foundations for sign bridges and cantilever sign structures shall be finished to the
elevation shown in the Plans.
Both forms and ground that will be in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly
moistened before placing concrete; however, excess water in the foundation excavation
will not be permitted. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has set at least 3 days.
All forms shall be removed, except when the Plans or Special Provisions specifically allow
or require the forms or casing to remain.
Foundation concrete shall conform to the requirements for the specified class, be cast-in-
place concrete, and be constructed in accordance with Sections 6-02.2 and 6-02.3.
After construction of concrete foundations for sign bridge and cantilever sign structures,
the Contractor shall survey the foundation locations and elevations, the anchor bolt array
locations and lengths of exposed threads. The Contractor shall confirm that the survey
conforms to the sign structure post, beam, span and foundation design geometry shown in the

Plans prior to completion of the sign structure foundation, and shall identify any deviations
from the design geometry shown in the Plans. When deviations are identified, the Contractor
shall notify the Engineer and submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of the Contractor’s
proposed method(s) of addressing the deviations.
Sign structures shall not be erected on concrete foundations until the Contractor confirms
that the foundations and the fabricated sign structures are either compatible with each other
and the design geometry shown in the Plans, or have been modified in accordance with this
section and as approved by the Engineer to be compatible with each other, and the foundations
have attained a compressive strength of 2,400-psi.
In addition to the basic requirements, sign bridges and cantilever sign structures shall
be installed in accordance with the following:
1. Foundation excavations shall conform to the requirements of Section 2-09.3(3).
2. Tops of foundations for sign bridges and cantilever sign structures shall be finished
to the elevation shown in the Plans.
3. Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to Section 9-07.
4. Concrete shall be Class 4000P, except as otherwise specified. The concrete for the shaft
cap (the portion containing the anchor bolt array assemblies above the construction joint
at the top of the shaft) shall be Class 4000.
5. All bolts and anchor bolts shall be installed so that two full threads extend beyond
the top of the top heavy-hex nut. Anchor bolts shall be installed plumb, plus or minus
1 degree.
6. Plumbing of sign bridges and cantilever sign structures shall be accomplished by
adjusting leveling nuts. Shims or other similar devices for plumbing or raking will not
be permitted.
7. The top heavy-hex nuts of sign bridges and cantilever sign structures shall be tightened
in accordance with Section 6-03.3(33), and by the Turn-of-Nut Method to a minimum
rotation of ¼ turn and a maximum of ⅓ turn past snug tight. Permanent marks shall be
set on the base plate and nuts to indicate nut rotation past snug tight.
In addition to the basic requirements, roadside sign structures shall be installed in
accordance with the following:
1. Tops of foundations shall be finished to final ground line unless otherwise shown in
the Plans or staked by the Engineer.
2. Steel reinforcement, including spiral reinforcing, shall conform to Section 9-07.2.
3. Unless otherwise shown in the Plans, concrete shall be Class 4000P.
4. The assembly and installation of all Type TP-A or Type TP-B bases for roadside sign
structures shall be supervised at all times by either a manufacturer’s representative or
an installer who has been trained and certified by the manufacturer of the system. If the
supervision is provided by a trained installer, a copy of the installer’s certification shall
be provided to the Engineer prior to installation.
5. For all Type TP-A or TP-B bases, the Contractor shall attach four female anchors to
a flat rigid template following the manufacturer’s recommendations. The Contractor
shall lower the anchor assembly into fresh concrete foundation and vibrate into position
such that the tops of the anchor washers are flush with the finished top surface of the
foundation. The Contractor shall support the template such that all anchors are level and
in their proper position.
Slip base and hinge connection nuts of roadside sign structures shall be tightened using a
torque wrench to the torque, following the procedure specified in the Plans.

8-21.3(9)G Sign Structure Identification Information

Whenever existing bridge-mounted sign brackets, cantilever sign structures, or sign bridge
structures are removed from their anchorage, whether temporary or permanent, the Contractor
shall provide the sign structure identification information, attached to the sign structures, to
the Engineer. The identification information may be in the form of a riveted plate, sticker, or
other means.
8-21.3(10) Sign Attachment
Sign panels consisting of sheet aluminum or fiberglass reinforced plastic shall be attached
or mounted to signposts or sign structures as shown in the Plans.
Signs not conforming to the above, including all variable message sign (VMS) assemblies
and other message boardtype assemblies, shall be attached or mounted to signposts or sign
structures by means of positive connections—defined as through-bolted connections. The use
of clips or clamps to accomplish the attachment or mounting of such signs and assemblies
is prohibited.
8-21.3(11) Multiple Panel Signs
After installation of multiple panel signs, the Contractor shall furnish and install an
approved reinforced aluminized tape on the reverse side of the sign to prevent visible light
through the seam. The tape shall be pressure sensitive and a minimum of 2 inches wide and
2 mils thick. In lieu of tape, the Contractor may use 1-inch-wide aluminum sheeting riveted to
the sign back. The aluminum shall be a minimum of 0.032 inch thick. Rivet heads shall match
the sign face color.
8-21.3(12) Steel Sign Posts
For roadside sign structures on Type TP-A or Type TP-B bases, the Contractor shall use the
following procedures and manufacturer’s recommendations:
1. The couplings, special bolts, bracket bolts, and hinge connection nuts on all Type TP-A
or Type TP-B bases shall be tightened using the Turn-of-Nut Tightening Method to a
maximum rotation of ½ turn past snug tight.
2. The Contractor shall shim as necessary to plumb the steel signposts.
For roadside sign structures on all Type PL and SB slip bases, the Contractor shall use the
1. The Contractor shall assemble the steel signpost to stub post with bolts and flat washers
as shown in the Plans.
2. Each bolt shall be tightened using a torque wrench to the torque, following the
procedures specified in the Plans.
For roadside sign structures on SB-1, SB-2, or SB-3 slip bases, the Contractor shall use the
following procedures and manufacturer’s recommendations:
1. The Contractor shall attach the perforated square steel post or solid square steel post to
the upper slip plate with bolts, nuts, and washers as shown in the Plans.
2. The three bolts connecting the upper and lower slip plates shall be tightened to torque,
using a torque wrench, following the procedures in the Plans.
For roadside structures on ST-2 and ST-4 sign supports, the Contractor shall use the
1. The Contractor shall attach the perforated square steel post to the lower sign post
support with bolts, nuts, and washers as shown in the Plans.
8-21.4 Measurement
Sign covering will be measured in square feet of the area of the sign covered.

8-21.5 Payment
“Permanent Signing”, lump sum.
“Sign Bridge No. ____”, lump sum.
“Cantilever Sign Structure No. ____”, lump sum.
All costs in connection with surveying completed concrete foundations for sign bridges
and cantilever sign structures shall be included in the lump sum contract price for “Structure
Surveying”, except that when no Bid item is included in the Proposal for “Structure
Surveying” then such costs shall be included in the lump sum contract price(s) for “Sign
Bridge No. ___” and “Cantilever Sign Structure No. ___”.
“Bridge Mounted Sign Bracket No. ____”, lump sum.
“Sign Covering”, per square foot.

Pavement Marking 8-22
8-22 Pavement Marking

8-22.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing, installing, and removing pavement markings upon
the Roadway surface in accordance with the Plans, Standard Plans, the FHWA publication
Standard Alphabet for Highway Signs and Pavement Markings and these Specifications,
at locations shown in the Contract or as ordered by the Engineer in accordance with
Section 1-04.4.
Pavement Markings may be either Longitudinal (long) Line Markings or Transverse
Markings. Longitudinal line markings are generally placed parallel and adjacent to the flow of
traffic. Transverse markings are generally placed perpendicular and across the flow of traffic.
Word and symbol markings are classified as transverse markings. Traffic letters used in word
messages shall be sized as shown in the Plans.
8-22.2 Materials
Material for pavement marking shall be paint or plastic as noted in the Bid item meeting
the requirements of Section 9-34. Glass beads for paint shall meet the requirements of
Section 9-34.4. Glass beads for plastic shall be as recommended by the material manufacturer.
The Engineer will provide necessary control points at intervals agreed upon with the
Contractor to assist in preliminary spotting of the lines before marking begins. The Contractor
shall be responsible for preliminary spotting of the lines to be marked. Approval by the
Engineer is required before marking begins. Preliminary spotting to guide the striping machine
is required for all longitudinal lines except where a clearly visible separation is present.
Preliminary spotting shall be provided at a spacing of 100 feet maximum on tangents and
25‑feet maximum on curves. The color of the material used for spotting shall match the color
of the permanent marking.
8-22.3(2) Preparation of Roadway Surfaces
All surfaces shall be dry, free of any loose debris, and within the proper temperature
range prior to striping. When required by the pavement marking manufacturer’s installation
instructions, remove pavement markings from pavement surfaces that will adversely
affect the bond of new pavement marking material to the roadway surface according to
Section 8-22.3(6).
Remove all other contaminants from pavement surfaces that may adversely affect the
installation of new pavement markings by sandblasting, shot-blasting, or sweeping. Air blast
the pavement with a high-pressure system to remove extraneous or loose material.
Apply materials to new HMA that is sufficiently cured according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Typically, Type D material applied to new HMA pavement requires a
pavement cure period of 21 days. This cure period may be reduced if the manufacturer
performs a successful bond test and approves the reduction of the pavement cure period.
For new Portland cement concrete surfaces, remove curing compounds and laitance
by an approved mechanical means. Air blast the pavement with a high-pressure system to
remove extraneous or loose material. Apply materials to concrete that has reached a minimum
compressive strength of 2,500 psi and that is sufficiently cured according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Typically, Type D material applied to Portland cement concrete pavement
requires a pavement cure period of 28 days. This cure period may be reduced if the
manufacturer performs a successful bond test and approves the reduction of the pavement
cure period.

After the pavement surface is clean and dry, apply primer as recommended by the
manufacturer to the area receiving the pavement markings. Apply the primer in a continuous,
solid film according to the recommendations of the primer manufacturer and the pavement
markings manufacturer.
8-22.3(3) Marking Application
8-22.3(3)A Marking Colors
Lane line and right edge line shall be white in color. Centerline and left edge line shall
be yellow in color. Transverse markings shall be white, except as otherwise noted in the
Standard Plans.
8-22.3(3)B Line Patterns
Solid Line – A continuous line without gaps.
Broken Line – A line consisting of solid line segments separated by gaps.
Dotted Line – A broken line with noticeably shorter line segments separated by noticeably
shorter gaps.
8-22.3(3)C Line Surfaces
Flat Lines – Pavement marking lines with a flat surface.
Profiled Marking – A profiled pavement marking is a marking that consists of a base line
thickness and a profiled thickness, which is a portion of the pavement marking line that is
applied at a greater thickness than the base line thickness. Profiles shall be applied using the
extruded method in the same application as the base line. The profiles may be slightly rounded
provided the minimum profile thickness is the same throughout the length of the profile.
See the Plans for the construction details.
Embossed Plastic Line – Embossed plastic lines consist of a flat line with transverse
grooves. An embossed plastic line may also have profiles. See the Plans for the
construction details.
8-22.3(3)D Line Applications
Surface Line – A line constructed by applying pavement marking material directly to the
pavement surface or existing pavement marking.
Grooved Line – A line constructed by grinding or saw cutting a groove into the pavement
surface and spraying, extruding, or gluing pavement marking material into the groove. Groove
depth is measured vertically from the bottom of a 2 foot or longer straightedge placed on the
roadway surface to the ground surface. The groove depth is dependent upon the material used,
the pavement surface, and the location. See these Standard Specifications, the project Plans,
and Special Provisions. Grooved line pavement marking shall not be constructed on bridge
decks or on bridge approach slabs.
8-22.3(3)E Installation
Apply pavement marking materials to clean, dry pavement surfaces and according to
the following:
1. Place material according to the manufacture’s recommendations,
2. Place parallel double lines in one pass,
3. The top of pavement marking shall be smooth and uniform,
4. Line ends shall be square and clean,
5. Place pavement marking lines parallel and true to line, and
6. Place markings in proper alignment with existing markings.
When applying paint, Type A or Type C material, ensure that both the pavement
surface and the air temperature at the time of application are not less than 50°F and rising.
When applying Type B or Type D material, ensure that both the pavement surface and the
air temperature at the time of application are not less than 40°F and rising.

Ensure that the Type A thermoplastic material meets the manufacturer’s temperature
specifications when it contacts the pavement surface.
Two applications of paint will be required to complete all paint markings. The second
application of paint shall be squarely on top of the first pass. The time period between paint
applications will vary depending on the type of pavement and paint (low VOC waterborne or
low VOC solvent) as follows:
Pavement Type Paint Type Time Period
Bituminous Surface Treatment Low VOC Waterborne 4 hours min., 48 hours max.
Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement Low VOC Waterborne 4 hours min., 30 days max.
Cement Concrete Pavement Low VOC Waterborne 4 hours min., 30 days max.
Bituminous Surface Treatment Low VOC Solvent 40 min. min., 48 hrs. max.
Hot Mix Asphalt Pavement Low VOC Solvent 40 min. min., 30 days max.
Cement Concrete Pavement Low VOC Solvent 40 min. min., 30 days max.
Centerlines on two-lane Highways with broken line patterns, paint, or plastic shall be
applied in the increasing milepost direction so they are in cycle with existing broken line
patterns at the beginning of the project. Broken line patterns applied to multilane or divided
Roadways shall be applied in cycle in the direction of travel.
Where paint is applied on centerline on two-way roads with bituminous surface treatment
or centerline rumble strips, the second paint application shall be applied in the opposite
(decreasing milepost) direction as the first application (increasing milepost) direction.
This will require minor broken line pattern corrections for curves on the second application.
8-22.3(3)F Application Thickness
Pavement markings shall be applied at the following base line thickness measured above
the pavement surface or above the groove bottom for grooved markings in thousandths of
an inch (mils):
Marking Material Application HMA PCC BST Groove Depth
Paint – first coat spray 10 10 10
Paint – second coat spray 15 15 15
Type A – flat/transverse & symbols extruded 125 125 125
Type A – flat/long line & symbols spray 90 90 120
Type A – with profiles extruded 90 90 120
Type A – embossed extruded 160 160 160
Type A – embossed with profiles extruded 160 160 160
Type A – grooved/flat/long line extruded 230 230 230 250
Type B – flat/transverse & symbols heat fused 125 125 125
Type C-2 – flat/transverse & symbols adhesive 90 90 NA
Type C-1 & 2 – flat/long line adhesive 60 60 NA
Type C-1 – grooved/flat/long line adhesive 60 60 NA 100
Type D – flat/transverse & symbols spray 120 120 120
Type D – flat/transverse & symbols extruded 120 120 120
Type D – flat/long line spray 90 90 120
Type D – flat/long line extruded 90 90 120
Type D – profiled/long line extruded 90 90 120
Type D – grooved/flat/long line extruded 230 230 230 250

Liquid pavement marking material yield per gallon depending on thickness shall not
exceed the following:
Mils thickness Feet of 4″ line/gallon Square feet/gallon
10 483 161
15 322 108
18 268 89
20 242 80
22 220 73
24 202 67
30 161 54
40 122 41
45 107 36
60 81 27
90 54 18
90 with profiles 30 10
120 40 13
120 with profiles 26 9
230 21 7
Solid pavement marking material (Type A) yield per 50-pound bag shall not exceed
the following:
Mils thickness Feet of 4″ line/50# bag Square feet/50# bag
30 – flat 358 120
45 – flat 240 80
60 – flat 179 60
90 – flat 120 40
90 – flat with profiles 67 23
120 – flat 90 30
120 – flat with profiles 58 20
125 – embossed 86 29
125 – embossed with profiles 58 20
230 – flat grooved 47 15
All grooved lines shall be applied into a groove cut or ground into the pavement. For
Type A or Type D material, the groove shall be cut or ground with equipment to produce
a smooth square groove 4 inches wide. For Type C-1 material, the groove shall be cut with
equipment to produce a smooth bottom square groove with a width in accordance with the
material manufacturer’s recommendation. After grinding, clean the groove by shot-blasting
or a method approved by Engineer. Immediately before placing the marking material, clean
the groove with high-pressure air.
8-22.3(3)G Glass beads
Top dress glass beads shall be applied to all spray and extruded pavement marking
material. Glass beads shall be applied by a bead dispenser immediately following the
pavement marking material application. Glass bead dispensers shall apply the glass beads
in a manner such that the beads appear uniform on the entire pavement marking surface
with 50 to 60 percent embedment. Hand casting of beads will not be allowed.

Glass beads shall be applied to 10 or 15 mil thick paint at a minimum application rate of
7 pounds per gallon of paint. For plastic pavement markings, glass bead type and application
rate shall be as recommended by the marking material manufacturer.
When two or more spray applications are required to meet thickness requirements
for Type A and Type D materials, top dressing with glass beads is only allowed on the
last application. The cure period between successive applications shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Any loose beads, dirt or other debris shall be
swept or blown off the line prior to application of each successive application. Successive
applications shall be applied squarely on top of the preceding application.
8-22.3(4) Tolerances for Lines
Allowable tolerances for lines are as follows:
Length of Line – The longitudinal accumulative error within a 40 foot length of broken
line shall not exceed plus or minus 1 inch. The broken line segment shall not be less than
10 feet.
Width of Line – The width of the line shall not be less than the specified line width or
greater than the specified line width plus ¼ inch.
Lane Width – The lane width, which is defined as the lateral width from the edge of
pavement to the center of the lane line or between the centers of successive lane lines,
shall not vary from the widths shown in the Contract by more than plus or minus 4 inches.
Thickness – A thickness tolerance not exceeding plus 10 percent will be allowed for
thickness or yield in paint and plastic material application.
Parallel Lines – The gap tolerance between parallel lines is plus or minus ½ inch.
8-22.3(5) Installation Instructions
Installation instructions for plastic markings shall be provided for the Engineer. The
instructions shall include equipment requirements, approved work methods and procedures,
material application temperature range, air and pavement surface temperature requirements,
weather limitations, precautions, and all other requirements for successful application
and material performance. Do not use materials with incomplete or missing instructions.
All materials including glass beads shall be installed according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations. A manufacturer’s technical representative shall be present at the
initial installation of plastic material to approve the installation procedure or the material
manufacturer shall certify that the Contractor will install the plastic material in accordance
with their recommended procedure.
8-22.3(6) Removal of Pavement Markings
Pavement markings to be removed shall be obliterated until all blemishes caused by
the pavement marking removal conform to the coloration of the adjacent pavement.
Grinding to remove pavement markings in their entirety is allowed in areas designated
for applications of either Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA) or Bituminous Surface Treatment (BST).
Pavement marking removal shall be performed from April 1st through September 30th and
only in those areas that shall be paved within the same time window as the grinding, unless
otherwise allowed by the Engineer in writing.
For all cement concrete pavement and areas that will not be overlaid with hot mix asphalt
or BST, grinding is allowed to a depth just above the pavement surface and then Water blasting
or shot blasting shall be required to remove the remaining pavement markings.
If in the opinion of the Engineer, the pavement is materially damaged by pavement
marking removal, such damage shall be repaired by the Contractor in accordance with
Section 1-07.13(1). Sand or other material deposited on the pavement as a result of removing
lines and markings shall be removed as the Work progresses to avoid hazardous conditions.
Accumulation of sand or other material which might interfere with drainage will not
be permitted.

8-22.4 Measurement
Center line, center line with no pass line, double center line, double lane line, edge line,
solid lane line, dotted extension line, lane line, reversible lane line, and two-way left-turn
center line will be measured by the completed linear foot as “Paint Line”, “Plastic Line”,
“Embossed Plastic Line”, “Profiled Plastic Line”, “Profiled Embossed Plastic Line” or
Grooved Plastic Line”.
The measurement for “Paint Line” will be based on a marking system capable of
simultaneous application of three 4-inch lines with two 4-inch spaces. No deduction will be
made for the unmarked area when the marking includes a broken line such as center line,
dotted extension line, center line with no-pass line, lane line, reversible lane line, or two-way
left-turn center line. No additional measurement will be made when more than one line can be
installed on a single pass such as center line with no-pass line, double center line, double lane
line, reversible lane line, or two-way left-turn center line.
The measurement for “Plastic Line”, “Embossed Plastic Line”, “Profiled Plastic Line”,
“Profiled Embossed Plastic Line”, or “Grooved Plastic Line” will be based on the total length
of each 4 inch wide plastic line installed. No deduction will be made for the unmarked area
when the marking includes a broken line such as, center line, dotted extension line, center line
with no-pass line, lane line, reversible lane line, or two-way left-turn center line.
The measurement for “Painted Wide Lane Line”, “Plastic Wide Lane Line”, “Profiled
Plastic Wide Lane Line”, “Painted Barrier Center Line”, “Plastic Barrier Center Line”,
“Painted Stop Line”, “Plastic Stop Line”, “Painted Wide Dotted Entry Line”, or “Plastic Wide
Dotted Entry Line” will be based on the total length of each painted, plastic or profiled plastic
line installed. No deduction will be made for the unmarked area when the marking includes a
broken line such as, wide broken lane line, drop lane line, wide dotted lane line or wide dotted
entry line. The measurement for double wide lane line will be based on the total length of each
wide lane line installed.
No additional measurement for payment will be made for the required second application
of paint. No additional measurement for payment will be made for additional applications
required to meet thickness requirements for plastic markings.
Diagonal lines used to delineate parking stalls that are constructed of painted or plastic
4-inch lines will be measured as “Paint Line” or “Plastic Line” by the linear foot of line
installed. Crosswalk line will be measured by the square foot of marking installed.
Crosshatch markings used to delineate median and gore areas will be measured by the
completed linear foot as “Painted Crosshatch Marking” or “Plastic Crosshatch Marking”.
The measurement for “Painted Crosshatch Marking” and for “Plastic Crosshatch Marking”
will be based on the total length of each 8-inch or 12-inch wide line installed.
Traffic arrows, traffic letters, access parking space symbols, HOV symbols, railroad
crossing symbols, drainage markings, junction box markings, bicycle lane symbols, aerial
surveillance full, and ½ markers, yield line symbols, yield ahead symbols, and speed bump
symbols will be measured per each. Type 1 through 6 traffic arrows will be measured as one
unit each, regardless of the number of arrow heads.
Removal of lines, 4, 8, 18, and 20 inches in width will be measured by the linear foot,
with no deduction being made for the unmarked area when the marking includes a gap.
Removal of traffic arrows, traffic letters, access parking space symbol, HOV lane symbol,
railroad crossing symbol, bicycle lane symbols, drainage markings, aerial surveillance full and
½ markers, yield line symbol, yield ahead symbol, and speed bump symbol will be measured
per each. Removal of crosswalk lines will be measured by the square foot of lines removed.

8-22.5 Payment
“Paint Line”, per linear foot.
“Plastic Line”, per linear foot.
“Embossed Plastic Line”, per linear foot.
“Profiled Plastic Line”, per linear foot.
“Profiled Embossed Plastic Line”, per linear foot.
“Grooved Plastic Line”, per linear foot.
“Painted Wide Lane Line”, per linear foot.
“Plastic Wide Lane Line”, per linear foot.
“Profiled Plastic Wide Lane Line”, per linear foot.
“Painted Barrier Center Line”, per linear foot.
“Plastic Barrier Center Line”, per linear foot.
“Painted Stop Line”, per linear foot.
“Plastic Stop Line”, per linear foot.
“Painted Crosswalk Line”, per square foot.
“Plastic Crosswalk Line”, per square foot.
“Painted Crosshatch Marking”, per linear foot.
“Plastic Crosshatch Marking”, per linear foot.
“Painted Wide Dotted Entry Line”, per linear foot.
“Plastic Wide Dotted Entry Line”, per linear foot.
“Painted Traffic Arrow”, per each.
“Plastic Traffic Arrow”, per each.
“Painted Traffic Letter”, per each.
“Plastic Traffic Letter”, per each.
“Painted Access Parking Space Symbol”, per each.
“Plastic Access Parking Space Symbol”, per each.
“Painted Railroad Crossing Symbol”, per each.
“Plastic Railroad Crossing Symbol”, per each.
“Painted Bicycle Lane Symbol”, per each.
“Plastic Bicycle Lane Symbol”, per each.
“Painted Drainage Marking”, per each.
“Plastic Drainage Marking”, per each.
“Painted Junction Box Marking”, per each.
“Plastic Junction Box Marking”, per each.
“Painted Aerial Surveillance Full Marker”, per each.
“Plastic Aerial Surveillance Full Marker”, per each.
“Painted Aerial Surveillance ½ Marker”, per each.
“Plastic Aerial Surveillance ½ Marker”, per each.
“Painted Access Parking Space Symbol with Background”, per each.
“Plastic Access Parking Space Symbol with Background”, per each.
“Painted HOV Lane Symbol”, per each.
“Plastic HOV Lane Symbol”, per each.
“Painted Yield Line Symbol”, per each.
“Plastic Yield Line Symbol”, per each.

“Painted Yield Ahead Symbol”, per each.

“Plastic Yield Ahead Symbol”, per each.
“Painted Speed Bump Symbol”, per each.
“Plastic Speed Bump Symbol”, per each.
“Removing Paint Line”, per linear foot.
“Removing Plastic Line”, per linear foot.
“Removing Painted Crosswalk Line”, per square foot.
“Removing Plastic Crosswalk Line”, per square foot.
“Removing Painted Traffic Marking”, per each.
“Removing Plastic Traffic Marking”, per each.
The unit Contract price for the aforementioned Bid items shall be full payment for all costs
to perform the Work as described in Section 8-22.

Temporary Pavement Markings 8-23
8-23 Temporary Pavement Markings

8-23.1 Description
The Work consists of furnishing and installing temporary pavement markings. Temporary
pavement markings shall be provided where noted in the Plans and for all lane shifts and
detours resulting from construction activities; or when permanent markings are removed
because of construction operations.
8-23.2 Materials
Materials for temporary markings shall be paint, plastic, tape, raised pavement markers
or flexible raised pavement markers. Materials for pavement markings shall meet the
following requirements:
Raised Pavement Marker 9-21
Temporary Marking Paint 9-34.2(6)
Plastic 9-34.3
Glass Beads for Pavement Marking Materials 9-34.4
Temporary Pavement Marking Tape 9-34.5
Temporary Flexible Raised Pavement Markers 9-34.6
8-23.3(1) General
The Contractor shall select the type of pavement marking material in accordance with
the Contract.
All preliminary layout and marking in preparation for application and the application
and removal of temporary pavement markings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
8-23.3(3) Preparation of Roadway Surface
Surface preparation for temporary pavement markings shall be in accordance with the
8-23.3(4) Pavement Marking Application
8-23.3(4)A Temporary Pavement Markings – Short Duration
Temporary pavement markings – short duration shall meet the following requirements:
Temporary Center Line – A BROKEN line used to delineate adjacent lanes of traffic
moving in opposite directions. The broken pattern shall be based on a 40-foot unit, consisting
of a 4-foot line with a 36-foot gap if paint or tape is used. If temporary raised pavement
markers are used, the pattern shall be based on a 40-foot unit, consisting of a grouping of three
temporary raised pavement markers, each spaced 3 feet apart, with a 34 foot gap.
Temporary Edge Line – A SOLID line used on the edges of Traveled Way. The line shall
be continuous if paint or tape is used. If temporary raised pavement markers are used, the line
shall consist of markers installed continuously at 5-foot spacings.
Temporary Lane Line – A BROKEN line used to delineate adjacent lanes with traffic
traveling in the same direction. The broken pattern shall be based on a 40-foot unit, consisting
of a 4-foot line with a 36-foot gap, if paint or tape is used. If temporary raised pavement
markers are used, the pattern shall be based on a 40-foot unit, consisting of a grouping of three
temporary raised pavement markers, each spaced 3 feet apart, with a 34 foot gap.
Lane line and right edge line shall be white in color. Center line and left edge line shall
be yellow in color. Edge Lines shall be installed only if specifically required in the Contract.
All temporary pavement markings shall be retroreflective.

8-23 Temporary Pavement Markings
8-23.3(4)A1 Temporary Pavement Marking Paint

Paint used for short duration temporary pavement markings shall be applied in one
application at a thickness of 15 mils or 108 square feet per gallon. Glass beads shall be
in accordance with Section 8-22.3(3)G.
8-23.3(4)A2 Temporary Pavement Marking Tape
Application of temporary pavement marking tape shall be in conformance with the
Black mask pavement marking tape shall mask the existing line in its entirety.
8-23.3(4)A3 Temporary Raised Pavement Markers
Temporary raised pavement markers are not allowed on bituminous surface treatments.
8-23.3(4)A4 Temporary Flexible Raised Pavement Markers
Flexible raised pavement markers are required for new applications of bituminous surface
treatments. Flexible raised pavement markers are not allowed on other pavement types unless
otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. Flexible raised pavement markers shall be
installed with the protective cover in place. The cover shall be removed immediately after
spraying asphaltic material.
8-23.3(4)B Temporary Pavement Markings – Long Duration
Application of paint, pavement marking tape and plastic for long duration pavement
markings shall meet the requirements of Section 8-22.3(3); application of raised pavement
markers shall meet the requirements of Section 8-09.3; and application of flexible pavement
markings shall be in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
8-23.3(4)C Tolerance for Lines
Tolerance for lines shall conform to Section 8-22.3(4).
8-23.3(4)D Maintenance of Pavement Markings
Temporary pavement markings shall be maintained in serviceable condition throughout
the project until permanent pavement markings are installed. As directed by the Engineer;
temporary pavement markings that are damaged, including normal wear by traffic, shall be
repaired or replaced immediately. Repaired and replaced pavement markings shall meet the
requirements for the original pavement marking.
8-23.3(4)E Removal of Pavement Markings
Removal of temporary paint is not required prior to paving; all other temporary pavement
markings shall be removed.
All temporary pavement markings that are required on the wearing course prior to
construction of permanent pavement markings and are not a part of the permanent markings
shall be completely removed concurrent with or immediately subsequent to the construction
of the permanent pavement markings. Temporary flexible raised pavement markers on
bituminous surface treatment pavements shall be cut off flush with the surface if their location
conflicts with the alignment of the permanent pavement markings. All other temporary
pavement markings shall be removed in accordance with Section 8-22.3(6).
All damage to the permanent Work caused by removing temporary pavement markings
shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Contracting Agency.
8-23.4 Measurement
Temporary pavement markings will be measured by the linear foot of each installed line
or grouping of markers, with no deduction for gaps in the line or markers and no additional
measurement for the second application of paint required for long duration paint lines. Short
duration and long duration temporary pavement markings will be measured for the initial
installation only.

Temporary Pavement Markings 8-23
8-23.5 Payment
“Temporary Pavement Marking – Short Duration”, per linear foot.
“Temporary Pavement Marking – Long Duration”, per linear foot.
The unit Contract price per linear foot for “Temporary Pavement Marking – Short
Duration” and “Temporary Pavement Marking – Long Duration” shall be full pay for all Work.

8-24 Rock and Gravity Block Wall and Gabion Cribbing

8-24.1 Description
This Work consists of constructing rock and gravity block wall(s), and gabion cribbing
in accordance with the Plans, Special Provisions, these Specifications, or as designated by
the Engineer.
8-24.2 Materials
Rock for Rock Wall and Chinking Material 9-13.7(1)
Backfill for Rock Wall 9-13.7(2)
Gabion Cribbing 9-27.3
Wire Mesh Fabric 9-27.3(1)
PVC Coating for Welded Wire Mesh Fabric 9-27.3(2)
Gabion Basket Fasteners 9-27.3(4)
Stone 9-27.3(6)
Construction Geotextile 9-33
Materials for gravity block walls shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
8-24.3(1) Rock Wall
8-24.3(1)A Geometric Tolerances
The completed wall shall meet the following tolerances:
1. Wall batter shall be 6:1 or flatter as specified in the Plans.
2. The exterior slope plane and grade in the finished surface of the wall shall be plus
or minus 6 inches.
3. The maximum void between adjacent rocks shall be 6 inches as measured at the
smallest dimensions of the void within the thickness of the wall.
8-24.3(1)B Excavation
shown in the Plans.
The Contractor shall restrict the excavation limits to the length of rock wall that can be
constructed in 1 day’s Work, except as otherwise noted. The Engineer may permit excavation
beyond the limits that can be completed in 1 day’s Work provided the Contractor either
demonstrates that the excavation will remain stable until the rock wall is completed, or
shores the excavation in accordance with Section 2-09.3(4).
Slope above the rock wall shall be established prior to excavating for the wall.
8-24.3(1)C Foundation Preparation
The foundation for the wall shall be graded as shown in the Plans.
Prior to rock placement, the foundation, if not in rock, shall be compacted as approved
by the Engineer. Any foundation soils found to be unsuitable shall be removed and replaced
Base course rocks shall have full contact with the foundation soils. If necessary, the
excavation shall be shaped to fit the rocks. Rocks may be dropped to shape the ground
provided the rocks do not crack. Cracked rocks shall be replaced and the foundation
regraded to fit the replacement rock.
8-24.3(1)D Construction Geotextile
Construction geotextile shall be of the type, and shall be placed, as shown in the Plans.

Rock and Gravity Block Wall and Gabion Cribbing 8-24
8-24.3(1)E Rock Placement and Backfill

Rocks shall be placed so there are no continuous joint planes in either the vertical or
lateral direction.
Where possible, rocks shall be placed so that the rock shall bear on at least two rocks
below it. Rocks shall be oriented so that flat surface contact points between adjacent rocks are
maximized. Point-to-point contact between adjacent rocks shall be minimized. Each rock in
a course shall be arranged so that the natural irregularities in the rocks key the rocks together
and so that the courses are keyed together.
Rocks shall increase in size from the top of the wall to the bottom at a uniform rate.
The minimum rock sizes, as referenced from the top of the wall, shall be as follows:
Depth From Minimum Rock Size at Depth
Top of Wall (feet) From Top of Wall
6 Three Man
9 Four Man
12 Five Man
Rocks at the top of the wall shall be Two Man or larger.

Where voids larger than 6 inches are present, chinking rock shall be keyed between the
rocks to fill the void.
Backfill for the rock wall shall be placed behind each course and tamped to provide a
stable condition prior to placing rocks for the next successive course.
For rock walls constructed in fills, the fill shall be overbuilt and cut back to construct
the wall.
8-24.3(2) Gravity Block Wall
shown in the Plans. Foundation soils found to be unsuitable shall be removed and replaced in
accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)C. Slope above the gravity block wall shall be established
prior to beginning any excavation for the wall.
Gravity block walls are defined as a wall of modular blocks acting as a gravity wall to
retain soil. The modular blocks may have features designed to interlock the blocks together.
However there shall be no reinforcement of the retained soil nor any reinforcement connection
between the modular blocks and the retained soil.
Gravity block walls shall be constructed as specified in the Special Provisions and as
shown in the Plans.
8-24.3(3) Gabion Cribbing
8-24.3(3)A Foundations
Before placing any gabion cribbing, the Contractor shall excavate the foundation or bed
to the specified grade in accordance with Section 2-09.3(4). Foundation soils found to be
unsuitable shall be removed and replaced in accordance with Section 2-09.3(1)C.
8-24.3(3)B Baskets
Baskets may be fabricated from either woven or welded steel wire; however, a gabion
Structure shall not include both. Baskets may be assembled with either lacing wire or clip
fasteners; however, a perimeter or diaphragm edge shall not include both.
8-24.3(3)C Dimensions
The Contractor shall supply gabion baskets in the lengths and heights the Plans require.
Each length shall be a multiple (double, triple, or greater) of horizontal width. Horizontal
width shall be 36 inches. All baskets from the same manufacturer shall be the same width
and shall be within a tolerance of 5 percent of the manufacturer’s stated sizes.

8-24.3(3)D Fabrication of Baskets

Gabions shall be made so that the sides, ends, lid, and diaphragms can be assembled into
rectangular baskets of the required sizes at the construction site. Common-wall construction
may be used in gabion Structures up to 12 feet high. Common-wall construction includes any
basket where its top serves as the bottom of the one above it, or where one wall also serves
an adjacent basket. When gabion Structures are more than 12 feet high, the baskets shall have
independent sides, ends, top, and bottom.
Each gabion shall be divided by diaphragms into cells the same length as horizontal basket
width. Diaphragms shall be made of the same mesh and gage as the basket body.
All perimeter and diaphragm edges shall be laced or clipped together so that joints are
at least as strong as the body of the mesh itself. The ends of the lacing shall be anchored by
three tight turns around the selvage wire.
8-24.3(3)E Filling Baskets
Baskets shall be filled with stone. The stone shall be placed and compacted to meet the
unit weight requirements of Section 8-24.3(3)F.
The stone shall be placed in compacted layers not more than 14 inches deep. If cross-
connecting wires are required, the Contractor shall adjust the number and depth of layers
so that wires occur between the compacted layers of stone.
8-24.3(3)F Unit Weight Requirements and Test
The unit weight of the filled gabion basket shall be at least 100 pounds per cubic foot.
Should the unit weight be less than 100 pounds per cubic foot, the gabion will be rejected and
the Engineer will require the Contractor to conduct and pass additional unit weight tests before
completing other gabions.
The Contractor shall conduct either of the following unit weight tests to prove the density
of completed gabions:
1. A filled gabion basket shall be selected from the completed Structure and weighed.
2. A gabion basket shall be filled with stone from a loaded truck that has been weighed.
After filling, the truck and unused stone shall be weighed again. The difference
between the two weights shall be used to determine the weight per cubic foot of the
stone in the gabion.
The Contractor shall conduct one unit weight test for each 500 cubic yards of gabions
placed. The Engineer may reduce the specified frequency of these tests provided the
specified minimum unit weight has been consistently achieved.
In conducting unit weight test 1 or 2, the Contractor shall provide and use scales
conforming to Section 1-09.2.
8-24.3(3)G Gabion Cribbing Erection
Each row or tier of baskets shall be reasonably straight and shall conform to alignment
and grade. Hexagonal mesh baskets shall be stretched endwise before filling. The stone
shall be carefully placed in layers, then tamped or vibrated. The last layer of stones shall fill
each basket completely so that the secured lid will rest upon the stones. Each basket shall
be laced securely to all adjacent baskets and its lid then laced or clipped to the sides, ends,
and diaphragms.
All selvage wires of ends of adjacent baskets shall be laced together. The bottom selvage
of the basket being constructed on a previously constructed basket shall be laced to the top
of that basket.
Backfilling behind or around gabions shall conform to Section 2-09.3(1)E.

Rock and Gravity Block Wall and Gabion Cribbing 8-24
8-24.4 Measurement
Rock for rock walls and backfill for rock walls will be measured by the ton of rock
actually placed.
Gabion cribbing will be measured by the calculated neat line volume of gabion baskets
in place, using the manufacturer’s stated dimensions.
Gravity block wall will be measured by the square foot of completed wall in place.
The vertical limits for measurement are from the bottom of the bottom layer of blocks to
the top of the top layer of blocks. The horizontal limits for measurement are from the end
of wall to the end of wall.
Construction geotextile will be measured by the square yard for the surface area
actually covered.
Structure excavation Class B, Structure excavation Class B including haul, and shoring
or extra excavation Class B, will be measured in accordance with Section 2-09.4.
8-24.5 Payment
“Rock for Rock Wall”, per ton.
The unit Contract price per ton for “Rock for Rock Wall” shall also include furnishing and
installing chinking materials.
“Backfill for Rock Wall”, per ton.
“Gabion Cribbing”, per cubic yard.
“Gravity Block Wall”, per square foot.
“Construction Geotextile”, per square yard.

8-25 Glare Screen
8-25 Glare Screen
8-25.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and constructing glare screen of the types specified,
in accordance with the Plans, these Specifications, the Standard Plans, and as ordered by
the Engineer in accordance with Section 1-04.4.
Glare screen consists of diamond woven wire mesh fence of aluminum, galvanized
or aluminum coated steel wire, fabricated and placed to reduce glare from headlights
of opposing traffic or other adjacent light sources.
8-25.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the requirements of Section 9-16.6.
8-25.3(1) Glare Screen Fabric
Glare screen fabric shall be placed on the face of the posts designated by the Engineer.
On curves, the fabric shall be placed on the face of the post that is on the outside of the curve.
The fabric shall be stretched taut and securely fastened to the posts. Fastening to end,
corner, and pull posts shall be with stretcher bars and fabric bands spaced at 1-foot intervals.
The fabric shall be cut and each span attached independently at all pull and corner posts.
Fabric shall be securely fastened to line and brace posts with tie wires, metal bands, or other
approved methods, attached at 14-inch intervals. The top and bottom of the fabric shall be
fastened to the tension wire with hog rings spaced at 24-inch intervals.
Rolls of wire fabric shall be joined by weaving a single strand into the end of the rolls
to form a continuous mesh.
8-25.3(2) Slats
The slats shall be fastened into the weave by using staples, screws, or other methods as
approved by the Engineer. Allowing the tension of the mesh to hold the slats in place will
not be permitted.
Slats broken or split during construction shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor
8-25.3(3) Posts
Posts shall be constructed in accordance with the Standard Plans and applicable provisions
of Section 8-12.3(1)A.
Posts for Type 1 Design A shall be bolted to the beam guardrail posts as detailed in the
Standard Plans. Drilling of the guardrail posts shall be done in such a manner to ensure
that the glare screen posts are set plumb and centered over the guardrail posts unless
otherwise directed.
All round posts for Type 1 Design B and Type 2 glare screen shall be fitted with a
watertight top securely fastened to the post. Line posts shall have tops designed to carry
the top tension wire.
8-25.3(4) Tension Wire
Tension wires shall be attached to the posts as detailed in the Standard Plans or as
8-25.4 Measurement
Measurement of glare screen will be by the linear foot of completed glare screen for the
particular type and design specified.
8-25.5 Payment
“Glare Screen Type 1 Design ____”, per linear foot.
“Glare Screen Type 2”, per linear foot.
Vacant 8-26
8-26 Vacant

8-27 Vacant
8-27 Vacant

Vacant 8-28
8-28 Vacant

8-29 Wire Mesh Slope Protection

8-29.1 Description
This Work consists of furnishing and installing the anchors and the wire mesh slope
protection in accordance with these Specifications and the details shown in the Plans and
in conformity with the lines and dimensions shown in the Plans or specified by the Engineer.
8-29.2 Materials
Materials shall meet the requirements of Section 9-16.4.
The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting of a wire mesh slope
protection plan. The wire mesh slope protection plan shall include the following:
1. Plan sheets for anchor layout and installation, and the equipment and process used to
confirm the capacity of the constructed anchors including the calibration data for the
stressing devices used to proof test the anchors, as completed by an independent testing
laboratory within 60 calendar days of the wire mesh slope work.
2. Working drawings for the temporary yoke or load frame to be used for anchor proof
testing in accordance with Section 6-01.9.
3. Plans and details for assembling wire mesh and erecting the assembled mesh on
the slope.
All the costs for the Work required for Submittals shall be included in the unit Bid price
detailed in Section 8-29.5.
8-29.3(2) Anchors
The Contractor shall install anchors of the type shown in the Plans and in conformance
with the layout shown in the wire mesh protection plan. The spacing and number of the
anchors and wire ropes as shown in the Plans are approximate only, and upon review of
the wire mesh slope protection plan, the Engineer may arrange the spacing to better hold
the wire mesh against the slope. Backfill material shall be thoroughly compacted with a
mechanical compactor.
The Contractor shall proof test up to 25 percent of the anchors in vertical pullout to the
minimum allowable anchor capacity specified in the Plans. Proof testing of anchors shall be
performed against a temporary yoke or load frame. No part of the temporary yoke or load
frame shall bear within three feet of the anchor being tested. For vertical pullout proof testing,
an anchor is acceptable if it sustains the specified capacity for 10 minutes with no loss of load.
Anchors that fail this criterion shall be replaced and retested. If more than three anchors fail,
the Contractor shall proof test all anchors.
8-29.3(3) Wire Rope
All wire rope loops shall include a thimble. No wire rope splicing will be allowed.
8-29.3(4) Wire Mesh
The wire mesh shall be fastened to the completed wire rope assembly as shown in the
Plans. High tensile steel fasteners on the vertical seams shall be staggered across width of
the seam. Horizontal splices joining 2 rolls of mesh shall be made by overlapping the mesh
approximately 3 feet and either weaving 3 rows of lacing wires through every mesh opening
or using 4 rows of high tensile steel fasteners placed on approximately 3-inch spacing. All
top and bottom laps shall be made by folding the mesh to the outside, away from the slope, to
avoid the possibility of falling material hanging up in the folds. The bottom of the mesh shall
be located as shown in the Plans. The ends of all lacing wires shall be secured to the mesh
with a minimum of 1½-turns.

Wire Mesh Slope Protection 8-29
The wire mesh shall not be tensioned in any direction, but is to remain loose so as
to increase its dampening effect on rolling rocks. The Contractor shall use care in the
handling and installing of the wire mesh and wire rope. Any mesh or wire rope damaged
due to the Contractor’s operations shall be replaced by the Contractor at no expense to the
Contracting Agency.
8-29.4 Measurement
Measurement of anchors will be per each for the completed anchor. Anchor types will not
be differentiated.
Wire mesh slope protection will be measured by the square foot of wire mesh erected on
the slope. There will be no deduction made for overlapping the wire mesh material as required
for splices or for coverage due to variations in the slope or ground conditions.
8-29.5 Payment
“Wire Mesh Slope Protection Anchor”, per each.
The unit Contract price per each for “Wire Mesh Slope Protection Anchor” shall be full
payment for all costs for the Work described in Sections 8-29.3(1) and 8-29.3(2).
“Wire Mesh Slope Protection”, per square foot.
The unit Contract price per square foot for “Wire Mesh Slope Protection” shall be full
payment for all costs for the Work described in Sections 8-29.3(3) and 8-29.3(4).


Division 9 Materials
9-00 Definitions and Tests
9-00.1 Fracture
“Fractured aggregate is defined as an angular, rough, or broken surface of an aggregate
particle created by crushing, or by other means. A face is considered a “fractured face”
whenever one-half or more of the projected area, when viewed normal to that face, is fractured
with sharp and well-defined edges: this excludes small nicks.
9-00.2 Wood Waste
Wood waste is defined as all material which, after drying to constant weight, has a specific
gravity of less than 1.0.
9-00.3 Test for Mass of Galvanizing
At the option of the Engineer, the weight of zinc in ounce per square foot required by the
various galvanizing Specifications may be determined by an approved magnetic thickness
gage suitably checked and demonstrated for accuracy, in lieu of the other methods specified.
9-00.4 Sieves for Testing Purposes
Test sieves shall be made of either: (1) woven wire cloth conforming to AASHTO
Designation M 92 or ASTM Designation E 11, or (2) square-hole, perforated plates
conforming to ASTM Designation E 323.
9-00.5 Dust Ratio
The dust ratio is defined as the percent of material passing the No. 200 sieve divided by
the percent of material passing the No. 40 sieve.
9-00.6 Sand/Silt Ratio
The sand/silt ratio is defined as the percent of material passing the No. 10 sieve divided
by the percent of material passing the No. 200 sieve.
9-00.7 Galvanized Hardware, AASHTO M232
An acceptable alternate to hot-dip galvanizing in accordance with AASHTO M 232 will
be zinc coatings mechanically deposited in accordance with AASHTO M 298, providing the
minimum thickness of zinc coating is not less than that specified in AASHTO M232, and the
process will not produce hydrogen embrittlement in the base metal. Sampling and testing will
be made by the Engineer in accordance with commonly recognized national standards and
methods used in the laboratory of the Department of Transportation.
9-00.8 Sand Equivalent
The sand equivalent will be the average of duplicate determinations from a single
sample. The sand equivalent sample will be prepared in accordance with the FOP for
AASHTO T 176.
For acceptance, there must be a clear line of demarcation. If no clear line of demarcation
has formed at the end of a 30-minute sedimentation period, the material will be considered
as failing to meet the minimum specified sand equivalent.
9-00.9 Field Test Procedures
Field test procedures may be either a Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) or a Field
Operating Procedure (FOP) for an AASHTO, ASTM, or WAQTC test procedure. A Field
Operating Procedure is a technically equivalent abridged version of an AASHTO, ASTM, or
WAQTC test procedure for use in field conditions. References to manuals containing all of
these tests and procedures can be found in Section 1-06.2(1).

9-01 Cement
9-01 Cement
9-01.1 Types of Cement
Cement shall be classified as portland cement, blended hydraulic cement, or rapid
hardening hydraulic cement.
9-01.2 Specifications
9-01.2(1) Portland Cement
Portland cement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M85 or ASTM C150 Types I, II,
or III portland cement, except that the cement shall not contain more than 0.75 percent alkalies
by weight calculated as Na20 plus 0.658 K20 and the content of Tricalcium aluminate (C3A)
shall not exceed 8 percent by weight.
The time of setting shall be determined by the Vicat Test method in accordance with
AASHTO T 131 or ASTM C191.
9-01.2(1)A Low Alkali Cement
When low alkali portland cement is required, the percentage of alkalies in the cement shall
not exceed 0.60 percent by weight calculated as Na20 plus 0.658 K20. This limitation shall
apply to all types of portland cement.
9-01.2(1)B Blended Hydraulic Cement
Blended hydraulic cement shall be either Type IP(X)(MS), Type IS(X)(MS), Type
IT(PX)(LY), Type IT(SX)(LY), or Type IL(X) cement conforming to AASHTO M240 or
ASTM C595, except that the portland cement used to produce blended hydraulic cement shall
not contain more than 0.75 percent alkalies by weight calculated as Na20 plus 0.658 K20 and
shall meet the following additional requirements:
1. Type IP(X)(MS) – Portland-Pozzolan Cement where (X) equals the targeted percentage
of fly ash, the fly ash is limited to a maximum of 35 percent by weight of the
cementitious material; (MS) indicates moderate sulfate resistance.
2. Type IS(X)(MS) – Portland Blast- Furnace Slag Cement, where: (X) equals the
targeted percentage of ground granulated blast-furnace slag, the ground granulated
blast furnace slag is limited to a maximum of 50 percent by weight of the cementitious
material; (MS) indicates moderate sulfate resistance.
3. Type IT(PX)(LY), where (PX) equals the targeted percentage of pozzolan, and (LY)
equals the targeted percentage of limestone. The pozzolan (PX) shall be Class F fly
ash and shall be a maximum of 35 percent. (LY) shall be a minimum of 5 percent
and a maximum of 15 percent. Separate testing of each source of fly ash each at each
proposed replacement level shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM C1012.
Expansion at 180 days shall be 0.10 percent or less.
4. Type IT(SX)(LY), where (SX) equals the targeted percentage of slag cement, and (LY)
equals the targeted percentage of limestone. (SX) shall be a maximum of 50 percent.
(LY) shall be a minimum of 5 percent and a maximum of 15 percent. Separate testing
of each source of slag at each proposed replacement level shall be conducted in
accordance with ASTM C1012. Expansion at 180 days shall be 0.10 percent or less.
5. Type IL(X), where (X) equals the targeted percentage of limestone, and shall be a
minimum of 5 percent and a maximum of 15 percent. Testing shall be conducted in
accordance with ASTM C1012. Expansion at 180 days shall be 0.10 percent or less.
The source and weight of the fly ash or ground granulated blast furnace slag shall be
certified on the cement mill test report or cement certificate of analysis and shall be reported as
a percent by weight of the total cementitious material. The fly ash or ground granulated blast
furnace slag constituent content in the finished cement will not vary more than plus or minus
5 percent by weight of the finished cement from the certified value.
Fly ash shall meet the requirements of Section 9-23.9 of these Standard Specifications.

Cement 9-01
Ground granulated blast furnace slag shall meet the requirements of Section 9-23.10 of
these Standard Specifications.
Limestone shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M240 or ASTM C595.
9-01.2(2) Rapid Hardening Hydraulic Cement
Rapid hardening hydraulic cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 1600.
9-01.3 Tests and Acceptance
Cement may be accepted by the Engineer based on the cement mill test report number or
cement certificate of analysis number indicating full conformance to the Specifications. All
shipments of the cement to the Contractor or concrete supplier shall identify the applicable
cement mill test report number or cement certificate of analysis number and shall be provided
by the Contractor or concrete supplier with all concrete deliveries.
Cement producers/suppliers that certify portland cement or blended hydraulic cement
shall participate in the Cement Acceptance Program as described in WSDOT Standard
Practice QC 1. Rapid hardening hydraulic cement producers/suppliers are not required to
participate in WSDOT Standard Practice QC 1.
Each mixing facility or plant utilizing portland cement shall be equipped with a suitable
means or device for obtaining a representative sample of the cement. The device shall enable
the sample to be readily taken in proximity to the cement weigh hopper and from a container
or conveyor holding only cement.
Cement may be tested using samples taken at the job site by the Engineer for submission
to the State Materials Laboratory for testing.
9-01.4 Storage on the Work Site
At the request of the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide test data to show that cement
stored on site for longer than 60 days meets the requirements of Section 9-01. Tests shall
be conducted on samples taken from the site in the presence of the Engineer. Test results
that meet the requirements of Section 9-01 shall be valid for 60 days from the date of
sampling, after which the Engineer may require further testing.

9-02 Bituminous Materials

9-02.1 Asphalt Material, General
Asphalt furnished under these Specifications shall not have been distilled at a temperature
high enough to produce flecks of carbonaceous matter, and upon arrival at the Work, shall
show no signs of separation into lighter and heavier components.
The Asphalt Supplier of Performance Graded Asphalt Binder (PGAB) and Emulsified
Asphalt shall have a Quality Control Plan (QCP) in accordance with WSDOT QC 2 “Standard
Practice for Asphalt Suppliers That Certify Performance Graded and Emulsified Asphalts”.
The Asphalt Supplier’s QCP shall be submitted and approved by the WSDOT State Materials
Laboratory. Any change to the QCP will require a new QCP to be submitted. The Asphalt
Supplier of PGAB and Emulsified Asphalt shall certify through the Bill of Lading that the
PGAB or Emulsified Asphalt meets the Specification requirements of the Contract.
9-02.1(1) Vacant
9-02.1(2) Vacant
9-02.1(3) Vacant
9-02.1(4) Performance Graded Asphalt Binder (PGAB)
PGAB meeting the requirements of AASHTO M320 Table 1 of the grades specified in
the Contract shall be used in the production of HMA. For HMA with greater than 20 percent
RAP by total weight of HMA or any amount of RAS the new asphalt binder, recycling agent
and recovered asphalt (RAP and/or RAS) when blended in the proportions of the mix design
shall meet the PGAB requirements of AASHTO M320 Table 1 for the grade of asphalt binder
specified by the Contract.
In addition to AASHTO M320 Table 1 specification requirements, all performance grade
(PG) asphalt binders shall meet the following requirements:
Additional Requirements by
Performance Grade (PG) Asphalt Binders
Property Test Method PG 58-22 PG 64-22 PG 64-28 PG 70-22 PG 70-28 PG 76-28
RTFO Residue: AASHTO T 3012 60% Min. 60% Min. 60% Min. 60% Min.
Elastic Recovery1
1Elastic Recovery @ 25°C ± 0.5°C.
2Specimen conditioned in accordance with AASHTO T 240 – RTFO.

Bituminous Materials 9-02
The Direct Tension Test (AASHTO T 314) of M 320 is not a Specification requirement.
The recycling agent used to rejuvenate the recovered asphalt from recycled asphalt
pavement (RAP) and reclaimed asphalt shingles (RAS) shall meet the specifications in
Table 1:
Table 1
RA 1 RA 2 RA 25
ASTM Test
Test Method Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Viscosity @ 140˚F cSt D2170 or D2171 50 150 200 800 1000 4000
Flashpoint COC, ˚F D92 400 400 400
Saturates, Wt. % D2007 30 30 30
Specific Gravity D70 or D2198 Report Report Report
Tests on Residue from D2872
RTFC
Viscosity Ratio1 3 3 3
Mass Change ± % 4 4 4
1Viscosity Ratio = RTFC Viscosity @ 140˚F, cSt
Original Viscosity @ 140˚F, cSt
9-02.1(4)A Vacant
9-02.1(5) Vacant
9-02.1(6) Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
Cationic Emulsified Asphalt Table
Type Rapid Setting Medium Setting Slow Setting
AASHTO CRS-1 CRS-2 CMS-2S CMS-2 CMS-2h CSS-1 CSS-1h
Test
Grade Method Min. Max Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Tests on Emulsified Asphalts:
Viscosity SFS @ 77ºF (25°C) T 59 20 100 20 100
Viscosity SFS @ 122ºF (50°C) T 59 20 100 150 400 50 450 50 450 50 450
Storage stability test 1 day % T 59 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Demulsibility 35 ml
0.8% sodium dioctyl
sulfosuccinate, %a T 59 40 40
Particle charge test T 59 Pos Pos Pos Pos Pos Posb Posb
Sieve Test, % T 59 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
Cement mixing test, % T 59 2.0 2.0
Distillation:
Oil distillate by vol. of
T 59 3 1.5 3 20 12 12
emulsions %
Residue, % T 59 60 65 60 65 65 57 57
Tests on Residue From Distillation Tests:
Penetration, 77ºF (25°C) T 49 100 250 100 250 100 250 100 250 40 90 100 250 40 90
Ductility, 77ºF (25°C)
T 51 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
5 cm/min., cm
Solubility in trichloroethylene, % T 44 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5 97.5
aThe demulsibility test shall be made within 30 days from date of shipment.
bIf the particle charge test for CSS-1 and CSS-1h is inconclusive, material having a maximum pH value of 6.7 will be acceptable.

9-02.1(6)A Polymerized Cationic Emulsified Asphalt CRS-2P

CRS-2P shall be a polymerized cationic emulsified asphalt. The polymer shall be milled
into the asphalt or emulsion during the manufacturing of the emulsified asphalt. CRS-2P shall
meet the following requirements:
AASHTO Specifications
Test Method Minimum Maximum
Viscosity @122ºF, SFS T 59 100 400
Storage Stability 1 day % T 59 1
Demulsibility 35 ml. 0.8% Dioctyl Sodium Sulfosuccinate T 59 40
Particle Charge T 59 positive
Sieve Test % T 59 0.30
Distillation
Oil distillate by vol. of emulsion % T 591 0 3
Residue T 591 65
Tests on the Residue From Distillation
Penetration @77ºF T 49 100 250
Elastic Recovery % T 3012 50
1Distillation modified to use 300 grams of emulsified asphalt heated to 350ºF ± 9ºF and maintained for 20 minutes.
2The residue material for T 301 shall come from the modified distillation per note 1.
9-02.1(7) Vacant
9-02.1(8) Flexible Bituminous Pavement Marker Adhesive
Flexible bituminous pavement marker adhesive is a hot melt thermoplastic bituminous
material used for bonding raised pavement markers and recessed pavement markers to
the pavement.
The adhesive material shall conform to the following requirements when prepared in
accordance with WSDOT SOP 318 in the WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01:
Property Test Method Requirement
Penetration, 77ºF, 100g, 5 sec, dmm AASHTO T 49 30 Max.
Softening Point, F AASHTO T 53 200 Min.
Rotational Thermosel Viscosity, cP, #27 spindle, 20 RPM, 400ºF AASHTO T 316 5000 Max.
Ductility, 77ºF, 5 cm/minute, cm AASHTO T 51 15 Min.
Ductility, 39.2ºF, 1 cm/minute, cm AASHTO T 51 5 Min.
Flexibility, 1”, 20ºF, 90 deg. Bend, 10 sec., ⅛"× 1" × 6" specimen ASTM D31111 Pass
Bond Pull-Off Strength WSDOT T 426 Greater than 50 psi
1Flexibility
test is modified by bending specimen through an arc of 90 degrees at a uniform rate in 10 seconds over a 1-inch
diameter mandrel.
9-02.1(9) Vacant

Bituminous Materials 9-02
9-02.2 Sampling and Acceptance

9-02.2(1) Certification of Shipment
Bituminous materials may be accepted by the Engineer based on the asphalt binder
supplier’s Certification of Compliance incorporated in their Bill of Lading. The Certification
will include a statement certifying Specification compliance for the product shipped. Failure
to provide this Certification with the shipment shall be cause for rejection of the material.
The following information is required on the Bill of Lading:
1. Date
2. Contract Number and/or Project Name
3. Grade of Commodity and Certification of Compliance
4. Anti-strip Type
5. Percent Anti-strip
6. Mass (Net Tons)
7. Volume (Gross Gallons)
8. Temperature of Load (F)
9. Bill of Lading Number
10. Consignee and Delivery Point
11. Signature of Supplier’s Representative
12. Supplier (Bill of Lading Generator)
13. Supplier’s Address
14. Refiner
15. Refiner’s Location
The Bill of Lading shall be supplied at the time of shipment of each truck load, truck and
trailer, or other lot of asphalt binder. In addition to the copies the Contractor requires, one copy
of the Bill of Lading including the Certification Statement shall be sent with the shipment for
agency use.
9-02.2(2) Samples
When requested by the Engineer, the asphalt supplier shall ship, by prepaid express or
U.S. mail, samples of asphalt that represent current production.
9-02.3 Temperature of Asphalt
The temperature of paving asphalts in storage tanks when loaded for transporting shall
not exceed the maximum temperature recommended by the asphalt binder manufacturer.
9-02.4 Anti-Stripping Additive
Anti-stripping additive shall be a product listed in the current WSDOT Qualified Products
List (QPL).
9-02.5 Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) Additive
Additives for WMA shall be approved by the Engineer.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03 Aggregates
9-03.1 Aggregates for Portland Cement Concrete
Portland cement concrete aggregates shall be manufactured from ledge rock, talus, or
sand and gravel in accordance with the provisions of Section 3-01. Reclaimed aggregate
may be used if it complies with the specifications for Portland Cement Concrete. Reclaimed
aggregate is aggregate that has been recovered from plastic concrete by washing away the
cementitious materials.
The material from which concrete aggregate is manufactured shall meet the following
test requirements:
Los Angeles Wear, 500 Rev. 35 max.
Degradation Factor (Structural and Paving Concrete) 30 min.
Degradation Factor (Other as defined in 6-02.3(2)B 20 min.
Aggregates tested in accordance with AASHTO T 303 with expansion greater than
0.20 percent are Alkali Silica Reactive (ASR) and will require mitigating measures.
Aggregates tested in accordance with ASTM C1293 with expansion greater than 0.04 percent
are Alkali Silica Reactive (ASR) and will require mitigating measures.
Aggregates for use in Commercial Concrete as defined in Section 6-02.3(2)B shall not
require mitigation.
Mitigating measures for aggregates with expansions from 0.21 to 0.45 percent, when tested
in accordance with AASHTO T 303, may be accomplished by using low alkali cement as per
Section 9-01.2(1)A or by using 25 percent Class F fly ash by total weight of the cementitious
materials. The Contractor may submit an alternative mitigating measure through the Engineer
to the State Materials Laboratory for approval along with evidence in the form of test results
from ASTM C1567 that demonstrate the mitigation when used with the proposed aggregate
controls expansion to 0.20 percent or less. The agency may test the proposed ASR mitigation
measure to verify its effectiveness. In the event of a dispute, the agency’s results will prevail.
Mitigating measures for aggregates with expansions greater than 0.45 percent when
tested in accordance with AASHTO T 303 shall include the use of low alkali cement per
Section 9-01.2(1)A and may include the use of fly ash, lithium compound admixtures, ground
granulated blast furnace slag or other material as approved by the Engineer. The Contractor
shall submit evidence in the form of test results from ASTM C1567 through the Engineer to
the State Materials Laboratory that demonstrate the proposed mitigation when used with the
aggregates proposed will control the potential expansion to 0.20 percent or less before the
aggregate source may be used in concrete. The agency may test the proposed ASR mitigation
measure to verify its effectiveness. In the event of a dispute, the agency’s results will prevail.
The use of fly ash that does not meet the requirements of Table 2 of AASHTO M295 may
be approved for use. The Contractor shall submit test results according to ASTM C1567
through the Engineer to the State Materials Laboratory that demonstrate that the proposed fly
ash when used with the proposed aggregates and portland cement will control the potential
expansion to 0.20 percent or less before the fly ash and aggregate sources may be used in
concrete. The Contracting Agency may test the proposed ASR mitigation measure to verify its
effectiveness. In the event of a dispute, the Contracting Agency’s results will prevail.
ASTM C1293 sampling and testing must be coordinated through the WSDOT State
Materials Laboratory, Documentation Section utilizing the ASA (Aggregate Source Approval)
process. Cost of sampling, testing, and processing will be borne by the source owner.
9-03.1(2) Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete
Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand or manufactured sand, or combinations thereof,
accepted by the Engineer, having hard, strong, durable particles free from adherent coating.
Fine aggregate shall be washed thoroughly to meet the specifications.

Aggregates 9-03
9-03.1(2)A Deleterious Substances

The amount of deleterious substances in the washed aggregate shall be tested in accordance
with AASHTO M 6 and not exceed the following values:
Material finer than No. 200 Sieve 2.5 percent by weight
Clay lumps and friable particles 3.0 percent by weight
Coal and lignite 0.25 percent by weight
Particles of specific gravity less than 2.00 1.0 percent by weight
Organic impurities shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 21 by the glass color
standard procedure and results darker than organic plate no. 3 shall be rejected. A darker color
results from AASHTO T 21 may be used provided that when tested for the effect of organic
impurities on strength of mortar, the relative strength at 7 days, calculated in accordance with
AASHTO T 71, is not less than 95 percent.
9-03.1(2)B Grading
Fine aggregate shall be graded to conform to the following requirements expressed
as percentages by weight:
Class 1 Class 2
Percent Passing Percent Passing
Sieve Size Min. Max. Min. Max.
⅜″ 99 100 99 100
No. 4 95 100 95 100
No. 8 68 86
No. 16 47 65 45 80
No. 30 27 42
No. 50 9 20 10 30
No. 100 0 7 2 10
No. 200 0 2.5 0 2.5
For fine aggregate Class 1, individual test variations under the minimum or over the
maximum will be permitted as follows, provided the average of three consecutive tests is
within the Specification limits:
Permissible percent of
Sieve Size Variation in Individual Tests
No. 30 and coarser 2
No. 50 and finer 0.5
Within the gradation limits for fine aggregate Class 2, uniformity of gradation shall be
limited to a range of plus or minus 0.20 of the reference fineness modulus. The reference
fineness modulus shall be determined from a representative sample from the proposed source
as submitted by the Contractor.
9-03.1(3) Vacant

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.1(4) Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete

Coarse aggregate for concrete shall consist of gravel, crushed stone, or combinations
thereof having hard, strong, durable pieces free from adherent coatings. Coarse aggregate shall
be washed to meet the specifications.
The amount of deleterious substances in the washed aggregate shall be tested in accordance
with AASHTO M 80 and not exceed the following values:
Material finer than No. 200 1.01 percent by weight
Clay lumps and Friable Particles 2.0 percent by weight
Shale 2.0 percent by weight
Wood waste 0.05 percent by weight
Coal and Lignite 0.5 percent by weight
Sum of Clay Lumps, Friable Particles, and Chert
(Less Than 2.40 specific gravity SSD) 3.0 percent by weight
1If the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is free of clay and shale, this percentage
may be increased to 1.5.
9-03.1(4)B Vacant
9-03.1(4)C Grading
Coarse aggregate for portland cement concrete when separated by means of laboratory
sieves shall conform to one or more of the following gradings as called for elsewhere in these
Specifications, Special Provisions, or in the Plans:
AASHTO AASHTO AASHTO AASHTO AASHTO AASHTO
Passing Grading Grading Grading Grading Grading Grading
No. 467 No. 4 No. 57 No. 67 No. 7 No. 8
Sieve Size Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
2″ 99 100 99 100
1½″ 95 100 90 100 99 100
1″ 20 55 95 100 99 100
¾″ 35 70 0 15 90 100 99 100
½″ 25 60 90 100 99 100
⅜″ 10 30 0 5 20 55 40 70 85 100
No. 4 0 5 0 10 0 10 0 15 10 30
No. 8 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 10
No. 16 0 5
Where coarse aggregate size 467 is used, the aggregate may be furnished in at least two
separate sizes. Coarse aggregate shall contain no piece of greater size than two times the
maximum sieve size for the specified grading measured along the line of greatest dimension.
9-03.1(5) Combined Aggregate Gradation for Portland Cement Concrete
As an alternative to using the fine aggregate sieve grading requirements in Section
9-03.1(2)B, and coarse aggregate sieve grading requirements in Section 9-03.1(4)C,
a combined aggregate gradation conforming to the requirements of Section 9-03.1(5)A may
be used.
The amount of deleterious substances in the washed aggregates ⅜ inch or larger shall not
exceed the values specified in Section 9-03.1(4)A and for aggregates smaller than ⅜ inch they
shall not exceed the values specified in Section 9-03.1(2)A.

Aggregates 9-03
9-03.1(5)B Grading
The combined aggregate shall conform to the following requirements based upon the
nominal maximum aggregate size.
Nominal Maximum
Aggregate Size 3 2-½ 2 1-½ 1 ¾ ½ ⅜ No. 4
3½″ 99-100
3″ 93-100* 99-100
2½″ 92-100* 99-100
2″ 76-90 90-100* 99-100
1½″ 66-79 71-88 87-100* 99-100
1″ 54-66 58-73 64-83 82-100* 99-100
¾″ 47-58 51-64 55-73 62-88 87-100* 99-100
½″ 38-48 41-54 45-61 57-83 81-100* 99-100
⅜″ 33-43 35-47 39-54 43-64 60-88 86-100* 99-100
No. 4 22-31 24-34 26-39 29-47 34-54 41-64 48-73 68-100*
No. 8 15-23 16-25 17-29 19-34 22-39 27-47 31-54 39-73
No. 16 9-17 10-18 11-21 12-25 14-29 17-34 20-39 24-54 28-73
No. 30 5-12 6-14 6-15 7-18 8-21 9-25 11-29 13-39 16-54
No. 50 2-9 2-10 3-11 3-14 3-15 4-18 5-21 6-29 7-39
No. 100 0-7 0-7 0-8 0-10 0-11 0-14 0-15 0-21 0-29
No. 200 0-2.0 0-2.0 0-2.0 0-2.0 0-2.0 0-2.0 0-2.0 0-2.0 0-2.5
*Nominal Maximum Size
Nominal maximum size for concrete aggregate is defined as the smallest standard sieve
opening through which the entire amount of the aggregate is permitted to pass. Standard sieve
sizes shall be those listed in ASTM C33.
The Contracting Agency may sample each aggregate component prior to introduction to
the weigh batcher or as otherwise determined by the Engineer. Each component will be sieve
analyzed separately in accordance with WSDOT FOP for WAQTC/AASHTO T 27/T 11. All
aggregate components will be mathematically re-combined by the proportions (percent of total
aggregate by weight), provided by the Contractor on Concrete Mix Design Form 350-040.
9-03.2 Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement Mortar
Fine aggregate for portland cement mortar shall consist of sand or other inert materials,
or combinations thereof, approved by the Engineer, having hard, strong, durable particles
free from adherent coating. Fine aggregate shall be washed thoroughly to remove clay, loam,
alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious matter.
The amount of deleterious substances in the washed aggregate shall not exceed the limit
specified in Section 9-03.1(2)A.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.2(1) Grading for Surface Finishing Applications

as percentage by weight:
Percent Passing
Natural Sand Manufactured Sand
Sieve Min. Max. Min. Max.
No. 4 99 100 99 100
No. 8 90 100 90 100
No. 16 60 90 60 90
No. 30 35 70 35 70
No. 50 10 30 20 40
No. 100 0 5 10 25
No. 200 0 3 0 10
9-03.2(2) Grading for Masonry Mortar Applications

as percent age by weight:
Percent Passing
Natural Sand Manufactured Sand
Sieve Min. Max. Min. Max.
No. 4 99 100 99 100
No. 8 95 100 95 100
No. 16 70 100 70 100
No. 30 40 75 40 75
No. 50 10 35 20 40
No. 100 2 15 10 25
No. 200 0 5 0 10
9-03.3 Vacant
9-03.4 Aggregate for Bituminous Surface Treatment
Aggregate for bituminous surface treatment shall be manufactured from ledge rock, talus,
or gravel, in accordance with Section 3-01, which meets the following test requirements:
Los Angeles Wear, 500 Rev. 35 percent max.
Degradation Factor 30 min.
9-03.4(2) Grading and Quality
Aggregate for bituminous surface treatment shall conform to the requirements in the table
below for grading and quality. The particular type or grading to be used shall be as shown in
the Plans. All percentages are by weight.
The material shall meet the requirements for grading and quality when placed in hauling
vehicles for delivery to the roadway, or during manufacture and placement into a temporary
stockpile. The exact point of acceptance will be determined by the Engineer.

Aggregates 9-03
Crushed Screening percent Passing

¾″-½″ ⅝″-No. 4 ½″-No. 4 ⅜″-No. 4 No. 4-0
1″ 99-100
¾″ 95-100 99-100
⅝″ 95-100 99-100
½″ 0-20 90-100 99-100
⅜″ 0-5 60-85 70-90 99-100
No. 4 0-10 0-3 0-5 76-100
No. 10 0-3 30-60
No. 200 0-1.5 0-1.5 0-1.5 0-1.5 0-10.0
% fracture, by weight, min. 90 90 90 90 90
The fracture requirement shall be at least one fractured face and will apply to the combined
aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 335.
The finished product shall be clean, uniform in quality, and free from wood, bark, roots,
and other deleterious materials.
Crushed screenings shall be substantially free from adherent coatings. The presence of a
thin, firmly adhering film of weathered rock shall not be considered as coating unless it exists
on more than 50 percent of the surface area of any size between successive laboratory sieves.
The portion of aggregate for bituminous surface treatment retained on a No. 4 sieve shall
not contain more than 0.1 percent deleterious materials by weight.
Fine aggregate used for choke stone applications meeting the grading requirements of
Section 9-03.1(2)B may be substituted for the No. 4-0 gradation.
9-03.5 Vacant
9-03.6 Vacant
9-03.7 Vacant
9-03.8 Aggregates for Hot Mix Asphalt
Preliminary testing of aggregates for source approval shall meet the following
test requirements:
Degradation Factor, Wearing Course 30 min.
Degradation Factor, Other Courses 20 min.
Sand Equivalent 45 min.
Aggregate sources that have 100 percent of the mineral material passing the No. 4 sieve
shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of the total weight of aggregate.
Aggregates shall be uniform in quality, substantially free from wood, roots, bark,
extraneous materials, and adherent coatings. The presence of a thin, firmly adhering film of
weathered rock will not be considered as coating unless it exists on more than 50 percent of
the surface area of any size between consecutive laboratory sieves.
Aggregate removed from deposits contaminated with various types of wood waste shall be
washed, processed, selected, or otherwise treated to remove sufficient wood waste so that the
oven dried material retained on a No. 4 sieve shall not contain more than 0.1 percent by weight
of material with a specific gravity less than 1.0.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.8(2) HMA Test Requirements

Aggregate for HMA shall meet the following test requirements:
1. Vacant
2. The fracture requirements for the combined coarse aggregate shall apply to the material
retained on the No. 4 sieve and above, when tested in accordance with FOP for
AASHTO T 335.
ESAL’s (millions) # Fractured Faces % Fracture
< 10 1 or more 90
≥ 10 2 or more 90
3. The uncompacted void content for the combined fine aggregate is tested in accordance
with FOP for AASHTO T 304, Method A. The minimum percent voids shall be as
required in the following table:
Traffic HMA Evaluation
ESAL’s (millions) Statistical Commercial
<3 40 40
≥3 44 40
4. The minimum sand equivalent for the aggregate shall be 45.

The mix design shall produce HMA mixtures when combined with RAP, RAS, coarse and
fine aggregate within the limits set forth in Section 9-03.8(6) and mixed in the laboratory with
the designated grade of asphalt binder, using the Superpave gyratory compactor in accordance
with FOP for AASHTO T 312, and at the required gyrations for N initial, N design, and N
maximum with the following properties:
HMA Class
⅜ inch ½ inch ¾ inch 1 inch
Mix Criteria Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA), % 15.0 14.0 13.0 12.0
Voids Filled With Asphalt (VFA), %
ESAL’s (millions) VFA
< 0.3 70 80 70 80 70 80 67 80
0.3 to < 3 65 78 65 78 65 78 65 78
3 to < 10 73 76 65 75 65 75 65 75
10 to < 30 73 76 65 75 65 75 65 75
≥ 30 73 76 65 75 65 75 65 75
Dust/Asphalt Ratio 0.6 1.6 0.6 1.6 0.6 1.6 0.6 1.6
Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing, FOP for
AASHTO T 324 10 10 10 10
Rut Depth (mm) @ 15,000 Passes
Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing, FOP for
AASHTO T 324
15,000 15,000 15,000 15,000
Minimum Number of Passes with no Stripping
Inflection Point
Indirect Tensile (IDT) Strength (psi) of
Bituminous Materials 175 175 175 175
FOP for ASTM D6931

Aggregates 9-03
ESAL’s (millions) N initial N design N maximum

< 0.3 ≤ 91.5 96.0 ≤ 98.0
% Gmm 0.3 to < 3 ≤ 90.5 96.0 ≤ 98.0
≥3 ≤ 89.0 96.0 ≤ 98.0
< 0.3 6 50 75
Gyratory Compaction 0.3 to < 3 7 75 115
(number of gyrations) 3 to < 30 8 100 160
≥ 30 9 125 205
The mix criteria for Hamburg Wheel-Track Testing and Indirect Tensile Strength do not
apply to HMA accepted by commercial evaluation.
When material is being produced and stockpiled for use on a specific contract or for a
future contract, the uncompacted void content, fracture, and sand equivalent requirements
shall apply at the time of stockpiling. When material is used from a stockpile that has not been
tested as provided above, the Specifications for uncompacted void content, fracture, and sand
equivalent shall apply at the time of its introduction to the cold feed of the mixing plant.
9-03.8(3) Grading
9-03.8(3)A Gradation
The Contractor may furnish aggregates for use on the same contract from multiple
stockpiles. The gradation of the aggregates shall be such that the completed mixture complies
in all respects with the pertinent requirements of Section 9-03.8(6).
Acceptance of the aggregate gradation shall be based on samples taken from the final mix.
9-03.8(3)B Gradation – Recycled Asphalt Pavement and Mineral Aggregate
The gradation for the new aggregate used in the production of the HMA shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor, and when combined with recycled material, the combined
material shall meet the gradation Specification requirements for the specified Class HMA
as listed in Section 9-03.8(6) or as shown in the Special Provisions. The new aggregate
shall meet the general requirements listed in Section 9-03.8(1) and Section 9-03.8(2). No
contamination by deleterious materials shall be allowed in the old asphalt concrete used.
For HMA with greater than 20 percent RAP by total weight of HMA the RAP shall be
processed to ensure that 100 percent of the material passes a sieve twice the size of the
maximum aggregate size for the class of mix to be produced.
When any amount of RAS is used in the production of HMA the RAS shall be milled,
crushed or processed to ensure that 100 percent of the material passes the ½ inch sieve.
Extraneous materials in RAS such as metals, glass, rubber, soil, brick, tars, paper, wood
and plastic shall not exceed 2.0 percent by mass as determined on material retained on the
No. 4 sieve.
9-03.8(4) Vacant
9-03.8(5) Mineral Filler
Mineral filler, when used in HMA mix, shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 17.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.8(6) HMA Proportions of Materials

The materials of which HMA is composed shall be of such sizes, grading, and quantity
that, when proportioned and mixed together, they will produce a well graded mixture within
the requirements listed below.
The aggregate percentage refers to completed dry mix, and includes mineral filler
when used.
Aggregate Gradation Control Points
Sieve Sizes
Percent Passing ⅜ inch ½ inch ¾ inch 1 inch
1½″ 99-100
1″ 99-100 90-100
¾″ 99-100 90-100 90 Maximum
½″ 99-100 90-100 90 Maximum
⅜″ 90-100 90 Maximum
No. 4 90 Maximum
No. 8 32-67 28-58 23-49 19-45
No. 200 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 2.0-7.0 1.0-7.0
9-03.8(7) HMA Tolerances and Adjustments

1. Job Mix Formula Tolerances – The constituents of the mixture at the time of
acceptance shall conform to the following tolerances:
Aggregate, percent Passing Statistical Evaluation Visual Evaluation
1″, ¾″, ½″ and ⅜″ sieves ± 6% ± 8%
No. 4 sieve ± 5% ± 8%
No. 8 sieve ± 4% ± 8%
No. 200 sieve ± 2.0% ± 3.0%
Asphalt binder ± 0.5% ± 0.7%
Air Voids, Va 2.5% minimum and 5.5% maximum
These tolerance limits constitute the allowable limits as described in Section 1-06.2.
The tolerance limit for aggregate shall not exceed the limits of the control points, except
the tolerance limits for sieves designated as 100 percent passing will be 99-100.
2. Job Mix Formula Adjustments – An adjustment to the aggregate gradation or asphalt
binder content of the JMF requires approval of the Engineer. Adjustments to the JMF
will only be considered if the change produces material of equal or better quality
and may require the development of a new mix design if the adjustment exceeds the
amounts listed below.
a. Aggregates – The maximum adjustment from the approved mix design shall be
2 percent for the aggregate passing the 1½″, 1″, ¾″, ½″, ⅜″, and the No. 4 sieves,
1 percent for aggregate passing the No. 8 sieve, and 0.5 percent for the aggregate
passing the No. 200 sieve. The adjusted JMF shall be within the range of the control
points in Section 9-03.8(6).
b. Asphalt Binder Content – The Engineer may order or approve changes to asphalt
binder content. The maximum adjustment from the approved mix design for the
asphalt binder content shall be 0.3 percent.

Aggregates 9-03
9-03.9 Aggregates for Ballast and Crushed Surfacing

9-03.9(1) Ballast
Ballast shall consist of crushed, partially crushed, or naturally occurring granular material
from approved sources manufactured in accordance with the provisions of Section 3-01.
The material from which ballast is to be manufactured shall meet the following
test requirements:
Los Angeles Wear, 500 Rev 40 percent max.
Degradation Factor 15 min.
Ballast shall meet the following requirements for grading and quality when placed in
hauling vehicles for delivery to the roadway or during manufacture and placement into a
temporary stockpile. The exact point of acceptance will be determined by the Engineer.
The portion of ballast retained on No. 4 sieve shall not contain more than 0.2 percent
wood waste.
Sieve Size Percent Passing
2½″ 99-100
2″ 65-100
1″ 50-85
No. 4 26-44
No. 40 16 max.
No. 200 9.0 max.
Dust Ratio: ⅔ max.
9-03.9(2) Permeable Ballast

Permeable ballast shall meet the requirements of Section 9-03.9(1) for ballast except for
the following special requirements.
The grading and quality requirements are:
2½″ 99-100
2″ 65-100
¾″ 40-80
No. 4 5 max.
No. 100 0-2
% Fracture 75 min.
The sand equivalent value and dust ratio requirements do not apply.
The fracture requirement shall be at least one fractured face and will apply the combined

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.9(3) Crushed Surfacing

Crushed surfacing shall be manufactured from ledge rock, talus, or gravel in accordance
with the provisions of Section 3-01. The materials shall be uniform in quality and substantially
free from wood, roots, bark, and other extraneous material and shall meet the following quality
test requirements:
Degradation Factor – Top Course 25 min.
Degradation Factor – Base Course 15 min.
Crushed surfacing of the various classes shall meet the following requirements for
grading and quality when placed in hauling vehicles for delivery to the roadway, or during
manufacture and placement into a temporary stockpile. The exact point of acceptance will
be determined by the Engineer.
Base Course Top Course and Keystone
1¼″ 99-100
1″ 80-100
¾″ 99-100
⅝″ 50-80
½″ 80-100
No. 4 25-45 46-66
No. 40 3-18 8-24
No. 200 7.5 max. 10.0 max.
% Fracture 75 min. 75 min.
Sand Equivalent 40 min. 40 min.
The fracture requirement shall be at least one fractured face and will apply to the combined
The portion of crushed surfacing retained on a No. 4 sieve shall not contain more than
0.15 percent wood waste.
9-03.9(4) Maintenance Rock
Maintenance rock shall meet all requirements of Section 9-03.9(3) for crushed surfacing
top course except that it shall meet the following Specifications for grading:
⅝″ 99-100
½″ 90-100
No. 4 45-66
No. 40 10-25
No. 200 7 max.

Aggregates 9-03
9-03.10 Aggregate for Gravel Base

Gravel base shall consist of granular material, either naturally occurring or processed. It
shall be essentially free from various types of wood waste or other extraneous or objectionable
materials. It shall have such characteristics of size and shape that it will compact readily, and
the maximum particle size shall not exceed ⅔ of the depth of the layer being placed.
Gravel base shall meet the following requirements for grading and quality when placed
in hauling vehicles for delivery to the roadway or during manufacture and placement into
a temporary stockpile. The exact point of acceptance will be determined by the Engineer.
2″ 75-100
No. 4 22-100
No. 200 0-10
Dust Ratio: ⅔ max.
Gravel base material retained on a No. 4 sieve shall contain not more than 0.20 percent by
weight of wood waste.
9-03.11 Streambed Aggregates
Streambed aggregates shall be naturally occurring water rounded aggregates. Aggregates
from quarries, ledge rock, and talus slopes are not acceptable for these applications. Streambed
aggregates shall meet the following test requirements for quality:
Aggregate Property Test Method Requirement
Degradation Factor WSDOT T 113 15 min.
Los Angeles Wear, 500 Rev. AASHTO T 96 50% max.
Bulk Specific Gravity AASHTO T 85 2.55 min.
9-03.11(1) Streambed Sediment

Streambed sediment shall meet the following requirements for grading when placed
in hauling vehicles for delivery to the project or during manufacture and placement into
temporary stockpile. Alternate gradations may be used if proposed by the Contractor and
accepted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a Type 2 Working Drawing consisting
of 0.45 power maximum density curve of the proposed gradation. The alternate gradation shall
closely follow the maximum density line and have Nominal Aggregate Size of no less than
1½ inches or no greater than 3 inches. The exact point of acceptance will be determined by
the Engineer.
2½″ 99-100
2″ 65-95
1″ 50-85
No. 4 26-44
No. 40 16 max.
No. 200 5.0-9.0
The portion of sediment retained on No. 4 sieve shall not contain more than 0.2 percent
wood waste.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.11(2) Streambed Cobbles

Streambed cobbles shall be clean, naturally occurring water rounded gravel material.
Streambed cobbles shall have a well-graded distribution of cobble sizes and conform to one
or more of the following gradings as shown in the Plans:
Percent Passing
Approximate
Size1 4″ Cobbles 6″ Cobbles 8″ Cobbles 10″ Cobbles 12″ Cobbles
12″ 99-100
10″ 99-100 70-90
8″ 99-100 70-90
6″ 99-100 70-90
5″ 70-90 30-60
4″ 99-100 30-60
3″ 70-90 30-60
2″ 30-60
1½″ 20-50
¾″ 10 max. 10 max. 10 max. 10 max. 10 max.
1Approximate Size can be determined by taking the average dimension of the three axes of the rock, Length, Width, and Thickness,
by use of the following calculation:
Length + Width + Thickness = Approximate Size
3
Length is the longest axis, width is the second longest axis, and thickness is the shortest axis.
The grading of the cobbles shall be determined by the Engineer by visual inspection of the
load before it is dumped into place, or, if so ordered by the Engineer, by dumping individual
loads on a flat surface and sorting and measuring the individual rocks contained in the load.
9-03.11(3) Streambed Boulders
Streambed boulders shall be hard, sound and durable material, free from seams, cracks, and
other defects tending to destroy its resistance to weather. Streambed Boulders shall be rounded
to sub-angular in shape and the thickness axis shall be greater than 60 percent of the length
axis. Streambed boulders sizes are approximately as follows, see Plans for sizes specified:
Rock Size1 Approximate Size
One Man 12″ – 18″
Two Man 18″ – 28″
Three Man 28″ – 36″
Four Man 36″ – 48″
Five Man 48″ – 54″
Six Man 54″ – 60″
1Approximate Size can be determined by taking the average dimension
of the three axes of the rock, Length, Width, and Thickness, by use of the
following calculation:
Length + Width + Thickness
= Approximate Size
3
Length is the longest axis, width is the second longest axis, and
thickness is the shortest axis.

Aggregates 9-03
9-03.11(4) Habitat Boulders

Habitat boulders shall be hard, sound and durable material, free from seams, cracks, and
other defects tending to destroy its resistance to weather. Habitat Boulders shall be rounded to
sub-angular in shape and the thickness axis shall be greater than 60 percent of the width axis
and the length shall be 1.5 to 3 times the width axis. Habitat boulders sizes are approximately
as follows, see Plans for sizes specified:
Rock Size1 Approximate Size
Three Man 28″ - 36″
Four Man 36″ - 48″
Five Man 48″ - 54″
Six Man 54″ - 60″
1Approximate Size can be determined by taking the average dimension
of the three axes of the rock, Length, Width, and Thickness, by use of the
Length + Width + Thickness
= Approximate Size
3
Length is the longest axis, width is the second longest axis, and thickness
is the shortest axis.
9-03.12 Gravel Backfill

Gravel backfill shall consist of crushed, partially crushed, or naturally occurring granular
material produced in accordance with the provisions of Section 3-01.
9-03.12(1) Gravel Backfill for Foundations
9-03.12(1)A Class A
Gravel backfill for foundations, Class A, shall conform to the requirements of
Section 9-03.9(1) for ballast or Section 9-03.9(3) for crushed surfacing base course.
9-03.12(1)B Class B
Gravel backfill for foundations, Class B, shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-03.10.
9-03.12(2) Gravel Backfill for Walls
Gravel backfill for walls shall consist of free draining granular material, essentially free
from various types of wood waste or other extraneous or objectionable materials. It shall
meet the following requirements for grading and quality when placed in hauling vehicles
for delivery to the roadway or during manufacture and placement into a temporary stockpile.
The exact point of acceptance will be determined by the Engineer.
4″ 99-100
2″ 75-100
No. 4 22-66
No. 200 5.0 max.
Dust Ratio: % Passing No. 200 ⅔ max.
% Passing No. 40
That portion of the material retained on a No. 4 sieve shall contain not more than
0.20 percent by weight of wood waste.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.12(3) Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding

Gravel backfill for pipe zone bedding shall consist of crushed, processed, or naturally
occurring granular material. It shall be free from various types of wood waste or other
extraneous or objectionable materials. It shall have such characteristics of size and shape
that it will compact and shall meet the following Specifications for grading and quality:
1½″ 99-100
1″ 75-100
⅝″ 50-100
No. 4 20-80
No. 40 3-24
No. 200 10.0 max.
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the native granular material is free from wood waste,
organic material, and other extraneous or objectionable materials, but otherwise does not
conform to the Specifications for grading and Sand Equivalent, it may be used for pipe
bedding for rigid pipes, provided the native granular material has a maximum dimension
of 1½ inches.
9-03.12(4) Gravel Backfill for Drains
Gravel backfill for drains shall conform to the following gradings:
1″ 99-100
¾″ 80-100
⅜″ 0-40
No. 4 0-4
No. 200 0-2
As an alternative, AASHTO grading No. 57 may be used in accordance with

Section 9-03.1(4)C. Alkali silica reactivity testing is not required.
9-03.12(5) Gravel Backfill for Drywells
Gravel backfill for drywells shall conform to the following gradings:
1½″ 99-100
1″ 50-100
¾″ 0-20
⅜″ 0-2
No. 200 0-1.5
As an alternative, AASHTO grading No. 4 may be used in accordance with

Section 9-03.1(4)C. Alkali silica reactivity testing is not required.

Aggregates 9-03
9-03.13 Backfill for Sand Drains

Backfill for sand drains shall conform to the following grading:
½″ 90-100
No. 4 57-100
No. 10 40-100
No. 50 3-30
No. 100 0-4
No. 200 0-3.0
That portion of backfill retained on a No. 4 sieve shall contain not more than 0.05 percent
by weight of wood waste.
9-03.13(1) Sand Drainage Blanket
Aggregate for the sand drainage blanket shall consist of granular material, free from wood,
bark, or other extraneous material and shall meet the following requirements for grading:
2½″ 90-100
No. 4 24-100
No. 10 14-100
No. 50 0-30
No. 100 0-7.0
No. 200 0-3.0
That portion of backfill retained on a No. 4 sieve shall contain not more than 0.05 percent
by weight of wood waste.
9-03.14 Borrow
9-03.14(1) Gravel Borrow
Aggregate for gravel borrow shall consist of granular material, either naturally occurring or
processed, and shall meet the following requirements for grading and quality:
4″ 99-100
2″ 75-100
No. 4 50-80
No. 40 30 max.
No. 200 7.0 max.
Ballast may be substituted for gravel borrow for embankment construction.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.14(2) Select Borrow

Material for select borrow shall consist of granular material, either naturally occurring or
processed, and shall meet the following requirements for grading and quality:
6″1 99-100
3″ 75-100
No. 40 50 max.
No. 200 10.0 max.
199 to 100 percent shall pass 4-inch-square sieve and 75 to 100 percent
shall pass 2-inch sieve when select borrow is used in the top 2 feet of
embankments or where Method C compaction is required.
9-03.14(3) Common Borrow

Material for common borrow shall consist of granular or nongranular soil and/or aggregate
which is free of deleterious material. Deleterious material includes wood, organic waste, coal,
charcoal, or any other extraneous or objectionable material. The material shall not contain
more than 3 percent organic material by weight. The plasticity index shall be determined using
test method AASHTO T 89 and AASHTO T 90.
The material shall meet one of the options in the soil plasticity table below.
Soil Plasticity Table
Option Sieve Percent Passing Plasticity Index
1 No. 200 0 - 12 N/A
2 No. 200 12.1 - 35 6 or Less
3 No. 200 Above 35 0
If requested by the Contractor, the plasticity index may be increased with the approval of
the Engineer.
9-03.14(4) Gravel Borrow for Structural Earth Wall
All backfill material within the reinforced zone for structural earth walls shall consist of
granular material, either naturally occurring or processed, and shall be free draining, free from
organic or otherwise deleterious material. The material shall be substantially free of shale or
other soft, poor durability particles, and shall not contain recycled materials, such as glass,
shredded tires, portland cement concrete rubble, or asphaltic concrete rubble. The backfill
material shall meet the following requirements for grading and quality:
Geosynthetic Reinforcement Metallic Reinforcement
Sieve Size Percent Passing Percent Passing
4 99-100
2 75-100
1¼″ 99-100
1″ 90-100
No. 4 50-80 50-80
No. 40 30 max. 30 max.
No. 200 7.0 max. 7.0 max.
Sand Equivalent 50 min. 50 min.
All percentages are by weight

Aggregates 9-03
Geosynthetic Metallic
Property Test Method
Reinforcement Requirements Reinforcement Requirements
Los Angeles Wear 500 rev. AASHTO T 96 35 percent max. 35 percent max.
Degradation Factor WSDOT T 113 15 min. 15 min.
Resistivity WSDOT T 417 3,000 ohm-cm, min.
pH WSDOT T 417 4.5 - 9 5 - 10
Chlorides AASHTO T 291 100 ppm max.
Sulfates AASHTO T 290 200 ppm max.
If the resistivity of the gravel borrow equals or exceeds 5,000 ohm-cm, the specified
chloride and sulfate limits may be waived.
Wall backfill material satisfying these grading and property requirements shall be classified
as nonaggressive.
9-03.15 Native Material for Trench Backfill
Trench backfill outside the roadway prism shall be excavated material free of wood waste,
debris, clods or rocks greater than 6 inches in any dimension.
9-03.16 Vacant
9-03.17 Foundation Material Class A and Class B
Foundation material Class A and Class B shall conform to the following gradations:
Percent Passing
Sieve Size Class A Class B
2½″ 98-100 95-100
2″ 92-100 75-100
1½″ 72-87 30-60
¾″ 27-47 0-5
⅜″ 3-14
No. 4 0-5
9-03.18 Foundation Material Class C

Foundation material Class C shall consist of clean bank run sand and gravel, free from dirt,
roots, topsoil, and debris and contain not less than 35 percent retained on a No. 4 sieve and
with all stones larger than 2 inches in the longest dimension removed.
9-03.19 Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill
Trench backfill material shall consist of aggregate for gravel base, as specified in Section
9-03.10, excepting however, that 100 percent of the material shall pass a 2½-inch screen.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.20 Test Methods for Aggregates

The properties enumerated in these Specifications shall be determined in accordance with
the following methods of test:
Title Test Method
FOP for AASHTO T 2 for Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates FOP for AASHTO T 2
Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete AASHTO T 21
Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates AASHTO T 112
Resistance to Degradation of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in AASHTO T 96
the Los Angeles Machine
Material Finer than 0.075mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing AASHTO T 11
FOP for AASHTO for Determining the percentage of Fracture in Coarse Aggregates FOP for AASHTO T 335
FOP for WAQTC/AASHTO for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates FOP for WAQTC T 27/T 11
FOP for AASHTO T 176 for Plastic Fines in Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the FOP for AASHTO T 176
Sand Equivalent Test
Method of Test for Determination of Degradation Value WSDOT T 113
Particle Size Analysis of Soils AASHTO T 88
9-03.21 Recycled Material

Hot Mix Asphalt, Concrete Rubble, Recycled Glass (glass cullet), and Steel Furnace Slag
may be used as, or blended uniformly with, naturally occurring materials for aggregates. The
final blended product and the recycled material component included in a blended product
shall meet the specification requirements for the specified type of aggregate. The Contracting
Agency may collect verification samples at any time. Blending of more than one type of
recycled material into the naturally occurring materials requires approval of the Engineer prior
to use.
Recycled materials obtained from the Contracting Agency’s roadways will not require
toxicity testing or certification for toxicity characteristics.
Reclaimed asphalt shingles samples shall contain less than the maximum percentage of
asbestos fibers based on testing procedures and frequencies established in conjunction with the
specifying jurisdiction and state or federal environmental regulatory agencies.
Recycled materials that are imported to the job site will require testing and certification for
toxicity characteristics. The recycled material supplier shall keep all toxicity test results on file
and provide copies to the Engineer upon request. The Contractor shall provide the following:
1. Identification of the recycled materials proposed for use.
2. Sampling documentation no older than 90 days from the date the recycled material
is placed on the project. Documentation shall include a minimum of five samples
tested for total lead content by EPA Method 6010. Total lead test results shall not
exceed 250 ppm. Samples that exceed 100 ppm must then be prepared by EPA Method
1311, the Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP), where liquid extract is
analyzed by EPA Method 6010B. The TCLP test must be below 5.0 ppm.
3. Certification that the recycled materials are not Washington State Dangerous Wastes
per the Dangerous Waste Regulations, WAC 173-303.
4. Certification that the recycled materials are in conformance with the requirements of
the Standard Specifications prior to delivery. The certification shall include the percent
by weight of each recycled material.

Aggregates 9-03
9-03.21(1)A Recycled Hot Mix Asphalt

For recycled materials incorporating hot mix asphalt, the product supplier shall certify
that the blended material does not exceed the Maximum Allowable percentage of hot mix
asphalt shown in Section 9-03.21(1)E.
9-03.21(1)B Recycled Concrete Aggregate
Recycled concrete aggregates are coarse and fine aggregates manufactured from hardened
concrete mixtures.
Recycled concrete aggregate may be used as coarse aggregate or blended with coarse
aggregate for Commercial Concrete. Recycled concrete aggregate shall meet all of the
requirements for coarse aggregate contained in Section 9-03.1(4) or 9-03.1(5). In addition to
the requirements of Section 9-03.1(4) or 9-03.1(5), recycled concrete shall:
1. Contain an aggregated weight of less than 1 percent of adherent fines, vegetable
matter, plastics, plaster, paper, gypsum board, metals, fabrics, wood, tile, glass,
asphalt (bituminous) materials, brick, porcelain or other deleterious substance(s) not
otherwise noted;
2. Be free of components such as chlorides and reactive materials that are detrimental
to the concrete, unless mitigation measures are taken to prevent recurrence in the
new concrete;
3. Have an absorption of less than 10 percent when tested in accordance with
AASHTO T 85.
4. Be considered mechanically fractured and therefore be considered part of the total
fracture calculation as determined by the FOP for AASHTO T 335.
Recycled concrete aggregate shall be in a saturated condition prior to mixing.
Recycled concrete, in any form, shall not be placed below the ordinary high water mark of
any surface water of the State.
9-03.21(1)C Recycled Glass (glass cullet)
Glass Cullet shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M318 with the additional
requirement that the glass cullet is limited to the maximum amounts set in Section
9-03.21(1)E for recycled glass. Prior to use the Contractor shall provide certification to
the Project Engineer that the recycled glass meets the physical properties and deleterious
substances requirements in AASHTO M-318.
9-03.21(1)D Steel Slag
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer the steel furnace slag blends that will
be used in the final product prior to use. Recycled steel furnace slag shall not be placed
below the ordinary high water mark of any water of the State.

9-03 Aggregates
9-03.21(1)E Table on Maximum Allowable percent (By Weight) of Recycled Material

Maximum Allowable percent (by weight) of Recycled Material
Recycled Recycled
Hot Mix Concrete Glass Steel
Asphalt Aggregate (glass cullet) Slag
Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete 9-03.1(2) 0 0 0 0
Coarse Aggregates for Portland Cement Concrete 9-03.1(4) 0 0 0 0
Coarse Aggregate for Commercial Concrete 9-03.1(4) 0 100 0 0
Aggregates for Hot Mix Asphalt 9-03.8 See 5-04.2 0 0 20
Ballast 9-03.9(1) 25 100 20 20
Permeable Ballast 9-03.9(2) 25 100 20 20
Crushed Surfacing 9-03.9(3) 25 100 20 20
Aggregate for Gravel Base 9-03.10 25 100 20 20
Gravel Backfill for Foundations – Class A 9-03.12(1)A 25 100 20 20
Gravel Backfill for Foundations – Class B 9-03.12(1)B 25 100 20 20
Gravel Backfill for Walls 9-03.12(2) 0 100 20 20
Gravel Backfill for Pipe Zone Bedding 9-03.12(3) 0 100 20 20
Gravel Backfill for Drains 9-03.12(4) 0 0 20 0
Gravel Backfill for Drywells 9-03.12(5) 0 0 20 0
Backfill for Sand Drains 9-03.13 0 0 20 0
Sand Drainage Blanket 9-03.13(1) 0 0 20 0
Gravel Borrow 9-03.14(1) 25 100 20 20
Select Borrow 9-03.14(2) 25 100 20 20
Select Borrow 9-03.14(2) 100 100 20 20
(greater than 3 feet below Subgrade and side slopes)
Common Borrow 9-03.14(3) 25 100 20 20
Common Borrow 9-03.14(3) 100 100 20 20
(greater than 3 feet below Subgrade and side slopes)
Foundation Material Class A and Class B 9-03.17 0 100 20 20
Foundation Material Class C 9-03.18 0 100 20 20
Bank Run Gravel for Trench Backfill 9-03.19 25 100 20 20

9-04 Joint and Crack Sealing Materials

9-04.1 Premolded Joint Fillers
9-04.1(1) Asphalt Filler for Contraction and Longitudinal Joints in Concrete
Pavements
Premolded joint filler for use in contraction and longitudinal joints shall be ⅛ inch in
thickness and shall consist of a suitable asphalt mastic encased in asphalt saturated paper or
asphalt saturated felt. It shall be sufficiently rigid for easy installation in summer months and
not too brittle for handling in cool weather. It shall meet the following test requirements:
When a strip 2 inches wide and 24 inches long is freely supported 2 inches from each end
and maintained at a temperature of 70°F, it shall support a weight of 100 grams placed at the
center of the strip without deflecting downward from a horizontal position more than 2 inches
within a period of 5 minutes.
9-04.1(2) Premolded Joint Filler for Expansion Joints
Premolded joint filler for use in expansion (through) joints shall conform to either
AASHTO M213 Specifications for “Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction”, except that the requirement for water absorption is deleted, or
ASTM D7174 Specifications for “Preformed Closed-Cell Polyolefin Expansion Joint Fillers
for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction”.
As an alternative to the above, a semi-rigid, non-extruding, resilient type, closed-cell
polypropylene foam, preformed joint filler with the following physical properties as tested to
AASHTO T 42 Standard Test Methods may be used.
Closed-Cell Polypropylene Foam Preformed Joint Filler
Physical Property Requirement Test Method
Water Absorption < 1.0% AASHTO T 42
Compression Recovery > 80% AASHTO T 42
Extrusion < 0.1 in. AASHTO T 42
Density > 3.5 lbs./cu.ft. AASHTO T 42
Water Boil (1 hr.) No expansion AASHTO T 42
Hydrochloric Acid Boil (1 hr.) No disintegration AASHTO T 42
Heat Resistance °F 392˚F± 5˚F ASTM D 5249
9-04.1(3) Vacant
9-04.1(4) Elastomeric Expansion Joint Seals
Premolded elastomeric expansion joint seals shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM D2628 and shall be formed by an extrusion process with uniform dimensions and
smooth exterior surfaces. The cross-section of the seal shall be shaped to allow adequate
compressed width of the seal, as approved by the Engineer.
9-04.2 Joint Sealants
9-04.2(1) Hot Poured Joint Sealants
9-04.2(1)A Hot Poured Sealant
Hot poured sealant shall be sampled in accordance with ASTM D5167 and tested in
accordance with ASTM D5329.
9-04.2(1)A1 Hot Poured Sealant for Cement Concrete Pavement
Hot poured sealant for cement concrete pavement shall meet the requirements of ASTM
D6690 Type IV, except for the following:
1. The Cone Penetration at 25°C shall be 130 maximum.
2. The extension for the Bond, non-immersed, shall be 100 percent.
9-04.2(1)A2 Hot Poured Sealant for Bituminous Pavement

Hot poured sealant for bituminous pavement shall meet the requirements of ASTM D6690
Type I or Type II.
9-04.2(1)B Sand Slurry for Bituminous Pavement
Sand slurry is mixture consisting of the following components measured by total weight:
1. Twenty percent CSS-1 emulsified asphalt,
2. Two percent portland cement, and
3. Seventy-eight percent fine aggregate meeting the requirements of Section 9-03.1(2)B
Class 2. Fine aggregate may be damp (no free water).
9-04.2(2) Poured Rubber Joint Sealer
The physical properties of the joint sealer, when mixed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations, shall be as follows:
1. Color: Gray or black.
2.1 Viscosity: Must be pourable and self-leveling at 50ºF.
3.1 Application Life: Not less than 3 hours at 72ºF and 50 percent relative humidity.
4. Set to Touch: Not more than 24 hours at 72ºF and 50 percent relative humidity.
5. Curing Time: Not more than 96 hours at 72ºF and 50 percent relative humidity.
6. Non-Volatile Content: Not less than 92 percent.
7. Hardness Rating (Durometer “Shore A”): 5-35.
8. Resiliency: Not less than 80 percent.
9. Bond test methods shall be in accordance with ASTM D5329.
1Viscosity and application life may be waived providing the material is mixed and
placed by a pump and mixer approved by the Engineer.

Suitable primer, if required by the manufacturer, shall be furnished with each joint
sealer. The primer shall be suitable for brush or spray application at 50ºF or higher and
shall cure sufficiently at 50ºF to pour the joint within 24 hours. It shall be considered
as an integral part of the sealer system. Any failure of the sealer in the test described
herein, attributable to the primer, shall be grounds for rejection or re-testing of
the sealer.
9-04.2(3) Polyurethane Sealant
Polyurethane sealant shall conform to ASTM C920 Type S Grade NS Class 25 Use M
or ASTM C920 Type S Grade NS Class 35 Use M.
Polyurethane sealant shall be compatible with the closed cell foam backer rod. When
required, compatibility characteristics of sealants in contact with backer rods shall be
determined by Test Method ASTM C1087.
9-04.2(3)A Closed Cell Foam Backer Rod
Closed cell foam backer rod for use with polyurethane sealant shall conform to
ASTM C1330 Type C.
9-04.3 Joint Mortar
Mortar for hand mortared joints shall conform to Section 9-20.4(3) and consist of one
part portland cement, three parts fine sand, and sufficient water to allow proper workability.
Cement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M85, Type I or Type II.
Sand shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M45.
Water shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-25.1.

9-04.4 Pipe Joint Gaskets

9-04.4(1) Rubber Gaskets for Concrete Pipes and Precast Manholes
Rubber gaskets for use in joints of concrete culvert or storm sewer pipe and precast
manhole sections shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM C 990.
9-04.4(2) Vacant
9-04.4(3) Gaskets for Aluminum or Steel Culvert or Storm Sewer Pipe
Rubber gaskets for use with metal culvert or storm sewer pipe shall be continuous closed
cell, synthetic expanded rubber gaskets conforming to the requirements of ASTM D1056,
Grade 2B3. Butyl rubber gaskets for use with metal culvert or storm sewer pipe shall conform
to the applicable requirements of ASTM C 990.
9-04.4(4) Rubber Gaskets for Aluminum or Steel Drain Pipe
Gaskets for metal drain pipe shall be self-adhering, butyl-based, scrim-supported type.
The gaskets shall be as described in the Standard Plan when specified.
9-04.4(5) Protection and Storage
Rubber gasket material shall be stored in a clean, cool place, protected from sunlight and
contaminants. They shall be protected from direct sunlight at all times except during actual
installation. Pipes with gaskets affixed shall be installed in the line within 28 days.
9-04.5 Flexible Plastic Gaskets
The gasket material shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon resins and
plasticizing materials reinforced with inert mineral filler and shall contain no solvents. It shall
not depend on oxidizing, evaporating, or chemical action for adhesive or cohesive strength.
It shall be supplied in extruded rope form of such cross section and size as to adequately fill
spaces between the precast sections.
The gasket material shall be protected by a suitable removable two-piece wrapper
so designed as to permit removing one half, longitudinally, without disturbing the other.
Its composition and properties shall conform to those set forth below.
Test Method Minimum Maximum
Bitumen (Petroleum plastic content) ASTM D4 50 70
Ash-inert Mineral Matter AASHTO T 11 30 50
Penetration ASTM D217
32ºF (300gm) 60 sec 75
77ºF (150gm) 5 sec 50 120
115ºF (150gm) 5 sec 150
Softening Point AASHTO T 53 320ºF
Specific Gravity at 77ºF AASHTO T 229 1.20 1.35
Weight per gallon, lb 10.0 11.3
Ductility at 77ºF (cm) ASTM D113 5.0
Flash Point COC, F AASHTO T 73 600
Fire Point COC, F AASHTO T 48 625
Volatile Matter AASHTO T 47 2.0
9-04.6 Expanded Polystyrene

Expanded polystyrene shall be of a cellular molded type with a density of 1.5 plus or minus
0.25 pounds per cubic foot.

9-04.7 Expanded Rubber

Closed cell expanded rubber joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1056, Grade No. 2B3.
9-04.8 Flexible Elastomeric Seals
Flexible elastomeric seals for PVC drain pipe and underdrain pipe shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM D3212.
9-04.9 Solvent Cements
Solvent cements for PVC underdrain pipe shall conform to the requirements of
ASTM D2564.
9-04.10 Butyl Rubber and Nitrile Rubber
Butyl rubber shall conform to ASTM D2000, M1 BA 610. If the Engineer determines that
the area will be exposed to petroleum products, Nitrile rubber shall be used and shall conform
to ASTM D2000, M1 BG 610.
9-04.11 Butyl Rubber Sealant
Butyl rubber sealant shall conform to ASTM C 990.
9-04.12 External Sealing Band
External sealing band shall be Type III B conforming to ASTM C 877.

Drainage Structures and Culverts 9-05
9-05 Drainage Structures and Culverts

9-05.0 Acceptance and Approval of Drainage Structures, and Culverts
The Drainage Structure or Culvert may be selected from the Qualified Products List, or
submitted using a Request for Approval of Materials (RAM) in accordance with Section 1-06.
Certain drainage materials may be accepted by the Engineer based on a modified
acceptance criteria when materials are selected from the Qualified Products List (QPL).
The modified acceptance criteria are defined in the QPL for each material.
9-05.1 Drain Pipe
9-05.1(1) Concrete Drain Pipe
Concrete drain pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM C118, heavy-duty drainage pipe.
9-05.1(2) Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum Coated (Aluminized) Corrugated
Iron or Steel Drain Pipe
Zinc coated (galvanized) or aluminum coated (aluminized Type 2) corrugated iron or steel
drain pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M36. The steel sheet thickness shall be
0.064 inch for 6-inch diameter and larger drain pipe. Zinc coated steel shall meet the material
requirements of AASHTO M218 (ASTM A929). Aluminum coated steel shall meet the
material requirements of AASHTO M274 (ASTM A929).
9-05.1(2)A Coupling Bands
Coupling bands for zinc coated (galvanized) or aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated
iron or steel drain pipe shall meet the requirements of coupling bands for Type I pipe of
AASHTO M36, except that bands using projections (dimples) shall not be permitted. The
bands shall be fabricated of the same material as the pipe, and with the same metallic
protective treatment as the pipe.
Acceptable coupling bands are the two piece helically corrugated band with nonreformed
ends and integrally formed flanges and those bands meeting the requirements of
Section 9-05.4(7).
9-05.1(3) Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Drain Pipe
Corrugated aluminum alloy drain pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 196,
without perforations.
Coupling bands for corrugated aluminum alloy drain pipe shall meet the requirements
of coupling bands for Type I pipe of AASHTO M196, except that bands using projections
(dimples) shall not be permitted. The bands shall be fabricated of the same material as
the pipe.
ends and integrally formed flanges and those bands meeting the requirements of
Section 9-05.5(5).
9-05.1(4) Vacant
9-05.1(5) PVC Drain Pipe, Couplings, and Fittings
PVC drain pipe, couplings, and fittings shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 278.
The maximum size pipe shall be 8 inches in diameter.
9-05.1(6) Corrugated Polyethylene Drain Pipe, Couplings, and Fittings (Up to 10 inch)
Corrugated polyethylene drain pipe, couplings, and fittings shall meet the requirements
of AASHTO M252 type C (corrugated both inside and outside) or type S (corrugated outer
wall and smooth inner liner). The maximum size pipe shall be 10 inches in diameter.

Corrugated polyethylene drain pipe manufacturers shall participate in the National

Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP) work plan for HDPE (High Density
Polyethylene) Thermoplastic Pipe and be listed on the NTPEP audit website displaying they
are NTPEP compliant.
9-05.1(7) Corrugated Polyethylene Drain Pipe, Couplings, and Fittings (12 Inch
Through 60 inch)
Corrugated polyethylene drain pipe, couplings, and fittings 12 inch through 60 inch
diameter maximum, shall meet the minimum requirements of AASHTO M 294 Type S
or 12‑inch through 24-inch diameter maximum shall meet the minimum requirements of
AASHTO M294 Type C.
Corrugated polyethylene drain pipe manufacturers shall participate in the National
9-05.2 Underdrain Pipe
9-05.2(1) Vacant
9-05.2(2) Perforated Concrete Underdrain Pipe
Perforated concrete underdrain pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M175,
Type I, except the perforations shall be approximately ½ inch in diameter. Strength
requirements shall be as shown in Table I of AASHTO M86.
9-05.2(3) Vacant
9-05.2(4) Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum Coated (Aluminized) Corrugated
Iron or Steel Underdrain Pipe
Zinc coated (galvanized) or aluminum coated (aluminized type 2) corrugated iron or
steel underdrain pipe shall meet the fabrication requirements of AASHTO M36, except that
perforations required in Class I, II, and III pipe may be located anywhere on the tangent
of the corrugations provided the other perforation spacing requirements remain as specified.
Zinc coated steel shall meet the material requirements of AASHTO M 218 (ASTM A929).
Aluminum coated steel shall meet the material requirements of AASHTO M274
(ASTM A929).
The pipe may conform to any one of the Type III pipes specified in AASHTO M 36, and
perforations in Class I, II, and III pipe may be drilled or punched. The sheet thickness shall
be 0.064 inch for 6 inch and larger diameter underdrain pipe.
Coupling bands for zinc coated (galvanized) or aluminum coated (aluminized) corrugated
iron or steel underdrain pipe shall meet the requirements of coupling bands for Type III pipe
of AASHTO M36. The bands shall be fabricated of the same material as the pipe and with
the same metallic protective treatment as the pipe, if metallic bands are used.
ends and integrally formed flanges, universal bands (dimple bands), a smooth sleeve type
coupler, and those bands meeting the requirements of Section 9-05.4(7). Smooth sleeve type
couplers may be either plastic or steel suitable for holding the pipe firmly in alignment without
the use of sealing compound or gaskets.
9-05.2(5) Perforated Corrugated Aluminum Alloy Underdrain Pipe
Perforated corrugated aluminum alloy underdrain pipe shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M196, except that the perforations may be located anywhere on the tangent of
the corrugations providing the other perforation spacing requirements remain as specified.


Coupling bands for corrugated aluminum alloy underdrain pipe shall meet the requirements
of coupling bands for Type III pipe of AASHTO M196. The bands shall be fabricated of the
same material of the pipe, if metallic bands are used.
Acceptable coupling bands are the two piece helically corrugated band with nonreformed
ends and integrally formed flanges, universal bands (dimple bands), a smooth sleeve type
coupler, and those bands meeting the requirements of Section 9-05.5(5). Smooth sleeve
type couplers may be either plastic or aluminum alloy suitable for holding the pipe firmly
in alignment without the use of sealing compound or gaskets.
9-05.2(6) Perforated PVC Underdrain Pipe
Perforated PVC underdrain pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M278.
The maximum size pipe shall be 8 inches in diameter.
9-05.2(7) Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene Underdrain Pipe (Up to 10 Inch)
Perforated corrugated polyethylene underdrain pipe shall meet the requirements of
AASHTO M252, Type CP or Type SP. Type CP shall be Type C pipe with Class 2 perforations
and Type SP shall be Type S pipe with either Class 1 or Class 2 perforations. Additionally,
Class 2 perforations shall be uniformly spaced along the length and circumference of the pipe.
The maximum size pipe shall be 10-inch diameter.
Perforated corrugated polyethylene underdrain pipe manufacturers shall participate in
the National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP) work plan for HDPE
(High Density Polyethylene) Thermoplastic Pipe and be listed on the NTPEP audit website
displaying they are NTPEP compliant.
9-05.2(8) Perforated Corrugated Polyethylene Underdrain Pipe (12-Inch Through
60‑Inch Diameter Maximum), Couplings, and Fittings
Perforated corrugated polyethylene underdrain pipe (12-inch through 60-inch diameter
maximum), couplings, and fittings shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M294 Type CP or
Type SP. Type CP shall be Type C pipe with Class 2 perforations and Type SP shall be Type S
pipe with either Class 1 or Class 2 perforations. Additionally, Class 2 perforations shall be
uniformly spaced along the length and circumference of the pipe.
Perforated corrugated polyethylene underdrain pipe manufacturers shall participate
in the National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP) work plan for HDPE
(High Density Polyethylene) Thermoplastic Pipe and be listed on the NTPEP audit website
displaying they are NTPEP compliant.
9-05.3 Concrete Culvert Pipe
9-05.3(1) Plain Concrete Culvert Pipe
Plain concrete culvert pipe shall be round and shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO M86, Class 2.
9-05.3(1)A End Design and Joints
All bell and spigot concrete culvert pipe shall be joined with rubber gaskets. The joints
and gasket material shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M198. Gasket material shall
be handled and stored in accordance with Section 9-04.4(5).
The plane of the ends of the pipes shall be perpendicular to their longitudinal axes.
9-05.3(1)B Basis for Acceptance
The basis for acceptance of plain concrete culvert or drain pipe shall be on the results
of three edge bearing tests performed at the manufacturer’s plant within the 90 day period
immediately preceding shipment of the pipe.

9-05.3(1)C Age at Shipment

Plain concrete culvert pipe may be shipped when it meets all test requirements. Unless it is
tested and accepted at an earlier age, it shall not be considered ready for shipment sooner than
28 days after manufacture when made with Type II portland cement, nor sooner than 7 days
when made with Type III portland cement.
9-05.3(2) Reinforced Concrete Culvert Pipe
Reinforced concrete culvert pipe shall be round and conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M170 except as herein provided.
The wall thickness and steel area for all classes of pipe which are of a diameter not set forth
in AASHTO M170, but within the maximum and minimum diameter limits set forth therein,
shall be determined by interpolation from data given in the tables for pipes of diameters next
smaller and next larger, respectively.
For all classes of pipe, except Class I, which are of a diameter less than the minimum for
the particular class set forth in AASHTO M170, the minimum wall thickness shall be 1¾ inch
and the steel area shall not be less than 0.06 square inch per linear foot of pipe barrel length.
9-05.3(2)A End Design and Joints
Section 9-05.3(1)A will apply to reinforced concrete culvert pipe.
9-05.3(2)B Basis for Acceptance
The basis for acceptance of reinforced concrete pipe 60 inches in diameter and smaller
shall be determined by the results of the three edge bearing test for the load to produce
a 0.01‑inch crack, and testing to the ultimate load will ordinarily not be required, except
as necessary to obtain samples for making the absorption test. In lieu of broken pieces of pipe
obtained as above provided, 4-inch diameter cores from pipe sections selected by the Engineer
may be furnished for performing the absorption test. Sections of pipe which have been tested
to the actual 0.01-inch crack will ordinarily not be further load tested; and such sections which
meet or exceed the required strength and workmanship standards may be accepted for use
on the project.
Acceptance of reinforced concrete pipe larger than 60 inches in diameter shall be based on
inspection of the size and placement of the reinforcing steel, and, at the option of the Engineer,
on compressive strength tests of 4-inch diameter cores cut from the pipe, or on compressive
strength of representative test cylinders cast with and cured with the pipe.
9-05.3(2)C Age at Shipment
Reinforced concrete culvert pipe may be shipped when it meets the requirements of
Section 9-05.3(1)C.
9-05.3(2)D Elliptical Reinforcement
In lieu of marking circular pipe with elliptical reinforcement in accordance with AASHTO
M170, the location of the top of the pipe shall be indicated by 3-inch, waterproof, painted
stripes on the inside and outside of the pipe for a distance of 2 feet from each end of the
section. At the option of the Contractor, a lift hole or lift holes may be provided at the top
of the pipe in lieu of the painted stripes. If one lift hole is provided, it shall be at the balance
point of the pipe; and if two lift holes are provided, they shall be spaced equidistant each
side of the balance point. Such holes shall not interfere with the reinforcement. After placing,
open lift holes shall be filled with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(3) or concrete plugs
before backfilling.
In addition to the requirements as set forth in AASHTO M170, it will be required on all
pipe 30 inches and over in diameter with elliptical steel reinforcement that the manufacturer
expose the reinforcement in not less than one of three lengths of pipe manufactured. A hole
exposing the steel shall be cut on the inside of the pipe at top or bottom and a second hole
on the outside, 90 degrees from the top or bottom position. After placing, holes exposing the
reinforcement shall be filled with mortar conforming to Section 9-20.4(3) or concrete plugs
before backfilling.
9-05.3(3) Beveled Concrete End Sections

Beveled concrete end sections shall be plain concrete conforming to AASHTO M 86 or
reinforced concrete conforming to the applicable sections of AASHTO M170 with the design
requirements as listed in Table 2, Wall B, Circular Reinforcement in circular pipe, and the
Standard Plans.
9-05.4 Steel Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arch
Steel culvert pipe and pipe arch shall meet the fabrication requirements of AASHTO M36,
Type I and Type II. Zinc coated steel shall meet the material requirements of AASHTO M218
(ASTM A929). Aluminum coated steel shall meet the material requirements of AASHTO
M274 (ASTM A929).
9-05.4(1) Elliptical Fabrication
When elongated pipes are specified, circular pipes shall be fabricated 5 percent out of
round to form an elliptical section. The vertical or longer axis of the elliptical section shall
be clearly marked before shipping.
9-05.4(2) Mitered Ends
The ends of steel culvert pipe or pipe arch shall not be beveled unless called for in the
Plans. If beveled ends are specified, the ends of culvert pipe over 30 inches in diameter shall
be mitered to conform to the slope of the embankment in which the culvert is to be placed
whether the culvert is constructed normal to or at an angle with the centerline of the roadway.
Beveled steel pipe end sections 12 inches through 30 inches in diameter shall be of the
same material and thickness and have the same protective coating as the pipe to which they
are attached. Beveled pipe ends of these dimensions shall be constructed in conformance with
the Standard Plans.
9-05.4(3) Protective Treatment
Steel pipe and pipe arch culverts shall be coated by one of the following protective
treatments, when such treatment is specified:
Treatment 1 Coated uniformly inside and out with asphalt as per Section 9-05.4(4)
(AASHTO M190 Type A) or with polymer as per  Section 9-05.4(5).
Treatment 2 Coated uniformly inside and out with asphalt and with an asphalt paved
invert (AASHTO M190 Type C) or with polymer as per Section 9-05.4(5).
Treatment 3 This treatment is no longer available.
Treatment 5 Coated inside and out with asphalt and a 100 percent periphery inside spun
asphalt lining (AASHTO M 190 Type D).
9-05.4(4) Asphalt Coatings and Paved Inverts
Asphalt for asphalt coatings and paved inverts shall meet the requirements of AASHTO
M190, Section 4. The coatings for Treatments 1, 2, and 5 shall be uniform, inside and out, and
applied in accordance with the following requirements:
The metal shall be free from grease, dirt, dust, moisture, or other deleterious contaminants.
Either process described below may be used for application.
1. Pipe Not Preheated – The temperature of the asphalt at the time of pipe immersion
shall be 400ºF (plus or minus 3 degrees), and the duration of the immersion shall
conform to the following schedule:

Thickness in inches Steel Minimum Immersion Time Minutes

0.064 2.5
0.079 3.0
0.109 5.0
0.138 6.5
0.168 8.0
2. Pipe Preheated. The asphalt shall have a temperature of 380ºF (plus or minus
3 degrees), and the pipe shall be brought to a temperature of 300ºF to 350ºF
before immersion.
The paved invert for Treatment 2 shall consist of bituminous material applied in
such a manner that one or more smooth pavements will be formed in the invert filling
the corrugations for at least 40 percent of the circumference. The pavement shall have
a minimum thickness of ⅛ inch above the crest of the corrugations except where the
upper edges intercept the corrugation. The pavements shall be applied following the
coating with asphalt. Treatment 5 may be substituted for Treatment 2, at the option
of the Contractor.
9-05.4(5) Polymer Protective Coating
Polymer coated steel pipe and pipe-arch shall meet the fabrication requirements
of AASHTO M36 (ASTM A760). Polymer protective coatings shall meet the material
requirements of AASHTO M246 (ASTM A742). Polymer coating shall be mill applied
to galvanized steel coils before fabrication and shall measure 10 mils thick on each side.
9-05.4(6) Spun Asphalt Lining
Asphalt for spun linings over 100 percent periphery shall conform to AASHTO M 190,
Section 4. Asphalt spun linings shall provide a smooth surface for the full interior of the pipe
by completely filling the corrugations to a minimum thickness of ⅛ inch above the crests.
The interior lining shall be applied by centrifugal or other approved methods. The interior
shall be free from sags or runs, but slight residual corrugations due to cooling shrinkage of the
lining will not be cause for rejection. At the three sheet laps, an interior nonuniformity equal
to the thickness of the sheet is allowable. The thickness of the lining shall be maintained to
the ends of the pipe.
The thickness of the lining over the crest of the corrugation shall not vary by an amount
in excess of ½ inch over the entire area of the spun lining.
In the case of helical corrugated pipe manufactured with a continuous lock seam, an
interior nonuniformity over the lock seam equal to the thickness of two culvert sheets
is allowable.
9-05.4(7) Coupling Bands
Coupling bands for steel pipe shall be as shown in the Standard Plans and shall
be fabricated of the same material as the pipe. Bands may be up to three nominal
thicknesses thinner than used for the pipe, but not thinner than 0.064 inches or thicker than
0.109 inches. Bands shall be coated with the same metallic protective treatment as the pipe
but shall not be coated with any asphalt protective treatment. Bands shall be made by the
same manufacturer as the steel pipe selected for installation.
Corrugations on the bands shall be the same size and shape as those on the pipes to be
connected. Steel bolts and nuts for coupling bands shall meet the requirements of ASTM A307
and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. Steel angles, when required for
coupling bands, shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 36. When annular corrugated
bands are used to connect helically corrugated lock-seam pipe, the seam shall be welded at the
pipe ends prior to recorrugating to prevent unraveling of the seam. All welds shall develop the
full strength of the parent metal.

Bands shall conform to the corrugations of the pipe and shall meet all applicable
requirements of AASHTO M36, with the following exceptions:
Coupling bands for all sizes of steel pipe arch with 3 by 1-inch corrugations shall be
24 inches wide.
Type K coupling bands shall only be used on circular culvert pipe when extending an
existing culvert. Rubber gaskets shall be used and shall conform to the requirements of
Section 9-04.4(3), match the width of the band, and have a minimum thickness of 1 inch.
Type K coupling bands are allowed for use on all sizes of steel pipe arch with 3 by
1-inch corrugations. Type K bands for this application shall be 24 inches wide. Rubber
gaskets shall be used and shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-04.4(3), match the
width of the band, and have a minimum thickness of 1 inch. When Type K bands are used,
pipe arch ends are not required to be recorrugated.
Gaskets are required for all culvert installations and shall meet the requirements of
Section 9-05.10(1).
9-05.4(8) Steel Nestable Pipe
Steel nestable pipe shall meet the requirements for steel pipe of these Specifications except
in the method of fabrication. Circular pipe shall be fabricated in two semicircles.
Nestable pipe may be either the stitch-type as hereinafter described or the flange-type in
accordance with Military Designation MIL-P-236. One longitudinal edge of each half of the
stitch-type nestable circular pipe shall be notched to provide interlocking seams which will
form the two segments into the full section when it is erected in the field. Hook and eye bolts,
or other approved means, shall be provided to hold the segments firmly together.
Individual plates shall be a minimum of 2 feet in length except for short or half sections
required to complete the end section of the culvert.
When protective treatment is specified in the Plans, nestable pipe shall be coated with one
of the treatments as provided in Section 9-05.4(3).
9-05.4(9) Steel End Sections
The applicable provisions of AASHTO M36 shall apply to the construction of steel end
sections, except that the end sections shall be fabricated of the same material with the same
metallic protective treatment as the pipe.
Asphalt coating shall not be used on steel end sections.
9-05.4(9)A Fabrication
The shape, thickness, dimensions, and number of pieces shall conform to the Standard
Plans for the size and shape of pipe shown in the Plans. They shall be manufactured as
integral units or so formed that they can be readily assembled and erected in place. When bolts
are used for assembly, they shall be ⅜-inch diameter or larger and shall be galvanized. No field
welding or riveting will be permitted.
9-05.4(9)B Galvanized Hardware
Bolts, nuts, and miscellaneous hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with the
provisions of AASHTO M232.
9-05.4(9)C Toe Plate Extensions
Toe plate extensions shall be furnished only when so designated in the Plans. When
required, the toe plate extensions shall be punched with holes to match those in the lip of the
skirt and fastened with ⅜ inch or larger galvanized nuts and bolts. Toe plate extensions shall
be the same material and thickness as the end section and shall be fabricated of the same
material with the same metallic protective treatment as the end section.

9-05.5 Aluminum Culvert Pipe

Aluminum culvert pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of AASHTO M 196M.
Section 9-05.4(1) shall apply to aluminum pipes.
9-05.5(2) Mitered Ends
Section 9-05.4(2) shall apply to aluminum pipes.
9-05.5(3) Vacant
9-05.5(4) Vacant
Bands shall be fabricated of the same material as the pipe and shall meet all applicable
requirements of AASHTO M196, except the band thickness shall not be more than
0.105 inches or less than 0.060 inches. All other requirements of Section 9-05.4(7) shall apply.
9-05.5(6) Aluminum End Sections
The applicable provisions of AASHTO M196 shall apply to the construction of end
sections and toe plate extensions for aluminum pipes. In addition, they shall conform to the
requirements of Section 9-05.4(9).
Asphalt coating shall not be used on aluminum end sections.
9-05.6 Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, Arch, and Underpass
9-05.6(1) General
Structural plate pipes shall be full circle of the type, gage or thickness, and
diameter specified.
Structural plate pipe arches shall be a multi-centered shape, made up of four circular arcs
tangent to each other at their junctions and symmetrical about the vertical axis, and of the type,
gage or thickness, and span specified.
Structural plate arches shall be a single-centered circular arc shape placed on a reinforced
concrete foundation, and of the design, type, gage or thickness, and span as provided for in
the Plans.
Structural plate underpasses shall be a multi-centered shape, made up of a variable number
of circular arcs tangent to each other at their junctions and symmetrical about the vertical axis,
and of the design, type, gage or thickness, and span specified.
9-05.6(2) Fabrication
The plates at longitudinal and circumferential seams shall be connected by bolts; the bolt
holes shall be staggered in rows 2 inches apart, one hole being punched in the valley and one
in the crest of each corrugation along both edges of each plate. Bolt holes on circumferential
seams shall be spaced at approximate 12-inch intervals. No hole shall be closer to the edge of
the plate than twice the diameter of the bolt.
The ends of structural plate pipes, pipe arches, arches, or underpasses shall not be mitered
unless called for in the Plans, Special Provisions, or Standard Plans. If mitered ends are
specified, the slope shall conform to the slope of the embankment in which the culvert is to
be placed. The miter on pipe arches shall be limited to the top arc only.
When elongated structural plate pipes are specified, they shall be fabricated 5 percent out
of round to form an elliptical cross-section. The vertical axis (the longer axis of the elliptical
section) shall be clearly marked on the plates before shipping.

9-05.6(4) Structural Plate Pipe Arch

Plates for structural plate pipe arches shall be formed so that the top shall be an arc of not
more than 180 degrees nor less than 155 degrees; the bottom shall be an arc of not more than
50 degrees nor less than 10 degrees; and the top shall be joined at each end to the bottom by
an arc having a radius between 18 and 31 inches and of not more than 87½ degrees nor less
than 75 degrees.
9-05.6(5) Structural Plate Arch
Structural plate arches and their foundations shall be as shown in the Plans.
9-05.6(6) Structural Plate Underpass
Structural plate underpasses shall be as provided for in the Standard Plans, or, in the case
of a special design, as provided for in the Plans.
9-05.6(7) Concrete
Concrete required for constructing structural plate arch foundations shall be Class 3000
concrete in conformance with the requirements of Section 6-02.
Steel reinforcing bars shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-07.1.
9-05.6(8) Plates
9-05.6(8)A Corrugated Steel Plates
Galvanized corrugated steel plates for constructing structural plate pipe, pipe arches,
arches, and underpasses, and nuts and bolts used in their assembly shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M167 except that the minimum mass of spelter coating on the
plates shall be 3 ounces of zinc per square foot of double exposed surface. If the average
spelter coating as determined from the required samples is less than 3 ounces, or if any one
specimen shows less than 2.7 ounces, the lot samples shall be rejected. Nuts, bolts, and
miscellaneous hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232.
9-05.6(8)B Corrugated Aluminum Plates
Aluminum alloy plates and fasteners intended for use in the construction of structural plate
pipe, pipe arches, arches, and underpasses shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M219. Nuts, bolts, and miscellaneous hardware shall be galvanized in accordance with
AASHTO M232.
9-05.7 Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe
9-05.7(1) Plain Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe
Plain concrete storm sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 86,
Class 2.
9-05.7(1)A Basis for Acceptance
The basis for acceptance of plain concrete storm sewer pipe shall be the same as specified
in Section 9-05.3(1)B.
9-05.7(2) Reinforced Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe
Reinforced concrete storm sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M170 and shall be of the class noted in the Plans or in the Special Provisions. Section 7.3.1 of
AASHTO M170 shall be amended to require that both bells and spigots shall be reinforced in
pipe 30 inches in diameter and greater.
The identification of the minor axis of elliptical reinforcement shall be in accordance with
Section 9-05.3(2)D.
The basis for acceptance of reinforced concrete storm sewer pipe shall be the same as
specified in Section 9-05.3(2)B.

9-05.7(3) Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints

All concrete storm sewer pipe shall be joined with rubber gaskets. The joints and gasket
material shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M198. Gasket material shall be handled and
stored in accordance with Section 9-04.4(5).
9-05.7(4) Testing Concrete Storm Sewer Pipe Joints
When a particular type of pipe joint design, material or joining method has not previously
been tested and approved, the following test shall be made on one test length of the assembled
storm sewer pipe to qualify the design, material or method of joining the pipe. At the option
of the Engineer, additional testing may be requested if subsequent field testing of installed
pipe indicates difficulty in obtaining properly joined pipe. The tests will be conducted at the
manufacturer’s yard, and the manufacturer will be required to make such space and facilities
available as required to conduct the tests in an efficient and workmanlike manner.
9-05.7(4)A Hydrostatic Pressure on Pipes in Straight Alignment
Hydrostatic pressure tests on pipes in straight alignment shall be made in accordance
with the procedure outlined in paragraph 8(a) of AASHTO M198, except that they shall be
performed on an assembly consisting of not less than three nor more than five pipe sections
selected from stock by the Engineer and assembled in accordance with standard installation
instructions issued by the manufacturer. The end sections shall be bulkheaded and restrained
against internal pressure.
9-05.7(4)B Hydrostatic Pressure Tests on Pipes in Maximum Deflected Position
Upon completion of the test for pipe in straight alignment, the test section shall be
deflected until at least two of the joints have been deflected to the maximum amount shown
in the manufacturer’s standard installation instructions. When thus deflected, there shall be
no leakage at the joints from an applied internal hydrostatic pressure of 5 psi.
9-05.7(4)C Hydrostatic Pressure Test on 15-Inch Diameter and Larger Pipe Under
Differential Load
The test sections shall be suitably supported so that one of the pipes of the test assembly
is suspended freely between adjacent pipes, bearing only on the joints. The suspended pipe
shall then be loaded, at its midpoint, in addition to the mass of the pipe, in accordance with
the following schedule:
Diameter Load
15 inches 7,400 lbs.
24 inches and over 11,000 lbs.
While under this load, the stressed joints shall show no leakage when subjected to an
internal hydrostatic pressure of 5 psi. At the option of the manufacturer, ½ of the load may
be applied on the bell end of the suspended pipe in lieu of the full load on the center of the
suspended pipe.
9-05.8 Vitrified Clay Sewer Pipe
This material shall not be used in Washington State Department of Transportation projects
unless specified in the Special Provisions.
Vitrified clay sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM C700, and all joints shall be factory
manufactured in accordance with ASTM C425.
9-05.9 Steel Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe
Steel spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall meet the fabrication requirements of AASHTO
M36 and these Specifications. Zinc coated steel shall meet the material requirements of
AASHTO M218 (ASTM A929). Aluminum coated steel shall meet the material requirements

of AASHTO M274 (ASTM A929). The size, coating, metal, and protective treatment, if any,
shall be as shown in the Plans or in the Specifications.
The manufacturer of spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall furnish the Engineer a
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance stating that the materials furnished comply in all
respects with these Specifications. The Engineer may require additional information or tests
to be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
Unless otherwise specified, spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be furnished with pipe ends
cut perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut evenly. Spiral rib
pipe shall be fabricated by using a continuous helical lock seam.
Spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall have helical ribs that project outwardly, be formed from
a single thickness of material, and conform to one of the following configurations:
1. ¾-inch-wide by ¾-inch-deep ribs at 7½ inches on center.
2. ¾-inch-wide by 1-inch-deep ribs at 11½ inches on center.
3. ¾-inch-wide by ⅝-inch-deep ribs at 12 inches on center.
Pipe shall be fabricated with ends that can be effectively jointed with coupling bands.
When it is required, spiral rib pipe shall be furnished with bituminous or polymer protective
treatment 1 or 2 treated or paved. The bituminous treatment for spiral rib pipe shall conform
to the requirements of Sections 9-05.4(3) and 9-05.4(4). Polymer coating shall conform to
Section 9-05.4(5).
9-05.9(1) Continuous Lock Seam Pipe
Pipes fabricated with a continuous helical seam parallel to the rib may be used for full
circle pipe. The seam shall be formed in the flat between ribs and shall conform to Sections
7.5.1 through 7.5.3 of AASHTO M36.
The basis for acceptance will be a qualification test, conducted by the State Materials
Laboratory, for each manufacturer of spiral rib lock seam steel pipe. Only those specific pipe
sizes and gasket materials, if any, approved under the qualification test will be accepted.
Continuous lock seam pipe shall be sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 249.
9-05.9(2) Vacant
Coupling bands shall be of the same material as the pipe. Coupling bands and gaskets shall
9-05.10 Steel Storm Sewer Pipe
Steel storm sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-05.4 for steel culvert
pipe, except that protective coating shall be Treatment 1 or 5, and be constructed of helically
corrugated lock seam pipe. When gasketed helically corrugated lock seam steel pipe is called
for, and the pipe is properly sized to meet hydraulic requirements, Treatment 5 is not required.
Coupling bands shall be as shown in the Standard Plans. Bands shall be fabricated of
the same material as the pipe and shall meet all applicable requirements of AASHTO M 36.
Bands may be up to three nominal thicknesses thinner than used for the pipe, but not thinner
than 0.064 inches or thicker than 0.109 inches. Bands shall be coated with the same metallic
protective treatment as the pipe but shall not be coated with any asphalt treatment. Bands shall
be made by the same manufacturer as the steel pipe selected for installation.
Corrugations on the bands shall be the same size and shape as those on the pipe to be
connected. Steel bolts and nuts for coupling bands shall meet the requirements of ASTM A307
and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M232. Steel angles, when required for
coupling bands, shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M36. When annular corrugated

bands are used to connect helically corrugated lock-seam pipe, the seam shall be welded at the
pipe ends prior to recorrugating to prevent unraveling of the seam. All welds shall develop the
full strength of the parent metal.
Gaskets are required for all storm sewer installations. Gasket material for coupling bands
shall meet the requirements of Section 9-04.4(3). Gaskets for Type D bands shall match the
width of the band and have a minimum thickness of ⅜ inch. O-ring gaskets for Type F bands
shall have a cross-sectional diameter of 13⁄16 inch for pipe diameters of 36 inches or smaller
and ⅞ inch for larger pipe diameters.
Type K coupling bands are not allowed for storm sewer applications.
9-05.10(2) Basis for Acceptance
The basis for acceptance of steel storm sewer pipe will be the same as specified in
Section 9-05.4, except when gasketed helically corrugated lock seam steel pipe is called for.
A qualification test conducted by the State Materials Laboratory will be required for each
manufacturer of gasketed helically corrugated lock seam steel pipe. Only those specific pipe
sizes and gasket materials approved under the qualification test will be accepted.
9-05.11 Aluminum Storm Sewer Pipe
Aluminum storm sewer pipe shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-05.5 for
aluminum culvert pipe, and the pipe shall be constructed of helically corrugated lock seam
aluminum pipe.
Coupling bands for aluminum pipe shall be as shown in the Standard Plans. Bands shall
be fabricated of the same material as the pipe and shall meet all applicable requirements of
AASHTO M196, except the band thickness shall not be more than 0.105 inches or less than
0.060 inches. All other requirements of Section 9-05.10(1) shall apply.
9-05.11(2) Basis for Acceptance
The basis for acceptance of aluminum storm sewer pipe will be the same as specified in
Section 9-05.0, except when gasketed helically corrugated lock seam aluminum pipe is called
for. A qualification test, conducted by the State Materials Laboratory, will be required for each
manufacturer of gasketed helically corrugated lock seam aluminum pipe. Only those specific
pipe sizes and gasket materials approved under the qualification test will be accepted.
9-05.12 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
9-05.12(1) Solid Wall PVC Culvert Pipe, Solid Wall PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, and Solid
Wall PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe
Solid wall PVC culvert pipe, solid wall PVC storm sewer pipe, and solid wall PVC sanitary
sewer pipe and fittings shall be solid wall construction and shall conform to the following
requirements:
For pipe sizes up to 15 inches: ASTM D3034 SDR 35
For pipe sizes from 18 to 48 inches: ASTM F679 using a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi
in accordance with Table 1.
Joints for solid wall PVC pipe shall conform to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric gaskets
conforming to ASTM F477.
Fittings for solid wall PVC pipe shall be injection molded, factory welded, or factory
solvent cemented.
9-05.12(2) Profile Wall PVC Culvert Pipe, Profile Wall PVC Storm Sewer Pipe, and
Profile Wall PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe
Profile wall PVC culvert pipe and profile wall PVC storm sewer pipe shall meet the
requirements of ASTM F794 Series 46, or ASTM F1803. Profile wall PVC sanitary sewer pipe
shall meet the requirements of ASTM F794 Series 46, or ASTM F1803. The maximum pipe
diameter shall be as specified in the Qualified Products List.
Joints for profile wall PVC culvert pipe shall conform to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric
gaskets conforming to ASTM F477, or as approved through the State Materials Laboratory.
Qualified manufacturers are identified in the Qualified Products List. Qualification for each
manufacturers requires joint system conformation to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric gaskets
conforming to ASTM F477 and a formal quality control plan for each plant proposed for
consideration.
A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance shall be required and shall accompany the
materials delivered to the project. The certificate shall clearly identify production lots for all
materials represented. The Contracting Agency may conduct verification tests of pipe stiffness
or other properties as it deems appropriate.
Fittings for profile wall PVC pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F794 Series 46,
or ASTM F1803.
9-05.13 Ductile Iron Sewer Pipe
Ductile iron pipe shall conform to ANSI A 21.51 or AWWA C151 and shall be cement
mortar lined and have a 1-mil seal coat per AWWA C104 or a ceramic-filled, amine-cured
Novalac Epoxy lining as indicated on the Plans or in the Special Provisions. The ductile iron
pipe shall be Special Thickness Class 50, Minimum Pressure Class 350, or the Class indicated
on the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
Nonrestrained joints shall be rubber gasket type, push on type, or mechanical type, and
shall meet the requirements of AWWA C111.
Cast iron fittings may be used with ductile iron pipe. Saddles fastened to pipe with external
bands shall not be acceptable on any new system. Normally, all fittings shall be the same
material as the pipe being connected, except that fittings using other materials or constructed
with more than one material may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer. Fittings shall
have sufficient strength to withstand handling and load stresses normally encountered.
9-05.14 ABS Composite Sewer Pipe
This material shall not be used in Washington Department of Transportation projects unless
specified in the Special Provisions.
ABS composite pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M264.
ABS composite pipe shall be provided with Type OR (flexible gasketed) joints. Rubber
gasketed joints shall conform to applicable provisions of ASTM C443.
Fittings for ABS composite pipe shall be specifically designed for connection to ABS
composite pipe with solvent cement. Normally, all fittings shall be the same material as the
pipe being connected, except that fittings using other materials or constructed with more than
one material may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer. Fittings shall have sufficient
strength to withstand handling and load stresses normally encountered.
9-05.15 Metal Castings
For all metal castings the producing foundry shall provide certification stating the country
of origin, the material meets the required ASTM or AASHTO Specification noted in the
Subsections below. The producing foundry shall detail all test results from physical testing to
determine compliance to the Specifications. The test reports shall include physical properties
of the material from each heat and shall include tensile, yield, and elongation as specified
in the appropriate ASTM or AASHTO Specification. For AASHTO 1 M 306, Section 8,
Certification is deleted and replaced with the above certification and testing requirements.
Metal castings for drainage structures shall not be dipped, painted, welded, plugged, or
repaired. Porosity in metal castings for drainage structures shall be considered a workmanship
defect subject to rejection by the Engineer. Metal castings made from gray iron or ductile iron
shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M306, and metal castings made from cast steel
shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-06.8. All metal castings shall meet the proof
load testing requirements of AASHTO M306.

9-05.15(1) Manhole Ring and Cover

Castings for manhole rings shall be gray iron or ductile iron and covers shall be ductile iron.
All covers shall be interchangeable within the dimensions shown in the Standard Plans.
All mating surfaces shall be machine finished to ensure a nonrocking fit.
The inside vertical recessed face of the ring and the vertical outside edge of the cover shall
be machined or manufactured to the following tolerances:
Ring ± 3/32 inch
Cover ± 3/32 inch
All manhole rings and covers shall be identified by the name or symbol of the producing
foundry and country of casting origin. This identification shall be in a plainly visible location
when the ring and cover are installed. Ductile iron shall be identified by the following, “DUC”
or “DI”. The producing foundry and material identification shall be adjacent to each other
and shall be minimum ½-inch to maximum 1-inch high letters, recessed to be flush with the
adjacent surfaces.
9-05.15(2) Metal Frame, Grate, and Solid Metal Cover for Catch Basins or Inlets
Castings for metal frames for catch basins and inlets shall be cast steel, gray iron, or ductile
iron, and as shown in the Standard Plans.
Castings for grates and solid metal covers for catch basins and inlets shall be cast steel or
ductile iron and as shown in the Standard Plans. Additionally, leveling pads are allowed on
grates and solid metal covers with a height not to exceed ⅛ inch. The producing foundry’s
name and material designation shall be embossed on the top of the grate. The material shall be
identified by the following: “CS” for cast steel or “DUC” or “DI” for ductile iron and shall be
located near the producing foundry’s name.
Grates and covers shall be seated properly to prevent rocking, including the replacement of
existing covers with solid metal covers. After seating, the frame and grate or frame and cover
shall be maintained as a unit. Alternate designs are acceptable provided they conform to the
manufacturer’s shop drawings approved prior to Award of the Contract.
9-05.15(3) Cast Metal Inlets
The castings for cast metal inlets shall be cast steel or ductile iron, and as shown in the
Standard Plans. Alternate plans are acceptable provided they conform to the fabricator’s shop
drawings approved prior to Award of Contract.
9-05.16 Grate Inlets and Drop Inlets
Steel in grates, angles, and anchors for grate inlets shall conform to ASTM A36, except
structural tube shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B, and structural shapes may conform
to ASTM A992. After fabrication, the steel shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO
M111, or galvanized with a hot-sprayed (plasma flame applied) 6 mil minimum thickness
plasma coating.
Steel grating shall be fabricated by weld connections. Welds, welding procedures, and
welding materials shall conform with the AWS D1.1/D1.1M, latest edition, Structural
Welding Code.
Alternate grate designs will be permitted, with the approval of the Engineer, providing the
hydraulic capacity is not decreased, the overall dimensions are the same allowing the grate
to be interchangeable, and the strength is essentially equal to the grate shown in the Standard
Plans or the Plans.
The Contractor has the option of furnishing either cast-in-place or precast inlets unless
otherwise shown in the Plans. Alternate designs are acceptable provided they conform to the
fabricator’s shop drawings approved prior to Award of the Contract.

9-05.17 Aluminum Spiral Rib Storm Sewer Pipe

Aluminum spiral storm sewer pipe shall meet the fabrication requirements of AASHTO
M196 and these Specifications. Aluminum alloy shall meet the material requirements of
AASHTO M97 (ASTM B744). The size and corrugation shall be as shown in the Plans or in
the Specifications. The size, metal, and protective treatment shall be as shown in the Plans or
in the Specifications.
The manufacturer of spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall furnish to the Engineer a
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance stating that the materials furnished comply in all
respects with these Specifications. The Engineer may require additional information or tests
to be performed by the Contractor at no expense to the Contracting Agency.
Unless otherwise specified, spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall be furnished with pipe ends
cut perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. Pipe ends shall be cut evenly. Spiral rib
pipe shall be fabricated by using a continuous helical lock seam.
Spiral rib storm sewer pipe shall have helical ribs that project outwardly, be formed from
a single thickness of material, and conform to one of the following configurations:
1. ¾-inch-wide by ¾-inch-deep ribs at 7½ inches on center.
2. ¾-inch-wide by 1-inch-deep ribs at 11½ inches on center.
3. ¾-inch-wide by ⅝-inch-deep ribs at 12 inches on center.
9-05.17(1) Continuous Lock Seam Pipe
Pipes fabricated with a continuous helical lock seam parallel to the rib may be used for
full circle pipe. The lock seam shall be formed in the flat between ribs and shall conform to
Sections 13.2.1 through 13.2.5 of AASHTO M196.
The basis for acceptance will be a qualification test, conducted by the State Materials
Laboratory, for each manufacturer of spiral rib lock seam pipe. Only those specific pipe sizes
and gasket materials, if any, approved under the qualification test, will be accepted.
Continuous lock seam pipe shall be sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 249.
Coupling bands shall be of the same material as the pipe. Coupling bands and gaskets shall
9-05.18 Safety Bars for Culvert Pipe
Steel pipe used as safety bars and steel pipe used as sockets shall conform to ASTM A53,
Grade B. Steel tubing used as safety bars shall conform to ASTM A500, Grade B. Steel plate
shall conform to ASTM A36. All parts shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
AASHTO M111.
9-05.19 Corrugated Polyethylene Culvert Pipe, Couplings, and Fittings
Corrugated polyethylene culvert pipe, couplings, and fittings shall meet the requirements
of AASHTO M 294 Type S or D for pipe 12- to 60-inch diameter with silt-tight joints.
Corrugated polyethylene culvert pipe manufacturers shall participate in the National
Joints for corrugated polyethylene culvert pipe shall be made with either a bell/bell or bell
and spigot coupling and shall incorporate the use of a gasket conforming to the requirements
of ASTM D1056 Type 2 Class B Grade 3 or ASTM F477. All gaskets shall be factory installed
on the coupling or on the pipe by the qualified manufacturer.
Qualification for each manufacturer of corrugated polyethylene culvert pipe requires
an approved joint system and a formal quality control plan for each plant proposed
for consideration.


9-05.20 Corrugated Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe, Couplings, and Fittings
Corrugated polyethylene storm sewer pipe, couplings, and fittings shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M294 Type S or D. The maximum pipe diameter for corrugated
polyethylene storm sewer pipe shall be the diameter for which a manufacturer has submitted.
Fittings shall be blow molded, rotational molded, or factory welded.
Corrugated polyethylene storm sewer pipe manufacturers shall participate in the National
All joints for corrugated polyethylene storm sewer pipe shall be made with a bell/bell
or bell and spigot coupling and shall conform to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric gaskets
conforming to ASTM F477. All gaskets shall be factory installed on the pipe in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Qualification for each manufacturer or corrugated polyethylene storm sewer pipe
requires joint system conformance to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric gaskets conforming to
ASTM F477 and a formal quality control plan for each plant proposed for consideration.
materials represented. The Contracting Agency may conduct verification tests of pipe stiffness
9-05.21 Steel Rib Reinforced Polyethylene Culvert Pipe
Steel rib reinforced polyethylene culvert pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F2562
Class 1 for steel reinforced thermoplastic ribbed pipe and fittings for pipe 24 to 60 inches in
diameter with silt-tight joints.
Silt-tight joints for steel reinforced polyethylene culvert pipe shall be made with a bell/
bell or bell and spigot coupling and shall incorporate the use of a gasket conforming to the
requirements of ASTM F477. All gaskets shall be installed on the pipe by the manufacturer.
Qualification for each manufacturer of steel reinforced polyethylene culvert pipe
requires an approved joint system and a formal quality control plan for each plant proposed
for consideration.
9-05.22 Steel Rib Reinforced Polyethylene Storm Sewer Pipe
Steel rib reinforced polyethylene storm sewer pipe shall meet the requirements of
ASTM F2562 Class 1 for steel reinforced thermoplastic ribbed pipe and fittings. The
maximum diameter for steel reinforced polyethylene storm sewer pipe shall be the diameter
for which a manufacturer has submitted a qualified joint. Qualified manufacturers and
approved joints are listed in the Qualified Products List. Fittings shall be rotationally molded,
injection molded, or factory welded.
All joints for steel reinforced polyethylene storm sewer pipe shall be made with a bell and
spigot coupling and shall conform to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric gaskets conforming to
ASTM F477. All gaskets shall be installed on the pipe by the manufacturer.
Qualification for each manufacturer of steel reinforced polyethylene storm sewer pipe
requires joint system conformance to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric gaskets conforming
to ASTM F477 and a formal quality control plan for each plant proposed for consideration.


or other properties it deems appropriate.
9-05.23 High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Pipe
HDPE pipe shall be manufactured from resins meeting the requirements of ASTM D3350
with a cell classification of 345464C and a Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) designation of PE 3408.
The pipes shall have a minimum standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 32.5.
HDPE pipe shall be joined into a continuous length by an approved joining method.
The joints shall not create an increase in the outside diameter of the pipe. The joints
shall be fused, snap together, or threaded. The joints shall be watertight, rubber gasketed if
applicable, and pressure testable to the requirements of ASTM D3212.
Joints to be welded by butt fusion shall meet the requirements of ASTM F2620 and the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Fusion equipment used in the joining procedure shall be
capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not
limited to, fusion temperature, alignment, and fusion pressure. All field welds shall be made
with fusion equipment equipped with a Data Logger. Temperature, fusion pressure, and a
graphic representation of the fusion cycle shall be part of the Quality Control records. Electro
fusion may be used for field closures, as necessary. Joint strength shall be equal to or greater
than the tensile strength of the pipe.
Fittings shall be manufactured from the same resins and cell classification as the pipe
unless specified otherwise in the Plans or Specifications. Butt fusion fittings and Flanged
or Mechanical joint adapters shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM D3261. Electro
fusion fittings shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM F1055.
HDPE pipe to be used as liner pipe shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M326 and this
specification.
The supplier shall furnish a Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance stating that the
materials meet the requirements of ASTM D3350 with the correct cell classification with
the physical properties listed above. The supplier shall certify that the dimensions meet the
requirements of ASTM F714 or as indicated in this Specification or the Plans.
At the time of manufacture, each lot of pipes, liners, and fittings shall be inspected
for defects and tested for Elevated Temperature Sustained Pressure in accordance with
ASTM F714. The Contractor shall not install any pipe that is more than 2 years from the date
of manufacture.
At the time of delivery, the pipe shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color,
and free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults.
Pipe shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number that identifies the
manufacturer, SDR, size, material, machine, and date on which the pipe was manufactured.
9-05.24 Polypropylene Culvert Pipe, Polypropylene Storm Sewer Pipe, and
Polypropylene Sanitary Sewer Pipe
All joints for polypropylene pipe shall be made with a bell/bell or bell and spigot coupling
and shall conform to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric gaskets conforming to ASTM F477.
All gaskets shall be factory installed on the pipe in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Qualification for each manufacturer of polypropylene storm sewer pipe requires joint
system conformance to ASTM D3212 using elastomeric gaskets conforming to ASTM F477
and a formal quality control plan for each plant proposed for consideration.
or other properties it deems appropriate.

9-05.24(1) Polypropylene Culvert Pipe and Storm Sewer Pipe

Polypropylene culvert and storm sewer pipe shall conform to the following requirements:
1. For dual wall pipe sizes up to 30 inches: ASTM F2736.
2. For triple wall pipe sizes from 30 to 60 inches: ASTM F2764.
3. For dual wall profile pipe sizes 36 to 60 inches: AASHTO MP 21, Type S or Type D.
4. Fittings shall be factory welded, injection molded or PVC.
9-05.24(2) Polypropylene Sanitary Sewer Pipe
Polypropylene sanitary sewer pipe shall conform to the following requirements:
1. For pipe sizes up to 30 inches: ASTM F2736.
2. For pipe sizes from 30 to 60 inches: ASTM F2764.
3. Fittings shall be factory welded, injection molded or PVC.
9-05.30 Vacant
9-05.40 Vacant
9-05.50 Precast Concrete Drainage Structures
9-05.50(1) Fabrication Tolerances and Requirements
All precast concrete items shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M199, fabricated as
shown on the Plans, and shall meet the tolerances and revisions as listed below.
1. The following information shall be legibly marked on each precast product (excluding
rectangular and round adjustment sections). Marking shall be indented into the concrete,
painted thereon with waterproof paint, or contained within a bar-coded sticker firmly
attached to the product:
a. fabricator name or trademark.
b. date of manufacture.
2. Catch Basins (to include Type 1, Type 1L, and Type 1P), and Concrete Inlets:
a. knock-out wall thickness, measured at thinnest point, 1½ to 2½ inches.
b. knock-out diameter, 5 percent plus/minus allowance.
c. base thickness, measured at thinnest point, 4 inches with ½-inch minus tolerance.
d. all other dimensions as shown on Plans, 5 percent plus/minus allowance.
3. Catch Basin Type 2 and Manhole Type 1, 2, 3:
a. knock-out diameter, 5 percent plus/minus allowance.
4. Flat Slab Tops:
a. round or rectangular opening, 5 percent plus/minus allowance.
5. Rectangular or Circular Adjustment Sections:
a. opening size or diameter, 5 percent plus/minus allowance.
6. Conical Sections:
a. top opening diameter, 5 percent plus/minus allowance.
7. Grate Inlets:
a. knock-out wall thickness, measured at thinnest point, 1½ to 2½ inches.
b. knock-out diameter, 5 percent plus/minus allowance.
c. opening size, 2½ percent plus/minus allowance.
8. Drop Inlets:
a. knock-out diameter, 1 inch plus/minus allowance.

9-05.50(2) Manholes
Precast concrete manholes shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M199.
The joints may be the tongue and groove type or the shiplap type, sufficiently deep to
prevent lateral displacement.
When secondary synthetic fiber reinforcement is used in 48-inch diameter by 3-foot
high eccentric or concentric cone sections, the synthetic fiber shall meet the requirements
of Section 9-05.50(9). A minimum of two hoops of W2 wire shall be placed in the 48-inch
end of each cone. No steel is required in the remainder of the cone.
Precast manhole sections 48-inch diameter, with no knock-outs, may be produced using
no steel reinforcement. As an alternate to conventional steel reinforcement, manufacturers
shall use synthetic structural fibers meeting the requirements of Section 9-05.50(10).
9-05.50(3) Precast Concrete Catch Basins
Precast concrete catch basins shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-05.50(1),
except that the dimensions shall be as set forth in the Plans.
When secondary synthetic fiber reinforcement is used to produce Type 1, Type 1L, and
Type 1P Catch Basins, the synthetic fiber shall meet the requirements of Section 9-05.50(9).
A minimum amount of steel reinforcement shall be used to reinforce the area around the
knockouts. Steel reinforcing shall consist of a No. 3 horizontal hoop reinforcing bar located
above the knockouts and a No. 3 vertical reinforcing bar in each corner, extending a minimum
of 18 inches below the top surface of the catch basin.
Catch Basin Type 1 may be produced using structural synthetic fibers meeting the
requirements of Section 9-05.50(10). Catch Basin Type 1 shall contain one hoop of No. 3
reinforcing bar around the top perimeter.
Knockouts or cutouts may be placed on all four sides and may be round or D-shaped.
9-05.50(4) Precast Concrete Inlets
Precast concrete inlets shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-05.50(1), except that
the dimensions shall be as set forth in the Plans.
9-05.50(5) Precast Concrete Drywells
Precast concrete drywells shall meet the requirements of Section 9-05.50(1). Seepage port
size and shape may vary per manufacturer. Each seepage port shall provide a minimum of
1 square inch and a maximum of 7 square inches for round openings and 15 square inches for
rectangular openings. The ports shall be uniformly spaced with at least one port per 8 inches
of drywell height and 15 inches of drywell circumference.
Precast Drywells may be produced using no steel reinforcement. As an alternate to
conventional steel reinforcement, manufacturers shall use synthetic structural fibers meeting
the requirements of Section 9-05.50(10).
9-05.50(6) Vacant
9-05.50(7) Vacant
9-05.50(8) Vacant
9-05.50(9) Synthetic Fibers for Precast Units
The synthetic fiber, either nylon multifilament fibers or polypropylene fibrillated fibers,
shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1116, Section 4.1.3 3 and ICC ES AC 32, Sections
4.1.1 and 4.1.2. Synthetic fibers shall be added at a minimum dosage rate of 1.0 pound
of nylon multifilament fibers per cubic yard of concrete or 1.5 pounds of polypropylene
fibrillated fibers per cubic yard of concrete and shall be thoroughly mixed with the concrete
before placement in the forms. The synthetic fibers shall be a minimum of 0.75 inches and
a maximum of 2 inches in length.

9-05.50(10) Synthetic Structural Fibers for Precast Units

Synthetic fibers shall be monofilament or monofilament/fibrillated blend made of
polyolefin, polypropylene, or polypropylene/polyethylene blend, meeting the requirements of
ASTM C1116, Section 4.1.3, and ICC ES Acceptance Criteria 32, Sections 4.1.3 and 4.1.2.
Additionally, the vendor or manufacturer must furnish an Engineering Report that provides
test data in accordance with ASTM C1018 and/or ASTM C1399 from an ICC-qualified
commercial laboratory relating to the specification requirements.
The vendor or manufacturer shall provide a letter of certification stating compliance with
specifications and/or standard codes.
The fibers shall be a minimum of 2 inches in length and have an aspect ratio (length
divided by the equivalent diameter of the fiber) between 70 and 100 when the fibers are
in their final phase.
The fibers shall have a minimum tensile strength of 50 ksi and a minimum modulus
of elasticity of 600 ksi, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3822.
Precast drainage units shall have a minimum dosage rate of 3.75-lbs/cu yd. or more in
order to obtain an Average Residual Strength (ARS) of 175 psi when tested in accordance with
ASTM C1018 and/or ASTM C1399. The fiber supplier shall submit independent laboratory
data to support ARS results.

9-06 Structural Steel and Related Materials

9-06.1 Structural Carbon Steel
Structural carbon steel shall conform to AASHTO M270, Grade 36, except as
otherwise noted.
9-06.2 Structural Low Alloy Steel
Structural low alloy steel shall conform to AASHTO M270, Grade 50 or 50W as
specified in the Plans or Special Provisions, except as otherwise noted.
9-06.3 Structural High-Strength Steel
Structural high-strength steel shall be high yield strength, quenched, and tempered
structural steel conforming to AASHTO M270, Grades 70W, 100, or 100W as specified in
the Plans or Special Provisions, except as otherwise noted.
9-06.4 Vacant
9-06.5 Bolts
9-06.5(1) Unfinished Bolts
Unfinished bolts (ordinary machine bolts) shall conform to the Specification requirements
of ASTM A307 Grade A or B. Nuts shall comply with ASTM A563 Grade A requirements.
Washers, unless otherwise specified, shall meet ASTM F844 Specifications.
The Contractor shall submit a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for the bolts, nuts,
and washers prior to installing any of them.
9-06.5(2) Vacant
9-06.5(3) High-Strength Bolts
High-strength bolts for structural steel joints shall conform to either ASTM F3125 Grade
A325 Type 1 or 3 or ASTM F3125 Grade A490 Type 1 or 3, as specified in the Plans or
Special Provisions. Tension control bolt assemblies, meeting all requirements of ASTM F3125
Grade F1852 may be substituted where Grade A325 high-strength bolts and associated
hardware are specified.
When specified in the Plans or Special Provisions to be galvanized, tension control bolt
assemblies shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM B695 Class 55
Type I.
Bolts conforming to ASTM F3125 Grade A490 shall not be galvanized.
Bolts for unpainted and nongalvanized structures shall conform to ASTM F3125
Grade A325 Type 3, ASTM F3125 Grade A490 Type 3, or ASTM F3125 Grade F1852 Type 3,
as specified in the Plans or Special Provisions.
Nuts for high-strength bolts shall meet the following requirements:
ASTM F3125 Grade A325 Bolts
Type 1 (black) ASTM A563 Grade C, C3, D, DH, and DH3
AASHTO M292 Grade 2H
Type 3 (black weathering) ASTM A563 Grade C3 and DH3
Type 1 (hot-dip galvanized) ASTM A563 Grade DH
ASTM F3125 Grade A490 Bolts
Type 1 (black) ASTM A563 Grade DH and DH3
Type 3 (black weathering) ASTM A563 Grade DH3

Nuts that are to be galvanized shall be tapped oversized the minimum required for proper
assembly. The amount of overtap shall be such that the nut will assemble freely on the bolt
in the coated condition and shall meet the mechanical requirements of ASTM A563 and the
rotational capacity test specified in ASTM F3125.
Galvanized nuts shall be lubricated in accordance with ASTM A563 including
supplementary requirement S2. Documentation shall include the name, method of application,
and dilution of the lubricant applied to the nuts.
Washers for ASTM F3125 Grade A325 and Grade A490 bolts shall meet the requirements
of ASTM F436 and may be circular, beveled, or extra thick, as required. The surface condition
and weathering characteristics of the washers shall be the same as for the bolts being specified.
Direct Tension Indicators shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F959 and may be
used with either ASTM F3125 Grade A325 or Grade A490 bolts. Direct tension indicators
shall be galvanized by mechanical deposition in accordance with ASTM B695 class 55. Hot-
dip galvanizing will not be allowed.
All bolts, nuts, and direct tension indicators shall be marked and identified as required in
the pertinent Specifications.
Lock-pin and collar fasteners which meet the materials, manufacturing, and chemical
composition requirements of ASTM F3125 Grade A325 or Grade A490, and which meet the
mechanical property requirements of the same Specification in full size tests, and which have
a body diameter and bearing areas under lock-pin head and collar not less than those provided
by a bolt and nut of the same nominal size may be used. The Contractor shall submit a detailed
installation procedure to the Engineer for approval. Approval from the Engineer to use a lock-
pin and collar fasteners shall be received by the Contractor prior to use.
The Contractor shall provide Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for all bolts,
nuts, washers, and load indicators. The Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance shall
include certified mill test reports and test reports performed on the finished bolt confirming
that all of the materials provided meet the requirements of the applicable AASHTO or
ASTM Specification. The documentation shall also include the name and address of the test
laboratory, the date of testing, the lot identification of the bolts and nuts, and coating thickness
for galvanized bolts and nuts. Shipping containers (not lids) shall be marked with the lot
identification of the item contained therein.
Bolts shall be sampled prior to incorporating into a structure. For the purposes of selecting
samples, a lot of bolts shall be the quantity of bolts of the same nominal diameter and same
nominal length in a consignment shipped to the project site. The minimum number of samples
from each lot shall be as follows:
Lot Size Sample Size1
0 to 50 *
51 to 150 4
151 to 1,200 6
1,201 to 10,000 10
10,001 to 35,000 16
35,001 and over 24
*Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance – samples not required.
1Nuts, washers, and load indicator devices, and tension control bolt assemblies or devices
shall be sampled at the same frequency as the bolts.

All testing of bolts, nuts, washers, and load indicating devices shall be performed on
specimens as they are to be installed.
All samples shall include a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for each lot of bolts
provided as defined in Section 1-06.3.

9-06.5(4) Anchor Bolts

Anchor bolts shall meet the requirements of ASTM F1554 and, unless otherwise specified,
shall be Grade 105 and shall conform to Supplemental Requirements S2, S3, and S4.
Nuts for ASTM F1554 Grade 105 black anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A563,
Grade D or DH. Nuts for ASTM F1554 Grade 105 galvanized bolts shall conform to either
ASTM A563, Grade DH, or AASHTO M292, Grade 2H, and shall conform to the overtapping,
lubrication, and rotational testing requirements in Section 9-06.5(3). Nuts for ASTM F1554
Grade 36 or 55 black or galvanized anchor bolts shall conform to ASTM A563, Grade A
or DH. Washers shall conform to ASTM F436.
The bolts shall be tested by the manufacturer in accordance with the requirements of the
pertinent Specification and as specified in these Specifications. Anchor bolts, nuts, and washers
shall be inspected prior to shipping to the project site. The Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer for approval a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance for the anchor bolts, nuts,
and washers, as defined in Section 1-06.3. If the Engineer deems it appropriate, the Contractor
shall provide a sample of the anchor bolt, nut, and washer for testing.
All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be marked and identified as required in the pertinent
Specification.
9-06.6 Vacant
9-06.7 Vacant
9-06.8 Steel Castings
Steel castings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M103, Mild to Medium
Strength Carbon Steel Castings for General Application, grade 70-36, unless otherwise
designated in the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
9-06.9 Gray Iron Castings
Gray iron castings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M306. The class of
castings to be furnished shall be that designated in the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
9-06.10 Malleable Iron Castings
Malleable iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A47.
9-06.11 Steel Forgings and Steel Shafting
Steel forgings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M102. The classes of
forgings to be furnished shall be those specified in the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
Steel shafting shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M169, Grade Designation
1016 to 1030 inclusive, unless otherwise specified.
9-06.12 Bronze Castings
Bronze castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 22, Bronze Castings for
Bridges and Turntables.
9-06.13 Vacant
9-06.14 Ductile Iron Castings
Ductile iron castings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A536, Grade 80-55-06,
unless otherwise specified in the Plans or in the Special Provisions.
9-06.15 Welded Shear Connectors
Welded shear studs shall be made from cold drawn bar stock conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO M169. Grades 1010 through 1020, inclusive, either semi-killed or
killed deoxidation.

The material shall conform to the following mechanical properties:

Tensile Strength 60,000 psi min.
Yield Strength 50,000 psi min.
Elongation 20 percent min.
Reduction of Area 50 percent min.
Mechanical properties shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO Methods and
Definitions T 244.
At the manufacturer’s option, mechanical properties of the studs shall be determined by
testing either the steel after cold finishing, or the full diameter finished studs.
9-06.16 Roadside Sign Structures
All bolts, nuts, washers, cap screws, and coupling bolts shall conform to ASTM F3125
Grade A325 and Section 9-06.5(3), except as noted otherwise. All connecting hardware shall
be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M232.
Posts for single-post sign structures shall meet the requirements of ASTM A500 Grade B or
ASTM A53 Grade B, Type E or S.
Posts for perforated square steel posts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A653
Grade 50. Perforated square steel posts shall be finished in accordance with ASTM A653 G90
Structural Quality Grade 50 or ASTM A653 G140.
Slip bases (SB1, SB2, and SB3) for perforated square steel posts shall conform to the
following:
Plates ASTM A572
Casting (SB3) ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12 and ASTM A153
Tubing ASTM A500 Grade B
Angle Iron (SB1) ASTM A36
Except as noted otherwise, the slip bases (SB1, SB2, and SB3) for perforated square steel
posts shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
The heavy-duty anchor (lower sign post support) used for perforated square steel
posts (ST‑4) shall meet the requirements of ASTM A500 Grade B and shall be hot-dipped
galvanized.
The bolts for connecting square steel posts to the upper slip plate SB-1, SB-2, or SB-3 shall
be corner bolts and conform to ASTM F568 Class 4.6, zinc coated, shoulder flange bolts and
conform to ASTM A29, zinc coated; or commercial bolts stock and conform to ASTM A307,
zinc coated.
The bolts connecting perforated square steel posts to the lower sign post support (ST-2 or
ST-4) shall conform to ASTM A307, Grade A and galvanized. The bolts connecting the lower
slip plate (SB-1, SB-2, or SB-3) to the heavy-duty anchor (lower sign post support ST-4) shall
conform to ASTM A307 and galvanized. The bolt stop for ST-2 and ST-4 shall conform to
ASTM A307, Grade A and galvanized.
Wide flange steel or solid square steel posts for multiple-post sign structures shall conform
to either ASTM A36 or ASTM A992. Posts conforming to either ASTM A588 or ASTM A572
Grade 50 may be used as an acceptable alternate to the ASTM A36 and ASTM A992 posts. All
steel not otherwise specified shall conform to either ASTM A36 or ASTM A992.
Except as noted otherwise, all steel, including posts, base plates, and base stiffeners, shall
be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M111.
Base connectors for multiple directional steel breakaway posts shall conform to the
following:
Brackets Aluminum Alloy 6061 T-6
Bosses for Type TPB Brackets ASTM A582
Anchor Ferrules Type 304 stainless steel for threaded portion. AISI
1045 steel rod and AISI 1008 coil for cage portion

Anchor couplings for multiple directional steel breakaway posts shall conform to AMS
6378D with a tensile breaking strength range as follows:
Type TPA 17,000 to 21,000 lb
Type TPB 47,000 to 57,000 lb
For multi-directional breakaway base connectors, shims shall conform to ASTM A653,
SS Grade 33, Coating Designation G 165.
9-06.17 Vacant
9-06.18 Metal Bridge Railing
Metal bridge railing shall conform to the type and material Specifications set forth in the
Plans and Special Provisions. Steel used for metal railings, when galvanized after fabrication
in accordance with AASHTO M111, shall have a controlled silicon content of either 0.00
to 0.04 percent or 0.15 to 0.25 percent. Mill test certificates verifying the silicon content
of the steel shall be submitted to both the galvanizer and the Engineer prior to beginning
galvanizing operations.
Section 8, part (b) of the Aluminum Association Standard Specifications for Aluminum
Railing Posts Alloy A 344-T4 is hereby revised to provide that no X-ray inspection will be
required after a foundry technique has been established for each mold which will ensure
production of castings which are free from harmful defects. Inspection for approval of
castings will be made by the Engineer after the finished castings have been anodized as
noted in the Plans.
Welding of aluminum shall be in accordance with Section 9-28.14(3).
9-06.19 Vacant
9-06.20 Vacant
9-06.21 Vacant
9-06.22 Bolts, Washers, and Other Hardware
Ordinary machine bolts and flat head bolts shall be made from commercial bolt stock
meeting the Specifications of ASTM A307, and shall be grade A. Drift bolts and dowels may
be either wrought iron or medium steel. Washers may be cast iron or malleable iron or may be
cut from medium steel or wrought iron plate.
All bolts and other hardware which are to be galvanized and which require bending or
shaping shall be hot forged to the required shape before galvanizing. Cold bending of such
material will not be permitted because of the tendency toward embrittlement during the
galvanizing process. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with AASHTO M232.
Split rings for log cribbing of 4 inches inside diameter shall be manufactured from hot
rolled, low carbon steel conforming to ASTM A711 AISI, Grade 1015. Each ring shall
form a true circle with the principle axis of the cross section of the ring metal parallel to the
geometric axis of the ring. The thickness of the metal section shall be 0.195 inch plus or
minus 0.010 inch and the section shall be beveled from the central portion toward the edges
to a thickness of 0.145 inch plus or minus 0.010 inch. It shall be cut through in one place
in its circumference to form a tongue and slot. Split ring connectors shall be galvanized in
accordance with AASHTO M232.
Spike-grid timber connectors shall be manufactured according to ASTM A47 for malleable
iron castings. They shall consist of four rows of opposing spikes forming a 4⅛-inch square
grid with 16 teeth which are held in place by fillets which are diamond shaped in cross section.
Nails shall be round wire of standard form. Spikes shall be wire spikes or boat spikes, as
specified in the Plans. Bolts, dowels, washers, and other hardware, including nails, shall be
black or galvanized as specified in the Plans, but if not so specified shall be galvanized when
used in treated timber structures.

9-07 Reinforcing Steel

9-07.1 General
9-07.1(1) Acceptance by Manufacturer’s Certification
Reinforcing steel may be accepted by the Engineer based on the Manufacturer’s Certificate
of Compliance.
9-07.1(1)A Acceptance of Materials
Reinforcing steel rebar manufacturers shall comply with the National Transportation
Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP) Work Plan for Reinforcing Steel (rebar) Manufacturers.
Reinforcing steel rebar manufacturers shall participate in the NTPEP Audit Program for
Reinforcing Steel (rebar) Manufacturers and be listed on the NTPEP audit program website
displaying that they are NTPEP compliant.
Steel reinforcing bar manufacturers use either English or a Metric size designation while
stamping rebar. The actual size of the bar, whether stamped with an English or a Metric size
designation is acceptable. The Contract Plans and the Standard Plans will continue to use an
English size designation. The table below shows the comparable reinforcing steel bar size
designations in the both units of measure:
English Designation Bar Diameter Metric Designation
#3 (0.375 inches) #10
#4 (0.500 inches) #13
#5 (0.625 inches) #16
#6 (0.750 inches) #19
#7 (0.875 inches) #22
#8 (1.000 inches) #25
#9 (1.128 inches) #29
#10 (1.270 inches) #32
#11 (1.410 inches) #36
#14 (1.690 inches) #43
#18 (2.260 inches) #57
9-07.1(2) Bending
Steel reinforcing bars shall be cut and bent cold to the shapes shown on the Plans.
Fabrication tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 315. The dimensions shown in the
Plans are out-to-out unless shown otherwise. Hooks and bends of steel reinforcing bars shall
be bent to the following inside diameters unless shown otherwise in the Plans:
Bar Size Stirrups and Ties (in) All Other Bars
No. 3 1½ 6 bar diameters
No. 4 2 6 bar diameters
No. 7 5¼ 6 bar diameters
No. 8 6 6 bar diameters
No. 9 through No. 11 8 bar diameters
No. 14 through No. 18 10 bar diameters
The supplementary requirements of AASHTO M31 for bend tests shall apply to size No. 14
and No. 18 steel reinforcing bars which have hooks or bends.
Hooked ends of steel reinforcing bars shall be standard hooks unless shown otherwise
in the Plans. Standard hooks shall consist of a 90-, 135-, or 180-degree bend as shown in

the Plans plus a minimum bar extension at the free end of the bar shown in the table below.
Seismic hooks shall consist of a 135-degree bend plus a minimum bar extension at the free
end of the bar shown in the table below.
Minimum Bar Extensions for Standard and Seismic Hooks
180º Hook 135º Hook 90º Hook
Bar Size All Bars Seismic Hook All Other Bars Stirrups and Ties All Other Bars
No. 3 2 ½″ 3″ 2¼″ 2¼″ 4½″
No. 4 2 ½″ 3″ 3″ 3″ 6″
No. 5 2 ½″ 3¾″ 3¾″ 3¾″ 7½″
No. 6 3″ 4½″ 4½″ 9″ 9″
No. 7 3½″ 5¼″ 5¼″ 10½″ 10½″
No. 8 4″ 6″ 6″ 12″ 12″
No. 9 4¾″ 13¾″
No. 10 5¼″ 15¼″
No. 11 5¾″ 17″
No. 14 7″ 20½″
No. 18 9¼″ 27¼″
9-07.1(3) Lengths
Net length is the length of bar along the bar centerline from end to end. Net lengths of
bent bars shown in the “LENGTH” column of the bar list in the Plans are rounded to the
nearest inch.
9-07.1(4) Vacant
9-07.2 Deformed Steel Bars
Deformed steel bars for concrete reinforcement shall conform to either AASHTO M31
Grade 60 or ASTM A706 Grade 60, except as otherwise noted in this section or as shown
in the Plans. Steel reinforcing bars for the cast-in-place components of bridge structures
(excluding sidewalks and barriers but including shafts and concrete piles), and for precast
substructure components of bridge structures, shall conform to ASTM A706 Grade 60 only.
Deformed steel bars are referred to in the Plans and Specifications by number: for example,
No. 3, No. 4, No. 5, etc.
9-07.2(1) Headed Steel Reinforcing Bar
Headed steel reinforcing bars shall conform to Section 9-07.2 and ASTM A970, including
Annex A1 requirements for Class HA head dimensions. Headed steel reinforcing bars shall be
forged headed bars or threaded headed bars.
9-07.3 Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars
Epoxy-coated rebar shall be coated according to ASTM A775 with the additional following
modifications:
1. The list of steel reinforcing bars acceptable for coating shall include ASTM A706.
2. The Contractor shall furnish a written certification that properly identifies the material,
the number of each batch of coating material used, quantity represented, date of
manufacture, name and address of manufacturer, and a statement that the supplied
coating material meets the requirements of ASTM A775.
3. Prior to coating the bars, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the
coating material manufacturer’s recommendation on the proper use and application
requirements of the coating material. For Pre-approved Epoxy Coating Facilities, this
information will be available to the Fabrication Inspector upon request.

4. A certification stating that all bars have been coated in accordance with the coating
material manufacturer’s recommendations and these Specifications shall be furnished
with each shipment. This certification shall include for each bar size the preheat
temperatures, cure times, thickness checks, holidays detected, and test results.
Two copies of these certifications shall be furnished to the Engineer.
5. The Contractor shall give advance notice to the Engineer of the coating schedule in
the coating plant so that Contracting Agency inspection may be provided. The Engineer
may inspect the coated bars at the coating plant for approval.
6. The patching material, compatible with the coating material and inert in concrete,
shall be supplied with each shipment.
7. For projects where epoxy-coated steel reinforcing bars are used in the top mat of
bridge decks only, the maximum amount of damage to the coating shall not exceed
0.25 percent of the surface area of each bar.
8. The thickness of epoxy coating shall be 10 mils plus or minus 2 mils.
9. Samples, when required, shall be shipped to the Washington State Department of
Transportation, Materials Laboratory, 1655 South 2nd Avenue, Tumwater, WA 98504.
9-07.4 Plain Steel Bars
Where plain steel bars are specified, they shall conform to the chemical and
physical properties of AASHTO M31, Grade 60, unless specifically noted otherwise. Plain
steel bars are indicated in the Plans and Specifications by fractions of an inch; for example,
⅜ inch Ø, ½ inch Ø, ⅝ inch Ø, etc.
9-07.5 Dowel Bars (for Cement Concrete Pavement)
9-07.5(1) Epoxy-Coated Dowel Bars (for Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation)
Epoxy-coated dowel bars shall be round plain steel bars of the dimensions shown in the
Standard Plans. They shall conform to AASHTO M31, Grade 60 or ASTM A615, Grade
60 and shall be coated in accordance with ASTM A1078 Type 2 coating, except that the
bars may be cut to length after being coated. Cut ends shall be coated in accordance with
ASTM A1078 with a patching material that is compatible with the coating, inert in concrete
and recommended by the coating manufacturer. The thickness of the epoxy coating shall be
10 mils plus or minus 2 mils. The Contractor shall furnish a written certification that properly
identifies the coating material, the number of each batch of coating material used, quantity
represented, date of manufacture, name and address of manufacturer, and a statement that the
supplied coating material meets the requirements of ASTM A1078 Type 2 coating. Patching
material, compatible with the coating material and inert in concrete and recommended by the
manufacturer shall be supplied with each shipment for field repairs by the Contractor.
9-07.5(2) Corrosion Resistant Dowel Bars (for Cement Concrete Pavement and Cement
Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation)
Corrosion resistant dowel bars shall be 1½ inch outside diameter plain round steel bars
18 inches in length and meet the requirements one of the following types:
1. Stainless Steel Clad dowel bars shall have a minimum 0.06 inches clad to a plain steel
inner bar meeting the chemical and physical properties of AASHTO M31, Grade 60,
or AASHTO M255, Grade 60. Stainless Steel Clad shall meet the chemical properties of
ASTM A276, Type 316L.
2. Stainless Steel Tube dowel bars shall have a minimum 0.06-inch-thick tube press-fitted
onto a plain steel inner bar meeting the chemical and physical properties of AASHTO
M31, Grade 60, or AASHTO M255, Grade 60. A lubricant/adhesive shall be used
between the tube and the plain steel bar to fill any voids. Stainless Steel Tube material
shall meet the chemical properties of ASTM A276, Type 316L.
3. Stainless Steel Solid dowel bars shall be ASTM A276, Type 316L.

4. Corrosion-resistant, low-carbon, chromium plain steel bars for concrete reinforcement

meeting all the requirements of ASTM A1035.
5. Zinc Clad dowel bars shall be of the dimension shown in the Plans and shall have
a minimum 0.04 inches A710 Zinc alloy clad to a plain steel inner bar meeting the
chemical and physical properties of AASHTO M31, Grade 60, or AASHTO M255,
Grade 60. A710 Zinc shall be composed of: ZN-99.5 percent, by weight, minimum;
CU – 0.1 – 0.25 percent, by weight; and Fe- 0.0020 percent, by weight, maximum.
The surface of the finished cut-to-length corrosion-resistant, low-carbon, chromium plain
steel bars for concrete reinforcement meeting all the requirements of ASTM A1035 dowels
shall be provided with a hot-rolled, as-rolled finish, including mill scale. The surface of
all other finished cut-to-length dowels shall be provided with a smooth “ground” or “cold
drawn” finish.
Stainless Steel Clad and Tube Dowel bar ends shall be sealed with a patching material
(primer and finish coat) used for patching epoxy-coated reinforcing steel as required in
Section 9-07.3, item 6.
9-07.6 Tie Bars (for Cement Concrete Pavement)
Tie bars shall conform to the requirements of the Standard Specifications for Deformed
Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement, AASHTO M31, Grade 60 and shall be coated
in accordance with ASTM A775 or corrosion-resistant, uncoated, low-carbon, chromium
deformed steel bars for concrete reinforcement meeting all the requirements of ASTM A1035.
The form of the deformed bar shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
Tie bars shall be free from dirt, grease, or other defects affecting the strength or bond with
the concrete.
9-07.7 Wire Mesh
Wire mesh for concrete reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M55, Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement or AASHTO M221, Steel Welded
Wire Reinforcement, Deformed for Concrete. All wire mesh shall be of an approved kind and
quality of manufacture.
9-07.8 Deformed Wire
Deformed wire shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M225, Deformed Steel
Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
Deformed wire is noted in the Plans and Specifications by the letter D, followed by
a number indicating the cross sectional area of the wire; for example, D2, D5, D20, etc.
9-07.9 Cold Drawn Wire
Cold drawn wire shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M32, Cold Drawn Steel
Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
Cold drawn wire is noted in the Plans and Specifications by the letter W followed by a
number indicating the cross sectional area of the wire; for example, W2, W5, W20, etc.
9-07.10 Prestressing Reinforcement Strand
Prestressing reinforcement shall be ½-inch diameter for precast-prestressed concrete piles
and ½- or 0.6-inch diameter for pretensioned concrete girders, post-tensioned segmental
precast concrete girders, or cast-in-place prestressed concrete.
Prestressing reinforcement shall be mill bright high tensile strength seven wire low
relaxation strand conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M203, Grade 270.
All prestressing reinforcement furnished for a given structural member shall have a
maximum elongation differential of 3 percent at stress of 0.8 of the ultimate strength of
the prestressing steel. Each reel of prestressing reinforcement shall be accompanied by
a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, a mill certificate, and a test report. The mill
certificate and test report shall include the yield and ultimate strengths, elongation at rupture,

modulus of elasticity, and the stress strain curve for the actual prestress reinforcing intended
for use. All values certified shall be based on test values and actual sectional areas of the
material being certified.
For every five reels furnished, one sample, not less than 5½ feet long, shall be sent to
the Engineer for testing. Samples of the furnished reels with Manufacturer’s Certificate of
Compliance, a mill certificate, and test report may be shipped directly by the manufacturer
to the Engineer. An independent inspector, approved by the Contracting Agency, shall be
present during sampling and shall provide a written certification to the Engineer.
9-07.11 Prestressing Reinforcement Bar
High-strength steel bars shall conform to AASHTO M275, Type II.
Nuts shall conform to either ASTM A29 Grade C1045, or ASTM A536 Grade 100-70-03,
and shall be capable of developing the larger of either 100 percent of the minimum ultimate
tensile strength (MUTS), or 95 percent of the actual ultimate tensile strength (AUTS), of the
bar. The anchor nuts shall conform to the specified strength requirement while permitting a
maximum 5 degree misalignment between the nut and the bearing plate. A minimum of three
tests, each from a different heat, are required.
Couplers, if required, shall be AASHTO M169 Grade 1144, or equivalent steel, developing
the larger of either 100 percent of the MUTS, or 95 percent of the AUTS, of the bar. The test
shall be performed with the coupler having a one inch unengaged segment between the two
coupled bars. A minimum of three tests, each from a different heat, are required.
For unbonded bars under dynamic loading, the connections shall withstand at least
500,000 cycles from 60 percent to 66 percent MUTS followed by at least 50 cycles between
40 percent MUTS and 80 percent MUTS. A minimum of three tests, each from a different heat,
are required.
The Contractor shall supply a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance in accordance
with Section 1-06.3 for each bar. The Contractor shall supply a Manufacturer’s Certificate
of Compliance in accordance with Section 1-06.3 for all nuts and couplers, confirming
compliance with the specified strength requirement.
For each heat of steel for high-strength steel bar, the Contractor shall submit two samples,
each not less than 5½ feet long, to the Engineer for testing.

Paints and Related Materials 9-08
9-08 Paints and Related Materials

9-08.1 Paint
Paints used for highway and bridge structure applications shall be made from materials
meeting the requirements of the applicable Federal and State Paint Specifications, Department
of Defense (DOD), American Society on Testing of Materials (ASTM), and Steel Structures
Painting Council (SSPC) specifications in effect at the time of manufacture. The colors, where
designated, shall conform to Section 9-08.1(8).
9-08.1(2) Paint Types
9-08.1(2)A Vinyl Pretreatment
Vinyl pretreatment shall be a two-component basic zinc chromate-vinyl butyral wash
primer conforming to DOD-P-15328 (Formula 117 for Metals) and SSPC Paint 27. Zinc
chromate shall be the insoluble type. The paint shall be supplied as two components that are
mixed together just prior to use.
9-08.1(2)B Galvanizing Repair Paint, High Zinc Dust Content
Galvanizing repair paint shall conform to Federal Specification MIL-P-21035B.
9-08.1(2)C Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer
Inorganic zinc-rich primer shall be a two-component, self-curing, inorganic zinc-rich paint,
conforming to either AASHTO M300 or SSPC Paint 20 Type I.
9-08.1(2)D Organic Zinc-Rich Primer
Organic zinc-rich primer shall be a high-performance two-component epoxy conforming
to SSPC Paint 20 Type II.
9-08.1(2)E Epoxy Polyamide
Epoxy polyamide primer shall be a two-component, VOC-compliant epoxy system,
conforming to MIL-DTL-24441.
9-08.1(2)F Primer, Zinc-Filled, Single-Component, Moisture-Cured Polyurethane
Zinc-rich primer shall meet the following requirements:
Vehicle Type: Moisture-cured polyurethane.
Pigment Content: 80 percent minimum zinc by weight in dry film.
Volume Solids: 60 percent minimum.
Minimum wt./gal. 22.0 pounds.
9-08.1(2)G Intermediate and Stripe Coat, Single Component, Moisture-Cured
Polyurethane
Vehicle Type: Moisture-cured polyurethane.
Pigment: A minimum of 3.0 lbs. of micaceous iron oxide per gallon.
Intermediate and any stripe coat shall meet the following requirements:
Minimum volume solids 50 percent.
A minimum of 3.0 lbs/gal. of micaceous iron oxide.
The intermediate coating shall be certified by the manufacturer to be able to be recoated
by the top coat in a minimum of 4 days.

9-08.1(2)H Top Coat, Single-Component, Moisture-Cured Polyurethane

Vehicle Type: Moisture-cured aliphatic polyurethane.
Color and Gloss: As specified in the Plans or Special Provisions.
The Top Coat shall meet the following requirements
The resin must be an aliphatic urethane.
Minimum-volume solids 50 percent.
The top coat shall be a gloss or semi-gloss.
9-08.1(2)I Rust-Penetrating Sealer
Rust-penetrating sealer shall be a two-component, chemically-cured, 100 percent solids
epoxy with maximum VOC 1.7 pounds/gallon.
9-08.1(2)J Black Enamel
The enamel shall conform to Federal Specification MIL PRF 2463D Type II Class II.
9-08.1(2)K Orange Equipment Enamel
The enamel shall be an alkyd gloss enamel conforming to Federal Specification TT-E-489,
except that the Sag Index shall be seven minimum. The color, when dry, shall match that of
Federal Standard 595, color number 12246.
For factory application to individual items of new equipment, samples and testing of the
enamel shall not be required; however, the equipment manufacturer shall match the color
specified and shall certify the quality of enamel used.
9-08.1(2)L Exterior Acrylic Latex Paint-White
This paint shall conform to Federal Specification TT-P-96, Paint, Acrylic Emulsion,
Exterior, except that the viscosity shall be 75-85 K.U.
This paint may be used self-primed in multiple coats over salts-treated wood and on
interior and exterior masonry surfaces.
9-08.1(3) Working Properties
The paint shall contain no caked material that cannot be broken up readily by stirring.
When applied to a clean vertical surface, the paint shall dry without running, streaking,
or sagging.
9-08.1(4) Storage Properties
Paints manufactured under these Specifications shall show no skin over the surface
after 48 hours in a partially filled container, when tested as outlined in Federal Test Method
Standard No. 141. A slight amount of skin or gel formation where the surface of the paint
meets the side of the container may be disregarded. Variable percentages of anti-skinning
agents are shown in those formulas set forth above that are susceptible to undesirable skin
formation. The manufacturer will be allowed to vary the amount of anti-skinning agent given
in the formulas provided the above results are accomplished and provided the paint does not
dry to a nonuniform or nonelastic film.
9-08.1(5) Fineness of Grinding
The paint shall be ground so that all particles of pigment will be dispersed and be coated
with vehicle, and the residue on a 325 sieve will not exceed 1 percent by weight of the
pigment. Paint shall be homogeneous, free of contaminant, and of a consistency suitable for
use under intended application. Finished paint shall be well ground, and the pigment shall be
properly dispersed in the vehicle, conforming to the requirements of the paint. Dispersion in
the vehicle shall be such that the pigment does not settle excessively, does not cake or thicken
in the container, and does not become granular or curdled.

9-08.1(6) Test Methods

Except as otherwise specified, all paints shall be sampled and tested in the ready-mixed
form. The test methods shall be as specified in the WSDOT Materials Manual M 46-01
or the corresponding test method covered by Federal Test Method Standard No. 141 or as
specified under AASHTO R 31.
9-08.1(7) Acceptance
Except for batches of paint in total project quantities of 20 gallons or less that are accepted
upon the manufacturer’s certificate, the manufacturer shall not ship any batch of paint until the
paint has been tested and released by the WSDOT Materials Laboratory. This release will not
constitute final acceptance of the paint. Final acceptance will be based on inspection or testing
of job site samples as determined by the Engineer.
Project quantities of 20 gallons or less of the above paint types will be accepted without
inspection upon the manufacturer’s notarized certificate. This certificate shall contain a
statement by the manufacturer to the effect that the material meets the paint type Specification,
and it shall include a list of materials and quantities used. One copy of the certificate shall
accompany the paint when shipped and one copy with a drawdown sample of the paint shall
be sent to the Materials Laboratory. The paint may be used at once without further release
from the Materials Laboratory.
9-08.1(8) Standard Colors
When paint is required to match a Federal Standard 595 color, the paint manufacturer or
the Contractor may obtain a sample of the required color through the following internet link:
www.colorserver.net.
Unless otherwise specified, all top or finish coats shall be gloss or semi-gloss, with the
paint falling within the range of greater than 70 for gloss and 35 to 70 for semi-gloss on the
60-degree gloss meter.
9-08.2 Powder Coating Materials for Coating Galvanized Surfaces
The powder coating system shall consist of two components: an epoxy primer coat and a
polyester finish coat. The epoxy primer coat and the polyester finish coat materials shall be
from the same manufacturer.
The epoxy primer coat shall be an epoxy powder primer conforming to the following
requirements:
Property Specification Performance Requirement
Adhesion ASTM D3359 Method B 5B (no failure)
Flexibility ASTM D522 Method B Pass ⅛″ mandrel bend
Pencil Hardness ASTM D3363 H Plus
Specific Gravity ASTM D792 1.25 minimum
The polyester finish coat shall conform to American Architectural Manufacturers
Association (AAMA) Specification 2604.
Degassing additives may be added as necessary to prevent pin holes in the finish coat.
The degassing additives shall be added in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
The color of the powder coating system polyester finish coat shall be as specified in the
Plans or Special Provisions.
Repair materials shall be selected from one of the approved products listed in the current
Qualified Products List and specified in the Contractor’s powder coating plan as approved by
the Engineer.

9-08.3 Pigmented Sealer Materials for Coating of Concrete Surfaces

The pigmented sealer shall be a semi-opaque, colored toner containing only methyl
methacrylate-ethyl acrylate copolymer resins, toning pigments suspended in solution at all
times by a chemical suspension agent, and solvent. Toning pigments shall be laminar silicates,
titanium dioxide, and inorganic oxides only. There shall be no settling or color variation.
Tinting shall occur at the factory at the time of manufacture and placement in containers, prior
to initial shipment. Use of vegetable or marine oils, paraffin materials, stearates, or organic
pigments in any part of coating formulation shall not be permitted. The Contractor shall
submit a 1-quart wet sample, a drawdown color sample, and spectrophotometer or colorimeter
readings taken in accordance with ASTM D2244, for each batch. The calculated Delta E shall
not exceed 1.0 deviation from the Commission Internationale de l’Eclairage (CIELAB) color
measurement analysis method for each pigmented sealer color.
For the respective color pigmented sealer shall conform to the following CIELAB analysis.
Color III/Obs L* a* b*
Washington Gray D65/10 degrees 62.59 0.98 5.23
A/10 degrees 63.06 1.80 5.70
CWF/10 degrees 63.02 0.73 6.08
Cascade Green D65/10 degrees 36.62 -6.53 -0.89
A/10 degrees 35.82 -7.15 -2.53
CWF/10 degrees 36.34 -5.09 -1.18
Mt. Baker Gray D65/10 degrees 45.94 1.38 4.46
A/10 degrees 46.40 1.70 5.05
CWF/10 degrees 46.46 1.07 5.48
Mt. St. Helens Gray D65/10 degrees 56.07 2.15 6.68
A/10 degrees 56.76 3.08 7.52
CWF/10 degrees 56.67 1.64 7.85
The 1-quart wet sample shall be submitted in the manufacturer’s labeled container with
product number, batch number, and size of batch. The companion drawdown color sample
shall be labeled with the product number, batch number, and size of batch. The Contractor
shall submit the specified samples and readings to the Engineer at least 14 calendar days prior
to the scheduled application of the sealer. The Contractor shall not begin applying pigmented
sealer until receiving the Engineer’s written approval of the pigmented sealer color samples.
9-08.4 Abrasive Blast Materials
9-08.4(1) Abrasive Blast Media
Material used for field abrasive blasting shall conform to Military Specification
MIL‑A‑22262B(SH) as listed on QPL-22262-28 as maintained by the Department of the
Navy. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with certified test results from the abrasive
blast media manufacturer showing that the abrasive blast material meets the Military
Specification. The Contractor shall select the type and size of abrasive blast media to produce
a roughened, sharp, angular surface profile conforming to the surface requirements specified
by the manufacturer of the selected paint system.
9-08.4(2) Lead Abatement Additive
Lead abatement additive shall be a granular chemical abrasive additive consisting of a
complex calcium silicate designed to stabilize lead through multiple mechanisms, including,
but not limited to, pH adjustment, chemical reactions, and encapsulation. The additive shall
be specifically designed and manufactured for lead paint abatement.

9-08.5 Surface Cleaning Materials

9-08.5(1) Bird Guano Treatment
Bird guano treatment shall consist of a 5.25 percent sodium hypochlorite solution.
9-08.5(2) Fungicide Treatment
Fungicide treatment shall consist of a 5.25 percent sodium hypochlorite solution.
9-08.5(3) Water
Water used for water jetting steel surface cleaning operations shall be clean, fresh water
only, without any detergents, bleach, or any other cleaning agents or additives. Recycling of
rinse water for water jetting operations is not allowed.
9-08.6 Filter Fabric
Filter fabric for water jetting operations shall be a polypropylene, nonwoven, needle-
punched geosynthetic or equivalent material conforming to the following requirements:
Property Specification Performance Requirement
Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D4632 100 pounds minimum
Apparent Opening Size ASTM D4751 #70 sieve
Permittivity ASTM D4491 1.0 sec-1 or better
9-08.7 Single-Component Urethane Sealant
Single-component urethane sealant shall conform to ASTM C920 Grade NS Class 25.
9-08.8 Foam Backer Rod
Foam backer rod shall be closed-cell expanded polyethylene or polyurethane foam.

9-09 Timber and Lumber

All timber and lumber shall be sized as indicated in the Plans.
All timber and lumber to be painted shall be surfaced on all sides. All timber and lumber to
be painted shall be thoroughly air or kiln dried to an equilibrium moisture content and shall be
stored in such a manner as to remain in a thoroughly dry condition until placed into the Work.
9-09.2 Grade Requirements
Timber and lumber shall conform to the grades and usage listed below.
Timber and lumber shall be marked with a certified lumber grade stamp provided by one
of the following agencies:
West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB),
Western Wood Products Association (WWPA),
Pacific Lumber Inspection Bureau (PLIB), or
Any lumber grading bureau certified by the American Lumber Standards Committee.
For structures, all material delivered to the project shall bear a grade stamp and have
a grading certificate. The grade stamp and grading certificate shall not constitute final
acceptance of the material. The Engineer may reject any or all of the timber or lumber that
does not comply with the Specifications or has been damaged during shipping or upon
delivery. The grading certificate shall be issued by either the grading bureau whose stamp
is shown on the material, or by the lumber mill, which shall be under the supervision of one
of the grading bureaus listed above. The certificate shall include the following:
Name of the mill performing the grading;
The grading rules being used;
Name of the person doing the grading, with current certification;
Signature of a responsible mill official;
Date the lumber was graded at the mill; and,
Grade, dimensions, and quantity of the timber or lumber
For Guardrail Posts and Blocks, Signposts, Mileposts, Sawed Fence Posts, and Mailbox
Posts, the material delivered to the project shall either bear a grade stamp on each piece or
have a grading certificate as defined above. The grade stamp or grading certificate shall not
constitute final acceptance of the material. The Engineer may reject any or all of the timber
or lumber that does not comply with the specifications or has been damaged during shipping
or upon delivery.
9-09.2(1) Structures
All timber and lumber for structures shall be Douglas Fir-Larch unless specified otherwise
in the contract, and shall conform to the following:
Materials 2″ to 4″ nominal thick, 5″ nominal and wider No. 1 and better, grade (Section 123-b of WCLIB)
(Structural Joists and Planks) or (Section 62.11 of WWPA)
Materials 5″ nominal and thicker No. 1 and better, grade (Section 130-b of WCLIB)
(Beams and Stringers) or (Section 70.11 of WWPA)
Timber lagging for soldier pile walls shall be Douglas Fir-Larch, grade No. 2 or better,
or Hem-Fir No. 1.
When the material is delivered to the project, the Engineer will check the order for the
appropriate grade stamp. The invoice and grading certificate accompanying the order must
be accurate and complete with the information listed above. The grading certificate and grade
markings shall not constitute final acceptance of the material. The Engineer may reject any or
all of the timber or lumber that does not comply with the Specifications or has been damaged
during shipping or upon delivery.

Timber and Lumber 9-09
9-09.2(2) Guardrail Posts and Blocks.

Timber and lumber for guardrail posts and blocks (classified as Posts and Timbers) shall
conform to the species and grades listed below:
Douglas Fir No. 1 and better, grade
(Section 131-b WCLIB) or (Section 80.11 WWPA)
Hem Fir Select Structural, grade
(Section 131-a WCLIB) or (Section 80.10 WWPA)
Southern Yellow Pine No. 1 and better, grade
(Southern Pine Inspection Bureau)
When the material is delivered to the project, the Engineer will check the order for the
appropriate grade stamp. The grade markings shall not constitute final acceptance of the
material. The Engineer may reject any or all of the timber or lumber that does not comply
with the Specifications or has been damaged during shipping or upon delivery.
9-09.2(3) Signposts, Mileposts, Sawed Fence Posts, and Mailbox Posts
The allowable species of timber and lumber for signposts and mileposts shall be Douglas
Fir-Larch or Hem Fir. Timber and lumber for sawed fence posts and mailbox posts shall be
Western Red Cedar, Douglas Fir-Larch, or Hem Fir.
Signposts, mileposts, sawed fence posts, and mailbox posts shall conform to the grades
shown below:
4″ × 4″ Construction grade (Light Framing, Section 122-b
WCLIB) or (Section 40.11 WWPA)
4″ × 6″ No. 1 and better, grade (Structural Joists and Planks,
Section 123-b WCLIB) or (Section 62.11 WWPA)
6″ × 6″, 6″ × 8″, 8″ × 10″ No. 1 and better, grade (Posts and Timbers,
6″ × 10″, 6″ × 12″ No. 1 and better, grade (Beams and Stringers,
9-09.3 Preservative Treatment
All timber and lumber requiring preservative treatment shall be treated in accordance with
AASHTO M133. As specified by AASHTO M133, the American Wood Protection Association
(AWPA) standards shall govern the Specifications. These Specifications include: storing and
curing the timber and lumber, the wood preservatives, the preservative treatment process,
documenting the results of the treatment, inspection, testing, and the identification of properly
treated timber. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract, all timber and lumber shall be
treated in accordance with Sections U1 and T1 of the latest edition of the AWPA standards.
All cutting, boring, chamfering, routing, surfacing, and trimming shall be done prior
to treating. Any field drilling or cutoffs shall be treated by two liberal applications of a
compatible preservative. The applications shall be in accordance with the requirements of
AWPA Standard M-4 entitled, “Standard for the Care of Pressured Treated Wood Products”.
All charges shall consist of pieces of the same species that are similar in form, size,
moisture content, and receptivity to treatment. The pieces in the charge shall be separated to
ensure contact of treating medium with all surfaces. The method of determining the retention
of the preservatives shall be by assay.

All orders of treated timber and lumber shall be accompanied by a Certificate of Treatment
showing conformance to this specification and AWPA standards record. The Certificate of
Treatment shall include the following information:
Name and location of the wood preserving company,
Customer identification,
Date of treatment and charge number,
Type of chemical used and amount of retention,
Treating process and identification of the Specification used,
Boring records verifying treatment penetration for timber and lumber with a nominal
dimension of 6" by 6" or larger,
Description of material that was treated, and
Signature of a responsible plant official.
All timber and lumber to be used in aquatic environments, unless specified otherwise
in the Contract, shall be chemically treated using Western Wood Preservers Institute Best
Management Practices (BMPs). The producer of the chemically treated products shall supply
a written certification that the BMPs were utilized, including a description and appropriate
documentation of the BMPs used. This information may be included on the Certificate of
Treatment record.

Piling 9-10
9-10 Piling
9-10.1 Timber Piling
Timber piling shall be untreated or treated with the preservatives specified in the Plans
and completely described in Section 9-09.3.
Timber piles shall have the following limiting diameters:
Min. Butt Dia. 3 feet Max. Butt Dia. 3 feet Above Min. Tip Dia.
Length in Feet Above Butt in inches Butt in inches in inches
Under 40 12 20 7
40 to 54 12 20 7
55 to 74 13 20 7
Over 74 14 20 7
Timber piles shall be strapped with at least three straps: one approximately 18 inches
from the butt, one approximately 24 inches from the butt, and one approximately 12 inches
from the tip. Additional straps shall be provided at approximately 15-foot centers between
the butt and tip. Strapping shall encircle the pile once and be tensioned as tightly as possible.
Straps shall be 1¼ inches wide, 0.31 inch thick, cold rolled, fully heat treated, high tensile
strapping, painted, and waxed, with an ultimate tensile strength of 5,100 pounds. The seal
shall be 2¼ inches long, 20 gage, crimped with a notch type sealer to furnish a joint yielding
80 percent of the strap tensile strength. Treated timber piles shall be strapped after treatment.
9-10.1(1) Untreated Piling
Except where specifically provided otherwise, untreated timber piling shall be Douglas
Fir, Western Red Cedar, or Larch. Piling for foundations shall be Douglas Fir. Piling shall be
cut from sound, live trees and shall contain no unsound knots. Sound knots will be permitted,
provided the diameter of the knot does not exceed 4 inches, or ⅓ of the small diameter of the
pile at the point where they occur, whichever is smaller. Any defect or combination of defects
which will impair the strength of the pile more than the maximum allowable knot will not
be permitted.
Piling shall be cut above the butt swell and shall have a uniform taper from butt to tip.
A line drawn from the center of the tip to the center of the butt shall not fall outside the center
of the pile at any point more than 1 percent of the length of the pile. A spiral grain or twist
in excess of ¼ turn in 10 feet of length will be cause for rejection.
Untreated timber trestle piling shall have an average of at least five annual rings per inch
measured radially over a distance of 3 inches at the butt, beginning at a point 3½ inches from
the heart. At least 9 inches of heartwood shall show at the butt.
Ring count requirements for untreated timber foundation piling and detour trestle piling
will be waived.
9-10.1(2) Creosote Treated Piling
For creosote treated piling, Douglas Fir timber shall be used. All other requirements shall
be the same as for untreated piling, except that the ring count requirement will be waived.
9-10.1(3) Timber Composite Piling
Timber composite piling shall consist of a pile made up of two timber sections. The lower
section shall be untreated, and the upper section shall be creosote treated.
The treated and untreated sections of timber composite pile shall meet the respective
requirements specified above for full length of treated and untreated timber piling.

9-10 Piling
9-10.1(4) Peeling
Untreated and creosote treated piles shall be peeled by removing all of the rough bark and
at least 80 percent of the inner bark. No strip of inner bark remaining on the pile shall be over
¾ inch wide or over 8 inches long, and there shall be at least 1 inch of clean wood surface
between any two such strips. Not less than 80 percent of the surface on any circumference
shall be clean wood. All knots shall be trimmed close to the body of the pile.
9-10.2 Concrete Piling
9-10.2(1) Concrete
The concrete for prestressed piles shall have a minimum compressive strength of 6,000 psi
at the age of 28 days. The minimum compressive strength of concrete at the transfer of
prestress shall be 3,300 psi.
The concrete for other precast piles shall be Class 4000. Mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section 6-02.3.
The Contractor shall mold and test a sufficient number of concrete test cylinders to
determine the strength of the concrete as required by the Specifications. Under the surveillance
of the Engineer, the test cylinders shall be molded, cured, and tested in accordance with the
procedures established by the State Materials Laboratory.
In the event that a sufficient number of concrete test cylinders are not molded to satisfy all
testing required on any one pile, cores measuring 4 inches in diameter by 5 inches in height
shall be taken and tested by the Contractor. If the strength of the core meets the required
compressive strength of the concrete, the pile may be accepted. The coring and testing of the
core shall be done under the surveillance of the Engineer.
9-10.2(2) Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall meet the requirements of Section 9-07.
9-10.3 Cast-In-Place Concrete Piling
Reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete piles shall conform to Section 9-07.2.
9-10.4 Steel Pile Tips and Shoes
Steel pile tips and shoes shall be fabricated of cast steel conforming to ASTM A148
Grade 90-60 [620-415] or ASTM A27 Grade 65-35 [450-240] and be free from any obvious
defects. Pile tips shall be accompanied by a mill test report stating the chemical and physical
properties (tensile and yield) of the steel.
9-10.5 Steel Piling
The material for rolled steel piling H-piling and pile splices shall conform to ASTM A36,
ASTM A572 or ASTM A992. The material for steel pipe piling and splices shall conform to
one of the following requirements except as specifically noted in the plans:
1. API 5L Grade X42 or X52 material may be used for longitudinal seam welded or
helical (spiral) seam submerged-arc welded pipe piles of any diameter.
2. ASTM A252, Grade 2 or 3 material may be used for longitudinal seam welded or
helical (spiral) seam submerged-arc welded pipe piles of any diameter. For the purposes
of welding and prequalification of base metal, steel pipe pile designated as ASTM A252
may be treated as prequalified provided the chemical composition conforms to a
prequalified base metal classification listed in Table 3.1 of the AWS D1.1/D1.1M, latest
edition, Structural Welding Code, the grade of pipe piling meets or exceeds the grade
specified in the Plans, and the carbon equivalent (CE) is a maximum of 0.45-percent.
3. ASTM A572 or ASTM A588 material may be used for longitudinal seam welded piles
of any diameter.

Piling 9-10
For helical (spiral) seam submerged-arc welded pipe piles, the maximum radial offset of
strip/plate edges shall be ⅛ inch. The offset shall be transitioned with a taper weld and the
slope shall not be less than a 1 in 2.5 taper. The weld reinforcement shall not be greater than
3/16 inches and misalignment of weld beads shall not exceed ⅛ inch.
Steel soldier piles, and associated steel bars and plates, shall conform to ASTM A36,
ASTM A572 or ASTM A992, except as otherwise noted in the Plans.
All steel piling may be accepted by the Engineer based on the Manufacturer’s Certification
of Compliance submitted in accordance with Section 1-06.3. The manufacturer’s certificate
of compliance submittal for steel pipe piles shall be accompanied by certified mill test reports,
including chemical analysis and carbon equivalence, for each heat of steel used to fabricate
the steel pipe piling.

9-11 Waterproof Membrane
9-11 Waterproof Membrane

9-11.1 Asphalt for Waterproofing
Waterproof membrane shall be a sheet membrane conforming to ASTM D 6153 Type III,
the puncture capacity specified below, and either the thin polymer sheet tensile stress or the
geotextile and fabric grab tensile strength specified below:
Performance Properties Test Method Specification Requirements
Tensile Stress ASTM D 882 75 pounds per inch min.
(for Thin Polymer Sheets)
Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 200 pounds min.
(for Geotextiles and Fabrics) (Woven or Nonwoven)
Puncture Capacity ASTM E 154 200 pounds min.
(For Thin Polymer Sheets,
Geotextiles and Fabrics)
Waterproofing membrane will be accepted based on a Manufacturer’s Certificate of

Compliance with each lot of waterproof membrane.
9-11.2 Primer for Waterproof Membrane
The primer for the waterproof membrane shall be appropriate for bonding the sheet
membrane to the bridge deck surface and shall be compatible with the membrane in
accordance with the waterproof membrane manufacturer’s recommendations.

Masonry Units 9-12
9-12 Masonry Units

9-12.1 Concrete Blocks
Concrete blocks for manholes and catch basins shall conform to the requirements
of ASTM C139.
Concrete blocks for building construction shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C90.
9-12.2 Concrete Brick
Concrete brick shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C55.

9-13Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection and Rock Walls
9-13 Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock for Erosion and
Scour Protection and Rock Walls
9-13.1 Riprap and Quarry Spalls
9-13.1(1) General
Riprap and quarry spalls shall consist of broken stone or broken concrete rubble and
shall be free of rock fines, soil, or other extraneous material. Concrete rubble shall not be
contaminated by foreign materials such as fibers, wood, steel, asphalt, sealant, soil, plastic and
other contaminants or deleterious material. Concrete rubble that is imported to the job site will
require testing and certification for toxicity characteristics per Section 9-03.21(1).
The grading of the riprap shall be determined by the Engineer by visual inspection of the
load before it is dumped into place, or, if so ordered by the Engineer, by dumping individual
loads on a flat surface and sorting and measuring the individual rocks contained in the load.
Should the riprap contain insufficient spalls, as defined in Section 9-13.1(5), the Contractor
shall furnish and place supplementary spall material.
Riprap and quarry spalls shall be free from segregation, seams, cracks, and other defects
tending to destroy its resistance to weather and shall conform to the following requirements
for quality.
Aggregate Property Test method Requirement
Degradation Factor WSDOT Test Method T 113 15 minimum
Los Angeles Wear, 500 Rev. AASHTO T 96 50% maximum
Specific Gravity, SSD AASHTO T 85 2.55 minimum
9-13.1(2) Heavy Loose Riprap

Heavy loose riprap shall meet the following requirements for grading:
Minimum Size Maximum Size
40% to 90% 1 ton (½ cubic yd.)
70% to 90% 300 lbs. (2 cu. ft.)
10% to 30% 3 inch 50 lbs. (spalls)
9-13.1(3) Light Loose Riprap

Light loose riprap shall meet the following requirements for grading:
Size Range Maximum Size
20% to 90% 300 lbs. to 1 ton
(2 cu. ft. to ½ cu. yd.)
15% to 80% 50 lbs. to 1 ton
(⅓ cu. ft. to ½ cu. yd.)
10% to 20% 3 inch 50 lbs. (spalls)
9-13.1(4) Hand Placed Riprap

Hand placed riprap shall be as nearly rectangular as possible, 60 percent shall have
a volume of not less than 1 cubic foot. No stone shall be used which is less than 6 inches thick,
nor which does not extend through the wall.
9-13.1(5) Quarry Spalls
Quarry spalls shall meet the following requirements for grading:
8″ 100
3″ 40 max.
¾″ 10 max.

Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection and Rock Walls 9-13
9-13.2 Vacant
9-13.3 Vacant
9-13.4 Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection
Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection shall be hard, sound, and durable material, free
from seams, cracks, and other defects that tend to destroy its resistance to weather, and it shall
consist of broken and/or processed rock. Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection shall meet
the quality requirements in Section 9-13 and the grading requirements in Section 9-13.4(2).
The use of recycled materials and concrete rubble is not permitted for this application.
9-13.4(1) Suitable Shape of Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection
The Suitable Shape of these rocks shall be “Angular” (having sharply defined edges)
to “Subangular” (having a shape in between Rounded and Angular) for a higher degree of
interlocking to provide stability to the protected area. The use of round, thin, flat, or long
and needle-like shapes is not allowed. Suitable Shape can be determined by the ratio of the
Length/Thickness, where the Length is the longest axis, Width is the second longest axis,
and Thickness is the shortest. The Suitable Shape shall be the maximum of 3.0 using the
Length = ≤ 3.0 Suitable Shape
Thickness
9-13.4(2) Grading Requirements of Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection
Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection will be classified as Class A, Class B, and Class C,
and it shall have a “Well-Graded” structure that meets the requirements for Suitable Shape and
conforms to one or more of the following gradings as shown in the Plans.
Class A Class C
Approximate Size (in.)1 Percent Passing (Smaller) Approximate Size (in.)1 Percent Passing (Smaller)
18 100 42 100
16 80-95 36 80-95
12 50-80 28 50-80
8 15-50 22 15-50
4 15 max. 14 15 max.
Class B
Approximate Size (in.)1 Percent Passing (Smaller)
30 100
28 80-95
22 50-80
16 15-50
10 15 max.
1Approximate Size can be determined by taking the average dimension of the three axes of the rock, Length, Width, and Thickness,
by use of the following calculation:

Length + Width + Thickness = Approximate Size
3
Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection shall be visually accepted by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall determine the Suitable Shape, Approximate Size, and Grading of the load
before it is placed. If so ordered by the Engineer, the loads shall be dumped on a flat surface
for sorting and measuring the individual rocks contained in the load.

9-13Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock for Erosion and Scour Protection and Rock Walls
9-13.5 Concrete Slope Protection

Concrete slope protection shall consist of reinforced portland cement concrete poured or
pneumatically placed upon the slope with a rustication joint pattern or semi-open concrete
masonry units placed upon the slope closely adjoining each other.
9-13.5(1) Semi-Open Concrete Masonry Units Slope Protection
Precast cement concrete blocks shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C1319.
9-13.5(2) Poured Portland Cement Concrete Slope Protection
Cement concrete for poured concrete slope protection shall be commercial concrete
in conformance with Section 6-02.3(2)B.
9-13.5(3) Pneumatically Placed Portland Cement Concrete Slope Protection
Cement – This material shall be portland cement as specified in Section 9-01.
Aggregate – This material shall meet the requirements for fine aggregate as specified in
Section 9-03.1. The moisture content of the fine aggregate at the time of use shall be between
3 and 6 percent by weight.
Reinforcement – Wire mesh reinforcement shall conform to the provisions of
Section 9-07.7.
Water – Water shall conform to the provisions of Section 9-25.1.
9-13.6 Vacant
9-13.7 Rock for Rock Wall
9-13.7(1) Rock for Rock Walls and Chinking Material
Rock for rock walls and chinking material shall be hard, sound and durable material,
free from seams, cracks, and other defects tending to destroy its resistance to weather,
and shall meet the following minimum requirements:
Test Test Method Requirements
Specific Gravity, SSD AASHTO T 85 2.55 min.
LA Wear AASHTO T 96 50% max.
Degradation WSDOT T 113 15 min.
Absorption AASHTO T 85 3% max.
Rock for rock wall sizes are approximately as follows:

Rock Size Rock Weight (lbs) Average Dimension (in.)
One Man 50 to 200 12 to 18
Two Man 200 to 700 18 to 28
Three Man 700 to 2,000 28 to 36
Four Man 2,000 to 4,000 36 to 48
Five Man 4,000 to 6,000 48 to 54
Six Man 6,000 to 8,000 54 to 60
Chinking material shall be a minimum of 4 inches average dimension.

9-13.7(2) Backfill for Rock Wall
Backfill for rock walls shall be shot rock ranging in size from a minimum of 2 inches
to a maximum of 6 inches.
Acceptance shall be based on visual inspection by the Engineer.

Erosion Control and Roadside Planting 9-14
9-14 Erosion Control and Roadside Planting

9-14.1 Topsoil
Topsoil shall not contain any recycled material, foreign materials, or any listed Noxious
and Nuisance weeds of any Class designated by authorized State or County officials.
Aggregate shall not comprise more than 10 percent by volume of Topsoil and shall not be
greater than two inches in diameter.
9-14.1(1) Topsoil Type A
Topsoil Type A shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
9-14.1(2) Topsoil Type B
Topsoil Type B shall be native topsoil taken from within the project limits either from the
area where roadway excavation is to be performed or from strippings from borrow, pit, or
quarry sites, or from other designated sources. The general limits of the material to be utilized
for topsoil will be indicated in the Plans or in the Special Provisions. The Engineer will make
the final determination of the areas where the most suitable material exists within these general
limits. The Contractor shall reserve this material for the specified use. Material for Topsoil
Type B shall not be taken from a depth greater than 1 foot from the existing ground unless
otherwise designated by the Engineer.
In the production of Topsoil Type B, all vegetative matter, less than 4 feet in height, shall
become a part of the topsoil. Prior to topsoil removal, the Contractor shall reduce the native
vegetation to a height not exceeding 1 foot.
9-14.1(3) Topsoil Type C
Topsoil Type C shall be native topsoil meeting the requirements of Topsoil Type B but
obtained from a source provided by the Contractor outside of the Contracting Agency owned
right of way.
9-14.2 Seed
Seed of the type specified shall be certified in accordance with WAC 16-302. Seed mixes
shall be commercially prepared and supplied in sealed containers. The labels shall show:
(1) Common and botanical names of seed,
(2) Lot number,
(3) Net weight,
(4) Pounds of Pure live seed (PLS) in the mix,
(5) Origin of seed.
All seed vendors must have a business license issued by supplier’s state or provincial
Department of Licensing with a “seed dealer” endorsement.
9-14.3 Fertilizer
Fertilizer shall be a standard commercial grade of organic or inorganic fertilizer of the
kind and quality specified. It may be separate or in a mixture containing the percentage of
total nitrogen, available phosphoric acid, and water-soluble potash or sulfur in the amounts
specified. All fertilizers shall be furnished in standard unopened containers with weight, name
of plant nutrients, and manufacturer’s guaranteed statement of analysis clearly marked, all in
accordance with State and Federal laws.
Fertilizer shall be supplied in one of the following forms:
(1) A dry free-flowing granular fertilizer, suitable for application by agricultural fertilizer
spreader.
(2) A soluble form that will permit complete suspension of insoluble particles in water,
suitable for application by power sprayer.
(3) A homogeneous pellet, suitable for application through a ferti-blast gun.

(4) A tablet or other form of controlled release with a minimum of a 6 month release period.
(5) A liquid suitable for application by a power sprayer or hydroseeder.
9-14.4 Mulch and Amendments
All amendments shall be delivered to the site in the original, unopened containers bearing
the manufacturer’s guaranteed chemical analysis and name. In lieu of containers, amendments
may be furnished in bulk. A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance shall accompany each
delivery. Compost and other organic amendments shall be accompanied with all applicable
health certificates and permits.
9-14.4(1) Straw
Straw shall be in an air-dried condition, free of noxious weeds, seeds, and other materials
detrimental to plant life. Hay is not acceptable.
All straw material shall be Certified Weed-Free Straw using North American Weed
Management Association (NAWMA) standards or the Washington Wilderness Hay and Mulch
(WWHAM) program run by the Washington State Noxious Weed Control Board. Information
can be found at www.nwcb.wa.gov.
In lieu of Certified Weed-Free Straw, the Contractor shall provide documentation that the
material is steam or heat treated to kill seeds, or shall provide U.S., Washington State, or other
states’ Department of Agriculture laboratory test reports, dated within 90 days prior to the date
of application, showing that there are no viable seeds in the straw.
Straw mulch shall be suitable for spreading with mulch blower equipment.
9-14.4(2) Hydraulically Applied Erosion Control Products (HECPs)
All HECPs shall be made of natural plant fibers unaltered by synthetic materials, and in
a dry condition, free of noxious weeds, seeds, chemical printing ink, germination inhibitors,
herbicide residue, chlorine bleach, rock, metal, plastic, and other materials detrimental to
plant life.
The HECP shall be suitable for spreading with a hydroseeder.
All HECPs shall be furnished premixed by the manufacturer with Organic or Synthetic
Tackifier as specified in Section 9-14.4(7). Under no circumstances will field mixing of
additives or components be acceptable, with the exception of seed and water. The product
shall be hydrated in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The Contractor shall provide test results, dated within 3 years prior to the date of
application, from an independent, accredited laboratory, as approved by the Engineer,
showing that the product meets the following table requirements:

Table 1
HECP Requirements
These test requirements apply to the fully mixed product, including tackifiers, dyes, or
other additives that may be included in the HECP final product in its sprayable form.
Properties Test Method Requirements
Acute Toxicity EPA-821-R-02-012 Methods for Measuring Four replicates are required with no
Acute Toxicity of Effluents. Test leachate from statistically significant reduction in survival
recommended application rate receiving 2 inches in 100 percent leachate for a Daphnid at
of rainfall per hour using static test for No- 48 hours and Oncorhynchus mykiss (rainbow
Observed-Adverse-Effect-Concentration (NOEC). trout) at 96 hours.
Solvents EPA 8260B Benzene – < 0.03 mg/kg
Methylene chloride – < 0.02 mg/kg
Naphthalene – < 5 mg/kg
Tetrachloroethylene – < 0.05 mg/kg
Toluene – < 7 mg/kg
Trichloroethylene – < 0.03 mg/kg
Xylenes – < 9 mg/kg
Heavy Metals EPA 6020A Total Metals Antimony – < 4 mg/kg
Arsenic – < 6 mg/kg
Barium – < 80 mg/kg
Boron – < 160 mg/kg
Cadmium – < 2 mg/kg
Total Chromium – < 4 mg/kg
Copper – < 10 mg/kg
Lead – < 5 mg/kg
Mercury – < 2 mg/kg
Nickel – < 2 mg/kg
Selenium – < 10 mg/kg
Strontium – < 40 mg/kg
Zinc – < 30 mg/kg
Water Holding ASTM D7367 800 percent minimum
Capacity
Organic Matter ASTM D586 90 percent minimum
Content
Moisture Content ASTM D644 15 percent maximum
Seed ASTM D7322 Long-Term
Germination 420 percent minimum
Enhancement Moderate-Term
400 percent minimum
Short-Term
200 percent minimum
If the HECP contains cotton or straw, the Contractor shall provide documentation that the
material has been steam or heat treated to kill seeds, or shall provide U.S., Washington State,
or other states’ Department of Agriculture laboratory test reports, dated within 90 days prior
to the date of application, showing that there are no viable seeds in the mulch.
The HECP shall be manufactured in such a manner that, when agitated in slurry tanks with
water, the fibers will become uniformly suspended, without clumping, to form a homogeneous
slurry. When hydraulically applied, the material shall form a strong moisture-holding mat that
allows the continuous absorption and infiltration of water.
If the HECP contains a dye to facilitate placement and inspection of the material, it shall be
nontoxic to plants, animals, and aquatic life and shall not stain concrete or painted surfaces.
The HECP shall not be harmful to plants, animals, and aquatic life.

9-14.4(2)A Long-Term Mulch

Long-Term Mulch shall demonstrate the ability to adhere to the soil and create a blanket-
like mass and shall bond with the soil surface to create a continuous, porous, absorbent,
and flexible erosion-resistant blanket that allows for seed germination and plant growth and
conforms to the requirements in Table 2, Long-Term Mulch Test Requirements.
The Contractor shall provide test results documenting that the mulch meets the
requirements in Table 2, Long-Term Mulch Test Requirements.
Effective January 1, 2012, the Contractor shall supply independent test results from the
National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP).
Table 2
Long-Term Mulch Test Requirements
Performance in ASTM D6459. Test in one soil type. Soil C Factor = 0.01 maximum using Revised
Protecting Slopes from tested shall be sandy loam as defined by Universal Soil Loss Equation (RUSLE)
Rainfall-Induced Erosion the NRCS Soil Texture Triangle.
9-14.4(2)B Moderate-Term Mulch

Within 48 hours of application, the Moderate-Term Mulch shall bond with the soil surface
to create a continuous, absorbent, flexible, erosion-resistant blanket that allows for seed
germination and plant growth and conforms to the requirements in Table 3, Moderate-Term
Mulch Test Requirements.
requirements in Table 3, Moderate-Term Mulch Test Requirements.
Table 3
Moderate-Term Mulch Test Requirements
Protecting Slopes from tested shall be sandy loam as defined by Universal Soil Loss Equation (RUSLE)
Rainfall-Induced Erosion the NRCS Soil Texture Triangle.
9-14.4(2)C Short-Term Mulch

requirements in Table 4, Short-Term Mulch Test Requirements.
Table 4
Short-Term Mulch Test Requirements
Protecting Slopes from tested shall be sandy loam as defined Universal Soil Loss Equation (RUSLE)
Rainfall-Induced Erosion by the National Resources Conservation
Service (NRCS) Soil Texture Triangle.

9-14.4(3) Bark or Wood Chip Mulch

Bark or wood chip mulch shall be derived from fir, pine, or hemlock species. It shall not
contain resin, tannin, or other compounds in quantities that would be detrimental to plant
life. Sawdust shall not be used as mulch. Mulch produced from finished wood products or
construction debris will not be allowed.
Bark or wood chips when tested shall be according to WSDOT T 123 prior to placement
and shall meet the following loose volume gradation:
Percent Passing
2″ 95 100
No. 4 0 30
9-14.4(4) Wood Strand Mulch

Wood strand mulch shall be a blend of angular, loose, long, thin wood pieces that are
frayed, with a high length-to-width ratio, and it shall be derived from native conifer or
deciduous trees. A minimum of 95 percent of the wood strand shall have lengths between 2
and 10 inches. At least 50 percent of the length of each strand shall have a width and thickness
between 1/16 and ½ inch. No single strand shall have a width or thickness greater than ½ inch.
The mulch shall not contain salt, preservatives, glue, resin, tannin, or other compounds in
quantities that would be detrimental to plant life. Sawdust or wood chips or shavings will not
be acceptable.
The Contractor shall provide a test report performed in accordance with WSDOT T 125
demonstrating compliance to this specification prior to acceptance. This product shall not be
harmful to plants, animals, and aquatic life.
9-14.4(5) Agricultural Grade Dolomite Lime
Agricultural grade dolomite lime shall be in a pelletized or granular form, meeting the
grading requirements of ASTM C602 for Class E.
9-14.4(6) Agricultural Grade Gypsum
Agricultural grade gypsum shall consist of Calcium Sulfate (CaSO4·2H2O) in a pelletized
or granular form and shall meet the following grading requirements;
¼” 99 – 100
No. 20 20 max

9-14.4(7) Tackifier
Tackifiers are used as a tie-down for soil, compost, seed, and/or mulch. Tackifiers shall
contain no growth or germination-inhibiting materials and shall not reduce infiltration rates.
Tackifiers shall hydrate in water and readily blend with other slurry materials. Tackifiers shall
include a mulch tracer added to visible aid uniform application, and shall not be harmful
to plans, animals, or aquatic life.
The Contractor shall provide test results documenting the tackifier and mulch tracer
meets the requirements for Acute Toxicity, Solvents, and Heavy Metals as required in
Table 1 in Section 9-14.4(2). The test shall be performed at the manufacturer’s recommended
application rate.
9-14.4(7)A Organic Tackifier
Organic tackifiers shall be derived from natural plant sources and shall not be harmful
to plants, animals, and aquatic life.

9-14.4(7)B Synthetic Tackifier

Synthetic tackifiers shall not be harmful to plants, animals, and aquatic life.
9-14.4(8) Compost
Compost products shall be the result of the biological degradation and transformation of
organic materials under controlled conditions designed to promote aerobic decomposition.
Compost shall be stable with regard to oxygen consumption and carbon dioxide generation.
Compost shall be mature with regard to its suitability for serving as a soil amendment or an
erosion control BMP as defined below. The compost shall have a moisture content that has
no visible free water or dust produced when handling the material.
Compost production and quality shall comply with WAC 173-350.
Compost products shall meet the following physical criteria:
1. Compost material shall be tested in accordance with U.S. Composting Council Testing
Methods for the Examination of Compost and Composting (TMECC) 02.02-B,
“Sample Sieving for Aggregate Size Classification”.
Fine compost shall meet the following gradation:
Percent Passing
1″ 100
⅝″ 90 100
¼″ 75 100
Note: Maximum particle length of 4 inches.
Medium compost shall meet the following gradation:

Percent Passing
1″ 100
⅝″ 85 100
¼″ 70 85
Note: Maximum particle length of 4 inches. Medium compost shall have a carbon to nitrogen ratio (C:N)
between 18:1 and 35:1. The carbon to nitrogen ratio shall be calculated using the dry weight of “Organic
Carbon” using TMECC 04.01A divided by the dry weight of “Total N” using TMECC 04.02D.
Coarse compost shall meet the following gradation:

Percent Passing
2″ 100
1″ 90 100
¾″ 70 100
¼″ 40 60
Note: Maximum particle length of 6 inches. Coarse compost shall have a carbon to nitrogen ratio (C:N)
between 25:1 and 35:1. The carbon to nitrogen ratio shall be calculated using the dry weight of “Organic
Carbon” using TMECC 04.01A divided by the dry weight of “Total N” using TMECC 04.02D.

2. The pH shall be between 6.0 and 8.5 when tested in accordance with U.S. Composting
Council TMECC 04.11-A, “1:5 Slurry pH”.
3. Physical contaminants, defined in WAC 173-350 (plastic, concrete, ceramics, metal,
etc.) shall be less than 0.5 percent by weight as determined by U.S. Composting
Council TMECC 03.08-A “Classification of Inerts by Sieve Size”.
4. Minimum organic matter shall be 40 percent by dry weight basis as determined
by U.S. Composting Council TMECC 05.07A “Loss-On-Ignition Organic Matter
Method (LOI)”.
5. Soluble salt contents shall be less than 4.0 mmhos/cm when tested in accordance with
U.S. Composting Council TMECC 04.10 “Electrical Conductivity”.
6. Maturity shall be greater than 80 percent in accordance with U.S. Composting Council
TMECC 05.05-A, “Germination and Root Elongation”.
7. Stability shall be 7-mg CO2–C/g OM/day or below in accordance with U.S.
Composting Council TMECC 05.08-B “Carbon Dioxide Evolution Rate”.
8. The compost product shall originate from organic feedstocks as defined in WAC 173-
350 as “Wood waste”, “Yard debris”, “Post-consumer food waste”, “Preconsumer
animal-based wastes”, and/or “Preconsumer vegetative waste”. The Contractor shall
provide a list of feedstock sources by percentage in the final compost product.
9. The Engineer may also evaluate compost for maturity using U.S. Composting Council
TMECC 05.08-E “Solvita® Maturity Index”. Fine compost shall score a number 6 or
above on the Solvita® Compost Maturity Test. Medium and Coarse compost shall score
a 5 or above on the Solvita® Compost Maturity Test.
9-14.4(8)A Compost Submittal Requirements
The Contractor shall submit the following information to the Engineer for approval:
1. The Qualified Products List printed page or a Request for Approval of Material
(WSDOT Form 350-071).
2. A copy of the Solid Waste Handling Permit issued to the manufacturer by the
Jurisdictional Health Department in accordance with WAC 173-350 (Minimum
Functional Standards for Solid Waste Handling).
3. The Contractor shall verify in writing and provide lab analyses that the material
complies with the processes, testing, and standards specified in WAC 173-350 and
these Specifications. An independent Seal of Testing Assurance (STA) Program
certified laboratory shall perform the analyses.
4. A copy of the manufacturer’s Seal of Testing Assurance STA certification as issued
by the U.S. Composting Council.
9-14.4(8)B Compost Acceptance
Fourteen days prior to application, the Contractor shall submit a sample of the compost
approved for use, an STA test report dated within 90 calendar days of the application, and
the list of feed stocks by volume for each compost type to the Engineer for review.
The Contractor shall use only compost that has been tested within 90 calendar days of
application and meets the requirements in Section 9-14.4(8). Compost not conforming to
the above requirements or taken from a source other than those tested and accepted shall
not be used.

9-14.4(9) Horticultural Grade Perlite

Horticultural grade perlite shall be in a pelletized or granular form.
Horticultural grade perlite shall meet the following requirements for quality and grading:
Quality Requirements
Property Test Method1 Requirement
pH (of water slurry) PI 202 6.5 – 8.0
Bulk Density, lb/ft3 PI 200 2 – 10
1PI, abbreviation for the Perlite Institute
Gradation Requirements
No. 4 99 – 100
No. 18 30 max
No. 30 10 max
9-14.5 Erosion Control Devices

9-14.5(1) Polyacrylamide (PAM)
PAM is used as a tie-down for soil, compost, or seed, and is also used as a flocculent.
PAM products shall meet ANSI/NSF Standard 60 for drinking water treatment with an AMD
content not to exceed 0.05 percent. PAM shall be anionic and shall be linear, and not cross-
linked. The minimum average molecular weight shall be greater than 5-mg/mole. The charge
density shall be no less than 15 percent and no greater than 30 percent. The product shall
contain at least 80 percent active ingredients and have a moisture content not exceeding
10 percent by weight. PAM shall be delivered in a dry granular or powder form.
9-14.5(2) Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket
Biodegradable erosion control blankets, including netting if present, shall be made of
natural plant fibers unaltered by synthetic materials. All blanket material shall effectively
perform the intended erosion control function until permanent vegetation has been established,
or for a minimum of 6 months, whichever comes first.
The Contractor shall provide independent test results from the National Transportation
Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP) meeting the requirements of Section 9-14.5(2)B,
9-14.5(2)C and 9-14.5(2)D.
9-14.5(2)A Approval and Acceptance of Biodegradable Erosion Control Blankets
The erosion control blanket may be selected from the Qualified Products List, or submitted
using a Request for Approval of Materials (RAM) in accordance with Section 1-06.
Erosion control blankets may be accepted by the Engineer based on the modified
acceptance criteria when materials are selected from the QPL. The modified acceptance
criteria are defined in the QPL for each material.

9-14.5(2)B Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket for Slopes Steeper than 3:1 (H:V)
Table 6
Properties ASTM Test Method Requirements for Slopes Steeper than 3:1
Protecting Slopes from ASTM D6459 C factor = 0.04 maximum for cumulative
Rainfall-Induced Erosion Soil tested shall be sandy loam as R-Factor<231
defined by the NRCS**
Soil Texture Triangle
Mass Per Unit Area ASTM D6475 7.6 oz./sq. yd. minimum
Light Penetration ASTM D6567 44% maximum
Tensile Strength MD × XD* ASTM D6818 10.0 × 6.0 pounds/inch minimum
Tensile Elongation MD × XD* ASTM D6818 38% × 33% maximum
*MD is Machine Design and XD is Cross Direction
**Natural Resource Conservation Services
9-14.5(2)C Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket for Slopes Flatter than 3:1(H:V)

Table 7
Properties ASTM Test Method Slope Flatter than 3:1 Requirements
Protecting Slopes from ASTM D6459 C factor = 0.15 maximum for cumulative
Rainfall-Induced Erosion Soil tested shall be sandy loam as R-Factor<231
defined by the NRCS**
Mass Per Unit Area ASTM D6475 7.6 oz./sq. yd. minimum
Tensile Strength MD × XD* ASTM D6818 6.5 × 2.3 pounds/inch minimum
9-14.5(2)D Biodegradable Erosion Control Blanket for Ditches

Table 8
Performance in Protecting ASTM D6460 Limiting Shear (TLimit) = 2.0 psf minimum.
Earthen Channels from Soil tested shall be sandy loam as Limiting Velocity (VLimit) = 7.5 ft/sec flow
Stormwater-Induced Erosion defined by the NRCS** minimum.
Mass per Unit Area ASTM D6475 7.4 oz./ sq. yd. minimum
Tensile Strength MD × XD* ASTM D6818 9.6 × 3.2 lbs/inch minimum
9-14.5(3) Plastic Covering

Plastic covering shall meet the requirements of ASTM D4397 for polyethylene sheeting.
9-14.5(4) Check Dams
All materials used for check dams shall be non-toxic and not pose a threat to wildlife when
installed.

9-14.5(4)A Biodegradable Check Dams

Biodegradable check dams shall meet the following requirements:
Wattle Section 9-14.5(5)
Compost Sock Section 9-14.5(6)
Coir Log Section 9-14.5(7)
The Contractor may substitute a different biodegradable check dam as long as it complies
with the following and is accepted by the Engineer:
1. Made of natural plant fiber unaltered by synthetic material.
2. Netting if present shall be made of natural plant fibers unaltered by synthetic materials.
Materials shall effectively perform the intended erosion control function until
permanent vegetation has been established or for a minimum of 6 months, whichever
comes first.
3. Straw bales shall not be used as check dams.
9-14.5(4)B Non-biodegradable Check Dams
Non-biodegradable check dams shall meet the following requirements:
1. Geotextile materials shall conform to Section 9-33 for silt fence.
2. Other such devices that fulfill the requirements of Section 9-14.5(4) and shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to installation.
9-14.5(5) Wattles
Wattles shall consist of cylinders of plant material such as weed-free straw, coir, wood
chips, excelsior, or wood fiber or shavings encased within netting made of natural plant fibers
unaltered by synthetic materials. Wattles shall be a minimum of 8 inches in diameter. Netting
material shall be clean, evenly woven, and free of encrusted concrete or other contaminating
materials such as preservatives. Netting material shall be free from cuts, tears, or weak places
and shall effectively perform the intended erosion control function until permanent vegetation
has been established or for a minimum of 6 months, whichever comes first.
If wood chip filler is used, it shall meet the material requirements as specified in Section
9-14.4(3). If straw filler is used, it shall meet the material requirements as specified in Section
9-14.4(1). If wood shavings are used, 80 percent of the fibers shall have a minimum length of
6 inches between 0.030 and 0.50 inches wide and between 0.017 and 0.13 inches thick.
Stakes for wattles shall be made of wood from untreated Douglas fir, hemlock, or
pine species.
9-14.5(6) Compost Socks
Compost socks shall consist of fabric made of natural plant fibers unaltered by synthetic
materials. The compost sock shall be filled with Medium Compost as specified in Section
9-14.4(8). Compost socks shall be at least 8 inches in diameter. The sock shall be clean, evenly
woven; free of encrusted concrete or other contaminating materials; free from cuts, tears,
broken or missing yarns; free of thin, open, or weak areas; and free of any type of preservative.
Sock fabric shall effectively perform the intended erosion control function until permanent
vegetation has been established or for a minimum of 6 months, whichever comes first.
Stakes for compost socks shall be made of wood from untreated Douglas fir, hemlock, or
pine species.
9-14.5(7) Coir Log
Coir logs shall be made of 100 percent durable coconut (coir) fiber uniformly compacted
within woven netting made of bristle coir twine with a minimum tensile strength of 80 lbs.
The netting shall have nominal 2 by 2-inch openings. Log segments shall have a maximum
length of 20 feet, with a minimum diameter as shown in the Plans. Logs shall have a minimum
density of 7 lbs/cf.

Stakes shall be untreated Douglas fir, hemlock, or pine species. Wood stakes shall have
a notch to secure the rope ties. Rope ties shall be made of ¼-inch diameter commercially
available hemp rope.
9-14.5(8) High Visibility Fencing
High visibility fence shall be UV stabilized, orange, high-density polyethylene or
polypropylene mesh.
Support posts shall be wood or steel in accordance with Standard Plan I-10.10. The posts
shall have sufficient strength and durability to support the fence through the life of the project.
9-14.5(9) High Visibility Silt Fence
High visibility silt fence shall be a minimum of 5 feet in height, high visibility orange, UV
stabilized and shall meet the geotextile requirements in Section 9-33 Table 6. Support posts
shall be in accordance with the Standard Plans. The posts shall have sufficient strength and
durability to support the fence through the life of the project.
9-14.6 Plant Materials
Bareroot plants are grown in the ground and harvested without soil or growing medium
around their roots.
Container plants are grown in pots or flats that prevent root growth beyond the sides and
bottom of the container.
Balled and burlapped plants are grown in the ground and harvested with soil around a core
of undisturbed roots. This rootball is wrapped in burlap and tied or placed in a wire basket or
other supportive structure.
Cuttings are live plant material without a previously developed root system. Source plants
for cuttings shall be dormant when cuttings are taken and all cuts shall be made with a sharp
instrument. Cuttings may be collected. If cuttings are collected, the requirement to be nursery
grown or held in nursery conditions does not apply. Written permission shall be obtained from
property owners and provided to the Engineer before cuttings are collected. The Contractor
shall collect cuttings in accordance with applicable sensitive area ordinances. Cuttings shall
meet the following requirements:
1. Live branch cuttings shall have flexible top growth with terminal buds and may have
side branches. The rooting end shall be cut at an approximate 45-degree angle.
2. Live stake cuttings shall have a straight top cut immediately above a bud. The lower,
rooting end shall be cut at an approximate 45-degree angle. Live stakes are cut from
one to two year old wood. Live stake cuttings shall be cut and installed with the bark
intact with no branches or stems attached, and be ½ to 1½ inch in diameter.
3. Live pole cuttings shall have a diameter between 2 inches and 3.5 inches. Live poles
shall have no more than three branches which must be located at the top end of the pole
and those branches shall be pruned back to the first bud from the main stem.
Rhizomes shall be a prostrate or subterranean stem, usually rooting at the nodes
and becoming erect at the apex. Rhizomes shall have a minimum of two growth points.
Tubers shall be a thickened and short subterranean branch having numerous buds or eyes.
9-14.6(2) Quality
At the time of delivery, all plant material furnished shall meet the grades established by
the latest edition of the American Standard for Nursery Stock, (ASNS) ANSI Z60.1 and
shall conform to the size and acceptable conditions as listed in the Contract, and shall be
free of all foreign plant material.
All plant material shall comply with State and Federal laws with respect to inspection
for plant diseases and insect infestation. Plants must meet Washington State Department
of Agriculture plant quarantines and have a certificate of inspection. Plants originating in

Canada must be accompanied by a phytosanitary certificate stating the plants meet USDA
health requirements.
All plant material shall be purchased from a nursery licensed to sell plants in their state
or province.
Live woody or herbaceous plant material, except cuttings, rhizomes, and tubers, shall be
vigorous, well formed, with well developed fibrous root systems, free from dead branches,
and from damage caused by an absence or an excess of heat or moisture, insects, disease,
mechanical or other causes detrimental to good plant development. Evergreen plants shall
be well foliated and of good color. Deciduous trees that have solitary leaders shall have only
the lateral branches thinned by pruning. All conifer trees shall have only one leader (growing
apex) and one terminal bud, and shall not be sheared or shaped. Trees having a damaged or
missing leader, multiple leaders, or Y-crotches shall be rejected.
Root balls of plant materials shall be solidly held together by a fibrous root system and
shall be composed only of the soil in which the plant has been actually growing. Balled and
burlapped rootballs shall be securely wrapped with jute burlap or other packing material not
injurious to the plant life. Root balls shall be free of weed or foreign plant growth.
Plant materials shall be nursery grown stock. Plant material, with the exception of cuttings,
gathered from native stands shall be held under nursery conditions for a minimum of one full
growing season, shall be free of all foreign plant material, and meet all of the requirements of
these Specifications, the Plans, and the Special Provisions.
Container grown plants shall be plants transplanted into a container and grown in that
container sufficiently long for new fibrous roots to have developed so that the root mass will
retain its shape and hold together when removed from the container, without having roots
that circle the pot. Plant material which is root bound, as determined by the Engineer, shall be
rejected. Container plants shall be free of weed or foreign plant growth.
Container sizes for plant material of a larger grade than provided for in the container grown
Specifications of the ASNS shall be determined by the volume of the root ball specified in the
ASNS for the same size plant material.
All bare root plant materials shall have a heavy fibrous root system and be dormant at the
time of planting.
Average height to spread proportions and branching shall be in accordance with the
applicable sections, illustrations, and accompanying notes of the ASNS.
Plants specified or identified as “Street Tree Grade” shall be trees with straight trunks, full
and symmetrical branching, central leader, and be developed, grown, and propagated with a
full branching crown. A “Street Tree Grade” designation requires the highest grade of nursery
shade or ornamental tree production which shall be supplied.
Street trees with improperly pruned, broken, or damaged branches, trunk, or root structure
shall be rejected. In all cases, whether supplied balled and burlapped or in a container, the
root crown (top of root structure) of the tree shall be at the top of the finish soil level. Trees
supplied and delivered in a nursery fabric bag will not be accepted.
Plants which have been determined by the Engineer to have suffered damage for the
following reasons will be rejected:
1. Girdling of the roots, stem, or a major branch.
2. Deformities of the stem or major branches.
3. Lack of symmetry.
4. Dead or defoliated tops or branches.
5. Defects, injury, and condition which renders the plant unsuitable for its intended use.
Plants that are grafted shall have roots of the same genus as the specified plant.

9-14.6(3) Handling and Shipping

Handling and shipping shall be done in a manner that is not detrimental to the plants.
The nursery shall furnish a notice of shipment in triplicate at the time of shipment of each
truck load or other lot of plant material. The original copy shall be delivered to the Engineer,
the duplicate to the consignee and the triplicate shall accompany the shipment to be furnished
to the Inspector at the job site. The notice shall contain the following information:
1. Name of shipper.
2. Date of shipment.
3. Name of commodity (including all names as specified in the Contract).
4. Consignee and delivery point.
5. State Contract number.
6. Point from which shipped.
7. Quantity contained.
8. Size (height, runner length, caliper, etc., as required).
9. Signature of shipper by authorized representative.
To acclimate plant materials to Northwest conditions, all plant materials used on a project
shall be grown continuously outdoors north of the 42nd Latitude (Oregon-California border)
from not later than August 1 of the year prior to the time of planting.
All container grown plants shall be handled by the container.
All balled and burlapped plants shall be handled by the ball.
Plant material shall be packed for shipment in accordance with prevailing practice for the
type of plant being shipped, and shall be protected at all times against drying, sun, wind, heat,
freezing, and similar detrimental conditions both during shipment and during related handling.
Where necessary, plant material shall be temporarily heeled in. When transported in closed
vehicles, plants shall receive adequate ventilation to prevent sweating. When transported in
open vehicles, plants shall be protected by tarpaulins or other suitable cover material.
9-14.6(4) Tagging
Plants delivered as a single unit of 25 or less of the same size, species, and variety, shall
be clearly marked and tagged. Plants delivered in large quantities of more than 25 must be
segregated as to variety, grade, and size; and one plant in each 25, or fraction thereof, of each
variety, grade, and size shall be tagged.
9-14.6(5) Inspection
The Contracting Agency will make an inspection of plant material at the source when
requested by the Engineer. However, such preliminary approval shall not be considered as final
acceptance for payment. Final inspection and approval (or rejection) will only occur when the
plant material has been delivered to the Contract site. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer,
not less than 48 hours in advance, of plant material delivery to the project.
9-14.6(6) Substitution of Plants
No substitution of plant material, species or variety, will be permitted unless evidence is
submitted in writing to the Engineer that a specified plant cannot be obtained and has been
unobtainable since the Award of the Contract. If substitution is permitted, it can be made only
with written approval by the Engineer. The nearest variety, size, and grade, as approved by the
Engineer, shall then be furnished.
Container or balled and burlapped plant material may be substituted for bare root plant
material. Container grown plant material may be substituted for balled and burlapped plant
materials. When substitution is allowed, use current ASNS standards to determine the
correct rootball volume (container or balled and burlapped) of the substituted material that
corresponds to that of the specified material. These substitutions shall be approved by the
Engineer and be at no cost to the Contracting Agency.

9-14.6(7) Temporary Storage

Plants stored under temporary conditions prior to installation shall be the responsibility of
the Contractor.
Plants stored on the project shall be protected at all times from extreme weather conditions
by insulating the roots, root balls, or containers with sawdust, soil, compost, bark or wood
chips, or other approved material and shall be kept moist at all times prior to planting.
Cuttings shall continually be shaded and protected from wind. Cuttings shall be protected
from drying at all times and shall be heeled into moist soil or other insulating material or
placed in water if not installed within 8 hours of cutting. Cuttings to be stored for later
installation shall be bundled, laid horizontally, and completely buried under 6 inches of water,
moist soil or placed in cold storage at a temperature of 34°F and 90 percent humidity. Cuttings
that are not planted within 24 hours of cutting shall be soaked in water for 24 hours prior to
planting. Cuttings taken when the temperature is higher than 50°F shall not be stored for later
use. Cuttings that already have developed roots shall not be used.
9-14.6(8) Sod
The available grass mixtures on the current market shall be submitted to the Engineer for
selection and approval.
The sod shall be field grown one calendar year or older, have a well developed root
structure, and be free of all weeds, disease, and insect damage.
Prior to cutting, the sod shall be green, in an active and vigorous state of growth,
and mowed to a height not exceeding 1 inch.
The sod shall be cut with a minimum of 1 inch of soil adhering.
9-14.7 Stakes, Guys, and Wrapping
Stakes shall be installed as shown in the Plans.
Commercial plant ties may be used in lieu of hose and wire guying upon approval
of the Engineer. The minimum size of wire used for guying shall be 12-gauge, soft drawn.
Hose for guying shall be nylon, rubber, or reinforced plastic and shall have an inside
diameter of at least 1 inch.
Tree wrap shall be a crinkled waterproof paper weighing not less than 4 pounds per
100 square feet and shall be made up of two sheets cemented together with asphalt.

Irrigation System 9-15
9-15 Irrigation System

All materials and equipment incorporated in the system shall be new, undamaged, of
standard quality, and shall be subject to testing as specified. When the water supply for the
irrigation system is from a nonpotable source, irrigation components shall have lavender
indicators supplied by the equipment manufacturer.
9-15.1 Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings
Pipe shall be copper, galvanized iron, PVC, or polyethylene, as specified in the Plans or
in the Special Provisions.
Copper pipe or tubing shall be annealed, seamless, and conform to the requirements of
ASTM B88, and shall be a minimum of Type L rating.
Threaded cast brass or bronze fittings shall meet the requirements of Section 9-30.6(6).
9-15.1(1) Galvanized Pipe and Fittings
Pipe shall be standard weight, hot-dip galvanized iron or steel pipe, threaded and coupled.
Pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM A53.
All pipe fittings shall be standard threaded galvanized malleable iron fittings.
9-15.1(2) Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings
PVC pipe and fittings shall be of PVC compound Type 1, Grade 1, conforming to
ASTM D1785 Specifications. The pipe and fittings shall be approved and certified by the
National Sanitation Foundation. Pipe and fittings shall be free from defects in materials,
workmanship, and handling. The Engineer may require dimensional and quick burst tests of
pipe and fittings after arrival at the job site. Acceptance of the materials shall be subject to
passing the designated tests per ASTM Standards.
PVC solvent weld pipe shall be of PVC 1120 material and shall have 200 psi minimum
pressure rating with SDR 21 walls which conform to ASTM D2241. PVC pipe with walls
heavier than SDR 21 shall be installed when noted in the Plans and specified in the Special
Provisions. PVC threaded pipe shall be of PVC 1120 material and shall be schedule 80 which
conforms to ASTM D1785.
PVC pipe fittings shall conform to ASTM D2466, Type I, Grades 1 or 2. Pipe may be
belled on one end with the dimensions of the tapered bell conforming to ASTM D2672.
Each length of PVC pipe is to be marked with an identifying extrusion “run” number
and the manufacturer’s name or trade name plus the pipe size and schedule.
9-15.1(3) Polyethylene Pipe
Polyethylene pipe shall be Class 80, SDR 15, medium density polyethylene pipe, meet
the requirements of ASTM D2239, conform to U.S. Commercial Standard CS-255, and be
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved.
Thick walled polyethylene (poly) pipe shall be used in conjunction with fittings
recommended by the manufacturer of the poly pipe to produce a flexible swing joint assembly
between the lateral line and the irrigation head. The pipe shall be manufactured from high
quality, low density virgin polyethylene material and have a minimum wall thickness
of 0.10 inch and a minimum inside diameter of 0.49 inch. The pipe shall be capable of
withstanding 80 psi operating water pressure at 110°F. The length of thick walled poly pipe
at each flexible swing joint assembly shall be 18 inches minimum to 36 inches maximum.
9-15.2 Drip Tubing
Drip tubing shall be manufactured from specially formulated, chemical resistant, low to
medium density virgin polyethylene or polybutylene selected for excellent weatherability
and stress cracking resistance and designed specifically for use in drip irrigation systems.
Drip tubing shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.045 inch.

9-15.3 Automatic Controllers

The automatic controller shall be an electronic timing device for automatically opening
and closing control valves for predetermined periods of time. The automatic controller shall be
enclosed in a weatherproof painted metal housing fabricated from 16-gauge sheet aluminum
alloy 6061-T6 or 16-gauge sheet steel or unpainted, nonrusting industrial grade stainless
steel. The pedestal shall have a completely removable locking faceplate to allow easy access
to wiring.
The automatic controller housing shall have hasp and lock or a locking device. All locks or
locking devices shall be master keyed, and three sets of keys shall be provided to the Engineer.
The controller shall be compatible with and capable of operating the irrigation system as
designed and constructed and shall include the following operating features:
1. Each controller station shall be adjustable for setting to remain open for any desired
period of time, from 5 minutes or less to at least 99 minutes.
2. Adjustments shall be provided whereby any number of days may be omitted and
whereby any one or more positions on the controller can be skipped. When adjustments
are made, they shall continue automatically within a 14-day cycle until the operator
desires to make new adjustments.
3. Controls shall allow any position to be operated manually, both on or off, whenever
desired, without disrupting the 14-day cycle.
4. Controls shall provide for resetting the start of the irrigation cycle at any time and
advancing from one position to another.
5. Controllers shall contain a power on-off switch and fuse assembly.
6. Output shall be 24-volt AC with battery back-up for memory retention of the
14‑day cycle.
7. Each controller shall have both normally-open or normally-closed rain sensor
compatibility.
9-15.4 Irrigation Heads
Irrigation heads shall be of the type, pattern, and coverage shown in the Plans at
rated operating pressure specified, discharging not more than the amount of gallons per
minute listed.
Sprinkler heads shall be designed so that spray adjustments can be made by either
an adjustment screw or interchangeable nozzles. Watering cores shall be easily removed
without removing the housing from the pipe.
All instructions, special wrenches, clamps, tools, and equipment supplied by the
manufacturer necessary for the installation and maintenance of the irrigation heads shall
be turned over to the Engineer upon completion and acceptance of the project.
9-15.5 Valve Boxes
Valve boxes shall conform to the Plans and be extendable to obtain the depth required.
All manual drain valves and manual control valves shall be installed in valve box with a
vandal-resistant lid as shown in the Plans.
9-15.6 Gate Valves
Valves shall be of the same size as the pipes on which they are placed and shall have
union or flange connections. Service rating (for nonshock cold water) shall be 150 psi. Valves
shall be of the double disk, taper seat type, with rising stem, union bonnet and hand wheel or
suitable cross wheel for standard key operation. Manufacturer’s name, type of valve, and size
shall be imprinted or printed on the valve.

9-15.7 Control Valves

9-15.7(1) Manual Control Valves
Manual valves shall be angle type. Service rating shall be not less than 150 psi nonshock
cold water. Valves shall be designed for underground installation with suitable cross wheel
for operation with a standard key. The Contractor shall furnish three suitable operating keys.
Valves shall have removable bonnet and stem assemblies with adjustable packing glands and
shall house long acme threaded stems to ensure full opening and closing.
9-15.7(2) Automatic Control Valves
Automatic remote control valves shall be globe pattern with flanged or screwed
connections as required. The valve shall be constructed so as to allow all internal parts to be
removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation.
Valves shall be of a normally-closed design and shall be operated by an electronic solenoid
having a maximum rating of 6.5 watts utilizing 24-volt AC power. Electronic solenoids shall
have a stainless steel plunger and be directly attached to the valve bonnets or body with all
control parts fully encapsulated. Valves shall be of 200 psi heavy-duty glass filled nylon and a
standard product of a reputable manufacturer of irrigation valves and equipment. The opening
and closing speed of the valve shall be a minimum of five seconds for closure and a minimum
of three seconds for opening with a constant rate of opening and closing. A manual control
bleed cock shall be included on the valve to operate the valve without the requirement of
electrical current. A manual shutoff stem with cross handle for wrench operation is required
for manual adjustment from fully closed to wide open. Once the manual adjustment is set,
the valve shall operate automatically in the adjusted position. Water flow shall be completely
stopped when the control valve is closed either manually or automatically. Automatic control
valves and automatic controllers need not be from the same manufacturer.
9-15.7(3) Automatic Control Valves With Pressure Regulator
Automatic control valves with pressure regulators shall be similar to the automatic control
valves described in Section 9-15.7(2) and shall reduce the inlet pressure to a constant pressure
regardless of supply fluctuations. The regulator must be fully adjustable.
9-15.8 Quick Coupling Equipment
Quick coupler valves shall have a service rating of not less than 125 psi for nonshock cold
water. The body of the valves shall be of cast Copper Alloy No. C84400 Leaded Semi-Red
Brass conforming to ASTM B584. The base of the valve shall have standard female pipe
threads. The design of the valve shall be such that it will open only upon inserting a coupler
key and will close as the coupler is removed from the valve. Leakage of water between the
coupler and valve body when in operation shall not be accepted. The valve body receiving
the coupler shall be designed with double worm slots to allow smooth action in opening and
closing of the valve with a minimum of effort. Slots shall be notched at the base to hold the
coupler firmly in the open position. Couplers shall be of the same material as the valve body
with stainless steel double guide lugs to fit the worm slots. Couplers shall be of one piece
construction with steel reinforced side handles attached. All couplers shall have standard
male pipe threads at the top. Couplers shall be furnished with all quick coupler valves unless
otherwise specified.
9-15.9 Drain Valves
Drain valves may be a ½- or ¾-inch PVC or metal gate valve manufactured for irrigation
systems. Valves shall be designed for underground installation with suitable cross wheel for
operation with a standard key, and shall have a service rating of not less than 150 psi nonshock
cold water. The Contractor shall furnish three standard operating keys per Contract. Drain
valves shall be installed in a valve box with a vandal-resistant lid as shown in the Plans.
Drain valves on potable water systems shall only be allowed on the downstream side of
approved cross-connection control devices.

9-15.10 Hose Bibs

Hose bibs shall be angle type, constructed of bronze or brass, threaded to accommodate
a ¾-inch hose connection, and shall be key operated. Design shall be such as to prevent
operation by wrench or pliers.
9-15.11 Cross Connection Control Devices
Atmospheric vacuum breaker assemblies (AVBAs), pressure vacuum breaker assemblies
(PVBAs), double check valve assemblies (DCVAs), and reduced pressure backflow devices
(RPBDs) shall be of a manufacturer and product model approved for use by the Washington
State Department of Health, Olympia, Washington, or a Department of Health-certified agency.
9-15.12 Check Valves
Adjustable spring check valves shall be PVC and shall be pressure rated at 200 psi.
Valves shall be adjustable from 5 to 15 pounds spring tension, but shall not cause pressure loss
in excess of 5 psi for flows up to 30 gpm. Valves shall have angled seats, Buna-N seals, and
threaded connections, and shall be installed in 8-inch-round plastic valve boxes with vandal-
resistant lids.
9-15.13 Pressure Regulating Valves
Pressure regulating valves shall have a minimum of 150 psi working pressure with an
adjustable outlet range of 20 to 70 psi. The valves shall be factory set as shown in the Plans.
Pressure regulating valves shall be rated for safe operation at 175 psi nonshock cold water.
9-15.14 Three-Way Valves
Three-way valves shall be tight closing, three port, ball or plug type, constructed to permit
straight through and 90-degree flow only. The valve shall be of bronze or approved corrosion
resistant body materials and shall have a minimum of 150 psi working pressure. The head of
the valve, or handle when applicable, shall be permanently marked to indicate port position.
When handles are included as an integral part of the valves, the Contractor shall remove the
handles and give them to the Engineer.
9-15.15 Flow Control Valves
Valve body materials shall be plastic or metal. Internal parts shall be stainless steel.
Valves shall be factory set to the flows as shown in the Plans. Valves shall have no external
adjustment and be tamper-proof when installed. One-quarter inch and smaller flow control
valves shall have a minimum pressure absorption range of 2 to 32 psi. One and one half inch
and larger flow control valves shall have a minimum pressure absorption range of 3 to 50 psi.
Flow shall be controlled to 5 percent of Plan volumes.
9-15.16 Air Relief Valve
The air relief valve shall automatically relieve air and break a vacuum in the serviced pipe.
Body materials shall be installed exactly at all high points.
9-15.17 Electrical Wire and Splices
Electrical wire used between the automatic controller and automatic control valves shall
be solid or stranded copper, minimum size AWG 14. Insulation shall be Type USE Chemically
Cross Linked Polyethylene or Type UF, and shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory. Each conductor shall be color coded and marked at each end and at all splices
with zone or station number identification.
Low voltage splices shall be made with a direct bury splice kit using a twist-on wire
connector and inserted in a waterproof polypropylene tube filled with a silicone electrical
insulating gel or heat-shrinkable insulation tubing. Heat-shrinkable insulation tubing shall
consist of a mastic-lined heavy-wall polyolefin cable sleeve.

9-15.18 Detectable Marking Tape

Detectable marking tape shall consist of inert polyethylene plastic that is impervious to
all known alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be encountered in the soil,
with a metallic foil core to provide for the most positive detection and pipeline location.
The tape shall be color coded and shall be imprinted continuously over its entire length
in permanent black ink indicating the type of line buried below and shall also have the word
“Caution” prominently shown. Color coding of the tape shall be as follows:
Utility Tape Color
Water Blue
Sewer Green
Electrical Red
Gas/Oil Yellow
Telephone/CATV Orange
Non-Potable Water Purple
The width of the tape shall be as recommended by the manufacture based on depth
of installation.
9-15.19 Wye Strainers
Wye strainers shall be bronze or brass with screwed end connections, 20 mesh Monel or
stainless steel screen, and standard tapped bronze retainer cap and closure plug. Service rating
shall be not less than 150 psii nonshock cold water.

9-16 Fence and Guardrail

9-16.1 Chain Link Fence and Gates
9-16.1(1) General
All material used in the construction of chain link fence and gates shall be new. Iron or
steel material shall be galvanized unless specified otherwise. Material upon which serious
abrasions of galvanizing occur shall not be acceptable.
9-16.1(1)A Post Material for Chain Link Fence
Except as noted otherwise, post material shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO
M 181, Type I (zinc-coated steel), Grade 1 or 2, and shall include all round and roll-formed
material (line posts, brace posts, end posts, corner posts, and pull posts).
Round Post Material
Round post material shall be Grade 1 or 2.
Roll Form Material
Roll-formed post material shall be Grade 1.
Roll-formed end, corner, and pull posts shall have integral fastening loops to connect to the
fabric for the full length of each post.
Grade 1 post material shall conform to the weight per linear foot, minimum wall thickness
and detail requirements of ASTM F1043. Grade 1 post material that exceeds the maximum
wall thickness requirement of ASTM F1043 may be accepted, provided it does not interfere
with the proper construction of the fence.
Grade 2 post material shall meet the organic exterior coatings requirements of AASHTO
M 181 (Section 33) and the additional requirement that the interior coated surface shall be
capable of resisting 300 hours of exposure to salt fog with a maximum of 5 percent red rust
when tested in accordance with ASTM B117.
9-16.1(1)B Chain Link Fence Fabric
Chain link fabric shall consist of 11-gage wire for chain link fence Types 3, 4, and 6,
and 9-gage wire for chain link fence Type 1. The fabric shall be zinc-coated steel wire
conforming to AASHTO M 181, Class C. Zinc 5 percent Aluminum-Mischmetal alloy meeting
the requirements of ASTM B750 may be substituted for zinc coating (hot-dipped) at the
application rate specified by AASHTO M 181 for hot-dip zinc coating. Coating for chain link
fence fabric shall meet the requirements of ASTM A817 with minimum weight of coating of
uncoated wire surface 1.0 oz/sq ft (305 g/m2). The wire shall be woven into approximately
2-inch diamond mesh. The width and top and bottom finish of the fabric shall be as specified
in AASHTO M 181.
9-16.1(1)C Tension Wire
Tension wire shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 181. Tension wire galvanizing
shall be Class 1.
9-16.1(1)D Fittings and Hardware
Except where indicated, fittings shall be malleable cast iron or pressed steel and shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM F626 or AASHTO M 232, whichever is applicable.
Tension truss rods shall be ⅜-inch round galvanized rods with drop forged turnbuckles
or other approved type of adjustment. Couplings for tubular sections shall be outside sleeve
type and shall be at least 6 inches long.
Eye bolts for attaching tension wire shall be ⅜-inch diameter and of sufficient length to
fasten to the type of post being used.
Tension bars shall be ³⁄16 by ¾-inch nominal and cross sectional area shall be 0.141 in2 ±
5 percent.
Hog rings shall be 12-gage galvanized steel wire. Tie wire shall be 9-gage galvanized steel
wire or 9-gage aluminum wire meeting the requirements of ASTM F626.
Fence and Guardrail 9-16
Fabric bands and stretcher bars shall meet the requirements of Section 9-16.6(9).
9-16.1(1)E Chain Link Gates
Gate frames shall be constructed of not less than 1½-inch (I.D.) galvanized pipe
conforming to AASHTO M 181 Type I, Grade 1 or 2, as specified in Section 9-16.1(1)A.
The corners of the gate frame shall be fastened together and reinforced with a malleable
iron or pressed steel fitting designed for the purpose, or they may be welded. Welding shall
conform to the requirements of Section 6-03.3(25). All welds shall be ground smooth coated
with paint conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B. The paint shall be applied in one or more coats
to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 3.5 mils.
Chain link fence fabric for filling the gate frame shall meet the requirements of
Section 9-16.1(1)B for the fence type being furnished.
Cross trussing shall be 5/16-inch steel adjustable rods galvanized in accordance with
Section 9-16.1(1)D.
Each gate shall be furnished complete with necessary hinges, latch, and drop bar locking
device designed for the type of gate posts and gate used on the project. Gates shall have
positive type latching devices with provisions for padlocking. Hinges, latches, and locking
devices shall be galvanized in accordance with Section 9-16.1(1)D.
Gate frames constructed of steel sections, other than pipe, that are fabricated in such a
manner as to form a gate of equal or better rigidity may be used provided they are approved
by the Engineer.
9-16.1(1)F Concrete
All concrete for chain link fence shall be as specified in Section 6-02.3(2)B.
9-16.2 Wire Fence and Gates
9-16.2(1) General
All materials used in the construction of the wire fence shall be new. All iron or steel
material shall be galvanized. Material upon which serious abrasions of galvanizing occur will
not be acceptable.
9-16.2(1)A Steel Post Material
Round Post Material
Round post material shall conform to AASHTO M 181, Type I, Grade 1.
Angle Post Material (Channel, T, U, Y, or Other Approved Style)
All angle post material shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of AASHTO
M 111, except the anchor plate on fence post material shall be Grade 55. Angle post used for
end, corner, gate, and pull post and brace shall have a minimum weight of 3.1 lb/ft.
Posts shall not be less than 7 feet in length. A tolerance of -5 percent on the weight of
individual posts, braces or anchor plates will be permitted. One type of line post shall be
used throughout the project. Line posts shall be studded, slotted, or properly adapted for
attaching either wire or mesh in a manner that will not damage the galvanizing of posts, wire
or mesh during the fastening. Line posts shall have a minimum weight of 1.33 lbs/ft and shall
be provided with a tapered galvanized steel anchor plate. The anchor plate shall be securely
attached and have a surface area of 20 ±2 in2, and a minimum weight of 0.67 pounds.
9-16.2(1)B Wood Fence Posts and Braces
Douglas fir, Western red cedar, hemlock, or larch shall be used in the construction of wood
fence posts and braces. The material shall be of good quality and approved by the Engineer
before use. Peeler cores shall not be used for round posts. Wood fencing materials shall have
sufficient sapwood in the outer periphery to obtain the specified penetration of preservative.
Western red cedar will not require preservative treatment. Fencing materials shall be cut to the
correct length before pressure treatment.

Line posts shall be 3-inch minimum diameter round posts or nominal 3 by 3-inch square
sawed posts. If the posts are to be pointed for driving, they shall be pointed before treatment.
Line posts shall be at least 7 feet in length.
Pull posts and brace posts shall be 6-inch diameter round posts or nominal 6 by 6-inch
material not less than 7 feet in length.
End, gate, and corner posts, and posts at an intersecting fence shall be 6-inch diameter
round posts or nominal 6 by 6-inch material not less than 7′ 10″ in length.
All sawed posts and timbers shall meet the requirements in the table under Section 9-09.2.
The preservatives used to pressure treat wood fencing materials shall meet the requirements
of Section 9-09.3.
The retention and penetration of the preservative shall be as follows:
Minimum Retention in Pounds Per Cubic Foot
Preservative Sawed Posts Round Posts
Creosote 10.00 8.00
Pentachlorophenol 0.50 0.40
ACZA 0.40 0.40
CCA 0.40 0.40
Minimum Penetration
for material 5 inches or less – 0.40 inches penetration and 90 percent of sapwood
for material 5 inches or greater – 0.50 inches penetration and 90 percent of sapwood
9-16.2(1)C Brace Wire
Brace wire shall be 9 gage wire galvanized to meet the requirements of AASHTO M 279,
Type Z, Class 1.
9-16.2(1)D Staples and Wire Clamps
The staples used to attach the wire fencing to wood posts shall be 9 gage wire, 1½ inches
long, galvanized to meet the requirements of AASHTO M 279, Type Z, Class 1.
The wire clamps used to attach the wire fencing to steel posts shall be 11 gage wire,
galvanized to meet the requirements of AASHTO M 279, Type Z, Class 1.
9-16.2(1)E Barbed Wire
Barbed wire shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 280, Type Z and shall
consist of two strands of 12½-gage wire, twisted with four point 14-gage barbs with barbs
spaced 5 inches apart (Design 12-4-5-14R). Galvanizing shall be Class 3.
9-16.2(1)F Wire Mesh
Wire mesh shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 279, Type Z and shall consist
of eight horizontal wires with vertical stays spaced 6 inches apart. The top and bottom wires
shall be 10 gage, and the intermediate wires and vertical stays shall be 12½ gage. The mesh
shall have a total width of 32 inches (Design 832-6-12½). Galvanizing shall be Class 3.
The zinc coated wire as represented by the test specimens shall be capable of being
wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns/minute around a cylindrical steel
mandrel having a diameter the same as the specimen being tested, without cracking or
flaking the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with the
bare fingers.
9-16.2(1)G Vertical Cinch Stays
Vertical cinch stays shall be 10 gage galvanized wire meeting the requirements
of AASHTO M 279, Type Z, Class 1.

9-16.2(1)H Miscellaneous Hardware

Bolts, nuts, hinges, latches and other miscellaneous hardware shall be galvanized
in accordance with AASHTO M 232.
9-16.2(1)I Wire Gates
Gate frames shall be constructed of galvanized pipe with a nominal diameter of not less
than 1 inch. The pipe shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 181 Type I, Grade 1.
Wire gates shall be not less than 48 inches in height and shall be designed to fit openings of
the width called for in the Plans or as indicated by the Bid items. Each gate shall be provided
with two upright braces of the same material as the frame, spaced at ⅓ points in the gate.
All gates shall be provided with adjustable 5⁄16-inch diameter galvanized diagonal truss rods
from corner to corner. Galvanizing shall be in accordance with Section 9-16.2(1)H.
The gate frame shall be provided with wire mesh conforming to the requirements specified
in Section 9-16.2(1)F, except that it shall consist of 10 horizontal wires and have a total width
of 47 inches.
Each gate shall be furnished complete with necessary galvanized hinges and latch designed
for use with the type of gate posts used on the project. The hinges shall be so designed as to
be securely attached to the gate post and to enable the gate to be swing back against the fence.
Double gates shall be hinged in the same manner as single gates and shall be provided with
an approved galvanized drop bar locking device. Galvanizing for hinges, latches, and locking
devices shall be in accordance with Section 9-16.2(1)H.
9-16.2(1)J Concrete
All concrete for wire fence shall be as specified in Section 6-02.3(2)B.
9-16.3 Beam Guardrail
9-16.3(1) Rail Element
The W-beam or thrie beams rail elements, backup plates, reducer sections, and end sections
shall conform to A Guide to Standardized Highway Barrier Hardware published by AASHTO,
AGC, and ARTBA. All rail elements shall be formed from 12-gage steel except for thrie beam
reducer sections, thrie beams used for bridge rail retrofits, and Design F end sections, which
shall be formed from 10-gage steel.
The rail splices shall have a minimum total ultimate strength of 80,000 pounds at
each joint.
The 6-inch channel rails and splice plates shall conform to ASTM A36, except
that the channel rails may conform to ASTM A992. All fabrication shall be complete
before galvanizing.
The holes in the plate shall be slotted to facilitate erection and to permit expansion and
contraction. The edges of the rail shall be rolled or rounded so they will present no sharp
edges. Where the rail is on a curve, the plates at the splice shall make contact throughout the
area of splice. When the radius of curvature is less than 150 feet, the rail shall be shaped in
the shop.
9-16.3(2) Posts and Blocks
Posts and blocks may be of creosote, pentachlorophenol, waterborne chromate copper
arsenate (CCA), or ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate (ACZA), treated timber, or galvanized
steel (galvanized steel posts only – no blocks). Blocks made from alternate materials that meet
the NCHRP Report 350 or MASH criteria may be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Wood posts and blocks may be surface four sides (S4S) or rough sawn.
Posts and blocks shall be of the size, length, and type as shown in the Plans and shall meet
the requirements of the below Specifications.
Timber posts and blocks shall conform to the grade specified in Section 9-09.2. Timber
posts and blocks shall be fabricated as specified in the Plans before being treated. Timber

posts and blocks shall be treated by the empty cell process to provide a minimum retention,
depending on the treatment used, according to the following:
Creosote oil 10.0 lbs. pcf.
Pentachlorophenol 0.50 lbs. pcf.
ACZA 0.50 lbs. pcf.
CCA 0.50 lbs.pcf.
Treatment shall be in accordance with Section 9-09.3.
Galvanized steel posts, and base plates, where used, shall conform to either ASTM A36
or ASTM A992, and shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 111. Welding shall
conform to Section 6-03.3(25). All fabrication shall be completed prior to galvanizing.
9-16.3(3) Galvanizing
W-beam or thrie beam rail elements and terminal sections shall be galvanized in
accordance with AASHTO M 180, Class A, Type II. Channel rails, splice plates, WF steel
posts, and base plates shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Anchor cables
shall be galvanized in accordance with Federal Specification RR-W-410, Table II, galvanized
at finished size. Bolts, nuts, washers, plates, rods, and other hardware shall be galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A153.
9-16.3(4) Hardware
Unfinished bolts (ordinary machine bolts), nuts, and washers for unfinished bolts, shall
conform to Section 9-06.5(1). High-strength bolts, nuts, and washers for high-strength bolts
shall conform to Section 9-06.5(3).
Unfinished bolts shall be accepted by field verification and documentation that bolt heads
are stamped 307A. The Contractor shall submit a manufacturer’s certificate of compliance
per Section 1-06.3 for high-strength bolts, nuts, and washers prior to installing any of
the hardware.
9-16.3(5) Anchors
Welding shall conform to Section 6-03.3(25).
All welding shall be equal in strength to the parent metal.
All fabrication shall be complete and ready for assembly before galvanizing. No punching,
drilling, cutting, or welding will be permitted after galvanizing unless authorized by
the Engineer.
Foundation tubes shall be fabricated from steel conforming to the requirements of
ASTM A500, Grade B or ASTM A501.
The anchor plate assembly shall develop a minimum tensile strength of 40,000 pounds.
The anchor plate, W8 × 18, and metal plates shall be fabricated of steel conforming to
the Specifications of ASTM A36, except that the W8 × 18 may conform to ASTM A992.
Anchor cable shall be ¾ inch preformed, 6 by 19 wire strand core or independent wire
rope core (IWRC), galvanized, right regular lay manufactured of improved plow steel with
a minimum breaking strength of 42,800 pounds. Two certified copies of mill test reports of
the cable used shall be furnished to the Engineer.
Swaged cable fittings shall develop 100 percent of the specified breaking strength of
the cable. One swaged fitting attached to 3 feet of cable shall be furnished to the Engineer
for testing.
The swaged fitting and stud assembly shall be of steel conforming to the requirements of
American Iron and Steel Institute C-1035 and shall be annealed and galvanized suitable for
cold swaging.
All metal components of the anchor and cable assembly and not less than the top 14 inches
of the W8 × 18 for the Type 2 anchor shall be galvanized in accordance with Section 9-16.3(3).
Cement concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 6-02.3(2)B.

Cement grout shall conform to Section 9-20.3(4) and consist of one part portland cement
and two parts sand.
9-16.3(6) Inspection and Acceptance
The Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer before the rail elements are fabricated in
order that inspections may be provided. The Contractor shall arrange for all facilities necessary
for the inspection of material and workmanship at the point of fabrication of the rail element,
and inspectors shall be allowed free access to necessary parts of the premises.
The Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or workmanship which do not
fulfill the requirements of these Specifications. In cases of dispute, the Contractor may appeal
to the Engineer, whose decision will be final.
The Inspector may accept a mill test report certifying that the steel used in fabricating the
rail element meets the requirements of the Specifications. The Contracting Agency reserves the
right, however, to require the Contractor to furnish samples of the steel proposed for use and
to determine to its satisfaction that the steel meets the Specification requirements. Steel rail
elements, fittings, end section hardware, and bolts may be accepted by the Engineer based on
the Manufacturer’s Certification of Compliance.
9-16.4 Wire Mesh Slope Protection
9-16.4(1) General
All metal material used in the construction of wire mesh slope protection shall be new
and galvanized. Imperfectly galvanized material or material upon which serious abrasion of
galvanizing occurs will not be acceptable.
9-16.4(2) Wire Mesh
The galvanized wire mesh shall be a Style 1 double-twisted hexagonal mesh conforming
to ASTM A975 with 8 by 10 opening, except when a colorized, polyvinyl chloride coating is
required then the Style shall be a Style 3.
The longitudinal edges of the wire mesh fabric shall have knuckled selvedges with
continuous selvedge wire as specified in ASTM A975.
9-16.4(3) Wire Rope
Wire rope shall be ¾-inch-diameter, independent wire rope class (IWRC) 6x19, extra
improved plow steel (EIP) wire rope galvanized in accordance with ASTM A1023. Each
lot of wire rope shall be accompanied by a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, a
mill certificate, and a test report showing the wire rope meets the minimum breaking force
requirements of ASTM A1023.
9-16.4(4) Hardware
Weldless steel rings shall be drop-forged steel and heat treated after forging; have a single
pull, working load limit of at least 10,000 lbs; and meet performance requirements of Federal
Specification RR-C-271D Type VI.
Thimbles required for all wire rope loops shall be standard weight, galvanized, and meet
performance requirements of Federal Specification FF-T-276b Type II.
Wire rope clips shall have drop-forged steel bases, be galvanized, and meet performance
requirements of Federal Specification FF-C-450 Type I Class 1.
9-16.4(5) Fasteners and Lacing Wire
Fasteners shall consist of 11 gauge high tensile steel. Lacing wire shall consist of 9 gauge,
zinc-coated steel wire conforming to ASTM A641.
9-16.4(6) Ground Anchors
Threaded bar ground anchors shall be deformed, continuously threaded, steel reinforcement
bars conforming to either Section 9-07.2 or Section 9-07.11. Threaded bar ground anchors

shall be either epoxy-coated in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(24)H and 9-07.3 or

galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A767 Class I.
Hollow-core anchor bars shall have continuous threads/deformations and be fabricated
from steel tubing conforming to ASTM A519. Couplers and nuts shall provide 100 percent
of the guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the hollow core anchor bars.
Bearing plates shall conform to ASTM A572 Grade 50 and shall be galvanized after
fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 111. Nuts shall conform to either AASHTO
M 291 Grade B, hexagonal, or Section 9-07.11. Nuts shall be galvanized after fabrication
in accordance with AASHTO M 111 for plate washers and AASHTO M 232 for all
other hardware.
Grout for ground anchors shall be Grout Type 2 for Nonshrink Applications, conforming
to Section 9-20.3(2).
Concrete for soil anchor deadmen shall be either commercial concrete conforming to 8
Section 6-02.3(2)B or Class 3000 conforming to Section 6-02.
Steel reinforcing bars for soil anchor deadmen shall conform to Section 9-07.2, and shall
be epoxy-coated in accordance with Sections 6-02.3(24)H and 9-07.3.
9-16.5 Vacant
9-16.6 Glare Screen
9-16.6(1) General
All material used in the construction of the fence shall be new. Iron or steel material shall
be galvanized or aluminum coated as specified. Imperfectly galvanized or aluminum coated
material, or material upon which serious abrasions of galvanizing or aluminum coating occur,
will not be acceptable.
9-16.6(2) Glare Screen Fabric
Glare screen fabric shall consist of diamond woven wire mesh. The fabric wire may be
0.148-inch diameter aluminum alloy complying with the Aluminum Association requirements
for alloy 6061T94, or it may be 0.148-inch diameter (9-gage) iron or steel wire which shall
meet all of the requirements of ASTM A392 galvanized or ASTM A491 for aluminum coated,
except that galvanizing of Type 2 glare screen fabric shall be not less than 0.8 ounce per
square foot and shall be done before weaving. Aluminum coating shall be Class II.
Type 1 glare screen mesh size shall be approximately a 1 inch diamond. Type 2 glare
screen mesh size shall be a maximum of 3½ inch vertical and 5½ inch horizontal. The design
shall permit the slats to be installed in a vertical position as shown in the Plans without
distortion of the slats.
9-16.6(3) Posts
Line posts for Types 1 and 2 glare screens shall be 2 inch inside diameter galvanized steel
pipe with a nominal weight of 3.65 pounds per linear foot. End, corner, brace, and pull posts
for Type 1 Design A and B and Type 2 shall be 2½ inch inside diameter galvanized steel pipe
with a nominal weight of 5.79 pounds per linear foot. Intermediate pull posts (braced line
posts) shall be as specified for line posts.
The base material for the manufacture of steel pipes used for posts shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM A53, except the weight tolerance on tubular posts shall be applied
as provided below.
Posts provided for glare screen will have an acceptance tolerance on the weight per
linear foot, as specified, equal to plus or minus 5 percent. This tolerance will apply to
each individual post.
All posts shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 181, Section 32. The
minimum average zinc coating is per square foot of surface area. This area is defined
as the total area inside and outside. A sample for computing the average of mass of coating
is defined as a 12-inch piece cut from each end of the galvanized member.
9-16.6(4) Tension Wire

Top and bottom tension wire shall be 7 gage coil spring steel wire of good commercial
quality and shall have a zinc coating averaging 0.8 ounces per square foot of surface area.
9-16.6(5) Vacant
9-16.6(6) Tension Wire Attachments
All tension wire attachments shall be galvanized steel conforming to the requirements of
AASHTO M 232 unless otherwise specified. Eye bolts shall have either a shoulder or a back-
up nut on the eye end and be provided with an eye nut where needed or standard hex nut and
lock washer ⅜-inch diameter for tension wire and of sufficient length to fasten to the type of
posts used. Turnbuckles shall be of the shackle end type, ½-inch diameter, with standard take-
up of 6 inches and provided with ⅜-inch diameter pins.
9-16.6(7) Slats
9-16.6(7)A Wood Slats
Wood slats shall be ⅜ by 2⅜ inch by the height designation of the fence. Material shall
be finished and treated cedar or redwood and shall be free from loose knots, cracks, and
other imperfections. A dimensional tolerance of plus or minus 1⁄16 inch in width or thickness
is allowed provided that the maximum space between slats does not exceed ¾ inch.
9-16.6(7)B Plastic Slats
Plastic slats shall be ⅜ by 2⅜ inch by the height designation of the fence. They shall be
manufactured from tubular polyethylene color pigmented material consisting of high-density
virgin polyethylene and color pigments, designed to retard ultraviolet penetration. The
material shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.0030 inch plus or minus 0.0003 inch and
shall remain flexible without distortion and without becoming brittle through a temperature
range of -70ºF to + 250ºF. Tensile strength shall be at least 3,600 psi and the melt index shall
not exceed 0.25.
Plastic slats shall be retained in place by means of U-shaped retainer members at the
bottom and top of the fence. Retainer members shall be of the same material as the slats.
The color for plastic slats will be approved by the Engineer from samples submitted by
the Contractor or supplier.
9-16.6(8) Fittings
Fittings shall be malleable cast iron or pressed steel and galvanized in accordance with the
requirements of AASHTO M 232.
Fittings for any particular fence shall be those furnished by the manufacturer of the fence.
9-16.6(9) Fabric Bands and Stretcher Bars
Fabric bands shall be ⅛ inch by 1-inch nominal. Stretcher bars shall be 3⁄16 inch by ¾ inch
nominal or 5/16 inch diameter round bar nominal 5/16 inch diameter round stretcher bar shall be
used with Type 1. Nominal shall be construed to be the area of the cross section of the shape
obtained by multiplying the specified width by thickness. A variation of minus 5-percent from
this theoretical area shall be construed as “nominal” size. All shall be galvanized to meet the
requirements of ASTM F626.
9-16.6(10) Tie Wire and Hog Rings
Tie wire shall be 9-gage aluminum wire complying with the ASTM B211 for alloy 1100
H14 or 9-gage galvanized wire meeting the requirements of AASHTO M 279. Galvanizing
shall be Class 1.
Hog rings shall be 12-gage galvanized steel wire.

9-17 Flexible Guide Posts

9-17.1 General
Flexible guide posts shall be made of a flexible, nonwarping, nonmetallic, durable plastic
material; shall be resistant to damage due to impact, ultraviolet light, ozone, hydrocarbons, and
other effects of atmospheric weathering; shall resist stiffening with age; and shall exhibit good
workmanship and be free of burns, discoloration, contamination and other objectionable marks
or defects that affect appearance or serviceability. The portion of ground mounted guide post
installed below ground may be the same material as the portion above ground or other durable
material suitable for firmly anchoring the post in the ground. When iron or steel are used for
the in ground portion, galvanize in accordance with AASHTO M111. The top of tubular posts
shall be closed to prevent moisture or debris from entering. Surface mounted guide posts
shall be mounted on a base made of a rigid high impact resistant material and be resistant to
ultraviolet light, ozone, and hydrocarbons. The post shall mount directly into or onto the base
in a tamper proof manner and shall allow for easy replacement. Guardrail mounted guide posts
shall be the same as ground mounted guide posts except the length shall be adjusted to meet
the mounting height requirements in the Standard Plans. Appropriate holes shall be provided
for fastening the guide post to the guard rail post.
The material composition of flexible guide posts subsequently furnished shall not vary
from that of the samples upon which the State Materials Laboratory pre-approval is based.
If analysis by the Materials Laboratory determines there is a change in material composition,
such change shall constitute grounds for rejection and/or removal from the Qualified
Products List.
The post system shall be designed for permanent installation to resist overturning, twisting,
and displacement from wind and impact forces.
Each flexible guide post shall be permanently identified with the manufacturer’s name, and
the month and year of fabrication. Ground mounted guide posts shall have a permanent a mark
indicating the recommended burial depth. The letters shall be solvent resistant, a minimum of
¼ inch in height, and permanently affixed to the post.
Unless otherwise specified, the color of the guide post shall be white or brown as indicated
in the Plans.
The reflective panel on a flat or elliptical guide post shall have a minimum width
of 3 inches facing traffic. The reflective sheeting shall have a minimum area of 24
square inches (3 by 8 inches). The reflective panel on a round guide post shall have an 8-inch
minimum band of reflective sheeting visible for 360 degrees.
9-17.1(1) Dimensions
1. Flat Type – The post has a minimum width of 3 inches of continuous flat surface with
no curvature for the entire length of the post. This will allow for ridges on the outer
edges and back of post intended for structural support.
2. Tubular Type – The post is tubular or round/circular in shape. This allows for a tubular
post with a minimum diameter of 3 inches or a tubular post with a minimum diameter
of 2 inches with a flat or flattened oval surface at least 3 inches wide and 12 inches long
measured from the top for mounting reflective sheeting.
3. Non-flat and Non-Tubular Type – This includes all post that do not fit into the two
types indicated above. This would include convex, w-shape, oval, and other post
designs. The post shall be wide enough to accept a 3-inch wide reflective sheeting.
Any curvature or rounding shall not significantly reduce the brightness value of the
reflective sheeting.
4. Surface Mount Guide Post Base – The base for surface mount guide posts shall be
approximately 8 inches in diameter with a maximum height of 2 inches.
5. Guide posts shall be of such length to provide the required mounting height above the
pavement surface in accordance with the Standard Plans.

Flexible Guide Posts 9-17
9-17.1(2) Reflective Sheeting

Reflective sheeting for guide posts shall be Type III, IV, V, or VII conforming to
Section 9-28.12. The reflective panel on a flat or elliptical guidepost shall have a minimum
width of 3 inches facing traffic. The reflective sheeting shall have a minimum area of
24 square inches (3 by 8 inches). The reflective panel on a round guidepost shall have an
8-inch minimum band of reflective sheeting visible for 360 degrees. Mount the reflective
sheeting on the guide post as detailed in the Standard Plans. Sheeting shall remain in place
during the life of the post.
9-17.2 Ultraviolet Resistance Test Procedure (Laboratory Test)
Two posts will be tested initially for tensile strength and elongation according to
ASTM D638 and again after 1,000 hours QUV weatherometer exposure (ASTM G53).
Six bow tie specimens shall be prepared from the delineator post samples submitted for
the purpose of ultraviolet (UV) exposure. The specimens shall be cycled at 1,000 hours in
a weatherometer in accordance with ASTM G53 (3 hr. 60C UV, 3 hr. 50C CON). Three
of each type shall be used for control purposes. The remaining three shall be subjected to
1,000 hours of UV exposure in the QUV weatherometer. Specimen dimensions conform to
those outlined below.
The laboratory test data shall summarize the tensile strength of each, and the average
tensile strength for both control and weathered samples. The data shall also summarize the
elongation of each, and the average elongation for both control and weathered samples.
The average values shall be used to show the percent change in tensile and elongation.
The specimens shall show no signs of delamination, distress, or discoloration. Physical
properties of tensile strength and rigidity shall be maintained within 80 percent of the
unconditioned values.
9-17.3 Field Impact Test Procedure
Sample size of eight units will be tested the following way:
Flexible Ground Mounted Posts
Eight flexible ground mounted posts installed by the manufacturer (four installed manually
and four installed mechanically). The delineators will be hit ten times (four posts for
glancing bumper hits and four posts for wheel hits). A standard sedan with a bumper height
of approximately 18 inches while traveling at a speed of 55 ± 2 mph will be used for impact
testing. Five of the impacts will be at an ambient temperature of 32 ± 5°F and the remaining
five impacts at an ambient temperature of 85 ± 5°F. The test vehicle shall impact four of
the posts at an angle perpendicular to the front of the post and shall impact the remaining
posts at an angle of 25 degrees clockwise from the angle perpendicular to the front of the
posts. The same test samples will be used for the ten hits. Two flexible posts will be used
for weatherometer testing. A glancing hit is defined as one on the bumper near the vehicle
headlight. The delineators shall be installed a minimum of eight hours prior to being hit.
Flexible Surface Mounted Posts
Eight flexible surface mounted posts installed by the manufacturer will be hit ten times
(four posts for glancing bumper hits and four posts for wheel hits). A standard sedan with a
bumper height of approximately 18 inches while traveling at a speed of 55 ± 2 mph will be
used for impact testing. Five of the impacts will be at an ambient temperature of 32 ± 5°F
and the remaining five impacts at an ambient temperature of 85 ± 5°F. The test vehicle shall
impact four of the posts at an angle perpendicular to the front of the post and shall impact the
remaining posts at an angle of 25 degrees clockwise from the angle perpendicular to the front
of the posts. The same test samples will be used for the ten hits. Two flexible posts will be
used for weatherometer testing. A glancing hit is defined as one on the bumper near the vehicle
headlight. The delineators shall be installed a minimum of eight hours prior to being hit.

9-17.3(1) Test Observations

Inspect each post after each impact and document the following:
1. Any splits, cracks, breaks, or other forms of deformation or distress;
2. The percent list to vertical 2 minutes after each impact;
3. The approximate percentage of the reflective area that is damaged after each impact
to an extent it no longer performs as intended;
4. Any problems or comments associated with the installation and removal of the posts
and bases. The testing agent will document any special equipment or techniques
required for installing or removing the posts and bases.
5. Any problems or comments associated with the performance of each ground mounted
flexible delineator post that would be of interest to the states;
6. Type of soil and impact surface.
A failure is defined as any of the following:
1. A minimum of 50 percent of the reflective sheeting shall be retained undamaged.
An area of damage greater than 50 percent is considered a failure.
2. If the guide post leans more than 10 degrees from vertical it is considered a failure.
3. Any cracking, other than surface cracking evident on only one face of the post, is
considered a failure.
4. Pullout in excess of 3 inches is considered a failure.
At least six of the guide posts must pass each criteria in the 55 ± 2 mph series of impacts
to be acceptable
9-17.4 Pre-approval
In order for a particular model of flexible guide post to become preapproved, the following
conditions must be met:
1. The manufacturer must submit a written request for pre-approval along with samples
for each model to be tested to: State Materials Engineer, Department of Transportation
Materials Laboratory, PO Box 47365, Olympia, WA 98504-7365. Requests shall
identify the model for which approval is being requested. Samples shall be complete
with reflective panel attached, and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer’s written
installation procedures.
2. The guide posts will be field impact tested by the State Materials Laboratory to verify
compliance with these Specifications.
3. In lieu of State Materials Laboratory testing, the Lab will accept the results of
preapproved testing performed by the National Transportation Product Evaluation
Program (NTPEP), the manufacturer, or other agencies under the following conditions:
a. The State Materials Laboratory is informed of the preapproval testing sufficiently
in advance in order to attend and observe. Attendance will be at the discretion of
the Materials Laboratory.
b. The results of the testing shall be reported in sufficient detail to enable the State
Materials Laboratory to evaluate compliance with these Specifications.
4. The manufacturer must submit a certified test report, including test data developed
by an approved testing laboratory, which demonstrates that the guide post complies
with the requirements of these Specifications. Certified test data supplied by the
manufacturer shall be subject to verification by appropriate tests conducted by the
State Materials Laboratory.
Frequency of field testing, evaluation, and pre-approval updating shall be at the sole
discretion of the State Materials Laboratory.


9-18.1 Precast Traffic Curb
9-18.1(1) Aggregates and Proportioning
The cement, fine and coarse aggregate, and reinforcing steel to be used in the manufacture
of precast concrete traffic curb shall meet the following requirements:
1. Portland cement shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-01 except that it may
be Type I portland cement conforming to AASHTO M85.
2. Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-03 except that they shall
be uniformly graded up to a maximum size of ⅜ inch and shall contain sufficient fine
fractions to permit securing the type of surface finish specified herein. The aggregate
shall be approved by the Materials Laboratory before it is used.
3. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-07.1.
4. The cement concrete mix shall be composed of not less than one part portland cement
to approximately two parts of fine aggregate and 3¼ parts of coarse aggregate adjusted
to secure proper workability. The Contractor will be allowed to use a different concrete
mix if approved by the Engineer, provided that it develops not less than 4,000 psi
compressive strength when tested at the age of 28 days.
9-18.1(2) Mixing
The mixers shall be kept in good repair and be equipped with an automatic timing device
and a positive device for regulating the quantity of water added to each batch. Such a device
must be approved by the Engineer before use.
After all materials, including water, have been placed in the mixer, the materials shall be
mixed for a period of not less than 1¾ minutes, or as much longer as may be necessary to
produce a thorough and uniform mixture of the concrete. No water shall be added to any batch
after the completion of the initial mixing period. Each batch of concrete shall be completely
emptied from the mixer before placing more materials in it. A batch which has not been placed
within 30 minutes from the time water was first added shall not be used.
The amount of water in the concrete shall be kept at a minimum consistent with the
manufacture of dense curb, free from air bubbles and surface defects in excess of the tolerance
limits specified.
9-18.1(3) Forms
Forms shall be of concrete or steel. The use of forms or molds made of plaster of paris,
wood, or other absorptive material will not be permitted.
Bulkheads shall be tight fitting so that there is no leakage of mortar between the bulkhead
and form.
The materials and methods used for lubricating the forms shall be such that they will not
result in discoloration of the curb at any time. A minimum quantity of lubricant shall be used
and all excess lubricant shall be removed.
The concrete shall be consolidated by external vibration, or by other means if approved
by the Engineer, to produce a dense concrete throughout, having a minimum of air bubbles
and honeycombing.
Reinforcing steel shall be placed and maintained in its proper position as shown in
detail drawings.
Curb or buttons shall not be manufactured in an atmospheric temperature of less than 50ºF.

9-18.1(5) Removal of Forms

The curb shall be removed from the molds or forms in accordance with the instructions or
by some other method acceptable to the Engineer.
The loosening of the curb from the molds shall be carefully performed to avoid excessive
shock and straining of the curb. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, undue shock is required
to remove the curb from the molds, the stripping operation shall be deferred until such time as
the curb may be removed without breakage.
9-18.1(6) Curing Concrete
Immediately after the concrete has been placed and consolidated in the mold, each unit
shall be placed in a curing room fitted with water sprays and maintained at a relative humidity
of not less than 90 percent and a temperature of not less than 60ºF, nor more than 100ºF.
Each unit shall remain in the curing room for a period of not less than 10 days, except that
if Type III cement is used, the period in the curing room may be reduced to 5 days.
9-18.1(7) Finish
The curb shall have a smooth, glassy finish on all exposed surfaces.
Excess honeycombing in the back of the curb may be cause for rejection of the curb.
Honeycombing areas in the back of the curb which, in the opinion of the Engineer, are not
detrimental to the curb need not be patched. The workmanship of the bottom finish shall be
such that no mechanical interlocking of the mortar bed and the curb bottom or anchor groove
will occur.
9-18.1(8) Surface Treatment
As soon as the units have been taken out of the curing room and thoroughly surface
dried to a depth of at least ¼ inch, two coats of a water repellent compound, meeting the
requirements of Section 9-18.4, shall be brush applied. When the first coat has dried, the
second coat of water repellent compound shall be applied.
9-18.1(9) Dimensions and Shape
The curb shall conform to the dimensions and shape shown in the Plans within a tolerance
of ¼ inch in length and ⅛ inch in alignment.
9-18.1(10) Curb Lengths
Curb lengths shall be in accordance with the Standard Plans, except in special cases where
different lengths are specified. Circular curbing shall be made only for such radii as called for
in the detail plans.
9-18.1(11) Defective Curb
Not more than 2 percent of the top area in any one piece of curb shall be defective, and
not more than 5 percent of the total length of the top corners of reflecting faces in any one
piece of curb shall be broken or rounded. There shall be not more than 50 holes in any linear
foot of curb. All curb having defects in excess of any of the above will be rejected immediately
upon inspection after removal from the forms. However, failure to reject the curb at that time
will not ensure its final acceptance. Ninety percent of the curb laid shall not have more than
10 percent of the maximum allowable number of defects specified above.
An air hole shall be defined as any hole ⅛ inch or larger in diameter or depth.
All defects within the limits permitted, apparent upon removal of forms, shall be
repaired immediately.
The sum of the length of the lines of discoloration caused by a cracked mold in any one
piece of curb shall not exceed 50 percent of the length of the curb, and the maximum length
of any single line of discoloration shall not exceed 18 inches. 75 percent of the curb laid shall
be entirely free from lines of discoloration. The employment of heat to obliterate lines of
discoloration will not be permitted. The process used to obliterate lines of discoloration shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer.

The repairing of molds which are chipped or broken shall be done in a manner that the
broken or chipped areas will not be apparent on the curb made in those molds.
All curb in which surface checking develops during the first five days after manufacture
will be rejected.
Hidden air holes at or immediately below the exposed surface of the curb, in excess of the
limits specified that are disclosed by testing the surface by means of a rubber hammer will be
cause for rejection of the curb.
All curb in which cracking is in evidence immediately after removal from the molds will
be rejected. A crack is defined as any separation of the concrete of a continuous length greater
than 3 inches.
All curb which varies in dimensions, alignment, or surface contour in excess of the
tolerance specified will be rejected.
Failure to comply with the Plans, Specifications, or instructions of the authorized
representative of the Contracting Agency in the manufacture and laying of any curb will be
cause for rejection of such curb.
9-18.1(12) Repairing Curb
Curb having defects which are not sufficient cause for its rejection shall be neatly repaired
immediately after removal from the molds in a manner subject to the approval of the Engineer.
However, no patching or other repairs shall be made without the permission of the Engineer.
Patches shall be undercut if, in the opinion of the Engineer, this operation is necessary to
achieve a satisfactory patch.
All holes larger than ¹⁄16-inch diameter in the exposed surface of acceptable curb or buttons
shall be filled with cement mortar.
9-18.1(13) Identification Marking
The date of manufacture, the length, and identification number corresponding to the detail
layout shall be marked in black paint on the back or end of each piece of curb.
Rejected curb shall be marked on the back or end surfaces in a practical and semi-
permanent manner to identify each cause of rejection.
9-18.1(14) Shipping
No unit of curb shall be shipped from the manufacturing plant prior to 21 days after
manufacture, except, however, that if Type III cement has been used, the units may be shipped
14 days after manufacture.
9-18.1(15) Sampling and Inspection
The Contractor shall submit, for the approval of the Engineer, an advance sample of curb
which shall be at least equivalent in color, surface texture, and bottom finish to the standard as
set forth in these Specifications. No repairing of any kind shall be done on the advance sample.
Upon approval, the advance sample shall be stored at the plant or site of manufacture in a
location readily accessible to the Inspector where there is adequate daylight for examination.
The advance sample shall be protected from damage and discoloration and shall be used as a
standard of comparison for color, surface texture, and bottom finish for all curb manufactured.
All curb furnished shall be equivalent in the foregoing respects.
The inspection at the plant will be made just prior to shipment, at which time examination
will be made of the alignment, contour, color, cracks, surface damage or discoloration,
broken corners or edges, and any other defects which may have developed, and to check
the laboratory test reports for strength. However intermediate inspections may be made to
determine surface checking and hidden air holes if it is impractical to examine for these
defects at the final inspection.
9-18.2 Vacant
9-18.3 Vacant

9-18.4 Water Repellent Compound

The water repellent compound shall be a clear, penetrating type, silicone resin base
compound containing no filler or other material which will leave a film on the surface of the
masonry after it is applied. It shall be of such consistency that it can be applied readily by
brush or spray to the masonry at atmospheric temperature down to -20ºF.
The average absorption of three test specimens treated with the water repellent compound,
when tested in accordance with the methods used in the State Materials Laboratory, shall
not exceed 2 percent after being partially immersed in water for 72 hours immediately
after curing.
The average moisture vapor transpiration (breathing) of three test specimens, when tested
in accordance with the methods used in the State Materials Laboratory, shall be not less than
50 percent at 7 days.
The water repellent compound shall be approved by the State Materials Laboratory before
it is used.
9-18.5 Sodium Metasilicate
Sodium metasilicate shall comply with ASTM D537.

Vacant 9-19
9-19 Vacant

9-20 Concrete Patching Material, Grout, and Mortar

9-20.1 Patching Material
Concrete patching material will be prepackaged mortar extended with aggregate.
The amount of aggregate for extension shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendation.
9-20.2 Specifications
Patching mortar and patching mortar extended with aggregate shall contain cementitious
material and meet the requirements of Sections 9-20.2(1) and 9-20.2(2). The Manufacturer
shall use the services of a laboratory that has an equipment calibration verification system
and a technician training and evaluation process per AASHTO R 18 to perform all tests
specified in Section 9-20.
9-20.2(1) Patching Mortar
Patching mortar shall conform to the following requirements:
Compressive Strength ASTM Test Method Specification
at 3 hours C 39 Minimum 3,000 psi
Length Change
at 28 days C 157 0.15 percent maximum
Total Chloride Ion Content C 1218 1 lb/yd3 maximum
Bond Strength
at 24 hours C 882 (As modified by C 928, Section 8.5) Minimum 1,000 psi
Scaling Resistance (at 25 cycles of C 672 (As modified by C 928, Section 8.4) 1 lb/ft2 maximum
freezing and thawing)
9-20.2(2) Patching Mortar Extended With Aggregate

Patching mortar extended with aggregate shall meet the following requirements:
Compressive Strength ASTM Test Method Specification
Length Change
at 28 days C 157 0.15 percent maximum
Bond Strength
at 24 hours C 882 (As modified by ASTM C928, Section 8.5) Minimum 1,000 psi
Scaling Resistance (at 25 cycles of C 672 2 Maximum Visual Rating
freezing and thawing)
Freeze thaw C 666 Maximum expansion 0.10%
Minimum durability 90.0%
9-20.2(3) Aggregate
Aggregate used to extend the patching mortar shall meet the requirements of Section
9-03.1(4) and be AASHTO Grading No. 8. A Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance shall be
required showing the aggregate source and the gradation. Mitigation for Alkali Silica Reaction
(ASR) will not be required for the extender aggregate used for concrete patching material.
9-20.2(4) Water
Water shall meet the requirements of Section 9-25.1. The quantity of water shall be within
the limits recommended by the manufacturer.

Concrete Patching Material, Grout, and Mortar 9-20
9-20.3 Grout
Grout is a mixture of Portland or blended hydraulic cement and water with or without
aggregates and with or without admixtures. Grout may also contain fly ash and/or concrete
admixtures. Grout may be a Contractor’s submitted mix design or a Manufacturer’s
prepackaged grout product.
All prepackaged grouts shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, including but not limited to, shelf life, mixing, surface preparation,
and curing.
Where required, all 2-inch cube specimens fabricated in the field shall be made in
accordance with WSDOT T 813. All 2-inch cube specimens fabricated in a laboratory shall be
made in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 106. All 2-inch cube specimens shall be tested
in accordance with FOP for AASHTO T 106.
When coarse aggregate is used, specimens shall be fabricated in accordance with FOP for
AASHTO T 23 and tested in accordance with AASHTO T 22.
9-20.3(1) Grout Type 1 for Post-Tensioning Applications
Grout Type 1 shall be a Class C prepackaged, pumpable, nonbleed, nonshrink, and high-
strength material conforming to the requirements of AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction
Specifications Section 10.9.3. The water/cement ratio shall not exceed 0.45.
9-20.3(2) Grout Type 2 for Nonshrink Applications
Grout Type 2 shall be a nonshrink, prepackaged material meeting the requirements of
ASTM C1107. The minimum compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi at 7 days.
9-20.3(3) Grout Type 3 for Unconfined Bearing Pad Applications
Grout Type 3 shall be a prepackaged material meeting the requirements of ASTM C928 –
Table 1, R2 Concrete or Mortar.
9-20.3(4) Grout Type 4 for Multipurpose Applications
Grout Type 4 shall be a multipurpose grout material for structural and nonstructural
applications. The grout shall be produced using portland cement Type I/II. The water to
cementitious material ratio shall not exceed 0.45 and water-reducing admixtures may be
used. Multipurpose grout may be extended up to three parts fine aggregate to one part cement.
The minimum compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi at 7 days. Substitution of fly ash for
cement is allowed up to 20 percent.
9-20.4 Mortar
Mortar shall be material made from Portland or blended hydraulic cement, water, and
fine aggregate.
9-20.4(1) Fine Aggregate for Mortar
Fine Aggregate for mortar shall conform to the requirements of Section 9-03.2.
9-20.4(2) Mortar Type 1 for Concrete Surface Finish
Mortar Type 1 for concrete surface finishing shall be either prepackaged or a Contractor-
recommended blend of portland cement Type I/II and fine aggregate conforming to Section
9-20.4(1). If the Class 1 concrete surface finishing mortar is a Contractor-recommended blend,
it shall conform to the sand-to-cement ratios specified in Section 6-02.3(14)A.
9-20.4(3) Mortar Type 2 for Masonry Applications
Mortar Type 2 for masonry shall be either prepackaged or a Contractor-recommended
blend of portland cement Type I/II and fine aggregate conforming to Section 9-20.4(1).

9-20.4(4) Mortar Type 3 for Concrete Repair

Mortar Type 3 shall be a prepackaged material that does not include expansive admixtures.
Aggregate extension and mixing procedures shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation. The minimum compressive strength shall be 4,000 psi at 7 days.
9-20.5 Bridge Deck Repair Material
Bridge deck repair material shall be either an ultra-low viscosity, two-part liquid,
polyurethane-hybrid polymer concrete, or a pre-packaged cement based repair mortar,
conforming to the following requirements:
1. Minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi, in accordance with ASTM C 109.
2. Total soluble chloride ion content by mass of product shall conform to the limits
specified in Section 6-02.3(2) for reinforced concrete.
3. Permeability of less than 2,000 coulombs at 56-days in accordance with AASHTO
T 277.
If pre-packaged deck repair material does not include coarse aggregate, the Contractor shall
extend the mix with coarse aggregate as recommended by the manufacturer.

Raised Pavement Markers (RPM) 9-21
9-21 Raised Pavement Markers (RPM)

9-21.1 Raised Pavement Markers Type 1
Markers Type 1 shall be plastic or thermoplastic markers composed of thermosetting
resins, pigments, and inert ingredients and be of uniform composition. Markers shall not
contain glass.
9-21.1(1) Physical and Chemical Properties
The markers shall be of uniform composition and free from surface irregularities, cracks,
checks, chipping, peeling, spalling, crazing, and other physical damage interfering with
appearance, application, or durability.
The markers shall be precast in the form of a single based spheroidal segment terminating
in a rounded or squared shoulder. Markers shall be white or yellow.
The markers shall meet the following requirements:
Property Unit Thermoplastic Markers Plastic Markers
Mass grams N/A 125 min.
Height inches 0.65-0.78 0.65-0.78
Diameter/Width inches 3.85-4.05 3.85-4.05
Shoulder height inches 0.08-0.22 0.08-0.22
Planeness of base:
Concavity inches 0.05 max. 0.05 max.
Convexity inches 0.05 max. 0.05 max.
Reflectance (white only) %MgO 80 min. 80 min.
Impact resistance inch-pound 15 min. 15 min.
Titanium Dioxide (white only) % by weight N/A 21 min.
The markers passing laboratory tests will be field tested for approval. The field tests
will include installation with control markers to determine relative adhesion and durability
characteristics.
The marker housing shall contain reflective faces as shown in the Plans to reflect incident
light from either a single or opposite directions.
9-21.2(1) Physical Properties
The markers shall be not less than 4 inches nor more than 5 inches in width, and not more
than ¾ inch in height.
The outer surface of the marker housing shall be smooth except for the purpose of
identification.
The base of the markers shall be substantially free from gloss or substances that may
reduce its bond to adhesive.
The markers passing laboratory tests will be field tested for approval. The field tests
will include installation with control markers to determine relative adhesion and durability
characteristics.
9-21.2(2) Optical Requirements
1. Definitions – Horizontal entrance angle shall mean the angle in the horizontal plane
between the direction of incident light and the normal to the leading edge of the marker.
Observation angle shall mean the angle at the reflector between observer’s line of sight
and direction of the light incident on the reflector.
Specific intensity (S.I.) shall mean candle power of the returned light at the chosen
observation and entrance angles for each foot-candle of illumination at the reflector
on a plane perpendicular to the incident light.
9-21 Raised Pavement Markers (RPM)
2. Optical Requirements – The specific intensity of each reflecting surface at 0.2 degrees

observation angle shall be not less than the following when the incident light is parallel
to the base of the marker.
Hor. Ent. Angle S.I.
0 3.0
20 1.2
Yellow reflectors shall be not less than 60 percent and red reflectors not less than
25 percent of the above values.
3. Optical Testing Procedure – A random lot of markers will be tested. The markers
to be tested shall be located with the center of the reflecting face at a distance of 5 feet
from a uniformly bright light source having an effective diameter of 0.2 inch.
The photocell width shall be 0.05 inch. It shall be shielded to eliminate stray light.
The distance from light source center to the photocell center shall be 0.21 inch. If
a test distance of other than 5 feet is used, the source and receiver dimensions and the
distance between source and receiver shall be modified in the same proportion as the
test distance.
Failure of more than 4 percent of the samples shall be cause for rejection of the lot.
9-21.2(3) Strength Requirements
Markers shall support a load of 2,000 pounds as applied in the following manner:
A marker shall be centered over the open end of a vertically positioned hollow metal
cylinder. The cylinder shall be 1 inch high with an internal diameter of 3 inches and wall
thickness of ¼ inch. The load shall be slowly applied to the top of the marker through a
1-inch diameter by 1-inch high metal plug centered on the top of the marker.
Failure shall constitute either a breakage or significant deformation of the marker at any
load of less than 2,000 pounds.
Raised pavement markers Type 3 shall be extruded from high impact thermoplastic
material which has been ultra-violet radiation stabilized and shall meet the following
requirements:
Impact resistance 15 inch-lbs, min.
Reflectance (White Only) 80 percent min.
Concavity & Convexity
Transverse ¹⁄16 inch, max.
Longitudinal ⅛ inch, max
Base Width 4″
Length 6″, 8″, 10″ or 12″
Height 0.60-0.75″
Shoulder height 0.08-0.20
The ends shall be beveled from the top of the shoulder edge at a slope of 1:1 nominal.

Monument Cases 9-22
9-22 Monument Cases

9-22.1 Monument Cases, Covers, and Risers
Castings for monument cases, covers, and risers shall be gray iron castings conforming
to the requirements of AASHTO M306, Class 35B. The cover and seat shall be machined so
as to have perfect contact around the entire circumference and full width of bearing surface.
Dipping, painting, welding, plugging, or repairing defects will not be permitted.

9-23 Concrete Curing Materials and Admixtures

9-23.1 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
Sheet materials for curing concrete shall meet the requirements of ASTM C171, Sheet
Materials for Curing Concrete, except that only white reflective type shall be used.
9-23.2 Liquid Membrane-Forming Concrete Curing Compounds
Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM C309 Type 1 or 2, Class A or B, except that the water retention when
tested in accordance with WSDOT T 814 shall be 2.50 grams for all applications.
Each lot of liquid membrane-forming curing compound shall be sampled at the project site
and tested for acceptance. Liquid membrane-forming curing compound shall not be used in the
absence of satisfactory test results.
9-23.3 Vacant
9-23.4 Vacant
9-23.5 Burlap Cloth
Burlap cloth shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M182, Class 4.
9-23.6 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Acceptance of chemical admixtures will be based on Manufacturer’s Certificate of
Compliance. If required by the Engineer, admixtures shall be sampled and tested before they
are used. A 1-pint (500-milliliter) sample of the admixture shall be submitted to the WSDOT
Headquarters Materials Laboratory for testing 10 days prior to use. Chemical Admixtures shall
contain less than 1 percent chloride ion (Cl-) by weight of admixture.
9-23.6(1) Air-Entraining Admixtures
Air-Entraining admixtures shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M154 or ASTM C260.
9-23.6(2) Type A Water-Reducing Admixtures
Type A Water-Reducing admixtures shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M194
Type A or ASTM C494 Type A.
9-23.6(3) Type B Retarding Admixtures
Type B Retarding admixtures shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M194 Type B
or ASTM C494 Type B.
9-23.6(4) Type C Accelerating Admixtures
Type C Accelerating admixtures shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M194
Type C or ASTM C494 Type C, and only nonchloride accelerating admixtures shall be used
9-23.6(5) Type D Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixtures
Type D Water-Reducing and Retarding admixtures shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M194 Type D or ASTM C494 Type D.
9-23.6(6) Type E Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixtures
Type E Water-Reducing and Accelerating admixtures shall conform to the requirements
of AASHTO M194 Type E or ASTM C494 Type E, and only nonchloride accelerating
admixtures shall be used.
9-23.6(7) Type F Water-Reducing, High Range Admixtures
Type F Water-Reducing, High Range admixtures shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M194 Type F or ASTM C494 Type F.

9-23.6(8) Type G Water-Reducing, High Range, and Retarding Admixtures

Type G Water-Reducing, High Range, and Retarding admixtures shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M194 Type G or ASTM C494 Type G.
9-23.6(9) Type S Specific Performance Admixtures
Type S Specific Performance admixtures are limited to ASR-mitigating, viscosity
modifying, shrinkage reducing, rheology-controlling, and workability-retaining admixtures.
They shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C494 Type S. When a Type S admixture
is used, a report on the performance characteristics of the Type S admixture shall be
submitted along with the WSDOT concrete mix design (WSDOT Form 350-040). The report
shall describe the performance characteristics and provide data substantiating the specific
characteristics of the Type S admixture in accordance with ASTM C494.
9-23.7 Vacant
9-23.8 Waterproofing
Concrete made with waterproofing admixtures shall have a percent absorption after
immersion and boiling of less than 5.0 percent at 7 days and a volume of permeable voids less
than 11 percent at 7 days per ASTM C642. The Contractor shall submit evidence in the form
of test results showing compliance with these specifications, when they submit their concrete
mix design.
If the concrete requires air entrainment, the Contractor shall also submit evidence to the
Engineer that the admixture will not adversely effect the air void system of the hardened
concrete. Test results complying with ASTM C457 shall be provided as evidence to satisfy this
requirement.
9-23.9 Fly Ash
Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M295 Class C or F including
supplementary optional chemical requirements as set forth in Table 2.
Fly ash that exceeds the available alkali limits set in AASHTO M295 Table 2 may be used
if they meet the tests requirements of Section 9-03.1(1). The supplementary optional chemical
limits in AASHTO M295 Table 2 do not apply to fly ash used in Controlled Density Fill.
9-23.9(1) Tests and Acceptance
Fly ash may be accepted by the Engineer based on the Manufacturer’s Mill Test Report
Number indicating full conformance to the Specifications. All shipments of the fly ash to the
Contractor or concrete supplier shall identify the applicable Mill Test Report Number. The
concrete supplier or Contractor shall provide mill test identification on all concrete deliveries.
Fly ash producers, importers/distributors, and suppliers that certify fly ash shall participate
in the fly ash acceptance program as described in WSDOT QC 4.
Each mixing facility or plant utilizing fly ash shall be equipped with a suitable means or
device for obtaining a representative sample of the fly ash. The device shall enable the sample
to be readily taken in proximity to the fly ash weigh hopper and from a container or conveyor
holding only fly ash.
Fly ash may be tested using samples taken at the job site by the Engineer for submission
to the State Materials Laboratory for testing.
9-23.10 Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag
Ground granulated blast furnace slag shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 302,
Grade 100 or Grade 120. The grade of the ground granulated blast furnace slag, the source,
and type of manufacturing facility shall be certified on the cement mill test certificate.

9-23.10(1) Tests and Acceptance

Ground granulated blast furnace slag may be accepted by the Engineer based on the
Manufacturer’s Mill Test Report Number indicating full conformance to the Specifications.
All shipments of the ground granulated blast furnace slag to the Contractor or concrete
supplier shall identify the applicable Mill Test Report Number. The concrete supplier or
Contractor shall provide mill test identification on all concrete deliveries.
Ground granulated blast furnace slag producers, importers/distributors, and suppliers that
certify ground granulated blast furnace slag shall participate in the ground granulated blast
furnace slag acceptance program as described in WSDOT QC 5.
Each mixing facility or plant utilizing ground granulated blast furnace slag shall be
equipped with a suitable means or device for obtaining a representative sample of the
ground granulated blast furnace slag. The device shall enable the sample to be readily taken
in proximity to the ground granulated blast furnace slag weigh hopper and from a container
or conveyor holding only ground granulated blast furnace slag.
Ground granulated blast furnace slag may be tested using samples taken at the job site
by the Engineer for submission to the State Materials Laboratory for testing.
9-23.11 Microsilica Fume
Microsilica Fume shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M307. The optional
physical requirement for Reactivity with Cement Alkalies set forth in Table 3 will be required
when Microsilica Fume is being used as an ASR mitigation measure.
9-23.12 Natural Pozzolan
Natural Pozzolans shall be either Metakaolin or ground Pumice and shall conform to
the requirements of AASHTO M295 Class N, including supplementary optional chemical
requirements as set forth in Table 2.
9-23.13 Blended Supplementary Cementitious Material
Blended Supplementary Cementitious Material (SCM) shall meet the requirements
of ASTM C1697. Blended SCMs shall be limited to binary or ternary blends of fly ash,
ground granulated blast furnace slag, microsilica fume, and metakaolin. Fly ash shall
meet the requirements of Section 9-23.9. Ground granulated blast furnace slag shall meet
the requirements of Section 9-23.10. Microsilica fume shall meet the requirements of
Section 9-23.11. Metakaolin shall meet the requirements of Section 9-23.12. The individual
SCMs composing the blended SCM shall be individually listed on the WSDOT Qualified
Products List.

Plastic Waterstop 9-24
9-24 Plastic Waterstop

9-24.1 Material
The waterstops shall be fabricated from a plastic compound, the basic resin of which
shall be polyvinyl chloride. The compound shall contain any additional resins, plasticizers,
inhibitors, or other material such that when the material is compounded, it shall meet the
performance requirements given in these Specifications.
Single-pass reworked material of the same composition generated from the fabricator’s
waterstop production may be used. No reclaimed polyvinyl chloride shall be used.
All waterstops shall be molded or extruded in such a manner that any cross section will
be dense, homogeneous, and free from porosity and other imperfections.
The waterstops shall be symmetrical in shape, nominal 4 inches in width, by ³⁄16 inch
thick, and a minimum of four ribs on each side of the bulb. The bulb thickness and diameter
shall be as noted in the Plans.
9-24.1(1) Tests of Material
The waterstops shall meet all of the physical and other test requirements of this material
as defined in the Corps of Engineers Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Water Stop
CRD-C572, except that the tear resistance of the material shall be not less than 160 pounds
per inch. The Contractor shall furnish such sample material as required by the Engineer for
the purpose of making tests.

9-25 Water
9-25 Water
9-25.1 Water for Concrete
Water for concrete, grout, and mortar shall be clear, apparently clean, and suitable for
human consumption (potable). If the water contains substances that cause discoloration,
unusual smell or taste, or other suspicious content, the Engineer may require the Contractor
to provide test results documenting that the water meets the physical test requirements and
chemical limits described in ASTM C1602 for nonpotable water.
Water from mixer washout operations may be used in concrete provided it meets or
exceeds the above criteria as well as the following additional requirements:
1. Concrete with water from mixer washout operations shall not be used in bridge
roadway deck slabs, flat slab bridge superstructures, modified concrete overlays,
or prestressed concrete.
2. Specific Gravity shall not exceed 1.07.
3. Alkalies, expressed as [Na2O+0.658 K2O], shall not exceed 600 ppm.
4. Shall be free of coloring agents.
5. If the wash water contains admixtures from different manufacturers, the Contractor
shall provide evidence that the combination of admixtures are compatible and do not
adversely affect the air void system of the hardened concrete as per Section 6-02.3(3).
6. All tests to verify that the physical and chemical requirements are met, shall be
conducted on the following schedule:
a. The physical requirements shall be tested on weekly intervals for four weeks and
thereafter on monthly intervals.
b. The chemical requirements shall be tested on monthly intervals.
c. The specific gravity shall be determined daily in accordance with ASTM D1429,
Test Method D.
The Contractor shall use the services of a Laboratory that has a equipment calibration/
verification system, and a technician training and evaluation process per AASHTO R 18 to
conduct all tests. The laboratory shall use testing equipment that has been calibrated/verified
at least once within the past 12 months to meet the requirements of each test procedure
in accordance with the appropriate section of AASHTO R 18. Documentation of tester
qualifications and equipment verification records shall be maintained and available for review
by the Contracting Agency upon request. Agency reviews of the laboratory facility, testing
equipment, personnel, and all qualification, calibration, and verification records will be
conducted at the Contracting Agency’s discretion.
9-25.2 Water for Plants
Water for plants shall not contain dissolved or suspended matter which will be harmful to
the plant material on which it is to be used.

Epoxy Resins 9-26
9-26 Epoxy Resins

9-26.1 Epoxy Bonding Agents
9-26.1(1) General
Epoxy bonding agents shall be two-component epoxy resin-base systems that meet the
requirements of ASTM C881, shall be furnished in the type, grade, and class specified, and
shall meet the requirements below. When not specified, an appropriate grade and class shall
be selected for the particular application. Epoxy bonding agents for patching external concrete
shall be concrete-gray in color.
9-26.1(1)A Type I and Type IV
Epoxy bonding agents used for bonding hardened concrete to hardened concrete and
other materials shall be Type I for non-load bearing applications and Type IV for load
bearing applications.
9-26.1(1)B Type II and Type V
Epoxy bonding agents used for bonding freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete shall
be Type II for non-load bearing applications and Type V for load bearing applications.
9-26.1(1)C Type III
Epoxy bonding agents used for bonding skid-resistant materials to hardened concrete and
as a binder in epoxy mortars and epoxy concretes used on traffic bearing surfaces shall be
Type III.
9-26.1(2) Packaging and Marking
The components of the epoxy system furnished under these Specifications shall be supplied
in separate containers that are non-reactive with the materials contained. The contents of each
container shall be such that when the container contents are combined, a properly proportioned
final mixture results.
Containers shall be identified as “Component A” (Contains the Epoxy Resin) and
“Component B” (Contains the Curing Agent) and shall show the type, grade, class, and mixing
directions as defined by these Specifications. Each container shall be marked with the name of
the manufacturer, the lot or batch number, the date of packaging, and the quantity contained in
pounds or gallons.
Potential hazards shall be so stated on the package in accordance with the Federal
Hazardous Products Labeling Act and State of Washington, Department of Labor and
Industries Regulations for Shipment of Hazardous Products.
9-26.1(3) Certification
If requested by the Contracting Agency, the manufacturer of the epoxy system shall certify
that components A and B meet the requirements of this Specification before a sample will be
accepted for testing by the Contracting Agency. The Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance
shall be furnished in accordance with Section 1-06.3.
9-26.1(4) Rejection
Except as noted otherwise, the entire lot of both components may be rejected if samples
submitted for test fail to meet any requirements of this Specification.
Acceptance of the Epoxy Bonding Agents for use on the project shall be based on a passing
test report from the State Materials Laboratory.

9-26 Epoxy Resins
9-26.2 Epoxy Adhesive for Lane Markers

9-26.2(1) General
Epoxy adhesives for lane markers shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M237 for
Type II – Standard Setting, High Viscosity, Epoxy Adhesive. In lieu of the square base test
specimen molds for the Slant Shear Strength test specified in AASHTO M237, cylindrical
molds in accordance with ASTM C882 may be used.
Packaging and Marking of Epoxy Adhesive for Lane Markers shall meet the requirements
Certification of Epoxy Adhesive for Lane Markers shall meet the requirements of
Section 9-26.1(3).
9-26.2(4) Rejection
Rejection of Epoxy Adhesive for Lane Markers shall meet the requirements of
Section 9-26.1(4).
Acceptance of each lot of the Epoxy Adhesive for Lane Markers for use on the project
shall be based on a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance.
9-26.3 Epoxy Grout/Mortar/Concrete
9-26.3(1) General
This Specification shall apply to epoxy grout, epoxy mortar and epoxy concrete for traffic
and non-traffic bearing applications. Epoxy grout/mortar/concrete shall consist of an epoxy
bonding agent and an aggregate component.
Prepackaged epoxy grout/mortar/concrete shall be prepared from a ready-to-mix epoxy
bonding agent/aggregate system supplied by a manufacturer in kit form.
Non-prepackaged epoxy grout/mortar/concrete shall be prepared from an epoxy bonding
agent and an aggregate component that is clean, surface dry and inert and that is of a
quality and gradation suitable for portland cement mortar or concrete. Aggregate meeting
the requirements of Section 9-03.1(2) will be satisfactory. Epoxy grout/mortar/concrete for
patching external concrete shall be concrete-gray in color.
9-26.3(1)A Traffic Bearing Applications
Epoxy grout/mortar/concrete for traffic bearing applications shall have a 7-day
compressive strength of not less than 4,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C579.
Epoxy bonding agent shall be Type III as described in Section 9-26.1(1)C.
9-26.3(1)B Non-Traffic Bearing Applications
Epoxy grout/mortar/concrete for non-traffic bearing applications shall have a 7-day
compressive strength of not less than 4,000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C579.
Epoxy bonding agent shall be Type I, II, IV, or V as appropriate for intended use as described
in Sections 9-26.1(1)A and 9-26.1(1)B.
Packaging and Marking of the epoxy bonding agent component of epoxy grout/mortar/
concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 9-26.1(2).
Certification of the epoxy bonding agent component of epoxy grout/mortar/concrete shall
meet the requirements of Section 9-26.1(3).

Epoxy Resins 9-26
9-26.3(4) Rejection
Rejection of the epoxy bonding agent component of epoxy grout/mortar/concrete shall
meet the requirements of Section 9-26.1(4).
Acceptance of the epoxy grout/mortar/concrete material for use on the project shall be
based on a passing test report from the State Materials Laboratory.

9-27 Cribbing
9-27 Cribbing
9-27.1 Vacant
9-27.2 Vacant
9-27.3 Gabion Cribbing
9-27.3(1) Gabion Fabric
Gabions may be fabricated from either hexagonal twisted wire mesh or from welded wire
mesh. Only one type of mesh and protective coating shall be used throughout a structure.
Baskets shall be furnished in the required dimensions with a dimensional tolerance of
plus or minus 5 percent.
Wire for construction of gabions shall be either galvanized steel wire conforming to
ASTM A641, Class 3, Soft Temper, or aluminized steel wire conforming to ASTM A809,
Soft Temper. The wire shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi when tested in
accordance with ASTM A370.
9-27.3(2) Gabion Baskets
Gabion baskets 1 foot or greater in the vertical dimension shall have mesh openings with
nominal dimensions not to exceed 4½ inches and the maximum area of any mesh opening
shall not exceed 10 square inches.
1. Hexagon Twisted Wire Mesh
a. Wire for galvanized or aluminized hexagonal twisted wire mesh shall be nominal
sized 0.120 inch galvanized steel wire or aluminized steel wire.
b. Hexagonal wire mesh be formed from galvanized or aluminized wire in a uniform
hexagonal pattern with nonraveling double twist. The perimeter edges of the mesh
for each panel shall be tied to a selvage wire of the same composition as the body
mesh and have a minimum diameter of 0.150 inch so that the selvage is at least the
same strength as the body of the mesh.
2. Welded Wire Mesh
a. Welded wire mesh shall be fabricated from galvanized steel wire having a diameter
of 0.106 inch. Wire shall be galvanized prior to fabrication.
b. Welded wire mesh shall be formed in a uniform square pattern with openings 3 by
3 inches with a resistance weld at each connection in accordance with ASTM A185.
c. If required, a PVC coating shall be fusion bonded onto the welded wire mesh to
provide a nominal coating thickness of 0.0216 inch per side with a minimum of
0.0150 inch.
3. PVC Coating (For Welded Wire Mesh Only)
Acceptance of PVC coating material shall be by certified test reports of an independent
laboratory. The initial properties of PVC coating material shall have a demonstrated
ability to conform to the following requirements:
a. Specific Gravity – In the range of 1.2 to 1.4, when tested according to ASTM D792.
b. Tensile Strength – Not less than 2,275 psi, when tested according to ASTM D638.
c. Modulus of Elasticity – Not less than 1,980 psi at 100 Strain, when testing
according to ASTM D638.
d. Hardness – Shore “A” not less than 75 when tested according to ASTM D2240.
e. Brittleness Temperature – Not higher than 15ºF when tested according to
ASTM D746.
f. Resistance to Abrasion – The percentage of the mass loss shall be less than
12 percent when tested according to ASTM D1242, Method B at 200 cycles, CSI-A
Abrader Tape, 80 Grit.

Cribbing 9-27
g. Salt Spray Exposure and Ultraviolet Light Exposure – The PVC shall show no
effect after 3,000 hours of salt spray exposure according to ASTM B117. The PVC
shall show no effect of exposure to ultraviolet light with test exposure of 3,000
hours using apparatus Type E and 63°C, when tested according to Practice D 1499
and Practice G 23. After the salt spray test and exposure to ultraviolet light as
specified above, the PVC coating shall not show cracks, blister, split, nor show a
noticeable change of color. In addition, the specific gravity, tensile strength, modulus
of elasticity, and resistance to abrasion shall not change more than 6, 25, 25, and
10 percent respectively from their initial values.
9-27.3(3) Gabion Mattresses
Gabion baskets less than 1 foot in the vertical dimension shall have mesh openings with
nominal dimensions not to exceed 3.3 inches, and the maximum area of any mesh opening
shall not exceed 6 square inches.
1. Hexagonal Twisted Wire Mesh
a. Wire for galvanized or aluminized hexagonal twisted wire mesh shall be nominal
sized 0.086 inch galvanized steel wire or aluminized steel wire.
b. Hexagonal wire mesh shall be formed from galvanized or aluminized wire in a
uniform hexagonal pattern with nonraveling double twisted. The perimeter edges
of the mesh for each panel shall be tied to a selvage wire of the same composition
as the body mesh and have a minimum diameter of 0.1062 inch so that the selvage
is at least the same strength as the body of the mesh.
2. Welded Wire Mesh
a. Welded wire mesh shall be fabricated from galvanized steel wire having a diameter
of 0.080 inch. Wire shall be galvanized prior to fabrication.
b. Welded wire mesh shall be formed in a uniform rectangular pattern with openings
1½ by 3 inches with a resistance weld at each connection in accordance with
ASTM A185.
c. If required, a PVC coating shall be fusion bonded onto the welded wire mesh to
provide a nominal coating thickness of 0.0216 inch per side with a minimum of
0.0150 inch. The PVC coating shall be in conformance with Section 9-27.3(2).
9-27.3(4) Fasteners for Basket Assembly
The lacing wire shall be a nominal sized 0.0866 inch galvanized steel wire or aluminized
steel wire. Lacing wire shall have the same coating as the basket mesh.
Spiral binders, if used for joining welded wire panels shall be formed from 0.106 inch
nominal diameter steel wire with a 3-inch pitch having the same Specifications and coating
as the wire mesh. Lacing wire may be used in lieu of spiral binders.
Alternate fasteners for basket assembly shall remain closed when subjected to a 600 pound
tensile force when confining the maximum number of wires to be confined. Installation
procedures and test results for alternate fasteners shall be submitted for approval.
Internal connecting wires shall be the same as required for lacing wire. Alternate stiffeners
acceptable to the gabion manufacturer may be used.
9-27.3(5) Nonraveling Construction
The wire mesh shall be fabricated in a manner to be nonraveling. This is defined as
the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the connections forming the mesh when a single
strand in a section of mesh is cut.

9-27 Cribbing
9-27.3(6) Stone
Stone for filling gabions shall have a Degradation Factor of at least 30. The stone shall
be dense enough to pass the unit weight test described in Section 8-24.3(3)F. Stone shall meet
the following requirements for gradation:
8″ 100
6″ 75-90
4″ 0-10
% Fracture 75 min.

Signing Materials and Fabrication 9-28
9-28 Signing Materials and Fabrication

9-28.1 General
Unless noted otherwise in the Plans, permanent signs shall be constructed of sheet
aluminum. Permanent signs which measure 36 inches or less on a side and are to be mounted
on a single post may be constructed of single 0.135-inch fiberglass reinforced plastic panels.
Sign overlay panels may be either 0.050-inch aluminum or 0.075-inch fiberglass reinforced
plastic panels. All signs, except internally illuminated signs, shall be reflectorized.
See ASTM D4956 for reflective sheeting type designations. Standard control signs and
guide sign borders, letters, numerals, symbols, shields, and arrows shall be in accordance
with the WSDOT Sign Fabrication Manual M 55-05.
All STOP, YIELD, DO NOT ENTER, WRONG WAY, FREEWAY ENTRANCE, and
HIGHWAY ENTRANCE signs shall be constructed entirely of Type III or IV reflective
sheeting. All M series, I series, and D-10 series signs and all signs with blue or brown
backgrounds shall be constructed entirely of Type II reflective sheeting unless otherwise
specified. Background reflective sheeting for all other signs shall be as noted in the Plans.
Sign legends for all other signs shall be constructed of Type III or IV reflective sheeting.
Sign legends include: borders, letters, numerals, symbols, shields, and arrows. Reflective
legend sheeting types shall not be mixed on individual signs.
9-28.2 Manufacturer’s Identification and Date
All signs shall show the manufacturer’s name and date of manufacture on the back.
In addition, the width and height dimension, in inches, and the number of the sign as it
appears in the Plans shall be placed using 3-inch series C black letters on the back of
destination, distance, and large special signs. Hand painted numbers are not permitted.
9-28.3 Corner Radius
All regulatory and warning signs shall have rounded corners with the exception of stop
signs. Information and guide signs may have square cut corners. Borders for signs having
square cut corners shall have a corner radius approximately ⅛ of the lesser side dimension
of the sign up to a maximum radius of 12 inches. For signs with rounded corners, the borders
shall be concentric with the rounded corners.
9-28.4 Extruded Windbeams and “Z” Bar
All multiple post and multiple panel signs shall be constructed and installed with horizontal
extruded windbeams and “Z” bar, when required, as shown in the Plans or the Standard Plans.
All bolt and rivet heads visible on the sign face shall be anodized or painted to match the sign
area immediately surrounding the bolt or rivet head. Extruded windbeams and “Z” bar shall be
accepted on the basis of a certificate of compliance from the manufacturer. Materials shall be
as designated in Section 9-28.11.
9-28.5 Letter and Spacing Formula
Letter and arrow sizes shall be as specified in the Plans. Spacing formulas shall be those
furnished by the manufacturer of the letters.
9-28.6 Destination Sign Messages
Destination sign messages, borders, shields, and symbols shall be direct applied unless
otherwise noted in the sign plans. All message components shall be one piece construction
unless the least dimension exceeds available sheeting widths. All components shall have
smooth, sharp cut edges. Components which are torn, wrinkled, or exhibit poor workmanship,
will not be permitted.

9-28.7 Process Colors

Transparent and opaque process colors used in silk screening sign messages shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer. When properly applied, process colors shall perform
satisfactorily for the expected life of the sheeting. Applied colors shall present a smooth
surface, free from foreign material, and all messages and borders shall be clear and sharp.
Sheeting shall conform to the retroreflective minimum values and color limits established for
its type and color without regard to whether the color is integral to the sheeting or achieved
by applying transparent colors to silver/white sheeting. There shall be no variations in color,
and overlapping of colors will not be permitted.
Properly applied and cured process colors shall exhibit no blistering, bubbling, or loss of
color or transparency when cleaned with a mild non-abrasive detergent solution. Minor loss
of color may be detected when solvents such as kerosene, mineral spirits, heptane, or VM&P
Naphtha are used to clean severely contaminated signs; e.g., paint vandalism. However, the
colors shall not blister, bubble, peel, or be easily removed.
9-28.8 Sheet Aluminum Signs
Sheet aluminum signs shall be constructed of material conforming to ASTM B209
alloy 6061-T6 or alloy 5052-H36 or H38. Alloy 5005-H34 may be used for sign overlays.
The Contractor shall provide a mill test certificate from the aluminum manufacturer attesting
to the correct alloy and temper of the metal supplied, when requested by the Engineer.
After the sheeting has been fabricated, the surface of each panel shall be protected from
corrosion. The corrosion protection shall meet the requirements of ASTM B449 Class II
Specification for Chromates on Aluminum. Aluminum signs over 12 feet wide by 5 feet high
shall be comprised of vertical panels in increments of 2, 3, or 4 feet wide. No more than one
2-foot and/or 3-foot panel may be used per sign. The Contractor shall use the widest panels
possible. All parts necessary for assembly shall be constructed of aluminum, galvanized steel,
or stainless steel in accordance with the Plans. Sheet thickness shall be as follows:
Maximum Horizontal Dimension Sheet Aluminum Thickness
Overlay panels 0.050 inch
Up to 20 inches 0.063 inch
20 to 36 inches, inclusive 0.080 inch
Over 36 inches (Permanent Signs) 0.125 inch
The side dimension for a diamond shaped warning sign is considered to be the maximum
horizontal dimension.
Before placing aluminum in contact with untreated steel, the steel surfaces shall be
protected by proper cleaning and painting with one coat of paint conforming to Section
9-08.1(2)B and two coats of aluminum paint.
Metal shall be handled by device or clean canvas gloves between all cleaning and etching
operations and the application of reflective sheeting.
9-28.9 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Signs
Fiberglass reinforced plastic signs and overlay panels shall be constructed of a fiberglass
reinforced thermoset polyester laminate. The sign panel shall be acrylic modified and UV
stabilized for outdoor weathering ability.
The sign panel shall be stabilized to prevent the release of migrating constituents (such
as solvents, monomers, etc.) over the expected life of the sign. The sign panel shall contain
no residue release agents on the surface of the laminate so neither migrating constituents
or release agents will be present in amounts which will interfere with any subsequent
bonding operations.

The sign panel shall not contain visible cracks, pinholes, foreign inclusions, or surface
wrinkles that would affect implied performance, alter the specific dimensions of the panel,
or otherwise affect its serviceability.
The sign panel surface shall be wiped clean with a slightly water dampened cloth before
applying reflective sheeting.
9-28.9(1) Mechanical Properties
All mechanical properties are stated as minimum requirements. The mechanical properties
are measured in both the line direction of the panel and at 90 degrees to the line as noted in
the appropriate ASTM test referenced.
Mechanical Property Ave. Min. Requirement ASTM Test
Tensile Strength 10.0 psi × 103 D638
Tensile Modulus 1.2 psi × 106 D638
Flexural Strength 20.0 psi × 103 D790
Flexural Modulus 1.2 psi × 106 D790
Compression Strength 32.0 psi × 103 D695
Compression Modulus 1.4 psi × 106 D695
Punch Shear 12.0 psi × 103 D732
9-28.9(2) Physical Properties

Sign Panels are to be 0.135 inch thick. Overlay panels are to be 0.075 inch thick. Panel
thickness tolerance shall be plus or minus 0.005 inch. Panel tolerance on nominal length
and width shall be plus or minus ⅛ inch for dimensions of 12 feet or less and shall be within
⅛ inch of square per 12 feet of length when measured in accordance with ASTM D3841.
Panels shall be manufactured with smooth surfaces on both top and bottom of the panel.
Panel flatness of a 30 by 30-inch panel shall be measured by hanging the panel diagonally
in suspension. The maximum deflection measured diagonally, parallel and perpendicular to
the panel by lines drawn through the center of the panel, shall not exceed ½ inch. The panel
shall then be hung diagonally in suspension in an oven for 48 hours at 180°F. The maximum
deflection shall again be measured as previously noted and shall not exceed ½ inch. All
measurements shall be made when panels are at ambient temperature.
Panels shall be pigmented to a visually uniform gray color within the MunselR range of
N.7.5/to N.8.5/.
Panels shall have a maximum coefficient of lineal thermal expansion of 1.8 × 10-5 in/in/°F.
when tested in accordance with ASTM D696.
Panels shall be classified as to a minimum Grade II (weather resistant) panel as specified
in ASTM D3841 following 3,000 plus or minus 100 hour weatherometer test.
Panels shall contain additives designed to be less responsive to fire ignition and flame
propagation. As such, the extent of burning shall not exceed 1.0 inch when tested in
accordance with ASTM D635.
Panels shall resist the impact energy of 20 foot-pounds applied with a hemispherical tipped
object 1 inch in diameter.
The panels thermal stability for strength and impact resistance qualities shall not be
appreciably affected over a temperature range of -65ºF to 212°F.
Fiberglass reinforced plastic panels for signs shall be accepted on the basis of a certificate
of compliance from the manufacturer as outlined in Section 1-06.3.
9-28.10 Vacant

9-28.11 Hardware
Bolts, nuts, locknuts, and washers shall be of the same material for each attachment. Bolts,
nuts, locknuts, and washers for signs mounted on overhead sign structures (i.e., sign bridges,
cantilevers sign structures, and bridge mounted sign brackets) shall be stainless steel only.
Hardware Specification
Bolts ASTM F468 2024-T4 Aluminum
ASTM A307 Steel
ASTM F593 Group 1, Condition A Stainless Steel, or ASTM A193, Grade B8,
Class 1 Stainless Steel
U-bolts ASTM A276 Type 304 Stainless Steel
Washers ASTM B209 2024-T4 Aluminum
ASTM F844 Steel
ANSI B18.22.1 Stainless Steel Alloy 304
Nuts ASTM F467 2024-T4 Aluminum
ASTM A563 Grade A Steel
ASTM F594 Group 1 Stainless Steel, or
ASTM A194 Grade 8 or 8A Stainless Steel
Locknuts ASTM F467 2024-T4 Aluminum
(with nylon insert unless otherwise ASTM A563 Grade A Steel
in the Plans) ASTM F594 Group 1 Stainless Steel, or noted
ASTM A194 Grade 8 or 8A Stainless Steel
Rivets ASTM B316 5052 Aluminum Alloy
ASTM B316 5056 Aluminum Alloy
Post Clips ASTM B179 356-T6 Aluminum
Windbeams ASTM B221 6061-T6 Aluminum
Angle and “Z” Bar ASTM B221 6061-T6 Aluminum
ASTM A36 or ASTM A992 Steel
Strap and Mounting Bracket ASTM A666, Type 201 Stainless Steel
All steel parts shall be galvanized per AASHTO M111. Steel bolts and related connecting
hardware shall be galvanized per AASHTO M232.
9-28.12 Reflective Sheeting
Type I and Type II reflective sheeting shall consist of spherical lens elements embedded
within a transparent plastic having a smooth, flat outer surface. Type III and Type IV reflective
sheeting shall consist of spherical or prismatic lens elements adhered to a synthetic resin and
encapsulated by a flexible, transparent, weatherproof plastic having a smooth outer surface.
Type V reflective sheeting shall consist of metallized microprismatic lens bonded to a flexible,
smooth-surfaced, weather resistant polymeric film. Type VI reflective sheeting shall consist of
unmetallized microprismatic lens formed on a flexible vinyl material. Type VII, VIII, IX and
Type X Fluorescent Orange reflective sheeting shall consist of unmetallized microprismatic
lens formed in a synthetic resin and encapsulated by a flexible, transparent, weatherproof
plastic having a smooth outer surface. All sheeting shall be weather resistant and have a
protected pre-coated adhesive backing. Type II reflective sheeting shall contain an identifying
marking, such as a water mark, which is visible after sheeting application. The marking shall
not adversely affect the performance or life of the sheeting.
The reflective sheeting shall have the following minimum coefficient of retroreflection
values at 0.2 degrees and 0.5 degrees observation angle expressed as average candelas per
foot-candle, per square foot of material. Measurements shall be conducted in accordance
with ASTM E810.

Type I Glass Bead Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Entrance Silver
Angle Angle White Yellow Orange Green Red Blue Brown
0.2° -4° 70 50 25 9.0 14 4.0 1.0
0.2° +30° 30 22 7.0 3.5 6.0 1.7 0.3
0.5° -4° 30 25 13 4.5 7.5 2.0 0.3
0.5° +30° 15 15 4.0 2.2 3.0 0.8 0.2
Type II Glass Bead Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Entrance
0.2° -4° 140 100 60 30 30 10 5.0
0.2° +30° 60 36 22 10 12 4.0 2.0
0.5° -4° 50 33 20 9.0 10 3.0 2.0
0.5° +30° 28 20 12 6.0 6.0 2.0 1.0
Type III Glass Bead Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Entrance Silver
0.2° -4° 250 170 100 45 45 20 12
0.2° +30° 150 100 60 25 25 11 8.5
0.5° -4° 95 62 30 15 15 7.5 5.0
0.5° +30° 65 45 25 10 10 5.0 3.5
Type IV Micro Prismatic Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Entrance
Angle Angle White Yellow Green Red Blue Brown
0.2° -4° 250 170 35 35 20 7.0
0.2° +30° 80 54 9 9 5.0 2.0
0.5° -4° 135 100 17 17 10 4.0
0.5° +30° 55 37 6.5 6.5 3.5 1.4
Type VI Vinyl Micro Prismatic Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Entrance
Angle Angle White Yellow Orange Green Red Blue
0.2° -0.4° 250 170 70 30 35 20
0.2° +30° 95 64 26 11 13 7.6
0.5° -0.4° 200 136 56 24 28 18
0.5° +30° 60 40 17 7.2 8.4 4.8
Type VII Micro Prismatic Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Entrance
0.2° -0.4° 750 560 280 75 150 34
0.2° +30° 430 320 160 43 86 20
0.5° -0.4° 240 180 90 24 48 11
0.5° +30° 135 100 50 14 27 6.0

Type VIII Micro Prismatic Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Entrance
0.2° -0.4° 700 525 265 70 105 42 21
0.2° +30° 325 245 120 33 49 20 10
0.5° -0.4° 250 190 94 25 38 15 7.5
0.5° +30° 115 86 43 12 17 7 3.5
Type IX Micro Prismatic Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Entrance
0.2° -0.4° 380 285 145 38 76 17
0.2° +30° 215 162 82 22 43 10
0.5° -0.4° 240 180 90 24 48 11
0.5° +30° 135 100 50 14 27 6.0
1.0 -0.4° 80 60 30 8.0 16 3.6
1.0 +30° 45 34 17 4.5 9.0 2.0
Type X Micro Prismatic Retroreflective Element Material

Obs. Angle Entrance Angle Fluorescent Orange
0.2° -0.4° 200
0.2° +30° 90
0.5° -0.4° 70
0.5° +30° 26
The wet performance measurements on unweathered sheeting shall be conducted in

accordance with one of the following methods:
1. The standard rainfall test specified in Federal Specification LS 300C and the brightness
of the reflective sheeting totally wet by rain shall not be less than 90 percent of the
above values.
2. Samples shall be submerged in a tank of clean water (approximately 72°F) for a
period of 5 minutes. Reflex-reflective performance of the sheeting shall be viewed
in a darkened room by reflected light through the surface of the water or through a
transparent plane surface of the tank parallel to the sample surface. Light source shall
be such as a hand flashlight held close to the eye. The wet sheeting shall show no
apparent loss of reflective performance as compared to dry material.
The sheeting shall conform to the applicable daytime color and luminance factor
requirements of ASTM D4956 when tested instrumentally in accordance with Section 8.4
of that Specification; OR, the diffuse day color of the reflective sheeting shall be visually
evaluated by comparison with the applicable Highway Color Tolerance Chart. Color
comparison shall be made under north daylight or a scientific daylight having a color
temperature from 6500 degrees to 7500 degrees Kelvin. Daytime color evaluation shall be
illuminated at 45 degrees and viewed at 90 degrees. There shall be no significant color shift
when viewed under nighttime (retroreflective) conditions.
The reflective sheeting shall have a pre-coated pressure sensitive adhesive (Class 1) or a
heat-activated adhesive (Class 2) either of which will adhere to flat, clean surfaces without
necessity of additional adhesive coats on the reflective sheeting or application surface.
Chemical activators shall not be used to activate Class 2 adhesive. The pre-coated adhesive
shall be protected by an easily removed liner which, when removed, shall not have a staining
effect on the reflective sheeting and shall be mildew resistant. The protective liner attached

to the adhesive shall be removable by peeling without soaking in water or other solvents
and shall be easily removed after storage for 4 hours at 150ºF under weight of 215 psi.
The sheeting with liner removed, conditioned for 24 hours at 72°F and 50 percent relative
humidity, shall be sufficiently flexible to show no cracking when bent around a 1.2-inch
diameter mandrel with the adhesive side contacting the mandrel. For ease of testing, talcum
powder may be spread on the adhesive to prevent sticking to the mandrel. The sheeting
surface shall be smooth and flat to facilitate self-cleaning in the rain, regular cleaning, and
wet performance, and exhibit 85 degrees glossmeter rating of not less than 50 when tested in
accordance with ASTM D523. The sheeting surface shall be readily processed and compatible
with transparent and opaque process colors and show no loss of the color coat with normal
handling, cutting, and application. The sheeting shall permit cutting and color processing at
temperatures of 60°F to 100°F and 20 to 80 percent RH. The sheeting shall be heat resistant
and permit force curing without staining of unapplied sheeting or applied sheeting at
temperatures recommended by the manufacturer not to exceed 150°F for unapplied sheeting or
200°F for applied sheeting. The sheeting surface shall be solvent resistant to permit cleaning
by wiping with a clean soft cloth dampened with VM&P Naphtha or mineral spirits.
The adhesive shall form a durable bond to smooth, corrosion and weather resistant surfaces
and permit the reflective sheeting to adhere securely, 48 hours after application at temperatures
of -30°F to 200°F. The adhesive bond shall be sufficient to render the applied sheeting vandal-
resistant and prevent its shocking off when subjected to an impact energy of 20 ft. lbs. applied
with a hemispherical tipped object 1 inch in diameter at -0°F. The test specimen shall be
applied to aluminum backing not less than 0.080 inch thick and having a dimension of not less
than 4 inches square. During testing, the specimen shall be supported on a 3-inch diameter ring.
The adhesion test shall conform to ASTM D4956 with the addition of the temperatures
noted above.
The resistance to accelerated weathering shall be as described in ASTM D4956 except the
weathering apparatus and procedure shall be in accordance with ASTM G154.
The reflective sheeting shall be sufficiently flexible to be cut to shape easily and permit
application over, and conform to, moderate shallow embossing characteristic of certain
sign borders and symbols. The tensile strength of the sheeting shall be 5 to 20 pounds per
square inch width when conditioned for 48 hours in accordance to ASTM D685 and tested in
accordance with ASTM D828. Following liner removal, the reflective sheeting shall not shrink
more than ¹⁄32 inch in 10 minutes nor more than ⅛ inch in 24 hours in any dimension per 9 inch
square at 72°F and 50 percent relative humidity.
The sheeting, when applied according to manufacturer’s recommendations to cleaned
and etched 0.020 by 2 by 8-inch aluminum, conditioned (24 hours) and tested at 72°F and
50 percent relative humidity, shall be sufficiently flexible to show no cracking when bent
around a ¾-inch diameter mandrel.
9-28.12(1) Application
The reflective sheeting shall be applied in the manner specified by the sheeting
manufacturer. The applied sign face shall not have bubbles, wrinkles, or foreign material
beneath the reflective sheeting.
9-28.12(2) Edge Treatment
All edges and splices of reflective sheeting signs shall be coated with an edge sealer when
recommended by the manufacturer of the reflectorized sheeting.

9-28.12(3) Splices and Color Matching

Splicing of reflective sheeting shall not be permitted on signs or panels with dimensions
up to and including 48 inches in height or width unless the reflective sheeting specified does
not come in this width, then the widest width material shall be used. When sheeting joints are
required, they shall be lap-jointed with the top sheet overlapping the bottom sheet by no less
than 3⁄16 inch. The fabricator shall endeavor to use the least number of seams possible with
the horizontal lap preferable. Roller applied or reverse screened sheeting may be butt-jointed
with joint gap not to exceed 1⁄32 inch. Color matching of adjacent sheets of reflective sheeting
comprising a sign shall be accomplished without a noticeable difference in color. No borders
shall be spliced other than the splice of the tangent border to the corner radius.
9-28.13 Demountable Prismatic Reflectorized Message and Borders
The letters, digits, and alphabet accessories shall consist of embossed 0.040-inch thick
sheet aluminum frames conforming to ASTM B209 grade 3003-H14 in which prismatic
reflectors are installed to prevent their displacement in handling or service. Letters in which
reflectors are assembled by means of tape are unacceptable. The plastic reflectors face shall
be colorless and be entirely smooth to present a water repellent and dirt resistant surface. The
area indicating the letter shape that is not reflectorized shall be white for maximum daytime
contrast with the sign background. All letters shall be free of any imperfections and shall
present a high quality appearance. Demountable prismatic border shall be comprised of a
minimum length of 2 feet with allowance of one shorter section between each corner radius.
Letters shall be fastened to the sign with aluminum screws or blind rivets conforming to
ASTM B209 grade 2024-T4.
The coefficient of retroreflection of each reflex reflector intended for use in cutout letters,
symbols, and accessories shall be equal to or exceed the following minimum values with
measurements made with reflectors spinning.
Coefficient of Retroreflection Candle Power/
Observation Angle (Degrees) Entrance Angle (Degrees) Square inch/Foot Candle
0.1 0 14.0
0.1 20 5.6
Failure to meet the specific minimum values shall constitute failure of the reflector being
used. Upon failure of more than two of the 50 samples tested, a resample of 100 reflectors
shall be tested. Failure of more than four of these samples shall be cause for rejection of
the lot.
9-28.14 Sign Support Structures
All sign support structures shall be constructed as shown in the Plans.
9-28.14(1) Timber Sign Posts
At the Contractor’s options, timber sign posts and mileposts shall be treated Douglas Fir
or treated Hem-Fir meeting the grades specified in Section 9-09.2. Douglas Fir and Hem-
Fir posts shall be given a treatment in accordance with Section 9-09.3(1). Preservative and
retention shall be as shown in Section 9-16.2 for sawn posts.
9-28.14(2) Steel Structures and Posts
Truss chords, struts, and diagonals, end posts, and end post struts and diagonals for
sign bridge structures and cantilever sign structures shall conform to either ASTM A36 or
ASTM A53 Grade B Type E or S. The nominal pipe diameter and the pipe wall thickness shall
be as shown in the Plans or Standard Plans. All other structural steel for sign bridge structures
and cantilever sign structures shall conform to either ASTM A36 or ASTM A992. Truss
member connection hardware shall conform to Section 9-06.5(3).

Pipe members for bridge mounted sign brackets shall conform to ASTM A53 Grade B
Type E or S, and shall be Schedule 40 unless otherwise specified. All other structural steel for
bridge mounted sign brackets shall conform to either ASTM A36 or ASTM A992. U bolts, and
associated nuts and washers, shall be stainless steel conforming to Section 9-28.11, and shall
be fabricated hot.
Anchor rods for sign bridge and cantilever sign structure foundations shall conform
to ASTM F1554 Grade 105, including Supplemental Requirements S2, S3, and S5. Nuts
and washers for sign bridge and cantilever sign structure foundations shall conform to
ASTM A563 Grade DH and ASTM F436, respectively.
Steel sign structures and posts shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with
AASHTO M111, unless noted otherwise in the Plans. All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be
galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M232. Unless otherwise specified in
the Plans or Special Provisions, metal surfaces shall not be painted.
Except as otherwise noted, steel used for sign structures and posts shall have a controlled
silicon content of either 0.00 to 0.04 percent or 0.15 to 0.25 percent. Steel used for slip
bases (SB-1, SB-2, SB-3) and heavy-duty anchors shall have a controlled silicon maximum
of 0.40 percent. If the Plans or Special Provisions specify painting of the galvanized steel
surfaces, then the controlled silicon content requirement does not apply for those steel
members. Mill test certificates verifying the silicon content of the steel shall be submitted
to both the galvanizer and the Engineer prior to beginning galvanizing operations.
Minor fabricating and modifications necessary for galvanizing will be allowed if not
detrimental to the end product as determined by the Engineer. If such modifications are
contemplated, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, six copies of the
proposed modifications, prior to fabrication.
9-28.14(3) Aluminum Structures
Welding of aluminum shall be in accordance with AWS D1.2/D1.2M, latest edition,
Structural Welding Code – Aluminum.
Aluminum alloy filler metals utilized on anodized structures shall result in color matching
to base metals.
9-28.15 Vacant

9-29 Illumination, Signal, Electrical

9-29.1 Conduit, Innerduct, and Outerduct
Conduit shall be free from defects, including out of round and foreign inclusions. Conduit
shall be uniform in color, density, and physical properties. The inside shall be smooth and
free from burrs, which could damage cable during installation. Conduit ends shall be cut
square to the inside diameter and supplied with thread protectors. All conduit, conduit
fittings, and associated hardware/appurtenances shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory.
9-29.1(1) Rigid Metal Conduit, Galvanized Steel Outerduct, and Fittings
Rigid metal conduit shall be straight and be rigid galvanized steel or stainless steel, as
required, and bear the mark of a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory. Exterior and
interior surfaces of the galvanized steel conduit, except threaded ends, shall be uniformly
and adequately zinc coated by a hot-dip galvanizing process. The average of the zinc coating
shall comply with Federal Specification WW-C-581d.
9-29.1(2) Rigid Metal Conduit Fittings and Appurtenances
Couplings for rigid metal-type conduits may be either hot-dip or electroplated galvanized.
Conduit bodies and fittings for rigid steel conduit systems shall be listed by a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory listed for wet locations and shall be hot-dip galvanized
malleable iron or bronze. Conduit bodies shall have tapered threads and include a bolt on
cover with stainless steel screws and a neoprene gasket seal.
Grounding end bushings shall be bronze or galvanized malleable iron with copper, tinned
copper, stainless steel, or integral lug with stainless steel clamping screw, mounting screw,
and set screw.
Conduit clamps and straps shall be Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel or hot-dip
galvanized. Two-hole-type straps shall span the entire width of the support channel and attach
to the supports on both sides of the conduit with bolts and associated hardware. Two-piece
conduit clamps shall interlock with the support channel with a single bolt.
Conduit supports for surface-mounted conduit shall be hot-dip galvanized or Type 304
or Type 316 stainless steel channel using Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel bolts and
spring nuts.
9-29.1(2)A Expansion Fittings, Deflection Fittings, and Combination Expansion/
Deflection Fittings
Expansion fittings for rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be weather tight, with hot-dip
galvanized malleable or ductile iron end couplings and body and shall allow for 4 inches of
movement minimum (2 inches in each direction). Expansion fittings for rigid galvanized steel
conduit shall have an external tinned copper bonding jumper or an internal tinned copper
bonding jumper. The internal tinned copper bonding jumper shall not reduce the conduit
conductor capacity.
Deflection fittings for rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be weather tight, with hot-dip
galvanized ductile iron or bronze end couplings, with molded neoprene sleeve, stainless steel
bands, and internal tinned copper bonding jumper. Deflection fittings shall provide for conduit
movement of ¾ inch in all directions and angular movement of 30 degrees in any direction.
A combination of a deflection and an expansion fitting for rigid galvanized steel conduit
shall be assembled from a deflection fitting and an expansion fitting as defined above.
The bonding jumper used for expansion fittings and combination expansion deflection
fittings shall be a tinned copper braid attached to the conduit with a galvanized “U” bolt-type
connection designed for the application.

Illumination, Signal, Electrical 9-29
9-29.1(3) Flexible Metal Conduit

Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall consist of a single strip of continuous flexible
interlocked steel galvanized inside and out, forming a smooth internal wiring channel with
a liquid tight covering of sunlight-resistant flexible PVC conforming to NEC Article 350.
9-29.1(3)A Flexible Metal Conduit Appurtenances
Liquidtight connectors shall be the insulated throat type, conforming to NEC Article 350,
and listed for wet locations.
9-29.1(4) Non-Metallic Conduit
9-29.1(4)A Rigid PVC Conduit
Rigid PVC conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 2 and UL 651. Fittings shall conform to
NEMA TC-3, and be UL 514C and UL 651.
PVC solvent cement shall meet ASTM D2564, including note 8 (label to show pipe sizes
for which the cement is recommended).
9-29.1(4)B Expansion Fittings
Expansion fittings for use with PVC shall allow for 4 inches of movement minimum
(2 inches in each direction). Expansion fittings for PVC conduit shall be PVC and have
a threaded terminal adaptor or coupling end, and shall meet the requirements listed in
Section 9-29.1(4)A.
9-29.1(4)C HDPE Conduit
HDPE conduit shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory recognized
by the United States Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) Program. Couplings for HDPE shall be
mechanical and listed for use with HDPE.
Aluminum mechanical couplings are prohibited.
9-29.1(4)D Deflection Fittings
Deflection Fittings for use with rigid PVC conduit shall be as described in
Section 9-29.1(2)A.
9-29.1(5) Innerduct and Outerduct
The innerduct system shall be factory-installed and shall be designed so that expansion
and contraction of the innerducts takes place in the coupling body to eliminate compatibility
problems. The conduit coupling body shall have a factory-assembled gasket that is multistage
and antireversing, sealing both the outerduct and innerducts. A secondary midbody O-ring
gasket shall be seated into the coupling body and shall hold the coupling body firmly in the
outerduct.
All fittings, adapters, and bends (sweeps) shall be provided and shall be manufactured from
the same materials and manufacturing process as the conduit, except as specified otherwise.
The conduit system shall be a complete system with the following accessories:
Manhole Terminator Kits
Deflection Fittings
Offset Fittings
Expansion/Contraction Fittings
Repair Kits
Conduit and Innerduct Plugs
Pull string
Pull rope
Conduit spacers
Split Plugs

9-29.1(5)A Rigid Galvanized Steel Outerduct With PVC or PE Innerduct

Each section of steel outerduct shall be supplied with one reversing spin coupling that
allows straight sections and fittings to be joined without spinning the conduit. The reversing
coupling shall be galvanized and have three setscrews or a lock nut ring to lock the coupling
in place. Setscrews or lock nut ring shall be galvanized or stainless steel and ensure continuous
electrical ground. The couplings shall be galvanized steel with the same material properties as
the conduit.
The conduit system shall be designed so that assembly of components can be accomplished
in the following steps:
1. Loosen setscrews or lock nut ring on coupling and spin back to allow for insertion.
2. Spin coupling mating sections forward to bottom.
3. Tighten setscrews on lock nut ring.
9-29.1(5)B Rigid PVC Outerduct With PVC or PE Innerduct
Protective outerduct for Schedule 40 PVC and Schedule 80 PVC conduit outerduct shall
be 4 inch with a minimum 5-inch extended integral “bell end” and shall be gray in color.
The outerduct minimum wall thickness shall be 0.23 inch for Schedule 40 PVC and 0.32 inch
for Schedule 80 PVC.
Conduit and fittings for PVC outerduct shall be manufactured with an ultraviolet inhibitor.
The coupling body for PVC outerduct shall include a factory-assembled, multistage gasket
that is antireversing, sealing both the outer and innerducts. A secondary midbody gasket shall
be seated at the shoulder of the bell to ensure air and water integrity of the system. The bell
end and the coupling body assembly shall accept a minimum of 5 inches of the spigot end.
The conduit system shall be designed so that straight sections and fittings will assemble
without the need for lubricants or cement.
PVC outerduct shall have a longitudinal print-line that denotes “Install This Side Up” for
proper innerduct alignment. PVC outerducts shall have a circumferential ring on the spigot
end of the duct to provide a reference point for ensuring the proper insertion depth when
connecting conduit ends. The line shall be a minimum of 5 inches from the end of the conduit.
9-29.1(5)C Innerduct for Straight Sections of Galvanized Steel Outerduct or
PVC Outerduct
The innerducts shall have a minimum outside diameter of 1.25 inch and a minimum
inside diameter of 1.2 inch. Larger-diameter innerducts may be provided if the wall thickness
and diameter tolerances are met. The tolerance for inside and outside diameters shall be
0.005 inch. The innerducts shall have a minimum wall thickness of 0.060 inch. Innerduct shall
be color coded and shall index a minimum of one innerduct with a different color. Alternate
color codes are permitted as long as the color codes are contiguous between adjacent junction
boxes. The innerducts shall be factory installed in the outerduct.
Dynamic coefficient of friction of innerducts shall be tested in accordance with Telcordia
GR-356-CORE procedure. The coefficient of friction shall be less than 0.30 between medium-
density polyethylene jacketed fiber optic cable and the prelubricated innerduct. The coefficient
of friction shall be less than 0.10 between the ¼-inch diameter polypropylene rope (suitable
for fiber optic cable pulling) and the prelubricated innerduct. Pull rope used for testing
(meeting the 0.10 coefficient of friction requirement) shall be the same type as the pull rope
used for cable installation. The Contractor shall provide as part of the conduit submittals a
certificate of compliance with these coefficient of friction requirements.
The innerduct shall have a smooth, nonribbed interior surface, with a factory prelubricated
coating. The coating shall provide the required dynamic coefficient of friction.
Innerduct shall be extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or polyethylene (PE).

The coupling body for the innerduct shall be factory assembled in the bell end of
the outerduct and shall be manufactured from a high-impact engineered thermoplastic.
The coupling body face shall be supplied with lead-ins to facilitate assembly.
All outerduct shall be marked with data traceable to plant location.
9-29.1(5)D Conduit With Innerducts Fittings and Appurtenances
Duct plugs shall be polypropylene and be equipped with a neoprene or polyurethane
gasket. Plugs shall be equipped with an attachment to secure the pull rope in the innerduct.
The plug shall withstand 5 psi.
9-29.1(5)D1 Bends for 4-Inch PVC Conduit With Innerducts or Galvanized Steel
Conduit With Innerducts
All bend radii shall be 36 inches or greater. The conduit system shall provide a complete
line of fixed and flexible sweeps with system-compatible bell and spigot or threaded ends.
The bends shall contain high-temperature burn-through-resistant innerducts manufactured
from PVC, PE, or Nylon-66. The innerducts shall meet all other requirements for innerduct
in Sections 9-29.1(1) and 9-29.1(5)A.
9-29.1(5)D2 Prefabricated Fixed and Flexible Bends (for Innerducts)
The prefabricated standard fixed PVC bends shall have a radius between 4 and 9 feet and
sweep angles of 11.25, 22.5, 45, or 90 degrees.
Flexible bends shall be prefabricated. These conduits may be field bent to a uniform
radius no less than 4 feet. The field bend shall be no greater than 90 degrees. Grounding
shall be continuous in flexible bends. Outerduct for flexible ends shall be manufactured from
reinforced PVC. Expansion and deflection fittings for rigid galvanized steel conduit with
innerduct shall be provided in accordance with Section 9-29.1(2)A.
9-29.1(6) Detectable Underground Warning Tape
Detectable Underground Warning tape shall be Orange imprinted in black lettering with
the message “FIBER OPTIC CABLE BURIED BELOW” or equal. The warning tape shall be
polyethylene with a metallic backing. The polyethylene shall be a minimum 4 mils thick and
3 inches wide.
9-29.1(7) Steel Casings
Steel casing material shall conform to ASTM A252 Grade 2 or 3 or casing as approved by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish pipe of adequate thickness to withstand the forces
exerted by the boring operation as well as those forces exerted by the earth during installation
and shall be a minimum of ⅜ inch thick. All joints shall be welded by a welder qualified in
accordance with AWS D1.1 structural welding code, Section 3.
9-29.1(8) Drilling Fluid
Drilling fluid used for directional boring shall be an inert mixture of water and bentonite
clay, conforming to the drilling equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.
9-29.1(9) Repair
Manufacturer repair kits shall be used for field repair of existing conduit, innerduct and
outerduct. The conduit repair kit shall be manufactured specifically for the repair of existing
damaged conduit, inner duct and outer duct. The repair kit shall be prepackaged and include
the split conduit and split couplings necessary to restore the damaged conduit to the original
inside dimensions including a water and air tight seal.

9-29.2 Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull Boxes

The Contractor shall perform quality control inspection. The Contracting Agency intends
to perform Quality Assurance Inspection. By its inspection, the Contracting Agency intends
only to verify the quality of that Work. This inspection shall not relieve the Contractor of any
responsibility for identifying and replacing defective material and workmanship. Prior to the
start of production of the precast concrete units, the Contractor shall advise the Engineer of the
If the Inspector observes any non-specification Work or unacceptable quality control practices,
Engineer, the unit(s) will be rejected.
9-29.2(1) Junction Boxes
For the purposes of this Specification concrete is defined as portland cement concrete and
non-concrete is all others.
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for all components, hardware lid, frame,
reinforcement, and box dimensions. The shop drawings shall be prepared by (or under the
supervision of) a Professional Engineer, licensed under Title 18 RCW, State of Washington,
in the branch of Civil or Structural. Each sheet shall carry the following:
1. Professional Engineer’s original signature, date of signature, original seal, and
registration number. If a complete assembly drawing is included which references
additional drawing numbers, including revision numbers for those drawings, then only
the complete assembly drawing is required to be stamped.
2. The initials and dates of all participating design professionals.
3. Clear notation of all revisions including identification of who authorized the revision,
who made the revision, and the date of the revision.
Design calculations shall carry on the cover page, the Professional Engineer’s original
signature, date of signature, original seal, and registration number.
For each type of junction box, or whenever there is a change to the junction box
design, a proof test, as defined in this Specification, shall be performed and new shop
drawings submitted.
9-29.2(1)A Standard Duty Junction Boxes
Standard Duty Junction Boxes are defined as Type 1, 2 and 8 junction boxes and shall have
a minimum load rating of 22,500 pounds and be tested in accordance with Section 9-29.2(5).
A complete Type 8 Junction Box includes the spread footing shown in the Standard Plans. All
Standard Duty Junction Boxes placed in sidewalks, walkways, and shared use paths shall have
slip resistant surfaces. Non-slip lids and frames shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with
AASHTO M111.
9-29.2(1)A1 Concrete Junction Boxes
The Standard Duty Concrete Junction Box steel frame, lid support, and lid shall be
painted with a black paint containing rust inhibiters or painted with a shop applied, inorganic
zinc primer in accordance with Section 6-07.3, or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
AASHTO M 111.
Concrete used in Standard Duty Junction Boxes shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 6,000 psi when reinforced with a welded wire hoop, or 4,000 psi when reinforced
with welded wire fabric or fiber reinforcement. The frame shall be anchored to the box by
welding headed studs ⅜ by 3 inches long, as specified in Section 9-06.15, to the frame. The
wire fabric shall be attached to the studs and frame with standard tie practices. The box shall
contain ten studs located near the centerline of the frame and box wall. The studs shall be
placed one anchor in each corner, one at the middle of each width and two equally spaced
on each length of the box.

Materials for Type 1, 2, and 8 Concrete Junction Boxes shall conform to the following:
Materials Requirement
Concrete Section 6-02
Reinforcing Steel Section 9-07
Fiber Reinforcing ASTM C1116, Type III
Lid ASTM A786 diamond plate steel
Slip Resistant Lid ASTM A36 steel
Frame ASTM A786 diamond plate steel or ASTM A36 steel
Slip Resistant Frame ASTM A36 steel
Lid Support ASTM A36 steel, or ASTM A1011 SS Grade 36 (or higher)
Handle & Handle support ASTM A36 steel, or ASTM A1011 CS (Any Grade) or SS (Any Grade)
Anchors (studs) Section 9-06.15
Bolts, Studs, Nuts, Washers ASTM F593 or A193, Type 304 or 316, or Stainless Steel grade 302, 304, or 316
steel in accordance with approved shop drawings
Locking and Latching In accordance with approved shop drawings
Mechanism Hardware and Bolts
9-29.2(1)A2 Non-Concrete Junction Boxes

Material for the non-concrete junction boxes shall be of a quality that will provide for a
similar life expectancy as portland cement concrete in a direct burial application.
Type 1, 2, and 8 non-concrete junction boxes shall have a Design Load of 22,500 pounds
and shall be tested in accordance with Section 9-29.2(5). Non-concrete junction boxes shall be
gray in color and have an open bottom design with approximately the same inside dimensions,
and present a load to the bearing surface that is less than or equal to the loading presented
by the concrete junction boxes shown in the Standard Plans. Non-concrete junction box lids
shall include a pull slot and embedded 6 by 6 by ¼-inch steel plate and shall be secured with
two ½‑inch stainless steel Penta-head bolts recessed into the cover. The tapped holes for the
securing bolts shall extend completely through the box to prevent accumulation of debris.
Bolts shall conform to ASTM F593, stainless steel.
9-29.2(1)B Heavy-Duty Junction Boxes
Heavy-Duty Junction Boxes are defined as Type 4, 5 and 6 junction boxes and
shall be concrete and have a minimum vertical load rating of 46,000 pounds without
permanent deformation and 60,000 pounds without failure when tested in accordance with
Section 9-29.2(5).
The Heavy-Duty Junction Box steel frame, lid support and lid fabricated from steel plate
and shapes shall be painted with a shop applied, inorganic zinc primer in accordance with
Section 6-07.3. Ductile iron and gray iron castings shall not be painted.
The concrete used in Heavy-Duty Junction Boxes shall have a minimum compressive
strength of 4,000 psi.

Materials for Type 4, 5, and 6 Concrete Junction Boxes shall conform to the following:
Lid ASTM A786 diamond plate steel, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A572,
grade 50 or ASTM A588, and having a min. CVN toughness of 20 ft-lb at 40
degrees F
Or
Ductile iron casting meeting Section 9-05.15
Frame and stiffener plates ASTM A572 grade 50 or ASTM A588, both with min. CVN toughness of
20 ft-lb at 40 degrees F
Or
Gray iron casting meeting Section 9-05.15
Handle ASTM A36 steel or ASTM A1011 Grade CS or SS
Threaded Anchors for Gray Iron ASTM F1554 grade 55 Headed Anchor Requirements
Frame
Bolts, Studs, Nuts, Washers ASTM F593 or A193, Type 304 or 316, or Stainless steel grade 302, 304, or
316 in accordance with approved shop drawing
Hinges and Locking and Latching In accordance with approved shop drawings
Mechanism and associated
Hardware and Bolts
Safety Bars In accordance with approved shop drawings
The bearing seat and lid perimeter shall be free from burrs, dirt, and other foreign debris
that would prevent solid seating. Bolts and nuts shall be liberally coated with anti-seize
compound. Bolts shall be installed snug tight. The bearing seat and lid perimeter shall be
machined to allow a minimum of 75 percent of the bearing areas to be seated with a tolerance
of 0.0 to 0.005 inches measured with a feeler gage. The bearing area percentage will be
measured for each side of the lid as it bears on the frame.
9-29.2(2) Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes
Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes shall be constructed as a concrete box and as a concrete lid.
The lids for the Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes shall be interchangeable and both shall fit the
same box as shown in the Standard Plans.
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for all components, including concrete box,
Cast Iron Ring, Ductile Iron Lid, Steel Rings, and Lid. In addition, the shop drawings shall
show placement of reinforcing steel, knock outs, and any other appurtenances. The shop
drawing shall be prepared by or under the direct supervision of a Professional Engineer,
licensed under Title 18 RCW, State of Washington, in the branch of Civil or Structural. Each
sheet shall carry the following:
1. Professional Engineer’s original signature, date of signature, original seal, and
registration number. If a complete assembly drawing is included which references
additional drawing numbers, including revision numbers for those drawings, then only
the complete assembly drawing is required to be stamped.
2. The initials and dates of all participating design professionals.
3. Clear notation of all revisions including identification of who authorized the revision,
who made the revision, and the date of the revision.
Design calculations shall carry on the cover page, the Professional Engineer’s original
signature, date of signature, original seal, and registration number.
For each type of box or whenever there is a change to the Cable Vault or Pull Box
design, a proof test, as defined in this Specification, shall be performed and new shop
drawings submitted.

9-29.2(2)A Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes

Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes shall be concrete and have a minimum load
rating of 22,500 pounds and be tested in accordance with Section 9-29.2(5). For the purposes
of this Section, Small Cable Vaults are considered a type of Standard Duty Cable Vault.
Concrete for Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes shall have a minimum
compressive strength of 4,000 psi. The lid frame shall be anchored to the vault/box concrete
lid by welding headed studs ⅜ by 3 inches long, as specified in Section 9-06.15, to the frame.
The wire fabric shall be attached to the studs and frame with standard tie practices. The vault/
box concrete lid shall contain ten studs located near the centerline of the frame and wall.
Studs shall be placed one anchor in each corner, one at the middle of each width and two
equally spaced on each length of the vault/box. The steel frame, lid support, and lid shall be
painted with a black paint containing rust inhibiters or painted with a shop applied, inorganic
zinc primer in accordance with Section 6-07.3 or hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
AASHTO M111.
All Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes placed in sidewalks, walkways, and
shared-use paths shall have slip-resistant surfaces. The steel frame, lid support, and lid for
the Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes shall be hot-dip galvanized.
Materials for Standard Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes shall conform to the following:
Lid ASTM A786 diamond plate steel
Slip Resistant Lid Slip Resistant Lid
Frame Frame
Slip Resistant Frame Slip Resistant Frame
Lid Support ASTM A36 Steel, or ASTM A1011 Grade SS
Handle & Handle Support ASTM A36 steel or ASTM A1011 Grade CS or SS
Bolts, Studs, Nuts, Washers ASTM F593 or A193, type 304 or 316, or Stainless steel grade 302, 304, 316
in accordance with approved shop drawing
Hinges and Locking Mechanism In accordance with approved shop drawings
Hardware and Bolts
9-29.2(2)B Heavy-Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes

Heavy-Duty Cable Vaults and Pull Boxes shall be constructed of concrete having a
minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi, and have a minimum vertical load rating of
46,000 pounds without permanent deformation and 60,000 pounds without failure when
tested in accordance with Section 9-29.2(5).
Materials for Heavy Duty Cable Vaults and Pull boxes shall conform to the following:
Cover Section 9-05.15(1)
Ring Section 9-05.15(1)
Bolts, Nuts, Washers ASTM F593 or A193, Type 304 or 316, or Stainless steel grade 302, 304, 316
in accordance with approved shop drawing

9-29.2(3) Structure Mounted Junction Box

Surface mounted junction boxes and concrete embedded junction boxes installed in cast-in-
place structures shall be stainless steel NEMA 4X.
Concrete embedded junction boxes installed in structures constructed by slip forming shall
be stainless steel NEMA 3R and shall be adjustable for depth, with depth adjustment bolts,
which are accessible from the front face of the junction box with the lid installed.
NEMA stainless steel junction boxes and cover screws shall conform to ASTM A304.
Junction boxes installed on exterior of structures shall have an external hinge. Junction boxes
shall be labeled with the appropriate designation.
Polyethylene drain tubes for junction boxes mounted in structures shall be ⅜-inch diameter
with a wall thickness of 0.062 inches and shall be rated for a 110 psi working pressure at 73°F.
The size of NEMA 4X junction boxes and NEMA 3R junction boxes shall be as shown in
the Plans.
9-29.2(4) Cover Markings
Junction boxes, cable vaults, and pull boxes with metallic lids shall be marked with
the appropriate legend in accordance with the bead weld details in the Standard Plans.
Non‑metallic lids shall be embossed with the appropriate legend and a non-skid surface.
Legends for metallic lids and non-metallic lids shall be 1-inch nominal height.
Junction boxes, cable vaults and pull boxes shall be marked or embossed for use in
accordance with the Plans and following schedule:
System Type Legend System Type Legend
Traffic Signal Interconnect (6pr) COMM WSTA to temp sensor, weather station ITS
Fiber Optic Trunk Lines ITS DS to loops (2cs) ITS
HUB to TC (25pr) ITS DS to ramp meter (5c) ITS
Fiber Optic Laterals to CC ITS Flashing Beacons ITS
TC to DS (6pr) ITS Neon Power ITS
TC to HAR (6pr) SC&DI ITS Transformers to Cabinets ITS
TC to CC (6pr) ITS Service to Transformers LT
TC to VMS (6pr) ITS All power for lighting LT
TC to WSTA (6pr) ITS Signal Controller to Displays TS
All other lateral 6pr (i.e. neon control, etc) TS Signal Controller to Loops TS
CC to camera (coax, control cables, old style) ITS Signal Controller to emergency preempt TS
CC to camera (fiber, new style) ITS Telephone Service Drop TEL
HAR to antenna (coax) ITS Telephones at Flyer Stops, Park and Rides, etc. TEL
VMS to sign (control cables) ITS
9-29.2(5) Testing Requirements

The Contractor shall provide for testing of junction boxes, cable vaults and pull boxes.
Junction boxes, cable vaults and pull boxes shall be tested by an independent materials testing
facility, and a test report issued documenting the results of the tests performed.
For each junction box, vault and pull box type, the independent testing laboratory shall
meet the requirements of AASHTO R 18 for Qualified Tester and Verified Test Equipment.
The test shall be conducted in the presence of a Professional Engineer, licensed under Title 18
RCW, State of Washington, in the branch of Civil or Structural, and each test sheet shall have
the Professional Engineer’s original signature, date of signature, original seal, and registration
number. One copy of the test report shall be furnished to the Contracting Agency certifying
that the box and cover meet or exceed the loading requirements for that box type, and shall
include the following information:

1. Product identification.
2. Date of testing.
3. Description of testing apparatus and procedure.
4. All load deflection and failure data.
5. Weight of box and cover tested.
6. Upon completion of the required test(s) the box shall be loaded to failure or to the
maximum load possible on the testing machine (70,000 pounds minimum).
7. A brief description of type and location of failure or statement that the testing machine
reached maximum load without failure of the box.
9-29.2(5)A Standard Duty Boxes and Vaults
Standard Duty Concrete Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull Boxes shall be load tested
to 22,500 pounds. The test load shall be applied uniformly through a 10 by 10 by 1-inch
steel plate centered on the lid. The test load shall be applied and released ten times, and the
deflection at the test load and released state shall be recorded for each interval. At each interval
the junction box shall be inspected for lid deformation, failure of the lid/frame welds, vertical
and horizontal displacement of the lid/frame, cracks, and concrete spalling.
Concrete junction boxes will be considered to have withstood the test if none of the
following conditions are exhibited:
1. Permanent deformation of the lid or any impairment to the function of the lid.
2. Vertical or horizontal displacement of the lid frame.
3. Cracks wider than 0.012 inches that extend 12 inches or more.
4. Fracture or cracks passing through the entire thickness of the concrete.
5. Spalling of the concrete.
9-29.2(5)B Retrofit Security Lids for Standard Duty Concrete Junction Boxes
Security lids used to retrofit existing Standard Duty Concrete Junction Boxes shall be
tested as follows:
1. The security lid shall be installed on any appropriately sized box that is currently
approved on the Qualified Products List.
2. The security lid and box assembly shall be load tested in accordance with Section
9-29.2(5)A. After the ten load cycles but before loading to failure, the security lid shall
be fully opened and removed to verify operability.
3. The locking mechanism(s) shall be tested as follows:
a. The locking mechanism shall be cycled 250 times (locked, then unlocked again) at
room temperature (60-80°F). If there is more than one identical locking mechanism,
only one needs to be cycled in this manner.
b. Temperature changes should be limited to no more than 60°F per hour.
c. The security lid shall be cooled to and held at -30°F for 15 minutes. The locking
mechanism shall then be cycled once to verify operation at this temperature.
d. The security lid shall be heated to and held at 120-122°F for 15 minutes. The locking
mechanism shall then be cycled once to verify operation at this temperature.
e. The security lid shall be temperature adjusted to and held at 110°F and 95 percent
humidity for 15 minutes. The locking mechanism shall then be cycled once to verify
operation at this temperature and humidity.
9-29.2(5)C Standard Duty Non-Concrete Junction Boxes
Non-concrete Junction Boxes shall be tested as defined in the ANSI/SCTE 77 Tier 15 test
method using the test load of 22,500 pounds (minimum) in place of the design load during
testing. In addition, the Contractor shall provide a Manufacturer Certificate of Compliance for
each non-concrete junction box installed.

9-29.2(5)D Heavy-Duty Boxes and Vaults

Heavy-Duty Junction Boxes, Cable Vaults, and Pull Boxes shall be load tested to
46,000 pounds. The test load shall be applied vertically through a 10 by 20 by 1-inch steel
plate centered on the lid with an orientation both on the long axis and the short axis of the
junction box. The test load shall be applied and released ten times on each axis. The deflection
at the test load and released state shall be recorded for each interval. At each interval the
test box shall be inspected for lid deformation, failure of the lid or frame welds, vertical and
horizontal displacement of the lid frame, cracks, and concrete spalling. After the twentieth
loading interval the test shall be terminated with a 60,000 pound load being applied vertically
through the steel plate centered on the lid and with the long edge of steel plate orientated
parallel to the long axis of the box.
Heavy-Duty Junction Boxes will be considered to have withstood the 46,000 pound test if
none of the following conditions are exhibited:
1. Permanent deformation of the lid or any impairment to the function of the lid.
2. Vertical or horizontal displacement of the lid frame.
3. Cracks wider than 0.012 inches that extend 12 inches or more.
4. Fracture or cracks passing through the entire thickness of the concrete.
5. Spalling of the concrete.
Heavy-Duty Junction Boxes will be considered to have withstood the 60,000 pound test if
all of the following conditions are exhibited:
1. The lid is operational.
2. The lid is securely fastened.
3. The welds have not failed.
4. Permanent dishing or deformation of the lid is ¼ inch or less.
5. No buckling or collapse of the box.
9-29.3 Fiber Optic Cable, Electrical Conductors, and Cable
9-29.3(1) Fiber Optic Cable
All fiber optic cables shall be single mode fiber optic cables unless otherwise specified in
the Contract. All fiber optic cables shall meet the following requirements:
1. Compliance with the current version of ANSI/ICEA S-87-640. A product data
specification sheet clearly identifying compliance or a separate letter from manufacturer
to state compliance shall be provided.
2. Cables shall be gel free, loose tube, low water peak, and all dielectric with no
metallic component.
3. Cables shall not be armored unless specified in the Contract.
4. Cables shall be approved for mid-span entries and be rated by the manufacturer for
outside plant (OSP) use, placement in underground ducts, and aerial installations.
5. Fiber counts shall be as specified in the Contract.
6. Fibers and buffer tubes shall be color coded in accordance with the current version of
EIA/TIA-598.
7. Fibers shall not have any factory splices.
8. Outer Jacket shall be Type M (Medium Density Polyethylene). Outer jacket shall
be free from holes, splits, blisters, or other imperfections and must be smooth and
concentric as is consistent with the best commercial practice.
9. A minimum of one (1) rip cord is required for each cable.
10. Cable markings shall meet the following additional requirements:
a. Color shall be white or silver.
b. Markings shall be approximately 3 millimeters (118 mils) in height, and
dimensioned and spaced to produce good legibility.
c. Markings shall include the manufacturer’s name, year of manufacture, the number of
fibers, the words “OPTICAL CABLE”, and sequential length marks.
d. Sequential length markings shall be in meters or feet, spaced at intervals not more
than 1 meter or 2 feet apart, respectively.
e. The actual cable length shall not be shorter than the cable length marking. The actual
cable length may be up to 1 percent longer than the cable length marking.
f. Cables with initial markings that do not meet these requirements will not be
accepted and may not be re-marked.
11. Short term tensile strength shall be a minimum of 600 pounds (lbs). Long term tensile
strength shall be a minimum of 180 pounds (lbs). Tensile strength shall be achieved
using a fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) central member and / or aramid yarns.
12. All cables shall be new and free of material or manufacturing defects and dimensional
non-uniformity that would:
a. Interfere with the cable installation using accepted cable installation practices;
b. Degrade the transmission performance or environmental resistance after installation;
c. Inhibit proper connection to interfacing elements;
d. Otherwise yield an inferior product.
13. The fiber optic cables shall be shipped on reels with a drum diameter at least 20 times
the diameter of the cable, in order to prevent damage to the cable. The reels shall be
substantial and constructed so as to prevent damage during shipment and handling.
Reels shall be labeled with the same information required for the cable markings, with
the exception that the total length of cable shall be marked instead of incremental length
marks. Reels shall also be labeled with the type of cable.
9-29.3(1)A Singlemode Fiber Optic Cable
Single-Mode optical fibers shall be EIA/TIA 492-CAAB or ISO/IEC 11801 Type OS2, low
water peak zero dispersion fibers, meeting the requirements of ITU-T G.652.D.
9-29.3(1)B Multimode Optical Fibers
Where multimode fiber optic cables are specified in the Contract, the optical fibers shall be
one of the following types, as specified in the Contract:
1. Type OM1, meeting the requirements of EIA/TIA 492-AAAA-A or ISO/IEC 11801.
The fiber core diameter shall be 62.5 µm.
2. Type OM2, meeting the requirements of EIA/TIA 492-AAAB-A or ISO/IEC 11801.
The fiber core diameter shall be 50 µm.
All multimode optical fibers shall have a maximum attenuation of 3.0 dB/km at 850nm
and 1.0 dB/km at 1300nm. Completed cable assemblies shall be rated for 1000BaseLX
Ethernet communications.
9-29.3(2) Electrical Conductors and Cable
9-29.3(2)A Single Conductor
9-29.3(2)A1 Single Conductor Current Carrying
All current carrying single conductors shall be stranded copper conforming to ASTM B3
and B8. Insulation shall be chemically XLP (cross-linked polyethylene) or EPR (Ethylene
Propylene Rubber) Type USE rated for 600-volt.
9-29.3(2)A2 Grounding Electrode Conductor
Grounding electrode conductor shall be bare or insulated stranded copper. The insulation
shall be green or green with a yellow tracer.

9-29.3(2)A3 Equipment Grounding and Bonding Conductors

Equipment grounding and bonding jumper conductors shall be bare or green insulated,
stranded copper with cross-linked polyethylene insulation rated USE and 600-volts, with the
exception that the equipment grounding and bonding jumper conductors installed between
junction box, pull box, or cable vault frame and lids shall be tinned, braided copper.
9-29.3(2)A4 Location Wire
Location wire shall be steel core copper clad minimum size AWG 14 insulated conductor.
The insulation shall be orange High Molecular Weight High Density Polyethylene
(HMHDPE).
9-29.3(2)B Multi-Conductor Cable
Two-conductor through 10-conductor unshielded signal control cable shall have stranded
copper conductors and shall conform to International Municipal Signal Association (IMSA)
signal cable 20-1.
9-29.3(2)C Aluminum Cable Steel Reinforced
Triplex or Quadraplex Type ACSR neutral self-supporting aerial conductors of the
appropriate size for aluminum conductors shall be used where required in the Contract.
The neutral conductor shall be the same size as the insulated conductor. All conductors
shall be stranded.
9-29.3(2)D Pole and Bracket
Pole and bracket cable shall be a two-conductor cable rated for 600-volts. The individual
conductors shall be one red and one black 19-strand No. 10 AWG copper, assembled parallel.
The conductor insulation shall be 45-mil polyvinyl chloride or a 600-volt-rated cross-linked
polyethylene. The Jacketing shall be polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride not less than 45 mils
thick. If luminaires with remote ballasts are specified in the Contract, this same cable shall
be used between luminaire and ballast for both timber and ornamental pole construction.
If the luminaire requires fixture wire temperatures greater than 75°C, the outer jacket shall
be stripped for that portion of the cable inside the luminaire. The single conductors shall then
be sheathed with braided fiberglass sleeving of the temperature rating recommended by the
luminaire manufacturer.
9-29.3(2)E Two-Conductor Shielded
Two-conductor shielded (2CS) cable shall have stranded 14 AWG (minimum) conductors
and shall conform to IMSA Specification No. 50-2.
9-29.3(2)F Detector Loop Wire
Detector loop wire may be 12 or 14 AWG stranded copper wire, IMSA 51-3.
9-29.3(2)G Four-Conductor Shielded Cable
Four-conductor shielded cable (4CS) shall consist of a cable with four stranded 18 AWG
conductors with polypropylene insulation, an aluminized polyester shield, water-blocking
material in the cable interstices, and a 26-mil minimum outer jacket of polyethylene. The
four-conductor assembly shall be twisted six turns per foot. Each conductor shall have a
different insulation color. Overall cable diameter shall be 0.25 inch maximum. Capacitance
between adjacent pairs shall be 18 pf per foot and 15 pf per foot between diagonal pairs.
The capacitances shall not vary more than 10 percent after a 10-day immersion test with
ends exposed in a saturated brine solution.

9-29.3(2)H Three-Conductor Shielded Cable

Three-conductor shielded cable (3CS) for the detector circuit for optical fire preemption
receivers shall consist of three 20 AWG conductors with aluminized mylar shield and one
No. 20 drain wire, all enclosed with an outer jacket. All wires shall be 7 by 28 stranded tinned
copper material. Conductor insulation shall be rated 75°C, 600 volt. The drain wire shall
be uninsulated. Conductor color coding shall be yellow, blue, and orange. DC resistance of
any conductor or drain wire shall not exceed 11 ohms per 1,000 feet. Capacitance from one
conductor to the other two conductors and shield shall not exceed 48 pf per foot. The jacket
shall be rated 80°C, 600 volt, with a minimum average wall thickness of 0.045 inch.
The finished outside diameter of the cable shall be 0.3 inch maximum.
9-29.3(2)I Twisted Pair Communications Cable
Twisted Pair Communications Cable shall meet RUS Specification 1755.390 and shall be
AWG22 conductor. The cable shall have a petroleum compound completely filling the inside
of the cable and rated for OSP (Outside Plant) applications.
9-29.3(3) Wire Marking Sleeves
Wire marking sleeves shall be full-circle in design, non-adhesive, printable using an
indelible ink and shall fit snuggly on the wire or cable. Marking sleeves shall be made from
a PVC or polyolefin, and provide permanent identification for wires and cables.
9-29.4 Messenger Cable, Fittings
Messenger cable shall be ⅜-inch, 7-wire strand messenger cables conforming to
ASTM A475, extra-high-strength grade, 15,400-pound minimum breaking strength, Class A
galvanized.
Strain insulators shall be wet process porcelain, conforming to EEI-NEMA Class 54-2
standards for 12,000-pound ultimate strength.
Down guy assembly shall consist of an eight-way steel expanding anchor, having a
minimum area of 300 square inches, made of pressed steel, coated with asphalt or similar
preservative, and fitted with a ¾-inch minimum guy eye anchor rod 8 feet long. As an alternate
to expanding anchors, screw-type anchors with two 8-inch helix, 3½-inch pitch, 1-inch by
7-foot guy anchor rod, and rated for 7,000-pound maximum torque may be installed.
All pole hardware, bolts, plate rods, hangers, clips, wire guards, and pole bands shall be
hot-dip galvanized in conformance with the requirements of AASHTO M232.
9-29.5 Vacant
9-29.6 Light and Signal Standards
Light standards (including light standards with Type 1 or Type 2 luminaire arms) and
signal standards (including Types I, II, III, IV, V, PPB, PS, RM, FB, and CCTV) shall be
in accordance with the details shown in the Plans, as specified in the Special Provisions
and as outlined herein, provided that only one luminaire arm type shall be used throughout
the project.
Fabrication of light and signal standards shall conform to the applicable requirements
Light standard, signal standards, slip base hardware and foundation hardware shall be
hot‑dip galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111 and AASHTO M232. Where colored
standards are required, standards shall be powder-coated after galvanizing in accordance with
Section 6-07.3(11). The standard color shall be as specified in the Contract.
Materials for steel light and signal standards, and associated anchorage and fastening
hardware, shall conform to Sections 9-29.6(1), 9-29.6(2), and 9-29.6(5) unless otherwise
specified in one of the following documents:

1. The steel light and signal standard fabricator’s preapproved plan as approved
by the Washington State Department of Transportation and as identified in the
Special Provisions.
2. The steel light and signal standard fabricator’s shop drawing submittal, including
supporting design calculations, as submitted in accordance with Sections 6-01.9
and 8-20.2(1) and the Special Provisions, and as approved by the Engineer.
9-29.6(1) Steel Light and Signal Standards
Steel plates and shapes for light and signal standards shall conform to ASTM A36, except
that structural shapes may conform to ASTM A992. Shafts for light and signal standards,
except Type PPB signal standards, shall conform to ASTM A572 Grade 50. Shafts and caps
for Type PPB signal standards, slipfitters for type PS I, FB, and RM signal standards, and all
pipes shall conform to ASTM A53 Grade B. Base plates for light standards shall conform to
ASTM A572, Grade 50, except as otherwise noted in the Standard Plans for fixed base light
standards. Base plates for signal standards shall conform to ASTM A36. Connecting bolts
shall conform to ASTM F3125 Grade A325. Fasteners for handhole covers, bands on lighting
brackets, and connector attachment brackets shall conform to ASTM F593.
Light and signal standards shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111
and AASHTO M232.
Steel used for light and signal standards shall have a controlled silicon content of either
0.00 to 0.04 percent or 0.15 to 0.25 percent. Mill test certificates verifying the silicon content
of the steel shall be submitted to both the galvanizer and the Engineer prior to beginning
galvanizing operations.
9-29.6(1)A Vacant
9-29.6(2) Slip Base Hardware
Slip plates and anchor plates for light standards and for Type FB and RM signal standards
shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A572 Grade 50. The keeper plate shall be 28 gage,
conforming to ASTM A653 coating designation G 90. Clamping bolts for slip base assemblies
and slip base adapters shall conform to ASTM F3125 Grade A325. Studs and bolts for slip
base adapters shall conform to ASTM F3125 Grade A325. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A563
Grade DH. Hardened washers shall conform to ASTM F436. Plate washers shall conform to
ASTM A36, and also shall conform to the flatness tolerances specified in ASTM F436 for
circular washers.
Galvanized bolts shall meet Section 9-06.5(4).
9-29.6(3) Timber Light Standards, Timber Strain Poles, Timber Service Supports
All timber poles used in illumination or traffic signal systems shall be Douglas fir,
machine shaved, roof sawed, conforming to the latest ANSI Specifications and Dimensions
for Wood Poles.
All timber poles shall be gained according to industry standards. A dated nail or metallic
date plate shall be set in the gain evidencing the year of treatment of the timber pole.
All poles shall be treated with pentachlorophenol in accordance with Section 9-09.3(1).
Tops shall be sawed before treatment. Where holes are bored in poles to accommodate
hanging bolts for brackets, transformers, guy assemblies, or other accessories, such holes
shall be painted with a solution of the above preservative.
9-29.6(4) Welding
Welding of steel structures shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, latest edition,
Structural Welding Code, and Section 6-03.3(25).

9-29.6(5) Foundation Hardware

Anchor bolts for Type PPB, PS, I, FB, and RM signal standards shall conform to the
requirements of ASTM F1554, grade 55. Nuts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A563,
grade A. Washers shall meet the requirements of ASTM F844 or F436.
Anchor bolts, and associated nuts and washers, for Type CCTV, II, III, IV, and V signal
standards and luminaire poles shall conform to Section 9-06.5(4). Anchor rods conforming
to ASTM A449 may be substituted, provided that the galvanized ASTM A449 anchor
rods having an ultimate tensile strength above 145 ksi shall be tested for embrittlement in
accordance with either ASTM A143 (if the rod length is equal to or greater than five times
the bolt diameter) or ASTM F606 Section 7 (if the rod length is less than five times the
nominal bolt diameter).
All foundation hardware shall be 100 percent hot-dip galvanized in accordance with
AASHTO M111 and AASHTO M232.
9-29.7 Luminaire Fusing and Electrical Connections at Light Standard Bases,
Cantilever Bases, and Sign Bridge Bases
9-29.7(1) Unfused Quick-Disconnect Connector Kits
Unfused quick-disconnect connector kits shall conform to the following requirements:
1. The copper pin and copper receptacle shall be a crimped type of connection or a
stainless steel set screw and lug connection to the cable. The receptacle shall establish
contact pressure with the pin through the use of a tinned copper or copper beryllium
sleeve spring and shall be equipped with a disposable mounting pin. The receptacle
shall be fully annealed. Both the copper pin and receptacle shall have a centrally
located recessed locking area adapted to be complementarily filled and retained by
the rubber housing.
2. The plug and receptacle housing shall be made of water-resistant synthetic rubber that
is able to be buried in the ground or installed in sunlight. Each housing shall provide a
section to form a water-seal around the cable, have an interior arrangement to suitably
and complementarily receive and retain the copper pin or receptacle, and a section to
provide a water-seal between the two housings at the point of disconnection.
3. The kit shall provide waterproof in-line connector protection with three cutoff sections
on both the line and load side to accommodate various wire sizes. All connections shall
be as described in item “1” above. Upon disconnect, the connector shall remain in the
load side of the kit.
9-29.7(2) Fused Quick-Disconnect Kits
Fused quick-disconnect kits shall provide waterproof in-line fuse protection. The kit shall
provide three cutoff sections on both lines and load side to accommodate various wire sizes.
All connections shall be as described in item “1” above. Upon disconnect, the fuse shall
remain in the load side of the kit.
Fuses furnished for all lighting circuits shall be capable of handling the operating voltage
of the circuit involved and shall have the following characteristics:
1. Fuses shall be capable of indefinitely supporting 110 percent of the rated load.
2. Fuses shall be capable of supporting 135 percent of the rated load for approximately
1 hour.
3. A load of 200 percent of rated load shall effectively cause instantaneous blowing of
the fuse.
4. Fuses shall be rated as listed below and shall be sized to fit the fuse containers furnished
on this project, according to the manufacturer’s recommendations therefore.

5. Fuses shall be listed by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory.

Service Voltage
Luminaire Size 480V 240V 120V
1,000W 10A 15A 30A
750W 5A 10A 20A
700W 5A 10A 20A
400W 5A 10A 15A
310W 5A 5A 10A
250W 5A 5A 10A
200W 4A 5A 10A
175W 4A 5A 10A
150W 3A 4A 5A
100W 2A 3A 4A
70W 2A 2A 2A
50W 2A 2A 2A
LED* 10A 10A 20A
*Applies to all LED luminaires, regardless of wattage. Fuses for LED
luminaires shall be slow blow.
9-29.8 Vacant
9-29.9 Ballast, Transformers
Heat-generating components shall be mounted to use the portion of the luminaire upon
which they are mounted as a heat sink. Capacitors shall be located as far as practicable from
heat-generating components or shall be thermally shielded to limit the fixture temperature
to 160°F.
Transformers and inductors shall be resin-impregnated for protection against moisture.
Capacitors, except those in starting aids, shall be metal cased and hermetically sealed.
No capacitor, transformer, or other device shall employ the class of compounds identified
as polychlorinated biphenyls (PCB) as dielectric, coolants, or for any other purpose.
9-29.9(1) Ballast
Each ballast shall have a name plate attached permanently to the case listing all
electrical data.
A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 1-06.3, meeting
the manufacturer’s and these Specifications’ requirements, shall be submitted by the
Contractor with each type of luminaire ballast.
Ballasts shall be designed for continuous operation at ambient air temperatures from 20°F
without reduction in ballast life. Ballasts shall have a design life of not less than 100,000
hours. Ballasts shall be designed to operate for at least 180 cycles of 12 hours on and 12 hours
off, with the lamp circuit in an open or short-circuited condition and without measurable
reduction in the operating requirements. All ballasts shall be high power factor (90 percent).
Ballasts shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of current ANSI C 82.6,
Methods of Measurement of High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts. Starting aids for ballasts
of a given lamp wattage shall be interchangeable between ballasts of the same wattage and
manufacturer without adjustment.
Ballast assemblies shall consist of separate components, each of which shall be capable
of being easily replaced. A starting aid will be considered as a single component. Each
component shall be provided with screw terminals, NEMA tab connectors or a single multi-
circuit connector. All conductor terminals shall be identified as to the component terminal to
which they connect.

Ballasts for high-pressure sodium lamps shall have a ballast characteristic curve which
will intersect both of the lamp-voltage limit lines between the wattage limit lines and remain
between the wattage limit lines throughout the full range of lamp voltage. This requirement
shall be met not only at the rated input voltage of the ballast, but also the lowest and highest
input voltage for which the ballast is rated. Throughout the lifetime of the lamp, the ballast
curve shall fall within the specified limits of lamp voltage and wattage.
All luminaires ballasts shall be located within the luminaire housing. The only exception
shall be ballasts to be mounted on lowering assemblies and shall be external to, and attached
to the fixture assembly.
Ballast Characteristics for High Pressure Sodium (HPS) and Metal Halide (MH) Sources
shall be:
Input Voltage Lamp Wattage
Source Line Volt. Lamp Wattage Ballast Type Variation Variation
HPS any 70 400 Mag. Reg. Lag 10% 18%
HPS any 750 1000 Auto Reg. Lead CWA 10% 30%
MH any 175 400 Mag. Reg. Lag 10% 18%
MH any 1000 Auto Reg. Lead CWA 10% 30%
9-29.9(2) Transformers
The transformers to be furnished shall be indoor/outdoor dry type transformers rated
as shown in the Plans. The transformer coils, buss bar, and all connections shall be copper.
Transformers, 7.5 KVA and larger shall be supplied with two full capacity taps, one at
5 percent and one at 10 percent below the normal full capacity.
9-29.10 Luminaires
All luminaires shall have their components secured to the luminaire frame with ANSI 300
series chrome-nickel grade stainless steel, zinc dichromate-coated steel, or ceramic-coated
steel hardware. The luminaire slipfitter bolts shall be stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel,
zinc dichromate-coated steel, or ceramic-coated steel. All internal luminaire assemblies shall
be assembled on or fabricated from either stainless steel or galvanized steel. The housing,
complete with integral ballast, shall be weathertight.
The temperature rating of all wiring internal to the luminaire housing, excluding the pole
and bracket cable, shall equal or exceed 200°F.
All luminaires shall be provided with markers for positive identification of light source
type and wattage in accordance with ANSI C136.15-2011, with the exception that LED
luminaires shall be labeled with the wattage of their conventional luminaire equivalents – the
text “LED” is optional. Legends shall be sealed with transparent film resistant to dust, weather,
and ultraviolet exposure.
Legends shall correspond to the following code:
Conventional Conventional Equivalent
Lamp Wattage Wattage Legend LED Legend
70 7 7E
100 10 10E
150 15 15E
175 17 17E
200 20 20E
250 25 25E
310 31 31E
400 40 40E
700 70 70E
750 75 75E
1,000 X1 X1E
9-29.10(1) Conventional Roadway Luminaires

1. Conventional highway luminaires shall be IES Type III medium distribution cutoff
cobra head configuration with horizontal lamp, rated at 24,000 hours minimum.
2. The ballast shall be mounted on a separate exterior door, which shall be hinged to the
luminaire and secured in the closed position to the luminaire housing by means of
an automatic type of latch (a combination hex/slot stainless steel screw fastener may
supplement the automatic-type latch).
3. The reflector of all luminaires shall be of a snap-in design or secured with screws. The
reflector shall be manufactured of polished aluminum or molded from prismatically
formed borosilicate glass. The refractor or lens shall be mounted in a doorframe
assembly, which shall be hinged to the luminaire and secured in the closed position
to the luminaire by means of an automatic latch. The refractor or lens and doorframe
assembly, when closed, shall exert pressure against a gasket seat. The refractor lens
shall not allow any light output above 90 degrees nadir. Gaskets shall be composed of
material capable of withstanding the temperatures involved and shall be securely held
in place.
4. Each housing shall be provided with a four-bolt slipfitter capable of mounting on a
2-inch pipe tenon and capable of being adjusted within 5 degrees from the axis of the
tenon. The clamping bracket(s) and the cap screws of the slipfitter shall not bottom out
on the housing bosses when adjusted within the ±5-degree range.
No part of the slipfitter mounting brackets on the luminaires shall develop a permanent
set in excess of 0.2 inch when the cap screws used for mounting are tightened to a
torque of 32 pounds feet.
5. Refractors shall be formed from heat-resistant, high-impact, molded borosilicate
glass. Flat lenses shall be formed from heat-resistant, high-impact borosilicate or
tempered glass.
6. High-pressure sodium conventional roadway luminaires shall be capable of accepting
a 150, 200, 250, 310, or 400 watt lamp complete with ballast.
7. Housings shall be fabricated from aluminum. Painted housings shall be painted flat
gray, Federal Standard 595 color chip No. 26280. Housings that are painted shall
withstand a 1,000-hour salt spray test as specified in ASTM B117.
8. All luminaires to be mounted on horizontal mast arms shall be capable of withstanding
cyclic loading in:
a. A vertical plane at a minimum peak acceleration level of 3.0 g’s peak-to-peak
sinusoidal loading (same as 1.5 g’s peak), with the internal ballast removed,
for a minimum of 2 million cycles without failure of any luminaire parts, and;
b. A horizontal plane perpendicular to the direction of the mast arm at a minimum peak
acceleration level of 1.5 g’s peak-to-peak sinusoidal loading (same as 0.75 g’s peak),
with the internal ballast installed, for a minimum of 2 million cycles without failure
of any luminaire parts.
9. All luminaires shall have leveling reference points for both transverse and longitudinal
adjustment. Luminaires shall have slipfitters capable of adjusting through a 5-degree
axis for the required leveling procedure.
9-29.10(2) Decorative Luminaires
Decorative fixture shall provide for a 50 to 400 watt HPS lamp fully enclosed fixture with
mogul lamp socket, adjustable where required to alternate cutoff distributions.
The fixture shall be a one piece, raintight, dustight, and corrosion resistant integral unit.
The unit shall consist of an accessible ballast compartment and a sealed housing, which
permits filtered pressure equalization.
The ballast housing shall be adequately constructed to contain ballasts for 50 to 400 watt
alternate high-intensity discharge sources.

Each housing shall consist of an integral reflector, containing a mogul-based high-intensity

discharge lamp and a one-piece heat- and shock-resistant, clear-tempered lens mounted in a
gasketed hinged frame. The reflector shall be a snap-in design or secured with screws. The
reflector assembly shall have a lamp vibration damper. The reflector shall be manufactured
of polished aluminum or molded from prismatically formed borosilicate glass. The housing
shall have a heat-resistant finish. The lens frame shall be secured to the housing with ANSI
300 series chrome-nickel grade stainless steel, zinc dichromate-coated steel, or ceramic-coated
steel hardware.
The auxiliary equipment compartment for ballast terminals shall be separated from the
lamp compartment by a metal heat barrier. The chassis shall be designed to provide effective
heat sinking from the ballast cores.
The finish shall meet the requirements of ASTM B117, with the exception that the finish
shall be salt spray resistant after 300 hours exposure.
A slipfitter assembly shall be provided for leveling purposes, between fixture and tenon.
Two 7⁄16 inch or larger stainless steel bolts, series 300, shall be used to mount the fixture to the
tenon. An approved gasket shall be utilized to seal against weather. A smooth wireway shall
be provided.
All decorative fixtures shall be of the same manufacturer and external appearance.
9-29.10(3) Vacant
9-29.10(4) Underdeck and Wall Mount Luminaires
Underdeck luminaires shall be weatherproof and corrosion resistant. Light distribution
shall be as shown on the Contract. Each flush-mounted underdeck luminaire shall consist
of a metal body, a prismatic refractor mounted in a doorframe, a prismatic glass or specular
anodized aluminum reflector, a ballast, and a ceramic lamp socket and be supplied complete
with all fasteners. The body shall have provisions for anchoring to concrete. The refractor
shall be glass and shall be clearly identified as to “street side”. The doorframe assembly shall
be hinged, gasketed and secured to the body.
Each wall-mounted luminaire shall consist of a metal body, a prismatic refractor mounted
in a doorframe, an aluminum reflector with a specular anodized finish, an integral ballast and a
ceramic lamp socket and supplied with all fasteners. The refractor shall be glass. A gasket shall
be provided between the refractor and the body of the fixture.
All lamp sockets shall be positioned to locate the light center of the lamp within ½ inch of
the light center location for which the luminaire is designed.
Ballasts for underdeck and wall luminaires shall conform to the provisions in Section
9-29.9. Ballasts for underdeck and wall mount luminaires shall be installed in the luminaire
housing.
9-29.10(5) Sign Lighting Luminaires
Sign lighting luminaires shall be the Induction Bulb type.
9-29.10(5)A Sign Lighting Luminaires – Isolation Switch
The isolation switch shall be installed in a terminal cabinet per Section 9-29.25, with the
exception that the cabinet shall be NEMA 3R and stainless steel. The terminal cabinet shall be
installed in accordance with the Standard Plans. The switch shall be either single pole, single
throw, or double pole single throw as necessary to open all conductors to the luminaires other
than neutral and ground conductors. The switch shall contain 600-volt alternating current
(VAC) terminal strips on the load side with solderless lugs as required for each load-carrying
conductor plus four spare lugs per strip.
9-29.10(5)B Sign Lighting Fixtures-Induction
Sign lighting luminaires shall have a cast aluminum housing and door assembly with a
polyester paint finish.

Each fixture shall consist of a housing, a reflector, refractor or lens, lamp socket, lamp,
power coupler, a high frequency (HF) generator and a fuse block, door, front entry (the side
facing the sign) suitable for ½-inch conduit and mounting holes for attaching to a fixture
mounting plate. Any additional entries shall have suitable plugs. The sign lighting luminaire
shall be supported by a lighting bracket assembly as detailed in the Plans. The door shall be
hinged to the housing on the side of the fixture away from the sign panel and shall be provided
with two captive devices. The door shall be provided with the means to allow the door to be
locked in the open position 70 to 90 degree from the plane of the door opening. The juncture
of the door and housing shall be gasketed to provide a rain tight and dust tight joint.
Refractors or lens shall be manufactured from heat resistant glass. The refractor or lens
shall be shielded so that no light source is visible from the sign viewing approach. The shield
shall be an integral part of the door assembly. When called for in the Plans, fixtures shall be
provided with a wire guard to prevent damage to the refractor.
The ratio of the maximum to minimum illuminance level on a panel 10 feet high by
16 feet wide shall not numerically exceed 9:1 approaching 1:1. In addition, the illuminance
gradient shall not numerically exceed 2:1, illuminance gradient being defined as the ratio of
the minimum illuminance of a square panel 1 foot on a side to that of any adjacent panel of
the same size. This performance shall be obtained when the fixture is mounted 1 foot below
the bottom edge of the sign and 5 feet out from the sign face.
The average to minimum uniformity ratio for a panel as dimensioned above shall not
numerically exceed 4:1. Average initial illuminance shall exceed 10 foot candles for an
induction lamp of 85 watts as specified.
The system lifetime shall be rated at 60,000 hours with a failure rate of less than
10 percent. The system shall be rated at a nominal wattage of 85 W, 120/240 or 480V(ac).
The power factor of the system shall be greater than 90 percent and the total harmonic
distortion (THD) shall be less than 10 percent. The system shall be UL approved for wet
locations and be FCC Class A listed.
The mounting assembly shall be either cast aluminum, hot-dip galvanized steel plate
or steel plate that has been galvanized and finished with a polymeric coating system or the
same finish that is used for the housing. The overall weight of the fixture shall not exceed
44 pounds. The manufacturer’s brand name, trademark, model number, serial number and
date of manufacture shall be located on the packaged assembly and on the outside and inside
of the housing.
Housing
The housing shall have a door designed to hold a refractor or lens. The housing door
shall be designed to be opened without the use of tools. The housing and door shall have
polyester paint finish of a gray color resembling unfinished fabricated aluminum.
Reflector
The reflector may be designed to be removed as a unit that includes the lamp and
power coupler.
Lamp
Each fixture shall be furnished with an 85-W induction lamp. The interior lamp walls shall
be fluorescent phosphor coated. Lamp light output shall be not less than 70 percent at 60,000
hours. Lamps shall have a color-rendering index (CRI) of not less than 80. Lamps shall be
rated at a color temperature of 4,000 K. Lamps shall be removable without the use of tools.
Power Coupler
The power coupler shall consist of a construction base with antenna, heat sink and
electrical connection cable. The power coupler shall be designed so that it can be removed
with no more than common hand tools.
High Frequency Generator
High frequency (HF) generators shall provide reliable lamp starting and operation at
ambient temperatures down to -15°F for the rated life of the lamp.

The generator output frequency shall be 2.65 MHz ± 10 percent. The generator radio
frequency interference shall meet the requirements of Part 18 of the FCC.
High frequency generators shall be designed for continuous operation at ambient air
temperatures from -5°F to 80°F without reduction in generator life. High frequency generators
shall have a design life of not less than 100,000 hours at 130°F.
A Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, conforming to the provisions in Section
1-06.3, and a copy of the high frequency generator test methods and results shall be submitted
by the manufacturer with each lot of sign lighting fixtures. The certificate shall state that the
high frequency generators meet, in every respect, the above requirements and the generator
Specifications of the lamp manufacturer. High frequency generators shall also conform to
the following:
1. High frequency generators shall be capable of being easily replaced. All conductor
terminals shall be identified as to the component terminal to which they connect.
2. High frequency generators shall be mounted so as to use the portion of the sign
lighting fixture upon which they are mounted as a heat sink.
9-29.11 Control Equipment
Illumination circuits shall be controlled by a combination of photoelectric controls and
lighting contactors or mercury relays as noted in the Contract.
9-29.11(1) Time Clock Controls
Time clocks, when specified in the Contract, shall be solid state and shall have a battery
backup. The clock shall provide four functions and shall be enclosed within a dust tight
mounting case. The unit shall be mounted on vibration dampened fittings.
The unit shall be push button programmable with 15 events per week, selectable by day
of week and time of day to the nearest minute.
The clock shall be accurate to plus or minus 15 seconds per month through a humidity
variation of 0 to 95 percent and a temperature variation of 0ºF to 150ºF. The clock shall be
within plus or minus 10 seconds after 10 hours of battery backup operation. The backup
battery shall operate for 24 hours minimum.
Contacts shall be rated at 5 amps tungsten load for up to 100,000 cycles. Each clock
function shall operate a 120 VAC normally open and normally closed set of contacts.
9-29.11(2) Photoelectric Controls
The photoelectric control shall be the twistlock type and the light sensitive element shall
be a solid state photo diode. The control shall be designed to turn on at 3 foot-candles (32 lux)
and turn off at 1.8 foot-candles (20 lux). The lighting control shall not drift by more than
1 percent over a 10-year period.
The output control relay shall have a 45-second time delay to prevent false turn-off
caused by momentary brightness. This output relay shall be rated 1,000 watts incandescent
or 15 amps inductive load. The contacts shall be normally closed. The unit shall be designed
to not continuously pulse the output relay if the photo control bypass switch is energized.
The lighting control shall have a built in metal oxide varistor (MOV) rated 180 joules
for lightning and transient protection. The control shall also have secondary zener diode and
transient filter. The printed circuit board shall be coated to prevent corrosion. The normal
operating voltage range will be 105 to 285 VAC.
9-29.12 Electrical Splice Materials
Circuit splicing materials shall meet the following specifications.
9-29.12(1) Illumination Circuit Splices
Illumination circuit splices shall be split bolt vice-type connectors or solderless crimped
connections to securely join the wires, both mechanically and electrically, as defined in
Section 8-20.3(8).

9-29.12(1)A Heat Shrink Splice Enclosure

Heat shrink insulating materials shall be the moisture blocking mastic type meeting
Mil Spec I230053.
9-29.12(1)B Molded Splice Enclosure
Epoxy resin cast-type insulation shall employ a clear rigid plastic mold or a clear mylar
sheet bonded to butyrate web, forming a flexible mold. The material used shall be compatible
with the insulation material of the insulated conductor or cable. The component materials of
the resin insulation shall be packaged ready for convenient mixing without removing from
the package.
9-29.12(2) Traffic Signal Splice Material
Induction loop splices and magnetometer splices shall include an uninsulated barrel-type
crimped connector capable of being soldered. The insulating material shall be a heat shrink
type meeting requirements of Section 9-29.12(1)A, an epoxy resin cast type with clear rigid
plastic mold meeting the requirements of Section 9-29.12(1)B, or a re-enterable type with a
silicone-type filling compound that remains flexible and enclosed in a re-enterable rigid mold
that snaps together.
9-29.13 Control Cabinet Assemblies
Control cabinet assemblies shall include all necessary equipment and auxiliary equipment
for controlling the operation of traffic signals, programmable message signs, illumination
systems, ramp meters, data stations, CCTV, and similar systems as required for the specific
application. Traffic Signal Controller Cabinet Assemblies shall meet the requirements
of the NEMA TS1 and TS2 specification or the California Department of Transportation
“Transportation Electrical Equipment Specifications” (TEES) dated March 12, 2009 as defined
in this specification.
9-29.13(1) Environmental, Performance, and Test Standards for Solid-State Traffic
Controller Assemblies
The scope of this Specification includes the controller of solid-state design installed in a
weatherproof controller cabinet. The controller assembly includes the cabinet, controller unit,
load switches, signal conflict monitoring circuitry, accessory logic circuitry, AC line filters,
vehicle detectors, coordination equipment and interface, and preemption equipment. NEMA
control assemblies shall meet or exceed current NEMA TS 1 Environmental Standards.
Normal operation will be required while the control assembly is subjected to any combination
of high and low environmental limits (such as low voltage at high temperature with high
repetition noise transients). All other control equipment shall meet the environmental
requirements of California Department of Transportation “Transportation Electrical Equipment
Specifications” (TEES) dated March 12, 2009.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Contracting Agency all guarantees and warranties
furnished as a normal trade practice for all control equipment provided.
9-29.13(2) Traffic Signal Controller Assembly Testing
Each traffic signal controller assembly shall be tested as follows. The Contractor shall:
1. Prior to shipping, arrange appointment for testing at the WSDOT Materials Laboratory.
2. Assembly shall be defined as tightening all screws, nuts and bolts, verifying that
all wiring is clear of moving parts and properly secured, installing all pluggables,
connecting all cables and ensure that all Contract required documents are present,
proper documentation is provided, and all equipment required by the Contract
is installed.
3. The Contractor shall demonstrate that all of the functions required by the Contract
perform as intended. Demonstration shall include energizing the cabinet and verifying
that all 8 phases, 4 pedestrian movements and 4 overlaps (as required by the Contract
Provisions) operate per Section 9-29.13. The Contractor shall place the controller in

minimum recall with interval timing set at convenient value for testing purposes. Upon
a satisfactory demonstration the controller assembly will then be accepted by WSDOT
for testing.
4. If the assembly and acceptance for testing is not complete within 7 calendar days of
delivery, the Engineer may authorize the return of the assembly to the Contractor, with
collect freight charges to the Contractor.
5. WSDOT will test each traffic signal control assembly in accordance with the following
test methods, WSDOT T 421, T 422, T 423, T 424, T 425, T 427, and T 428.
6. If the traffic signal control assembly passes all testing, the Contractor will be notified
where the assembly is to be picked-up for delivery to the project. The Contractor shall
pick-up the assembly within 7 calendar days of notification.
7. If the traffic signal control assembly fails testing, the Contractor has 7 calendar days to
repair or replace any components that fail during the testing process at no cost to the
Contracting Agency. All repairs shall be completed during normal business hours for the
State Materials Lab. A failure shall be defined as a component that no longer functions
as intended under the conditions required or does not meet the requirements of the
Contract and is at the sole discretion of WSDOT. Once all repairs and replacement of
components is complete WSDOT will retest the traffic controller as specified in step 6
and all costs for retesting will be deducted from monies due or that may become due the
Contractor.
9-29.13(3) Traffic Signal Controller
The traffic signal controller shall conform to the Contract requirements and the applicable
Specifications as listed below: All solid-state electronic traffic-actuated controllers and their
supplemental devices shall employ digital timing methods.
1. NEMA control and all auxiliary equipment shall conform to current NEMA TS1 or TS2
Specification. Every pin of every connecting plug shall be utilized as described within
the NEMA requirement, except that those pins identified as “spare” or “future” shall
remain unused.
2. Type 170E controllers shall conform to the TEES. The 170E controller shall be
provided with a program card, one blank ROM chip, and two 64K non-volatile
memory chips.
3. Type 170E/HC-11 controllers shall conform to the current Oregon Department of
Transportation Specification for model 170E/HC-11 controller. The 170E controller
with the HC11 chip shall be compatible with the software specified in the Contract.
The controller shall be provided with one ROM chip and one 64K non-volatile
memory chip.
4. Type 2070 controllers shall conform to the TEES. The standard 2070 controller shall
consist of the following:
2070 2070E 2070N1
2070-5 VME cage
2070-1E CPU Card 2070-1E CPU Card 2070-1E CPU Card
2070-3B Front Panel 2070-3B Front Panel 2070-3B Front Panel
2070-4 Power Supply 2070-4 Power Supply 2070-4 Power Supply
2070-2A Field I/O 2070-2A Field I/O 2070-2B Field I/O
X X 2070-8 Interface
9-29.13(4) Traffic-Signal Controller Software
All traffic signal controllers shall operate with software specified in the contract.
Traffic-actuated controllers shall be electronic devices which, when connected to traffic
detectors or other means of actuation, or both, shall operate the electrical traffic signal system
at one or more intersections.

If the complete traffic controller defined in the Special Provision requires NTCIP
compliance the following are the minimum requirements for NTCIP operation.
Communication
The traffic controller hardware and software shall communicate with the central computer
in a polled multi-drop operation. In the polled multi-drop operation, several traffic controllers
shall share the same communication channel, with each controller assigned a unique ID
number. Controller ID numbers shall conform to the NTCIP requirements for address
numbers. A traffic controller shall only reply to messages labeled with its ID. In polled
multi-drop mode, traffic controllers never initiate communication, but merely transmit their
responses to messages from the central computer.
A laptop computer connected to the traffic controller’s local communication port shall have
the same control and diagnostic capabilities as the central computer. However, local laptop
control capability shall be limited to that traffic controller.
NTCIP Requirements
The traffic controller software shall comply with the National Transportation
Communications for ITS Protocol (NTCIP) documents and all related errata sheets published
before July 1, 1999 and as referenced herein.
The traffic controller software shall support the following standards:
1. NTCIP 1101, Simple Transportation Management Framework (STMF), Conformance
Level 1 (Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP))
2. NTCIP 2001, Class B Profile. All serial ports on the device shall support
communications according to these standards.
3. NTCIP 2101, SP-PMPP/RS232 Point-to-Multi-Point Protocol (PMPP)
4. NTCIP 2201, NTCIP TP-Null Transport Profile Null (TP-NULL)
The traffic controller software shall implement all mandatory objects of all mandatory
conformance groups as defined in NTCIP 1201, Global Object Definitions, and NTCIP 1202,
Object Definitions for Actuated Traffic Signal Controller Units. Software shall implement the
following conformance groups:
NTCIP 1202, Object Definitions for ASC
Conformance Group Reference
Configuration 1201 2.2
Time Management
Time Base Event Schedule
Report 2.5
Phase 1202 2.2
Rings 2.8
Detector 2.3
Unit 2.4
Preempt 2.7
Time Base 2.6
Coordination 2.5
Channel 2.9
Overlaps 2.10
The software shall implement the following optional objects:

Objects required by these specifications shall support all values within its standardized
range. The standardized range is defined by a size, range, or enumerated listing indicated in
the object’s SYNTAX field and/or through descriptive text in the object’s description field.
The following list indicates the modified object requirements for these objects.

Object Name Object ID

Global Configuration moduleType Value 3
dBCreateTransaction All Values
Database Management
dBErrorType All values
Time Management globslDaylightSavings Values 2 and 3
maxTimeBaseScheduleEntries 16
Timebase Events Schedule MaxDayPlans 15
MaxDayEvents 10
maxEventLogCongifs 50
MventConfigMode Values 2 thru 5
Report mventConfigAction Values 2 and 3
MaxEventLogSize 255
MaxEventClasses 7
PMPP maxGroupAddress 2
maxPhases 8
pPhaseStartp Values 2 thru 6
ASC Phase
phaseOptions All Values
maxPhaseGroups 1
maxRings 2
Rings
maxSequences 16
maxVehicleDetectors 64
Detector vehicleDetectorOptions All Values
maxPedestrianDetector 8
unitAutoPedestrianClear All Values
unitControlStatus All Values
Unit unitFlashStatus All Values
unitControl All Values
maxAlarmGroups 1
Special Function maxSpecialFunctionsOutputs 8
coordCorrectionMode Values 2 thru 4
coordMaximumMode Values 2 thru4
coordForceMode Values 2 and 3
maxPatterns 48
Coordination
patternTableType Either 2,3 or 4
maxSplits 16
splitMode Values 2 thru 7
localFreeStatus Values 2 thru 11
Time Base maxTimebaseAscAction 48
maxPreempts 4
Preempt preemptControl All Values
preemptState Values 2 thru 9
maxOverlaps 4
Overlaps overlapType Value 2 and 3
maxOverlapstatusGroup 1
maxChannels 16
channelControlGroup Values 2 thru 4
Channels channelFlash Value 0,2,4,6,8,10,12 and 14
channelDim Values 0 thru 15
maxChannelStatusGroup 2
maxPortAddresses 18
TS 2 Port 1
port1Table Values 2 and 3
*Values in excess of the minimum requirement are considered to meet the specification.

Documentation
Software shall be supplied with all documentation on a CD. ASCII versions of the
following Management Information Base (MIB) files in Abstract Syntax Notation 1 (ASN.1)
format shall be provided on CD-ROM:
1. The official MIB Module referenced by the device functionality.
2. A manufacturer-specific version of the official MIB Module with the non-standardized
range indicated in the SYNTAX field. The filename shall match the official MIB
Module, with the extension “spc”.
3. A MIB Module of all manufacturer-specific objects supported by the device with
accurate and meaningful DESCRIPTION fields and the supported ranges indicated in
the SYNTAX field.
9-29.13(5) Flashing Operations
All traffic signals shall be equipped for flashing operation of signal displays. Controllers
and cabinets shall be programmed for flashing red displays for all approaches. During flashing
operation, all pedestrian circuits shall be de-energized.
Actuated traffic signal control mechanisms shall be capable of entry into flash operation
and return to stop-and-go operation as follows:
1. Terminal Strip Input (Remote Flash). When called as a function of a terminal strip
input, the controller shall provide both sequenced entry into flash and sequenced return
to normal operation consistent with the requirements of the latest edition of the Manual
on Uniform Traffic Control Devices.
2. Police Panel Switch. When the flash-automatic switch located behind the police panel
door is turned to the flash position, the signals shall immediately revert to flash; and, the
controller shall have a stop time input applied. When the switch is placed on automatic,
the controller shall immediately time an 6 second all red period then resume stop-and-
go operations at the beginning of major street green.
3. Controller Cabinet Switches. When the flash-automatic switch located inside the
controller cabinet is placed in the flash position, the signals shall immediately revert to
flash; however, the controller shall not have a stop time input applied. When the flash-
automatic switch is placed in the automatic position, the controller shall immediately
time a 6 second all red period, then resume stop-and-go operation at the beginning of
the major green.
4. Power Interruption. On “NEMA” controllers any power interruption longer than 475
plus or minus 25 milliseconds, signals shall re-energize consistent with No. 2 above
to ensure an 6-second flash period prior to the start of major street green. A power
interruption of less than 475 plus or minus 25 milliseconds shall not cause resequencing
of the controller and the signal displays shall re-energize without change. Type 170
controllers shall re-energize consistent with No. 2 above after a power interruption of
1.75 plus or minus 0.25 seconds. The 6-second flash period will not be required. Any
power interruption to a 2070 type controller shall result in a 6 second flash period once
power is restored.
5. Conflict Monitor. Upon detecting a fault condition the conflict monitor shall
immediately cause the signal to revert to flash and the controller to stop time. After the
conflict monitor has been reset, the controller shall immediately take command of the
signal displays at the beginning of major street green.
9-29.13(6) Emergency Preemption
Immediately after a valid call has been received, the preemption equipment shall cause
the controller to terminate the appropriate phases as necessary with the required clearance
intervals and enter any programed subsequent preemption sequence. Preemption sequences
shall be as noted in the Contract.

9-29.13(7) Wiring Diagrams

Schematic wiring diagrams of the controllers, cabinets and auxiliary equipment shall be
submitted when the assemblies are delivered. The diagram shall show in detail all circuits and
parts. The parts shall be identified by name or number in a manner readily interpreted. Two
hard copies of the cabinet wiring diagram and component wiring diagrams shall be furnished
with each cabinet and a pdf file of the cabinet wiring and component drawings. The schematic
drawing shall consist of a single sheet, detailing all circuits and parts, not to exceed 52-inches
by 72-inches. The cabinet wiring diagram shall indicate and identify all wire terminations, all
plug connectors, and the locations of all equipment in the cabinet. Included in the diagram
shall be an intersection sketch identifying all heads, detectors, and push buttons and a
phase diagram.
9-29.13(8) Generator Transfer Switch
When specified in the contract, a generator transfer switch shall be included. The Generator
Transfer Switch shall be capable of switching power from a utility power source to an external
generator power source.
The Transfer Switch enclosure shall be of identical materials and dimensions and
installation methods as the Police Panel type enclosure specified in the first paragraph of
Special Provision 9-29.13(10)D except that the enclosure door shall include a spring loaded
construction core lock capable of accepting a Best 6-pin CX series core. The core lock shall
be installed with a green construction core. Upon contract completion, two master keys for the
construction core shall be delivered to the Engineer.
The enclosure shall include the following Transfer Switch equipment:
1. One Nema L5-30P Flanged Inlet generator connector
2. One Utility power indicator light
3. One generator indicator light
4. Two 30 amp, 120 volt, single pole, single phase, circuit breakers. One circuit breaker
shall be labeled “Generator” and the other circuit breaker shall be labeled “Utility”.
Both labels shall be engraved phenolic name plates.
5. A mechanical lock out feature that prevents the Utility circuit breaker and the Generator
circuit breaker from being in the ON position at the same time. The circuit breakers
shall be capable of being independently switched.
6. The conductors from the Generator Transfer Switch enclosure to the cabinet circuit
breaker shall be enclosed in nylon mesh sleeve.
7. The enclosure door shall be labeled with the letters “GTS”.
9-29.13(9) Vacant
9-29.13(10) NEMA, Type 170E, 2070 Controllers and Cabinets
9-29.13(10)A Auxiliary Equipment for NEMA Controllers
The following auxiliary equipment shall be furnished and installed in each cabinet for
NEMA traffic-actuated controllers:
1. A solid-state Type 3 NEMA flasher with flash-transfer relay which will cut in the
flasher and isolate the controller from light circuits. See Section 9-29.13(5) for
operational requirements.
2. Modular solid state relay load switches of sufficient number to provide for each vehicle
phase (including future phases if shown in the Plans), each pedestrian phase and
preemption sequence indicated in the Contract. Type P & R cabinets shall include a
fully wired 16-position back panel. Solid-state load switches shall conform to NEMA
standards except only optically isolated load switches will be allowed. Load switches
shall include indicator lights on the input and output circuits. The controller cabinet
shall have all cabinet wiring installed for eight vehicle phases, four pedestrian phases,
four emergency pre-empts, four overlaps (OL A, B, C, D).

3. A power panel with:

a. A control-display breaker sized to provide 125 percent overload protection for all
control equipment and signal displays, 20 ampere minimum.
b. A 15 ampere accessory breaker wired parallel to the control display breaker.
The breaker will carry accessory loads, including vent fan, cabinet light, plug
receptacle, etc.
c. A busbar isolated from ground and unfused for the neutral side of power supply.
d. A radio interference suppresser installed at the input power point. Interference
suppressers shall be of a design which will minimize interference in both broadcast
and aircraft frequencies, and shall provide a minimum attenuation of 50 decibels
over a frequency range of 200 kilohertz to 75 megahertz when used in connection
with normal installations. The interference filters furnished shall be hermetically
sealed in a substantial case filled with a suitable insulating compound. Terminals
shall be nickel plated, 10-24 brass studs of sufficient external length to provide space
to connect two 8 AWG wires, and shall be so mounted that they cannot be turned in
the case.
Ungrounded terminals shall be insulated from each other and shall maintain a
surface leakage distance of not less than ½-inch between any exposed current
conductor and any other metallic parts with an insulation factor of 100-200
megohms dependent on external circuit conditions.
Suppressers shall be designed for operations on 50 amperes, 125 volts, 60 cycles,
single wire circuits, and shall meet standards of the Underwriters’ Laboratories and
the Radio Manufacturers Association.
e. A Surge Protection Device connected to the controller power circuit for protection
against voltage abnormalities of 1 cycle or less duration. The Surge Protection
Device shall be a solid state high energy circuit containing no spark gap, gas tube,
or crow bar component. The device shall provide transient protection between
neutral and ground, line and ground, as well as line and neutral. If the protection
circuits fail, they shall fail to an open circuit condition. The minimum interrupting
capacity shall be 10,000 Amps. The Voltage Protection Rating shall be 600 volts
or less when subjected to an impulse of 6,000 volts, 3,000 amp source impedance,
8.0/20 microsecond waveform as described in UL 1449. In addition, the device
shall dissipate a 13,000 Amp or greater repeated single peak 8/20 microsecond
current impulse, and withstand, without failure or permanent damage, one full
cycle at 264 volts RMS. The device shall contain circuitry to prevent self-induced
regenerative ringing. There shall be a failure warning indictor which shall illuminate
a red light or extinguish a green light when the device has failed and is no
longer operable.
f. Cabinet ground busbar independent (150K ohms minimum) of neutral.
4. A police panel located behind the police panel door with a flash automatic switch
and a control-display power line on-off switch. See Section 9-29.13(5) for
operational requirements.
5. An auxiliary control panel located inside the controller cabinet with a flash-automatic
switch and a controller on-off switch. See Section 9-29.13(5) for operational
requirements. A three wire 15 ampere plug receptacle with grounding contact and
15 ampere ground fault interrupter shall also be provided on the panel.
6. A conflict monitor conforming to NEMA standards. See Section 9-29.13(5) for
operational requirements. The unit shall monitor conflicting signal indications at the
field connection terminals. The unit shall be wired in a manner such that the signal will
revert to flash if the conflict monitor is removed from service.
Supplemental loads not to exceed 10 watts per monitored circuit or other means, shall
be provided to prevent conflict monitor actuation caused by dimming or lamp burn-
out. Supplemental loads shall be installed on the control side of the field terminals.
Conflict monitors shall include a minimum of one indicator light for each phase used.
The monitoring capacity of the unit shall be compatible with the controller frame size.
Conflict monitors shall include a program card.
7. A “Detector Panel”, as specified in Section 9-29.13(10)B, shall be installed. The panel
shall be mounted on the inside of the front cabinet door. The detector panel shall be
constructed as a single unit. Detector switches with separate operate, test, and off
positions shall be provided for each field detector input circuit. A high intensity light
emitting diode (LED) shall be provided for each switch. The lamp shall energize upon
vehicle, pedestrian or test switch actuation. The test switch shall provide a spring loaded
momentary contact that will place a call into the controller. When in the OFF position,
respective detector circuits will be disconnected. In the operate position, each respective
detector circuit shall operate normally. Switches shall be provided on the panel with
labels and functions as follows:
a. Display On — Detector indicator lights shall operate consistent with their
respective switches.
b. Display Off — Detector indicator lights shall be de-energized.
A means of disconnecting all wiring entering the panel shall be provided. The
disconnect shall include a means to jumper detection calls when the display panel
is disconnected. All switches on the panel shall be marked with its associated Plan
detector number. All markers shall be permanent.
8. Insulated terminal blocks of sufficient number to provide a termination for all field
wiring. A minimum of 12 spare terminals shall be provided. Field wire connection
terminal blocks shall be 600 volt, heavy duty, barrier type, except loop detector lead-
ins, which may be 300 volt. The 600 volt type terminal strips shall be provided with
a field-side and a control-side connector separated by a marker strip. The 300 volt type
shall have a marker strip, installed on the right side of vertical terminal strips or below
horizontal terminal strips. The marker strip shall bear the circuit number indicated in
the Plans and shall be engraved. Each connector shall be a screw type with No. 8 post
capable of accepting no less than three 12 AWG wires fitted with spade tips.
9. A vent fan with adjustable thermostat. The minimum CFM rating of the fan shall exceed
three times the cabinet volume.
10. All wiring within the cabinet, exclusive of wiring installed by the signal controller
manufacturer, shall have insulation conforming to the requirements of Section
9-29.3. Cabinet wiring shall be trimmed to eliminate all slack and shall be laced or
bound together with nylon wraps or equivalent. All terminals, shall be numbered and
permanently identified with PVC or polyolefin wire marking sleeve consistent with
the cabinet wiring diagram provided by the signal controller manufacturer and the
Contract. The cabinet will be completely wired so that the only requirement to make a
field location completely operational is to attach field power and ground wiring. Internal
cabinet wiring shall not utilize the field side connections of the terminal strip intended
for termination of field wires.
11. Cabinet wiring diagram and component wiring diagrams meeting the requirements of
Section 9-29.13(7) shall be furnished with each cabinet. Each cabinet shall be equipped
with a, shelf mounted roll out drawer mounted directly below the controller to house
one or more cabinet wiring diagrams. The cabinet wiring diagram shall indicate and
identify all wire terminations, all plug connectors, and the locations of all equipment in
the cabinet. Included in the diagram shall be an intersection sketch identifying all heads,
detectors, and push buttons; and a phase diagram.
12. Each vehicle detector amplifier, video detection output channel pedestrian call isolation
unit, phase selector, discriminator, and load switch shall be identified with semi-
permanent stick-on type label. The following information shall be included:

a. Vehicle Detector Amplifier Channel

i. Loop number
ii. Assigned phase(s)
b. Ped Call Isolation Unit
i. Push button number
c. Load Switches
i. Signal head number
d. Phase Selectors
i. Circuit Letter
ii. Phase(s) called
The label shall be placed on the face of the unit. It shall not block any switch, light, or
operational words on the unit. The lettering on this label shall be neat, legible, and easily read
from a distance of approximately 6-feet.
9-29.13(10)B Auxiliary Equipment for Type 170E, 2070 Assemblies
The following requirements apply to required auxiliary equipment furnished with Type
170E, 170E-HC-11 and 2070 controllers:
1. Flashers, flash transfer relays, conflict monitor, AC isolators, DC isolators, discriminator
modules, program modules, modem modules, breakers, buses, police panel switches,
receptacle requirement, vent fan and auxiliary control panel switches shall conform
to the requirements noted in the TEES.
2. Flashing operation shall conform to Section 9-29.13(5), except the 6-second flash
period described in Item 2 of that section will not be required. Emergency preemption
shall conform to Section 9-29.13(6).
3. Input and output terminals shall be installed with a marking strip with field wire
numbers noted in the Contract embossed on the strip. All cabinet and field conductor
shall have a PVC or polyolefin wire marking sleeve installed, matching the input and
output terminals above. Marking on sleeves shall be embossed or type written.
4. The input panel terminal blocks TB 2 through TB 9 and associated cable to the input
files as described in the TEES shall be provided in all control assemblies.
5. Supplemental load resistor, not less than 2000 ohms and not greater than 5000 ohms not
to exceed 10 watts per monitored circuit, shall be provided to prevent conflict monitor
actuation caused by dimming or lamp burn-out.
An individual supplemental load resistor shall be installed within the output file, and
shall be installed on each of the following terminal circuits:
FT1-105 (SP 4P-Y) FT1-111 (SP 8P-Y) FT2-114 (SP 2P-Y) FT2-120 (SP 6P-Y)
FT2-117 (SP 3-Y) FT2-118 (SP 3-G) FT2-123 (SP 7-Y) FT2-124 (SP 7-G)
FT3-126 (SP 1-Y) FT3-127 (SP 1-G) FT3-132 (SP 5-Y) FT3-133 (SP 5-G)
6. Load switches of sufficient quantity to fully populate the output files shall conform to
TEES and shall have indicator lights on input and output circuits.
7. A detection panel, which shall be constructed as a single unit. Detector switches with
separate operate, test, and off positions shall be provided for each field detector input
circuit. A high intensity light emitting diode (LED) shall be provided for each switch.
The lamp shall energize upon vehicle, pedestrian or test switch actuation. The test
switch shall provide a spring loaded momentary contact that will place a call into the
controller. When in the OFF position, respective detector circuits will be disconnected.
In the operate position, each respective detector circuit shall operate normally. Switches
shall be provided on the panel with labels and functions as follows:

a. Display On – Detector indicator lights shall operate consistent with their respective
switches.
b. Display Off – Detector indicator lights shall be de-energized.
A means of disconnecting all wiring entering the panel shall be provided. The
disconnect shall include a means to jumper detection calls when the display panel
is disconnected. All switches on the panel shall be marked with its associated Plan
detector number. All markers shall be permanent.
8. A “Detector Termination and Interface Panel” shall be provided. When viewing the
cabinet from the back, the panel shall be located on the upper left hand side of the
cabinet. The panel shall be electrically located between the “detection Panel” and the
C-1 connector. The panel shall utilize insulated terminal blocks and each connector
shall be a screw type with post.
9. Each switchpack socket shall have pin 11 common to Neutral.
10. The AC input Service Panel Assembly (SPA), line voltage filter, transient surge
protection and all neutral bus bars and equipment ground bus bars shall be on the right
side of the cabinet, mounted no more that 18 inches from the bottom of the cabinet
when viewed from the rear, and meet the requirements described in TEES.
11. The PED yellow terminals on the CMU edge connector shall be extended with a 2 foot
wire, coiled, heat shrink tipped and labeled for the correct corresponding terminal
as CH-13Y/CMU-8, CH-14Y/CMU-11, CH-15Y/CMU-K, CH-16Y/CMU-N.
12. An “Absence of Red Programming Assembly” shall be provided. There shall be
provided on the back panel of the output file, 17 accessible jumper plug attachment
areas, made up of three male pins per position (one, for each conflict monitor channel
and one for red enable function). Each jumper plug shall be a two position connector,
It shall be possible, by inserting and positioning one of the 16 connectors on the right
two pins on the monitor board, to apply 120 VAC into a corresponding channel of
the conflict monitor red channels. The connection between the red monitor board and
the conflict monitor shall be accomplished via a 20 pin ribbon cable and the industry
standard P-20 connector that attaches on the front panel of the monitor. It shall be
possible, by inserting and positioning one of the 16 jumper plugs on the two left pins
on the monitor board, to enable the corresponding channel to monitor for red fault by
the conflict monitor. There shall be installed on the red monitor board a red fail monitor
disable function that controls the 120 VAC red enable signal into the conflict monitor.
During stop-and –go operation, 120VAC is sent via pin #20 on the P20 connector to
enable red failure monitoring on the conflict monitor by having the connector moved to
the side labeled “Red Enable”. If this is disengaged by moving the connector to the side
labeled “Red Relay”, then 120VAC is removed from pin #20, and the conflict monitor
will no longer monitor for red fail faults. The red enable function will also be wired
such that if the traffic signal is in cabinet flash, then there will be no voltage on pin #20,
and the conflict monitor will not monitor for red fail faults.
13. Each cabinet shall be provided with at least 20 empty neutral connections to
accommodate field wiring. The neutral bus bars shall be of the style in which a
lug is not needed to be applied to the neutral field wire(s). All of the neutral bars
shall be secured in accordance with the TEES. All neutral bars shall be at the same
electrical potential.
14. The main breaker on the SPA shall be provided with a cover to prevent accidental
tripping. The cover shall be removable and replaceable without the use of tools.
15. Equipment Branch Breaker –The duplex receptacle on the rear of either PDA #2L or 3L
shall be wired in parallel with the ground fault current interrupt receptacle on the front
of the power supply. The ground fault current interrupt receptacle being in the “Test”
mode shall not remove power to the rear receptacle.

9-29.13(10)C NEMA Controller Cabinets
Each NEMA traffic controller shall be housed in a weatherproof cabinet conforming to the
1. Construction shall be of 0.073-inch minimum thickness series 300 stainless steel or
0.125 minimum thickness 5052 H32 ASTM B209 alloy aluminum. The stainless steel
shall be annealed or one-quarter-hardness complying with ASTM A666 stainless steel
sheet. Cabinets may be finished inside with an approved finish coat of exterior white
enamel. If no other coating is specified in the Contract Provisions the exterior of all
cabinets shall be bare metal. All controller cabinets shall be furnished with front and
rear doors.
2. The cabinet shall contain shelving, brackets, racks, etc., to support the controller and
auxiliary equipment. All equipment shall set squarely on shelves or be mounted in
racks and shall be removable without turning, tilting, or rotating or relocating one
device to remove another. A 24 slot rack or racks shall be installed. The rack(s) shall be
wired for 2 channel loop detectors and as follows. Slots 1 & 2 phase 1 loop detectors.
Slots 3, 4, & 5 phase 2 loop detectors. Slots 6 & 7 phase 3 loop detectors. Slots 8, 9,
& 10 phase 4 loop detectors. Slots 11 & 12 phase 5 loop detectors. Slots 13, 14, &
15 phase 6 loop detectors. Slots 16 & 17 phase 7 loop detectors. Slots 18, 19 & 20
phase 8 loop detectors. Slot 21 upper phase 1 loop detector. Slot 21 lower phase 5
detector. Slot 22 wired for a 2 channel discriminator channels A, C. Slot 23 wired for
a 2 channel discriminator, channels B, D. Slot 24 wired for a 4 channel discriminator,
wired for channel A, B, C, and D. All loop detector slots shall be wired for presence/
pulse detection/extension. If an external power supply is required in order for the
entire racks(s) to be powered it shall be installed. All rack(s) slots shall be labeled with
engraved identification strips.
3. Additional detection utilizing the “D” connector shall be installed in accordance with
the Contract. The cabinet shall be of adequate size to properly house the controller
and all required appurtenances and auxiliary equipment in an upright position with
a clearance of at least 3-inches from the vent fan and filter to allow for proper air flow.
In no case shall more than 70 percent of the cabinet volume be used. There shall be
at least a 2-inch clearance between shelf mounted equipment and the cabinet wall
or equipment mounted on the cabinet wall.
4. The cabinet shall have an air intake vent on the lower half of the front door, with
a 12-inch by 16-inch by 1-inch removable throw away filter, secured in place with
a spring-loaded framework.
5. The cabinet door(s) shall be provided with:
a. Cabinet doors shall each have a three point latch system. Locks shall be spring
loaded construction locks capable of accepting a Best 6 pin core. A 6 pin
construction core of type (blue, green, or Red) specified in the contract shall be
installed in each core lock. One core removal key and two standard keys shall be
included with each cabinet and delivered to the Engineer.
b. A police panel assembly shall be installed in the front door and shall have a stainless
steel hinge pin and a police panel lock. Two police keys with shafts a minimum
of 1¾-inches long shall be provided with each cabinet.
c. All doors and police panel door shall have one piece, closed cell, neoprene gaskets.
d. A two position doorstop assembly.
6. LED light strips shall be provided for cabinet lighting. Each LED light strip shall be
approximately 12 inches long, have a minimum output of 320 lumens, and have a color
temperature of 4100K (cool white) or higher. Two light strips shall be provided. One
light strip shall be ceiling mounted and oriented parallel to the door face. The second
light strip shall be mounted under the lower shelf, such that the output terminal landings
are illuminated. Lighting shall not interfere with the proper operation of any other
ceiling or shelf mounted equipment. All lighting fixtures shall energize automatically
when any door is opened. Each door switch shall be labeled “Light”.
9-29.13(10)D Cabinets for Type 170E and 2070 Controllers

Type 170E and 2070 controllers shall be housed in a model 332L cabinet unless specified
otherwise in the contract. Type 332L cabinets shall be constructed in accordance with TEES
with the following modifications:
1. Each door shall be furnished with the equipment listed in Section 9-29.13(10)C item
5 above.
2. The cabinet shall be furnished with auxiliary equipment described in
Section 9-29.13(10)B.
3. The cabinet shall be fabricated of stainless steel or sheet aluminum in accordance with
Section 9-29.13(10)C, Item 1 above. Painted steel, painted or anodized aluminum is
not allowed.
4. A disposable paper filter element with dimensions of 12ʺ × 6ʺ × 1ʺ shall be provided
in lieu of a metal filter. The filter shall be secured in the filter holder with a louvered
aluminum cover. The maximum depth of the cover shall not be more than 0.5ʺ inch
to provide the filter to be flush against the door. No incoming air shall bypass the
filter element.
5. Field wire terminals shall be labeled in accordance with the Field Wiring Chart.
6. LED light strips shall be provided for cabinet lighting, powered from the Equipment
breaker on the Power Distribution Assembly. Each LED light strip shall be
temperature of 4100K (cool white) or higher. There shall be two light strips for each
rack within the cabinet. Lighting shall be ceiling mounted – rack mounted lighting is
not permitted. One light strip shall be installed above the front of the rack, oriented
parallel to the door face, and placed such that the front of the rack and the rack mounted
equipment is illuminated. The second light strip shall be installed above the rear of
the rack, oriented perpendicular to the door face, and placed such that the interior of
the rack is illuminated. Lighting shall not interfere with the proper operation of any
other ceiling mounted equipment. All lighting fixtures above a rack shall energize
automatically when either door to that respective rack is opened. Each door switch shall
be labeled “Light”.
7. One drawer shelf, as shown in the TEES
8. 332D Controller Cabinet
a. The 332D Controller cabinet shall have the appearance of two Type 332 controller
cabinets joined at opposing sides. The outside Dimensions of the cabinet shall be
67ʺ High × 48½ʺ Wide × 30¼ʺ Deep.
b. The right side of the cabinet, as viewed from the front, shall be considered the
Signal Control side. The left side of the cabinet, when viewed from the front, shall
be considered the ITS/COMM side.
c. One police access panel shall be installed on the right side of the cabinet, as viewed
from the front.
d. Two cabinet lights shall be provided one on each side and as described in
Section 9-29.13(10)D6.
e. The Traffic Signal Control side of the cabinet shall contain the Traffic Signal
Controller assembly and shall be furnished with equipment as described in the
contract specifications. The Traffic Signal Control side of the cabinet shall also meet
all the additional equipment requirements of the Type 332 Signal Controller cabinet
as indicated in the contract specifications.
f. The ITS/COMM side of the cabinet shall contain ITS and Communication
equipment and shall be furnished with the following:
1. One controller shelf unit, mounted 36 inches from the bottom of the cabinet
opening to the front of the cabinet and attaching to the front rails of the EIA rack,

shall be provided. The shelf shall be fabricated from aluminum and shall contain
a rollout flip-top drawer for storage of wiring diagrams and manuals.
2. One aluminum sheet metal panel, ⅛ʺ × 15ʺ × 54ʺ, shall be installed to the rear
of the cabinet on the right hand (when facing the front) side railing.
3. Additional ITS and Communication equipment as described in the Contract Plans
and the ITS section of the Contract Special Provisions.
9-29.13(11) Traffic Data Accumulator and Ramp Meters
All cabinets designated for use as a traffic data or ramp meter shall be Type 334L cabinets
furnished to meet the TEES with the modifications listed in Section 9-29.13(10)D and include
the following accessories:
1. Each cabinet shall be equipped with a fully operable controller equipped as specified in
the Contract Provisions.
2. Two input files, shall be provided.
3. The PDA #3L shall contain three Model 200 Load Switches.
A second transfer relay, Model 430, shall be mounted on the rear of the PDA #3L and
wired as shown in the Plans.
4. Police Panel shall contain only one DPDT toggle switch. The switch shall be labeled
POLICE CONTROL, ON-OFF.
5. Display Panel
a. General
Each cabinet shall be furnished with a display panel. The panel shall be mounted,
showing and providing detection for inputs and specified controller outputs, at the
top of the front rack above the controller unit. The display panel shall be fabricated
from brushed aluminum and constructed according to the detail in the Plans.
b. Text
All text on the detector panel shall be black in color and silk screened directly to the
panel except the Phenolic detector and cabinet nameplates.
A nameplate for each loop shall be engraved with a ¼-inch nominal text according
to the ITS Field Wiring Charts. The nameplates shall be permanently affixed to the
detector panel.
c. LEDs
The LEDs for the display panel shall meet the following Specifications:
Case size T 1-¾
Viewing angle 50° minimum
Brightness 8 Milli candelas
LEDs with RED, YELLOW or GREEN as part of their labels shall be red,
yellow or green in color. All other LEDs shall be red. All LEDs shall have tinted
diffused lenses.
d. Detector panel Control Switch
Each display panel shall be equipped with one detector display control switch on the
panel with labels and functions as follows:
ON
Detector panel LEDs shall operate consistent with their separate switches.
OFF
All detector indicator LEDs shall be de-energized. Detector calls shall continue
to reach the controller.
TEST
All detector indicator LEDs shall illuminate and no calls shall be placed to the
controller.

e. Advance Warning Sign Control Switch

Each display panel shall be equipped with one advance warning sign control switch
on the panel with labels and functions as follows:
AUTOMATIC
Sign Relay shall energize upon ground true call from controller.
SIGN OFF
Sign Relay shall de-energize.
SIGN ON
Sign Relay shall energize.
f. Sign Relay
The sign relay shall be plugged into a socket installed on the rear of the display
panel. The relay shall be wired as shown in the Plans. The relay coil shall draw
(or sink) 50 milliamperes ± 10 percent from the 170E/HC11 controller and have
a DPDT contact rating not less than 10 amperes. A 1N4004 diode shall be placed
across the relay coil to suppress voltage spikes. The anode terminal shall be
connected to terminal #7 of the relay as labeled in the p lans. The relay shall energize
when the METERING indicator LED is lit.
g. Detector Input Indicators
One LED and one spring-loaded two-position SPST toggle switch shall be provided
for each of the 40 detection inputs. These LEDs and switches shall function
as follows:
TEST
When the switch is in the test position, a call shall be placed to the controller
and energize the associated LED. The switch shall automatically return to the
run position when it is released.
RUN
In the run position the LEDs shall illuminate for the duration of each call to
the controller.
h. Controller Output Indicators
The display panel shall contain a series of output indicator LEDs mounted below
the detection indicators. The layout shall be according to the detail in the Plans.
These LEDs shall illuminate upon a ground true output from the controller via the
C5 connector.
The output indicator LEDs shall have resistors in series to drop the voltage from
24 volts DC to their rated voltage and limit current below their rated current. The
anode connection of each LED to +24 VDC shall be wired through the resistor.
i. Connectors
Connection to the display panel shall be made by three connectors, one pin (labeled
P2) and one socket (labeled P1) and one labeled C5. The P1 and P2 connectors shall
be 50-pin cannon D series, or equivalent 50 pin connectors and shall be compatible
such that the two connectors can be connected directly to one another to bypass
the input detection. Wiring for the P1, P2 and C5 connectors shall be as shown in
the Plans.
The Contractor shall install wire connectors P1, P2, C1P, C2, C4, C5 and C6
according to the pin assignments shown in the Plans.
6. Model 204 Flasher Unit
Each Model 334 ramp meter cabinet shall be supplied with one Model 204 sign flasher
unit mounted on the right rear side panel. The flasher shall be powered from T1-2. The
outputs from the flasher shall be wired to T1-5 and T1-6.

7. Fiber Optic Patch Panel

The Contractor shall provide and install a rack-mounted fiber optic patch panel as
identified in the Plans.
Cabinet Wiring
Terminal blocks TB1 through TB9 shall be installed on the Input Panel. Layout and
position assignment of the terminal blocks shall be as noted in the Plans.
Terminals for field wiring in traffic data and/or ramp metering controller cabinet shall
be labeled, numbered and connected in accordance with the following:
Terminal Block Pos. Terminal and Wire Numbers Connection Identification
TBS 501-502 AC Power, Neutral
T1-2 641 Sign on
T1-4 643 Sign off
T1-5 644 Flasher Output NC
T1-6 645 Flasher Output NO
T4-1 631 Lane 3 – Red
T4-2 632 Lane 3 – Yellow
T4-3 633 Lane 3 – Green
T4-4 621 Lane 2 – Red
T4-7 611 Lane 1 – Red
Loop lead-in cables shall be labeled and connected to cabinet terminals according to the
ITS Field Wiring Chart. This chart will be provided by the Engineer within 20 days of
the Contractor’s request.
9-29.13(12) ITS Cabinet
Basic ITS cabinets shall be Model 334L Cabinets, unless otherwise specified in the
Contract. Type 334L Cabinets shall be constructed in accordance with the TEES, with the
following modifications:
1. The basic cabinet shall be furnished with only Housing 1 B, Mounting Cage 1, Service
Panel #1, a Drawer Shelf, and Controller Unit Supports. Additional equipment may be
specified as part of the cabinet function-specific standards.
2. Housing aluminum shall be 5052 alloy with mill finish. Painted or anodized aluminum
is not allowed.
3. The door air filter shall be a disposable paper filter element of at least 180 square inches.
4. Locks shall be spring loaded construction core locks capable of accepting a Best
6-pin core. A 6-pin construction core of the type (Blue, Green, or Red) specified in the
Contract shall be installed in each core lock. One core removal key and two standard
keys (properly marked) shall be included with each cabinet and delivered to the
Engineer upon Contract completion.
5. Each cabinet shall include a 120VAC electric strip heater with a rating of 100 watts,
which shall be thermostat controlled. The heater strip shall be fed by wire with a
temperature rating of 400°F or higher, and shall be shielded to prevent contact with
wiring, equipment, or personnel. If the heater thermostat is separate from the fan
thermostat, the heater thermostat must meet the same requirements a++++s the fan
thermostat as defined in TEES.

6. LED light strips shall be provided for cabinet lighting, powered from the Equipment
breaker on the Power Distribution Assembly. Each LED light strip shall be
temperature of 4100K (cool white) or higher. There shall be two light strips for each
rack within the cabinet. Lighting shall be ceiling mounted – rack mounted lighting is
not permitted. One light strip shall be installed above the front of the rack, oriented
parallel to the door face, and placed such that the front of the rack and the rack mounted
equipment is illuminated. The second light strip shall be installed above the rear of
the rack, oriented perpendicular to the door face, and placed such that the interior of
the rack is illuminated. Lighting shall not interfere with the proper operation of any
other ceiling mounted equipment. All lighting fixtures above a rack shall energize
automatically when either door to that respective rack is opened. Each door switch shall
be labeled “Light”.
7. Each cabinet shall be equipped with a power distribution assembly (PDA) mounted in
a standard EIA 19-inch (ANSI/EIA RS-310-C) rack utilizing no more than five Rack
Mounting Units (RMU) (8.75 inches). The PDA shall include the following equipment:
a. One duplex NEMA 5-15R GFCI receptacle on the front of the PDA.
b. Four duplex NEMA 5-15R receptacles on the rear of the PDA. These receptacles
shall remain energized on a trip or failure of the GFCI receptacle.
c. Four 1P-15A, 120VAC Equipment/Field Circuit Breakers.
d. Line filter meeting the requirements of Section 9-29.13(10)A.4.
PDA components shall be mounted in or on the PDA such that they are readily
accessible, provide dead front safety, and all hazardous voltage points are protected to
prevent inadvertent contact.
8. Service Panel #1 shall include a service terminal block labeled “TBS”, a Tesco
TES-10B or equivalent surge suppressor connected to provide power in line surge
suppression, and a 1P-30A Main Breaker. The Service Panel Assembly (SPA) shown in
the TEES shall not be included.
9. Each cabinet shall include a rack mounted fiber optic patch panel of the type specified
in the Contract.
Cabinet drawings and wiring diagrams shall be provided in the drawer shelf. Additionally,
an electronic (PDF format) copy of all drawings and wiring diagrams shall be provided.
9-29.14 Vacant
9-29.15 Flashing Beacon Control
Line Voltage flashers shall conform to the latest NEMA publication, and shall be solid
state. When used as a beacon control, they shall be jack mounted and installed in raintight
aluminum or hot-dipped galvanized steel cabinet.
9-29.16 Vehicular Signal Heads, Displays, and Housing
Each signal head shall be of the adjustable, vertical type with the number and type of
displays detailed in the Contract; shall provide an indication in one direction only; shall be
adjustable through 360 degrees about a vertical axis; and shall be mounted at the location and
in the manner shown in the Plans. Except for optically programmed signal heads, all vehicular
signal heads at any one intersection shall be of the same make and type.
Backplates shall be constructed of 5-inch-wide, .050-inch-thick corrosion-resistant flat
black finish, louvered aluminum, or Polycarbonate attached with stainless steel hardware.
A 1-inch-wide strip of yellow retro-reflective, type IV prismatic sheeting, conforming to the
requirements of Section 9-28.12, shall be applied around the perimeter of each backplate
with the exception of installations where all sections of the display will be dark as part of
normal operation such as ramp meters, hawk signals and tunnels.

9-29.16(1) Optically Programmed, Adjustable Face, and Programmable Array 12-Inch

Traffic Signal
The signal shall permit the visibility zone of the indication to be determined optically and
require no hoods or louvers. The projected indication may be selectively visible or veiled
anywhere within the optical axis. No indication shall result from external illumination, nor
shall one light unit illuminate a second. The display shall operate from 85 VAC to 130 VAC.
9-29.16(1)A Optical System
9-29.16(1)A1 Non-LED Optical System
The components of the optical system shall comprise:
1. Lamp,
2. Lamp Collar,
3. Optical Limiter-Diffuser, and
4. Objective Lens.
The lamp shall be nominal 150 watt, 120 volt AC, three prong, sealed beam having an
integral reflector with stippled cover and an average rated life of at least 6,000 hours. The lamp
shall be coupled to the diffusing element with a collar including a specular inner surface. The
diffusing element may be discrete or integral with the convex surface of the optical limiter.
The optical limiter shall provide an accessible imaging surface at focus on the optical
axis for objects 900 to 1,200 feet distant, and permit an effective veiling mask to be variously
applied as determined by the desired visibility zone. The optical limiter shall be provided with
positive indexing means and composed of heat-resistant glass.
The objective lens shall be a high resolution planar incremental lens hermetically sealed
within a flat laminant of weather resistant acrylic or approved equal. The lens shall be
symmetrical in outline and may be rotated to any 90 degree orientation about the optical axis
without displacing the primary image.
The optical system shall accommodate projection of diverse, selected indicia to separate
portions of the roadway such that only one indication will be simultaneously apparent to any
viewer after optically limiting procedures have been accomplished. The projected indication
shall conform to ITE transmittance and chromaticity standards.
9-29.16(1)A2 LED Programmable Array
1. LED array shall have a programmable visibility from a portable hand-held device from
ground level.
2. Lens shall be clear unless color lenses are specified.
The LED array shall be 22 watt maximum and shall operate directly from 120-volt AC.
The LED array shall provide an accessible imaging surface at focus on the optical axis for
objects 900 to 1,200 feet distant, and permit an effective veiling mask to be variously applied
as determined by the desired visibility zone.
The optical system shall accommodate projection of diverse selected indicia to separate
portions of the roadway such that only one indication will be simultaneously apparent to any
viewer after optically limiting procedures have been accomplished. The projected indication
shall conform to ITE transmittance and chromaticity standards.
9-29.16(1)B Housing Construction
Die cast aluminum parts shall conform to ITE alloy and tensile requirements and have a
chromate preparatory treatment. The exterior of the signal case, lamp housing, and mounting
flanges shall be finished with a high quality, baked enamel prime and finish paint.
The lens holder and interior of the case shall be optical black.
Signal case and lens holder shall be predrilled for backplates and visors. Hinge and
latch pins shall be stainless steel. All access openings shall be sealed with weather resistant
rubber gaskets.

9-29.16(1)C Mounting
The signal shall mount to standard 1½-inch fittings as a single section, as a multiple
section face, or in combination with other signals. The signal section shall be provided with an
adjustable connection that permits incremental tilting of at least 0 to 10 degree above or below
the horizontal while maintaining a common vertical axis through couplers and mounting.
Terminal connection shall permit external adjustment about the mounting axis in five degree
increments. The signal shall be mountable with ordinary tools and capable of being serviced
with no tools.
Attachments such as visors, backplates, or adapters shall conform and readily fasten to
existing mounting surfaces without affecting water and light integrity of the signal.
9-29.16(1)D Housing Electrical
9-29.16(1)D1 Electrical – Non-LED
The lamp fixture shall be comprised of a separately accessible housing and integral lamp
support, indexed ceramic socket, and self-aligning, quick release lamp retainer. The electrical
connection between case and lamphousing shall be accomplished with an interlock assembly
which disconnects lamp holder when opened. Each signal section shall include a covered
terminal block for clip or screw attachment of lead wires. Concealed 18 AWG-AWM, stranded
and coded wires shall interconnect all sections to permit field connection within any section.
9-29.16(1)D2 Electrical – LED
The Light Emitting Diode (LED) array shall be accessible from the front of the housing.
Each multi-section assembly shall include a terminal block for clip or screw attachment of
lead wires.
9-29.16(1)E Photo Controls
9-29.16(1)E1 Conventional Photo Controls
Each signal section shall include integral means for regulating its intensity between
limits as a function of individual background illumination. Lamp intensity shall not be less
than 97 percent of uncontrolled intensity at 1,000 ft-c ambient and shall reduce to 15 plus or
minus 2 percent of maximum at less than 1 ft-c ambient. Response shall be proportional and
essentially instantaneous to any detectable increase of illumination from darkness to 1,000 ft-c
ambient and damped for any decrease from 100 ft-c ambient.
The intensity controller shall comprise an integrated, directional light, sensing and
regulating device interposed between lamp and line wires. It shall be compatible with 60 Hz
input and responsive within the range 105 VAC to 135 VAC. Output may be phase controlled,
but the device shall provide a nominal terminal impedance of 1,200 ohms open circuit and a
corresponding holding current.
9-29.16(1)E2 LED Photo Controls
Each signal section shall include an integral means to automatically regulate the display
intensity for day and night operation.
9-29.16(1)F Installation
The signal shall be installed, directed, and veiled in accordance with published instructions
and the project visibility requirement. Each section of the signal shall be masked with
prescribed materials in an acceptable and workmanlike manner.
9-29.16(2) Conventional Traffic Signal Heads
9-29.16(2)A Optical Units
LED light sources are required for all displays. The Contractor shall provide test results
from a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory documenting that the LED display conforms
to the current ITE Specification for Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads, Light Emitting

Diode Circular Signal Supplement VTCSH ST-052 or Vehicle Traffic Signal Heads, Light
Emitting Diode Vehicle Arrow Traffic Signal Supplement ITE VTSCH ST-054, and the
1. The LED traffic signal module shall be operationally compatible with controllers and
conflict monitors on this project, and the LED lamp unit shall contain a disconnect that
will show an open switch to the conflict monitor when less than 60 percent of the LEDs
in the unit are operational.
2. LEDs shall have a 50-degree minimum viewing angle.
3. Wattage (Maximum) – 12 inch red, yellow, and green ball displays – 25 W
12 inch red, yellow, and green arrow displays – 15 W
8 inch red, yellow, and green ball displays – 15 W
4. Voltage – The operation voltages shall be between 85 VAC and 130 VAC.
5. The LED display shall be a module type and shall replace the lens, socket, bail, and
reflector and be directly connected to the terminal strip in the signal head.
6. Label – Each optical unit shall be listed by and bear the label of a Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory. In addition, the manufacturer’s name, trademark,
serial number, and other necessary identification shall be permanently marked on the
back side of the LED signal module, and the installation date shall be indicated on a
separate label with an indelible ink marker.
9-29.16(2)B Signal Housing
The signal head housing, or case, shall consist of an assembly of separate sections,
expandable type for vertical mounting, substantially secured together in a weathertight
manner. Each section shall house an individual optical unit.
Each section shall be complete with a one-piece, corrosion-resistant aluminum alloy die
cast door and shall have a nominal 8- or 12-inch diameter opening for the lens. Each door
shall be of the hinged type having two integrally cast hinge lugs and latch jaw. The door shall
be attached to the housing by means of two noncorrosive, stainless steel hinge pins that are
removable without the use of a special press or tool. A noncorrosive, stainless steel, threaded
latch bolt and matching wing nut shall provide for opening and closing the door without the
use of any special tools. Each door shall have a cellular neoprene gasket around the entire
outer edge of the door, which, when the door is closed, shall make a positive weather and
dust-tight seal. Each door shall have four tapped holes spaced about the circumference of the
lens opening with four noncorrosive screws to accommodate the signal head visors. Each door
shall have some device such as washers, clips, or keys, or be constructed so as to keep it from
dismounting from the housing accidentally when it is open.
The body of each signal section shall consist of a one piece corrosion resistant, die cast
aluminum alloy. Each section shall have serrated rings top and bottom so when used with
proper brackets, each section may be adjustable in respect to an adjoining section, and the
hangers shall be locked securely to prevent moving. Cast integrally with the housing shall be
two hinge lugs and one latch jaw. The top and bottom of the housing shall have an opening
to accommodate standard 1½-inch pipe brackets. The sections shall be so designed that when
assembled, they interlock with one another forming one continuous weathertight unit. The
sections shall be interchangeable and shall be dust and weathertight when assembled with the
door and appropriate furnished hardware.
A terminal block of an approved type shall be mounted inside at the back of the housing.
All sockets shall be so wired that a white wire will be connected to the shell of the socket and
a wire, the color of the lens, to the bottom, or end terminal of the socket. These wires shall
in turn be connected to the terminal block mounted in the housing, in the proper manner.
The terminal block shall have sufficient studs to terminate all field wires and lamp wires
independently to the block with separate screws. The terminals to which field wires are
attached shall be permanently identified to facilitate field work.

Each face shall be protected with a removable visor. The visor shall be tunnel type unless
noted otherwise in the Contract. Tunnel, cap, and cut away type visors shall be molded using
ultraviolet and heat stabilized polycarbonate plastic or be constructed of 0.050-inch corrosion
resistant aluminum material throughout as specified in the Contract, or as ordered by the
Engineer in accordance with Section 1-04.4. Visors shall be flat black in color inside and shall
be flat black or dark green on the outside. Visors shall have attaching ears for installation to
the housing door. The signal display shall have square doors. End caps shall be made from
aluminum or plastic material and shall be installed with fittings to provide a watertight seal.
A bead of silicone sealant shall be applied around the perimeter of all top end cap openings
prior to installation of the end cap assembly. Plastic end caps shall utilize a threaded stud
with seal and wing nut. Plastic end caps utilizing a metal screw that may damage the cap
if overtightened will not be allowed. Plastic end caps shall have the same color as the
signal housing.
9-29.16(2)C Louvered Visors
Where noted in the Contract, louvered tunnel visors shall be furnished and installed.
Directional, Geometrically Programmed louvers shall be constructed to have a snug fit in the
signal visor. Louvers shall be flat black, constructed of aluminum or ABS and polycarbonate
plastic. Dimensions and arrangement of louvers shall be as shown in the Contract.
9-29.16(2)D Vacant
9-29.16(2)E Painting Signal Heads
Traffic signal heads shall be finished with two coats of factory applied dark green (Federal
Standard 595) baked enamel or shall be finished with a dark green oven baked powder coating
comprised of resins and pigments. Aluminum end caps shall be painted to match the color of
the signal housing.
9-29.16(3) Polycarbonate Traffic Signal Heads
Polycarbonate signal heads shall be provided only when specifically identified in the
Contract. With the exception of top and bottom bracket mountings, polycarbonate signal
heads shall be installed with approved reinforcing plates located in signal sections adjacent
to the mounting hardware.
Polycarbonate employed in traffic signal fabrication shall tolerate an elongation
prior to break in excess of 90 percent. The green color shall be molded throughout the
head assembly. The optical system shall be Light Emitting Diodes as defined in Section
9-29.16(2)A. The entire optical system shall be sealed by a single neoprene gasket. The signal
head shall be formed to be used with standard signal head mounting accessories as shown
in Section 9-29.17. All hinge pins, latch assemblies, and reflector assemblies shall conform
to Section 9-29.16(2)B.
9-29.16(4) Traffic Signal Cover
The covers shall be manufactured from a durable fabric material, black in color with a
mesh front, and designed to fit the signal head configuration properly. The covers shall have
an attachment method that will hold the cover securely to the signal in heavy wind. The covers
shall be provided with a drain to expel any accumulated water.
9-29.17 Signal Head Mounting Brackets and Fittings
Vehicle and pedestrian signal head mountings shall be as detailed in the Standard Plans.
Material requirements for signal head mounts are as follows:
Aluminum
1. Hinge fittings for Type E mount.
2. Arms and slotted tube fittings for Type N mount.
3. Tube clamp and female clamp assembly for Type N mount.

Bronze
1. Terminal compartments for Type A, B, C, F, H, and K mounts.
2. Collars for Type C, D, and F mounts.
3. Ell fittings for Type L and LE mounts.
4. Plumbizer for type M mounts.
5. Messenger hanger and wire entrance fittings for Type P, Q, R, and S mounts.
6. Balance adjuster for Type Q, R, and S mounts.
Galvanized Steel
1. Washers for Type A, B, C, D, F, H, and K mounts.
2. Fasteners for Type A, B, E, H, and K mounts.
Stainless Steel
1. All set screws and cotter Keys.
2. Bands for Type N mount.
3. Hinge pins for Type E mount.
4. Bolts, nuts and washers for Type M mount.
5. Bolt, nut and washers for Type L mount.
6. Bolts, nuts, washers, and screw buckle swivels.
Steel
1. Center pipes, nipples, elbow, and tee fittings for Type A, B, C, F, H, and K mounts.
2. Multi-head mounting assemblies and spider assemblies for Type Q, R, and S mounts.
3. Nipples for Type L, LE, P, Q, R, and S mounts.
Fittings for Type N mounts shall be installed unpainted. All other hardware for other
mounts shall be painted with two coats of factory applied traffic signal green baked enamel.
Pins for messenger hanger fittings shall be a minimum of ½ inch in diameter.
Terminal compartments for Type A, B, C, F, H, and K mounts shall contain a 12 section
terminal block.
9-29.18 Vehicle Detector
Induction loop detectors and magnetometer detectors shall comply with current NEMA
Specifications when installed with NEMA control assemblies and shall comply with the
current California Department of Transportation document entitled “Transportation Electrical
Equipment Specifications”, specified in Section 9-29.13(7) when installed with Type 170,
Type 2070, or NEMA control assemblies.
9-29.18(1) Induction Loop Detectors
When required in the Contract, amplifier units shall be provided with supplemental timing
features identified as follows:
1. Delay Timing – When delay timing is required, the unit shall delay detector output for
up to 15 seconds minimum, settable in one second maximum intervals.
2. Delay Timing With Gate – When delay timing with gate is required, the unit shall
provide delay timing features as noted above with the additional capability of inhibiting
delay timing when an external signal is applied.
3. Extension Timing – When extension timing is required, the unit shall extend the
detector output for up to 7 seconds minimum, settable in 0.5 second minimum intervals.
4. Delay and Extension Timing With Gate – When delay and extension timing with gate
is required, the unit shall provide both delay and extension timing features as noted
above with the additional capability of inhibiting delay while enabling extension upon
application of an external signal. Without external signal, the unit shall inhibit extension
and enable delay.

9-29.18(2) Magnetometer Detectors

Magnetometer detector units and sensors shall conform to the following Specifications:
1. Operation – The magnetometer detector unit shall respond to changes in the earth’s
local magnetic field caused by the passage of a vehicle containing iron or steel over the
sensor unit.
2. Environmental Requirements – Satisfactory operation shall be attained over the
ambient temperature range from -30○F to 160○F. Operation shall be unaffected by
temperature change, water, ice, pavement deterioration, or electromagnetic noise.
3. Modes of Operation – Each detector channel shall be capable of functioning in any
of four front-panel selectable modes:
a. Presence – Time of detection shall be unlimited.
b. Extended Presence – The detection output shall extend for a timer set value of up
to 5 seconds after the detection zone has cleared.
c. Pulse – A single 30- to 50-millisecond pulse will be generated per detection
actuation.
d. Inhibited Pulse – The detection output will be inhibited for a time set value of up to
5 seconds after the detection zone has cleared.
4. Response Time. Pick up and drop out times shall be consistently within 10 milliseconds.
5. Approach Speed. The unit shall be capable of detecting vehicles traveling from 0 to
80 mph.
6. Sensor Probes. Each channel of the detector unit shall be capable of operating up to
three sensing probes.
9-29.19 Pedestrian Push Buttons
Where noted in the Contract, pedestrian push buttons of tamper-resistant construction
shall be furnished and installed. They shall consist of a 2-inch nominal diameter plunger.
The switch shall be a three-bladed beryllium copper spring, rated at 10 amperes, 125 volts.
The pedestrian push-button assembly shall be constructed and mounted as detailed in
the Contract.
9-29.20 Pedestrian Signals
Pedestrian signals shall be Light Emitting Diodes (LED) type.
The LED pedestrian signal module shall be operationally compatible with controllers and
conflict monitors. The LED lamp unit shall contain a disconnect that will show an open switch
to the conflict monitor when less than 60 percent of the LEDs in the unit are operational.
The Pedestrian signal heads shall be on the QPL or Contractor shall submit a
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance, in accordance with Section 1-06.3, with each
type of signal head. The certificate shall state that the lot of pedestrian signal heads meet the
1. All pedestrian signal heads shall be a Walk/Don’t Walk module with a
countdown display.
2. All pedestrian displays shall comply with the MUTCD and ITE publication ST 011B,
VTCSH2 or current ITE Specification and shall have an incandescent appearance.
The Contractor shall provide test results from a Nationally Recognized Testing
Laboratory documenting that the LED display conforms to the current ITE and the
a. All pedestrian signals supplied to any one project shall be from the same
manufacturer and type but need not be from the same manufacturer as the
vehicle heads.
b. Each pedestrian signal face shall be a single unit housing with the signal indication
size, a nominal 16 inch × 18 inch with side by side symbol messages with
countdown display.

c. Housings shall be green polycarbonate or die-cast aluminum and the aluminum

housings shall be painted with two coats of factory applied traffic signal green
enamel (Federal Standard 595-14056). All hinges and latches and interior hardware
shall be stainless steel.
3. Optical units for traffic signal displays shall conform to the following:
a. Pedestrian “RAISED HAND” and “WALKING PERSON” modules shall be the
countdown display type showing the time remaining in the pedestrian change
interval. When the pedestrian change interval is reduced due to a programming
change, the display may continue to show the previous pedestrian change interval
for one signal cycle. During the following pedestrian change interval the countdown
shall show the revised time, or shall be blank. In the event of an emergency vehicle
preemption, during the following two cycles, the display shall show the programmed
pedestrian change interval or be blank. In the event the controller is put in stop time
during the pedestrian change interval, during the following two cycles the display
shall show the programmed clearance or be blank. In the event there is railroad
preempt during the pedestrian change interval, during the following two cycles the
display shall show the programmed clearance or be blank. Light emitting diode
(LED) light sources having the incandescent appearance are required for Portland
Orange Raised Hand and the Lunar White Walking Person.
4. LED displays shall conform to the following:
a. Wattage (Maximum) – Portland Orange Raised Hand, 15 watts: Lunar White
Walking Person, 15 watts.
b. Voltage – The operating voltages shall be between 85 VAC and 135 VAC.
c. Temperature – Temperature range shall be -35°F to +165°F.
d. LED pedestrian heads shall be supplied with Z crate visors. Z crate visors shall have
21 members at 45 degrees and 20 horizontal members.
9-29.21 Flashing Beacon
Flashing beacons shall be installed as detailed in the Plans, as specified in the Special
Provisions, and as described below:
Controllers for flashing beacons shall be as specified in Section 9-29.15.
Beacons shall consist of single section, 8 or 12-inch traffic signal heads, three or four-
way adjustable, meeting all of the applicable requirements of Section 9-29.16. Displays (red
or yellow) may be either LED type or incandescent. Twelve-inch yellow displays shall be
dimmed 50 percent after dark.
Mounting brackets, mountings, and installation shall meet all applicable requirements of
Section 9-29.17.
Lenses shall be either red or amber, glass or polycarbonate as noted in the Plans.
9-29.22 Vacant
9-29.23 Vacant
9-29.24 Service Cabinets
In addition to the requirements for service cabinets indicated in the Contract, the following
requirements shall apply:
1 Display an arc flash warning label that meets the requirements of ANSI Z535.
2. All electrical conductors, buss bars, and conductor terminals shall be copper. Conductor
insulation shall be either THW, XHHW, USE, or SIS.
3. If field wiring larger than that which the contactors or breakers will accommodate is
required by the Contract, a terminal board shall be supplied for use as a splicing block.
4. The minimum size of all other load carrying conductors used within the service cabinets
shall be based on the National Electrical Code ampacity tables for not more than three
conductors in a raceway or cable.
5. Type B, B Modified, C, D, and E Cabinets shall have ventilation louvers on the lower
sides complete with screens. Type D and E shall also have rain-tight cabinet vents with
screens at the top. Cabinet vents shall be gasketed.
6. The Type B modified cabinets shall have one future use double pole circuit breaker.
Type D and E cabinets shall have two future use double pole circuit breakers. The dead
front cover shall have cutouts with for all circuits. The receptacle shall be ground fault
interrupter equipped.
7. The minimum size of control circuit conductors used in service cabinets shall be
14 AWG stranded copper.
All electrical contactors shall have the loadside terminals toward the front (door side)
of the service cabinet.
8. The lighting contactors used shall be specifically rated for tungsten fluorescent and
mercury arc lamp loads.
9. All service enclosures shall be fabricated from steel or aluminum. If aluminum, they
shall be fabricated from 0.125 inch (minimum) 5052 H 32 ASTM designator or B209
aluminum. If steel, they shall be fabricated from 12-gage (minimum) steel, hot-dipped
galvanized per AASHTO M111.
10. All doors and dead front panels installed in service cabinets shall incorporate a hinge
placed in a vertical plane. Service doors shall be sealed with closed cell gasket material.
The side opposite the hinge shall be secured with quarter turn screws or slide latch. No
electrical devices shall be connected to the dead front panel. However, every switch
serviced through the dead front panel shall be appropriately identified with its respective
circuit designation by means of a screwed or riveted engraved name plate. Such circuit
identification shall be submitted for approval together with the appropriate fabrication
drawings. Dead front panels shall be intended to provide security only to the switching
segment of the service enclosure and shall not cover the electrical contactor portion.
11. A typed index of all circuits shall be mounted on the cabinet door. Each index shall
show an entire panel section without folding. Index holders shall have metal returns
on the sides and bottom. A schematic of the main panel, any subpanels, circuits, and
control circuits shall be provided. The schematic shall be plastic coated and secured
in a metal holder.
9-29.24(1) Vacant
9-29.24(2) Electrical Circuit Breakers and Contactors
Lighting contactors shall be rated 240 volts maximum line to line, or 277 volt maximum
line to neutral voltage for tungsten and ballasted lamp loads on 120/240/277 volt circuits,
whichever is applicable, or they shall be rated 480 volt maximum line to line voltage for
higher than 277 volt circuited tungsten or ballasted lamp loads.
As an alternate to the lighting contactor, the Contractor may furnish a double contact
mercury relay. The relay ampere rating shall equal or exceed the rating noted in the Contract.
The relay shall be normally open and shall be rated for up to 480 VAC resistive. The unit shall
have a molded coil enclosure rated for 120 VAC. The contacts shall be evacuated, backfilled
with an inert gas and shall be hermetically sealed. The electrode shall be one piece with Teflon
wear rings on the internal plunger assembly. All contact terminals and coil connection clamps
shall be U.L. approved.
Circuit breakers shall be 240 or 277 volt maximum rated for 120/240/277 volt circuits,
whichever is applicable, and shall have an interrupting capacity (R.M.S. – symmetrical) of
not less than 10,000 amperes. They shall have not less than 480 volt rated for circuits above
277 volts and shall have an interrupting capacity (R.M.S. – symmetrical) of not less than
14,000 amperes. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type.

9-29.25 Amplifier, Transformer, and Terminal Cabinets

Amplifier, Terminal, and Transformer cabinets shall be NEMA 3R and the following:
1. All cabinets shall be constructed of welded 14 gage (minimum) hot-dipped galvanized
sheet steel, 14-gage, minimum type 316 stainless steel or 0.125 inch, minimum 5052
alloy aluminum H32 ASTM designator minimum.
2. Nominal cabinet dimensions shall be:
Depth Height Width
a. Terminal 8″ 16″ 12″
b. Terminal 8″ 24″ 18″
c. Transformer up to 12.5 KVA 20″ 48″ 24″
Transformer 12.6 to 35 KVA 30″ 60″ 32″
3. Cabinet doors shall have a stainless steel piano hinge or shall meet the requirements
for the alternate hinge detailed for type B modified service cabinets. Doors less than
3 feet in height shall have two hinges. Doors from 3 feet to 4′ 8″ in height shall have
three hinges. Spacing of hinges for doors greater than 4′ 8″ in height shall not exceed
14 inches center to center. The door shall also be provided with a three-point latch and
a spring loaded construction core lock capable of accepting a Best six pin CX series
core. The locking mechanism shall provide a tapered bolt. The Contractor shall supply
construction cores with two master keys. The keys shall be delivered to the Engineer.
Three-point latches are not required for terminal cabinets.
4. All seams shall be continuously welded.
5. All cabinets shall provide a gasketed door flange.
6. Transformer cabinets shall provide a 9-square-inch minimum louvered vent.
7. Insulated terminal blocks shall be 600 volt, heavy-duty, barrier type. The terminal
blocks shall be provided with a field-side and a control-side connector separated by
a marker strip. One spare 12-position insulated terminal block shall be installed in each
terminal cabinet and amplifier cabinet.
8. Each non-pad mounted Terminal, Amplifier and Transformer cabinet shall have ¼ inch
drain holes in back corners. Each pad mounted Terminal, Amplifier and Transformer
cabinet shall drain to a sump and through a ⅜ inch diameter drain pipe to grade as
detailed in the Standard Plans.
9. Mounting shall be as noted in the Contract.
10. Transformer cabinets shall have two separate compartments, one for the transformer
and one for the power distribution circuit breakers. Each compartment shall be enclosed
with a dead front. There shall be an isolation breaker on the input (line) side of the
transformer, and a breaker array on the output (load) side. Each breaker shall be labeled
with the device name by means of a screwed or riveted engraved name plate.

Water Distribution Materials 9-30
9-30 Water Distribution Materials

This Specification addresses pipe and appurtenances 16 inches in diameter and smaller.
Water distribution material incorporated in the Work shall be new.
The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer the names of the manufacturer(s) of the
water distribution materials proposed for inclusion in the Work, which materials shall
conform in every respect to these Specifications. If so required by the Special Provisions,
the Contractor shall provide to the Engineer in addition to the names of the manufacturer(s)
of the water distribution materials, a Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance meeting the
provisions of Section 1-06.3, for the materials proposed for inclusion in the Work. As used
in this Specification, the term “lot of material delivered to the Work” shall mean a shipment
of the water distribution materials as it is delivered to the Work.
The Engineer shall have free access to all testing and records pertaining to material
to be delivered to the job site. The Engineer may elect to be present at any or all material
testing operations.
9-30.1 Pipe
All pipe shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer’s name, type, class, and thickness
as applicable. Lettering shall be legible and permanent under normal conditions of handling
and storage.
9-30.1(1) Ductile Iron Pipe
1. Ductile iron pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C151. Ductile iron pipe shall
have a cement mortar lining and a 1-mil thick seal coat meeting the requirements
of AWWA C104. Ductile iron pipe to be joined using bolted flanged joints shall be
Special Thickness Class 53. All other ductile iron pipe shall be Special Thickness
Class 50, minimum Pressure Class 350, or the class indicated in the Plans or the
Special Provisions.
2. Nonrestrained joints shall be either rubber gasket type, push on type, or mechanical
type meeting the requirements of AWWA C111.
3. Restrained joints shall be as specified in Section 9-30.2(6).
9-30.1(2) Polyethylene Encasement
Polyethylene encasement shall be tube-form high-density cross-laminated polyethylene
film or linear low-density polyethylene film meeting the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C105.
Color shall be natural or black.
9-30.1(3) Vacant
9-30.1(4) Steel Pipe
9-30.1(4)A Steel Pipe (6 inches and Over)
Steel pipe 6 inches in diameter and larger shall conform to AWWA C200. The type of
protective coating and lining and other supplementary information required by AWWA C200
shall be included in the Special Provisions.
9-30.1(4)B Steel Pipe (4 inches and Under)
Steel pipe 4 inches in diameter and smaller shall be hot-dip galvanized inside and out and
meet the requirements of ASTM A53.
9-30.1(5) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
9-30.1(5)A Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (4 Inches and Over)
PVC pipe for water mains shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C900 or
ANSI/AWWA C905. PVC pipe shall have the same outside dimensions as ductile iron pipe.
PVC pipe for distribution pipelines shall be a minimum of SDR 18. Pipe shall be listed by
Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.

PVC pipe shall be considered flexible conduit. Joints shall meet the requirements of
ASTM D3139 using a restrained rubber gasket conforming to ASTM F477. Solvent welded
pipe joints are not permitted.
9-30.1(5)B Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Under 4 inches)
Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) under 4 inches shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2241.
Pipe material shall be PVC 1120, PVC 1220, or PVC 2120, and shall have minimum wall
thickness equal or greater than a standard dimension ratio (SDR) of 21. Pipe shall bear
the National Sanitation Foundation Seal for use to transport potable water. Pipe shall be
considered flexible conduit. Joints shall meet the requirements of ASTM D3139 using a
restrained rubber gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM F477.
9-30.1(6) Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe (4 inches and Over)
PE pressure pipe for water mains shall meet the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C906.
Pipe materials shall be high-density polyethylene PE3408 conforming to a minimum cell
class 345464 C, D or E per ASTM D3350. Pipe diameter shall be either iron pipe size per
Table 3 and Table 5 of ANSI/AWWA C906. Pipe pressure class shall be as listed in Table 9
of ANSI/AWWA C906 for DR 9 PE3408 material.
9-30.2 Fittings
Bolts, nuts, and washers used for securing fittings shall be of similar materials. Steel bolts
shall meet the requirements of ASTM A307 or ASTM F568 for carbon steel or ASTM F593 or
ASTM F738 for stainless steel. Nuts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A563 for carbon
steel or ASTM F594 or ASTM F836 for stainless steel. Iron bolts and nuts shall meet the
requirements of ASTM A536, grade 65-45-12.
9-30.2(1) Ductile Iron Pipe
Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C110 or AWWA
C153. Joints shall meet the requirements of AWWA C111. Fittings shall be cement mortar
lined, meeting the requirements of AWWA C104. Gaskets for flat faced or raised faced flanges
shall be ⅛-inch-thick neoprene having a durometer of 60 plus or minus 5 or 1⁄16 cloth inserted.
The type, material, and identification mark for bolts and nuts shall be provided.
9-30.2(2) Vacant
9-30.2(3) Vacant
9-30.2(4) Steel Pipe
9-30.2(4)A Steel Pipe (6 inches and Over)
Fittings for steel pipe 6 inches and larger shall be bell and spigot or welded to match the
pipe joints. Welded joints shall conform to AWWA C206. Field couplings shall be bolted,
sleeve-type for plain-end pipe conforming to AWWA C219. Expansion joints shall be
fabricated steel mechanical slip-type conforming to AWWA C221.
When flanges are required, they shall conform to AWWA C207. Linings and coatings for
fittings shall be the same as specified for the adjacent pipe.
9-30.2(4)B Steel Pipe (4 inches and Under)
Fittings for steel pipe 4 inches and under shall be malleable iron threaded type with a
pressure rating of 150 psi. Dimensions shall meet the requirements of ANSI B16.3. Threading
shall meet the requirements of ANSI B2.1. Material shall meet requirements of ASTM A47M,
Grade 32510. Fittings shall be banded and hot-dip galvanized inside and out.
9-30.2(5) Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe
9-30.2(5)A Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (4 Inches and Over)
Fittings for PVC pipe shall be the same as specified for ductile iron pipe.

9-30.2(5)B Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe (Under 4 inches)

Fittings for PVC pipe under 4 inches shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2466.
9-30.2(6) Restrained Joints
The restraining of ductile iron pipe, fittings, and valves shall be accomplished by the use
of either a bolted or boltless system. Any device utilizing round point set screws shall not
be permitted.
All couplings installed underground to connect ductile iron or PVC pipe shall be
manufactured of ductile iron.
9-30.2(7) Bolted, Sleeve-Type Couplings for Plain End Pipe
Bolted, sleeve-type couplings, reducing or transition couplings, and flanged coupling
adapters used to join plain-end pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C219. Buried
couplings to connect ductile iron, gray cast iron, or PVC pipe shall be ductile iron. Buried
couplings for connecting steel pipe to steel pipe shall be steel.
9-30.2(8) Restrained Flexible Couplings
Restrained flexible couplings shall be locking type couplings in accordance with the Plans
or Special Provisions. Any couplings that utilize set screws tightened against the outside pipe
wall are not acceptable. Coupling shall be epoxy coated.
9-30.2(9) Grooved and Shouldered Joints
Grooved and shouldered joints shall conform to AWWA C606. Rigid or flexible grooved
or shouldered joints shall be as specified in the Special Provisions.
9-30.2(10) Polyethylene (PE) Pipe (4 inches and Over)
Fittings for PE pipe shall meet the requirement of ANSI/AWWA C906. Pipe material shall
be high-density polyethylene PE3408 conforming to minimum cell class 345464 C, D or E per
ASTM D3350. Pipe diameter shall be either iron pipe size per Table 3 and Table 5 of ANSI/
AWWA C906 or ductile iron pipe size per Table 7 and Table 8 of ANSI/AWWA C 906. Pipe
pressure class shall be as listed in Table 9 of ANSI/AWWA C 906 for DR 9 PE3408 material.
9-30.2(11) Fabricated Steel Mechanical Slip-Type Expansion Joints
Fabricated steel mechanical slip-type expansion joints shall meet the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C 221. Buried Expansion joints to connect ductile iron or PVC pipe shall be
ductile iron. Buried expansion joints for connecting steel pipe to steel pipe shall be steel.
9-30.3 Valves
Valves shall be provided with hand wheels or operating nuts as designated. Where
operating nuts are called for, a standard 2-inch operating nut shall be furnished. Valves shall
be nonrising stem type, open counterclockwise, and be equipped with an O ring stuffing box.
9-30.3(1) Gate Valves (3 to 16 inches)
Gate valves shall meet the requirements of AWWA C509 or AWWA C515. Gate valves
16 inches in size shall be arranged for operation in the horizontal position by enclosed
bevel gearing.
The Contractor shall provide an affidavit of compliance stating that the valve furnished
fully complies with AWWA C509 or AWWA C515.
9-30.3(2) Vacant
9-30.3(3) Butterfly Valves
Butterfly valves shall be rubber seated and shall meet the requirements of AWWA C504,
Class 150B. Butterfly valves shall be suitable for direct burial.
Valve operators shall be of the traveling nut or worm gear type, sealed, gasketed, and
permanently lubricated for underground service. Valve operators shall be constructed to the

standard of the valve manufacturer to withstand all anticipated operating torques and designed
to resist submergence in ground water.
The Contractor shall provide an affidavit of compliance stating that the valve furnished
fully complies with AWWA C504.
9-30.3(4) Valve Boxes
Valve boxes shall be installed on all buried valves. The box shall be of cast iron, two piece
slip type standard design with a base corresponding to the size of the valve. The box shall
be coal tar painted by the manufacturer using its standard. The cover shall have the word
“WATER” cast in it.
9-30.3(5) Valve Marker Posts
Posts shall have a 4-inch minimum square section and a minimum length of 42 inches,
with beveled edges and shall contain at least one No. 3 bar reinforcing steel.
The exposed portion of the marker posts shall be coated with two coats of concrete paint
in a color selected by the Contracting Agency.
The size of the valve and the distance in feet and inches to the valve shall be stenciled on
the face of the post, using black paint and a stencil which will produce letters 2 inches high.
9-30.3(6) Valve Stem Extensions
Valve stem extensions shall have a 2-inch-square operating nut and self-centering rockplate
support. Valves with an operating nut more than 4 feet below grade shall have a valve stem
extension to raise the operating nut to within 36 inches of the ground surface.
9-30.3(7) Combination Air Release/Air Vacuum Valves
Combination air release/air vacuum valves shall be designed to operate with potable water
under pressure to permit discharging a surge of air from an empty line when filling and relieve
the vacuum when draining the system. The valves shall also release an accumulation of air
when the system is under pressure. This shall be accomplished in a single valve body designed
to withstand 300 psi.
The body and cover shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30. Floats shall be
stainless steel conforming to ASTM A240 and designed to withstand 1,000 psi. Seats shall be
Buna N rubber. Internal parts shall be stainless steel or bronze.
9-30.3(8) Tapping Sleeve and Valve Assembly
Tapping valves shall be furnished with flanged inlet end connections. The outlet ends shall
conform in dimensions to the AWWA Standards for hub or mechanical joint connections,
except that the outside of the hub shall have a large flange for attaching a drilling machine.
The seat opening of the valve must permit a diameter cut no less than ½ inch smaller than the
valve size. Valves specifically designed for tapping meeting the requirements of AWWA C500,
and valves meeting the requirements of AWWA C509, will be permitted. Tapping valves shall
be of the same type as other valves on the project. Tapping sleeves shall be cast iron, ductile
iron, stainless steel, epoxy-coated steel, or other approved material.
9-30.4 Vacant
9-30.5 Hydrants
Fire hydrants shall conform to AWWA C502 and shall be of standard manufacture and of
a pattern approved by the Contracting Agency.
9-30.5(1) End Connections
The end connections shall be mechanical joint or flanged, meeting the requirements of
AWWA C110 and C111.

9-30.5(2) Hydrant Dimensions

Hydrant connection pipes shall be 6 inches inside diameter with 6-inch auxiliary gate
valves. Barrels shall have a 7-inch minimum inside diameter. Hydrant length, measured
from the bottom of the hydrant to the sidewalk ring, shall provide proper cover at each
installed location. Valve openings shall be 5¼ inches minimum diameter. Hydrants shall
have two 2½-inch hose nozzles and one pumper nozzle to match Contracting Agency’s
connection requirements.
Nozzles shall be fitted with cast iron threaded caps with operating nuts of the same design
and proportions as the hydrant stem nuts. Caps shall be threaded to fit the corresponding
nozzles and shall be fitted with suitable neoprene gaskets of positive water tightness under test
pressures. The direction of opening shall be counterclockwise and shall be clearly marked on
the operating nut or hydrant top. Hydrants shall be with O ring stem seals. The hydrant shall
be painted with two coats of paint to match the owner’s existing hydrants.
9-30.5(3) Hydrant Extensions
Hydrant extensions shall have a 6¾-inch minimum inside diameter and shall be gray
cast iron or ductile iron and shall conform to the AWWA Standards for such castings. The
drillings of the connecting flanges on the extensions shall match the drillings of the flanges
on the hydrant.
Hydrant extensions shall also include the necessary hydrant operating stem extensions.
9-30.5(4) Hydrant Restraints
Shackle rods shall be ¾-inch diameter with threaded ends, and shall be ASTM A36 steel.
Shackle rods shall be coated with two coats of asphalt varnish. If a restrained joint system is
used, it shall meet the requirements of Section 9-30.2(6).
9-30.5(5) Traffic Flange
Hydrants shall be provided with a traffic flange and shall be equipped with breaking
devices at the traffic flange which will allow the hydrant barrel to separate at this point with
a minimum breakage of hydrant parts in case of damage. There shall also be provided at this
point, a safety stem coupling on the operating stem that will shear at the time of impact.
9-30.5(6) Guard Posts
Guard posts for hydrants shall be provided where shown in the Plans. Guard posts shall be
reinforced concrete having a compressive strength of 3,500 psi and shall be 6 feet in length by
9 inches in diameter. Reinforcing shall consist of a minimum of five No. 3 deformed steel bars.
9-30.6 Water Service Connections (2 inches and Smaller)
9-30.6(1) Saddles
Saddles shall be ductile iron, bronze, brass, or stainless steel.
Saddles used for ¾- and 1-inch services shall be single strap and may be either AWWA
tapered thread or female iron pipe thread outlet. Saddles used for 1½- and 2-inch services shall
be double strap and shall be female iron pipe thread outlet. Saddles used on PVC pipe shall be
formed for PVC pipe and have flat, stainless steel straps.
9-30.6(2) Corporation Stops
Corporation stops shall be made of bronze or brass alloy.
Corporation stops for direct tapping shall have AWWA tapered thread inlet and an outlet
connections compatible with either copper or polyethylene tubing.
Corporation stops used with ¾- and 1-inch outlet saddles shall have either AWWA tapered
thread or male iron pipe thread inlets and outlet connections compatible with either copper or
polyethylene tubing. Thread patterns for the saddle outlet and corporation stop inlet shall be
the same.

Corporation stops used with 1½- and 2-inch outlet saddles shall have male iron pipe thread
inlets and outlet connections compatible to connecting service pipes or have male iron pipe
thread outlets.
9-30.6(3) Service Pipes
9-30.6(3)A Copper Tubing
Copper pipe or tubing shall be annealed, seamless, and conform to the requirements of
ASTM B88, Type K rating.
9-30.6(3)B Polyethylene Tubing
Polyethylene tubing shall meet the requirements of AWWA C901. Tubing shall be high
molecular mass with a 200 psi rating. Tubing used for ¾ and 1 inch shall be either SIDR 7
(iron pipe size) or SDR 9 (copper tube size). Tubing used for 1½ and 2 inches shall be SDR 9
(copper tube size).
9-30.6(3)C PEX-a Tubing
PEX-a tubing shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch or a maximum 2-inch in diameter and shall
be manufactured in accordance with AWWA C904 and ASTM F876. The tubing shall have
a minimum materials designation code of 3306 in accordance with ASTM F876, a pressure
rating of 200 psi at 73.4 degrees using a design factor of 0.63 as outlined in PPI TR-3, Part
F-7, and shall have a minimum SDR of 9. Tubing color shall be blue in accordance with
APWA Uniform color standards.
9-30.6(4) Service Fittings
Fittings used for service connections shall be made of bronze or brass alloy.
Fittings used for copper tubing shall be either compressions or flare type.
Fittings used for polyethylene tubing shall be either compression or stab type. Stab type
fittings shall utilize an internal grip ring and O ring seal. Stainless steel liners shall be used
when utilizing compression fittings on polyethylene tubing.
Fittings for PEX-a tubing shall meet the requirements of AWWA C904.
9-30.6(5) Meter Setters
Meter setters shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with all applicable parts of
AWWA C800.
Meter setters shall have an angle meter stop with drilled padlock wing, an angle check
valve, measure 12 inches in height, and shall have an inlet and outlet threads compatible
with fittings connecting to service pipes.
Meter setters for ⅝ by ¾, ¾, and 1-inch services shall have meter saddle nuts for
installation and removal of the meter.
Meter setters for 1½- and 2-inch services shall be equipped with a locking bypass.
9-30.6(6) Bronze Nipples and Fittings
Bronze threaded nipples and fittings shall meet the requirements of ANSI B-16.15, ASA
125 pound class.
9-30.6(7) Meter Boxes
Meter boxes and covers located in the non-traffic areas shall be constructed of either
reinforced concrete or high-density polyethylene. High-density polyethylene meter boxes
and covers shall have a tensile strength conforming to ASTM D638. Meter box covers shall
include a reading lid.
Meter boxes located in traffic areas shall be constructed of reinforced concrete, cast iron,
or ductile iron. Traffic covers shall be constructed of aluminum, steel, cast iron, or ductile iron.
Meter boxes and covers shall be designed for H-20 loading.

9-31 Fabricated Bridge Bearing Assemblies

9-31.1 Steel Plates and Bars
Steel plates and bars, including anchor array templates, shall conform to ASTM A 36.
Recessed steel surfaces retaining PTFE shall have an average surface roughness of
250-microinches or less.
Steel surfaces in contact with pre-formed fabric pad or polyether urethane disc shall have
an average surface roughness of 250-microinches or less.
Steel surfaces in contact with stainless steel sheet, or with the bearing block of a pin
bearing assembly, shall have an average surface roughness of 125-microinches or less.
All other steel surfaces in contact with other fabricated bridge bearing assembly
components shall have an average surface roughness of 250-microinches or less.
9-31.2 Stainless Steel
Stainless steel sheet shall conform to ASTM A 240 Type 304L. Stainless steel in contact
with PTFE shall be polished to a Number 8 mirror finish. Stainless steel sheet for fabric pad
bearing assemblies shall have a thickness greater than or equal to 14-gage.
Stainless steel countersunk screws shall be hexagon socket type conforming to the
geometric requirements of ANSI B 18.3 and shall conform to ASTM F 593 Type 304L.
9-31.3 Bearing Blocks and Keeper Rings
Bearing block forgings for pin bearing assemblies shall conform to Section 9-06.11,
including AASHTO M 102 Supplemental Requirement S4. The grade shall be Grade F. The
bearing block forging surfaces in contact with other pin bearing assembly components shall
have an average surface roughness of 63-microinches or less. All other bearing block forging
surfaces shall have an average surface roughness of 250-microinches or less.
Keeper ring forgings for pin bearing assemblies shall conform to Section 9-06.11, and the
grade shall be Grade H. All keeper ring surfaces shall have an average surface roughness of
125-microinches or less.
9-31.4 Pin Assembly
Pins shall conform to ASTM A 276 UNS Designation 21800. The pin surfaces in contact
with the bearing block shall have an average surface roughness of 63-microinches or less.
Nuts shall conform to ASTM A 563 Grade DH. Nuts with a thread diameter equal to or
less than six-inches shall have a minimum Rockwell Hardness of HRc 24. Nuts with a thread
diameter greater than six-inches shall have a Rockwell Hardness between HRc 20 and HRc 30.
Washers shall conform to ASTM A 572 Grade 50.
Cotter pins shall be stainless steel.
9-31.5 Welded Shear Connectors
Welded shear connectors shall conform to Section 9-06.15.
9-31.6 Bolts, Nuts and Washers
Bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to Section 9-06.5(3).
9-31.7 Anchor Array Rods, Nuts and Washers
Anchor array rods, nuts and washers shall conform to Section 9-06.5(4). The top 1’-0”,
minimum, of the exposed end of the anchor rods, and the associated nuts and washers, shall
be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M 232 or ASTM F 2329 as applicable.
Pipe sleeves for anchor array templates shall conform to ASTM A 53 Grade B Type E
or S, black.

9-31 Fabricated Bridge Bearing Assemblies
9-31.8 Bearing Pads

9-31.8(1) Elastomeric Pads
Elastomeric pads shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M251 unless otherwise
specified in the Plans or Special Provisions. The elastomer shall be low-temperature Grade
3 and shall not contain any form of wax. Unless otherwise specified in the Plans or Special
Provisions, the elastomer shall have a shear modulus of elasticity of 165 psi at 73°F.
All elastomeric pads with steel laminates shall be cast as units in separate molds and
bonded and vulcanized under heat and pressure. Corners and edges of molded pads may be
rounded at the option of the Contractor. Radius at corners shall not exceed ⅜ inch, and radius
of edges shall not exceed ⅛ inch. Elastomeric pads shall be fabricated to meet the tolerances
specified in AASHTO M251.
Shims contained in laminated elastomeric pads shall be mill rolled steel sheets not less than
20 gage in thickness with a minimum cover of elastomer on all edges of:
¼ inch for pads less than or equal to 5 inches thick and,
½ inch for pads greater than 5 inches thick.
Steel shims shall conform to ASTM A1011, Grade 36, unless otherwise noted. All shim
edges shall be ground or otherwise treated so that no sharp edges remain.
9-31.8(2) Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)
PTFE shall be unfilled (100-percent virgin) PTFE or fiberglass fiber filled PTFE
(or woven fabric PTFE for disc or spherical bearing assemblies) conforming to
Section 18.8 of the AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specifications, and the following
additional requirements:
1. PTFE shall be unfilled (100-percent virgin) PTFE except where filled PTFE is specified
in the Plans.
2. Filled PTFE shall be composed of PTFE resin uniformly blended with 15-percent
maximum fiberglass fiber.
3. The substrate shall limit the flow (elongation) of the confined PTFE to not more
than 0.009-inch under a pressure of 2,000 psi for 15-minutes at 78°F for a two-inch by
three-inch test sample.
4. Unfilled PTFE shall have a hardness of 50 to 65 Durometer D, at 78°F, in accordance
with ASTM D 2240.
5. The PTFE may be dimpled.
9-31.8(3) Pre-formed Fabric Pad
Pre-formed fabric pads shall be composed of multiple layers of duck, impregnated and
bound with high-quality oil resistant synthetic rubber, compressed into resilient pads. The pre-
formed fabric pads shall conform to MIL C 882 and the following additional requirements:
1. The pre-formed fabric pad shall have a shore A hardness of 90 ± 5 in accordance with
ASTM D 2240.
2. The number of plies shall be as required to produce the specified thickness after
compression and vulcanization.

9-31.9 Polyether Urethane

Polyether urethane shall be a molded polyether urethane compound conforming to the
following properties:
Physical Properties Specification
Hardness, Type D durometer ASTM D 2240 45 55 65
Minimum tensile stress, ksi ASTM D 412
At 100-percent elongation 1.5 1.9 2.3
At 200-percent elongation 2.8 3.4 4.0
Minimum tensile strength, ksi ASTM D 412 4.0 5.0 6.0
Minimum ultimate elongation, percent ASTM D 412 350 285 220
Maximum compression set (22 hours at 158°F) ASTM D 395 40 40 40
Method B, percent
Required minimums for tensile stress at specific elongations, tensile strength, ultimate
elongation, and compression set may be interpolated for durometer hardness values between
45 and 55, and 55 and 65.
9-31.10 Silicone Grease
Silicone grease for use with dimpled PTFE shall conform to SAE AS 8660.
9-31.11 Epoxy Gel
Epoxy gel shall be Type 1, Grade 3, Class A, B, or C, conforming to Section 9-26.1.
9-31.12 Resin Filler
Resin filler shall be a two-component, resin and catalyst, liquid thermoset material, with
the following properties:
1. The viscosity of the resin-catalyst mixture shall be 35,000 ± 5,000cP at 75°F
immediately after mixing.
2. The flash point shall be 100°F minimum.
3. After mixing, the resin-catalyst mixture shall be pourable for a minimum of 8-minutes
at 60°F and shall harden in 15-minutes maximum. Heating of the mixture to a
maximum temperature of 250°F after placement is permissible to obtain a full cure.
The properties of the cured resin-catalyst mixture shall be:
1. The fully cured compressive strength shall be 12,000 psi, minimum.
2. The maximum allowable shrinkage shall be 2-percent. To control shrinkage, an inert
filler may be used in the resin provided the specified viscosity requirements are met.
3. The hardness shall be between 40 and 55 in accordance with ASTM D 2583.
The resin and catalyst components shall be supplied in separate containers.


9-32.1 Steel Posts
The post shall be 2 inches outside diameter, 14-gage, mechanical tubing, and shall conform
to ASTM A513. Galvanizing shall conform to G 90 coating as defined in ASTM A653, or an
approved equal.
Any damage to galvanized paint surfaces shall be treated with two coats of paint
conforming to Section 9-08.1(2)B.
9-32.2 Bracket, Platform, and Anti-Twist Plate
The bracket, platform, and anti-twist plate shall be 16-gage sheet steel, conforming to
ASTM A1011 or ASTM A1008.
9-32.3 Vacant
9-32.4 Wood Posts
Wood posts shall meet the requirements of Section 9-28.14(1) or Western Red Cedar.
9-32.5 Fasteners
Unless otherwise specified, bolts and nuts shall be commercial bolt stock, galvanized
in accordance with ASTM A153. Washers, unless otherwise specified, shall be malleable
iron, or cut from medium steel or wrought iron plate. Washers and other hardware shall be
galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111.
9-32.6 Snow Guard
Snow guard shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM F1071 for expanded metal
bulkhead panel, to the dimensioning shown on the Standard Plans. After fabrication, the
snow guard shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111.
9-32.7 Type 2 Mailbox Support
Type 2 mailbox supports shall be 2-inch 14-gage steel tube and shall meet the NCHRP 350
or the Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH) crash test criteria. Type 2 mailbox
supports shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
9-32.8 Concrete Base
The concrete in the concrete base shall meet or exceed the requirements of
Section 6-02.3(2)B.
9-32.9 Steel Pipe
The requirements for commercially available, Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe, elbows,
and couplings shall be met for all parts not intended to be bent or welded. Welded and bent
parts shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with AASHTO M 111.
9-32.10 U-Channel Post
U-channel posts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A29, weigh a minimum of 3 pounds
per linear foot, and shall be galvanized according to AASHTO M 111.


9-33.1 Geosynthetic Material Requirements
The term geosynthetic shall be considered to be inclusive of geotextiles, geogrids, and
prefabricated drainage mats.
Geotextiles, including geotextiles attached to prefabricated drainage core to form a
prefabricated drainage mat, shall consist only of long chain polymeric fibers or yarns formed
into a stable network such that the fibers or yarns retain their position relative to each other
during handling, placement, and design service life. At least 95 percent by weight of the
material shall be polyolefins or polyesters. The material shall be free from defects or tears.
The geotextile shall also be free of any treatment or coating which might adversely alter its
hydraulic or physical properties after installation.
Geogrids shall consist of a regular network of integrally connected polymer tensile
elements with an aperture geometry sufficient to permit mechanical interlock with the
surrounding backfill. The long chain polymers in the geogrid tensile elements, not including
coatings, shall consist of at least 95 percent by mass of the material of polyolefins or
polyesters. The material shall be free of defects, cuts, and tears.
Prefabricated drainage core shall consist of a three dimensional polymeric material with
a structure that permits flow along the core laterally, and which provides support to the
geotextiles attached to it.
The geosynthetic shall conform to the properties as indicated in Tables 1 through 8 in
Section 9-33.2, and additional tables as required in the Standard Plans and Special Provisions
for each use specified in the Plans. Specifically, the geosynthetic uses included in this section
and their associated tables of properties are as follows:
Geotextile Geosynthetic Application Applicable Property Tables
Underground Drainage, Low and Moderate Survivability, Classes A, B, and C Tables 1 and 2
Separation Table 3
Soil Stabilization Table 3
Permanent Erosion Control, Moderate and High Survivability, Classes A, B, and C Tables 4 and 5
Ditch Lining Table 4
Temporary Silt Fence Table 6
Permanent Geosynthetic Retaining Wall Table 7 and Std. Plans
Temporary Geosynthetic Retaining Wall Tables 7 and 10
Prefabricated Drainage Mat Table 8
Table 10 will be included in the Special Provisions.
Geogrid and geotextile reinforcement in geosynthetic retaining walls shall conform

to the properties specified in the Standard Plans for permanent walls, and Table 10 for
temporary walls.
For geosynthetic retaining walls that use geogrid reinforcement, the geotextile material
placed at the wall face to retain the backfill material as shown in the Plans shall conform to
the properties for Construction Geotextile for Underground Drainage, Moderate Survivability,
Class A.
Thread used for sewing geotextiles shall consist of high-strength polypropylene, polyester,
or polyamide. Nylon threads will not be allowed. The thread used to sew permanent erosion
control geotextiles, and to sew geotextile seams in exposed faces of temporary or permanent
geosynthetic retaining walls, shall also be resistant to ultraviolet radiation. The thread shall be
of contrasting color to that of the geotextile itself.

9-33.2 Geosynthetic Properties

9-33.2(1) Geotextile Properties
Table 1
Geotextile for Underground Drainage Strength Properties for Survivability
Geotextile Property Requirements1
ASTM Test Low Survivability Moderate Survivability
Geotextile Property Method2 Woven Nonwoven Woven Nonwoven
Grab Tensile Strength, in machine and D4632 180 lb min. 115 lb min. 250 lb min. 160 lb min.
x-machine direction
Grab Failure Strain, in machine and D4632 < 50% ≥ 50% < 50% ≥ 50%
x-machine direction
Seam Breaking Strength D46323 160 lb min. 100 lb min. 220 lb min. 140 lb min.
Puncture Resistance D6241 370 lb min. 220 lb min. 495 lb min. 310 lb min.
Tear Strength, in machine and x-machine D4533 67 lb min. 40 lb min. 80 lb min. 50 lb min.
direction
Ultraviolet (UV) Radiation Stability D4355 50% strength retained min.,
after 500 hours in a xenon arc device
Notes in Section 9-33.2(3), Table 8.
Table 2
Geotextile for Underground Drainage Filtration Properties
Geotextile ASTM Test Geotextile Property Requirements1
Property Method2 Class A Class B Class C
AOS D4751 No. 40 max. No. 60 max. No. 80 max.
Water Permittivity D4491 0.5 sec-1 min. 0.4 sec-1 min. 0.3 sec-1 min.
Table 3
Geotextile for Separation or Soil Stabilization
ASTM Test Separation Soil Stabilization
Geotextile Property Method2 Woven Nonwoven Woven Nonwoven
AOS D4751 No. 30 max. No. 40 max.
Water Permittivity D4491 0.02 sec-1 min. 0.10 sec-1 min.
Grab Tensile Strength, in machine and D4632 250 lb min. 160 lb min. 315 lb min. 200 lb min.
x-machine direction
Grab Failure Strain, in machine and D4632 < 50% ≥ 50% < 50% ≥ 50%
x-machine direction
Seam Breaking Strength D46323 220 lb min. 140 lb min. 270 lb min. 180 lb min.
Puncture Resistance D6241 495 lb min. 310 lb min. 620 lb min. 430 lb min.
Tear Strength, in machine and x-machine D4533 80 lb min. 50 lb min. 112 lb min. 79 lb min.
direction
Ultraviolet (UV) Radiation Stability D4355 50% strength retained min.,
after 500 hours in xenon arc device

Table 4
Geotextile for Permanent Erosion Control and Ditch Lining
Permanent Erosion Control Ditch Lining
Moderate
Survivability High Survivability
ASTM Test Non Non Non
Geotextile Property Method2 Woven Woven Woven Woven Woven Woven
AOS D4751 See Table 5 See Table 5 No. 30 max.
Water Permittivity D4491 See Table 5 See Table 5 0.02 sec-1 min.
Grab Tensile Strength, in machine
D4632 250 lb min. 160 lb min. 315 lb min. 200 lb min. 250 lb min. 160 lb min.
and x-machine direction
Grab Failure Strain, in machine and
D4632 15% -50% ≥ 50% 15% - 50% ≥ 50% < 50% ≥ 50%
x-machine direction
Seam Breaking Strength D4632 220 lb min. 140 lb min. 270 lb min. 180 lb min. 220 lb min. 140 lb min.
3
Puncture Resistance D6241 495 lb min. 310 lb min. 620 lb min. 430 lb min. 495 lb min. 310 lb min.
Tear Strength, in machine and
D4533 80 lb min. 50 lb min. 112 lb min. 79 lb min. 80 lb min. 50 lb min.
x-machine direction
Ultraviolet (UV) Radiation Stability D4355 70% strength retained min., after 500 hours in xenon arc device
Table 5
Filtration Properties for Geotextile for Permanent Erosion Control
ASTM Test Geotextile Property Requirements1
Geotextile Property Method 2 Class A Class B Class C
AOS D4751 No. 40 max. No. 60 max. No. 70 max.
Water Permittivity D4491 0.7 sec-1 min. 0.4 sec-1 min. 0.2 sec-1 min.
Table 6
Geotextile for Temporary Silt Fence
ASTM Test Supported Between Posts
Geotextile Property Method2 Unsupported Between Posts With Wire or Polymeric Mesh
AOS No. 30 max. for slit wovens, No. 50 for all other geotextile types,
D4751
No. 100 min.
Water Permittivity D4491 0.02 sec-1 min.
Grab Tensile Strength, in machine 180 lb min. in machine
and x-machine direction D4632 direction, 100 lb min. in 100 lb min.
x-machine direction
D4632 30% max. at 180 lb or more
x-machine direction
Ultraviolet (UV)
D4355 70% strength retained min., after 500 hours in xenon arc device
Radiation Stability

9-33.2(2) Geotextile Properties for Retaining Walls and Reinforced Slopes

Table 7
Minimum Properties Required for Geotextile Reinforcement
Used in Geosynthetic Reinforced Slopes and Retaining Walls
ASTM Test Geotextile Property Requirements1
Geotextile Property Method2 Woven Nonwoven
AOS D4751 No. 20 max.

D4632 200 lb min. 120 lb min.
and x-machine direction

D4632 < 50% ≥ 50%
x-machine direction
Seam Breaking Strength D46323,4 160 lb min. 100 lb min.
Puncture Resistance D6241 370 lb min. 220 lb min.
Tear Strength, in machine and D4533 63 lb min. 50 lb min.
x-machine direction
Ultraviolet (UV) Radiation Stability D4355 70% (for polypropylene and polyethylene) and 50% (for polyester)
Strength Retained min., after 500 hours in a xenon arc device
9-33.2(3) Prefabricated Drainage Mat

Prefabricated drainage mat shall have a single or double dimpled polymeric core with
a geotextile attached and shall meet the following requirements:
Table 8
Minimum Properties Required for Prefabricated Drainage Mats
ASTM Test
Geotextile Property Method2 Geotextile Property Requirements1
AOS D4751 No. 60 max.
D4632 Nonwoven – 100 lb min.
and x-machine direction
Width Thickness 12 inch min.
D5199
0.4 inch min.
Compressive Strength at Yield D1621 100 psi min.
In Plan Flow Rate
Gradient = 0.1,
5.0 gal./min./ft.
Pressure = 5.5 psi D4716
15.0 gal/min./ft.
Gradient = 1.0,
Pressure = 14.5 psi
1Allgeotextile properties in Tables 1 through 8 are minimum average roll values (i.e., the test results for any sampled roll in a lot
shall meet or exceed the values shown in the table).
2The test procedures used are essentially in conformance with the most recently approved ASTM geotextile test procedures,
except for geotextile sampling and specimen conditioning, which are in accordance with WSDOT T 914, Practice for Sampling of
Geotextiles for Testing, and T 915, Practice for Conditioning of Geotextiles for Testing, respectively. Copies of these test methods
are available at the State Materials Laboratory, PO Box 47365, Olympia, WA 98504-7365.
3With seam located in the center of 8-inch-long specimen oriented parallel to grip faces.
4Applies only to seams perpendicular to the wall face.

9-33.3 Aggregate Cushion of Permanent Erosion Control Geotextile

Aggregate cushion for permanent erosion control geotextile, Class A shall meet the
requirements of Section 9-03.9(2). Aggregate cushion for permanent erosion control
geotextile, Class B or C shall meet the requirements of Sections 9-03.9(3) and 9-03.9(2).
9-33.4 Geosynthetic Material Approval and Acceptance
9-33.4(1) Geosynthetic Material Approval
Geosynthetics listed in the WSDOT Qualified Products List (QPL) are approved for use.
If the geosynthetics material is not listed in the current WSDOT QPL, a sample of each
proposed geosynthetic shall be submitted to the State Materials Laboratory in Tumwater for
evaluation. Geosynthetic material approval will be based on conformance to the applicable
properties from the Tables in Section 9-33.2 or in the Standard Plans or Special Provisions.
Approval/Disapproval information will be provided within 30 calendar days after the sample
and required information for each geosynthetic type have been received at the State Materials
Laboratory in Tumwater.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the following information regarding each
geosynthetic material proposed for use:
Manufacturer’s name and current address,
Full product name,
Geosynthetic structure, including fiber/yarn type,
Geosynthetic polymer type(s) (for permanent geosynthetic retaining walls, reinforced
slopes, reinforced embankments, and other geosynthetic reinforcement applications),
Geosynthetic roll number(s),
Geosynthetic lot number(s),
Proposed geosynthetic use(s), and
Certified test results for minimum average roll values.
Geosynthetics used as reinforcement in permanent geosynthetic retaining walls, reinforced
slopes, reinforced embankments, and other geosynthetic reinforcement applications require
proof of compliance with the National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP)
in accordance with WSDOT Standard Practice T 925 or AASHTO Standard Practice PP 66,
Standard Practice for Determination of Long-Term Strength for Geosynthetic Reinforcement.
9-33.4(2) Vacant
9-33.4(3) Acceptance Samples
A satisfactory test report is required when the quantities of geosynthetic materials proposed
for use in the following geosynthetic applications are greater than the following amounts:
Application Geosynthetic Quantity
Underground Drainage 100 sq. yd.
Permanent Geosynthetic Reinforced Slopes, Retaining Walls, Reinforced All quantities
Embankments, and other Geosynthetic Reinforcement Applications
The samples for acceptance testing shall include the information about each geosynthetic
roll to be used as stated in Section 9-33.4(4).
Samples from the geosynthetic roll will be taken to confirm that the material meets the
property values specified. Samples will be randomly taken at the job site by the Contractor in
accordance with WSDOT T 914 in the presence of the Engineer.

Acceptance will be based on testing of samples from each lot. A “lot” shall be defined for
the purposes of this Specification as all geosynthetic rolls within the consignment (i.e., all
rolls sent to the project site) that were produced by the same manufacturer during a continuous
period of production at the same manufacturing plant and have the same product name.
Test results from Section 9-33.4(1) Geosynthetic Material Approval testing may be used for
acceptance provided the tested roll(s) are part of the “lot” as defined above.
Acceptance testing information will be provided within 30 calendar days after the sample
and the required information for each geosynthetic type have been received at the State
Materials Laboratory in Tumwater.
If the results of the testing show that a geosynthetic lot, as defined, does not meet the
properties required for the specified use as indicated in Tables 1 through 8 in Section 9-33.2,
and additional tables as specified in the Special Provisions, the roll or rolls which were
sampled will be rejected. Geogrids and geotextiles for temporary geosynthetic retaining walls
shall meet the requirements of Table 7, and Table 10 in the Special Provisions. Geogrids and
geotextiles for permanent geosynthetic retaining wall shall meet the requirements of Table 7,
and Table 9 in the Special Provisions, and both geotextile and geogrid acceptance testing shall
meet the required ultimate tensile strength Tult as provided in the current QPL for the selected
product(s). If the selected product(s) are not listed in the current QPL, the result of the testing
for Tult shall be greater than or equal to Tult as determined from the product data submitted and
approved by the State Materials Laboratory during source material approval.
For each geosynthetic roll that is tested and fails, the Engineer will select two additional
rolls from the same lot for sampling and retesting. The Contractor shall sample the rolls in
accordance with WSDOT T 914 in the presence of the Engineer. If the retesting shows that
any of the additional rolls tested do not meet the required properties, the entire lot will be
rejected. If the test results from all the rolls retested meet the required properties, the entire lot
minus the roll(s) that failed will be accepted. All geosynthetic that has defects, deterioration,
or damage, as determined by the Engineer, will also be rejected. All rejected geosynthetic shall
be replaced at no additional expense to the Contracting Agency.
9-33.4(4) Acceptance by Certificate of Compliance
When the quantities of geosynthetic proposed for use in each geosynthetic application are
less than or equal to the following amounts, acceptance shall be by Manufacturer’s Certificate
of Compliance:
Application Geosynthetic Quantity
Underground Drainage 100 sq. yd.
Soil Stabilization and Separation All quantities
Permanent Erosion Control All quantities
Prefabricated Drainage Mat All quantities
The Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance shall include the following information

about each geosynthetic roll to be used:
Manufacturer’s name and current address,
Full product name,
Geosynthetic structure, including fiber/yarn type,
Geosynthetic Polymer type (for all temporary and permanent geosynthetic retaining
walls only),
Geosynthetic roll number(s),
Geosynthetic lot number(s),
Proposed geosynthetic use(s), and
Certified test results.

9-33.4(5) Approval of Seams

If the geotextile seams are to be sewn in the field, the Contractor shall provide a section of
sewn seam that can be sampled by the Engineer before the geotextile is installed. The seam
sewn for sampling shall be sewn using the same equipment and procedures as will be used to
sew the production seams. If production seams will be sewn in both the machine and cross-
machine directions, the Contractor must provide sewn seams for sampling which are oriented
in both the machine and cross-machine directions.
The seam sewn for sampling must be at least 2 yards in length in each geotextile direction.
If the seams are sewn in the factory, the Engineer will obtain samples of the factory seam at
random from any of the rolls to be used. The seam assembly description shall be submitted
by the Contractor to the Engineer and will be included with the seam sample obtained for
testing. This description shall include the seam type, stitch type, sewing thread type(s), and
stitch density.

9-34 Pavement Marking Material

9-34.1 General
Pavement marking materials in this section consist of paint, plastic, tape or raised
pavement markers as described in Sections 8-22 and 8-23 as listed below:
Low VOC Solvent Based Paint
Low VOC Waterborne Paint
Temporary Pavement Marking Paint
Type A – Liquid Hot Applied Thermoplastic
Type B – Pre-Formed Fused Thermoplastic
Type C – Cold Applied Pre-Formed Tape
Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate
Glass Beads
Temporary Pavement Marking Tape
Temporary Raised Pavement Markings
9-34.2 Paint
White and yellow paint shall comply with the Specifications for low VOC (volatile organic
compound) solvent-based paint or low VOC waterborne paint. Blue paint for “Access Parking
Space Symbol with Background” and black paint for contrast markings shall be chosen from
a WSDOT QPL-listed manufacturer for white and yellow paint.
Blue and black paint shall comply with the requirements of yellow paint in Section
9-34.2(4) and Section 9-34.2(5), with the exception that blue and black paints do not need
to meet the requirements for titanium dioxide, directional reflectance, and contrast ratio.
9-34.2(1) Vacant
9-34.2(2) Color
Paint draw-downs shall be prepared according to ASTM D82. For white, the color shall
closely match Federal Standard 595, color number 37875. For yellow, the color shall closely
match Federal Standard 595, color number 33538. For blue, the color shall closely match
Federal Standard 595, color number 35180. For black, the color shall closely match Federal
Standard 595, color number 37038.
9-34.2(3) Prohibited Materials
Traffic paint shall not contain mercury, lead, chromium, toluene, chlorinated solvents,
hydrolysable chlorine derivatives, ethylene-based glycol ethers and their acetates, nor any
other EPA hazardous waste material over the regulatory levels per CFR 40 Part 261.24.

Pavement Marking Material 9-34
9-34.2(4) Low VOC Solvent Based Paint

Low VOC Solvent-Based Paint
White Yellow
Paint Properties Test Method Min. Max. Min. Max.
Density of Paint (lb/gal) ASTM D1475 11.8 11.8
Viscosity, KU ASTM D562
@35°F
@50°F 105 105
@77°F 75 85 75 85
@90°F
@120°F 65 65
Nonvolatile Content, % by weight ASTM D2369 65 65
Pigment Content, % by weight ASTM D2698 53 53
Titanium Dioxide Content (lb/gal), Rutile ASTM D5381 1.0 0.2
Type II
Volatile Organic Content (VOC) lbs/gal ASTM D3960 1.25 1.25
Directional Reflectance %, @ 15 mils wet WSDOT T 314 80 50
Package Stability ASTM D1849 6 6
Bleeding, % ASTM D8681 90 90
Flexibility ASTM D5222 No cracking, flaking, or loss of adhesion
Settling Properties during Storage, inch ASTM D13093 8 8
Skinning ASTM D154 The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in a
¾ filled, tightly closed container
1The reflectance of the paint over asphalt paper shall be a minimum of 90 percent of the reflectance measurement of the paint over
a taped (nonbleeding) surface.
2The paint shall be applied at a wet film thickness of 6 mils to a 3 by 5 inch panel that has been solvent cleaned and lightly buffed
with steel wool. With the panel kept in a horizontal position, the paint shall be allowed to dry for 18 hours at 77° ± 2°F, and then
baked for 3 hours at 140° ± 2°F. The panel shall be cooled to 77° ± 2°F for at least 30 minutes, bent over a 0.25 inch mandrel, and
then examined without magnification. The paint shall show no cracking, flaking, or loss of adhesion.
3The sample shall show no more than 0.5 inch of clear material over the opaque portion of the paint and there shall be no settling
below a rating of eight.

Standard Waterborne Paint High-Build Waterborne Paint Cold Weather Waterborne Paint
9-34
White Yellow White Yellow White Yellow
Paint Properties Test Method Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Density of Paint (lb/gal) ASTM D1475 Within ± 0.3 of qualification sample Within ± 0.3 of qualification sample 12.5 12.5
Page 9-206
Viscosity, KU ASTM D562
@35°F 95 95
@77°F 80 95 80 95 80 95 80 95 87 87
@90°F 60 60
Nonvolatile Content, % by ASTM D2369 75 75 77 77 70 70
weight
Pigment Content, % by weight ASTM D3723 68 68 62 62 50 50
Nonvolatile Vehicle (NVV), % by ASTM D2369 40 40 43 43 40 40
weight ASTM D37231
Volatile Organic Content (VOC) ASTM D3960 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
lbs/gal
9-34.2(5) Low VOC Waterborne Paint
Fineness of Grind, (Hegman ASTM D1210 3 3 3 3

Scale)
Contrast Ratio, @ 15 mils wet ASTM D2805 0.98 0.96 0.98 0.96 0.99 0.98
Directional Reflectance %, @ WSDOT T 314 88 50 90 50 87 50
15 mils wet
Flash Point, °F ASTM D93 100° 100°
pH ASTM E70 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5
Laboratory Dry Time (Minutes) ASTM D711 10 10 10 10
Vehicle Composition ASTM D2621 100% acrylic emulsion or approved equal 100% cross-linking acrylic or approved equal 100% acrylic emulsion or approved equal
Freeze-Thaw Stability, KU ASTM D2243 and @ 5 cycles show no coagulation or change @ 5 cycles show no coagulation or change @ 3 cycles show no coagulation or change
D562 in viscosity greater than ± 5 KU in viscosity greater than ± 5 KU in viscosity greater than ± 10 KU
Heat Stability ASTM D5622 ± 10 KU from the initial viscosity ± 10 KU from the initial viscosity ± 10 KU from the initial Viscosity
Low Temperature Film ASTM D28053 No Cracks
Formation
1Use the following formula for calculating nonvolatile in vehicle (NVV): NVV = (N-P/100-P)×100. Where: N= % of nonvolatile content as determined by ASTM D2369 and P= % of pigment content as determined by
ASTM D3723.
2Put approximately 15-fluid ounces of paint in a 1-pint lined container, close the container, seal it with tape, and put it an oven maintained at 140° ± 2°F for 7 days. Equilibrate the paint at 77° ± 2°F and mix
thoroughly with gentle stirring. Perform consistency test as specified in ASTM D562. Consistency shall not vary by ±10 KU from the initial viscosity.
3Apply paint at 15 mils wet per ASTM D2805 over a 2A Leneta Chart. Immediately and carefully lay the applied film horizontally in a refrigerator that maintains a temperature of 35°F. After 24 hours, remove the
applied film and inspect. Paint film should show no cracks when held at arm’s length and observed by the naked eye.
2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

Pavement Marking Material
9-34.2(6) Temporary Pavement Marking Paint

Paint used for temporary pavement marking shall conform to the requirements of
Section 9-34.2.
9-34.3 Plastic
White and yellow plastic pavement marking materials shall comply with the
Specifications for:
Type A – Liquid hot applied thermoplastic
Type B – Pre-formed fused thermoplastic
Type C – Cold applied pre-formed tape
Type D – Liquid cold applied methyl methacrylate
For black, the color shall closely match Federal Standard 595, color number 37038,
and shall be chosen from a WSDOT QPL-listed manufacturer for white or yellow plastic.
Black plastic shall comply with Sections 9-34.3(2), 9-34.3(3), and 9-34.3(4) for yellow,
except for retroreflectance.
9-34.3(1) Type A – Liquid Hot Applied Thermoplastic
Type A material consists of a mixture of pigment, fillers, resins and glass beads that is
applied to the pavement in the molten state by extrusion or by spraying. The material can
be applied at a continuously uniform thickness or it can be applied with a profiled pattern.
Glass beads, intermixed and top dress, shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations
necessary to meet the retroreflectance requirements. Type A material shall conform to the
requirements of AASHTO M249 and the following:
Resin – The resin shall be alkyd or hydrocarbon.
Retroreflectance – ASTM E1710
Newly applied pavement markings shall have a minimum initial coefficient of
retroreflective luminance of 250 mcd∙m-2∙lx-1 for white and 175 mcd∙m-2∙lx-1 for yellow
in accordance with ASTM E1710 when measured with a 30-meter retroreflectometer.
WSDOT will measure retroreflectivity for compliance with a Delta LTL-X retroreflectometer.
Skid Resistance – ASTM E303
45 BPN units minimum
9-34.3(2) Type B – Pre-Formed Fused Thermoplastic
Type B material consists of a mixture of pigment, fillers, resins and glass beads that is
factory produced in sheet form. The material is applied by heating the pavement and top
heating the material. The material shall contain intermixed glass beads. The material shall
conform to AASHTO M249, with the exception of the relevant differences for the materials
being applied in the pre-formed state and the following:
Resin – The resin shall be alkyd or hydrocarbon.
The sample material submitted for approval shall be fused to a suitable substrate prior
to performing the following tests.
Retroreflectance – ASTM E1710
The fused samples shall have a minimum initial coefficient of retroreflective luminance of
250 mcd∙m-2∙lx-1 for white and 175 mcd∙m-2∙lx-1 for yellow in accordance with ASTM E1710
when measured with a 30-meter retroreflectometer. WSDOT will measure retroreflectivity for
compliance with a Delta LTL-X retroreflectometer.
Skid Resistance – ASTM E303
45 BPN units minimum
The blue color shall match Federal Standard 595, color number 35180, and the tolerance
of variation shall match that shown in the FHWA “Highway Blue Color Tolerance Chart”.
The red color shall match Federal Standard 595, color number 11136, and the tolerance of
variation shall match that shown in the FHWA “Highway Red Color Tolerance Chart”.

9-34.3(3) Type C – Cold Applied Pre-Formed Tape

Type C material consists of plastic pre-formed tape that is applied cold to the pavement.
The tape shall be capable of adhering to new and existing hot mix asphalt or cement concrete
pavement. If the tape manufacturer recommends the use of a surface primer or adhesive, use a
type approved by the pavement marking manufacturer. The tape shall also be capable of being
inlaid into fresh hot mix asphalt during the final rolling process. The material is identified by
the following designations: Type C-1 tape has a surface pattern with retroreflective elements
exposed on the raised areas and faces and intermixed within its body and shall conform to
ASTM D4505, Reflectivity Level I, Class 2 or 3, Skid Resistance Level A. Type C-2 tape
has retroreflective elements exposed on its surface and intermixed within its body and shall
conform to the requirements of ASTM D4505, Reflectivity Level II, Class 2 or 3, Skid
Resistance Level A.
9-34.3(4) Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate
Type D material consists of a two part mixture of methyl methacrylate and a catalyst that is
applied cold to the pavement. The material can be applied at a continuously uniform thickness
or it can be applied with profiles (bumps). The material is classified by Type designation,
depending upon the method of application.
Glass beads shall conform to the manufacturer’s recommendations necessary to meet
the retroreflectance requirements. Type D-1, D-2, D-3, D-4, and D-6 material shall have
intermixed glass beads in the material prior to application.
Type D-5 material shall have glass beads injected into the material at application and
a second coating of top dressing beads applied immediately after material application.
Type D materials shall conform to the following:
Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate Properties
White Yellow
Property Test Method Min. Max. Min. Max.
Adhesion to PCC or HMA, psi ASTM 45411 200 or substrate 200 or substrate
failure failure
Chemical Resistance 2 No Effect No Effect
Hardness ASTM D22403 50 50
No Track Time ASTM D7114 30 30
Skid Resistance, BPN ASTM E303 45 45
Tensile Strength, psi ASTM D638 125 125
1Part A and B mixed, applied at 60 mils thickness.
2Cured markings shall be resistant to calcium chloride, sodium chloride, fuels, oils, and UV effects. Cure three days for motor oil,
gas, diesel, ATF, salt, and anti-freeze.
3Shore Durometer Type D and measurement made after 24 hours.
4Sample applied at 40 mils.
Type D liquid cold-applied methyl methacrylate shall meet the following formulations:
4:1 Formulation Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate
Type D-1 – One-gallon of methyl methacrylate and 3-fluid ounces of benzoyl
peroxide powder (by weight).
Type D-2, D-3, D-4, and D-5 – Four parts methyl methacrylate and one part liquid
benzoyl peroxide (by volume).
98:2 Formulation Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate
Type D-1– One-gallon of methyl methacrylate and 3-fluid ounces of benzoyl
peroxide powder (by weight).
Type D-2, D-3, D-4, D-5, and D-6 – Ninety-eight parts methyl methacrylate
and two parts liquid benzoyl peroxide (by volume).

D liquid cold applied methyl methacrylate shall meet the following requirements
for viscosity:
4:1 Formulations Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate
D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 White D-5 Yellow
Property Test Method Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Viscosity cP @ ASTM D2196
15,000
26,000
28,000
17,000
21,000
11,000
77°F, 50-rpm, Method B,
spindle #7 LV Model
10,000
11,000
8,000
5,000
8,000
7,000
77°F, 50-rpm, Method B,
spindle #4 LV Model
98:2 Formulations Type D – Liquid Cold Applied Methyl Methacrylate

D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4 D-5 D-6
Property Test Method Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Viscosity Daniel Daniel
12 14 6 12 12 14 13 15
Scale Method1
77°F, 50-rpm, Method B, 100 118
spindle #4 LV Model
1Follow Daniel Gauge method; measure flow at 60-seconds.
9-34.4 Glass Beads for Pavement Marking Materials

Glass beads for traffic marking paint shall be coated with silicone for moisture resistance
and a silane to promote adhesion. The beads shall be transparent, clean, colorless glass;
smooth and spherically shaped; and free from milkiness, pits, or excessive air bubbles.
Glass beads used with plastic traffic markings shall be per the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
The glass beads for paint and plastic traffic markings shall not contain any metals in excess
of the following established total concentration limits when tested in accordance with the
listed test methodology:
Metal Concentration Limits
Element Test Method Max. Parts Per Million (ppm)
Arsenic EPA 3052 SW-846 6010C 10.0
Barium EPA 3052 SW-846 6010C 100.0
Cadmium EPA 3052 SW-846 6010C 1.0
Chromium EPA 3052 SW-846 6010C 5.0
Lead EPA 3052 SW-846 6010C 50.0
Silver EPA 3052 SW-846 6010C 5.0
Mercury EPA 3052 SW-846 7471B 4.0

Glass beads for traffic marking paint shall meet the following requirements for quality:
Type A Type B1
Glass Bead Property Test Method Min. Max. Min. Max.
Refractive Index @ 77 AASHTO M247 1.50 1.55 1.50 1.55
± 9°F Section 5.2.3
AASHTO M247
Moisture Resistances Flow Without Stopping Flow Without Stopping
Section 5.3.2
Adherence AASHTO M247
Pass Pass
Section 5.3.4
Roundness, % ASTM D1155 70 802
FLHT 520 803
Appearance TT-B-1325D Beads shall be transparent,
Section 4.3.1 clean, dry, and free from
bubbles and foreign matter.
Resistance to Acid TT-B-1325D Beads shall not develop any
Section 4.3.6 surface haze or dulling.
Resistance to Calcium TT-B-1325D Beads shall not develop any
Chloride Section 4.3.7 surface haze or dulling.
Resistance to Sodium TT-B-1325D Sodium sulfide should
Sulfide Section 4.3.8 not darken the beads.
Water Resistance TT-B-1325D Water shall not produce haze
Section 4.3.9 or dulling of the beads.
1WSDOT Type B Glass Beads are high-performance glass beads for improved retroreflectivity and durability for high-performance
pavement markings. A minimum of 50 percent of the glass beads shall be made from the direct-melt molten kiln process.
2Roundness will be determined on material < No. 30 sieve.
3Roundness will be determined on material ≥ No. 30 sieve.
Glass beads for traffic marking paint shall meet the following requirements for grading
when tested in accordance with ASTM D1214:
Percent Passing
Type A1 Type B
Sieve Size Min. Max. Min. Max.
No. 14 100
No. 16 100
No. 18 65 80
No. 20 95 100
No. 30 75 95 30 50
No. 50 15 35 0 5
No. 100 0 5
1Same gradation as AASHTO M247 Type 1.
9-34.5 Temporary Pavement Marking Tape

Biodegradable tape with paper backing is not allowed.
9-34.5(1) Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Short Duration
Temporary pavement marking tape for short duration shall conform to ASTM D4592
Type II except that black tape, black mask tape and the black portion of the contrast removable
tape, shall be non-reflective.

9-34.5(2) Temporary Pavement Marking Tape – Long Duration

Temporary pavement marking tape for long duration shall conform to ASTM D4592
Type I. Temporary pavement marking tape for long duration, except for black tape, shall
have a minimum initial coefficient of retroreflective luminance of 200 mcd*m-2*lx-1 when
measured in accordance with ASTM E2832 or ASTM E2176. Black tape, black mask tape and
the black portion of the contrast removable tape, shall be non-reflective.
9-34.6 Temporary Flexible Raised Pavement Markers
Temporary flexible raised pavement markers shall consist of an L-shaped body with
retroreflective tape on the top of one face for one-way traffic and reflective tape on the top
of both faces for two-way traffic. The marker body shall be made from 0.060-inch minimum
thick polyurethane. The top of the vertical leg shall be between 1.75 and 2.0 inches high and
shall be approximately 4 inches wide. The base width shall be approximately 1.125 inches
wide. The base shall have a pressure sensitive adhesive material, a minimum of 0.125 inch
thick with release paper. The reflective tape shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high by 4 inches
wide. The reflective tape shall have a minimum reflectance of 3.5 candlepower per foot-candle
for white and 2.5 candlepower per foot-candle for yellow measured at 0.2-degree observation
angle and 0-degree entrance angle.
9-34.7 Field Testing
9-34.7(1) Requirements
Field performance evaluation is required for low VOC solvent-based paint per Section
9-34.2(4), standard waterborne paint and high-build water borne paint per Section 9-34.2(5),
Type A – liquid hot applied thermoplastic per Section 9-34.3(1), Type B – preformed fused
thermoplastic per Section 9-34.3(2), Type C – cold applied preformed tape per Section
9-34.3(3), and Type D – liquid applied methyl methacrylate per Section 9-34.3(4).
Testing on a northern AASHTO National Transportation Product Evaluation Program
(NTPEP) pavement marking test deck is recommended. Test decks conducted by other public
entities may be considered provided they produce data similar to a northern NTPEP test deck.
Retroreflectivity, Durability, and Auto No-Track shall conform to the following requirements
after being installed on a northern NTPEP test deck for a minimum of 12 months.
Successful use of a product in five other States may be considered in lieu of the field
test requirement.
Cold weather waterborne traffic paint per Section 9-34.2(5) will be accepted based solely
on the laboratory testing.
9-34.7(1)A Retroreflectivity
Retroreflectivity is measured as a coefficient of retroreflective luminance (RL) in
accordance with the requirements of ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry. The minimum
initial retroreflectivity is 250 mcd∙m-2∙lx-1 for white and 175 mcd∙m-2∙lx-1 for yellow, except
Type C preformed tape shall meet the minimum initial values in ASTM D4505. The minimum
retroreflectivity after 12 months is 150 mcd∙m-2∙lx-1 for white and 100 mcd∙m-2∙lx-1 for yellow,
when measured in the skip line area. However, the Department will review the results of each
test deck to determine the minimum value in effect for that deck, in order to approve only the
better-performing materials.
9-34.7(1)B Durability
Durability rating shall be a minimum of seven in the skip line area and six in the wheel
paths after 12 months. The rating system used will be as indicated by NTPEP procedures.
However, the department will review the results for each test deck to determine the minimum
value in effect for that deck, in order to approve only the better-performing materials.

9-34.7(1)C Auto No-Track Time

Auto No-Track Time will only be required for low VOC solvent-based paint per
Section 9-34.2(4), and standard waterborne paint and high-build water borne paint per
Section 9-34.2(5).
No-track time shall be determined in accordance with NTPEP procedures by passing
over an applied test line with a standard size passenger car without tracking of the line when
viewed from a distance of 50 feet. Standard paint shall have a no-track time of 90 seconds
or less when applied at a wet film thickness of 15 ±1 mil, with glass beads applied at a
minimum rate of 6 pounds per gallon of paint. High-build paint shall have a no-track time of
120 seconds or less when applied at a wet film thickness of 20 to 30 mils, with glass beads
applied at a minimum rate of 10 pounds per gallon of paint. The maximum no-track time shall
not be exceeded when the pavement temperature is between 50°F and 120°F, with relative
humidity less than 85 percent, and the pavement is dry.
9-34.7(1)D Approval
The Department will evaluate the results of laboratory and test deck data. This information
will be reviewed for each material by color and roadway surface to determine compliance
with this Specification. Approved product formulas will remain active for a period of
approximately 5 years after completion of the NTPEP evaluation; afterwards, the product
will need to be reevaluated.

Temporary Traffic Control Materials 9-35
9-35 Temporary Traffic Control Materials

Temporary traffic control materials in this section consist of various traffic communication,
channelization and protection items described in Section 1-10 and listed below:
Stop/Slow Paddles
Construction Signs
Wood Sign Posts
Sequential Arrow Signs
Portable Changeable Message Signs
Barricades
Traffic Safety Drums
Traffic Cones
Tubular Markers
Warning Lights and Flashers
Transportable Attenuator
Portable Temporary Traffic Control Signal
Tall Channelizing Devices
The basis for acceptance of temporary traffic control devices and materials shall be visual
inspection by the Engineer’s representative. No sampling or testing will be done except that
deemed necessary to support the visual inspection. Unless otherwise noted, requests for
Approval of Material (RAM) and Qualified Products List (QPL) submittals are not required.
Certification for crashworthiness according to NCHRP 350 or the Manual for Assessing Safety
Hardware (MASH) will be required as described in Section 1-10.2(3).
“MUTCD”, as used in this section, shall refer to the latest WSDOT adopted edition of the
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways. In the event of conflicts
between the MUTCD and the Contract provisions, then the provisions shall govern.
9-35.1 Stop/Slow Paddles
Paddles shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD, except that the minimum width
shall be 24 inches.
9-35.2 Construction Signs
Construction signs shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD and shall meet
the requirements of NCHRP Report 350 for Category 2 devices or MASH. Except as noted
below, any sign/sign stand combination that satisfies these requirements will be acceptable.
Post mounted Class A construction signs shall conform to the requirements of this section and
additionally shall conform to the requirements stated in Section 9-28.
Aluminum sheeting shall be used to fabricate all construction signs. The signs shall
have a minimum thickness of 0.080 inches and a maximum thickness of 0.125 inches.
All orange background signs shall be fabricated with Type X reflective sheeting.
All post‑mounted signs with Type X sheeting shall use a nylon washer between the twist
fasteners (screw heads, bolts or nuts) and the reflective sheeting.
The use of plywood, fiberglass reinforced plastic, fabric rollup signs, and any other
previously approved sign materials except aluminum or aluminum composite is prohibited.
All Class A and Class B signs shall utilize materials and be fabricated in accordance with
Section 9-28 and the Washington State Sign Fabrication Manual M 55-05. A fabrication decal
as stated in Section 9-28.1(2) is not required for construction signs. All regulatory signs having
a red background (i.e., Stop, Yield) shall be fabricated with Type III or IV sign sheeting.
All other regulatory information signs (i.e., Speed Limit, Traffic Fines Double in Work Zones)
shall have Type II sheeting in rural areas and Type III or IV sheeting in urban areas. All signs
having a green background (i.e., Exit arrow) shall have Type II sheeting for the background
and Type III or IV sheeting for the letters, border, and symbols.

9-35.3 Wood Sign Posts

Post sizes for construction signs shall be as follows:
One Post Installation
Post Size Min. Sign Sq. Ft. Max. Sign Sq. Ft.
4x4 16.0
4x6 17.0 20.0
6x6 21.0 25.0
6x8 26.0 31.0
Two Post Installation

(For signs 5 feet or greater in width)
Post Size Min. Sign Sq. Ft. Max. Sign Sq. Ft.
4x4 16.0
4x6 17.0 36.0
6x6 37.0 46.0
6x8 47.0 75.0*
*The Engineer shall determine post size for signs greater than 75 square feet.
Sign posts shall conform to the grades and usage listed below. Grades shall be determined
by the current standards of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) or the Western
Wood Products Association (WWPA).
4 × 4 Construction grade (Light Framing, Section 122‑b WCLIB)
or (Section 40.11 WWPA)
4 × 6 No. 1 and better, grade (Structural Joists and Planks,
6 × 6, 6 × 8, 8 × 10 No. 1 and better, grade (Posts and Timbers,
6 × 10, 6 × 12 No. 1 and better, grade (Beams and Stringers,
9-35.4 Sequential Arrow Signs
Sequential Arrow Signs shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD supplemented with
the following:
Sequential arrow signs furnished for stationary lane closures on this project shall be
Type C.
The color of the light emitted shall be yellow.
The dimming feature shall be automatic, reacting to changes in light without a requirement
for manual adjustment.
9-35.5 Portable Changeable Message Signs
Portable Changeable Message Signs (PCMS) shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD
and the following:
The PCMS shall employ one of the following technologies:
1. Fiber optic/shutter
2. Light emitting diode
3. Light emitting diode/shutter
4. Flip disk

Regardless of the technology, the PCMS shall meet the following general requirements:
1. Be light emitting and must not rely solely on reflected light. The emitted light shall be
generated using fiber optic or LED technology.
2. Have a display consisting of individually controlled pixels no larger than 2½ by
2½ inch. If the display is composed of individual character modules, the space between
modules must be minimized so alphanumeric characters of any size specified below can
be displayed at any location within the matrix.
3. When activated, the pixels shall display a yellow or orange image. When not activated,
the pixels shall display a flat black image that matches the background of the sign face.
4. Be capable of displaying alphanumeric characters that are a minimum of 18 inches
in height. The width of alphanumeric characters shall be appropriate for the font.
The PCMS shall be capable of displaying three lines of eight characters per line with
a minimum of one pixel separation between each line.
5. The PCMS message, using 18-inch characters, shall be legible by a person with
20/20 corrected vision from a distance of not less than 800 feet centered on an axis
perpendicular to the sign face.
6. The sign display shall be covered by a stable, impact resistant polycarbonate face.
The sign face shall be non-glare from all angles and shall not degrade due to exposure
to ultraviolet light.
7. Be capable of simultaneously activating all pixels for the purpose of pixel diagnostics.
Any sign that employs flip disk or shutter technology shall be programmable to activate
the disks/shutters once a day to clean the electrical components. This feature shall not
occur when the sign is displaying an active message.
8. The light source shall be energized only when the sign is displaying an active message.
9. Primary source of power shall be solar power with a battery backup to provide
continuous operation when failure of the primary power source occurs.
10. The sign controller software shall be NTCIP compliant.
The PCMS panels and related equipment shall be permanently mounted on a trailer with
all controls and power generating equipment.
The PCMS shall be operated by a controller that provides the following functions:
1. Select any preprogrammed message by entering a code.
2. Sequence the display of at least five messages.
3. Blank the sign.
4. Program a new message, which may include animated arrows and chevrons.
5. Mirror the message currently being displayed or programmed.
9-35.6 Barricades
Barricades shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD supplemented by the further
requirements of the Standard Plans.
9-35.7 Traffic Safety Drums
Traffic safety drums shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD and shall have the
following additional physical characteristics:
Material Fabricated from low-density polyethylene that meets the
requirements of ASTM D4976 and is UV stabilized.
Overall Width 18-inch minimum regardless of orientation.
Shape Rectangular, hexagonal, circular, or flat-sided semi-circular.
Color The base color of the drum shall be fade resistant safety orange.
The traffic safety drums shall be designed to accommodate at least one portable light
unit. The method of attachment shall ensure that the light does not separate from the drum
upon impact.

Drums and light units shall meet the crashworthiness requirements of NCHRP 350
or MASH as described in Section 1-10.2(3).
When recommended by the manufacturer, drums shall be treated to ensure proper adhesion
of the reflective sheeting. Retroreflective bands shall be fabricated from Type III or Type IV
reflective sheeting as described in Section 9-28.12.
9-35.8 Vacant
9-35.9 Traffic Cones
Cones shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD, except that the minimum height
shall be 28 inches.
Retroreflective bands shall be fabricated from Type III or Type IV reflective sheeting as
described in Section 9-28.12.
9-35.10 Tubular Markers
Tubular markers shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD, except that the
minimum height shall be 28 inches.
The devices shall be stabilized by affixing them to the pavement by using either
weighted bases or adhesive. Adhesive used to glue the device to the pavement shall meet the
requirements of Sections 9-02.1(8) or 9-26.2. Retroreflective bands shall be fabricated from
Type III or Type IV reflective sheeting as described in Section 9-28.12.
9-35.11 Warning Lights and Flashers
Warning lights and flashers shall conform to the requirements of the MUTCD.
9-35.12 Transportable Attenuator
Transportable attenuators are Truck-Mounted Attenuators (TMA) or Trailer-Mounted
Attenuators (TMA-trailer). The transportable attenuator shall be mounted on, or attached to, a
host vehicle that complies with the manufacturer’s recommended weight range. Ballast used
to obtain the minimum weight requirement, or any other object that is placed on the vehicle,
shall be securely anchored such that it will be retained on the vehicle during an impact. The
Contractor shall provide certification that the transportable attenuator complies with NCHRP
350 Test level 3 or MASH Test Level 3 requirements. Lighter host vehicles proposed by
the Contractor are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide the
Engineer with roll-ahead distance calculations and crash test reports illustrating that the
proposed host vehicle is appropriate for the attenuator and the site conditions.
The transportable attenuator shall have a chevron pattern on the rear of the unit. The
standard chevron pattern shall consist of 4-inch yellow stripes, alternating nonreflective black
and retroreflective yellow sheeting, slanted at 45 degrees in an inverted “V” with the “V” at
the center of the unit.
9-35.12(1) Truck-Mounted Attenuator
The TMA may be selected from the approved units listed on the QPL or submitted using
a RAM.
The TMA shall have an adjustable height so that it can be placed at the correct elevation
during usage and to a safe height for transporting. If needed, the Contractor shall install
additional lights to provide fully visible brake lights at all times.
9-35.12(2) Trailer-Mounted Attenuator
The TMA-trailer may be selected from the approved units listed on the QPL or submitted
using a RAM.
If needed, the Contractor shall install additional lights to provide fully visible brake lights
at all times.

9-35.12(3) Submittal Requirements

For transportable attenuators listed on the QPL, the Contractor shall submit the QPL
printed page or a QPL Acceptance Code entered on the RAM (WSDOT Form 350-071)
for the product proposed for use to the Engineer for approval. The Contractor shall submit
a RAM for transportable attenuators not listed on the QPL.
9-35.13 Tall Channelizing Devices
Tall channelizing devices shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD Part VI for
channelizing devices and shall conform to these general Specifications:
Fabricated of fade resistant, safety orange color, low-density polyethylene that is resistant
to deformation upon impact and meets the requirements of ASTM D4976 and is UV stabilized.
Forty-two inches in height minimum, using a tapered cone type shape of consistent
dimensions regardless of orientation to traffic.
Four inches in width minimum at the top and 8 inches in width minimum at the base,
which incorporates a separate ballast that is designed to resist overturning or other movement
from wind gusts or other external forces.
Four retroreflective 6-inch-wide horizontal bands, alternating orange and white beginning
6 inches from the top of the device. Retroreflective bands shall be fabricated from Type III or
Type IV reflective sheeting as described in Section 9-28.12.
Warning lights are not required unless specifically shown on the traffic control Plan but
provisions for securely attaching a warning light are required. The method of attachment must
ensure that the light does not separate from the device upon impact and light units shall meet
the crashworthiness requirements of NCHRP 350 or MASH as described in Section 1-10.2(3).
Devices shall be regularly maintained to ensure that they are clean and the reflective
sheeting is in good condition.
Except for the Specifications and requirements specifically listed above, Tall Channelizing
Devices are defined to be Traffic Cones. All non-conflicting Contract provisions related to
“Cones” shall apply to Tall Channelizing Devices.
9-35.14 Portable Temporary Traffic Control Signal
Portable traffic control signals shall meet the requirements of the MUTCD and these
specifications.
The portable temporary traffic control signal shall be fully operational for two-phase traffic
actuated, pre-timed, or manual control. The portable temporary traffic control signal shall
conform to the following requirements:
Controllers shall demonstrate conflict-monitoring capability, consistent with the
requirements of Section 9-29.13(2) item number 5, with a flashing red display in
both directions. The portable traffic control signal shall be capable of terminating the
movement one (1) or movement two (2) all red clearance, in order to repeat the previous
movements operation.
Signal head displays shall be either hard wired or controlled by radio signal. Manual
operation will not require hardwiring or radio control except for the use of two-way radio
communication by manufacturer trained qualified operators.
The system shall be equipped with a means of informing the operator of signal indications,
such as a light on the back of each signal head that illuminates when the signal displays a red
indication, during manual operation.
A vehicle detection system is required. The system shall be capable of operating either as
fixed time or traffic actuated controller. The detection system shall provide presence detection
(continuous call to the controller) while there is a vehicle in the detection zone.
Signal supports used with portable traffic control signals shall provide a minimum of
two signal displays, spaced a minimum of 8 feet apart. When trailer-mounted portable
traffic signals are used to provide alternating one-way control, a minimum of one of the

signal displays shall be suspended over the traveled way. The minimum vertical clearance
to the traveled way for this signal display is 16.5 feet. Vehicular signal heads shall be of the
conventional type with standard ITE approved, 12-inch ball LED display. Tunnel visors shall
be provided for all indications.
Back plates shall be furnished and attached to the signal heads. Back plates shall be
constructed of 5-inch-wide .050-inch-thick corrosion resistant louvered aluminum, with a
flat black finish. A highly retroreflective yellow strip, 1 inch wide, shall be placed around the
perimeter of the face of all vehicle signal backplates to project a rectangular image at night
toward oncoming traffic.
Trailers shall have a leveling jack installed at all four corners. The crank for the leveling
jacks and trailer hitch shall be locked. The signal pole and mast arm assemblies shall be of the
collapsible type, which can be erected and extended at the job site. The mast arm assemblies
shall be firmly attached to the trailer to form a stable unit, which can withstand an 80 mph
design wind speed with a 1.3 gust factor.
The portable temporary traffic control signal shall be powered using a self-contained
battery system capable of providing over 12 days of continuous operations without solar
array assistance. A solar panel array will be allowed.

Shaft-Related Materials 9-36
9-36 Shaft-Related Materials

9-36.1 Shaft Casing
9-36.1(1) Permanent Casing
Permanent casing shall be of steel base metal conforming to ASTM A36, ASTM A252
Grades 2 or 3, ASTM A572, or ASTM A588.
9-36.1(2) Temporary Casing
Temporary casing shall be a smooth wall structure of steel base metal, except where
corrugated metal pipe is shown in the Plans as an acceptable alternative material.
9-36.2 Shaft Slurry
9-36.2(1) Mineral Slurry
Mineral slurry shall conform to the following requirements:
Property Test Requirement
Density (pcf) Mud Weight (Density) API 13B-1, Section 1 63 to 75
Viscosity (seconds/quart) Marsh Funnel and Cup API 13b-1, Section 2.2 26 to 50
PH Glass Electrode, pH Meter, or pH Paper 8 to 11
Sand Content (percent) Sand API 13B-1, Section 5
Prior to final cleaning 4.0 max.
Immediately prior to placing concrete 4.0 max.
Use of mineral slurry in salt water installations will not be allowed.

Slurry temperature shall be at least 40F when tested.
9-36.2(2) Synthetic Slurry
Synthetic slurries shall be used in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
and shall conform to the quality control plan specified in Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 4.
The synthetic slurry shall conform to the following requirements:
Density (pcf) Mud Weight (Density) API 13B-1, Section 1 64 max.
Viscosity (seconds/quart) Marsh Funnel and Cup API 13b-1, Section 2.2 32 to 135
PH Glass Electrode, pH Meter, or pH Paper 6 to 11.5
Sand Content (percent) Sand API 13B-1, Section 5
prior to final cleaning 1.0 max.
immediately prior to placing concrete 1.0 max.
If the product is not listed on the Qualified Products List, the Contractor shall submit
a Request for Approval of Materials Source (RAM) form with the following information:
• Test data showing conformance to the properties in the table above, and
• Documentation showing that the synthetic slurry (with load-tested additives) has been
approved by the California Department of Transportation (Caltrans).

9-36 Shaft-Related Materials
9-36.2(3) Water Slurry

Water without site soils may be used as slurry when casing is used for the entire length
of the drilled hole. Water slurry without full length casing may only be used with the approval
of the Engineer.
Water slurry shall conform to the following requirements:
Density (pcf) Mud Weight (Density) API 13B-1, Section 1 65 max.
Sand Content (percent) Sand API 13B-1, Section 5 1.0 max.
Use of water slurry in salt water installations will not be allowed.

Slurry temperature shall be at least 40ºF when tested.
9-36.3 Steel Reinforcing Bar Centralizers
Steel reinforcing bar centralizers shall be steel, conforming to the details shown in the
Plans. The Contractor may propose the use of alternative steel reinforcing bar devices as part
of the shaft installation narrative as specified in Section 6-19.3(2)B, item 9, subject to the
Engineer’s review and approval of such devices.
9-36.4 CSL Access Tubes and Caps
Access tubes for crosshole sonic log testing shall be steel pipe of 0.145 inches minimum
wall thickness and at least 1½ inch inside diameter.
The access tubes shall have a round, regular inside diameter free of defects and
obstructions, including all pipe joints, in order to permit the free, unobstructed passage of
1.3‑inch maximum diameter source and receiver probes used for the crosshole sonic log tests.
The access tubes shall be watertight and free from corrosion, with clean internal and external
faces to ensure a good bond between the concrete and the access tubes.
The access tubes shall be fitted with watertight threaded PVC caps on the bottom, and
shall be fitted with watertight PVC caps, secured in position by means as approved by the
Engineer, on the top.
9-36.5 Grout for CSL Access Tubes
Grout for filling the access tubes at the completion of the crosshole sonic log tests
shall be a homogeneous mixture of neat cement grout and potable water, conforming to
Section 9-20.3(4), except that the maximum water/cement ratio shall be 0.45.

Index
A
Abandon existing manholes.................................................................................................... 7-19
Abbreviations............................................................................................................................ 1-1
Acceptance of Aggregate (Section 3-04).............................................................................. 3-11
Acceptance of work, final..............................................................................................1-32, 1-98
Access to work, inspection............................................................................................1-30, 6-95
Acquisition of quarry and pit sites............................................................................................ 3-4
Adjusting, manholes and catch basins.................................................................................... 7-19
pin nuts, anchor bolts, shoes........................................................................................... 6-113
sprinklers.......................................................................................................................... 8-29
Admixtures for concrete......................................................................... 6-8, 9-120, 9-121, 9-124
Aeration, equipment for.......................................................................................................... 2-18
Age, concrete piling (strength)............................................................................................... 9-72
concrete pipe for shipment............................................................................................... 9-36
Aggregates (Section 9-03)....................................................................................................... 9-8
bituminous surface treatment........................................................................................... 9-12
cement concrete pavement........................................................................................5-43, 9-8
fineness modulus................................................................................................................ 9-9
HMA................................................................................................................................. 9-16
nonstatistical acceptance.................................................................................................. 3-11
statistical acceptance........................................................................................................ 3-12
stockpiling.......................................................................................................................... 3-6
washed................................................................................................................................ 3-8
Air-entrained concrete, for pavement....................................................................................... 5-2
Alignment and grade, steel structures................................................................................... 6-106
Alkali Silica Reactive (ASR) aggregates.................................................................................. 9-8
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)................ 1-1
American Railway Engineering and Maintenance Association (AREMA).............................. 1-1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM)........................................ 1-1
Anchor bolts, placed in concrete structure.............................................................................. 6-56
in steel structure............................................................................................................. 6-113
Annealing, eyebars................................................................................................................ 6-100
Anti-stripping additive.............................................................................................................. 9-7
Approaches to movable spans................................................................................................... 6-2
Approval of, materials...................................................................................................1-26, 1-34
working drawings......................................................................................................1-28, 6-2
Archaeological and historical objects..................................................................................... 1-66
Arch, pipe, structural plate...................................................................................................... 7-11
Asphalt, basis of measurement............................................................................................... 1-88
certification of shipment..................................................................................................... 9-7
curb, gutter....................................................................................................................... 8-33
samples............................................................................................................................... 9-7
Assignment of contract........................................................................................................... 1-77
Audits.................................................................................................................................... 1-104
Authority of engineer and inspector....................................................................................... 1-28
Award and Execution of Contract (Section 1-03).............................................................. 1-16
2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page I-1

Index
B
Backfill abutments, inverts, piers, walls, etc........................................................................... 2-30
Backfill, gravel........................................................................................................................ 9-22
for drains.......................................................................................................................... 9-22
for drywells...................................................................................................................... 9-22
for foundations................................................................................................................. 9-21
for pipe zone bedding....................................................................................................... 9-22
for sand drains.................................................................................................................. 9-23
for walls............................................................................................................................ 9-21
Backfilling,.............................................................................................................................. 2-30
bridges and trestles........................................................................................................... 2-17
cribbing........................................................................................................................... 8-108
irrigation system............................................................................................................... 8-29
manholes and catch basins............................................................................................... 7-19
pipe................................................................................................................................... 7-27
structural plate pipe, arch, and underpass........................................................................ 7-12
unsuitable foundation....................................................................................................... 2-16
Ballast..................................................................................................................................... 9-17
Ballast and Crushed Surfacing (Section 4-04)..................................................................... 4-4
Barricades, concrete pavement............................................................................................... 5-56
Bars, dowel............................................................................................................................. 5-52
reinforcing...............................................................................................................6-58, 9-58
Base, crushed surfacing...................................................................................................4-4, 9-18
gravel base.................................................................................................................9-19, 4-2
Beam guardrail.............................................................................................................8-44, 9-101
Bearing tests............................................................................................................................ 2-35
Bearing values, timber piles.................................................................................................. 6-131
Bedding, pipe.......................................................................................................................... 7-25
Beginning of work.................................................................................................................. 1-79
Bending steel reinforcing bars.......................................................................................6-58, 9-58
Bents, framed........................................................................................................................ 6-117
Bid, consideration of............................................................................................................... 1-16
deposit..................................................................................................................... 1-11, 1-18
identical............................................................................................................................ 1-16
proposal.............................................................................................................................. 1-3
Bidder........................................................................................................................................ 1-3
causes for disqualification................................................................................................ 1-15
prequalification of.............................................................................................................. 1-7
Bid Procedures and Conditions (Section 1-02)..................................................................... 1-7
Prequalification of Bidders................................................................................................. 1-7
Bituminous Materials (Section 9-02)..................................................................................... 9-4
Bituminous Surface Treatment (Section 5-02)..................................................................... 5-9
Bituminous Surfacing on Structure Decks (Section 6-08)............................................... 6-158
Bolts........................................................................................................................................ 9-53
Bolts, anchor, for concrete, steel, and timber structures
anchor bolts...................................................................................................................... 9-55
anchor for concrete........................................................................................................... 6-56
high-strength..................................................................................................................... 9-53
timber structure.............................................................................................................. 6-116
Page I-2 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

Index
unfinished......................................................................................................................... 9-53
washers............................................................................................................................. 9-54
Borrow, and borrow sites...............................................................................................2-12, 2-13
select................................................................................................................................. 2-18
Box girder cell, drainage of.................................................................................................... 6-57
Bridge approach embankment, definition................................................................................. 1-4
backfill.............................................................................................................................. 2-17
compacted......................................................................................................................... 2-17
Bridge Railings (Section 6-06)............................................................................................ 6-135
Buildings, use of..................................................................................................................... 1-26
Burlap cloth........................................................................................................................... 9-120
C
Calendar days.......................................................................................................................... 1-79
Camber diagram, structural steel.......................................................................................... 6-106
timber trusses.................................................................................................................. 6-119
Catch basins............................................................................................................................ 7-18
Cement Concrete Driveway Entrances (Section 8-06)...................................................... 8-36
Cement Concrete Pavement Rehabilitation (Section 5-01)................................................. 5-1
Cement Concrete Pavement (Section 5-05)........................................................................ 5-43
cold weather..................................................................................................................... 5-56
curing.......................................................................................................................5-55, 5-56
dowel bars...............................................................................................................5-52, 9-60
equipment......................................................................................................................... 5-44
finishing............................................................................................................................ 5-53
joints................................................................................................................................. 5-51
mixing for structures...................................................................................................6-4, 6-5
proportioning materials.................................................................................................... 5-43
repair defective slabs........................................................................................................ 5-57
surface smoothness........................................................................................................... 5-54
thickness, penalty for lack of............................................................................................ 5-60
tie bars.....................................................................................................................5-52, 9-61
Cement Concrete Sidewalks (Section 8-14)........................................................................ 8-55
Cementitious........................................................................................................................... 5-43
Cement, portland....................................................................................................................... 9-2
acceptance of...................................................................................................................... 9-3
Cement (Section 9-01)............................................................................................................. 9-2
Chain Link Fence and Wire Fence (Section 8-12)............................................................. 8-49
Changed conditions................................................................................................................. 1-26
Change order........................................................................................................................... 1-20
Check dams.............................................................................................................8-9, 9-87, 9-88
Chlorination............................................................................................................................ 7-40
Claims........................................................................................................................1-104, 1-105
Cleaning Existing Drainage Structures (Section 7-07)...................................................... 7-23
Cleanup, final............................................................................................................................ 3-2
final for structures............................................................................................................... 6-3
Clearing, Grubbing, and Roadside Cleanup (Section 2-01)................................................ 2-1
clearing and grubbing......................................................................................................... 2-1
Clearing site for structures........................................................................................................ 6-1
Cofferdams, shoring................................................................................................................ 2-33

Index
Cold weather work/unfavorable weather

concrete............................................................................................................................ 6-17
concrete pavement............................................................................................................ 5-56
surfacing............................................................................................................................. 4-6
Collusion, noncollusion declaration........................................................................................ 1-11
Compacting, HMA
concrete............................................................................................................................ 5-49
embankment..................................................................................................................... 2-13
subgrade........................................................................................................................... 2-25
surfacing............................................................................................................................. 4-5
Compaction control tests......................................................................................................... 2-15
Completion date of contract.............................................................................................1-4, 1-79
Compost.................................................................................................................................. 9-84
Concrete.................................................................................................................................... 6-4
air-entrained..................................................................................................................... 6-13
blocks............................................................................................................................... 9-75
cement concrete pavement............................................................................................... 5-43
cement proportions for classes........................................................................................... 6-5
consistency..............................................................................................................5-44, 6-13
curbs................................................................................................................................. 8-32
curing, pavement.............................................................................................................. 5-55
curing, structures.............................................................................................................. 6-25
finishing concrete surfaces, structures.............................................................................. 6-30
finishing on pavement...................................................................................................... 5-53
foundation seals................................................................................................................ 6-18
hand mixing...................................................................................................................... 6-10
lean concrete....................................................................................................................... 6-8
mixing for pavement........................................................................................................ 5-48
mixing for structures...................................................................................................6-4, 6-5
piling, cast-in-place...............................................................................................6-123, 9-72
pipe, culvert...................................................................................................................... 9-35
pipe, drain......................................................................................................................... 9-33
placed in cold or freezing weather..........................................................................5-56, 6-17
placed in hot weather........................................................................................................ 6-17
placed under water........................................................................................................... 6-18
placing, maximum time between layers........................................................................... 6-16
precast concrete piles..................................................................................................... 6-124
rubble................................................................................................................................ 9-26
spillways........................................................................................................................... 8-32
surface finish, class 1........................................................................................................ 6-30
surface finish, class 2........................................................................................................ 6-31
transit-mixed, minimum/maximum revolutions................................................................. 6-8
vibration of..............................................................................................................5-49, 6-20
Concrete barrier, air-entrained.............................................................................................. 6-182
Concrete Barrier (Section 6-10)......................................................................................... 6-182
Concrete Curing Materials and Admixtures (Section 9-23)............................................ 9-120
Concrete inlet.......................................................................................................................... 7-18
Concrete Patching Material, Grout, and Mortar (Section 9-20).................................... 9-114
Concrete Slope Protection (Section 8-16)............................................................................ 8-59
Concrete Structures (Section 6-02)........................................................................................ 6-4

Index
Conformity with and deviations from plans........................................................................... 1-29

Construction Geosynthetic (Section 2-12) (Section 9-33).......................................2-41, 9-197
bid items........................................................................................................................... 2-43
ditch lining........................................................................................................................ 2-41
permanent erosion control................................................................................................ 2-41
separation......................................................................................................................... 2-41
soil stabilization................................................................................................................ 2-41
underground drainage....................................................................................................... 2-41
Construction stakes................................................................................................................. 1-29
Contract bond...................................................................................................................1-4, 1-17
Contract, definition................................................................................................................... 1-4
additions/alterations of work............................................................................................ 1-20
assigning........................................................................................................................... 1-77
award of............................................................................................................................ 1-16
completion date................................................................................................................ 1-79
execution of...................................................................................................................... 1-17
extensions of time............................................................................................................. 1-82
failure to execute.............................................................................................................. 1-17
intent of............................................................................................................................ 1-19
liquidated damages, overrun of time................................................................................ 1-83
subletting.......................................................................................................................... 1-74
termination....................................................................................................................... 1-84
Contraction joints.................................................................................................................... 5-51
Contractor, definition................................................................................................................ 1-4
compliance with laws....................................................................................................... 1-44
cooperation by and with others........................................................................................ 1-33
examination of site............................................................................................................. 1-8
forest fires......................................................................................................................... 1-45
liability for patents and processes.................................................................................... 1-70
overweight loads.............................................................................................................. 1-48
prevailing wages............................................................................................................... 1-50
qualification for award....................................................................................................... 1-7
responsibility for damage................................................................................................. 1-60
responsibility to public and for work............................................................................... 1-58
unauthorized work............................................................................................................ 1-31
Control of Material (Section 1-06)....................................................................................... 1-34
Control of Work (Section 1-05).......................................................................................... , 1-28
Coordination of contract documents, plans, special provisions, specifications, and addenda.1-19
Corrugated aluminum alloy pipes........................................................................................... 9-33
Counter, batch..................................................................................................................5-48, 6-9
Crack sealing........................................................................................................................... 9-29
Cribbing (Section 9-27)...................................................................................................... 9-128
gabion............................................................................................................................. 9-128
wire mesh....................................................................................................................... 9-128
Cross connection control device............................................................................................. 8-30
Crushed surfacing top course.................................................................................................. 9-18
Crushing plant, compensation for moving................................................................................ 3-3
Culverts (Section 7-02)........................................................................................................... 7-3

Index
Curb, asphalt concrete............................................................................................................. 8-33

cement concrete................................................................................................................ 8-33
cement concrete curb ramp.............................................................................................. 8-55
roundabout........................................................................................................................ 8-33
Curbs, Gutters, and Spillways (Section 8-04)..................................................................... 8-32
Curing, cement concrete......................................................................................................... 5-55
cement concrete sidewalks............................................................................................... 8-56
concrete.......................................................................................................................... 9-110
concrete piles, precast.................................................................................................... 6-123
concrete structures............................................................................................................ 6-25
Cuts, widening of...................................................................................................................... 2-7
D
Damage to property, contractor responsible for...................................................................... 1-60
Date numerals, for concrete structures.................................................................................... 6-31
Debris, clearing and grubbing, disposal of............................................................................... 2-1
Defective work........................................................................................................................ 1-31
Definitions and Terms (Section 1-01).................................................................................... 1-1
Definitions and Tests (Section 9-00)....................................................................................... 9-1
Deleted items, payment for..................................................................................................... 1-92
Detectable warning surface..................................................................................................... 8-56
Detours.................................................................................................................................... 1-72
Dewatering foundations seals................................................................................................. 6-18
Discrimination......................................................................................................................... 1-54
Disqualification of bidders...................................................................................................... 1-15
Ditches, roadway..................................................................................................................... 2-11
Documents, required............................................................................................................... 1-53
Dowel bars.............................................................................................................................. 5-52
Drainage Structures and Culverts (Section 9-05).............................................................. 9-33
Drains (Section 7-01)............................................................................................................... 7-1
french or rock................................................................................................................... 6-57
Drawings, working, contractor responsible for....................................................................... 1-29
Drop manhole connection....................................................................................................... 7-20
Drop-offs, roadway........................................................................................................1-71, 1-72
Drywells.................................................................................................................................. 7-18
Ductile iron castings............................................................................................................... 9-55
Dust ratio................................................................................................................................... 9-1
E
Elastomeric joint seal.....................................................................................................6-29, 9-29
Embankments, approach to bridge structure........................................................................... 2-17
compaction control test.................................................................................................... 2-15
earth and rock, compaction.....................................................................................2-13, 2-14
snow removal................................................................................................................... 2-19
unsuitable foundation excavation..................................................................................... 2-15
End slopes............................................................................................................................... 2-19
Epoxy Resins (Section 9-26)............................................................................................... 9-125
Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO).........................................................................1-54, 1-55
Equipment, for aeration.......................................................................................................... 2-18
automatically controlled................................................................................................... 1-31
weighing........................................................................................................................... 1-88
Index
Equitable adjustment............................................................................................................... 1-92

Erosion Control and Roadside Planting (Section 9-14)..................................................... 9-79
Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control (Section 8-01)............................................. 8-1
Erosion control devices........................................................................................................... 9-86
Estimates, partial payment.............................................................................................1-26, 1-97
for material on hand......................................................................................................... 1-97
Excavation, below grade........................................................................................................... 2-7
borrow, pits....................................................................................................................... 2-12
cuts, widening of................................................................................................................ 2-7
disposal of surplus and waste material............................................................................. 2-11
ditches............................................................................................................................... 2-11
measurement..................................................................................................................... 2-19
overbreak.......................................................................................................................... 2-12
payment............................................................................................................................ 2-20
rock cuts............................................................................................................................. 2-7
rock stored for future use................................................................................................. 2-10
selected material............................................................................................................... 2-11
slides................................................................................................................................. 2-12
sluicing by special provisions.......................................................................................... 2-10
stepped slope construction............................................................................................... 2-19
stripping quarries and pits.................................................................................................. 3-1
trenches............................................................................................................................. 7-24
unsuitable foundation materials....................................................................................... 2-15
waste of material, replacement................................................................................ 2-10, 2-11
Excavation, below subgrade..................................................................................................... 2-9
Excavation for structures, backfilling..................................................................................... 2-30
classification..................................................................................................................... 2-31
depth................................................................................................................................. 2-29
disposal of excavated material......................................................................................... 2-29
in open pits....................................................................................................................... 2-32
riprap................................................................................................................................ 8-57
trench................................................................................................................................ 7-24
Execution of contract.............................................................................................................. 1-17
Expansion bearings, concrete structure................................................................................... 6-56
Expansion joint filler and sealer.............................................................................................. 9-29
Explosives, use of, storage...................................................................................................... 1-70
Extension of time, for execution of contract and furnishing bond......................................... 1-17
Eyebars.................................................................................................................................... 6-99
F
Fabricated Bridge Bearing Assemblies (Section 9-31)..................................................... 9-193
Falsework, for concrete structures.......................................................................................... 6-32
plans for concrete structures, falsework and formwork................................................... 6-32
plans for steel bridges....................................................................................................... 6-96
removal from concrete structure...................................................................................... 6-54
Federal Highway Administration, approval and inspection.............................................1-5, 1-58
Fence and Guardrail (Section 9-16).................................................................................... 9-98
Fence, chain link, wire...................................................................................................8-49, 9-98
Fertilizers................................................................................................................................ 8-20
Field test, storm sewers........................................................................................................... 7-14

Index
Filter blanket, with riprap....................................................................................................... 8-58

Final cleanup........................................................................................................................... 1-27
quarry and pit sites............................................................................................................. 3-2
structures............................................................................................................................ 6-3
Final inspection and acceptance.....................................................................................1-31, 1-32
Final payment for contract.............................................................................................1-97, 1-98
Finishing, cement concrete pavement..................................................................................... 5-53
precast concrete piles..................................................................................................... 6-123
sidewalk............................................................................................................................ 8-55
surface finishes for concrete, classes 1 and 2..........................................................6-30, 6-31
Flexible Guide Posts (Section 9-17)................................................................................... 9-106
Floor, (bridge) single-plank and laminated........................................................................... 6-118
plank subfloor for concrete deck.................................................................................... 6-119
Fly ash................................................................................................................................... 9-121
Force account, provisions and payment for............................................................................ 1-93
Forests, protection of.............................................................................................................. 1-45
Forgings, steel......................................................................................................................... 9-55
Forms, concrete structure........................................................................................................ 6-32
releasing agent/compound................................................................................................ 6-53
Foundation, for cribbing....................................................................................................... 8-107
for structures....................................................................................................................... 6-1
preparation for placing, structures.................................................................................... 2-33
Fracture..................................................................................................................................... 9-1
G
Gabion cribbing.........................................................................................................8-107, 9-128
Gaskets, rubber....................................................................................................................... 9-31
Gates, chain link and wire fence...........................................................................8-49, 8-51, 9-99
General Pipe Installation Requirements (Section 7-08).................................................... 7-24
General Requirements for Structures (Section 6-01).......................................................... 6-1
Geosynthetic material requirements..................................................................................... 9-197
Geosynthetic Retaining Walls (Section 6-14).................................................................... 6-203
Geosynthetic retaining wall, traffic and pedestrian barriers................................................. 6-206
Glare Screen (Section 8-25)................................................................................................ 8-110
Grade requirements, timber, and lumber................................................................................ 9-68
Grate inlets.....................................................................................................................7-18, 9-46
Gratuities................................................................................................................................. 1-69
Gravel backfill, drains............................................................................................................. 9-22
drywells............................................................................................................................ 9-22
foundations....................................................................................................................... 9-21
pipe zone bedding....................................................................................................7-24, 9-22
walls................................................................................................................................. 9-21
Gravel Base (Section 4-02)..................................................................................................... 4-2
Gravel borrow................................................................................................................2-17, 9-23
Grout..................................................................................................................................... 9-115
Grubbing................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Guarantees............................................................................................................................... 1-31
Guardrail (Section 8-11)....................................................................................................... 8-44
Guide Posts (Section 8-10).................................................................................................... 8-43
Guying.................................................................................................................................... 8-20

Index
H
Hammer, pile driving............................................................................................................ 6-125
Haul (Section 2-04)................................................................................................................ 2-23
additional for changed quarry-pit site................................................................................ 3-3
disposal of excavated material......................................................................................... 2-29
Headwalls.........................................................................................................................7-5, 7-12
High-visibility
apparel.............................................................................................................................. 1-50
fence................................................................................................................................... 8-1
Holes, hand, in steel................................................................................................................ 6-99
pin, structural steel......................................................................................................... 6-100
punched, reamed, subpunched....................................................................................... 6-103
rods, bolts, on timber structures..................................................................................... 6-117
weep, retaining wall......................................................................................................... 6-57
Hot Mix Asphalt (Section 5-04)............................................................................................ 5-17
warm mix asphalt............................................................................................................... 9-7
Hour, measurement of (precision).......................................................................................... 1-87
Hydrants (Section 7-14)........................................................................................................ 7-47
Hydraulically Applied Erosion Control Products (HECP)..................................................... 9-80
I
Identification plates................................................................................................................. 8-93
Illumination, Signal, Electrical (Section 9-29).................................................................. 9-140
Illumination, Traffic Signal Systems, Intelligent Transportation Systems, and
Electrical (Section 8-20).................................................................................................... 8-64
Impact Attenuator Systems (Section 8-17)......................................................................... 8-61
Incentive, financial, materials................................................................................................. 1-39
Initial planting......................................................................................................................... 8-20
Inlets, metal............................................................................................................................. 9-46
Inspection, access for.............................................................................................................. 1-30
fabrication......................................................................................................................... 1-35
federal agency.................................................................................................................. 1-58
final, of work.................................................................................................................... 1-31
guardrail rail element..................................................................................................... 9-103
mill and shop, steel structures.......................................................................................... 6-95
plant material.................................................................................................................... 9-91
reinforcing steel bars........................................................................................................ 9-59
Inspectors, authority and duties.............................................................................................. 1-28
Insurance, public liability and property damage..................................................................... 1-67
Intelligence Transportation System (ITS ).............................................................................. 8-80
Intent of the contract............................................................................................................... 1-19
Irrigation
electrical service............................................................................................................... 8-31
water service..................................................................................................................... 8-30
Irrigation Systems (Section 8-03) (Section 9-15).......................................................8-26, 9-93

Index
J
Jets, water, for driving piles.................................................................................................. 6-127
Joint and Crack Sealing Materials (Section 9-04)............................................................. 9-29
Joints, concrete curb and gutters............................................................................................. 8-33
concrete pavement construction, contraction................................................................... 5-51
expansion for concrete structures..................................................................................... 6-29
expansion for sidewalks................................................................................................... 8-55
for pipe culverts, sewers, etc............................................................................................ 7-26
metal spillways................................................................................................................. 8-33
premolded joint filler.......................................................................................................... 6-3
sealing, concrete pavement.............................................................................................. 5-57
spillways at bridge ends................................................................................................... 8-34
Joint venture.............................................................................................................................. 1-7
K
Keystone................................................................................................................................... 4-5
L
Labor and Industries, State Department of............................................................................... 1-9
Laboratory................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Labor, prevailing wages.......................................................................................................... 1-50
Laminated timber structures................................................................................................. 6-118
Laws to be observed................................................................................................................ 1-44
Layout of planting................................................................................................................... 8-19
Legal Relations and Responsibilities to the Public (Section 1-07).................................... 1-44
Liability of public officers...................................................................................................... 1-73
Licenses and permits............................................................................................................... 1-48
Liquidated damages, overruns of time.................................................................................... 1-83
Load limits.............................................................................................................................. 1-48
Log of test boring.................................................................................................................... 1-10
Loose riprap............................................................................................................................ 8-57
Lower tier subcontractors....................................................................................................... 1-74
Lumber, forms for concrete structures.................................................................................... 6-51
grade requirements........................................................................................................... 9-68
preservative treatment...................................................................................................... 9-69
M
Mailbox Support (Section 8-18) (Section 9-32)................................................................ , 8-62
Maintenance
during suspension of work............................................................................................... 1-81
rock............................................................................................................................4-7, 9-18
Malleable iron castings........................................................................................................... 9-55
Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins, and Drywells (Section 7-05)........................................... 7-18
Manufacturer’s certificate of compliance............................................................................... 1-41
Masonry Units (Section 9-12)............................................................................................... 9-75
Materials, bought from contractor.......................................................................................... 1-93
defective........................................................................................................................... 1-31
financial incentive............................................................................................................ 1-39
found on project, use of.................................................................................................... 1-27

Index
guarantee.......................................................................................................................... 1-31
on hand, payment for........................................................................................................ 1-97
source of supply and quality............................................................................................. 1-34
storage and handling......................................................................................................... 1-42
tests for acceptance........................................................................................................... 1-36
Measurement and Payment (Section 1-09)......................................................................... 1-87
Mechanical rebar splices......................................................................................................... 6-62
Mesh, wire, for reinforcement................................................................................................ 9-61
for wire fence................................................................................................................... 8-52
Metal end sections................................................................................................................... 7-4
Mineral filler for HMA............................................................................................................ 9-15
Mixing, cement concrete for paving....................................................................................... 5-48
cement concrete for structures............................................................................................ 6-9
Mobilization............................................................................................................................ 1-96
Modified Concrete Overlays (Section 6-09)...................................................................... 6-165
Monument Cases (Section 8-13) (Section 9-22)....................................................... 8-54, 9-119
Mortar blocks, rebar placement.............................................................................................. 6-60
Moving crushing plants, payment for....................................................................................... 3-3
Mowing................................................................................................................................... 8-23
Mudsills, for falsework
for timber structures....................................................................................................... 6-117
Mulch.............................................................................................................................8-20, 9-80
N
Name plates, for structures....................................................................................................... 6-3
Navigable streams affected by structures................................................................................. 6-2
Nestable pipe and pipe arch.................................................................................................... 9-39
Noise Barrier Walls (Section 6-12).................................................................................... 6-190
Noncollusion declaration........................................................................................................ 1-11
No waiver of legal rights by state........................................................................................... 1-73
O
Obstructions, removal and disposal of...................................................................................... 2-4
Opening, bid proposal............................................................................................................. 1-14
sections of highway to traffic................................................................................................ 1-73
Overbreak................................................................................................................................ 2-12
P
Painting, application
machine finished surfaces............................................................................................... 6-106
Painting (Section 6-07)........................................................................................................ 6-137
Paints and Related Materials (Section 9-08)...................................................................... 9-63
Panel, concrete, cast-in-place noise barrier........................................................................... 6-192
concrete fascia, for soil nail walls.................................................................................. 6-214
concrete fascia, for soldier pile and soldier pile tieback walls....................................... 6-221
concrete, precast, erection for structural earth walls...................................................... 6-199
concrete, precast, fabrication for structural earth walls................................................. 6-198
concrete, precast noise barrier........................................................................................ 6-192
timber, noise barrier....................................................................................................... 6-193
Patented devices, materials, and processes............................................................................. 1-70

Index
Pavement, adjacent lanes........................................................................................................ 5-56

cement concrete................................................................................................................ 5-43
curing cement concrete..................................................................................................... 5-55
Pavement Marking Material (Section 9-34)..................................................................... 9-204
Pavement Marking (Section 8-22)....................................................................................... 8-95
Payment, final acceptance.....................................................................................1-26, 1-97, 1-98
for items deleted from contract........................................................................................ 1-92
for material on hand......................................................................................................... 1-97
for surplus processed materials........................................................................................ 1-99
partial and progress estimates.......................................................................................... 1-26
scope of............................................................................................................................ 1-91
state sales tax.................................................................................................................... 1-45
Payrolls, certified.................................................................................................................... 1-53
Perforated drain pipe............................................................................................................... 9-34
Permanent Ground Anchors (Section 6-17)..................................................................... 6-223
acceptance criteria.......................................................................................................... 6-230
installing......................................................................................................................... 6-226
tendon fabrication, storage, handling..................................................................6-225, 6-226
testing and stressing....................................................................................................... 6-228
Permanent Signing (Section 8-21)....................................................................................... 8-88
Permeable ballast.............................................................................................................4-6, 9-17
Permits and licenses................................................................................................................ 1-48
Pesticides................................................................................................................................. 8-18
Piling (Section 6-05) (Section 9-10)...........................................................................6-120, 9-71
before driving precast concrete (strength)...................................................................... 6-129
cast-in-place concrete............................................................................................6-133, 9-72
curing precast concrete................................................................................................... 6-123
equipment for driving..................................................................................................... 6-126
formulas for bearing values............................................................................................ 6-131
ordering.......................................................................................................................... 6-121
penetration and driving................................................................................................... 6-129
precast concrete.............................................................................................................. 6-122
precast piles...................................................................................................................... 9-72
steel........................................................................................................................6-123, 9-72
storage and handling....................................................................................................... 6-124
test piles.......................................................................................................................... 6-128
timber piles..................................................................................................................... 6-124
water jets for driving...................................................................................................... 6-127
Pins and rollers, structural steel............................................................................................ 6-100
Pipe, age before shipping concrete......................................................................................... 9-36
aluminum, culvert............................................................................................................. 9-40
aluminum, storm sewer.................................................................................................... 9-44
asphalt coatings and paved inverts................................................................................... 9-37
cleaning and testing.......................................................................................................... 7-14
concrete culvert................................................................................................................ 9-35
concrete storm sewer........................................................................................................ 9-41
corrugated iron and steel underdrain................................................................................ 9-34
ductile iron sanitary sewer................................................................................................ 9-45
nestable............................................................................................................................. 9-39
plugging existing pipe with concrete............................................................................... 7-28

Index
polyethylene, culvert.......................................................................................................... 7-3

polyethylene, storm sewer................................................................................................ 7-14
polypropylene sanitary sewer........................................................................................... 7-53
reinforced concrete storm sewer...................................................................................... 9-41
removing and relaying culverts.......................................................................................... 7-5
rubber gaskets................................................................................................................... 9-31
steel culvert...................................................................................................................... 9-37
steel storm sewer.............................................................................................................. 9-43
structural plate......................................................................................................... 7-11, 9-40
testing storm sewer pipe joints......................................................................................... 9-42
treatment, protective......................................................................................................... 9-37
vitrified clay sanitary sewer.............................................................................................. 9-42
Pipe and fittings, irrigation system.......................................................................................... 9-93
Pipe arch, structural plate........................................................................................................ 9-41
Pipe laying.............................................................................................................................. 7-25
Pipe, storm sewer.................................................................................................................... 9-41
Pipe zone bedding................................................................................................................... 7-25
Pit sites, acquisition.................................................................................................................. 3-4
Plans...................................................................................................................................1-5, 1-8
ambiguities with the specifications.................................................................................. 1-19
cofferdams and shoring.................................................................................................... 2-33
conformity with and deviations from............................................................................... 1-29
examination of site of work................................................................................................ 1-8
reclamation......................................................................................................................... 3-9
temporary water pollution/erosion control......................................................................... 8-2
working drawings....................................................................................................1-28, 1-29
Plant establishment................................................................................................................. 8-21
Planting................................................................................................................................... 8-19
Planting area preparation........................................................................................................ 8-19
Plant materials......................................................................................................................... 9-89
Plant replacement.................................................................................................................... 8-21
Plastic covering....................................................................................................................... 9-87
Plastic Waterstop (Section 9-24)........................................................................................ 9-123
Plate girders............................................................................................................................ 6-99
Platform scales........................................................................................................................ 1-89
Plugging existing pipe............................................................................................................ 7-28
Polyacrylamide (PAM)........................................................................................................... 9-86
Portland Cement Concrete Compliance Adjustment.............................................................. 5-59
Posts, chain link fence............................................................................................................. 8-49
glare screen.......................................................................................................... 8-110, 9-104
guardrail................................................................................................................8-44, 9-101
guide................................................................................................................................. 8-43
sign........................................................................................................................8-91, 9-138
wire fence......................................................................................................................... 8-51
Pre-award information............................................................................................................ 1-15
Precast concrete piles............................................................................................................ 6-122
Precast Traffic Curb (Section 8-07) (Section 9-18)..................................................8-37, 9-109
Premolded joint filler.......................................................................................................6-3, 9-29
Prequalification of bidders........................................................................................................ 1-7
Prestressed concrete girders, prestressed concrete.................................................................. 6-64

Index
Prestressing reinforcement...................................................................................................... 9-61

Prevailing rates of wages........................................................................................................ 1-50
Production From Quarry and Pit Sites (Section 3-01)........................................................ 3-1
Progress estimates................................................................................................................... 1-26
Progress schedule, to be furnished by contractor.................................................................... 1-77
Property, protection and restoration of.................................................................................... 1-64
Proposal, bid, definition, supplement........................................................................................ 1-3
causes for rejection, irregularities.................................................................................... 1-14
combination and multiple................................................................................................. 1-13
delivery of........................................................................................................................ 1-12
officers, personal liability................................................................................................. 1-73
preparation of................................................................................................................... 1-10
public opening.................................................................................................................. 1-14
withdrawal or revision of................................................................................................. 1-13
Proposal forms.................................................................................................................1-5, 1-10
Prosecution and Progress (Section 1-08)............................................................................. 1-74
Prosecution of work................................................................................................................ 1-79
Protest by the contractor......................................................................................................... 1-24
Pruning.................................................................................................................................... 8-20
Public convenience and safety................................................................................................ 1-70
officers, personal liability................................................................................................. 1-73
Pumping, for foundation seals................................................................................................ 6-18
Q
Qualified Products List (QPL)................................................................................................ 1-34
Quantities, measurement of bid items of work....................................................................... 1-87
Quarries, pits, acquisition of sites............................................................................................. 3-4
compensation for moving plan........................................................................................... 3-3
final cleanup....................................................................................................................... 3-2
preparation of site............................................................................................................... 3-1
production requirements..................................................................................................... 3-2
scalping............................................................................................................................... 3-2
Quarry spalls........................................................................................................................... 8-57
Quick coupler valves............................................................................................................... 9-95
R
Railings, metal...................................................................................................................... 6-135
metal bridge...................................................................................................................... 9-57
timber............................................................................................................................. 6-135
Raised Pavement Markers (RPM) (Section 8-09) (Section 9-21)........................... 8-40, 9-117
recessed pavement markers.............................................................................................. 8-41
Ready-mix concrete.................................................................................................................. 6-8
Reclamation of pit sites............................................................................................................. 3-9
Records and retention, required.............................................................................................. 1-58
Recycled material.................................................................................................................... 9-26
Regulations, State Department of Fish and Wildlife.............................................................. 1-47
state and federally owned lands....................................................................................... 1-45
Reinforced Concrete Walls (Section 6-11)......................................................................... 6-187
Reinforcing bars, tie bars, dowels..................................................................................5-52, 9-59

Index
Reinforcing Steel (Section 9-07)........................................................................................... 9-58

clearances......................................................................................................................... 6-60
inspection......................................................................................................................... 9-59
mortar blocks.................................................................................................................... 6-60
placing and fastening........................................................................................................ 6-59
splicing............................................................................................................................. 6-61
weight of reinforcing steel................................................................................................ 6-93
welding............................................................................................................................. 6-62
Rejection of bids..................................................................................................................... 1-15
Removal of, defective and unauthorized work....................................................................... 1-31
existing pavement............................................................................................................... 2-5
overburden from quarries and pits..................................................................................... 3-1
utilities.............................................................................................................................. 1-66
Removal of Structures and Obstructions (Section 2-02)..................................................... 2-4
Removing and replacing culverts.............................................................................................. 7-5
Rented equipment, force account............................................................................................ 1-94
Request for approval of material............................................................................................. 1-34
Retainage................................................................................................................................. 1-98
Retaining walls, drainage, backfill.......................................................................................... 6-57
Retempering concrete, prohibited........................................................................................... 5-48
Ride Smoothness Compliance Adjustment............................................................................. 5-59
Right of way.....................................................................................................................1-5, 1-73
Riprap, Quarry Spalls, Slope Protection, and Rock for Erosion and Scour
Protection and Rock Walls (Section 9-13)....................................................................... 9-76
Riprap (Section 8-15)............................................................................................................ 8-57
hand placed..............................................................................................................8-57, 9-76
loose........................................................................................................................8-57, 9-76
Roadside cleanup...................................................................................................................... 2-2
Roadside Restoration (Section 8-02)................................................................................... 8-16
Roadway ditches..................................................................................................................... 2-11
Roadway Excavation and Embankment (Section 2-03)...................................................... 2-7
Rock and Gravity Block Wall and Gabion Cribbing (Section 8-24).............................. 8-106
Rock, drilling safety requirements.......................................................................................... 1-70
embankments.................................................................................................................... 2-13
erosion and scour.............................................................................................................. 9-77
walls................................................................................................................................. 9-78
Rubber gasketed pipe joints...........................................................................................7-26, 9-31
Rumble Strips (Section 8-08)............................................................................................... 8-39
S
Safety and convenience of public........................................................................................... 1-70
Safety bars for culvert pipe..............................................................................................7-5, 7-12
Sales tax, state......................................................................................................................... 1-45
Salvage of usable materials....................................................................................................... 2-4
Sampling and acceptance, bituminous materials...................................................................... 9-7
cement................................................................................................................................ 9-3
materials, general............................................................................................................. 1-36
Sand drainage blanket...........................................................................................2-16, 2-20, 9-23
Sand equivalent......................................................................................................................... 9-1
Sand/silt ratio............................................................................................................................ 9-1
Sanitary accommodations....................................................................................................... 1-46
Index
Sanitary Sewers (Section 7-17)............................................................................................ 7-53

Scales, weighing..................................................................................................................... 1-88
Schedule, progress.........................................................................................................1-15, 1-77
Scope of the Work (Section 1-04)......................................................................................... 1-19
Screw threads........................................................................................................................ 6-103
Seals, foundation..................................................................................................................... 6-18
Seed......................................................................................................................................... 9-79
Seeding, erosion control.......................................................................................................... 9-79
Selected material, in excavation............................................................................................. 2-11
Service Connections (Section 7-15)...................................................................................... 7-50
Sewer Cleanouts (Section 7-19)............................................................................................ 7-60
SEW (Structural Earth Walls)............................................................................................... 6-195
precast concrete facing panel and concrete block erection............................................ 6-199
precast concrete facing panel and concrete block fabrication........................................ 6-198
traffic barrier and pedestrian barrier............................................................................... 6-201
welded wire faced structural earth wall erection............................................................ 6-200
Shaft, construction, noise barrier walls................................................................................. 6-191
excavation, soldier pile and soldier pile tieback walls................................................... 6-216
Shaft-Related Materials (Section 9-36)............................................................................. 9-219
Shaft (Section 6-19)............................................................................................................. 6-236
Shear, connectors.................................................................................................................... 9-55
keys................................................................................................................................... 6-28
Shoes, bridge, setting and grouting....................................................................................... 6-113
Shop, drawings for prestressed girders................................................................................... 6-65
details for steel structures................................................................................................. 6-96
details for timber structures............................................................................................ 6-116
Shoring.................................................................................................................................... 7-25
cofferdams........................................................................................................................ 2-33
Shotcrete Facing (Section 6-18)......................................................................................... 6-232
application...................................................................................................................... 6-234
finishing.......................................................................................................................... 6-234
mix design...................................................................................................................... 6-232
soil nail walls.................................................................................................................. 6-210
testing............................................................................................................................. 6-232
Side Sewers (Section 7-18).................................................................................................... 7-58
Sidewalks, cement concrete.................................................................................................... 8-55
Signing Materials and Fabrication (Section 9-28)........................................................... 9-131
Sign posts, timber................................................................................................................. 9-138
Signs, overhead clearance at railroad track............................................................................. 6-54
overhead clearance, roadway........................................................................................... 6-54
permanent signing............................................................................................................ 8-88
Site of work, examination of..................................................................................................... 1-8
Site Reclamation (Section 3-03)............................................................................................. 3-9
Slag, furnace......................................................................................................................... 9-121
Slides....................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Slope protection, concrete..............................................................................................8-59, 9-78
Sluicing................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Slump...................................................................................................................................... 6-11
Slump test................................................................................................................................. 6-9
Snow removal, prior to grading.............................................................................................. 2-19
Soil amendments..................................................................................................................... 8-19
Index
Soil Nail Walls (Section 6-15)............................................................................................. 6-207

concrete fascia panels..................................................................................................... 6-214
shotcrete facing.............................................................................................................. 6-210
soil nailing...................................................................................................................... 6-209
soil nail testing and acceptance...................................................................................... 6-210
Soldier Pile and Soldier Pile Tieback Walls (Section 6-16)............................................. 6-215
concrete fascia panel...................................................................................................... 6-221
installing soldier piles..................................................................................................... 6-217
prefabricated drainage mat............................................................................................. 6-221
shaft excavation.............................................................................................................. 6-216
Specifications, definition........................................................................................................... 1-5
coordination of contract, plans, special provisions.......................................................... 1-19
Spillways, air-entrained concrete............................................................................................ 8-32
at bridge ends................................................................................................................... 8-34
cement concrete................................................................................................................ 8-32
metal................................................................................................................................. 8-33
Splicing................................................................................................................................... 6-61
mechanical splices............................................................................................................ 6-62
reinforcing steel................................................................................................................ 6-61
steel piles........................................................................................................................ 6-124
stringers, wood............................................................................................................... 6-118
Stakes, construction................................................................................................................ 1-29
Staking.................................................................................................................................... 8-20
Steel bars, for reinforcing....................................................................................................... 9-58
Steel bolts, for structural steel................................................................................................. 9-53
shop assembly................................................................................................................ 6-104
shop storage of structural materials.................................................................................. 6-97
straighten bent material, steel........................................................................................... 6-97
weighing structural steel................................................................................................... 6-96
welds............................................................................................................................... 6-100
Steel Structures (Section 6-03)............................................................................................. 6-95
alignment and camber.................................................................................................... 6-106
assembling and bolting................................................................................................... 6-106
pin nuts, bolts................................................................................................................. 6-113
Stepped slope construction..................................................................................................... 2-19
Stockpile construction............................................................................................................... 3-7
Stockpile sites........................................................................................................................... 3-6
preparation of site............................................................................................................... 3-7
Stockpiling Aggregates (Section 3-02)................................................................................... 3-6
Storage, cement for concrete..................................................................................................... 9-3
concrete precast units....................................................................................................... 6-72
explosives......................................................................................................................... 1-70
lumber for timber structures........................................................................................... 6-116
piling.............................................................................................................................. 6-124
structural steel.................................................................................................................. 6-97
Storm Sewers (Section 7-04)................................................................................................ 7-14
Straightening bent material, steel............................................................................................ 6-97
Straw....................................................................................................................................... 9-80
Stringers, timber structures................................................................................................... 6-118

Index
Stripping quarries, pits.............................................................................................................. 3-1

Structural Earth Walls (Section 6-13)............................................................................... 6-195
Structural Plate Pipe, Pipe Arch, Arch, and Underpass (Section 7-03)........................... 7-11
Structural Steel and Related Materials (Section 9-06)...................................................... 9-53
Structure excavation, classification......................................................................................... 2-31
trench widths, for measurement....................................................................................... 2-36
Structure Excavation (Section 2-09).................................................................................... 2-29
Structures, concrete................................................................................................................... 6-4
steel................................................................................................................................... 6-95
timber............................................................................................................................. 6-116
Structures, general requirements............................................................................................... 6-1
approaches to movable spans............................................................................................. 6-2
clearing site........................................................................................................................ 6-1
Subcontractor...................................................................................................................1-6, 1-74
Subgrade, cement concrete sidewalk...................................................................................... 8-55
for surfacing..................................................................................................................... 2-25
pavement.......................................................................................................................... 2-25
Subgrade Preparation (Section 2-06).................................................................................. 2-25
Subletting contract work......................................................................................................... 1-74
Substitution of plants.............................................................................................................. 9-91
Substructure of bridge............................................................................................................... 1-6
Subsurface boring logs............................................................................................................ 1-10
Surety, definition....................................................................................................................... 1-6
responsibility.................................................................................................................... 1-17
Surfacing, ballast....................................................................................................................... 4-4
construction of courses....................................................................................................... 4-5
crushed............................................................................................................................. 9-18
equipment........................................................................................................................... 4-4
gravel base........................................................................................................................ 9-19
hours of work..................................................................................................................... 4-6
maintenance during work suspension.............................................................................. 1-81
mixing................................................................................................................................ 4-4
percent of water content payable........................................................................................ 3-5
placing and spreading......................................................................................................... 4-5
Surplus material, disposal of................................................................................................... 2-11
Surplus screenings.............................................................................................................3-3, 3-5
Suspension of work................................................................................................................. 1-80
T
Tagging plants......................................................................................................................... 9-91
Tax, state sales tax................................................................................................................... 1-45
Temperature, normal................................................................................................................. 6-3
Temperature of asphalt.............................................................................................................. 9-7
Temporary barrier................................................................................................................. 6-184
Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control (TESC).................................................................. 8-2
Temporary Pavement Markings (Section 8-23)............................................................... 8-103
Temporary Traffic Control Materials (Section 9-35)....................................................... 9-213
Temporary Traffic Control (Section 1-10)........................................................................ 1-108
Temporary water pollution/erosion control.....................................................................1-61, 8-1
Test piles............................................................................................................................... 6-128

Index
Tests, aggregates..................................................................................................................... 9-14
compaction for embankments.......................................................................................... 2-14
concrete culvert pipe........................................................................................................ 9-42
portland cement.................................................................................................................. 9-2
sanitary sewers................................................................................................................. 7-55
storm sewers..................................................................................................................... 7-16
Threads, screw, steel structures............................................................................................. 6-103
Thrie beam, guardrail............................................................................................................ 9-101
Tie bars, pavement.........................................................................................................5-52, 9-58
Timber and Lumber (Section 9-09)..................................................................................... 9-68
Timber and metal railings..................................................................................................... 6-135
Timber Structures (Section 6-04)...................................................................................... 6-116
bracing............................................................................................................................ 6-118
caps, timber bridge......................................................................................................... 6-117
floors............................................................................................................................... 6-118
framing........................................................................................................................... 6-117
lumber, storage, handling............................................................................................... 6-116
painting........................................................................................................................... 6-119
shop details..................................................................................................................... 6-116
stringers.......................................................................................................................... 6-118
trusses............................................................................................................................. 6-119
Topsoil............................................................................................................................8-18, 9-79
Traffic curb, precast.............................................................................................................. 9-109
Traffic detours, construction and maintenance of................................................................... 1-72
Traffic, opening sections to................................................................................................... 1-73
Traffic signal controller, cabinet assembly........................................................................... 9-162
Transportable attenuator............................................................................................ 1-112, 9-216
Treated timber......................................................................................................................... 9-69
piling................................................................................................................................ 9-71
Trestle ends, embankment at................................................................................................... 2-17
Trimming and Cleanup (Section 2-11)................................................................................ 2-40
Trusses, timber structure....................................................................................................... 6-119
U
Underdrains, perforated pipe...........................................................................................7-1, 9-35
Underpass................................................................................................................................ 7-11
Underweights, no pay adjustment........................................................................................... 1-91
Unsuitable foundation material.............................................................................2-15, 2-16, 2-29
Utilities and similar facilities.................................................................................................. 1-66
V
Valves...................................................................................................................................... 9-94
Valves for Water Mains (Section 7-12)................................................................................ 7-44
Vegetation protection and restoration..................................................................................... 1-65
Vertical drains......................................................................................................................... 2-16
Vibration, concrete structures................................................................................................. 6-20
concrete pavement............................................................................................................ 5-50
protection against............................................................................................................. 6-19
Vibratory rollers...................................................................................................................... 2-13
Vitrified clay sewer pipe......................................................................................................... 9-42
Index
W
Wages, compliance with......................................................................................................... 1-50
Waiver of state’s legal rights, no............................................................................................. 1-73
Walls, geosynthetic retaining................................................................................................ 6-203
noise barrier.................................................................................................................... 6-190
soil nail........................................................................................................................... 6-207
soldier pile and soldier pile tieback................................................................................ 6-215
structural earth walls (SEW).......................................................................................... 6-195
Warranty.................................................................................................................................. 1-31
Waste sites, disposal of waste, debris..................................................................................... 2-10
Wasting excavated material.................................................................................................... 2-11
Water Distribution Materials (Section 9-30).................................................................... 9-187
Watering (Section 2-07)........................................................................................................ 2-27
Water Mains (Section 7-09).................................................................................................. 7-29
Waterproof Membrane (Section 9-11)................................................................................ 9-74
Water (Section 9-25)........................................................................................................... 9-124
surfacing materials............................................................................................................. 4-4
Waterstop, plastic.................................................................................................................. 9-123
Wattles..................................................................................................................................... 9-88
Weather, unfavorable for, concrete paving............................................................................. 5-56
concrete structures............................................................................................................ 6-17
crushed surfacing................................................................................................................ 4-6
Web plate, splices, stiffeners, fillers........................................................................................ 6-99
Weed control........................................................................................................................... 8-17
Weep holes, structures............................................................................................................ 6-57
Weighing equipment............................................................................................................... 1-88
Weight of, asphalt................................................................................................................... 1-88
reinforcing steel................................................................................................................ 6-93
Welded wire faced structural earth wall erection.................................................................. 6-200
Welds, reinforcing steel........................................................................................................... 6-62
structural steel................................................................................................................ 6-100
Wheel guards and railings..................................................................................................... 6-118
Wire, cold drawn for reinforcing............................................................................................ 9-61
Wire, fencing........................................................................................................................... 8-51
Wire Mesh Slope Protection (Section 8-29)...................................................................... 8-114
Work, acceptance of................................................................................................................ 1-32
changed conditions........................................................................................................... 1-26
changes............................................................................................................................. 1-20
contractor’s responsibility for.......................................................................................... 1-58
defective and unauthorized............................................................................................... 1-31
failure to complete on time............................................................................................... 1-84
force account.................................................................................................................... 1-93
inspection of, and samples............................................................................................... 1-30
prosecution of................................................................................................................... 1-79
suspension........................................................................................................................ 1-80
Working day............................................................................................................................ 1-79
Working drawings................................................................................................................... 1-29
Written notice to contractor, method of serving..................................................................... 1-33

Found an error in the Standard Specifications? Can't find an item in the Index?
Help us improve the manual by sending your comments to the State Specifications
Engineer using one of the following methods:
Gregory D. Morehouse, P.E. Washington State Department of Transportation
Phone: 360-705-7834 Headquarters Construction Office
Fax: 360-705-6809 PO Box 47354
Email: morehog@wsdot.wa.gov
Olympia, WA 98504-7354
Mail Stop: 47354
Comments


Standard Specifications: For Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Specifications: For Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Specifications: For Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard

Note: This publication is not for resale.

Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Information

Title VI Notice to Public

Standard Specifications: 2018, Copyright © 2005, Washington State Department of

Robert E. Christopher, P.E.

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 1

Page 2 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

Division 1 General Requirements

Division 3 Aggregate Production and Acceptance

Division 5 Surface Treatments and Pavements

Division 7 Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers,

Division 8 Miscellaneous Construction

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 3

Page 4 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 5

1-04.5 Procedure and Protest by the Contractor.................................................... 1-24

Page 6 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

1-07.4 Sanitation.................................................................................................... 1-46

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 7

1-07.17 Utilities and Similar Facilities.................................................................... 1-66

Page 8 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

1-09.3 Scope of Payment....................................................................................... 1-91

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 9

Page 10 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

2-04 Haul............................................................................................................................ 2-23

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 11

2-12 Construction Geosynthetic....................................................................................... 2-41

Page 12 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

Division 3 Aggregate Production and Acceptance .............................................3-1

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 13

3-03.5 Payment....................................................................................................... 3-10

Page 14 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 15

Division 5 Surface Treatments and Pavements...................................................5-1

Page 16 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

5-04.3(5) Producing/Stockpiling Aggregates, RAP, & RAS.................. 5-25

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 17

Page 18 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

6-02.4 Measurement............................................................................................... 6-92

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 19

6-04 Timber Structures................................................................................................... 6-116

Page 20 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

6-06 Bridge Railings........................................................................................................ 6-135

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 21

6-09 Modified Concrete Overlays.................................................................................. 6-165

Page 22 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

6-12 Noise Barrier Walls................................................................................................. 6-190

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 23

6-15 Soil Nail Walls......................................................................................................... 6-207

Page 24 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

6-18 Shotcrete Facing...................................................................................................... 6-232

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 25

Division 7 Drainage Structures, Storm Sewers, Sanitary Sewers,

Page 26 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10

7-05 Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins, and Drywells....................................................... 7-18

2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10 Page 27

7-09.3(17) Laying Ductile Iron Pipe With Polyethylene Encasement...... 7-34

Page 28 2018 Standard Specifications M 41-10